Cv_ 
 
The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924099427886 
 
In compliance with current 
 
 copyright law, Cornell University 
 
 Library produced this 
 
 replacement volume on paper 
 
 that meets the ANSI Standard 
 
 Z39.48-1992 to replace the 
 
 irreparably deteriorated original. 
 
 2005 
 
CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
A 
 
 GREEK GRAMMAR 
 
 FOE 
 
 SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 
 
 BT 
 
 JAMES HADLEY, 
 
 LATE PBOFESSOB'iN TALE OCLLEGV 
 
 REVISED AND IN PART REWRITTEN 
 
 BT 
 
 FREDERIC DE FOREST ALLEN 
 
 FBOFESBOB IN HAKVABD OOLLEGB. 
 
 NEW YORK .:- CIJNCINNATI •:• CHICAGO 
 
 AMEEICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
 
 K 
 
'JOPTEIOHT, 1860, 1884 
 
 bl! D. 4.PPLET0N AND COMPANY 
 
 w, P. 4 
 
PEEFAOE 
 
 OF PROFESSOR HADLBT TO THE FIRST EDITION, 1860. 
 
 The grammar which is here submitted to the public ia founded on the 
 &riechisolie Schulgrammaiih of Geoeq Cuethts, Professor in the University 
 of Kiel. The work of Professor Curtius was first published in 1G52, and 
 was received in Germany with marked favor : a second edition was called 
 for in 18.55, a third in 1867, and a fourth in 1859. Having been led, soon 
 after ii appeared, to study it with some care, I became satisfied that it 
 possessed important advantages of plan and execution ; and I was therefore 
 easily induced, more than three years ago, to undertake the task of bringing 
 it before the American public. My first thought went no further than to. 
 reproduce it in an English version, with only such changes as might seem 
 necessary to adapt it to the wants and habits of instructors in our country. 
 But in carrying out this purpose, it happened, by what is probably a com- 
 mon experience in such cases, that one change led on to another, until at 
 length the alterations had assumed an extent out of all proportion to the 
 original design. To give the book, as it stands here, the name of Curtius, 
 would be to make him responsible in appearance for many things which he 
 has not said, aikd might perhaps fail to approve. Under these circumstances, 
 it has seemed to be the only proper course, that I should assume the respon- 
 sibility of the work, while making, as I cheerfully do, the fullest acknowl- 
 edgments of obligation to the German scholar. Should this volume prove 
 to be of service in the work of classical instruction, the result will be per- 
 haps mainly due to his broad and thoughtful scholarship, and his sound, 
 practical judgment. 
 
 It may be proper for me here to follow the example of Professor Curtius, 
 by calling attention, at the outset, to some features in the plan and arrange- 
 ment of this Grammar. 
 
 It is a fact generally understood, that the Greek, in common with the 
 
It preface to the first hDITION. 
 
 other Indo-European languages, has of late received, and is still receiving, 
 much light from the scientific comparative study of the whole class to which 
 It belongs. The new views of Greek etymology and structure, developed 
 and established by that study, have been made the object of special atten- 
 tion in the preparation of this work ; and have been taken up into it. as far 
 as seemed to be consistent with the practical ends which must always be 
 paramount in an elementary grammar. 
 
 The multiplicity of forms presented by the different Greek dialects is 
 the occasion of considerable embarrassment to the grammarian. Scattered 
 through the sections which describe the Attic language, they interfere seri- 
 ously with the unity of exhibition and impression which it is important to 
 secure : but when thrown together by themselves at the end of the book, 
 they lose in clearness and significance, by being severed from those common 
 facts and principles with which they are naturally associated. In this 
 Grammar will be found a sort of compromise between the opposite diffi- 
 culties. The peculiarities of euphony and inflection, which belong to the 
 other dialects, are given in smaller type at the foot of each page, under the 
 corresponding Attic forms, so as to be kept clearly distinct from the latter, 
 while yet presented with them in the same view. 
 
 It is hardly necessary to say that a complete exhibition of the dialects is 
 not attempted in these pages. The multitude of forma which appear only 
 in lyric fragments, or in ancient inscriptions, or in the writings of gram- 
 marians, are passed over without notice. The object has been simply to 
 supply what is necessary in this respect for a proper reading of the classic 
 authors, and particularly Homer, Herodotus, Pindar, and Theocritus. For 
 the language of Homer, I have derived much assistance from the Homeric 
 Grammar of Ahrens (Griechisehe For.nenlehre des ffomcrischen vnd AttiscJten 
 Dialehtes: Gottingen, 1852); and for that of Herodotus, from the careful 
 and thorough investigations of Bredow {Quaesiioius Criticae de Dialecto 
 Herodoiea: Lipsiae, 1846). 
 
 In the sections on the verb, the forms of voice, mode, and tense are 
 reduced to a small number of groups, called " tense-systems." Under this 
 arrangement, which is similar to those already adopted by Ahrens and 
 Curtius, the inflection of the verb is represented as the inflection of n few 
 tense-stems, which are formed, each in its own way, from the common verb 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. V 
 
 stem. It is hoped that the arrangement may commend itself in use, not 
 only as consistent with the obvious analogies of yerb-formation, but also as 
 calculated to make the structure of the verb simpler and more intelligible 
 to the leSrner. 
 
 Among these tense-systems, the most prominent is that which includes 
 the present and imperfect, the tenses of continued action ; and it is also the 
 ' one which shows the greatest variety of formation. Hence the formation of 
 the present is taken as the basis of a new classification, the whole mass of 
 verbs being divided into nine classes, according as the stem of this tense 
 coincides with that of the verb, or varies from it by different changes. 
 
 The special formation of particular verbs — " anomalous " formation, as it 
 has been generally, but to a great extent inappropriately, termed — ^is ex- 
 hibited with considerable fulness, and according to a uniform method, 
 intended to assist the apprehension and memory of the learner. 
 
 In the Syntax, the leading aim has been — not to construct a philosophical 
 system of human expression, with Greek sentences for Illustrations but to 
 represent, as fully and clearly as possible within the prescribed Umits, the 
 actj^al usage and idiom of the Greek language. It has also been an object 
 to accompany the full statement of rules and principles with brief phrases, 
 describing their substance, and convenient for use in the recitation-room. 
 
 In regard to the examples by which the Syntax is illustrated, it has not 
 been thought necessary to give for each one the name of the author from 
 whom it is cited. Only those taken from non-Attic sources, as Homer ajid 
 Herodotus, are credited to their authors : those which come from Attic poets 
 are marked simply as poetic: while those which come from Attic prose- 
 writers, and constitute perhaps nine-tenths of the whole number, are given 
 without any indication of their source. The examples are translated through- 
 out, untranslated examples being (if I may trust my own observation) of but 
 little use, in general, even to the better class of students. Regarded as 
 illustrations, they are imperfect, since it is only with difficulty, and perhaps 
 with uncertainty, that the learner recognizes their relation to the rule or 
 principle to be illustrated. And if we view them as exercises in translation, 
 it may be questioned whether detached sentences, torn from the connections 
 in which they stood, and involving often peculiar difiSculties of language and 
 construction, are best suited for this purpose. A similar rule has been fol- 
 
vi PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 lowed even in the earlier portions of the Grammar ; except, indeed, in the first 
 part (Orthography and Euphony), where it could hardly be carried out with 
 convenience : but in the second and third parts, which treat of Inflection 
 and Formation, the Greek words introduced are accompanied regularly by a 
 statement of their signification. This course has been adopted, partly from 
 the feeling that a student cannot fairly be expected to take much interest in 
 words that have no meaning to his mind ; and partly in the belief that it is 
 possible for a student, in this way, as he goes through his grammar, to 
 acquire, with little trouble, a useful vocabulary of Greek expression. 
 
 In preparing this division of the work, I have made frequent use of the 
 Syntax der GHechiscIien Spraelie (Braunschweig, 1846), by Professor J. N. 
 Madvig of Copenhagen. But my obligations are much greater — not for the 
 Syntax only, but for almost every part of the book — to K. W. Kriiger, whose 
 Greek Grammar (like that of Buttmann before it) marks a new epoch in the 
 scientific treatment of its subject. Important aid has been received also 
 from the school-grammars of Buttmann and Eiihner, which are familiar to 
 American students in the skilful translations of Dr. Robinson and Dr. 
 Taylor. Nor must I omit to acknowledge myself indebted, for many valuable 
 suggestions, to the excellent grammars produced in our own country by 
 Professor Sophocles and Professor Crosby. 
 
 In the appended chapter on Versification, I have relied, partly on Munk's 
 Metres of the Greeks and Romans (translated by Professors Beck and Felton, 
 Cambridge, 1844), but still more on the able treatises of Rossbach and 
 Westphal (Oriechische Rhythmih, Leipzig, 1854; and Griechische Metrik, 
 Leipzig, 1866). 
 
PEEFAOE 
 
 TO THE REVISED EDITION. 
 
 The Greek G-rammar of Professor Hadley— =^;he foundation of the 
 present work — appeared in 1860 ; and has been in use, unchanged in 
 any way, since that time. Professor Hadley died on the fourteenth 
 of November, 1872, at the age of fifty-one. The leading features of 
 his work, and its relation to Curtius's Oriechisclie Sehulgrammatih, 
 are set forth in the foregoing reprint of his own preface. It re- 
 mains for the reviser to state, so far as may be done in a few words, 
 what his work has been, and how the new book difiers from the old 
 one. 
 
 In the first place, it seemed an urgent reform that the quantity of 
 u, 1, and V should be uniformly and systematically indicated to the 
 eye. Accordingly, 5, I, v have been everywhere printed where these 
 vowels are long; so that the unmarked a, i, v are understood to be 
 short. This notation, now generally adopted in elementary Latin 
 books, is equally important in Greek. 
 
 The general plan of the work and the arrangement of its divisions 
 remain unchanged; the most important transposition is that of the 
 chapter on Adjectives and Adverbs (§§ 640-653, new grammar) and 
 that on Pronouns (§§ 677-706) ; these formerly stood after Cases. 
 The parts least changed are perhaps Writing and Sound (Part First), 
 and Declension. Here the paradigms and rules relating to adjectives 
 have been completely (instead of partially) separated from those of 
 substantives, and the adjectives have been rearranged according to 
 their stems. In the substantives, a class of /-stems has been recog- 
 nized. 
 
 Much more altered is the part relating to the structure of the 
 verb. The complicated machinery of 'tense-signs,' 'mode-signs,' 
 'voice-signs,' and 'connecting vowels,' has given place to a simpler 
 system of 'tense and mode suffixes,' according to which all that 
 intervenes between 'verb-stem' and personal ending is reckoned as 
 a single element (or in the optative as two elements). This requires 
 
Viii PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. 
 
 a change in the use of the term stem. The old ' connecting vowel ' 
 is now counted a part of the tense-stem : the first aorist tense-stem is 
 EO longer Xuo-, but XiJo-a-; and in like manner Xtyo- (not Xcy-) is 
 called the stem of Xe'yo-fiev, just as we call Xoyo- (not Xoy-) the stem 
 of \ayo-s. In fact, it seemed desirable to restrict the term stem, in 
 conjugation as well as in declension, to that wMch is ready to receive 
 the inflectional endings. I have, therefore, recognized no ' stems ' ex- 
 cept tense-stems (and mode-stems); and for the old 'verb-stem' — the 
 element whence the different tense-stems are derived — I have used 
 the term theme. Another necessary innovation is the ' variable vowel ' 
 and its sign, <>\,. This sign may be read 'omicron or epsilon,' or 
 ' ^ or e ' ; but Xv"],- should be read ' \vo- or \ve- '. 
 
 Of the nine classes of verbs, two have disappeared : the ' f-class ' 
 is made a subdivision of Class I, and the ' reduplicated class ' dis- 
 tributed among the other classes. On the other hand, a new ' root 
 class ' has been added, comprising the /nt-verbs, which could no longer 
 form a part of Class I. It will be observed, moreover, that the fu- 
 form of inflection has received a new treatment : its main peculiarities 
 are enumerated in § 385, in immediate contrast to the ordinary form ; 
 and details of the present and second aorist /ii-forms are given under 
 those tenses respectively. The inflection of the irregular /ii-verbs is 
 given by itself in full, and four regular ones have been added to the 
 synopses, §§ 349-353. 
 
 The paradigms have been pruned here and there in the interest 
 of a stricter Atticism. For instance, -17 in the second person singular 
 middle has been dropped, and forma like TlfLiirniiv, biioiju, ea-Tatrniev, 
 idiBiov, SlSov (imperative middle), have disappeared. So XtJoVmi', 
 Xv((rda>v, have taken precedence of Xveraxrav, \ica-6ao-av ; Xco-fiaj, 
 Xt/o-fie of Xif(raif, XtS(rai ; the pluperfect in -ktj of that in -/cfiv ; XuSei- 
 fify, SiSoifiev of \v0fir)iifv, 6iSoij;/iei/ ; (^iKolrjv of (ftiXoifii. The perfect 
 active imperative has been relegated to a note, and so has the opta- 
 tive form \iKvKoir]v ; the noun avi>yea>v has been discarded as non-ex- 
 istent. In the dual feminine of pronouns, to, T<i8f, toutm have taken 
 the place of ri, rihc, raira. So the rules for augment of diphthongs 
 (357) and of the pluperfect (358) have been restated in accordance 
 witli the now established Attic usage. I might have drawn the lines 
 still closer in these matters ; but the maker of a school-grammar 
 is hampered by the necessity of having some regard to the current 
 Greek texts. 
 
 The Classified Verb-List has been revised with the aid of Veitoh's 
 
PREFACE TO THE BE VISED EDITION. ix 
 
 Oreek Verbs, and the forms of Attic prose and poetry distinguished 
 by means of two kinds of type. The Alphabetical Verb-List, which 
 was formerly a mere index to the other, has been amplified so as to 
 serve some purposes independently, and has been placed at the end of 
 the book instead of the middle. 
 
 The greatest changes are in the Syntax: here a good deal is sub- 
 stantially rewritten. This is particularly true of the Syntax of the 
 Modes. And here I owe very especial thanks to Professor Goodwin 
 for cordial permission to adopt some important features of his works : 
 especially the distinction of general and particular conditions, and 
 the application of the categories of conditions to conditional relative 
 clauses. The arrangement of final clauses also follows closely Pro- 
 fessor Goodwin's. 
 
 The introductory part of the Syntax as far as § 639, is entirely re- 
 cast and rearranged. There is less that is new in the syntax of Cases, 
 and of the Infinitive and Participle ; yet even here much is altered. 
 The prepositions I have arranged in alphabetical order. In all parts 
 of the Syntax I have striven to bring into greater prominence what 
 is important and peculiar to Greek, and to separate it more thorough]^, 
 fi'om what ia unimportant or self-evident. - 
 
 Professor Hadley, as he explains in his preface, did not think it 
 necessary to give the sources of the Greek examples used in illustrat- 
 ing the syntax. In the new edition, on the other hand, I have fol- 
 lowed the plan of giving exact citations for these. The old examples 
 have been very generally employed, yet in numerous instances others 
 have been substituted or added. 
 
 The chapter on Word Formation has been somewhat enlarged, 
 but is otherwise not much changed. The same is true of the Versifi- 
 cation ; only here I have stated the modern theories more boldly than 
 Professor Hadley had ventured to do, and have modified the system 
 of notation. 
 
 So much about the separate parts of the work. Throughout the 
 whole the lesser changes, in wording, arrangement, and so on, and 
 the minor additions and omissions, are numerous. Many good hints 
 as to conciser forms of expression were derived from Professor Had- 
 ley's smaller work. The Elements of Greek Orammar (1869). 
 
 A word respecting explanations of the origin of inflectional forms. 
 I hope no one will suppose that thig book professes to embody the 
 latest results of comparative grammar. Those results are at present 
 partly in a very chaotic condition, partly very ill suited to be set 
 
X PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. 
 
 before a learner. Much that in Professor Hadley's time was thought 
 certain has been entirely upset or become very doubtful, and in many 
 cases nothing positive has taken its place. All that can be demanded 
 of a school-grammar in this respect is that its classifications and 
 analyses shall not be seriously at variance with well-established facts 
 of genesis. 1 have occasionally gone a trifle further than Professor 
 Hadley in these historical statements ; but of tener, I think, have re- 
 trenched or modified explanations which he gave, and have been 
 entirely content to leave much unexplained. And I have put this 
 matter, so far as possible, in separate paragraphs and in the smallest 
 type. 
 
 I am under obligations to so many friends for help that I can- 
 not name them all, but must content myself with mentioning those 
 who have done me the most service. My colleagues, Professors Lane 
 and Lanman, and my friend Dr. Robert Keep, of Williston Seminary, 
 have been ever ready with advice and useful suggestions. Professor 
 W. Gr. Frost, of Oberlin, sent me some good hints about syntax; 
 Professor T. D. Seymour and Dr. H. M. Clarke gave me valuable 
 assistance in revising the verb-list, and Dr. Clarke also in finding 
 examples. The two general indices are in great part the work of 
 Dr. F. B. Goddard and Dr. A. W. Roberts. Besides these, I must 
 thank all whom I have consulted, by letter or personally, on various 
 points, or who have written me of their own accord. 
 
 P. D. A. 
 July, 1884. 
 
COIsrTE]S"TS. 
 
 uttroduotion. 
 
 
 
 PAOB 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Adjectives .... 
 
 56 
 
 Greek Language and Dialects 
 
 . 1 
 
 Vowel-Declension 
 
 56 
 
 
 
 Consonant-Declension 
 
 68 
 
 PAST FIEST. 
 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives . 
 
 65 
 
 
 
 Form, and Compar. of Adverbs . 
 
 69 
 
 WRITING AND SOUND. 
 
 
 Pronocns .... 
 
 70 
 
 Alphabet .... 
 
 . 3 
 
 Numerals 
 
 78 
 
 Vowels ... 
 
 4 
 
 Vebds 
 
 82 
 
 Diphthongs 
 
 . 5 
 
 Paradigms of Verbs . 
 
 85 
 
 Breathings .... 
 
 6 
 
 Formative Elements of the Verb 
 
 112 
 
 Consonants 
 
 . 7 
 
 Augment 
 
 112 
 
 Vowel Changes 
 
 8 
 
 Keduplication 
 
 115 
 
 Consonant Changes 
 
 . 13 
 
 Tense and Mode Suffixes . 
 
 116 
 
 Special Changes of final Sounds 
 
 19 
 
 Endings 
 
 117 
 
 Ciasis . . . . 
 
 . 211 
 
 Use of the Endings 
 
 119 
 
 Elision .... 
 
 20 
 
 Accent of the Verb 
 
 120 
 
 Final Consonants . 
 
 . 22 
 
 Formation of Tense-Systems 
 
 122 
 
 Movable Consonants . 
 
 22 
 
 Present and Imperfect 
 
 122 
 
 Syllables 
 
 . 23 
 
 Future Active and Middle 
 
 128 
 
 Quantity .... 
 
 24 
 
 First Aorist Act. and Mid. . 
 
 129 
 
 Accent .... 
 
 . 25 
 
 Second Aorist Act. and Mid. . 
 
 131 
 
 Accent affected by Quantity 
 
 26 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect Active 
 
 133 
 
 Accent in Vowel-Changes 
 
 . 27 
 
 Perf., Pluperf., Fut. Perf., Mid. 
 
 135 
 
 Accent in Connected Discours 
 
 e 28 
 
 Aorist and Future Passive 
 
 138 
 
 Punctuation 
 
 30 
 
 Verbal Adjectives 
 
 139 
 
 
 
 Irregular Verbs in -lu 
 
 139 
 
 PAET SECOHB. 
 
 
 Enumeration of /u-forms . 
 
 145 
 
 
 
 Presents of /u-form . 
 
 145 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 
 Second Aorists of /ii-form . 
 
 145 
 
 NonNS .... 
 
 . 31 
 
 Shorter 2d Perf. without -«- 
 
 148 
 
 First Declension (A-Decl.) 
 
 33 
 
 Dialectic Formations 
 
 150 
 
 Second Declension (0-Decl.) 
 
 . 37 
 
 Irregularities of Meaning . 
 
 151 
 
 Attic Second Decl. 
 
 40 
 
 Classified Verb-List 
 
 163 
 
 Third Declension (Cons.-Decl.) 
 
 . 40 
 
 First Class (Variable-Vowel 
 
 
 Labial and Palatal Stems . 
 
 43 
 
 Class) .... 
 
 153 
 
 Lingual Stems 
 
 . 44 
 
 Second Class (Strong-Vowe! 
 
 
 Liquid Stems 
 
 46 
 
 Class) .... 
 
 164 
 
 Stems in -co-- and -aa- 
 
 . 47 
 
 Third Class (Tau-Class) . 
 
 166 
 
 Btems in -f- 
 
 49 
 
 Fourth Class (Iota-Class) . 
 Fifth Class Wasal Class) . 
 Sixth Class (Inceptive Class) 
 
 168 
 
 Stems in -i- and -u- . 
 
 . 50 
 
 175 
 
 Diphthong Stems 
 
 51 
 
 181 
 
 frregular Declension . 
 
 . 52 
 
 Seventh Class (Root-Class) 
 
 184 
 
 Local Endings 
 
 66 
 
 Eighth Class (Mixed Class) . 
 
 186 
 
Xll 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAET THIRD. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. ■pi,^^ 
 
 Formation of Simple Words . 188 
 
 Substantives . . . 189 
 
 Adjectives . . . , 193 
 
 Denominative Verbs . . 196 
 
 Composition of Words . .197 
 
 Form of Compound Words , 197 
 
 Meaning of Compound Words . 199 
 
 PAET FOURTH. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Definitions ..... 201 
 General Rules of the Sentence 208 
 
 Subject 203 
 
 Verb 203 
 
 Predicate-Nouns . . . 206 
 Attributives . . . 207 
 
 Appositives .... 208 
 Pronouns of Reference . 210 
 Otlier Peculiarities in Number 
 
 and Gender . . .211 
 
 Adjectives and Adverbs . .212 
 
 The Article . . . .215 
 
 6 in Poetry . . . .216 
 
 6 as Demonstrative . . 215 
 
 6 as an Article . . . 216 
 
 Pronouns .... 220 
 
 The Cases 226 
 
 Nominative and Vocative . 226 
 
 Accusative ..... 227 
 
 Two Accus. with one verb . 231 
 
 Genitive 232 
 
 with Substantives . . 233 
 with Verbs .... 235 
 with Adjectives and Adverbs 241 
 in looser Relations . . . 243 
 Dative ..... 244 
 of Indirect Object . . . 244 
 of Interest .... 245 
 of Association and Likeness . 246 
 with Compound A'^erbs . 248 
 
 of Instrument, Means, Manner, i 
 
 Cause .... 248 ] 
 of Time and Place . . . 250 
 Prepositions with Cases . . 250 
 General View .... 252 
 Use of the Prepositions . 252 
 
 The Voices 260 
 
 Active .... 260 
 
 Middle 260 
 
 Passive . ... 262 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Tenses . . . .264 
 
 Tenses of the Indicative . 266 
 
 Tenses in other Modes . . 270 
 
 The Modes .... 273 
 
 The Adverb &v . . . 273 
 
 Finite Modes in Simple Sentences 274 
 
 Finite Modes in Comp'd Sentences 277 
 
 Final Clauses . . . 2^8 
 
 Conditional Sentences . . 281 
 
 Peculiarities . . . 286 
 
 Relative Clauses . . . 287 
 
 Clauses of Cause and Result 291 
 
 Indirect Discourse . . . 292 
 
 Infinitive .... 295 
 
 Subject and Predicate . . 295 
 
 Infinitive without Article . 297 
 
 Infinitive with Neuter Article . 300 
 
 Infinitive with 6,v . . 301 
 
 Participle 302 
 
 Attributive Participle . . 302 
 
 Predicate-Participle . . 302 
 
 Circumstantial Participle . 302 
 
 with Case Absolute . 304 
 
 Adjuncts of Participle . 305 
 
 Supplementary Participle . 307 
 
 Participle with &ti . . 809 
 
 Verbal Adjectives in -t€os . . 809 
 
 Relative Sentences . . . 310 
 
 Attraction, Incorporation . 310 
 
 Other Peculiarities . . 313 
 
 Interrogative Sentences . .316 
 
 Negative Sentences . . 318 
 
 Particles 322 
 
 Conjunctions .... 824 
 Figures of Syntax . . . 332 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Versification .... 384 
 
 Trochaic Rhythms . . 839 
 
 Iambic Rhythms . . . 840 
 
 Dactylic Rhythms . . 848 
 
 Anapaestic Rhythms . . 846 
 
 Logaoedic Rhythms . . 846 
 
 Dactylo Epitritic Rhythms . 349 
 
 Cretic Rhythms . . . 850 
 
 Choriambic Rhythms . .361 
 
 Ionic Rhythms . . , 351 
 
 Dochmiao and Bacchic Rhyth. . 862 
 
 Abbreviations . . . 864 
 
 Alphabetical List of Verbs . 365 
 
 Greek Index .... 867 
 
 English Index . . . 898 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The Greek Language and Dialects. 
 
 1-. The inhabitants of ancient Greece called themselves Hellenes 
 ("EXXijver), and their country Hellas ("EXXdf). The name Hellenes 
 was applied also to the members of the same race, dispersed by colo- 
 nization over the islands and coasts of the Mediterranean. By the Ro- 
 mans they were called Oraed, and hence are known to us as Greeks. 
 Their language — the Greek — ^is connected with the languages of the 
 Indians, Persians, Romans, the Slavonic, Germanic, and Celtic na- 
 tions. These are all kindred languages, and together form the Indo- 
 European family of languages. 
 
 2. The Hellenes referi'ed themselves for the most part to three 
 principal divisions, Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians. To these be- 
 longed three groups of dialects : the Aeolie, spoken in Aeohs, Boeo- 
 tia, Thessaly, and elsewhere ; the Doric, in Peloponnesus, Isthmus, 
 and north-western Greece, also in Crete and Caiia, Sicily and southern 
 Italy ; the Ionic, in Ionia and Attica, and in most of the Aegean 
 islands. The Aeolie and Doric groups were more closely related to 
 each other than either was to the Ionic. In each group the various 
 dialects differed somewhat from each other ; and the Aeolie dialects 
 in particular were very unlike. As regards the written works which 
 have come down to us, it is enough to specify the following forms : 
 
 3. a. The Aeolie of Lesbos, found in the lyric fragments of Al- 
 caeus and the poetess Sappho (600 b. c). 
 
 b. The Doric, found in the lyric poetry of Pindar (470 b. c.) and 
 the bucolic (pastoral) poetry of Theocritus (270 b. c). Even the 
 Attic dramas in their lyric parts contain some Doric forms. The lan- 
 guage of Pindar has some peculiarities derived from the Aeolie, and, 
 stiU more from the Epic. 
 
 c. The Ionic, including 
 
 (1) The Old Ionic, or ^Epic, found in the poetry of Homer and 
 Hesiod (before 700 b. c). In all the poetry of later times (though 
 least of all in the dramatic dialogue) we find more or less admixture 
 of Epic words and forms. 
 
 (2) The Jfisw Ionic, the language of Ionia about 425 b. c, found 
 in the history of Herodotus and the medical writings of Hippocrates. 
 
 1 S. In Homer, Hellas is only a district in northern Greece, the Hellenes 
 its inhabitants. For the Greeks at large, he uses the names 'Axaioi, 'Apyeioi, 
 Amittoi, which, strictly taken, belong only to a part of the whole people. 
 
 2 S. The division into Aeolians, Dorians, lonians, is unknown to Homer. 
 
2 OREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS. [4 
 
 > The following dialect, though in strictness the Ionic of Attica, and 
 closely related to the two preceding, is always distinguished a's 
 
 d. The Attic, the language of Athens in her flourishing period 
 (from 490 b. c), found in many works of poetry and prose, especially 
 the tragedies of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, the comedies 
 of Aristophanes, the histories of Thucydides and Xenophon, the 
 philosophical writings of Plato, and the orations of Lysias, Isocrates, 
 Aeschines, and Demosthenes. The political importance of Athens 
 and the superiority of her literature gave a great ascendancy to her 
 dialect, which at length banished the others from literary use ; though 
 the Doric and the Old Ionic were still retained, the latter for epic, 
 the former for lyric and bucolic poetry. The Attic thus became the 
 common language of all cultivated Greeks ; but at the same time be- 
 gan to lose its earlier purity. In this state, commenckig about the 
 time of Alexander (who died 333 b. c), it is called 
 
 e. The Common dialect (ij koiv!\ hiSKfKToi), in distinction from the 
 purer Attic. On the border between the two, stands the great phi- 
 losopher Aristotle, with his pupil Theophrastus. Among later au- 
 thors, the most important are the historians Polybius (140 b. c), Plu- 
 tarch (100 A. D.), Arrian (150 A. D.), and Die Cassius (300 A. D.), the 
 geographer Strabo (1 a. d.), and the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali- 
 carnassus (30 b. c), and Lucian (170 a. d.). 
 
 Rbmabk. — There is a noticeable difference between the earlier and 
 Jater Attic. The first is seen in the tragic poets and Thucydides; 
 the last, in most other Attic writers. The language of Plato has an 
 intermediate character. The tragic language is marked by many pe- 
 culiarities of its own. 
 
 4, For completeness, we may add 
 
 f. The Hellenistic, a variety of the Common dialect, found in the 
 New Testament, and in the Septuagint version of the Old Testament. 
 The name comes from the term Hellenist ('EXXi/i/iorijr from IXkrivi^a), 
 applied to Hebrews, or others of foreign birth, who used the Greek 
 language. 
 
 g. The Modem Oreek, or popular language for the last thousand 
 years, found in written works since about 1150 a. d. It is also called 
 Romaic from 'Vtofiaioi, {Romans), the name assumed in place of "EXXi/vey 
 by the Greeks of the middle ages. 
 
 Note. — Through the first two Parts of the Grammar, the forms of Attic 
 Greek, especially the Attic prose, are described in the body of the text ; 
 while the peculiarities of other dialects (particularly those of Homer and 
 Herodotus) are added in smaller type at the foot of each page. 
 
 Hm. stands for Homer, and Hd. for Herodotus ; cf. is used for Latin con- 
 fer (compare) ; sc. for scilicet (to wit) ; ib. for ibidem (in the same place) ; 
 i. e. for id est (that is) ; e. ff. for exempli gratia (for example) ; ktA. for koI 
 t4 Koirri (Lat. et cetera). Other abbreviations will explain themselves. 
 
PART FIRST. 
 
 WRITING AND SOUND. 
 
 
 
 Alphabet. 
 
 
 
 & The Greek is 
 
 written with twenty-four letters. 
 
 
 
 Form. 
 
 Name. 
 
 
 Latin 
 
 / A 
 
 a 
 
 c^^a 
 
 alpha 
 
 a 
 
 1-B 
 
 /3 
 
 ^^ra 
 
 beta 
 
 b 
 
 3 r 
 
 r 
 
 ya/A/Att 
 
 gamma 
 
 g 
 
 f A 
 
 8 
 
 SeXra 
 
 delta 
 
 d 
 
 i-E 
 
 e 
 
 1 ;^lA.ov 
 
 epsilon 
 
 g 
 
 t Z 
 
 £ 
 
 C^a 
 
 zeta 
 
 z 
 
 7 H 
 
 >; 
 
 ^ra 
 
 eta 
 
 e 
 
 f 
 
 6liJ 
 
 thjTd 
 
 theia 
 
 th 
 
 ? I 
 
 ( 
 
 iSyra 
 
 iota 
 
 i 
 
 ,iK 
 
 K 
 
 Kainra 
 
 kappa 
 
 c 
 
 n A 
 
 X. 
 
 Xaifi^Sa 
 
 lambda 
 
 1 
 
 /-M 
 
 /^ 
 
 IJ.V 
 
 mu 
 
 m 
 
 /3N 
 
 V 
 
 vv 
 
 nu 
 
 n 
 
 i<^ E 
 
 f 
 
 & 
 
 xi 
 
 X 
 
 .r o 
 
 
 
 O fUKpOV 
 
 omicron 
 
 6 
 
 /«. n 
 
 IT 
 
 TTl 
 
 pi 
 
 P 
 
 <->p 
 
 P 
 
 p£ 
 
 rho 
 
 r 
 
 it% 
 
 tr S 
 
 ariyfua 
 
 sigma 
 
 s 
 
 "fT 
 
 T 
 
 rav 
 
 tau 
 
 t 
 
 >ttY 
 
 U 
 
 V ijflkov 
 
 upsilon 
 
 y 
 
 ■w * 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^l 
 
 phi 
 
 ph 
 
 -^vX 
 
 X 
 
 XI 
 
 chi 
 
 ch 
 
 -.3* 
 
 "A 
 
 f , 
 
 psi 
 
 ps 
 
 of« 
 
 (1> 
 
 S> fi-eya 
 
 omega 
 
 
 
4 VOWELS. [6 
 
 6. Sigma at the end of a word has the form s ; in any 
 other place the form o- : thus o-rao-is faction. 
 
 a. Abbreviations for many combinations of two or three letters are found 
 in manuscripts and old editions. Two of these are still occasionally em- 
 ployed : 8 for ov, and r for o-t. 
 
 7. The oldest Greek alphabet had two other letters : 
 
 F p fav iiau Latin v 
 
 <f ^cmwa hoppa " q 
 
 Vau stood in the alphabet between t and f, koppa between w and p. 
 Vau is also called digamma, hlyajxji.a (double gamma, from its form). 
 
 8. The ancients used only the capital letters. The small letters came into 
 iise during the middle ages. The names epsilon, omia-on, iipsilon, and omega 
 are also of late origin ; the ancient names were e? or e, ou or ii, S, and S. 
 
 a. The term alphabet is formed from the names of the first two letters. 
 The Greek alphabet is the source of the Latin : it is itself derived from the 
 Phoenician alphabet. 
 
 Vowels. 
 
 9. The vowels are a, e, ij, t, o, o), v. 
 
 Of these, e, o, are always short, 
 ■q, <o, always long, 
 a, I, V, short in some words, long in others. 
 
 10. The short sounds of a, t, o, are sometimes indicated by a, i, 
 ii ; the long sounds, by a, t, v. 
 
 In this grammar, however, the long vowels, d, I, v, are so 
 marked throughout, and the unmarked a, i, v are therefore 
 understood to be short. We have, then : 
 
 the short vowels, a, e, i, o, v, and 
 the long vowels, a, ?;, I, a>, v. 
 
 Note. — The mark of length is omitted over circumflexed vowels (96). 
 
 11. The long vowels were originally sounded as a, e, i, o, u, in 
 the English words par, prey, machine, prone, prwne, slowly and fully 
 uttered. The short vowels had the same sounds, only less prolonged 
 in utterance — nearly, therefore, like the English short sounds in the 
 words papa (first syllable), pet, pit, obey, pall. 
 
 a. But V and i! assumed at an early period (before 400 b. c.) the 
 sound of the French u or German ii, intermediate between English oo 
 and ee. At the end of a diphthong u retained its earlier sound. 
 
 11 D, a. Some of the Doric and Aeolic dialects always retained the older 
 sound of V, 
 
14] DIPHTHONGS. 5 
 
 12. The vowels are open or close. 
 
 The open vowels are ) "' "' (the most open). 
 ^ ( £, 17, o, (1) (less open). 
 
 The close vowels are t, i, v, v. 
 
 Diphthongs. 
 
 13. The diphthongs {Si<ji6oyyoi. double sounds) unite two 
 vowels — an open and a close vowel — in one syllable. They 
 are 
 
 ai, ei, ot, av, ev, ov, 
 
 a, ?;> <o, rpj, <ov, and vl : 
 
 but in VI, both the vowels are close. 
 
 The diphthongs a, y, <a, which have the first vowel long, are 
 sometimes called improper diphthongs. Their second vowel 
 is called iota subscript (written below the first). 
 
 a. But when the first vowel is written as a capital letter, i stands 
 upon the line : QIAHI = 'Qibfi = oJSfl. 
 
 14. a. In the diphthongs, as at first pronounced, both vowels were 
 heard, each with its proper sound, but without break between them. 
 Tlius ai was sounded like Engl, ay affli-mative ; av like Engl, mi in 
 otir ; ot and ev nearly like oi in foil and eu in feud. But « and ov, 
 though they originally had the diphthongal sounds to be inferred 
 from their composition, came at an early time (before 400 b. c.) to be 
 pronounced with simple sounds : ov like ou in youth; ei like the &i in 
 rein (and much later like that in seize). 
 
 b. From the genuine et and ov above described must be distin- 
 guished, liowever, the spurious diphthongs ei and ov, which arise by 
 compensative lengthening (34) or contraction of ef, to, oe, 00 (37 e). 
 These were sounded from the beginning as in rein and yovth, and 
 were not originally written as ei and ov ; but about 400 b. c. they 
 coalesced with the genuine ft and ou in sound and writing. 
 
 c. In a, ,17, <a, the second vowel was at first written on the line and 
 sounded, as in other diphthongs. But afterwards (about 100 b. 0.) 
 it ceased to be pronounced, being swallowed up by the long a, 7;, w, 
 before it. The custom of writing it under the line dates from about 
 the eleventh century. 
 
 d. The sounds of r)v and a>v cannot be exemplified from English. 
 These diplithongs are rare : iju occurs in Attic only as the result of 
 
 14 D. d. The Ionic lias rju also in vr\vs (Hm. Hd.) Att. vaSs ship, and 
 ypTjiJj (Hm.) Att. ypavs old woman. The New Ionic has av in taiiT6s, Tabrd, 
 etc., by crasis for & aurSs, rh aWS (77 D) ; also in reflexive pronouns, as 
 iavToS (266 D), which seems to have arisen by crasis from eo auroi ; further 
 in 9a>v/itt Att. Bauna wonder, and words derived from it. 
 
6 BREA THINGS. [16 
 
 augment (357) or of crasis (76) : av is chiefly Ionic. The diphthong 
 ML was sounded somewhat like ui in quit; it is never followed by a 
 consonant in the same word. 
 
 15. In Latin letters the diphthongs were represented, 
 
 m, ft, oi, av, €U, ov, vi, a, ij, a, 
 
 by a«, e or I, o«, au, eu, u, yi, a, e, o. 
 
 a. For m, oi, in a few proper names, we have Latin ai, oi ; Mam 
 Maia, Tpola Troia, Aids Aiax. For o), in a few compounds of ahl] 
 song, we have oe : rpaymSos trugoedus. 
 
 16. Diaeresis. — A double dot, called- a mark of diaeresis 
 (separation); is sometimes written over an i or v, to show 
 that it does .not form a diphthong with the vowel before it : 
 thus Trpoievai, pronounced Trpo-ievai to advance. 
 
 a. The diaeresis may be omitted, when it is evident from a breathing (17 a), 
 or an accent (96), or from i written on the line (13 a), that the two vowels do 
 not unite as a diphthong. Thus in Aur^, ix^it, Xrii^Sn^vos, the vowels are 
 evidently separate ( = oiir^, Ix^ii, Arjifii/iews), while in mrii, ix^v!, KriCifiems, 
 they unite as diphthongs. 
 
 breathings. 
 
 17. A vowel at the beginning of a word always has either the 
 rough breathing (') or the smooth (') written over it. The 
 rough breathing shows that h was sounded before the vowel : 
 thus eirra (pronounced hepta) seven. The smooth breathing 
 means simply that the vowel was sounded without h : thus 
 ETTt (pronounced epi) upon. 
 
 a. A diphtJiong at the beginning of a word takes the breathing over 
 its second vowel : airov of himself, airov of him. But in the impropei- 
 diphthongs, i never takes the breathings, even when it stands upon 
 the line : "AiSrjs = dSrjs Hades. 
 
 b. All words which begin with u or C have the rough breathing. 
 
 18. The consonant p at the beginning of a word always has 
 the rough breathing (thus p, Latin r/t): prfTwp rhetor orator. 
 And in the middle of a word pp is by many editors writ- 
 ten pp (Latin rrh) : thus IIuppos Pyrrhus ; though some write 
 IIvppos. 
 
 a. Except in pp, the breathings belong only to initial letters ; if 
 brought into the middle of a word by composition, they are not writ- 
 
 17 D. b. The Epic pronouns Hn/ifs, Siifii, Sfifie (261 D) have the smooth 
 breathing. The Aeolio dialect had other exceptions. 
 
26] CONSONANTS. 7 
 
 tefi: ■rrpoea-dm (for npo-ea-dai) to abandon, though there is evidence 
 that the rough breathing was often pronounced. Compare the Latin 
 forms enhydris ewSpis, polyhistor Trokvtarap. 
 
 Consonants. 
 
 19. The consonants were sounded, for the most part, as we sound 
 the Boman letters used to represent them (5). But observe that k, y, 
 a; T had only the sounds which are heard in Bngl. coo, go, so, to : 
 thus in AvKid Lyda, ipvyid Phrygia, Mva-'iS. Mysia, BoaoTid Boeotia. 
 
 20. Gamma (y) before k, y, x, or ^, had the sound of n in ink, 
 anger, and was represented by a Latin n : ayKvpa (Lat. ancora) 
 anchor, ayyeXoi (Lat. angeliis) messenger, o-c^ty^ sphinx. This 
 is called gamma nasal. 
 
 21. The letters ^, 6, x, seem to have had at first the sounds of ph, 
 ih, ch, in English uphill, hoJAouse, block/tead. But afterwards they 
 came to sound as in English graphic, pa(/ws, and German macAen. 
 
 a. Zeta (0 was sounded like Engl, ds; in late Greek like Engl. e. 
 
 b. Every consonant was sounded : thus k was heard in KTfjp.a posses- 
 ion, y in yvap-rj judgment, and in ^^I'o-is decay. Similarly ^evos 
 stranger, \jfev8os falsehood, were pronounced hsenos, pseudos, with k 
 and p distinctly heard. 
 
 22. Among consonants we distinguish semivowels, mutes, 
 and double consonants. 
 
 23i The SEMIVOWELS are X, m v, p, a-, and y-nasal; of which 
 <T is called a spirant (or a sibilant), 
 X, IJ,, V, p are called liquids, 
 pL, V, y-nasal are called nasals. 
 
 a. Another spirant is the old Greek / (see 7), which had the sound 
 of English w. 
 
 24, The MCTTES are of three classes : 
 
 labial mutes ir y8 <^ or 7r-mutes, 
 
 lingual mutes t 8 ^ or T-mutes, 
 
 palatal mutes k y x or K-mutes. 
 
 Mutes of the same class are said to be cognate, as produced 
 by the same organ (lips, tongue, or palate). 
 
 25. The mutes are also divided into three orders: 
 
 smooth mutes tt t k (tenues), 
 
 middle mutes ;S 8 y (mediae), 
 
 rough mutes <f> 6 x (aspiratae). 
 
 Those of the same order are said to be co-ordinate. 
 
8 INTERGHANQE OF VOWELS. [26 
 
 a. The rough mutes, or aspirates, are so named from the rough breathing 
 {}i) which was heard in them. The middle mutes are so called merely from 
 their place in the arrangement. 
 
 26. The DOUBLE consonants are ^, f, i/f; of which \f; is 
 written for ircr, and f for k<t. 
 
 27. The relations of the consonants may be seen from the following 
 table : 
 
 Somivowcls. Mutes. Double 
 
 , ' . , * , Conso- 
 
 Spirants. Liquids. Smooth. Middle. Bough. nants. 
 
 1 Nasals. Ill I 
 
 Labials f /x tt /? <^ i/' 
 
 Linguals cr X p v t 8 ^ 
 
 Palatals y-nasal. '^ y X f 
 
 a. Stords AMD Sonants. — The smootli and rough mutes, with o-, ^/', 
 I, are surd; that is, hushed or whispered sounds. The other conso- 
 nants and all the vowels are sonant, sounding. 
 
 VOWEL CHANGES. 
 Interchange of Vowels. 
 
 28. The open short vowels (a, e, o) are often interchanged 
 in the inflection and formation of words : rpi^-w nourish, 
 i-Tpdxf>-riv was nourished, re-rpotp-a have nourished, Tpo(j)-rj nour- 
 ishment. 
 
 a. So sometimes 17 and a> : dpriy-a> help, apay-os helper. 
 
 29. In like manner et and ot, in root-syllables (see 32), are 
 interchanged : ku-w-m leave, Xi-Xoar-a have left, Xonr-os left. 
 In oTTEvS-o) hasten, o-wouS-^ haste, we have a like interchange 
 of ev and ov. 
 
 30. In Attic the general rule is that d of the earlier lan- 
 guage becomes rj, unless preceded by e, i, or p : thus 4'VM 
 report, older (Doric) form 0a/Ad; laTr)p.i set up, older (Doric) 
 MjTd/it ; but yevea generation, (ro(f>ia wisdom, Trpda-croi do, re- 
 main unchanged. 
 
 29 D. The variation of €1; to ov is seen in elK-l]Kov9a (Hm.) for iKiiKvBa 
 have come (root cAi/9-, strong form eAfuS-, 539, 2). 
 
 30 D. (1) The Ionic (Epic and New Ionic) has r) for Attic d, even after 
 6, I, and p : Ion. vsyivir^s for Att, veavias young man ; so yeve-i], ffotpiri, irp^iiaa), 
 for yevea, iTO(pia, irfiairw. But not so when a arises by contraction or com- 
 
S3] LONG AND SHORT VOWELS. 9 
 
 a. This rule does not apply to u arising by contraction (37) or 
 compeasative lengtheniug (34). TMs is always unchanged. 
 
 31. A close and open vowel are rarely interchanged : iati is, Mt be thou ; 
 iivofia nam€j avfiivvfios nameless ; poetic fuofios blame, ofii^v blameless ; ovivTjfu 
 (for opontfu) benefit. In such cases the open vowel is always the original. 
 
 •Strong and Weak Hoot- Vowels. 
 
 32. In root syllables we often land an interchange of 
 
 t with £1 or 01, 
 
 V with ev (seldom ou), 
 
 a with Tj, d. 
 
 In such cases the short Towel is said to be the weak form, 
 tlie diphthong or long vowel the strong form. The weak 
 vowel is conveniently treated as the fundamental form. Thus: 
 
 e-XiTr-oj/ (root Xiff-) left, XeiV-m lewoe, Xe'-XoiJr-a liwoe left, 
 e-(j>vy-ov (root </»uy-) Jled, cjievy-o} jlee. 
 
 a. For the interchange of ei and oi, cu and ou, see 29. 
 
 Iiooig and Short ■ Vowels. 
 
 33. Long and short vowels are sometimes interchanged in 
 the inflection and formation of words. 
 
 Thus corresponding to a, «> ^ o, v, 
 
 the long forms are ij or d, -q, I, to, v. 
 
 Tlfia-a I honoi; Ti-Be-fiiv we put, Sl-Bo-fiev we give, 
 
 Ttfiij-a-a I shall honor, Ti-Orj-iit I put, Si-Sa-iu I give. 
 
 Ti-cris retribution, (pi-a-is nature, 
 
 rf-cro) sJiall repay, 7re-<f>v-Ka am. 
 
 pensative lengthening: Ion. and Att. Spa (for opo-e) see thou, /ueAds (for 
 ^€\av-s) black. 
 
 (2) The Doric and Aeolic, on the other hand, have a for Attic jj: Dor. 
 Sd/xos for Att. Sntios people, nirrip (Lat. mater) for /u^TTjp mother, 'k6avd 
 (used also in Trag.) for Horn. 'A9V') (in Att. commonly 'AflTjco) the goddess 
 Athena. But not so when t; arises from a lengthening of e : Dor. and Att. 
 rlSriiu (root 9e-) put, Kt/i^v (Gen. M/iiv-os) harbor. 
 
 31 D. In the dialects this change is more frequent : Ion IffTiri Dor. iarla 
 for Att. eiTTla. Iicarth. 
 
 S3 D. Hm. puts a long vowel or a diphthong for a short vowel in many 
 words which would otherwise be excluded from his verse. Thus, where 
 otherwise three short syllables would stand in succession : T\vop4ii from i,vi\p 
 man, elapii>6s from tap spring, o-j\6fiei'os for d\6iifj/os destroying, oipeos, 
 oCpeo from ipos (never oSpos) mountain, oSro/ui for iyofui name (also in Hd.), 
 
10 COMPENSATIVE LENGTHENING. [34 
 
 a. It is convenient, in general, to treat the sJwrt vowel as the funda- 
 mental form, and to speak of the long vowel as the result of \he form- 
 ative lengthening. 
 
 b. The lengthened form of a coincides with its strong form (32). 
 Wliether a or i; is used depends on 30. 
 
 Compensative Lengthening. 
 
 34. A short Vowel is sometimes lengthened to make up for 
 the omission of a following consonant. This is Compensative 
 Lengthening. 
 
 By this, a, €, I, o, V, 
 become d, tt, I, ov, v. 
 
 Thus for fif\a-v-s, 6e-vT-s, cKpi-var-a, \vo-v-cn, <jiv-vT-s, 
 we have /itXas, dels, eKptva, Xsfoutrt, (jivs. 
 
 a. For an exception in whicli a becomes jj, see 431 ; for one in which e, o 
 become tj, a, see 168 (2). 
 
 b. The « and ov arising by this process are the spurious diphthongs 
 (Hb). 
 
 35. When I is dropped between two vowels (44), the former vowel is 
 sometimes made long : thus del, Kcia, from aUi, Kaia. 
 
 36. Teanspbk of Quantity. — A long open vowel standing before a 
 short one sometimes shifts its length to the latter. So and tjo becoming 
 ea>, and jja becoming eS : thus vt'ios temple becomes vedis, fieTrjopos 
 aloft li-eTeapos, ^aa-iKrja king /SaoriXe'd. Even am and rja become eu : 
 redvcas for TeOvqws dead. 
 
 uij'tTreTTjA.os from TeTaKov leaj\ tl6t)^^vos for riBe/ifvos putting ; or a short 
 between two long, tvffa^av for ivfraiiav from Svrrd-iis ill-hlowing. Also, where 
 two long syllables would stand between two short ones : Oi\i/moio (for 
 'Oki/iwoto) of Oli/mpus, eiA^Aoufla (for e\ri\ov9a) have come. 
 
 34 D, The dialects differ much in respect to compensative lengthening. 
 Host Aeolic and Doric dialects lengthened e, o to >;, u : fivai = eXvai (from 
 i<r-vai), 6i)s ^ 6tU, fiacra = fiov(ra ( f lom fiovcra). The AeoUo of Lesbos made 
 oiff, eiir, our from avir, ekt, ov<t ; as iraitra = iraffa, /icKats = p.e\as, fioTara = iwvo'a 
 (used also by Pindar and Theocritus) ; but in other cases avoided compensa- 
 tive lengthening by using assimilated forms (46) : sxpivva — iKplva (from 
 IxQiv-trii), iixid = eifj.1 (from eV-/iu), p6\\d = /SouA.^. The Ionic agrees in the 
 main with the Attic. In ^eTvos for |^fos stranger^ kciv6s for Keif6s einptij^ 
 e'ltieKa for 'ivexa on acemtnt of, fnovvos for /iSyos alone, Kovpos, Koipri for 
 ic6pos, xipri loy, girl, the Ionic employs the lengthening while the Attic does 
 not : these are general poetic forms. 
 
 36 D, So especially in Ionic : 'ArpEfSem, originally 'hrpdiaa (Att. ^ArpelSov) 
 of Afrides ; irvheav, orig. ■iru\aai' (Att. TrvXiiv) of gatei ; Xioaci&iav, orig. Ilo- 
 ffEiSawf (Att. IloffEiSajp') the god Poseidon. 
 
88] 
 
 CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. 
 
 11 
 
 Contraction of Vowels. 
 
 37. Contraction unites concurrent vowels of different sylla- 
 bles into one long vowel or diphthong. 
 
 For simple vowels the rules are these : 
 
 a. An open-vowel before a close forms a diphthong with it. 
 
 b. Two like vowels unite in the common long. 
 
 c. An o-sound absorbs an a- or an e-sound and becomes co. 
 
 d. If an a- and an e-aound come together, the first in order 
 absorbs the second and becomes long. 
 
 e. But e-£ gives €t ; e-o, o-£, o-o give ou. 
 
 a. 
 
 C-l 
 
 ei 
 
 y4vf-i 
 
 yevet 
 
 C. 
 
 o-a 
 
 Q> 
 
 alB6-a 
 
 aldS) 
 
 
 o-t 
 
 ot 
 
 TTflBo-l, 
 
 netdoi 
 
 
 a-o 
 
 OD 
 
 opa-opev 
 
 opapev 
 
 
 e-v 
 
 cv 
 
 i-v 
 
 '". 
 
 
 o-ri 
 
 0} 
 
 S?;Ao-j)Te 
 
 dr]\S)T€ 
 
 
 a-i 
 
 ? 
 
 ypa-ihiov 
 
 ypdSiou 
 
 
 €-a 
 
 (O 
 
 (piXe-anri 
 
 (fxXSxri 
 
 
 ij-t 
 
 V 
 
 KKr)-{.6pov 
 
 KKjjBpOV 
 
 
 at-a 
 
 0} 
 
 rjpa-a 
 
 ^p<o 
 
 
 <B-t 
 
 v 
 
 irpa-i 
 
 irpm 
 
 d. 
 
 a-e 
 
 d 
 
 6pd-fT€ 
 
 opdre 
 
 b. 
 
 a-a 
 
 d 
 
 yepa-a 
 
 yipa 
 
 
 a-rj 
 
 d 
 
 6pd~rjTe 
 
 opare 
 
 
 e-T) 
 
 n 
 
 </)tXe-i7T€ 
 
 (piXrjre 
 
 
 e-a 
 
 n 
 
 yfV€-a 
 
 yivp 
 
 
 ri-€ 
 
 V 
 
 Tipij-evTi 
 
 Tip^VTl 
 
 6. 
 
 e-e 
 
 ei 
 
 ^iXf-e 
 
 <j)IXei 
 
 
 t-t 
 
 i 
 
 Xi-ios 
 
 Xios 
 
 
 €-0 
 
 ov 
 
 y4ve~os 
 
 yivovs 
 
 
 O-O) 
 
 0) 
 
 dr]\6-a}(Ti 
 
 drjKatri 
 
 
 0-e 
 
 ov 
 
 5//Xo-6 
 
 SrfKov 
 
 
 dJ-O 
 
 0) 
 
 traos 
 
 a-as 
 
 
 0-0 
 
 ov 
 
 itXo-os 
 
 TrXoBr 
 
 38. a. A close vowel before an open is seldom contracted : yet ixdv-es 
 fishes gives lx6vs. 
 
 37 D, The dialects differ widely in respect to the contraction of Towels. 
 
 f. The Ionic (Old and New) has uncontracled forms in very many cases 
 where the Attic contracts : >'6os for mvs mind, yivia for yivri races, tpthiris 
 for (/>i\p; thou may si love, aeKtav for axaii/ unwilling, aoiSii for ^5^ song. — 
 In a few instances, however, these dialects have contracted forms where the 
 Attic does not contract : Ion. tp6s (and Up6s) Att. Up6s sacred (see 38 a), 
 oySuKovra for Att. oySiyliKoma eig/ify. •■ 
 
 g. All dialects, except the Attic, leave to, ea>, €ou, as a rule, uncontracted. 
 But the Ionic and Doric occasionally contract co, eou into eu (instead of on): 
 TToidfieyf iroievtri, from TroU-Ofiev, troU-ovtri (Att. iroiofjuev, Trofovcri), we do, 
 tfiey do. 
 
 h. The Doric and Aeolic often contract ao, do, ato, doi into d: 'ATpefSo, 
 orig. 'A-rpeiSio (see 146 D) ; iw\av, orig. irvxdav (141 D) ; IToo'eiSai' or IIotei- 
 Soi^Jm. noirciSaiui' (Att. UoaciSuv). 
 
 i. The Doric often contracts ae, o€i to j), p : ipri, Sp^s, from Spa-e, Spii-eis 
 (Att. Spa, 6p^s), see thou, thou seest. 
 
 j. All Aeolic and some Doric dialects contract e€ into rj, oo and oe into a : 
 Dor. ayriTcu, from aye-erai (Att. T)yetrai) lie leads, lutrBHyri from purBo-ovrt 
 (Att. luaSovai) they let for hire. 
 
12 CONTRACTION' OF VOWELS. [89 
 
 b. Contraction is often neglected when the first vowel is long : vrji 
 to a ship, ^vviopos helpmeet. But see 36. 
 
 39, Simple vowels before diphtliongs are often contracted. 
 
 a. In general they are contracted with the first vowel of the 
 diphthong: the last vowel, if it is t, becomes subscript. 
 
 b. But € and o are absorbed in some diphthongs without 
 changing them. 
 
 C. And o-ei, o-r) give oi; a-ov gives (J). 
 
 a. a-€i 
 
 a 
 
 Tt/iU-fl 
 
 rljia 
 
 b. 
 
 €-ei 
 
 €t 
 
 ^iXe-fi 
 
 <j)i\fl 
 
 a-Tf 
 
 a 
 
 Tl^a-ji 
 
 Tifia 
 
 
 €-01 
 
 01 
 
 ^iXe-ot 
 
 (jiiKoT 
 
 a-oi 
 
 V 
 
 Tlfia-oifii 
 
 Tiuaiii 
 
 
 e-ov 
 
 ou 
 
 (jitXe-ov 
 
 <j>t\ov 
 
 f-ai 
 
 n 
 
 \ie-ai 
 
 \i„ 
 
 
 O-Ol 
 
 ot 
 
 drjXu-oi 
 
 difXal 
 
 rj-ai 
 
 V 
 
 \ir]-ai 
 
 Ur, 
 
 
 o-ov 
 
 ov 
 
 8rj\6-ov 
 
 dr]\ov 
 
 i;-oi 
 
 6} 
 
 /lefivrj-oifiriv 
 
 fjieiivciprjv 
 
 c. 
 
 o-et 
 
 ot 
 
 6^Xo-ei 
 
 SrjXol 
 
 o-av 
 
 0)U 
 
 irpo-avSav 
 
 vpavShv 
 
 
 a-ov 
 
 01 
 CO 
 
 . Srj\u-Tj 
 rlfjia-ov 
 
 SriXol 
 T'ljiai 
 
 40. a. The spurious diphthong ei (14 b) is contracted like simple 
 € : T'ljiuv (not Tipav) from rl/iu-fii', oiVoCf from oiVii-eir, rlfirji from 
 
 b. o-ci rarely gives ai instead of a: atpai raise from a-dpa, aixi]! uii- 
 scemlq from 4eik))j. 
 
 u. e-oi in tlie second person singular of verbs gives both ei and ji ; \iu or 
 \iri, from KoeoLi. But see 384. 
 
 41. Irregular Contkaotion. — In contracts of the first and second declen- 
 sions, a short vowel followed by a, or by any long vowel-sound, is absorbed : 
 otrre-a, otrra (not oo-tti) ; apyupe-dVy apyvpav ; OTrA-rf-Tj, a^rATj (not airKca) ; 5i7r\(J- 
 ais, Snr\ats. Only in the singulai', ea, after any consonant but p, is con- 
 tracted to r) : xP"''^-h XP^^V- Other cases of irregular contraction will be 
 noticed as they occur. 
 
 42. Synizesis. — Sometimes two vowels, which could not form a 
 diphthong, were yet so far united in pronunciation as to pass for one 
 syllable : thus ^eo? god, used in poetry for one syllable. This is called 
 m/nizesis (setting together). It is not indicated in the writing, and 
 therefore appears only in poetry, where it is detected by the metre. 
 
 Omission and Addition of Voioels. 
 
 43. A short vowel between two consonants is sometimes 
 dropped (syncope): Trarpo's (for Trare/jos) irovcv iraT-qp father. 
 
 42 Di Synizesis is very frequent in Hm., especially after e : Bvpeay of 
 doors, xp'Jo'f'o'S golden, o-T^flea breasts, TreiAiaj cilies, iySoos eighth, all used 
 as words of two syllables. 
 
49] DOUBLED CONSONANTS. 13 
 
 44. The close vowels t and v are sometimes dropped be- 
 tween two vowels: ^aa-iXe-mv (for /3aa-i\ev-iov) from ^ao-iA,€u-s 
 A;««(7, d.Ko-)j (for a.Kov--q) hearing, irX.4-u)v for wkei-aiv more. 
 
 1. In this case, v was first changed to the cognate semivowel f (PcunKeFay, 
 oKoFri), which afterwards went out of use. 
 
 45. a. Protlielic Vowel. — A short vowel appears at the beginning of some 
 words ifhich formerly began with two consonants or a single semivowel: 
 i-X^is, also x^". yesterday. When such a vowel came before initial F, it re- 
 mained after the F had disappeared : &-ee\ov (Att. aBXov) prize, formerly 
 j^FeQKov. 
 
 b. A similar vowel is sometimes developed between K or p and another 
 consonant : op6y-vm, also hpy-vta, fathom ; aXi^-w defend, from root oAf- (cf. 
 sir-oA.|-is hattlement). 
 
 CONSONANT CHANGES. 
 
 46. Assimilation. — Many of the following changes are of the na- 
 ture of assimilation ; that is, the making of one consonant like another 
 contiguous one. Assimilation may be total or partial. 
 
 Doubled Consonants. 
 
 47. These have in many cases arisen by total assimilation. See 53, 55 c, 59, 
 66. The middle mutes are never doubled in Attic. The rough mutes are 
 never doubled, but 7r(/), t9, kx are used instead. 
 
 48. The later Attic has tt for a-a- of the earlier Attic and 
 most other dialects : Tonui arrange, KpdTTinv stronger, later 
 Attic for rao-o-o), Kpeicrviav. 
 
 a. This rule applies only to the a-a- arising from a mute with i. 
 See 67. 
 
 49. p at the beginning of a word is doubled when, by in- 
 flection or composition, a simple vowel is brought before it: 
 peio flow, eppei was floioing, Kora-ppim/ floioing down. After 
 a diphthong, p remains single: ^v-pooff air-flowing. 
 
 47 D. Hm. in many words doubles a consonant which is single in the com- 
 mon form, especially a semivowel: ?AA.aj8E for e-Aa|8€ he took, pKonneiSis 
 for ^i\o,uEiS^; fond of smiles, ivvvqTos for eB-(T)Tos well-spun, oaaov for 
 offov quantum, owiiraa for oirlcrin backward. Less often a mute: Sinras for 
 oTTus as, oTTi for Jiri that, ^SSeitre for ^Sei(re /le feared. In some words he 
 has both a single and a double form : 'AxtWfis, 'OJuo-o-eiij, less often 'AxiAeiJj, 
 'OSvtreis. — For some cases in Hm. (raSSDiroi, ifi^dWetv, etc.), in which a mid- 
 dle mute is found doubled, see 84 t>. 
 
 49 D. In Hra. p sometimes remains single, even after a, simple vowel . 
 l-p6(e from fiiCo' do, aid-poos smft-flowing. 
 
14 CONSONANTS WITH CONSONANTS. [60 
 
 a. This doubling is due to the assimilation of an initial ir or F, with which 
 most of these verbs originally began : ^-p^et for e-crpei. 
 
 50. The later Attic has pp for pa- of the earlier Attic and 
 the other dialects : KoppTi temple, 6d.ppos courage, for Kopa-nj, 
 Odpcro's. 
 
 Consonants with Consonants. 
 
 Mutes before Mutes. 
 
 51. Before a lingual mute, a labial or palatal mute becomes 
 co-ordinate (25). Thus, 
 
 /3r and 0r become irr yr and ■)(t become kt 
 
 irB " ^6 " ^6 k6 " y6 " x^ 
 
 TeTpiTTTai for rerpi^-Tai XAe^rat for XeKey-rai 
 
 yeypaTTTai '* yeypaCJi-Tai dedeKTOi *' deSc^-TaL 
 
 ypa^brjv " ypaf^-brjv irKiyhrfv " irXcK-trjv 
 
 €\ci<l>dr)v " fX€i7r-6r]V iirkix^'qv " (TrXf K-drjV 
 
 iTpi(j)drjv " eTpl^-Orjv IKixBtjv "- f\ey-6rjv 
 
 52. A lingual mute before another lingual mute is changed 
 to cr. 
 
 tfTTf for tS-Tc iriirfiarai for Tre^ret^-rat 
 
 ttr^t ** tS-^t inettr&qv " eTreiS-drju 
 
 a. But TT for (rtr (48) remains unchanged. So also tt and tB in a few 
 other words : 'Arrmis, 'AtBIs Attic. 
 
 Mutes before Liquids. 
 
 53. Before /i, a labial mute becomes /x, 
 
 a palatal mute " y, 
 a lingual mute " cr. 
 
 XAei/ifiai for XfXfwr-^ai ncnkfyfuu for rrfTrXtK-jxai 
 
 TerpTpiiai " TerpJ^-pai fy}rev<riiaL " fi//'euS-/xat 
 
 yey pappai " yey pa<p-p,ai irtweurfuu " irfireiB-jxai 
 
 a. But K/i, T;ii, brought together by metathesis (64), are never changed: 
 Kf-Kwt]-Ka am wearied, i-Tfi-fi-Briv was eui. And often a palatal or lingual 
 mute remains before a formative suffix beginning with ^ : iic-yii^ edge, ir-^iis 
 vapor, aToS-iiis station. 
 
 53 D, a. In Hm. the exceptions are more numerous : tx-iievos favoring 
 (root IK-, iKava come), uKax-H-^i'os sharpened (root aK- or ox-, Lat. acuo), oh-fi'l) 
 Att. htTfji-ii smeU (root oS-, u([« srneU, Lat. 0(for), id-fiev Att. taftey wc 'know 
 (root iS-, olSa), KeKopvdfi4vos equipped (theme KopvB-, Kopiffffta). 
 
59J CONSONANTS WITH CONSONANTS. 15 
 
 b. Before the other liquids, A, p, c, the mutes remain unchanged. Yet 
 we find ffeiMiis reoa-ed for ffeP-vos (ufP-oiuu revere), and ipeiiv6s murky for 
 tpeP-yos (^pfPos thick darkness). 
 
 Mutes before %. 
 
 54. Before o-, a labial mute forms >/' (= ■n-a); 
 
 a palatal mute forms f (= k<t); 
 a lingual mute is dropped without further 
 change. 
 
 \fi\jfto for XftTT-o-o) Kopa^ for KopaK-s a-afiaai for craifiaT-a-i 
 TpiyjfO) " Tpij3-<r<» 0Xo^ " <^Xoy-r cXiriai " cX7rtS-irt 
 
 ypa<frto " ypacf>-(Ta> /3^^ " /SijX"* opvt<ri " opvld-<ri 
 
 N ANT) S BEFORE OTHER CONSONANTS. 
 
 55. a. " before a labial becomes /*; 
 
 b. v before a palatal becomes y-nasal; 
 
 c. V before A, p, is assimilated; 
 
 d. V before o- is dropped and the preceding vowel is 
 
 lengthened (34). 
 
 a. efiiras for ev-irds b. a-vyKal<o for frvv-Kcuo} C. eXXeiVo for ey-XeiTTo) 
 
 ip^aiva " ev-^aiva> (TvyyfvfjS " (TVV-yevrjS a~vppi<o " avv-pea 
 
 ep(t>avrjs " ev-<f)avrjs (ruyxfc " (rw-xfo' d. /if'Xdy ." /leXai'-r 
 
 ippiva " ev-p,fVCO ey^co) " eiz-^eo) Xcoucri " XCov-trt 
 
 56. So also vT, v8, v^ are dropped before o- (54), and the 
 preceding vowel is lengthened (34). 
 
 Sour for SovT-s tnTcltro) for trwcvh-ira ireltropai for irevS-tropai 
 
 57. Before o-j of the dative plural, the vowel remains unchanged 
 when V alone is dropped : peXacri, Xipicn, 6ai/xoo-t, for jie\av-<Ti, Xipev-tri, 
 baipov-cTL. But when vt is dropped, the vowel is lengthened: naa-i, 
 6ei(Ti, XtfoiKri, for 7ra»r-o"t, BevT-ai., Xuoi/r-crt. 
 
 58i V remains before t in the nominatives 'iK/uvs worm, Ttpvvs Tiri/ns, 
 for €\pipB-s, TipuvS-s (54), and in a few nouns in -ais, as Bdpiuwais warming. 
 
 59. In composition : 
 
 (V before p, o-, is not changed : cv-pv6pos, eV-arafo). 
 rriv, before <r with a vowel, becomes (rv(r- : <rv(r-(rtTwv \ 
 
 before a- with a cons., or f, becomes crv-: av-arrfpa, trv-^vyos. 
 Trav, TToXii/, before cr, retain v : jrdv-trocjios ; or change v to tr: iraKlir- 
 
 64 D. Tn Ilm., a r-mute is sometimes assimilated to a following tr : iro<r-irl 
 for iroS-irt Att. iroai to feet. 
 
16 CONSONANTS WITS VOWELS. [60 
 
 60. Between v and p is developed a S; this happens in the declen- 
 sion of avqp man : avSpos for avpos for avipos. Similarly, between p, and 
 p (or X) is developed a /3, in pecTT)p.jip'ia, midday, south, for iiecr-i]iJ.pi5. for 
 fie(T-rip.epia., from p.4o-os and rj/iepa. 
 
 61. o- between two consonants is dropped : yeypd^-Oai for 
 
 yeypa(j>-(r6ai; eK-fir/vo'S of six months for i^-fi.r)vos. 
 
 a. Not so, however, when initial a- is brought by composition be- 
 tween two consonants : fV-orafm. 
 
 b. The preposition e| (= cks) in composition drops s before any 
 consonant, but undergoes no further change: eK-Sovvm give out (not 
 ey-hovvm, 51). 
 
 62. When two sigmas are brought together by inflection, one of 
 them is dropped : reixfcn. for T€i)(€a--a-i, ca-naa^ai for fcmair-trai. 
 
 63. The combination o-S, in some adverbs of place (219 a), passes into (: 
 dvpd^e out for Bvpac-Se. 
 
 Consonants with Vowels. 
 Metathesis. 
 
 64. A vowel and a liquid are sometimes transposed: Odpcros 
 courage, also Bpaa-o^; thus, too, 
 
 aorist e-dop-ov, present dpa-a-Ka ; present ;3aX-X<a, perfect ^i-^Xrj-Ka ; 
 " €-6av-ov, " 6vrj-(TKa>; " rip-va, " Te-Tp.r)-Ka. 
 
 a. The vowel is often made long. See the last four examples. 
 
 Consonants before I. 
 
 65. The close vowel i, following a consonant, gives rise to 
 various changes. Thus, frequently, 
 
 60 D. This change of pp, p\ to pPp, pP\ takes place in a few Epic words : 
 p4-tiP\ii>-Ka, have gone (from root iw\-, by transposition fiXai-, 64). At the be- 
 ginning of a word, p before this /3 is dropped : ^Ktia-Ka go, for n$\ai-crKa 
 (root iio\-, p\a-] ; Pporos mortal for pfipo-ros (root pop-, ppo- ; Lat. mor-ior nior- 
 tuus). But in composition /u remains : S-/i/3puToi immortal, (peial-fifipoTos man- 
 
 62 D, In Hm., both sigmas are often retained ; ^ireff-fft Att. eireo-i to words, 
 itr-ffl Att. c? thou art. 
 
 63 D. The Aeolic has aS for f in the middle of a word ; this is often found 
 in Theocritus ; pe\i(rS€c Att. pe\lCa> make melody, 
 
 64 D. Metathesis is very frequent in Hm. ; Kaprepis and KpaTep6s power- 
 ful, KdpTUTTos = Att. KpiruTTos most powerful, best, from xpiros power, irap- 
 ir6s Att. arpaitSs path, rpaireiofiev for Taptreiopev (root repn-, Tepwoj delight), 
 Similarly, iSpoKoii from SepK-opat see, HirpoBov from Trip9-u destroy. 
 
fa] DISAPPEARANCE OF SPIRANTS. 17 
 
 I, after v and p, passes over to the preceding vowel and 
 unites with it by contraction (epenthesis). 
 
 )(eip(ov for x^p-iav Tfiva) for Tev-IM 
 
 SoTctpa " SoTep-ia KpTvco " Kpiv-ito 
 
 paivopai " pav-iopai uvpoi " avp-uo 
 
 66. t after A, forms with it AA. 
 
 ^aXXov for pdK-wv aWos for aX-ios Lat. aliun 
 
 OTcXKa " oTeX-t<B aXKopai " (iX-io/;ia( Lat. saZio 
 
 67. I after k, y, x, or after t, ^, forms with them a-a- (later 
 Attic TT, 48). 
 
 ijo-trmv for riK-ia>v e\<i(T<TO>v for fXa;(-io)v 
 
 e/)a(r(ra " &paK-ia Kp!jiT(ra " Kpr/T-ia 
 
 Taaao) " ray-iCD Kopv(r<T<o " Kopvd-uo 
 
 68. t after S (sometimes after -y) forms with it ^. 
 
 eXTTifo) for tX7riS-t(B pti^cov for /Liey-iui' 
 
 69. T before i often passes into o-. 
 
 SiSaiTi, originally SiSton nKovaios for TrXouT-ior, from ttXoCt-os. 
 
 a,. The same change occurs, though rarely, before other vowels ; irv, <rol, 
 o'€, originally ti5, to/, tc; ffiip.epov to-day for riifiepov. 
 
 Disappearance of Spirants. 
 
 When (T is not supported by a consonant before or after it, it often dis- 
 appears. Thus : 
 
 70. Initial <r before a vowel often changes to the rough 
 breathing : 5s for o-Ss, Lat. sus ; tor-iy/x.t for (nxrTr\p.i, Lat. sisto. 
 
 71. (T between two vowels is dropped : thus Xca con- 
 tracted from Aoe-ot for Xiie-o-ai, Aco-ato for Ai)crai-o-o, yevous con- 
 tracted from yei/e-os for ycvea-os, Lat. gener-is. 
 
 72. FaM (digamma, 7) disappeared entirely in Attic and Ionic at 
 an early period: olvos wine, formerly fotvos (Lat. vinum); ois she^, 
 
 69 D. The Doric often retains the original t; SiSart, tiS, roi, re; \iyovTi 
 they say, Att. Keyoviri. Even the older Attic retains it in rij/icpoy and a few 
 other words. 
 
 72 D. Vau was retained by the Dorians and Aeolians long after it was lost 
 by the lonians: thus Dor. and Aeol. F^tos year, FlSios own, Att. ?tos and 
 IfSios ; Dor. K\4Fas renown, alFel always, Att. k\4os, aUl It must have ex- 
 isted, however, in the old Ionic of Homer, although not written in the text 
 of his poems. Thus it must have been sounded by Hm., more or less con- 
 stantly, at the beginning of these words and their derivatives. (Those in which 
 the former existence of F is confirmed by inscriptions are marked insc.) : 
 
18 REJECTION OF ASPIRATION. [73 
 
 formerly oFis (Lat. ovia). Some words have lost both o- and F at the 
 beginning : i^his sweet, or his own, formerly pubis, /or, still older 
 a-J-aSvs, a-fos (Lat. suavis, auus). 
 
 Mejection or Transfer of Aspiration. 
 
 73. The Greeks disliked to begin successive syllables veith rough 
 mutes, especially the same rough mute. To avoid this : 
 
 a. Reduplications change a rough mute to the cognate 
 
 smooth : Tri-(j>v-Ka for <^e-<^v-Ka, Ti-Orj-ixi for BL-Orj-fU, i-K£-)(V-TO 
 
 for £-)(E-)(y-TO. 
 
 b. The imperative ending -6i becomes -ti after -6rj- in the 
 first aorist passive : kv-Orj-n for Xv-dr}-6i,. 
 
 c. The roots de-, 6v-, of Tidrjfu put, diia saervfice, become tc-, tv- 
 before -6t]- in the first aorist passive : i-ri-drjv, i-Tv-Orjv. 
 
 d. Single instances are a/tirex<>', afarlffX" clothe, for afup-, ixexeipla truce, 
 for ex^-x^ipid (from exo> and XE'p)i-and a few other words. 
 
 e. For a like reason the rough breathing was dropped at the beginning of 
 €xa> Jmve, hold, for e-xi" (fut. E'f«), originally o-fx'"- 
 
 Ayvvfii break, fiXts in numbers, enough, aXuvai to he taken, ava^ lord (insc), 
 a;'Siii/ai please (insc), SiTtu town (insc), eap (Lat. ver) spring, eSvov bride- 
 gift, elKOffi tiueniy (insc. Dor. Fixari, Lat. viginti), cIkoi ;/ield, EiA.a) press (insc), 
 f'l'pa sail, fut. ipito (insc), cKaaTOS each (insc), stem Iko- {eicri06\os far-shoot- 
 ing etc, insc), 6K7)Ti 6^ loill of, exdv willing (insc), €Kvp6s father-in-law, 6\i| 
 coil, crooked, lA.iro/xoi hope, e| six (insc), eo, of, e, himself (insc), e-Kos word 
 (insc), eliTov I said (insc), ipyov work (insc ), ^pa go, ipia draw, root fcir- 
 (ewu^i clothe, ea8i\s clothing, efjua garment), of. Lat. ves-tis, e'tnrepoj evening 
 (insc, of. Lat. vesper), iriis clansman (insc), iros year (insc), iiSis sweet, iax", 
 iax'h cry, root fi5- (i5e7j/ to see, oTSa I know), insc, cf. Lat.'vid-ere, root FiK- 
 (iKe\os, E?KeA.os like, eoiKo am fife), insc, iov violet (cf. Lat, vio-la),''lpis Iris, 
 rainbow, is, 7(fi strength (insc, of. Lat. vis), Icros equal (insc), trii] willoio, 
 oXkos /louse (insc, cf. Lat. vicris), olvos wine (insc), is, 5i, ov his. Probably 
 also apai6s slender, iBms host, "lAios Troy, ^flea haunts. 
 
 a. At the beginning of some words Hm. has a prothetic vowel e (45 a) as 
 a result of former F : ^ef/cotri twenty, ii<rr) fern, of Taos equal, Upa-n deiv, iepyai 
 shut in or out. 
 
 For effects of vau in Hm., see 15 D a, 92 D c, 93 D. 
 
 b. Other examples of preserved F, from inscriptions, are --FuTTii hearth, 
 Fparpd treaty, |eVFos guest, Hp'^os boundary (Att. ea'Tid, piiTprj, ^ivos, Spos), 
 
 73 D. Hm. often has a smooth breathing where the Attic has the rough : 
 'AiSris Att. "AiSris the god Hades, H/ia^a Att. Hfia^a wagon, ^eA.iof Att. I'lKios 
 sun, ■f)d)j (so Hd.) Att. ews dawn, i'orif (so Hd., cf. 37 D f) Att. if'pdj /lawk. 
 Cf. Hd. oBpoj Att. tSpos boundary. A smooth mute used instead of a rough is 
 seen in avris (Hm. Hd.) Att. aZQts again, ovxi (Hm. Hd.) Att. Q^X^ not, S^t^op-ai 
 (Hd.) Att. Sexofiat receive. 
 
IB] TRANSFER OF ASPIRATION. HIATUS. 19 
 
 74. Transfer of a&piration is found in a few roots which begin with 
 T and end with ^ or ;(. When, for any cause, the rough sound is lost 
 at the end of the root, it appears at the beginning, changing t to 6. 
 This occui-s : 
 
 a. In the substantive-stem rpi^- hair ; gen. sing, rpjp^dr, nom. plur. 
 rpixes, but nom. sing, dpl^, dat. pirn-, dpi^l. 
 
 b. In the adjective raxvs swift, superlative Taxtaros, but compara- 
 tive 6aa-a-(ov (Bdrrmv) for Tap^ftov (253). 
 
 c. In the roots : 
 
 Tpfcf)-, pres. Tp4(j)a ruywriah, fut. Bpi-^a, subst. 6peppa nursling; 
 
 Ta<j}-, " Bdin-a) bury, " Sdyjfa, " Td(f)os tomb; 
 
 '"P^X" " TpfVo) run, " dpe§opai, 
 
 rpvq)-, " Bpvwrio weaken, " 6pv^<o, " Tpv<f>fi delicacy; 
 
 Tvtji-, " rt7</)o> smoke, perf. re-dvppm. 
 
 d. The first aorist passive and perfect middle infinitive of these verba re- 
 tain S at the beginning of the root, although the last consonant has been 
 again made rough by 61 : so i-Bpli\>-6iiv, re-Bpiip-eai, re-ed^Scu. 
 
 SPECIAL CHANGES OF FINAL SOUNDS. 
 
 75. Hiatus. — When a word ending with a vowel is followed by 
 another beginning with a vowel, the result is a hiatus. This, though 
 not agreeable to the Attic ear, was often endured in prose : often, how- 
 ever, it was obviated by crasis or elision, or the addition of a movable 
 (xmsoiMnt. Crasis and elision occur especially when the first of the two 
 words is short and unimportant, or when the two words are often used 
 together. 
 
 74 D, Hd. shows a transfer of aspiration in Kifftic Att. xiriv tvnic, anf' 
 ^cflaih-a there, 4ii6ivT(v thence, Att. iiiraSSa, ^vrcCflec. 
 
 75 D.. Hiatus in Epic Poetrt. — In Epic poetry, the hiatus is allowed in 
 many cases ; the most important are the following : 
 
 a. When the second word begins with digamma : Kara oIkov ^ Karek Foikov, 
 in tlie house. Here the hiatus is only apparent. 
 
 b. When the first word ends in a close vowel (i, u), and is one which sel- 
 dom or never suffers elision : ttoiSI iliroiro-e he bestowed on his son. 
 
 c. When the two words are separated by a mark of punctuation : ox^av 
 iiriP^trco, u<ppa tSijai mount the car, that i/ou may see. 
 
 d. When the vowels, which malce hiatus, are the two short syllables of the 
 third foot : rSiv at | Ij 4y4- | vovto i- \ v\ /icyi- | paurt ye- | v^SKri. The two 
 words are then separated by the feminine caesura of the third foot (1100). 
 
 e. When a long vowel or diphthong at the end of the first word gives up 
 a part of its quantity, and becomes short before the following initial vowel : 
 'ArpetSai re Kol &\Koi ivKv^fiiSes ^Axaioi i^v vXv v Iw JL^lv vl^). This . 
 is regarded as a weak (improper) hiatus, being relieved by the sacrifice of 
 quantity. 
 
aO CRASIS. ELISION. [7p 
 
 Gr'asis. 
 
 76. Crasis {mingling) is the contraction of a vowel at the 
 end of a word with a vowel at the beginning of the next 
 word. The two words are then written as one, with a coronis 
 or^'hook' (') over the vowel in which they join. Thus 
 Tovvofi.a the. name, for to ovofw.. 
 
 a. The coronis is omitted when the first Towel has the rough breathing : 
 fiV for t&v. 6 6 
 
 b. Crasis is used chiefly after forms of the article, the relative pronouns 
 0, o, the preposition irpS, the conjunction Kai, and the interjection S. 
 
 77. Crasis follows generally the rules of contraction (37, 39) : thus 
 ToiivavTiov the contrary for to ivavriov, ovk for 6 «, eolfiaTiov the cloak 
 for TO ifiaTwv (82), iiyadi my good sir for i, dyade, iyafim I suppose for 
 eyo} oifiai. But : 
 
 a. If the first word ends in a diphthong, its last vowel is dropped 
 before contraction: ovvi for oi eVi, ovv for oi iv, ksv for kol iv. 
 
 b. The final vowel or diphthong of the article is absorbed by initial 
 a: ivlip the man for 6 avljp, hvhpes the men for oJ avSpes, ravbpus for " 
 
 TOV 
 
 avdpos, avTos the same for 6 airos. The particle toi follows the same rule : 
 rdpa for rot apa, p.svTav for fiivroi av. 
 
 c. The diphthong of Kai is absorbed by all vowels and diphthongs 
 except e and ci : Kauris for fcai aiTor, xh fo"" *<" ht X^ ^or *<"' Oj X°' ^o^ 
 Kai oi, but Kis for Kai is, Kara for Kai elra. Yet Kai el and Kai els give 
 Kel and KeZ?. 
 
 d. "Etepos oZ/i«- enters into crasis under the form irepos : thus arepos for 
 d erepos, Bxrepov, OaTepou, for t?> erepov, toi" erfpou. 
 
 78. Stnizbsis (cf. 42). — Sometimes the final and initial vowels, 
 though not contracted by crasis, were so far united in pronunciation 
 as to serve in poeti-y for one syllable. This occurs only after a long 
 vowel or diphthong; especially after the conjunctions iirei since, ^ or, 
 rj interrogative, p.li not, and the pronoun iya I: thus eVf t ov, as two 
 syllables ; and so pq aXkoi, iya> oi. 
 
 .Elision. 
 
 79. Elision is the cutting ojf of a short vowel at the end of 
 a word when the next word begins with a vowel. The place 
 
 76 D. Crasis is rare in Hm. ; in Hd. it is not frequent. It is most ex- 
 tensively used in Attic poetry. 
 
 77 D. b and d. These rules apply mainly to the Attic Hm. has &purros, 
 tavris (with coronis in place of the rough breathing) for 6 &piiTT05, 6 aitrSs 
 Hd. has aiviip for S a.iA\p, to\t)6cs for ri a\ri8is, SivSpawoi for oi &v0pairoi (yet 
 TavdpdiTTOu for toO k'jQp^irov), oj'rrSs, toWoi, rtovTov (cf. 14 D d), for 6 aiirSs, oi 
 avTot, TOu aitTOv, ro^jrepov for rh irepov. 
 
83] ELISION. 21 
 
 of the elided vowel is marked by an apostrophe ( ' ). Thus 
 
 hr auT(3 for hrX avT<^. . ^ 
 
 80. Elision is jjjggj^ frequent in: 
 
 a. Words of one syllable in -e, as y4, 84, re. 
 
 b. Prepositions and conjvmctions of two syllables, as irapd, dXXu ; 
 
 (except wepl, axpi, ^e'xP'i o"0 
 
 c. Some adverbs in common use, such as tn, afui, eha, iiaXa, rdxa. 
 
 Exempt from elision are : 
 
 d. Tlie vowel -v. 
 
 e. Final -a, -i, -o, in words of one syllable. 
 
 f . Final -a in the nominative of the first declension, and -i in the 
 
 dative of the third. 
 
 Rem. — Forms which can take u movable (87) are not aSected by 
 elision in prose, except only fort is. 
 
 81. Elision occurs also in the formation of compound words, 
 but then without the apostrophe to mark it: airaniia from airo 
 and aiTeo), oiSeis from oiSe and as, Sii^aXov from Sid. and e/SaXov, 
 d/ixe;^ci) (of. 73 d) from djiu^i' and extu. 
 
 82. A smooth mute and rough breathing, brought together 
 by elision, give the cognate rough mute : 
 
 dcj)' wv for dir(p) av vixff oKrjv for vvKT{a) oXiji/ (51) 
 
 So also in compound words : 
 
 d<l)aip4io from dno and aipeio Ka6trfp,i from xard and 'ir)p.i 
 
 bexqiiepos from Sc'/ca and rjiiepd icjidinicpos from eTrra and fjfifpa 
 
 The same effect is seen also in crasia: B&repovior to mpov, x^ for 
 Ka\ 6, odovveKa for orov evsKa. 
 
 a. The same change of mute takes place, notwithstanding an intervening 
 p, in (ppovSos aone (from irp6 and d5os\ <ppovp6s watchman (for vpo-dpos), 
 TiBpiinros four-horsed (from TtTTopes and tmros). 
 
 83. Aphabbbsis is the elision of « at the 'beginning of a word alter a 
 final long vowel or diphthong, especially in iiq and //: thus /iij 'ya>, r) 'jiov 
 
 80 S. Dlision is less frequent in Hd. than in Attic prose. It is most ex- 
 tensively used in poetry. Many forms, which might take v movable, suffer 
 elision in poetry : and so, further, the particle ^d (only used in Epic), and the 
 possessive pronoun ai. Datives (singular and plural) in -i are subject to elision 
 in Hm. The diphthongs of the verb-endings -ytiai, -aai, -rai, -vai, -aStu are 
 elided in Hm. and Aristophanes (not in the tragedy) : /uo(, voi, roi suffer elision 
 rarely in Hm., oXfun before cSi; in Attic poets. 
 
 82 D. In the New Ionic (Hd.), the smooth mute remains unchanged before 
 the rough breathing: ott' ob for o(^' o5, ovk oStus for oi/x oifrws, Karirini for 
 KaBiiW'h ToSrepov for rh frepoi/. 
 
22 FINAL CONSONANTS. N MOVABLE. [85 
 
 for p) lyia, r\ efiov. It occurs in poetry only. Some editors write the e 
 and assume synizesis (78). 
 
 Final Consonants. 
 
 85. The only consonants allowed to stand at the end of a 
 ■word are -v, -p, -s. 
 
 a. The only combinations of consonants allowed are -■^ (tts), -^ 
 (ks), and -y| (Ka). 
 
 b. 'Ek from and o!ik, ovx not (88 c and a) were hardly felt to be separate 
 words. Final -Xs, -vs are found only in the nominatives a\s salt, sea, eX^uicf 
 worm, and Ttpvvs 2'iryns (58). 
 
 86. Other consonants at the end of a word are dropped. 
 
 Thus in the nominatives ffSafia hody for (rtofiar (genitive ffdi^ar-os), y&Ka 
 milk for 7a\oKT (gen. yi\aKT-os), \v8ev loosed for \v8evT (gen. \v9evT-os) ; and 
 the vocatives ira? boy for iraiS (gen. iraiS-6s), yivai woman for yvvcuK (gen. 
 ywaiK-6s).' 
 
 Movable Consonants. 
 
 87. N Movable. — Some words annex a -v when the next 
 word begins with a vowel. These are : 
 
 (\) All words in -o-i, 
 
 (2) All verbs of the third person singular in -c, 
 
 (3) EOTt is. 
 
 Thus vaa-i bi&afu I give to all, but Traa-iv eSaiKa I gave to all: SiSaa-i 
 fioi or SlSaxriv ifw'i he gives to me, cSaiKe fioi or eSaKev ijioi he gave to me. 
 
 84 Di Apocope. — Similar to elision, but confined to poetry, is apocope, the 
 cutting off of a. final short vowel before an initial consonant. In Hm., this 
 is seen in the conjunction &p for &pa, the prepositions &v, Ktir, nilp for avd, 
 Kari, Ttapd (and rarely in air, m for ajr6, uirS). The apocopate forms are used 
 both as separate words and in composition. The v of &v is subject to the rules 
 in 65. The r of Kar is assimilated to the following consonant ; but before two 
 consonants it is dropped. Thus rls t ttp rutv, irapfisueTe for napofiiveTe, tt/j. 
 TreSlov for av^ ireStov, a\\va for &ya\uti}, nhp p6oy for kut^ {}6oi/, kuk Kopv(l>'f]v 
 for KOTO Kopv<p'i}p, K^y ySvu (pronounced kaff ffonu) for Kara. y6vv, kA5 Se for 
 KOTCt 5€, Kat^vffai for KOToSufTat, Khir (pd\apa (47) for koto 0aA.apo, KarOai/eTv 
 for KaTaBave7v, Kdicrave for KUT^Krave, wimifv^ei for &TrQir€/j.yf/ei, ii^^dWstv for 
 uiro$dWfty. Compare Kdfxfiopos (Hm.) ill-fated for KOK-fjLopos for KaKO~iMopos. 
 — Here belongs also Dor. ir6T (only before the article) for irorl = Att. jrpdr : 
 thus ir^T rav (or TroTTav) fidrepa. 
 
 85 D. For some apparent exceptions {h/i TeSlov, Kcty y6vv, etc.), see 84 D. 
 87 D. In the New Ionic (lid.), which does not avoid a concurrence of vow- 
 els, V movable is not used. 
 
 In Hm., the pronoun ^716(1'), and the plural datives (261 D) &ii/u(v), S/i/tt^v), 
 tr<pi(v), have v movable. So also forms with the suffix -(()i (221 D): 6e6ibi{v) 
 to gods. Likewise most adverbs of place in -flee (217) : 4i'cu9€(j/) without, 
 
91] SYLLABLES. 23 
 
 a. The 3d sing, of the pluperfect active rarely takes v movable : ^Sei{v) he 
 knew. So too the impf, ^ei(y) he went. Not, however, imperfects in -ei for -ee : 
 
 b. This V is also called i^^Kia«rrM6v (dragging after). It is usual to print 
 it at the end of a sentence and at the end of a verse in poetry. The poets 
 often use it before a consonant, thus making u, final short syllable long by 
 position (92). Even in prose, as appears from inscriptions, » movable was 
 often used before a consonant. 
 
 88. a. The adverb ov not, before a vowel, becomes ovk, but before 
 the rough breathing, oi^ (of. 83) : ov Xeym, ovk airos, oix ovtods. 
 
 b. Ml) not follows the analogy of ov in the compound fiJ^Km (from 
 jii] and ETi), like ouKcrt no longer. 
 
 c. 'e^ (€Ks)from and ovras i^MS drop r before consonanta : e'^ ao-Tews 
 from toion, but eV Trjs iroKeas from the dty : ovras eSowt ao it seemed, 
 but ouro) SoKcX ao it seems. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 89. Every single vowel or diphthong, whether with or without conso- 
 nants before or after it, makes a distinct syllable. Thus iyltia has four 
 syllables. 
 
 90. UUima, Penult, Antepenult. — The last syllable of a 
 word is called tbe ultima; the one next to the last, penult 
 (paeD ultima) ; the one before the penult, antepenult (ante- 
 paenultima). 
 
 91. In dividing a word into syllables (as when it has to be broken at the 
 end of a line) it is customary to observe the following rules : (a) A single 
 consonant in the middle of a word is connected with the following vowel : 
 1-Karv6s. (b) Combinations of consonants, such as can stand at the beginning 
 of a word, are assigned to the following vowel ; i-\^oiuu, pa^fiSos, tirxoy, 
 Korftvo!. (c) Other combinations of consonants are divided : ap-im, i\-wls, 
 iir-TTos. (d) Compounds formed without elision are treated as if their elements 
 were separate words ; ir/jotr-e/c-rfvo), not Trpo-tre-KTiyo). 
 
 ■irdpoiee{v) before. Further, i/6(r<pi{v) apart, and the enclitic particles k4(i/) 
 = Att. fiv, and vM.y) now. 
 
 In Hd., some adverbs in -flee reject v. so vp6(r6e before, Cirio-ffe behind, 
 virtpSe above, IvepBe below. 
 
 88 D. A movable j is found, though used with little reference to the next 
 word, in the following adverbs: i/upl about, Hm. also &fi<l>ts; Siriicpus right 
 oppoHte, Hm. only avrmpi; hTpifia and irpe^as quietly, mostly poet.; &XP'< 
 /ic'xpi untU, rarely &xp^s, /aexpis ; evBv (Hd. fflii) straight towards, cl/6is (Hd. i9is) 
 straiglUway, but in Hm. only ttis straight towards ; fieanyi and /lea^is be- 
 tween (Hm. /iKTa-) ; iroWdKis often. Ion. also TtoKKim (Hm. Hd.). 
 
24 QUANTITY. [92 
 
 Quantity. 
 
 92. A syllable is long by nature when it has a long vowel 
 or diphthong: Kpl-voi-/]i,rjv may he judged. 
 
 A syllable is long by position when its vowel is followed by 
 two consonants or by a double consonant: op-rv^ quail. 
 
 a. The consonants, which make a final syllable long by position, 
 may be partly or wholly in the following word: thus the second sylla- 
 ble in akkos TOTTof, and in «XXo a-TOfia, is long by position. 
 
 b. In a syllable long by position it must not be supposed that 
 the ■vowel is necessarily long. This was sounded according to its natu- 
 ral quantity. Thus the first vowel was sounded short in Xi^co, koKXos, 
 long in X^|ci), /xaXXov, though the first syllable in all these words was 
 long. 
 
 93, When a vowel naturally short is followed by a mute 
 and liquid, the syllable is common, that is, it may be used as 
 long or short, at pleasure: thus in riKvov, tv<^X6<5, ti S/aas, the 
 first syllable is common. But, 
 
 a. The mute and liquid must be in the same word. Hence the 
 preposition ex before a liquid always (even in composition) makes a 
 long syllable : e/c i/emv, t xXf yeiv. 
 
 b. The rule applies to middle mutes O, 8, y) only before p. Be- 
 fore fi, V they always make a long syllable, and generally so before 
 X: thus in ray^ia, eSi/a, ^i/3Xos the first syllable is long. 
 
 92 D, a. In Hm. one of the consonants, which make position, may be the 
 (unwritten) digamma : To'i6v ot irvp = Totiv Fot wTp (— — — — ). 
 
 c. Epic Shortening of Vowel before Vowel. — In epic poetry a long 
 vowel or diphthong at the end of a word makes a short syllable, when the 
 next word begins with a vowel : ei Sii S/mv ( i. « « i. ), koI /ioi ifioiraov 
 (J. w 'J JL \j)^ see 75 D e. This takes place occasionally in the choruses 
 of the dramatic poets. But the long vowel or diphthong remains long: 
 (1 ) When the rhythmic accent falls upon it (in thesis, 1071) : if lieyiKv iSiirij) 
 (2>/u^wuJL); (2) Whea the next word began with the digamma: exarhv 
 Kal e'iKocrt (w w J. — L w w). 
 
 d. A long vowel or diphthong ia rarely made short before a vowel in the 
 same word : Hm. oios (v «), p4pKriai ovS" (i. u u 1). Even in the Attic drama 
 roiouTos (w — w), trotu (w _), SsiKatos (— w w), and a few other words admit this 
 interior shortening. 
 
 93 D. In Hm. a mute and liquid generally make position : rixvov, rl 
 K\aUis ( — — — — -\ Sirms iravSa/idTiDp (.!■ — '- ^ " —)■ Even before a simple 
 liquid at the beginning of some words a final short vowel often makes a 
 long syllable : KaKi\v re iJityiKr\v re (-^^ — — « " -^ — ), when perhaps the liquid 
 was doubled in pronouncing. So too before f : cmb eo ( v X u u ) = in-i h'4o 
 imrh aFeo, 72). So also before S in the root S«- {SeiSia fear, etc.) and S^k 
 long which once began with SF. 
 
9^] -ACCENT, 25 
 
 94, The quantity of most syllables is obvious at once. Thus, syl- 
 lables 
 
 a. with ri, a>, or a diphthong, are always long. 
 
 b. with e, 0, before a vowel or single consonant, are short. 
 
 c. with e, u, before two consonants, or a double consonant, are long. 
 
 d. with a, I, V, before two consonants, or a double consonant, are long. 
 
 Rules c and d are liable to the exception in 93. There remain, then, sub- 
 ject to uncertainty, only the syllables with a, t, « before a vowel or single 
 consonant. As to these we observe that 
 
 Syllables with a, t, v may be known to be long : 
 
 e. when they have the drcmmflex accent : Kplve. 
 
 f . when they arise from a contraction : ukcov from acKav. 
 
 Rem. — The quantity of o, i, u, so far as it is connected with inflection, is 
 to be learned from the grammar. In other cases, it may be ascertained by 
 consujting the le:xicons, or by observing the usage of Greek poets. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 95. The Greek accent consisted in a raising of the pitch, 
 and qot in stress of utterance. 
 
 96. There are three kinds of accent : 
 
 the acute, marked ' : ikvOr/v, 
 the circumflex, marked " : Xva-ov, 
 the grave, marked ' : AcAd/cws. 
 
 a. These marks stand over the vowel of the accented syllable. In 
 case of a diphthong, the accent stands over the second vowel ; but over 
 the _flrst vowel of an improper diphthong (cf. 17 a) : avTovs, airols, 
 avra, 
 
 b. The acute and grave follow the breathing when both belong to the 
 same vowel : S\os, tiy ; but the circumflex is placed above the breathing : ^ye, 
 oStoj. When they belong to a capital letter, they are placed be/ore it : "EWtjc, 
 
 97. The acute shows that the 7t)hole vowel was uttered on a higher 
 key. The dreumfl&t (made up of the acute and grave, ' ^ " ) shows that 
 the vowel began on a high key, but sank away to a lower. The grave 
 belonged in theory to every vowel which had not the acute or cir- 
 cumflex. The term was applied in two ways. First, to unaccented 
 
 94 D. The quantity of a, i, « varies in many words, especially in Hm. ; 
 they often become long under the rhythmic accent (in thesis, see 1071), when 
 otherwise they would be short : lojiev or tajj-tv let us yo, ''Apss, 'Apes, fipori- 
 \oiye (ivuiui/Zx). Hm. has Ka\6s, riva for Att. KaKos, riva; on the 
 other hand he has usually Vq/ii, \iu for Att. (t)/», Kia. 
 
26 RULES OF ACCENT. [98 
 
 vowels, as we should call them, i. e., those which did not rise above the 
 general pitch : here, being the mere negation of an accent, it was not 
 in general written : thus avBptanos, not iivBpairbs. Secondly, to the 
 modifled acute at the end of a word ; see 108. 
 
 98, To the Latin terms accent, acute, cireumjlex, grave, correspond the 
 Greek irf>oa(fSlS, singing, pitch, or t6vos tone (straining or raising of the voice), 
 o^is s/iarp, irepKrTrdfievos drawn around, and $apis heavy, Jlat. From these 
 words, together with the prepositions irapd near and 7rp6 before, are derived 
 the names in the following section. 
 
 99. The acute can stand only on one of the last thi-ee sylla- 
 bles of a word, the circumflex on one of the last two. A word 
 which has the acute 
 
 on the ultima is called oxytone: /Sao-tXcvs 
 
 on the penult " paroxytone : /iaa-Lkevwv 
 
 on the antepenult " proparoxytone ; ^curiXevovToi. 
 A word which has the circumflex 
 
 on the ultima is called perispomenon : \x,iriiv. 
 on the penult " properispomenon : A.nrovcra. 
 
 A word which has no accent on the ultima is called bary- 
 tone. This name, of course, belongs alike to paroxytones, 
 proparoxytones, and properispomena. 
 
 Accent as affected by Quantity. 
 
 100, a. The acute stands on long and short syllables alike, 
 the circumflex only on syllables long by nature. 
 
 b. If the ultima is long by nature, the acute cannot stand 
 on the antepenult, nor the circumflex on the penult. 
 
 c. Final -| and -i^r, after a short vowel, exclude the acute from the 
 antepenult, but not the circumflex from the penult : thus we have 
 TJki^, but m<To<f)vKa^ instead of vvKTa<j)vXa^. 
 
 101. Using now the words long and short to denote natural quantity (of 
 vowel-sounds) without regard to position, we have the following rules : 
 
 A word with short ultima, if accented 
 
 a. on the antepenult, has the acute : Xvafjuda, eXiovro. 
 
 b. on a short penult, has the acute: XeXw/coTos. 
 
 c. on a Ion ff penult, has the circumflex : A.eXw/a)tav. 
 
 d. on the ultima, has the acute: AeXukos. 
 
 A word with long ultima, if accented 
 
 e. on the penult, has the acute : X«A.wkot6)v, XekvKvla.^. 
 
 f. on the ultima, has either the acute or the circumflex; 
 
107] ACCENT IN CONTJRACTION, ETC. 27 
 
 102. It is important to observe, that 
 
 a. Final -ai and -oi have the effect of short vowels on the 
 accent of the penult and antepenult: kvovrai, X.v6fi,ivo(, ^101 a), 
 Toa-ovToi, Tocravrai (101 c). 
 
 b. Not so, however, in the optative mode : watSciot, Trai&eia-ai (101 e) ; , 
 nor in the adverb o'Uoi at home. 
 
 103. a. Exception to 100 b. — Some words in -ems, -eav are accented on the 
 antepenult: Wei/eKews, irdAeais; see 16"2 a, 203. So also a few other words 
 (compound adjectives) in -as : Sia-epas unhappy in love, v^fiUepas lofty arUlered. 
 
 b. Some exceptions to 101 c, as Sirre, ^Se, are explained by the rules for 
 enclitics (115, of. 118). 
 
 104. ii. We can often determine the quantity of vowels from the accent. 
 Thus the ultima must be short in iteAekuj, jrpSJir (100 b), and long in oiriipa, 
 (101 c): the penult must be short in rli/es, for, if long, it would be writ- 
 ten Tjvef (101 c). 
 
 b. Rules for accent, so far as it is connected with inflection, are given in the 
 grammar. But the accent of words must be learned, to a great extent, from 
 the lexicons, or by observation in reading. In the majority of words, it re- 
 cedes as far from the end as the foregoing rules allow ; when thus placed, it 
 may be called recessive accent. 
 
 Accent as affected by Vowel- Changes. 
 
 105. Contraction. — If eilher of the syllables contracted had 
 an accent, the contract syllable receives one. 
 
 For a contract penult or antepenult, the kind of accent is 
 determined by the general rules (101). 
 
 A contract ultima receives the acute, if the ultima had it 
 before contraction ; otherwise it takes the circumjlex. 
 
 TlfiafKvos from Tl/ia-oiifvos TifiiTO) from Ti/Jui-eTa ootib from ooxc-o) 
 Tl/iairBai " Tl/id-ecrdat Tifif " ripa-ei earas " ea-ra-as 
 
 a. If neither of the syllables contracted had an accent, the contract 
 syllable receives none : t^/io from rfna-c. 
 
 106. Crasis. — In crasis, the accent of the first word disappears ; that of 
 the last remains unchanged : rdyaSd from rck ayaSL 
 
 But the lengthening of an accented penult by crasis may require a change 
 from acute to circumflex (101 o): tSWo from tA &\Ka. 
 
 107. Elision. — In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose 
 their accent ; other oxytone words throw it back on the penult : 
 tV alria (ini on), oiid' airos (oiSe neither), but eW ^(rav (eirrd seven). 
 
 104 D. b. The Aeolic (of Lesbos) has recessive accent in all words : irrfra^oj, 
 •nordfjLov, rpaxvSf \4\eitp6ai for trorafiSs, Trorafiov, Tpa^is, KfKu<pQai. But in the 
 accent of prepositions and conjunctions it agrees with the other dialects: 
 TKpi, wrdp. 
 
28 GRAVE FOR ACUTE. ANASTROPHE. PROCLITICS. [108 
 
 Accent as affected by Connection in Discourse. 
 
 108, Change of Acute to Gkate. — When an oxytone is 
 followed by other words in close connection, its acute changes 
 
 . to the grave : airo from, but airh tovtov from this, ^atrtXojs 
 king, but jSao-tXeus eyeVero he became Icing. 
 
 109, Anastrophe. — Oxytone prepositions of two syllables some- 
 times shift their accent from the ultima to the penult. This is 
 called anastrophe {retraction of the accent). It occurs : 
 
 a. When the preposition follows its case : tovtoiv iripi instead of 
 irfpX TovTiov about this. 
 
 b. When a preposition takes the place of a verb (cot/ being omit- 
 ted) : napa for irdpia-Ti it is permitted (as preposition napd) ; evi for 
 cvf(TTi it is possible (as preposition e'vi poetic for ev). 
 
 110, But ai/rl, ait<l>(, Sii do not suffer anastrophe: nor does avd, except in 
 the poetic form &va up ! arise 1 In prose, irepi is the only preposition that 
 ever follows its case. 
 
 a. If a preposition with elided vowel stands after its case, it is usually 
 written without accent : toC imp' av8p:iirai> ; from wliom of men ? 
 
 b. In poetry, we have ircipo for nipeurt, and even for other forms of the 
 compound verb : thus iyd) irdpa (for Traptifit) I am here. 
 
 Peoclitics. 
 
 111. A few words of one syllable attach themselves so 
 closely to a following word as not to have a separate accent. 
 They are calXeA proclitics (leaning forward). They are: 
 
 a. The forms 6, v, oi, ai of the article the. 
 
 b. The prepositions ev in, els (or es) into, e'f (iicjfrom. 
 
 c. The conjunctions el if, as as, that (also as preposition to). 
 
 d. The adverb oh (ovk, ovx, 88 a) iwt. 
 
 112. Proclitics sometimes take an accent, thus : 
 
 a. ov at the end of a sentence : <f>^s, *; od ; sayest thou so or not? Also 
 oTj no. 
 
 b. mr and the prepositions when placed after the words to which 
 they belong: as Ka<5iv ?| (Hra.) out of evils, debs as (Hm.) as a god. 
 
 c. When the following word is an enclitic (115 c). 
 
 109 L. In Hm. prepositions suffer anastrophe when placed after verbs, to 
 which they belong in composition : iXetrds &iro for diroA^iras. 
 
 110 D. b. Hm. has even in for iveiai. 
 
118] ENCLITICS. 29 
 
 Enclitics. 
 
 113. Some words of one or two syllables attach themselves 
 so closely to a preceding word as to give up their separate 
 accent. They are called enclitics (leaning on another word). 
 They are : 
 
 a. The pronouns of the first person, juoC, fioi, fic ; of the second, 
 <rov, o-oi, (t4 ; of the third, ov, of, e, and a(t>l<rt. See 263. 
 
 b. The indefinite pronoun rir, ti, in all its forms (includins tov, 
 rm for Ttvos, nvi); and the indefinite adverbs rrov (or Trofli), rrj, ttoi, 
 noOev, TToTe, Trci), irmr. Used as interrogatives, these words are ortho- 
 tone (erect in accent, not enclitic) : rls, tI, ttoO (irodi), irij, ttoi, tto^iv, 
 
 TTOre, TTWS. 
 
 c. The present indicative of ^i/il am and <j)rjiii say, except the sec- 
 ond person singular, el, (j>;js. 
 
 d. The particles ye, re, rot, wep, and the inseparable -8e (not the 
 conjunction Se but, and). 
 
 114. The accent of an enclitic is thrown back, as an acute, on the ultima 
 of the preceding word, if that syllable has not an accent already. Yet a 
 paroxytone does not admit the additional accent, as the acute or higher pitch 
 cannot be sustained through two successive syllables. Hence we have the 
 following rules : 
 
 115. The word before an enclitic 
 
 a. preserves its proper accent, and never changes an acute 
 to grave: dyadov ti, airo^ ((>r]<Ti. 
 
 b. if proparoxytone or propeji^>©menon, adds an acute on 
 
 the ultima: avOponro^ tis, irotScs nves. 
 
 c. if proclitic, takes an acute: ei Tts, ov ^-qa-i. 
 
 116. The enclitic loses its own accent; except an enclitic of 
 two syllables after a paroxytone: Aoyos rts, Koyoi nvh. 
 
 a. A properispomenon ending in -| or -ifi is treated Uke a paroxytone ; ^oivij 
 Tis, tpoTvi^ itrrl, 
 
 117. Of several enclitics in succession, each one takes an acute from 
 the succeeding, only the last appearing without accent : e? ris poi (firjo-i 
 TTore. 
 
 118. In some cases, a word is combined so often with a following 
 enclitic that the two are regarded as one word : more for S>s re, (ire, 
 li'lTc, ofoore, oortr, 77-01, koitoi. The enclitic -Se is always treated thus : 
 oSe, Tovirbe, oixahe. So irip, in prose, almost always : uKrirep. 
 
 113 D. The personal pronouns iiiv, vlv, iripl, and a(p4, aifieaii, <r(p4as are 
 enclitic. So too the Ionic efj and Epic i(r<rl thou art. To enclitic particles 
 belong the poetic xii or v6v, and Epic k4 or icev, eiiv, and ^i, (for &fn). 
 
30 ENCLITICS. PUNCTUATION. [119 
 
 a. EIBe, vaix^ from ei, vai, are accented as if -fle and -^i were enclitic par- 
 ticles. 
 
 119. The enclitics in some cases retain their accent (are ortTiotone) : 
 
 a. When there is no preceding word to which they can attach them- 
 selves, as at the opening of a sentence : nvh Xeyouo-t some say. This, 
 however, is not often the case. 
 
 b. Wlien there is an emphasis on the enclitic : liXXa a-i \iya> hut thee 
 I mean (no other). For the personal pronouns, of. 363 ; for eotj as 
 orthotone, 480. 
 
 c. After elision, when the vowel to be affected by the enclitic is cut 
 off: ravT eorV i/^euS^ for ravrd scttl. 
 
 d. Enclitics of two syllables after a paroxytone ; see 116. 
 
 120, The following particles are distinguished by the accent : avd preposition 
 over, from poetic iva up! (110); &pa therefore, from apa interrogative; ^ or, 
 than, from ^ truly and ^ interrogative ; vvv now, at present, from poetic piv 
 enclitic now (inferential conjunction) ; oSkovv not therefore, from ovkovv thei'e- 
 fore ; &s relative as, that, from lis demonstrative t/ms. 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 121, The comma and period are the same as in English. The colon, 
 
 -a point above the line, takes the place alike of the colon and semicolon : 
 
 ia-mpa fjv ' Tore rjKBcv civyeXos it was evening : then came a messenger. 
 
 The marh of interrogatwn is like the English semicolon: tI ehas ; 
 
 what saidst thou f 
 
 a. The Diastole or Hypodiastole, which has the form of a comma, is some- 
 times used to distinguish the pronouns o, ti and o, re lohich from the conjunc- 
 tions 8ti that and Stc lohen. At present, however, this mark is generally 
 omitted, a space being left instead : S ti and 8 re. 
 
PART SECOND. 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 122. Inflection belongs to nouns (both substantive and 
 adjective), pronouns, and verbs. It gives to the same word 
 different forms according to its different relations in the sen- 
 tence. 
 
 The inflection, of nouns and pronouns is called declension. 
 
 123. The Greek distinguishes in its declension, 
 
 (1) Three gendees: masculine, feminine, and neuter. 
 
 (2) Three numbers : the singular in reference to one ob- 
 ject, the plural to more than one, the dual to two only. 
 
 (3) Five CASES : nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and 
 vocative. In the singular, the vocative is often like the nomi- 
 native ; in the plural, it is always so. In neuter words, the 
 nominative and vocative are always like the accusative, and in 
 the plural always end in -a. The dual has but two forms, one 
 for the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for the 
 genitive and dative. 
 
 a. In distinction from the nominative and wcative (casus recti), the 
 other cases are termed oblique (casus obliqui). 
 
 124. Gender. — To indicate the gender of substantives, forms of 
 the article (373) are used ; 6 for masculine, fj for feminine, to for 
 neuter. 
 
 125. Words which designate males are, of course, masculine ; those 
 which designate females, feminine. Further, 
 
 a. Masculine are names of winds (like 6 uvejios the wind), of rivers 
 (o TTOTajMos the river), and of months (6 iifjv the month). 
 
 b. Feminine are names of trees (i) bpw the oak), lands (fj yrj the land), 
 islands (17 v^o-or the island), and most cities (ij iriXis the city). 
 
 c. Also, most abstract words are feminine ; that is, words which ex- 
 press quality, state, or action (bodily or mental) : thus raxvTris noift- 
 ness, 8iKato(rivrj justice, eXn-ir hope, vintj victory. 
 
3^ jrOUNS. GENDER AND ACCENT. [126 
 
 d. Neuter are many names of fruits (t6 o-vkov the Jig) ; also, most 
 diminutives, even when designating males or females : to yepovrtov dim. 
 of d yepav the old man, t6 yvvaiov dim. oi if yvvf] the woman. The names 
 of the letters are neuter : to aK<pa, to a-iyfia. 
 
 e. Any word may be neuter when the object thought of is the word 
 itself, rather than the thing which it signifies : to ovBpanos the name 
 man, to SiKaiotrvvri the term justice. 
 
 Remark. — The gender may often be known from the form of the word. See 
 especially 134 and 164. 
 
 126. Common Gender. — Some nouns are either masculine or femi- 
 nine, according as they designate males or females: 6, ij Oeos the di- 
 vinity, god or goddess, 6, f] SvBpamos tlie human being, man or woman. 
 These are said to be of common gender. 
 
 127. Epieenes. — In many names of animals, the same word with the 
 same gender is used for both sexes : {] aKinrq^ the fox, mule or female. 
 These are said to be epicene (eViKotvor promiscuous). 
 
 128. Accent of Nouns. — The accent of a noun remains, in 
 all the forms, on the same syllable as in the nominative singu- 
 lar, or as near that syllable as the general laws of accent 
 allow. 
 
 avOpuywo's man, accus. sing. avOpuiwov, nom. plur. avBpum-oi ; but 
 gen. sing. avOpuirov (100 b), dat. plur. avBpiliiroi^: ovojxn name, 
 gen. sing. oi/o/Aaros (99), gen. plur. 6vofx,a.TU}v (100 b). 
 
 129. An accented ultima, in general, takes the acute : but, 
 In the genitive and dative of all numbers, a long ultima, 
 
 if accented, takes the circumflex. 
 
 Thus TTcnafWi river, gen. sing, vorrafwv; rlp.-^ honor, dat. sing. 
 rlpi^ ; Tovifoot, gen. plur. ttoSGv, gen. and dat. dual irohoiv. 
 
 a. The nominative and accusative have the circumflex on the ultima in 
 contracted forms, as haTovv bone for otTTiov, plur. oiTTa for oarea ; and in some 
 words of one syllable, as /iDs mouse, accus. /ivv (205). 
 
 130. Stems. — The forms of a noun are made by adding dif- 
 ferent case-endings to a common stem,. 
 
 The stem^s of Greek nouns end in 
 
 1. The open vowels -a- and -o-, 
 3. The close vowels -i- and -v-, 
 3. Consonants. 
 
 131. Declensions. — ^Nouns are declined in two principal 
 ways. 
 
 1. The Vowel-Declension, for stems ending in an open vowel. 
 
 2. The Consonant-Declension, for stems ending in a conso- 
 nant or close vowel. 
 
134] 
 
 DEOLENtilONS. CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 33 
 
 132, But the vowel-declension has two forms, according as 
 the stem ends in -a- or -o-. Hence we have 
 
 I. The Vowel- Dficlension, including 
 
 The A- Declension, commonly called First Declension. 
 Tlie 0-Declension, commonly called Second Declension. 
 II. The Consonant-Declension, commonly called Third De- 
 clension. 
 
 a. These three correspond to the first, second, and third declensions in 
 Latin. The haXiu fourth and fifth declensions are only modifications of the 
 third umA first respectively. 
 
 133. Case-Endiitgs. 
 
 
 VOWEL-DEOLENSION. 
 
 CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 
 
 
 Masc. and Fern, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. and Fern. 
 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. Nomin. 
 Genit. 
 Dative. 
 
 -s or none 
 
 -s or -13 
 -I 
 
 -y 
 
 -s or none 
 
 -OS 
 
 -t 
 
 
 none 
 
 Accus. 
 Vocat. 
 
 -V 
 
 none 
 
 -y 
 
 -V or -a 
 
 none 
 
 
 none 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 none 
 
 
 -e 
 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 -IV 
 
 
 -oiy 
 
 
 
 Plur. Nom. Voo. 
 
 -( 
 
 -a 
 
 -es 
 
 
 -o 
 
 Genit. 
 
 -av 
 
 
 -0)V 
 
 
 
 Dative. 
 
 -UTl 
 
 
 -<Ti, -aai. 
 
 ctro-i 
 
 
 Aocua. 
 
 -ys 
 
 -a 
 
 -ys or -as 
 
 
 -a 
 
 On comparing these two sets of endings, we see that they agree in many 
 points. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 PiEST Declension (A-Declension). 
 
 134, Words of this declension have stems ending in -a-. 
 They are masculine smdi feminine. 
 
 The masculines take the case-ending -s in the nominative 
 singular; the femiuines do not. The nom. sing, oifeminines 
 ends in -d, -a, or -rj ; of masculines, in -ds or -t^s. 
 
34 
 
 135. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. FEMININES. 
 I. Feminines. . 
 
 [136 
 
 Example. 
 Stem. 
 
 r\ x<^pd land 
 (Xapa-) 
 
 T\ Ti/i'li honor 
 (Ti>d-) 
 
 Tl ye<l>vpa bridffe 
 (yetpiipa.) 
 
 fi y\£i(r<ra tongue 
 (y^wo'trd-) 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 ACCU3. 
 
 Toe. 
 
 XiSpd 
 
 X<6pds 
 
 Xcip4 
 
 X'4pa-v 
 
 X<6pd 
 
 Tl(»fjS 
 Tl|ixi 
 
 Tlp,^ 
 
 yi^ipa, 
 
 7e<j>vpds 
 
 74vpa 
 
 yi^vptk'V 
 
 7^<j>vpa 
 
 yk&a-ira 
 
 y\ut<nrt\% 
 
 YXiicro-T] 
 
 ^Xfiirora-V 
 
 YXSo-cra 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 X<Spii 
 X<5paiv 
 
 TT|J.i 
 TlfUltV 
 
 7Eij)iJpa 
 YE<j>vpai.v 
 
 yXitttra-a. 
 y\ui<r<ra\,v 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Acous. 
 
 X<5pai 
 X^puv 
 X'ipais 
 Xcipds 
 
 TTp,WV 
 TVp.OtS 
 Tip,CtS 
 
 'y^<|>i;pai 
 'YC(t>upiov 
 Y«ij)iJpais 
 7«<t>wpas 
 
 yXaa-a-ai 
 yKatririov 
 7XiSo-o-ais 
 y\^<ra-as 
 
 Other examples: ij/xepa dap, a-Kid shadow, — ttuXj) gate, yvaji-q judg- 
 ment, — jiolpafate, — Sd|a opinion, rpdire^a table. 
 
 136. Originally all these feminines ended in long -a and were 
 declined like x^P^- ^"* many have sJiortenM this -a in the nomina- 
 tive, accusative, and vocative singular. We distinguish, therefore, 
 
 Two Classes of Feminiistes. 
 
 137. FiEST Class. — Those which have a lonff vowel (d or 
 rj) in the final syllable throughout the singular; as x^P", rlfji-j. 
 
 138. Long d, the original vowel, is retained when preceded 
 by £, i, or p ; otherwise it is changed to rj throughout the sin- 
 gular (30) : yevid race, cro<jiia. wisdom, x"Jp5 land ; but Tifuri 
 honor, rjhovri pleasure. 
 
 a. But in Kopr) girl, h4pr) neck, we have rj after p. After o, both a 
 and rj may stand : ^oij cry, pofj current ; but aroa colonnade, noa grass, 
 Xpoa color. In some proper names d is retained against the rule : AiJSa 
 Leda. 
 
 138 D. b. In the Doric and Aeolio, a remains unchanged : Tifxa., rlfias, rT/ii, 
 ri/idy. 
 
 v. In the Ionic, d always changes to tj in the singular, even after e, i, and 
 p : yivc'l], (/)i\i^f, $tt(ri\€lr)s, iiolpri. But Hm. retains d in Bed goddess and a few 
 proper names. 
 
142] FIRST DECLENSION. FEMININES. 35 
 
 139. Second Class. — Those which have short a in the 
 noininative, accusative, and vocative singular. This class 
 includes : 
 
 a. Those in which the final -a is preceded by o- (f, i/f, a-a- 
 or tt), ^, AX, or aw : as ixovcra muse, afj.a^a wagon, SLij/a thirst, 
 Od\a(T(Ta or OdXarra sea, pi^a root, a/iiWa contest, Aeatva lioness, 
 
 b. Female designations in -rpia and -eia : yJAdkrpia liarper-girl,_ 
 ^atriXeia queen (but /Sao-iXfaT sovereignty). 
 
 c. Abstracts in -em and -oia, from adjectives in -ijs and -oos: 
 oAijdeia truth, (Smia good-will. 
 
 d. Most words in -pa after if or a diphthong : ayKxipa anchor, p.oipa 
 fate. 
 
 e. Many others : as roXpa daring, Siaira living, p.vla Jly, aicavda 
 thorn. 
 
 Exceptions lo a : Kifperr) temple, eptrri dew. — Exceptions to o; In Attic poetry 
 occur forms like eu/cXcfd, cucoid, ayvola. 
 
 Remark. — Most of these words betray the shortness of -a by the accent, 
 being either proparoxytones or properispomena. 
 
 140. In the genitive and dative singular of words in short 
 -a, the vowel of the final syllable is determined by the rule 
 in 138. So yXuxTcra gen. yXoio-oTys (see paradigm, 1.35), ToA/na 
 gen. ToXfir/s. But, of course, yi^vpa gen. yetjivpas, dAiydeta gen. 
 dAij^etds, because p and i precede. 
 
 141. Special Rule of Accent. — The genitive plural of 
 the first declension is always perispomenon, because -!!>v is 
 contracted from -d-mv. Thus froin stem x'^p"-- comes xwpd-tav, 
 contracted x'^P'^"- 
 
 142. The dative plural has in poetry Crarely in prose) the older 
 ending -ata-i : niXatcn. The oldest Attic had even -ijcrt ; not, how- 
 ever, after c, i, or p. See also 320 a. 
 
 139 D. The Ionic, has -etri, -air] in the abstracts mentioned in c : a\iiiSelri, 
 (imlri. And in general the dialects use this shortening more sparingly: 
 Ionic Kviai] savor, irpip-vri stern, %KiWii, Dor. ri\im ; for Att. mnaa, irpipva, 
 ^K-liWa, Ti\/ia. Yet Hm. has voc. sing, vi/iipa maiden for vipipt). 
 
 141 D. In the genitive plural Hm. has 
 
 a. -iiwv, the original form : KKiaiaav of tents. 
 
 b. -e'ajc, the Ionic form (36 D) : iruA^aJv of gates. This -eW in Hm. is usually 
 sounded as one syllable, by synizesis (42). 
 
 c. -i.v, the Attic form, mostly after vowels: TrapeiSiv of cheeks. 
 
 The Doric form -av, a contraction of -amy (37 D h), is used also in the dra- 
 matic choruses : Seat/ of goddesses. 
 
 142 D. In the dative plural Hm. has — (a) the Ion. form -riiTt{v) : kXht/tiiti. 
 — (b) also often -pj : TreVpTjj to rocks. — (c) rarely the Att. -oii : Beats. 
 
36 FIRST DECLENSION. MASCULINES. [143 
 
 143. In the aceus. plur. -as stands for -o-vj ; cf. 133. 
 
 144, Contract Substantives. — These have the circumflex in all the 
 cases (105). In contraction they follow the rule in 41 : thus fiva, 
 fivas, jj,va, jivav (for fiva-a, etc.) mina, yrj, y^j, yij, ■yijv (for yeTn or ya-a) 
 land. See 'Epiiijs (145), poppas (149). 
 
 145- 
 
 II. Masculines. 
 
 
 Example. 
 Stem. 
 
 S vedvlds youTiff man 
 (yedi/id-) 
 
 S iroXiTTjs citizen 
 (iro\iTO-) 
 
 6 "Epiifis Hen-mes 
 {'Epfid- for 'Ep/ted-) 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accua. 
 Voc. 
 
 V£dv£d-s 
 
 vt&vCov 
 
 vedvt^ 
 
 vedvCd-v 
 
 vcdvCd 
 
 iro\lTT)-S 
 
 iroXiTOu 
 iroXiTQ 
 TToXtrii-v 
 TToXtTa 
 
 'Epp.<)-S 
 
 'EpjiOU 
 
 'EpH.fl 
 
 •EpiJ.<i-v 
 
 ■EpH.fi 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 viavla 
 VidvCaiv 
 
 iroXiTa 
 ToXtraiv 
 
 'EpH.a images of H. 
 'Epjiaiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Acous. 
 
 vcdvCai 
 vedviuv 
 vedvCois 
 vedvtds 
 
 TToXtTOI. 
 
 iroXiTfflV 
 iroXiTttts 
 iroXtrds 
 
 'EpH.ai 
 'EpH.Sv 
 'EpH.ats 
 'Epfids 
 
 So TOfiids steward, Nt Kia?) — KpiTr/s judge, o-TpaTiwTrjS soldier, TraiSorpi'^ijs 
 gymnastic-master, — 'AXKi^idSrjs (see 147 b). 
 
 146. In the singular of masculines, a is retained after e, i, 
 or p ; but after other sounds it is changed to ij. 
 
 a. Compounds in -fieTpns form an exception : yea-fihfn}s land-measurer. 
 
 147. The vocative singular takes -a short when the nomi- 
 native ends in -Tr)<i : thus TroXiTa (nom. iroXtrrj's citizen). 
 
 143 D, The Aeolic (of Lesbos) has -air in the aocus. plur. ; cf. 34 D. 
 
 144 D. The Ionic generally has the uncontracted forms. Hd. uses 7^ (Hm. 
 yaia) ; but has fiv4a for fiva. 
 
 146 D. The Ionic has rj for o through the sing. (138 D c). The Doric has 
 o for Tj; and in the gen. sing, has -a (contracted from -do, 37 D h) for -ov: 
 'ArpefSd, 
 
 147 D. In some masculine words Hm. has a nom. sing, in -to for -ttji: 
 iiTTTiiro for 'nTir6TTis horseman, aixf^rird for ai-)0i.r]T4\s spearman, etc. : also, with 
 accent thrown back, lirirlera counsellor, aKAierfra favorer. So, too, evpimrafar 
 sounding. Cf. Lat. poeta, scriba. 
 
152] SECOND declension: 37 
 
 a. So, too, in names of nations and compound words, which make the 
 nom. in -ijr : Wpira (nom. IlepaTjS Fersian), yea-fiirpa (nom. yea-fiiTprjs 
 land-measurer). 
 
 b. All other words in -rjs have -i; in the vocative : KpoviSij (nom. 
 KpoviSijs). 
 
 c. Afa-noTu, vocative of dea-iroTijs master, has u-regular accent. 
 
 148i The gen. sing, of masculines originally ended in -d-io, which became 
 -a-o (4.i), as in Homer. The Attic -ou is wholly irregular, 
 
 149. In the gen. sing, of Poppas (later contracted form of jSopcdj north 
 wind), the earlier -do has the Doric contraction to a : fioppa. This occurs also 
 in some Doric and Roman proper names, and in a few other words ; 2uAAds 
 Sulla, opviBoBiipas bird-catcher, G. S. SiiAAd, opvlSoBripd. 
 
 150. Two masculines have an irregular accent in the gen. plur. (141): 
 Xp^CTTjj usurei', G. P. xp^ttom' (but xP'O'T'tSiv G. P. of the adj. xpW'is good), 
 and iTT\ai(u annual winds, G. P. iriiaiav. So also the fern, cupiri ancliovy, 
 G. P. lupitav (but cupvuv G. P. of the adj. apirfis dull). 
 
 Second Declension (O-Declension). 
 
 151. Words of this declension have stems ending in -o-. 
 They are chiefly masctiline and neuter, with a iew fendnines. 
 
 The masculines and feminines have -os in the nom. sing., 
 the neuters -ov. The feminines are declined like the mascu- 
 lines : the neuters differ from them in two respects : 
 
 a. The nom. and voc. sing, take -v, the accusative ending. 
 
 b. The nom., accus., and voc. plural end in -a. 
 
 152, The feminines may be known, in part, by the general rules (125): 
 Ti tlnjy6s kind of oak, tj o^TreAos vine, ^ ijireipos mainland, tj ^dfios (the island) 
 Samos, T) K6pivBos (the city) Connth. 
 
 Of the remaining feminines the most important are : 
 
 a. Several names of mineral or earthy substances : tlia/i/jLos sand, yi\lios 
 chalk, nKivdos brick, inrodds ashes, xSirpos dung, }j/ri(pos pebble, fidffavos touch- 
 stone. 
 
 b. Several words that denote something hollow : X'J^'^s <'offer, yvddos jaw, 
 
 d. In Hd. some words in -tjj have -ea for -t)i/ in the accus. sing, (as if from 
 stems in -co--, see 190): Sea-Trirea for SeoiriiTiji'. 
 148 D. In the gen. sing. Hm. has 
 
 1. -do, the original form : 'ArpeiSdo. 
 
 2. -eai, the Ionic form (36 D) : 'ArpEfSem. This -eai in Hm is always sound- 
 ed as one syllable (42). The accent remains as in the original form (103 a). 
 
 3. -a), a contraction of -do, used after vowels : 'Ep/iefoi (nom. 'Epnelds, Att. 
 Ep/iijs), $op4a (nom. fiopeds, 149). 
 
 4 
 
38 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [163 
 
 KtffwrSs chest, <rop6s coffin, \rivis wine-pr-ess, KipSmros kn,eadinr/-irouffh, Kifiims 
 oven. So Td<bpos trench. 
 
 c. Several words for icay .• iS5<(j, kc'AeuSoj ; aTpa.w6s footpath, aii.a^tT6s wagon- 
 7'oad ; but b ffTevairSs narrow passage. 
 
 d. Several adjectives used as substantives: ^ Sid/jieTpos (se. ypaiJ.iJ.-fi line) 
 diameter, iTiyKKr\Toi (sc. ^ovXii council) legislative assembly, t/ SioXektos (sc. 
 7\£ir(ro speech) dialect. 
 
 e. Further, plpKo3 book, ^dfiSos staff, v6aos disease, Sp6(ros dew, SoKis beam. 
 
 153. 
 
 Example. 
 Stem. 
 
 S &v6pamos man 
 {avQpayiro-) 
 
 i l>S6s icai/ 
 
 rh SUpov gift 
 (Sapo-) 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Voc. 
 
 &v9p(i)iro-s 
 
 dv9piin-ou 
 
 dv9p(iiru' 
 
 ttv8puiro-v 
 
 AvSpun-c 
 
 6Sd-s 
 
 oSoC 
 
 oSuf 
 
 oSd-v 
 
 68^ 
 
 Supo-v 
 S(6pov 
 
 tlip{f 
 
 Supo-v 
 8(opo-v 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 dv9p(&ir<i> 
 dvSpiiiroiv 
 
 &S.6 
 oSoiv 
 
 8t&pu 
 Si&poiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 ttvSpimroi 
 dv9p(&ir«)v 
 dv9pc&iroi5 
 dv9piiirovs 
 
 oSdiv 
 oSoIs 
 &8ovs 
 
 Supa 
 
 SupoJV 
 
 StSpois 
 Smpa 
 
 So vofios law, KivSvvos danger, ravpos Imll, irorafios river, novos lahor, 
 fiios life, Bavaros death, 6e6i god (see 155), — vqaos (fern.) Uland, — o-vkov 
 fig, fiiTpov measure, ifidnov cloak. 
 
 154. (a) In t\ie genitive singular the case-ending -lo with o- of the stem gives 
 -0-10 (as in Homer) : thence comes -o-o and by contraction -ov. — (b) In the dat. 
 sing, (-a)) and the nom. dual (-a) the stem-vowel -o- appears as -a-. — (c) In the 
 voc. sing, of masculines and feminines -o- of the stem becomes -e. — (d) In the 
 gen. plur. -o- of the stem disappears before the case-ending -wv, and is not 
 contracted with it ; iv8p<!>ir-a>ii : hence this case is not always perispomenon (as 
 in the first declension, 141). In lilce manner -o- disappears before -o of the 
 neuter plural. — (e) In the accusative plural -ovs has arisen from -o-vs (see 133). 
 
 154 D, a. In the gen. sing. Hm. has two forms, -ov and -oio, as voKe/ioio ; 
 and even -oo is required by the metre in a few places. 
 
 The Aeolic always and the Doric sometimes (but not Pindar) has -a for 
 -ov (31 D j). 
 
 e. In the accus. plur. the Doric (not Pindar) has -tor or -os for -ovs : Mi/cais 
 or Kixos for \iKov! wolves. The Aeolic (Lesbian) has -ois ; cf. 34 D. 
 
 f. In the gen. dat. dual Hm. has -onv for -ou' : Hiioav from Sinos shoulder. 
 
158] 
 
 CONTRACT SUBSTANTIVM8. 
 
 39 
 
 155. The nominative is often vised in place of the vocative ; in 
 6!edr god it is always so : £ 6f6s (Lat. deus). 
 
 a. The vocative singular of iSi\j^6s brother is &Sc\^e, with irregular 
 accent. 
 
 156. The dative plural in poetry often has the older ending -ouri. 
 This is very rare in Attic prose. 
 
 Contract Substantives. 
 
 157. Words which have stems in -eo-, -oo- suffer contrac- 
 tion. This takes place according to the rules in 37, 39, 
 and 41. 
 
 Example. 
 Stem. 
 
 i vovs mind 
 (voo-) 
 
 th oarovv hone 
 
 (otTTCO-) 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Voo. 
 
 (i/6o-s) voB-s 
 {v6ov) vov 
 (v6^) vi 
 {v6o-ii) voB-v 
 (v6i) voB 
 
 (oo-Te'o-i') o<rToO-v 
 (oo-Te'ou) ooToB 
 
 (00*TcV) OCTT^ 
 (oo'TCO-*') fioToB-V 
 
 (oo'Te'o-i') doToS-v 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 {v6a) v& 
 {v6oiv) voiv 
 
 (otTTe'd)) do-Tii 
 (oarioiv) ocrrotv 
 
 Plur. N. y. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 {v6oi) vol 
 {v6av) v&v 
 {y6ois) vols 
 (v6ovs) vois 
 
 (offria) oirrd 
 (huTiuv) ootSv 
 (oiTTeois) OOTOiS 
 (do-Tc'a) oo-ra 
 
 So ttXovs (from TrXdor) voyage, ireplirKovs {ntpiirkoos) circumnaviga- 
 tion, povs (poos) stream, Kavovv (from Kovkov, cf. 224) haaket. 
 
 158. The accent of the contract forms is, in two points, inconsistent 
 with the rules in 105. 
 
 a. The nominative dual, when accented on the ultima, is oxytone : 
 ocrrcB (from ooTe'm) instead of oo-rfi. 
 
 b. Compounds keep the accent on the same syllable as in the 
 contract nominative singular : jrepiTrXovs (from ncplirXoos), dat. sing. 
 TrepiTrXo) (from wepiirXom) instead of irepiirXm. 
 
 166 S. In the dative plural Hm. usually has -oio-i, Hd. always ko. 
 
 167 D. The Ionic generally has the uncoutracted fomiB. 
 
40 
 
 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 
 Attic Second Declension. 
 
 [159 
 
 159, The O-Declension includes a few stems ending in -w-. 
 This 0) appears in all the cases ; but takes i subscript where the 
 common ending has t. This form of the O-Declension, though 
 not confined to Attic writers, is known as the Attic Second 
 Declension. 
 
 & yeti-5 ieinple 
 
 S. N. v«<S-s 
 
 D. N. A. ve<4 
 
 P. N. v£ : 
 
 G. v€<4 
 
 G. D. V£cuV 
 
 G. vfJtv 
 
 D. veii 
 
 
 D. v«ius 
 
 A. v(ii-v 
 
 
 A. veiis 
 
 So Xeo)? people, /caXms cable, MeviXems (see 163 a) Menelaus. 
 
 160. Moat of these words are produced by transfer of quantity (36), vtds, 
 Ksias for va6s, \a6s, the latter forms being also in use. Others are formed 
 by contraction : \aydis hare from \aya>6s ; adjective ayi'ipw! ageless from 
 iyftpaos. 
 
 161. Some words liave -a> or -av in the accusative singular : Xayms 
 hare, accus. sing. \aya> Or "Kayav. So the proper names "Adas, Kas, Kfcos, 
 Mij/mr. "Em? dawn has only ea. 
 
 162. The accent of these words is peculiar in two respects : 
 
 a. The long m in the ultima does not exclude the accent from the 
 antepenult : Mf i/eXcms (= MfveXnor) Menelaus. 
 
 b. The genitive and dative, when accented on the ultima, are oxy- 
 tone ; yet there is some diversity of theory and usage in this. 
 
 Thied Declension {Consonant- Declension.) 
 
 163. To this declension belong words whose stems end in a 
 consonant or a close voioel (i, v). 
 
 a. In this declension the form of the nominative singular is not suf- 
 ficient to determine the other cases. It is often necessary to know 
 also either the stem of the word, or the genitive singular, from which 
 the stem may generally be found by dropping the ending -os. 
 
 169 D, In the other dialects this variety of declension is little used, except 
 in proper names. For veds, \eds, Kd\a)S, \aytis, Hm. has vnis, \ais, KdKos, 
 Kaytois ; Hd. yjjSs, \etus (or ATjrfs ? ), Rd\os, \ay6s. For ''Aflws, Kds, ydKajs, Hra. 
 has 'fiBSas, K6as, ya\6as. For eas, both Em. and Hd. have riiis (196 B). 
 
 An older form of the gen. is seen in ntred-o, Hm. (for nerea-io), nom. 
 
1671 THIRD DECLENSION. GENDER. 41 
 
 164. Gender. — The gender may be known in many cases by the 
 last letters of the stem. Thus : 
 
 Neuter are stems ending in 
 
 a. -ar-, -ap- : as trSiixa {(roifiar-) T>ody, vdnrap nectar. 
 
 b. -a<T-, -f(r- : as ye'vos (ycyecr-) race, yijpas old age. 
 
 c. -«-, -U-, with nom. in -i, -u : Sarv city. 
 Feminine are those ending in 
 
 d. -njT-, -S-, -6- : as TaxvTijS (raxvTrjT-) swiftTiess, d(nris (ao-jrtS-) 
 shield. 
 
 e. -yov-, -Sov- : as (rrayiiv (oTayov-) drop, ^eXlBav (p^eXtSov-) swallow, 
 i. -I-, -V-, with nom. in -is, -us : woKi-s city, apKv-s net. 
 Masculine are those ending in 
 
 g. -eu- : as ypa(j)cv-s writer. 
 
 h. -rr- : as 68ovs (oSovr-) tooth, rivav (revocr-) tendon. 
 
 i. -TjT-, -COT- : as raTnjr {rainiT-) carpet, epas (tpmr-) love. (Except 
 those in -ttjt--.) 
 
 j. -V- : as KTeis ((crei/-) comb, \eifiaiv meadow. (Except those in -yov-, 
 -Sov-.) 
 
 k. -p- : as Kparlip mixing-hncl. (Except those in -ap-.) 
 
 1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute are never neuter, but 
 whether they are masculine or feminine caimot be determined by 
 general rules. 
 
 165. Several words of masculine form, denoting persons or animah, are 
 of commo7i gender (126): as 6, ri fidprvs (fiaprvp-) witness, 6, tj hKiKrpviLv 
 {oKeKTpvov-) cock or lien, d, tj aiO-fip {cuOep-) aethei'. 
 
 166. Exceptions to the above rules. — Some are evident from the meaning 
 {fi Bvydrrip daugliter). Others are : 
 
 Exceptions to a: 6 ^ip starling ; — to d : & irois (iroS-) font, 6, t) ipvU (opviB-) 
 bird ; — to t : masc. ex'-J vipa; Spx'-s testicle, S<pi-s serpent, $6Tpv-s duster of 
 grapes, Bprjvu-s footstool, lx9v-s fish, iiv-s mouse, v4kv-s corpse, ffrdxv-s ear of 
 corn, ireKfKu-s axe, ttIxv-s fore-arm : also ^, ^ (rv-s or S-s sivine ; — to i : Ji iffdris 
 (ctrflTjT-) dress, to <pas ((par-) light; — to]: fern. if>pi\v (<ppev-) midriff, cucrts 
 (oKTiv-) rail, yKaixts iy\o>xi>'-) point of arrow, is (Jv-) strength, pis (plv-) nose, 
 aiSts (liiSiv-) pang ; aKmiiv (a,\Kvov-) halcyon, elic^v (eiKoy-) image, i\idiv (riiov-) 
 shore, x^^" ix^oi'-) earth, x'^i" ix""'-) snow, fihix"" pennyroyal, fvHiKam poppy ; 
 — to k : fem. ycurriip {yaa-rep-) belly, iciipfate, x^lp hand ; neut. trvp (imp-) fire. 
 
 FOEMATION OF CaSES. 
 For the case-endings see 133. 
 
 167. The nominative, accusative, and vocative singular of 
 neuter words are the simple stem. Final -t- is dropped (86) : 
 o-(iJyu.a (for o-aj/Aar) body. 
 
 166 Di k. Several poetic stems (most of them defective) in -op, -ap are 
 neuter ; (top sword, %Top heart, i\<iip prey, riKiuop = reK/iap bound 
 
42 THIRD DECLEKSION. CASE-FORMATION. [168 
 
 168. (1) The nominative singular of masculines and femi- 
 nines adds -s to the stem. 
 
 (2) But stems in -v-, -p-, -cr-, -ovt- reject the ending -s, 
 and lengthen a preceding e, o to r], <i> : thus 
 
 Xi/i)jv (\ifiev-) harbor, pi'iraip {pjjTop-) orator, Tptripr/s (rpiripfo-) trireme, 
 Xiaiv (\eovT-) lion. (Cf. 34 a.) 
 
 a. Stems in -Tv- take -s : SeX^fs dolphin. But in late Greek occur 
 Sf\(j>tv and the like. 
 
 b. -s appears also in ktcIs (Krei/-) cornl) and oSois (oSovr-) tooth. 
 
 169. The accusative singular of masculines and feminines 
 adds -a to consonant-stems : irov'sfoot, accus. 7ro'8-a. 
 
 -V to vowel-stems : 7rdA.t-s city, accus. wdXi-i/. 
 
 a. The same rule, in general, governs the use of the endings -as and -vs in 
 the accusative plural. 
 
 b. Only stems in -eu- take -a and -oi ; see 206. 
 
 170. The vocative singular of masculines and feminines 
 is regularly the mere stem. But many words make the vo- 
 cative singular like the nominative, thus : 
 
 a. Oxytone stems ending in a liquid : nom. voc. wotfir/v {iroifuv-} 
 shepherd (but halfiav divinity, barytone, voc. Salp-ov like the stem). 
 
 b. Stems ending in a mute : nom. voc. 0uXa| (<f)v\aK-) watchman. 
 Excepting stems in -iS- and barytone stems in -vt- ; these, of course, 
 drop the -8 and -t : yipov voc. of yipav (yipovr-) old man. Proper 
 names with stems in -avr- have -as in Attic, as Aids. 
 
 172. Special Rule of Accent. — Monosyllahic stems of the 
 third declension accent the case-ending in the genitive and 
 dative of all numbers : -<ov and -oiv taking the circumflex (129). 
 
 Thus novs (ttoS-) foot : genitives 7ro8-dr, iroS-oXv, iroS-S>v ; datives 
 TTod-l, noS-oiv, iro-ci. 
 
 Exceptions. — a. The genitive dual and plural of iraii hoy, girl, Sfiiis 
 slave, 6a>s jackal, Tpas Trojan, t6 (pas light, fj (j)as hlister, rj Snr torch, 
 
 168 D. b. For iSois, Hd. has iSiiv according to the rule. 
 
 170 D. b. From &va^ king Hm. has, beside the regular voc. sing. Sj/oI, a. 
 form Si/o (for avaicr) used in addressing gods. — The proper names in -is (stem 
 -OJ/T-) have in Hm. the voc. in -av : Atav ; but two have -d ; IIou\v5dfid, 
 AdoSdfxd. 
 
 171 Di a. In the gen. dat. dual Hm. has -ouy for -oiv : iroSoTtv. 
 
 b. In the dat. plur. Hm. has both -iri and -ctriri : iraKrl (for iroiS-tri) and 
 waiS-€(r<ri. Rarely also -effi : a%y-iai. He has also sometimes -o-tri after vowels : 
 vfKv-ircn. But in forms like ?7rE(r-(ri (62 D), the first a belongs to the stem ; 
 80 in ieirmr-tri, and iroffal = iroS-iri (54 D), tpurtri = IpiS-irt. 
 
175] 
 
 LABIAL AND PALATAL STEMS. 
 
 43 
 
 ro o5s ear, 6 a-fjs moth : iraihav, Sfiaatv, 6a>av, Tpaxov, (jxaToav, <j)io8av, 
 Sdd<ov, aTtov, (t4o)v. 
 
 ' b. Some words in which a stem of two syllables is contracted to 
 one : cap spring, gen. capos or ijpor, dat. eapi or ^pi. 
 
 173. The paradigms of the third declension will be given 
 in the following order : 
 
 1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute (-tt-, -/3-, -<f)-, -k-, -y-, -x-)- 
 
 3. a lingual mute (-r-, -S-, -6-). 
 
 3. a liquid (-X-, -v-, -p-). 
 
 4. -a-- (-€0-- and -aa--). 
 
 5. vau (-/-). 
 
 6. a simple close vowel (-i-, -u-). 
 
 7. a diphthong (-eu-, -av-, -ov-). 
 
 174. I. Stems ending in a Lahial or Palatal Mute. 
 
 
 watchman 
 
 vein 
 
 trumpet 
 
 vBpii 
 (tp^x-) 
 
 hair 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 (ien. 
 Dat. 
 Accus 
 Voc. 
 
 (|>uXaK-DS 
 
 ij>uXaK-i 
 ij><<XaK-a 
 (jiiiXaS 
 
 +X4+ 
 
 <f>Xcp-o's 
 
 ^.Xep-C 
 
 +X^p-a 
 
 +XI+ 
 
 o-dXiriY? 
 
 o-dXiriYY-os 
 
 crdXiriYY-i 
 
 (rdXiriYY-tt 
 
 o-dXiriY^ 
 
 ep« 
 
 Tpix-<5s 
 
 Tpix-C 
 
 TpCx-o 
 
 epcg 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 c|>iSXaK-E 
 <t>vXdK-ai.v 
 
 <f>X^P-E 
 
 ^iXcP-otf 
 
 o-dXiriYY-e TpCx-* 
 iraXirCYY""''*' Tpix,-oiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 (jivXaK-is 
 <|>uXdK-uv 
 ^i\a.%i. 
 ij>vXaK-as 
 
 (t>X^P-E5 
 
 <|>Xcp-uv 
 
 <|>XetC 
 
 <j>X^p-as 
 
 o-dXiriYY-ss 
 o-aXirCYY-wv 
 
 O-dXlTiYlL 
 
 <rdXiriY7-as 
 
 TpCx-'s 
 Tpix-<Sv 
 
 epi£i 
 
 Tp£x-as 
 
 So 6 itXmi/' (kXojtt-) ^Aie/", 6 Aidio^ (AlBiott-) Aethiopian, 6 'Apa^ 
 (Apa^-) Arabian, fj KKip-a^ (^KXlpax-) ladder, fj p,ao-Tl^ (p.aa'Tly-) whip, 
 6 ovv^ (ovvx-) daw, ^ <j)a\ay^ ((paKayy-) phalanx. 
 
 a. For ^ and ■^ in the nominative singular and dative plural see 54. 
 For the vocative singular see 170 b. For the change of aspiration 
 in 6pl^, Tptxos, see 74 a. 
 
 175. The stem oAwtck- makes nom. sing. ^ iKdirji^ fox irregularly. On 
 the contrary, the stems Kr\pvK-, ^oivIk- make nom. sing. 6 Ktjpv^ herald, i (tiaicij 
 rialm, with short v and i (100 b). 
 
44 LINGUAL HTEMS. MASCULINE AND FEMININE. [176 
 
 II. Stems ending in a lAngual 3fute (-r-, -S-, -6-). 
 176. A. Masculines and Feminines. 
 
 
 6 8i,s 
 
 (9„T-) 
 
 laborer 
 
 hope 
 
 V €pts 
 (ep.5-) 
 strife 
 
 S T] ipvTs 
 
 (opvW-) 
 
 bird 
 
 6 yepav 
 (yipovT-) 
 old man 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Aocus. 
 Voe. 
 
 9r]T-a 
 
 l\ir£8-os 
 «\Tr£8-i 
 
 fpiS 
 
 «pi8-os 
 i;pi8-i 
 Spiv 
 Spi 
 
 Vis 
 
 fipvT9-os 
 
 fipvlB-i 
 
 SpvXv 
 
 fipvTs 
 
 ■y^puv 
 
 •y€pOVT-OS 
 7^p0VT-l 
 
 ■y^povT-a 
 7^pov 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 G. D. 
 
 9fiT-£ 
 8T]T-0tV 
 
 IXirC8-« 
 IXirfS-oiv 
 
 £piS-E 
 
 lpC8-oiv 
 
 <ipvX8-E 
 opviS-oiv 
 
 Y^povT-e 
 76pdvT-oiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 Accus. 
 
 efJT-tS 
 9nT-d)V 
 
 9<iT-as 
 
 4\ir£8-i)v 
 IX7r£8-as 
 
 fpiS-es 
 cpCS-uv 
 Spicri 
 SpiS-as 
 
 Spvxe-£s 
 
 opviO-(i>V 
 
 fipvTcri 
 «pvX9-tts 
 
 7^pOVT-6S 
 
 y(p6vr-mv 
 
 -y^povo-L 
 
 ■y^povT-as 
 
 So fj vi^ (vvKT-) night, 6 yiXas (yeXtor-) lav-gJiter, fj Xa/jmas (XafiiraS-) 
 torch, fj x"/"r (x°P"'-) fniior, 6 yiyds (yiyavT-) giant, 6 Xcav (keovT-) lion. 
 For another declension of Spvls bird, see 216, 14. 
 
 177. For the dropping of r, S, d before n- in the nom. sing, and 
 dat. plur. see 54. For the dat. plur. yepova-i see 57. 
 
 178. The nom. irois foot (iroS-) is irregular. Ad/mp (So/uapr-) wife drops 
 both T and -s. 
 
 179. In the accusative singular, barytone stems in -t-, -8-, 
 -6-, after a close vowel, commonly omit the mute and take the 
 case-ending -v : as ipi-v, opvl-v. 
 
 a. This applies to barytone stems in -it-, -tS-, -id-, -v8-, -v6-. Thus 
 Xapt-s (j(apiT-) favor, accus. xi^P'"} rarely ;(apir-a. But oxytones take -a, 
 
 176 D. A few stems in -oit- have forms without t. Xp^s (xpar-) skin is 
 declined in Ionic, XP'^'? XP""*', XP"'; XP^"- '^™- 'i^^ ^'^^i hut rarely, xpwdj, 
 Xpura. Even the Attic has dat. sing, xpv ^^ the phrase ^v XP9^ c^se. From 
 ISpds [iSpar-) sweat, yihtos {yehar-) laughter, ipas (e(itBT-) love (also epos, 2d de- 
 clension, poetic), the forms with t are unknown to Hm. He has only dat. sing. 
 /5p'jJ, yeKy, epv, and accus. iSpw, ye\(o (or y4\ajv, 2d decl.), fpov. 
 
 179 D. In Hm. words of this class often form thi! accus. sing in -o: ^piSa 
 more frequent than epiv, yXavKdamSa from y\avKu-ris SriglU-eijed. 
 
 a. For KKeis Hm. uses the Ionic kKtiis aocus. sing. KhriiSa: the Doric has 
 vAdis (Lat. clavis), rarely K\a|. 
 
183] 
 
 LINGUAL STEMS. NEUTER. 
 
 45 
 
 fXTTi's accus. eXjri8-a. Only the oxytone kKcIs (kXeiS-) Icey has in the accus. 
 sing. KKeiv (rarely kXe iSo), and in the accus. plur. (cXeir or Kkeibas. 
 
 b. In thes^fords the t, S, or fl, is an accessory sound, which did not 
 originally belong to the stem : hence its omission. 
 
 180. For . 
 an -i5- stem. 
 
 181. B. Neuters. 
 
 he vocative singular see 170 b. jrais boy, airl has voc. Trai, ae 
 
 
 Th a-ufitt body 
 {<ranaT-) 
 
 rh r/nap liver 
 (riwar-) 
 
 rh Kepas horn 
 (/cepdT-, Kepaff-) 
 
 Sing. Norn. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Voc. 
 
 o-(&|i,aT-os 
 o-ufia 
 
 'qirap 
 
 fjirOT-os 
 
 ijiroT-i 
 
 ■^irap 
 ■fjirar-e 
 
 TJirOT-OlV 
 
 Kc'pOS 
 
 K^paT-os {Kepaos) K^pus 
 K^poT-i (/cepoi) K^pai 
 
 K^pas 
 
 K^pas 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 o-ii|jLaT-E 
 o-up,dT-oiv 
 
 K^par-E (Kepae) Kipa 
 KEpdr-oiv {Kepaoiy) KEpcjiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 <rii|ji.aT-a 
 o-<ii|uiT-(i>v 
 o-(6(j.a(ri 
 o-ii|i,ar-a 
 
 ijirar-a 
 T|irdT-<DV 
 {)iro<ri 
 ■fjiroT-a 
 
 K^pdT-a {xepaa} Kipa 
 
 KEp4r-uv (Ktpaav) KEpwv 
 
 K^pdo-i 
 
 KE'par-a {xepaa) Kipa 
 
 So (TTo/ia (oTo/Liar-) mouth, ovo/ia (ovofiar-) name, BiXcap (SfXear-) bait, 
 fiiXi (fi€\iT-) honey, yd\a (yaXaicr-) milk (see 86). 
 
 182. The words like rinap, in -ap, gen. -aror, are ri\eL(f>ap fat, SiXfap 
 hait, (rreap tallow, (fipeap (Att. gen. ippiaTos), and the poetic eliap fooa, 
 fip,ap day, ireipap limit. It is tliought that their stems ended originally 
 in -apr-, and that p has been dropped in some cases and t in others. 
 
 a. "YSoj/j {vbar-) water and a-Kap (trKar-) filth have irregularly m for 
 a in nom. accus. voc. sing. 
 
 183. A few words have double stems in -or- (or -ar-) and -air-, and 
 form the nom., accus., and voc. sing, from the latter (like yipas, 190). 
 So nipas gen. Kepar-os ; and repay prodigy, ndpas end, gen. re'por-os 
 iripar-os with short a. Ke'/)ar makes other (contracted) forms, Kipas, 
 etc., from the stem in -ao-- (see jjaradigm) ; but in rtpas and ivipas 
 these do not occur. The contract noun ^iis (for ^aos) light, gen. 
 (fxoT-us, belongs also here. 
 
 183 D. In Kipas, ripas, the forms with t are not used in the Ionic. Hm. 
 has Kepas, Kepat, Kipa, Kepiiwv, K€pa<ri, and Kepdeirtri; repas, ripaa, rtpdw, Tcpdeafft. 
 Hd. changes o before a vowel to e, and does not contract : Kcpei, Tepta. — For 
 iripas, TtipaTos, lira, has ireipap, irelparos. — For </)i;j Hm. has only <pdos or <p6as ,' 
 dat. fxifi, plural i^aea. <l>dos is used also by Attic (Tragic) poets. 
 
46 
 
 184. 
 
 LIQUID STEMS. 
 m. Stems ending in a Liquid. 
 
 [184 
 
 
 {iroifiev-) 
 sJiepheyd 
 
 d SalfjLojy 
 {Saifxov-) 
 divinity 
 
 b aiwv 
 
 {aiwv-) 
 
 age. 
 
 wild beam, 
 
 (hrop-) 
 orator 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Voc. 
 
 1T0ip,lfjV 
 
 iroifiev-os 
 
 iroi)i.lv-i 
 
 iroiiie'v-a 
 
 SaCjiuv 
 
 SaC)iov-os 
 
 8at|iov-i 
 
 Saifiov 
 
 alc&v 
 aluv-os 
 . alwv-i 
 aluv-a 
 aiuv 
 
 8i|p-o's 
 
 erp-C 
 
 9iip-a 
 
 e^p 
 
 pi^TCijp 
 
 pijirop-os 
 
 p^JTop-i 
 
 pi]Top-a 
 
 pTJTOp 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 iroiiL^v-OLV 
 
 SaC)j.ov-E 
 8ai,|jidv-oiv 
 
 aluv-E 
 al(Gv-oiv 
 
 efjp-e 
 
 fll]p-OlV 
 
 p^TOp-6 
 p1]Tdp-OI,V 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 iroi|i^-cs 
 ■iroi(i6V-ci)V 
 iroiplaa 
 iroi|jilv-as 
 
 SaC|iov-Es 
 8ai)j.dv-ci)v 
 SaC)io(ri. 
 8a()iov-as 
 
 aluv-cs 
 oXiiv-av 
 aluo-i 
 aluv-as 
 
 erjp-ES 
 6i)p-mv 
 8i]p-<ri 
 eijp-os 
 
 pTJTOp-tS 
 
 pTrjTop-wv 
 
 p^TOp-OT, 
 
 pTJrop-as 
 
 So 6 liTjv (jirjv-) month, 6 'Kifx^v (Xi/iev-) harbor, 6 fj-yc/ioiv (rjyffiov-) 
 leader, 6 ayaiv (ayav-) contest, 6 alBqp (m0ep-) aetlier, 6 KpdTtjp (Kparr/p-) 
 mixing-bowl, 6 ipap (<j>aip-) thief. 
 
 185. In the voc. sing., crmTrip samor, 'AiroWav, and Uoa-eiSav short- 
 en the long vowel of the stem, and throw the accent back upon the 
 first syllable: crmrep, "AiroXXcy, UocreiSov. — The accent is also thrown 
 back in compound proper names in -mv : ' h.yap,4p,va>v, 'ApicrToyfirav, 
 voc. 'Aydfiffivov, ' ApuTToyeiTov. Except those in -<j>poiv : voc. hvKo^pov. 
 
 186. 'ATniXXtBy and IloerfiSaii/ have shorter forms of the accus. sing.. 
 'AttoXXo) and Iloo-eiSS, used chiefly in exijressions of swearing after 
 vq Tov and pa Tov. 
 
 187. a. The only stem in -X- is a.\-, nom. & fixj salt, fi a\s (poetic) tea. 
 b. The neuter word irup (■irvp-)Jire has irregularly v in the nom. sing. 
 
 Stucopated Stems in -ep-. 
 
 188. Hot !ip father, pt'iTrjp mother, dvyarrjp daughter, and yacrrj)p belly, 
 drop 6 of the stem in the genitive and dative singular, and accent the 
 case-ending fcf. 172). In the other cases they retain e and accent it. 
 Only in the vocative singular all throw the accent back to the first 
 syllable. And-in the dative plural -ip- is changed to -pa- (64). 
 
 185 D. The Epic So-^p (Botp-) husband's brother has voc. sing. 5Sep. 
 
 186 D. These shorter forms are not used by Hm. or Hd. ; but from KuKedi. 
 mixed draught Hm. makes accus. sing, kuksw or KVKsiia. 
 
 188 D. The poets often have the full forms in the gen. and dat. sing. : 
 
190] 
 
 LIQUID STEMS. 
 
 47 
 
 II. The proper name Arifi'fiTrip (vocative A^/irjrep) syncopates all the oblique 
 cases, but accents them on the first syllable : 4^fiT)Tpos, ^■litvriTpa. — 'haTi)p 
 (o(rTE()-) star l^uip syncopated forms, but makes dat. plur. aaTpdai. 
 
 b. 'Avjjp ^iWy ™''" follo'^s the analogy of naTtm, but syncopates all 
 the cases ii^liBh -ep- comes before a vowel, and inserts 8 between v 
 andp (60).^^ 
 
 189. 
 
 d iraT^p 
 (warep-) 
 father 
 
 V li-tirrip 
 (wep-) 
 mother 
 
 ^ SvyaTTtp 
 {Ouyarep-) 
 daughter 
 
 6 hri\p 
 
 (mep-) 
 
 man 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Yoo. 
 
 irOTTJp 
 
 irarp-ds 
 TraTp-£ 
 TraT€p-tt 
 irixTep 
 
 H<iTT)p 
 |lTlTp-lis 
 >T|Tp-£ 
 
 |jiT|T^p-a 
 
 (ItJTCp 
 
 OuYaTifp 
 
 6u-yaTp-os 
 
 Bu-yarp-C 
 
 9u-yaT^p-o 
 
 flu-yaTcp 
 
 dv<)p 
 dv8p-os 
 dvSp-C 
 &vSp-a 
 
 avcp 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 iroT^p-e 
 irttTe'p-oiv 
 
 l>.r\T4p-e 
 
 \..1\Tlp-0lV 
 
 6vYaT^p-e 
 Sv7aT^p-oi,i> 
 
 av8p-e 
 dvSp-oiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 iroWp-es 
 iraTip-av 
 iroTpa-o-i 
 irar^p-as 
 
 |J,T|T^p-ES 
 
 Itiyrip-av 
 (iTiTpd-tri 
 (iTiT^p-as 
 
 9uYaT4p-63 
 SuyaTlp-uv 
 flu7XTptt-<ri. 
 Suyar^p-as 
 
 «v8p-6s 
 dvSp-uv 
 dvSpd-o-i 
 £vSp-a5 
 
 IV. Stems ending in -to-- and -acr-. 
 
 190. The final -<r- of the stem appears only in the nominative 
 singular, and elsewhere where there is no case-ending. Before all 
 case-endings it fails away, and the vowels thus brought together are 
 then contracted. — The neuter stems in -to-- have -or instead of -es in 
 the nominative singular (38). 
 
 TToTepos, Trarcpi. In Bvydrnp they aometimes syncopate other cases : Biyarpa, 
 66yaTpeSf Buyarpoiv ; this happens also in iraTpun/ for iraTeptoy, In the dat. 
 plur. the Epic -e<rai may be used ; BOyaTipeiTiri. 
 
 b. From aviip the poets use apipos, auipis, etc., as well as i,vSp6s, &vSpes, 
 etc. ; in the dat. plur. Hm. has both avSpMi and &pSpf<r<ri. 
 
 190 B. Sterna in -ect-. — The uncontracted forms prevail in Hm. ; yet he 
 often contracts -ei to -ci : ycvii ; and sometimes -eos to -evs : 6dp<revs from 
 0dp<ros courage. — Kheos fame makes accus. plur. K\ia for KXiea. — In the dat. 
 plur. Hm. has three forms : 0e\f-effa'i, $4\ea'-(ri, and p4\e-a't, from p4\os 
 missile. 
 
 ffTr4os or ffireios cave has gen. (TTrefous, dat. (r-7rr}'i (for triree-i'), dat, plur, 
 ffirfie&ffi and irreg. <TTe<T(n. — Seas fear has irreg, gen, Setovs. 
 
 Hd, has only the uncontracted forms. 
 
4-8 
 
 STEMS m -E2- AND -A2-. 
 
 [191 
 
 191. 
 
 rh yevos race 
 (yeveir-) 
 
 d SiBKpaTTjs Socrates 
 (SwKpaTeo"-) 
 
 
 S.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 7^vos 
 
 (ycvf-os) yivovs 
 (yeve-X) yiva 
 yivos 
 ylvos 
 
 ZlDKpdTT]S 
 
 (SoMcpare-os) ZuKparovs 
 (2aiKficiT€-i) SdiKpdrei 
 (2ci)ttpoT€-o) Saikpan] 
 SciKpares 
 
 m 
 
 (7€'po.i) 7^pai 
 7^pas 
 7^pos 
 
 Dual. 
 
 (yeVe-e) yivr\ 
 {yeye-oty) yevolv 
 
 
 
 P.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 (yevc-iBi/) yevwv 
 
 (7€V€-o) 7^VT) 
 
 
 iyipa-a) yipd. 
 (yepd-wv) yepSv 
 ylpan 
 (ydpora) yipa. 
 
 So TO ethos form, eras year, fieKos song. — 6 Aiy/ioo-^fv^r Demosthenes, — 
 ro yrjpas old age, Kpias flesh. 
 
 192. The nominative plural of neuters in -of contracts -ea into -a 
 after an e : XP^^ from xp^"' (xP^^<^-) debt. The genitive plural is 
 sometimes uncontracted, even in prose. — In the dual, -ce gives -rj, con- 
 trary to 37 e. 
 
 193. Names like 'SmKpaTrjs retract the accent in the vocative, con- 
 trary to 138. They have often an irregular accusative in -rjv, 2a>KpdTrjv, 
 as if of the first declension. 
 
 194. Proper names in -xXfj/y, compounded with kXcos (KKeea--) fame, 
 are peculiar in their contraction. 
 
 N. HfpiicKeris UfpiKXfjs D. (Il€piKXe€-i) IlfpixXft 
 
 G. (Ilept/cXce-off) IlepLKKdovs A. {TlepLKXee-a) UepLKked 
 
 Y. (n.fpiK\€fs) TJepUXfis. 
 
 Stems in -air-. — -In Hm. mostly uncontracted, but contraction sometimes 
 occurs in the dat. sing., Seirai ; rarely in other cases, Kpeimv. In the nora. and 
 accus. plur. he has always -a short : yipa, SeVo cups. In the dat. plur. he has 
 three forms : Seirii-eo'o'i, S/Trotr-fft, Kp4a<rt. 
 
 o55oi ground, floor, Kwas fleece, KT^pas possession, in all other forms take 
 e for a : oSSeoj oSSei oBSei, K(4ea Kieai, Kripea KTepiav funeral-gifls : so also 
 poetic PpiTas, Ppereos, image. Cf. yepea Hd. for yepaa. The only contract 
 forms in Hd. are Kped, Kpeuv. — Dor. Kprjs ^ Kpias. 
 
 194 D. Hm. declines 'llpaK\ii)s, 'HpoK\^os, 'Hpa.KK'qX, 'HpanA^o, 'Hp(£/c\6ii. — 
 Hd. '\ipaK\4ris, 'HptvcAeos, 'HpaKKei, 'HpaK\4a, 'iipdKKees, one e being rejected 
 before endings that begin with a vowel. 
 
199] 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN -F-. 
 
 49 
 
 195. The dat. sing, of neuters in -as is sometimes wrongly written with -^. 
 Forms of tho nnm plur. in short -o occur rarely in Attio poets ; /cpeo. 
 
 196. T. 
 
 G". (atSo-oy 
 
 ;h^mm. f 
 
 ne stem in -oo--, alhoa- shame {rf) ; inflected N. albas, 
 D. (atSo-i) alboi, A. (aiSo-a) aiSm. No dual or plural. 
 
 197. 
 
 V. Stems eliding in -F-. 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 fipas hero 
 ivpuF-) 
 
 J) TreiSii persuasion 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Voc. 
 
 ijpcw 
 <ipw-os 
 ^ipM-i, <ipiu 
 {{pu-a, {jpu 
 '(jpus 
 
 irciSiS 
 (ire»flo-os) iraBoCs 
 
 (7reiflo-a) irttBii 
 irciSot 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 'fjpcd-e 
 rjpii-oiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 4jpu-E5, ■fjpas 
 •^pii-MV 
 ■{jpoi-o-i 
 ■(jpu-as, ijpws 
 
 
 So 6 Tpmr Trojan (see 173 a), d nrjrpas mother's hrother, — ^ ^p^a ecAo, 
 
 198. These words are few in number. The dative and accus. sing, of the 
 masculines are usually contracted, 1\p<f, TJpai. Some of these words occasion- 
 ally have forms according to the Attic second declension : gen. sing, iipo), accus. 
 
 199. The feminines are all oxytone, and chiefly women's names. The 
 nom. sing, is without case-ending, and the contract accus. sing, is oxytone 
 like the nom. These stems seem to have formerly ended in -oFi- : hence the 
 voc. sing, in -oT, and an older form of the nom. in -iji : 2ajri/>si. 
 
 a. In the dual and plural, which occur very rarely, they follow the second 
 declension : nora. Aexo'i accus. yopyois ; from Ksx<^i yopyii. 
 
 196 S. Besides cuSds, the Ionic has 
 {=Att. ecus declined according to 159). 
 tract form, even in Hm. and Hd. 
 
 198 D. Hm. has iipai and ijpiii, Mtvaa and Mivui. 
 
 199 D. Even the Ionic has only the contracted forms, 
 accus. sing, in -ai!i', 'lovi' for 'li^. 
 
 another -o<r- stem, ii ii<is dawn 
 Both words always have the con- 
 
 Hd. makes the 
 
50 
 
 STEMS IN -I- AND -T-. 
 
 [200 
 
 200. A few feminine nouns in -iv occasionally have forms as if from 
 nouns in -li ; cIkiIiii {hkov-) image, gen. eticovs, acous. eixd ; iriSiiv (oijBoi/-) nigM- 
 ingale, too. a.y]Soi. 
 
 201. 
 
 VI. Stems in -i- and -v-. 
 
 
 fi irdAij citi/ 
 (iro\(-) 
 
 6 TTTJxvs fore-arm 
 {rnixu-) 
 
 t!i So-tu town 
 
 (acTTU-) . 
 
 a Ixeisfsh 
 ('Xfl"-) 
 
 S. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 irdXi-s 
 ird\e-MS 
 (irdAc-i) irdXei 
 irdXi-v 
 irdXi 
 
 mjXii-S 
 irTJxe-us 
 
 irf)xi'-v 
 
 fnx" 
 
 dOTl) 
 
 do-T€-(og 
 do-TU 
 
 lx8(S-s 
 
 lx9u-os 
 
 lx9i--i 
 
 IxBit-v 
 
 lx9ii 
 
 Du. 
 
 irdXe-e 
 iroXI-oiv 
 
 irT)x^-oiv 
 
 &trT€-« 
 
 tx9fi-e 
 Ixflu-oiv 
 
 P.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 {■w6\e-€s) ttoXeis 
 irdXe-mv 
 irdXe-o-i 
 irdXeis 
 
 (7rl5xc-es) ir^ixeis 
 lrir)X€-wv 
 ir^t-o-i 
 ir^X'iS 
 
 (ito-Te-a) tto-TT) 
 
 d(rT€-WV 
 
 fioT-e-o-i 
 (S(rT€-a) fto-rn 
 
 lx9i-es 
 IxBi-iov 
 Ixfli-o-i 
 IxBOs 
 
 So ij bvvajii-s power, rj crTaa-i-s faction, 6 wekcKv-s wxe, (lilie 7r^;(ur), 
 
 /iv-r rnoxae (like tx^i'S-i t)ut see 205), o ^orpv-s cluster of grapes (like 
 IxSys, but with short u, 205). 
 
 202, The final -i- or -u ot the stem always appears in the nom., acous., 
 and voc. sing. In the other eases most i-stems and some u-stems insert an e 
 before the -i- or -v-, and the latter drops out (44) : iro\e(i)-ES, a(rTe{v)-a. Con- 
 traction then takes place in the dat. sing, and nom. plur. The accus. plur. 
 iriKei!, irl/xf's are irregularly made to conform to the nom. plur. The nom. 
 and accus. dual are seldom contracted (-€€ to -r), cf. 191): TrdXij, Sitttj. 
 
 201 D. Stems in -i-.— (a) The New Ionic and the Doric and Aeolio retain 
 
 1 in all the forms, but contract -i-i in the dat. sing, to -i, and form the acous. 
 plur. in -IS (for -i-vs. Si) or -las. Thus sing. Tr6\ts, tt6\ios, ■ir6\I, ir6\iv, Tr6\t, 
 plur. Tr6\tes, iroKioiy, iriKKn, iriKts or TrdAias. 
 
 (b) Hm. declines sing. 7r((Xis, ir6Xios, ■!r6\ei (and 7rTd\€i), ir6\tv, ttiJAi, plur. 
 •tr6\iis, TToJ^tcov, irSKefft or iroKUffci, iv6\tas or -irSkls (written in some editions 
 TrdAeis). Perhaps ir6\ei Tri\€(n should be written irdAi 7rd\i(ri. In other 
 datives he has -i : xSn, /u^ti, from k6vi-5 dust, /iijri-s wisdom. 
 
 (c) From ir6\is itself Hm. haB also a peculiar form with t; : irdA?)or, TrdAi)!', 
 vS\irjes, TriXTjas. 
 
 'Stems in -v-. — The Ionic always has -os in the gen. sing. Hm. sometimes 
 contracts -et to -fi, -ui' to -m in the dat. sing: ir^x^'i ir\r)8ur (from wKrieds 
 multitude). Hd. has no contraction. Both have IxSias as well as ixBvs in 
 the accus. plur. For the datives vixvatri, irWvaffi see 171 D b. 
 
2p6] 
 
 DIPHTH0N&-8TEM8. 
 
 51 
 
 • 203, After -f- the gen. sing, has -as instead of -or, which, however, 
 does not affect the accent (103 aj : woKeas, nrixeais. The gen. plur. 
 follows the accent of the gen. sing. : ir6\ea>v, nifx^v. 
 
 a. For the o»giii of -ws by transfer of quantity {■ir6\eas perhaps from Tr6\t)os, 
 201 D c), cf. 36. But such forms as 7r<(\eos, irlixfos, Atrreos occur, especially 
 in poetry. 
 
 b. i Ki-s, gen. Ki-6s weevil, preserves i in all cases. 
 
 204, Most substantive stems in -u- keep this vowel throughout. The nom. 
 dual and plural may be contracted: 1x60 (for ixBve), ixSvs (for IxOies). The 
 accus. plur. has -vs (for -v-vs, 34) : in late writers -u-as. 
 
 a. "EyxeKvs eel is declined like ixBos in the sing., but like irijxus in the 
 plur. : gen. sing. iyxf\v-os, nom. plur. iyxeKets. 
 
 205. Oxytone substantives and monosyllables with -u-stems have 
 long u in the nom., accus., and voc. sing.: IxOiis, lx6vv, Ix^i; and 
 monosyllables take the circumflex in these cases : fivs, fivv, jiv. Bary- 
 tones have short -v- : fiorpvs, fiorpw, fiin-pv. 
 
 206. 
 
 VII. Stems ending in a Diphthong. 
 
 
 
 6 PaiTiKei-s 
 king 
 
 S fi PoS-s 
 ox, cow 
 
 fl ypav-s 
 old woman 
 
 ■% ytxS-s 
 ship 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 Voc. 
 
 Pao-iXev-s 
 Pa<riXI-us 
 
 (iSacriAe-i) Pao-iXet 
 Pao-iX^-a 
 Pao-iXev 
 
 Pov-s 
 
 Po-o's 
 
 Po-t 
 
 Poi)-v 
 
 PoO 
 
 7paS-5 
 
 7pa-ds 
 
 7po-t 
 
 7paS-v 
 
 7pai) 
 
 vav-s 
 
 VE-lis 
 VTI-t 
 
 VttO-v 
 vav 
 
 Dual N.A.V. 
 G. D. 
 
 Pao-iX^E 
 Pao-iX^-oiv 
 
 pd-e 
 Po-oEv 
 
 7pa.e 
 7pa-otv 
 
 Wj-e 
 ve-otv 
 
 Plur. N. T. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 (/9o<ri\e-«) Poo-iXrts 
 Pao-iX^-div 
 PamXEv-o-i 
 Pao-iX^as 
 
 Po'-cs 
 Po-uv 
 Pov-o-C 
 PoO-s 
 
 7pa-€S 
 7pa-uv 
 7pau-ir£ 
 7poO-s 
 
 Vf|-6S 
 
 vav-<rC 
 vaO-s 
 
 So 6 yovev-s pa/rent, 6 lepev-s priest, 'OSutrcreu-y, 'AxiWev-s. 
 
 206 Di Stems in -ev-. — Hd. has only the uneontraoted forms. Hm. has ij 
 instead of e, wherever v falls away : $a<ri\e6s, $aa-i\ev, $a(ri\eva't, but 0aiTt\7Jos, 
 PtttriXTJi, etc., dat. plur. iptariifa-tri. Yet in proper names he often has f. 
 IItjA^os and TlriKeos, Uri\rii and TlTjKei, etc. ; rarely with contraction : gen. 
 'OSucrcBs, dat. 'AxiAA«, accus. TuSij. In the ace. sg. and plur., a is short. 
 
 BoiJj Dor. ;8a)s, accus. sing, fiovv Dor. $iiy (once in Hm.) : Hm. has in dat. 
 plur. p6i<r<n and $ova't, accus. plur. P6as and Povs. 
 
 Tpavs : Hm. has only yp^Ss (14 D d) and ypi\is, dat. yprft, voc. ypiiv and 
 
52 DIPHTHONO-STEMS. [207 
 
 207. The final u of the diphthong disappears before all vowels, according 
 to 44. — The stem vav- (originally vo.v-) becomes j/tj- before a xhort vowel- 
 sound, ve- before a long one. 
 
 208. In regard to stems in -tu-, observe that 
 
 a. The contract nom. plur. has -^r in the older Attic and in Plato, 
 as ^acCKrjs, instead of ^ao-iXelr. 
 
 b. The gen. sing, has -tmy, arising from -rjos (36) ; see the Homeric 
 form, 206 D. In the same way 
 
 c. The accus. sing, and plur. have -eo and -eaf, arising from -Tja, -rjas. 
 
 d. When -eu- follows a vowel, contraction may occur in the gen. and 
 accus. sing. : Utipmei-s Piraeeus, gen. Tleipaiws, accus. Ileipaid. 
 
 e. The accus. plur. in -cir belongs to late Greek. 
 
 209. XoDf (x""-) three-guart measure is declined like fiovs, but has accus. 
 sing, x^^' accus. plur. x'^SS' 
 
 210. The only diphthong-stem ending in -i- is oi- (formerly ofi-, see 72), 
 sing. oX-s sheep, oUis, ol4, 6t-v ; plur. oT-ej, o\-Siv, ol-irl, ol-j. 
 
 Ireegtjlae Declension. 
 
 211. In some instances, a word has forms belonging to two different 
 stems. This is a common cause of irregular declension. 
 
 212. Such words are called TieterocUtes {irepoKKira differently de- 
 clined) when the nom. sing, can be formed alike from either stem. 
 Thus N. S. o-KOT-of darhneas (stem o-koto-, 2d declension, or o-Korfo--. 
 3d declension), G. S. crKoroti or ukotovs. 
 
 213. But usually the nom. sing, can be formed from only one of 
 the two stems. Then forms belonging to the other stem are called 
 metaplastic (from pfraTrXaa-p-os change of formation). Thus t6 trvpfire, 
 plur. TO. irvpd (2d decl.) watch-fires, D. nvpois; 6 uveipo-s dream (2d 
 decl.), but also Q. S. oveipar-oi, N. P. oveipar-a (3d decl.) ; f) aKa>-s 
 
 NoEs is declined by Hm., nora. sin". vt\\is (14 D d), gen. (vrjds) ve6s, dat. vrii, 
 accus. (I'ijo) yea, nom. plur. (vries) vees, gen. (yTjtDi/) vtuv, dat. y-rivirl (yi^eaai, 
 vha<ri), accus. (cijaj) vias. The forms not in ( ) belong also to Hd. 
 
 209 D. Hippocrates and late writers have forms from stem xof- '■ X"^"'' 
 Xo^^^, etc. 
 
 210 D. Hm. (commonly) and Hd. have ot- for oi- : Sis, vios, etc., dat. plur. 
 Hm. bUacri (once oteai) and ueaffi. 
 
 212 D. From SapTTTjScii' Hm. has 1afnr7iZ6vos, etc., also Sapjr^Soi'Tos, etc. — 
 From Wlvas, Att. gen. Mfcm, etc. (159), Hm. Mfi/wos, etc. (197). 
 
 213 D. Hm. a\K-l D. S. of d\K^ slrength, — ia/juv-i D. S. of iap-ivTi battle, — 
 fiAiTTl D. S., p.iaTi-11 A. S., of tuLcTTll whip, — ix" (^^ ■* for ixw-n, see 197) A. S. 
 of tx^P lymph, — lax-a A. S. of i'mk^ rout, — dyKoAfB-co-ffi D. P. of ir/KiXii 
 elbow, — SLvSpaTr6S-ea<ri D. P. of &v^piiTro5o-v slave, — detrfiar-a plur. of Sefffii-s 
 bond, — irpoiriiTraT-a plur. of Trp6<Tanro-y face, — to irKfvpi Ion. and poet. plur. of 
 f) ir\cvpi side. 
 
21bJ IRREOULAR DECLENSION. 53 
 
 threshing-floor declined like eas (161), but sometimes G. SKmv-os, etc. : 
 like aKa>s are d raiis peacock, and (in poetry) 6 rv^as whirlwind. 
 
 214. In some words the sing, and plur. are of difierent genders 
 (heterogeneous), thiough alike in stem. Thus 6 o-Iro-r com, plur. to. a-'iTa; 
 6 oToS^dr station, stall, plur. often ra a-Tad/id ; d dea-fios band, plur. 
 often ra 8e(7/id; to aTiiSiov stade, plur. commonly oJ trradioi. 
 
 215. a. Many words are defective In number, often from the nature of their 
 meaning. Thus aiflijp aether, only in the sing. ; ot irriirlat annual winds, 
 Th Aiovuffia festival of Dionysus, only in the plural. 
 
 b. Other words are defective in case. Thus uvap dream, Swap waking, 
 6<l>e\os use, all neuter and used only in the nom. and acoua. 
 
 216. The most important irregularities of declension, which have 
 not been noticed already, will be found in the following alphabetic table : 
 
 1. "Apjjs (Apea--) the god Ares, G. "Apeas (poet. 'Apeos), D. "Apet, 
 A. "Aprj, V. reg. 'Apes. 
 
 2. Stem apv- larnb (N. S. apqv only in an inscription) ; hence (tov, 
 Trjs) apvos, apvl, apva, apyes, apvatri. The N. S. is supplied by ap.v6s, 
 2d deal., regular. 
 
 3. TO yom knee (Lat. genu), N. A. V. S. All other cases are formed 
 from stem yovar- : ■ydvai-or, yovari, etc. 
 
 4. rj yvvl] woman. All other forms come from a stem ywaiK- : the 
 genitives and datives accent the case-ending: G. S. yvvaiKos, D. yvvaiKi, 
 A. yvvalKa, V. yvvai ; dual yui/aiice, yvvaiKolv ; plur. ■yuvaiKey, yvvaiKav, 
 yvvai^L, yvvoLKas. 
 
 5. TO 86pv spear, N. A. V. S. All other cases from stem Sopar- (cf. 
 no. 3) : Soparos, dopari, etc. Poetic G. 8op6s, D. 8opi and 86pei. 
 
 From UdrpoKXa-s declined regularly, Ilm. has also VlaTpoKhrios, UaTpoicKria, 
 XlaTp6KKeis (stem naTpoK\eecr-, 194 D). 
 
 From rivloxo-s ehanoteer, declined regularly, Hm. has also Tjvtoxna, tii^oxvics 
 (stem Ttviox^i; 206 D) ; cf. Aifl^oiroj and Aiflion-qas, A. P. of AlBto^. 
 
 214 D, Hm. Spv/id plur. of Spun6s oak-wood, — Hirirepa plur. of eWfpor even- 
 ing, —Ke\ej6a (also iceAeufloi) plur. of ri Ke\ev9os way. 
 
 lid. Kvxva plur. of \ixvos lamp. 
 
 215 D. a. Hm. plur. eyxara entrails, D. iyxain, — oinre eyes, only N. A. dual 
 (in Trag. also plur., G. S<r<ray, D. ufftrois), — plur. uxeo, ox^ay, Sx'"''?' chariot 
 (sing, i ux"^! not in Hm.). 
 
 b. Only nom. or accus., Hm. Sa (for ScS/ut) house, — xpT (for KpWii) barley, — 
 &<j>epos wealth, — Sefias body, — ^Sor delight, — ?ipa only in -tipa (ptpetv to render a 
 service, — ^rop lieart, — reK/imp (Att. TeV/top) bound, — all neuter. Only voc, iihi 
 or T)A.6e (^xa.) foolish, — /itXe (Attic poets) my good sir or madam. Only dat., 
 Hm. KTedr-eirat to possessions, — (iv) Sa'f in battle. 
 
 216 D. The dialects have the following peculiar forms ; 
 
 1. "Aprjr : Hm. "Aprios, "ApTji, "Aprja, also "Apeos, "Apei (Hd. 'Apei, 'Apfol. 
 3. yovu: Ion. and poetic yoivaros, yovvari, yovyara, youvdruv, yoiycuri. 
 Epic also yovv6s, youyi, yovya, yti^vtay, yohyesTi. 
 
 6. 5dpu : Ion. dovparos, Sovpart, Soipara, Soupdruv, Soipcuri. Epic also Bovp6s, 
 Saupi, Sovpe, Soupa, Soiipcoy, Zovpeffffi. 
 
54 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. [2ie 
 
 6. Zeus the god Zeus, G. Aioy, D. An', A. Ai'a, V. ZeC. 
 
 7. jy 5e';iif (^e^iS-) ri^Ai, declined reg. : but in the phrase Bifui 
 elvai (fas esse, indie. 5e'/iis f'o-ri /as es<), the nom. is used for the aceus. 
 
 8. TO Kapa head, D. S. Kapa. Other cases from stem k/jJi-- : G-. Kpdros, 
 D. KpdTi : also to Kpara N. A. sing. , and even Kparas accus. plur. mase. 
 Poetic word. 
 
 9. d ?7 Koiva>v6-s partaker, regular ; but also N. A. P. Koiv&v-es, -as. 
 
 10. 6 ij Kuwv (Zc^, V. S. Kvov. All other cases from stem kw- ; kvvos, 
 KVvl,,Kiva\ plur. Kuvef, Kvvav, Kutri, Kvvas. 
 
 11. d XS-r stone, contracted from \a.a-s, Ot. XS-or, D. Xa-V, A. XSa-v, 
 Xa-v: plur. Xa-er, Xs-mv, Xu-fo-o-t, or Xa-^ri. Poetic word for XWor. 
 
 13. d 7} fidpTv-s witness, D. P. paprv-a-i. All other cases from stem 
 fiapTvp- : fidpTvpos, p-dprvpi, etc. 
 
 13. Olbiirovs Oedipus makes G. OlBlirov (D. OlSlnco does not oc- 
 cur), A. OlSiTTovv, V. OlSiirovs and OiSiVdu. Late writers have G. D. A. 
 OlSinoSos, -Si, -Sa. 
 
 14. d ^ opytf (opvlB-) Krd, declined regularly (176) ; A. S. opvTv, 
 also opvlda. Less frequent forms, made from stem opvi-, are N. S. Spvi-s, 
 A. S. opvi-v, N. P. opvcis, G. opveav, A. opveis. 
 
 15. Td oJy ear, N. A. V. S. All other oases from stem cor- : toTor, 
 ttin ; plur. S>ra, &tu>v, wai. (These forms were made by contraction 
 from ovas, oSaros, etc., see below.) 
 
 16. i) nw| Pnyx, stem IIvkv- : IIvkvos, TIvkvI, JIvKva. 
 
 17. d npea-fievTris (vpfa-ficvTa-) embassador : in the plur. commonly 
 irpea-fiets, Trpia-^easv, npia-^ea-i. These forms come from the poetic sing. 
 TTpio-^v-s erribassador, also old man, in which latter sense npfa-^irqs is 
 the common prose word for all numbers. 
 
 18. tAv, defective ; only in voc. S tAv (or m Vai/) my dear sir. 
 
 19. d vio-s son, declined regularly: also from a stem viv-, G. v'Uos, 
 D. vtet ; dual uieV, vUoiv ', plur. vUls, vleoiv, vUat, vUls. Forms vivs 
 and vlvv in inscriptions. This word was also written without i, v6s, etc, 
 
 20. ij x^'i-P hand, stem x"?-) ''ut G. D. D. xV'". D- P- X^P"''- 
 
 6. Zfiir: poet, also Zrji/iis, Zrii-^, Ztji/o. Pind. Af for Ait. 
 
 7. Be/us: Hm. Be/iiffTos, etc., Pind. B^/iitos, etc. 
 
 8. Hm. has stems Kaprir-, xpar-, and uncontracted Kapriar-, KpiuT: 
 N. A. Sing. K({p7) also Kt£/> 
 
 G. Kdpr}Tos 
 D. KdprjTt 
 
 KpdrSs 
 Kpdrl 
 
 Kap4\aT0S 
 KapiiaTi 
 
 Kpaaros 
 Kpaari 
 
 N. A. Plur. Ktipct 
 
 Kpara 
 
 Kapi\ara 
 
 Kpdara also Kdprjva 
 
 G. 
 
 Kparwv 
 KpdffL 
 
 
 Kap4\vo}V 
 
 9. The Doric (Pind.) has Koivav, Koivavos, etc. 
 
 12. fidprvs: Hm. always jxipTupos, 2d decl. Cf. t^iXuKos^i. (once in Hm.\ 
 for (^lixof watchman. 
 
 13. To OiSiiroi/s belong also gen. OiSiTriJSao Hm., OiSmSSca Hd. ; and in 
 Trag. gen. Oldm6Sd,, accus. OlimiSav, voc. OiSiir<(Sa. 
 
 14. ipvis : Hm. and Hd. have only forms from stem opvW-. Dor. ipvtxos, 
 ipvlxh etc., from stem opvlx-- 
 
 15. oSs: Dor. &s, Hm. oiaros, plur. oBoto, oi^a(ri, once aierf. 
 
219] LOCAL ENDINGS. 55 
 
 31. TO xpfO)!! debt, N. A. V. S. ; only another form of to xp^°^> which 
 is declined regularly, but see 193. 
 
 Local Endings. 
 
 217. Closely analogous to case-endings are certain endings 
 which mark relations of place. These are 
 
 -6i for the place where : aXXo-di elsewhere. 
 -Oev for the place lohence: oIko-O^v from home. 
 -8e for the place whither : 0LKa-8e homeward. 
 
 218. The endings -di and -dev are affixed to the stem : 'A6iivri-6ev 
 from Athena, kvkKo-Bcv from the circle {kvkK6-s)\ but -o- is sometimes 
 used for final -d- of the stem : pi(6-6iv from the root (from pl^a root) ; 
 and consonant-stems assume an -o- : Travr-o-Bev from every side. 
 
 219. The ending -Se (enclitic, 113 d) is affixed to the accusative : 
 Meyapd-Se toward Mega/ra, 'EXeutrli/a-Se toioa/rd Eleum ; oU-a-Se (from 
 oiKo-s) is irregular. 
 
 a. With a preceding -j, -5e makes -fc by transposition (63) : 'Afl^mfE (for 
 ABrims-Se) toward Alliens, ©^iSoff (for ©jj/Boi-Se) toward Thebes, eipa^e (for 
 dvpas-Se) out of doors. 
 
 19. vios: Hm. often has vlis, vi6v, vU, — other forms of the 2d dec!, very 
 rarely. From stem vlv- he has vUos, vU'i {viei), vUa, vUes {vU7s), vUas (uUis) 
 Further, from stem vt- he has vTos (gen.), vTt, via, vU, vies, via<ri, vTas. — Hd. 
 uses only the 2d decl. forms. 
 
 20. x^^P '• poet. x^P^^i X^p'- ^™' I*. P. x^P"'' ^'•'J x^h^"'"'- 
 The following appear as irregular only in the dialects : 
 
 22. 6 aip (fern, in Hm.) air. Ion. rjcpos, vepi, rje'pa. 
 
 23. 6 'AiSTjr Hm. (Att. "AiSris the god Hades) 1st decl., G. "AfSdo or 'AtSeu, 
 D. "AiSp, A. 'AtSriv: but also G.''AiSos, D.'AtSi (stem AiS-, 3d decl.). Rare 
 N. "AiSwyeiJ-j, D. 'AiSuvn' (206 D). 
 
 24. rh SevSpov tree. Ion. and poet. SivSpiov, ScvSpcov, etc. Also irreg. 
 D. P. SeVSpco-i (as if from stem SeySpe<r-). 
 
 25. 6 /Mfis (for /iev-s, and that for /iTjy-s), only nom. sing., Ionic and poetic 
 form for d fiiiv month. 
 
 26. T] ttKtiBss (declined hlce Ix^vs) Ionic for rb ir\^flos multitude ; of the 
 latter, Hm. has only ttX^Aei, ir^^flei. 
 
 27. 7) iTTux^ fold, not in Hm., who uses only the defective D. S. irrvxt, 
 N. A. P. irrvx^s, -mixas. 
 
 28. i arlxos row, not in Hm., who uses only the defective G. S. arixis, 
 N. A. P. utIx^s, arixas. 
 
 217 D. The local endings are much more frequent in Hm. : oIkoBi at home, 
 'lA.i(ffli vpS before Troy, ovpav69ev from heaven, ayopfiSev from the assembly. 
 
 The form with -8ev is sometimes used by Hm. as a genitive case : kotA 
 itpri9ev from the head down, wholly, 4^ ahiBev out of the sea. 
 
 219 D. Homeric forms are ; OiKovSe homeward, Si/Se Srf/itocSe to his own house, 
 ilfi.eTep6vSe to our {Jiouse), Tr6\tvSe to the city, (pipovSf to fiigM : pecuhar are 
 ^iJyaSc to flight, ipaQe, xaM"Ce to earth," AiSiaSe to (the abode of) Hades (21 6 D, 23) 
 
56 
 
 ADJEC riVES. VO WEL-DECLENSION. 
 
 [220 
 
 fiWo-ire toward another 
 
 b. An ending -ae, added to the stem, also occurs ; 
 place, irdyro-cre in every direction. 
 
 220. For some words we find an ancient Locative case, denoting the 
 place where, with the ending -i for the singular, and for the plural -(n : 
 ttxoi at home, Tlvdol at Pytho, 'la-Bfiol at tlie Isthmus, 'Adi'ivrj-crt at Athene, 
 nXaraiaa-i at Plataea, dvpda-i (Lat. /oris) at the doors, abroad, &paa-i at 
 the proper season. 
 
 a. It appears from inscriptions that the oldest Attic used the form in -atri, 
 -Tjo-i as dative of the first declension : tois ranlcuri, rois iirurTdTnaiv. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Adjectives of the Vowel-Declension. 
 
 222. This is mucli the most numerous class. The mascu- 
 line and neuter follow the second declension ; the feminine 
 usually follows the first declension. Thus the nominative 
 singular ends in -os, -rj (or -5,), -ov (Lat. -us, -a, -um). 
 
 
 M. good 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 Ti. friendly F. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 dvaeos 
 
 dyaB^ 
 
 dyoBov 
 
 ijiCXios 
 
 <t>i\[d 
 
 (t>lXlOV 
 
 G. 
 
 d-yaSov 
 
 d-yoBijs 
 
 d'yaBoO 
 
 <|>i\(ou 
 
 (jiiXCas 
 
 it>i.XCau 
 
 D. 
 
 OYaSiu 
 
 dyaBfl 
 
 dyaBu 
 
 ct>l\Cu> 
 
 tfuXCd 
 
 (|>iXCu 
 
 A. 
 
 dyaBov 
 
 d-yaBi^v 
 
 d^aBdv 
 
 ^CXiov 
 
 (jiiX^dv 
 
 <)>CXiov 
 
 V. 
 
 dvo9^ 
 
 d-yo9^ 
 
 dyaBdv 
 
 ^CKii 
 
 <)iiXCd 
 
 (|>fXiov 
 
 Dual. 
 
 d-yaOii 
 
 d-yaBd 
 
 dyaBti 
 
 (j)l\{o> 
 
 (j>LXCd 
 
 (|>iXCu 
 
 
 dYaSotv 
 
 d-yaBalv 
 
 d^aBotv 
 
 c|>iX(oi,v 
 
 (j>iX{aiv 
 
 <j>iXCoiv 
 
 P.N. 
 
 d^aSoC 
 
 d^aBaC 
 
 dyaBd 
 
 (|>CXioi 
 
 (|>CXiai 
 
 <|>aia 
 
 G. 
 
 d-yaBuv 
 
 d-yaBidv 
 
 d-yaBuv 
 
 <))iX.(uv 
 
 (jiiXCuv 
 
 <tiiXCmv 
 
 D. 
 
 d7a6ots 
 
 d-yaBats 
 
 dYaBots 
 
 (|>t\(oiS 
 
 (t>i,X(ais 
 
 <j>lX(oi5 
 
 A. 
 
 d-yaBovs 
 
 d^aBas 
 
 dyaBd 
 
 (jiiXCovs 
 
 <|>iXCds 
 
 (|>aia 
 
 221 D. Epic Case-Ending -<pt. — A peculiar suffix of the Epic language is 
 <pi- (or -(piv, 87 D), added to the stem. The form with -(j>i serves as a genitive 
 or dative, both singular and plural. Thus — (a) in the 1st declension always sin- 
 gular : fiin-tpi with violence, K\i<rlT]<pi in the tent, airh vsvpritpi frorn tlie how-siriyig ; 
 irregular iir' iirxap<i<t>' (for ia^xapri-fi) on the hearth. — (b) in the 2d declension : 
 'IA.iJ-1^1 of Troy, 6e6rl)i with the gods. — (o) in the 3d declension, almost always 
 plural; aw' ixfc-tjii from the ear, jrapa. iiaO-fjii by the ships, irphs KoruKi\dov-6-ipi 
 to the feelers ; irregular anh Kpdrea-^i from the head (216 D, 8). 
 
 222 Di a. For Ionic tj instead of d in the feminine, see 1.S8 D c. Hm. has 
 Sia f em. of Sioi divine, with short a ; Sia Sedan divine (among goddesses. 
 
225] 
 
 ADJECTIVES. VO WEL-DECLSNSWN^. 
 
 57 
 
 a. The nominative singular feminine always has a long vowel, 
 either -a or -;;, according to 138. After -o-, -i; is used ; oySoor eighth 
 fem. oySdi) : but -a after -po- ; adpoo-s collected fem. ddpoa. 
 
 h. The feminine, in the nom. and gen. plur., follows the accent of 
 the masculine : thus <^CKiai, not ipiXiai. as we might expect from nom. 
 sing. (fiiXid (138) ; (jiiXiayv, not <^lKiS>v as in substantives (141). 
 
 c. The dual forms of the feminine in -i7, -aiv, are often (but not 
 always) replaced by the masculine forms : roiv (plXotv the (two) dear 
 {maidens). This applies to all adjectives and participles. 
 
 223. Contract Adjectives. — Adjectives in -eos and -oo'; 
 are subject to contraction. Thus dTrAoBs simple, apyvpovs of 
 silver, contracted from d'lrA.oos, apyvpeoi. The contract forms 
 are as follows : 
 
 s. 
 
 N. 
 
 air\oSs 
 
 dirXi] 
 
 oirXoOv 
 
 dp-yvpoCs 
 
 dpv«ptt 
 
 dpYvpovv 
 
 
 G. 
 
 air\ov 
 
 airXfis 
 
 airXoS 
 
 dp7vpou 
 
 dpYvpils 
 
 dpYvpoii 
 
 
 D. . 
 
 a'irX<^ 
 
 oiirX^ 
 
 a.ir\ia 
 
 ap-yvpu 
 
 opvvpj 
 
 ttpY«p<u 
 
 
 A. 
 
 airXovv 
 
 airXijv 
 
 dirXoBv 
 
 dp7VpoSv 
 
 apyvpav 
 
 dpYvpovv 
 
 
 V. 
 
 airXovs 
 
 airXi) 
 
 airXovv 
 
 dp'yvpoOs 
 
 dp-yvpd 
 
 dpYupovv 
 
 D 
 
 ual. 
 
 a7r\(& 
 
 airXS. 
 
 airXii 
 
 apYvpu 
 
 dp-yvpd 
 
 dpYvpii 
 
 
 
 airXoiv 
 
 dirXatv 
 
 airXotv 
 
 dp-yvpatv 
 
 dp-yvpati' 
 
 dpYvpoiv 
 
 P 
 
 N. 
 
 airXot 
 
 uTrXal 
 
 airXa 
 
 dp-yvpoE 
 
 dpYvp:ti: 
 
 apYupd 
 
 
 G. 
 
 ottXuv 
 
 airXuv 
 
 dirXuv 
 
 dp^vpuv 
 
 dpYVpoiiv 
 
 dpYvpuv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 airXots 
 
 airXats 
 
 dirXots 
 
 dp^vpots 
 
 dpYvpats 
 
 dpYupois 
 
 
 A. 
 
 airXovs 
 
 airXas 
 
 dirXa 
 
 ap-yupovs 
 
 dpYvpds 
 
 dpYvpd 
 
 So ;(/)v(rot)r, xP^o''ij XP*'"'"'''' (XP''0'^°^i "™! -«"')• 
 
 224. For the peculiarities of contraction see 41. The rules of ac- 
 cent in 158 apply here too. Adjectives of material in -eor, as dpyvpeos, 
 accent their contract syllables, -oiir, -^ (-a), -oiv. Thus apyvpois, as if 
 from dpyvpeos. 
 
 225. Adjectives or Two Endings. — In these the mascu- 
 line form is used also for the feminine : M. F. v<^X°^' ^- V'^X"^ 
 quiet. So most compound adjectives : d-rcKvos childless, KapTro- 
 (jiopo's fndt-bearinj, eiJ-rous (eti- voos) well-disposed. 
 
 a. Many adjectives of three endings are sometimes used as of two, and, con- 
 versely, some adjectives of two endings have occasionally a distinct form for 
 the feminine. These exceptional cases are most frequent in poetry. 
 
 222 D. b. But the Ionic has -aan, -cW in the gen. pi. fem. : see 141 D. 
 
58 ADJECTIVES. VOWEI^DECLENSION. [226 
 
 226. 
 
 
 M. F. quiet 
 
 N. 
 
 M. F. propitious 
 
 N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 •ijiruxos 
 
 
 fjOTIXOV 
 
 fXccos 
 
 
 I'Xcuv 
 
 G. 
 
 
 ■f|<r«xov 
 
 
 
 t\m 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 f|(rix<!> 
 
 
 
 fXeo. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 ■(j(r«xov 
 
 
 
 tXtav 
 
 
 V. 
 
 {jj«X« 
 
 
 ijo-uxov 
 
 t\las 
 
 
 fXcMV 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 T|(riJxw 
 
 
 
 tXtu, 
 
 
 P.N. 
 
 fjOT/X*"- 
 
 
 fjinjxo 
 
 fXecj, 
 
 
 fXea 
 
 G. 
 
 
 Ti<rfxo'V 
 
 
 
 fXemv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ^o-iixois 
 
 
 
 iXtois 
 
 
 A. 
 
 'f|o-ilxavs 
 
 
 fjoTixa 
 
 fXcus 
 
 
 fXta 
 
 227. A few adjectives like fXias follow the Attic second declension 
 (159) ; but the neut. plur. has -a (seldom -co). Of these, TrXe'cos fvll 
 has a separate feminine form : TrX/mr, TrXe'n, TrXe'toi/. The defective 
 adjective M. F. eras, N. aav (formed from a-aos safe) has A. S. c&v, 
 A. P. (T&s \ also a-a as N. S. fern, and neut. plui. 
 
 Adjectives op the Consonant-Declension. 
 
 228. The feminine of these, when it differs from the mas- 
 culine, follows the first declension : its nominative singular 
 always ends in short -a (second class, 139). 
 
 a. The feminine is formed from the stem of the masculine by an- 
 nexing -la, but this addition causes various phonetic changes. 
 
 b. For the feminine dual, of. 233 c. 
 
 Stems in -v-. 
 
 229. The masculine of these is declined like nfjxvs, the neuter like 
 ao-Tv (301) : but the genitive singular has -os (not -mr) and the neuter 
 plural is uncontracted. The feminine has -fta (for -ev-ia, 44). 
 
 227 D. For fxcius, Hm. has i\aos or i\aos : for irXf'af, Hni. irAeios, 
 iT\(i-n, T!\€iov, Hd. irA.e'os, -7), -ov. — Hm. has irSs (only in this form), and 
 <t6os, <r6ri, <r6ov, comp. traciTepos. — With (0)65, -■fi, -iv living, he has N. S. fur, 
 , A. fwv. 
 
 229 D. For fem. -Cia, -cfas, etc., Hd. has -e'o, -c'tjs, -e??, -tav, etc. Hm. com- 
 monly has -€10, -e(77S, etc., but Lxia. for loKeia., PaBit-ris and $aeet}s, ^aBeTav 
 and PaBeai/. In Tim., fiSv! and irovXvs (for iroAis), as well as Sri\vs, are some- 
 times fem. In the A. S., Hm. sometimes has -^o for -if : fvpia itivrov the 
 wide sea. 
 
ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN -T- AND -E2-. 
 
 59 
 
 
 sweet 
 
 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 I'lSiis 
 
 i\hAa. 
 
 ^8{l 
 
 Geu. 
 
 if|8^os 
 
 ^SeCas 
 
 ^Slos 
 
 Dat. 
 
 (iiSii) ^8et 
 
 ijSeCcf 
 
 (hSit) i\htl 
 
 Accus. 
 
 r^hiv 
 
 rjSciav 
 
 i\hi 
 
 Voo. 
 
 i\U 
 
 {jSela 
 
 i\U 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 i\iU 
 
 i^StCd 
 
 i\%U 
 
 G. D. 
 
 -^Se'oiv 
 
 irjSECaiv 
 
 TJS^OIV 
 
 Plur. Nora. 
 
 (^Se'es) ^Uvs 
 
 ^Sclai 
 
 ^S^a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 TJSgOIV 
 
 TJSElUf 
 
 i\Uav 
 
 Dat. 
 
 r|S^o-i 
 
 r|S«(ai.s 
 
 i\Un 
 
 Aoous. 
 
 TjSets 
 
 ^SeCas 
 
 TJS^a 
 
 So yKvKvs sweet, ^paSvs slow, ra^vs swift, cvpis wide. 
 
 a. All these are oxytone except 6?)\vs female and fifjiurvs half. In BrjAvs tha 
 poets sometimes use the masculine form for the feminine. 
 
 Stems in -ecr-. 
 
 230. Tliese are of two endings : M. F. eiyev-^i (ev-ycvecr-), 
 N. evyeves well-born. 
 
 
 M. F. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 EUY'VTJS 
 
 
 eiyaiis 
 
 G. 
 
 
 {evyev4-os) ti-^aiovi 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 {€vyev4-i) (iytvti 
 
 
 A. 
 
 (eOyeye'-a) eii7«VT) 
 
 
 tiyevh 
 
 V. 
 
 
 (iyevh 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 {fiyev4-e) (if€vf\ 
 {eiy eve-oiv) ev^EVotv 
 
 
 P.N. 
 
 (euyevE-Es) rf7«veis 
 
 
 (eiyev4-a) ciytvf\ 
 
 G. 
 
 
 (fvyevf-av) eiyev&v 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 liyevim 
 
 
 A. 
 
 (V7CV£tS 
 
 
 (eiyeyf-a) ri^Evi) 
 
 So (Ta(j)fis clear, a\i]dfjs true, TrXfiprjsfuU. 
 
 230 D. a.. Hm. and Hd. use uncontracted forms : both have -eas in accus. 
 plur. masc. and fern. But Hm. sometimes contracts -ci', -€€s: KorairprtveT, 
 ivapyeTs. Hd. has SkAca for d/cAe^a. 
 
60 
 
 ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN -E2- AND -N-. 
 
 [231 
 
 231, a. Cf. 190. Tlie accusative plural in -fir irregularly follows 
 the nominative. 
 
 b. -fa is contracted into -S, not -i;, when an f precedes (192) : f vSfa 
 from ivieljs needy. After i and v both vowels occur : vyia and uytij 
 from vyiifS healthy ; fi(f)va and eicpvrj from fv^v'qs comely. 
 
 232. Compound paroxytones in -779 have recessive accent every- 
 where, even in contract forms : avTdpKrjS self-sufficient, neut. aSrapKes, 
 gen. plur. avTapKiov (not airapKoiv). This does not ajjply to words in 
 -dibrjs, -mXijr, -apris, -rjpr]!, which were not felt as compounds ; yet 
 Tpiijpav, from Tpiijprfs trireme, is commonly written. 
 
 a. The neuter 4\>)9e's, when used as an exclamation, throws back its ac- 
 cent: &\7iQes indeed / 
 
 Stems in -v-. 
 
 233. Stems in -av- form the nominative masculine with -r (peKSs for 
 peXav-s, 34), and are of three endings. The feminine peXmva is for 
 p.eXav~La (65). 
 
 234, Other stems in -v- form their nominative masculine according 
 to 168 (3), and are of two endings, except Tepijv, ripeiva, ripev tender. 
 The accent is recessive : neuter eiiSmpov. 
 
 235. 
 
 
 black 
 
 
 
 fortunate 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 |Ji^\ds 
 
 |iA.aiva 
 
 H^Xav 
 
 iiBal[uav f<!Sai|xov 
 
 Gen. 
 
 H«Xavos 
 
 pXoCvus 
 
 (i^Xavos 
 
 eiSaCfjiovos 
 
 Dat. 
 
 pe'Xttvi 
 
 HeXoCvT] 
 
 |ifXavi 
 
 cvSa()iovi 
 
 Accus. 
 
 |ji4\ava 
 
 (WXttivav 
 
 |ilXov 
 
 E{i8aC|jLova fUBaiuov 
 
 Voc. 
 
 (ilXav 
 
 lilXaiva 
 
 |ji^Xav 
 
 c<18ai.|iov 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 H^Xove 
 
 )uXaCvd 
 
 li^ave 
 
 iiSaCfiovi 
 
 G. D. 
 
 |'.e\dvoiv 
 
 luXaCvaiv 
 
 lieXdvoiv 
 
 ev8ai|xdvoiv 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 |i^\avfs 
 
 [i^aivai 
 
 (Ji^Xava 
 
 EvSaCfiovfs ciSaC)iova 
 
 Gen. 
 
 luXdvuv 
 
 (icXaiviov 
 
 fieXdvuv 
 
 cvSaifidvuv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 H^ao-i 
 
 (icXaCvais 
 
 |i^Xa<ri 
 
 (iSaCfi,o<n 
 
 Accus. 
 
 jjL^Xavas 
 
 lifXaCvds 
 
 |jL^Xava 
 
 fiSaCfiovas fvSaC|i.ova 
 
 So rdXds, Ta\aiua, raXav vyretehed, '(ra>(j)pa>v, traxfipov discreet, Sppr/v, 
 appev (older apcTrjv, npa-cv) male. 
 
 b. In adjectives in -ctjs Ilm. rarely contracts -f f- of the stem : 4vK\(ias for 
 iv-K\e4as, ivppuos for ivppeios. Cf. 194 D. 
 
2391 
 
 STEMS IN -ON- AND -NT-. 
 
 61 
 
 Comparative Stems in -ov-. 
 
 236. Adjectives of the comparative degree in -mv (stem -ov-) 
 have, in some of their cases, shorter forms, which are more 
 used in Attic. 
 
 
 M. F. greater 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 |U(£CDV 
 
 
 yjAXfiV 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 (J.6l5oV-OS 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 (ieCJov-i 
 
 
 Acous. 
 
 (leCJov-a, ^iiXfa 
 
 
 |i6tj0V 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 (itljov 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 
 |jieC^ov-c 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 
 |iii£dv-oiv 
 
 
 riur. N. V. 
 
 f.dXpv-ea, |uC£ovs 
 
 
 |xcC£ov-a, f^ilut 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 (leiJov-MV 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 |Jie(£o<ri 
 
 
 Aecug. 
 
 |uC£av-a5, (leC^ovs 
 
 
 ^iSflV-a, (itiju 
 
 So ^eXriiav better, ai(rxT<ov more shameful, oKyiav more painful. 
 
 a. The forms in -ou have recessive accent : PeXrlov. 
 
 b. The shorter forms are from a different stem in -off- : /ueiftu and iielCovs 
 are contracted from /tteifo-a, ^eifo-es (never used). The accus. plur. /iei(ovs 
 follows the nominative. 
 
 Stems in -vt-. 
 
 237. In these the feminine has -era with the preceding vowel length- 
 ened (for -vT-ia, -va-a, 67 and 34). But stems in -(vt- (like xapiets) have 
 the feminine in -eo-o-o (for -tr-ia, 67) from shorter stems in -er-. From 
 the same is the dative plur. ■)(apie<n. 
 
 a. The nom. sing. xnp'e'Si "■"! are for xapieyr-s, iravT-s (56). 
 
 238. Contracted forms of adjectives in -eis occur : nrepovvTa for 
 TTTepofvTa, fif'KLTTovTra (48) for ixeXiToecra-a honey-cake. So many names 
 of places, 'Pa/xvovs (-oeii), gen. 'Pay.voivTos. 
 
 239. In irav the vowel is exceptionally long : the compounds sometimes have 
 it short: anav — The gen. and dat. sing, conform their accent to 172, but not 
 the gen. and dat. dual and plural. 
 
 236 D. Hm. and lid. use both the shorter and longer forms. 
 238 D. Hm. seldom contracts : tI/j-tis for rlnids (40 a), Ti/i^KTo for Tiw^ei/ra 
 The Doric has -Sj, -avros for -a-eis, -o-evTos ; apyuvra. 
 
62 
 
 ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN -NT-. 
 
 [240 
 
 240. 
 
 
 phasinff 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 all 
 
 
 
 S. N. 
 
 Xapttis 
 
 \apCe(rira 
 
 Xoptev 
 
 iros 
 
 iracra 
 
 irov 
 
 G. 
 
 XaptevTos 
 
 XapiecroTis 
 
 XapCevTos 
 
 TravTos 
 
 iracTT^s 
 
 •irttVT<Js 
 
 D. 
 
 \apUvri 
 
 Xapi^o-OT) 
 
 XapCevTi 
 
 iravrC 
 
 irdo-j] 
 
 iravrf 
 
 A. 
 
 Xoptevxa 
 
 XOffccrcrttv 
 
 Xopi'ev 
 
 iravTtt 
 
 irao-av 
 
 irav 
 
 V. 
 
 Xapttv 
 
 XapCcero-a 
 
 Xapfev 
 XapCevTt 
 
 irav 
 
 Trao-a 
 
 irav 
 
 Dual. 
 
 XapCevT£ 
 
 \apUa-ard 
 
 7rdvT6 
 
 iraird 
 
 TrttVTt 
 
 
 Xapi^VTOiv 
 
 Xapi^(r<raiv 
 
 XapiivTOiv 
 
 TraVTOiv 
 
 irao-aiv 
 
 iraVTOiv 
 
 P.N. 
 
 XaptevTcs 
 
 Xapfco-o-tti 
 
 X<ip£evTo 
 
 irdvTes 
 
 Trdtrai 
 
 irdvTa 
 
 6. 
 
 Xapi^vTuv 
 
 Xapi€(ro-MV 
 
 XOpl^VTUV 
 
 TravTuv 
 
 irdo-wv 
 
 iravTwv 
 
 D. 
 
 \apUa-i 
 
 Xapi^o-o-ais 
 
 XopCeo-i 
 
 irao-i 
 
 irao-ttis 
 
 iraoT. 
 
 A. 
 
 Xoptevras 
 
 Xapi^o-ords 
 
 Xaplevra, 
 
 iravras 
 
 irao-ds 
 
 iravra 
 
 So Trrtpdeis winged, (jjavqcis voiced. 
 
 Participle- Stems in -vt-. 
 
 241. Stems in-ovr-, in general, form the nominative singular 
 like yipwv (176), according to 168 (2). But stems in -ovt- in 
 presents and aorists of the ixi-form, and all stems in -avr-, 
 -ei/T-, -vvT- form it with -s, according to 56. The vocative 
 singular is like the nominative. 
 
 242. 
 
 
 loosing (K 
 
 \)ovr-) 
 
 
 giving (SiSoct-) 
 
 
 S. N. 
 
 \vmi 
 
 Xijouera 
 
 Xiiov 
 
 SiSojjs 
 
 SiSovo-a 
 
 SiSdv 
 
 G. 
 
 X:'oi'Tos 
 
 XiJoio-i]s 
 
 XiovTos 
 
 SiSdvTos 
 
 8tSov(nr|s 
 
 SiSdvTOs 
 
 D. 
 
 \tl0VTl 
 
 XuoiioT) 
 
 XdovTi 
 
 SiSdvTi 
 
 SiSovirxi 
 
 StSdvTi 
 
 A. 
 
 \iovTO. 
 
 Xvouo-av 
 
 Xfiov 
 
 SiSdvra 
 
 SiSoOo-av 
 
 8t8dv 
 
 V. 
 
 XlJCOV 
 
 Xi;ou(ra 
 
 XCov 
 
 SiSoiSs 
 
 SiSoDo-a 
 
 SiSdv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 \U0VT£ 
 
 \voitro. 
 
 X^foVTt 
 
 SlSdvTE 
 
 SiSovo-d 
 
 8i8dvT€ 
 
 
 XvdvToiv 
 
 \voiiraxv 
 
 XiidvToiv 
 
 SiSdvToiv 
 
 SiSovo-aiv 
 
 StSdvToiv 
 
 P.N. 
 
 XiioVTES 
 
 XiSoiPO-ai 
 
 \iovra. 
 
 SiSdvrcs 
 
 SiSovcrai 
 
 8iSdvTa 
 
 G. 
 
 XvdvToiv 
 
 Xvovo-uv 
 
 XvdvTwv 
 
 SiSdvTuv 
 
 SiSovo-uv 
 
 8i8dvT(i}V 
 
 D. 
 
 Xijova-i. 
 
 XiJoio-ais 
 
 Xiiou<ri, 
 
 SiSovo-i 
 
 SiSovo-ais 
 
 8i8oi)cri, 
 
 A. 
 
 Xijovras 
 
 XtJouo- "s 
 
 XuovTa 
 
 SiSdvras 
 
 8iSoifo-ds 
 
 8i8dvTa 
 
 242 D. The Aeolio has -oiaa for -ouaa and -aura for -aira in the feminine 
 participle; also -us for -ds in the masculine (34 D): rpiipotfra nourishing, 
 
243] 
 
 PARTIQIPLE-STEMS IN -NT-. 
 
 63 
 
 
 loosed (AuflevT-) 
 
 
 sJiowing (Seiktoi/t-) 
 
 
 S. N. 
 
 Xv8€(s 
 
 XuOcto-a 
 
 Xu9iv 
 
 SciKVVS 
 
 8ciKvS(ra 
 
 SeiKvvv 
 
 G. 
 
 XvSe'vTos 
 
 XuQcCo-qs 
 
 Xti9cvTos 
 
 SeiKvivTos 
 
 Sei.KV(S(rT]S 
 
 SsiKVVVTOS 
 
 D. 
 
 \v84vTi 
 
 XvB£Co-[| 
 
 \vUvT\. 
 
 SeiKvuvTi 
 
 SeiKvvo-g 
 
 SeikvOvti 
 
 A. 
 
 XuB^vra 
 
 XvecCo-av 
 
 Xi;94v 
 
 SciKviivTa 
 
 SuKvvo-av 
 
 SciKviiv 
 
 V. 
 
 X.v9eCs 
 
 Xi)9«t<ra 
 
 Xi>9^v 
 
 Seikvvs 
 
 SciKvOcra 
 
 SciKviiv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 XvS^VTE 
 
 Xv8cC(rd 
 
 \viivTt 
 
 SUKVIJVTC 
 
 &eiKvtfo-d 
 
 StiKvuvre 
 
 
 \v64vTOI.V 
 
 Xv9e{(nuv 
 
 XvB^VTOLV 
 
 SeiKVvvTOtv 
 
 ScLKVlftraLi' 
 
 SeiKVvVTOiii 
 
 P.N. 
 
 XvSivres 
 
 XvOeio-ai, 
 
 Xu9lvTa 
 
 Seikvvvtcs 
 
 SciKVucraL 
 
 SElKVVVTa 
 
 G. 
 
 XvB^VTUV 
 
 XvSeio-uv 
 
 Xu8e'vto>v 
 
 SeikvAvtuv 
 
 SciKvvcruv 
 
 SciKviivTuy 
 
 D. 
 
 Xud£lO*l 
 
 XuBeCa-ai; 
 
 XuSeto-i 
 
 SCLKVOO-I 
 
 8»KVl)(rai.s 
 
 8«iKvOiri 
 
 A. 
 
 Xue^vxas 
 
 Xv9«((rds 
 
 Xve^vra 
 
 Sev.KvvvTas 
 
 SeiKvtio-ds 
 
 SciKvvvra 
 
 Decline also Xitrds, Xitraa-a, Xv<rav; 
 
 XviravTos, \vad(rrjs, Xva-avros 
 like nas (240) ; but voc. sing. Xtfo-ar, and short a in XSo-ai/. 
 
 a. Monosyllabic participles do not follow 172 in accent : SoiJj, gen. S6vtos 
 (not 5otiT6s). 
 
 243. Participles in -awv, -emv, -owv are contracted : 
 
 ri/jbdiav, rlfiaovcra, rlfiiov honoring, contl". Tlfji,u>v, rlfjiSMTa, rlfjiSiv ] 
 <^tA.e(ov, <l>iX€ovcra, (^lA.eoi' loving, contr. <J>l\,Iov, tj^iXovcra, (jiiXovv ; 
 SrjXoiov, SjyXooutra, Srjkoov shoioing, COIltr. hr)\S)v, 8T]X.ov(ra, Sr/Xovv. 
 The uncontracted forms are like those of kvuiv (242) ; the 
 contract forms are as follows : 
 
 S. N. 
 
 Tip-UV 
 
 Tipio-a 
 
 tT(i»v 
 
 <|>i,Xuv 
 
 <|>iXav<ra 
 
 <|)iXo5v 
 
 G. 
 
 tXhwvtos 
 
 Ti(tcS(rqs 
 
 TT;iuvTOS 
 
 <tnXoSvTos 
 
 cjiiXovo-qs 
 
 <t>iXavvTos 
 
 D. 
 
 TltJLMVTl 
 
 TX|i<i(rx| 
 
 TTjiavTi 
 
 <j>lXo€VTl 
 
 <j>iXoiio-T) 
 
 <|>I,X0VVTI 
 
 A. 
 
 Tijuavra 
 
 Ti(i.M(rov 
 
 Ti|X<av 
 
 <|>iXovvTa 
 
 (t>iXovo-av 
 
 <j>i,Xovv 
 
 T. 
 
 TlJlSV 
 
 TipLuo-a 
 
 tX|Xuv 
 
 <}iiXmv 
 
 ijiiXovcra 
 
 <|>iXoSv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 TT;ifivTe 
 
 TifJiuo-d 
 
 TlJlUVTe 
 
 (|)lXoSVTE 
 
 (|>iXov(rd 
 
 (jllXovVTi 
 
 
 TlJilSvTOlV 
 
 TT|jL(a(raiv 
 
 TX)l.[iVTOlV 
 
 <f>iXotivTaiv 
 
 tpiXovo-aiv 
 
 ijuXoivToiv 
 
 P.N. 
 
 Ti(i«5vTes 
 
 TT|iia(rai 
 
 rXjiuvra 
 
 <f>lXoi)VTCS 
 
 (jiiXoua-ai 
 
 <f>iXoi)vTa 
 
 G. 
 
 TTjJ.^t/T(i>V 
 
 Ti^ucrmf 
 
 tXjjlwvtwv 
 
 iJiiXovvriav 
 
 iJ>iXov(r(i>v 
 
 (f>iXauvT(i)V 
 
 D. 
 
 tT;j.mo-i 
 
 TijiiSo-ais 
 
 TXp.t0O-L 
 
 (|>iXoOa-i 
 
 (j>iXoua'ai5 
 
 (J>LXo\)a-L 
 
 A. 
 
 Tl|JUOVTaS 
 
 Tlfidxras 
 
 TX|i(i>VTa 
 
 ij>iXovvTas 
 
 (jiiXovirds 
 
 (|>i,XovvTa 
 
 At/XSk (contracted from SrjXoav) is declined exactly like (ftiXav. 
 
 9pf\liais, 6pi-^ai(ra havinr/ nourished. The first of these forms is used by 
 Theocritus, and all of them by Pindar. 
 
64 
 
 PARTICIPLE-STEMS IN -0T-. 
 
 [244 
 
 244. Perfect Active Participles. — These have steins in 
 •0T-. The feminine ends in -uta. 
 
 S. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 having loosed {KeKvKor-) 
 XeXvkus X^XvKvia XeXvKos 
 
 XeXvKoTos XeXuKuids XcXukotos 
 
 XcXvKOTl XeXuKvC^ XeXvKOTI 
 
 XeXvKOTa XEXvKvtav XcXvkos 
 XeXvKus XeXvKvCa XeXukos 
 
 Dual. 
 
 XeXiiKOTc XeXuxuCti XcXvkote 
 
 XeXuKOTOlV X«XvKu£ttl.V XeXuKOTOlV 
 
 standing (etrriuT-) 
 loTMS eoTcoira 
 
 eoTuTos e<rT(ii(n)s €0-t<i>tos 
 
 €OT«TL eCTTtioTI €OTcStI 
 
 eoTwTa 
 Ictus 
 
 toTcSs 
 
 COTTWO-aV COTOS 
 
 ia-Tiiroiv (tnciiraiv eoTioToiv 
 
 P. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 XeXukotcs X(XvKvtai XEXtiKora 
 
 XeXukotuv XeXvkviuv XeXvkotcov 
 
 XeXvkoctl XcXuKufais XcXvkoo-i 
 
 XcXvKOTas XtXDKvtiS XcXtlKOTa 
 
 EO-TUTfS eOTWO-ai. COTWTa 
 
 CCTTl&TWV eoTtiHTUV loTt&TUV 
 
 loTwo-i IcTTwcrais l<rTw<ri 
 
 toTtoTas €<rTt&(ras ItrrcoTa 
 
 a. e'oTwf is contracted from iaraas, and is irregular in tlie forma- 
 tion of the feminine. Tlie neuter form ia-rus is also irregular : ea-rats 
 seems to have been also used. 
 
 245. Othek Adjectives. — Of two endings are some compounds of 
 substantives, with stems ending in various ways ; as 
 
 dirdrcop, awarop : gen. airarop-m fatlierleSB. 
 eueXTTir, diikin : gen. tieXiriS-of of good hope. 
 eiix^cipi.s, ev-^apt. . gen. ci^dpir-os agreeable, 
 
 246. Adjectirei of One Ending. — In these the feminine is like the 
 masculine ; but, owing either to their meaning or their foim, they have 
 no neuter : thus apna^, 3.piray-os rapacious, (hvyds <^iiya8-oy fugitive, 
 ayvas, ayva>T-os unJmown, aTrais, airaiS-os childless, fidxap, fiaKap-os 
 hiessed, irivrjs, irivrir-os poor, yvpvrjS, yufivrJT-os light-armed, "ibpis, nom. 
 plur. tSpt-er Icnowing. 
 
 247. Irregular Adjectives. — Some adjectives are irregular, 
 their forms being derived from different stems. So /xeyas 
 [fjieya- and fieyaXo-) great, TToXus {ttoXv- and ttoAAo-) much, 
 many. 
 
 246 D, Ilm. has many adjectives which appear only in the feminine: 
 virvia (in voc. also ■n6Tva) revered, \axcio (or perhaps ixdxf'" small): 
 etriroT€peio of noble fathei; ofipi/ioirdTpr} of mighty father, avridveipa match 
 for men, PtnTideetpa nourishing men, xOSidvetpa making men glorious, irovKv- 
 $iT€ipa much nourinhing, fox^aipa arrow-showering, 'fjnro^a.(r£ta thick with lior&e- 
 hair, KoWiyivMKa A. S. rich in fair women. To fern. 9i\fia rich there is a 
 neut. plur. BdKea. 
 
 247 D. Hm. and Hd. have vo\k6s, -4), -6v reg. like aya96s. But Hm. has 
 
248] 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 65 
 
 P. N. 
 
 |i^V<is 
 
 HtVdXn 
 
 H^Va 
 
 iroXus 
 
 iroXX^i 
 
 iroXti 
 
 G. 
 
 jU-yoXov 
 
 lu-ydXifs 
 
 liEydXav 
 
 TfoXXoO 
 
 iroXX^s 
 
 iroXXoO 
 
 D. 
 
 HrydXcy 
 
 (MvoXti 
 
 |jiEYdXu 
 
 iroXXu 
 
 iroXXif] 
 
 iroXXi}! 
 
 A. 
 
 f,lya,v 
 
 |xc7a^^v 
 
 |i.^7a 
 
 TToXlJV 
 
 iroXX<)v 
 
 TToXti 
 
 V. 
 
 v-iyo- 
 
 HeydXii 
 
 fA-^a. 
 
 iroXil 
 
 iroXX'/i 
 
 TToXli 
 
 Dual. 
 
 lu^oXw 
 (iryoXoiv 
 
 (leydXa 
 (icydXaiv 
 
 lirydXoi 
 peyaXotv 
 
 
 
 
 P.N. 
 
 (lEYdXoi 
 
 (lEYdXai 
 
 (iiEYdXa 
 
 iroXXoC 
 
 iroXXaC 
 
 iroXXd 
 
 G. 
 
 (UYdXuv 
 
 (leyoXuv 
 
 liCY^i^uv 
 
 iroXXSv 
 
 iroXXuv 
 
 iroXXuv 
 
 D. 
 
 )U7d\ois 
 
 |ji«YdXais 
 
 fieydXoLS 
 
 iroXXois 
 
 iroXXats 
 
 iroXXois 
 
 A. 
 
 |j,ryd\oii$ 
 
 (leYctXas 
 
 ^irydXa 
 
 iroXXoiJs 
 
 iroXXds 
 
 iroXXd 
 
 a. npaos mild forms the whole feminine from stem irpav-: irpSfla, 
 wpdelas, etc. The masculine and neuter singular are formed from 
 stem irpao- : irpdov, irpia, irpaov. In the masculine and neuter plural, 
 both formations are used : npaoi and irpdels, irpaa and irpdia. 
 
 b. Some compounds of iroiJj (iroS-) foot form the nom. sing, neuter, and 
 sometimes the accus. sing. masc. in -ovv, after the analogy of arrXovs (223) ; 
 rplirovs three-footed, Tplvovv (but in the sense tripod, accus. always TpinoSa). 
 
 Comparison of Adjectivbs. 
 
 A. Bt -Tepos AND -Taros. 
 
 248. The usual ending of the co7)iparative degree is -rcpos, 
 -repd, -repov (stem -repo-) ; of the superlative, -raTos, -rarr], -twtov 
 (stem -Taro-). These endings are applied to the masculine 
 stem of the positive. Thus : 
 
 also the common forms ttoKvs, iroKi, iroKiv, as well as itovkAs, trovK^, irovK^v, 
 and from the same stem, iro\u-, he makes likewise G. S. ttoXeos, N. P. iroKees, 
 G, iroKeay, D. Tro\4ifffft or iroKitri, A. iro\eos. 
 
 Pindar has irpats, irpSb, the Ionic irpTjiJs irpijS. Compare irpjivrepos in Hd. 
 
 Hm. has some feminine adjectives wliich are not formed from the stem of 
 the mascuUne: BoCpis, -iS as impetuous, M. floEpo-s,- irieipa fat, rich, M. niar; 
 irpea^a and vpefffieipa honored, M. Tpetrfiu-s ; irp&ippaffixa favorable, M. 'jrp6ippfav, 
 — The following are made from the stem of the masculine, but by an un- 
 usual mode of formation : p^oAKo^cipEia heavy mth brasn, M. x^^^oPaphs ', 
 ripiyeveia earli/-bom (M. riptyiviis later) ; fiSvima (Hes.) sweet-speaking, M. 
 TlSueirlis ; liixaipa (Find.) blessed, M. pdxap ; and in the plur. only, Bapftai 
 crowded, rapipcial frequent, M. 8o,uecj, rapipees. 
 
 In Hm. ipinpo-5 ti-usty, makes plur. nom., and accus. 4pirip-es, iplrip-as. 
 
 248 D. The force of the ending is nearly lost in the Homeric forms : 
 8ri\irepos feminine, aypdrepos wild (livinff in t/ie country), opiartpos living in 
 
66 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [249 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative, 
 
 KOVCJiOS (kOU0O-) ligllt KOV<p6-TepO?^ -a, -OV KOVC^tO-TaTOS, -7], -ov 
 
 yXvKvs (yXuicu-) sweet yXvKv-Tepos yXvKv-Taros 
 
 fields (/ieXaj/-) blacJc jieXav-Tfpos fi.e\dv-Taros 
 
 pAKap (jiaKap-) blessed p^aKap-repos fiaKap-raros 
 
 (ra(j>Tis {(ra(j)f(T-) clear (ra<j)i(r-Tepos iTa(j>€cr-TaTos 
 
 XapifiS (xaptevT-) pleasing f^apUcy-Tepos ^apiia-Taros 
 
 TTevrjs (ireyTjT-) poor nevea-Tepos Trepiar-Taros 
 
 XapUtrrepos and irevea'Tepos arise from xop'^T-repos (23'7) and irenjT-Tepoj 
 by change of t to ir (52). In the latter, tj is shortened. 
 
 249, Adjectives in -os with short penult lengthen -o- to -<u- : 
 this prevents the excessive multiplication of short syllables : 
 a-otfxii-Tepos wiser, dfifo-TaTos worthiest, from o-oi^o-s, afio-s. 
 
 a. But if the penult is long by nature or position, -o- remains : 
 novrjpo-Tfpos more wicked, Xeirro-Taros finest. So always when a mute 
 and liquid follow the vowel of the penult : niKpo-Taros bitterest. 
 
 250, The adjective yepaios aged always, TraXato'y ancient, and <rxoKaios 
 leisurely, sometimes, drop -o- after -m- : yepai-rcpos, iraKai-TaTos. 
 
 a. fj.t<Tos middle, ttros equal, edStos serene, ^fTvxos quiet, trpfltios early, tj^tos 
 late, make -anepos, -airaTos, as if from forms in -aios : /lecrof-raros, irptoiai-repov. 
 riffux'iTfpos occurs once. From irX^aioj adv. near (adj. irXijo'io-s poetic) come 
 ■7r\Ticriai-Tepos, -totos ; and from irpoSpyou (for irpb Ipyov advantageous) comes 
 Trpovpyiai-Tipos. 
 
 b. (pi\os dear makes <l>l\T€pos (poetic) and tplXTaros. The comparative in 
 prose is usually fiaWov (pl\os (256). — ^i\a(Tef>ay, (fiAafroTos occur only in 
 Xenophon. 
 
 251. Some adjectives take the irregular endings -earepos, -earaTos. 
 So _ 
 
 a. Stems in -ov- : tTo><j>pa)v ( (r<o<jypov- ) discreet, a-a)(l>povia'-Tepos, 
 eiSalpav (evSai/iov-) happy, evSaipovecr-TaTos. — Special exceptions are 
 ntcov fiat, iriorepos, -raros; and Treircov ripe, ireTTaLTcpos, -raros. 
 
 b. &KpdTos unmixed, ip^wfiems strong, iafiems glad, and occasionally some 
 others in -os : ojcpaTeaTepos, ip^aficveffTepoi. 
 
 c. Some contract adjectives in (-ooj) -ovs: ^hvoicmpos (for evvoetTTepos) 
 from cSvovs (eCyooj) well-disposed. 
 
 252. a. The adj. \i\os talkative, trrmxis beggarly, o^oipdyos dainty, /iovoipiiyos 
 eating alone, and some adjectives of one ending, as KheirTJis thievish, have 
 -KTTepOS, -tffTUTOS '. KaXiffTcpos, TTTcoxiirraTos, KKt-KTlo'Tepos. 
 
 the mowniaiiu, BetiTepos belonging to Hie gods, Sf^trepis Lat. dexter, which differ 
 little from BtiKvs, iypios, uptios, fleios, Se^i6s, 
 
 249 D. The poets sometimes use -a- after a long syllable : oi^vpdrfpos Hm. 
 more wretched. — From tBis straight, Hm. makes iBivrtna; from (paeivSs 
 shining, tpaeivdrepos, but (paivraTos. 
 
2j-t] COMPARISON BY -IDN AND -I2T02. 67 
 
 b. Other adjectives of one gender in -tjs (G. -ov) follow the rule for stems 
 in -0- : i^pitTT6ripos from v^purriis insolent, 
 
 c. Compounds of x<«P" favor form the comparative and superlative as if 
 they ended in x'^P"'''-* ■ iirixaptriiTtpos from iirlxapu agreeable. 
 
 B. By -1(01' AND -wrros. 
 
 253. A much less frequent ending of the comparative is 
 -Imv, -lov (stem -10V-) ; of the superlative, -toros, -ixxTq, -urrov 
 (stem -uTTo-). 
 
 These endings are applied, not to the stem of the positive, 
 but to the root of the word. Hence a final vowel, or syllable 
 -po-, in the stem of the positive disappears : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative, 
 
 fjS-i-s pleasant (rjS-oiim am pleased) fi8-ta)v ijS-iotoe 
 
 rax-i-s swift (rdx-os swiftness) dda-a-mv (tov rax-liov) rax-iaTos 
 
 jiiy-a-s great (ji4y-c6os greatness) fiei^aiv (for licy-iwv) fiiy-urros 
 
 ix6-p6-s hostile (eyd-os Jiatred) ixO-iav exfi-^<"'°^ 
 
 aliTX-po-' shameful (^ala-x-os shame) aitrx-i''>v aicrx-toror 
 
 a. In /xei^Qtv, for fiey-tuj/, the i passes into the first syllable, as in afielyetv 
 for anev-lav. For -o-ff- in Sairauyv {BaTrav), see 67. 
 
 254. The following require special notice : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 1. ayaBos good dpeivav SpitrTos (dp-€Tr) virtue) 
 
 fieXriaiv ^{Xriaros 
 
 xpeiircraiv (KpelTTav) lepdna-Tos (Kpar-os Strength) 
 
 Xtoav XaiTTOs 
 
 dpeivaiv, apioTos, refer more to excellence or worth ; Kpciaatav, Kpanmos, 
 more to power and superiority. The opposite of Kpeia-a-wv is ija-a-av. 
 
 262 D. c. Hm. has kxapiff-nfios (for dxapiT-repas), from &xapis graceless. " 
 253 D. In Epic aud Doric poetry -lav (with short i) is used. The forms in 
 -uov, -KTTos are much more frequent in poetry than in prose : thus (the starred 
 forms are un-Homeric), *$a0lui', ^iduTTOs (^oBis deep), — $pa.<r<rmv or *0pttSiay, 
 0dp5iirTos or *PpdSi(rTos {0paSis slow), — *kpdx"'"^'>' (3p«X™ short), — yKvKiiav 
 (yKvKis sweet), — 4\eyx"rTos (iKeyxffs plur. infamous), — *KiiSiuiv, kuSjittos 
 (KuSpds glorious), — ^frfftoir, ^•f]Kitrros, Dor. ^fiaKtiTTos {fjLaKp6s long), — o'ikthttos 
 {oiKTp6s pitiable), — Tracrfrtov or ^Ttaxitav, Trdxurros (trax^s thick), — tpiXluv, ^(pi- 
 \«rros ((pl\os dear), — &kuttos (axis quick). — Hd. has fi^Cuv for lal^av. 
 
 264 D. 1. Hm. corap. apelwy. pos. Kparis powerful, sup. KipruTTos (64): 
 comp. Kwiav and Kairepos. — Hd. and Dor. Kpetraav for Kpelinrau. — Poet. 
 ^eXrepos, (3e'\TOTos (not used in Hm.) : (piprepos more excellent, (ptpTaros and 
 
 tpeptOTTOS. 
 
68 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. [266 
 
 3. KOKo's had KaKimv kukuttos 
 
 X^ipaiv (deterior) x^^P'^''"''"' 
 
 ^(Tcroiv, rjTTcov {inferior) iJKLaTa adv. least of all 
 
 3. fiiKpos small fiiKparepos filKpararos 
 
 i. oKlyos little, few (oXel^av inscriptions) oXiyia-ros fewest 
 eXd<T<Ta)v {eKiTTtov) eXaxiaros least 
 
 5. iroXus much, many irXeioiv or irXiaiv (44) TrXf (oros 
 
 aeut. TrXeov, also nXfiv 
 
 6. KoKos teautiful KohXicov koKKio-tos (xaXXos leauty) 
 
 7. pdbios easy pdcuv pa<rTos 
 
 8. oKyeivos painful Skyiav aKyurros (JiKy-os pain) 
 
 255, Defective Comparison. — The following adjectives are without 
 the positive : 
 
 (jrpo before) irparepos prior wparos primus 
 
 vtTTepos later, latter vcTaros latest, last 
 
 a. A superlative ending -otoj appears in iff^m-os extremus ; and in the 
 (mostly poetic) forms vtaros novisshnus, last in place (from i/eos noum), and 
 viraros Sfuprernits, summus (from wrcp super, whence come also a poetic comp. 
 vireprepos, sup. irrepTaTos). 
 
 256. For the comparative and superlative maybe used pSKXovmore, 
 paXurra most, with the positive : p.aKKov ii^ios more worthy, pakurra 
 vapdvopos most unlawful. For participles this is the only mode of 
 comparison. 
 
 2. Hm. comp. KcuaiTepos : x^pUtov, p(;6penJTepos, p^ eiptSrepos : also the defect- 
 ive forms, D. S. x^PV't -i- S. x^PV, N. P. x^PV^s, neut. X'PI"' — ^^- '^f'""' for 
 
 4. Hm. comp. ihi^av. 
 
 6. In the comp. Hm. has also the defective forms ir\Us, irXtar. — Hd. con- 
 tracts €0 to eu: irXsiiv, vXivves, for irKiOV, TrXeoi/es. 
 
 I. Hm. pos. firitStos (also in lid.); adv. priXSlms, often ^c7a, ^e'o; comp. 
 ^TltTepos ; sup. fyr]iTaTos and ^'Cffros. 
 
 To the above add for Hm. 
 
 9. KepSiwv, KEpSia-Tos (/cepSaXeos gainful, artful, Kep^os gain). 
 
 10. filyiojv, fttyta-Tos more, most dreadful {^lyrixSs Hes. chilling, fiiyos cold), 
 
 II. K-fiSiffTos {KTjSeTos dear, kyiSos care). 
 
 12. Poet, (not in Hm.) v^iuv, fS^liia-Tos {iipri\6s high, v^pos heigJii). 
 
 2B5 D. Doric irparos for wpZros. Hm. sometimes forms a comp. or sup. 
 from a substantive: fiaa-iKevrepos, -raros (from ^turiXevs king), KovpSrepos 
 [Kovpos youth), Kivrepos more dog like (kiiqjv dog). 
 
 Other defectives in Hm. are : SirxSrepos younger, 6ir\6Taros, — atpdprepos 
 (ai^ap forthwith) ; — and several expressing place : irapoiTepos {irdpoiBiv before), 
 — 6,Tl(rTOTOs {oirta-dev behind), — iTroffainpos (aaaov nearer), — pvxolTaTos ( iv tavx'f 
 m a recess). — The ending -aros appears also in piffffaros from piffos middle. 
 
260] AD VERBS. 69 
 
 Formation and Compaeison of Adveebs. 
 
 257. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding -ws to 
 the stem. The stem takes the same form as before -mv in the 
 genitive plural. The adverb has also the accent of the geni- 
 tive plural, and is contracted when the latter is contracted. 
 
 Thus hUaios jvst (G. P. hiKaiav), adv. diKaias justly, (ro<f)6s wise 
 (a-otjiaiv) a-o(f>S)s wisely, ivas whole, all {navrmv) wdvras wholly, raxis 
 quick {raxfiov) raxtas quickly, a-a^ijs clear (o-a^Si; contr. from <Ta(f>4(ov), 
 trafpSys contr. from a-acpeas clearly. 
 
 258. A less common ending of adverbs is -a: Taxis quick, adv. ti^xb 
 quickly, in Attic prose perhaps, S,fia at the same time, /lixa very, much. The 
 comp. of fui\a is /iaWov (for jmX-iov, 66) more, tlie sup. itAKurra most. — ei 
 well is used as tlie adverb of ayaSis good. 
 
 259, For the comparative and superlative of adverbs, the 
 accusative neuter of the adjective is commonly used ; in the 
 singular for the comparative, in the plural for the superla- 
 tive : croi^uls wisely, (rocjxiyrepov, (TO<j)ioTaTa ; KoAois finely, koXKiov, 
 KoXXuTTa. 
 
 a. Forms in -as also occur : /Se/Saiorepwy more firmly, KoKktovtos more 
 finely. 
 
 260, Adverbs in a (such as &vm above, koltid below, tain within, ?{oi with- 
 out) make the comp. and sup. in -a : avaripta, KaTtoTepw. So also SLiraTepw 
 further from prep. aTr6 from, irepcuTepu furt/ier from irdpa beyond, iyyvrepu, 
 iyyvrdTu (or eyyirepov, iyyirara) from iyyis near, and a few others. 
 
 and iri/iaTos last. — Hm. has vimiTios for Bototos, and in the same sense SciJtotoi 
 {SeuTfpos second). A strengthened sup. is Hm. irpJiTUTTos first of alt. 
 
 258 D. Adverbs in -a are more frequent in Hm. : /copra very (Kparis), \iya 
 shrilly (Ktyis), ircupa clearly {cra(p'lis), &Ka quickly (aiKiis). 
 
 For eS, Hm. has ii, whenever the u would be long by position : ^6 yvolriv. 
 So too in compound words : 4v^a)V0S ; yet rarely eu- : i^irKeKTOS or eSir\eKTOs. 
 — ^Hm. has also a defective adj. 4vs or ^i)s, A. S. ivv or ijvv, also G. S. irjos. 
 
 260 D, ends far, Hm. exaa-rfpai, -rdTin, — T))A.c or rrfAovfar, Hm. TriKoTdru, 
 — &yX' or ayxov near, Hm. a<r<rov (for 07x101', 6*7), also aattoripa, it7X"''''''' 
 (ayxordTta Hd.). The adj. ayx^repos, ayx^TaTos, and iyxii^Tos are post- 
 Homeric. 
 
70 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUKS. 
 
 [261 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 261, Personal Peonouns. 
 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 SECOND PERSON. 
 
 THIRD PEKSON. 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 
 a-i thou 
 
 o-oO 
 
 <ro£ 
 
 o5 o/' /«m, Iter, it 
 ol 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 vu 
 
 VWV 
 
 o-<j>uv 
 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Accus. 
 
 ^|i£ts we 
 iwXv 
 
 ^fiets you 
 
 V|1UV 
 
 vjitv 
 iJHas 
 
 o-<|>cis they 
 
 o-<j>£o-i 
 o-^ds 
 
 261 Di Personal Pronouns in the Dialects. — Hm. has the following forms : 
 those not in ( ) are found also in Hd. 
 
 S. N. 
 G. 
 
 0. 
 
 A. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 iyd), (iyiiv) 
 ^fieOj ifiev, fiiv 
 {i/Jifio, ifieSev) 
 iliol, iwl 
 4fi€, ne 
 
 {vwip) 
 
 ail, (jini) 
 ffeo, ffiv 
 {ffeio, tredev) 
 ffoit Toif (rety) 
 ere 
 
 {a(pwty) 
 
 (eh, 'ieev) 
 ((r(paie) 
 
 P. N. Ti/ifis, {i/ifies) vftets, (K/t/ics) (r<pf!s not in Hm. 
 
 G. ruiduv, (iiiJLelav) u^eoiv, (vfietav) a^4uv, [(ripiluiv) 
 
 A. v/ieas, {&/iiis) v/ifas, (S^/ic) (rcptas, tripe 
 
 iyiv is used before vowels (87 D). The datives cro/ and rol are distin- 
 guished in the same way as iiwi and noi (263). The forms with -/i/i-, S/n/iw, 
 B^/iEj, belong to the (Lesbian) Aeolic. 
 
 a. For iiiv, the Dor. and Trag. have viv : both are enclitic,' both used in all 
 genders, and vlv is sometimes plural. — In Hd. and Trag. (r^i is sometimes 
 singular. — In Hd. aipiai (not (ripl) is reflexive: he has also a neut. plur. a(\>ia. 
 
 b. The Dor. has N. S. iydv even before a consonant, ti) (tu) for <rii, G. teS, 
 T«Bi, T€oSj, D. rul for o-of ; also ^idv, riv, Hv for iinoi, aol, oT, A. re, enclitic rii, 
 for 0-^. N. P. 4/i€'s, u/ic'i G. afieaiy, D. a/j(i/, A. a/i€, dfie, and i/(6 for (r(^E. Of 
 these Find, has only rii, to(, t^i/. 
 
266] PRONOUNS: PERSONAL, INTENSIVE, REFLEXIVE. 71 
 
 262. The stems of the singular are ejixc- (Lat. me), crt- (le), e- (se). But 
 the nominative is differently formed : ^71^, ai ; and in the tLiird person is 
 entirely wanting. The stems of the dual are vw- (Lat. no-s), iripa-. The 
 stems of the plural are fi/ie-, u/te-, <r<pe- : «- is contracted with most of the 
 endings (cf. 261 D). 
 
 263. The forms mentioned in the list of enclitics (113 a) lose their 
 accent when there is no emphasis upon the pronoun ; and in the first 
 person singular the shorter forms (fj-oC, fioL, jii) are then used. But if 
 the pronoun is einpliatic, it retains its accent, and the longer forms 
 (e'/ioO, ffioi, ifif) are used in the first person. So also, in general, after 
 prepositions. Thus SokcI /not it seems to me, ijioX ov o-ol roCro dpea-Kci 
 this pleases me, not thee ; irap' efiov from me (not irapa ixov), eVi a-ol 
 upon thee (not eVi <roi) : yet irpos fie to me frequently occurs. 
 
 264. The genitive, dative, and accusative plural of the first and second per- 
 sons, when unemphatic, sometimes throw the accent on the first syllable ; ilfu»v, 
 Sfiiuy ; the last syllable of the dative and accusative is then usually shortened : 
 ^/iti;', Sfua. The last syllable is sometimes shortened, even when the pro- 
 noun is emphatic ; we then write Ti/iiv, ifih. 
 
 Intensive Peonoun. 
 
 265. The intensive pronoun avrd-s self (Lat. ipse) is inflected 
 
 avTO^ avTT^ avTO 
 
 avTov avrfj's avrov etc., 
 
 like ayaOos (222), except that the neuter singular, in the nomi- 
 native and accusative, does not take -v. 
 
 Preceded by the article, 6 airds, 17 aiTTj, to avro (or with 
 crasis, 77 b, auTos, air^, TavTo, also ravTov), it signifies the same 
 (Lat. idem). The neut. plur. ravTa, for to. avrd, must not be 
 confounded with ravra these (272). 
 
 a. In the oblique cases, it also serves as a personal pronoun of the 
 third person : him, her, it. 
 
 Reflexive Pbonouns. 
 
 266. The reflexive pronouns are formed from the stems of 
 the personal pronouns compounded with avrds. They have 
 no nominative. In the plural both stems are declined together, 
 yet the third person plural has also the compound form. 
 
 265 D. For Ionic crasis in aurds (Hm.), airds (Hd.), see 11 D. 
 
 266 D. Hm. always has the separate forms, even in the sing. : ifii airiy, 
 oT avT^, not fiumriv, kaur^. — For ifumrov, etc., Hd. has ^^ueoiutoD, etc. ; and in 
 like manner ireavrov, Iuut-oD (14 S). 
 
72 PRONOUNS: REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, POSSESSIVE. [267 
 
 
 myself 
 
 thyself 
 
 himself, herself, itself 
 
 Sing. G. 
 
 l|iaVTOV, -7)S 
 
 (reouToO, -fjs 
 
 eavroO, -ijs 
 
 D. 
 
 ijuiOTi;, -n 
 
 o-eovTio, -fj 
 
 eOOTiu, -xj 
 
 A. 
 
 (\ui,vr6v, -tiv 
 
 o-caiiTov, -rjv 
 
 eoDTOv, -i)V, -d 
 
 
 ourselves 
 
 yourselves 
 
 themselves 
 
 Plur. G. 
 
 i\]i&v airav 
 
 i]i,av airav 
 
 eavTuv 
 
 or (r(j>uv avTuv 
 
 D. 
 
 i\f.tv airots, -ats 
 
 ffitv avTOts, -aCs 
 
 eauToIs, -ttts 
 
 or o-<j>C(riv airotSi -ats 
 
 A. 
 
 'fj|ias airovs, -ds 
 
 £|ids avTO^Si -ds 
 
 caiiToiis, -ds, -d 
 
 or o-cjids avrovs, -ds 
 
 a. o-eavTov and iavTov are often contracted : aavrov, a-avrfis ; avTov, 
 air^r, etc. 
 
 267, The indefinite pronoun oAXos other (Lat. alius) is in- 
 flected like avTos (265) : oAAos, oAA?;, oAAo. 
 
 Recipkocal Peonoun. 
 
 268. The reciprocal pronoun, meaning each other, is used 
 only in the oblique cases of the dual and plural. 
 
 Dual G. D. 
 A. 
 
 Plur. G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 M. 
 dW^Xoiv 
 dW<i\(i> 
 
 F. 
 dXX^Xaiv 
 dXXfjXtt 
 
 N. 
 dW-^Xoiv 
 dXX^Xii) 
 
 dXX^Xcov 
 dXX^Xois 
 dXX^Xovs 
 
 dXX'^Xuv 
 dXXijXais 
 dXXrjXds 
 
 dXX-^Xuv 
 dXX^Xois 
 dXXi)Xa 
 
 a. It is formed from the stem of iiWos (26'7), compounded with itself, 
 &W-Tl\o- (for oA.A-aA.A.0-). 
 
 Possessive Peonotjns. 
 
 269. The possessive pronouns are formed from the stems 
 of the personal pronouns. They are : 
 
 €^t6s e/ATj eixov my, mine, ^^erepos -d -ov our, ours. 
 
 <rds irri <t6v thy, thine. ijiirepos -a -ov your, yours. 
 
 Off Tj ov his (her, its) oton. afj^erepos -a -ov their oion. 
 
 a. & is never used in Attic prose, seldom in Attic poetry. 
 
 269 D. Hm. has also Te6s (also Doric, = tutis) thy, k6s his ; ifiis our (prop- 
 erly Dor.), UJU4JS, (Ti/wfs; also (from the dual stems vw-, a^ot-) yaiTepoy, tripaitTepoSt 
 
272] ARTICLE AND DEMQNSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 73 
 
 Akticle and Demonstkativb Pkonouns. 
 
 270. The article 6, rj, to the, has the two stems o- and to-. 
 For its inflection see 272. 
 
 271, The most important demonstrative pronouns are : 
 
 oSe ijhe ToSf this (liere) 
 
 ovTos avTrj tovto this, that 
 
 eK€ivos eKelvq eKeivo tlud (there, yonder) 
 
 oSf is formed from the article and the demonstrative ending -Se 
 (enclitic) : it is declined like the article, with -8e added to each 
 form. 
 
 oItos follows the article in respect to the h or t at the beginning. 
 It takes av in the penult, wherever the last syllable has an a-sound 
 (a, ;;) ; but ov where it has an o-sound (o, a>, ov). 
 
 cKelvos is declined like airos (365). 
 
 272. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 & 
 
 <l 
 
 TO 
 
 SSe 
 
 ijSc 
 
 ToSc 
 
 oilTOS 
 
 avTT) 
 
 toOto 
 
 G. 
 
 TOU 
 
 Ti]S 
 
 ToO 
 
 tovSe 
 
 Tf](rS« 
 
 toOSe 
 
 TOJJTOU 
 
 Tairris 
 
 TOUTOU 
 
 D. 
 
 TU, 
 
 TTl 
 
 TU. 
 
 tiuSe 
 
 TfiSc 
 
 TCuSc 
 
 ToiTIjI 
 
 TaiiTxl 
 
 TOUTIjl 
 
 A. 
 
 T<5V 
 
 Ti\V 
 
 T<5 
 
 TovSe 
 
 TrjvSe 
 
 ToSt 
 
 toBtov 
 
 Ta«Tt|V 
 
 toDto 
 
 Dual. 
 
 T<i 
 
 T<4 
 
 TlS 
 
 Ti4S« 
 
 T<iS( 
 
 TuSc 
 
 TOUTU 
 
 ToilTCD 
 
 rovToi 
 
 
 TOtV 
 
 TOtV 
 
 TOIV 
 
 ToIvSe 
 
 toEvSe 
 
 tolvSe 
 
 TOUTOIV 
 
 TOIITOIV 
 
 TOUTOIV 
 
 P.N. 
 
 Ol 
 
 at 
 
 TO. 
 
 oiSi 
 
 al'Sc 
 
 Td8« 
 
 OUTOl 
 
 aiiTai 
 
 ToBTtt 
 
 G. 
 
 TMV 
 
 TolV 
 
 tS)V 
 
 TMvSe 
 
 tuvSe 
 
 tuvSe 
 
 TOVTUV 
 
 TOijTCOV 
 
 TOIJTUV 
 
 D. 
 
 TOtS 
 
 TOIS 
 
 TOtS 
 
 Tolo-Se 
 
 Tttto-Be 
 
 ToEo-Se 
 
 TOUTOIS 
 
 Ta^iTais 
 
 ToiTOlS 
 
 A. 
 
 TOUS 
 
 Tds 
 
 TO, 
 
 TOUO-Sc 
 
 Tcio-Se 
 
 TdSc 
 
 TOUTOVS 
 
 TttllTttS 
 
 toBto 
 
 a. Separate feminine forms for the dual, rd raiv, T(tS« raivhe, raird 
 Tavrmv, are rare, and perhaps not Attic. 
 
 b. When used as demonstrative, 6, ^, ot, at are best written with an 
 accent, o, rj, ol, al. 
 
 c. The adverb of o8f is &Sf, that of olros is ovtcos or outco (88 c), 
 i7tM4, so. 
 
 belonging to us (i/ou) both. — aii6s (also written d/ias} is found in Attic poetry 
 for ifios. — Ss is sometimes used without reference to the third person, in the 
 sense of own. 
 
 271 D. For ixeTfos the poets have Ktivos. 
 
 272 D, In Hm., the article is usually a demonstrative, and has the follow- 
 ing peculiar forms : G. S. to7o, G. D. D. touv, N. P. roi, ral, Q. Fem, riav. 
 
74 
 
 PRONOUNS: DEMONSTRATIVE, RELATIVE. 
 
 [273 
 
 273.^Dem(mstratives of Quantity, Quality, and Age. — These were 
 Toaos, Toios, TijXiKof, wliioh occur often in poetry. In place of them 
 the Attic prose uses chiefly the strengthened forms : 
 
 TO(ro(rbe 
 ToiotrSe 
 TTjXiKocrSe 
 
 TOtrOVTOS 
 TOLoilTOS 
 T1}\iK0VT0S 
 
 Toa-qoe 
 T.oidSc 
 
 Totraiirrj 
 
 TOiaVTTJ 
 
 TT}\LKavn) 
 
 Toaovbe 
 TotovSe 
 TrjXiKovBe 
 
 TOtTOVTo(v) 
 T0l0iT0(l') 
 
 so much, so many 
 such (in quality) 
 so old, so great 
 
 so much, so many 
 sucli (in quality) 
 
 TrfKi.KovTo{v) so old, so great 
 
 The last three are declined like ovtos ; but the neuter singular, in 
 the nominative and accusative, has two forms, with and without -v. 
 To(rovTo and too-ovtov, etc. 
 
 274. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes rendered more 
 emphatic by appending to the different forms a long accented -I, iota 
 paragogicum, before which the short vowels (a, f, o) are elided : 
 ovTocri, avTTfi, Tovri, tovtt, 6&i, Toiahi, cKcivaivt. The particle yi is 
 sometimes put between : rovToyi. 
 
 Relative Peonoun. 
 
 275. The relative pronoun is os, ^, o who, lohich. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 8s 
 
 <i « 
 
 D. N. A. 
 
 & & & 
 
 P.N. 
 
 ot 0.1 & 
 
 G. 
 
 01) 
 
 t 9 
 
 tis ov 
 
 G. D. 
 
 olv olv olv 
 
 G. 
 
 t * 9 
 
 av <i>v lav 
 
 D. 
 
 « 
 
 ■B t 
 
 Tl f 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ots ats ols 
 
 A. 
 
 6v 
 
 ijv 6 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ovs as 6. 
 
 a. Separate feminine dual forms, a and cuv, are seldom orjiever 
 used in Attic. 
 
 b. OS is used as a demonstrative in the phrases icni & e<pri and he said, 
 ri 8' Of said he. In the plural we have kclI ol and they ; in which o? 
 may be taken as the article (272 b). 
 
 D. Toiai, rf!(Ti, or t^s. For rotirSf Hm. rarely has roirSeaffi or To7trSefft. The 
 forms rol, ral are also Doric. 
 
 Hd. has D. P. roiiri, r^tri ; also roKrlSe, rrifflSe. 
 
 273 D, Jim. has tSo-itos for rdcros (47 D). 
 
 276 D, Hm. has also S for 8j ; Sov, properly written So, for oS ; e7)s for 
 ?is : the nom. sing, and plural he sometimes uses as demonstrative. 
 
 Hd. has 8s, fi, oX, a'l: for all other forms of the relative he uses the article 
 t6, to~, Tjjs, etc., except after certain prepositions ; trap' $, ^ ot. — This use of 
 the article (r-forms) for the relative is often found in Hm., and sometimes 
 even in Tragedy. 
 
279] INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 75 
 
 276. Relatives corresponding to the demonstratives in 273 are oo-or 
 OS much as, oios of which sort, ^XUos of which age. 
 
 Intebrogativb and Indefinite Peonotjns. 
 
 277. The interrogative pronoun is rts, tl who? which? 
 The same word when enclitic is the indefinite pronoun, some, 
 any. 
 
 
 INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 INDEFINITE. 
 
 
 M. F. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Sing. Norn. 
 
 Tfe 
 
 
 t£ 
 
 TVs 
 
 
 Tl 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 tCvos, toB 
 
 
 
 Tivds, TOV 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 tCvi, t^ 
 
 
 
 TIVC, T$ 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 rCva 
 
 
 tC 
 
 Tivd 
 
 
 Tl 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 
 tCvj 
 
 
 
 TIV^ 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 
 T^VOIV 
 
 
 
 TlVOtl» 
 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 t(v€S 
 
 
 rCva 
 
 Tivls 
 
 
 Tivd 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 rlvav 
 
 
 
 TLVUV 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 tCot. 
 
 
 
 TKr£ 
 
 
 Ago. 
 
 rlvas 
 
 
 xCva 
 
 Ttvds 
 
 
 Tivd 
 
 a. The acute accent of ris, t[ interrogative never changes to the 
 grave (see 108). 
 
 b. Stto (never enclitic, Hm. ficro-a) is sometimes used for the indefinite 
 
 TU'ci. 
 
 278. Other interrogative pronouns are irorepos which of two f ttoo-os 
 how much ? nolos of wliat sort f lajKUos how old or large ? warepos and 
 (with diflferent accent) ttoo-os, ttoios are also indefinite. 
 
 279, Another indefinite pronoun is SeTva no and so, rohat's his name, used 
 in colloquial speech, always with preceding article : i (ri, rh) SiTva. This is 
 sometimes used without inflection ; sometimes it is inflected as follows, with- 
 out distinction of gender : 
 
 Sing. N. 6 Se^Da Plur. N. oi Seircs 
 
 G. TOV SeTfOS G. ray Seij/wv 
 
 D. Ty Sfii/i 
 
 A. rhv Seiya A. rohs Suvas 
 
 276 D. Hm. has often oVo-os for oVoj (47 D) ; once iffa-aTtos. 
 
 277 D. The Ion. (Hm. lid.) has G. S. reo, rev, D. riip, G. P. tcW, D. reottri. 
 
 278 D. Hd. has k- for ir- in the interrogatives and indefinites : Kifrepos, xdiros, 
 •tos ; so the adverbs koD, k(!tc, etc. Cf . Lat. gu- in quis, qitot, qualis, etc. 
 
76 INDEFINITE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 Indefinite Relative Pbonoun. 
 
 [280 
 
 280. The indefinite relative oo-rt?, •^tis, o ti lohoever, which- 
 ever, is formed by uniting the relative os with the indefinite 
 TL's, each being separately declined. 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 Sing 
 
 N«m. 
 
 JioTlS 
 
 <JTIS 
 
 8ti 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 OVTIVOS) BtOIP 
 
 ■qoTTivos 
 
 OUTIVOS, 
 
 Btoii 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ^ITIVI, 8to> 
 
 flTlVl 
 
 oiTivi, iruf 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 iivTlVO 
 
 fjVTiva 
 
 8ti 
 
 
 Dual N. A. 7. 
 
 ^Tive 
 
 wTive 
 
 (jStive 
 
 
 
 6. D. 
 
 otvTlVOlV 
 
 OIVTIVOIV 
 
 OJVTIVOIV 
 
 Plur 
 
 Norn. 
 
 otrives 
 
 atrivcs 
 
 &Tiva 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 UVTlVtOV} 8tCi>V 
 
 WVTIVIOV 
 
 lOVTlVUV, 
 
 Btuv 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ottTTLO-l, StOIS 
 
 aicTTKri 
 
 oEoTlO-t, 
 
 Stois 
 
 
 Acs. 
 
 oSoTivas 
 
 OO-TlVttS 
 
 &Tiva 
 
 
 a. The sI^oHer forms orou, ora, orav, utols are invariably used in 
 the older Attic, and 6rov, ora are at all times much more common 
 than 0VTIV09, aTivt. 
 
 b. For firica, there is another form Stto, not to be confounded with Stto 
 = Tivd {211 b). 
 
 281. Other indefinite relatives (cf. 278) are o-irorepos whichever (of 
 two), o-TToo-or however much, o-noios of whatever sort, o-nrjXtKos of what- 
 ever age or size. 
 
 CoEEELATIOlir OF PeONOUNS. 
 
 282, The following table shows the correspondence, in form and 
 meaning, of the last four classes of pronouns : 
 
 280 D. Hm. has the following peculiar forms, in most of which the rela- 
 tive stem is undeclined, as it is in d-ir6<ros, i-iroTos, etc (281). 
 
 S. (Stis) N. (8 TTi) P. N. aV<ra 
 
 Sreu (Sttco, Sttcu) bVewv 
 
 (oTixo) N. {& TTi) (Srivas) N. Hffffa 
 
 The forms not in ( ) occur also in Hd. — In the nominative and accusative, 
 Hm. has also the usual forms. 
 
 281 D. Hm. often doubles ir in the indefinite relatives ; SirvSTcpos, dirroTos ; 
 and in adverbs Sinras, STnrire, etc. (47 D). 
 
 Hd. has ixirepos, 6x60-0$, etc. ; and in adverbs Skov, &K6Bev, etc. Cf. 278 D. 
 
283] 
 
 CORRELATION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 77 
 
 
 INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 INDEFINITE. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE. 
 
 RELATIVE, INDEF. REL. 
 
 Simple 
 
 which? what? 
 
 some 
 
 oSe this (here), 
 oStos this, that 
 
 OS, iJlTTIS 
 
 who, which 
 
 Compar- 
 ative 
 
 it6Tepos 
 which of two ? 
 
 ir6Tepos 
 one of two 
 
 erepos the one or &Tr6repo5 
 the other of two | which of two 
 
 Quantity 
 
 or 
 Number 
 
 Tr6ffQS how 
 much, many ? 
 
 TToaii of 
 some quail. 
 or number 
 
 (T(f(ros) f so 
 T0(r6(rSe < much, 
 Toa-ovTos ' many 
 
 StTos, 6Tr6(ros of 
 which guan., num., 
 {as much, many) as 
 
 Quality 
 
 volos of 
 what sort ? 
 
 iroi6s of 
 some sort 
 
 (toios) such 
 
 Tot6(rSe 
 
 toioEtos 
 
 oloj, diroTos 
 of which sort 
 (such) as 
 
 Age 
 
 or 
 
 Size 
 
 wtiKIkos 
 how old? 
 how large? 
 
 wtiKIkos 
 of some 
 age, sine 
 
 {tiixIkos) { so old, 
 TriKM6aSe\ large 
 
 TTjAlKOUTOS 
 
 tiKIkos, Sin]\lKos 
 of which age, size, 
 (as old, large) as 
 
 283, CoBRELATiVE Advbrbs are also formed from the same pro- 
 noun-stems. 
 
 
 INTERROGATIVK 
 
 INDEFINITE. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE. 
 
 REL., INDEF. BEL. 
 
 
 vov 
 wliere ? 
 
 ITOtJ 
 
 somewJicre 
 
 (Ma) iveiSe, 
 ipraiSa, there 
 
 oS, tjTTOV 
 
 where 
 
 Place 
 
 whence ? 
 
 voBev from 
 some place 
 
 (cvBev) ivB&Se, 
 ivrevBey, thence 
 
 SSev, Sw69ev 
 whence 
 
 
 Trot 
 whilha- ? 
 
 irol to 
 some place 
 
 (Ma) ivedSe, 
 ivravSa, thither 
 
 ot, birot 
 whither 
 
 Time 
 
 irSre 
 when ? 
 
 irore some 
 time, ever 
 
 t6t€ 
 t/ien 
 
 when 
 
 ■trqvlKa at 
 what tim£ ? 
 
 
 (riivlKa) ( at 
 TTivwiSe ■< that 
 tjji/ikoBto I tim^ 
 
 TivIko, dmivlKa 
 at which time 
 
 Way 
 
 irfj which 
 way? how? 
 
 irjj some way, 
 somehow 
 
 rfiSe, Tairri 
 this way, thus 
 
 whic?i way, as 
 
 Manner 
 
 iras 
 how? 
 
 irds 
 somehow 
 
 (Sj) £Sf, o8tb.(j) 
 thus, so 
 
 &s, Sirojs 
 as, that 
 
78 NUMERALS. [284 
 
 The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (113 b). 
 
 a. To the pronoun (kuvos that (yonder), correspond the demonstra- 
 tive adverbs of place, e«i there, iKeWev thence, eKelcre thither. 
 
 284. The demonstratives in parentheses are not used in Attic 
 prose except in particular phrases: kol a>s men thus, ovb' as, /«;S' &s 
 not even thus; fv6a fiiv . . . evBa Si here . . . there; so evBiv ixev . . . 
 ev6ev Se. — In Attic prose, evOa and cvdev are chiefly relative, ev6a being 
 used instead of oi and of, iv6ev instead of o6ev. 
 
 285. The indefinite relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are made 
 more indefinite by adding the particles ovv, Srj, Si) jroi-e, Sij wot ovv. 
 ooTis ovv wlio {which, what) soever, Sans Si), oa-ris 8i; ttotc, ootis Si; ttot 
 ovv: these are also written as single words, oa-Turoiv, oa-Tia-Srj, ocrncr- 
 SrjiroTc, oa-Tio-SrjiroTovv. With the same force, tIs is sometimes added to 
 indefinite relatives : onolos ns and even oTroidy ns oSv of what sort soever. 
 
 286. The enclitic vip gives emphasis to relatives (definite and in- 
 definite) : oa-oi wep of which numuer precisely, Sxrir^p just as. ovv is 
 sometimes added after it : axrirepovv. 
 
 287. Observe also the negatiiie pronouns and adverbs: oSt«, p-iyns 
 no one (poet, for ovSds, p-riSeis, 390 a; in prose only oiSri, pijri not at 
 all), ovSirepos, jiifSirepos neither of two, ovSapov, iJiriSap,ov nowhere, 
 ovSapfi, iir/Saprj in no way, ovSap.S>s, prjSapais in no manner, with some 
 others of similar formation. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 288. The words which express number are of various classes; 
 the most important are given in the following table : 
 
 283 D. Poetic are T66i = irov, iroBt := iroi, S9i = oE; t((9i there; T66ev 
 thence ; — also ^//oj, rfifios (Dor, S^ior, Tap.os) = Sre, rdre. — For Att. ems a.9 lonff 
 as, TftDs so long, Hm. has also cfoij, relas, and sometimes chs, Tf7os. In the 
 same sense, he has Stbpa, Ti(ppa. Beside ^, he has the form fxh but uses 
 both only in the local meaning, which way, uhere: for iro'i, oiroi, he always uses 
 ir6(Te, dinr6(re. — For ivBavra, ivBevrev in Hd., see 74 D. 
 
 a. For 4Ke7, etc., the poets use /teifli, xcTBev, kcio-c (271 D). 
 
 284 D. The demonstrative Sr (distinguished by its accent from the rela- 
 tive OPS as, 120) is frequent in Epic poetry: it is sometimes written Ss. The 
 poets have also rds ^= oStccs. 
 
 288 B. For the first four cardinal numbers, see 290 D. 
 
 Hm. has for 12, StiSena, Svc&SeKa, and SvoKalSeKa ; 20, e'lKOffi and 4eiK0(n ; 
 SO, TpiiiKovra; 80, dySdKOPTa ; 90, lvfvi]K0VTa and ivviiKovra; 200 and .SCO, 
 Si7)ic6(rtoi, TpiriK6crioi ; 9,000 and 10,000, ivved^flKoi, Seicdxl^ot. He has also the 
 ordinals Sd,TplTaTos; 4th,T€TpaT0f ; 7th, ePS6fw.Tos; 8111,6781(0x05; 9th, etvaros; 
 12th, SuaSeKUTos ; 20th, iemoaTis ; together with the Attic form of each. 
 
288] 
 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 79 
 
 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 ORDINAL. 
 
 NUM. ADTERBS. 
 
 1 
 
 o' 
 
 els, fiia, ev one 
 
 irp&Tos Jirat 
 
 a7ra| once 
 
 3 
 
 /3' 
 
 8vo 
 
 ScvTepos 
 
 Sis 
 
 3 
 
 X. 
 
 Tpeis, Tpia 
 
 Tp'lTOS 
 
 Tpls 
 
 4 
 
 K 
 
 T€a-a-apes, ria-irapa 
 
 TcTapros 
 
 TCTpaKtS 
 
 5 
 
 f 
 
 irevTc 
 
 nefiTTTos 
 
 irevraKis 
 
 6 
 
 r' 
 
 !^ , 
 
 fKTOS 
 
 i^aKis 
 
 7 
 
 C 
 
 cTira 
 
 f^dofios 
 
 eirraKis 
 
 8 
 
 v 
 
 OKTW 
 
 oySoof 
 
 OKTUKIS 
 
 9 
 
 e 
 
 evvea 
 
 fvaros 
 
 tvaKis 
 
 10 
 
 I 
 
 Se'KO 
 
 SeKaros 
 
 SeKllKlS 
 
 11 
 
 la 
 
 evbeKa 
 
 ivdiKoros 
 
 cvSeKOKis 
 
 12 
 
 '/3' 
 
 bitbfKa 
 
 SaSeKOTOs 
 
 daSeKciias 
 
 13 
 
 % 
 
 rpfUTKaihcKa 
 
 rpia-KoibiKaTos 
 
 
 14 
 
 is; 
 
 Tea-a-apea-KalSeKa 
 
 T€<r<rapaKaiB4KaTos 
 
 
 15 
 
 tf' 
 
 TtevTfKaibfKa 
 
 irevreKaiSiKaTos 
 
 
 16 
 
 «r' 
 
 eKKaideKa 
 
 iKKaiSeKaros 
 
 
 17 
 
 < 
 
 iirraKalSfKa 
 
 eTiraKaiSeKaTos 
 
 
 18 
 
 "1 
 
 OKTCHKaiSfKa 
 
 OKTOlKai&iKaTOS 
 
 
 19 
 
 iff 
 
 ivveaKaiBcKa 
 
 evveaKaiSfKUTos 
 
 
 20 
 
 K 
 
 eiKO(n(y) 
 
 elKOOTOS 
 
 flKoa-aKis 
 
 30 
 
 X 
 
 TpidKovra 
 
 rpidKoaros 
 
 TpidKovraKis 
 
 40 
 
 '', 
 
 Tco-a-apaKOVTa 
 
 Tfo-a-apaKoa-Tos 
 
 Tea-a-apaKovrdias 
 
 50 
 
 V 
 
 ■KfvTrjKovra 
 
 TreiTrfKotTTos 
 
 JTfvTiiKoiirdias 
 
 60 
 
 r 
 
 e^rjKOVTa 
 
 e^rjKoa-TOS 
 
 e^r)KOVTaKis 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 ilidoiirjKovra 
 
 i^hop.r)KO(TT6s 
 
 f^hoiirjKovraKis 
 
 80 
 
 IT 
 
 oySoTiKovra 
 
 oyhorjKoirros 
 
 oydoTjKovrdias 
 
 90 
 
 q; 
 
 evevTjKOvra 
 
 evevqKooTos 
 
 tpevrjKovTaKts 
 
 100 
 
 p 
 
 fKOTOU 
 
 cKOTOcrros 
 
 cKorovTaKis 
 
 200 
 
 & 
 
 BtaKOfriOL, -ai, ~a 
 
 SiaKoiTwa-Tos 
 
 Staicoa-idias 
 
 300 
 
 T 
 
 TpidKocrioi, -ai, -a 
 
 TpiaKOfnooTOS 
 
 
 400 
 
 \i 
 
 TfTpaKoa-wi, -m, -a 
 
 TfTpaKoa-toaros 
 
 
 500 
 
 '^. 
 
 nevraicofrioiy -at, -a 
 
 irevraKoo'iotTTOS 
 
 
 eoo 
 
 X 
 
 i^oKoa-ioi, -ai, -a 
 
 e^aKoaiodTos 
 
 
 700 
 
 V'' 
 
 ejrTaKoa-ioi, -ai, -a 
 
 cirraKoo-wiTTos 
 
 
 800 
 
 a 
 
 6KTaK6(rtoi, -at, -a 
 
 oKTanoa-tooTos 
 
 
 900 
 
 ^' 
 
 evaKoo-ioi, -ai, -a 
 
 ivaKoa-ioaros 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 a 
 
 xt^ioi, -ai, -a 
 
 p^lXtOOTOff 
 
 Xi^idKis 
 
 2,000 
 
 fi 
 
 8t(r;( rXtoi, -at, -a 
 
 Sia-xi^tooTOS 
 
 
 3,000 
 
 ,7 
 
 Tpia-xfKioi, -ai, -a 
 
 Tpia-xiKioiTTOS 
 
 
 10,000 
 
 '' 
 
 fiipioi,, -ai, -a 
 
 fivpiotrros 
 
 pvpidKis 
 
 
 Hd. has SudiieKa {SvaSeKaros), rpffiKovra (rpiiiKoirTis), oySiixovTa, SiriKSirtoi 
 {StriKoirto(rT6s), rpn\K6(Tioi : for ii/aros he has eivaros, and so eivdKis, eivaK6<riot, 
 elvaKiaxi^toi. 
 
 Dor. eificoTi for etKoai. — Aeol. iriiare for ireKTe, cf . the ordinal ire/iims. 
 
80 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 [289 
 
 289. Notation. — The letters from a to ff denote units 1 — 9, r' (for 
 former f, vau) being inserted after e' for the number 6. Those from 
 i' to tt' denote tens 10 — 80, q' {koppa) being added after n for 90. 
 Those from p to <a' denote hundreds 100 — 800, ^ {aampi) being added 
 for 900. For the thousands (1,000—900,000), the same characters are 
 used again, but with the stroke under the letter. Tlius ,/3T/i8'= 2344, 
 aa>ve'= 1859. 
 
 a. Sampi, like vau and koppa (7), was a letter of the primitive Greek 
 alphabet, which became obsolete except as a numeral sign. 
 
 b. The letters of the alphabet are sometimes used in unbroken succession 
 to denote the series of numbers from 1 to 24. Thus is used for 21, being 
 the 21st letter of the alphabet. The books of the Iliad and Odyssey are 
 numbered in this way. 
 
 290. The cardinal numbers from 1 to 4 are declinahle: 
 
 one 
 
 two 
 
 three 
 
 four 
 
 ets (i£a 8v 
 
 N. A. 8vo 
 
 Tp.ts TpCa 
 
 ria-a-apK r^o-o-apa 
 
 Ivos pis €VOS 
 
 G. D. SuoEv 
 
 rpifov 
 
 Tcaro-apcDV 
 
 evC (iiS, €vC 
 
 
 Tpicr£ 
 
 T^o-o-apcri 
 
 8vo |iCav 8v 
 
 
 TpElS TpCa 
 
 T^o-crapas T^o-o-opa 
 
 a. Like ffr, arQ_ declined oi&els, oiSejiia, ovSev, and fiTjSels, no one: 
 these are found also in the plural. They may be written in two words 
 for emphasis: ovSi els not a soul; and Sv or a preposition may be in- 
 terposed : /ii;S' &v fls, oiSe nap' ivos. 
 
 b. With a plural noun biio is sometimes used without inflection. 
 The forms bveiv and Suit/ belong to late Greek. 
 
 c. For <r(r in ria-a-ap^s and all its forms, tt is also used (48). 
 
 d. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 199 are indeclinahle. Those 
 from 200 on, and all the ordinals, are regular adjectives of three 
 endings. • 
 
 291. a. For 13 TpuTKaihfKa also occurs. For the ordinals 13tli-19th 
 separate forms are also found : Tphos koI BeKUTos, etc. 
 
 b. For the union of 20, 30, etc. , with units there are three forms : 
 Cardinal. Ordinal. 
 
 TTfVTC Ka\ €lKO(ri ir^flTTTOS Koi CtKOOTOff 
 
 eiKoai KOI irtvTe tlKoarbs Kcu irefiiTTOs 
 
 eiKOO-l TT€VTe TTfVTf KOI nKOCTOS 
 
 Cf. TCB ev\ Kal TpidKoa-T<a trei (uno et tricesimo anno). 
 
 290 D. 1. Hm. has also fem. la, Iris, Ip, lav, with D. S. neut. •$. 
 
 2. Hm. has Sio and Sia, both indeclinable ; also Du. Soiii, PI. Soiol, -ai, 
 -d, D. 5oio7<ri, A. Soiois, -as, -d. — Hd. with SiJoj Suoiv, has G. P. Suwv, D. Suotiri ; 
 also Sio indeclinable. 
 
 4. Hm. with TcVtrapes has iriffvpes (Aeol.). — Hd. reVireper (so 14 Tfirire- 
 pfffKoiSfKa sometimes indeclinable, and 40 TtaacpdjcovTo). — Dor. TeVopej, D, 
 TeTpatTi. 
 
 a. Of ohScls, uriSels, Hm. has only ohiev, p.riSiv, oiSevl. 
 
297] NUMERALS. 81 
 
 292, The numbers 18, 19 are commonly expressed by ivos (or bvoiv) 
 deovres eiKoa-i twenty wanting <me or two. So 38, 29, 38, 39, etc. ; vavai 
 fuas 8eoi5(rats weirrfjKovTa with 49 ships. So too the ordinals: dvolv 
 Seovn TpiaKoara eret in the 38fA year. 
 
 293, '&xa.m\)\eaoi fractional expressions axe: tJ/uio-uj (229 a) ^j rmiToKoLVTov 
 lialf a talent ; — f]fii6\tos li ; rpta TifiiTtiKam-a 1 ^ talents ; Tpirov TjfjuTdKayrov 2^ 
 talents; — TptTriii6pioi> ^, TeTapTTi/iApioi/ i\ — iirlTptros 1^ ; — rii Sio fiipri {duae 
 partes) f ; ri Tpla Ii4pri J ; rav Trim at Sio ftoipcu f , 
 
 294. To the ordinal class belong iroWoo-rifj {many-eth, following many in 
 a series) and the interrogative troini! (how-many-elh, having what place in a 
 series ?), with a corresponding indefinite relative oTtiaros. 
 
 295. From the numeral stems are formed several other classes of 
 numeral words : 
 
 a. Distributives, with aiv : aiySvo two together, two by two, etc. 
 
 b. Multiplicatives, in -itXovs (from -irA.ooj, Lat. -plex) : anhovs simple, Snr\ovs 
 twofold, Tptir\ods threefold, xECT07rA.oSs fivefold, etc., 7roA.Aa7rAoi/s manifold. 
 Also Siirirrfs dotible, Tpttra'6s treble. 
 
 Further, multiplicatives in -T\i(Tios : SnrKdtrios twice as much {Sis to^oitos), 
 rpiirXia-tos three times as much, etc., no\\air\d(rios many times as much. 
 
 c. Adverbs of Division : fujvax^ (fifii/or alone) in one part, single, Sixa or 
 Sixv *" '""" po^rts, Tpixg in three parts, etc., iroWaxfl in many ways, Trai/Tax^ 
 every way. 
 
 d. Abstract Nouns of Number, in -ds : liovds (piovdS-os) the number one, unity, 
 Svds tlie number two, rpids, Terpds, iteixirds, e|t£i, i$Soiids, oySods, Ivvcds, ScKds, 
 ehcds, eKaToyrds, x^^^'^t [ivpids '. hence Tpeis fiOptdSes = 30,000, 
 
 296. Closely connected with numerals are such general expres- 
 sions as 
 
 cKorepos (with comparative ending) either (of two), 
 cKaoTos (with superlative ending) each (of any number), 
 afi(j}<o, G. D. afixpoiv, both (Lat. a/rtibo), for which dfujiorepoi, -at, -a 
 is commonly used. 
 
 297. Observe also the adverbs in -dxis , woWdms, many times, often, 
 eKooToKis each time, rotravrdKts so often, Sffdxis as often as, TrKetCTdKis very 
 often, oMyaKis seldom. 
 
 29B D. b. Hd. Si^Ss, rpi^is, for SuTa'6s, rpicrir6s ; also SijrAiiirios, rpntXijaios, 
 etc., as if for -5r\a<rioj. 
 
 c. Hm. has S^x" ^"'J ^'X^^i "rpfX" "-^^ '''P'X^'^ rerpaxSa ; also rpaX^, 
 TeTpceir\y. 
 
 297 D. Adverbs in -ditis sometimes lose -s in poetry : dv/rdxt Hm., see 
 88 D. 
 
82 VERBS. MODES AND TENSES. [298 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 298. Voices. — The Greek verb has three voices, active, 
 middle, and passive. 
 
 a. Many verbs are used only in the active voice : and, on the other 
 hand, many verbs — called deponent — are never used in the active, but 
 only in the middle voice (or middle and passive). 
 
 299. Modes. — Each voice has six modes : 
 
 the indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative ; 
 the infinitive, and participle. 
 
 a. The first four modes are called finite modes. In their inflection 
 they distinguish three numbers, singular, dual, and plural ; and three 
 persons, first, second, and thu-d. 
 
 b. The infinitive and participle are essentially nouns, the infinitive being 
 an indeclinable substantive, the participle an adjective of three endings ; yet 
 they both have some of the properties of the verb. 
 
 u. The verbal adjectives in -t^s and -reos are like participles, though less 
 clearly distinguished from ordinary adjectives. 
 
 300. Tenses. — The tenses of the indicative mode are seven : 
 the present, and imperfect (for continued action) ; 
 
 the aorist, and future (for indefinite .action) ; 
 ^ the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect (for completed 
 action). 
 
 The tenses of the other modes are three : 
 
 the present (for continued action) ; 
 
 the aorist (for indefinite action) ; 
 
 the perfect (for completed action). 
 The optative, infinitive, and participle have also the future 
 and future 'perfect. 
 
 301. The tenses of the indicative are also distinguished as 
 
 1. Principal tenses : the present, future, perfect, and 
 future perfect ; which express present or future time ; 
 
 2. Past tenses : the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect ; 
 which express past time. 
 
 302. a. The passive voice has a distinct form only for the 
 aorist and future. In the other tenses, the middle form has 
 both a middle and a, passive meaning. 
 
 b. The active has no future perfect (yet see 467). 
 
 300 D. The future and future perfect optatives are never found in Hm. 
 
308] SYSTJiMS. STEMS. THEMES. ■ 83 
 
 303. Tbnsk-Ststems. — The different forms of the verb are 
 divided into the following systems of tenses : 
 
 1. the present system including the Present and Imperfect. 
 
 2. \\i^ future system " Future Active and Middle. 
 
 3. iki& first aorist system " 1st Aorist Active and Middle. 
 
 4. the second aorist system " 2d Aorist Active and Middle. 
 
 5. thu first perfect system " 1st Perf. and 1st Plup. Act. 
 
 6. the second perf ect system " 2d Perf and 2d Plup. Act. 
 
 7. the perfect middle systevci" Perf. , Plup. ,Sindi Put. Perf. Mid. 
 
 8. t'he first passive system " 1st Aor. and 1st Fut. Pass. 
 
 9. the secotid passive &yst&ia. " 2d Aor. and 2d Fut. Pass. 
 
 304. a. The tenses called second differ from the corresponding Jirat 
 tenses in form, but have like meaning. Very few verbs have both the 
 first and second form of the same tense. 
 
 b. Most verbs, therefore, have only six of the above systems. Many 
 have less than six ; and hardly any verb is used in all nine systems. 
 
 c. The ' principal parts ' of a verb are the first person singular 
 indicative of every system used in it. Thus : 
 
 \ia>, XiJo'CO, t\v(Ta, XiKvKO, XiKyjiai, iXvBtjv (see 313). 
 
 305. Stems. — Each tense-system has a separate stem, called 
 a tense-stem. 
 
 a. The passive, perfect, and perfect middle systems have, besides 
 the principal tense-stems, secondary tense-stems, for the future passive, 
 the pluperfect, and the future perfect. 
 
 b. Each subjunctive and optative has furthermore a stem of its 
 own (mode-stem) derived from its proper tense-stem. 
 
 306. Inflection-. — The forms of the verb are made by 
 adding to its different steras certain endings (375-382) which, 
 in the finite modes, mark the persons and numbers. Cf. 299 a. 
 
 307. Themes and Roots. — The various tense-stems of a 
 verb are made from a common theme (sometimes called the 
 verb-stem). This may be either a root (543), or a longer 
 formation consisting of a root with a derivative sufBx added. 
 Thus Tt- (present t«o honor) is a root ; rlfia- (present Ti/idii)) 
 is a longer theme. 
 
 a,. The longer themes are mostly noun-stems, slightly modified. They 
 have two or more syllables, whereas roots are almost always of one syllable. 
 
 308. Pbimitivb and DENOMiNATrvB Vbebs. — A Primitive verb 
 forms its tense-stems from a root ; a Denominative verb from a longer 
 theme, originally a noun-stem. 
 
84 VARIABLE VOWEL. m-FORM. [809 
 
 Thus the primitive verbs Xtfa loose and rim Aonw are from the roots 
 Xu- and Ti- ; the denominative verbs (f>i\ea> love and rifiam honor are 
 from the themes (f>i\e-, Ti/ia-, which are the stems (j>iKo-, rijid- of the 
 nouns ^i\os dear and rXfirj honor, slightly modified. 
 
 a. The following practical rule will generally serve to distinguish 
 the two kinds of verbs. Primitive are verbs in -fu (311 c), and verbs 
 in -at of two syllables in the present indicative active, as Xiya speah 
 (or three syllables in the middle, as fiaxonat Jight, deponent). Others 
 are denominative. 
 
 309. Verbs are named mute-verbs, liquid-verbs, vowel-verbs, 
 etc., according as their themes end in a mute, a liquid, a 
 vowel, etc. 
 
 310. Variable Vowel. — The final vowel of a tense-stem 
 is said to be variable when it is -o- in some of the forms and 
 -c- in others. Thus \vo-ii.€v we loose but Xvi-rt you loose. The 
 sign for the variable vowel is -%-. 
 
 Thus \v''\t- means that the stem is sometimes AiJo- and sometimes 
 XiJe-. It may be read "Kvo- or XSt-'. 
 
 a. The subjunctive has also a long variable vowel, -"|i|-. 
 
 311. The Mi-eoem. — There are two slightly different ways 
 of inflecting tense-stems, called the common form of inflec- 
 tion, and the fi.i-form. See 383 and 385. 
 
 The Present and Second Aorist systems are inflected 
 according to the /xt-form when the tense-stem does not end 
 in a variable vowel. 
 
 a. Otherwise they follow the common form. The rest of the 
 tenses follow, some the one form, some the other. 
 
 b. The jai-form is thus called, because when the present indicative 
 active is so inflected, its first person singular ends in -pi. 
 
 c. Verbs whose present system has the ;ii-form are called 'verbs 
 in -fii ' ; and those whose present system has the common form, ' verbs 
 in -o). ' But it must be remembered that these designations refer only 
 to the present system. 
 
 312. In the following synopsis of the verb Xifm loose, the meanings 
 of the indicative, mfinitive, and participle are given for the active 
 voice. The subjunctive and optative cannot be adequately rendered 
 by any single English expressions : their various meanings must be 
 learned from the Syntax. Meanwhile the following may serve as ex- 
 amples: Subj. (cai/) XctD {if) I loose; Opt. (f() Xtfoi/w {if) I should loose. 
 
 The meanings of tlie passive may be inferred from those of the 
 active : thus Xoo^ai / am loosed, etc. The middle of \im means to 
 loose for one's self {deliver, ransom) : so Xtfo/iai I loose for myself, and 
 so on. 
 
313] 
 
 PARADI0M8 OF VERBS. 
 
 86 
 
 g" ^ 
 
 ^^ ft 
 
 > 3. 
 
 »■ ? 
 
 CD ,_. 
 CD y 
 
 " & 
 
 lA $- 
 ^ *^ 
 
 O^ O 
 
 11 
 
 a,' 
 
 l§ 
 
 1- 
 
 s-s, 
 
 S-2. 
 
 hi 
 
 1 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 n%%i I n%n i 
 
 
 g. 
 ■ 1 
 
 S:* a* 5* S' 5* s^ 
 
 1? "''it 
 
 "J 
 1 
 
 I- r s' r r p r 
 
 § ° 1 § s- 
 
 P 
 1' 1" 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 3. a 3.3 
 
 rr r r. 
 
 li i 1 
 ir 1 s 
 
 ii 1 ^ 
 
 H f 
 
 i 
 
 % 
 
 r 
 
 r r. r fr r. f 
 Ir 1^1 
 
 V 2: a: s* 2* © 
 
 q- q' q q q'- !■ 
 
 g' S § ? e § 
 
 Sf o" 5* '^ "^ 
 
 > 
 
 fi 
 
 like the middle 
 
 t 
 
 
 If rl 
 
 
 CO 
 
 I-' 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
86 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [814 
 
 314. 
 
 loose 
 
 Present System. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Indica- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 XiSa. 
 
 Xvcis 
 
 \ia 
 
 Xiie-TOV 
 
 Xde-Tov 
 
 Xiio-(icv 
 
 XiSe-re 
 
 Xtjovo-i 
 
 S-XCo-v 
 8-Xw-s 
 ?-Xw 
 
 l-Xl£-TOV 
 
 l-Xii^^v 
 l-Xiio-jicv 
 
 l-Xi£-T« 
 
 g-Xio-v 
 
 Xtio-fiai 
 Xtici 
 
 X<)«-TOl 
 
 Xv£-(r9ov 
 
 X(;6-(r9ov 
 
 Xvo-|iE9a 
 
 Xi)e-(r9e 
 
 Xvo-vrm 
 
 1-XCo-p.ifv 
 ^-Xvov 
 
 l-X<i£-TO 
 
 4-X(ie-<r9ov 
 I-Xij^(r9iiv 
 €-XiJo'-|ie9a 
 
 i-X<io-VTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sub- 
 junc- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 X«i]-s 
 
 xtfn 
 
 XvH-TOV 
 
 \il\-TOV 
 
 Xl)(i>-|1EV 
 Xi)T|-T6 
 
 Xijoiiri. 
 
 Xtju-|iai 
 Xitx, 
 
 XiStl-TOl 
 
 XiS'n-<r9ov 
 
 X«ii-ir9ov 
 
 Xi;<4-ne9tt 
 
 XiiT|-o-96 
 
 Xtico-vrai 
 
 Opta- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 S 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Xijoi-|U 
 Xvoi-s 
 
 XlJOl 
 Xt>Ol-TOV 
 
 Xi?o£-Triv 
 
 Xi>Ol-|tEV 
 
 XlSoi-T« 
 
 XvOL€-V 
 
 XuoC-nnv 
 Xitoi-o 
 
 XvOt-TO 
 
 Xioi-cr9ov 
 XvoC-(r9T]V 
 XiJoC-|i.EBa 
 X'uoi-(r9c 
 
 XlJoi-VTO ~ 
 
 Imper- 
 ative. 
 
 S. 2 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 
 3 
 
 XOe 
 
 Xil^-TU 
 
 XtSe-Tov 
 
 XCi-TUV 
 
 \it-Tt 
 
 . \v6-VTIOV 
 
 or A.Oe-Tftjfl'ai' 
 
 Xioi) 
 
 Xv^-(r9» 
 
 Xve-o-9ov 
 
 Xul-ir9av 
 
 Xiie-o-9e 
 
 Xv^-{r9uv 
 
 or \v4-<rQu)<Tav 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Uav 
 
 X<ie-o-9ai 
 
 Participle. 
 
 \im>, -ova-a., -ov 
 
 XvO-flEVO-S, -T], -ov 
 
 Jl^ 
 
316j 
 
 315. 
 
 PARAJJIQMS OF VERBS. 
 316. 
 
 87 
 
 Future 
 
 System. 
 
 J?^rs< J.ms< System. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Future. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 Xttmi 
 
 Xviro-|jLai 
 
 i-Xtro-a 
 
 i-Xu(rd-|»rjv 
 
 Xvo-cis 
 
 Xlicrei 
 
 8-Xv(ro-s 
 
 l-X<<rai 
 
 \ia-0. 
 
 Xiio-t-Toi 
 
 «-X€o-e 
 
 l-Xtfo-tt-TO 
 
 Xrfo-e-TOV 
 
 X(i(re-irflov 
 
 l-Xl^o-a-Tov 
 
 l-Xt)<ro-o-flov 
 
 XlSo-e-Tov 
 
 Xt}<r£-o-9ov 
 
 l-X«o-d-Tifiv 
 
 ^Xio-d-o-Siiv 
 
 Xvo-o-|i.«v 
 
 Xviro-|ie6a 
 
 i-XtJO-a-pcv 
 
 ^-X«<rd-|it9tt 
 
 \in-Ti 
 
 Xt>o-e-(r9e 
 
 l-Xu<ro-T« 
 
 l-\i<rarirdi 
 
 Xio-ovo-i 
 
 Xtio-o-vrai 
 
 8-XiJira-v 
 
 i-Xti<rtt-VTO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 XiSo-u 
 
 XtF<rci>|iai 
 
 
 
 Xuo-ns 
 
 Xtto-n 
 
 
 
 XioTi 
 
 X.1icn]Tai 
 
 
 
 XioTlTOV 
 
 X(i<n](r9ov 
 
 
 
 XttrniToif 
 
 Xtiinr|(r9ov 
 
 
 
 X(i<r(i>)i,ev 
 
 Xvir(S|u9a 
 
 
 
 Xliirr]T£ 
 
 Xi)(rri<r9« 
 
 
 
 Xljo-iixri 
 
 Xtio-uvrai 
 
 X£<roi|U. 
 
 Xv(roC|iT|V 
 
 XiJO-ai|u 
 
 XC<ra(|iT|v 
 
 Xt^o-ois 
 
 Xtio-oia 
 
 Xljo-Eias, \taati 
 
 Xljo-aio 
 
 Xlto-oi 
 
 XlSo-oiTO 
 
 Xfitreu, \uo'ai 
 
 Xijo-aiTO 
 
 XlScroiTOV 
 
 Xtia-ourSov 
 
 Xlio-aiTov 
 
 Xi<<rai<r9ov 
 
 Xuo-oCtiiv 
 
 Xi)<ro£(r9i]i» 
 
 \i<raS,Tx\v 
 
 Xii(raCo-9i)v 
 
 X<j<roi|i,cv 
 
 XvroC|i,t6a 
 
 
 Xv(ra{|ic9a 
 
 XflO-OlTt 
 
 X</a-oi(r0E 
 
 Xvo-aiTC 
 
 Xijo-aio-BE 
 
 Xtio-OIEV 
 
 Xio-oiVTO 
 
 XtJO-ciav, Auo-aiei/ 
 
 Xtio-aivTO 
 
 
 
 XOo-ov 
 
 Xvo-ai 
 
 
 
 Xvo-aTO) 
 
 Xtio-dcrSu 
 
 
 
 Xl><roTov 
 
 Xfi(ra(r9ov 
 
 
 
 Xvcrdruv 
 
 Xvo-dtr9uv 
 
 
 
 Xio-OTt 
 
 Xco-aa-9« 
 
 
 
 Xuo-dvTMv 
 
 Xtia-dir9uv 
 
 
 
 or XvaiTuaav 
 
 or \v(tij(ria>acai 
 
 Xfiniv 
 
 Xl/o-co-Bai 
 
 Xvirai 
 
 Xvcra<r9ai 
 
 Xlfiruv, -ovira, -ov 
 
 Xvo-djicvos, -T), -ov 
 
 Xllira5t-(raira,-irav 
 
 Xva-d|i€Vos,-^>-ov 
 
88 
 
 317. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 318. 
 
 [317 
 
 A.i)-<o 
 
 i^Vrsi Perfect System. 
 
 Perfect Middle 
 
 loose 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 
 
 Ist Perfect. 
 
 1st Pluperfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 X^uKa 
 
 e-XAiKt], -Ml 
 
 XA.v-|iai 
 
 l-XcXii-|lT|V 
 
 
 2 
 
 XI\vKa-s 
 
 i-\i\iKf\-^, -tis 
 
 \Q\.v-ira.\, 
 
 ^-X^Xv-o-o 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 X^\VKC 
 
 (-XeXvKCi 
 
 XA.u-Tai 
 
 l-X^Xv-TO 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 D. 2 
 
 X«\uKtt-TOV 
 
 l-XeXiJKei-Tov 
 
 X^Xv-o-Sov 
 
 l-Xaip-o-Bov 
 
 
 .2 
 
 3 
 
 XeXiJKa-Tov 
 
 l-XeXuK«£-Tiiv 
 
 X^Xu-o-flov ' 
 
 l-XcXii-o-6i)v 
 
 
 a 
 
 P. 1 
 
 XeXvKa-iMv 
 
 e-XcXiiKcy-|icv 
 4-X«XvKe(;-Tf 
 
 XEXv-|i£6a 
 
 l-XcXii-)u8a 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeXuKa-re 
 
 \&M-<r6t 
 
 c-Xdiv-o-e« 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 XcXvKain 
 
 ^-XeXtiKC-o-av 
 
 X^Xu-VTOl 
 
 l-X^«-VTO 
 
 
 
 1st Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 XeXvKo) 
 
 XeXv)1,^i/os (-111 -ov) a 
 
 2 
 
 XeXvKTjs 
 
 BS 1 
 
 ^\ 3 
 
 XeXvKTj 
 
 fl 
 
 S D. 2 
 
 XeXvkt|tov 
 
 XeXv|i^iD (-5., -u) fJTOV 
 
 li 3 
 
 XiXiKigTOV 
 
 1\T0V 
 
 t ^-^ 
 
 X<XtiKCil|UV 
 
 XeXv|i^oi (-ai, -a) u|iEV 
 
 "" 2 
 
 X6XiiK1]T6 
 
 " ifn 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 XcXvKciKn 
 
 « £irt j 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 XeXiJKoip 
 
 XeXupi^vos (->l, -ov) Ar\v j 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeX^JKOis 
 
 ClTlS 
 
 £ 
 
 3 
 
 XeXiIkoi 
 
 « «tTl 
 
 ■■a 
 
 D. 2 
 
 XeXvKoiTov 
 
 XeXv|i^V(ii (-a, -a) etrov or ctT]Tov 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 XcXukoCthv 
 
 " ttTT|V eli^THV 
 
 o 
 
 P. 1 
 
 XcXvKOl|tCV 
 
 XcXvfl^VOl (-ttl, -a) tl|i£V €tl]|lEV 
 
 
 2 
 
 \(\iKovn 
 
 " iXn etT]T6 
 
 
 3 
 
 XcXiJKOlEV 
 
 " tttv cdfo-av 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 
 XA.v-iro 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 XcXi-o-So) 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 X^Xv-o-Sov 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXv-o-Suiv 
 
 A 
 
 J 
 
 P. 2 
 
 
 XA«-o-ee 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXij-o-Ouv 
 
 
 
 or Ac\iJ-irfl(i)(rac 
 
 Infin. 
 
 XcXvK^ai 
 
 XcXii-crSai 
 
 Part. 
 
 XeXuK^is, -Kiiia, -Kos 
 
 XeXv-fi^vos, -1], -ov 
 
3l9] 
 
 PAkAblOMS OF VERBS. 
 319. 
 
 89 
 
 &yst 
 
 «»l. 
 
 i''iMi Passive System. 
 
 Middle 
 
 (Pass.). 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 1st Aorist. 
 
 1st Future. 
 
 XA<io-o-|uii 
 
 
 i-Xvei)-v 
 
 Xii8^iro-|iai 
 
 XeXio-ti 
 
 
 i-x<iei]-3 
 
 \v9l]<ra 
 
 XcXvo-.-Tai 
 
 
 l-Udri 
 
 Xu9fj<r€-Tai 
 
 Xe\io-«-o-0ov 
 
 
 ^-XiflTl-TOV 
 
 Xu9r|<re-c 9o|/ 
 
 Xe\.<Jo-«-o-9ov 
 
 
 i-\v9i\-Tr(\/ 
 
 XuSijcrE-o-Bav 
 
 XcXto-d-juSa 
 
 
 4-Xii9il-|i..v 
 
 Xi>9T)iro-|t(9a 
 
 X«Xi)(r£-<re€ 
 
 
 l-XuSlJ-Tj 
 
 \v6i\a-i-ir9i 
 
 XcXvo-o-vrai 
 
 
 l-Xii8i]-o-ttv 
 
 Xv9;^(rov-Tai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 XvSu 
 
 
 
 
 Xu9fis 
 
 
 
 
 x«efj 
 
 
 
 
 XuSiJTOV 
 
 
 
 
 XufltJTOV 
 
 
 
 
 Xv9u|t«v 
 
 
 
 
 X«9t)t« 
 
 
 
 
 Xv9u(ri 
 
 
 XeXiiiroC)i,T)v 
 
 
 Xv9e(iiv 
 
 XD97]<ro£|JlT|V 
 
 XeXt^o-oio 
 
 
 Xv9cCt)s 
 
 Xj9r'(o-oio 
 
 XEXdo-oiTO 
 
 
 Xv9e{i) 
 
 Xj9qo-oiTO 
 
 XcXvo-oio-Sov 
 
 
 Xv9£Ctov or Xu9e{r|rov 
 
 Xu9^(roi(r9ov 
 
 X€XC<ro£o-6i]v 
 
 
 X«B«Cttiv XD9ay)Triv 
 
 Xv9i|(roC<r9T|V 
 
 XcXv<ro<|i,«8a 
 
 
 Xv9ct|JiEV Xv9cC'q{;,ev 
 
 Xv9'r)<roC|i,E9a 
 
 XeXfo-oio-Be 
 
 
 X«9eiT« Xii9Eti]T£ 
 
 Xv8^o-oi(r9e 
 
 XEXdo-oiVTO 
 
 
 Xv9e!cv \v0elri<rai' 
 
 X«9V)(roHTo 
 
 
 
 \i9nTi 
 
 
 
 
 X«9<i-Tca 
 
 
 
 
 Xii9t|-Tov 
 
 
 
 
 X«9tj-tciiv 
 
 
 
 
 Xi9Tl-T£ 
 
 
 
 
 Xv9^-VTC0V 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 or \y$iiTanrav 
 
 
 XcXlScrc-o-8ai 
 
 Xv9fj-vai 
 
 Xv9^ire-<r9cii 
 
 XeXCiro-ficvas, 
 
 -ri, -ov 
 
 Xv9efe| -elo-a, -^v 
 
 Xv9r)<rd-|i.cvoSi -t|, -ov 
 
90 
 
 320. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 321. 
 
 [820 
 
 AetVo) 
 
 Second Aorist System. 
 
 Secmd Perfect System. 
 
 (W.) 
 
 
 
 
 leave 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 ACTITE. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 2d Aorist. 
 
 2d Perfect. 
 
 2d Pluperfect. 
 
 
 ?-Xnro-v 
 
 l-Xiwd-iiTiv 
 
 X^Xoiira 
 
 E-XcXoCin), -tiv 
 
 
 2 
 
 ?-Xiir«-s 
 
 I-XCttou 
 
 X^Xoiira-s 
 
 l-X€Xa(in)S| -eis 
 
 f 
 
 3 
 
 8-Xi.ire 
 
 e-XCire-To 
 
 X^oiirc 
 
 c-XcXoCirci 
 
 1 
 
 D.2 
 
 l-X£ire-Tov 
 
 l-XCir6-<r9ov 
 
 XeXoiira-Tov 
 
 E-XtXoCiret-Tov 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 l-Xiir^-TTiv 
 
 l-Xi.iri-<r9T|v 
 
 XtXoiira-Tov 
 
 l-XtXonrcC-niv 
 
 
 P.] 
 
 l-\Ciro-n«v 
 
 ^-Xiird-neBa 
 
 X(Xo£ira-fjLCV 
 
 l-XeXo(irci-|iEV 
 
 
 2 
 
 e-XCirc-re 
 
 l-XCire-o-Se 
 
 XeXofirtt-re 
 
 l-X«Xo£ir€i-Te 
 
 
 3 
 
 S-Xiiro-v 
 
 £-XCiro-VTO 
 
 XeXo£iracn, 
 
 4-X«Xo£ir«-o-ttv 
 
 
 
 
 2d Perfect. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 XCiru 
 
 X(iru|iai 
 
 XeXofiru 
 
 
 2 
 
 XfiTDS 
 
 Xfeti 
 
 XtXo£ir[|S 
 
 s; 
 
 3 
 
 XChT) 
 
 X£iniTOi 
 
 XeXotirxi 
 
 t3 
 
 D.2 
 
 XCirnTOv 
 
 Xiirijo-Bov 
 
 XeXoCirriTov 
 
 ^P 
 
 3 
 
 XCttt^tov 
 
 Xi-irqo-Oov 
 
 XeXoCirqTov 
 
 s 
 
 P. 1 
 
 XCir(i>|icv 
 
 Xiiri6)jic6a 
 
 XeXofirdiiiEV 
 
 
 2 
 
 XCiriiTe 
 
 X£in|(r9e 
 
 X«Xo£inriT6 
 
 
 3 
 
 S. 1 
 
 XCiruo-i 
 
 XtiruvTai 
 
 XeXoCirioo-i 
 
 
 XCuoi|j.i/ 
 XCirow'/ 
 
 Xi.iro£(i.T)v 
 
 XEXofiroiiu 
 
 
 2 
 
 XCiroio 
 
 XcXoCirois 
 
 a; 
 
 3 
 
 XCn-oi 
 
 XCiroiTo 
 
 XcXotiroi. 
 
 > 
 
 '■5 
 
 D.2 
 
 X£iroiTov 
 
 XfirourSov 
 
 XeXofiroiTov 
 
 1. 
 
 3 
 
 XiirofTiiv 
 
 Xi.iro((r6i|v 
 
 XeXoiiroCTiiv 
 
 o 
 
 P. 1 
 
 XCiroifiev 
 
 Xin-oCiuSa 
 
 XcXoCiroifiev 
 
 
 2 
 
 X£iroiT« 
 
 X^7roi(r0€ 
 
 XeXoCiroire 
 
 
 3 
 
 XCrroicv 
 
 X£iroiVTo 
 
 XeXotiroicv 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 XCirc 
 
 XiiroC 
 
 
 ai 
 
 3 
 
 Xiir^-Tu 
 
 Xiir^-(r9<i) 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 D.2 
 
 X£ir«-TOV 
 
 XCirc-(r9ov 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 Xiir^-Toiv 
 
 Xnr^-(r9<i)V 
 
 
 &4 
 
 a 
 
 P. 2 
 
 XCirt-re 
 
 XCm-o-Be 
 
 
 3 
 
 Xhto-vtwv 
 
 Xtirl-crflmv 
 
 
 
 
 or Xiire-ruffav 
 
 or \nr4-tT6wffav 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Xiirttv 
 
 Xiir^-(r9ai 
 
 XcXoiir^-vai 
 
 Part. 
 
 Xiiriiv, -ovcra, -dv 
 
 Xiird-ltcvoS) -T|, -ov 
 
 XEXoiiri&s, -via, -ds 
 
822] 
 
 322.' 
 
 PARADiaMS OB VERBS. 
 
 91 
 
 orreAAo) 
 
 (0T€A-) 
 
 Second Passive System. 
 
 send 
 
 Passive. 
 
 
 
 2d Aorist. 
 
 2d Future. 
 
 Indica- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 ^-crrdXTi-v 
 e-OTdXij-s 
 l-irrdXii 
 
 l-OToXtl-TOV 
 
 l-(rTaX<)-TT|v 
 l-irTdXT|-|«v 
 i-<rTaKr\-T( 
 t-OTdXi)-<ra,v 
 
 oToX<jo-o-(iai 
 
 oToX^o-ei 
 
 oTaXVja^-rai 
 
 oToXljo^-o-Bov 
 
 oToX^o^-o-Bov 
 
 OToXija-o-ftEBa 
 
 oraXfjo^-o-fle 
 
 (rTCiXT|0^-VTCll 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sub- 
 junc- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (TToXu 
 
 o-ToXfls 
 o-roXft 
 
 (TToXiJTOV 
 
 <rToX<iTov 
 <rTaXu|UV 
 (rToXfJTS 
 oToXua-v 
 
 
 Opta- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. I 
 2 
 3 
 
 oToXeCTiv 
 
 trTaXc(i)5 
 
 otoXeCti 
 oToXeiTov or OTttXetiiTov 
 OToXeCniv crTaXei'fiTT|V 
 trraXiliuv oTaX«£Ti|ia' 
 oToXetTe irraKebyn 
 o-raXctEV ara\elri(ray 
 
 oTaXiio-oC|ji,T|V 
 
 oraX^o-oio 
 
 oraX-^oxiiTO 
 
 0TttXT|O*0tO^0V 
 
 OTeiXi|o^£o"8T]V 
 oraXyjo-oio-Bc 
 
 OTOX^O-OIVTO 
 
 Impera- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 irra\f\-Ta 
 
 OTdXTJ-TOV 
 
 irraX-f\-Tav 
 
 ordXri-re 
 
 oraX^-VToiv 
 
 or ffraXiiruffav 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 0TaX{):^vai 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 otoXeCs, -tio-a, -tv 
 
 OTaXT|0-o'-)WVOS, -t], -ov 
 
92 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [S2S 
 
 323. 
 
 Tl/Jid-U) 
 
 Present System of Contract Verbs in -aa. 
 
 honor 
 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 TTji(aa>)u 
 
 €TL|l(a0|/)»V 
 
 TXn(l£o)u-Httl 
 
 ItXh' a6)i-f,r\v 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ti|i.((ieij)as 
 
 lTi|j.(oes)aS 
 
 TXn(afl)J 
 
 ^TX|j.(c!au)u 
 
 P 
 
 3 
 
 TX|i(ciE.)?' 
 
 €Ti;i.(a€)a 
 
 TX(i.(oc)a-Ttti 
 
 4TXp,(<Je)a-To 
 
 m 
 
 D. 2 
 
 TX|l.(ae)tt-TOV 
 
 lTX|i.(tie)a,-Tov 
 
 TX(i(<{e)d-ir9ov 
 
 lTXn(<£e)d-<r9ov 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tl)l,{il) i-TOV 
 
 STX;i(ae')d-TT)V 
 
 TX|i(i£f)i-(r9ov 
 
 lTXji(oE')d-(r9T|V 
 
 ^ 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Tlf.(do)ii-f£V 
 
 lTX)ji(ao)M-nev 
 
 TX|i.(o<))<4-(teBa 
 
 eTX|i(oi()i4-|i,9tt 
 
 
 2 
 
 TZf.(de)a.-Te 
 
 lTXn(£ie)d-T« 
 
 TX(i.((Je)a.-(r9« 
 
 eTX(i,(<ie)d-ir9« 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tl)i[dou)ain 
 
 ^Ti|i.(oov)ciiv 
 
 TX(t(iio)u-VTai 
 
 4TX|J.(t{o)u-VTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 riii.{dai)a 
 
 TX(i(iiw)ffl-|i.ai 
 
 
 2 
 
 TZf.(dr,s)as 
 
 TX|i(ap)^ 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 r-iii(dr,)^ 
 
 TT)i,(ii7j)d-Tai 
 
 ■s 
 
 D.2 
 
 Ti}i(cir;)a-TOV 
 
 Ti)i,((Ji))d-ir9ov 
 
 p 
 
 3 
 
 TX(i.(a)))a-TOV 
 
 Tl|i(o7j)d-0-9oV 
 
 1 
 
 P. 1 
 
 TT(J.(({lu)d)-H£V ' 
 
 TX|j,(acij)i6-|i.e6a 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ttll(c(jj)a-T€ 
 
 TX|i.(oT))d-cr86 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tl(jL((iet))o}o-i 
 
 TX)i,(:i(i))w-VTai 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 tT|i(ooO'uH-v or Ti]J.(o(oi)£i-|ii 
 
 Tljl,[aol)^^T]V 
 
 
 2 
 
 TT(i.(ao/)(Jii-s 
 
 Tlfl'(ioi)lj>-0 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 TTn(aoO'P'n tT(i(i4oi)<J1 
 
 TX|i((£oi)£-TO 
 
 
 D.2 
 
 Tt|l.(l4oi)w-TOV 
 
 TX|i,((ioi)ai-<r9ov 
 
 i. 
 
 3 
 
 tT|ji(oo()iu-t»|V 
 
 TX(i(aoi)'u-o-8iiv 
 
 o 
 
 P. 1 
 
 TT|i(<ioi)<u-nev 
 
 TX(i.(ao/)cu-ne9a 
 
 
 2 
 
 TTn(aoi)(p-Te 
 
 TX(i((ioi)4i-<r9f 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tl\i.{doi)(uf-v 
 
 TX(i(aoi)ai-VTO 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 Tt|Ji(ae)a 
 
 Tlf>(dov)a 
 
 m 
 
 3 
 
 TX|i(a€)d-T<ll 
 
 Ti|i(a^)4-<r9a) 
 
 ■% 
 
 D.2 
 
 TX|i(ci€)tt-TOV 
 
 TX(i((i€)d-<r9ov 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 
 TXn(a€)4-T<iiv 
 
 TX|j<af")d-o-B(av 
 
 P. 
 G 
 
 P. 2 
 
 T'if.{de)a.-Te 
 
 TX(ji((£€)d-(r9« 
 
 3 
 
 TX|l(a<()<6-VT<l)V 
 
 TX(i(ae)4-o-B<i)V 
 
 
 
 or Tr;ii(ac)i-Tffl(roi' 
 
 or Tlii(ae)i-cr6iiia'av 
 
 Infin. 
 
 TX(j,(i{cii')dv 
 
 TX|i(iic)d-(rBai 
 
 Part. 
 
 TlfL(day)&V, -MO-O, -Sv 
 
 TX)l(a<i)(&-|UVOS, -T|, -ov 
 
324] 
 324. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VJBRBS. 
 
 93 
 
 love 
 
 Present Si/stem of Contract Verbs in -e<o. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 Pre 
 <J)iX(eio)o 
 
 isent. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 . 
 
 l<j)CX(eoj')ojv 
 
 <|>i\(ca)oi-)iai 
 
 4c|)lX(€(()0()-HTlV 
 
 <i>lX(«Is)6tS 
 
 l<|.a(«s)£w 
 
 <j>lX(6'e(Ki 
 
 ^<}»lX(£Ou)ov 
 
 <t>lX(E6<)el 
 
 l(|>£\(6e>i. 
 
 <|ii\(^c)et-Toi 
 
 J<j)iX(e'e)ti-TO 
 
 (|>lX(cEjEi-TOV 
 
 c4>i\(E'e)Ei:-Tov 
 
 <j>iX(c£)et-(reov 
 
 4()>iX(EE)it-ir3ov 
 
 <|>l\(c'E)et-TOV 
 
 4^ )i.(e€')t£-niv 
 
 <|iiX(e'€)ei-<r8ov 
 
 l4.iX(€Ot£-<r9Tiv 
 
 <|iiX(co)a3-|tcv 
 
 eit>i\(co)ov-|uv 
 
 <t>iX(e<<)ov-(i£9a 
 
 l(|>iX;E(i)ou-)u9a 
 
 <t>tX{t'e)£l-T4 
 
 €(j>lM«)6l-T€ 
 
 <j)i\(«)ei-(re« 
 
 4<t>iX(E'E;ei-(r9c 
 
 <j>lX(e'ou)ou<n 
 
 eij>C\(eok)ouv 
 
 <j)lX(eo)oO-VTOl 
 
 E(|>lX(E'a)ov-VTO 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 <|>iX(cai)u 
 
 
 <t)i\(ciu)u-|i,ai 
 
 <1.i\(6'7,s)bs 
 
 
 <|)l,X(€'j,)^ 
 
 ^'■^■(''p)ii 
 
 
 <))i.\(e7)}i)-TOi 
 
 <j)l\{6)))f]-T0V 
 
 
 <|)iX(€r;)<i-(r9ov 
 
 <j>l\(E?))ii-TOV 
 
 
 <|ii\(€7))i)-o-0ov 
 
 lf>l\(E<u)o>-}lEV 
 
 
 4>i\(c<^)<i-|te9a 
 
 ^<M4ri)i\-rt 
 
 
 4ii\(ED)ij-(rO€ 
 
 ^iX(eei>)m(n 
 
 
 <|>i\(eet;)u-VTai 
 
 <t>iX(coOo£T|-v or <|iiX(Eai)oI-|u 
 
 
 (|>i,\(€o()o£-|jniv 
 
 itii\(EaOofT|-s <jii\(€'ois)oI-s 
 
 
 <|)iX(e'oi'oI-o 
 
 (|)i\(eo/)oCTi (j)iX.(€'oi)oI 
 
 
 <j)i\(6'oi)oI-TO 
 
 i|>i\(eoi)ot-Tov 
 
 
 <j).X(e'oi)ot-<r9ov 
 
 <tllX(co()oC-TT|V 
 
 
 ^iK{^oi)ol-tr9i\v 
 
 <tii\(Ea()ai:-|i.cv, -oiri-fifv 
 
 
 <|>iX(Eo0o(-|u9a 
 
 <)>iX(€'oi)ot-T6, -olji^e 
 
 
 <})iX(e'oi)oi-<r3e 
 
 <tii\(eoi)oic-v 
 
 
 <|>l\(E0l)0t-VT0 
 
 <t>CX(cc)a 
 
 
 €|iiX(^u)ov 
 
 <tiiX(ec')cC-T0> 
 
 
 <j)lX(EE'')tC-0-9cil 
 
 <|>i\(e'€)et-TOi' 
 
 
 <j)iX(E'e)«I-<r9ov 
 
 <|)i\(ce)£C-^1i)V 
 
 
 <t>iX(EE>£-(reav 
 
 <j)i\(e'e)et-T€ 
 
 
 ^iX{h)tl-<r9f 
 
 4>i\(c(!)o£-vriav 
 
 
 ^Md)il.-<Tim 
 
 or ^i\(e6)ef-Tft)(r(«' 
 
 
 or (()iA(c£' 
 
 \fl-aBa>irai> 
 ai 
 
 
 <j>lX(«U/)6iV 
 
 
 <|>iX(E'E)et-<re 
 
 (|>iX(^Q»')uv, -oCira, -oSv 
 
 <j>i.\(c(!)ou-|icvos, -1], -ov 
 
94 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [32fi 
 
 325. 
 
 Sj/Xo-o) 
 
 Present System of Contract Yerbs in -oa. 
 
 manifest 
 
 Aci 
 
 
 
 
 riTE. 
 
 Middle (Passite). 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 8l]X((ia))u 
 
 J8ijX',oo>')ow 
 
 8TiX((io)oi)-nai 
 
 68llX(oi()oij-|iTlV 
 
 
 2 
 
 8ti\(<(£is)ois 
 
 e8TJX(oei)oi)S 
 
 STlX((ie.)ot 
 
 €8'!lX((lou)oB 
 
 t 
 
 3 
 
 ST)\((!ei)oI 
 
 IStJX'oejou 
 
 8iiX((!e)oi<-Tai 
 
 e8iiX(((e)oB-TO 
 
 "rt 
 
 D. 2 
 
 8ti\((J6)oO-tov 
 
 ISiiX(i(e)oB-Tov 
 
 8T|X(<(6)oO-cr9ov 
 
 E8'nX(iJE)oC-!r8ov 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 8'nX(<iE)oO-TOV 
 
 atlXtoEOoU-TTlV 
 
 8T)X(<(e)oB-a-9ov 
 
 €8.^X(o6')oxi-<r9Tiv 
 
 a 
 
 l-H 
 
 P. 1 
 
 8riX((Jo)ov-nev 
 
 e8iiX((fo)ov-|j.6V 
 
 8T|X(o(S)oi-H€8o 
 
 eSTiX(o(!)oii-(ie9o 
 
 
 2 
 
 8n\(((e)oB-Te 
 
 e8iiX(<ie)oiJ-Te 
 
 8nX((ie)oO-(re£ 
 
 e8TiX((<E)oB-o-9« 
 
 
 3 
 
 8'n\(((ou)oB(ri 
 
 e8T)X(oo>')ow 
 
 8ir)X((io)oB-VTai 
 
 «8t)X(((o)oB-VTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 STiX(<iai)a 
 
 8T)X((!ai)u-|iai 
 
 
 2 
 
 8T)X(((j,s)ots 
 
 8iiX(((j))ot 
 
 .E; 
 
 3 
 
 8tiX.(<(?))ot 
 
 8l)X(<f7))<3-TOl 
 
 c 
 
 D. 2 
 
 8t)X(((7))m-TOV 
 
 8tiX(i{j))m-(p9ov 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 8TlX((iT))u-T0V 
 
 8tiX((i7))u-o-9ov 
 
 ra 
 
 P. 1 
 
 8T|X(((a))a-|j,ev 
 
 8T]X(iiiii)<6-|j,e8a 
 
 
 2 
 
 ty\K(6i])S,-Ti 
 
 8ii\(ifj))i3-<r9e 
 
 
 3 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Sii\(((aj)i5o-i 
 
 87lX((!ai)u-VTai 
 
 
 8t|\(oo/)o£T)-v or 8Ti\(<<oi)ot-(ii 
 
 St)X(oo£)o£-hi]v 
 
 
 2 
 
 8tiX(oo0o£t)-s 8iiX((iois)oi-s 
 
 8iiX((Soi)ot-o 
 
 <U 
 
 8 
 
 8i)X(oof)o£Ti 8T]X(i(oi)ot 
 
 8TlX((i0l)0l-T0 
 
 '-5 
 
 D. 2 
 
 8T]X((io()or-TOV 
 
 8-qX((Joi)o?-cr9ov 
 
 •fi, 
 
 3 
 
 8tiX(oo()i>C-tiiv 
 
 8TiX(oo()oC-cr9Tiv 
 
 o 
 
 P. 1 
 
 8T)X((<oi)ot-nev 
 
 8T|X(oor)a£-|j,e9a 
 
 
 2 
 
 8T)X((ioi)oC-T« 
 
 8iiX(((oi)oi-(r9« 
 
 
 3 
 
 S. 2 
 
 8iiX((ioi)ot«-v 
 
 8T]X((Joi)or-VTO 
 
 
 8tJX(0£)oU 
 
 8tiX(<<ou)oO 
 
 u 
 
 3 
 
 8t)X(06)0U-T<i) 
 
 8l]X(06')oU-O-9<iJ 
 
 "■'^ 
 
 D. 2 
 
 SiiX(((e)oB-TOV 
 
 8iiX((fe)oB-ir9ov 
 
 y 
 
 3 
 
 8T|X(oe)oil-TC«)V 
 
 8T)X(o€')oi-(r9(i)V 
 
 n 
 
 P. 2 
 
 8iiX(ii€)ovi-Te 
 
 8iiX(((€)oB-(r9e 
 
 t-H 
 
 3 
 
 8T]X(o(i)o^-VTCi)V 
 
 8i]X(oe')ou-<r9(OV 
 
 
 
 or 5y)K{oi)o'l)-Tat(Tav 
 
 or ST]\(oe)oi-(ria><rav 
 
 Infin. 
 
 8iiX(({€i>')o0v 
 
 8iiX(i(f)oB-tr9ai 
 
 Part. 
 
 8i)X((!&>i')<ov, -ov<ra, -ovv 
 
 8llX(o<i)o«-|MVOS, -1), -ov 
 
827] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 327. 
 
 95 
 
 t^aivio 
 
 Miture System, of 
 
 I^st Aorist System of 
 
 (<^av-) show 
 
 Liquid Verbs. 
 
 Liquid Verbs. 
 
 Active. | Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 1 Middle. 
 
 Future (contracted). 
 
 1st Aorist. 
 
 ()>avu 
 
 (jiavovftai 
 
 £-(|>T|va 
 
 £.(jn]vd-jir)v 
 
 (jiavEts 
 
 <(>av£i 
 
 ?-<|>riva-s 
 
 c-iti^vai 
 
 <|iav«i 
 
 (fiavEtrat 
 
 Hnv* 
 
 4-(j>^VO-T0 
 
 cjiavsiTov 
 
 <t>avEi<r8ov 
 
 4-(j)^va-Tov 
 
 l-<|i^va-(r6ov 
 
 4>av«tTov 
 
 <|>avei<r8ov 
 
 E.(j>T]vd-TT|V 
 
 |.ij)T)vd-(r6i]V 
 
 i|iavou|jiEV 
 
 (|>avoiifj.€Oa 
 
 l-i|>yiva-|iiEV 
 
 E-(|>r]vd-|i«8a 
 
 ^av^Tt 
 
 4iavel(r6c 
 
 |.)ji^va-TC 
 
 l-(j>^va-(r8E 
 
 (jiavovo-i. 
 
 ij>avoCvTai 
 
 S-(j>T|va-v 
 
 l-iji^va-VTO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <j)^Vti> 
 
 <|i'fjv(>)|i.ai 
 
 
 
 <l"^VTis 
 
 <j)^Vt| 
 
 
 
 <|)^vn 
 
 (}>lfjVT)Tai 
 
 
 
 <t>^V11T0V 
 
 (|>4ivT|<r8ov 
 
 
 
 ^■f\vr[Tov 
 
 OTjvno^ov 
 
 
 
 ()>^VCi>|UV 
 
 (|>T)vc&|iE8a 
 
 
 
 <|><)VTlTe 
 
 <|)^vt|(r8E 
 
 
 
 (ji^vaim 
 
 (ji^jvuvrai 
 
 ^tsfohfi/, <jiavoi|u 
 
 <j>avoC|iT]V 
 
 (t>^vai|u p 
 
 <f"iva£niiv 
 
 4>avo{T|s, 4>avois 
 
 (fiavoio 
 
 ({l^VElUSi (pitvius 
 
 <|>^vaio 
 
 ifiavoCi], <|>avo: 
 
 (jJOVOtTO 
 
 if>^V£u, i^^vai 
 
 <|>^vaiTO 
 
 ■{lavolTov 
 
 <f>avotir6ov 
 
 ■(i^vaiTov 
 
 i|>irjvai,<r8ov 
 
 <fiavoCTT]i' 
 
 
 <j>ilvaCTTiv 
 
 <|>T)va(ir8T|V 
 
 cfiavoL^EV 
 
 <t>avoC)u6a 
 
 ()>^vai|uv 
 
 <t>r|vaC|jLE8a 
 
 (j>avoiTS 
 
 <|>avoio-9£ 
 
 <|i^vaiT« 
 
 ij>TJvai.<r8E 
 
 ifiavoiev 
 
 (jiavoivTO 
 
 (|>yjvEiav, ipiiiiufp 
 
 <j><ivoivTO 
 
 
 
 ^f\vov 
 
 (|>{jvai 
 
 
 
 
 <)>T|vd(r8(i) 
 
 
 
 
 ij>^v(ur8ov 
 
 
 
 (jnjvdTwv 
 
 (|>i)vd(r8(DV 
 
 
 
 4>^vaTC 
 
 ^i\vcur9e 
 
 
 
 (jn|vdvT(iiv 
 
 i|>T|vda-8iiiv 
 
 
 
 or tpTiKdraa'ai' 
 
 or ipi)vi(rSuiraii 
 
 ifiavEtv 
 
 4>av(t(r6ai 
 
 <f>f)vai 
 
 <|>4iva(r8ai 
 
 <f>avuv, -ovo-a, 
 
 -OVV 
 
 <j>avoi!|i,EvaSi-T|, -ov 
 
 (|i^vasi -ao-a, -av 
 
 i|iT]vd|iEvos, -T), -ov 
 
96 
 
 Paradigms oP verm. 
 
 [328 
 
 328. 
 
 Perfect Middle and 
 
 
 Vowel-Verbs, 
 with added a-. 
 
 lAquid 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 Middle 
 
 reXiui (reXe-) 
 
 cTTcAAo) (oreX-) 
 
 </>aiV<D (<^av-) 
 
 (Passive). 
 
 complete 
 
 send 
 
 show 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 T£T^«-ir-|iai 
 
 SirraXjiai. 
 
 ir44>a(r|iai 
 
 
 2 
 
 TtT6\«-<rat 
 
 So-raXo-ai 
 
 (irdipaiiirai, 463 a) 
 
 =3 
 
 3 
 
 TeT^\e-<r-Tai. 
 
 SoTaXroi 
 
 ir^(j)avTai 
 
 1— I 
 
 D. 2 
 
 T€T^X€-0"9oV 
 
 8oTaX9ov 
 
 'irl4><>'V9ov 
 
 
 3 
 
 T€T£X6-0-9oV 
 
 8(rTaX9ov 
 
 ir4<J>av9ov 
 
 s 
 
 P. 1 
 
 T€T£Xs'-(r-|j.e9a 
 
 £(rTdX|iE9a 
 
 'ir£:|)d(r[L£9a 
 
 Ph 
 
 2 
 
 T«T^\€-<r9£ 
 
 i:<rTaX9£ 
 
 ir£'(|>av9£ 
 
 
 3 
 
 T€T€\£-0--Jt^VOl Aa-i 
 
 £<rraX|x^voi Airi 
 
 ')r£c|>a(r|ji,lvai Acrl 
 
 
 S. I 
 
 l-T£T€X^-0--|iTlV 
 
 kirra\y,i\v 
 
 £ir£(t>do-)i.'qv 
 
 
 2 
 
 e-TtT^Xs-o-o 
 
 ^(rraXcro 
 
 (eTTet^avCo) 
 
 ri 
 
 3 
 
 ^-T£T^X£-ir-TO 
 
 So-raXro 
 
 lir^if'"''''''" 
 
 «H 
 
 D. 2 
 
 l-T£T<X£-0-90V 
 
 ScrTaX9ov 
 
 £ir^<|>av9ov 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 l-T£T£X4-0-9l]V 
 
 €(rTdX9i]v 
 
 £ir£(j)dv9iiv 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 4-T£T£X^-(r-[j.£9a 
 
 ^irTdX|i.£9a 
 
 ^ir£(t>d(r|;,£9a 
 
 
 2 
 
 £-T£T4X£-(re£ 
 
 'i<rro.\9i 
 
 lir^4'av9E 
 
 
 3 
 
 TeTeXe-o--ji^i'oi ^irav 
 
 ecrTaX|j.^voi fjo-av 
 
 'ir€ij>aTiJ.^voi ^o-ttv 
 
 Perl Sub. 
 
 T£TeX£ir|j.^vos a 
 
 lcrTaX|j.^vos u 
 
 ir£<j>ao-|J.^vos w 
 
 Perf. Opt. 
 
 T£T£X£0-|1£V0S A'<\V 
 
 lcrTaX(i^vos tl-ep 
 
 ir£<|)a<rn^vos ftiiv 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 reri\i-a-o 
 
 £C^Ct\o*0 
 
 {Tretpavffo) 
 
 t^ 
 
 3 
 
 T(rtKl-a-ia 
 
 €(rTdX9a> 
 
 7r£<j>dv9^ 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 D. 2 
 
 T£T^X£-ir9oV 
 
 ?(rTaX9ov 
 
 'ir^<j)av9ov 
 
 3 
 
 T£T£X^-0-9li)V 
 
 4o-TdX9ciiv 
 
 n'£c|>dv9uv 
 
 ^ 
 
 P. 2 
 
 TeriKi-uii 
 
 ScrTaX9£ 
 
 ■ir^ij>av9£ 
 
 Ph 
 
 3 
 
 T£T6X4-0-9fflV 
 
 £0'TdX9ajv 
 
 ir£(|)dv9o)V 
 
 
 
 or rereXi-trBtaa'ay 
 
 or laraKBairmi 
 
 or ir€<pa.vdtaiTav 
 
 Perf. Inf. 
 
 rvriKt-a-iai 
 
 £(rTdX9ai 
 
 ir£(j>dv9ai 
 
 Perf. Par. 
 
 T£T£X£-Cr-H^VOS 
 
 £irTaX(i.^vos 
 
 n-EtjiairpL^vas 
 
 „. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 e-T£XI-<r-9Tiv 
 
 
 I(|>dv9i]v 
 
 Ph 
 
 Sub. 
 
 T£X£-<r-9m 
 
 
 <j>av9a> 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 TEXE-(r-9££T]V 
 
 
 (t>av9£Ci]V 
 
 -^ 
 
 Irav. 
 
 t«X^-o--9t]ti 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 Inf. 
 
 T£X£-(r-9i)voi 
 
 
 <j>av97ivai 
 
 i-H 
 
 Par. 
 
 T£X£-(r-9e£s 
 
 
 ij>av9£C5 
 
 1 Put. Ind. 
 
 T£X£-<r-9fi<ro|i,ai 
 
 
 (j>av3^o-o)uu 
 
828] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 97 
 
 Mrst Passive Systems of 
 
 Mute Verbs. 
 
 ptlTTO) {pl<f>-} 
 
 aXA.a<T(r(o (oXAay-) 
 
 (kiyx<a (eXeyX-) 
 
 -TreWta [wiO-) 
 
 throw 
 
 exchange '' 
 
 co«mc< 
 
 pm'suade 
 
 eppT|i,)jiai, 
 
 J^WaYfiai 
 
 IX.TJXcY)i.ai 
 
 ir^iruo-fiai 
 
 Sppii|>ai 
 
 <iX\agai 
 
 ^X'^Xeyiai 
 
 ir^irticrai 
 
 Jp^llTTttl 
 
 'ijWaKTai 
 
 l\^X«YKTai 
 
 ir^iretoTai 
 
 lfpX^9ov 
 
 IjWaxSov 
 
 IXTJXeYXSov 
 
 ire'ireio-Bov 
 
 £ppitt>aov 
 
 ■ijWaxBov 
 
 eXyiX6Yx9ov 
 
 T^TreurBov 
 
 Ippt|ji);,c9a 
 
 'f|XXd7|i.e6a 
 
 IXTjXeYliefltt 
 
 ir(.ir«C(rp,E8a 
 
 i^^X^it 
 
 iiWax?e 
 
 IX^XCYXB. 
 
 ir6Tr«io-9e 
 
 lppi|ji|i^voi, Atrl 
 
 '^WaYJi.^voi elo-i 
 
 IXt)XeYP'^voi. clo-i 
 
 ■ir«ir«io-(ji^l'Oi elirC 
 
 ^PPWI" 
 
 T|\\a,Y|it]V 
 
 cXiiX^YH-l" 
 
 lireir«C(rp,T]V 
 
 ifpX^o 
 
 <^Uaio 
 
 IX^X«Y?o 
 
 lir^ireio-o 
 
 g^^i-irro 
 
 <JWOKTO 
 
 IX^XCYKTO 
 
 lir^ireioTo 
 
 ip^X^iov 
 
 ■tjWoxBov 
 
 IX^X6Yx9ov 
 
 lireireto 9ov 
 
 lpAt.j.eT,v 
 
 ^X\dx9T)v 
 
 i\-n\iyx^v 
 
 kiretrGCa-9r\v 
 
 Ippi)i(i68a 
 
 f|X\.dY|j.E9a 
 
 IXT|XcYF^c9a 
 
 iirfirfCtrfjida 
 
 i^^X^it 
 
 <'|\\ttx9€ 
 
 IX^XeYxee 
 
 Iir^ir£t<r9« 
 
 |ppXp,p,4voi. fjo-av 
 
 f|X\aY|ji^voi -^o-av 
 
 IXr)XeYt>'^>'°>' ^o"iiv 
 
 irerrcio-ji^voi. ^o-av 
 
 Eppi|lfl^VOS u 
 
 'fjWaYp.^vos w 
 
 ^XtiXeyii^vos u 
 
 ircircicft^vos u> 
 
 lppX)i|j.4vos Av^v 
 
 'f|X\aY)i.^vo5 tlTiv 
 
 cXriXeYli^vos ttiiv 
 
 iren-Eio-ii^vos elT)v 
 
 i^^X^o 
 
 4)Ua|o 
 
 IX^XtY^o 
 
 TT^.rcwro 
 
 l^^t<t>9a> 
 
 ■f|X\dx9<« 
 
 eXT)X^YX9" 
 
 ireTreC(r9(0 
 
 £ppi4ieov 
 
 <jWax9ov 
 
 eX^X«Yx9ov 
 
 •n-^irei(r9ov 
 
 cppi(j>9ii>v 
 
 'fjX\dx9o)v 
 
 IXiiX^YX^wv 
 
 ire'Tre£(r9MV 
 
 8p^Tij>9e 
 
 IjWaxBe 
 
 c'XiXtYxBe 
 
 Tr4ir6Kr96 
 
 i^,6t<l)euv 
 
 fjXXdx9MV 
 
 JXuX^YX^"" 
 
 ir£irEC<r9a)v 
 
 or ipptipBaMTov 
 
 or TiK\a.x6miyca/ 
 
 or ihriKeyxSioTm 
 
 or TT^irelcrQaffav 
 
 lppi:<j>8ai. 
 
 T|\\dxBai 
 
 ^XiiX^YxSii 
 
 ir6'ireE(r9ai 
 
 ^^pX|ip.lvos 
 
 ■fjX\o-y[i.^vos 
 
 eXT|XeYH<^vos 
 
 7reir€i(r|j.^vos 
 
 Ep^t<t>ST|V 
 
 fj\Xdx9T)v 
 
 flX^YXV 
 
 eire£o-8Tiv 
 
 pXij>8u 
 
 d\\ax9u 
 
 IXcYX^*" 
 
 irciir9u 
 
 pXrj)9e£iiv 
 
 dWttx9€triv 
 
 IXcYxfleV 
 
 ■Kii,a-9(lr\v 
 
 pfl|>9tlTl 
 
 dX\dx9TiTi 
 
 IX^YX^T'''' 
 
 
 pX(f>6f|vai. 
 
 dWax9f)vai 
 
 IXcYx9iivttv 
 
 irEi(r9f)vai 
 
 ^x4>ecCs 
 
 dXXax9cb 
 
 IX«Yx9«fe 
 
 inuriili 
 
 pX4>6^iro|i.ai 
 
 dXXax9ifj(ro|iai 
 
 IXeyx^^"'"!'''*'' 
 
 irci.a-9rj<ro)im 
 
98 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [829 
 
 329. 
 
 Present System, 
 
 Ti67]fju (Oe-) put. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 T£-9i)-|ii 
 Tf-9i)-s, Ti9ets 
 Tt-9i]-(ri 
 tC-96-tov 
 T£-9e-Tov 
 
 t£-96-|«V 
 
 tC-Be-ts 
 Ti-B^-ao-i 
 
 ^tC-9ii-v 
 l-T£-9tis 
 ^T£-9a 
 I-tC-9«-tov 
 
 I-TI-94-TI1V 
 
 c-tC-9€-h«v 
 
 «-T£-9e-T€ 
 
 l-T£-9£-(rov 
 
 TC-9e-|i,oi. 
 Tf-9e-(roi, 
 
 T£-9E-Tttl 
 
 T£-9e-(r9ov 
 
 T£-9£-cr90V 
 
 Ti-9^-|i.e9a 
 
 T£-96-ir96 
 
 rC-Bc-vrai 
 
 l-TL-9^-|JlTp' 
 
 l-T£-9e-o-o 
 
 «-T£-9e-To 
 
 l-T£-96-(r9ov 
 
 l-Ti-9€'-<r9tiv 
 
 l-Ti-9l-f«9a 
 
 4-t£-9£-0-9£ 
 6-t£-9£-VTO 
 
 
 
 . Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1^ 
 2 
 3 
 
 Ti-BS 
 Ti-9fj-s 
 
 Tl-9f| 
 
 Tl-Bij-TOV 
 
 Tt-9fi-T0V 
 
 Ti-9ca-(J.ev 
 
 Tl-9ii-T€ 
 TI-9M-0-1 
 
 Ti-Ba-|iai 
 
 Tl-9i)-Tttl 
 
 Ti-9fi-(r9ov 
 
 Ti-Bij-o-Bov 
 
 Ti-Bii-|uBa 
 
 ti-Btj-o-Bj 
 
 Ti-Bto-vrai 
 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 8 
 
 Ti.-9tCii-v 
 Ti-9«£n-s 
 
 Tl-9€t-T0V or Tl-9£Cr)-T0V 
 Tl-9eC-THV Tl-9£l.<i-TT|V 
 Tl-96l-|ieV Tl-96{ll-p.6V 
 Tt-96C-T« Tl-9eCT|-T6 
 
 Ti-Bete-v Tt-8flr)-(rav 
 
 Ti-B€£-|i,i)v or Ti-9o(-|i.i]v 
 Ti-9et-o rt-9at-o 
 
 Tl-96t-TO TI.-9ot-TO 
 
 Tt-96t-(r9ov Ti-9oI-tr9ov 
 Ti-9e£-cr9T]v Ti.-9aC-o-9tiv 
 Tt-9e(-ne9a Ti-9o£-(jit9tt 
 Ti-9«t-cr9£ Ti-9oi:-o-96 
 
 Tl-9€l-VT0 Tl-9oI-VTO 
 
 1 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 Tl-9a 
 
 Tl-9^-TCI> 
 
 tC-9£-tov 
 
 Tl-9^-TUV 
 tC-9£-T£ 
 
 ■n-9i-VTav 
 
 or Ti-Be-Tia^av 
 
 ri-9i-(T0 
 
 Ti-B^-o-Bu 
 
 tC-9«-o-9ov 
 
 Ti.-9^-ir9<i)v 
 
 TC-9£-o-9e 
 
 Ti.-9^-<r9ii)v 
 
 or Ti-Bt-aBaMTan 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Tl-Bi-VOl 
 
 Tf-Bc-o-Boi 
 
 Part. 
 
 Ti-9tfe, -tto-a, -Iv 
 
 Ti-9^-|ievos, -T], -ov 
 
330] 
 
 
 PARADIGMS OF 
 
 r£R£S. 
 
 99 
 
 330. 
 
 MI-Form. 
 
 
 StS(o/ti (So-) give. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passite). 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 SC-Sw-(ib 
 
 
 4-8£-8o«v 
 
 S{-8o 
 
 -HOI 
 
 l-8i-8d-)ii]v 
 
 8C-Su-$ 
 
 
 4-8t-8oi>s 
 
 SC-80 
 
 -o-oi 
 
 k-Si-So-<ro 
 
 8£-8u-cri 
 
 
 l-8(-8oii 
 
 8£-8o-Tai 
 
 l-8i-8o-TO 
 
 SC-So-TOV 
 
 
 4-8C-S0-T0V 
 
 S£-Sa 
 
 o-Bov 
 
 ^-8£-8o-<r9ov 
 
 S{-80-T0V 
 
 
 e-8i-8o-Ti)V 
 
 8£-8o 
 
 ■o-Sov 
 
 4-8i-8d-a-9'r]v 
 
 8C-8a-|uv 
 
 
 l-8£-8o-H.6v 
 
 8t-S<5 
 
 ■jjicSa 
 
 l-8i-8o'-n68a 
 
 8i-8o-Te 
 
 
 I-8C-80-T6 
 
 8(-8o-irec 
 
 «-8£-8o-<r9e 
 
 8i-8o-0(ri 
 
 
 E-SC-So-o-av 
 
 SC-80 
 
 VTOl 
 
 l-hlSo-VTO 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Si-8u 
 
 
 8i-8co-p.ai' 
 
 
 Si-Su-s 
 
 
 8i,-84> 
 
 
 Si-Su 
 
 
 SL-8m-Tai 
 
 
 8i.-8«5-Tov 
 
 
 8i-Su-ir3ov 
 
 
 8l-8co-TOV 
 
 
 8i-8u-(r8ov 
 
 
 8i-8u-|i.ev 
 
 
 8i-Sii-|u9a 
 
 
 8l-8w-T6 
 
 
 8i-Sa>-<rec 
 
 
 8i-8<o-(ri 
 
 
 8i-8w-VTai 
 
 
 8i-So£t|-v 
 
 
 8i-8oC-(i.T)v 
 
 
 8i-8o£ti-s 
 
 
 8i,-8oE-o 
 
 
 8i-8oC'n 
 
 
 8i-8ot-To 
 
 Si-S 
 
 >i-Tov or 8i.-8o£ti-tov 
 
 
 81-S01-0-80V 
 
 8i-8o£-niv 8i-8oi^-TT)V 
 
 
 8i-SoC-cr6i]v 
 
 8i.-8ot-|uv Si-SoCt)-h«v 
 
 
 Si-SoC-|teSa 
 
 8l-Sot-T£ 8l-8ofT)-T€ 
 
 
 Si-8oI-a-9e 
 
 8i-8oi€-v St-SoiTj-trav 
 
 
 S1-801-VT0 
 
 
 Sl-Sov 
 
 
 8i-8o-a-o 
 
 
 8i-8d-T<i) 
 
 
 8i,-8d-ir9(D 
 
 
 8C-80-TOV 
 
 
 8C-8a-o-eov 
 
 
 8i-8d-T«v 
 
 
 Zi-So-TSav 
 
 
 8i:-8o-Tc 
 
 
 tC-So-a-9( 
 
 
 Si-Sd-vTuv 
 
 
 8t-8(i-o-9j)v 
 
 
 or Si-S6-Ttoffay 
 
 
 or Si-S6-(rB(i)(raii 
 
 8i-8o-vai 
 
 8f-So-(r8ai 
 
 Si-Sovs, -oBo-a, -ov 
 
 8i-8d-|iCvos, -T), -ov 
 
100 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [SSI 
 
 331. 
 
 Present System, 
 
 i(TTr]iu ((TTa-) set. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 S 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 l!-OTT|-S 
 
 t-<rrq-cri 
 
 t-OTO-TOV 
 H-OTa-TOV 
 
 t-orra-fiiv 
 
 J-o-ra-Tt 
 
 i-trrd-irt 
 
 "-OTTj-V 
 
 f-o-n)-s 
 f-(mi 
 
 r-OTtt-TOV 
 
 i-o-rd-TTiv 
 f-(rTa-(tev 
 f-o-Ta-re 
 f-o-ra-o-av 
 
 J-o-ra-o-ai 
 
 t-oTO-rai 
 
 I'-crra-crBov 
 
 J-o-TO-o-Bov 
 
 i-irra-fLfia 
 
 t-o-ra-o-Be 
 
 t-crra-VTai 
 
 f-OTd-HTJV 
 
 f-oT-a-o-o 
 
 t-J Ttt-TO 
 
 f-oTO-o-Bov 
 i-o-Td-o-Briv 
 i-o-Td-(j.e6a 
 f-o-To-o-Be 
 
 f-OT-a-VTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 3 
 D. 2 
 
 8 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 l-O-TCO 
 
 t-OTTJ-S 
 
 l-OTXI 
 
 t-OTt)-TOl> 
 
 t-a-TTJ-TOV 
 
 l-OTU-H-V 
 
 U<rTf)-Te 
 
 l-OTM-O-t 
 
 L-OT»-|J.ai 
 l-OTfl 
 
 i-OTij-Tai 
 
 t-OTTJ-O-BoV 
 J-OTfj-O-SoV 
 
 t-(rTii-(i.tBtt 
 t-crrij-o-Be 
 
 l-O-TW-VTttl. 
 
 •B 
 O 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 i-(rTa£T]-v 
 i-irTa£i]-s 
 i-OTaCii 
 
 t-OTOl-TOV or l-0-TotT|-TOV 
 
 i-o-raC-TTiv i-oTtti^-niv 
 t-(rTOt-(j.6v i-(rTo£ii-(i,tv 
 t-OTat-T6 t-OTotii-Te 
 t-OTot€-v l-<rTalri-(rav 
 
 i-(rTa£-nT)v 
 i-crrai-o 
 
 l-OTat-TO 
 
 i-o-raC-o-Bov 
 i-(rra£-o-flt)V 
 i-(rTa£-(jifcBtt 
 t-cTat-o-fle 
 
 l-CTTaC-VTO 
 
 l-H 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 2. 
 S 
 
 l-OTO-TU 
 
 t-crra-TOV 
 i-irrd-Tuv 
 iI-<rTa-T€ 
 t-crrd-VTUv 
 or i-CTd'Ttaffap 
 
 t-OTtt-O-O 
 
 i-OTd-crBo) 
 
 {.(rra-o-Bov 
 
 i-o-rd-o-Bdiv 
 
 t-oTa-o-fle 
 
 t-o-rd-crBuv 
 
 or l-iTTti-tTdaa'aif 
 
 Infin. 
 
 t-errd-voi 
 
 f-OTO-o-Bai 
 
 Part. 
 
 t-irrdsi -otra, -dv 
 
 t-(rTd-|i«vos, -ti, -ov 
 
332] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 101 
 
 332. 
 
 Mi-Form. 
 
 huKvvni (Sct/c-) show. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive), 
 
 Present. 
 
 8{Ck-viJ-(i.i 
 
 SeCk-vv-s 
 
 SeCK-vii-oi. 
 
 SefK-vu-TOV 
 
 86£k-vu-tov 
 
 8eCK-v«-|i.€v 
 
 Sc^K-vu-re 
 
 8etK-vii-d(n 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 e-StCK-vu-v 
 I-ScCk-vu-s 
 4-8cCk-vv 
 
 €-8e£K-V«-T0V 
 «-8«lK-VU-THV 
 4-8t£K-VU-|l€V 
 
 ^-8eCK-v«^« 
 l-8{£K-vii-o'av 
 
 8E(K-vv-|xai 
 
 Sc^K-vv-crai 
 
 8«CK-vu-Tai 
 
 SeiK-viP-o-Sov 
 
 SttK-vv-o-Sov 
 
 SciK-vu-|tc9a 
 
 86CK-v«-<r9« 
 
 8c(K-vii-VTai. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 4-8tiK-vii-(iiiv 
 l-SeCK-vu-o-o 
 
 4-8£lK-VU-TO 
 
 4-86CK-vi)-<r9ov 
 
 c-8i.i.K-vii-|u9a 
 
 ^-8efK-vv-o-9< 
 
 I-8«£k-v«-vto 
 
 Present. 
 
 SciKvvu 
 SeiKvuxi 
 
 84lKVV1)TOV 
 8£lKV>iHT0V 
 SciKVUO>|lEV 
 8cLKvi}T]TC 
 
 Present. 
 
 8ElKVUa)|iak 
 
 SciKvuxi 
 
 8eiKviJT]rai 
 
 8EiKvvr](r9ov 
 
 8ei.KV<JT]<r8ov 
 
 8ciKvi)<o|jL€9a 
 
 8eiKvvi](r9c 
 
 
 Seikvvuo-i 
 
 SciKviJQivTai 
 
 
 
 SElKVUOipil, 
 
 8ei,kvuois 
 
 SeiKvvo£|jii]v 
 Seikvvoio 
 
 
 
 8eiKvJioi 
 
 8eiKVVOlTO 
 
 
 
 8aKVUOlTO|/ 
 
 8aKvvoi<r9ov 
 
 
 
 8eiKviJo£'n]V 
 
 8eIKVVOI|XCV 
 
 Seikvvoite 
 
 8ciKvvo£<r8i)v 
 
 8€LKVVo£|J.€9a 
 
 8ei,Kvvoi(r9e 
 
 
 
 htiKvioiev 
 
 8eikvvoivto 
 
 
 
 8e£k-vv 
 
 Zdx-vv-a-o 
 
 
 
 8£IK-Vli-Tlll 
 
 S(iK-vi;-(r9(ii 
 
 
 
 8efK-vu-Tov 
 
 Zil,K-vv-<r9ov 
 
 
 
 StlK-VU-TMV 
 
 8ElK-vi-T8uV 
 
 
 
 tdx-vv-rt 
 
 Se£K-v«-o-9e 
 
 
 
 8ei.K-v<i-vT<i)v 
 
 8»K-vv-(r9j>v 
 
 
 
 or SefK-i/tJ-Ttucrat' 
 
 or SeM-vi-ir6o><rav 
 
 
 8EiK-vv-vai 
 
 Sc£K-vv-(r8ai 
 
 
 8eiK-vvs, -vo-o, -ilv ' 
 
 8ElK-VU-)t€V05, -1), -ov 
 
102 
 333. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 334. 
 
 [sss 
 
 Second Aorist System, 
 
 
 riOrifu {6e-) put. 
 
 diouifju (o 
 
 0-) ^'ffi. 
 
 2Aor. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 (eeriKa) 
 
 l-9i-y.r\v 
 
 (SSuiKa) 
 
 C-8o-|11)V 
 
 
 2 
 
 (iBriKOs) 
 
 i-9ov 
 
 (eSuKas) 
 
 8-8o« 
 
 ? 
 
 3 
 
 (?eiiKO 
 
 «-9€-ro 
 
 (£S0)KC) 
 
 {-So-TO 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ?-9e-TOV 
 
 «-9c-<r9ov 
 
 S-SO-TOV 
 
 «-8o-<rBov 
 
 .§ 
 
 3 
 
 i-e{-TT|V 
 
 i-9i-a-9r\v 
 
 4-8o-TT|V 
 
 4-8o-crBiiv . 
 
 £ 
 
 P. 
 
 Me-|uv 
 
 I-B^|ie9a 
 
 e-So-llEV 
 
 4-8o-|iE9a 
 
 
 2 
 
 8-8€-Te 
 
 ^■9£-crBE 
 
 i-SoTt 
 
 i-io-<r6e 
 
 
 3 
 
 8-9e-(rav 
 
 ?-9e-vTo 
 
 f-So-crov 
 
 8-80-VTO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 e£ 
 
 9a-|iai 
 
 8£ 
 
 8<ii-|i,ai 
 
 
 2 
 
 efl-s 
 
 eti 
 
 8u-s 
 
 8.U 
 
 g! 
 
 3 
 
 flti 
 
 9ii-Tai 
 
 sa 
 
 Su-Tai 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Bij-Tov 
 
 9f|-cr9ov 
 
 Su-TOV 
 
 Su-o-Bov 
 
 3 
 
 6fi-TOV 
 
 0ii"O"Bov 
 
 8u-T0V 
 
 Su-o-Bov 
 
 J3 
 
 P. 
 
 6oa-|Jicv 
 
 9(S-)iE8a 
 
 8m-|tEV 
 
 S<&-|jLc9a 
 
 
 2 
 
 9ri-T€ 
 
 9{j-o-9e 
 
 8m-T6 
 
 8aj-(r9« 
 
 
 3 
 
 ea-o-i 
 
 9m-vrai 
 
 Su-o-i 
 
 8u-VTai 
 
 
 S. 
 
 idr\-v 
 
 9eC-nTiv 
 
 So£i)-v 
 
 8a(-|iT|v 
 
 
 2 
 
 etCri-s 
 
 9tt-o 
 
 So£ti-s 
 
 8ot-o 
 
 ? 
 
 •3 
 
 ecCi] 
 
 9eI-To (-BotTo) 
 
 &0ll] 
 
 80C-T0 
 
 ■I 
 
 D. 
 
 9«i-T0V Beftl-TOV 
 
 9ei-<rBov 
 
 801-TOV 8o£ti-Tov 
 
 Sot-ir9ov 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 9e£-Tiiv Btt^j-niv 
 
 9eC-irdr[V 
 
 8o£-T'riv BoiVj-niv 
 
 
 O 
 
 P. 
 
 Bet-|uv 9eCii-(iev 
 
 BeC-|uBa (-BoCfuBa) 
 
 8ot-{j.£v 8o£i]-|icv 
 
 8ot-|ieBa 
 
 
 2 
 
 9«^T« d(Ci\-Te 
 
 Bci-o-Be (-Boto-Bc) 
 
 8ot-T« 8oCt|-Te 
 
 8oi-o-9e 
 
 
 8 
 
 9{i«-v fletrj-ffov 
 
 Bei-VTO (-BotvTo) 
 
 8ot«-v Sotri-trav 
 
 Sot-vro 
 
 
 S. 
 
 94-s 
 
 BoO 
 
 8o'-s 
 
 80V 
 
 
 3 
 
 9^-T(i> 
 
 B^(^B(D 
 
 8a-T(i> 
 
 So'-o-9(ii 
 
 
 D. 
 
 9^-TOV 
 
 fl^o-Bov 
 
 80-Tov 
 
 So-o-Bov 
 
 k 
 
 3 
 
 9^-TMV 
 
 B^(rBa>v 
 
 8o-T(i}V 
 
 So-o-Buv 
 
 
 P. 
 
 9I-T6 
 
 6^(rBe 
 
 8ri-T€ 
 
 So-ctBe 
 
 3 
 
 9i-VT<i)V 
 
 9^-o-8<DV 
 
 8()-VT<i>V 
 
 So-o-Buv 
 
 
 
 or de-Ttatrav 
 
 or e4-<r8a<rcu> 
 
 or S6Tatrai> 
 
 , or S6-a-da>(rav 
 
 Infill. 
 
 6il-v<u. 
 
 Bi-o-Bai 
 
 8ov-vai 
 
 8o-o-9ai 
 
 Part. 
 
 9iCs, 9ct(ra, 9^v 
 
 B^-|xevos, -T], -ov 
 
 hois, 8oS(ra, So-v 
 
 8a-|Uvos, -r|, -ov 
 
336] 
 
 335. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 103 
 
 Ul-Form. 
 
 Second Perfect System with- 
 out suffix (454). 
 
 to-ny/xt 
 
 {(rra-). 
 
 Sv-o> enter. 
 
 lOTTiixi (ora-) set. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Active. 
 
 2d Perfect Act. 
 
 2d Plup. Act. 
 
 i-xrrr[-v stood 
 
 «-8«-v 
 
 (8im]Ko) stand 
 
 (lo-T^JKIl) ■ 
 
 i-<mi-s 
 
 
 8-8«-s 
 
 (^OTIJKOS) 
 
 (6<rT<iKTlS) 
 
 li-U '1 11 
 
 
 «-8ii 
 
 (^OTTlKt) 
 
 (eoTTJKei) 
 
 i-<rn\-Tov 
 
 
 £-8v-T0V 
 
 J-CTTtt-TOV 
 
 8-(rra-Tov 
 
 i-irri\-Tf\v 
 
 
 |-8tl-TT]V 
 
 ^.o-ra-Tov 
 
 e-oTtt-niv 
 
 6-trrr)-|i.ev 
 
 
 i-Sv-fiev 
 
 8-<rTa-|itv 
 
 £-<rTa-|UV 
 
 S-<rTT]-T£ 
 
 
 8-Sl-T6 
 
 8-(rTO-T« 
 
 ?-CrTO-T« 
 
 e-(m]-<rttf 
 
 
 8-8v-irav 
 
 e-o-To<ri 
 
 ^-(rTa-<rav 
 
 
 
 2d Perfect Act. 
 
 OTW 
 
 
 Svo 
 
 tOTM 
 
 o-rfi-S 
 
 
 Siiris 
 
 
 OTT) 
 
 
 Bvn 
 
 
 a-rii-Tov 
 
 
 SilT|TOV 
 
 
 O-rij-TOV 
 
 
 8uT|TOV 
 
 
 a^a-^Lev 
 
 
 8vu|i,ev 
 
 l-o-ru-|UV 
 
 (rrff-TC 
 
 
 8l)Tl« 
 
 
 OTW-OT. 
 
 
 Svum 
 
 e-OTTU-O-l 
 
 OT 
 
 atiy-v 
 
 
 €-irTtt£T|-V 
 
 CTT 
 
 tt£n-s 
 
 
 t-o-raCti-s 
 
 
 
 ^oraCri 
 
 <rraE-Tov or <rroCi)-rov 
 
 
 
 o-raC-TTiv 
 
 aToiyj-TTiv 
 
 
 
 <rToi-(«v 
 
 crTo(Ti-|«v 
 
 
 
 o-rai-re 
 
 OTairj-TE 
 
 
 
 oToIe-v 
 
 ffrcdrj-ffay 
 
 
 l-<rrait-v 
 
 OTii-ei 
 
 
 83-ei 
 
 ^-crra-Si 
 
 O-rij-TCll 
 
 
 8li-To) 
 
 
 o-rfl-TOV 
 
 
 8iJ-TOV 
 
 J-crra-Tov 
 
 (rr/j-Tciiv 
 
 
 8«-TWV 
 
 6-o-rd-T<av 
 
 OTfj-T£ 
 
 
 80-T« 
 
 !-<rro-Te 
 
 o-ra-VTwv 
 
 
 8v-VT(i)V 
 
 4-<rTd-VT(i>v 
 
 or (rT^i-TCMTav 
 
 or S6-TW<rav 
 
 or k-ffT6yraffav 
 
 (rTf)-vai 
 
 Si)-vai 
 
 J-OTO-VOl 
 
 <rTaS| crrdxai o^a-v 
 
 8ijs, Svo-a, Sv-v 
 
 €-<rTi4si e-o-rfiiro, l-o-rds 
 
104 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VMRBS. 
 
 \SZ1 
 
 337. 
 
 lud. 
 
 Sub. 
 Opt. 
 Imv. 
 Inf. 
 Par. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Sub. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Sub. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Pr. Impf. Active, 
 
 CTl]l<OV 
 Tl|J.» 
 
 tZ^ift\v, -l{i(ll 
 Tind 
 
 tT)j.c5v 
 M. P. 
 
 Tljl'jd^JLaL 
 TL[it5[JLai 
 
 Tl}lai[l.l]V 
 
 TtjlU 
 
 Ti|xdcr8ai 
 
 Titlf&[J.€VOS 
 
 .11: 
 
 Synopsis of 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Tl(i7J(rO» 
 
 Ti|i^(roi)ii 
 
 TijJi'qa'wv 
 
 Middle. 
 Ti|Li]O'0|iai 
 
 TX[jLii(ro£|jnf]v 
 Tip,iio-€(r9tti 
 
 Passive. 
 Ti}i'r|6ii(rop.ai 
 
 TlnT]9T|(roCntiv 
 TljiTi9ifiirojAei'03 
 
 rlfxa-ui honor. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 eTijiiniTtt 
 
 Tl|Jf!]0-OJ 
 
 Tt(i.'i]o-aL|j,t 
 
 TX|j.'f](rai 
 Tifiif|(rds 
 
 Middle. 
 
 lTt[iTia-d|J,'qv 
 Ti|iT|cru[xai 
 TX|i'r]tra{(JL'i]V 
 TLHTio-ai 
 TXjxi]0'aa"9at 
 TX|j,iio-djievos 
 Passive. 
 
 TL|i.Tl9M 
 
 Ti|nf]9«tT]v 
 
 Tl|J.'l]9'r]TL 
 
 TXiiTiOijvai 
 
 Perf. Plup. Activa 
 
 T€TL|l.'qKa 
 
 TvTip.T|KU 
 Te'lX;J.^KOL|JLL 
 
 TerXp.TjK^vav 
 
 T€TIJJ.T|K^S 
 
 M. P. 
 T£Tt|i'qp,ai 
 lT€Ti[i'i]p,'r]V 
 
 TiTX[JLTlp,^VOS « 
 
 t€tX|j.t)|jl^vos tXtyv 
 
 T€TLfJLT](rO 
 
 TCTl(J,T]0-9ai 
 
 T€Tl|i,T||Jl^VOS 
 
 Fut. Perf. Pass. 
 T€TX|nfj(rojiai 
 
 T€TX|i.'I](ro£|iT]V 
 
 T€TX|i'iio-£(r9ai 
 
 T£TL|JLTlO-djl£V0S 
 
 338. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Sub. 
 Opt. 
 Imv. 
 Inf. 
 Par. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Sub. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv, 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Sub. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Pr. Impf. Active. 
 
 6t]pu 
 
 ISrjpoiv 
 6T|pu 
 
 6t|piut|V, -$(11 
 Srjpa 
 Sripdv 
 
 StlpCOV 
 
 Or]pd-<a 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 6T|p&(roi|J,i 
 
 6i)pda-Eiv 
 Qr\patToiV 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 6T|pio|jiai, 
 iSi\p(l>jj.r[V 
 
 6T|pU|JUll 
 
 erip^Htiv 
 
 Btipw 
 
 6T]pd(r9ai 
 
 6T]pii|JlCV0S 
 
 9ilpdo-o|jiai 
 
 9T|pairoC(j.iriv 
 
 St1pd<r£(r8ai 
 di]pao-o{X€vos 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 «." g 
 
 fli]pa9/i(rojiai 
 
 ni 
 
 8T|pa9ii(roC(inv 
 9i]pa9^(rEir9ai 
 
 hunt. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 €9^pdo-a 
 6r)p&,ira 
 9i)pd(rai.|Jii 
 9ifjpda-ov 
 9t]pd(rai 
 9i]pdirds 
 Middle. 
 
 e9T|pd(rd]iT]v 
 
 BT)pd(ru|xai. 
 
 9T]pdo-aCnT]v 
 
 9i]pd(raL 
 
 9i]pd(ra(r9ai. 
 
 9T]pd(rd|jL£vos 
 
 Passive. 
 49T]pd9T]v 
 
 @r\pa,9ih\v 
 
 9T]pd9TlTl 
 
 BiipdBfjvat 
 9T|pd9ti(rd|«vos 9iipd9efe 
 
 Perf. Plup. Active. 
 Tc9T]pdKa 
 eTe9iipdKi) 
 
 T€9T]pdKliJ 
 Tc9T]pdK0l[JLl 
 
 TE9T]pdK^Vai 
 
 Te9T]pdKt&s 
 
 M. p. 
 Te9fjpd|iai. 
 
 lT€9T|pd|lT|V 
 
 T€9'tipd|j,eVos S> 
 TcBTipdiilvos iii\v 
 Te9 rjpd(ro 
 Te9T]pdcr9ai 
 
 TE9l]pd|JL^V0S 
 
840] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 105 
 
 339. 
 
 7roi£- 
 
 (0 make. 
 
 
 Pr. Itnpf. Active. 
 
 Futare Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 Perf. Plup. Active. 
 
 TTOIU 
 
 iroiTJo-d) 
 
 
 ITETroCTIKa 
 
 liroCovv 
 
 
 6iro^o-tt 
 
 kirettOvi\Kt\ 
 
 iroiu 
 
 
 irot^o-w 
 
 TTEirOLI^Kbl 
 
 iroiDfiiv, -oE[ii 
 
 iroti^o-oi|u 
 
 iroLTJcrai|JLi. 
 
 7r£iroi^Koi|u 
 
 n-oCei 
 
 
 troh^a-ov 
 
 
 iroKiv 
 
 iroi^o-Eiv 
 
 iroifjo-oi 
 
 7rE7roii]K^vai 
 
 iroiuv 
 
 TTOL^O-COV 
 
 iroi^o-ds 
 
 irtn-oiTiKcis 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 MP. 
 
 iroiQv|iai, 
 
 ')roiTJa-o|iai 
 
 
 'irEiro£T)(i.tti 
 
 4iroiot>|i,T]V 
 
 
 liroiTio-diJnriv 
 
 ^TTEirolVJlJlTlV 
 
 iroiu{xai 
 
 
 iroiTJa-<o|i.ai 
 
 irEirofqu^vos a 
 
 iroioC|i,T)v 
 
 iroiTjo-ofiiiiv 
 
 iroiT)o-aC|Ji'i]v 
 
 ■irEiroi.r]|j.^vos Ay[V 
 
 iroioO 
 
 
 irojtio-ai 
 
 ■ir£iro{T|cro 
 
 iroiEio-Sai 
 
 iroiticreo-3ai. 
 
 •iroiifjo-tto-3oi 
 
 'irETroiT]o-9at 
 
 n-oioviiEvos 
 
 iroiT|o-o)uvos 
 
 iroi7|(rd)].evas 
 
 ITEn-OlTIIJl^VOS 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Put. Pei-f. Pass. 
 
 
 iroiTi9t'|o-onai 
 
 lTroi^9tiv 
 
 irEiroiVjo-oiiai 
 
 £ «,'S 
 
 
 xoi.t)9m 
 
 
 ITT 
 
 ■iron)9t]o-o£(i,i]v 
 
 •iroir)96£Tiv 
 
 7rE'iroiT|(roC|ii]v 
 
 1 s-r 
 
 
 iroi'^9T]Ti 
 
 
 ^ 11 
 
 iroi.t)9^o-«o-6oi 
 
 iroiii9fjvai. 
 
 'ir£iroi^<rEO-9ai 
 
 
 iroiT|9T)aro|j,Evos 
 
 iroir)8ECs 
 
 ■ir£Troii](rd|j.£vos 
 
 340. 
 
 TeAe-O) 
 
 complete. 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Active. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 Perf. Plup. Active. 
 
 tcXm 
 
 TfXS (reXeo-u, 423) 
 
 1 
 
 TET^XEKa 
 
 iriKovv 
 
 
 CT^XEO'a 
 
 eteteX^kt) 
 
 Te\S> 
 
 
 teX^o-cj 
 
 teteX^ko) 
 
 TeXoCtiv, -01(11 
 
 TeXoCijv, -ot|xi 
 
 TEX^irai,|j:i 
 
 T£TeX^K01|JII 
 
 T^W 
 
 
 tIXeo-ov 
 
 
 T6\eCv 
 
 TeXetv 
 
 TEXIo-ai 
 
 TETsXEK^Vai 
 
 T«Xi5v 
 
 teXwv 
 
 TEX^o-as 
 
 teteXekcAs 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 M. p. 
 
 T«\ov|Jiai 
 
 teXoBjiw 
 
 
 T€T^X£0-(J.ai. 
 
 iriKoi^tf/ 
 
 
 4TEXEO-dlX1]V 
 
 lTtTEX^CT-(lT|V 
 
 Te\»nai 
 
 
 TEXE'o-Cll|J.ai 
 
 TETEXcO-fLEVOS U 
 
 T£Xo£(1.11V 
 
 TeXo£|j.i]v 
 
 t£Xeo-oC(miv 
 
 T£TeX£0-|J.4vOS EtilV 
 
 TsXoB 
 
 
 T^XEO-ai 
 
 tet4Xeo-o 
 
 Tc\EC<r8ai 
 
 TeXeto-flai 
 
 TEX^o-ao-Sai 
 
 T£TEXIo-9ttl 
 
 TEXouftEVOS 
 
 T«Xoi)fJl(VO$ 
 
 TeXeo-d|JiEvos 
 
 TitiKarfAvoi 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 t nssive. 
 
 
 
 T«X«o-9rio-0|).tti 
 
 lTEX^ir9TlV 
 
 
 „• .g J 
 
 
 TEXE(r9dj 
 
 
 
 TeX«o-6Tio-oC(i.T)y 
 
 TiKiir6ili\v 
 
 
 III 
 
 
 TE\60"tFTITt 
 
 
 TeX6o-9if)o-€o-9ai, 
 
 TEXEa-9f)i'ai 
 
 
 
 T«XEO-6T|(rd|UV0S 
 
 TEXeo-SEts 
 
 
106 
 
 PARADI&MS OF VERBS. 
 
 [341 
 
 341 
 
 
 SijXo-o) manifest. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Active. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 Perf. Plnp. Active. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 8T|X.d> 
 
 ST|Xc^crti> 
 
 
 SeS^XuKa 
 
 
 eS^Xovv 
 
 
 cS^Xua-a 
 
 48ESl]X<iKT] 
 
 Sub. 
 
 St^Xu 
 
 
 8T|X(io-(l> 
 
 SeS'qXuKiD 
 
 Opt. 
 
 8i]XoCt|V, -oE|jii 
 
 8T)X(i(roi|u 
 
 ST|X(i(rai.|i,i 
 
 8e8T|XciK0i,|ii 
 
 Imv. 
 
 S^Xou 
 
 
 StjXuo-ov 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Si]\ouv 
 
 8TiX(&arciv 
 
 8'T]Xuo-ai 
 
 8£ST|X(aK^vai 
 
 Par. 
 
 Si)Xuv 
 
 Si^Xu^ruv 
 
 &T|X<tf(rds 
 
 8€St]Xo)K(&S 
 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 ST|XoS|xai 
 
 Si]X<icro|jLai 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 SE8^X(i))i.ai 
 
 
 eSi)X(>v|M1V 
 
 (as pass., 496) 
 
 1 
 
 48£ST)Xt&|l,T|V 
 
 Sub. 
 
 Si]X(o|iai 
 
 
 
 8£St]X<i))1.^VOS U 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Sl^XoCfLTIV 
 
 8T|X(i><roC|iT)v 
 
 
 Se8t)X<i>)jicvos Ai\v 
 
 Imv. 
 
 8t]Xov 
 
 
 
 Sc8ifjXuo-o 
 
 Inf. 
 
 8T)Xoi)o-8ai 
 
 Si)Xi&(rc(r6ai. 
 
 
 8£Si]Xm<r8ai 
 
 Par. 
 
 8t)Xou|i.evos 
 
 8i)X(i>(ro|JLEVos 
 
 
 8e8'i]Xci>|i4vos 
 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Fut. Perf. Pass. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 8T|X(i>6ii(ro|iai 
 
 l8r|Xi&et]v 
 
 8EST|Xciiro|i.ai 
 
 Sub. 
 
 J.XO 
 
 
 8i]Xueu 
 
 
 Opt, 
 
 f3 E E 
 
 8i]X(i>0i]<ro(|xiiv 
 
 8T|Xu6e(i)v 
 
 S£8T|X(i>iro(|ir|v 
 
 Imv. 
 
 lil- 
 
 
 8T]X(iei)Ti 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 8i)Xm6/iir«'^>>' 
 
 StiXuSTjvai 
 
 8ESi]Xi&o-€(r6ai 
 
 Par, 
 
 
 8T]X(i)6t](ro|j,cvo$ 
 
 StiX(i>9e(s 
 
 SeST|X<D(rd|xevos 
 
 342 
 
 ii 
 
 oTcAAo) (arfX-) send. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Active. 
 
 future Active. 
 
 AoriBt Active. 
 
 Perf. PIup. Active. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 OT^XXu 
 
 (tteXu 
 
 
 iirra.'Kxo. 
 
 
 SoTtXXoV 
 
 
 tOTClXtt 
 
 IotoXkti 
 
 Sub. 
 
 (TT^XXu 
 
 
 (TTcCXu 
 
 ^o-raXKu 
 
 Opt. 
 
 CTT^XXoifU 
 
 o-TcXoCi)v, -otp 
 
 irreCXai|u 
 
 l(rTdXKOi|u 
 
 Imv. 
 
 o-r^XXe 
 
 
 o-T€tXov 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 oT^XXeiv 
 
 oreXttv 
 
 o-TctXai 
 
 io-raXK^vai 
 
 Par. 
 
 o-r^XXuv 
 
 o-reXiov 
 
 oTcfXds 
 
 co-TaXK(is 
 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 <rT^XXo|i,ai 
 
 crreXoOfiai 
 
 
 £(rraXu.ai 
 4o-TdXnT]v 
 
 
 ioTtXXoimv 
 
 
 lo-reiXanTiv 
 
 Sub. 
 
 trriXXdiuat 
 <rTeXXot(iTiv 
 
 
 (TTcCXiupai 
 
 la-TaX|i.4vos u 
 
 Opt. 
 
 <rTeXotnT)v 
 
 0-T€lXaC|lT]V 
 
 E<rTaX|i,^vas Ai\v 
 
 Imv. 
 
 OT^XXou 
 
 
 OTSlXoi, 
 
 VoTaXoro 
 
 Inf. 
 
 irr<XX€o-9oi 
 
 <rT«X«I(r8ai 
 
 o-TcCXao-9ai, 
 
 corTd.Xfltti 
 
 Par. 
 
 O-TcXXofiCVOS 
 
 <rTeXoi|ievos 
 
 2d Fat. Passive. 
 
 <rTeiXd(j.€vos 
 2d Aor. Passive. 
 
 lo-raXfi^vos 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 (rraX^jo-onai 
 
 loToXllV 
 
 
 Sub. 
 
 .-.S " 
 
 
 irTO.Xo> 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 III 
 
 OTttX'rlO-of(I.TlV 
 
 OToXetriv 
 
 
 Imv. 
 
 
 
 (TraXifSi 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 ** b b 
 
 o^a.AT]o*€(rOoii 
 
 o-roX'fjvoi 
 
 
 Par. 
 
 
 (rTaXTitrduevos 
 
 on-oXeCs 
 
 
344] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 107 
 
 343. <l>aiv(ti ((jbav-) show (in second tenses, appear). 
 
 Pr. Impf. Act. 
 
 Future Active. Aortot Active. 
 
 let Perf. Plup. A 
 
 . 2a Perf. Plup. A, 
 
 c}>aCvu 
 
 <j>avu 
 
 ir^<|>aYKa 
 
 Tr^if'l'"'' 
 
 i^awov 
 
 
 C<)ii]va iirc(|iaYKi] 
 
 iirE^i)Vi) 
 
 1 lafvoi 
 
 
 < rfpm irfdxxYKo) 
 
 < iTJvaipLi ircc laYKOijjLi 
 
 irE<j>i)va> 
 ir« iVjvoiiu 
 
 ( ia(voi)u 
 
 (|>avoCi)v, -oiixi 
 
 oatvc 
 
 
 ( tfpiov 
 
 
 < laCvEiv 
 < laCyuv 
 
 ijiavctv 
 ij>avuv 
 
 < ><ivoi iTEtba^K^vai 
 <j>^vds ir£ij>a7K(Ss 
 
 7rc<|>i]Vias 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. M 
 
 P. 
 
 (|>aCva|iai. 
 
 ij>avo0|iai 
 
 ir^<|>a(r|j,ai 
 
 E<|>ai,vd|XT|V 
 
 
 «4>i1vd|iT]V lir»t>d(rfiT|v 
 
 <j>aCvii>|i.ai 
 
 
 < i^ivuitai irci)>a<r)iivos » 
 
 < ii]vaC|i,T)v ir<^a<r|i^vos etijv 
 
 < iai.voC|ii)v 
 
 i|>avoC)i.i]v 
 
 (jiaCvov 
 
 
 4»^vaL (ire^afao) 
 
 (jtaCvco-Sai 
 
 4>avei(rBai 
 
 1 irjvao-Sai, irc^dvSai 
 
 (|>aivdj:.cvos 
 
 4>avoii|iEvos 
 
 <|>T]vd|itvo3 irc<^ao-)i.^vos 
 
 
 2d Future P. 
 
 2d Aorist P. ist Aorist P. 
 
 
 
 (jiavrjo-ofiat 
 
 e4>di>i)V i^av9T\v 
 
 
 «• <n S 
 
 (f)avi|iroC;j.T]v 
 
 diavu i|>av6u 
 
 
 |I5 
 
 
 1 >dvT)9i 1 idvBTjTi 
 < >avf)vai < >av6f)vai 
 
 
 t>-9-|- 
 
 <|>av^o-C(r6ai 
 
 
 
 (jiavt|(rd|t{vos 
 
 4>avE(s <|iav6cCs 
 
 
 344. 
 
 A.ewra) (A.i7r-) leave. 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Act. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 2a Aorist Act. 2d Perf. Plup. A. 
 
 XeCirto 
 
 XcCilfu 
 
 
 XA.oiira 
 
 SXciTTOV 
 
 
 ^iirov 
 
 IXEXoCini 
 
 XcCiru 
 
 
 XCiru 
 
 X«Xotir(i> 
 
 XE{iroi|xi 
 
 XfC'^oifu, 
 
 XCiroifii 
 
 XcXoliroi|ii 
 
 Xetire 
 
 
 Xtire 
 
 
 XcCtteiv 
 
 XeCilreiv 
 
 Xiirctv 
 
 X<Xoiir^vai 
 
 XcCiruv 
 
 XeCi|/<i>v 
 
 Xiiriiv 
 
 XeXoiirus 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 M.P. 
 
 XcCiropat 
 
 Xc<i|/o)iat 
 
 
 X^€i|ip.at 
 
 eX€i'ird)i,i]v 
 
 
 IXiird|i.t)v 
 
 cX«X<{|l,)l,T|V 
 
 XeCir^liai 
 
 
 XCiruuai. 
 
 \l1to(|l,T]V 
 
 XcXcip|t^vos a 
 
 XeitroiiiTiv 
 
 X«i|>oC|ii)v 
 
 XcXei|i|Uvos ih\v 
 
 XcCirou 
 
 
 Xiirov 
 
 XiXci<|ro 
 
 X«Cir£o-9ai 
 
 XECi|/e(rSai 
 
 XiTT^o-Sai 
 
 XeXci<j>eai 
 
 X:iird|xcvos 
 
 X«i|>d|icvos 
 
 XiirdpiEvos 
 
 XcXei|ji,|i4vos 
 
 
 1st Future Pass 
 
 let Aorist Pass. 
 
 Fut. Perf. Pass. 
 
 
 Xa<f>8]^(ro|iai, 
 
 iXEC<|>eTiv 
 
 XEXcCi|(opLai 
 
 d « g 
 
 
 X«i<{ 
 
 leu 
 
 
 3"?T 
 
 Xci.4iBT|(roC)iT|K 
 
 Xei, 
 
 lOcCifV 
 
 XeXeii|ioC|j.tiv 
 
 fe fib 
 
 
 \tl< 
 
 lOt^Tl 
 
 
 1^;?;? 
 
 Xci.<f>9^(r€ir8ai 
 
 Xei< 
 
 i6f)vai 
 
 XcXcC'jrcs-9ai 
 
 
 XEi,4i8T]o-d|j,cvos Xeii 
 
 >ec(s 
 
 XEXei<Jrd|ji,evos 
 
108 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [346 
 
 345. 
 
 piTrrto [pT^-, piff)-) throw. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. i.ct. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 2d Perf. Plup. Act. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 plTTTU 
 
 pX>|/<j 
 
 
 ^^pXd,tt 
 
 
 SppTlTTOV 
 
 
 i^J,T^a 
 
 Sub. 
 
 ptlTTU 
 
 
 pLl|/CU 
 
 IppidKi) 
 eppXijioip 
 
 Opt. 
 
 piirroi|j.i 
 
 ptl|fOl|Jll 
 
 pi\ rai^L 
 
 Imv. 
 
 piirre 
 
 
 piljfOV 
 
 
 laf. 
 
 piirrav 
 
 ^t.|>ElV 
 
 pI\|faL 
 
 lppX4>^vai 
 
 Tar. 
 
 ptlTTUV 
 
 ptijfCDV 
 
 ^ti/as 
 
 4,S^X4.<is 
 
 
 _^M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 piirTojioi 
 
 6^piirT0|i11V 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 
 Sub. 
 
 piirT(i>|iai 
 
 
 
 l^pX|j,;ievos 1) 
 
 Opt. 
 
 pXirTo£p,iiv 
 
 
 
 ipjiif,\i.ivos lir^ii 
 
 Imv. 
 
 ptlTTOU 
 
 
 
 tppXijfa 
 
 Inf. 
 
 pfirreo-Sai. 
 
 
 
 lppt<j>eai 
 
 Par. 
 
 piirro|i,evos 
 
 
 
 cppXp,|j,^vos 
 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 pi<f>6^(rop.ai 
 
 ippt<^9i\v 
 
 c^ptijrojiab 
 
 Sub. 
 
 »• ,. <£ 
 
 
 pi<|>em 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 
 ptt{)0t](ro{fjL'qv 
 
 pZ<^9tCi\v 
 
 £ppXl|/oC|i.T)V 
 
 Imv. 
 
 s.&% 
 
 
 pit l9l]Tl 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 > 'i-'i 
 
 pi<t>6^<reir6ai 
 
 pitjjOijvoi 
 
 I^pti|fccr6ai 
 
 Par. 
 
 
 pii|>9T](rd)xevas 
 
 pXi)>eeCs 
 
 £^pX\j/d|ievos 
 
 a. 
 
 Le93 common are 
 
 2d aor. P. eppC<jniv, 
 
 etc., 2d fut. P. 
 
 pi4>TJ<ro|xai, etc. 
 
 346. dAAao-cro) (aXXay-) exchange. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Act. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 2d Perf. Plup. Act. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 d\.\do-<r<o 
 
 dWd^u 
 
 
 ■ijXXoxa 
 
 
 ■liWao-o-ov 
 
 
 IjUaSa 
 
 ^iXXdxT) 
 
 Sub. 
 
 dXXdo-o-cj 
 
 
 dUdlu 
 
 ^jXXdxci) 
 
 Opt. 
 
 dWdo-(roi|ii 
 
 d\\dfoi|i.i 
 
 dXXd^aip 
 
 '^XXdxoi(u 
 
 Imv. 
 
 dWao-o-t 
 
 
 dWafov 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 dXXdo-o-civ 
 
 dXXd^dv 
 
 dWd^ai 
 
 ^XXax^vai 
 
 Par. 
 
 dWdo-o-uv 
 
 dWd^oiv 
 
 dXXd^ds 
 
 'f|XXax<is 
 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 M. p. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 dWd<ro-0|tai 
 
 dWd^ofiai 
 
 
 'i^XXayiiai 
 
 
 f|\Xao-(rd|ir|V 
 
 
 ■f|XXo|dnriv 
 
 TjXXavuriv 
 
 Sub. 
 
 aXXda-a-muai. 
 ttX\a(r<roC|jniv 
 
 
 dXXd^u)iai 
 
 'f|XXa'yp,^vos w 
 
 Opt. 
 
 dWaSoCp,i]v 
 
 dXXa|ai)i.T]V 
 
 ^XXa7u.^vos etriv 
 
 Imv. 
 
 dWdcrcrou 
 
 
 fiXXa^ai 
 
 i)XXtt£o 
 
 Inf. 
 
 dX.Xdcro-e(r9aL 
 
 dWd^co-Sai 
 
 dXXdiao-Sai. 
 
 ^XXdxBtti 
 
 Par. 
 
 d\\a(r<ro)i£vo5 
 
 dXXa|d|X(vos 
 
 2d Future Pass. 
 
 dXXa|d|icvos 
 
 2d Aorist Pass. 
 
 '^XXayii.^i'os 
 
 Ind. 
 
 "m C 
 
 dWaYVjo-OjAai 
 
 flXXdyriv 
 
 
 Sub. 
 
 ||| 
 
 
 dXXavu 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 
 dWaYncoCifiiv 
 
 dXXa^c^Tjv 
 
 
 Imv. 
 
 III 
 
 
 dXXdynSi 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 dX\o7^o-€<r9ai 
 
 dXXaY<ivat 
 
 
 Par. 
 
 
 dXXaY'qo-dp.EVos 
 
 dXXa7c(s 
 
 
 a. Less common are 1st aor. P. fiXXdxflnv, etc., 1st fut. P. dXXax6^<ro|uii. 
 
848] 
 
 PAMADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 109 
 
 347. 
 
 wudm [ttlO-) persuade, Mid. obey. 
 
 Pr. Impf. A. 
 
 Future A. 
 
 Aorist A. Ist Perf. Plup. A. 2d Pert. Plup. A. 
 
 irtiCeo) 
 
 ircCo-u 
 
 ir4ireiKa 
 
 TT^iroiBtt trust 
 
 ivaiov 
 
 
 ?ir6i<ra eireir 
 
 eCkti 
 
 eTTCiroWt) 
 
 irefSu) 
 
 
 irfla-a ireireCKM 
 
 Treiro£9<i) 
 
 ircCdoip.i 
 
 •ntla-oif.}. 
 
 ■ircfa-aip.1 'n'€7rvCKQi[jLL 
 
 irciro(8oi)u 
 
 irtlBe 
 
 
 ireio-ov 
 
 
 
 irtWeiv 
 
 ireio-siv 
 
 irtio-ai ireiTEH 
 
 c^vai 
 
 irtiroi9^voi 
 
 ■KiViuiV 
 
 TreCo-uv 
 
 ■ir«£o-ds TreireiKws 
 
 ir€iroi9(6s 
 
 Pr. Impf. M. P. 
 
 Future M. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plup. M. P. 
 
 irtC9o|iai 
 
 ircC(ro|iai 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 ■ir^irei<r|j.ai. 
 
 lireiBdiiTiv 
 
 
 
 l'iri.ire£(r|Ji.'r]V 
 
 irEC6u)i.ai 
 
 
 
 ircircto-p.^vos u 
 
 irei9o£|xT]v 
 
 ir£i(ro£|i.iiv 
 
 
 IrCTTClO-fl^VOS e1CT|V 
 
 n-eCeov 
 
 
 
 ir^Treitro 
 
 n-eCSeo-Sai 
 
 ircC(re<r8ai 
 
 
 7r€Tr€to-9tti 
 
 irEiS6|j.cvos 
 
 ircurd)i.evos 
 
 
 irEirci<r|i^vos 
 
 
 Future P. 
 
 Aorist P. 
 
 
 
 
 irEio-9^<ro)i.ai 
 
 k'Kiivir\v 
 
 
 
 d o. g 
 
 
 ir€LO*9w 
 
 
 
 ill 
 
 irei<r9T|(roC^T|v 
 
 ir«ir9£CT)V 
 ireCo-BiiTi 
 
 
 
 ^ 11 
 
 ireio-Sfjo-eo-Bat 
 ir£i.o-9T|ird(i,«vos 
 
 ircurBfjvai 
 im<r9e(s 
 
 
 
 a. Poetic are 2d aor. A. Siri9ov, etc., 2d aor. M. Iiri6dfii]v, ete. 
 
 348. 
 
 KOfjii^di [KOfuS-) bring. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. A. 
 
 Future A. 
 
 Aorist A. 
 
 
 Perf. Plup. A. 
 
 KO|J.(^<a 
 
 KOfiiu 1426) 
 
 
 
 K«Kd|UKa 
 
 EKOIU^OV 
 
 
 cKd|ii<ra 
 
 
 ckiko|iCkt| 
 
 Kop.C^u 
 
 
 KO^la-a 
 
 
 KEKO|Jl{Ka> 
 
 KOjlCJoifU 
 
 ko|j,i.oCt]i', -otfu Ka)i.Cirai|u 
 
 
 KCKOfiCKOip 
 
 K6\U.Xfi 
 
 
 KO{XlO-OV 
 
 
 
 KOflC^ClV 
 
 KO|l,lEtV 
 
 Ko|x((rai 
 
 
 KEKOfllKCVai 
 
 KOf.iX,av 
 
 KOfUUV 
 
 KOfiCo-ds 
 
 
 KEKO|J.tKlis 
 
 M. P. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 M. P. 
 
 KO|ji.(£o|jiai, 
 
 KO)uoS|i.ai 
 
 
 
 KEKdiiio-uai 
 kvxKOf.la-f,r\v 
 
 kK0f.il6^i\v 
 
 
 lKa|xura|j|.T]V 
 
 
 KO|ji(tuuai 
 
 K0|U|0C)1T)V 
 
 
 KO)i((r<i>|j.ai 
 
 
 KCKO|J,'.(r|UvOS u 
 
 KO^I.oC|l,T)V 
 
 KO|XtO-o£|i11V 
 
 
 KeKO|U(r|i.^vos Ai\v 
 
 KOf,C(fiV 
 
 
 Koixio-at 
 
 
 KEKdfUO-O 
 
 K0|i(^eir9ai 
 
 K0|i.ui:<r9ai. 
 
 Ko)i£o-a(r9ai 
 
 
 KCK0)tC(r9ai 
 
 KO|Ju£d)UVOS 
 
 KOflLOvpi^OS 
 
 Passive. 
 
 K0|UO-dp.EV0S 
 
 Passive. 
 
 
 KtKOfAO-^VOt 
 
 
 KO)j,iir9^a-o|*ai 
 
 I eK0|i.Cir8T]V 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kou,io-9o> 
 
 
 
 2 bE 
 
 KO)ii(r9T|(ro(|ii]V Ko;iio-9«(i)V 
 
 
 
 1 ii. 
 
 
 K0U.l(r9TITI, 
 
 
 
 > oo 
 
 Ka)uo-8^o-6(r9ai K0|jiiir9fjvai 
 KO|iio-BT](rd|XEVos K0|U(r6c(s 
 
 
 
110 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [S49 
 
 349. 
 
 TiOrj/jLi (6e-) put. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Act. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 iBt Perf. Plup. Act. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 IX 
 
 S^o-w 
 
 SBriKtt 
 
 T^BiiKa 
 
 ETtBtCKT) 
 
 Sub. 
 
 TlSu 
 
 
 Bu 
 
 tcBcCku 
 
 Opt. 
 
 TL9e{iiv 
 
 STJ(roi)u 
 
 BtCriv 
 
 Te6E(KOl|U 
 
 Imv. 
 
 tCBsi 
 
 
 S^s 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 TiBlvai 
 
 Sifjo-civ 
 
 Bcivai 
 
 TcBciK^vai 
 
 Par. 
 
 TiBefe 
 
 Otjo-uv 
 
 BeCs 
 
 TeBeiKiis 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. M. P. 
 
 Future Mid. 
 
 2d Aorist Mid. 
 
 Perf. Plop. M. P. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 6^iro|xn.i 
 
 
 T^Beintti 
 
 
 
 £B^|jii^v 
 
 ItcBcCiliiv 
 
 Sub. 
 
 TiOuftai 
 
 
 Bco|iai 
 
 T€Bei(i4vos a 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Ttflefiniv 
 
 6l]0-o(|lT]V 
 
 B££|XT|V 
 
 Te6ci)i.^vos Ai\v 
 
 Imv. 
 
 rOecro 
 
 
 Bov 
 
 T^Bcio-o 
 
 Inf. 
 
 rCeeo-Bai 
 
 flrjo-eo-Bai 
 
 B^o-Bai 
 
 «B€to-9ai. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Ti6l)j.(vos 
 
 B'qo-diiEVOs 
 
 lat Fut. Pass. 
 
 B^p.€VOS 
 
 let A or. Pass. 
 
 TeB£i|i^vos 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 TcB^o-ofiai 
 
 MBiiv 
 
 
 Sub. 
 
 , 
 
 
 TtBm 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 |.s| 
 
 Tsflrio-oCiiiiv 
 
 TcBeCiiv 
 
 
 Imv. 
 Inf. 
 
 l^k 
 
 Ttfl^o-eo-Bai 
 
 t^Btiti 
 Tcflijvoi. 
 
 
 Par. 
 
 
 Te8tio-d|j.6vos 
 
 TcBets 
 
 
 350. 
 
 8t8(DyU.t (80-) 
 
 give. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. Act. 
 
 Future Active. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 )st Perf. Plup. Act 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S(Sa>|Xl 
 
 8w(ro> 
 
 
 S^SuKa 
 
 
 ISfSovv 
 
 
 £8uKa 
 
 eSeSi&kti 
 
 Sub. 
 
 SiSu 
 
 
 8o> 
 
 SeSuku 
 
 Opt. 
 
 8iSoCi)V 
 
 Siiiroi(u 
 
 Sojiiv 
 
 8£S(iKOI.|U 
 
 Imv. 
 
 SCSov 
 
 
 805 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 SiSdvai 
 
 Suo-eiv 
 
 8ovvai, 
 
 8c8uKlvai 
 
 Par. 
 
 SiSous 
 
 8(&o-(i)V 
 
 8oi<s 
 
 8e8uk(6s 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. M. P. 
 
 Future Mid. 
 
 2d Aorist Mid. 
 
 Perf. Plup. M. P. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SCSoiiai 
 
 8(io-o|jiai, 
 
 
 84Souai 
 E8c8d|ji.i)V 
 
 
 £8i8d^i]V 
 
 
 I8d|i'>]v 
 
 Sub. 
 
 8iSoijj,ai 
 Si8oC|Jii)v 
 
 
 8uu.ai 
 
 Se8o|ji^vos u> 
 
 Opt. 
 
 SoiiroCfiiiv 
 
 Soi|l,T|V 
 
 Sc8o|j.^vos c(t|V 
 
 Imv. 
 
 8C800-0 
 
 
 80V 
 
 S^Socro 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Uioa-iax 
 
 8cacr€(rBai 
 
 8d(rBai 
 
 SeSdo-Bai 
 
 Par. 
 
 SiSdficvos 
 
 8ucrd|i,£V0S 
 
 let Fut. Pass. 
 
 Sd|icvos 
 
 1st Aor. Pass. 
 
 S£S0|J.^V0S 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 SoBTJo-ofiai 
 
 48d9iiv 
 
 
 Sub. 
 
 m M 
 
 
 SoBil 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 •i <» 
 
 
 8oe€Ciiv 
 
 
 Imv. 
 
 & ° ° 
 
 8oBii(rof|j.'nv 
 
 8dBiiTi, 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 t' <a<a 
 
 8o0r|o-c(r8aL _ 
 
 8oBi)vai. 
 
 
 Par. 
 
 ~ 
 
 8oBT)0-d|J,€VOS 
 
 8oe€Cs 
 
 
352] 
 
 PARAbtOMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 351. la-TijfJiL (ora-) set up 
 
 (in perf. and 2d 
 
 aor. stand). 
 
 Pr. Impf. A. 
 
 Fut. Active. 1st Aor. 
 
 Act. 2d Aor. Act. 
 
 Perf. Plup. Act. 
 
 i;oT-i](i,i 
 
 CTTTJcroi 
 
 
 !<rrT)Ka 
 
 i<m]V 
 
 SoTiio-a i<m\v 
 
 l<rT^KT| 
 
 lOTW 
 
 trTyjo-W OTM 
 
 lirrfJKW, eoTm 
 
 lOTOCllV 
 
 (rHi(roi(i.i <rT<j(rtti|j,i <rra£iiv 
 
 ccrT<)Koi|u, IcttoCtiv 
 
 to-rt) 
 
 o-rfjo-ov oTriBi 
 
 8<rTa9i_ 
 
 to-rdvtti 
 
 OT^<r«iv OTTJo-tti OTnvoi 
 o-TTJo-wv o-T^o-as O-TOS 
 
 l<miK€vai, Itrrdvai 
 
 to-ras 
 
 eoTTlKiis, toTcSs 
 
 Pr. Impf. M. P. 
 
 Fut. Mid. 
 
 1st Aor. Mid. 
 
 Put. Perf. A. 
 
 tcrraixai 
 
 (TTTJO-Oftai 
 
 
 40T<i|<D 
 
 foTd|lT|V 
 
 
 «oTT)<rd|iTiv 
 
 
 i(rTco|jLai 
 
 
 o-Tr)crcd|j.ai 
 
 
 to~raC|ii)v 
 
 (mr](ro£(jL'qv 
 
 oTTi<ra£|iiiv 
 
 lirT^£ai|u 
 
 to-rao-o 
 
 
 irTi](rai 
 
 
 l!<rTao-9tti 
 
 0^T]0"€0"9aL 
 
 OT^c-acr9ai 
 
 eoT^i^eiv 
 
 i(TTdp.Evas 
 
 <rTti(rd|j.svos 
 
 o-Ti)o-d.n«vos 
 
 E(rrij|(i)V 
 
 
 Ist Future P. 
 
 l8t Aorist P. 
 
 
 
 (rTaflfjo-o(i.ai 
 
 ktrraSvfif 
 
 
 • ™ ST 
 
 
 o'Ta9(o 
 
 
 ill 
 
 oTo9Ti<ro£(i.i]v 
 
 trTa96£Tiv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OTttSTJcreo-Bai 
 
 crraSfivai 
 
 
 
 (rTa9T)(rd|i€vos 
 
 ffraBeis 
 
 
 352. 
 
 SeiKvii/it 
 
 (SetK-) show. 
 
 
 Pr. Impf. A. 
 
 Fut. Active. 
 
 Ist Aor. Act. 
 
 1st Perf. Plup. A, 
 
 ScCkvv|u 
 
 8cCgoi 
 
 
 hlZa\a, 
 
 cScCkvvv 
 
 
 «8Ei|a 
 
 ^SeSeCx'n 
 
 ScLKVVCil 
 
 
 Se(£<o 
 
 itlilXa 
 
 8eikvvoi)u 
 
 ScC^oip 
 
 8e{|ai)j.t 
 
 UUlxot.fx 
 
 ScCkvv 
 
 
 Setiov 
 
 
 SciKviivai. 
 
 Zit£,eiv 
 
 Sci^ai 
 
 SeSctx^vai 
 
 SeikvIjs 
 
 SeCiav 
 
 8e££as 
 
 8c8eixiis 
 
 Pr. Impf. M. P. 
 
 Future Middle. 
 
 1st Aor. Mid. 
 
 Perf. Plup. M. 
 
 8e{KVV|i.ai 
 «SaKviS|i.'i)V 
 
 ScCSojiai 
 
 
 84S£i7|jiai 
 
 
 c8ElSdflT|V 
 
 48eSe£Yl''''l'' 
 
 8eiKvii(D|iai 
 
 
 8cCSu|i.ai 
 
 8cSeiy|x^vos a 
 
 8€IKVD0£|JIT)V 
 
 8ci£oC|iii|v 
 
 8»ia(|j,T)v 
 
 8ES£l-y|l.^V0S ilT]V 
 
 Se£Kvuo-o 
 
 
 Seliai 
 
 8l8u|o 
 
 8cCKVvo-9ai 
 
 S«C|eo-eai 
 
 SeC|a<r9ai 
 
 8e8ctx^<>^<' 
 
 ScfcKvvjxevos 
 
 SctldixEvo: 
 
 8ci|d(icvos 
 
 Sf86i7|x^vos 
 
 
 Future Pass. 
 
 iBt Aorist Pass. 
 
 
 
 Scix^TOitai 
 
 ^StCxBiiv 
 
 
 ii> 
 
 
 8cix6<> 
 
 
 r?T 
 
 8eix9T]o-oC().Tiv 
 
 8eix9«£Tiv 
 
 
 |SS 
 
 
 Befxfll" 
 
 
 
 he-x^iya-tiriaA 
 
 8axB^vai 
 
 
 
 8EtxST|o-d|j.evos 
 
 8ti.xfl«fe 
 
 
112 AVOMENT. [363 
 
 FOKMATIVE ELEMENTS OF THE VERB. 
 
 353. The additions by which the different forms of a verb 
 are made from the theme, are : 
 
 1. The augment, 3. The tense and mode suffixes, 
 
 2. The reduplication, 4. The endings. 
 
 a. Of these, the suffixes and the reduplication form the stems ; the 
 endings and the augment inflect them. 
 
 Augment. 
 
 354. The augment is the sign of past time. It belongs, 
 therefore, to the past tenses of the indicative — the imperfect, 
 aorist, and pluperfect. It has two forms : 
 
 1. Syllabic augment, made by prefixing €-. 
 
 2. Temporal augment, made by lengthening an initial 
 vowel. 
 
 355. The syllabic augment belongs to verbs beginning 
 with a consonant : A-vu) loose, impf. l-Xvov ; otcAAcd send, impf. 
 
 f.-<TT(X\0V . 
 
 a. p is doubled after the syllabic augment (see 49) : pinra) throw, 
 impf. €-ppi7rrov. 
 
 b. Three verbs sometimes have r;- as augment, especially in the 
 later Attic: peXKio intend, /SouXopai wish, divap.ai am able. Thus impf. 
 
 rj-p.eKKov, r)-^ovk6p.r)V, rj-bvvdprjv. 
 
 356. The temporal augment belongs to verbs beginning 
 with a vowel: ^^.awov from iXavvw drive, wpfjitav from op/xdu) 
 move, iKerevov from^ iketctjoj supplicate, vPpi^ov from ippl^o) 
 insult. — The vowel a- becomes ?;-: ^yov from ayu lead. 
 
 a. The long vowels remain unchanged ; only 5- becomes rj- : tj3\ovv 
 from affkeu) contend. But atui hear makes a'iov. 
 
 354 D. In Hm., the augment, both syllabic and temporal, is often omitted. 
 Kvi, e\auvc, fXf, for tAue, 1j\avve. e?XE- So also in lyric poets, and the lyric 
 parts of tragic poetry ; but seldom, if ever, in the tragic dialogue. 
 
 355 D. a. In Hm., initial \ is sometimes doubled after the augment (47 D). 
 i-WiacTiTo {\ta-irofiai praii). Similarly, ^ is doubled in e-fi/iade learned, n in 
 i-vviov were sivimming, a in the verbs ireiJii) dnve and atia shake, and 8 in the 
 root 5ei- : e-crfftua drove, e-SSetae feared. 
 
 b. The other dialects have only e- as augment in jue'Wiu, etc. ; so also, in 
 general, the Attic tragedy. 
 
 358 D. In Hd., the temporal augment is often omitted ; the syllabic aug- 
 ment, only in the pluperfect. — In the Doric, o- by the temporal augment 
 becomes d- ; ayov. 
 
339] AUGMENT. 113 
 
 357. Diphthongs lengthen their _/?»•«(! vowel: ijV^avo/xijv from 
 
 aicrOdvo/j-at, perceive, jjKafov from eiKa^ia guess, laKTipov from 
 
 oiKTipui pity, rjv^ov from aii^a) increase, ifipicrKov from evpicrKU) 
 .find. 
 
 a. But ov- remains unchanged. And in the later Attic, ei-, en- and 
 sometimes ot- remain : fSpov for r/ipov found. 
 
 b. If a verb has the rough Ijreatliing, it is always retained in the 
 augmented form. 
 
 358. Augment of the Pluperfect. — The augment of the 
 pluperfect is applied to the reduplicated theme : l-Xikv-K-q. 
 But when the reduplication consists of c- (365) or «- (366), 
 the augment is omitted : perf. loraX/ca, plupf. IotoAk); (not 
 7](TTaXia)) from ariXXta send. 
 
 a. But efl-TTjKo stand makes both ciVt^kt) (older Attic) and co-tIj/o). — eoiKo 
 am like (492) takes the augment on the second syllable, i^Kr\. 
 
 b. The ' Attic reduplication ' (368) takes, as a rule, the augment in 
 the pluperfect: air-aikiiKr], perf. arr-oKaXa am lost; rjKrjKorj, perf. dxi'iKoa 
 have heard. But perf. cXrjXvBa {epxopai come) has plupf. always eXriT^vSq. 
 
 c. The omission of the pluperfect-augment in other cases than the above 
 is not strictly Attic, yet forms like aw-o\ii\ri, oiro-7r6((>6ii77j are still read in some 
 editions. 
 
 359. Syllabic Augment before Voioel- Initial. — A few verbs 
 beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment. This with 
 €- is contracted to et-: €l)(ov for e-exo"- Here belong 
 
 ayvvpi break, ea^a aor. iaa> permit, Aav. 
 
 cikl(rKopai am taken, idXiov aor., edl((o accustom, fWi^ov. 
 
 but impf. r(Ki.(rK6iirjV. eKitrcrto turn, eiKitrirov. 
 
 avhava please, eaSov aor. cXkio draw, fVKKov. 
 
 avolytt) open, aviayov. ewop-at follow, flirofiqv. 
 
 opdo) see, iapoav. ipya^ojiai work, clpya^opriv. 
 
 ovpeo) m,ake water, eaipovv. epirto or epni^a creep, tlpwov. 
 
 d>dea push, ia>6ovv. eVrtuto entertain, f'urrimv. 
 
 aviojiai luy, iajvovpr]v. ex'" '*'*®*i hold, elx°v. 
 
 a. Here belong, further, the aorists eVKov (aipea take, 539, 1), fio-a 
 r set (517 D, 7), and tWov etc., 3d aorist of iij/xi (476). Cf. also the 
 plupf. cia-T^Krj, 358 a. 
 
 b. Of these, Spaa see and av-oiya open, in addition to the syllabic 
 augment, lengthen o of the theme. 
 
 358 D, b. In Hd., the ' Attic reduplication ' is never augmented : he has 
 even aicftKoee etc. 
 
 3B9 D. Hm. has id\ii)u from efiVto press, etpvira from ipia draw, iavox^f 
 from oivoxoia pour out wine, rivSavov and ii\vSavov from avSdvai please. In 
 Hd., iyyvfu, e\Ka, iitotuu, ix" ^^^ augmented as in Att. ; avhivia has impf. 
 
114 AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. [860 
 
 c. These verbs began originally with a consonant, F or <t\ so iymiu, 
 originally Fdymni, aorist 6fa|a, 6a|a; 'ifnta, originally ffffma, impf. ftrefmov, 
 eepnoy, etfmov. 
 
 d. Irregularly, eopriC" ^'««P festival has the augment on the second vowel; 
 itipraCov instead of riopra^ov, cf . 36. 
 
 Augment of CoMPoirerD Veebs. 
 
 360. Compounds, consisting of a preposition and a verb, 
 take the augment after the preposition : eicr-c^epio brinrf in, 
 
 eic-e^epov; irpocr-dyui lead to, Trpoa-rjyov. 
 
 a. Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before e- : diro-tj^epto 
 bear away, a7r-4<f>epov. But nept and np6 retain the final vowel : irpo is 
 often contracted with e : Trpo-^aiVw advance, irpoipaivov for irpo-efimvov. 
 
 b. The prepositions c^, cv, o-vv have their proper form before e-: 
 efcreli/a extend, e^-ereivov', e/x/3a\Xa) invade, ev-e^aWov', crvWeyoj collect, 
 crvv-eXe^a. 
 
 361. In some cases the preposition has so far lost its separate force 
 that the augment is placed before it: Ka6evSa> sleep, cKd$€vSov (j'et also 
 KadrivSov) ; KaOt^to sit, €Kadi(ov. So some forms of dcjitqpi, (476 a), Kiidrjpat 
 (484, 3), ap.(j)uvvvpL (536, 1). 
 
 a. Some verbs have two augments, one before and one after the 
 preposition; dvexopai endure, Tiveif^opjjv', dvop66(o set right, rjvoipdow, 
 evoxXeay annoy, Tjvax^ovv. 
 
 362. Denominative verbs (308) derived from nouns already com- 
 pounded are not properly compound verbs. Such take the augment 
 at the beginning: oiKohopia huild (from oiKo-hopos Iwuse-build&i-), w'ko- 
 dofiovv, 
 
 a. This rule sometimes holds good when such verbs begin with a 
 preposition: thus evavrwopai oppose (from ivavrios opposite, not from 
 iv and avTioofiaC), rjvavnovprjv ', pfTeapl^a raise aloft (from p^reapos aloft), 
 ep€Teatpi^ov. But more commonly the augment comes after the prepo- 
 sition: iKKkiqaid^to Tiold an ass&mhly {lKKKr\(Tia), e^eKXijaria^ov', vTvoTTTeva 
 suspect (ynoTTTos subjected), virimTevov. — The verb irapoivea behave as 
 drunken (napoivos) takes two augments : iirapavow. 
 
 b. The verb Siairclm arbitrate (from SiaiTa arbitration) is augmented as if 
 it were a compound of Sii ; SiTfrijira : and in compounds it takes two aug- 
 ments ; KBT-eSiT^TT^ffa. 
 
 c. Verba beginning with eZ well and Svtr- ill have the augment after the 
 adverb when the second part of the compound begins with a short vowel : 
 SvirapeCTeea am displeased {SvaapftTTOs), SvffTjpfffTovv, evepyeTew benefit ^tvepy^TTjs), 
 fi/TjpyeTovy, also evepyirovv. But ^vfrrvx^t^ am unlucky (Sutrrux^s), iSvffT^xovv. 
 
 idviavov, 2d aor. eaSof. the rest usually (perhaps always) reject €, and take 
 either the temporal augment (so a\l(TKop.ai, ipda), or none at all (so inolyu, 
 ido), ipyd^Oflou, udeu, i)v4ofjuu). 
 
se*?] REDUPLICATION, 115 
 
 Reduplication. 
 
 363. The reduplication is the sign of completed action. It 
 belongs, therefore, to the perfect, pluperfect, and future per- 
 fect, through all the modes. It consists properly in a repeti- 
 tion of the initial sound. 
 
 364. Verbs beginning with a consonant repeat that conso- 
 nant with e : A.u<o, perf. \k-\vKa.. A rough mute becomes smooth 
 in the reduplication (73 a); Ovia sacrifice, ti-6vKa. 
 
 365. In verbs beginning with a double consonant, two con- 
 sonants, or p-, the reduplication omits the consonant and con- 
 sists of e- only, p is doubled (49). 
 
 Thus i/reijSo/xat lie, perf. i-ij/evafji.a.i (not ^^€-^jl£va■|JUlt) ; OTeAAo) 
 send, £-crTa/VKa ; plirTui throw, e-ppl<f>a. 
 
 a. But before a mute and a liquid the reduplication has generally 
 its full form : ypd(j)a> loi'its, ye-ypacjia. Still yv- takes e- only : yiyvaxTKa 
 (yyo-) hnow, €-yvaiKa. And rarely /3X-, yX- do the same. 
 
 b. The perfects Ki-KTrifiai possess, fie-pvrjfim remember, from roots kto- 
 and p-va-, are against the rule. So ■ni-ivTaiK.a am fallen, ire-irrapai am 
 spread (presents irtTrrco and TreTavvvp.i). 
 
 366. The reduplication has the form u- in : 
 
 eX-\ri(^a from Xa/i,Sov(B(Xa/3-) tahe. ei-paprm it is fated (jiep-, 518, 36). 
 
 ei-\Tjxa from \ayx^dvi)}{\ax-) get hy lot. eL-\oxa from \4y<o gather. 
 et-pT]Ka have said (pc-, 539, 8). fii-ti'-Xfyfiat from 8ia-\4yop.ai con- 
 
 verse. 
 But Xeyo) speah has Ae'-Xey/iai. 
 
 367. Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel. 
 Thus the reduplication in these vei'bs has the same form as the 
 temporal augment: eXirtX" hope, ■^A.iriKa; 6pix,d(ii move, (op/xi^Ka; 
 
 aTTopew am at a loss, rjTroprjKa ; alpiui tahe, ripTjKO.. 
 
 363 D. The reduplication is regularly retained in Hm. ; yet we find Se'xo- 
 rai (for SeSe'xaTat, pf. 3d pi. of 56;i^o;xot receive) ; ef/tai, ttrrai (orig. Ffifiiat, 
 Fsffrai, from 'dvvvfu elotlie) ; tpxarai, epxctro or iepxaro (from epyu or itpyaj 
 shut) ; avaya order. Cf. pf . o?5o know in all dialects. The long d remains 
 unchanged in the defective perfect participles, dSriKiis sated (aor. opt. aS^ircie 
 might be sated), and dpri/ievos distressed. 
 
 In Hd., an initial vowel in some words remains short in the perfect. 
 
 365 D. Hm. has ^epma/ievos soiled (for ippvwaiiivos) ; but, on the other 
 hand, e^^ope (for fxe-iJiope) from fieipofiai reeeive part, iffffv^ai (for tre-frvfioLi) from 
 (Tfiai drive, like the verbs with initial p. In S^i-ioiKa and Ssi-Sia fear (490 D 6), 
 8e/-Se'7/»oi greet (628 D 3), the reduplication is irregularly lengthened. 
 
 b. The Ionic has ^-kttj/ioi regularly formed. 
 
116 REDUPLICATION. SUFFIXES. [368 
 
 368. 'Attic Reduplication.'' — Some verbs, beginning with a-, 
 e-, 0-, followed by a single consonant, prefix tbat vowel and 
 consonant : the vowel of the second syllable is then length- 
 ened. This is called ' Attic reduplication.' 
 
 Thus dXei^co (aXt0-) anoint^ dX-TjXKfta, dX-^Xi/i/iai ; d/covco Tiear^ 
 aK-tjKoa (but perf. mid. yxoviriiai) ; opiatroa (opvx-) dig, 6p-aipv)^a, 
 op-a>pvypai\ iXaiva (eXa-) drive. eX-ryXaxa, e\-rj\apm\ eXdyx'^ convict, 
 eX-t'lXeypai, etc. Irregularly, iyclpa (eyep-) wake has eyp-ijyopa, but 
 the perf. mid. is regular : iy-fiyeppai. 
 
 369. E as reduplication tefore a vowel-initial. — The verbs mentioned 
 in 359 have e- for the reduplication also, and this with initial e- is 
 contracted to ft- : ayvvpi hreah (orig. fdyvvpi, perf. fefaya), taya ; 
 cBl^co accustom, e'idiKa (from e-ediKo). — opdio see vaaiies iapuKa; av-oiya> 
 open, dv-eaya or dv-ecfx". — The root etx- makes perf. e-oiKa am like, 
 appear, plup. c-cokti. Similarly the root e6- or rjd- makes ei-a>da am 
 accustomed. 
 
 370. In compound verbs, and verbs derived from compounds, the 
 reduplication has the same place as the augment. See 360-363. 
 
 371. Reduplication in the Present. — A different kind of re- 
 duplication is that which appears in the present system of about twenty 
 verbs. The initial consonant is repeated with i: yi-yvwa-Kio (yi/o-) 
 know; Ti-dripi (5c-) put. In trip-nXrjpi Jill and nlfi-vprjpi hum this 
 reduplication is strengthened by p,. 
 
 a. For reduplication in the second aorist, see 436. 
 
 Tense and Mode Suffixes. 
 
 372. The tense-suffixes, which are added- to the theme to 
 form the tense-stems, are the following : 
 
 For the Present System, -o|e-, -■'"[e-, -t'lo-, -v^U; -av°|e-, -ye^le-, -va-, 
 -W-, -(TK'le, or none. 
 
 388 D, In Hm., more verbs receive the Attic redupl., and sometimes 
 without lengthening the vowel after it : a\-d\Tiiim rounder from aA.c{-o/xat, d\- 
 o\i5KTi)/ioi am distressed {ct. Hd. &\vKTa(a am distressed), &i>-ripa am filed from 
 &papltrKa> {apA, ip-4pnrToiTOva ipeiiru (epiir-) oi}erfhrow, oS-dSvtrrai is wroth (bSva"-), 
 ip-apa am roused from upi/u/ii (op-) etc. — also the defective perfects, av-iimBe 
 issues (or issued), iir-ey-rimSf is (or was) close upon. For aK-ax-p^vos sharpened, 
 see 53 D a. — Hd. has irregularly apatpriKa from aipe-ta take. 
 
 369 D. For d-oiOa, Hm. has also c-aifla (Hd. only ^a$a) : the orig. root was 
 perhaps o-fijfl-, pf. e-trFaS-a (28 a). — Further, Hm. has ^\-ir-a (feAT-) cause to 
 hope, pf . ioKTra Jiope, plup. idKirea ; and %pSu (Fepy-, Eng. work) do, pf . topya, 
 plup. i6pyta ; also i-eppevos from eJpa join. 
 
 372 D. For epic first aorist forms with suffix -(ro|e- see 428 D b. — For <j 
 
STB] SUFFIXES. ENDINGS. II7 
 
 Future system, -<T<'\e-. 
 
 First aorist system, -a-a-. 
 
 Second aorist system, -o|e-, or none. 
 
 First perfect system, -ra- (plupf. -kjj- or -Kei-). 
 
 Second perfect system, -a- (plupf. -,j- or -«-). 
 
 Perfect middle system, none (future perfect -o-°|e-). 
 
 Fii-st passive system, -$€- (future passive -er,<j<'\,-). 
 
 Second passive system, -€- (future passive -rf<T'>\r). 
 
 a. In these suffixes the variaile vowel {o\i) appears as before /i or 
 !>, and in the optative ; otherwise as e : Xtfo-mt y, \co-i-fit, X(fe-Te. 
 
 373. The Subjunctive puts the long variable vowel -"|,- Ib the 
 place of the final vowel of the tense-suffix. But in the aorist passive 
 -"I,- is added to the tense-stem. So too in the present and second 
 aorist, when there is no tense-suffix (^i-forms). 
 
 374. The Optative adds the mode-suffix -i- or -11;- to the tense- 
 stem: Xvo-i-fu, So-irj-v. 
 
 a. The form -irj- is used only before active endings. It is always 
 employed in the singvlar of tenses which have the fii-inflection (385) ; 
 80-irj-v, \vde-iri-v. In the dual and plural of these tenses, it sometimes 
 occurs, but these foi-ms belong to the later Attic and the common 
 dialect; \v6fiqTf, hoirjirav. It is also regularly used in the singular of 
 contract forms : Tljiao-'n)-v, contr. rl/jLciriv. 
 
 b. Before -v in the 3d plur. active, -le- is always used ; Auo-ie-y. — For -lo- 
 as mode-suflBx in the first aorist, see 434. 
 
 Endings. 
 
 375. There are two series of endings, one for the active 
 voice, the other for the middle. The passive aorist has the 
 endings of the active ; the 23assive future, those of the middle. 
 
 a. The endings of the finite modes are called personal endings, be- 
 cause they have different forms for the three persons. 
 
 doubled in the future and first aorist Bee 420 D, 428 D a. — ^For ' Doric ' future 
 with suffix -(rc"|e- see 426. 
 
 The suffix of the pluperfect was originally -keo-, -eo-, which appears in 
 some of the Ionic forms : see 468 D. 
 
 373 D, Hm. often has -o|e- instead of -"[tj- in the subjunctive; in the ac- 
 tive before the endings -rov, -juev, -tc, and in middle forms. This forma- 
 tion occurs chiefly in the first aorist, the second aorist of the ^i-form, and 
 the second aorist passive. See these tenses severally, 433 D b, 444 D, 473 
 D a. In other tenses this formation is less frequent. It is seldom found in 
 the present indicative of verbs in -<a. 
 
 374 D, a. Hm. almost never has -ir;- in the dual and plural. For contract 
 optatives in Hm. and Hd. see 410 D a. 
 
 9 
 
118 
 
 ENBiyes. 
 
 [376 
 
 376. Indicative, 
 
 StrBJUNCTIVB, 
 
 AND Optative. 
 
 
 
 ACTITE. 
 
 
 Middle 
 
 
 
 Principal tense^ 
 
 Past tenses. 
 
 Principal tenses. 
 
 Past tenses. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 -fU 
 
 -V 
 
 -jiai 
 
 
 -H-V 
 
 3 
 
 -, [-crt] 
 
 -s 
 
 -trai 
 
 
 -iro 
 
 3 
 
 -a-i [-Ti} 
 
 
 -Tat 
 
 
 -TO 
 
 D. 2 
 
 -TOP 
 
 -TOV 
 
 -(t6ov 
 
 
 -adov 
 
 3 
 
 -TOP 
 
 -Tr]v 
 
 -a-6ov 
 
 
 -a-ffriv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 -fi€v [-fies] 
 
 -/lei/ [-/ifj] 
 
 -lieda 
 
 
 -fieda 
 
 3 
 
 -T€ 
 
 -T€ 
 
 -a-Bt 
 
 
 -ude 
 
 3 
 
 -V<Tl [-ITl] 
 
 -V, -a-av 
 
 -yrai 
 
 
 -VTO 
 
 a. The endings in brackets are earlier forms, not used in Attic Greek, but 
 found in other dialects. For change of -ti, -vti, to -at, -vcn, see 69. 
 
 377. The ending -a-Ba for -s (second person singular) is found in a 
 few /ai-forms: edirj-a-Ba thou saidst. And in presents of tlie /u-form 
 the ending -Sa-t is used for -va-i : see 385, 7. 
 
 378. The ending of the first person plural is also used for the ^rst person 
 dual. — A special ending -fieSov, for the middle first person dual, occurs only 
 in Horn. V 486, Soph. El. 950 and Phil. 1079, beside two instances cited by 
 Athenaeus. 
 
 a. -TTip is sometimes used for -rov in the second person dual of the past 
 lenses : elxcrriv you had. 
 
 379. The Subjunctive has the endings of the jirineipal 
 tenses ; the Optative those of the past tenses. 
 
 a. But the 1st sing, optative active takes -/ii : Xvoi-fu ; unless -of- is 
 the mode-sulfix. The 3d plural has -v after -if-, -a-av after -irj-. 
 
 b. Optatives in -oiv for -aifu occur very rarely: Tpi^oiv Eur. frag. 895 
 Nauck, a/idpToiv Cratin. Drapetides frag. 6 Meineke. 
 
 376 D. a. The Bor. retains the earlier forms -ti for -o-i, -vrt for -viri, -fi€s 
 for -liev. It has -Tdy for -ti/k, -fiiv for -/irjj/, -a-eay for -aBriv. Thus t/Ajiti, 
 A.io!/Ti, KBaavTi, KeKvKavTi, Kvcro/ies, i\ii6nav, i\eKiiT8dy, for Tl6r\<n, Kuoviri, 
 XUffuffif \e\vKd(rt^ Kuaofieff ^\v6fnjv, iXeXvadTjv. 
 
 b. Ilm. sometimes has -rov for -riiv and -aBov for -irBriv in the third person 
 dual of the historical tenses. 
 
 c. The poets have often -/letrfln for -/if 8a : ytyv6iJLf(r8a. 
 
 A. The Ionic lias also the endings -arai, -arc, for -vrai -vto in the perfect 
 and pluperfect middle : see 464 a. Hd. sometimes has these in the present 
 and imperfect of |Ui-forms ; see 415 D,c. 
 
 e. In the optative, Era. and Hd. always have -oto for -vto : 7171/of-aTo for 
 7(7i'oi->'to ; though in the subjunctive they always have -vtoi : ylyva-vTat. 
 
 377 D. In Hm. -aBa is more frequent ; TiBna-Ba, SiSoiirflo. He has it even 
 in the subjunctive ; iBcX-qa-Ba for iBeXr/s {ieixco wish) : rarely in the optative • 
 K\iiiotiTBa for K\alois {KKalu weep). 
 
383] USE OF THE ENDINGS. 119 
 
 380, Imperative. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 S. 3. -6i D. a. -Tov P. 2. -re 
 
 S. 3. -0-0 D. 2. -0-^01/ P. 2. -<T6e 
 
 3. -TO) 3. -Ta>V 3. -ITO)!' 
 
 8. -o-^o) 3. -crBmv 3. -a-dmv 
 
 or -rojcrai/ 
 
 or -o-5<»<rai> 
 
 a. The endings -rnxrav and -(rSuxroc, if Attic at all, belong only to the later 
 Attic. 
 
 381. luTiNiTiVE. — The infinitive-endings are 
 Active, -ev (contracted with preceding e to -eiv), or -vai. 
 Middle, -a-Bai. 
 
 382. Participle. — The participle forms its stem by a special suffix 
 added to the tense-stem. This is 
 
 for tlie Active, -vr- (but for the perfect active -or-), 
 for the Middle, -fiem-. 
 
 For the declension of the participles and the formation of the feminine, 
 see 241-244. 
 
 Use op the Endings. 
 
 383. A. The Common Form of Inflection. 
 
 This belongs (1) to the present and imperfect and the second 
 aorist active and middle, when the stem ends in a variable vowel ; 
 (3) to the future of all voices, the first aorist active and middle, the 
 perfect active. 
 
 1. The endings -/ti and -o-i are omitted : \ia>, \e\vKe. 
 a. Except -fu in the optative (319 a) : \iiai-/xt. 
 
 2. The imperative ending -Si is omitted : XSe. 
 
 3. The 3d plural of the past tenses has -v. fXiio-v. 
 
 4. The middle endings -am and -tro drop o- (71) and are contracted : 
 Xrfft for Xue-(a-)ai, Xcrj for 'Kvri-(<T)ai, eXijov for c\vf-{a-)o, eXoo-m for 
 e\v(ra-(<r)o. But in the optative there is no contraction: \voco for 
 
 X VOL-(o')o. 
 
 380 D. a. The endings -rwaav and -o-flctxrai/ do not occur in Hm. 
 
 381 D. For -iv or -vai, Hm. often has -yueyoi or -/iei/ (also Dor.), with the 
 accent always on the preceding syllable : ire'/tTeii' or veimiiiepat or neiaefifv to 
 send. Hm. never uses -fiev after a long syllable or -vai after a short one : 
 hence iTT^/neyai or irTrjvat, never (rrrificp, Sa/jL^fi/icvai or Safirjvai aor. pass, to be 
 subdued, never Safiriiiev, kffTdjjLivai or i(rTdfiev, never 4(TT<ii>at. Yet we have 
 leyai as well as ifjLeyat, tfiev to go. 
 
 383 D, 1. Hm, often retains -)u, -ai in the subjunctive: iiiKaja, ideKiin 
 (more correctly written i64\ii(n) for 49f\a), i6i\y. 
 
 4. In Hm. and Hd. the vowels, after o- is dropped, usually remain uncon- 
 tracted : XVffeai, 4\veo, etc. Hd. contracts -yjai to --p and sometimes -co to -cv : 
 
120 ACCENT OF THE VERB. [884 
 
 5. The infinitive active has -ev (381) : \iciv. 
 b. Except the first aorist and the perfect. 
 
 6. Active participles with stems in -orr- make the nominative 
 singular masculine in -av (see 241) : Xiaiv. 
 
 384. The 2d singular indicative middle has -ei in Attic, -.j; in all 
 other dialects (except Ionic, see 383 D 4). The Common dialect had 
 -ji except in ^ovkei, oiei, from PovXofiai wish and o'lojiai think. 
 
 385. B. The Ul-form of Inflection. 
 
 This belongs (1) to the present and imperfect, and the second aorist 
 active and middle, when the stem does not end in a variable vowel ; 
 (2) to the pluperfect active, the perfect and pluperfect middle and the 
 aorist passive. 
 
 1. The endings -fii and -m are retained in the indicative: Tidq-fu, 
 riSq-in. 
 
 2. The imperative ending -9i is sometimes retained : 4>a-6i, a-rq-Si ; 
 sometimes not : lori;. 
 
 8. The 3d plural of the past tenses has -trav. iriBe-trav. 
 
 4. The middle endings -a-ai and -o-o usually retain a: rldc-a-ai, 
 XeXu-tro. 
 
 a. Not, however, in the subjunctive or optative ; and usually not in the 
 second aorist. 
 
 5. The infinitive active has -vat : riSe-vat, \v6ij-vat. 
 
 6. Active participles with stems in -oi/r- make the nominative sing, 
 masc. in -ovs (341) : StSovr. 
 
 7. The 3d plural present indicative active has generally the ending 
 
 -d(TL. 
 
 Accent of the Verb. 
 
 386. As a general rule, the accent stands as far as possible 
 from the end of the form [recessive accent, 104 b) ; on the 
 penult, when the ultima is long by nature ; otherwise, on the 
 antepenult : Xva-aa-Owv, Xva-aa-Oe. 
 
 Final -m and -oi have the effect of sJiort vowels on the accent 
 (102) : \tiovTai, Xva-ai, XvdritTofifvoL. But not so in the optative : \io-ai, 
 
 XfXvKOl. 
 
 For contract forms, the accent is determined by the rules in 105. 
 
 2d sing. sub. Poi\ri, iniv. fiovKeo or Poi\ev wish. Hm. contracts -eai to -ei 
 only in oi)/ei thoti wilt see. 
 
 5. For -ei/ Hm. has sometimes -/iefai or -fiey (381 D). 
 
 385 D. 3. Hm. often has -v for -(rav, always with a short vowel preceding; 
 l=^a-v, %(pa-v for e^Tj-aav^ 6<l)Tj-ffav. 
 
 6. Hm. has also -fievai and -jUev (381 D). 
 
 7. Hm. has -d<ri only in iaffi they go and Icurt they are (i'J'!, 478 D). 
 
 8. For -oral, -aro in 3d plur. middle, see 376 D d. 
 
391] ACCENT OF TEE VERB. 121 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 387i In the finite modes there are only the following exceptions: 
 In the second aorist of the common form the imperative 2d sing 
 accents the end of the stem : 
 
 a. uniformly in the )«j(W?« ; XittoC contracted from Xi7re'-(tr)o. 
 
 b. in the following ouitive forms : eittc say, e\di come, eipe find, 
 iSf see, \afie taTce ; but not in theii- compounds : an-eme. 
 
 388. In optatives of the /ii-inflection the accent can not go back 
 of the mode-suflix -i- : iaral-Tf, Moi-ro, Xv^eiei/. 
 
 389. The infinitive and participle present several exceptions: 
 
 a. In the second aorist active and middle they accent the end of 
 the stem: \mfiv (for 'Kmi-ev) 'Kiwmv, 'kiiri-a-Bai. 
 
 b. In the perfect middle they accent the penult: Xf'Kva-dai, tctI- 
 fiTJffdat, \e\vfj.4vos. 
 
 c. The first aorist active infinitive accents the penult : rtfiijcrat. 
 
 d. All infinitives in -vai accent the penult : ndevm, 'Kt'XvKivm, \v6rjvai. 
 
 e. All third-declension participles in -r, except that of the first 
 aorist active, are oxytone : SiSovs, XeXuicay, Xvdeis, ardKeis. 
 
 390. In the first aorist, these three forms, which have the same 
 letters, are often distinguished by the accent: 
 
 3d Sing. Opt. Act. TrXe^t Tvavtrai. reXecrat SijX&xrat 
 
 Inf. Act. 7rXe|at navaai TfXe'o-ai 8r)\S)(rai 
 
 2d Sing. Imv. Mid. irKi^ai iravcrai riXca-ai S^Xoxrat 
 
 391. For compound verbs there are the following restrictions. 
 
 a. The accent can only go back to the syllable next preceding the 
 simple verb : i'irL-(r\es hold on, irvveK-hos give out together (not etriirx^s, 
 frvveKBos). 
 
 b. The accent can never go back beyond the augment or reduplica- 
 tion : aTT-^X^e he went away, ax^-lKrai he lias arrived, Trap-ijv he was there 
 (not airqXdf, afplKTcu, wdpijv). This is the case, even when the aug- 
 ment, falling upon a long vowel or diphthong, makes no change in 
 it : uTT-fiKe he was yielding, but vn-eiKe imperative, yield. 
 
 c. The middle imperative in -ou of the second aorist of the jui-form throws 
 the accent back when compounded with a preposition of two syllables : a,ir6-Sou 
 sell, KOTci-fiou pTit down. ; but not when the preposition ia of one syllable : iv9av 
 stow away, irpooS abandon. 
 
 389 D. a. In Hm., the infinitive of the 2d aor. mid. conforms in some 
 words to the general rule : hyepeaScu (iyelpa assemble), fpe<r9ai (elpo/uu asfr), 
 Ix^eirfla' [exS^vo/iai am odious), eypeirBai (iyelpa amuse). 
 
 b. In Hm., the perfects- dAa\7|(r0at, aKaK-fifjievos {^Kiiofiai wander), ouuixv<^-9at, 
 4Kox^M^'"'f <"■ aKlX^A'^'"'s (fix""/""' ""* pO'i'ted), iir<rin€vos (iretJa) drive), con- 
 form to the general rule. 
 
 391 1), c. In uncontracted forms the accent always goes back : liBeo, irivBeo. 
 
122 PRESENT SYSTEM: CLASSES OF VERBS. [392 
 
 FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE-SYSTEMS. 
 
 Present Ststeu, or 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Formation of the Tense-Stem. Classes op Verbs. 
 
 3192. The present stem of eacli verb is formed from tlie 
 theme in one of seven ways. With reference to this we 
 distinguish seven classes of verbs. 
 
 a. All classes contain primitive verbs ; denominative verbs are confined 
 to classes 1, 4, 5 and 8. 
 
 393. First Class {Variable Vowel Class).— The suffix -"le- 
 (variable vowel, 310) is added to the theme to form the present 
 stem. The 1st sing, indie, act. changes this to -to : 
 
 Acy-(o speak present stem Xcy-"],- theme Xey-. 
 
 (jtiXe-oi love present stem (juke-"],- theme i^tAe-. 
 
 a. In presents in -va the quantity of v wavers, but in Attic long v 
 prevails : thus always Xim loose, Siia go under, tttcoi spit, va> rain, and 
 generally (pim make grow, Bia sacrifice ; probably also ^ia> scrape, fWa 
 shut the eyes. So always aXw am leside myself, aprvo) prepare, daxpiai 
 weep, iSp-ia establish, la-x^'f am strong, Koxia lament, pr]via> divulge, and 
 almost always KoKva hinder. On the other hand kXuw hean- (poetic), 
 and pf6vu> am drunk. 
 
 b. In ■yiypo/nai become (for yi-yev-o-fiai) and ?(rx<" ^"M (for cri-trex-a) the 
 present has the reduplication (371). 
 
 394. Second Class {Strong-Vowel Class). — The suffix -°|.- 
 is added, and the theme-vowel a, t, v takes the strong form 
 7), £t, eii (32) : Tr)K-u> melt (present stem TriK-°\t-) theme raK- ; 
 XeiTr-w leave, theme Xuir-; (jtevy-u) Jlee, theme (l>vy-. 
 
 a. Roots ending in -v- lose this vowel in the present (44) : ttX^m sail 
 for TrXcv-a (ttKv-), x^*" pour for p^eu-tu (x"-)- So 
 
 6fa> {6v-) run. wvim (ttvu-) Mow, hreathe. 
 
 veta (yv-) swim. peta (pv-) fiow. 
 
 395. Third Class {Tau-class). — The suffix -t°|,- is added : 
 Tvir-Tu) strike (present stem tutt-t"!,-) from theme tvtt- ; /SaTr-ru 
 dip, theme y8a<^- ; KaXvir-rui cover, theme KaXv/3-. 
 
 a. The theme (always a root) ends in a labial mute. "Whether this is «■, 
 $, or (^ cannot be ascertained from the present, but only from the second 
 
 393 D. a. Hm. has Kiai (and \va>) Sia, (pia, dua (and Sia) irriu, ^ia>, iia. 
 Theocr. has Trria. And aKiai, ipria, iSpia, Kaxiw occur in Hm., iaxia and 
 \taviu in Find. 
 
401] CLASSES OF VERBS. 133 
 
 aorist (if there be one) or some other word from the same root. Thus 2d 
 aor. i-Tinr-riv, 4-pd(b-riv, and the noun Ka\i5;8-») cover. 
 
 396. Fourth Class (Iota-class).— The BuflSx -i»|,- is added ; 
 this always occasions sound'changes, as follows : 
 
 397. K, X, T, 6, and sometimes 7, unite with i to form <t(t 
 (later Attic tt): see 67. Thus 0uA.acro-(o giiard (present stem 
 ^uAao-o-"!^-) for <pvXaK-i<a, theme i^uAaK- ; Tapda-a-io disturb for 
 Tapax-itii, theme rapax- ; Tao-cro) arrange for ray-to), theme ray-. 
 
 a. The final consonant must be determined as above, 395 a. The future, 
 according as it ends in -|ai or a-a, will show whether the consonant is a pal- 
 atal or lingual. 
 
 b. In ireVo-w (ireir-) cook, the present comes from an older form of the 
 theme, tte/c-. 
 
 398. 8, less often y, unites with 6 to form ^ (68) : <l>pd^o) tell 
 
 for <j)paS-L(o ; Kpa^to cry for Kpay-ua. 
 
 a. Here also the future wiU show whether the stem ends in a lingual (S) 
 or a palatal (7). 
 
 b. Themes in -77- drop 7 nasal before f : a\i.^ai (KXayy-) shriek, irXcEfa 
 (7rAo77-) ca-use to wander, ira\irl(a {(nAirtyy-) sound the trumpet. 
 
 c. In i/l(u {vi0-) wash the present comes from an older form of the theme, 
 yiy-. 
 
 399. A with i produces AA (66) : /3a.XX<o (for j3aX-ui)) throw. 
 a. Only oipctAu (for o<^eA.-iiu) am obliged follows the analogy of 400, being 
 
 distinguished thus from uipeWa (also for o</>e\-ia)) increase. 
 
 400. V and p with i transpose it to the preceding syllable, 
 where it unites with the vowel of the theme (65) : <f>aiv(n show 
 for (^av-to) ; <j>8€Lp(o destroy for ^Ocp-ita. If the theme-vowel is 
 1 or V, it tjecomes long : Kptvw distinguish for Kpiv-ua ; crvpo! 
 drag for (rup-Lto. 
 
 401. Two verbs with themes in -av- drop the v : Ka'uo him for . 
 Kav-ia> (44) and KKaia weep for kXqu-kb. The Attic prose, however, 
 uses the forms xda, K\da> (35). 
 
 398 D. Aeol. -irSo) for -(a, frequent in Theoc. (63 D) : rvpUSoi for cripi(u 
 pipe. In Dor., most verbs in -(a have themes in -y- : ko/j.I((i) take care of, aor. 
 4K6fit(ra (for e-Ko/iiS-cra), but Dor. ^K<(/ii{a (for e-Koiiiy-a-a). In Hm., too, these 
 verbs have -7- much oftener than in Att. : so in a\cnrd(a lay waste, Sai^a di- 
 vide, 4vapl(ai slay, strip, fiep/iTiplCa debate in mind, iroKffil^a war, <rTv^e\i(a> 
 push, etc. 
 
 399 D, a. Hm. has et\ai (cK-) press (not eXAai). But instead of o<t>el\<i> he 
 commonly uses the form 6(pe\\aj. 
 
 401 Di In Hm., some other vowel-themes annex -lai : Saia {Sau-) bum, 
 Saio/iou (5a-) divide, vaia (vu-) inhabit, fialoiiai (/uo-) reach after, etc. 
 
124 PRESEN'T SYSTEM: CLASSES OF VERBS. [402 
 
 402. Fifth Class {JVasal Class). — A suffix containing v is 
 added. 
 
 a. -v%' : Tc/i-vo) cut (present stem Te/t-voje-), tlieme re/x-. 
 
 b. -av°|j- : d/Aapr-avo) err, theme d/iapr-. 
 
 c. -av°|e- with an inserted nasal : fxavO-avu) learn, theme fi.a.6-; 
 Xajxp-dvia take, theme A.a/?-; kajx-avw get bij lot, theme Aax-. 
 
 Rem. -av°\,- is used alone, if the theme-vowel is long by nature or 
 position: if otherwise, a nasal is inserted in the theme {v, n, y, accord- 
 ing as it precedes a lingual, labial, or palatal mute). 
 
 d. -v(°\e- : iK-vio-fj.a.1 come, theme Ik-. 
 
 e. -vv- (after a vowel -vw-): hdK-vv-ii,i show, theme Seik- ; 
 a-pi-vvvix-L quench, theme cr/8e-. 
 
 f. -VOL- : irip-vrj-ij.i sell (jaresent stem irep-va-), theme irep-. 
 
 403. Sixth Class {Inceptive Class). — The suffix -o-K°|e- (or 
 -to-K"!,-) is added : api-a-Kw please, tvp-ia-Kw find. The vowel 
 before -tr/co) is usually made long. 
 
 a. This class is called inceptive, because some verbs which belong 
 to it have the sense of beginning or becoming : yrjpia-Koi grow old. 
 
 b. Several presents have the reduplication: yi-yva>-a-K(o (yi'o-) know. 
 
 c. A mute before -o-kio is dropped : KiaKa for haK-ffxa speak. Quite 
 irregular are fiiffyat for /Aiy-tTKca mix, and trdfrxot for TraO-trKu suffer. 
 
 404. Seventh Class {Root-Class). — The theme itself, with 
 or without reduplication, serves as present stem : cftrj-fii say, 
 theme and present stem <^a-; rl-drj-fiL jout, present stem Ti6e-, 
 theme Be-. 
 
 405. Sometimes the present has a different theme from the other 
 systems. Thus it may have a longer theme in -f-, while the other 
 systems are formed from a shorter one without -e- : pres. Sokcu (So/ce-) 
 seem, but future Sd|M (Sok-). More often the present has the shorter 
 theme, and the other systems (or some of them) come from a longer 
 theme ending in -f-, or in -o-: present ^ovKojml (/3ouX-) wish, but 
 future fiovKijcTOiim (povXe-). 
 
 Inflection. 
 
 406. A. The Common Form {Presents in -m). — ^Present 
 stems ending in a variable vowel (-°|e-) are inflected according 
 to 383. Paradigm 314. 
 
 407. The following points require notice : (a.) The 1st sing. pres. ind. act. 
 lengtliens the suffix-vowel o to tu : Kva. (b.) In tlie 2d and 3d sing, -eij and -« 
 
 407 D. (b.) The Doric (Theocr.) has sometimes -ej for -eii in the 2d pera 
 (e.) The Doric has -oi/ti, -avri ; see 69 D. 
 
409] PRESENT SYSTEM; INFLECTION. 125 
 
 are perhaps due to epentliesis (cf. 65) ; Kveis for \ve-ai, \iei (XOeit) for \Oe-ti. 
 So, too, -ps -}) in the subjunctive active, (c.) In the 3d plur. active -ouat is 
 for -o-v<ri (55 d) and -ai<ri for -a-ixri. (d.) For the middle forms of the second 
 person, \uei, i\vov, etc., see 384 and 388, 4. 
 
 408. The Subjunctive has -"I,- for -»|e-. The Optative has the 
 mode-suffix -j- ; for Xtjo-ie-j/, see 374 b. 
 
 409. CoNTKACT Pkesents. — Verbs in -aw, -eo), and -out con- 
 tract the final a, e, or o of the theme with the following vari- 
 able vowel : Ti/ict-o) Ti/iG honor, ^iXi-w (juXS) love, SrjX6-uy Sr^Xui 
 manifest. Paradigms 323-325. 
 
 a. The contraction follows the rules, 37, 39. In reading the para- 
 digms, the uncontracted form will be seen by omitting the syllable 
 next after the parenthesis ; the contract form, by omitting the letters 
 Lathe parenthesis itself: thus in T-f;u(uo)o)-/iei/ the uncontracted form 
 is rlfionjiev, the contract form Tlfiafuv. 
 
 409 D. Contract Presents in the Dialects. 
 
 Usage of Homer. — a. Verbs in -aai are often contracted aa in Attic : bpH, 
 
 ip^s, ipf. When uncontracted, they are subject to a peculiar assimilation of 
 
 the concurrent vowels, which gives for ae, otj, a double a-sound, and for ao, cm, 
 
 aou a double o-sound. One of the vowels is usually lengthened ; rarely both. 
 
 dp6a for npdat fievoivdia for fj-evotvilti) 
 
 6p6Q3ines 6pdoPTes Ti^cioj/res ri^doj/res 
 
 6p6t(}fii dpdoi/j.t 7j0cttotfit Tj^doifii 
 
 dpSwa't dpdovfft Tjfid^totra ^/Saoutra 
 
 dpd^s dpdets fJ.evoivdf fieyoivdei 
 
 dpdcurdcu dpdeaOcu fivdaadai /jtvdetrOat. 
 
 The second vowel must have stood (before the change) in a long syllable ; 
 
 otherwise the uncontracted form is not used : thus 6p6a>ix^v (for dpdo/iev) is 
 
 an impossible form. A single exception is fiva>6ii.ems. The former vowel is 
 
 lengthened only when the word could not otherwise stand in the Homeric 
 
 verse (exception ye\{iovTes). 
 
 Uncontracted forms without assimilation occur rarely ; aoiStdii, vaurdoyTa : 
 even with lengthening : TrfimovTo. In imperfects ao is sometimes changed to 
 €0 : iivTeov (amdio encounter), 6/ujK\eoti.iv (S/iOKKda rebuke). Notice -xfniiifvos 
 for xpa6iievos. 
 
 b. Verbs in -eai are commonly uncontracted, but sometimes ee, eei go into 
 ei ; €0, €ov, into ei) : Te\eei, re\eovfft, reKeerat, TcKeo/xevos, or Te\6*, Te\evfft, 
 TEXetrat, reXe^fiei/os. In the 2d sing mid -e-e-at, -e-e-o may become -e7ai, -eio, 
 by contraction of ee, or -eai, -eo, by rejection of one e : fiu6e7at or fiOOeai, for 
 fiOSe-e-ai tltou sayesl. An older form of these verbs was in -ei'oi : so vemeta 
 for vemetc gvMrrel, ireXeleTO from teA ca complete. 
 
 c. Verbs in -oai are contracted as in Attic. But sometimes they have 
 forms with a double o-sound, like verbs in -aw : ap6airi for ap6ov(ri (ttp6u 
 plough), mviiovras (ifrv6m sleep). 
 
 Usage of Herodotus. — d. Verbs in -aa commonly change o before an o-sound 
 to E : TifjLeu, TtfieovTai, rifxeS/jieyos, rifieouct ; ej rarely goes into eu : iTifiew (Att. 
 M/uiiy). Otherwise they contract a with the following vowel as in Att.! 
 
126 PRESENT SYSTEM: INFLECTION: [410 
 
 410. a. In the optative active, contract verbs have generally -jij- 
 (374 a) in the singular, but very seldom in the dual and plui-al. 
 
 b. In the infinitive active, -o-ciy, -o-eiy give -Si', -ovv (not -av, -oiv) because 
 -€i is a spurious diphthong ; see 40 a and 381. 
 
 411. Verbs in -cm of two syllables admit only the contraction into 
 ei. Wherever contraction would result in any other sound, the un- 
 contracted form is used. Thus trki-a sail makes in the pres. ind. 
 TrAc-ft), TrXety, TrXei, dual TrXetTov, plur. trXe-o^ev, TrXetre, irXe-ovo-t. Ex- 
 cept df'-o) Mnd, which makes to SoCi' (for Se'-oi/), Sov/iai (for Se-o/im), 
 etc., and is thus distinguished from di-a want, require, wliich follows 
 the rule, making to de-ov the requisite, Sdofiai, I request. 
 
 412. Seven verbs in -aa take r/ instead of d in the contract forms. 
 Thus (d-a> live, (ijs (not (as), (rj, (fjTe, ^rjv, etc. So also ireiva-a hunger, 
 biyJAa-co thirst, Kvd-co scratch, a-fiia-to wash, yp-d-ai rub, and p^pa-o/^ai use. 
 
 a. piy6-ai am cold has ai and cf in contract forms, instead of ov and oi : inf. 
 piywv, opt. ^lyc^Tjy. 
 
 b. \ov-cD bathe sometimes drops v (44), and is then contracted as a verb in 
 -0(0 ; eAou for €A.o(u)-e, AoO^ai for \o(v)-o-/ta{, etc. 
 
 413. B. The Mi-Foem. — Present steins not ending in a 
 variable vowel, — i. e., those of class 7 and those in -w- and 
 -va- of class 5, — are inflected according to 385. Paradigms 
 329-332. 
 
 rljiSs, ti^uStc, Ti/ji'Sl'-V'', Ti/nSffSoi; so also mid. imv. ri/iSi, impf. irlfiLa. But 
 Xpao/xai changes ao to ea : xp^tu/iai. 
 
 e. Verbs in -ea are uncontracted, except that eo, eou may go into eu; 
 <pi\4tM), ipi\4ei, ^lAeoijUf, tptKeofial or (piKev/iat, <pt\eovtTt or (ptXevirt. But Sei it 
 is necessary and its inf. Seiv are usually contracted. Instead of 2d sing. mid. 
 tpiKe-e-o, i<piKe-e-o, we find forms with only one 6, <pi\€0, i^i\€0. 
 
 f. Verbs in -ow are contracted as in Att., but sometimes have -ev in- 
 stead of -ov : SrjAS, SijAoi, SriKafiat, Sii\olfa}v, Sn\oi(ri or BjjAeDffi, ^Sii\ov or 
 
 Doric Contraction. — g. The Doric contracts o with o, oi (not in the ultima) 
 to d instead of a: it contracts a with e, tj, ei, ri, to ?), r] instead of d, ?: ireiyS- 
 fies (for TreivwfLev), ireivavTi (for Treivuci), dprJTe (for Spare), 6p^ (for (Sp^), 
 (SpTJi' (for dpap) ; seeiiV D h and i. The Ion. contraction of eo, €ou to eu belongs 
 also to the Doric. 
 
 AeoKc Inflection. — h. For -am, -ea, -oa, the Aeolic (of Lesbos) has peculiar 
 forms in -aijui, -^/if, -w/xi, with the /xMnfiection : ^iKfim, <pi\'t\}ievos, SokI^/u. 
 
 410 D. a. In contract present optatives Homer scarcely ever has -it;- ; Hd. 
 uses it for verbs in -ma (Ti/ifjji?!'), but not for those in -eu and -oa. 
 
 412 D. Hm. has Treiv^/ifpat, Kvri ; but C^eiv. Hd. has f^f, Sii/zflv, but 
 XpaaSai, Kvav, ffiuiv, 
 
 c. Other irregular contractions in Hm. are : irpoffav^rtiv (auSc^cu spealcS, 
 trvvai/r-fiTTit' (ayrdtii encounter), air€i\'fiT7iv {d.irei\4a} threaten), trevO^fievai {irevStu 
 mourn), yroB^fievai (Troflew miss), (ftopi}fieyai and (poprjvat {ipopiu bear). Cf. 409 D h. 
 
[419 PRESENT SYSTEM: m-FOEM. I37 
 
 414, The end-vowel of the stem is made long in the singu- 
 lar of the indicative active : TiO-q-iLi, stem i-i^e- ; k^uKvv-v, stem 
 8etKi/ii-. 
 
 415, a. Stems in -a- contract -a-wi in the 3d plur. pres. : la-rain. 
 b. In the present imperative -Si is omitted, and the stem-vowel 
 
 lengthened: Zot-i;, ScUvC. 
 
 416, The forms in -ao rarely drop o- and are contracted : so in 
 poetry rldov, la-roi for ridea-o, la-Tacro. But in hivafiai can and €7ria-Tafi.m 
 understand, this is generally th« case : iSivo), ^jrioro). We have even 
 poetic Suv ' for Bivaa-m, and ((jjtei for ic^Uirm. 
 
 417, The subjunctive adds the mode-sufflx -w|,-, and contracts it 
 with final a, t, o of tlie stem : Ti6a for ndioi ; but not with v : SetKvvo). 
 In contraction, arj, arj, 01; give tj, tj, w (contrary to 37 d, 39 c) : jo-T^T-at 
 for iirrdriTai, SiSws for SiSoi;r. 
 
 a. But in three verbs -"[,- takes the place of the stem-"vowel, so 
 there is no contraction. These are Siva-fiat can, inlaTa-imi understand, 
 Kpifia-fiai Jiang ; subj. hivai-fiai, ewl<TTa>-fiai, Kpe/iw-iiai. 
 
 418, a. The optative mode-sufflx is -t- or -iij- according to 374 a. 
 For BeiKvioifit, Tidoifnjv, see 419 b and c. 
 
 b. The accent of the optative follows 388 : iaraiTo. But the verbs 
 mentioned in 417 a are exceptions : SvvaiTo, iiriiTTaiTo, KpifiaiTo. 
 
 419, In some forms the fii- verbs take the inflection of presents in -a, 
 a variable vowel being added to the stem. This is the case in : 
 
 a. The imperfect forms eSiSow, eSiSovs, eStSov ; iriSeis, eridei (used 
 for cBiScov, -ms, -w ; eVi^T/r, -7;). So in the present riBfls (more Attic 
 than Ti'^ijr) and in the imperative rWet and fii'Sov. These forms are 
 made as if from Tid^a and diSoa. 
 
 b. The optative of verbs in -vvp.i : SuKvi-oiiu, like \ijotiu. 
 
 c. The optative ndoifiijv, cf. <l)i\olpr)v. 
 
 414 D. In Hm. the stem-vowel is sometimes long in other forms : as 
 ri6^fi€vat, Ti6-fifievos, arii/ai to blow : Si^jifiai seek. 
 
 416 D. a. Hm. and Hd. always have 3d plur. rtdeicrt, SiSovffi, priyfiffi, etc., 
 but both have idiri they go and Hm. has eoiti they are. 
 
 b. Hm. sometimes retains -Bi : SlSoiSi give, ijivuBi swear. 
 
 c. Hd. has forms with -otoi, -oto in the 3d plur. of the middle : Tifleorat, 
 drtdearo, even iSwearo for i^ivavTO, etc. 
 
 417 D. a. So in Hm. and Hd. the pres. subj. active of %riiu, according to 
 most editions : 'Iri (Hd.) ?J7iri (Bm.) for I'p. 
 
 419 D. a. The Ionic has other forms of this sort in the active. Hm. has 
 5i5oij (cf. SrjAois for 5i]\6-fis) and SiSotaBa, SiSor(and Siiaai), Ti9er(and rlBijiri), 
 Uis (with irregular accent), lei (and JTjo-i). Also KoBlffTo, (z= -icrra-e), imv. In 
 Hd. Vei, TfSeit, riBii, SiSois, SiSoT, la-rS, are perhaps always used. So, too, Hd. 
 has impf. 3d sing. iVrd for iWt). 
 
 b. But Hm. has opt. Satvvro for 8ouvv-t-ro from Saivvfitu feast. 
 
128 FUTURE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. [420 
 
 FoTUEE System, or 
 
 Future Active and Middle. 
 
 420. The future stem is formed by adding -o-"!,- to the 
 theme, and is inflected like the present of the common form 
 (406) : -o-o), -o-ets, -o-€t etc. Paradigm 315. 
 
 421. a. Mute Verbs. — A labial or palatal mute at the end 
 of the theme unites with o-, forming i/f or ^ : a lingual mute is 
 dropped before a- (54). 
 
 KOTrrw (kott-) cut K6\jra) rdtrcrai {ray-) arrange rdfrn 
 
 ^XaTTTW (/3Xa/3-) 7iurt /3Xu\|'a) opv(T(Ta> (opvx-) dig opi^a 
 
 ypd(p-ai write ypa^a <^pd^a> {(jipat-) tell (ppdato 
 
 7rXeK-m twist nXe^a a-!revS-a> pour o-TTfiVo) (55 d). 
 
 For Tp€<p-a) nourish, dpi-^a, and the like, see 74 c. 
 
 b. Vowel Verbs. — A short vowel at the end of the theme 
 becomes long before a- (33). 
 
 ed-a> permit iiaa> noid-a make Ttoirjo-a 
 
 Tifid-o) honor r'lp.fiaa) 8ouXd-o) enslave SouXoxro) 
 
 For exceptions, see 503. 
 
 c. Verls of the second class (394) have the strong form of the theme 
 in the future : iretda {m6-) persuade, TreiVia ; ttvcoi {ttvv-} breathe, nvfva-o- 
 jxai. 
 
 422. Liquid Future. — The future of liquid verbs ends in 
 -€<i) instead of -o-m ; e is contracted with the following vowel, 
 as in the present of <f)iXeui : tjiaiuu) {<f>av) show, c^ave-o), contracted 
 <t>avC>. Paradigm 326. 
 
 a. -€0) is for -eo-ai: <r is dropped between two vowels (71). 
 
 b. KiWw (keA.-) land, Kupa (fcup-) fall in with, Spvifu roune make KsKaai, 
 Kiptra, vpffca, with ff. 
 
 Contract JFuturefrom Vowel and Mute Verbs. 
 
 423. Some verbs in -fw drop a- in the future, and contract : reXf-co 
 complete, fut. rfXt'ero), reXf'-m, TeXm; 1st plur. TeXovfifv, etc. The future 
 thus made has the same form as the present. 
 
 420 D. In Hm. o- of the future is often doubled after a short vowel : 6\d<r<ra 
 for oKetTQt {uWvfxi destroy'), av{iaffw for cLviiau {aviw achieve). 
 
 421 a. For fut. in -foi from pros, in -fm, frequent in Hm., see 398 D. 
 
 422 D. The future in -ea has in the dialects the same forms, contracted 
 and uncontracted, as the present in -ea (409 D b and e). 
 
 b. Hm. has other exceptiona : Bipao/im (9ipu warm) ; cf. 431 D o. 
 
429] FIRST AOBIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 129 
 
 424. Verbs in -af<a (themes in -ah-) sometimes do the same : 0i/3<if<a 
 cause to go, fut.^^iySuo-w, ^tfid-a, ^ifii,. Similarly iXawa (eXa-) drive, 
 eXd((r)(ii, (Xii, eXas, e'XS, etc. 
 
 425. Verbs in -ifm (themes in -iS-) make their future in -leco instead 
 of -jtrm, and contract : Ko/ii^to (xofuS-) conmy, koixi-i'w, Kofua ; 1st plur. 
 Koniovixev, etc. ; fut. mid. Kofuoifim. The name Attic Future has been 
 given to this formation. 
 
 426. Some verbs have a future in -a-fcuai, contracted -a-ovjim, in- 
 stead of -<rofiai: ttve'-ib [ttw-, nvev-) breathe, ■nvevai-ofiai, 7rpiva-oifim\ 
 <f)fvy-a) ((f)vy-) flee, (fiev^ov/iai. Here -o-t'lt- is the tense-suflftx. This 
 formation is found only in the future middle, and only when it has an 
 active meaning. It is called the Doric Future (436 D). The same 
 verbs have also the ordinary future in -trofj-ai. 
 
 427. A few verbs have futures with the form of a present : x^" 
 (xv-) povr, fut. x^<»- So the irregular futures eSo/iai shall eat (539, 3), 
 moiioi shall drinlc (531, 3). 
 
 FiEST AoEisT System, or 
 First Aorist Active and Middle. 
 
 428. FoEMATioN. — The first aorist stem is formed by add- 
 ing -tra- to the theme : Xv-a-a- (first pei'son l-kv-aa). 
 
 429. The rules in 421, for the future of mute verbs, vowel 
 verbs and verbs of the second class, api^ly also to the first 
 aorist. 
 
 k6ht-tu> cKoi\ra TdiT(rm (ray-) era^a Tlfid-io eriiirjcra 
 
 ^Xdir-Tto e)3Xai^a dpvtrira} (opv)(-) atpv^a TroU-co €nolrj<ra 
 
 ypd(j}-io eypa-Jra <l>pd(a) (^pa8-) ((fipaira 8ouXo-<b edov\ai(ra 
 
 nXeK-a> enXe^a frnevh-ta ea-Tretcra neiOoi (nid-) enfiaa 
 
 Tp€(p-o> eOpeyjra ed-to f'latra nvdo} (tti/u-) tnvevcra 
 
 424 D. The future in -au has in Hm. the same variety of forms as the 
 present in -aai (409 D a) : thus i\6u>, 4\dis, ixd^. In Hd. it is contracted as 
 in Att. 
 
 426 D. In Doric the future is regularly formed in -ireio, -treo/iai contracted : 
 \vira, Xvffeis, Avffei, KOffUTOv, hvffevfies, Kuffeire, \iiffevUTt ; mid. \varevfxai, 
 Mfrij, KvireiTcu, etc., Kva-eiffdai, KOtrevfieyos. 
 
 427 D. Similarly, Hm. has fut. ^elo/xat or j3co/xai shall live connected with 
 Pt6a live, 8^01 shall find connected with 2d aor. pass. i-Sii-i\v learned, Kelai or 
 Kfo) shall lie from /tei^ai. — He also uses laiia achieve, ipia draw, rva/ia stretch, 
 as futures. 
 
 428 D. a. Hm. often doubles ff of the first aorist after a short vowel ; 
 iyihcuraa for fy(\a<ra {yehda laugh). Cf. 420 D. 
 
 b. Hm. has forms of the first aorist with a variable vowel in the place of 
 o: ifii\<TeTo went (Palva), iSufffro set (Sim), Tie, l^ov came (ikw). So especially 
 
130 FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. [430 
 
 430. xf'<» (x"-) i'l'Mr makes ep^ta (for ex^va) without cr, correspond- 
 ing to the future pfem (427). 
 
 431. Liquid Verbs. — These reject o- in the first aorist, and 
 lengthen the theme-vowel in compensation for it (34) : ^aivta 
 (c^ai/-), i(^-r)va (for etftava-a) ; fiev-ai remain, t/ieti/a (for £/xevcra) ; 
 KpLVb) (xpiv-) decide, eKplva (for eKpivo-a). Paradigm 327. 
 
 a. The lengtliened form of u is i;, except after i or p : eiprfva, but 
 iirepava (TTepaivm finisK). 
 
 b. The verbs alfpm (op-) raise and iXKoiiai (nX-) leap make ap- and a\- 
 in the first aorist, except in the indicative, which has tj- on account of 
 the augment : ^pa, TiAa/iriv, but apas, i\diievos. Even a few other verbs 
 have d where tlie rule requires tj: Kephaivia gain^ iKepSdvaj bpyaivu enrage, 
 iapydya, 
 
 c. KeA\a>, Kvpa, opvOp.! (422 b) make e/ce\<ra, exvpaa, &p<ra. 
 
 432. Three first aorists have the suffix -xa- ; edrjKa from Tidrjpi (5e-) 
 put, (ScoKa from dldafu (So-) give, and ^xa from irjpj. (e-) sera(Z. These 
 are confined to the indicative, and are used chiefly in the singular 
 active (see paradigms 333, 334, 476) in place of the defective second 
 aorist. Plural forms, like iSaKaiiev, eSaxarc, cSaxav, are rare and 
 poetic. 
 
 433. Inflection. — The first aorist is inflected according to 
 the Common form, 383. Paradigm 316. 
 
 a. The 1st sing. ind. act. omits the ending -f, t\vtra; and the 3d sing, 
 changes -o to -e, ^xOire. The imv. AEo-oi/, Kva-ai and infin. Ai/ffai are irregular. 
 For the middle forms 4\ta-ic, \vaji, Avtraio see 383, 4. 
 
 b. The subjunctive has -"It)- in place of -a- : Kvirio. 
 
 434. In the optative, besides the regular forms with mode-suflix 
 -(-, there are three irregular forms in -ae-ia-s, -cre-ie, -tre-ia-v. These 
 are much more used than those in -a-ais, -a-ai, -aaiev. 
 
 in the imperative : ipaeo, ipaev rise {Sp-vufu), fiferc lead(&ya>), olire bring {<p4pa), 
 Ae'Jeo lai/ thyself (Kiya), ■ire\d<r(reTov draw near (ircArffiu). 
 
 430 D.__l<'or exfo, Hm. has commonly exeva. Similarly, Hm. makes 1st aor. 
 ^K7j-a (Att. EKauira) from xaia (kou-) burn, etra-eva from ircia (trv-) drive, iiKediiiiv 
 and it^evdfj.T]p from a\^ofiai or dAevojuai avoid, and the defective aor. Searo 
 seemed. Hes. has SareaffOai from Sareofiai divide. 
 
 431 D. c. Homer has also iKcpaa (Kelpie shear), ipipffu aor. subj. (<pipa mix), 
 lAcro {ilKiD press), defective avS-epa-a took away. 
 
 d. The Aeolic (Lesbian) assimilates a to the foregoing liquid: eipavva for 
 *(pav(ra. So Hm. in one word ; &(p€K\a, from oifteWto increase. 
 
 433 D. b. In Hm., first aorist subjunctives with short vowels -o|e- (373 D) 
 often occur : yejueo-^tr-ere for j/e/ieo-^<r-7)Te (yeij.e<rd-a resent), drpd^fi-eai for (icpdifi- 
 jjai) 4(t>d\f/ji ^iipdiTToiJiai lotieh upon). These forms are often liable to be con- 
 founded with those of the future indicative. 
 
439] SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 131 
 
 Second Aorist System, or 
 Second Aorist Active and Middle. 
 
 Sbcoitd Aobist of the Common Foem. 
 
 435. The second aorist stem adds -°|,- to the theme: knr-'>\t- ; 
 indie. iXiTTov, present Xihrm (Anr-). It has the inflection of 
 the present system (406), the second aorist indicative being 
 inflected like the imperfect. Paradigm 320. 
 
 a. As a rule, only primitive verbs (308) have second aorists. The 
 root takes its shortest, or weah, form (33). A few second aorists 
 have a for e of the root : t-rpair-ov from rpdir-a turn. 
 
 b. For the accent of the 2d sing, imperative, the infinitive and par- 
 ticiple, see 387, 389. 
 
 436. The second aorist of ay-a lead has a reduplicated stem : ijyayov, 
 ayayeiv. 
 
 a. ilnov said is also reduplicated : it is contracted from t-eeTroi/ {e-FeFeiroy, 
 root Ffir-, 72 D). 
 
 437. The root-vowel is dropped (syncope, 43) in i-irr-oiirfv (n-cV-o/iai 
 fly), e-a-x-ov (for c-o-fx-o"! pres. ex'" ^ve), c-o-Tr-d/iijv (for f-o-ejr-o/iijc, 
 pres. eirofiat follow), and some others. 
 
 438. Two second aorists, tlirov said and ^veyKov iore (539, 8 and 6), 
 have also forms with stems in -a-, eiira, rjveyKa, with the inflection of 
 the first aorist. 
 
 Second Aoeist of the Mi-Foem. 
 
 439. The second aorist of the /At-form has the simple theme 
 as its stem : €-<rrq-v (o-ra-) stood. This is inflected according 
 to 385. Paradigms 333, 334, 335. 
 
 436 D. In Hm., a few roots which end in a mute after p, suffer transposi- 
 tion as well as variation of vowel in the second aorist : SepK-o/mi see, fSpaKov ; 
 TeipB-a destroy, lirpaBov. 
 
 b. Hm. and Hd. often have -eeix for -fiv in the 2d aor. inf. : Kmeeiv, j8aA.e'Ei(/. 
 
 436 D. In Hm., a good many verbs have reduplicated stems in the 2d aor. : 
 4-ve<f>paS-ov (<l)pd(tu dcclaro), ireiriB-ov (irefflm persuade), TfTapTr6fi.riv (rcpir-a de- 
 light), •jre<piS-fa6ai {<ptl8ofiai spare), etc. So ijpap~ov {op-, pr. apapitrKta fit), iepop-ov 
 (op-iw/u rouse). — Reduplicated and syncopated are 4-KeK\-6ftrii' (KeX-a/iat com- 
 mand), &\aKK-op (oAe/c-, pr. 4\e'|<» tmrd off). Not used in the pres. are ireipti-ov 
 (ij)€i/-) killed, TeTii-ov (refi-) came up to, TeTary-dv (rny-, Lat. tango) liaviiig seized. 
 — Two verbs, 4puK-a draw, ivlir-Taj chide, reduplicate the final consonant of 
 the theme, with a as a connective : vpvK-aK-ov, iiviw-aTr-ov (also ivfviir-ov). 
 
 437 D. Of syncopated stems, Hm. has also iyp-6ii.i\v awoke (found even in 
 Att., from lyelpai, fyep-), iyp-6iiei/oi assembled (inf. irycp-eirSai, 389 D a, pr. 
 ayelpu), i-nr\-6ii.tii> (iriK-ontu am). 
 
132 SECOND AORIST OF THE vn-FORM. [440 
 
 440. The end-vowel of the stem is made long in the act- 
 ive before a single consonant : e-a-rrj-v, e-cmj-ft-ev, crrij-vai ; but 
 (TTa-{r]v, (rrd-vTiov. 
 
 a. The 3d sing. eo-Tij comes under this rule because it stands for e-o-ttj-t. 
 — So does ardv neuter participle, for <rTa-vT. 
 
 b. iiviiii-nv, aor. of mlvitiu (oxo-) benefit, follows the same rule in the middle: 
 aiirliiieda (but &va(T0e). 
 
 441. The middle ending -a-o drops <r (385, 4 a) : €-Bov (not e-de-tro), 
 wpia bup (yet also irpiacro). But not after a long vowel : Svrjo-o. 
 
 442. In compounds -$a and -trra occur for 0ri-0i and (rrii-fli : Kardfia come 
 down, irapvuTTa stand by, used only in poetry. 
 
 443. The second aorists of three verbs, rWriiu, BiSa/ii and "i;/it, are 
 peculiar iu these respects (paradigms 333, 334, 476) : 
 
 a. They do not lengthen the stem-vowel : t-6e-jx.ev. 
 
 b. The 3d sing, imper. active has -s for -6i. 
 
 c. The infinitive active, deivai, Sovvai, elvai (for 6e-evm etc.), has an 
 irregular ending -ei/ai. ' 
 
 d. The singular of the indicative is wanting, and supplied by the 
 first aorist in -xa (433). 
 
 444. The subjunctive adds -<»|,,- and is contracted as in the present 
 (417): 6S> for d4-a>, tas for Sd-ns ; but Bi-a uncontracted. 
 
 a. The aorist cnpidiirjv bought puts -"|,- in place of the stem-vowel 
 (cf. 417 a) : Trpiaiiai. 
 
 445. The optative mode-suffix is -i- or -ir/- according to 374 a. But 
 stems in -v- {e-Bv-v) have no optative in Attic. 
 
 a. The optative is accented according to 388. But irpi.aifi.riv (from 
 iiTpiap.rfv bought) and ovaiprjv (from b>vfip.rjv received profit) are exceptions: 
 irpiatro, ovavro. 
 
 440 D, Exceptions, the poetic aorist i-Kxa-v killed (489, 4) and Hm. oEto 
 wounded, oWdfievai to loound — On the other hand, like wtf^fvrjv Hm. has ttA^to 
 approached, e/3\i)To was hit, and other middle forms. 
 
 444 D. In Hm., the second aorist subj. of the lu-iona usually remains un- 
 contracted : Beoi/iev, cup-iri. The root-vowel is then almost always made long, 
 a and € becoming ei before an o-sound, and rj befoce an c-sound. Thus yvda, 
 $ela (for $ia, $ai), Belm (for Bern, Bii), Bfir/s (for Oeris, Bfis), Sdria-t (for Siri, 5^1. 
 And before the endings -tov, -fiip, -re, the mode-vowel is short (378 D) : ariieTav 
 (for tTTilrtTov, (TTTJTOtf), Belofj-ey (for deojfiev, B&fjiev) : so also in the middle forms 
 Belo/iai (for Btafjuu, Bauai), 3\^ctoi. Hm. has subj. Hw, with long 0. 
 
 In Hd., only am and eoj remain uncontracted in the subjunctive; aw he 
 changes to ew : cr^cofiev (for CTatofi^v, trrafiev). The same change is found 
 in Hm. 
 
 445 D. Hm. has opt. Sutj, Sv/iev (contracted from Sv-iri, Sv-t-fiev). So also 
 ipffho (for ^fl£-iTo) 2d aor. opt. of ipBivio pcrisJi. 
 
450] PERFECT AND PLUPERFEOT ACTIVE. 133 
 
 b. The compounda of ■rl6t\fu and ti\\u. have in the second aorist optative 
 -BoiTo and -iSto, besides the regular fleiro and cTto ; so too in the plural -9oliie6a, 
 -o'l/icBa etc. These are sometimes written with recessive accent : 7rp611B01.ro, 
 Trp6oiro. 
 
 Perfect Active Systems, or 
 Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 
 
 446. Formation of the Fibst Peefeot. — To form the 
 stem of the first perfect, the theme is reduplicated (363 ff) 
 and -Ktt- is added: X^-kv-Ka-; 1st sing, indie. kekvKa. 
 
 a. The first perfect belongs (1) to vowel-verb.s, (2) to many liquid 
 verbs, (3) to many mute verbs with lingual themes, especially those in 
 -tfoj (-iS-) and -ofm (-aS-). 
 
 447. a. A lingual mute is dropped before -xa- ; weWa (.md-), irina- 
 
 Ka\ KO/ll'ftB (koIIiS-), KfKOfU-Ka. 
 
 b. Vowel-verbs usually lengthen the vowel before -ko-, and verbs 
 of the second class have the strong form of the theme with ci or eu. 
 
 ia-a> em-KO noU-co Tv^iroirj-Ka Trelda (wid-) TveTrei-Ka 
 
 Tiiid-to TeTTfirj-Ka 8ov\6-(a SeSovXa-Ka wio) (wvv-) 7rcm/ev-Ka 
 
 448. a. Liquid themes of one syllable change e to a : oreXXto (areX-) 
 send, ((rroKKa ; <i>6eipa> (^dep-) destroy, cKfydapiea. 
 
 b. »/ is rejected in a few verbs : Kpivoi (Kptv-) distinguish, KcKpi-xa; 
 Tfiva (rev-) extend, rera-Ka, etc. (519). If not rejected, it must be 
 changed to y nasal : <j)aiva) {(jtav-), ire(payKa. 
 
 c. Several liquid roots suffer transposition (64), and thus become 
 vowel-roots : ^ciXXa (fiaX-) throw, /St'/SXij-ica ; Ka/i-vio am weary, ks- 
 Kfirj-Ka. 
 
 449. The stem of the first pluperfect is the same as that of the first 
 perfect, with -kij- (in some forms -xei-) substituted for -kq-. 
 
 450. Formation of the Second Perfect. — The stem of 
 the second perfect reduplicates the theme and adds -a-: ye- 
 ypa<f>-a-, 1st sing, indie. yiypa<jja; from ypa.<^m (ypofj}-) write. 
 
 a. In general, only consonant-verbs form a second perfect. Yet 
 the vowel-verb aKovto liea/r makes the second perf. aKT]Koa. 
 
 b. Hd. has -Beoiro for -Beiro in compounds. 
 
 446 D. In Hm. only vowel-themes (or such as become so by transposition) 
 form a first perfect ; and even these often have a second perfect form : 
 iretpi-aa-i Att. TretpuKaffi {(pi-io produce), Kexfiri-ds Att. KeK/iiiKis {KiprVu am 
 weary), Teriiids troubled. 
 10 
 
134 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. [461 
 
 451, Vowel changes. — a. An e of the root becomes o in the 
 second perfect ; 
 
 (rTp€(j>-ai turn, t-(rrpo(^-a. tIktco (tck-) hringforth^ re-TOK-a. 
 
 b. Verbs of the second class have the strong form of the theme, 
 but take oi uistead of cl (39). 
 
 XEiVm (XiTT-) leave, Xf-Xot7r-a. (pevya {<^vy-)flee, iri-tfievy-a, 
 
 TrjK(i> (raK-^ melt, re-rrjK-a, 
 
 c. In other verbs a is often lengthened : Kpa^a (jepay-) cry, KcKpaya ; 
 ay-vvp.1, break, eaya ; ^aiVo) {(jiav-), Trt'^iji/a. 
 
 d. But the theme-vowel remains short after the Attic reduplication 
 (368) : a\ei(f>o> {aKi(f>-) anoint, dX^Xti^a. 
 
 e. Cases that stand by themselves are i^ptcya from pi\yvviu {pay-) break, 
 and eiaiBa am accustomed from root efl- or 7j9-. 
 
 452, Perfects with Aspiration. — Some verbs aspirate a labial 
 or palatal mute at the end of the theme, changing it, /3, to <^, 
 and K, y, to X • kAchto) (KXerr-) steal, KeKXo<t>a; aXKacrcru) (oAAay-) 
 exchange, -^XXap^a. 
 
 a. A few verbs have two forms, aspirate and unaspirate: thus 
 irpdrra-a (irpny-) do, TreVpaya and mnpSxa liwm done ; TreTrpaya is of tener 
 intransitive, have done {fared) well or ill. 
 
 453, The second pluperfect stem is the same as that of the second 
 perfect, with --q- (in some forms -ei-) substituted for -a-. 
 
 454, Shoetee Peefbct Forms. — A few second perfects 
 have forms loithout any suffix, the endings being added 
 directl}"^ to the root : c-oTa-fji.ei' we stand, r€-6va-vai to he dead. 
 Paradigm 336. For a list of such forms see 490 ff. 
 
 455, Inflection. — The first and second perfect systems 
 are alike in their inflection. Paradigms 317, 321. 
 
 a. The perfect follows the common form (383). The 3d sing, indlc. changes 
 -a to -6 : \eAuKe. The 3d plur. -aat is for -a-vri. The -a- of the stem changes 
 
 451 D. c. In Hm., the feminine of the participle sometimes keeps ihort a, 
 when the other forms of the tense have r\ : apripis fitted, fem. &papvta, ind. 
 tipripa {cLpapiaica); Te6ri\iis blooming, fem. TefloAuia (SefWoi). 
 
 462 D. The aspiration of a smooth or middle mute in the perfect active is 
 unknown to Hm. 
 
 45B D, a. In the Doric (Theocr.) the perfect sometimes ends in -a, -eis, -ti 
 like the present, instead of -a, -os, -e : SeSolxai J fear, ne<pvKei has sprung up. 
 So the in6n., ScSu/teiw to have set, and the participles (in Pindar), irc^piKoi/Tos, 
 KeX^oSoi/TM. Of. in Hm. KeK\i]yovTes (from KKiQu shriek). 
 
460] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 135 
 
 to the variable vowel in the subjunctive and optative, and disappears before 
 -6s (suffix -OT-) of the participle. For -vai in the infinitive see 383, 6 b. For 
 the accent of the infinitive and participle see 389 d and e. 
 
 b. The participle rtBveiis, gen. TeflveMTos, dead (490, 4) arises from TiBva-us 
 TeBi/d-oTos by transfer of quantity (36). 
 
 456. An imperative of the perfect active is lacking, except in 
 perfects which have a present meaning, and even here it is nearly 
 confined to the shorter perfects mentioned in 454 : ftrradi stand, 
 TeBvario let him die the death. Yet we have neKpayere yell and KexfjveTe 
 stand agwpe in Aristophanes. 
 
 457i The singular of the optative has rare poetic forms in -oitjv, 
 -oi7|s, -017): iratoiSolt). The subjunctive, optative, and imperative can be 
 expressed by the perfect participle with a form of ei/if am : AcAvk&s S, efrjv, 
 ifo-fli. 
 
 458. The pluperfect follows the ;xt-form (385) : before -irav in the 
 3d plural, e is used instead of ft. 
 
 a. The first and second person singular of the pluperfect have -r], 
 -rjs in the older Attic and in Plato, but -eiv, -eir in the later Attic. 
 
 Perfect MmnLE System, or 
 Perfect, Pluperfect, Put. Perf, Middle (Passive). 
 
 459. FoEMATiON. — The tense-stem of the perfect and plu- 
 perfect middle is the reduplicated theme. There is no suffix. 
 Thus stem Ae-Av-, 1st sing, indie. XiXv/xai. 
 
 460. In vowel-changes of the theme and the rejection of v, the 
 perfect middle agrees with the first perfect active : see 447 b, 448 
 a, b, c. 
 
 id-a ejd-fim tteWcb (ttiB-) weireitr-fiai Kpiva> (xpiv-) KtKpc-fiai 
 
 TipA-(i> T€Tipjj-p.at. ttXco) (ttXu-) 'ire7r\ev(r-pai reiv<o (rev-) Tera-p-at 
 
 TToii-a irfiroiri-pai (rreWio (orf A-) e(TTaK-pai /SdAXo) (^a\-) /3c'/3Xi7-/iai 
 
 8ov\6-co 8e8oiJX(0-/x(U ^deipa (tpdcp-) f(l>6ap-pai 
 
 b. Hm. has reSniiis, TtOvitaTos. In other second perf. participles, too, he 
 has -oiT- fcr -or- : ^ePawTos, yeyauros. 
 
 458 Di lid. has in the pluperfect active -ea, -ea-s, -e«. -ca-re ; in the 3d 
 plur. only -etro-i/. — Hm. has -co, -eo-s (also contracted -tj-j), -€i or -ei-v (con- 
 tracted from -EE, -cE-i/) : ireSiiirfa loas astonished, ^teS^tteoj, SfSenrvl]Keiv lie had 
 feasted. The uncontracted 3d sing, is seen only in s;See, commonly jJS?) he 
 knew. — In two or three words, Hm. forms a pluperfect with the suffix -"Ie-, 
 after the analogy of the imperfect : fiva>y-o-v (also i\v<!>y-id) plup. of fira)7a 
 command, 4pepnK-o-v plup. of n^/iriKa bleat, iyeyan-e (also iyeydv-ei) plup. of 
 ^E^oifa shoKt. Still more irregular are Sd pi. iitniy-euy, yey6v-ivv (contracted 
 from -eo-v). 
 
136 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. [461 
 
 a. The verbs rpe<j>-a) nourish, rpeir-a turn, and oTpt 0-<b turn, change 
 
 € to a: TeSpafifjiOL (74 C, d), rirpafip^L, ea-Tpapfiai. 
 
 461. Addition qfcr. — Many vowel-verbs add o- to the stem of 
 the perfect middle : TeXe'-u) complete, TeT£A.e-o--/iai, iTe-TeXe-cr-To. 
 But the added <r falls away before endings that begin with t 
 (62) : Te-reXe-a-ai, ire-rike-a-de. Paradigm 328. 
 
 a. This <r is almost always added to the perfect middle of vowel-Terbs 
 which retain a short theme-vowel in the future, aorist, and perfect : e-(nra-(r-iMaL 
 from (TTrd-ta draw. Other verbs in which it occurs are enumerated in 505 ; 
 some have both forms, with and without <r; K\ii-u close, KiKKeur/iat and 
 KfxKeiiiai : in such cases the form without er is the older. 
 
 462. Inflection. — The perfect and pluperfect middle are 
 inflected accoi-ding to 885. Paradigm 318. 
 
 a. For the accent of the infinitive and participle, see 389 b. 
 
 463. Liquid Verbs and Mute Verbs. — The concurrence of 
 consonants in the stem and endings gives occasion to a num- 
 ber of changes. These are shown in the Paradigms, 828. 
 They take place according to the rules in 51-54, 61. 
 
 a. Stems in -v- (unless they reject i>, 460) change it to a- before p. : 
 <j>aiva> ((f)av-), 7re'0ao--/iai ; but sometimes to p.: 6^6va> (o^vv-) sharpen, 
 m^vppat. The succession v-t remains; v-(t6 drops o- (61). The forms 
 which would have v-a- (7re(j>av(rat etc.) are avoided altogether ; for 
 these, it is likely that irerjiaa-pivos d, rjo-Qa, la-di, were used. 
 
 b. When pp or yy would be brought before p, the first consonant is 
 rejected : tvepir-a to send, Tri-irep-pai (for Trf-irepp-pai), (Xeyx-'o to con- 
 vict, eX-TjXcy-pai (ioT cX-rjXfyy-pai). 
 
 C. a-nevd-a pour makes fcmfUTpai (for ecr7r€V(r-pm, for ecrirevS-pai). 
 
 464. Third Person Plural of the Indicative. — The endings 
 -i/Tttt, -vTo can only stand after a vowel. When the tense-stem 
 ends in a consonant, the 3d plur. indie, is made by using the 
 perfect participle, with the auxiliary verb eiVt they are for the 
 perfect, and ^o-ai/ they were for the pluperfect. See Paradigm 
 328. 
 
 a. The Ionic endings -arai, -aro (before which ir, ft k, y are aspi- 
 rated) sometimes appear in Attic, after a consonant : reraxaTai, crerd- 
 ^aro, for reraypivoi fieri, ^(rav, from T-do-era) (ray-) arrange. 
 
 482 D, Hm. sometimes drops tr in the 2d sing. : /i4fun)-ai for nf/irri-a-iu, 
 also contracted itiiiv^. So in Hd. the imperative /i^fweo remember, with e 
 for 7). 
 
 464 D, a. The use of -otoi, -oto is much more common in Hm. and Hd. ; 
 see 376 D d. Hm. has rerctlx-oTat, -aro (1st sing. Tervynat, Tei5x<u make) with 
 
467] FUTURE PERFECT. I37 
 
 465. Subjunctive and Optative. — The perfect middle sub- 
 junctive and optative are made by using the perfect participle 
 with the subjunctive and optative of ei/xt am. 
 
 a. A few vowel-verbs form these modes directly from the stem : 
 Kra-ofjiai acquire, perf. KcKTij-fim possess, subj. KeKTw/im, Keicrjj, KeKrqrai 
 (contracted from KeKTrf-iofiat, etc.), opt. KfKTiofujv, kcktwo, kektiuto (from 
 KcKTrj-oi/Miiv, etc.), or KfKTi'iiiJiv, KeKTr/o, KeKTjJTo (from KiKTrj-ijiriv, etc). 
 So lufivrjo-Ktii (fuia-) remind, perf. lUfivrj-fiai remember. 
 
 466. FuTUBE Peefect. — The future perfect stem adds -o^|,- 
 to the tense-stem of the perfect middle. It has the inflection 
 of the future middle, -aofj-ai, -tret, -a-erai, etc., from which tense 
 it differs in form only by having a reduplication. Paradigm 
 318. 
 
 a. The vowel before -a-ofuu must be long, even when it is short in 
 the perfect middle: SeStj-crojicu (84(0 hind), XeXv-o-o/iot ; but SeSe-fiai, 
 \eXv-fiai. 
 
 b. The meaning of this tense is almost always passive. The chief 
 exceptions are fiefivfjo-ofiai sliall remember (530, 6), KeKTrjo-o/iai shall 
 possess, TTfTrava-o/jLai shall hate ceased. Very many verbs have no future 
 perfect. 
 
 c. The participle of the future perfect occurs very rarely. The only 
 instance in classic Greek is SiaTeiro\ftiri(r6fi€i/ov in Thuc. vli 25. 
 
 467. Two verbs have a future perfect active, formed from 
 the first perfect active. It ends in -fu (-k-o-o>). 
 
 '<mjiu set up perf. ctmjKa stand fut. perf. ectt^^o) shall stand. 
 
 dvfjo-Ka die TfdprjKa am dead reBvif^a shall he dead. 
 
 a. In other verbs the place of a future perfect active may be sup- 
 plied by using the perfect active participle with ta-ofuu shall he : 
 eyvioKm-es ecrofieffa we shall have recognized. Even the passive future 
 perfect may be similarly formed : t-^evtriievoi '4(tovtcu. they will have heen 
 
 Eu for V, i/mpeS-aTO (1st sing. ipripfl<riir)v, ipeiSa support) with e for ti, — the 
 change of quantity in each case being required by the hexameter verse. He 
 has even -otoi -oto after vowels : SeSal-arai {Sah/mi divide), j3f)3A.^-nTo (BdWai 
 throw). Before these endings he inserts 8 in &K-rixf-S-aTai (part, ax-rixf- 
 fievos pained), i\-Tj\e'5~aTo (for e\-7;\a-5-aTO, theme e\a-, pres. iKaiva drive). 
 Hd. usually has -arai -oto even after Towels ; a preceding a or 7) becomes e : 
 oiKfarm for ^mivTai {olxfa inhabit). In itap-eaKivaS-arai (mpcurKcai^a prepare), 
 and like forms from verbs in -fa, S belong to the theme. In hr-iK-aTcu, -oto 
 (Hd.) = Att. aiplyiihot elfft, ■iiaav, k is not changed to x- 
 
 466 S. Hm. has subjunctive iieiu><!ifji.e8a (Rd. fiefivedfieda), optative iieiu/^/iiiy, 
 fieftviifTo {etp for jjot, 36) ; also opt. 3d plur. K^Kvyro (for Kehv-t-vro). 
 
138 AOEIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE. [468 
 
 Passive Systems, or 
 Aorist and Future Passive. 
 
 468. FoEMATioN OP THE AoRisT PASSIVE. — To form the 
 stem, the suffix -6^- for the first aorist, or -e- for the second, 
 is added to the theme. These become -d-q- and -t;- before a 
 single consonant. Thus stems \v-Oi-, oToK-i-; 1st sing, indie. 
 IKvdrjv, laToXrjv. 
 
 Jiemarhs on the First Aorist Passive. 
 
 469. In modifications of the theme, the first aorist passive agrees in 
 general with the perfect middle (460, 461). 
 
 ia-a> eld-drjv irfida {ttiB-) eire[a-driv /3aX-Xm ifiXrj-drjv 
 
 Tifid-a) iTifiTi-6riv TrXeco (ttXv-) eirXevo'-di^v o"7rd-a> €(rirda--Sjjv 
 
 iroU-a iiToir^-Brjv Teivco (rev-) eTa-Brjv TeXe-<B iT€\4<T-6rjv 
 
 8ov\6-co e^ovXa-Orjv Kpivoj {Kpiv-) eKpl-Ojjv aKov-at 7jkovo--6i]v 
 
 a. But orpe'c/xo, Tpimo, and rp€(f>o> (460 a) have c in the first aorist 
 passive : ia-rpicjidriv, erpetpBriv, cdpicfiBriv, 
 
 470. Mute Verbs. — Before 6, a labial or palatal mute (tt, 0, k, y) 
 becomes rough (^, x); a lingual mute (t, 6, 6) becomes o-; see 51, 53, 
 and Paradigms 328. 
 
 For edpe^dijv, etc., see 74 d. For eTedrjv, crvBrfv, see 73 c. 
 
 Remarlcs on the Second Aorist Passive. 
 471i An e of the root becomes a : oteX-Xoi send, iirrakjiv. 
 a. ir\ii<Tffm (trKay-) stnke makes iirXfiynv ; yet in composition with ix and 
 Kari, it takes the form ■eTr\iyrii'. 
 
 472i No verb has both a second aorist active and a second aorist 
 passive. The chief exception is rpeiTco turn, eTpairov and erpdnriv. 
 
 a. Some verbs have both passive aorists in use : fi\awTco (/3Xa/3-) 
 hwrm, i^\a^6r]v and i^Xd^rjv. So Tpena, rpi^O), aTpi<j)a> ; but the 
 second aorist is more used. 
 
 473. Inflection. — The first and second aorista passive are 
 inflected alike. Paradigms 319, 322. They take active end- 
 ings, and follow the jui-form (385). 
 
 469 D. Hm. adds v before S to some vowel-themes : lSpi-v-ir)v took my seat 
 (tSpi-a), aixririii-v-9r\v revived, root Trvv- breatlie. In <(>aAvBi\v {<f>aclva shiiie, = 
 tpalva) he changes (pa€v- to tpaav- (cf. 409 D a). 
 
 473 D. Hm. sometimea has .p for -a-au in the 3d plur. indio. ; see 386 D 3; 
 also -juEZ'ai for -cai in the infinitive ; see 386 D 5. 
 
476] VERBAL ADJEGTIVES. IRREGULAR VERBS IN -m. 139 
 
 a. The subjunctive adds the mode-sufflx -"I,- and contracts: \v6S> 
 for 'KvBito. The optative has the mode-sufflx -n;- or -i- according to 
 374 a: \vde-Lq-v, Xu^e-i-rf. For the ending -ri instead of -di in the 
 first aorist imperative, see 73 b. For the accent of the infinitive and 
 participle, see 889 d and e. 
 
 474. FtJTUEE Passive. — The stem adds -(r°|,- to the aorist 
 passive stem ; and is inflected like the future middle. The 
 first future passive ends in -6?/o-o/tai, the second future passive 
 in -rjcrofJMi : Xvdi^(TOfi,aL, (rraA.i;cro//,ai. 
 
 Visrbal Adjectives. 
 
 475. The verbal adjectives are analogous to passive parti- 
 ciples. Their stems are formed by annexing -to- or -reo- (nom. 
 -To's, -T£os) to the theme. 
 
 1. A.i)-Tos, -■q, -6v loosed, looseable (solutus, solubilis). 
 
 2. Au-T£os, -d, -ov (requiring) to be loosed [solvendus). 
 
 The theme assumes the same form as in the first aorist passive, 
 except that a mute before -tos and -re'os must be smooth (51). 
 
 ed-w enros, -reos ■jreldat Tretoroff, -reos jQoXXo) ^Xtjtos, -Tfos 
 
 Tl/id-a Ti/ti^rdr, -reos wAfca TrXeuo-Tor, -reos n\fKm jrAfKroy, -te'os 
 
 re\€-(B TeXftTT-dy, -tcos reiVw Tordr, -reos ra<r(ro) tqktos, -rios 
 
 aKov-a aKOWTOs, -reos Kpivto Kpiros, -reos Tpecjxo dpeirros, -reos 
 
 THE IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. 
 476. irj/ii («-) send ; inflected nearly like tiOtj/ii. 
 
 Fut. ^cru), Aor. ^Ka {elrov etc., 443), Perf. eixa, et/xat, Aor. p. ii6r]V 
 The aorists and perfect occur almost entirely in compounds. 
 The tenses which have the ;ui-form are inflected as follovps : 
 
 a. The subjunctive of the second aorist passive has in Hm. the same 
 peculiar forms as the second aorist active of the /ii-form (444 D) : <j>av'liit (for 
 ^ax/j;, (pavfi), dauetere (for 5ajue7)re, SafirJTe), rpaTrelo/icv (for rpaire'ai/uex, rpoirwynei/) 
 with transposition, from irtifm-QV (Tepiru delight). 
 
 Hd. in the subjunctive contracts et;, but not eoi : \vSia, \v9^s, Auflp. 
 
 474 D. In Hm., the first future passive is never found ; the second- future 
 only in Saiffo/im (2d aor. pass. iSiTii' learned), fuyitaoixai {/xty-m/u mix). 
 
 476 D, Hm. has usually ??)/«, with short i. He has impf. 1st sg. "eic, Ist 
 aor. ?iKtt and eV« (359) : from &i/-(n/j.i he has a fu. Ai/eVai, ao. &i/e<ra. — Hd. p£ 
 iud. 3d pi. i.ii-iuinai irreg. for ii,v-(tvTai, and pf. par. p-f-ner-i-iiivas very irreg. 
 
140 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. 
 
 [476 
 
 
 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 Pres. ii\<f.\. 
 
 
 Impf 
 
 tV - 
 
 Pres. fc|iai 
 
 
 Impf. Uf.i\v 
 
 ti\%, i«is 
 
 
 
 rtlS 
 
 ICO'ttL 
 
 
 ico-o 
 
 filo-i 
 
 
 
 fei 
 
 ^crai 
 
 
 rtTO 
 
 rtTOV 
 
 
 
 rcTOV 
 
 feo-Bov 
 
 
 feo-Sov 
 
 ftxov 
 
 
 
 NtT|V 
 
 feo-eov 
 
 
 f^o-9tiv 
 
 f'cjJLEV 
 
 
 
 ftHev 
 
 f^^eBa 
 
 
 f^lxcOa 
 
 rtT6 
 
 
 
 f6T6 
 
 f€o-9« 
 
 
 L'eo-Se 
 
 fd<ri 
 
 
 
 feo-av 
 
 ftvrai 
 
 
 fcvTO 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 txfs etc. 
 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 iu|j,ai 
 ffl etc. 
 
 Pres. Opt. 
 
 i€£t|v or 
 
 foim 
 
 Pres. Opt. 
 
 tii^T\v or lofjlTlV 
 
 
 tefris 
 
 fois etc. 
 
 
 lelo loto etc. 
 
 Pres. Impv 
 
 ifeTcij etc 
 
 
 Pres. Impv 
 
 fto-o 
 Ua-ia etc. 
 
 Pres. Infin. 
 
 tiva-y. 
 
 
 Pres. Infin. 
 
 feo-9ai 
 
 Part. 
 
 fete, ftto-a, fiv 
 
 Part. 
 
 lf^(i.evos, -Tl, -ov 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 (Va) 
 
 
 «t(iev 
 
 et|iT]V 
 
 
 et:)ie9a 
 
 (TiKas) 
 
 cJtov 
 
 €tT6 
 
 cto-o 
 
 £to-9ov 
 
 €to-9e 
 
 (VO 
 
 {Jttiv 
 
 elo-av 
 
 ttro 
 
 litriipi 
 
 eJvTO 
 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 U|J,CV 
 
 ii>|xai 
 
 
 u|j,e9a 
 
 TIS 
 
 UTOV 
 
 1« 
 
 11 
 
 ^(r9ov 
 
 ^£r9e 
 
 ■n 
 
 TJTOV 
 
 uo-i 
 
 TlTOl 
 
 iqo-9ov 
 
 MVTttl, 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 tVtiv 
 
 
 tt|J.6V, tttKtfV 
 
 tiiiriv 
 
 £i:ne9a (-ol'|jie9a) 
 
 rfT|S 
 
 etrov, (ityrov 
 
 fctrfi, €tt]Te 
 
 eto 
 
 «i:cr9ov et(r96 (-ol(r96) 
 
 rf,, 
 
 tirvjii, ei^THV 
 
 eltv, eV'i]o-ov 
 
 ttro (-oIto) elo-9T|V etvro 
 
 (-otvTo) 
 
477] 
 
 IMREOULAB 
 
 VERBS IN -MI. 141 
 
 ACTITE. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 !tov 8t€ 
 {toiv ivTiav 
 
 or Urwffav 
 
 Imperative. 
 ov 8<rBov So-Be 
 ia-ia i<riiav iiritav 
 
 or iffBuffav 
 
 Infin. eEvai 
 
 Part, els, elo-a, iv 
 
 Infin. 8<reai 
 
 Part. 8|tevos, -i), -ov 
 
 Verbals Jtos, erfos. 
 
 a. The impf. of d<l)iqfu sometimes takes the augment before the 
 preposition: tjtpiei. 
 
 477. ei/At (i- ; Latin i-re) go has only the present system. 
 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 Imperfect Indicative. 
 
 eI|u 
 
 tflCV 
 
 X\a or flav fn"" 
 
 d 
 
 trov It€ 
 
 iitiS or ^eicrett f|TOV {|« 
 
 elo-i 
 
 Itov Itto-i 
 
 fl«i or fltiv tiTTIv |i<rav or tEO-a* 
 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 
 Present Optative. 
 
 (o> 
 
 {u|<.(V 
 
 IoCtiv or toim toi.|j,(v 
 
 «T1S 
 
 IriTOV tT|T6 
 
 lois toiTOV toiTC 
 
 «T1 
 
 tTJTOV tum. 
 
 (oi IoCti)v (OIEV 
 
 
 Present Imperative. 
 
 Present Infinitive Uvoi 
 
 tSi 
 
 Ktov Its 
 
 Participle l<iv, loOo-a, lov 
 
 tru 
 
 Itwv loVTWV 
 
 
 
 or truffav 
 
 Verbals Ito's, It^os (also iTtirfos) 
 
 a. The present has a future meaning, especially in the indicative 
 f'/ii lam going, i. e., about to go. 
 
 b. Bare, and perhaps not Attic, are tlie forms geiiiev, f/aTe, in the 
 plural of the imperfect. 
 
 c. The participle has the accent of the second aorist (389 a), and 
 sometimes its meaning. 
 
 477 D. Hm. pr. ind. 2d sg. eMa ; impf. fia or ijiov, 8 sg. ijU or ^t, 1 pi. 
 ijo/jiev, 3 pi. iiiov, Ijirai/, or ^ffav. Hm. has also an impf. with simple i ; 3 sg. 
 iff, 3 du. trriv, 1 pi. ifiev, 3 p'l. t(rav. — Hd. has in impf. 1 sg. fia, 3 sg. fit, 3 pi. 
 tjia^tty. — Compounds have rarely -ei for -ifli In Attic poets ; as ?{«. 
 
 Hm. sub. 2 sg. fpiffla, 8 sg. Jjjo-i, 1 pi. lo/iev or ioitev, opt. 3 sg. Ifoi or Ulri, 
 inf. Uvai, tiievat or j/iiv ; f u. «?i70/tai, ao. tlainr)v, irreg. ieurdfiiiv. 
 
142 
 
 ISREGVLAR VERBS IN -MI. 
 
 [478 
 
 478, ctjLtt (eo-- ; Lat. esse) am ; has only the present and fu- 
 ture systems. 
 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 
 Imperfect Indicative. 
 
 cl)iC 
 
 io-^iv 
 
 4) or iff 
 
 ^H€V 
 
 A 
 
 loTOV irrl 
 
 ijo-Ba 
 
 ^OTOV or ^TOV ^T€ Or ^(TTC 
 
 itrri 
 
 iinov iWl 
 
 fiv 
 
 lj(rTT|V or ffn\v fjo-av 
 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 
 
 Present Optative. 
 
 CD 
 
 U|«V 
 
 elTiv 
 
 «t|itv-or £tn|«v 
 
 Tis 
 
 ^TOV ^T6 
 
 A-t\i 
 
 elrov or €lIt)TOV dn or eVT)Te 
 
 * 
 
 fJTOV UO-l 
 
 Axi 
 
 etriiv or eli^Tnv tUv or cl'tiirav 
 
 
 Present Imperative. 
 
 Present Infinitive ttvoi 
 
 to-ei 
 
 ^o-Tov ^irre 
 
 
 Participle «v, ouo-a, Sir 
 
 itnbi 
 
 or eo'TWCoi' 
 
 
 SvTos, etc. 
 
 Future S(ro(iai (3d sg. ^crrai), l(roC|JLHv, 8<rea-9ai, l<ro|i€vos. 
 
 479. In the pres. indie. (ljj.i is for f(r-/ii (34) ; ei is for ecn (origi- 
 nally ea--(Ti): ia-ri retains the original ending rt. The subj. & is for 
 Eo) (Ion.) from eo-m : the opt. e'lrjv is for €(r-it)-v. The inf. that is for 
 fo-'vai : the part. &v is for fav (Ion.) from fcr-mi'. 
 
 480. The forms of the present indicative are all enclitic, except the 
 3d sing, ei (113 c). After a paroxytone, they have an accent on the 
 ultima, by 116. But the 3d sing, takes the regular accent, cori, 
 
 1. vphen it expresses existence or possibility : 
 3. when it stands at the beginning of a sentence : 
 3. when it follows ov, fiq, el, as, koL 
 Thus TovTo 8 €(TTL that which exists, etrri fioi jSouXo/ieVw it is according 
 to my wish, tl eariv ovtios if it is so. 
 
 478 D. Hm. has many peculiar forms : 
 Pr. ind. 2d sg. 4<r<rl and eh, 1st pi. ei/ieV, Sd pi. (eW, and) ^diri not enclitic; 
 Impf. ^a, ea, ^ov, 2d sg. (ijirfla and) iriffBa, Sd sg. (^v and) ?iev, erjy, ^tjv, 
 
 3d pi. {?iiTttv and) etrap ; iterative (493) fO-Kov (for eir-ffKov) ; 
 Subj. em, eta, 3d sg. eri, irKTi, f (Ti, 3d pi. saxTi (once Siai) ; 
 Opt. {eXnv etc., also) eois, eoi ; Imv. 2d sg. ia-cro (middle ending) ; 
 Inf. {elvai and) efi^evat (for eff-ixevai), efijAev, also efievai, efiev; 
 Part, idiv, iovcra, I6v, etc. Put. often with ffff : effffo/iai ; 
 Put. 3d sg. {tfferai, iarai and) tffaerai, also ifftre'tTat (as in Dor.). 
 
 Hd. has pr. ind. 2d sg. els, 1st pi. eljiev ; impf. €o, 2d sg. ?aj, 2d pi. %aTe ; 
 iterative iffKov ; sub. ia>, iwai ; opt. once iv-eoi ; part, idv 
 
 Dor. pr. ind. 2d sg. iirai, 1st pi. eluh, 3d pi. Ivrl ; impf. 3d sg. ^y, 1st pi. ^|Ues ; 
 inf. eifiev, ?ifiev ; part. idv. Put. ^(Ttrcvjuai, -p, -eiTOi, etc. 
 
482] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. 
 
 143 
 
 a. The participle Hv retains its accent in composition: irapiv, inxpovaa; so 
 also the 3d sing, of the future iarcu (for iaerai) : irapiffTtu. The retention of 
 the accent in several other compound forms is not irregular : irafniv (391 b), 
 trapSi (-ew, 479), Trapclei' (388), Trap^'tvai (389 d). 
 
 481. <l>r)jx,L (<^a-, 'L&t.fa-ri) say: 
 
 Fut. ^■qcrui, Aor. fffjrjcra, 
 
 Vb. (jbttTos, (jyarios. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 <{>T)|i.C (|>a|i,4v 
 <|>^s (jiardv ^wri 
 <j)Tl(r£ <j>aTov ^aa-l 
 
 Imperfect Indicative. 
 i^x\v £<j>afi,Ev 
 e(|>T](r6a or 6<|)T|S ?<|)otov ?<J)ot6 
 2i})i] 4(jidTT|V V<|>a<rav 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 i|>u etc. 
 
 Present Optative. 
 <|ia(iiv etc. 
 
 Present Imperative. 
 (j>a6C or <|>d6i 
 <|>dT<ii etc. 
 
 Present Infinitive ijidvai 
 
 Participle i|>ds, ij'O'O'a, <fidv 
 
 a. The forms of the present indicative are all enclitic except the 3d 
 sing, ^fl's (113 c). The participle (jjds is never used in Attic prose, 
 , which takes (pda-Koiv instead : cf . 530, 8. 
 
 482, /cet/ittt (ku-) lie, am laid. 
 Fut. K£i(ro/xat. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 Ket|iai KEt|iE9a' 
 Keto-ai Kcto-Sov kcio-9c 
 KEirai KSto-eov Ktlvrai 
 
 Imperfect Indicative. 
 iKivro 4KE((r9i]V Skclvto 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 K^ufiai etc. 
 
 Present Optative. 
 K(oCfn\v etc. 
 
 Present Imperative. 
 Ktio-o 
 K(l<r9a etc. 
 
 Present Infinitive KEto-8ai 
 Participle KE(|Jievos 
 
 481 D. Middle forms of <t>nfi( are rare in Att. (thus in Plato, pf. imv. Sd sg. 
 7r€(f i^ffflw), but common in other dialects ; yet the pres. indicative middle is 
 rare. Hm. has impf. l<bi.iu\v, iiparo or ^irx), etc., imv. ^io, <j>iire<i>, etc., inf. 
 (pJurBai, part, (pijievos. 
 
 482 D. Hm. pr. ind. 3d pi. Keo/rai, KelaToi (3Y6 D d), /tfarai (44) ; impf. 3d 
 pi. ixiiVTo, Kfiaro, kcoto ; subj. 3d sg. ktjtui ; iterative (493) 3d sg. KivKSTo ; fu. 
 
144 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -Ml. [488 
 
 a. The infinitive Kucrdai retains its accent in composition: Kara- 
 KfiaBat, contrary to 386. 
 
 b. The only forms of the subjunctive and optative which occur are Kfrirai, 
 Kiriffde, Keoiyrai ; KeoiTOj Kioivro. 
 
 483. rifxai {rjo--) sit : used only in the present system. The 
 -0-- of the root is retained only before the endings -rak 
 and -TO. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 T||i.ai {j|u6a 
 i]a-ai Tjo-dov TjcrOe 
 ^CT-rai ^o-flov ^VTOi 
 
 Imperfect Indicative. ' 
 ■^o-o r\<r9ov rjo-Be 
 
 ■qOTO fjO-OllV T|VTO 
 
 Subjunctive wanting. 
 
 Optative wanting. 
 
 Present Imperative. 
 r\a-o 
 <j<rflo) etc. 
 
 Present Infinitive T[<r8oi 
 Participle {j|j:cvos 
 
 484, For Tjiiai, the Attic prose almost always uses the compound 
 KaBrjiim (properly sit down). 
 
 Pr. Ind. KaQjifiai, KaBrfircu, Ktidrirai, etc. 
 
 Impf. eKaBriiitjv, indOrjao, eKaOrjTO, etc. (361) 
 or Ka0T]iir]v, Kadrjao, KaSijaro, etc. 
 Pr. Subj. Kadaiiai, Ka6fj, KaB^rm, etc. 
 
 Opt. Kadoifniv, KaBoio, KaBoiro, etc. 
 
 Irav. Ka6r)<To, KaBrjirdtD, fete. Inf. xaBrjaBat. Part. Kadfjiifvos. 
 
 a. Kadrja-dai irregularly keeps the accent of rjadat: cf. KaraKf'ia-Bm 
 (483 a). 
 
 485, ^lii (cf. Lat. a-io) my, used only in pres. 1st sing, ^pn and impf. 
 Ist and 3d sing, ^v, ^ (^v S' tym said I, ^ S' Ss said he). 
 
 486, xP'l (xp"-! XP^') i^ hehoves, impf. exPV" •"" XP^"! 
 
 Pr. sub. xpn> opt- XP^'I' i°^' XP^'"^< V- XP^^" iP^l neut., for xp^ov 36). 
 Fu. xph'^fi" A compound of this is : 
 
 aiTo-xpr) it is enough, 3d pi. (contract) diroxpaxri., impf. dnixpr] ; 
 
 Ksia or Kta (427 D). — Hd. has ee for ct in some forms : Ke'erai, IkUto, (cfeVflm, 
 KfcffOai (but not before /i, as Kce/iai, Kcefievos). In the ind. 8d pi, he has Kearcu, 
 
 483 D. Hm. has ind. Sd pi. cVarai, ('{aro (376 D d), with irregular change of 
 71 to ei, rarely coTai, eoTO, only once tivto. Hd. always Earoi, ^aro. 
 
 486 D, Hd. has xp^, Xpvo, XPn""', but iwoxp? (kotoxp?, Kardxpa), imoxpav. 
 
489] ENUMERATION OF ni-FORMS. 145 
 
 Pr. inf. airoxprjv, part. oaroxpSiv, -Sxra, -S>v, both contract. 
 Fu. 6aroxpt)<Tfi, mroxprjaoviri, aor. dirixPW^- 
 
 487. The deponents Sivafim can, cViora^ai understand, and Kptfiafiai 
 Jiang are inflected in the present like the middle of tartjiu (331), except 
 in the following forms r 
 
 1. The 2d sing, imperfect and imperative : eSvva, Tjiria-Tw ; Svva, 
 eirl(TTio (416). 
 
 2. Subjunctive bvva/im, cirla-Ttofiai, KpefuofLoi, proparoxytone (417 a). 
 
 3. Optative hivaio, eViorato, Kpefiaio, etc., with recessive accent 
 (418 b). 
 
 For their principal parts, see 585, 5, 6, 8. 
 
 ENUMERATION OF MI-FORMS. 
 Presents of the fu-form. 
 
 488. The verbs whose presents have the /xi-form belong to 
 the seventh and the fifth classes (404, 402 e, f ). 
 
 The presents in -ii.i of the seventh class are enumerated in 
 the verb-list 534-538. For the complete inflection of TiBrifu, 
 
 d(S(i>/u, lar-qfu See 329—331 ; of tiy/^t, ^t/^lj tilii, (t>VI^^ Kct/Aai, -q/xai 
 
 see 476-484. 
 
 The presents in -/^i of the fift/i class are enumerated in the 
 verb-list, 525-529. Those in -vv/u are inflected like SeiKvU/ii, 
 332 ; the few in -i/Tj/ii like ronj/ii. 
 
 a. Verbs in -vvfu, in the later Attic and common dialect, often have 
 another form in -via, inflected like \da> : SeiKvia SetKvieis, etc. 
 
 Second Aorists of the jxi-form. 
 
 489. For the second aorists of Ti6r]p,i, bibajii, Itrnifu, see 333-385 ; 
 of I'lj/it, see 476. 
 
 Themes in -a-. 
 1. /3aiVo> 03a-) go (519, 7). 
 2d ao. t^Tjv, j35, ^attjp, ^qBi, ^jjvai, ^is. 
 
 3. yijpd-a-Kco grow old (530, 1). 2d ao. inf. yrjpavm (poetic). 
 3. dt8pda-K<o (8pa-) run (530, 2), used only in compounds. 
 2d ao. edpdv, eSpds, eSpd, etc. ; Spa, dpas, dpi, etc. ; Spairjv, bpaBi, dpavai, 
 8pds. 
 
 489 D, Hm. has 3d pi. tarm, inf. ffe/teK, B^ftevat, S6iiev, S6ii.fvai, irriintvai. 
 
 1. Hm. ind. 3d dual pi]Tiiv and fiiriiv, 3d pi. %Pt]<rvai, and iPav, pdy, once 
 iPaxrm/, subj. fidw (444 D), 3d sg. i8%, 1st pi. fieiofuv (Hd. fiiaiiev), inf. flSrai 
 and piiiieiicu. 
 
 2. Hm. part, ytipas. 3. Hd. iSpriv, inf. Spiral, but part, ipaf. 
 
146 SECOND A0RIST8 OF THE MI-FORM. [489 
 
 4. KTelvco {lerev-, Kra-) Mil (519, 4). 
 
 2d ao. (poetic) cktov, i'Kras, eKxa ; part. Krds, mid. KTcificvos. 
 
 5. ovivrjfu (ova-) ienefit (534, 6). 
 
 3d ao. mid. aivlnrqv (440 b) ovalfu^v (445 a) ovquo, ovaa-Bai, ovrifievos. 
 
 6. ncTofiai {iTfT- also TTTa-jJfy (508, 38). 
 
 3d ao. act. (only poetic) fitrqv, irTa'.tjv, trT^vai, irrAs. 
 
 mid. (also in prose) eirTcifi.riv, irTciirBaL, Trrdfievos. 
 
 7. Root tXo- endure, fut. tXijo-o^oi, perf. TerXrjKa. 
 3d ao. etXtji/, rXm, TXairjv, rX^^i, rX^i/ai, rXar. 
 
 8. <j)ddva> {(pda-) anticipate (531, 3). 
 3d ao. '4(^6r]v, <j)du>, <^6aiqv, (jtBrjvai, (j>6ds. 
 
 9. Theme npia-, used for aor. of uveofim Tmy (539, 7). 
 
 2d ao. iivpiafir)v, irpimfiai., irpiatiir))) (445 a), Trplaxxo and Trpio), irpiaa-Bai, 
 Trpidpevos. 
 
 Themes in -e-. 
 
 10. (T^ivvvfu ((T/Sf-) ^M< out, extinguish (536, 3). 
 3d ao. io-^riv went out (500, 5), inf. a-^fivai. 
 
 11. o-keXXq) (o-KeX-, tricXe-) (?ry trans. (518, 15). 
 3d ao. eo-kXiji/ iecame dry (500, 6), inf. o-kX^vhi. 
 
 13. ex"> (o'EX' t^X^") ^"'^^i ^"'^ (508, 16). 
 2d ao. imv. o-x^s (443 b). 
 
 Themes in -o-. 
 
 13. SKlcrKop.ai (aX-, dXo-) am taken (533, 1). 
 2d ao. erfXojy or ijXmy, dXci, dXoirjv, a\aivai, dXovr. 
 
 14. ^id-ffl Z&e (507, 2). 
 
 2d ao. e0ta)v, ^ta>, ^lolrjv, ^iSivai, Piovs. 
 
 15. yiyvaa-Ka (yi-o-) fcoM (531, 4). 
 
 2d ao. eyvuiv, yvat, yvoirjv, yvaidt, yvavai, yvovs. 
 
 Themes in -i- and -«-. 
 
 16. ntvat (m-) drink (531, 3). 2d ao. imv. nWt (poet. Trie). 
 
 17. fitf-o) pass under, take on (507, 3). 
 3d ao. eSvv (500, 4), Bi<o, Sddi, Sivm, Sis. 
 
 4. Hm. 3 pi. iKTav, subj. KTeoiucc, inf. Kri/ievai, KTd/iev; mid. 3 sg. ?ktoto 
 W(M MfeJ, inf. KToo-flai. 
 
 6. Dor. eiTTdi/ (iu chorus of Att. tragedy). 
 
 7. Hm. 3 pi. ?T\av. 
 
 8. Hm. 3 pi. (/>flc{i/, subj. 3 sg. ipBri^ or (^flrjo-i (once irap-ij>fl^7)(ri), 1 pi. <;)8f'u- 
 fiev, 3 pi. <^0eWi. 
 
 1 3. The form with €- is not found in Hm. and Hd. Hm. has subj. 3 sg. 
 aKdr} (444 D), inf. ahibvaL and a\iifievai. 
 
 14. Hm. subj. 3 sg. yvdip and yv^, inf. yixi/i-fvai and 71'Si'ai. Find. ind. 3 
 pi. iyvov. 
 
 17. Hm. 3 pi. %Svv and ^SOo-ok, opt. 3 sg. 8u»j (for Si/-«;, 446 D), 1 pi. SB/ieii 
 (for Siw/iey), inf. Sii/ieyoi and Svvcu ; iterative SiiTKoy. 
 
489] SECOND AORISTS OF TEE m-FORM. 147 
 
 18. (j>v-<i> prodiice (507, 4). 
 3d ao. f<l)vv (was produced, horn, 500, 3), ^ia, <j)wai, ^is. 
 
 18. Hm. 3 pi. iipw. 
 
 The following second aorists of the /ii-form are peculiar to the Epic 
 dialect : 
 
 19. &-a> satiate, 2 ao. became sated, sub. 1 pi. iicix^v, inf. a/iEvai. 
 
 20. airawpd^o) take away, 2 ao. part, airoipas (mid. anovpafievas Hes.). 
 
 21. pdWa (Pa\-, |8Aa-) i/irow at (518, 4), 2 ao. 3 du. ^u/i^PKiTriv encountered, 
 inf. (vfiPK'linevat ; mid. 3 sg. ifiKr\ro was hit, wounded, sub. 3 sg. $\-i\eTai (373 D), 
 opt. 2 sg. $Ke!o (for PKn-io), inf. $Kfi(r6m, par. j3\^/jcvoj. 
 
 22. oiTo-o) wound (507 l*, 5), 2 ao. 3 sg. o&ro, inf. oirdiievai, ovTd/uv, mid. 
 par. oirdiievos wounded. 
 
 23. irliiw\Ti/u (T\a-) Jill (534, 7), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. irKfiTO, 3 pi. irX^i/ro, became 
 full (in Aristoph. opt. i/i-irK^nriv, imv. eiiirKria'o, par. i/j.jrK'lififi'os). 
 
 24. ireXofoi (TeAaS-) tome n«a)' (514 D, 21). From cognate theme irAo- 
 come 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. TrXflro, Eir\r)To, 3 pi. ^irATji/To, ttX^vto. 
 
 25. irr^o-crtu (irrjjK-) crouch (514, 7). From cognate theme irra- come 2 ao. 
 3 du. Kara-irT-fiTTiv. 
 
 26. PtPpiiffKoi {Pop-, Ppo-) eat (531, 3), 2 ao. ifipav. 
 
 27. irA.(i-aj Ion. and poet, for TrAea (irAu-) soi/ (512, 3), 2 ao. (in comp.) 
 ^■jrXav, par. ttAc^;. • 
 
 28. KT^fu) (ktiS-) found. From shorter root kti- comes 2 ao. mid. par. 
 lerifievos founded. 
 
 29. <pel-vu> perish (521, 6), 2 ao. mid. itpBi/xiiv, sub. 3 sg. <l>9ieTai, 1 pi. <()9m(- 
 fifO-ea, opt. (pet/iriv (for <()fli-i;uT)v, 445 D), 3 sg. ((leiTO, inf. ^SlaBat, par. ^Bitieyos. 
 
 30. kAu-o) Aear (512 D, 8), 2 ao. eK\voy heard, imv. kAiSi, 2 pi. KASre, also 
 KeK\v0t, kekAutc (436 D). 
 
 31. Au-o) /oosc, 2 ao. mid. Kip.-nv, 3 sg. Aiiro and aCto, 3 pi. xivro. 
 
 32. Trveo) (ircw-) breathe (512, 4), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. &fi-m€To recovered breath. 
 
 33. o-eiJa ((Tu-) (^jwe (512 D, 9), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. a-iro, par. aifitfos (Trag.). 
 
 34. x^" (x«-) /">'»• (612, 6), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. x^to, 3 pi. x*^"™, par. x^Mfor. 
 Also the following (all in the middle) from verbs with consonant themes ; 
 
 35. aWo/iai (oA-) leap (518, 3), 2 ao. 2, 3 sg. oAcro, SAto (^ir-aAro), sub. 3 sg. 
 fiAerai, aAi7Toi, par. 4ir-d\fievos (also ^m-(iA/«ei'oj). 
 
 36. apcpla-Ka (op-) ^'oin (533 D, 14), 2 ao. mid. par. ipjavos fitting. 
 
 37. Root yev-, only in 2 ao. 3 sg. 7eWo 7ic grasped. 
 
 38. Se'x-Ojuai receive, 2 ao. iSeyfiri", 3 sg. SeWo, imv. Be'|o, inf. 5e'x8ai, par. 
 Seyfievos. 
 
 39. AeV"" spe<s^i 2 ao. iKeyfJLriv counted myself, 3 sg. AeWo counted (for him- 
 self). 
 
 40. Root Aex- (no Pres.), 2 ao. 3 sg. cAckto 7a?W himself to rest, imv. Atfo 
 (as to Af'leo, see 428 D b), inf. Kara-Kcxeai, par. KaTtXrXeyiieyos. 
 
 41. fiiy-vvfu mix (528, 7), 2 ao. 3 sg. ^/iiKTO, /UKTO. 
 
 42. up-mifii rouse (S28, 11), 2 ao. 3 sg. Spro, imv. iipo-o (as to 6p<rio, see 428 
 D b), inf. up9ai, par. op/ievos. 
 
 43. irfiy-vOfu fix (628, 12), 2 ao. 3 sg. Kar-iirriKTo stuck: 
 
 44. ndWa (iroA-) sAaie (518 D, 27), 2 ao. 3 sg. tti^Ato dashed himself. 
 
 45. TTf pB-iD destroy, 2 ao. inf. irepBai (for irepfl-ffflai) <o 6« destroyed. 
 
 Here belong also two adjectives, originally participles of the 2 ao. mid. : 
 
 46. &a-fieuos well-pleased, glad (root aS-, pr. avhdvia please, 523, 1). 
 
 47. iKiiivos favorable (root ik-, pr. i/covco, come, 624 D, 2). 
 
148 
 
 SHORTER SECOND PERFECT FORMS. 
 
 [490 
 
 Shorter Second Perfect Forms without -a-. 
 
 490. See 454. In the indicative these forms are confined to the 
 dual and plural: the singular always has the suffix -a-. See para- 
 digm 336. 
 
 1. "umjfu (a-To) set, 1st pf. earrjKa (for tre-a-TqKa) stand (500, 1), with 
 regular inflection ; 2d pf. dual eaTorov, etc. Paradigm 836. 
 
 2. ^alvai 03a-) go (519, 7), 1st pf. fiefiqKa have gone, stand fast (500, 
 2), regular; 2d pf. 3 pi. ^e^aai, sub. 3 pi. ^c^acri, inf. fie^dvai, part. 
 |3e^<B9, /36/35tra, gen. ^i^Sitos (contracted from /Se^amr). 
 
 3. yiyvofiai {y(v-, ya-) become (506, 1), 2d pf . yeyova regular ; 2d pf . 
 part, yeyas, yeyaxra, gen. ytySror (contracted from yfyacof). 
 
 4. Bvfia-KO) (6av-, 0va-) die (530, 4), 1st pf. redviKa am dead regular; 
 2d pf. pi. ridvaiiev, TeBvua-i, 2d plup. 3 pi. ereBvaa-av, pf. opt. TfBvalrjv, 
 imv. riOvadi, inf. reSvavat, part, redueas, -atra, -6s, gen. -ajroff. 
 
 5. 1st pf. SeSoiKa (root Si-, fiei-) fear, aor. eSettra. 2d pf. SiSta, pi. 
 deSificv, SfSiaa-i, 2d plup. 3 du. eScSirrjv, 3 pi. fdeSia-av, pf. sub. deS<'<», 
 opt. SfSifi'i;!', imv. SeSidi, inf. SeSihat, part. SeStas. 
 
 491. 6. oTSa (tS-, eiS-) /cwoio .• a perfect without reduplication 
 and with present meaning. Fut. ttcrofiai, verbal urTeov. 
 
 Perfect Indicative. 
 
 Pluperfect Indicative. 
 
 olSa ia-ftiv 
 
 fiSt], T)8eiv fio'liei', ^Sei/iev 
 
 ol<r6a itrrov lo-re 
 
 ■nSi] r8a, iiSci(r8a 5'""<"' fi"""') ^Seite 
 
 olSi (o-Tov lo-ao-i 
 
 Ti86i(v) fio-rtiv f|o-ov, fiSeirov 
 
 Perfect Subjunctive. 
 
 Perfect Optative, 
 
 clSu clSuflEV 
 
 clSctTjv elSet)i,(v, -c(i)|iEV 
 
 clSfjs elSfjrov Air^e 
 
 (lScCi]s clSciTov cISeCtc, -c(t)tc 
 
 clSfj clSfjTov clSucri 
 
 dStb] clSe(TT]v «l8«I«v, -elria-av 
 
 Perfect Imperative. 
 
 
 Jo-fll toTOV toT6 
 
 Perfect Infinitive rtSivai 
 
 ^loTOI VoTUV licTTWV 
 
 Participle elStis, elSvta, clSds 
 
 or iffraffav 
 
 elSoTos etc. 
 
 490 D. 1. Hm. pf. 2 pi. eVrjire, inf. iarififai, itrrdfiev, part, iffrads, Icrra- 
 Jtos. — TId. part, etrretjis, ea'Tewa'a, etc. 
 
 2. Hm. pf. 3 pi. P^pdiiri, part, fifffatis, jSeiSauja, gen. $e$aSiTos. 
 
 3. Ilm. pf. 3 pi. ye-ytido't, plup. 3 du. yeydr-qy, inf. yeydftif, part, yeyottij, 
 yeyawa, gen. YEyatSTos. 
 
 4. Hm. imv. tiBvadi, TeBviro), inf. rfSud/ievai, reBydficv, part. gen. TcfljTjwToj, 
 also Tidvr\6Tos, fem. reOvriviris ; only once TcflveaTi, as in Att. 
 
 6. Hm. has Sei- for the redupl., SelSia, SelSoixa (once SeSidiri), and doubles 
 S after the augment, ISSeitra, as well as after a short vowel in composition, 
 
492] SHORTER SECOND PERFECT FORMS. 149 
 
 a. The forms y&rjs and pSftr are also used for HSricrda and rjSei.a-6a. 
 Rare and poetic are ^Se/ifv, i/Scte : colloquial ota-Bas. Rare and mostly 
 late are oiSas, oiSa/iev, oiSarf, otbatri. 
 
 492, 7. eot/ca (iK-, eiK-) am like, appear, pluperf. iaKr) (358 a): 
 besides the regular inflection, has the forms 1 pi. totyfiev (poetic), 3 
 pi. ei^atrt (cf. itrdtri), inf. elKivm, part. cIkcds, flKvia, cIkos. Fut. ei^to 
 rare. 
 
 8. Kpd^o) (Kpay-) ory (514, 13), 3d pf. KcKpdya as present ; 2d pf. imv. 
 
 K€Kpa)(St. 
 
 neptSSeiffas (once iiroSefffore). The original root was SFt- : hence pf. SeSFia, 
 ao. eSFettra, which, after F was lost, were changed to SefSta, ^SSettra, to pre- 
 serve the long quantity of the first syllable. For SefSia, Hm. has also SelSa 
 with present form, but only in the first person sing. He has also a future 
 SeirreTM, Sel<re<T6ai, and an impf . Sie, Sioy, feared, fied. 
 
 491 D. 6. Hm. has pf. 1 pi. itiifv (53 D a), plup. 2, 3 sg. jJSijo-flo, ^Stj, or 
 JjSte, also very irreg. rjefSiji, t/e(8); (perhaps for ef«Sr)s, eFeiSn) ; plup. 3 pi. 
 tirav (for iS-<rat>) ; pf . sub. eiSeu, pi. eiSofiev, efScTf, eiSuiti ; inf. IfS/UEcai, i'S/ici/, 
 part. fem. elSma and iSum ; f u. ft(rofiau and eiS^itq;. 
 
 Hd. has pf. 1 pi. iS/nev and olSafiev, plup. 1,3 sg. ijSea, ^See, 2 pi. ^Siare; 
 fu. ciS^o-o). 
 
 The Dor., with oTSo, has a peculiar pres. iffa/it, fa^s, lirdTi, pi. ftra/iev, 
 fffarri. 
 
 492 D, 7. Hm. impf. 3 sg. clice, 2d pf. 3 du. iiKTOv, 2 plup. 3 du. ^kttjk, 
 plup. mid. 3 sg. ijiicTo or tiKTo. — Hd. has pf. o?ko, part, ornds. 
 
 Add further for Homer, 
 
 9. ludofiai {fmr, fiey-) reach after, seek for, 2 pf. press on, desire eagerly; 2 
 pf. sg. /icfuti/a, -as, -E, du. /itntrrov, pi. /i-cimfifv, ixenaTe, jieiiaaai, plup. 3 pi. 
 /lefuurow, pf. imv. 3 sg. /le/idra, part, /lefiadis, -vTa, gen. ^e/uouto; or ikixoAtos. 
 
 10. Pf. rirKriKa (tKcl-) am patient (489, 1) ; 2d pf. 1 pi. TETAa/uEy, opt. te- 
 ■r\ait\v, imv. TEVXofli, inf. TETAa^uEi/Joi), part. tetAijcSs, -u?ci, gen. -((ror. 
 
 11. 2d pf. &vaya, -as, -e (avay-) command, 1 pi. Hvmyiiev, imv. fivajx^', 3 sg. 
 aii(ix9a (with middle ending; so), 2 pi. S;'cijx9e: sub. wtii-ya), opt. aifdiyoifu, 
 rare imv. SvojyE, inf. cti/aiyE/iEi/. Plup. ^i/c^yEa, 3 sg. iip<iyfi{v), commonly 
 oi/iiiyEi. For irreg. plup. ^ywyov (or Symyoc), 3 sg. ^vaivE, 3 pi. iivdyevy, see 
 458 D. For pf. 3 sg. &;/a)7E Ae commands, iwdiyii is sometimes used: 2 du. 
 aviiyeTov for iviiyarov. Fu. aviii^iu, ao. ^vii)|a. 
 
 IS. ^TE^pa) (e7Ep-) wafe (618, 5), 2d pf. iypfiyopa am amake, 3 pi iypT\y6pBd.at 
 wholly irreg., imv. 2 pi. iyp^yopOe (middle ending), inf. 4ypiiyop8<u (middle 
 ending, but accent irreg.). Hence pr. part. iypfi)yop6<i)v. 
 
 13. epxo/iai come (639, 2), 2d pf. iK-fiKiiBa, etc. ; also EiA'^Aouflo, 1 pi. eiX^- 
 KovBfify (29 D). 
 
 14. irdcrx'" (iro9-, itevS-) s«^«' (533, 13), 2d pf. iriirovBa, 2 pi. iriiroirBe (better 
 ireirao-flE, for ireTraS-rc), part. fern. itciraSvitt. 
 
 15. irelBoi (mfl-) persuade (511, 8), 2d pf. iteVoiSo ir«s<, 2d plup. 1 pi. 
 4irciri0iiev (imv. Tr/irEifffli Aesch.). 
 
 16. PiPpiia-Kiii (Ppo-) eat (531, 3), pf. pdPpuKa (part. nom. pi. Pe^parcs 
 Soph.). 
 
 17. TTiTTTai (tet-, ttte-, ttt 0-) fall (506, 4), pf. ire'irrcBKa, part. ace. pi. irETrrEuJ- 
 Tos (irEirriiis, irEirraToi, Soph.). 
 
150 DIALECTIC FORMATION'S. \i9& 
 
 DIALECTIC FORMATIONS. 
 
 Some formations, which are unknown in Attic prose, occur more or 
 less frequently in other dialects. 
 
 493. Iteeatitb Fokmation. 
 
 The iterative imperfect represents a continued past action as repeated 
 or vMial : weiiwea-Ke he was sending (repeatedly), used to ie sending. The 
 iterative aorist has the same force in reference to indefinite past action, 
 marking it as repeated, or usual : eXao-ao-Ke he drove (repeatedly), used to 
 drive. — Both are confined to the indicative; and are generally found 
 without the augment (in Hd. always so). The iterative aorist is found 
 only in poetry. 
 
 They are formed from the tense-stem of the imperfect or aorist, by 
 adding the iterative-sign -o-fcole-, and are inflected like the imperfect : 
 act. -(TKo-v, -a-Kf-s, -<rK€, etc., mid. -crKo-firjv, -o-Ke-o, -o-kc-to, etc. Thus 
 fiivf-aKov (fievo> remain), (jjvye-cricc {(pfvyai flee), eprjTijcra-crKf (ipjjTijco 
 restrain), a-Ta-a-Ke stood (Ja-rrnu set, ta-Tijv stood). 
 
 a. A very few iterative imperfects have o before -itkov, Kp^TTTOriTKov (KpiirTto 
 hide), piTrTa-ffKoy (j>iitTa> throw). 
 
 b. In contract verbs, e either remains without contraction : KaK4-e-<rKov (KaKta 
 call) ; or ia dropped : &9€-<rKov (ai0f oi push). Verbs in -ooj sometimes change 
 ae to aa : vaierdaa-Kov (vaieTcLQ) inhabit), cf . yaierii'i (409 D a). 
 
 494. Formation with -$-. 
 
 Several verbs annex -Bolt- to the tense-stem of the present or second 
 aorist. A variable vowel before this suffix sometimes changes to -a-. 
 This formation does not modify the meaning : it is mostly poetic, 
 occurring very seldom in prose. It is often difficult to tell whether 
 the meaning is that of the aorist or the present (or imperfect). The 
 following are the most important of these forms. 
 
 bimKco pursue eSiwKades, SiaiKdda (subj.) -detv. 
 
 fiKia yield eiKiidji, -Boifii, -Bovra. 
 
 afLvvo) ward off d/ivvadov, -dere, -deiv. 
 
 e'ipya shut out eepyadev, dno-epyade, KarfipyaBov, etc. 
 
 of/pm lift up r/epedovTm float in air. 
 
 dyfipa assenible rjyepiBovrai, -oiTO. 
 
 fpXeya hum (pXeyeBei, -oiaro, •6uiv. 
 
 <pBiva> perish (jtBivvdovm, -dov, -0eiv. 
 
 cX<i> hold ((Tx^Bov aor., inf. a-xfBUiv, Att. axeBetv. 
 
 fKiov went, aor. pcr-fKiadov. 
 
 a. The first three are regarded by most editbrs as aorists, and their infini- 
 tive and participle are written accordingly : Sij>KadeTi>, elxaBdvTa, aiiiivaSetv. 
 
497] IRREGULARITIES OF MEANINQ. 151 
 
 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. » 
 
 A. Forms of one voice in the sense of another. 
 
 495. In many verbs the active voice has no future, the 
 future middle being used instead : /j.avdafio learn, /xaflijtro/iai 
 (not fji.a6Tj(rw) shall learn. 
 
 a. This is the case with a large proportion of the verbs of the fifth 
 and sixth classes (see the verb-list, 531-533) ; also with many others, 
 as (peiyia Jiee, daviii^M wander; especially such as express an action of 
 the body, as aKova hear, Sdw sing, drravrdai meet, anokavo) enjoy, /3a6i'f<a 
 (fut. ^aStoC/iai) walk, ^XiircD see, ^oaxa cry, ye\ia> laugh, kX(T<u weep, 
 olfiai^io wail, o-tyaeo and (runirda am silent, o-irouSafm am hisy. 
 
 496. In many verbs tbe future middle has the meaning of a 
 future passive: AetTro) leave, Aei'i^o/Aat {— XenpOT^a-oixai) shall be left. 
 
 a. This is always the case with the following verbs, which have no 
 future passive : dSiKeto lorong, apxw rule, StSdo-Ko) teach, eipya shut out, 
 eX<» liave, KaXtjo) hinder, oIkcio inhabit, 6fi6Koyia> acknowledge, Tapd(riTa> 
 disturb, rpitjxo nourish, rripea watch, (j)i\ea) love, (j)v\d(Ta-a> gua/rd. So 
 nearly always Ti/xam honor, rpf/Sw crush, a-repeco derive. 
 
 497. In many deponent verbs the aorist passive is used 
 instead of the aorist middle : thus ^ovKo/xai wish, future l3ov- 
 Xria-OfLai, but aorist IfiovXqQrjv (not e^ovk-rja-aijiriv) wished. These 
 are called passive deponents/ and the rest, in distinction from 
 them, are called middle deponents. 
 
 a. Of passive deponents, the most important are the following : those 
 which in the future have a passive form as well as a middle, are meirked 
 with * : thus *diaXiyopm converse, aor. SieXexdrjv amversed, fut. 8iaXe^- 
 o/iai and bidkexd'iia-ofiai shall converse. But ijSopai has only fi<r6!j(rop.ai. 
 ayap.at admire (535, 4) *rj8opai am pleased 
 
 ''mdeop.m feel shame (508, 7) iv6vp.iop,ai consider 
 
 cikaojiai wander *irpodvfi4onm am eager 
 
 dp.CKKdopm contend *8ia\€yofiai converse (508, 19) 
 
 dpi/eop.ai deny iiriiii'kop.ai. care for (510, 12) 
 
 *ax6op.ai am gi-ieted (510, 3) liera/ieXopai regret 
 
 ^ovkopai wish (510, 4) diTovoiop.ai despair 
 
 biop-ai want (510, 5) *Si.avoeopaL meditate 
 
 SepKop-ai see (508 D, 31) ivvoiopm thinh on 
 
 bivafiai am able (585, 5) irpovoeoiiai. foresee, provide 
 
 evavTioopai oppose o'iopai think (510, 16) 
 
 iirla-TaiJim understand (535, 6) a-e^ofmi revere 
 
 eiAa/3e'o/iai am cautious ' <jii\oTi fiiopat am ambitious 
 
 496 D. In Hm. a, few second aorists middle have a passive meaning : 
 6i8\»)To he was hit, Krd/ievos slain. 
 
152 IRREaULAEITIES OF MEANING. [498 
 
 b. Some of these verbs, beside the aorist passive, have an aorist of 
 the middle form : thus ayafiai, aor. usually Tiyda-driv, but also riyaa-dfiriv. 
 
 498. Even in some verbs which are not deponent the aorist passive 
 has a middle meaning: €v(j)paiva) gladden, Tjv^pavBrjv rejoiced; aTpe(j>a> 
 turn, i<TTpa.<l>rfv turned (myself); (jtaivco ahoiD, e(j)dvr)v showed myself, 
 appeared (but i(l>dvdqv generally was shown). 
 
 499. Several deponent verbs" have a passive aorist and future vrith 
 passive meaning: idofiai heal, lanTdjirfv healed, but ii6r]v was healed; 
 Sexofiai receive, ede^dprjv received, but ibix6r)v was received. 
 
 a. In some, the middle forms of the present or perfect systems may have 
 both an active and a passive meaning : juijueo/tai imitate, iieiitia)imi have imi- 
 tated or have been imitated. 
 
 £. Mixture of transitive and intransitive senses. 
 
 500. In some verbs, the forms of the active A'oice are 
 divided between a transitive and an intransitive sense. The 
 future and frst aorist are then transitive ; the second aorist 
 and the perfect are intransitive. The most important cases 
 are the following : 
 
 1. itTTTjfii (tTTa-) set, place ; 
 
 trans., fut. a-Trjo-a shall set, 1st aor. caTt]<ra set; 
 intrans., 3d aor. ea-Trjv (set myself; stood, pf. €<n-t)Ka (have set myself) 
 am standing, ia-Tr]Kq was standing, fut. pf. ea-Ti'i^a shall stand. 
 a. The same important distinction prevails in the numerous com- 
 pounds of this verb : — d(f>ia-TTiiJit set off, cause to revolt, diria-njv stood 
 off, revolted, d(f>€(rTqKa am distant, am in revolt, — i<pi(rTr)fi.i. set over, 
 eireaTrjv set myself over, ecfieaTijKa am set over, — Kadia-Trj/u set down, 
 establish, Karea-Triv established myself, became established, KaBeanjKa am 
 established. The aorist middle has a different meaning: KaTfa-rrja-aTo 
 established for himself. 
 
 2. ^alvco (^a-) go; 
 
 (trans., fut. Pqcrai shall cause to go, 1st aor. t^ija-a. Ion. and poet.) 
 intrans. , 2d aor. el3qv went, pf . fie^ijKo have gone, stand fast. 
 
 3. <pij-ai bring forth, produce; so <f>6(ra, e(f>va-a; intrans., e<f>vv was 
 produced, came into being, iri^vKa am by nature. 
 
 4. hi-a pass under, take on ; KaraSio) submerge trans. ; so trans. Sia-a, 
 eSva-a, SiSvKa. but intrans. eSvv dived, set, deSvKa have entered, set. 
 
 a. ii'4Su<Ta means put on and &irf5v<ra or i^eSvtra took off another's clothes ; 
 iviivv and iardSOv, i^eSOv are used of one's own clothes. 
 
 5. a-^i-wvfu put out, extinguish; 2d aor. eo-zSi/v went out, pf. eo-jSijKo 
 am extinguished. 
 
 6. a-KcXXa ((tkcX-) dry trans. ; iiitrans., 2d aor. c<TK\rjv became dry, 
 pf. eo-icXj/Ka am dry. 
 
 7. TTiva (tti-) drink, 2d aor. tinov drank; 1st aor. eirTa-a caused to drink. 
 
 8. yeivopai (-yf v-) am bom, poetic ; Ist aor. iyfindp^v begot, brought forth. 
 
608] CLASSIFmD LIST OF VERBS. I53 
 
 501. In several verbs, only the second perfect is intransitive. 
 
 ayvufu hreah 2d pf. taya am hroken 
 
 eyeipa wake trans. iyprjyopa am awaJce 
 
 SKKiiii destroy oAmAa am ruined (SKitXcKa have mined) 
 
 wfWa permade ir4iroi6a trust (irineiKa have persuaded) 
 
 irrjyvviujix ■Kitnyya am fixed 
 
 pliyvvfu hreah eppmya am J/rohen, 
 
 0-1)170) cause to rot a-eo-rjna am rotten 
 
 TTjKto cause to melt TcrrjKa am melted 
 
 (jiaiva show ^((prjva have shown myself, appeared 
 
 CLASSIFIED LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 502. The following list exhibits the principal parts of all the most 
 important Greek verbs, excepting such verbs of the first and fourth 
 classes as are entirely regular. They are aiTanged according to the 
 formation of the present, in seven classes (see 393). For convenience, 
 the few verbs which have different tenses formed from themes essen- 
 tially different are put by themselves as an eighth class. 
 
 Pull-faced tyjje (as -YcXdu) distinguishes forms of the Attic spoken 
 language; here are included tenses found in Attic prose; also, in 
 general, those found in the colloquial parts of Attic comedy. 
 
 In ordinary type (as Tpfo) are printed forms of Attic poetry, espe- 
 cially those found in the dialogue parts of the tragedy. 
 
 Forms in brackets, [ ], or marked late, (1.), belong to the period of 
 the Common dialect (3 e). Other abbreviations are r. (rare), r. A. 
 (rare in Attic), r. pr. (rare in prose), fr. (frequent). 
 
 Dialectic forms, including those which occur only in the lyrical parts 
 of tragedy, are given at the foot of the page. Occasionally, tenses 
 found only in Ionic writers, and so marked, are included in the main 
 list, when it is likely that their non-occurrence in Attic is accidental. 
 
 Verbal adjectives in -ror and -reos are seldom given when the verb 
 has a first passive system, as they are easily inferred from that. 
 
 First Class (Variahle-Vowd Class, 393). 
 
 503. The theme assumes -"I,- in the present. This is much 
 the most numerous of all the classes. We notice here only 
 those verbs of it which have peculiarities of formation. 
 
 I. Vowel-verbs in which the final theme-vowel remains short 
 be/ore a conso?iant. 
 
 a. The following retain the short vowel in all the forms : 
 
 Future. Aorist. Perfect. Passive. 
 
 1. yiKaia laugh. 
 
154 VERBS: FIRST CLASS. [B03 
 
 2. if&M love ; also poetic prea. tpafuu, class '7. 
 
 Fu. p. ipcurBitaoiuu as act. •fjpAo-Bnv as act, 
 
 3. [KXam] break. 
 
 [KXiffu] JicXoira K^KXa<r(iai JKXdo-Biiv 
 
 4. oirdd) (^ffflw. 
 
 (Tirifo-M ?<nro(ra ScpiraKO, S(nrao-)i.ai 4<nrtt<r8t]V 
 
 6. <j>x6jii h-uise; (collateral form Bxiu) [ao. p. iSKiaBriv] 
 
 6. )^aXdo> loosen. 
 
 [xaKiaai] iffi.\a,a-a, IX<l^<io"8Tlv 
 
 7. olSlonai (oiSe-) feel shame ; also alSo/iai poet. 
 alS^crop.ai 'fi8€(rd|jLT(v r, pr. fjSefffjtai ^8^(r9T]V 
 
 "8. dK^o|j.ai heal. 
 [SLKfaofiai] f|KEord)i.T)V [{)Kc'(r0r)i'] 
 
 9. &,\(a grind. 
 
 ^\f(Ta dX'/|\Eir|Jiai, dX^Xcfiai 
 
 10. dpKliD suffice. 
 
 &pKl(rii) IjpKccra {i]pK€(T0riv^ 
 
 11. eji^oi vomit, ao. 'ij|j.€(ra> 
 
 12. J^u io)7. fu. feVu, ao. SJeo-o. 
 
 18. £«ii) scrape, ao. ?|f(ra, pf. ^Jctr/toi. 
 14. TcX^d) complete. 
 rt\S), TeKia-a h(\f(ra rer^XcKa, T£T^Xe<r|iai lTeXlo-fli]v 
 
 18. Tp4w tremble, ao. ^rpeo-a. 
 
 16. dpou plough. 
 
 [ip^Tai] ijpoora ^piBiiv 
 
 17. i,viim accomplish, also dv^ro. 
 
 Mffu ■fjv«o-tt 4)vvKa, 4tvv(r|j.ai [^i/iJtrflTjc] 
 
 18. apiw draw water, Attic dpuTu. 
 
 <jpu(ra 'fjpii6T]V [^piiffflT)!/^ 
 
 19. ?Xkm (cAk-, IAku-) (fraw. 
 
 8X|(o dXKiio-a etXicvKa, «tXKi)<rp.oi EtXKiJo-6r]v 
 
 a. The forms kKKia, eXKiira, eiK^a, elXxSw are late. 
 
 603 D. 1. Hm. also yeXoida. 2. Hm. ao. m. itpaaiiajv. 
 
 5. Theoc. fu. <p\tt(rtrSi, Hm. ao. iehaira, Pind. i(p\<ura, Theoc. pf. p! TeSKaa-iiat. 
 
 6. Pind. ao. part. x'>A(i?ais. 8. Hm. cucelofuu. 
 
 12. Hipp. c^eaiMi. 16. Hm. pf. m. ap^po/iai. 
 
 17. The form ii/iiia is commoner in poetry, Mra in Attic prose. Hm. has 
 also a fu. ccvia. Hes. has eit-TtviaBri. Theoc. has Svu^uej, and Hm. ^mro, as if 
 from a pr. ivvfu. &v(a (also ava) is poetic, though it occurs once in Plato. 
 
 19. Hm. has imp. eKKtov, fu. ixieljam, ao. EAKijira. 
 
BOB] FIRUT CLASS. 155 
 
 20. TTTioj spit (see 393 a). 
 [vriaa, -croiiiai] ^irTucra 
 
 504. b. The following retain the short vowel in a part of the forms. 
 The iirst three make it long before a-. 
 
 1. 84tii hi7id. 
 
 S^o-co ffirjo-a tihiKa, Uitfai IS«9tiv 
 
 2. Qi<a (flu-) sacrifice (see 393 a). 
 
 iwra t'flvo-o T^6uKa, T^ev|j.ai M6i]V 
 
 3. \ia loose (see 393 a). 
 
 Xvo-ci) ^vo-a X^vKa, \('\v|j,ai £\v6t]V 
 
 4. alv^u praise. 
 
 alv^o-<i> ^v£o-a ^veku, ^vrjuai f|v^8T|v 
 
 In Att. prose used mostly in compounds. 
 
 5. KaX^u (koAc-, kAt;-) call. 
 
 KoXu (423) cKd\e<ra k^kXtiko, K^KXT]|j,ai ckX^Si)v 
 
 6. (Jiuu s/iMi the lips or eyes (see 393 a). 
 
 [^liiiiui] if.va-a |il|i£Ka am shut. 
 
 1. 8*0) enter (see SO"?, 3). 
 
 8. iroB^oi miss is inflected regularly with n, but has e occasionally in the 
 future and first aorist systems. 
 
 II. Vowel-verbs with added a- after a long vowel. 
 
 505. The forms in which n- is added to the theme (461) are the 
 perfect middle and first passive systems, with the verbals. The verbs 
 which add this or after a short vowel have been enumerated in 503. 
 There remain the following in which the theme-vowel is either long, 
 or if short, is lengthened in these tenses. 
 
 21. Ion. and poet. vnKfin (or veiKfla) quarrel, fu. vemiaa, ao. Iveixwa. 
 604 D. 3. Hm. 2d ao. m. ^Ki/itjv, as pass. 
 
 4. Hm. fu. w.pi)tr<t), ao. ^vrjca ; pr. also alyiCofiat (in Hes. aXptjfti). 
 
 5. Hm. also irpQ-Ka\i^ofiai, poet. KucK'fia'Kcii cl. 6. 
 
 9. -Hm. eida harm, mislead, pr. m. 3d sg. dSroi, ao. &acra or &aira, con- 
 tracted dura, ao. p. iiaa0r)v. The first a may become d by augment. V. 
 a daTos or a-daros. 
 
 10. Hm. Koriai (also KOTeo/iai) am angry, ao. iKdrtaa, 2d pf. par. kcko- 
 
 11. Ton. and poet, ipia draw, fu. ^piJirw (Hm. also Ipia, 427 D), ao. Eipuira, 
 pf. clpvfuu {K'aTeipv<r/uu). Hes. pr. inf. (/tti-form) elpifiemi (33 D). Hm. has 
 eipi;- only as result of augm. or redupl. (3B9 D). Different are ipiofuu, pio/uu 
 (also with short «), preserve (538 D, 6 and 1). 
 
156 VERBS: 
 
 j^/TJsr ci^S/S. 
 
 [606 
 
 1. 8pdci> do. 
 
 
 
 Spdo-u SSpao-a 
 
 S^Spaxa, S^Spapai 
 
 ^SpatrEhiv 
 
 2. Kvdw scrape. 
 
 
 
 Kviaa Hipp. £KVT)<ra 
 
 
 ^kv^o-Stiv 
 
 3. Xfaia give oracle. 
 
 
 
 xpia-tn ^XP^o'O' 
 
 Kexpfo'M'" Hd. 
 
 i\pi\<ri^v 
 
 4. vfca heap up, pr. only Hd. 
 
 
 
 v^rnn ivt\ira, 
 
 v^vi]|Jiai, vivT)(r|j,ai 
 
 [4irli8riv, -ffSi]v\ 
 
 5. KvXiu, more fr. kv\{vS(d, 
 
 j-otf. 
 
 
 iKi\l(ra 
 
 KEKiJxrir^uai 
 
 iKvXiirBfiv 
 
 6. irpiu saio. 
 
 
 
 iirpura. 
 
 ir^irpT(r|UU 
 
 4irpiir6nv 
 
 1. XP'" atoint. 
 
 - 
 
 
 Xpia-a expiaa 
 
 K^XP^I^ii, KfxP'<r|iai 
 
 lxpi(r6T]v 
 
 8. XO" ''««P "i*- 
 
 
 
 \(i<r<i> £x<"''°' 
 
 K^X'^Ka, K^x'^o-fiai 
 
 iX&ir9vjV 
 
 9. |t)U pofis/i (see 393 a). 
 
 
 
 i^va-a, 
 
 [^va■|lal] 
 
 l|i<r9T)v 
 
 10. iro) ™i« (see 393 a). 
 
 
 
 vtro) Sera 
 
 iiTjiai 
 
 'iaertv Hd. 
 
 11. KvaCu seratch. 
 
 
 
 lemlffa ^Kvaicra 
 
 K^KvaiKa, K^KVai<r|j,ai 
 
 lKvaC<rST]v 
 
 12. iraCa strike. 
 
 
 
 iraCo-di iiraiaa 
 
 irliraiKa [ir«irai(r/uu] 
 
 iiraiaSriv 
 
 irof^o-oj 
 
 
 
 13. iraXaCu wrestle. 
 
 
 
 iraKaicru Hm. 4irdXaio-a 
 
 
 iiroKalaBriv 
 
 14. K\f|(i> shut, later Attic kXeCch. 
 
 kXxjitoj SKXt|o-a K^KKriKa, K^xXxiuai lKXf;o-9r|V 
 
 icXeto-d) ^KXeura [/ceKXeiKa] K^KXtijiai lKX«i<rBijv 
 
 later K^KXeurpai 
 
 15. tnla shake. 
 
 ffclffu ^a-€io*a o-^<r€iKa, ir4ir€to-^a.i ka-iia-^v 
 
 16. Bpavfu break. 
 
 ipaia-a l:'Spai)(ra T^9pav;iai, T^9pav<r|iai £9pa<l(r9T)v 
 
 BOB D. 14. Ion. KKriia, ao. ixxiilara, pf. m. kck\^i/««i, ao. p. iKKiftaBrtv, T, 
 l£\j)i(rT(ij. Dor. also fu. K\afS, ao. 6K\9{a. 
 
606] 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 157 
 
 17. iravci) make cease ; middle cease. 
 
 iravcu £irav(ra 
 
 18. KcXcOw order. 
 KiKtia-a ^K^Xevo-a 
 
 19. Xcuu atone. 
 Xcviroi SXevo-a 
 
 20. dKoiiu hear, see 607, 1. 
 
 21. Kpoutt) beat. 
 Kpovmi ^Kpovo-a 
 
 T. iraiioT^os \iitai(r9riv\ 
 KCK^XevKa, KEK^Xevo-fiai IkcXcvo-Siiv 
 IXevo-Otiv 
 
 K^KpoiiKa cKpovo-8i]v 
 
 K^Kpov^ai,, K^Kpoii<r|tai 
 
 in. Verbs with Reduplicated Presents. 
 
 506. The theme assumes a reduplication in the present. For fii- 
 verbs of this kind, see 534 ; for reduplicated verbs of the sixth class, 
 see 530. There remain : 
 
 1. 7CYV0|j.ai (yiv-, 393 b) become: also ytvoiiat in Hd. and late writers. 
 YCVif)iro|ji,ai iytv6f.t\v 7^-yovo (490, 3 J [iyeirlieriv] 
 
 2. iir\a (o-ex-, 393 b) Md, another form of €x<» (608, 16 ; cf. 624, 4). 
 
 3. fil/iva (jKv-) remain, poetic form of /idva (610, 14). 
 
 4. irtiTTO) [ireT-, irro-) fall: cf. nlTva el. 5 (521, 10), poetic. 
 irco-ov|xai 8ir«<rov ir^irTcoKa 
 
 a. iitiaav is for orig. and Dor. iir^Tov (69 a). 
 
 B. tCktu (for TiTKiD, root tck-) brinff forth, berjei. 
 T^|o|iai SreKov T^roxa 
 
 7-efa less fr. [TcVeyyuai] [irexivv] 
 
 a. Mid. rlKTo/iai rare and poetic. Ao. erejo doubtful in Attic. 
 
 6. [t*t/i^wj (rpo-) bore: also Terpo^rw (reTpav-, cl. 4). 
 [rp^irio] 8TpT|(ra T^rprniai 
 
 [^T€TpctI/o] 
 
 22. Poet, ^ofd) shatter, fu. ^a^o-ia, ao. p. ippai(renv. 
 
 506 D. X. 2d ao. 3d sg. tycvTo Dor. (and lies.), different from yfvTo seized 
 (489 D, 37). From root ycv- comes also poet, yeiyoiiat cl. 4, am born, ao. ^^ei- 
 viiifiv trana. begot, bore (oi yeivdfievoi the parents, also in prose), yiyaa etc. 
 490 D, 3. 2. Epic also io'xai'a', 'urxavda, 
 
 4. Hm. 2d pf. par. irejTTeairas, Soph. ireirTds, -wros (492 D, 17). 
 
 6. Ion. fu. TfTpocEW, ao. rtrmva, v. tp7It6s. Late poets iTerpivBriv, 
 
 7. Hm. iaiiai (oi/-, aue-, oe-) sicep, ao. iea'a or a'c(ra, once oontr a(r<mey. 
 
158 
 
 VERBS: FIRST CLASS. 
 
 [BO'? 
 
 IV. Verbs which form second tenses. 
 507i a. Themes ending in a vowel. 
 
 1. aKouti) hear. 
 
 aKoilo-0)i.ai •i^Kovo-a qktJkoo (44, 868) ^K0«<r9t]v (461) 
 
 2. Pidu live. Cf. afa-PidcTKo/iai cl. 6 (531, 1). 
 piu<ro|iai. cpCuv (489, 14) ^tptaKa 
 
 [Pidiaa] ipCuira rarer pEpCwjiai v. PlutoSi -t^os 
 
 3. Bvo) enter., cause to enter (500, 4) : also Suva) cl. 5. 
 
 Sv(r(i> tr. ^SiJcra tr. S^SvKa tr., Se'SvKa intr. e8ij9nv 
 
 ?8iiv(489, 17) S^Svuai v. 8«t^os 
 
 4. <j)ltci) produce (BOO, 3). 
 
 (j>fi(ru Sc|>v(ra Tti^vKO, intr. [^ipirivl 
 
 'i^vv (489, }8) [t. (pvrSs] 
 
 508. b. Themes ending in a consonant. 
 
 'he first five of these verbs " 
 short in others. 
 
 1. flXtpu (8Arj3-, e\iP-) press. 
 
 The first five of these verbs have the root-vovcel long in some tenses 
 and short in others. 
 
 6\t\jia S9\Xi|<o [TE'9\i(fo, -tfifuti] 
 
 2. irviya (wiy-, vviy-) choke. 
 
 irvilu 8irvi|a ir^irvt'y|iai 
 
 3. Tptpu (rpf/S-, rpiP-) rub. 
 
 Tpti|Ki> (496 a) irfXi/a T^Tpi<t>a 
 
 T^TpTn|jiai 
 
 4. T<i<j)m (tO(()-, Tu(/)-) raise smoke, rare in prose. 
 
 T^9iii|i(Jiai (74 c) 
 B. i}rt)X,» ('f'i'X-) "('"X") <""''■ 
 
 e9Xi(J>9i]v [iBKi^v] 
 
 eirvtYiiv 
 
 lTpCpT|v 
 lTpt<j>9i)v less fr. 
 
 IiJ(«\9t]v, also 
 lil/ipxnv [^1(^(71)1/] 
 
 607 D, 2. Hm. fu. jScfo/ioi or jSeV"" (427 D). 
 
 3. Hm. has pr. impf. act. only ^uvw (yet Ji//^ Si5etf»/ ^ai'e setting), mid. only 
 Sioimi, both with same meaning. For ^Suj'eTO, Siffeo, dv(r6fi€vos, see 428 D b. 
 
 4. ITm. 2d pf. 3d pi. wetpiatri, par. jrefviis, -Sitos (446 D, 456 D b) ; plup. Sd 
 pi. iire(pvKov Hes. (458 D). 
 
 5. Hm. ovria wound, ao. 3d sg. oBTjjire, 00mm. 2d ao. oSra (489 D, 22), 2d 
 ao. ra. par. ovrdfievos wounded. Also pr. oircSfa), ao. oSraffa freq., pf. m. 3d 
 sg. ottTcurTai, par. oi/Tcurixevos. 
 
608] FIR8T CLASS. 159 
 
 6. &.-^u had. 
 
 4i«' 4ivaYov (436) fjxo [oy^oxo] 'l\X'^ 
 
 d$o|uu m. and p. ^fa rare ^'iV-"''^ ttx'^"''!""' 
 
 7. &PXU '>~ule, begin, middle begin. 
 
 apjw (496 a) fjpga [^PX"] ^PTM"' ^iPX^nv 
 
 8. pXiira look, see. 
 
 9. Pp^u wet. 
 
 [flpe'la] jppeja p«PpeYp,oi ^Pp^xV [dppixvy] 
 
 10. PptSu am heavy, only once in Att. prose. 
 Ppia-ai ejSpio-o fiiPpWa 
 
 11. 'YpQ'<j><>> write. 
 
 7pdi|/(i> £Ypa<|fa Y^^paifia, y^yP^'H'C'O''' s'Ypa't'T' 
 
 a. 1st pf. yiypd<priKa and 1st ao. p. i-ypd(l>0iii/ are late. 
 
 12. hipafiay: also SeCpu cl. 4. 
 
 S(pu SSeipa S^Sap|jiai 4Sdpi)v 
 
 13. hto^\. follow ; impf. eiirdixTiv (359). 
 
 {<|/op,ai i<nr6f,i\v (tnra^a.v, (nroCjiT]v, o-ttoB, (rir^o-6ai, inrdiJiEVos) 
 
 a. The orig. root was (Tett-. 2d ao. km6in\v is for c-(r(e)ir-o;m)i' (43) 
 with irregular breathing brought in from the pr. eVo/jai (70). 
 
 14. ipofjuu ask. Pr. impf. epic only, supplied in Attic from iparda. 
 cpTJ<rop,ai(610, 6) ■i\p6[Lr\v 
 
 16. kfiKia hold back ; chiefly poetic. Ao. ^tpv^a. See D. 
 16. ?x<ii have, hold ; impf. tlyifiv (359) : also llrxw 606, 2. 
 IJcii, (TX^cru iayjav iayj[Ka., iir%T\f.->.<. [eVxe'flj)!'] 
 
 a. V. eKris, -t4os, and (rxpr6s, -te'os. The modes of the 2d ao. are 
 
 508 D. 6. Hm. also oyiWai ; ao. imv. S|eTc (428 D b). 
 
 9. Hm. has also theme Ppex- rattle, only in 2d ao. 3d sg. iPpaxe : also 
 
 fipox- nwallow, only in 1st ao. opt. 3d sg. ii'a-{KaTar)Pp6(eif and 2d. ao. p. par. 
 ava^pox^is. 
 
 12. Hm. has verbal Sparis. 
 
 13. Ion. and poet. act. (only once as simple) eirm to be busy, fu. €i(/ai, 2d ao. 
 cffirov {in-ea'TTOv), par. inrtitv, 2d ao. m. as in Att. The forms ^ffiratfiai, eirirolfnjv, 
 etc., in Hm. should prob. be changed to airSinai, (rirol/niv, etc., the preceding 
 word being read without elision : afut <rir4a6u>, not S/u' iairiffSoi. Hm. imv. 
 tT'Keio for cnreo. Hd. ao. p. Trepi-e^Bfjv. 
 
 14. Ion. pr. elpo/iiu, fu. tip'fiiroi.iai. Hm. also pr. ipiopmi (less freq. act. ipiio) 
 and ipeelyia. He has irreg. accent in pr. imv. ^peto (for 4peTo, from epeeo, 409 
 D b) and 2d ao. inf. ?pe<r9oi (389 D a). 
 
 16. Hm. has fu. ^pi^a and 2d ao. i]piKaKoy (436 D), also pr. ipvKiha and 
 
 16. Hm. 2d pf. ixoiKa (for o«»x«)i pl^P- ™- 3d pl- iv-dxaro irreg. For 
 poet. tax^Sov, see 494. 
 
jgO VERBS: FIRST CLASS. [608 
 
 ^o-Yo;', crxS, crxohv (ii comp. vapia-xo'M''^ etc.), <rx^s (489, 12), 
 (rX€iv, crx<4>'. In the pr. ^x" is for ix" (73 e), and that for o-«X-(» 
 (70). The root crex- is syncopated in ^irxov (43), beside which it 
 assumes e in axh'^", etc. 
 
 17. 6ipo|j,ai. become loarm ; in prose only present. 
 
 18. XanTTM sliine, middle Xd)iiro|i.ai id. 
 \t£|Ul|/m ?\a|iT|/tt \i\afnra 
 
 19. n. \lyagat!u:r; used by Attic writers only in compounds. 
 \€'|a.Hm. SMa taoxa (366) ^X^vtiv 
 
 €(Xe7|i.ai, X^XeyK''^'' ' ■ ^'^-^X.^l'' >■• ■*■. 
 b. X^7<i> speak. 
 U^u 8X«|tt (ttpriKa, 539, 8) -aixV 
 
 But Sia\e70/iai makes Si-e(\c7;xoi (366). 
 
 20. oiv-oCym open ; impf. dv^wYOV (369 b) : also dv-oCvvCiii cl. 5. 
 S.voli,<a av«'a>|o aviuya., dv^tiiXa oveiixB'n'' 
 
 dv^CuYUat V. iLVOLKTeOS 
 
 a. In late Greek hvicfya was used intransitiyely = i.vitfyimi. The 
 forms fivoiyov and ^roi^a are doubtful in Attic. A comp. Si-olya 
 is also used, and in poetry the simple verb is found, but without 
 the syllabic augment. 
 
 21. ir^(j.ir<i) send. 
 
 irtu.'i/a firenijfa itiirof.^a,, irlitif,f,<u, lir^(i.i|>fliiv 
 
 22. ir^p8o)iai., Lat. pedo. 
 irap8i^(rou.ai ^irap8ov ireiropoa 
 
 23. irtTop.ai (ircT-, ircre-, irra-) fly. 
 irT^(ro|iai. «irTd|iriv 
 >rtT<i(ro|iai iirTdfiriv 
 
 24. irX^Ko) fuii.<i;. 
 
 [ir\eja)] 8irXt|o irfirXeynai lirXdKi]V 
 
 lirX^X''!" "■• ■*^- 
 
 25. oT^p7(i> /ot;«. 
 
 irr^plu SoTtpIo ta-Topya Hd. v. OTtpKTOs, -tIo% 
 
 17. Hm. £u. eipaoimi (422 D b), 2d ao. p. sub. flfpem. 
 
 19. Hm. and Hd. have no pf. act., in pf. m. only \e\eyfitti, in ao. p. iXexBriv 
 (Hd. qlso iK4yriv). For ao. m. ihiyii-nv, t\eKTo, see 489 D, 39. 
 
 20. Poet, and Ion. 1st ao. 4>r|a, ij|n and olfo. Hm. impf. m. 3d pi. 
 oiiyvvvTO. 
 
 23. Poet. ao. %Tm]v (489, 6). Poetic also are 'Irrafuu and vfra/iai ; also 
 Itoriioixau, iroTiofuu, iror^iro/iuu, irtiri^Trj/ioi, ^Tror^flr)!'. 
 
609] FIRST CLASS. 161 
 
 26. (rTp^<j>ai turn. 
 
 frrpi^a iinft^a, iirtfo^a. i<rrfi.^y\ii 
 
 £crTpa)i,|j[,ai c<rTpi<J>6i]v r. A. 
 
 27. T^pirw ddiglit. 
 
 T^p+o) ^Tcpijfa 4r4p4ieT|v 
 
 28. Tp^TTu turn. 
 
 Tp^ijfu %Tpe<J/a T^rpo<|ia [rcTpai^o] ^Tpairriv 
 
 T^Tpa|i,|jLai, CTp^<j>8T|v r. A. 
 
 29. Tp4<)>iii nounsh. 
 
 6p^i|/<i> (496 a) i6po|/a rirpo^a [reVpoi/io] lTpd(|>T|v 
 
 TlOpa|i)i,at I6p4ij>8i]v r. A. 
 
 V. Verbs which assume -e- in the present. 
 
 509. The following verbs form the present from themes of two 
 syllables ending in -c-, but the other tenses (or a part of them) from 
 the root. See 405. 
 
 1. 7a|i^(i> (yan; 7a/ie-) marry (act. uxorem duco, mid. nubo). 
 Ya|jLd> ^YHf^O' 7eyd|iT)Ka, -i]|j.ai. [iyaiii)6riv\ 
 
 a,. Late forms ya/jef]<rwj iydfiTjtraf iyafiedijy Theoc. 
 
 27. Hm. 2d ao. m. iTafnT6fn)v, and with redupl. (436 D) TeTafm6niir, ao. p. 
 iripipSriv and iTip(p8riv, also 2d ao. iTdpwiii', sub. 1st pi. Tpmntonev (473 D a). 
 
 28. Hd. has pr. rpdira, ao. p. ^Tpa(()fl7;i' ( also in Hm.), but rpc'ifio), 6Tpe\j/o. 
 Hm. has also rpaireu, rpoiriw. For Terpci^aTOi, see 464 D a. 
 
 29. Dor. Tpd(pa. Hm. has an intrans. 2d ao. erpcupoy was nourished^ ff^^Wj 
 and uses tbe 2d pf. rcTpoipa as intransitive. 
 
 30. Boot yaii'-. Hm. has 2d pf. yiyava shout, plup. 3d sg. ^yf-vdjvei (and 
 ^•ycywye, also Ist sg, yeytiyeuy, 458 D), inf. yeyuvefiey, irreg. yeywt/eii/, part. 
 yeyav^s (not in Hm. are sub. 767(^i'fl?, imv. yiywpt ; fu. ysytoviiatii, ao. iyeydi- 
 vriira). Poet. pr. yeyaviaxa or ^eyoii/ea), found eren in Att. prose. 
 
 31. Poet. SepKo/iiu see, 2d ao. ISpaxov (435 D), 2d pf. SeSopxa see, ao. p. 
 iSepxBvy saw (2d ao. iSpixriv Find.). 
 
 32. Hm. (Kim cause to hope, tKiroiJuu or if\irofuu (72 D a) hope (=Att. 
 i\'irtCa> cl. 4), 2d pf. eoKira hope, plup. iiiKirea (369 D), v. &-e\irros. 
 
 33. Poet. ii(x<» and laxf" sound; Hm. 2d pf. par. fern. ii/iip-iaxiJia. 
 
 34. Poet. K4\ofjuu command, fu. Ke\'li<ro/iat (of. 510), ao. iK€\Tia'diir)v rare, 
 usu. 2d ao. lKeK\6ii.-nv (436 D). 
 
 35. Poet. iriKoiuu (move) be, 2d ao. iirXoiiiiv (437 D) often used as pres. 
 Less freq. act. tteAo;, 2d ao. 3d sg. (ir\e. 
 
 36. Poet. Trepflm desfroi/ (in prose iropBiai), fu. rrepaa, ao. iwepaa. Hm. 2d 
 ao. Eirpaeoi/ (435 D), 2d ao. m. inf. irfp9ai (489 D, 45). 
 
 37. Poet, root, trap-, 2d ao. iiropov imparted, pf. m. 3d sg. ■Kiirpanai (64) i< 
 u allotted, destined, part, imrpufitvos. 
 
 38. Ion. and poet, repffofim become dry, 2d ao. p. iripariv. Hence act. 
 Tepa-alvai, ao. 4Tfp<rri»a (late Irepira) made dry. 
 
 509 D, Hm. fu. m. 3d sg. yaniaaerai will cause (a woman) to marry, 
 doubtful. 
 
163 VERBS: FIRST CLASS. [609 
 
 2. yrtSta (yv^; 7i)9f-) rejoice. 
 
 ■fi)6i\(rm iyfi&riaa yiyr[9a am glad. 
 
 3. 8oK^(i> (SoK-, Soke-) seem, think. 
 
 8d|<i) ^8a|a SeSoYiiai ISdxfltlv r. 
 
 a. ioK-liira, iS6ini<ra, SeSiicriKa, S€S6Kriitai, 4Soicii8r}v are poetic or late. 
 
 4. Kvpita (Kvp-, Kupe-) hit upon, happen, Ion. and poet. : also Ktf^o), cl. 4. 
 Kvp^ffw, Kdpffo) ^Kvpaa, iKvpjjffa. 
 
 I |i.apTvp^ci> (fuipTvpe-) bear tntnesa. Inflected regularly, but 
 ( |iapT(ipo|xai (imprvp-) cl. 4, call witnesses, ao. E|jiapTiJpdp.'r|v. 
 
 6. ircKT^u (ircK-, ircKTe-) comi, shear. ao. p. Iir^flriv 
 
 7. ftmria throw — (Siirrci) (513, 13), only pr. and impf. 
 
 8. iiiia (u0., oifle.) push ; impf. ciiSovv (359). 
 
 uo-u, ^6^iru £(iio-a [ea/ca] Sa>ir|tai l<4<r8T]V 
 
 a. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Attic. 
 
 6. ire|S and iitttfl Theocr. Hm. pr. ireiKta. 
 
 9. Poet. Somia sound heavily, ao. iSoimiira (even in Xen.), iySo\nnt<ra (cf. 
 iplySoviros loud thunderinff), 2d pf. Se'Soinro. 
 
 10. Poet. KEAaSeo) roar, fu. Ke^aS^iriti, Hm. pr. part. Ke\dSii>v. 
 
 11. Ion. and poet, kcvtcw prick, fu. KevT^rrw, etc., reg. ; but Hm. ao. inf. 
 KeVirai (= Kei'T-irai), V. KeirrSs (= k^vt-tos). 
 
 12. Poet. KTUTre'm crash, clatter, rare in prose, 2d ao. (KTvirov; in Trag. also 
 1st ao. eKTvmfiffa. 
 
 IS. Ion. and poet. 7roT€0|Uai, ea^, ao. iirturdfiTjv, pf. TrtTrofT/iat, v. ti-TroiTTos. 
 
 14. Poet, plyca shudder, fu. ^iyfitra, ao. 4p^tyri<ra, 2d pf. ipl>Tya used as a 
 present. Different is ^r7((m am coW (412 a). 
 
 15. Ion. and poet, trrvyca dread, hate, fu. trruyiiaoixai, ao. ioriyTi(ra, etc., 
 reg. Hm. has 1st ao. ccm/fo marf« dreadful, 2d ao. iarvyov dreaded. 
 
 16. Pr. <pi\€a! love, inflected reg. as a verb of cl. 1, see Paradigm 324; but 
 Hm. ao m. iipixifiriv (ipi\-) 
 
 1'7. Hm. {xpaur/i^a help, tiiard off, pr. impf. rare and late) fu. XP'""'!''^'^'"! 
 ao. ixpaiiTfi-qfra, 2d ao. expoitr^uoz'. 
 
 Add the following, which form the present from themes in -a-. 
 
 18. Pr. PpOxiofLai roar, ao. 4^pvx7i(rd/xriv. In Hjn., only 2d pf. /3e/3puxo 
 used as a present. 
 
 19. Poet, yodu heu'ail, fu. yoiiffofxai, Hm. 2d ao. iyoov. 
 
 20. Hm. Sripido/mt giiarrcl (fu. Sripitrofiai Theoc), ao. iSrjpIednny, ao. p. 
 iSnplvSriv (469 D). Pind. Sripio/iai, Snpidi<i). 
 
 21. Poet. A.ixM'^w, -0|Uai, lick, fu. Aix/J-'iieo/xai, 2d pf. part, irregular AcXeix- 
 firfrej Hes. 
 
 22. Hm. fi-qKdo/jiat (fiuK-, /utjk-) bleat, 2d ao. part. /ioKdv, 2d pf. part. lie/iriKtis, 
 tern. fi€iiaKv7a (451 D e), plup. ^/jif /j.iikop (458 D). 
 
 23. Hm fiTjTida, -ofiai, plan, fu. /xTjTiirofjLai, ao. ^fvqrlffd^tiv. Pind. 
 
 24. Pr. nmdoimi (iiiiK-, fiVK-) low (used in Att. prose). Poet. ao. 4fwK7i(rd/iriv 
 Hm. 2d ao. ^/ivkov, 2d pf. )ii/ima used as a present. 
 
610] MUST CLASS. 163 
 
 VI. Verbs which assume -e- in other tenses. 
 
 510, The following verbs form their presents from the root, but 
 the otlier tenses (or a part of them) from longer themes ending 
 in -e-. See 405. 
 
 1. aKi^a (oA.€|-, oAfK-, a\K-) ward off. Act. rare in prose. 
 
 a. aKs\i[aofuu and aXii;i\aa.ji.i\v are probably not Attic. 
 
 2. d,\6o|iai am displeased. 
 
 3. poiTKutfeed. 
 
 Poo-K^o-oj [^^licrKTjo-a] [ifioiTKiidriv] 
 
 V, POO-KTIT^OS. 
 
 4. poiiXo)i.ai toish. Augment, see 356 b. 
 
 PovX-iio-oiJiai P£poviXr]|iai «Pov\i]9tii' (497 a) 
 
 6. 8l(i> Jicet/, middle want, entreat. 
 S£fj(ra> IS^Tio-a SeS^TiKa, SE8ei]|j.ai l8e^6T)v (497 a) 
 
 a. Impersonal 8ci it is necessari/, impf. iSti, fu. Sc^o-Ei, ao. iSir\iri. 
 
 6. epo/uu ask, see 508, 14 ; fu. Ip^o-ojiai. 
 
 7. iffa go (to harm). 
 
 8. cBSai sleep, usually in comp. KaScvSu. Augment, 361. 
 Ka9euSii(r<ij t. Ka6Ev8i]T^ov 
 
 9. 'ii/a boil. 
 
 ci|>ii](r<ii ■fjij/tjo-a [^if'Tj^oi] [ijtfi'fiBTiv, ?l(p8riv] 
 
 V. e(pBis (for Ii/(-toj) and li/fTiTiJi. 
 
 10. 49^\ii> and 0e\a wish: impf. <j9£Xov (never eAeAov). 
 (I)96Xt)o-«i ■f|9^XT)ira 'f|6^XT|Ka [Ti9iKi\Ka\ 
 
 a. The Attic poets in the Iambic trimeter have 9e\a (not lSi\a) ; but 
 ieiKio is the usual form iu Attic prose, in Plm. and Pind. The 
 augmented forms in Att. always have t) : thus ao. -f/fleAijiro, but 
 sub. ideK-l\<ra> or ee\ii<ra, etc. 
 
 11. f,a\oii.ai JigfU. 
 
 [lOxoBjjiai (423) e|iox6o-d|iTiv liEjidxilliai v. jxaxcrlos, -^rios 
 
 510 D. 1. Ion. and poet. fu. 4A6|V<", -riffoimi, ao. ^Aefijiro, 2d ao. &\a\Kof 
 (436 D), aKKaeeTviiSi). 
 
 4. Hm. pr. inf. $6\ea'8ai, 2d pf. irpo-0ei3ou\o. 
 
 6. Hm. has in act. Sijire and 4Sex'ir)!rf ; iu middle always Seio/uu. Cf. 44. 
 
 11. Hm. fjAxofiai, also /iaxso/Mu, part. fiax^i^tJ-ems or naxfoijifvos (S3 D), 
 fu. frnx^o/iai usu. /lax^ffo/uti, ao. luaxfaafiiiv or ^lUox'Jo'i/iJJi', V. /MXV'is. 
 Hd. fu. iiax^iroiuu. 
 
164 VERBS: SECOND CLASS. [511 
 
 12. |t^<ii care for. 
 
 )i,cX^(r(D c|ji^\T|o-a (leii^TiKa, -i)|i,ai ifuK^Briii 
 
 a. The Att. prose has the act. only as an impersonal verb, /ueXei it con- 
 cerns, in. (ueA^o-ei, etc. ; and in the mid. uses the comp. ii!iii.i\ofuu 
 (also imiiiXioiuu) passive deponent (497 a). 
 
 13. )i^W<i> am about. Augment 355 b. 
 
 |mXX'/jo-(i) l|i^Wi)(ra v. /icAXjjt^oj 
 
 14. |i^V(i) remain : also iiiiuiu (606, 3) poetic. 
 
 fsva S|uiva f.if.ivr[Ka, v. |xcvetoS| -t^os 
 
 16. vlfAa distribute. 
 
 16. otaitai, more fr. ot|iai think ; impf. 4«>|i''n*' (Wl")' 
 
 ol^(ro|j.ai [^c^riirdiiriy] uifir\v (497 a) 
 
 17. otx,o|j,ai am gone ; impf. (ux^|j.i]v was gone or went. 
 olx^o-ofj.at [y;^7^/utt] 
 
 18. iripSofiai, see 508, 22; fu. TrapS^o-oiiai.. 
 
 19. triroiLai Jly, see 608, 23 ; fu. ■irrt[<ro[uu,, ■iriTr\<ro\uu, 
 
 Second Class {Strong-Vowel Class, 394). 
 
 511. The theme-vowel a, t, v takes the strong form i;, «, eu, 
 a. Mute themes. 
 
 1. \tjS(i> (Aafl) rare in prose, = XavSdvio cl. 5, lie liid. 
 
 2. (rfjirei) (o-ajr-) rot, trans. 
 
 D"^i|'iD [e<r7);(/o] (r^o-qTra (501) [aiirt\nfuii\ lo-diniv 
 
 3. 'WJKu (tok-) mc?<, trans. 
 
 T^|a ?n)|o T4n)KO (601) lTdKT]V 
 
 [reVriy/iai] exVixBTiv rare 
 
 4. TpcGyiD (for rpriya, root rpay-) gnaw. 
 
 TptiSofJiai. STpa^ov TlTpciiYp.ai v. rpuKTos 
 
 12. Hm. 2d pf. /i^/iijAa, pf. m. 3d sg. ^=V;3A€Tai (for (je-juAf-Toi, 60 D), plup. 
 pLfii^KeTo. 
 
 16. Hm act. oXa or oiai, middle almost always with diaeresis otoixai, ao. 
 ulO'Afnjv, ao. p. m(TB7)V. 
 
 17. Hm. also pr. olxvem cl. 6, pf. Trap-t^xV" Hd. olx'^ta (for oix-iyx-Oi '?3). 
 
 20. Hm. £A.0o^ai am healed, fu. aXBifcroimi. 
 
 21. Hm. KijStti trouble, fu. Kr)8'^<riB, ao. iK^S7)<ro (2d pf. KcKrjSa, not in Hm., 
 intrans. =) m. KiiSo/iai am troubled, irreg. fu. pf. KEKaS^ira/xai, different from 
 fu. pf. of xiifw (614 D, 18). 
 
 22. Hm. niSoiuu attend to, fu n'^ffoiuu. Cf. Hm. /ifSav (-VT-), iieSiaiv {-vr-] 
 guardian. Cf. also /u^8o/uzi intend, contrive, fu. fiiicro/tai, ao. ^firiirdiiiriv. 
 
611] SMCOND CLASS. 165 
 
 5. d\eC<j>(i> {aKi(f>-) anoint. 
 
 aXc(i|/u 4)\ei,i|(a dX^Xi^a (368) 'f|XE((|i6T]v 
 
 ■■ d\^\i|i|jiai \i\\lifn]v\ 
 
 6. ipelva (epwr-) overthrow ; chiefly Ion. and poet. 
 
 1. \ilira (Anr-) leave: also Xifiirdvu cl. 5, rare, 
 Xe(<|/u ^iirov XiXoiira, Xe'Xei|i.|uu cXeCij>6T)v 
 
 8. ircCBu (irifl-) persuade. 
 
 ■mla-ta ^Treicra ir^uciKa, ir^irei<r|xoi ivil<r9r\v 
 
 iitiBov ir^TTOiOa ii-ust r. A. pr. 
 
 9. (rretpci) ((TtijS-) tread, chiefly used in pr. impf . ; rare in proae. 
 
 10. irTelxoi (cTix-) march, go, chiefly in pr. impf. ; Ion. and poet. 
 
 11. ^ilSo]i.a.i ((ptS-) spare. 
 <|>cC(rap.ai 4<|>a(rd|ti]v 
 
 12. Kcida {ku9-) hide, poetic. 
 
 Keiaia %Kivaa Hm. Ke'/ceufla as pres. 
 
 13. Tfvdoiiai (iru9-) poetic for irvvSdvoiJiai cl. 6, inquire, learn. 
 
 14. reix" (tux-, tuk-) make ready, make, poetic. 
 TetJftu ^Teu|a rervyfjiat 
 
 15. <|)EVYcu (i/iuy-) /««/ also ij)«YY"''*' d- B. 
 
 <f>cv£o|iai. or %<j>vyov ir^(|>cuYa T. <j>cvktoS) -r^os 
 
 (|icv$ov|iai (426) 
 
 511 D, 6. Ion. 2d ao. ^pmoii fell, 2d pf. ip^ipma am fallen; Find. 2d ao. p 
 iiplirnv. 
 
 8. Hm. 2d ao. irimBov (436 D) persuaded, whence fu. TmriSr,aa) shall per 
 suade ; but mBiiaa (405) shall obey, ao. par. irifli^ffds trusting, 2d plup. 1st pi. 
 iirfiriS/ify trusted (492 D, 15). Aesch. 2d pf. imv. wewcttTSi. 
 
 10. Ep. ao. tcTTf i{o and t<TTtxov. 
 
 11. Hm. 2d ao. iri<pti6iatv (436 D), fu. TeipiSiitroiim. 
 
 12. Hm. pr. KevSava cl. 5 ; 2d ao. 3d sg. /cufle, sub. 3d pi. KfKiJflaxri (436 D). 
 In Trag. KeiBa, Kexevda, may mean am hidden. 
 
 14. Hm. ao. p. Mx^riv, 2d pf. part. Tereuxds, fu. pf. T6T6iifo/<ai, 2d ao. 
 rervKov, T€TVK6firii' (436 D) prepared. Also pr. TiriffKo/iat (for Tt-rvK-ffKO/xai) 
 prepare, aim. For TeTei(x"'''ai, -aro, see 464 D a. 
 
 15. Hm. 2d pf. par. ircc^ufiiTes (cf. Hm. <l>i(a = ipvyli ^ighi), ft. m. par. 
 iretpvyfi4vos, v. tpvKT6s. 
 
 16. Ion. and poet, theme roifi- or Bair- (cf. 74), 2d pf. TiBrfira wonder, 2d ao. 
 par. Ttup^v. 
 
 17. Hm. Tiiiiya (r/tay-) ewi = re^va) cl. 6 (521, 8), ao. fT/i7){o, 2d ao. irixayw, 
 2d ao. p. iTfia,yT\v. 
 
 13 
 
VERBS: THIRD CLASS. 
 
 [612 
 
 512, b. Themes in -v-. 
 
 1. 6^<ii (flu-) run. Fu. 8Eii<ro|Uii. 
 
 2. via (vv-) swim. 
 ycvo-ovfiai (426) £v«i(ra 
 
 S. irXia (ir\u-) sail. 
 irXcircro|iai or CirXeuo-a 
 
 TXcvirov)tai [ir\ci!(ru] 
 
 4. irv^u (iri/u-) hreatlie, blow. 
 meiiTOiiai or Cirvcuira 
 irvev(roi)iai 
 
 5. pi<a ((Su-) _^oi5. 
 pEija-o|iai, or [^^^euiro] 
 pvT|(ro|jLai fu. p. as act. 
 
 *>• X^" (X"-) pour. 
 X.4u (427) Sx«"» (480) 
 
 viirXfVKO, 
 
 it^irXeuo-jiai (461) 
 ir^TTVOPKa 
 
 ^^ptlT]Ka ' 
 
 K^XVKa, K^X^I"'''- 
 
 r. vivinioi 
 [^ir\ei!<r6rjj'] 
 
 [^TTceiJa'fliji'] 
 
 l{>pvrjv as act. 
 lxiii\v 
 
 Third Class {Tau-Glass, 395). 
 
 513. The theme assumes -t°|,- in the present. Verbs of this 
 class have themes ending in a labial mute. 
 
 18. Ion. and poet. ipeUa (epi/c-) reiid, ao. <fpei|o, 2d ao. ijpMov intrans. s/iiv- 
 eredj pf . m. ip^piyfiat. 
 
 19. Epic and Ion. ipdyo/tat spew (Att. ipvyydva cl. 5), fu. ipei^oiuu, 2d ao. 
 Ijpvyoy roared. 
 
 20. Hm. ipeiBa (cpufl-) make red, ao. inf. Ipivaai. Also pr. 4pu9almfuu 
 grow red. 
 
 512 D. 2. Hm. has also v^ix", i^Xof""^ fi- v^^ofuu (freq. in late prose). 
 Dor. vax", vdxo/iai. Hm. ineov (S5B D a). 
 
 3. Ion. and poet. irKdia, fu. irXdiloiMX, ao. cTrX&xra, also 2d ao. iitKaiv (489 
 D, 27), pf. TTeirXftjrta, V. irAwTify. 
 
 4. Hm. 2d ao. imv. fi/i-iryue, 2d ao. m. 3d sg. S/i-tttoto (489 D, 32), ao. p. 
 iLfi-nyivBriv (469 D), pf. m. irdnvvfiai a-m animated, intelligent: connected with 
 this is pr. trivitrKO) (iriyv-) Aesch. make wise, Hm. ao. ivlvutrtTo. 
 
 6. Hm. also X''" (409 D b), ao. usu. ?YEua (430 D), 2d ao. m. 3d se. yiSto 
 (489 D, 34). 
 
 7. Hm. iXfofuu and aXfio/iai (oAu-) avoid (act. iA€(!(U (Mi«"<, Aesch.), ao. 
 tlKei/iitv and ii\evdiinp (430 D). Pr. also dXeed/m. 
 
 8. Poet. K\ea {k\v-) celebrate (i. e. make men /tea)' of), Hm. K\elai. Also 
 pr. kM/cd /tear. 2d ao. ixXvov heard, imv. tcXGdi or k4k\vBi, K\vTf or Ke'icAuTe 
 (439 D, 30), also (cAiic, xKiere, par. m. KKi/iems = v. KKvris, K\eiT6s celebrated. 
 
 9. Poet. (Tclia) ((ru-) drive (also in late prose), ao. (aaeva (;j65 D a, 430 D), 
 pf. m. taavjuu hasten (365 1), 389 D b), ao. p. itrtriBriv or 4(riBriv, 2d ao. m. 
 3d Bg. o-rSro (489 D, 33). The Att. drama has irreg. forms of a pr. m., 3d sg. 
 (TeuTcu, 3d pi. ffovvrai, imv. aov, tro^ffBa, <rovtrBe. 
 
B13] 
 
 rfl/flZ> CLASS. 
 
 167 
 
 1. 
 
 &wrta (a^)-) fasten, kindle, middle touch. 
 
 
 &^it 
 
 ^i|>a TJiipai 
 
 ij+env 
 
 2. 
 
 pdiTTCi) (;8ai()-) dip, dye. 
 
 
 P&^a 
 
 
 ipdit>r|v, ipdiperiv r. 
 
 3. 
 
 pXdirru ((SAcijS-) AuH. 
 
 
 pXd<|>u 
 
 ep\ai|/a p^p\a<|>a 
 
 £pXd()>eT|v and 
 
 
 p4pXa|i|uii 
 
 ipXdpiiv 
 
 4. 
 
 BdlTTW (tO(()-, 1i c) 6m)t^. 
 
 
 ed<|/u 
 
 i8ai|ra T^8a|i,)i,ai 
 
 tra^v, T. Bairrdos 
 
 5. 
 
 6pvirT(D {Tpv<p-, 74 c) Jrea/; (/own, weaken. 
 
 
 Qpir^a 
 
 iSpwiia Hipp. T^6pv)j,|iai 
 
 [iepi<periv] 
 
 6. 
 
 KaXiirru (Ka\uj8-) coj^er. 
 
 
 Ka\iii|/(>i 
 
 eKdXv<|/a KEKdXv|i.|tai 
 
 iKoXi^iip/ 
 
 7. 
 
 Kd|MrTii> (Kojiwr-) ieracJ. 
 
 
 ftcijutf'u 
 
 SKa|ii|fa K^Kaitfiai (463 b) 
 
 4Kd|uf>6i]V 
 
 8. 
 
 kX^ittcii (/c\fir-) ifeffl?. 
 
 
 kX^i|>(i> 
 
 £KXei|/a K^KXo(|>a 
 
 lKXdin|i> 
 
 
 K^KXc|J.|JLai 
 
 4K\i<periv 
 
 9. 
 
 KOITTCl) (koTT-) cut. 
 
 
 K()l|/(il 
 
 ^KOlj/a K^KO<|>a, K^KOpiJAI. 
 
 4K0irT|V, V. KOITTOS 
 
 10. 
 
 Kp{iirT(i> (lepiKp-) hide. 
 
 
 Kpv<|f(a 
 
 ^Kpvijfa K^KpV|l,|UU, 
 
 iKpiipTtv [iKpi^TJv] 
 
 11. 
 
 KIlTTTOl (Ki;<^-) Stoop. 
 
 
 Kv<|ni> 
 
 ^Kv<j/a K^Kv4ia 
 
 
 12. 
 
 pdTTTu (palp-) sew. 
 
 
 ^d.|/u 
 
 Sppai|ra £ppap.|xai, 
 
 i^p&^V 
 
 13. 
 
 ptirro) (plip; puj)-) throw. 
 
 
 fti» 
 
 mixifia. 8f fX+a, 8^^X|ji.poi 
 
 
 14. 
 
 o-KoirTW (crKa<t>-) dig. 
 
 
 (rKd<|fiii 
 
 {(rKai|/a {<rKa<f>a, £(rKa|x^ai 
 
 lirKd4>i1v 
 
 15. 
 
 O-K^TTTOIJlOl (a-KCT-) visW. 
 
 
 «-K^l|(0|UU lo-KClj/dlXTIV {(rKC|l,|U),l 
 
 [iirK4<periv] 
 
 a. 
 
 . Instead of o-Kc'irTo/tai, the Attic writers 
 
 almost always use the 
 
 
 kindred a-Kovia in the present and imperfect ; but the other 
 
 
 tenses of a-Kontia are found only in latt> srriters. 
 
 B13 D. 3. Hm. pr. m. 3d sg. 0\dpeTai. 
 
 4. Ilm. pf. m. 3d pi. Teed^arai (364 D a) ; Hd. ao. p. 
 
 5. Hm. 2d ao. p. irpiipriv. 
 
 9. Hm. 2d pf. part. Keitairds. . 
 
168 VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. [614 
 
 16. o-K^irrci) ((Dojtt-) prop, 
 
 o-K^i|/ci> i(rKi)^^a [iaKii]t^d\ iirKt\f.f.a\, lcrKifj<t>6i]V 
 
 17. a-Kairra (iTKiim-) jeer. 
 
 crK(ii|/o|iai £(rKui|>a [IrKoinfuu] lo-Kii(|>9i)v 
 
 18. TuuTu (twtt-, also Tuirre-) stnke. 
 
 TVirT^O-(l> ^TtmTiv 
 
 n. ^Tt^TTTTjco is found in Aristotle ; rertJirTTiKO, nr^rri^ai^ ervirT^Bijp 
 are late. The aorist, perfect, and passive systems are unknown 
 to Attic prose, the aorist system being supplied from TrardcrirQi 
 (iraray-), the perfect and passive systems from »\i)(r<ra? (614, 6). 
 
 Fourth Class {Iota-Class, 396 ff). 
 
 The theme assumes -i°|e- in the present, always with sound- 
 changes. The verbs of this class are very numerous. We 
 notice only those which have peculiarities of formation, espe- 
 cially all those which form second tenses. 
 
 I. Verbs in -<t(tu> and -^id which form second tenses. 
 
 514. 1. aWdo-o-u (oAAay-) exchange. 
 aXXd|<i> 'IjXXala 4)\Xaxa, {jWayjiai ■fiXXd^nv 
 
 f|\Xdx9T]V 
 
 2. KT|pijcr(r<i> {ia)pvK-) proclaim. 
 
 Ktipti^di cK^pii^a KCK^pfxcii -Y|J.ai iKr\pi\9v/v 
 
 3. (idciru (fiay-) knead. 
 
 [id^oi Sfiafa |i^fi.a\a, p.^|JiaY|tai l|xd7T|v, l/xdxBrir 
 
 4. 6pia-<ni> (opvx-) dig. 
 
 £pv|cii upv^a if&fxrfja,, -Y|xai &fiyijii\v 
 
 a. Pf. m. &pvyfxai (for bpt&pvyftai) late, 2d ao. p. wp^xvf doubifuL 
 6. irX^ro-w {w\ay-, ir\i)7-) strike. (^KirX^YVvo-Sai. cl. 5, Thuo.) 
 
 viTr\i\yfUU iit\iixSriv 
 
 a. 4Kir\4\fffft)), KaTajr\iiff(Tw make -GtrKi.yf^v (471 a). Attic writers use 
 the simple verb only in the perfect and passive systems, the 
 other active tenses being supplied from iraTdo-o-m (Trara-y-), which 
 in Att. is confined to the active, or from Tinta (613, 18). 
 
 18. Ion. and Lyric 1st ao. itvi/a^ p(. m. t/tw^/ioi, poet. 2d ao. irvnov. 
 
 19. Poet. yvi.p.'KTu {^yva^i.-n-') heml^ fu. yvdfvj/w, ao. eyvafi^a, ao. p. ^yvd/KpBijv 
 
 20. Hm. iiilirra (enir-) chide, also Maaai cl. 4 (516 D, 3), 2d ao. Jivtvawoii 
 and ivivmov (436 D). 
 
 21. Poet. fnipjrTQ} (fiapv-) seize, fu. fidpyj/a}, ao. ipLop^a In Hes. 2d ao. 
 uefiapirov (436 D), opt. fiefidwoiey, inf. fjLaveeiv^ 2d pf. fiefiapwa. 
 
 514 D. 5. Hm. 2d ao. {4)Tr4Tt\riyov {i36 D), 2d ao. p. 4K-itXiiyriv, KaT-enKfiynv. 
 
514] FOURfS CLASS. 169 
 
 6. irpdo-o-u (irpdy-) do. 
 
 irpd^tii ^irpd^a ir^irpaYa, ir^Trpaxa (462 a) iwfa\9i\v 
 
 u4irpaY|J>ai 
 
 7. irT^(r<r« (ttttjk-) cower : also irTtiira'a Ion. and poet. 
 [iTT^fo)] ^im)fa Simixa 
 
 8. Tapd<r(rw (rapaX") disturb : also Opdo-o-w {rpax-} mostly poet, 
 Topd^u ^rdpa^a TETdpa7|;.ai ^Tapdx6r]v 
 
 89pa|a (T4 c) idpaxSw r- 
 
 9. Tdo-<rw (ray-) arrange. 
 
 ToScii 8to|o T^TOXtt, T^TaYjuti ItoxBtiv, iriyrii/ r. 
 
 10. i|>pi(r(r(i> {(pplK-) am rough. 
 
 [ippi^ai] i({>pi|a ir^<f>pXKa brUtle, shudder. 
 
 11. i|>vXd(r(r(i> [ipvKaK-) guard, middle guard (one's self) against. 
 <{ivXd|ci> l(|iii\a|a ir£i|>u\ax<<') -7)i.ai E<{>vXdx6i|v 
 
 12. KAii^w (kAo77-, 398 b) maA:* a loud noise, mostly poet. 
 K\dy^a eK\ay^a K^KXayyo as pr., f u. pf. KexXdyloiiai 
 
 13. Kpd^cii (Kpay-) cry ; pr. impf. rare. 
 
 ^Kpa^ov K^Kpaya as pr., fu. pf. KEKpd^ojiai. 
 
 a. Kpd^a, eupa^a, late. Pf. imv. xiKpaxS', see 492, 8. 
 
 14. ^eftt) (pey-) do, poet, and Ion. : also tpSai (for epfai, root epy-). 
 
 Ipfa epjo 
 
 16. (r(|>d£tt> ((ri/>a7-) s^ay, in Attic prose usu. (ri|>dTTiii. 
 ir<|id^iii 2(rij>a£a i(r4>a7|Jiai l<rc|>dY'|V 
 
 16. Tpt(a> (rpfy) squeak, poet, and Ion. 2d pf. TcVpfyo as prea. 
 
 17. 4'P'''£'» C'^'poS-) declare. 
 
 ifipdro) S(j)pa(ra ir^(|>paKa, ir^<jipair)iai i^pdirBriy 
 
 18. xoj™ (x°^") """^^ '■*'*''^ J middle rehire / chiefly poetic. 
 
 4xa(rdp.i)v 
 
 7. Hm. has from kindred root irro-, 2d ao. 3 du. KaTa-irTi\Tr\v (489 D, 26) 
 and pf. part. irerrTrids, -arcs (446 D, 455 D b). 
 
 8. Hm. 2d pf. TeVpiix"! *"" troubled. 
 
 10. Pind. pf. par. ireijipiicovTtts, see 456 Da. 
 
 12. Poet. 2d ao. %K\ayov. Hm. 2d pf. par. KexKriyds, gen. -ovros (455 D a). 
 14. Ion. pf. iopya, plup. iiipyea (369 D). 
 
 Hd. pr. impf. epSw instead of IpSw. 
 16. Ion. and poet. 1st ao. p. 4tr<pdxS7iy. 
 
 11. Hm. 2d ao. diretppaSov (436 D). Hes. pf. m. part. iri^paSfjihos. 
 
 18. Hm. fu. xt^coA""! 2d ao. m. irreg. KcKaS6ij.riv (436 D) retired, but act. 
 KeKoSov deprived, fu. iceKaSriira shall deprive. Cf. 610 D, 21. 
 
irO VERBS: FOTTRTB CLASS. [slS 
 
 19. x^" (x^^') o'*""" exonero. 
 Xciro3|iai (426) ^XEva, ^x^o-ov r. k^x<>^<^> K^orfiai 
 
 n. Verbs in -a-a-w and -t,u> with other peculiarities. 
 
 515. a. Labial themes (397 b, 398 c). 
 
 1. ir^<rirci> (ireir-, formerly ttek-) cook: [TrcTrra later]. 
 
 iti^ia SiTOJ/a ir^7rc|i)iat 4ir^(|)9r]v 
 
 2. vCJ<D (vi/S-, formerly viy-), wash hands or feet: [ylirra later]. 
 
 vC<|/(ii &i<|/a v^vi|i|tai ivi<p97\v Hipp, 
 
 516. b. Lingual themes which make -a-a-o) (-ttco). 
 
 1. tLpfLOTTia fit toffether : also ap/u^^u poet. 
 
 opfido'cii 1jp|i,o(ra {|p|j.o(r|iai 'fjpiu)(r6r|v 
 
 2. p\(TT(i> toA;« <A« /ioney (a'e'A', /i€\it-os, 60 D). ao. SpXura. 
 
 3. Ppd(r<ra boil. [ao. ifipcura, pf. m. /3€flpa(r/ioi.] 
 
 4. iptfftra (fpfT-) row. Only pr. impf. in Att. 
 
 5. irdo-o-oi sprinile. 
 
 iraira £ira<ra [ir^Trotr/iai] lird(r6T)v 
 
 6. irXdo-o-o) mould. 
 
 ir\dira Hipp. iirXaora TT^irXairiiai eirXao-Oriv 
 
 7. tttCo-o-u ^mmA 
 
 iwriaa Hd. £irTi(r|iai [eTrrftrfl?)*] 
 
 20. Poet. Kpi^ia creak ; 2d ao. 3d ag. Kplice (or /cpfyc) Hm., 2d pf. icfKplya 
 Ariatoph. 
 
 21. Poet. ireKii^a {we\ai-, irfAa-, irXo-) iWn^ near, mid. com« neai; pr. and ao. 
 act. alao in prose, intrans., fu. TTf\i(ra, ve\a (424), ao. i'ire\a<Ta, pf. m. Tre'irXij- 
 juai, ao. p. iTn\atrBT]v and Trag. iirhaST)v, 2d ao. m. 3d sg. xAjjto, 3d pi. iirK-qvro 
 (489 D, 24). Pr. also 7rc\iio), Ep. irUvafuu or niKyda cl. 6 (529 D, 6), Trag. 
 ireKdeai, ir\d9a) (494). 
 
 515 D. 2. Hm. vtwroiiai. 
 
 3. Hm. ^Wo-o-m (ew-n--) = ^vfirTtD el. 3, chide (513 D, 20). 
 
 4. Hm. utrtro/jtm (ow-) foresee, only pr. impf. ; of. 639, 4. 
 
 5. Hm. Aafo;uai (Aaj3-) = Kaii^va cl. 5, /afe (523, 5). Attic poets have 
 
 516 D. 4. Hm. ao. Iripura and iipe<r<ra. 
 
 8. Hd. &<|)(^(r(i> =: a(/>c£tu ^ee^, ao. ^^affa. 
 
 9. Poet. iiiAffaai lash, Hm. ao. i/uura ; cf . liiAs lash, gen. l/idur-os. 
 
 10. Poet. KopiiTffa (icopvO-) equip, ao. m. Kopvtrtrd/jievos, pf. m. KeKopvBfievos 
 (53 D a). 
 
 11. Poet, (rare in proae) \l(r<ronai (Ait-) ;»*ay, also xhoiiai cl. 1. Hm. ao. 
 iKKurdfiTiv (365 D a), 2d ao. inf. KneaBu. 
 
 12. Poet, ylira-o/mt ffo, fu. vtaoiuu. Also pr. Wojuii, usu. with future meaning. 
 
617] FOURTH CLASS. 171 
 
 517. c. Themes of variable form. 
 
 1. apird^cD (a/nraS-, also apway- not Att.) seize. 
 
 apirdo-o (-onoi) ijpiracro {jpiraKa, 'fjpiratrp.ai iipTrdo-Biiv 
 
 [apirt^oi] [iipiro|a] [?tpira-yfmt] [rumdxBv", VP'^iyvy] 
 
 2. PaffrdCa (fiaaraS-, late PcuTTay-) carry, poet, (late in prose). 
 BcurTdaa ipaaraaa [-|a] [PifitiffTayiuu] [i^airra.\9rjv\ 
 
 3. [viicro'iv] (yay- and vaS-) press close, pf. m. vtvaxrfjM. 
 
 i. iraJX,a (ttoiS- and irtuy-) sport. 
 
 vwiovfuu (426) Siraura ir^irai(r|jiai v. iraioT^os 
 
 a. ^jraifo, ire'iroixo, ire'iraiy/tai, iiralxSr]'' are late : so also f u. ml^o/uu 
 and TToi^a. 
 
 5. (ru£<»| later (najo) ((Tto-, iri^S-) save. 
 
 o-io-a itraa-a triirioKa,, o-^(ru|iai l(r(&8i|V 
 
 <r4o-ufrp.ak v, o-(i><rTios 
 
 6. XP''S<" (XP^S-) Xpo'^-) toZor, also xpoK" poet. ; [xpiili'i'O/ui late]. 
 
 [expoxTo] [xexpaica} K^XP""'!"'^ ^Xpcio-fiijv 
 
 7. ita (iS-, ife-) «V, seat, middle l!£o)i.ai, also e^o/uu (18-), sit : found chiefly 
 in comp. with Kard. Hence 
 
 Ka6(£ci), impf. iKaSi^ov (861): also t^dvcD, KaSi^dvu, cl. 6. 
 KaSiu (425) iKdSio-a and Ka6t(ra, 
 
 Ka9i£^(ro|xai. eKaSio-dpniv 
 
 Ka9^£o|xai, impf. EKaSe^ojJi'qv and Ka3e(6ii.iiv. 
 Ka9c8oC)iiai, (for KoBeSea'o/iat, cf. 423). [iKaSeffdifiy] 
 
 a. Pr. ind. 4'^o/tai, KaSe(oitai, is rare in classic Greek, and the pr. inf. 
 and part, and the impf. have usually an aorist meaning. The 
 root of both these verbs was originally (reS- (Lat, sed-eo). 
 
 8. 8|<» (o5-, ofe-) smell. 
 o0\tra> u£T|(ra 
 
 517 D. 1. Hm. afnrila and 1\fma^a. 
 
 3. Hm. and Hd. iva^a. 
 
 5. Hm. pr. ad^a and aiia (shortened in subj. ai-(is, airi, iria&i), fu. aatiffa!, 
 ao. iadaffa, ao. p. ivaieiip. The orig. theme was ffao- (cf. 227 D), from which 
 comes also a 2d ao. (/t:-form) (rda he saved and save t/tou. 
 
 7. Hm. ao. eTira (^ e-ircS-ira) seated, imv. criroi> (better iaaov), inf. E(r<rai, 
 par. eVaj (Ai/eVds), Hd. c&rdr ; middle trans. 3d sg. Uaaaro (eJiraTO Eur., eacavru 
 Find.), par. etrffd/ievos, Hd. eia-dfuvos ; fu. c'(r(ro;uai (= (rt8-<ro(uai). In comp. 
 Hm. has ao. Ka0e7cra and xiSura. 
 
 8. Hm. pf. oSoiSd as pr. 
 
 9. Pr. ^ufai (jiiOy-, /lOft-), Hm. ao. liiv^riaa. 
 
 10. Hm. aipiirfra} (aipvy-, mpuS-) draw out, fu. &^^|ai, ao. ^^vira. Also once 
 pr. i^iw. 
 
172 VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. [618 
 
 in. JOiquid themes which form second tenses. 
 
 518. 1. ayeCpa (ayep-) gatJier. 
 
 I^YEipa [cty^yfpKo, -/ioi] 
 
 2. alpu (ap-) &/i! / contracted from aeipa (aep-). 
 
 dp£ fjpa (431 b) fipKa, ^p|i.ai l^pBiiv 
 
 3. &X\o|jiai (a\-) leap. 
 
 a\ov|tai fiXdnnv (431 b, 2d ao. T)\6tiiiv doubtful in Att., cf. 489 D, 85) 
 
 4. pdXXcii (jSoA.-, /3\a-, 64) throw. 
 
 PaXa «Pa\.ov p^pXrjKa, pip\T||iai. ipXVjeTiv 
 
 5. kyitpa (eyep-) rouse, wake trans., 2d pf. and mid. toake intrans. 
 I^epu l^yeipa Ivp^vop'' (368, 601) i\yipdriv 
 
 ■f|Ypo|tilv (437 D) 4Y/|-ycpp,tti 
 a. A poetic pr. eypu, iypop-ai is also found. 
 
 6. 9dX\(i> {ea\-) foui-ish. 2d pf. T^ei)\o. 
 
 1. Koiva (Kav-) kill, fu. kokS, 2d ao. iKavov: other tenses doubtful. In 
 prose only as compound, KaraKaCviD. 
 
 8. KcCpu (/cep-) shear. 
 
 KCp& ixiipa [(feKopKo] K^Kapitai [^(ceJpTji'] v. Kapreos 
 
 9. kXivio (kXo'-) maie incline, see 519, 1. ■ . , 
 
 10. KTtlva (ktck-) KW, see 519, 4. 
 
 11. p,ttCvo|iai (m"''-) '"" '"ad: poet. ;iiaf;<u madden, ao. ifiTiva. 
 fiavovnai Hd. )i.in7)va am mad 4(i.dvT]V 
 
 12. 6<|>cCX(i> am obliged. 2d ao. <i>ij>cXov. From tlieme oi()Ei\e- come 
 £4><iXifio-(i> ^<|>c(Xi)(ra ^(f>ECXi]Ka i&(tiaX^6i)v 
 
 13. ireipio {Trep-) pierce (pr. Epic only). 
 
 eireipa Trewapfiai 
 
 518 D. 1. Hm. pr. impf. 3d pi. iiyepiBovrai, -ovto (494), 2d ao. 3d pi. iyip- 
 oyro, inf. ayepeffOat (389 D a), part. ayp6p.evos (437 D), ao. p. TjyepOjjv. 
 
 2. Hm. lias only ao. m. iipd/iriv, p. part, ipdiis. He commonly uses Ion. 
 and poet, ieipa {aep-), ao. ^eipa, ao. p. i)tpBr\v, plup. 3d sg. Umpro (for ijopro): 
 pr. impf. 3d pi. ^epiQovTai, -ovro (494). 
 
 4. Hm. pf. 2d sg. p4p\riat (462 D), 3d pi. fiiMarai, -oto (376 D d), also 
 Pe/SoMoTo, part. Pe$o\TinfPos ; 2d ao. m. 3d sg. l^fi\i\To, etc. (489 D, 21) ; fu. 
 once irufi^K-fiffoficu. 
 
 6. Hm. pf. part. fern, rcflo^uia (451 D c), 2d ao. 3d sg. 8d\e. Hm. pr. 8n\eai, 
 fu. ByjX'fiffto, pr. part. 6a\e6a>j/ (494), r-qKeddai'. 
 
 8. Hm. ao. ^Repaa (131 D c). Hd. has ao. p. iKipv, Pind. ixfpenv. 
 
 11. Hm. ao, inrivdfiriv, Theoc. pf. m. fif/idviiiiat, 
 
 12. Hm. in pr. impf. almost always 6(j)f\\ai (different from i(pi\\iD in, 
 crease, ao. opt. i<f>i\Keie, 431 D d). 
 
 13. Hd. ao. p. ivapriv. 
 
619] 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 173 
 
 14. (ralpa {(rap-) sweep. 
 
 loTjpo iri<n\pa grin 
 
 16. [o-KeXAoi] (o-KcX-, o-KXe-) dry (500, 6). 
 [iTK^^iro/uu] eo-K^T)!/ (489, 11) 
 
 16. o-irtCpu (ffirep-) sow. 
 
 <r»q>« ^(rireipa £(nrap|iai 
 
 17. irrQiXia (otcA.-) s«t(2. 
 {(TTciXa iirraXKa, ScrTa\)iai 
 
 (nt>dX\<i> trip up, deceive. 
 
 £(r<|iT|\a [€(r(j)a\Ka] £o-(|ia\jiai 
 
 19. <t>aCvu, slum, middle appear. 
 
 4>avu £<t>i)va ir^(f>aYKa, ir^(|>a(r|juu 
 
 ir^if^va intr. 
 
 20. 4>Sctp CD (<pBep-) corrupt, destroy. 
 
 <t>8c()u S^Scipa £()>9apKa, £4>9<i'Pt'^<>'>' 
 
 eipBopa 
 
 21. \aCpu (xop-, also X'V^'i X"'?^") ''c/oice. 
 Xatp^viii [^x^^pw] Kex<ipiK0. 
 [X''p4<''<'A">'] KEX'V"IM"'i nexapiuu 
 
 18. 
 (njiaXu 
 
 V. (nrapT6i 
 4<nrdpT|v 
 
 l<rTd\T|v 
 
 l(r(t>dX'i|v 
 
 44>dv6T|v r. pr. 
 c<|>dvi]v 
 
 l(|>6dpi]v 
 
 [v. tpBaprSs^ 
 
 IxdpTjv as act. 
 y. xaprds 
 
 rV". Liquid themes which reject v. 
 
 519. A few liquid verbs reject the final v of the theme in some of 
 the systems (the first six only in the perfect and passive systems). 
 
 ) 5. Hm. 1st ao. irreg. iincriKa made dry. Ion. pf. tinc^jjKa am dry. 
 
 19. Hm. 2d ao. act. iter. (j>ive(rKe appeared. From shorter root i/>a- he has 
 impf. ipde (morn) appeared, fu. pf. jre0^<r€Toi wUl appear. For ipaelya, ao. p. 
 <paiy8Tiv, see 469 D. For intensive iraiupalixiiv, Traiiipaii6av, see 674. 
 
 20. Hm. fu. Sia-(p8epira (422 D b), 2d pf. Si-iip9opa am j-uined (in Att. poets 
 trans, and intr.). lid. fu. m. iia-^apioiuu intr. 
 
 21. Hm. ao. m. 4xvpiil"l''t 2d ao. Kixapinv (436 D), fu. Kexapiia-a, -o/icu, pf. 
 part. KexapTidis (446 D). 
 
 22. Poet. ixSvdvto {iXSva/-) nourish, 2d ao. ijKScaiov. 
 
 23. Hm. ilKo! (e\-, Fe\-) press, ao. (i)e\(ra, pf. m. UKfuu, 2d ao. p. iiXnn, 
 inf. aKrivai. Find, has 2d plup. 3d sg. Uk^i. In pr. impf. act., Hm. has only 
 clKdw. Even Attic writers have pr. impf. eiAcfti or eiAeoi, also tiWa : iKKa is 
 old and poetic. 
 
 24. Poet, ivalpo) (evop-) slay, 2d ao. fjvapov, ao. m. 3d sg. iirfiparo. 
 
 25. Poet. Beiva (foi/-) smite, fu. Seva, ao. ^Setva, 2d ao. iBevov. 
 
 26. Hm. fiflpo/iat (ftep-) receive as my part, 2d pf. 3d sg. e/ifiope (365 D), pf. 
 m. 3d sg. et/mpTm (366) it M fated used even in Att. prose, part, eifutp/iivos. 
 In later poets, fiefiSpriKe, fiefiSprjTat, fiefioprifievos. 
 
 27. Poet. irdWa (iro\-) sAoAe, ao. ?in)A.o; Hm. 2d ao. part. &n-ireira\<iii 
 (436 D), 2d ao. m. 3d sg. iriKro (489 D, 44). 
 
174 
 
 VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 [B20 
 
 1. kXivoi (k\i;'-, k\£-) make incline. 
 
 kXivu EicXiva [kekXiko] IkXC6i)v and 
 
 KeKXiiiai KttT-eKWvT)v 
 
 2. Kpivii) {npiv-, Kpi-) judge. 
 
 KpivS ^KpXva K^KpiKa, K^Kpt|J.ai €Kp(9T]V 
 
 3. irXivca {ir\vv-, ir\u-) wash clothes. 
 
 irXvvco ^irXvva ir^TrXvp-ai i-KKidiiv Hipp. 
 
 4. kteCvu (KTfv-, KTa-} kill : also airo-KT£vvip, -ilcj cl. 5. 
 KTEvu SKTCiva air-^KTOvtt 
 
 a. For 2d ao. poet. ^KTai/, see 489, 4. For the perf. m. and ao. p. the 
 Attic uses Te'flKTjKo and ^florai' from dviiaKie (530, 4). 
 6. TcCvu (Tev-, TO-) extend. 
 TEVu IJTeiva T^raKa, T^Ta^tai 
 
 6. KEpSaCvu {xepSav-, KepSa-) gain. 
 KcpSavu cK^pSdva (431 b) KEK^pSt^Ka 
 
 7. PoCvw (ficai; Pa-) go. 
 P^o-O(ioi gpTiv (489, 1) pe'pTiKtt (490, 2) 
 /S^trai (500, '2) c/37)(ra Pepa|j.ai in corap. 
 
 8. o(r<j>pa£vo|tai (ocrippav-, o<r<j)pa-, o<r<pp-) smell. 
 o(r</>p^(ro;uai aiT<pp6firiv [wtr</>pi7<r<i;Ui;i'] oi<rippivBr\v 
 
 kra,9v(i> 
 
 ^pdflnv in corn p. 
 . paroSi Par^os 
 
 V. Vowel-themes of the fourth class. 
 
 520. 1. Kaia (kou-) bum ; Att. prose Kdw unoontracted. 
 KaCo-u ^Kavo-a K^xavKa, K^Kau|ji.ai iKaiiBr^v 
 
 2. K\aia (KKav-) weep ; Att. prose KXau unoontracted. 
 KXav(ro|j.ai ixKavira KiKKaop-ai v K\avT6s 
 
 KKavffovfiai (426) later K\ava'T6s 
 
 also KXd-^o-u 
 
 a. KeKAaviTfiai, ^KXaiirB'qv are late. 
 
 519 D. 1. Hm. ao. p. 4k\I.vBi\v and ixXtdnv, pf. m. 3d pi. KexMarai (464 D a). 
 2. Ilm. ao. p. ^KpivBi]v (so Hd.) and ^KpiBnv. 
 
 4. Hm. fu. KTeviai and KTavia, ao. p. ^HTiBriv. 
 
 5. From root to-, Hm. makes also pr. Toi/iia (once with jui-form, pr. m. 3d 
 eg. rdvvTai\ fu. Taviffat^ ao. eTtivutra, pf. m. Terdvufr^at, ao. p. ^TaviiaB-qv. Also 
 pr. TiTofyw, ao. irirTiva. 6. Hd. fu. KepSTjtro/tai, ao, iK^pSTjtra. 
 
 1. Hm. ao. m. Sd sg. ^/S^crero (428 D b). Pr. also jSiitrKU) cl. 6 ; 5S0 D, 11. 
 Pr. part. PifiSs, as if from jSi/Stj/ui, also PLPaf (as if from j8i|8aai). Dor. fu 
 ^d(roi!;uai, Theoc. jSTjerED/iai. 8. Hd. ao. 3d pi. fi(r<(>pa>To. 
 
 9. Hm. root tpev-,' ipa-, 2d ao. iTetpnov, ■ir4<pvoi' (436 D) Mterf, pf. m. iriipafiai, 
 fu. pf. iretp'fio'ofmi. 
 
 620 D, 1. Hm. ao. e/ojo, Attic poets hare part, iceds (shortened from idias). 
 Hm. ao. p. iKoriv. 
 
621] PIFTH CLASS. I75 
 
 Fifth Class {Nasal Class, 402). 
 
 The theme assumes a syllable containing v. 
 I. Themes which assume -v°|e-. 
 
 521. 1. IXaivo) (eAo-) (/Hue; also ^Aaiu poetic. 
 I\u (IXdo-u, 424) {jXaira IX^XuKa, €\i^\a)iai ^\d6i]v \^\A(r8Tiv\ 
 
 a. ^A.aiii'ttJ is probably for c^a-yu-ui ; see 525 and 488 a. 
 
 2. <)>6dvci) (i/>Sa-) anticipate. 
 
 <t>9rio-0|i.ai 8<|)9tiv (489, 8) [6(;>eoKa] [e(()9({ore7)i/] 
 
 ij>9d(r(i> %<)>6a<ra 
 
 3. irtvii) (iri-, also tto-) drink. 
 
 irCopai (42Y) Siriov (489, 16) ir^ir<DKa, ir^7ro|iai kiT69i\v 
 
 or irto|iai [tioC^oi] t. iriaT6s, iroris, ttot^os 
 
 4. tCvu (ti-) ^ay 6aeA-, middle obtain payment. 
 
 Ticu ?Tvirtt TlriKa, TiTi.(r|xai IrCo-Otiv 
 
 5. <)>6Cvii> (if>9i-) pei-ish. 
 
 (pSlffw trans. ((pBio-a trans. t^ifuu v. (pBiT6s 
 
 u. Late ^(^dfj^cra e(p6lpT}Ka. 
 
 6. SdKvu (SaK-) 6i2e. 
 
 S^|o|iai SSaKOf 84Si)7fj.ai. ^SVix9T]v 
 
 Y. Kd)i.v(ii ((ta/ii-, Kfio-) am weary, sick. 
 Ka|xoOp.ai, SKa|j,ov KiK|iT)Ka v. diro-K|jiT)T^ov 
 
 8. T^|XV(0 (tc^-, TjU€-) cm^. 
 
 TCfiu STejiov, irafiov T^T(i.i]Ka, TeTfi,r)/Mi Ir^iiiSriv 
 
 9. virym (irer-) /a??. Of. iriirToi, 606, 4. 
 
 3. Poet. Soiai (5a-) iwra tians., mid. intr., 2d pf. SeSrja intr., 2d ao. m. sub. 
 3d sg. SdriTai. 
 
 4. Poet. Salofiai (8a-) divide, fu. Saffo/iai, ao. iSa(rdiiriv, pf. 3d sg. Sc'SoiTTai, 3d 
 pi. (irreg.) ScSatoToi. Also pr; SoTfo^uai (Hes. ao. inf. irreg. SaTeoo-flot, 430 D). 
 
 5. Poet, fiaioiiai (/ia-, fiev-) reach after, seek for, fu. fiairo/iai, ao. i/iaiTtliiriv, 
 2d pf. /ii/ioya press on, desire eagerly, pi. ii.4iMiJi.iv, etc. (492 D, 9), v. ij.cutt6s. In 
 the sense of the pf., Hm. has intensive luujiAa (574), ao. /ialfiriffe. In Att. 
 Trag. we find pr. part, fi^fievos ( ^ /ia-ofiepos). 
 
 6. Poet, ya/m (va-) inliabit, ao. tvaaaa caused to inJiabit, m. iyaffffipaiiv be- 
 came settled in, = ao. p. ivdirBrii'. Pf. m. DevtuT/tai late. 
 
 7. Hm. oTiidu (oTu-) teA« /o tcJ/c, fu. oiriira) Aristoph. 
 
 521 D. 1. Hm. fu. cAiJai, ^\dSs, etc. (424 D); plup. m. 3d sg. ^A'^Aoto, once 
 ^\-^\oTo, 3d p. 4\n\4SaTo (464 D a). Hipp. iKriXatr/iai. 2. Hm. pres. ^flovai. 
 
 4. Hm. Tj;/!!. Hm. and Hd. have also pr. rivO/ii, Tivv/iai, v. tit6s. 
 
 5. Hm. (petva, (peta-a, i<peia-a ; 2d ao. 6(#>9ioy, m. iipBiiaiv, i<pel9r\v (489 D, 29). 
 Pr. also (pBiviea (494). V. Hm. pf. part. KeK/irids, -aros (446 D, 455 D b). 
 
 8. Ion. Td/iva, 2d ao. Ira/ioc. Hm, has pr. Tfjivu once, T^/»ai once; also 
 THiiyia (jixay-) cl. 2 (511 D, 17). 
 
176 VERBS: FIFTH CLASS. [522 
 
 II. Themes which assume -av°|e-. 
 
 522. 1. oX<r6a.vofjax {aurB-) perceive : also a{(r8o)iai rare. 
 alo'S^o-Ofiat 'f|o-8d|jLi]v ^(r8t]|JLai v. al<rST)Tos 
 
 2. a|xaf>Tdvfd (a/xa/JT-) ei'V. 
 
 a|i.apT^a-opiai {jixaprov f|nopTiiKa, -i||i.ai i^|jutpT'rj9T|v 
 
 3. av|dv<a (au|-) inerease : also aif^u, 
 
 avS^o-u i]<l^i](ra i)<!£i]Ka, i^dSruiai T|i|yi8t)V 
 
 4. pXaordvo) (jSXoitt-) sprout : [also pxturriin late], 
 $\a(n-fi(ra e$\aiTToy (P)ip\d<m]Ka (366 a). 
 
 [ej3\o(rTrj(ro] 
 
 6. SapSdvai (Sap6-) sleep, in comp. except in 2d ao. 
 
 '^Sap9ov ScSopSriKa liSdpBriv] 
 
 6. dir-c\6dvo|iai (fx^-) ""^ hated. 
 aire)(fi'l\<ro]ui,i dirT)x9dp.i]v dir^x'lH'*'' 
 
 The forms ex^^ hate, ^xBofxai am hated are poetic. 
 
 7. olSdna (oiS-) and olS^u cl. 1, swell; [later olSaw, otSaiva.^ 
 
 ^ST]<ra ifSriKa 
 
 8. JXio-Bdvoi (oAitrfl-) slip ; [later o\i<r6alv(ii\ 
 [o^itrfl^irai] HXurBov {uXlaBriKa and aiKMncra Hipp.) 
 
 9. 6<|>Xi(rKdv(D (o(/iA.-, oifXiiTK-) incur judgment. 
 6<|>\^irci> uit>Xov a(}>XT)Ka, u(j>XT||j.ai 
 
 523. The following have an inserted nasal. 
 
 1. avSdva (at-) please, only the present in Attic. 
 
 2. Biyydvu (617-) touch. 
 
 Bl^Ojial iiiyOV V. fi-fllKTOS 
 
 10. Hm. 66pa (Hes. flui/eaj) = flu-o) 1-Ms7i. 
 
 B22 D. 2. Hm. 2d ao. iJuPporov (for TifipaTov, ij/ipoToy, 60 D). 
 
 8. Hm. a€|ai. 
 
 5. Hm. 2d ao. ISpaeov (436 D). 
 
 10. Eur. aKifidi'u {a\<l)-) procure. Hm. 2d. ao. ^K<pov. 
 The following two add -alva to the theme. 
 
 11. Hes. a\nalpa (a\iT-) o/fend. Hm. 2d ao. ^Ktrov, m. iiKirS/iriv, pf. part, 
 irreg. iXiT-fifiems (cf. 3S9 D b). 
 
 12. Hm. iptSalvu) (epiS-) contend (= ^p/fai cl. 4), ao. m. inf. ^piS^iraj-9ai. Pr. 
 also epi^fiaifu provoke. 
 
 623 Di 1. Hm. impf. •livSai'oi', €^(/Soi'oi' (Hd. li{i'Sai'oi/)see 359 D ; 2d ao. fiSon 
 or fSaSov ( = eFFaSov, cf . 355 D a), 2d pf. tdSa. Hd. 2d ao. eoSov, f ut. oS-^criB. 
 For &<riievos, see 489 D, 46. 
 
524] FIFTH CLASS. 177 
 
 3. Ki-yx'^""' ("'X") oome up to. 
 
 Kix^iro/iai iiaxov v. k-nixifra^ 
 
 4. XaYxdvo) (Aax-) obtain hy lot. 
 
 \i\iofsu. £\axov ^'nX°'i eiiXTYtmi IX<ixfl»lv 
 
 6. \a|j.pdv(i> {Kaff-) take. 
 \^ijf0|xai ^apov e{\T](|>a, EtXT]|i)iai IX^4i6i]y 
 
 6. Xav8dv(D (\o9-) lie hid, middle forget: also Xtj9u cl. 2 (511, 1). 
 
 \i\<ra £\a9ov X^iiSa, \^\i](r|iai v. &-hairTos 
 
 a. The simple middle is rare in prose, im-\cui6dvofiai (seldom iK-Kcw- 
 Sdvo/iai) being used instead. 
 
 7. fiavGdvu (fuaS-) leai-n. 
 
 |i.a6^o-o|i.ai S|xa6ov |xE|id9T]Ka v. |xa6r)T0Si -t4os 
 
 8. iniv9dvo|xai (ttuA-) inquire, learn : also irevBo/iai cl. 2, poet. 
 ircv(ro|i.ai 4irv9d[i.T)v ir^ir«<r|Jiai T. ireucrT^os 
 
 9. Tvyxdvo) (twX") ''^'i happen. 
 
 TCu|o|uu Jnixov TeTixTiKO, TeT6«xa. [ireixSriy] 
 
 [rerevyfiai] 
 
 III. Themes which assume -ve'l^-. 
 
 524. 1. pHviu) (/3u-) stop up ; [also Pva]. 
 pco-u SpScra p^pvo-fjiai \^i$i<T6r)v] v. pvcrrds 
 
 2. iKV^ojiai (iH-) com;. 
 
 a. &<j)-iKy4o/uu is commonly used in prose. 
 
 3. Hm Kixava, ao. kix^ctoto. For /w-forms from theme kix«-, see 638 D, 4. 
 
 4. Hd. fu. A(£|0|Uai. Hm. 2d ao. %\axov obtained by lot, but \4\axov (436 D) 
 made partaker. Ion. and poet. 2d pf. \4\oyx''- 
 
 5. Hd. fu. Xan^ofiai, pf. XeXd^riKa, pf. ra. AeAo/it/tai (463 b), ao. p. i\i/i<l>8r]t', 
 T. Xa/iiTTcos. Hm. 2d ao. m. inf. XeKafiea-Sai (436 D). 
 
 6. Hm. 2d ao. Stoflo)/ ?ay /»</, but AeAoflov (436 D) ca«sed <o forget, m. 
 A.cAa9eV9ai to forget, pf. m. K^Xaaiiai have forgotten. The meaning catwe <o 
 forget is found also in rare pr. A.7)9(£;'ai, ao. iTt-ihtiaa, and sometimes in pr. 
 act. im\'li6a. Dor. ao. p. iXiia9T\v. 
 
 8. Hm. 2d ao. m. opt. ireirvBotTO (436 D), v. o-iruirToj. 
 
 9. Hm. has also 1st ao. Mxi](ra, and often uses TfTvyfuu, irix^" (from 
 TeiJxffl cl. 2, 611, 14) in the sense of Terixva, irvxov. 
 
 10. Poet. x'>''8o>'<» (x"^-i X'»'8-, X^"^-) contain, fu. x^'frojuai (^ x^''^''''''/'<")> 
 2d ao. ^x°^'"'i 2d pf. KexavSa. 
 
 B24 D. 2. Hm. has pr. impf. iKce'o/i"' only twice, often kai/a) (also kdi/n. 
 fu«) and iKO), 1st ao. fje, f|oc (428 D b). For 2d ao. part. Ik/jlcvos, see 489 D, 
 47. Hd. pf. m. 3d pi. awiicarai, cmiKaTO (464 D a). 
 
178 VJiRBS: FIFTH GLASS. [525 
 
 3. KvvEiii ((CU-) kiss. ao. ixvaa. 
 a. The simple verb is poetic; but wpoffKvvea do homage is frequent 
 in prose ; it makes irpoirKwiiffa), TrpotreK^i^a'a. 
 
 i. a/iirurxveofiaL (o/xir-6X-) = a|j,'ir4x°l''''"> '"""* "" ■' active hfrnix", ^t"'- 
 l(rxi»,P^'i on. Impf. ifniTreixoH-lv {361 a). 
 a/ufefo) •ii(j.iri(rx.ov, inf. a.(i7ri<rx«iv 
 
 d|ii|>^|o|uu ■f|(Mri(rxoH-1'' o^ i\ii.iricr)^6fLi\v (361 a) 
 
 a. afiirKrxf^ofjiat is for a^(^(t)-t(rx-»'€o-jtiai. For change of <p to it, cf. 
 73 d. iffx is for iVx, and that for a-i-(r{€}x, a reduplicated theme 
 of €xa (tr^X-) ''«"« (508, 16 ; cf. 506, 2). The 2d ao. must be 
 divided 1jinrt-<rxov ; i here belongs to the preposition. 
 
 5. {iiri.(rxv^O|j.ai (uir-cx-) promise; also uirfcrxoM"'' ^^^ 4 a above and 
 508, 16 
 iirocrx'/io-onoi 4ire<rx.0(i.Tlv viria-)^r\[ia.i 
 
 IV. Themes lohich assume -w- (after a vowel -vw-). 
 525. Tliemes in -a-. 
 
 1. Kepdwv|JLi (Kepa-, Kpa-) mix. 
 
 [Kfpcurui] eK«pocra K^Kpajxai lKpa0T|V or 
 
 V. Kpar^os [KeKt'pcKTjuai] eKepdo-flriv 
 
 2. Kpe|i,dvvvp.i. ((cpe/io-) Jumg trans. : [also KpepAa late]. 
 
 Kpeiia {-dffw 424) EKp^|J.ti(ra [nEKpefioir^uoi] iKptudo-flriv 
 
 a. For middle Kp4fia^at hang intrans., fu. Kpefifitrofiai^ see 535, 8. 
 
 3. TTETdwuni {irera-) expand: [also Terda late]. 
 
 irerfi (-t£(r(u 424) eireTtto-a Tr^TrraiJiai [ TreTreTaffjiiai] iTreTdtrdTtv 
 
 4. (rKeSdwv|U ((r/ceSa-) scatter : also (tkCSvi^iii r. A., [ffKeSam late]. 
 o-KcSu {-diTa 424) lo-K^Sao-a l(rK^Sa<r|i,ai E(rKESdcr6T]v 
 
 626. Themea in -€-. 
 
 1. ewC/ni (I-, orig. feir-, I at. «;cs-Wo) clothe; in prose d|i4>i^wv|u. 
 d|i<|>iti) (-Eiru 423) {||i<j>C£<ra (861) ii\i^i«rfi,u,i 
 dp,(j>Ua-0}jt.ai 
 
 52B D. 1. Hm. also pr. xipda, Kepala, ao. inf. im-Kp?ic-at, v. fi-wp-jros. For 
 Klpvviu, see 529 D, 2. 
 
 4. Hm. ao. also without a; ixeSaa-ffct, iKeSirSriv ; of. xlSvrifiL (529 D, 8). 
 
 6. Poet, ydrnfittt (70-) a'n glad, fu. yaviirirofiai, late pf. ycydvvii.ai. Cf. 
 70(0) ol. 4, only in pr. part, yaiav. 
 
 528 D. 1. Hm. impf. KaTo-ehuov (= Fev-vvov), cf. Hd. ^Tr-efvutrfloi, fu. eWu, 
 ao. io'cra, ao. m. 3d sg e((r)iraTO or eiaaaTO, pf. m. cT/tuii (=: fc<r-;uai), eWai, 
 •Ttoi (eiTTai ?), plup. 2d, 3d sg. tViro, citto or 'icaro, 3d du. eirSnv, 3d pi. cVaro, 
 part, eluivos. 
 
628] 
 
 FIFTH CLASS. 
 
 179 
 
 2. \KOfiw\>)i,i\ {Kope-) satiate, chiefly poetic. 
 
 8. (rp^vvii|u ((7j36-) extingvAsh (600, 5). 
 o-p^crai So-peo-a ^ S(rPi|Ka 
 
 o-pifi(ro|iai 8<rPnv (489, 10) [e(rj8e(r/ioi] 
 
 iKop4a6r\v 
 eo-p^o-Bijv 
 
 527. Themes in -a-. 
 
 1. ^(ivvii|ii (fo)-) gird. 
 
 [fnio-io] S|(ii<ra [ffaiKa] 8J<i)ji,ai, ££oKr)i,ai [^fdi(rfl7)y] 
 
 2. [^ii>i'i'0/iu] (^o)-) strengthen, 
 
 [piitrai] ippaa-a ^ppto^ai am strong (ppdirdipr 
 
 3. a^piSvvC|j.i ((TTpiu-) spread out = (rT6pmiu, 528, 16. 
 
 OTputru iarpaiTa S(rTp<D|jiai itTTptiBi]!! 
 
 528. Themes ending in a consonant. 
 
 1. fi.7Vii|ii (ay-, orig. fay-) irrai. 
 
 4|u Stt^o (369) Java (601) {tayimi'] ityt\v 
 
 2. &pvv[iai (ap-) win, chiefly poetic. 
 apovfiai ^p6/jL7iv 
 
 8. Se(KVV)u (8eik-) s/iow. 
 
 4. eiCp-yvviu (eipy-) shut in : (also tJpYu). 
 
 «tpS<o rfpSa, p. ip^as dpypju (Xp)^ii\v 
 
 a. The forms of etpya shut out are distinguished from these by their 
 smooth breathing. 
 
 6. JeiYVvp (fuy-, ftuy-) join. 
 fe(i|ai 8Jeii|a ££evY|JLai. ^IvyVi iUi\ir\v r. A. 
 
 2. Hm. f'l. Kop^Q) (423), ao. iK6pecra, iK6pe<r<Ta, pf. part. KfKopri<is (446 D), 
 pf. m. KeK6p7}fiai (also Hd.), v. d-/f(ip7jTos. Hd. fu. Kopeaa. 
 
 Add the following with themes in -i- : 
 
 4. Poet. KivvfiM (ki-) mow intrans., 2d ao. e/ciov went, part. Kiiiiv. For 
 iKiaBov, see 494. 
 
 5. Epic aivu/iai (at-) ifa^« airay, in comp. airoafi/u/Kai and &Tralvvfj.ai. 
 
 6. Ion. and poet. Saim/ii (Sat-) feast trans., mid. intr., opt. 3d sg. Saifvro 
 (419 D b), 3d pi. SaiviaTo: fu. Saltra, ao. ^Saiira, ao. p. iSaltrBiiv, v. S-8aiTos. 
 
 628 D. 1. Hm. ao. ^aja, rare ^|o (Hes. opt. 2d sg. Kavd^ats, = Ko^fa|aii = 
 KarorFa^ais, 84 P), ao. p. ^c^yj/i' with short a. Hd. pf. ^rjya. 
 
 3. Hd. has root Sew- in Sejai, ^8e|a, SeSey^o/, 4Sdx9vy. Hm. pf. ra. SelSey/iai 
 greet (for SESeiy/iai), 3d pi. SetSexarai, -aro (464 D a). In the same sense of . 
 greeting, he has pr. part. Semi/i/ieyos, as also pr. SeiKavdo/iat and 8eiS/(rK0/uai 
 {= Sei-SiK-ffKOfiai). 
 
 4. Hm. has only forms with smooth breathing, even in the sense of shutting 
 in. As theme, he has epy- or eepy- instead of eipy-. For ^pxarai, {4)epxaTo, 
 see 363 D. For poet. fXpyaSov, Hm. {i)^pyaeov, see 494. 
 
180 VERBS: FIFTH CLASS. [628 
 
 6. airo-KTfvvC|ii (ktsv-) kill ^ ktcIvu (519, 4). 
 
 7. iit'yviJii.i ifity-, luy-) mix : also ^(o~y<i> cl. 6, less f req. in Att. 
 
 )L4|tT7|j.ai I|jiCyi]v 
 
 8. dXXCiii (for oXviju, theme oA-, o\e-) destroy, lose. 
 oXco {^iffoa 422) ti>Xco-a oXt&XcKa 
 
 oXoifiai a>\d|iT|v £Xii>Xa (501) 
 
 a. In prose, the compound dn--(iXXCjUi is always used. 
 
 9. {I)ivvp (oji-, o/ito-) swear. 
 
 d)ioi|iai (422) oifjiacra o|i(&|j,OKa (368) &|idST]v and 
 
 [hfUffa, -a/iai] 6|u6)io|iai, o|ui)io<r|iai. d|xd(r8i]v 
 
 10. iii6pyvviu (ojiofty-) wipe off. Pres. and impf. only Epic. 
 oii6p^oiiat u)i,op^a [S//op7/iai] unipx^rir 
 
 11. upvOfii {op-) rouse, middle rouse one's self, rise. 
 Spa-w (422 b) S/jo-o (431 c) opapa intrans. (368 D). 
 
 12. ir^Y*'*'K''' ("■oy-j "■777-) Jix,faste7i: [also jr^crira) late]. 
 
 TT^lai Hm. £7rT]Sa ir^irriYa (501) lirayriv, v. irijifrd'- 
 
 [ireir777/iai] iv'fix&V^ 
 
 13. 7rTdpvv)iai (irrap-) sneeze. 
 TtTapii Hipp. iiTTapov [eirrctpa] 
 
 14. p^Yvii|ii (^ay-, ^7)7-, pay-) break. 
 
 p^Sw ^ArSi Sppw^a (501) ipp&yrpi 
 
 15. crTdpvii|U {(TTop-, iTTope-) spread out : cf. arpimviu, 527, 3. 
 (rropu (422) ^o-rdpEo-a [^(rT((pe(r;iiai] [^iTTops'fl-fliji/] 
 
 16. ({jpaYviip (ippay-) also (j>pd(r(r<i> cl. 4, enclose. 
 
 [<ppila\ gcfipa^a ir^<j)po7(j.ai I({ipdx6iiv \lippAYi\y\ 
 
 a. The forms ^dpyvvfii, etpap^a, -rritpapyfiai, ifpapx^V^, etc., are certainly 
 Attic, and are preferred by many editors. 
 
 7. Hm. and Hd. have only fj.to'ya) in pr. impf. : Hm. once ixtyi^onai. Hm. 
 2d ao. m. 3d sg. e/ilKTO, /mkto f4£9 D, 41), 2d fu. p. fuyicrofiai, 
 
 8. Poetic also pr. dKcKoi ; 2d ao. m. part. ov\6fi.ei'os (S3 D). 
 
 11. Hm. fu. m, bpouftai, ao. &piTa, oftener Sopopov (436 D), pf. m. bpt&pi-rai, 
 sub. 3d Sff. opcipriTai, ao. m. Sipro (oftener than ilpero), ipiro, vpBat, Hp/xefos (489 
 D, 42). For opireo, see 428 D b. Connected with Sppvfu are ipivai ,oicse, ao. 
 &ptva, ao. p. Q3piv6r]V', and oporto ^~ush, ao. fiSpouca. 
 
 12. Hm. 2d ao. m. 3d sg. KaT-iwnKTo (489 D, 43). 
 
 13. Hipp. ao. p. iirrdpriv. 
 
 14. Hm. pf. p. ipli-iiKTcu, Hipp. ao. p. ip^-S^xBrfV. 
 
 17. Hm. ^;^i/ujuai (ax-) «»i jPo^i^icf^ (rare ^x'^f^^-^^ ^^^xK^l^^) \ 2d ao. aKtixovro 
 (436 D), pf. oKiix'?.'"" '368 D), 3d pi. aKrixtSarai (464 D a) plup. 3d pi. aKaxtiaro 
 (for wcaxnaTo), inf. iicaxiirSo', part. aKaX'/ll^fos, aKjJxefiei^ (389 I) bl. — Act. 
 iKaxi((» pain, ao. iJKaxoy and ^Kcfx^"'"' — i"""- piirt. intrans. li.xcan', ii,x^vav. 
 
630] SIXTH GLASS. 181 
 
 Sixth Class {^Inceptive Class, 403). 
 
 530. The tlieme assumes -o-k^- (or -to-K°|e-) in the present. 
 Several verbs which belong here prefix a reduplication. Only 
 a few show an inceptive meaning. 
 
 Themes in -a- and -e-. 
 
 1. yrip&o-Ku = YHP*^'" grow old. 2d ao. inf. yrjpavai (489, 2). 
 'YT]p&o-(i>, -o|iai ^7^pa<ra Ycy^paKa 
 
 2. SiSpdo-Ku {Spa-) run, used only in composition. 
 8p&o-o|iai eSpav (489, 3) S^SpaKa 
 
 3. ifjpdo-Ku (^iSo-) come to puberty : 'fjpdu am at puherty. 
 ^P^o-a> {|pr|o-a 4JPi]Ka 
 
 4. 6v^(rK(D, older Sv^o-ku (floj'-, fivo-) die. 
 6avoC|iai £6avov T^OvT|Ka am dead (490, 4) 
 
 a. Fu. pf. Tefli/^fa, see 46'7 a. For f u. flai/oDjuoi, 2d ao. ie<aiov, the Att. 
 prose always uses imoQavovfiai, aireSayov (never found in Trag.), 
 but in the pf. TidvmKa, not itjro-redyTjKa. 
 
 6. fXd(rKO)iai (i\a-) propitiate. 
 iXdcopLai f\acrd|i.T|V f\dir6t|v 
 
 18. Poet. Koivviua (for fcaS-cvyiuu) surpass, pf. Kc/nur/iai, part. KfKoaiUvos 
 (Find. KeKaS/xevas). 
 
 19. Hm. opeyyvfu (opey-),^ opeyu cl 1, reach, pf. m. 3d pi. opupexarat (368 
 D, 464 D a). 
 
 629 D. In the Epic language, several themes, which for the most part 
 show a final a in other forms, assume -yo- instead of it in the present. This 
 is accompanied in most instances by a change of vowel, and by inflection 
 according to the jixi-form. 
 
 1. Sdfiprifu or Sanrda (Sau-, Sa/ia-) overcome, fu. Safidai (cf. 424), ao. iSd/iaca, 
 pf. m. SeS/xfiiiai, fu. pf. SiS/jiiiaoiitti, ao. p. iSa/idrSriy or iSfiiieT)!', more freq. 2d 
 ao. iSd/iTiv. Pr. also Sa/tdCa. The forms iSa/iatrdfiriv and iSa/idaBriy are even 
 found in Att. prose. — The same perf. m. SeSfiimai belongs also to the Ion, 
 and poet. Se/jm (Att. o(/co5o/*ew) build, ao. ^5£ijua. 
 
 2. Kipyrifii or Kipfda {Kepor), ^ Kepdwifu mix (525, 1). 
 
 3. Kpiiiiva/iai (Kpi/aa-), = Kpfiia/juu liang (636, 8; cf. 626, 2). Active Kpii- 
 livrifii very rare. 
 
 4. pLdpvanai (jiapor) figlU, used only in the present. 
 
 5. ■ir4pvr]fu (ire/jo-), = iriwpd(rKii> sell (630, 7), fu. irfpaa (cf. 424), ao. ^Tepacra, 
 pf. m. part, ■jretrepri^evos. 
 
 6. irfAvo/iai (TreAu-) rfj-aai nra*-; also iriKi'da = irfAafa) ini/j/ near (514 D, 21). 
 Y. "jrlTfTifit or iriTvc^Qj (irera-), = Trerdvyvfii spread (625, 3). 
 
 8. ffxiSfrtiu ((TKfSa-), = (TKfSdvi'viu scatter (5^6, 4): also without <r, KtStr/i/u. 
 
 630 D. 2. Hd. SiSp-tia-Ko), Spi]aoiuu, ISpriv (30 D). 
 6. Um. also iKdojuu, pf. ■''A.TiKa; see 636 D, 10. 
 1.S 
 
182 VERBS: SIXTH CLASS. [531 
 
 6. |j.i|ivirja-K(i>, older |u|j,vf|(rK(i> {ixva-) remind, mid. remeniher, mention. 
 y.v([<na ifSfi\<ra. f,if.vr\yjxi. (365 b, 465 a) l|iv^o-8i]V 
 
 Fu. pf. )i,E|i.vifj(ro|iai will bear in mind. 
 a. The fu. and ao. m. are poetic ; the fu. and ao. p. take their placa 
 The pf. m. liefiynfjiai is present in meaning, = Lat. memini. 
 
 1. [viTpdffKo] (irpa-) sell ; wanting in f u. and ao. act. 
 (okiroSii(rop,ai) (airESd|j.i]v) ir^irpaKa, ir^irpa|ji.ai. htpkitfi 
 
 S. (jidirKai (</)o-) = qniiii (536, 1 ) smj ; used chiefly in the part., see 481 a, 
 
 9. xdo-Ku (xo-, X""-) 9V^ ' [x"'""" late] 
 XavoOjJAi £)^avov k^xT""' stand agape / 
 
 10. ap^o-KCii (ape-) please. 
 dplcd) 4|pc(ra [a^^pe/ca] iipecBriv 
 
 531. Themes in -o-. 
 
 1. civa-Pui(rKO|iat (;8(o-) trans, re-animate, intr. revive. 
 
 ao. avEpCuv (489, 14) intrans., av£Pi[iio-dp.i]v trans. Cf. $t6a> (507, 2). 
 
 2. PKdorKa (fioA-, yuAo-, j3Xo-, 60 D) go, poetic. Pr. impf. only Epic, 
 fioKovfiai efio\ov fUfi^KwKa (60 D) 
 
 3. fii^pdaKoi (fipp-) eat ; pres. Hipp, and late. 
 
 \fipii(ronai\ [eiSpwira] p^^puKa, p^ppufiai i$piiBriv Hd. 
 
 a. The defective parts are supplied by forms of ia-dla cl. 8 (539, 3). 
 
 4. 7iYV<4<rK(i) (7<'o-) know : also ylvdxrKu Ionic and late Att. 
 YVt&o-oiuu 2-yv<DV (489, 15) ^YVciiKa, ?YV<D<rnai i^fv^&iyf/ 
 
 5. BpiffKu [Bop-, dpo-) leap, poet. ; also d6pvvfuu cl. 5. 
 Bopov/jui edopov 
 
 6. TiTpt&crKii) (rpo-) wound. 
 
 rpi&o-di 2rpu(ra T^Tpujiai 4Tp<iSi^v 
 
 532, Themes in -i- and -v-. 
 
 1. Kvto-KO|j:ai (ku-) conceive, ao. EftCira impregnated. 
 a. Ki/tti, ttue'ti) mean am pregnant. 
 
 6. Hm. pf. m. 2d sg. ficfivnai, fiefivp (imv. fitfivco Hd.), see 462 D ; sub. 1st 
 pi. fietivd/isB^ (Hd. fi€/ii>eiiii.e6a), opt. fiefu^f^riv, 3d sg. /^eiiveiisTo, see 465 D. 
 
 11. Poet. iStiincii) (^a-) = ;8a£ya ^o (619, 7), chiefly in imv. pdffK' IBi haste ; 
 once ivi^atrKciiev cause to go upon. 
 
 12. Poet. KiicKricrKia (k\ij-) = ica\4a cl. 1, call (504, 5). 
 
 631 D. 3. Hm. PiPpdBa. Ep. 2d ao. ^Ppcai> (489, 26 ; not in Hm.). Soph, 
 2d pf. part. ;8ej3pwTes (492 D, 16). 
 
 4. Hd. 1st ao. &v4yf!ii(ra persuaded. Poet. r. yvaiT6s (ior yvaa'T6s). 
 6. Hm. TpdJo) ; v. rpayrSs. 
 
533] SIXTH CLASS. 183 
 
 2. |uSvo-K«> (/tcSu-) intoxicate. 
 
 ^(i^Suo-a \ji.ifi.ie\iajuu\ 4)i,e8v<rSi)v 
 
 a. Mid. iie0.v(rKoimt get drunk ; but jueWo) (only pr. impf.) am drunk. 
 
 533, Themes ending in a consonant. 
 
 1. aX(o-KO|tai (o\-, aAo-) am Zaie», used as passive to a/p^oi ol. 8. 
 aXuo-o|JLai ed\ii>v or IdXcoKa or t. aXuTos 
 
 fjUv (489, 13) ijXuKa 
 
 2. av-a\C(rK(i> (dA-, d\o-) expend; also avaXou. 
 
 dfoXtio-a) dv^Xuo-a dvTJXuKa, dv^Xajtai dvT|X(o6T|v 
 
 a. Rare forms, rivd\a(ra, TivaXafiai (361). The forms avaAuira, acaAoiKO, 
 waAiiBriv etc., are un-Attic. 
 
 8. d|i.p\C<rKu (aii$\-, a/i^Ko-) miscarry : also 4^-aitp\6tD. 
 [auPMia-ai] 4j)ip\(i>(ra {)|i.p\uKa, 4)|j.p\ci>|i,ai [i)fi.p\^0riv] 
 
 4. iir-avpl(rKo/Mu (avp-) enjoy, also 4iraupl<rK<ti, iiravpiia : pres. Ionic only. 
 liravp^(roiiat i'TrrjSpov, iTrrivp6iiriv [^Trrjupi^/jrji'] 
 
 6. cipCo-Koi (tip-) find. 
 
 tip-f[<ra> T]vpov TivpT)Ka, ti'vptDiai. r]{ip^OT]V v. ({iperds 
 
 o. For 2d ao. imv. etpe, see 387 b. For later Attic eSpov, eliprixa, etc., 
 see 357 a. 
 
 6. o-TCpCcTKu (ffre/)-) = iTTepia deprive. 
 
 oTtp^o-w €o-T^ptio-a 4(rT^pT]Ka, -T||iOi iimp^9i\v, iarfprtv 
 
 a. Pass. ffrepiffKofiai, ffrepovftat am deprived ; but trrepofjuu am needy. 
 
 7. aKicTKw (for a\vK-(TKw, theme o\uk-) aaoic?, poet. ; pr. impf. rare. 
 dA.v|ai ^\«|o 
 
 8. SiSdo-Ku (for SiSox-iT/cia, theme SiSax-) teach. 
 
 StSd^u ISCSaSa ScSfSaxUi -Y|tai ISi8dx9T]v 
 
 9. XocTKw (for KoK-ffKw, theme Aowc-) apcai, poetic. 
 \aieli<ro/iai eKaitrja'a Ke\cuca 
 
 i\ttKOV 
 10. nCo-yii) (for luy-ffKa, theme luy-) mix, = iiiyvv/u cl. 6 (628, 7). 
 
 632 D. 3. Ion. and poet. mTriiTKa (m-) give to drink (of. iriva, 621, S), fu. 
 witrot, ao. ^irto'a. 
 
 4. Hm. 7ri<^ai$(r/cw (tpav-) declare. Hd. Siat^aiifTKo;, or -(pdffKu shine, dawn. 
 533 D. 6. Hm. ao. inf. (rrepeirai. 
 
 7. Hm. has also aKvirxdCa cl. 4 and ItKiKTKdpa cl. 6. 
 
 8. Ep. ao. ^5i5ii(rK7)o-a (not in Hm.). A shorter theme is So-, Hm. fu. S^o) 
 shall find (427 D), 2d ao. S4Saou (436 D, also ^Saov) taught, 2d ao. m. inf. Se- 
 SiaaSai (for SeSaeaSai), pf. Se8({j)Ko /ia«c learned, 2d pf. part. ScSw^s, pf. m. 
 part. SeSaniiems, 2d ao. p. 4Sdriv learned, fu. p. Saia'a/iai. 
 
 9. Hm. \iiic4a, 2d pf. \e\riKa, part. fem. \e\cocufc (451 D c). 
 
184 VERBS: SEVENTH CLASS. [534 
 
 1 1 . ird<r\<ii (for Trafl-ir/cii), theme ira9-, irevS-), suffer. 
 ireCiro|iai (56) SiraSov ir4irov9a [v. ■!raS'r\T6s] 
 
 Seventh Class {Boot- Class, 404). 
 
 534, The theme itself, with or without reduplication, serves 
 as present stem. These are all verbs in -/xt. 
 
 I. With reduplication. 
 
 1. t£9tihi {Be-) put. See 329, 333, 849. 
 e<i(r« «9t)Ka T^9tiKa M9t|v (73 c) 
 
 du. S9erov etc. T^9«,|i.ai r. 
 
 ■ 2. SC8t||U (Se-) bind, rare form for Sea (504, 1). 
 3. ii\^i. {}-) send ; see 476. 
 (jo-d) T|Ka Ako. t1ir\v 
 
 du. etrov etc. cljJiai 
 
 ■4. 8£8u|i,i (Bo-) 5'ij)e. See 330, 334, 350. 
 8<i(rci) ^8(i>Ka S^SuKa e8o9i]v 
 
 du. SSoTov etc. S^8o|tai 
 
 6. io-rniii (iTTa-) set up. See 331, 335, 336, 351, and 500, 1. 
 irr^o-d) shall set iirTt[ira set i(rri\Ka stand 4oTd9t)v was set 
 
 iTTr\v stood JoTafiai r. f u. pf . £(rT<)|<i) shall stand 
 
 6. &vlvr\^ (o/za) benefit (for oiz-oj/ij-pi). 
 6vi\o-a uvi)(ra, uvVJivqv (4S9, 5) cbv^9T|v 
 
 II. Hm. 2d pf. 2d p. irc'irotrfle (492 D, 14), part. fem. Tr€5ra9u7a (451 D c). 
 
 12. Poet. ay-irKaKltricat {afi-7r\aK-) miss, err. 2d ao. ij/jLTrKaKoy, pf. m. 3d sg. 
 7ifnr\dKrjTat. 
 
 13. Hm. a.ira<til(rKa (a(p-) deceive, 2d ao. ftTrwpov (436 D), rare 1st ao. fiwdipria-a. 
 
 14. Poet. hpaploKw (op-) ^'oira, fit, trans., 1st ao. ^pira (cf. 431 D 0), 2d ao. 
 fipapov (436 D) twice intrans., 2d pf. fipdpa am joined, fitted (found even in 
 Xen.), Ion. &pripa, Hm. part. fem. apapv7a (451 D c), pf. m. ap-fipe/mi, ao. p. 3d 
 pi. &pe€v (386 D, 3), 2d ao. m. part. &piievos (489 D, 86). 
 
 15. Hm. la-Ku (= FiK-iTKa) and ^trKa (72 D a) liken ; cf. toiKo. (492, 7). 
 
 16. Hm. TLT6(TK0fjLai {^= Ti-rvK-ffKofiai) prepare, aim (cf. 511, 14; 523, 9). 
 B34 D, 1. Hm. has pr. ind. 2d sg. Tleri<rBa, 8d sg. riflei, 3d pi. riflero-i (also 
 
 ■Kpo-Siovai), inf. rifl^j^ei/ai, part. ti9^/li€i/os. Hd. pr. tiSc?, TiflEiffi : impf. 1st sg. 
 irlBe-a irregular, 2d ao. opt. irpoa-BioiTo, inf. Si/iiv, Bffiei/at. 
 
 3. For dialectic forms of 'trifu see 476 D. 
 
 4. Hm. has pr. ind. 2d sing. SiSoTs and SlSourSa, 8d sg. SiSoT, imv. SfSmfli, inf. 
 SiSoCi^ai ; 2d ao. inf. S6fi€v and S6fi.evai ; iterative SiffKov. — lid. SiSois. SiSoI 
 JiSoBirt. Hm. has a fu. with reduplication SiSdam. 
 
 5. Hm. 1st ao. 3d pi. t^ffnurav as well as iaTT]irav, 2d ao. ind. Sd pi. ^o-toi', 
 inf. (rrliiievai, pf. inf. ((TTdfuii, ia-rdiuvai, part, iirradis and lo'T«<^J, iterative 
 i<rTa<rKe and ardaHe, — Hd. pr. Sd sg. lar^. 
 
SS6] SEVENTH CLASS. 185 
 
 7. ■ttlf.it\r[fi, (irKa-) jUl ; also wK-liea am full. 
 
 irX.i)(ru 2irXi)o-a ir^irXiiKa lir^o-Snv 
 
 n'^irXi]p.ai, -o-fiai 
 
 a. In this verb and the next, the reduplication is strengthened by the 
 nasal /i. This, however, often falls away in the compounds, if 
 the preposition has fi : in-iriitKriiu, but impf. 3d pi. iy-eiriforKairca'. 
 
 8. irC|i7rpT||ti (irpa-) set on. fire, bum. 
 
 irp-Zjow £irpT|(ra [ite'tptj/co] 4irp^o-8»iv 
 
 ir^irpT)|iai [ir^irpijcfuu] 
 
 9. K^xpTIp (XP»-) ^^"^1 ™''i- *<"^<'«'- 
 
 X/>^(ru Ed. ^Xpiltra K^xpilKCi, k^xP'HI^^^^ 
 
 n. Without Reduplication. 
 
 535, a. Themes in -a-. 
 
 1. <)>i)|tC (4><i-) saj^ ,' see 481. 
 (j>^o'<D ^(|>T](ra 
 
 2. ?i|ii (a-) say ; defective present ; see 485. 
 
 3. XP^ (xP""i XP^-) *^ belmves ; impersonal ; see 486. f u. xp^ni. 
 
 4. &Ya|iai (070-) admire, ao. rarely ■fJYOcrdniiv, usually ■f|7do-8'iiv (497 b). 
 6. Svvap.ai (Suca-) can, am able; see 487. 
 
 SvWjo-oiiai • 8E8iivi]|iai ISw^6i)v, ISvvd(r6i]v r. A. 
 
 6. liri-(rTO(ioi. ((Tto-) understand (impf. i\in<rta,f,r(i/) ; see 487. 
 Iiri<rrti<ro(ioi. ^jirioT^iBTiv 
 
 7. ipofuu, (epo-) love ; poetic for if6M (503, 2). 
 
 8. Kp^naiioi (fcpf/io-) Imng, intr. (cf. 525, 2) ; see 487. fu. Kpen^oi*""' 
 
 536. b. Themes in -i-. 
 
 1. cl|u (1-) go ; only pres. and impf. ; see 477. 
 
 2. Kcipu (k«-) lie ; see 482. fu. KcCcro|UU. 
 
 7. Hm. pr. m. also •jniticX^.v^rai, 2d ao. m. irX^o, ir\T\VTO ; see 489 D, 23. 
 n-\i)fli» is chiefly poetic, 2d pf. TreirAijfla. 8. Ilm. itfi\9a>. 
 
 10. Hm. pr. part. P^pis, from root /3a-, common pr. Pali/a go (519, 7). 
 
 535 D. 1 and 3. For dialectic forms of <fn)iji and xp^, see 481 D, 486 D. 
 
 4. Besides 6.yanai admire, Hm. has hyioiuu and 470(0/101 e«»y, fu. a7[^(r(ra/iai, 
 ao. ^yaff6.fniv. v. otTjjTrfy. 
 
 6. Hm. and Hd. have in ao. p. only iSvydaSriv. Hm. has also ao. m. 
 Sivviftaan-nv. 6. Hd. pr. ind. 2d sg. i^-^TrlffTeat for i^eiriirraircu. 
 
 9. Hm. pr. act. inf. dpiinitai (ctpo-) prai/ ; common present dp&oiiai. 
 
 10. Ep. 7\o;uai propitiate, rare; also in act., imv. ?A.j)9i Hm. (iAa9i Theoo.) 
 be propitious. The quantity of i- wavers. Common present iKd<rKoiitti (530, 6). 
 
186 VERBS: EIGHTH CLASS. [537 
 
 537i c. Themes in -a--. 
 
 1. Af.1 (co--) am ; see 478. fu. So-o|iai. 
 
 2. ^^ai ijia-) sit, also Kd8T||iai ; see 483, 484. 
 
 Eighth Class {Mixed Class, 502). 
 
 539. Different parts of the verb may be derived from themes 
 essentially different : compare Eng. go, went. Here belong 
 
 1. aXpia (ai/)€-, lA.-, 359 a), lake, mid. choose. 
 
 alp^<rii> elXov (^X(o etc.) fiprgKa, ^pT^|j[.ai. 'npl6'r|V 
 
 a. Fu. e\a, ao. fi\diinv are late. 
 
 2. 8pxo|Jiat {epX; eKv8-, e\fl-) ffo, come. 
 4\ei<roiJ.M ij\9ov e\-r|Xu9tt (367 b) 
 
 a. For 2d ao. imv. ^\flf, see 387 b. For iK^ia-ofiai the Attic prose has 
 eTjUi, tJIqj, or &<^/|o/iai ; for i]px6/xi}v, tpx^M^'i ^pX^^f^V^i ^PX^^i 
 epxea-Bai, ipxi/J-^ms, the Attic prose generally lias ^a, ia>, ioi/u, iBi, 
 Uvai, iiiv. 
 
 536-7 D. For dialectic forma of ef/ii, see 477 D ; of KcTiiai, 482 D ; of ei/il, 
 478 D ; of ?iimi, 483 D. 
 
 538 D, Hm. has also the following fii-verbs of tlie seventh class : 
 
 1. h)ij.i (ae-) blow, 2d du. firjrov, inipf. 3d sg. &ri or Sci, inf. diji'at or ^^/uerai, 
 part, ieh ; mid impf. Sd sg. Sr/ro, part, iiiiiiems. 
 
 2. Theme Sie- make fee (in mid., also flee), impf. 3d pi. ivMesav; m. pr. 
 3d pi. hUvrai, sub. Siai/icu, opt. 3d sg. S^oito (cf. 417 a, 418 b), inf. Bfetrflai. 
 
 3. Sl^rifiai (Sifc-) seel; 2d sg. S(f7)oi, part. Sif^|Uei/oj ; fu. Si^'^irojuai. 
 
 4. Theme Kixf- (from kix-, common pr. m^x""'"' com« m/> /o, 523, 3), impf. 
 2d sg. iKix^is, 3d du. kix-^tt)!/, sub. Kix^ia, opt. Kixefili', inf. Kix^rai or Kixhh^vai, 
 part. Kix^is, m. Kix'fit^evos. 
 
 6. ovo-;!!!!! /nrf /n«/< !m7A, 2d sg. ui/offai, opt. 3d sg. ovoito (cf. 418 b) ; fu. 
 hvdaaopim, ao. aipocrdtnip (Hd. i>v6a6T)v). — Hm. has also from root ov-, pr. 2d 
 pi. oHveffQe and ao. &j/aTO. 
 
 6. ^puoftai or ^pvo^iai (epv-, eipv-) guard, presen'e. Ion. and poet. The jUt- 
 forms are pr. ind. Sd pi. elpiarai, impf. 2d sg. ipiiau, 3d sg. ipvro, elpvTO, 3d 
 pi. eJjouvTO, elpiaro, inf. spvffdai, eipvcBai. Fu. ipixrao^ai (4p6e(rdaL, cf. 427 D), 
 cipitra'ofiai, ao. etpv{cr)(rai^7iv. 
 
 7. From ^ioitat or (ivojmi (pv-) = Iptoiiai come /ii-forms, impf. 3d pi. biaro, 
 inf. ^Eo-flai. Fu. jiua-ofiai (lid.), ao. €pp\iaain\v and jivaajx-nv (once jivaintiv). 
 
 8. Root (TTeu-, promise, threaten, pr. impf. (TTcCrai, o-tcBto, (rreCKTai. 
 
 9. From ?8-aj (539 D, 31 eai, pr. inf. ^S./iEi/ai; cf. Lat. ftvs« for c(?-se. 
 
 10. From (/je'/j-u) (639, 6) J«ar, pr. imv. 2d pi. (j>ep-re ; cf. Lat. fer-te. 
 
 B39 D, 1. Hd. pf. apaipvKa (368 D). 
 
 2. Poet. 2d ao. ^\ueoy with v (but only in ind., 1st, 2d, 3d sg. and 3d 
 pi.), Dor. (not Pind.) iicfloi/. Hm. 2d pf. eiA^\ou9o, 1st pi. EtA^Aoufl^ev (492 
 D, 13). 
 
539] EIGHTH CLASS. 187 
 
 3. lo-eCo) (eo-fl-, eS-, iSeff-, iSo-, <bay-) eat. 
 
 880(101 (427) Sijia^ov 48ii8oKa ■/jS^o-flriv 
 
 IST|8e<r}iai t. ISeirrds, -t^os 
 
 4. opdtii {ipa-, i5-, ott-) s«e, impf. lupuv (359 b). 
 
 fii|/0|iiai ctSov (tScD etc.) EopaKa, liipaKa, C(ipa|iai u<j>6iiv [I(upad7)i>] 
 
 imv. 184 (387 b) uirwjra, up,)iai v. oparos^ onreos 
 
 a. The middle is generally poetic, but occurs in Att. prose in compo- 
 sition witli Trp6, im6, nepi. Imv. iSoB, but as exclamatiou iSoii lo I 
 
 5. Tfixa (rpex-, Span-, Spa/ie-) run. 
 
 Spa|j,ou|iai iSpa)iav Se8pd|i,'r|Ka T. SpcKT^ov (74 c) 
 
 ep4^o/j.ai edpe^a (74 c) 8e8pd|iTi|j.ai in comp. 
 
 6. <j>4pa) {fpep-, ot-j eve/c-, eveyK-) bear. 
 
 oto-cu I l^vfYKa (438) 4v<)voxo. ^iv^X^I*" 
 
 oio-onat (as ( IjveYKov tv^veynai ev6x9'i'»'0|«<.i 
 
 mid. and pass.). ^veYKdjiiiv t. oIotos, -t^os ol(r8<i<ro(jiai 
 
 7. iivio^ax (ave-, irpia-) buy, impf. «ui'oii|j.iiv (359). 
 aiv>i(roii.ai lirpidnnv (489, 9) Ecivr^jxaL lcov^9i)V 
 
 a. i<jipri<T(iii.T\v is late. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Att. 
 iiirqiuu may have, iiovii6r\v always has, a passive meaning (499). 
 
 8. etirov (eir-, ep-, ^e-) said. 
 
 fpu ( elirov (436 a) ctpT)Ka (366) ifpvfii\v, v. prjTos 
 
 / elirtt (438) et:pi|p.ai [^p^eflj)!/] 
 
 imv. elir^ (387 b) fu. pf. clp^o-ojiai pT]6<j<ro)i.ai 
 
 a. The pr. impf. are supplied by \iya>, (prifil, and (especially in comp.) 
 by ayopeitu discourse, as airayopevta forbid, ao. a-jre^Toy. The root 
 of elirov was originally feTr- ; of. eiror, orig. Feiros, word. The 
 root of dpa was orig. Fep- (cf. Lat. verbum) ; hence efpriKa for 
 Fe-Fpij-Ko, ipj)'l\6i}V for eFpriSni', j)t)r6s for FpriTos. 
 
 3. Hm. has pres. ^o-flai (for eiS-fla), 52) and iSa ; also pr. inf. IS/iBvat (638 
 D, 9), 2d pf. par. iSriStis, pf, m. ^StjSo/hoi. 
 
 4. Hm. f u. iTri6^oiiat sUall choose, but ^ir((iJ'o/.uu s/iaZ/ look ore / so Find. 1 st 
 ao. iTr6^a.To looked at, but Att. (rare) ^iriwy^tifniv cliose. Hd. impf. liiptav. Aeol. 
 pr. '6priiu Theoc. For iaaoijuu. (oir-), see 515 D, 4. Poetic is also pr. m. cBoftai 
 appear, appear like, ao. elffduriv. 
 
 5. Doric rp^x^' ^'^' P^- ^eSpofxa. 
 
 6. Hm. pr. imv. (pepre (538 D 10), ao. ^veiKa (rarely fivfiKov), m. ^vemifxiiv ; 
 ao. imv. oTfre (428 D b), inf. oltri^iv\ai\ v. tpeprSs. Hd. has ao. ^veiKa, inf. 
 ofirai (once), pf. m. iyifveiyfuu, ao. p. iiV€lxSr}V. 
 
 8. Ilm. pr. eifpo? rare, fu. ipftn, ao. erTroj/ and in ind. (unoontracted) eetirov ^ 
 e-FeFeirov). From root ffeir-, Itt- (70), comes iy-eiru or ^vveirot, 2d ao. ew-o'Troi', 
 imv. Ei/i-tTTre or ifurires (2d pi. limTc for ey-iTTreTe), fu. ^I'ti^m (^ ew-ffir-irft)) or 
 ij/i-trtriiffa, v. ^(rweros. Hd. makes ao. usu. e2Va, ao. p. eipeBjjv. 
 
PART THIRD. 
 
 FOEMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 540. Simple akd Compotinb Wokds. — ^A word is either simple, i. e., 
 containing a single stem: Xoyo-y speech, ypaf^a write; or compound, 
 i. e. , containing two or more stems : Xoyo-ypd^o-f apeecli-writer. 
 
 FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 
 
 541. Pkimitites add Denomdtatives. — Words formed immedi- 
 ately from a root (or the tlieme of any verb) are called primitives: 
 apx-ij heginning, from apx-, root of apx-a hegin. — Those formed im- 
 mediately from a noun-stem are called denominatives : dpxa-lo-s of tht 
 heginning, original, from the stem of dpxri (apxa-) beginning. 
 
 542. SuPFixES. — Nouns (substantive or adjective) are formed by 
 means of certain added elements called suffixes. Thus Xoy-o-r is 
 formed from the root \ey- by means of the suffix -o- ; dpxa-to-s from 
 the noun-stem apxd- by means of the suffix -lo-. 
 
 a. By different suffixes, different words are formed from the same root, 
 theme, or noun-stem : thus from theme iroic- (iroi^a) make, compose, are formed 
 •itoi7]-tIi-s composer, poet, trolij-ffi-s act or art of composing, TrolTj-fia (-Troiri-fxaT-) 
 thing composed, poem. 
 
 b. There are many suffixes, and their uses are very complicated. Only the 
 most important can be noticed here. 
 
 543. Roots. — A root is the fundamental part of a word. It is what 
 remains after removing all inflectional endings (including the augment 
 and reduplication of verbs) and all suffixes and prefixes. 
 
 a. Not all Greek words can be referred to known roots. The origin of 
 many is obscure. 
 
 b. Roots are properly of one syllable. The few exceptions are due to pro- 
 llietic vowels (45 a) and vowels developed inside a root (46 b): thus o-pvx-, 
 e\vd- (also e\B-) are roots. 
 
 c. A root is sometimes increased by the addition of a consonant at the 
 end, generally without appreciable difference in meaning. Tlius root o-to- 
 (if(rTi)|Ui) becomes (rraS- in (rTofl-/U(i-s station. The consonants most commonly 
 added are B, v and a. a appears not only with roots, as aita-a-pJis twilching 
 from <rira- (irir({-(»), but sometimes with other verb-themes : KfKiv-a-r^s com- 
 mander from k£\ev-ii). Cf. the perfect middle, 461. 
 
 544. Chakqes of the Root-Vowbl. — The vowel of the root may 
 be changed in the process of word-formation. Thus : 
 
S48] FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVE8. 189 
 
 a. It may take the strong form (32) : f«5y-os yoke, pair, from root C^y-- 
 
 b. A vowel at the end of a root is oommouly made long before a conson- 
 ant : Sa-pov gift, root 80- ; Spa-im action, root 8pa-. This applies also to other 
 verb-themes : troiri-fTis composition from theme Troie- {TroU-ta). But this rule 
 has many exceptions ; S6-iiis gift, Ku-T-i\p looser, yeve-ai-s birth. 
 
 0. e may become (28), and ei (strong form of i) may become 01 (29). Thus 
 TpdT-o-i turning from rpeir- (Tpeir-u teni), \otv-6-s left from Aitt-, \enr- {Keiir-u 
 leave). Compare &pay-6-s helper; and ap^y-tu help. 
 
 545, Other Changes. — The addition of suffixes gives occasion to 
 many sound-ctianges. 
 
 a. Vowels brought together are often contracted: apxatos for apxa-to-s, 
 PaiTtKeia Hngdom for j3a(riA.E( u)-io, a\ii9eia truth for a\riBi(<r)-ta (71) from 
 oKtiBtis (a\7)6e<r-) true, alSoTos renerahle for aiSo(a)-io-s from aiSdis reverence, 
 
 b. A noun-stem may change its final syllable before a suffix : oitte'-TTjj 
 house-slave from oIko-s lumse, ffauppo-trivri discretion from stem (rutppov- (irili^pap 
 discreet). 
 
 c. A noun-stem often drops its final vowel (especially -0-) before a suffix be- 
 ginning with a vowel : ?Tir-io-j equine f ro.n 'brno-s Imrse ; oipiv-io-s lieavcnly from 
 oipavi-s heaven. Even a diphthong may be dropped : ^curi\-M6-s from 0airi\fi-s. 
 
 d. Lastly, consonants, when they come together, are subject to the usual 
 changes : ypifi-na lariting for ypcuj)-/ia, \efis speaking for Xey-tri-s, 5ik<w-t^-s 
 judge for 5iKa5-Ti)-i from Si/cafai judge, etc. 
 
 546. Accent. — As a rule, neuter substantives take the accent as 
 far as possible from the end {recessiue accent). For exceptions see 
 558, 1; 561, lb. 
 
 Many masculine and feminine suffixes are regularly accompanied by 
 recessive accent. Those vrhich are not so will be specially noticed in 
 the follovdng enumeration. 
 
 I. FOEMATION' OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 A, Primitives. 
 
 547. A few substantives are formed from roots without any suffix : (p\6i 
 {<t>\oy-) flame from <j>\ey- {<p\iy-o> bum) : o>// (ott-) voice from eir- (eT'Troi' said). 
 
 548. Many substantives are formed from roots by the suffixes : 
 -0-, nom. -o-s masc. fem., -o-v neut. ; -a-, nom. -5 or -i; fem. 
 In the root, e becomes o, and ei becomes 01 (544 c). 
 
 \6y-o-s speech from \4y-ai speak t^dx-V ,fig!il from fidx-ofua fight 
 
 ffT6\-o-s sending otcA- ((tt^AAw send) (pop-i bearing ip4p-a bear 
 
 Tpoip-6-s nurse Tpe<p-a nourish rpo*-^ nurture rpiip-a nourish 
 
 (vy-6-v yoke Qvy- ((ciyvviu join) \oi^-i\ pouring Kflp-apour 
 
 a. In like manner tv changes to ou in o-jrouB-^ haste from crireiS-a hasten 
 (29). For the same reason we have n\6os (for wKov-us) voi/age from ir\ia 
 (for 9rA€u-a>, root irAu-) sail; irvo^ (for irwu-Tj) blast from trvito (for nv^v-a, root 
 irW") blow. 
 
190 PRIMITIVE SUBSTANTIVES. [649 
 
 b. These substantives have a wide range of meaning. Most m -d or -n are 
 oxytone, especially those which have a change of root-vov/el. So too those 
 in -OS which denote an agent; ay-6~s leader, 
 
 549, Suffix. -1-. — This forms u few substantives : rp6x-i-s runner from 
 Tpe'x-w 1-unj ir6\-i-s cUy. Many original i-stems have added S at the end 
 and become consonant-stems : i\irl-s (eXir-iS-) Iwpe from eA.7r-o/iai hope ; Koiri-s 
 (ttOjr-iB-) cleaver from /coir- (/ciJTr-Tai chop). 
 
 550. The agent is expressed by the following suffixes : 
 -nip- nom. -rrfp ) ( -mpd- nom. -reipa ) 
 -Top- -Tcop > masc. ; ■< -rpia- -rpia > fern. 
 
 -TO- -Tr)-S ) ( -TptS- 'TpL-S 
 
 ffu-r-fip savior ) „ i i^ \ 
 
 I '^ t \ from am- (aaCa save\ 
 
 ^il-Tiop (-Top-) orator pf- (^p«o, 539, 8) 
 
 Kpi-T^-s (-Td-) judpe Kpi- (Kpivu decide) 
 
 Trotii-rii-s (-rd-) poet ) , 
 
 I f „ ■ r iroie-o) compose 
 
 Troiti-Tpia rem. \ ^ 
 
 ouA.7i-T^-t (-Td-) flute-player ) . , / 7 .o j 
 
 aiX„-Tpr-. (-rp/s-) fern. [ avX.-m play flute 
 
 a. .(dccCTii!. — Words in -rrjp and -rpir are always oxytone : so also most of 
 those in -ttjs, especially when the penult is long by nature or position. 
 Words in -roip, -Tetpa^ -Tpta, have recessive accent. 
 
 551. The ACTION is expressed by the following suffixes : 
 
 1. -Ti- nom. -Ti-s ) 
 
 -<ri- -tri-s > feminine. 
 
 -a*ia- -a-La ) 
 
 -(Ti- is for -T(- by 69, cf. Lat. 4i-o. 
 
 via-Ti-s faith from iriB- (irelBai persuade) 
 
 fiifjLTi-art-s imitation fiifii-Ofiai imitate 
 
 irpa^i-s action trpay- (Trpdacw act) 
 
 yeve-fft-s origin y^v-., yei^e- {yiyvoixat become) 
 
 SoKtp.a-(rid examination SoKiiiaS- (SoKi/ta(,ai examine) 
 
 2. -|io-, nom. -p,o-s, masc. and oxytone. 
 
 6Svp-ii6-s wailing from oSvp- (iSip-oiJ,ai wail) 
 \oyt(r-/j.6-s calculation \oyiS- (Xoyl^ofiat calculate) 
 
 ffTTa-ff-^6-s twitchhig (rird-w draw 
 
 ^v-B-jjii-s (movement) rhythm, fiv- (^eoj flow) 
 
 a. The corresponding feminine suffix -^ud- is seen in yva-p.'fi opinion from 
 7>'o- (yiyvdxTKa know), Ti-fvl] honor from tI-oi honor. 
 
 3. -TU-, nom. -ris, feminine and oxytone ; chiefly Homeric (cf. Lat. -tu- in 
 ean-tvr-s, or-tu-s) : $pa>-ri-s food from Ppo- (pifiptia-Ka eat), ^ot]-t6-s shouting 
 from fioi-a shout. 
 
 552. From verbs in -eva are formed substantives in -«a (for -tu-m) 
 which express the action ; they are all feminine and paroxytone : 
 TTmSetd education, from naiSeito educate. 
 
656] DENOMINATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. 191 
 
 553. The KBSTTLT of an action is expressed by the suffixes : 
 1. -uttT-, nom. -jia, neuter. 
 
 irpay-fm (-^laT-) thing done, affair from wpdy- (irpaatra do) 
 ^rj-na (^-niiaT-) word ^e- (ipii shall say) 
 
 Tfirj-im {T/uiturr-) section re/i-, r/ie- {rf/j.i'a eut) 
 
 3. -60--, nom. -or, neuter. 
 
 \iix-os (^"X*"'-) '"' from \ax- (^ayxii/ai get by lot) 
 
 eS-os (efleo--) custom cfl. (eiaBa am accustomed) 
 
 TcK-os (T€K€<r-) chUd TCK- (t/kto) bring forth) 
 a. The same suffix may express quality: 
 
 flaATT-oj (SaKirfo--) warmth ' from ed\ir-a heat 
 
 Pdp-os (iSopecr-) weight 0ap- {fiap-is heavy) 
 
 0de-os ifiaeea--) depth PaB- {fiae-is deep) 
 
 554. The iNSTRTjMBiifT or MEANS of au action is expressed by 
 -Tpo-, nom. -Tpo-v, neuter (cf. Lat. -trum). 
 
 i.po-rpo-v plough (aratrum) from &p6-ai plough 
 
 \v-Tpo-v ransom \v- {\i-u loose) 
 
 SldaK-rpo-v ieacher^s hire SiSax- (jSiSdiTica teach) 
 
 a. The kindred feminine suffix -rpa- is less definite : |i/-(r-Tpa Jlesh scraper 
 from |u-w scrape, opx'h-o'-rpd place of dajicing from opx^-Ofiat dance, TcaXai-iT-rpd 
 wrestling-ground from vakai-io wrestle. 
 
 555. Other suflSxes are : 
 
 -0V-, -oiv- : e'm-dv [eiKov-) image from ei/c- (couca am like) ; Khii-av {-ay-) 
 billow from kXvS- (xKi^w splash). 
 
 -avo- : irTe<p-avo-s wreath (ariip-a) crown). 
 -ovd- : rjS-oD^ pleasure (TJS-o/iioi am glad). 
 
 B. Denominatives. 
 
 556. Substantives expressing quajlitt are formed from adjective- 
 Btems by the following suffixes : 
 
 1. -Tr]T-, nom. -t-;;j, feminine (Lat. -tat-, nom. -t(xs-). 
 . irox^-TijJ (-T))T-) thickness from iraxv-s thick 
 
 vci-TTis (-T7)T-) youth vio-s young 
 
 iV({-Ti)s (-TTjT-) eqtiality lao-s equal 
 
 2. -oTiva-, nom. -a-vvrj, feminine. 
 
 SiKaia-a-vyri justice from 8/koio-j just 
 
 awtppo-ffivTi discretion ff^<pptav {(ratppot'-) discreet 
 
 3. -la-, nom. -id or -la (139), feminine. 
 
 ffo{p-ia wisdom from <ro(l}6-s tvise 
 eviainov-id happiness eiiSai/iav (evSainov-) happy 
 
 aK'fiBf-ta {oA.7|9E<r-io) truth aXrjfl^j (oAr/fleo--) true 
 
 eSyo-ia good-will fivovs (tt/voo-) well-disposed 
 
192 DENOMINATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. [657 
 
 557. The PBBSON who has to do with an object is denoted by the 
 following suffixes : 
 
 1. -«u-, nom. -eu-r, masc, always oxytone; denotes a person with 
 reference to his function. 
 
 Iwirei-s hm-scman from ifinro-s horse 
 
 TropBiiii-s ferryman voj>Bijl6-s ferry 
 
 Uffv-s priest . Upi-s sacred 
 
 yptupei-s scribe ypa<pi\ toriiing 
 
 ■yovei-s parent yovii procreation 
 
 b. Several masculines in -euj have corresponding feminines in -cm (for 
 -cu-m) proparoxytone : ^aaiKeis king, Pcurl\eia queen. 
 
 2. -Ttt-, nom. -Tris, masc, paroxytohe. 
 
 -TiS-, -ns fem., paroxytone or properispomenon. 
 
 iro\i-T7)-s (-TO-) citisen from ttSki-s city 
 
 (TTpaTui-rri-s (-rfi-) soldier trrpaTio army 
 
 oIk^-tv-s (-Td-) !u,use^ervant ) ^j^^^ j^^^ 
 
 oiKe-Ti-s (-T10-) liouse-maid ) 
 
 558. DiMDnjTivBS are formed from substantive-stems by the fol- 
 lowing suffixes : 
 
 1. -10-, nom. -w-v, neuter. 
 
 iroiS-fo-v little child from irdts (iraiS-) cliild 
 
 KT)Tr-lo-v little garden k^tto-j garden 
 
 iM6vT-to-v javelin &kuv {okovt-) lance 
 
 Those of three syllables are paroxytone, if the first syllable is long by 
 nature or position : iratSiov. 
 
 2. Other forms connected with -lo- are 
 
 -i8io- : oiK-tSio-v little liouse from oTko-s hoiise 
 
 -apio ; Trai^-apio-v little child irots (ttoiS-) child 
 
 -vopio- : fie\-vSpLO-v little song fieXos (jue^eo*-) song 
 
 3. -to-Ko-, -lo-Kd-, nom. -io'ko-s masc, -ictki; fem., paroxytone. 
 
 v^av-ltTKo-s Lat. adulescentulus from veav young man 
 
 ■TratS-lffKri lass r] wais {natS-) girl 
 
 aTe(pati~{ffKo-s little wreath ffretpavo-s wreath 
 
 559. PATRONYincs (proper names which express descent from a 
 father or ancestor) are formed from proper names of persons by add- 
 ing the suffixes : 
 
 -i8a- or -8a-, nom. -iSrjs or -879, masculine, paroxytone ; 
 -18- or -8- -If or -s, feminine, oxytone. 
 
 a. The forms -So- and -5- are applied to masculine stems in -d- and -10- : -d- 
 is then changed to -a-, and -10- to -10- : 
 
 masc. Boped-Sri-s, fem. Bopet^s {-dS-os) from Bopea^s 
 
 'Apyed-drj-s 'Apyed-y 
 
 ©eCTio-STj-s, ®€ffrid-s (-a5-os) ®4ffTto-s 
 
 VlevoLTid-Srjs Vtlei/olTto-s 
 
 b. All other stems take -iSd- and -(5-, before which -0- of the 2d decl. is 
 dropped. Those in -eu- lose v (44). 
 
DENOMINATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. 193 
 
 masc. KfKpoTt-iSri-s fern. Keicpoirl-s (-IS-os) from K€Kpai/> (-oir-) 
 
 TavTtt\-t57i-s TayTa\-(-s {-IS-as) TdvTa\o-s 
 
 Kpov-lSri-s Kp6vo-s 
 
 TI-n\e-iSri-s (epic nijAriSTjj) UriKev-s 
 
 Nripe-i-s, Nripri-'ts NrjpeiJ-s 
 
 Atjto-Wtj-s AtjtiS (ArjTof-) 
 
 Sometimes -iizSt); is used : nTj^Tj-idSrjs from IlTiAeii-s. 
 
 c. A rarer suflix for patronymics is -imv- or -Xov- : Kpov-tau (genit. Kpovi- 
 avos or Kpovionos) son of Kp6po-s. 
 
 560. Gentiles (substantives which designate a jjerson as belong- 
 ing to some people or country) have the following suffixes : 
 
 1. -«u-, nom. eu-r, oxytone : cf. 557, 1. 
 
 Mi-yap-ei-s a Megarian from lAiyapa. (2d decl. pi.) 
 
 ■EpfTpi-ei!-s an Eretrian 'Epirpia (1st decl.) 
 
 2. -Ta-, nom. -ttj-s, paroxytone: cf. 557, 2. 
 
 Tf7ea-Tr)-j from Tfye'd, Ai^u/^-ttj-s from Alylva, 'Ylireipdi-ni-s from "Hircipo-j, 
 2iK€A.ii4-T7)-s from Si/ceAte. 
 
 3. The corresponding feminine stems end in -18- and -ti8-, nom. -tr, 
 -rir: Meyapls (Meyaptd-) a Megarian woman, Teyeartr (-18-), StxeXtfiT-t? 
 (-iS-). The accent falls on the same syllable as in the corresponding 
 masculiae. 
 
 4. For gentiles in -los see 564 a. 
 
 561. The Place is expressed by the suffixes: 
 
 1. -10- in neuters. The words thus formed end in : 
 
 a. -TTip-io-v, from substantives in -T7]p (mostly obsolete forms of 
 those in -ri/r, 550). 
 
 SiKcuTT'lip-iov court 0/ justice from (SiicairT^p) SMain"l\! judge 
 
 oKpodT'tip-iov auditoHum (o/cpodr^p) aKpoariis hearer 
 
 b. -€-io-v, properispomenon. 
 
 Koye-lo-v speaker^ s platform from x6yo-s speech 
 
 Koupe-7o-v (for Kovpsv-io-v) barber^ shop xovpci-s barber 
 
 liovtTf-7o-v seat of the muses /wvaa muse 
 
 3. -WV-, nom. -av, masculine and oxytone. 
 
 aiiTcK-iv vineyard from ifiireKo-s vine 
 
 oU-iip wine-cellar oho-s wine 
 
 irapBep-^p maiden's room TropfleWs maid 
 
 II. Formation of Adjectiybs. 
 A. Primitives. 
 
 562. Important suffixes forming primitive adjectives are : 
 1. -«-, nom. -v-s, -eia, -v, oxytone ; added only to roots. 
 
 riS-i-s sweet from riS- (fiSop.at am pleased) 
 
 fiap-i-s heavy Pap- (pdp-os wcig/U) 
 
 Tax-'i-s swift Tax- {Tdx-os swiftness^ 
 
194 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. [563 
 
 2. -eo--, nom. -ijy, -ef (cf. 553, 3J ; used especially in compounds (578). 
 
 y^tvS-i)S false from i/ieuS- (il/EvSo/xai Ke) 
 
 (Tatp'Tts clear aatp- 
 
 3. -[lov-, nom. -ficov, -}iov. 
 
 TX'i^-iuiv suffering, daring from T\a- (iT\i]v endured) 
 
 iiri-\ii(r-fiav forgetful \aS- (iirL-\av6dvofim forget) 
 
 563. Here belong also all participles: suffixes -vt-, -ot-, -(icvo- (see S82); 
 and the verbal adjectives in -to-s and -tco-s (see 475). 
 
 S. Denominatives. 
 
 564. The sufflx -10-, nom. -w-s, -id, -w-v or -to-s-, -w-v expresses that 
 which pertains in any way to the noun from which the adjective is 
 formed : 
 
 oipdv-io-s heavenly from ovpav6-s heaven 
 
 Tr\o6a-io-s wealthy (for irXovr-io-s) TrXovTO-s wealth 
 
 otKeio-s domestic (for ome-io-s) o1ko~s house 
 
 ciyopoTo-s formisis (for ayopa-io-s) kyopd foi'um 
 
 0epeio-y of the summer (for Ocpetr-io-y) Oepos (Bfpetr-) summer 
 
 alSoio-s venerable (for aiSo(T-io-s) aiS^s (aiSoir-) shame 
 
 $afft\eio-s kingly (for j3a(ri\eu-io-s) PacnKii-s king 
 
 a. This suffix often serves to form adjectives denoting country or people 
 {gentiles), which may be used also as substantives : MiX^o-io-j (for Mr\7)T-io-s) 
 Milesian from MiArjTo-s, 'A8rivato-s Athenian from 'ASijcai Athens. 
 
 b. Adjectives in -oio-s, -oio-s are generally properispomena (-aios, -olos). 
 
 565. -iKo-, nom. -iKo-s, -iKij, -LKo-v, always oxytone. It expresses that 
 which pertains to the noun, often with a notion oi fitness or ability/. 
 
 yuov(j-iK6~s m.usical from fwvffa muse 
 
 apx-'xi-s capable of governing apx6-s ruler 
 
 After i-stems -ko- is used : <t>v(Ti-K6-s natural from <pva-t-s nature. 
 
 a. Such adjectives may be formed directly from a verb-theme by the sufiBx 
 .TiKo- : oi(rfl))-Ti/c((-j capable of feeling, Trpa.ic-TiK6-s suited for action, 
 
 566. -to-, nom. -eo-s contracted -ovs (224). 
 
 -IVO-, -ivo-s 
 
 These denote the material: xp^o'^o-s, xpOo'oSf golden from xpi;(r((-s gold; 
 Kie-ivo-s of stone from \lBo-s stone, (iA-tm-s wooden from fiiAo-i' wood. 
 
 a. The older form of -eo-j is -cio-s, in which the sufflx is really -lo-, the e 
 belonging to the stem of the noun : thus xp^Tf-'o-r (Hm.) formed like oIki-To-s, 
 664. 
 
 b. -tvo-, nom. -ivo-s oxytone, forms adjectives denoting time : x^^<'-"'^-s be- 
 longing to yesterday, hestemus ; vuKrep-tvi-s nocturmta, ittp-iv6-s vernus. 
 
 567i -€VT-, nom. -CIS, -ioaa, -tv. 
 
 These denote fulness or abundance : xapi-^-s gracefid from x<^P'-^\ i\ii-ci-s 
 woody from uAtj, ixBv-6-eis full offish from IxSu-s. They are mostly poetic. 
 
571] DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 195 
 
 568i The comparative and superlative suffixes -repo- and -raro- (248) be- 
 long here. The suHixes -Xov- and -ictto- (253), on the other hand, are added, 
 with very few exceptions, directly to the root. 
 
 569. Other adjective-suffixes, which cannot be so distinctly classed as 
 forming primitives or denominatives, are : 
 
 1. -lao-, num. -ifm-s, active : &\K-i/w-s brave (&AKi) prowess), fiL(ix-'f">-s war- 
 like, AoiS-i/io-s to be sung of. And akin to this ; 
 
 2. -o-ijio-, nom. -aiiio-s : xP'h-ir'I'-o-s useful, (jii^ijj.os ((/juy-iri/io-s) avoidable or 
 able id avoid, iirird trifio-s ^fit for riding {iinrd.QofJiai ride). 
 
 a. Both these classes were originally denominative. The words in -a-ifw-s 
 came at first from nouns in -<ri-s (551, 1) : XP^"''-/""* useful from xp^C'-s use ; 
 but afterwards -cri/io-, considered as a single suffix, was employed to form 
 other adjectives directly from verbs. 
 
 3. -n]pio-, nom. -TT/pio-s, forms adjectives from verbs : ireiir-T^pio-s per- 
 suasive from ireiB-a. These are properly denominatives from nouns in -rrip 
 (a^aiT'lip-io-s preservin(/ from (rai-r^p) or in -ttjs (of. 561, 1 a), and in most cases 
 the corresponding noun exists. 
 
 4. -V0-, nom. -yo-s, oxytone. 
 
 a. In verbals, passive : Sei-i'6-s fearful {to be feared), <reii-v6-s {(rcP-o/iat) to 
 be revered. 
 
 b. In denominatives.: a\yeii'6-s {a\ye(r-vo-s) painful from &Kyos {a\yeir-) 
 pain, op€iy6-s (opeir-m-s) mountainous from Spos (optir-) mountain. 
 
 5. -po-, nom. -po-s, mostly oxytone and active: Kaiiv-pi-s bright {Kd/iir-m 
 shins), ^6ovs-p6-s e?ivioics {<pQ6vo-s envy), \v7nj-p6-s annoying {Kvirri annoyance), 
 
 6. -\o-, nom. Ao-s, mostly oxytone and active : Sei-K6-s timid, inraT7]-\6-s de- 
 ceitful (airirr] deceit). 
 
 III. Denominative Veebs. 
 
 570. Denominative verbs were originally formed by adding, in the pres- 
 ent, the suffix -file- (Ist sg. indie, -m) to a noun-stem, usually somewhat modi- 
 fied. The I then disappeared (as in teAe-w finish, older TeXf-lai) or combined 
 with the preceding sound (as in val^a sport for iraiS-ia, from jraij child). So 
 arose several types of denominative verbs, each of which was afterwards ex- 
 tended in use beyond its original limits. 
 
 a. In respect to their meaning, these classes are not -all clearly distin- 
 guished from each other. Yet see 571, 1, 4, 7, 8. 
 
 571. The most important endings are the following; they are given 
 as seen in the present. 
 
 1. -o-tii 5qv\6-uj enslave from dovAo-s slave 
 
 XP<J(Ti-a gild XP""'''"' ^"''^ 
 
 (r)iu6-a> pumish (rifita penalty 
 
 Verbs in -ote are causative ; that is, they signify to make or cause what is 
 expressed by the noun. 
 
 2. -tt-o) Tiiid-a honor from rl/Jiii honor 
 
 aiTtd-ofiaL accuse airia fault 
 
 yoih-w lament y6o-s wail 
 
196 DENOMINATIVE VERBS. [572 
 
 8. -t-t) aptBfie-a number from ipiBfid-s number 
 
 cuTvx^-a am fortunate evrvxhs fortunate 
 
 iffTope-a hlow by inquiry "arap (icrTop-) knowing 
 
 4. -iv-a fiaa-iAii-a am king from ;8oiriA.eii-j king 
 
 PovKei-a take counsel PouKii counsel 
 
 i\Ti6e6-ii> speak truth oXtjA^s true 
 
 This class of verbs arose first from nouns in -eu-j, and signified the exer- 
 cising of the function implied in the noun (551, 1). But afterwards many 
 were formed from other nouns. Most are intransitive. 
 
 6. -ila iXirlCo) {fXiriS-iai) hope from iXiris (fK-iriS-) hope 
 
 . f\\rivi(a speak Greek "^KK-i^v Greek 
 
 ^i\nnrl(w favor Philip i>i\iwiro-s 
 
 The theme of these verbs ends in -iS-, and the type arose from nouns with 
 stems in -I- or -iS-, but was extended to other nouns. 
 
 6. -ajo) SmiC" i'^i-KoS-^ia) judge from Sixri justice 
 
 ipydCo^i work epyo-v work 
 
 PidCo/iai use force ^Id. force 
 
 The theme of these verbs ends in -oS-. They are in origin closely allied to 
 those in -am, both classes being derived, for the most part, from noun-stems 
 in -d-. 
 
 7. -aivti) ai\tmivai (artp-av-ue) signify from ariiia (ffn/iaT-) sign 
 
 liiKaivofLai grow black ptiXas (lieKav-) black 
 
 Xa\eTralvaf am angry x^^^^^'^ hard, angry 
 
 8. -vvw fiiivtn (fiSw-iai) sweeten riSi-s svieet 
 
 KapLirpjva) brighten ^MfiirpS-s bright 
 
 ai(rxvi^op.ai am ctshamed rnVx^vi) shame 
 
 The verbs in -aivoi and -uj/o) have themes in -av- and -vv-. They come from 
 a great variety of nouns, but -aiva comes especially from stems in -or-, and 
 -iva from stems in -v-. Most of them are causative. 
 
 9. Less frequent endings are seen in fiapripofiai (fnapTvp-iopMi) call to witness 
 from pidprvs (fiaprvp-) ivitness, KoBalpiD (Kadap-itu) cleanse from Ka0ap6-s clean, 
 t/ielpa {t/iep-ta) desire from Tp.ipo-s longing, dy7EA.\(u {ayye\-ia) announce from 
 &-yyi\o-s messenger, ffTap.iWu {(rTUfivK-Lu) babble from ffTtapLv\o-s talkative. 
 
 572. Sometimes several verbs with different meanings are formed from 
 the same noun : thus from iov\o-s slave, ^ov\6-u3 enslave, hovKe^-a am a slave ; 
 from ir6\fit.o-s war, iroKi/ic-m and 7ro\c/i(fai wage war, TroAfn6-oi make hostile. 
 
 573. Desideratives. — ^Verbs expressing rfestVe are formed most frequently 
 with the ending -aeun : •yeA.oircfai desire to laugh, SpaiTfta have a mind to do ; 
 also in -cm, -law : (^ovda am eager for murder, KXavcndta long to weep. — Some 
 verbs in -aa>, -iaa> express an affection of tlie body : mxpuuu am pallid, o^Sah/iiia 
 Jiave sore eyes. 
 
 574. Intensives (almost entirely poetic) are formed from primitive verbs, 
 by a more or less complete repetition of the stem, generally with some change 
 of vowel: fiaiixd-a reach after, long fm-, from iiaioiiai (iia-) reach, iropipvp-a boil 
 (of the sea) from 0up oi mix, Tronrvu-ai puff from irvia (wv-) breat/ie. 
 
B78J FORM OF COMPOUND WORDS. 197 
 
 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 
 I. FoEM OF Compound Woeds. 
 
 575. Wlien a noun stands as the Jirat part of a compound word, 
 only its stem is used : vav-Trr)y6s ship-builder (yav-s), p^opo-StSao-KoXos 
 chorus-teacher (xopu-s). 
 
 u. Stems of the first decl. change -d- to -o-, appearing thus like stems of 
 the second decl. : \vpo-'iroi6s lyre-maker {\ipd). Stems of both these declen- 
 sions drop their final vowel when a vowel follows : xop-vy^^ chorus-leader 
 {xop6-s). It is retained, however, when the second part of the compound 
 began originally with F: Hm. Sriiito-epy6s artisan, Att. Sriiuovpyis. 
 
 Stems of the third declension commonly assume o before a consonant; 
 aySpiavT-o-woi6s imajj/e-maker, itaTp-o-RTivos parricide, <pu(ri-o-\6yos natural 
 philosoplier, lxSo-o-(p6.yos fish-eatiny. ' 
 
 b. But there are many exceptions to these rules. Thus, stems in -<r- 
 often change to o-stems : ^upo-KTivos {^i<pos, st. |ii(>£o--) slaying witli the s>Jiord, 
 Tftxo-iMxia (st. reix^ir-) battle at t/ie wall. — Stems of the first declension 
 sometimes retain the final -d- (as d or ?;) : xf^V'^^pos lihaiion-bringer. 
 
 c. When an inflected case is used instead of a stem, the word is not prop- 
 erly a compound, but only a close union of two words : veda-OLxos ship-house, 
 H^AoTr^u-j/Tiffos (for Ue\otro<T-i/7nros) Felops^s island, SQpl-\T}'irTos won by the spear. 
 In a few words, however, an inflected case appears in a real compound : vavai- 
 iropos traversed by ships (-iropoi not being used separately in this sense). 
 
 576. When a noun stands as the last part of a compound, its final 
 syllable is often changed : (^tXa-rffio-f (rifirj) honor-loving. 
 
 a. Neuters in -fia (-/zar-) make adjectives in -fiwf : iroKv-vpayfuctf {irpayfut) 
 busy, •ppiii' becomes -<ppav, as eii-(t>pm> merry-hearted. 
 
 b. An abstract word cannot stand unchanged as the last part of a com- 
 pound, but a new abstract in -id is formed from a (real or imaginary) com- 
 pound adjective: thus /8o\^ throwing, but irerpo-fioKia stone-throwing (from 
 •jreTpo-06\o-s stone-throwei') ; so vav-ftaxia {fidxv) ship-fight, ev-irpd^ld (-Trpa^is) 
 good success. Only after a preposition can the abstract word remain un- 
 changed : vpo-^ov\i\ forethougJii. 
 
 577. The last part of a compound is often a word not in use as a 
 separate noun : thus \vpo-7ro16s lyre-maker, vav-iidxos fighter in ships, 
 though -iroios maker, -fiaxos fighteir, are not used separately. 
 
 578. A very frequent ending of compound adjectives is -ijs, -es (stem 
 -eer-). This is found : 
 
 a. Oftenest in adjectives of which the last part is a neuter substantive- 
 stem in -ea- (nom. -os) : ei-yei^s {ytvos) of good birth, Sf/ta-er^j (?tos) of ten 
 years. 
 
 b. Less often when the last part is a noun with some other ending: 
 cv-Tvxhs (■nJxi) fortunate, Sio-ipi\i]s (<pl\o-s) dear to the gods. 
 
 c. When the last part is an adjective not in actual use (57V), but formed 
 for the occasion from a verb : a-(pavi\s invisible {ipay-, ipaiyai), rf/u-Baylis half 
 dead (Bav-, BviiffKw). 
 
 u 
 
198 FORM OF COMPOUND WORDS. [679 
 
 579. Compouiids in which the first part is made directly from a 
 verb-theme,* are used chiefly in poetry. They are formed in two 
 ways: 
 
 a. The theme (sometimes with a vowel added), or the present stem, ap- 
 pears as the first part : Sax-t-BvjjLos (SdK-pw bite) heart-mrivditiff, apx-t-TeKTav 
 master-builder, iua-6-jvvos woman-hater, vflO-apxos obedient to command. 
 
 b. The verb-theme has -iri- added to it ; this becomes -cr- before a vowel : 
 Ku-al-iroms releasing from toil, ipu-tr-dp/iaTes (nora. pi., Hm.^ chariot-drawing, 
 irA^^-iTnroj (irXTjy-, irA^iTffoj) horse-driving, ffTpe\fil-SiKos ((rTp€(()-i») pervertei- of 
 justice. 
 
 580. Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing a pr^osition to a 
 simple verb : f rrt-|3aXX<o throw on. 
 
 a. Originally the prefix was a mere adverb, qualifying the verb. Hence 
 the augment was applied to the latter, hot to the preposition (360). In the 
 early language, as in Homer, the preposition was often separated from the 
 verb by intermediate words, and even placed after the verb. This separation 
 of the preposition from the verb is called tmesis (r^^tris cutting). 
 
 581. Verbs cannot be compounded vrith nouns, nor vdth anything 
 but prepositions. Where verbs of such meaning are required, they 
 are formed indirectly, as denominatives from compound nouns. 
 
 Thus vav-s and juaxoA"" cannot form vao-\w,xop.Oii, but from vav-fiix"' fio^i^- 
 ing in ships is made vavp.ax^(*> fisht in ships ; v6p.o-s and rlBrj^t cannot unite, 
 but from vofio-BeTris lawgiver is formed vojiodiTta make laws. So ireiBo/iai obey, 
 but disobey is not a-veiBofi-ai, but awnBea from oTreifl^s disobedient. 
 
 582. Accent op Compotjnds. — In general, compounds have reces- 
 sive accent. But there are many exceptions to this rule. Thus : 
 
 a. Compounds of the first declension, and some of the third, keep the 
 accent of the second part : atro-ffToX'fj sending away, irAowro-SoT^p wealih-giver, 
 fiov-il)^ one-eyed. 
 
 b. Most compounds in -r]s, -es are oxytone : for examples, see 578. 
 
 c. Determinative compounds (685 a) of the second declension, when the 
 last part has a passive or intransitive sense, follow the rule : KiB6-fio\os throiim 
 at viith stones, fj.nTp6-KToms slain by a mother. But when the last part is active 
 (denoting the agent), and is made from a root by suffix -o- (nom. -os), they 
 accent the penult if it is short ; if long, the ultima : KtBo-p6Kos throwing 
 stones, fiTjTpo-Krdvos matricide, vSpo-(p6pos luafer-carrier ; arpaT-Tiyiis army-leader, 
 genei'ol, Koyo-Troi6s story-maher, yj/Oxo-irofiTris condiwtor of souh. 
 
 But compounds in -oxos (ex-") *"<1 -apxos (apx-'^), with some others, 
 follow the general rule : fivl-oxos (rein-holder) cliarioteer, SdSovxos (contr. 
 from 8aS6-oxos) torch-holder, 'Itrn-apxos convmandei' of horss. 
 
 583. Words formed from compound verbs should be distinguished 
 from actual compounds. They are commonly accented like simple 
 words with the same suffixes : (ruXXoyi<r-jad-r reclconing from o-uXXoyi- 
 fo^ai reckon, airoSo-Teo-s from ajroSiStB/ii give bach. 
 
 * Compare in English ' breakwater,' ' dreadnought,' and the like. 
 
687] MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS. 199 
 
 n. Meaniitg of Compound Woeds. 
 
 584. As regards their meaning, compound nouns (substantive and 
 adjectiye) may be divided into two principal classes. 
 
 585. Determinative Compounds. — In these, the first part defines 
 or determines the second, and the whole compound denotes the same 
 person or thing as that denoted by the second part : thus olKo-<pv\a§ 
 house-gvardiaii is a particular kind of <j)iXa^ or guardian. 
 
 Of these there are two kinds : 
 
 a. The first part may define the second in a sense which might be 
 separately expressed by an oblique case (with or without a preposi- 
 tion). 
 
 Koyo-ypitpos speech-wnter = wnter of speeches 
 Xf'po-volriTos hand-made = made with Imnda 
 df-TjXaTos god-sent = sent by a god 
 
 Here may be put the verbal compounds mentioned in 679 ; as Seuri-Satfiav 
 spini-feai-ing, fearing spirits ; although in these the second part defines the 
 first. 
 
 b. Much less often, the first part defines the second in the sense of 
 an adjective or an adverb. 
 
 oKprf-iroAis upper citi/j citadel = &Kpd Tr6\is 
 ij/€vSo-Kiipv^ false herald ^ ^evh^s Kjjpv^ 
 in6-Sou\os fellow-slave 
 
 586. PossESSiTE Compounds. — In these, also, the first part defines 
 the second, but the whole compound is an adjective describing the 
 possessor, some such idea as ' having ' being supplied in thought. In 
 English such compoimds generally end in -ed.* 
 
 ljaKp6-xfip long-armed = having long arms 
 
 y\avK-Snris bright-eyed = having briglit eyes 
 
 afrfvp6-Tot,o-s with silver bow 
 
 Sfjt^^poTTo-s of like character 
 
 mKp6-yafU)-s bitter-wedded = having an unhappy marriage 
 
 Sexa-eriis (having) lasting ten years 
 a. Here belong the numerous adjectives in -o-ciS-t\s, or contracted -dSris : 
 <r<paipo-iiti\s having the appearance of a ball, ball-like ; TepardSris monster-like, 
 monstrous. 
 
 587. Prepositions may be connected with substantives in each of the 
 above-described relations : 
 
 a. Determinative : 
 
 ■irpo-0ov\'li forelhoiighl, planning beforelmnd 
 i/itpl-puTOs flowed around, sea-girt 
 
 * Yet compare such names as ' Greatheart,' ' Bluebeard.' 
 
200 MEANINO OF COMPOUND WORDS. [688 
 
 b. Possessive: ' 
 
 IvSeos hailing a god in him, inspired 
 aiu^iKioiii having pillars round it 
 
 588. Compound adjectives of a peculiar sort arise from prepositional 
 phrases, and are equivalent to those ijhrases with ' being ' understood. 
 Thus: 
 
 from 4if errrl^ comes iipfarios (being) on the hearth 
 
 ki^ 'iinrci) ^(j>lwwios pertaining to (being on) a horse 
 
 iv x'^P^ iyx^P'o' native = (being) in the country. 
 
 589. Alpha PKrvATivE. — The prefix av- (Lat. m-, Eng. un-), be- 
 fore consonants d-, is called on account of its meaning alpha jirivative. 
 Compounds formed with it are possessive, when the second jjart is a 
 substantive ; when it is an adjective, or a formation with adjective 
 meaning directly from a verb, they are determinative. 
 
 dv-aiS^s shameless (aliiis shame) 
 
 &-Trai5 childless (irals child ) 
 
 a-SvvaTos unable, impossible (Suj/arrfs able, possible) 
 
 a-(t>av7js invisible {(pav-, (l>alva> show) 
 
 a. Determinative compounds formed with this prefix from substantives, are 
 rare and poetic : liiirrip a^u^Tup an unmotlierli/ mother = lU^Tijp ou ju:i)Tj)p oiffa. 
 
 b. Words, which began originally with F, have o-, not ay- : h-iKuv, ckoiii, 
 unwilling, d-EiK^s, aiK^s, unseemly (root ik-, ^oiku). 
 
 590. The inseparable prefix Sva- ill ia the opposite of eu ivell, and ex- 
 presses something bad, unfortunate, or difficult : Ziiff-^ovKos ill-advised (posses- 
 sive) = having evil counsels, Sva-Apeffros (determinative) ill-pleased, Su<r-d\aTos 
 hard to be caugJU. Here, too, determinative compounds formed from sub- 
 stantives are very rare : Hm. Au<r-irapiy wretched Paris. 
 
PART FOURTH. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 DEFINITIONS. 
 
 591. Syntax {a-uvTa^us nrraiiging togetlier) shows how words 
 are combined iu seutences. 
 
 592. The essential parts of a sentence are 
 
 the Subject, of which something is said, and 
 the Predicate, which is said of the subject. 
 The subject of a sentence is a substantive (or substantive pronoun) 
 in the nominative case. The predicate of a sentence is either a, Jinite 
 verb or a finite verb with a predicate-noun. 
 
 593. Object. — A verb may have an object on which its 
 action is exerted. The ohject is a substantive in an oblique 
 case : it is either direct (in the accusative case) or indirect 
 (in the dative ; sometimes also in the genitive, see 735 fE). 
 
 a. Verbs capable of taking a direct object are called transitive; 
 others are intransitive. 
 
 Atteibutive, Appositive, and Pebdicate-Nottn. 
 
 594. An adjective qualifying a substantive is called : 
 
 a. An Attributive, when it is directly joined with the sub- 
 stantive, without any assertion: as o ayaOh^ av-qp the good 
 man. 
 
 b. A Predicate-Adjective, when it forms part of the predi- 
 cate, and is asserted of the substantive : as o avijp dya^os ecm 
 t/ie man is good, ayaOhv voixi^ov(n t6v a.v8pa they think tlie man 
 good. 
 
 Rem. — The term predioate-adjectire includes all adjectives and participles 
 which are not attributive : thus in irpSiTos tovto iirolriacv he was the first to do 
 this, (TuWe'lds (TTpareu/ia iTrjpeiffri having collected an army he set Old, \|/i\a?r 
 TOW Ki^dKfus fi%xovTat iheif figJit uiith their /leads bare, irpuros, cri/AAc^ds, and 
 t^iKah are called predicate-adjectives. 
 
202 DEFINITIONS. [696 
 
 595. A substantive qualifying another substantive may be : 
 
 a. An Appositive, when it is simply added to the sub- 
 stantive to explain it : as MiXticiSt/s 6 o-rpaTijyos Miltiades the 
 general. 
 
 b. A Predicate- Substantive, when it is a part of the predi- 
 cate, and is asserted of its substantive : as MtATtaSijs a-TpaTrjyoi 
 ia-TL 3Iiltiades is general, ttoiovo-i MiATtaSiyv oTparriyov they make 
 Miltiades general. 
 
 Rem. — So also in /cafl£<rTOToi paa-tKeis he becomes estahlisJied as leinff, TJKeij 
 HOI ffanitp Hum art come as my savior, fiatrtKeis and cruTi^p are regarded as 
 predicate-substantives. 
 
 596. Copulative Veebs. — The verb ei/jLi am, when it serves 
 simply to connect a predicate-noun with the subject of the 
 sentence, is called a copula. Some other verbs, as yCyvofx-ai 
 become, and those meaning to appear, to be called, chosen, 
 considered, and the like, have a similar use. 
 
 a. Yet all these verba, even ei//(, may be used without a predicate-noun, 
 as complete predicates. 
 
 PEOiToiTiirs OF Repeeektce. 
 
 597. Pronouns of reference are either relative or demon- 
 strative : 
 
 598. Belatim. — A substantive may be qualified by a sentence : 
 avqp ov wavres <j>i\ov<ri. a, man whom all lone. The sentence is then 
 introduced by a relative pronoun. The substantive, as it commonly 
 goes before the relative, is called its antecedent. 
 
 599. Demonstrative. — A substantive, once used, may be recalled or 
 referred to by a demonstrative pronoun. 
 
 EcjUrVALBNTS OF THE StIBSTANTIVE AND ADJBCTrVB. 
 
 600i other words may take the place of the substantive and adjec- 
 tive in the above constructions. Thus the adjective may be replaced 
 by an adjective pronovn, article, or participle; or by a genitive, an 
 adverb, or a preposition with its case, especially when these are placed 
 directly after the article (666 a, b, c). 
 
 A substantive may be replaced by the adjective ^or any of its 
 equivalents), by a personal or reflexive pronoun, an infinitive or a 
 clause. 
 
 a. Any word or phrase viewed merely as a thing may be used as a sub- 
 stantive : T^ 7j/£9i (reavriv Kol rh (ra<t>p6i/ei itrrl TouTiiv Hie "know thyself" 
 and tlie "be wise" are the same thing (PCharm.164"). 
 
 b. A preposition with a numeral may take the place of a substantive ; dire- 
 6ai/oi/ aiiTciv irepl rptSxofflous there died of them about three hundred (XH.4.6"). 
 
604] SUBJECT AND VERB. 203 
 
 GENERAL RULES OF THE SENTENCE. 
 
 The Subject. 
 
 601, The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case : 
 KS/30S PajTiXeoa Cyrus is king. 
 
 602. Omission of the Subject. — The subject is often omitted: 
 
 a. When it is a pronoun of the iiist and second person: \iya I 
 speak, aKova-are hear ye. 
 
 But the pronoun is not omitted, if there is an emphasis upon it : & ttv iyii 
 Keyu, Gfiets cucova'aTe whatever I may say, do you liear. 
 
 b. Wlien it is implied in the context : 
 
 Kvpos Tds vavs ^ereire^i/'aTo, ottwf b-rrKWas airo^ifidffeie Cyrus sent fw the 
 ships, that he (Cyrus) miglU land troops (XA.l 4'). 
 
 c. When it is a general idea of person : (jiatri tliey (men, people) say. 
 Less often in the singular : itriXTriy^i the trumpet sounded, literally (one) 
 
 sounded tlie trumpet (XA.1.2"). 
 
 So originally such verba as uet it rains, vifpei it snows, oarpoeTrTet it lightens, 
 <reiei (it shakes) t/tere is an earthquake, etc. ; these operations of nature being 
 regarded by the Greeks as actions of a divine person, Zeis, or flcdi (which are 
 sometimes expressed). 
 
 d. When the subject is indeterminate; that is, thought of as ■wholly 
 vague and general. The verb is then said to be impersonal: o^c ^v 
 it was late. 
 
 So Ti/iepa iyivcTo it became day, koXus ex" *' '* ™*''i 5« f^Xt^ there is need 
 of a battle, Sri\o7 (something makes clear) it is clear. 
 
 The same construction is seen in passive verbs, especially in the perfect 
 and pluperfect : irapeaKevacrrai fwi (things have been prepared by me) / have 
 •made preparation. 
 
 Rbmabk. — The term impersonal is also less correctly applied to 
 verbs whose subject is an infinitive or a sentence : e^fariv fiSat/iovfiv 
 it is possible to he happy, hfjKov ^v on iyym nov 6 ^atriXeiis rjv it was 
 plain that the hing was somewhere near (XA.2.3°). 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 603. A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in 
 number and person : ^juet? cTraivou/iev tee approve. 
 
 a. The only nominatives of the first person are lyii, yd, ^/lEir; of the 
 second person, ait, trcpd, tf^tTs ; all other nominatives are of the third person. 
 
 604, But a neuter plural subject has its verb in the singu- 
 lar : TO. irpdy/iaTa ravra Seivd icm these things are dreadful. 
 
 a. A neuter plural subject denoting persons, may have a verb in the 
 plural : rotrd^e fiera ^hdrivaiav %Bvri iffTpdrevov so many nations were warring 
 on the side of the Athenians (T.7.58). 
 
204 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB. [605 
 
 b. Other exceptions to this rule, though rare in Attic, are frequent in the 
 other dialects ; thus Hm. <rwdpTa \e\vvTai the cables are loosed (B 135). 
 
 605. Very seldom a masculine or feminine plural subject has a verb in 
 the singular. In such cases the vei'b stands hrst : hoKovvri StKaly elvai yiyve- 
 Toi iirh rns 5<i|r|s apxal te /ca! 711^01 to a >nan reputed to be just, there comes, 
 in consequence of his repittntlon, both ojfces and nuptials (PRp.SBS"). Su 
 "with the dual ; eim Toira SiTrii ri $la> there are these two diffm-ent ways of 
 living (PGo.fiOO''). 
 
 Agrebmbnt with Two or More SaBJBCTS. 
 
 606. With two or more subjects connected by and, the verb is in 
 the plural. If the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the 
 first person rather than the second or tliu-d, and in the second person 
 ratlier than the tliird : 
 
 Eupu/ie'Sd)!' Kai 'S.o^okK'is iffTpirevam Eurt/medon and Sophocles set out on a 
 campaign (T.4.46), Seii^ol /col ffotpol ^yti re /cal a-h ^^ev both 1 and thou were skil- 
 ful and wise {PTheaet.l5-i^), ou ffv oyBc 01 <xoi <j>l\oi wpuTOL ravnjv S6^av effxcTc 
 'twas not you and not i/our friends who first conceived this opmion (FLg.SSS'). 
 
 a. With two singular subjects, the dual may be used; ^5u(/Jj Koi Kvirri iv tij 
 iroA.ei ^cunfitiaeTov pleasure and pain will bear sway in the city (PRp.607°). 
 
 607. Often, however, the verb agrees with one of the subjects (the 
 nearest, or the most important), and is understood with the rest. 
 Especially so, when the predicate stands before all the subjects, or 
 directly after the first of them : 
 
 j8a(rtA.ei)s Kol oi ffhv abrQ eltririirTet eis rh ffrpar^TreBoy the king and his fol- 
 lowers break into the camp (XA.1.10'), 01 irevriTes Kol 6 S~]iios irKeov exei the 
 poor and the common people have superior power (XRa.l'^), eTTE/iApe fie 'Aptalos 
 Ko! 'A-prdoCos Ariaeiis and Artaonus sent, me (XA.2.4"'), e'-yi Keyai real ZevBrjs ri 
 airi I and Seuthes say the same (XA.7.7'*). 
 
 608. A plural verb is rarely used, when singular subjects are connected • 
 by ^ or, oijTe nor : ei ^fieWoi/ d.no\oyficraa-dai A^ujxdpTjs '?) AiKaioytvTis if Leo- 
 chares or Dicaeogcnes were about to make a defence (Isae.5'). 
 
 a. A singular subject followed by the preposition with, rarely takes a plural 
 verb : Arijioa-devris iMrh tuv auaTpaTiiywv trirhiovTai Mavriviviri Bemostlienes 
 with his associate-generals make a treaty with the Mantineans (T.3.109). 
 
 609. CoLLBCTiTE SUBJECT. — The subject is sometimes a collective 
 noun, expressing more than one in the singular : ia-Ofjs clothing 
 (clothes), irXivBos brich (= bricks), 17 ijrirof t?ie horse (cavalry), 17 ao-jr/s 
 the heavy armed. 
 
 A collective subject denoting persons, may have its verb in the 
 plural : 
 
 'Adrifaioji/ rh Tr\ri9os ofovrai "iwtrapxov ripavvov Aura hroQavetv the mass of 
 the Athenians believe that Hipparchus was tyrant when he died (T.1.20). 
 
 a. Such words as (Kaaros each, t\s any one, iras Tis every one, oiiSeis no one, 
 may have the construction of collectives, on account of the plural which 
 they imply ; tS>v eavrov eKtufTOs Kal iralSau Ka\ oiKeruv &pxovfftv each man rules 
 his own, both children and servants (XEl.6'). 
 
613] VERB OMITTED. 20u 
 
 Agreement with a Pbedicatb-Nodn. 
 
 610. A verb may agree with the predicate-noun, when this stands 
 nearer than tlie subject, or is viewed as more important : 
 
 <" Xopiy'"' iKavhv eiSat/iOvlas ffrifieUv icrri his choms-pai/nientu are a sufficient 
 siffu of prospei-ily (Ant.^7'), rii x'-'pl"" rtp6Tspov 'Ewc'a dSol ikaKovvTo ilie pletce 
 was be/ore called J\ine Wai/s (T.-1.102). So, also, participles of such verbs: 
 vTrs^eBemo ras BuyaTipas irai6/o tyra they conveyed dimy their dauqidera being 
 children (D.19'9«;. 
 
 ■1. Witfi a predicate-adjectiTe in the neuter plural, the verb is regularly in 
 the siugular : otfre (Ttii^aros KdK\os Kai Iffxv^ SetA.^ ^vvoiKovvTa •n-peirovTa <l)utpeTai 
 nor do beauty and strength of body, lohen dwelling with a coward, appear seemly 
 qualities (PMenex,246»). 
 
 Omission of the Verb. 
 
 611. Tlie copula flui am is often omitted, especially the forms 
 eVri and eiVi: 6eaiv Swa/iis fiiy'uTTr] tlie power of tlie gods is ^"eatest 
 (EAlc.219). 
 
 a. The omission is the rule with certain words ; as &pa time, avdyicri ncccs- 
 sity, Seoy and XP^""" needful, ^poiSos gone ; and is frequent also with verbals 
 in -T€'os (988) : Tsi vd/tm ttaatiov tlie law must be obei/ed (PAp.l9'), &pd Keyeui 
 'tis time to tell (SA.1.3'«). 
 
 b. The omission of other forms of ei/tl is comparatively rare : ipiKiiKoos 
 lyaye (sc. ctfil) I for my part am fond of hearing (PEuthyd..S04'=l, eas (so. 
 eVre) It' iv acr^oAei, <l>v\d^aa'Be while you are yet in safely, beware (D.19**''), 
 
 612. Some common verbs of beirig, doing, saying, going, coming, may 
 be omitted in brief and pointed expressions, especially questions and 
 commands : 
 
 o/o tI (so. yevTiTai); to what end? literally, that what may happen ? (PAp.26''), 
 tI &K\o oZtoi (sc. iirolri(rai') r) iTrefiovKcaaav ; w/iat else did these men than plot 
 against us ? (T.3..S9), ovS^x &\\' ?; <rvii0ov\evova'tv r\iuv they do nothing else than 
 advise its (I.S^'), KaWoi koI toCto (sc. Ke-yti) tlumgh this also I say (D.4"), aW' 
 ofma irepl TovTwy but not yet about this will T speak (D.18^*), /i^ juoi fivplovs 
 ffvous (sc Ae'-yere) tell me not of ten thousand mercenaries (D.4"), Si ipl\e 
 *ar5p6, wot dii (sc. eI), koI Tn^flfi' (sc. fj/ceis); dear Phaedrus, whither, I pray are 
 you going, and whence are you come ? (PPhaedr.22'7*). 
 
 a. Here belongs the phrase (cnl ToCro and that : ayptarepovs avrovs airiipni'e, 
 Kol Tavra els aliT6v lie rendered Ihem, wilder, and that (he did) toward himself 
 (PGo.516°); Kol TouTo is especially used with concessive participles (969 e) : 
 hoKets fioi ov npotrfxf'", koI ravra <ro^hs Hv you seem to me not to observe, and 
 that (you do) tlumgh you are viise (PGo.508"). 
 
 613. Any verb may be omitted, where it is readily supplied from a 
 verb in the context : 
 
 <ri re yAp'EAATjx ef, KcA riiieh (sc. iff/i^y "EWiDves) for you arc a Oreck, and 
 so are we (XA.2.1''), rb aaipes ouSeIs oSte t6tc (sc. ErxEv) oire yuv ^x^' f'''t"y 
 the certain fact no one either tlrni was able or now is able to state (T.6.60) Of. 
 906 and 1006. 
 
206 AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE-NOUNS. [614 
 
 Predicate- N^ouns. 
 
 614. A predicate-substantive must agree in case with the 
 substantive to wliicb it refers : a predicate-adjective must 
 agree in case, number, and gender. 
 
 For examples, see 594 b, 596 b. 
 
 a. A predicate-substantive usually agrees in number also ; but sometimes 
 the sense will not permit this : oStoi 76 tjtavepci i(TTi Kii$ri -rav a\ryyi.-\ivofi.iv(i>v 
 these men are a manifeH bane to their associates (PMen-Ol*^). 
 
 615. With two or more substantives, a predicate-adjective, like the 
 verb (606), is generally plural: 'Ayddav Kai SaiKparris Xoivoi Agathon 
 and Socrates are left (PSym.193'). 
 
 With substantives of different genders : 
 
 (1) If they denote persons, the predicate-adjective is mascfiiline 
 (cf . 639), unless the persons are all women ; 
 
 (3) If they denote things, it is neuter (cf. 617); 
 
 (3) If they denote persons and things together, it takes the gender 
 of the persons : 
 
 (1) OTav 5)) 01 iaVT\ii.4voi KaX 01 iiovriiievai firiS^v ?ittov 4\€i6epoi Sxri rZv 
 Trpiaiiivmv when bought mem and bought women are no less free than their 
 buyers (PRp.SeS*"). — (2) vovs kcu tex"!) vpSrepa ttv €ir) mind and art nmst have 
 been pre-existent (Ph^.iSli^). — (3) y] rixn Kol *(\iir7ros ■litrav tSiv epyav icipiot 
 fortune and Philip had control over the actions (Ae.2"'). 
 
 a. A collective also (cf. 609) may have a plural predicate-adjective. 
 
 616. But the predicate-adjective, like the verb (607), may agree 
 with one substantive and be understood with the rest: koI yap (po^os 
 Kal vufios Uavos epioTa Ka>\deiv for fear and law a/i'e capable of restraining 
 toe (XC. 5.1"): 
 
 617. Netjthb PREDicA.TE-ADjBCTrvB. — a predicate-adjective is 
 often neuter when its substantive is masculine or feminine : xaXAv rj 
 aXiiOfia beautiful is truth; properly a beautiful thing (PLg.663''): 
 
 a. This construction is the rule with substantives of different genders de- 
 noting things (615, 2), but it is allowed in other cases : evyepetal re ical Swdp^eis 
 Kal Tlfial StjAo ia-rijf &ya6a Ijirra high birth and power and honor are manifestly 
 good things (PEuthyd.279^), ^ KaWiffrn TroKireld Kal d KdWi(rros &.u^p Xotir^ 
 til/ iiiuv eifi) SiiXBiiv the noblest polity and the noblest man u'ould be left for us to 
 consider (PRp.562*), a'lpaK^pbv iiyefx^v dpacris dangej'ous is a daring guid>e 
 (ESupp.508), Seivhv at iroWol, KUKoipyous Srav ^x""'' TpoffTi^Tds formidable are 
 the many, when they have rogues for leaders (EOr,772). 
 
 Special Uses op PREDicATK-JSTotms. 
 
 618. A predicate-adjective or substantive is often a brief equivalent 
 for one clause of a compound sentence : 
 
 dfliJi/aTov TJjy ii.vi]ia\v KaraXet^l/ovffi (they will leave the memory deathless) 
 ilie memory which they leave will be deathless (1.9*), oix airAovv tovto iparSs 
 (not being a simple thing, do you ask this) this is no simple thing that you ask 
 
621] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES. 207 
 
 (PGo.503»), olav ^x'^""" ''"hf^ i(pv<ras (being what sort of a viper hast thou 
 begotten her) ivhat a viper is this woman whom thou hast begotten (EIonl262), 
 Tr6aoi> Ti &yfi t!> irrpaTeufia; (how large is he leading the army) how large is tlie 
 army which he leads? (XC.2.1"), 4v 6irol§ rij yij Set (jjureieiv oiSa I know in 
 what kind of soil one must plant, i. c, oJf what kind the soil is, in which, etc. 
 (X0.19*), Trap' Efd^vTiw Tail/ ^vfifuix'"' '''V riyt/iovldv iXafiov they received the 
 leadership from their allies (being willing) wIm were willing to confer it (1.7"). 
 Of. 6Y0 a and 1012 a. 
 
 619. The Greek often uses a predicate-adjective where other lan- 
 guages use an adverb, or a preposition with its case : a0(/c>'oCi'rai 
 Tptralot they arrive on the third day (XA.S.S"), vo-repoi a<f>iKovTo they 
 came afterward (PLg.GQS"), ookios S4 o-ol Xe'yo) and under oath I speak 
 to thee (SAnt.305). 
 
 a. So especially adjectives denoting time or order : ScuTepcuos im the second 
 day, vpQptos at dawn, cTKOTa'ios in the dark, Trpirepos, irpwros firnt, tiffrspos Strro- 
 Tos, T€\€VTaios last, etc. So also eictiv willingly, atcwv nnwiltingly. 
 
 b. In some such cases, the adverb, used in Greek, would give a different 
 meaning : Trpajros MriBifivri vpoir4$a\e he first (before any one else) attacked 
 Mcthymna ; irpioTTi MtjAu/zw) irpotrefiaAe he attacked Methymna first (before any 
 other place) ; but with the adverb, r-puTov M7)86fji.iiri TrpotreffaKe first (before 
 doing any thing else) !ie attacked Methymna. 
 
 Attributives. 
 
 620. An adjective agrees with its substantive in case, num- 
 ber, and gender : 8t/caios av-qp a just man. 
 
 a. An attributive belonging to more than one substantive agrees with the 
 nearest : rhy Ka\hv Kayadhv &v8pa Kal yvvaiKa evSalfwya eTval <pT]fii the perfect 
 man and woman I say are happy {FGo.ilO']. Otherwise it must- be repeated 
 with each substantive. 
 
 621. Adjectpve used Aioite. — The substantive to which 
 an attributive belongs is often omitted : 
 
 a. When it is tlie general idea of man or woman : 6 o-o<^dr the wise 
 man, oi QrjPaloi the Thebans. 
 
 So ri Ko\^ t!ie beautiful woman, of voXKol the many, the mass of tlie people, 
 ^Kie\ri(ria(ov(rat women holding assembly. 
 
 b. When it is the general idea of thing, the attributive is then 
 ueuter: dyadd good things. Sometimes quality, essence, space, time, or 
 other words, may be used in English to express the omitted idea: 
 
 rh Keydiiivov (the thing said) the common saying, rh, tjjs iriKeas the affairs 
 of the city, rh TvpavviK6u the condition or character of tyrant, iir\ jroAi) (over 
 much apace or time) to a great extent or for a long time, 4v /i^trif (in the midst) 
 in public, rh avh roSSe (the time from this time) lienceforth, rh vauTiK6v the 
 (naval force) navy, rh 0ap$aptK6y the barbarian world, th koiv6v the common- 
 wealth, ri Aioiiia-ia the festival of Dionysus. 
 
 Rem. — rh Ka\6p is abstract, the (quality) beautiful ; ret Ka\d, concrete, beau- 
 tiful things, whatever is beautiful. 
 
208 A^POSITIVES. [622 
 
 c. When, as in many common expressions, it can be readily under- 
 stood from the attributive itself, as 17 h^^ii the right hand. In this 
 way, the masculine koKitos gulf, olvos wine, and a number of feminines, 
 such as TjfiepS day, yrj land, x™/"" count)-y, 6&6s way, x.eLp hand, rix"'] 
 art, and some others, are often omitted. 
 
 Thus i 'Irfvios llie Ionian gulf, iS &.Kparos unmixed wine, ^ irporepaid the day 
 be/ore, ri iwiovira the coming day, ri aipiov the morrow, fi iimvrov my oion coun- 
 try (T.5.26), |3<i5i^E tV e"9f''ai' walh the straight way (Milou.C2), fiye tV ^tI 
 VLeyapa he was leading on the way toward Megara (KH.4.4^'^), priToptKij rhetoric 
 (oratorical art), xari ttji/ i/jiiit' (sc. yvd/xriv) according to my judgment (PPhil. 
 il*"), 4piiiJ,riv (sc. S/(o)>') Karriyopova'i they bring as plaintiff's a deserted suit, the 
 defendant not appearing (PAp.18") ei/coo-T^ (p-^pis) « twentieth part (T.6.64), 
 ri weTrpafiivn ilioipa) the allotted portion, destiny (I.l^'), tovtov 6\lyas ^TroKre 
 (sc. vKiiyas) he struck this man fern blows (X_A..5.8"), i>s fiaShv iKOiftiiBris (sc. 
 Snmv) how deep a sleep you slept (Luc.Marin.293), Bep/ia (so. vSart) \ov<T6ai to 
 bathe in warm water (ArNub.1044). 
 
 d. When it is expressed in the context : 
 
 ei rwv ^iiplaiv 4\Tri8(av /Aa rts (sc. iKiris) vfiiv iffTi if out of ten tliousand 
 chances you Jiave a single one (XA.2.1'*), ficTex^i Tris KoWiffTTjs (sc. rex^vs) 
 Tav Tex^ay he shares in the fairest of arts (PGo.448°). 
 
 622. Feminine adjectives without a substantive are often used to express 
 direction, manner, or condition. These uses may have grown out of an orig- 
 inal omission of &Z6s way: i^ ivavrias from an opposite directioyi, hi front 
 (XHier.6*), fwxpiv a long way o^(EPhoen.906), U fmKpav at a long remove in 
 time (D.18^'), I^Keiv ttjk Taxl-frriv to come (the quickest way) jnost quickly 
 (Xn.4.5*), \T)aTi\)iiv avayKT) t)]v irpdiriiv we must needs plunder (as the first 
 course) at first (D.4*'), t))v SWojj aSoKeffx'' I am prating to no purpose, i. e., 
 the way that leads astray (D.6''}. 
 
 Appositives. 
 
 623. The appositive agrees in case with its substantive : 
 MtA.rtaS?js 6 a-Tparrjyoi Miltiades the general. 
 
 a. The appositive ordinarily agrees in number also, but this is sometimes 
 impossible: eis neA.Tds, -nSKtv oiKovfiiVfiv to Peltae, an inhabited city (XA.1.2^°), 
 
 b. An appositive belonging to two or more substantives is usually plural 
 or dual ; cf. 606 and a : Bdppos Koi (j>6pos, &!l>pove ^vii$oi\a daring and terror, 
 uninlellig-mt advisers (PTim.69^). 
 
 624. Apposition is of several kinds : 
 
 a. Attributive Apposition : the appositive has the force of an attributive : 
 ^iirBo(pi\aK(s \oxayol rear-guard captains (XA.4.7'). Such an appositive may 
 be placed between the article and its substantive (666 a) : i EvcjipaTtis irora- 
 p.6s the river Euphrates (XA.1.4"), ol "EWttivcs xeATo<rTo( i7ie Greek targeteers 
 (XA.6.52«). 
 
 b. Descriptive Apposition : the appositive describes something just 
 named : 7] riinrepa '7r6\is, 7} koiv^ KaTox^vy^i t&v 'EAA^i/oh' our city, tjie common 
 refuge of the Greeks {A.e.S^'*). 
 
626] APP08ITIVES. 209 
 
 c. DEriNiTiYE Apposition : the appositive definitely expresses something 
 whicli has been vaguely indicated : & Odvaros rvyxO'Vet tov Svoiy irpdyftdToiv 
 St^viTis, Tt)s ^OxTis Koi Tov fft^futTos death h a separation of two things^ tlie soul 
 aitd the bod(/ (PGo.524''). 
 
 d. Partitive Apposition : the appositive is related to its substantive as 
 the part to the whole : Kvtrai at fiev xp^jo^fl' eiffiv, ai Si irovTipai paiTis are, 
 some good, others evil (PGo.499"), ai rtx"™ Tb ajTTJs e/catrTT) ipyov 4pyii(eTtti 
 the arts work each one its own work (PXip.346*'j, outoi &Wos &Wa \eyet these 
 sa;/, one otie thing another another (XA.2.1"). 
 
 625. The following are peculiar uses of appositives : 
 
 a. Words denoting station or condition are often connected with avitp man 
 or Si/flponror person, the former implying respect, the latter contempt : &vSpes 
 SmaifTol judges, liter, juror-men, cf. gentlemen of the jury (D.20'), 6,vBpitmos 
 y6ris a mountebank fellow (Ae.2'"). 
 
 b. In Homer, the demonstrative S S4, used at the beginning of a sentence, 
 is often explained at the close by adding as an appositive the object referred 
 to : oi 8' avrioi ?7;^ f' ixipav Tpaes but they in opposition raised their spears, the 
 Trojans (T 373), rb S" virepirraTo x'^keov lyxos but it flew over him, the brazen 
 spear (X 275). With h p.iv, this is much less often the case. 
 
 c. Homeric Construction op the Whole and Part. — To words denoting 
 person, in the accusative or dative, Homer often adds an appositive denoting 
 the part (head, hand, heart, mind, shield, etc.) which is specially affected by 
 the action ; A7|ioiriT7)> oiTaaev &nov he wounded Deiopites in tlie shoulchr 
 (A 420), k4S S' a^os oi x^o l">pioy oipBoKiimiriv excessive grief o'erspread (him 
 the eyes) 7iis ei/es (T 282), ■ir(ii6i> <re tiros ipiyev cpKos oSdvrai'; ii'hat manner of 
 saying, has escaped the fence of thy teeth? (A 350), &Sos te /uv Jkcto dvix6v and 
 satiety came to his spirit (A 88). 
 
 626. Apposition to a Sentence. — When a word and a sentence 
 are in apposition, the word may stand either in the nominative or the 
 
 ifif8vov, Ixavii irp6(pa<Tis I toas drunk — a siiffident excuse (Philem.iv.62), 
 evSaiftovolris, fuaShy iiSiffrair A.(<7(i)i' mayst thou be Iwppy, a reward for sweetest 
 woj-is(EE1.231). 
 
 a. The word is put in the nominative, as not depending in construction 
 upon any other word (708). When put in the accusative, it is brought into a 
 kind of dependence on ..he verb of the sentence, as if in apposition with a 
 cognate-accusative (715) supplied after the verb: cuSoi^ovoItji {eiSainoviav), 
 /iiirSiv^ etc. 
 
 b. Neuter words often used in apposition with a sentence, are ffjinetov sign, 
 r^Kiiipiov evidence, Ke(pd\atay chief point, rh fiiyuTTov the greatest thing, ri 
 ivavTlov tlie contrary, rh \ey6fievov ilie common sailing, rb t^i irapoiixias tfie 
 expression of tlie proverb, airh toSto this very thing, Tairh tovto this same 
 thing,\Suo7v BaTepov one of two things, intpSTepof or an<p6Tepa both, etc. Such 
 wordsi commonly precede the sentence : koI rh iieyiaTov, i^o^eTro Sti o(^fl'^(re 
 a-Bai i/ie\\f and — more than all — lie was afraid, because he was likely to be 
 seen (JC.3.1'), rb \ey6iievov, icar6mv koprris fiKOfici ; are we come too late for 
 a feast, as the saying is ? (PGo.477''), Svo7v edrepov, 1) oiSafutv tsTi leriitrcHrecu 
 rb ei'SeVoi ^ Te\evT^a'affi one or the other must be true, eitlier nowhere can we 
 attain, to knowledge, or after we are dead (PPhaed.66"). 
 
210 AGREEMENT OF RELATIVES. [627 
 
 Pronouns of Reference. 
 
 627. The relative agrees witli its antecedent in number and 
 gender : 
 
 ^VTOuSa ^iv Kf)i]i'% i<l>' ^ Keyerai Mapffids rhv airvpov Brtpevaai hei'e was a 
 spring^ hy which Marsyas is said to have caught the satyr (XA.1.2'^). 
 
 a. If the relative is subject of a sentence, its verb takes the persmi 
 of the antecedent : 17/ieif 01 tovto Xiyojiev we who say this. 
 
 For omission of the antecedent, incorporation, etc., see 994-996. 
 
 628. A relative referiing to tveo or more antecedents, foUdws the 
 rules for the number and gender of the predicate-adjective (615, 616): 
 
 iTEpl TToXfiiOu Koi fipi\vris, & ex^' /"ey'cTlji' Siva/uv eV T$ Plai TWV avSpdirutv COh- 
 cerning ivar and peace, ztthich have the gveateat power in the life of men (1.8"^)^ 
 a-TraWayevTes TToKifuav Kal KivBuj/af Kal rapaxv^i **5 ^^ *'i'^ vphs a.W-fi\ovs Kafle- 
 aTa)iev delivered from wars and dangers and trouble, in which we have now 
 become involved with one another (1.8^°). 
 
 629. A relative, referring to a collective, may be in the plural : 
 iropetTToi oKpeXia. at rSi'Se Kp^iffffovs e'ari an auxiliary force will be m hand, 
 
 who are more effective than these (T.6.80), rb 'ApxaSiKhv Sir\lTiK6i', u>y ^px^ 
 KKfivap the Arcadian heavy-armed force, whom Cleanor led (XA.4.8")i 
 
 a. A singular antecedent may suggest a class of persons, and may thus 
 have a relative in the plural: Stiffavpowoibs aviip, o&s SJ) Kal itratus^ rh ttAtJAos a 
 money-making man, just those whom the multitude praise (P&p.^&i^). 
 
 b. Conversely, when the antecedent is plural, the relative is sometimes 
 singular, referring to an individual of the number : iunra^sTat iravras, ^ hn 
 TrepiTuyx^i^ he embraces all men, whatsoever one he falls in with (PRp.666''). 
 
 630. So, too, a relative may be neuter when the antecedent is masculine 
 or feminine ; TvpavvlSa Orjpav, t irX-ijBei xP'ht^affiv ff aXitTKerat to pursue, despotic 
 power, (a thing) lohich is captured through numbers and wealth (SOt.54:2). 
 
 631. A relative pronoun, used as a subject, instead of agreeing with 
 its antecedent, may agree with its predicate-noun : ^ toC ^eiS/xciTos iKelvou 
 TTTJT^, hv ifiepof Zeits aySfiace the fountain of that stream which Zeus named 
 Desire (PPhaedr.25.'5«). 
 
 a. The relative may even agree with a predicate-noun belonging to the 
 antecedent : ouScttot* ii.v eftj ^ fiTjTopiKij &fliKoy irpay^, '6 y' ael irepl SiKawaivTfs 
 robs \6yov5 irotetTot r]i£toric can never be an unjust thinxj, since it (rhetoric) «fi 
 always making its discourses about justice (PGo.JeO"). , 
 
 632. The rules in 637-630 apply also to the demonstrative pironoun 
 of reference (599). 
 
 a. A demonstrative pronoun, which would properly be neuter, as [ signify- 
 ing the idea of t?dng, may be masculine or feminine to agree with a ptedioate- 
 noun : outtj ^ctIv &vota (for tovt6 iffrtv ivota) this is folly, 55Se &pxh t^s d/io\o- 
 yids, ip4ff6ai Tifias ai/Tovs this is u beginning of agreement, to question otu 
 cjwiAec (PRp.462''). 
 
686] NUMBER AND GENDER. 211 
 
 OTHER PECULIAEITIES IN THE USE OF 
 NUMBER AND GENDER. 
 
 633. CoNSTEUCTio AD Senstjm (Kara avveaiv).—h. word in agree- 
 ment often conforms to the real gender or number of the word with 
 wliich it agrees, instead of the grammatical. 
 
 Thus, a predicate-participle: th a-Tpdrevfrn iiropl(eTo a-Troy icSirroyTes rotis 
 0OVS the army provided food for ilsclf, by slaughtering the oxen (XA.2.1«), Taur' 
 e\cyev fi /uapa outtj KSKpoKii, €|€A.rjAu9<i)j thus spake this abominable person, 
 having come out (D.'.'l'") ; or a pronoun of reference: Baa/6vTav kirra. yevvaiav 
 TfKvav o8j ttot' 'Apyelair Seal 'ASpooTos ^7076 seven noble children having 
 fallen, whom once Adrasfus, chief of Argives, led (ESupp.l2). So, in poetry, 
 an attiibutiye : S irtpta-a-ii Ti/ir/flfls t4kvov U greatly honored child (ETro.740). 
 
 a. Here belong also the constructions with collectives ; see 609, 615 a, 629. 
 
 b. An adjective may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun of refer- 
 ence, agreeing with a substantive implied in it : 'ABiivaios &v, irrf^eias t^s 
 Heylffrns being (an Athenian) a man of Athens, a city the greatest (PAp.29*), 
 oIkIo. ii vficTipd ot xp^irfle (your house) the lumse of yov, lolw use, etc. (XC.6.2'5). 
 
 c. A word denoting place may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun 
 of reference, belonging to the inhabitants of that place : cupfKovro els Koritapa, 
 Sivairfay aitoiKovs they came to Votyora, colonists of the Sinopeans (SA.5.5'), 
 0E/«(rTOKAj)S ipiiyfi is KepKvpav, iiv ahruv eiepyfrris Tliemistocles flees to Cor- 
 cyra, being a beiufactor of them, i. e., of the Corcyreans (T.1.136). 
 
 634. DtTAL AND Plttral. — In speaking of two, the dual and plural 
 are freely united or interchanged with eacli other : 
 
 irpotTeTp^XO" 5"0 veaviaKto two young men ran up (XA.4.3"'), ^eKaffirriv 
 &li<pa j8Aei(<t«Tej eis aKKijXovs they both burst into laug/Uer on looking at one 
 another (PEuthyd.273''). 
 
 635. PiiURAi FOB Singtilak. — The Greek often uses the plural of 
 neuter pronouns where in English the singular is preferred : raCj-a 
 (these things) this. 
 
 a. In impersonal constructions (602 d) a predicate-adjective may stand in 
 the neuter plural : TroKeixi\r4a %v (things were to be done in war) it was neces- 
 sary to make war, irKoiiJcilyrepa iyivero (things became more favorable to navi- 
 gation) navigation became more advanced (T.1.8), aSwora ^v robs AoKpobs 
 ajjiveaiai it was impossible to keep off the Loenans (T.4.1). 
 
 636. The plural of abstract substantives expresses repeated instances of 
 the quality : iixol ai col evrvxlai ovk opetTKOvffi to me thy (often repeated) good 
 fortune is not pleasing (Hd.3.40). 
 
 a Hm. often uses the plural of abstract words to express the various ways 
 in which a quality is manifested : iinroffii/ds iStSa^av tliey taught him (the arts 
 of) horsemanship CV 3071. 
 
 b. Even in concrete words, the poets sometimes use the plural for the 
 singular, to give the expression a more general turn (gena'aliidng plural) : 
 XoA-d TOKevam emiTas Svftoviif'vots forgive a parent justly indignant, as all such 
 have a claim to indulgence (Enec.408). 
 
212 COMPARATIVE DEGREE. [esl 
 
 637. A speaker sometimes uses the first person plural of himself 
 (we for J) as a more modest form of expression : T)/ieif Seivoi to. Toiavra 
 Jjjicv I teas (we were) shilled in such practices (XM.1.2"). 
 
 a. This occurs frequently in poetry, sometimes with abrupt change of 
 number : ffXiox fiapripdixeaBa, Spaa' & Spav ov $oi\ofiai I call the sun to witness, 
 doing what I would fain not do (EHf.858). 
 
 b. In this construction an adjective when plural is masculine, even though 
 a woman is spealting (cf. 639) : ireaoiiieff, ei XP'!, Tarpl Tiiia>poifi.€voi /(Electrii) 
 will fall, if need be, in avenging mi/ father (SE1.399). 
 
 638. Singular for Plural. — In dramatic poetry, a chorus is commonly 
 treated as an individual, the Coryphaeus being regarded as speaking and act- 
 ing for the whole body ; so that the singular is often used in reference to it. 
 
 639. Masculine fob Person d? general. — The masculine is used 
 in speaking of persons, if sex is not thought of, or if both sexes are 
 meant : 
 
 Tw/' evTvxoiipTav TrdvTes ettrl ffvyyeveis all (persons) are kinsfolk of the pi'os- 
 parous (MMon.510), AivSrepos hv ^ /3e\Tiwv, eiff 6 hvhp, cW rj yvvii, oZtos koI 
 Thetof ipepiTai rod ayaBov whichever is the better, whether the man or the woman, 
 he receives also inoi-e of the good (XO.^"). 
 
 ADJECTIVES AND ADVEEBS. 
 
 640. For agreement of the attributive adjective see fi20; of the predicate- 
 adjective see 614. For the use of the adjective as substantive, see 621 : as 
 adverb, see 719 b. For neuter adjective used as cognate-accusative, see 716 b. 
 
 641. Adverbs are used to qualify verbs, adjectives, or otber 
 adverbs : tS ttoieis thou dost well, ttoXv koXXuttos much the hand- 
 somest, fji-aX aa-fjievw's right gladly. 
 
 a. In the attributive position (666 a) an adverb may serve as an adjec- 
 tive ; see 600. 
 
 Degrees of Comparison. 
 
 642. The positive is sometimes used with an idea of disproportion, which 
 in English might be expressed by too. This is most frequent before an in- 
 finitive with ws or fitrre : rh vSap }f/vxphv Stffre KoiffcurBal iirriv the water is 
 (too) cold for bathing (XM.S.IS^). 
 
 643. Comparative. — The comparative degree may be fol- 
 lowed by 7) than, or by the genitive : fjieC^tov ^ iyu> or /icl^oiv 
 i/jMv taller than I. 
 
 a. When ^ is used, the objects compared are usually in the same case : 
 Xp^^oTo Trepl TtKiiovos iroteiffBcu ^ (pl\ovs to consider money of more value than 
 friends (PCr.44'=) ; and this is always so when they are connected with the 
 
648 1 COMPARATIVE DEOREE. 213 
 
 same verb. The word after ^ maj, however, be the subject of a new verb, 
 expressed or understood : avipbs SuvaTiDripov % 4yii vi6s son of a man rrwre 
 powerful than I am (XC.5.2'") ; yet even this is sometimes attracted into 
 the case of the preceding word : (k SeivoTepav i) roi&vSf iffiiSiiiTaii they have 
 been rescited from greater perils than these (T.7.77). 
 
 b. The genitive is freely used in cases where ij, if used, would be followed 
 by a nominative or accusative: vetirepos crov €i'/ii (= tj ui) I am younger t/ian 
 you ; much less freely, where ij would be followed by some other case, or by 
 a preposition: efecm S" Tifuv naWov erfpav (=^ iripois) it is permitted to us 
 rather than to otiiers (T. 1.85), ^Ke-jreLv eis t^v ifnreipidif fjiaWoy ttjs dper^s (^ ^ 
 €is T^jy apsT-fiv) to took at skill m,ore than at courage (Arist.Pol.5.9). 
 
 c. For shortness' sake, the possessor, instead of the object possessed, is 
 sometimes put in the genitive after a comparative : «' S' ^jueis iTrmiibv leniirai- 
 HeBa /li? x^f'"*' roitTojv if we should raise a cavalry-force not worse than theirs 
 (XC.4 3'), irapolKTiirts iiriKiySivoripd kripiav a proximity more dangerous than 
 that of ot/ier men (T.4.92). 
 
 644, The genitive of a reflexive pronoun is used after comparatives with 
 a peculiar force when something is compared with itself under other eircum^ 
 stances. The subject is generally strengthened by aurcis. Thus Suvarirepoi 
 avTol eavTwv iylyuovTO tliey grew more powerful tlian before (T.3.11), auris 
 eaiuToC ^eei iroA.A^ uTroSeeWepos it (the Nile in winter) runs with a much less ■ 
 stream than at other times (Hd.2.26). 
 
 a. The same use occurs after superlatives : V aurbs abrov rvyx^vei $e\- 
 TUTTos Siv where he is (best of himself) at his best (EFr.lSS), ttj ivpuTdrri i(rTl 
 auTT) iauTrjs wJiere it (the Caspian) is at its widest (Hd.1.203). 
 
 645i When the comparison is between two adjectives (or adverbs) 
 j; is always used, and ioth are put in the comparative : trrparriyol 
 irXfioves rj ^eXrioves generals more numerous than good (ArAch. 1078), 
 a-vvTOjiaiTepov fj (ra<j>4aTepov SioKexSrjvai to discourse more hrieflg than 
 clearly (l.Q'*). 
 
 646. The comparative has a peculiar use before ^ Kara (quam pro) 
 with the accusative : vonodirqs jSeXTrmv fj Kar nvOpanrov a lawgiver better 
 (than according to man) than consists with man's nature (XM.4.4"), 
 ufi'fiB ^ Kara SaiKpva weirovdores having suffered misfortunes too great 
 for tears (T.7.75). 
 
 a. For ri MOTf etc., with infinitive after a comparative, see 954. 
 
 647. ^ is sometimes omitted when the neuter irKeov {irKtiv) more or %\ar- 
 Tov (fieToy) less is followed by a numeral : a-KOKTiivovtri tuv iLvBpaiv ov /jlcTov 
 TrevTOKoa-lovs they kill not less than SOO of the men (XA.6.4'''). In this con- 
 struction irAeov, ^\aTTov, etc., remain unchanged for case and number : "AKvs 
 ov fieToi/ Suolp dToSioiv tlie Halys a river of not less than two stadia (XA.5.6') ; 
 so sometimes even when ^ is retained : iv irKiov {= Tr\elo<nv) ^ StdKotrlois 
 inai in more than ^00 years (D.24'*'). 
 
 648. Instead of the genitive or the particle t% a preposition is some- 
 times used with the comparative : 
 
 Karetpydffaro aipeTt&repof elvai rhp KoKhv Odvarov avrX rov altrxpou ^iov 
 fee made a noble death more desirable tlian (lit. instead of) a shameful lif« 
 15 
 
314 SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. [649 
 
 (XRi,9'), ft)^ traiSas Trepl irKetoyos irotov trph Tov SiKcdoj do not consider children 
 of more account than (lit. before) jtistice (PCr.54''), ^^'M'^" /J-ei^a" irapct t)]v 
 KoBstrrriKviav 3>pdu a cold more seiiei'C than (lit. ia comparison witli) the actual 
 time of year (T.4.6). 
 
 649. The comparative may be used alone, tlie second part of the 
 comparison being implied : 
 
 01 ffoipiiTepot the loise)- (those wiser than the rest), A/xeiviv iari Wb Belov koI 
 <ppoyl^ov HpxfffBai it is better to be govei-ned by a divine and intelligent being 
 (Pllp.SQO**). Note also vetorepov something new (more recent than we know 
 already) ; often in a bad sense, a calamity. 
 
 a. The comparative alone often denotes simply an excess (more than 
 is usual or proper), and so may be rendered by too or t>ery : irkdm 
 Xf'XeKTai too much has been <oM(EAlc.706). So daa-o-ov too soon, fiSXKov 
 too mitch, etc. 
 
 b. But often it gives the force of rather, somewhat: ye\oi6T£pov rather 
 funny (PAp.30°), imoiJiapySTepos a little out of his head (Hd.6.75). 
 
 650. SuPERLATiVB. — The superlative represents a quality as be- 
 longing to some individual of a class in a higher degree than to the 
 rest. The class may be designated by a genitive partitive (739 e) : 
 6 iro(pa>Taros tSiv 'EXX/jvcbk the iciisest of the Ch'eehs. 
 
 a. But the highest degree among two is expressed by the com- 
 parative: so TrpoTfpos and nparos, Sorepor and vcrTaTos, eRarepos and 
 (Kaa-Tos, are carefully distinguished: worepos Xc'|fi nporepos which (of 
 the two) is to speak first (ArNub.940). 
 
 b. The superlative may express simply a very high degree of the quality : 
 av))p (roipti>TaTos a very wise man. In this sense it never has the article. 
 
 651. Strengthened Forms. — The superlative is strengthened by a 
 prefixed ms or on, less often ji (in poetry also oaov and oirwf) : ilvSpes 
 oTi ttXeio-t-oi (quam plurimi) as many men as possible. 
 
 So iis ^Xox'fl'TiBi' ScTirSoi to have tlie very smallest wants, Sti p-iKuTTa as much 
 as possible, ^ p^a'ra in the easiest manner. Sometimes wj and on are used 
 tog<3ther : i/jL^ ms Sti fiiKruTTOV ysviaSai that I should become as good as may 
 be (PSym.218*). The adjective pronoun oXos has a similar use: 6pSi rd irpaj- 
 liara oiix oTa piKnara ivra I see that our affairs are not in the very best 
 condition (Lysis'^'). 
 
 a. Sometimes fuller forms of expression are used : thus with cus and other 
 relatives (but not with Sti) the verb of possibility may be expressed: SL-ryyli- 
 aop.(xi as hv Sivmpai Sth fipaxvTdraiv I will state in the briefest terms I am able 
 (1.21^), rds K6pa.s citw ^ avvffThv peTpioJTiiTQi Tpe<pov(n they feed their girls 
 with an amount of bread as moderate as possible (XRl.l^), 9iye trrpanav Scriv 
 ThelfTTrii' iSivwTo he brought as large an army as he could (T.'7.21). 
 
 652. a. iv Toh is sometimes prefixed to the superlative to strengthen it : 
 iv TOiS irpuTot S^ 'ABrivaiot rhv a-lSnpov KareOevTO the j\ theniaTis wa-e the first to 
 cease carrying weapons (T.1.6). It is used indifferently before all genders and 
 numbers : ^v rots irp&ros, iy rots trKettTrai, 
 
654] ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 215 
 
 b The superlative may receive emphasis from the numeral ets : irXcrirTo 
 fh aviip Svvdficyos ai(pe\e7v being able to render (most aid as one man) aid 
 betjond ani/ other one man (T.8.68). 
 
 c. Sometimes ixaKtffTo, or irAeitrToi/, /xeyurrop is added to the superlative : 
 01 /uiAi(7Ta ca'oriT6TaToi tlie very stupidest (PTiin.92''). So )m)Oi.ov is sometimes 
 found with the comparative: altrxvmripoTfpoi /iaWov toO Seovros bashfvl 
 more than tliey might to be (PGo.487"). 
 
 For comparison by means of imKXov and fjuiKurra see 266. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 'O 171 Poetry. 
 
 653. The word i, fi, ri was at first a demonstrative pronoun, which after- 
 wards, by gradual weakening of its force, became an article. In Homer, 
 it is usually a demonstrative : elos & t^ TroAefii^e while lie JvuglU with him 
 (O 639). Still in many places it approaches nearly to its later use as an article : 
 oi &Wot the others^ ri ifftrSfiepa tlie things about to 6e, to -Kpiv formerly. 
 
 a. The lyric poets conform nearly to the epic usage; so too the Attic 
 drama in its lyric parts. Even in the tragic dialogue, the article is more 
 sparingly used than in Attic prose. 
 
 For 6, ^, T(i as a relative pronoun, in Homer, Herodotus, and Attic tragedy, 
 see 275 D. 
 
 'O as a Demonstrative. 
 
 654, Even in prose, the word sometimes retains its primitive power 
 as a demonstrative. Thus before fiiv and bi ; and usually in contrasted, 
 expression, 6 fiiv . . . o 84 this . . . that, the one . . . the other : 
 
 o! lihv iiropsiovTo, ot S" eiirovTO t/iese (the Greeks) marclied on, and those (the 
 Persians )/o&Hjerf (XA.3,4'»). 
 
 a. Often no particular person is meant : one . . . another, some . . . some ; 
 in this use tIs may be added : %\eyov toS Kipov, t /ucV tis rijv a'o(plav, i Si riiv 
 Koprepldv, & 5e t^v TrporfTTjTO, & Se ris Kal rb KdKKos they were speakinfj, on£ of 
 Citrus's wisdom, another of his fortitude, another of his mildness, yet anotlier 
 of his beauty {XG.3.1*'). 
 
 b. As adverbs, rh fici/ . . . rh Be, ri niv . . . rtl 34 (also Totfro fiev . . . tovto 
 S4), mean on tlie one Iwrnd . . . on tlie other, partly . . . partly. 
 
 c. After a preposition, the order is usually changed : 4// fiey rois, eis 5h rd. 
 
 d. In late writers (even in Demosthenes), the relative is sometimes so 
 used, but only in oblique cases ; TrrfXcis, as filv hvaipjov, els as Se robs fpvydSas 
 Kordyav destroying some cities, into others bringing back their exiles (D.IS"). 
 
 e. Very often 6 84 (without preceding 8 fi4v) means but fie; in the 
 nominative this almost always refers to a different subject from that 
 of the preceding sentence : 'Ivdpas 'h6qvaiovs cnrjydyeTo ■ oi 6' ^X6ov 
 Fnaros called in the Athenians j and they came (T. 1.104). 
 
216 ARTICLE. [655 
 
 655i In a few other phrases 8 is demonstrative : 
 
 a. In Ko! Tiic, Ka! t^x, before an infinitive : /cal -rbv airoKpivairBat \67fTai 
 and it is said that he aiiswa-ed (XC.4.2"). In the nom , we have /cal Ss, /ca! i), 
 to! o?(27B b): xal oS iiptiravand they asked (XGA.2"). So ^ 8' Sj, ^ S' i) (486). 
 
 b. In r'bv /cal tcJ//, rb /col T(J, tA /cal T(£, to /) to ; eSei yap t6 /cal t6 iroi?J(rai, 
 /col rb /iJi iroi^irot for this and that we ouglit to have done, and this not to luxve 
 done (D.O"'). The nom. hs /cal os occurs in lid. 
 
 c. Rarely before a relative ; opiyerai toO 8 ^ffTii' taov lie aims at thai which 
 is equal (PPhaed.'75''). 
 
 d. In irph tov (also written TrpoTov) be/ore this (time). Also in a few other 
 cases of very rare occurrence. For ii> toTs with the superlative, see 652 &. 
 
 'O as an Article. 
 
 656. Used as an article, 6 is either restrictive or generic. 
 
 A. Resteictivb Article. — The restrictive article marks a 
 particular object (or objects) as distinguished from others of 
 the same class : thus o a.v$poyiro? the man (distinguished from 
 other men). 
 
 So 01 iyaffoi &vSp£s, the (particular) good men, distinguished from other 
 good men, ^ Smaioffiyji Kvpov the justice of Cyrus, distinguished from justice 
 in other men. 
 
 The following are special uses of the restrictive article. 
 
 657. The article may distinguish an object : 
 
 a. As well known : ot TpSies ra. SeKa errj 6.vtuxov the Trojans held out during 
 the ten years, the well known duration of the siege (T.1.11). 
 
 b. As the usual or proper thing under the circumstances : yeVoitiJ luit ras 
 xip'Tas hroSovvai rarpl be it mine to return the (proper) thanks to a father 
 (Chaer.Fr.34). 
 
 0. As a specimen of its class, selected at pleasure. In this use, the article 
 may often be rendered by a or each .• ^Soi/cc rpia TjfiiSdpEiKct tov firjuhs r^ (rrpa- 
 TuiTr) he gave three half-darics a month to each soldier, lit. the month to the 
 soldier (XA.l.S"). This use approaches very closely to the generic article. 
 
 658. The article regularly takes the place of an unemphatic posses- 
 sive pronoun : 
 
 Kvpos /coTOTrrjS'^cras imh rov ipimros rhv Biipaxa ivfSv Oyi'us leaped down from 
 his chariot, and put on his breastplate (XA.l.S"). 
 
 659. B. Generic Article. — The generic article marks a 
 whole class of objects as distinguished from other classes : 
 thus o avOpuyiroi man as such, distinguished from other beings, 
 ot yipovrei the old. It must often be left untranslated in Eng- 
 lish. 
 
 So ol Ayoflol iti/Spes good men as a class, distinguished from bad men, ^ 
 SiKatoffivTj justice, rj ^riTopiK-fi rhetoric. 
 
664] ARTICLE OMITTED. 217 
 
 a. So when a single object forms a class by itself : t] 7^ the earth, 6 ;;\ios 
 tlie sun, i popias the north wind, etc. These, however, often omit the article, 
 like proper names. 
 
 660. Article OMtTTED.— The article is often omitted where it 
 could have been used with propriety. So oftenest the generic article, 
 especially with abstract nouus: 0dj3or ij.v!ifi.i)v iKieXiiaaei fear drives out 
 recollection (T.2.87). 
 
 a. Often, too, in copulative expressions, which gain thus in emphasi.< : as 
 yvvmKiS (tal TroiSej women and children, oSre irarphs oihe /iiirpos ^eiSerai he 
 spares ncithir father nor mother (PPhil.l5»), more forcible than his father, his 
 mother. 
 
 b. For ilie divinity in general eUs is used, but l> ee6s the (particular) ffod. 
 
 c. Bo(riA.eiis, used almost as a proper name for the king of Persia, may omit 
 the article, so Tpurdyeis the prylanes (officers in Athens). 
 
 661. The article is omitted in many common designations of place and 
 time, made by such words as Sirru, 7rd\is, city, aKpivoKis citadel, ayopd market- 
 place, Tfixos wal>, (rTpardweSov camp, ayp6s country, yrj land, daKatraa nea, — 
 Se^id, apurrepi, right, left hand, Se^i6v, einivufiov {Kipas), right, left wing, fieaov 
 center — r)nipa. day, vv^ night, ems morn, vp9pos day-brcaA; Se/Xij afternoon, ktrirepa 
 evening, tap spring, and the like. 
 
 Thus els (uTTu to town, Karb, yriv bi/ land, 4irl S6pv to the (spear-side) right, 
 Trap' aa-wiSa to the (shield-side) left, ei^vv/iov fix"" they held Hie left tiling, o/ia 
 rifiipf at day-break, vvkt6s hy night, irp' '4ai just before day-light. — These should 
 perhaps be regarded as relics of earlier usage, which remained unafCected by 
 the developed use of the article. 
 
 662. When the first of two or more substantives connected by and has 
 the article, it may be understood with the others : d irSKeiios raiy neAoTrowrjo-W 
 Ko! 'Mtivaiav the war of the Peloponnesians ami Athenians (T.1.1), robs S' 
 iypois Tovs eavTov Kol oIkIos his own lands and Jiouses (T.2.13). 
 
 663. Abticle with Propeb Names. — Names of persona and 
 places, being individual in their nature, are usually without the arti- 
 cle: Ev^oia ania^TTf Evhoea revolted (T. 1.114). Yet they often take it, 
 to mark them as before mentioned or well known : 
 
 robs ffTpaTtdnds avrav Trapci K\4apxov aireKSdiras e2a KVpos rhv K\eapxov 
 ^X^'" tlieir soldiers, who had gone to Clearchus, Cyrus allowed (the said) Cle- 
 archus to retain (XA.1.4''); h Uxdrav (the celebrated) Flato, in plural with 
 generic article 01 TlKdruves tlie Plato's, philosophers like Plato. 
 
 a. Plural proper names of nations ov families generally have the article : ol 
 KoplvSioi the Corinthians ; but sometimes omit it : xntoaTdvTts M^Sous having 
 withstood tlie Medes (T.1.144). 
 
 664. A NUMKRAL may have the article : 
 
 a. When it is distinftuished as a part from the wlwle number (expressed 
 or understood) to which it belongs : i.irri(rav rHv Actx""', Sii>5e(co ivrav, oi rpc7s 
 of the companies, being twelve in number, there were absent (the part) three 
 (XH.T.S'"), Til SiJo fi4pri two thirds, i. e. two parts out of three (T.2.4'7). 
 
218 ARTICLE WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. [66B 
 
 b. When it is merely a number as such, without reference to any thing num- 
 bered : ju^ 4pe7s Srt ra St^Sexd icrri Sis e| ; will you say that (the) twelve is twice 
 six? {PKp.337''). 
 
 c. When it is an approximate round number: innvav rifiepas a/upl ras 
 TpiaKovTa they staid about thirty days (XA.4.8*'). 
 
 665. Note the phrases oi trKeiffroi the most numeroits part, the largest num- 
 ber, oi Tr\eloves (the more numerous part) tJie majority, and with much the 
 same meaning oi troWoi (the numerous part ) tlie larger number, often used for 
 the democratic mass ; of. oi 0^.(701 the oligarchs. Also rb 7roA.1l tlie great part. 
 
 666. Article with Atteibutives. — When the article and 
 an attributive belong together to a substantive, the article is 
 always placed before the attributive. 
 
 a. This rule applies to adjectives, participles, adverbs, and (usually) 
 prepositions with their oases, when used as attributives. Such words, 
 when following the article, are said to have the Attribvtive Position. 
 
 b. The attributive genitive may or may not follow this rule; thus ^ riv 
 ■jraTphs otKtd and tj oiKid tj tov TrarpSs the J'ather^s house, yet often t] oIkIo. tov 
 iraTp6s. 
 
 u. In general, any word or group of words standing between the article and 
 its substantive, has the force of an attributive (600). Except, however, the 
 particles niv, 5e, y4, re, jdp, S<5, oSv, and in Herodotus, tIs : twi/ tis Uepffeav 
 one of the Persians (Hd.1.85). 
 
 667. Usually, as in English, the article and attribute precede 
 the substantive : 6 ayaOos av-qp the good man. 
 
 So Ti vporepa oXiyapxia the earlier oligarchy (followed by another oligarchy), 
 71 irpirepov oKijapxid the earlier oligarchy (followed by a different form of 
 government), v; Kafl' ijiiepav Tp<xf>^ the daily food. 
 
 a. When an attributive participle has other words depending on it, either 
 these words or the participle may follow the substantive : ai i-rrh roirov 
 ^Kaa^Tlliiai fiprififvai tlie slanders uttered by this man (D.IS'^*), iS KaTiiKy\(pi>s 
 xli/Sums riiv it6\ui the dangm- which has overtaken the state (D.IS*'"). 
 
 b. If the attributive participle has a predicate-word connected with it, this 
 is commonly put before it : ri KoriKaiov om/iaCi/iemn upos the mountain called 
 Cotylaeum (Ae 3"'). 
 
 668. Less often, the article and attribute follow the sub- 
 stantive, which then takes another article before it : 6 di/^p o 
 ayaOo'i. 
 
 ol xroi rh retxos irepieiXov rh Kaiv6v the Chians threw down tJicir wall, the 
 new one (T.4.51), 4v rfl i.iiafliaei rrj /»6t4 Kvpou in the expedition loith Cyrus 
 (XA.5.1'). 
 
 a. But the substantive takes no article before it, when it would have 
 none if the attributive were dropped : t( Sta<l>fpn &v9puvos oKpariis Briplov rod 
 &fia9€iTTdTov ; how does an intemperate man differ from a wild beast of the most 
 h-utish sort ? (XM.4.5"> 
 
673] ARTICLE WITH ADJECTIVES. 219 
 
 669. Akticle with Predicate-Nouns. — The predicate-noun, in 
 general, is ■without the article : avdpmTros et thou art a man. Hence 
 we may distinguish subject and predicate in sentences such as wpoSm-rjs 
 rjv 6 a-Tparijyos tile general was a traitor. 
 
 a. But if the predicate-noun la definite, meaning the individual or the class, 
 it has the article : rhv Ae^iinrov aj/ctKuhovvTes rhv TrpoB6T7]i> ecdlinff Dexip/jus 
 the (notorious) traitor (Xj\..6.6''), oi TtBefiivoi robs vijiovs oi iirdeveis &v9puTtol 
 EiVi Kttl o( TToKKol the enactors of the laws are the weak men and the muliiiude 
 (PGo.483''). 
 
 670. Pbbdicate Position op Adjectives. — A predicate-adjective 
 can never stand between an article and its substantive, but must pre- 
 cede or follow both of them : dyadbs 6 dvi)p or o dvijp dyados the man is 
 good. This is called the predicate position (of. 666 a). 
 
 a. So iQ all expressions in which the adjective has predicate force, that is, 
 implies aa assertion (594 rem.) : i^i\))j/ ^x'"" '''h" Kfipa\^y having his head bare 
 (XA.l.S"), iSpovvTi T^ tinriii with his horse sweating (XA.1.8'), Sia ipiKias t^s 
 Xt^pas aird^ei he loill conduct us back (through the country being friendly) 
 through the country which will then be friendly (XA.1.3'*). For other examples 
 see 618. 
 
 671. Article with Adjectives of Place. — The adjectives pia-oi, 
 aKpos, ea-xaros, used in the predicate position, refer to a part of the 
 subject : 
 
 /jLeffTj 7] x^P^ or 71 x^P^ p.^fffi the middle of the country^ but tj pjffy] x^P°- ^^^ 
 middle country (between other countries) ; itrxarov rh Upos or rh upos iffxaTov 
 the end of the mountain^ but rh tffxo-Tov tipos tlie last mountain (of several 
 mountains); i.Kpi t) x^W <"' ^ X^'p ^"P" the point oftheliand, — In like manner, 
 iipiavs 6 iSi'os or & plos ^futrui lialf of the life. 
 
 672. Article with irSs and SAos. — The adjective ttSs (strengthened airas, 
 aipiras) all, has usually the predicate position ; but it takes the attributive 
 position when it means the sum total, the collective body : Trdvres ol iroAiroi all 
 the citizens, individually, but oi Trdi/res ttoAitoi tite whole body of citizens. 
 
 a. With numerals ol TrivTfs is used, meaning in all: Sie'jSTjirav is riiv yrjffov 
 e|ofc(J(r(Oi pd\ttrTa oi iravTcs there crossed over to the island about six hundred in 
 all (T.3.85). 
 
 b. Without the article, irdvres iroAirai all citizens, irdffri irpoSipi^ witli all 
 zeal. But irSs in the singular without the article often means every : was aviip 
 evei'y man. 
 
 c. Similarly, '6Kos wJiole : 'ihri t\ ttcJaij or i) iriKis &\i) the city as a whole, t] 
 iKr) ir<(Ais tli£ whole city ; without article, Sat; ir((\« a whole city. 
 
 673. Aeticlb with PROifOuiirs. — Substantives with oS«, 
 ovro<;, iK£Lvo% require the article in prose, and the pronoun 
 takes the predicate position (670) : oSe o dvijp this man, to, 
 
 irpa.yfJi.aTa ravra these affairs. 
 
 a. The same is true of dptpa, &iiUp6Tfpos both, ixdrepos each (of two), I'/cao'- 
 Tos each (of several) : etdo'Tr} fi apx^l each magistracy. But with eKmrras the 
 article may be omitted : /cafl' iKeJiTTjjv iipepav every day. 
 
220 ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS. [674 
 
 b. Genitives of personal pronouns (/«)B, ainoS etc.), connected with the 
 article and substantive, talie the predicate position ; genitives of reflexive pro- 
 nouns (e^ouToS etc.) the attrilnUive position. See 689, 690, and 692, 3. 
 
 c. Yet if the article is followed by an attributive, most of the above pro- 
 nouns may stand between the attributive and substantive : (titiitiov t^iv iiiav 
 iKcivr\v iroKlTelav we must seek for that one polity (PPol.297'), T) traKai ijiuiv 
 (picris our old nature (PSym. 1S9''). 
 
 674. With 8Se, otros, and iKeivos, substantives omit the article in certain 
 cases ; thus often proper names ; KtAKlarparos ixeivos that well-known Callis- 
 tratus (D.18*"); .nnd when the p ro noun me ans ' here ,' ' there-j jiointing out an 
 obj ect in si^ht ( see 695 a). And always, when the substantive is a. predicate: 
 Kiviqais aSTTi neyicrrit S^ roh "EWritrtv iyevero this was tlie greatest uprising 
 which ever took place amonc/ the Greeks (T.1.1). In poetry, also, the article is 
 often lacking : ftlafffia tovto this stain {SAnt.1042). 
 
 For the article with auT<(s, see 679, 680. 
 
 675. The possessiye pronouns take the article, only when 
 a particular object is referred to: e/tos <^iAos a friend of mine, 
 6 e/ios </)iAos my friend (the particular one). 
 
 676. An INTERKOGATITE pronoun may take the article, when it relates to 
 an object before mentioned : ndrx^' ^^ 6auiJuiuTT6v • rb t(; A. A queer thing 
 is Jmjjpening to him. B. (The what) Wlial is it? (ArPax 696). — So even a 
 personal pronoun : Sevpo S^ eitdb TjtiSiv • iropa rivas Tobs vfias ; A. Come hit/ier 
 straight to tis. B. (To the you being whom) Who are you., that I must come 
 <q?(PLys.203''). 
 
 PEONOUNS. 
 
 677. The Peesonal PE0i<roT7NS, when they stand in the 
 nominative, are emphatic: Kot a-v 6ij/ei avrov thou also loilt see 
 him. When there would be no emphasis on them, they are 
 omitted (602 a). 
 
 a. The pronoun ov, of, etc., of the third person, is in Attic always 
 reflexive (685) ; instead of it, the oblique cases of axiros are used as a 
 personal pronoun (682). 
 
 Intensive Peonoun. 
 
 678. The intensive pronoun avT6s has three meanings, (1) Ko/me, 
 (2) self, (3) Mm, her, it. 
 
 679. With preceding article (attributive position, 666 a) 
 avToi means the same, Lat. idem: b airos OLvrjp the same man. 
 
 a. In Homer, auriJj without the article may mean the same: ?ipx^ ^^ 'rv 
 outV "55^" 7i<Tr€() 01 &\\oi and lie led him the same way tliat the othei-s had gone 
 (fl 107). 
 
683] INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 221 
 
 680. Auto's is emphatic {himself, myself, etc., Lat. ipse) : 
 
 1. In the predicate position (670) with a substantive : airos 
 avrip or o a.vr]p airds the man himself. 
 
 a. So, too, when the substantive has no article : airhs Mevmv Meno himself. 
 
 2. When standing alone in the nominative : airol ttjv yrjv 
 ecrxov they seized the land themselves (T.1.114). 
 
 3. Less often when standing alone in an oblique case : 
 
 BpatrfSds ttj &e(r<ra\cov y^ /cat aiiTois (sc. rots ©etrffa^ois) <piKos -^p Brasidas 
 was a fnend io the country of tlie Thessalians and to {the people) t/iemselves 
 {TA.'78), eJ ot6v t4 itrrin a^ucA^ airhv ivra iWovs iroieiv iirt/xeXets if it is possible 
 for one who is careless himself to make oihei-s careful (X0.12"). 
 
 681. The emphatic aurds has various shades of meaning ; eViiTTifi^itr) ami) 
 knA)wledge in itself (in its own nature) ; ^ yecopyld iroWa Kal avr^ SiSatr/cet 
 agriculture itself also (as well as other pursuits) affords much hviUntction 
 (X0.19^*), 7)yovfjLai t7)v T]fieTepdf Tr6\tv avrijv ttoAu Kpeio'caj eluat I believe our 
 citfi by itself {a\one) to be much superior in strength (T.6.87), i/|€t yap avrd for 
 this will come to light of itself = of its own accord (SOt 341). For auroTs -roh 
 hwXois and like expressions, see 774 a. 
 
 a. Plato uses the neuter avri, even with masculines or feminines, to denote 
 the abstract idea of a thing: airh SiKawtrivri justice in the abstract (PRp.363°). 
 
 b. AuTiis is used, by a peculiar idiom, with ordinal numerals : icrpariiyei 
 Nixlds Tplros avT6s Nicias was general (himself third) with two associates (T.4.42). 
 
 c. Avt6s is said of the master by a slave or a pupil : avrhs e(/>r) the master 
 (Pythagoras) said it, avoiyeTca tis Siti-aT' • outI)j epx^Tai open the /louse some- 
 body; master is coming (ArFrag.ii.l056). 
 
 682. Usually the oblique cases, airov, avT(S, avrov, etc., stand- 
 ing alone, serve merely as personal pronouns : him, her, it: 
 iyu} avTOV eiSov T Saw him. 
 
 ■ Kipip Traprjffav at 4k neAoirowJjtroi; vrjes, Kal ex" ouraTs Uv6ay6pa.s the ships 
 from Peloponnesus Joined Cyrils, and Pythagoras in command of them (XA.1.4°). 
 a. In this sense they cannot stand at the beginning of a sentence, 
 nor in an emphatic position. 
 
 Reflexive PEOiirotrNS. 
 
 683. The reflexive pronouns e/xauroS, a-eavTov, lauToi), etc,, 
 usually refer to the subject of the sentence : yvai^i a-mvTov 
 know thyself. 
 
 a. In a dependent clause, they often refer to the subject, not of the 
 dependent, but of the principal verb ; they are then said to be indirect 
 reflexives : 
 
 ■ Tck cauoyio, offa irphs Tjj eaurwy (77)) ?ii>, avel\ovTo they took up the wrecks, as 
 many as were close to their own land (T.2.92), i^oiKcTo Himv rb (rTpdrev/ia irpbs 
 iavrhii exe'" tV yv^tiV l''^ wished the whole army to be devoted to himself 
 
222 REFLEXIVE PRONOUN'S. [684 
 
 (XA.2,5"), TovTttv ?pfe KCpos oix ^"vr^ i/jioyKtiTTup tjVTou/ Cy^~m became ruler 
 of these, though they were not of tlie same tongue with him (XC.l.l*), Tiyet aiirds 
 eiriCriiuovs elvai ffeoiuT^ you think that they are hurtful to you (XM.2.7"). 
 
 b. Sometimes, however, the reflexive pronouns do not refer to the subject, 
 but to a dependent word: dirb o-outoS 'yd ae SiSd^a from yourself I will in- 
 struct you {ArNub.3S5), rhv Kw/j.cipxri'' ^xero Herai^uiv &yuv irphs robs iavrov 
 oiKeras Xenophon went conducting the governor of the village to his own people, 
 the governor's, not Xenophon's (XA.4,52°). The real office of the reflexives is 
 to emphasize the identity of the person with some one named in the sentence, 
 
 684. The personal pronouns are sometimes used instead of the re- 
 flexive : SoKw fioi aSvvaros fhai, I (seem to myself to be) tJdnk that I 
 amionahle (PR^.m'S'). 
 
 a. So avTov, avra, etc., may take the place of cavroi, eavra, etc., 
 as indirect reflexives, but not as direct: T^eyoua-iv on iMeraiMekoi airols 
 they said that they were sorry, liter., that it repented them {XA.5.6^°). 
 
 b. As subject of the infinitive, ejxi, ai, are commonly used, not the re- 
 flexives : ^7^ oljuai koX i/j.^ Kal tre rh a^iKeiv rod aSi/ccTcrflai k^kIqv Tiye7(rdat I dare 
 say that both you and I think it worse to lorong than to be wronged (PGo.474''), 
 
 685. The personal pronouns of the third person (ou, oT, etc.) are in Attic 
 almost always used as indirect reflexives ; but o£ and e are rare in Attic 
 prose, and oT is seldom emphatic ; iyicK-fifjiara iroioi5/ie(/oi, oirais (r(l}la'iv on fieyiffTTj 
 ■irp6<pa{ns clri tov ivoKefi^lv bringing charges, that they might have the, greatest 
 possible color for making war (T. 1.126), A676Tai 'Atr6\Kcijv e/cSelpat Mapffvdv 
 ipi^ovrd at nepl (roflas Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, when contending 
 with him (Apollo) in skill (XA.1.2'). 
 
 a. In Homer, Vo, oT, etc., when used as personal pronouns (^ Att. aurov, 
 airip, etc.), are enclitic ; when direct reflexives (= €outoD, etc), they are ortho- 
 tone : atirifiaTos Se ot '?iX6e Merixdos but Mcnelaus of his own accord came to 
 him (B 408) ; but rhy Kpibv airh io ■Kffove Bipd^s the ram he sent from himself 
 out at the door (i 461). As indirect reflexives, both forms are used. 
 
 b. The same rule applies to Herodotus, but with him the singular forms 
 65, oX are never direct reflexives nor orthotone. For (r<pi(n and ircjjf, see 261 D a. 
 
 686. a. The reflexive pronoun of the third person is sometimes used for 
 that of the first and second : ■ 5e7 rifias ''avspecrdat eaurous we viust question our- 
 selves (PPhaed.78''). In Hm. the possessive pronoun oj {ids) has a similar 
 use : otjToi ^ytwye ijs (for ifJ.rjs) yalTis Sufauai y\vK€ptoTepov txWo iSeo'dai I can 
 look on nothing sweeter than mine ovm laiul (t 28). 
 
 b. The reflexive pronoun, in the plural forms, is often used for the recip- 
 rocal, aKKitXav, AW'liXois, etc. ; vifuv airoTs Sia\e^6fif6a we shall converse (with 
 ourselves) with one another (D.48''). 
 
 687. The forms e'/ie avriv, aiiTov fie, <re alrov, avrov <r€, and the like, 
 are emphatic only, not reflexive : 
 
 Tobs vaTSas robs lixobs KaT^axme Rai ifii avrhv S$ptcre he disgraced my chil- 
 dren, and insulted me myself (Lys. 1'*), abrcp rubra ffol Si8Q>/j.i to tJiee thyself do I 
 give these things (EHec.12'76). 
 
 a. Instead of f air6v, etc., in the third person, avT6v alone is used : \^. 
 ^cToi ahrhv /cal yvvaiKa he will take the man himself and his wife (XA.7.8°). 
 
692] possessive; pronouns. 223 
 
 b. In the plural, ^fiiov a'jTuiv, etc., may be either reflexive or emphatic ; 
 avTav riiiaiy, etc., emphatic only : but (rip&v airav is only reflexive, and aiirwj) 
 cripav is never used. 
 
 c. But in Hm., to whom the compound reflexives are unknown (266 D), 
 such forms as e avT6v, oT aurip, <ro\ auTp, etc., are sometimes reflexive and 
 sometimes emphatic. 
 
 688. The reflexive pronoun may be made to receive emphasis by 
 prefixing to it avros in agreement with the subject: 
 
 ouTol e<p' savriiy ix^povv they marched hi/ themselves (XA.2.'t"'), rhv aoiphv 
 ouTo// aoT^ juaA.t(rTa Set fro(phv ehai the wise man must be wise espedallu for 7«';)2- 
 se//(Pflipp.Maj.283i>). 
 
 B. The two pronouns are separated by a preposition : cfialveTai ra ix.ei/ out)) 
 Si' avTTjs 71 'f'vxii iTTKTKoire'iD sonic things the sold appears to sturveij by itself 
 (PTheaet.lSS'S) ; but not, usually, by the article: KataXiKvKe t^v aurhs auroO 
 SvnaiTTeldv lie has overthrown his own dominion (Ae.3'2^). 
 
 Possessive Pbonotjns. 
 
 For the article with a possessive pronoun, see 678. For the article used 
 instead of an unemphatic possessive pronoun, see 668. 
 
 689. Instead of tlie possessives e'/xdr, tras, the genitives of the per- 
 sonal pronouns fj-ov, o-ov (enclitic, not e'/ioC, a-ov) are often used; less 
 often ij/iwi/, vfiav, for rifieTepos, u/je'repos. These genitives take the predi- 
 cate position (670) : uhov tov vlov a-ov or etSov a-ov tov vlov I saw thy son. 
 
 690. For tlie third person, his, Jier, its, their, the genitives airov, 
 avT^s, airSiv (683), in the predicate position, are always used in Attic 
 (or and a-cjiir^pos being reflexive) : wapa tIjv Su^av airov contrary to his 
 aypectation (XA.3.1"). 
 
 a. In Ionic cB and ir^etov can be used. And in Hm. os (or kis), though 
 usually reflexive, is sometimes a simple possessive ; t{]v ttotc NtjAeuj yrifiev 
 khv Sih KciWos whom of yore Neleus wedded by reason of Iter beauty (\ 282), 
 
 691i The possessive, being thus nearly equivalent to the genitive of a 
 personal pronoun, may have an adjective or appositive connected with it 
 in the genitive : f) ip.€T4pa rau ao^uTTav rix"^ ^''^ <"■' "/ J""" ^''^ sophists 
 (PHipp.Maj 281«), Tn/ick Suo-tijcou Kaxd the ills of me, unhappy one (SOc.344), 
 S/ieTepos S" El fi^v BO/ihs vifiea-i^eTai avTwv if your own mind is offended (/3 138). 
 
 692. Possessive pronouns are reflexive (my own, his own,, etc.) when 
 the possessor is the same as the subject of the sentence. As such may 
 be used : 
 
 1. The simple possessive pronouns in reflexive sense. This is the 
 regular use of or and o-c^cVepor, but as is poetic only : 
 
 rav XPI/"^'"'!!?!' (Tot raf i/nuv kIxpvI''' I ^«"<^ '" '''"« "/ my own properrty (D.o3"), 
 BoimToi fispos rh (r<\ieTspov irapetxovTo the Boeotians furnished their contingerU 
 (T.2 12), \^ai<ras li/MupaTs x^pf'" S" To£8o)C having caressed his daughters with 
 groping hands (SOo.1639). 
 
224 
 
 DEM0N8TRA TIVE PR ONO UN 8. 
 
 2. The possessives strengthened by airov, aiTrjs, airSiv (691); but 
 with the singular possessives ifios, a-os, Ss, this is poetic only : 
 
 iroKfiiiol iffiiev toTs ^/iicTf'poij avrav <pt\ots we are foes to our own friends 
 = HOstris ipsorum amicis (XA.T.l'^'), to o'lperep' aiirav tS TlBeffBai to gel their 
 own affairs into good condition (1.20"). 
 
 3. The genitives of the reflexive pronouns, ifiavrov, -rjs, creavrov, -rjs, 
 iavTov, -rjs, iavTau, in the attributive position : jxeTeirffi^aTo Tqv iavTov 
 Bvyaripa he sent fw his own daughter (XC.1.3'). 
 
 a. This is the only way of expressing his own in prose. Observe that the 
 forms 7]fi(iv auTtSi', etc., are hardly ever so used. Thucydides has occasionally 
 aipwv (iu the predicate position) for kavrSv. 
 
 b. The reflexive possessives may, like the reflexive pronouns (683 b), refer 
 to some other word than the subject of the sentence. 
 
 693. Summary of Possessive Forms (those in parentheses are poetic). 
 I. Not reflexive. 
 
 my ifiAs 
 thy a-6s 
 his, her (8s Hm. 
 
 fXQV 
 
 ffov 
 rare) avrov, 
 (€5Hm 
 
 , rare) 
 
 our 
 
 your 
 
 their 
 
 Tifierepos Tjfiwv 
 vfierepos tfioiv 
 avrSiV 
 {(r<p4(av Ionic) 
 
 II. Reflexive. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 my own 
 thy own 
 his, hei- own 
 
 a6s 
 
 (Ss) 
 
 
 (ifihs avrovj -^s) 
 
 {ffhs aVTOV^ -7Js) 
 
 {ts avrov, -rjs) 
 
 
 ifiavTOv, -r}j 
 ffeauTOV, -TJs 
 eavToVj -rjs 
 
 our own 
 your own 
 their own 
 
 7]/J.€T€pOS 
 
 vfierepos 
 
 a'<p4Tepos 
 
 
 7]fi€repo5 ai/Twy 
 vfierepos aifrwy 
 
 
 lavT&v 
 ff(pcSuj rare 
 
 694. A possessive pronoun is sometimes equivalent to an objective geni- 
 tive : ftlvota r\ ^fi4\ their good-will to me (XC.3.1**) ; so a^v X'^P'" (^^ * favor to 
 thee) for thy sake (PSoph.242»). 
 
 Demonstrative Peonouns. 
 
 695. The ordinary demonstrative is oBtos this, that. °08e 
 this (here) is used of something near or present / e/cetvos that 
 (yonder), of something remote. 
 
 a. These pronouns, and especially S5e, sometimes mean here, there, lo, he- 
 hold, calling attention to an object in sight : vvp re SS€ iari and now here he 
 is! (Hd. 1.111), ip5> Tl]vti' ix i6naiv arelxovaav 'loxdffTriv lo, I see locasle coming 
 from the house! (SOt.631), oZtos iiriffSey wpoffepxcrat t!iere he comes behind us ! 
 (PEp.S27''), VTJES iKeii/ai iirnrKiouffi yonder are s/iips sailing towards us (T.1.51). 
 ' Those ships ' would be ai vijes ixeTvai ; see 673, 674. 
 
 696, In referring bach, to an object already mentioned, ovtos is 
 used; but oSe, in referring /orwari^, to an object yet to be mentioned: 
 eXe^av raira they said this (before stated), eXf^av rdbe they spoke asfolr 
 
T02] RELATIVE PROJWaNS. 335 
 
 lows. The same distinction exists between toiovtos such, too-oOtos so 
 much, many, TrjXiKovros so old, large, and the corresponding forms in 
 
 -3e, TotdtrSe, TO(rdo"5e, TrjXtKotrde. 
 
 II. Yet ojToi — especially the neuter toDto — sometimes refers forward to a 
 word or sentence in apposition : is fi^ rovro fxAyoy iyyouvTot, tI TreitrovTai that 
 they may not think of this alone, what they shall suffer (YA R,l"), More rarely, 
 oSe refers back to something before mentioned. 
 
 b. 'EksTvos, like outos, refers back (rarely forward), but implies remoteness, 
 either in space or in thought : Kvpos KoBopa ^cuTi\4a hoI t6 ofxtp^ iKeivoy CT^ipos 
 Cyrus observes the king and tlie band around hint, some way off, as leader of 
 the opposite army (XA.1.9"). 
 
 c. Noteworthy is the colloquial phrase roiyT' ckeico, t6S' iicetvo that's it/ 
 there it is ! (literally this is that already spoken of or understood). 
 
 697. Outos sometimes repeats the subject or object of a sentence with 
 emphatic force : & ri trnipfia trapcurxt&v, oUtos tuv tpivroiv aiTtos tjie man who 
 furnished the seed, lie is respo7isibte for what grew from it (D.18'"). 
 
 For Kol TaDro and that with omitted verb, see S12 a. 
 
 698. OStos is sometimes used in addressing a person : oStoj, t( iroicis ; 
 you there, what are you doing? (ArRan.198). 
 
 Relative Pkonotjcts. 
 
 699. The ordinary relatives (or, oo-or, ofoj, etc.) are often used where 
 tlie antecedent is indefinite : neWovrai our &v {= ovartvas av) ijymjrai 
 jSeAr/trTous- ehai they obey (those, any) ichom they think to ie best. 
 
 a. But the indefinite relatives {iaris, 6ir6iTos, Sirolos, etc.) are not used 
 where the antecedent is definite. Where the antecedent seems to be of this 
 nature, an indefinite idea is really connected with it : infBijxriae Tlo\vKpa,Tca 
 airoKiaai, Si' ovriva Kaxas iJKOvire he desired to destroy Folycrates, (as being a 
 person) on whose account lie had been ill spoken of (Hd.3.120). Yet in Jate 
 writers, oVtij, etc., are sometimes used without any indefinite idea. 
 
 For agreement of relative and antecedent, see 627. For peculiarities of 
 relative sentences, see 993 ff. For indefinite relatives used as (dependent) in- 
 terrogatives, see 700; also 1011 and a. For the relative in exclamations, see 
 1001 a. For Sj demonstrative, see 275 b and 665 a and b. 
 
 700. Interrogativbs. — The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, 
 282-3) are used botli in direct and in indirect questions. But in in- 
 direct questions, the indefinite relatives are commonly used instead 
 (see 1011 a) : r/pard S ti ^oiiKoivTo he ashed what they wanted (XA.2.3*). 
 
 For peculiarities of interrogative sentences, see 1010 ff. 
 
 701. Ikdefikite PRONOtrNS. — The pronoun t\s, r\, is used either 
 substantively (Lat. quidam) or adjectively (Lat. aliquis). Being en- 
 clitic, it can never stand at the beginning of a sentence. 
 
 702. Tif may express indefiniteness of nature; ' a sort of ; 6 ao(f>i(r- 
 ri^r rjvpcBrj efijropos tis the sophist has ieen found to ie a sort of trader 
 (PSoph.231'i). 
 
226 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. [703 
 
 a. So with adjectives and numerals it implies hesitancy or reservation^ 
 /tt{) |8\a£ Tis Kal t)K16ios yevwimi lest I shoiUd come to be a aort of dull and simple 
 fellow (XC.1.4'^), so toioCt' Ktto things of some such kind (PSyin.174''), fidyas 
 Tis of some magnitude (PGo.481''), iv tivi Ppax^t Xfi^''V *™ "* pi'i'Ui/ short time 
 (PLg.698''), TpiaKovrd Tiyas orreKTHvav they killed some thirty (T.8.73), ^^(701 
 Tivis some few (SH.6.1*). 
 
 b. So t1 with adverbs : ffx^Siv ti pretty nearly (T.3.68), ou irdvv ti cur<f)aK4s 
 not altogether safe (XA.6.1'*). 
 
 703i nSj TIS, 'cKa<rT6s tis, denote evei-y one, each one, taken at pleasure. 
 Tis in the singular has sometimes a general pluralisin"; sense, like French on 
 or German man : xph Seiirve'tv 3 ti tis exei whatever (every) one has, he must 
 make a dinner of it (XA.2.2''). 
 
 a. Tis sometimes means somebody (or something) of importance: riSx^ts 
 TIS tTrai t/iou didst vaunt thyself to be somebody (EE1.939), \4yeiv ti to say some- 
 thing (to the point) ; so oliSev \e7e1y to say nothing (sensible). 
 
 704, 'AXXor other, rest, is often put first, the particular thing to 
 which it is in contrast being named afterwards : 
 
 T(£ T6 &\Ka iTi^Tjfre Kol fxvpiovs ^5qjk6 SdpeiKovs he gave me ten t/iousand 
 daricn, besides hcawring me in other loai/s (XA.1.3'), Ttji /xev &\\a aTparlf riaix"- 
 fey, eKarhv 5e irfATaffToj ir/jOTre/iirei with the rest of the army he kept quiet, but 
 sends forward a hundred peliasts (T.4.111). 
 
 a. "AWos &K\o and similar expressions are used like alius aliud in Latin. 
 For an example, see 624 d. 
 
 705, "AWos and eTcpos have sometimes an apposiiivc relation to their sub- 
 stantives, in which they may be rendered besides : 01 iroX^Tai koX 01 &K\oi. ^evoi 
 the citizens and (the others, foreigners) the foreigners beside (PGo.473°), yipwv 
 Xttipei niff cTcpov veaviov an old man comes with (a second person, a young 
 man) a yomig man beside (ArEccl.849). 
 
 THE CASES. 
 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. 
 
 706, The chief uses of the nominative are : 
 
 a. As subject of a finite verb (601): KCpos ^aa-iXevu Cyrus 
 is king. 
 
 b. As Predicate-Nominative^ when a predicate-noun (614) 
 belongs to the subject : eyw (TTparrfyoi et/ti I am general. 
 
 707. NoMn^ATiTB FOB VocATivE. — The nominative is often used 
 for the vocative in address, especially in connection with oJtos (098): 
 6 'ATToXXdSiupos ouTos, ov nfpi/ieve'is ; you Apollodwus there, will you not 
 etay? (PSym.lTa"). 
 
712] ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT. 227 
 
 a. A nominative with the article may be used as appositire to a vocative : 
 S &vSpes 01 Trap6vTfS you gentlemen who are present (PProt.SST"). 
 
 b. The nominative is used in exclamations about a person (not addressed 
 to him) : ax^>^os rash man ! (E i03), Si fiapos foolish woman ! (EMed.61). 
 
 708i Nominative Independent. — The nominative is used for names and 
 titles, which form no part of a sentence : Kipov 'Avipaa-ts Expedition of Cy- 
 rus ; and sometimes even when they are part of a sentence : irpoatlKi]^^ riiv 
 tS)v irovTipiov KOivi]v itrwvvfjddv, (rvKotpavnjs lie obtained tlie common appellation 
 of the vile, ''sycophant^ (Ae.2"), trap^q-yyia & Kvpos ffii/Btjua, Zeiis (i/J-iiaxos Koi 
 riye/jidv Cyrus gave out, as pass-word, 'Zeus, our ally and leader' (XO.3.3"). 
 
 709. The person (or thing) addressed is put in the vocative. 
 
 a. In Attic prose, S is usually prefixed, but sometimes it is wanting : /iii 
 flopu/SeiTe, S &vSpes 'AflrjcaToi make no noise, men of Alliens (PAp.30"), oKoieu, 
 Al(rx'>^; fiearest thou, Aeschines? (D.18'''). 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 710. The accusative properly denotes the direct object of an action, and 
 belongs with transitive verbs. But in some of its uses it has the office of an 
 adverbial modifier. 
 
 We distinguish : 
 
 1. Accusative of the direct object. 
 
 2. Cognate accusative. 
 
 3. Accusative of specification and Adverbial accusative. 
 
 4. Accusative of e-vtent, and of the Object of motion. 
 
 5. Accusative with adverbs of swearing. 
 
 For the accusative as subject of the infinitive, see 939. 
 For the accusative absolute, see 973. 
 
 711. The DiEECT Object of a transitive verb is put in the 
 accusative : tov dvSpa opS I see the mmi. 
 
 712. Many Greek verbs are transitive and take a direct object, 
 when the verbs commonly used to render them in English are intran- 
 sitive and followed by a preposition. Note especially the following : 
 
 cS (xaicSis) iroielv Ttva to do good (ill) to one, e5 {KoKas) \4yeti) riyd to speak 
 well (ill) of one, oixvivcu robs Beois to SKear by the gods, /leveiy nva to wait for 
 one, ipfiyeiv Tivd to fee from one, KavBimiv Tivd to escape tlie notice of one, 
 <pv\dTTea-8al Tira to guard ar/ainst one (act. tpuKdrretv nvd to guard one), 
 cuSeta-dai, cuax^veaSai rhv iraripa to feci shame before his father, Bap^cTy riva 
 to rely on one, Bap^e'iv rds fidxas to have no fear of the battles, irXeii/ tV 
 eiXaa-aav to sail over the sea, triyay, a-iairdi/ ri to keep silence about something. 
 
 a. Conversely, many Greek verbs are intransitive and followed by a geni- 
 tive or dative, when the verbs commonly used for them in English are transi- 
 tive ; see 735-743 and 764, 2. 
 
228 COGNATE-ACCUSATIVE. [713 
 
 b. In many cases, the Greek itself varies, using the same verb at 
 diilerent times as transitive and intransitive : 
 
 alffdai/etrdal ri or tivos to pej'ceive something. iv9v/xt7iT6at tivqSj ti to consider 
 something^ ^voxAeTv rii/a, Tivi to trouble one, ^e/j.<l>eff6ai nva, Tivi to blame one^ 
 4TriffTpaT€i€iv Tivd, rivl to war against one (so, too, other compounds o±' ivl), 
 Sei iioi Tii/os / have need of something, poet. Sti (xp'h) M*' tii/os. Especially iu 
 poetry, verbs usually intransitive sometimes take a direct object : ?i<r8ai or 
 daffffetv {KeiffBai, Tn]5aj/) t6ttov tivA to sit {He, leap) in a place, xop^^^ty rhv 6e6f 
 to celebrate the god bi/ choral dance, robs euaefie'is 9eo\ BinjffKOVTas oi x°'p<""''< 
 the gods rejoice not in the death of the pious (EHipp 1339). 
 
 c. Many intransitive verbs become transitive from being compound- 
 ed with a preposition : 
 
 Siafialviiv rbv ■iroTaj).6v to a'oss the river, iKPalvetv tV fi\iiclav to pass out of 
 the age, irapa^aiyeiv Toits v6fious to transgress tlie laws, a7roBeSpdK6T€s iraripas 
 having run away from their fathers. 
 
 713. In rare oases, an intransitive verb in connection with a verbal noun, 
 forms a transitive phrase which takes an object-accusative : iiri(rT'i]fioves fi<rav 
 T& irpo!TT}Kovra they viere acquainted with their duties {XC.S.3*), eo'rt Tci fierfupa 
 ippovTiaTTis he is a student of things above the earth (PAp-lS""), auvB^Kas e^appos 
 ytyferai he denies the agreement (D.23^''^), TeOfdvai rc^ (f>6^<fi &r]^alovs to be 
 mortally afraid of the Thebans (D.19"), <r^ (pv^i/ios (iffTt) is able to escape thee 
 (SAnt.tST^, 61 8e ju' mS' etc! \6yovs i^rjpxes if you always thus begun your 
 addresses to me (SE1.656), S«m6Ta.v y6ots Kardp^oi [will begin with lamentations 
 for my master (EAnd.1198). 
 
 714. Accusative of Effect. — Many transitive verbs have, 
 as direct object, the thing effected or produced by tbeir action : 
 ypa.<\)€i iirLa-ToX-qv he writes a letter. 
 
 a. Compare in English break a hole, as opposed to break the ice. So in 
 Greek Sit^puxa re/ij/eiv to cut a canal, 'opKta r^uvetv foedus ferire (hostiam feri- 
 endo foedus eflioere), but Tf/ivetv tV 7?>' '" '«y waste the land. 
 
 b. Some verbs, not properly transitive, take an accusative of the effect, de- 
 noting that which is made to exist or appear by their action : irpeir^eiieii/ 
 elpiivriv to negotiate a peace, i. e. form a peace by acting as embassador (1.4'"), 
 Xopriyiiv iroiirl Aiopiffia celebrating the Dinnysia by furnishing a chorus of 
 boys (0.21"^), ^Se rpoiras KaTap^-fiyvvfft this (anarchy) causes routs by breaking 
 ranks, liter, breaks routs (SAnt.675). 
 
 715. CofiNATB-AcousATivE. — This repeats the meaning of 
 the verb in the form of a noun : Spo/xov Spa/^tai/ to run a race. 
 It has commonly an attributive connected with it. 
 
 The cognate-accusative is sometimes called the implied object, as being 
 already contained in the verb. Here belong : 
 
 a. AconsATivE of Kindred Formation : tV outV jiixw ftdx^aSai to fight tlie 
 same battle (XAges.6'), rhv iroiMir^v irlfiireiv to conduct the procLSsion (Lys.lS*"), 
 5ou\ei5eij/ ZoDKiiav altrxp°-^ lo be subject to an infamous servitude (X.M. 1.6^), 
 b'y Kei/ aplffTTjif ^ovK^v $ou\evff7i whoeve}' may give the best counsel (I 75), er^pai/ 
 v6aov vofffiv to be sick with another disease (PAlc.ii.lS9^), iKpivero r^v irepi 
 
718] ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION: 229 
 
 Jn,paino~j Kpliriy he was tried in iJie suit about Oropus (D.21**), trvpetpvye rijv 
 (pjyiiv Tjiirifiv he shared in that banishment (PApai"). 
 
 b. AccusATiTE OP Kindred Mkakinq : f^treir $loy KpaTuxTov i/ou will lead 
 the best life (UMon.lSti), e|"\9oy aW&s i^6Sous tliei/ wext on other expeditions 
 (XH.1.2"J, irdcrds t>6(Tovs Kapivovtri they are sick with all diseases (PRp.408'), 
 Thv Upbv KoKoiiiiVov v6Kefu>v icrrpdreviray they engaged in the so-called Sacred 
 war (T. 1.1 12), fieyoAds ypa<pds SiiiKeiv to prosecute Important suits (Ant.2a'). 
 
 £emark. — The attributive is ia general necessary with the cognate-accusa- 
 tive, as otherwise its use would in most cases be mere tautology. But if the 
 Icindred noun has in itself a meaning more definite than the verb, it may be 
 used without an attributive: thus tpuKaKgs ipuA.iiTTeu' to stand seiUry, <f>6pov 
 (pfpetv to pay tribute, apx^v ip^ai to hold an office. 
 
 716. Some times the place of the kindred noun is taken by a guali- 
 fying substantive, or neuter adjective. Hence two more forms of the 
 cognate-accusative. 
 
 a. Qbaufying Substantive. — The kindred noun is replaced by another 
 substantive, which defines more exactly the meaning of the verb. Thus (on 
 the model of vIkclv vIkt^v) is said vlxav fiaxv ^ conquer in a battle, vlKav 
 'OXiixTFia. to win a victory at iJte Olympian games, and even vlKtiv hiR-qv to win 
 a suit and viKav yviiftijv to carry a resolution. Similarly TjTTaffdcu to be beaten. 
 So also (like ayojvl'^effBai dyuva), ayatvl^etrOai iriiKTjv {tTTaSioj/) to contend in 
 wrestling (a 7'ace). Also irvp btpBoK/xoiat SeSopK^s looking (a look of) Jire with 
 his eyes (t 446). In some of these cases, the substantive may be regarded as 
 standing in apposition to the omitted kindred noun. 
 
 Remark. — Still freer is the poetic phrase Palveii/ iriSa step the foot (on tlie 
 analogy of Paiyeii' pdtriv step a footstep) : ixPds TeBpiirTruv apfiaTiav ir6Sa having 
 stepped from the four-Iiorse chariot (EHeracl.802). So also irepav, iir^aaetv and 
 other verbs. 
 
 b. Neuter Adjective — The kindred noun is replaced by a neuter adjec- 
 tive : iiiya. ^IfevSerat (^ fi4ya ypevSos i|/et;5eTai) he utters a great falseltood, iravra 
 •neiffofiai I shall obey in all things (render all acts of obedience), TaOra AOn-e?- 
 (rflai Ka! Tavra xo(p«>' rots iroKKoh to have the same paim and the same pleasures 
 with t/ie multitude (D.IS'*"), aiuKp6i/ -ri dropw / am in -lome little perplexity 
 (PTheaet.l4B^), t/ xp^o'^'ai alnlf ; what usewill he makeof him? (ArAcb.93B), 
 (refivhi/ 0\e!rus you look grave (EAlc.773). 
 
 717. The cognate-accusative is a;lso used in connection with ad- 
 jeetives : kukoX trairav kokIov bad tcith all badness (PRp.490^). 
 
 718. Accusative of Specification. — The accusative is 
 connected with verbs, adjectives, and substantives, to specify 
 the part, property, or sphere, to which they apply : dXyeiv 
 Tov? TToSas to have pai?i in the feet, MiJ<ros to veVos a Mysian 
 by birth. 
 
 This accusative specifies : 
 
 a. The part: to. (rdpiaTa e5 ^xo"'''" being well in our bodies (XM.3.12*), 
 Tv<t>\h5 TO t' Sto t6)i Te voiv rd t' ijiyum' " blind t1u>u art in ears, and mind, 
 and eyes {SOt.ZIl). 
 
230 ACCUSATIVE: ADVERBIAL AND OF EXTENT. [719 
 
 b. The property (nature, foj-m, size, name, number, etc.) : elSos iciWurToi 
 most heautiful in form, (XC.1.2'), Trora/iiy eipos Sio -irXeBpav a rivo' of two 
 plethra in breadth (XA.1.2''"'), 6,iretf>ov Th irKrfios injinite in its extent (PPar.MS"). 
 vp^os Th ^6os mild in disposition (Pl-*haedr.ii43'=). 
 
 c. The sphere : rouKetvov /liy €VTvxf!s /ifpos happy thou art, so far as in 
 him lies, liter, as to his part (EIIec.989), oii kivXuoi rh kot' iij,4 on my pari I 
 make no objection {XH.1.6*), to vepl Toiis Beobs eu(rej3ou/iCi' in our relations it 
 tlui gods we are devout (1.3^). 
 
 Remark. — The accusative of specification belongs exclusively to predicate 
 words and modifiers. It can never be connected with the subject of a sen' 
 tence. 
 
 719, Adverbial Accusattvb. — The accusative is used, in 
 many words and phrases, with the force of an adverb : tcXos 
 Se elire but at last (as the end) he said. 
 
 a. Note especially the following common phrases : ripSe {tovtov) tIv 
 Tp&trov in this manner, iravra rpSirov in everii manner, %v Tp6irov hi which man- 
 ner. — tV Taxiarriv in the quickest wai), r^v eiiBelav (in thesiraigM way) straight- 
 forward, etc. ; cf. 622. — (t))v) hpxh^ "' ^^> always with a negative : apx^f Si 
 Bjjpaf ov Trpevei Ta^^ixava it is not meet to chase impossibilities at all, i. e. not 
 to make even a beginning of it (SAnt.92). — p^rfpiv/o}- the sake of, with a geni- 
 tive : rod \iyov x^'P'" f'"' "** *"^'* <i/ '''* argument, ifiiiv x^P'" /<"■ ™.'/ sake. — 
 SIki^p tike (in the fashion of) ; ircir\»)pm(rfloi 8/k7)<' 0776(01; to be filed hke a pail 
 (PPhaedr.236'1). 
 
 b. Many neuter adjectives are used in this way ; ptfja, iieya\tt greatly, 
 iroXi, TToAAii much, rh iro\i, rh, irowi for the most part, ■7Tp6repov before, ri 
 vrpSrepoi/ the former time, irpuTOV at frst, rh irpaTov the first time, ri AoiTriii' 
 for the rest, for the future (but tou \onro5 at some time in the future), rvxi" 
 perhaps, ovSfi>, n-rfiiv not at all, Toaovrov so much, oaov as far as, t1 somcichai 
 (iyyis ti pretty near). Cf. adverbs of the comparative and superlative de- 
 grees (259). 
 
 c. Especially important are t( w7iy, tovto, ravra therefore : ri xAalfis ; why 
 art thou xveeping? (A 362), outA ravra vvv fjKW for this very reason am I now 
 come (PProt.310'), ravr' &p' 4(pv\drrov ah, that's why you were so cautious/ 
 (ArEq.125). 
 
 720, Accusative of Extent. — The extent of time and 
 space is put in the accusative. 
 
 a. Time : ivravSa e/iciycc rifiepas ireWe thei-e he remained five dai/s (XjV.1.2"), 
 Hi ffTTovSal iviaurhf eaovrai the truce will be for a year (T.4.11S), \pevS6^euos 
 ouSeIs XavBdvei ttoXiiv xP^""" "" ""^ '"'"' ''^ escapes detection long (MMon,547). 
 
 b. Space : Kvpos i^eXavvti Stck rris AvSlds trrad/jLoifs rpets, irapaffdyyds etKotn 
 Kol Sio Ci/rus advances through Lydia three days' marches, twenty-itoo parasangs 
 (XA.1.2'), Meyapa inrfx^' 'S.vpdKovawv oSre irKoOv itoXhv oi/Tf iS6v Megara is 
 not far distant from Syracuse, eiiJier by sea or by land, liter, no long voyage 
 or journey (T.6.49). 
 
 721, The accusative singular is used with an ordinal numeral, to show 
 the number of days (months, years) since a particular event, including the 
 day (month, year) of the event itself : h^Z6fn\v jffiepdy i] Bvydrrip irereKetn-iiKei 
 
724] TWO ACCUSATIVES. 231 
 
 his dauglUer had died the seventh day (i. e. six days) before (Ae.3'"). The pro- 
 noun ooTocri is often added : i^iiABonfV eror toutj rplrov is Udi/oKTOv we went 
 out two years ago (this, as third year) to Panactum {D.Si'). 
 
 722. Object of Motion. — The poets often use the accusative without a 
 preposition, to denote the object towards which motion is directed : to koTKov 
 'Apyos pis having gone to hollow Argos (SOc.878), Koi /iieu K\ios oipcwiiv 
 ^/cei mg fame reaches to heaven {t 20), fiinjaTripas oupiKeTo she came to t/ie 
 suitors (a 332), <re TciS' iK-i)\v9i nai> Kpiros this w/u>le powo- has come to tliee 
 (SPbil.141). 
 
 a. The accusative of a person is used after the conjunction iis in its mean- 
 ing to: iropeuEToi oil /SaffiAed lie goes to the king (XA.1.2*). See 784 a on im- 
 proper prepositions. 
 
 723. Adverbs of Swbarino. — N^ and /xd are followed by the 
 accusative (perhaps on account of Suvvfu understood): vi) is always 
 affirmative ; fid, unless val precedes it, is always negative : v!/ Ala by 
 Zeus, vai fia Ata yea, hy Zeus, fia Aia or oi /lA Aia no, by Zeus. 
 
 a. Sometimes the name of the god is suppressed with humorous effect : 
 /ni rhv — ob ai 76 not you, by — (PGo.466°). Rarely is fta omitted after a 
 negative; oi, r6vS' 'OKvuirov no, by this Olympus (SAnt.758). 
 
 b. The accusative is sometimes found in other exclamations : ojror, 
 OI o-e Tot you there, ho ! you, I mean (ArAv.374). 
 
 Two Accusatives loith One Verb. 
 
 724. Double Object. — Many transitive verbs may have a 
 double object, usually a person and a thing, both in the accusa- 
 tive. Thus verbs of asking, teaching, clothing, hiding, de- 
 priving, and others : KSpov ah-av irXola to ask Cyrus for 
 
 Such verbs are atrS, ipcorw ask, MatrKto teach, ireWa convince, dva- 
 fiifivija-KQ) remind, aii.(f>Uvvvfu, ivhia clothe, ckSvco atrip, KpiirTw hide, 
 d^aipovjiai, dnoiTTep5> deprive, (rvKS> despoil, irpaTTop.ai (also TrpiiTTcn or 
 ei(rTrpdTT(o) exact. 
 
 Thus oi tout' ipara <rc that's not what I ask you (ArNub.641), jj'pJaTii (re 
 SiidtTKUv T^v arpaTiiyldi/ he began to teach you military science (XM.3.1'), ^Treiflov 
 ouSeV o!iS4y I convinced no one of augJU (AAg.1212), a^u/i/uxxiav avaiufiv^aKOVTiS 
 Tois 'ABijvalavs reminding the Al/umians of i/ie alliance (T.6.6), rhv p-tv imrov 
 viTdova 4Ke7vov TifiipUiTe his own tunic he put on tlie oilier boy (XC.1.3'''), iKSuatv 
 ip.i xP't<^''"'iP^°-'' ^cS'i'ra stripping me of the oracular garment (AAg.1269), tV 
 Ouyarepa tKpvirre rhv Gdvarov tov cLv5p6s he hid from his daugliter hci' hus- 
 band's death (Lys.32'), i.^aipii<rSai roiis "EWitvas riiv t^v to depnve the Greeks 
 oftlieir land (XA.1.3*), robs vTiauiras i(,i]icovra Tdhm/Ta e'ureirpaTTov they exacted 
 from the inlanders sixty talents (Ae.2"). 
 
 a. The passive of these verbs retains the accusative of the thing: 
 fiova-iKqu natSevdeis having been tav^ht music (PMenex.236»), tijv o^tn 
 a<j>aipelTai he is deprived o/Tiis sight (XM.4.3"). 
 
232 TWO ACCUSATIVES. GENITIVE. [Y26 
 
 725. Object and Cognate-Accusative. — Many transitive 
 verbs may have, beside the object, a cognate-accusative : 
 
 MeA7)T(is jue iyfO/aTo tV yp'upil'' Tairriv Meletus brought this impeachment 
 against me (PAp.19'*), &pKa(Tav roifs ffrpaTidyras tovs fieyitrrovs bpKovs they 
 m,ade the soldiers swear the greatest oaths (T.S.75), iiik 6 irari/p ttJj/ Twy watStof 
 iratSeldv trpeipev my father reared me with the training of the boys (XC.S.S^'), 
 Hm. hv TepX KTJpt ft>l\€i Zciis •KavToltji' ^i\6r'iyTa for whom Zeus felt in his heart 
 all manner of love (o 245). 
 
 a. Here are included verbs meaning to do anything to a person and 
 say anything of a, person: ravTa tovtov enolrja-a this I did to him (Hd. 
 1.115), Toiis Kopivdiovs jroXXu Te Kai KOKa eXfye he said many had things 
 of the Corinthians (Hi.S.Gi). 
 
 b. Verbs of dividing may take this construction : Kvpos -rh tTTpdreviM 
 KaTiveifie StoSeKa fitprj Cyrus divided his army into twelve divisions (XC,7.C'*). 
 
 c. Such verbs in the passive may retain the cognate-accusative: 
 Kpidijvai dficfioTepds rds Kpi<rets to undergo hoth the trials (D.34'"), tvtt- 
 Tea-dat nevTrjKovra TrXr/yds to l)e struck fifty hlo'WS (Ae.l'^°), ov ^Xd'^ovrm 
 a^ia \6yov tliey will not suffer injuries worth mentioning (T.6.64). 
 
 726. Object and Pebdioate-Accusative. — A predicate- 
 noun, when it belongs to the object of a transitive verb, is 
 put in the accusative. This occurs especially with verbs which 
 mean to make, show, choose, call, consider, and the like, 
 
 voioufial Tiva <(>i\ov I malce one my friend^ aipeiaBal riva tTTparriySv to choose 
 one as general, irapex^'" ^'^"Thv einreifl? to show himself ready to obey (XC.2.1'-), 
 KoXoutn rairriv diduerpov tJiey call this a diagonal (PMen.85^), a'wTripa rhv 
 ^iKiirirov iiyovvTO they regarded Philip as their preserver (D.IS""*), eSojKa Scupmv 
 T^ \vTptt I gave him his random as a gift (D.19""). 
 
 a. The predicate-accusative is often distinguished from the object by the 
 absence of the article (669) : ra wepiTTo. xp^M^tTa wpdyfiara ix°^^^ they have 
 their superfluous weaUhfor a vexation (XC.8.2''). 
 
 b. In the passive construction, both of these accusatives become 
 nominatives (706 b): 6 iroTafios KaXf^rai. Mapavas the river i 
 Mtvrayaa {XA.1.2,^). Cf. 596. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 727. The genitive in general denotes relations expressed in English 
 by the prepositions of and from. In the latter use, it corresponds to 
 the Latin ablative. 
 
 We distinguish : 
 
 1. Genitive with substantives. 
 (a) Attributive, (b) Predicate. 
 
 2. Genitive with verbs. 
 
 (a) As Subject, (b) As Object, (c) Of cause, crime, value, (d)- Of sepa- 
 ration, distinction, source, (e) With compound verbs. 
 
729] ATTRIBUTIVE GENITIVE. 233 
 
 3. Genitive with adjectives and adverbs. 
 
 4. Genitive in looser relations. 
 
 (a) Time, (b) Place, (c) In exclamaiion. 
 
 For the genitive absolute, see 970 fi; for the iiifinitiv-e with roi 
 exppbssing purpose, see 960. 
 
 Genitive with Substantives. 
 
 728. One substantive may; have another depending on it in 
 the genitive : d<^^aA./xos j3acn\i<iis the king's eye. 
 
 a. This is the Attributive Genitive : cf . 600. 
 
 729, This genitive may be of several kinds ; as : 
 
 a. ■ Genitive of Possession or Belonging : oIkIo. irarpos a father's house, 
 KV/iara t^s da\d(r(rris loaves of the sea, &pd apitrrov hreakfast-time. 
 
 Remakk. — It may express merely origin or connection : 'Op-iipov 'l\ids 
 Homer's Hiad, ypa(pi) KKoirris an indictment for theft. 
 
 b. Genitive Subjective, showing the subject of an action: 6 </>d^os 
 tSiv 7ro\ep.mv the fear of the enemy (which they feel), 17 e^oSor rod 
 a-TpaTfiiLaros the approach of the army (XA.2.2"). 
 
 c. Genitive Objective, showing the object of an action : o (po^os rav 
 iroKfiilav the fear of the enemy (which is felt toward them), 6 oXeSpos 
 tS>v fTvfTTpanaiTav the destntction of their fellow-soldiers (XA.1.3"). 
 
 Remark. — Other prepositions are often to be used in translating this geni- 
 tive : 0ewv evxal prai/ers to the gods (PPhaedr.244''), fj tuu Kp€itT(r6piiif Sou\ela 
 servitude to the stronger (T.1.8), 6 Siav ■ir6\tfios the war with the gods (XA.2.5'), 
 *A0Tjyaio}y ettyota affection for flie Athenians (T.7.57), iyKpdreta 7)8oy^s modera- 
 tion in pleasure (I. l^^), awaWayi) tov piov deparhirc from life (XG.6.1"), Kpdros 
 TTJs 9aKd(r<Tris power over the sea (T.8.76), fieydKay aSMi\ii.dTwv opyf) anger at 
 great wrongs (Lys.l2'™), ci,w60a<rts T^r yrjs a descent upon the land (T.1.108), 
 /3f? tS)v TvoKlrmv (with violence toward) in spite of the citizens (XH.S.l''"). 
 
 d. Genitive of Measure (extent, duration, value) : irorap.os eSpos 
 irXfSpov a river of one plethrum in breath (XA.1.4*), /ua-dos Terrapaiv 
 p,r)v5>v four months' pay (XA.1.2'"), pftXimi/ 8paxp.S>v Sikij a suit for a 
 thousand drachmae (D.SS"). 
 
 e. Genitive Partitive, denoting the wlwle, of which the other sub- 
 stantive is a part : rroXXoi tS>v 'Adrjvalmv many of the Athenians, avijp 
 TOV 8fip.ov a man of the people (XC.3.3'"'), /ifo-ov rj/iepas the middle of 
 the day (XA.1.8'). 
 
 f. Genitive of Material : Tokavrov xpi'cov a talent of gold, afia^ai 
 a-irov wagons (wagon loads) of corn (XC.3.4"). 
 
 g. Genitive of Designation, taking the place of an appositive : ihs XPW' 
 /le'T" <" (great affair) monster of a wild boar (Hd.1.36). This construction 
 is chiefly poetic : Tpolris vToxUSpcv eity of Troy (a 2), 6avdTou> re\os end of 
 (life, i. e.) death (T 309). 
 
234 PREDICATE-aENITIVE. [730 
 
 Rem. — In a — d the things denoted by the two words are distinct ; in e — g 
 they are more or less the same. The above classes by no means represent 
 all possible relations of the genitive ; many of these are hard to classify. 
 
 730. The following are peculiarities of the attributive genitive : 
 
 a. With the genitive, vios son and orKos Ticnme are often omitted: 
 'AXe^avSpos 6 *iXiV7rou Alexander the son of Philip, eh nXartoj/or to 
 Platans (house), ev "AiSou in the abode of Hades, ev Aioi/ifo-ou in the 
 temple of Dionysus, els tIvos SiSao-KoXov ; to what teacher's (school) ? 
 
 b. Especially frequent is the genitive after the neuter article: to t?is 
 T6\eas the affairs of the dty, state-affairs, tA tuv 'S.vp&Koirlav the resources of 
 the Syracusans, Ser <j)epeij/ ra twv Beuv we must hear the ordering of the gods 
 (EPhoen.382), t!i t?s tcx>")s irepalvoiro iv Kol Sio iriy^s the function of the 
 art fan be pel formed even in silence (PGo.460"). Often this is merely a vaguer 
 expression for the thing itself : rk t^s if'i'X^s the soul (with all that belongs 
 to it) nearly the same as ij ^Ox'l}, t^ t?}s ri^vs luck, ri t^s hXiyapx^o.^ tlie 
 oligarchy. So rb rovSe, meaning nearly he, and even TafiA I. 
 
 c. The genitive partitive with neuter pronouns and adjectives often denotes 
 degree: eh Toaovrov avoiis i\0e7v to come to this extent of folly (PGo.514"), 
 4ir\ fJL^ya Suvdfietas ix^PVO'av tliey advanced to a great degree of power (T.1.118), 
 ii> irarTl KaKov in extremity of evil (PRp.579''). 
 
 d. The partitive genitive does not take the attributive position (666 a): 
 thus 'ASrivatav 6 Sn/jtos the lower class of the Athenians (but 6 'ABrii/alav Srj/ios 
 the Athenian people, the whole mass). 
 
 e. Adjectives which have a partitive genitive, usually conform to it in 
 gender, so as often to appear in the masc. or fem., where we might expect 
 the neuter : S ^fitiriis {d \otir6s, d nXeTffTos) rod xp^^ov the lialf {rest, most part) 
 of the time, iroW); rijs x<'p"s (also iroXh Tijs X'^P*') much of the country. 
 
 731. Two Genitives with One Substantive. — The same substantive may 
 have two genitives depending on it, usually in different relations : tSiv av9pj>- 
 ■jrwv Seos tov davdrov m,en's fear of death, 5ik tt/j* tov avefLov iirajo'iv ra>v yavdylwv 
 because of the wind's driving the wrecks out to sea (T.'7.34), iTnrou Sp6fios ri/iepds 
 a day's run for a horse (D.19^'^), J^iovdaou TrpetrfivTaiv xop^s a Dionysiac choi-us 
 o/o?d mm (PLg.eeS"). 
 
 732. Peedicate - Genitive. — The genitive may take the 
 place of a predicate-noun : o vo/aos oSros ApaKovros ia-ri this 
 law is Draco's. 
 
 a. The predicate-genitive usually refers to the subject of the sentence, 
 and its different uses correspond in general with those of the attributive 
 genitive (729 1. Thus: 
 
 Genitive of Possession, Belonging, Origin: 'Boiarav ri ^6X1! •la-rai the city 
 will belong to the Boeotians (Lys.12'8), oMas fieydXits ^v lie was of an influential 
 house (PMen,94''), rotoirav icri ■irpoy6iiuv from such ancestors are ye (XA.3. 2^^). 
 
 Objective : ou t5c KUKoipyav oTktos, iA.\a Tijr SUris compassion is not for the 
 evil-doers, but for justice (Errag.272). 
 
 Of Measure : ^v irav us rptaKovra lie was about thirty years old (XA.2.6^*), 
 rh rifiTiiii laTi rb ttji x<ipd.s IfaKHrx'^'o"' raXivTuv the rateable property of 
 the country is (of) six thousand talents (D.14"). 
 
135] GENITIVE AS SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 235 
 
 Parlitivc : ^6\u}v riav ctttA ffo^iffrSau iK\ii8i) Solon was called one of the seven 
 wise men (1.15^^^), twi/ \a^^ap6vTu)v elffiv ol fiavBdyoj/Tfs learners are among the 
 receivers (PEuthyd.27'7°). 
 
 Of Material: oi OTftpami p63a)v ^(rav the wreaths were of roses (D.22™). 
 
 b. It may, however, refer to the object of a sentence : 4fil 6h rSij/ ireTreur- 
 fieVeoi/ count me one of the believers (PRp.424''). 
 
 0. A predicate-genitive is often connected with an infinitive, and denotes 
 one whose nature, habit, or dut;!, is to do something : 81s c'^a/tapTfii' ravThv am 
 avSphs tro(pov His not the nature of a wise man tivice to ej*r in the same thing 
 (Jlilon.121), ulKou6fjiov ayaQod iffTiv eS o'lKetv rhv eavTov oIkov ^iis the business 
 of a good husbandman to manage his estate well (XO.l*). 
 
 d. The genitive of characteristic so frequent in Latin {vir summae prudcn- 
 tiae) is used in Greek only as a predicate-genitive ; f-yaye Toirou tov Tp6irou 
 iriis eifi aei lam always of about this character (ArPlut.246), t^s aliTTJs yvti/iris 
 fiffttp they were of the same opinion (T.1.113). 
 
 Genitive with Verbs. 
 
 733. The genitive sometimes seems to be connected with a verb, 
 when it really belongs to a neuter pronoun or a dependent clause: 
 
 eyajye fiaMffra 46avficura avTov tovto I admired this especially in him, liter- 
 ally I admired most this of him (PPhaed.89'), fi SkSkei tov tf/riiptiriiaTos tout' 
 ^o'rt tJie points %ehich he im,peaches in the decree, are these, literally which points 
 of the decree (D.18''), ayvooiiiey it\\ij\uv o ti Keyoiiev loe misunderstand each 
 other'' s language (PGo.Slt"). 
 
 a. Bv an extension of this usage, the genitive sometimes means simply 
 about, concerning : tI Sh iinruii oUi; but of horses, what think you? (PRp.469''), 
 TOV oiKaSe irhov Si«rKiirovv iini Ko/uirBiiffoyTai touching tliar homeward voi/age, 
 they were cortsidering by what course they should rcturji (T.1.52). 
 
 734. Genititb as Subject. — The genitive (used partitively) some- 
 times does duty as the subject of an intransitive verb : 
 
 itwX o'jSaii69ev irpoa-tiKet tov irpdy/iaTos I haiie no part whatever in the matter, 
 literally to me belongs in no way of the matter (Andoc.4'^), iroKenov koI 
 fidxvs ow M^ ''■^'' "'^■'■il "/ "'""" andfigMing she liad no shai-e (XG.7.2'"), ivi/ilyviyat 
 e<pa<rav (T(puiv irphs itelrnvs they said thai some of their number had intercourse 
 with them (XA.3.5'^). — In these cases the genitive may be regarded as depend- 
 ing on an omitted form of t!j some one. 
 
 Genitite as Object. 
 
 735. Note. — Many verbs, which in Latin or English would take the 
 accusative, have the genitive in Greek, because the action is regarded as 
 belonging to the object, rather than as falling directly upon it. In some of 
 these constructions (as in that of 736) the genitive appears to depend on an 
 omitted accusative of tIj some. In others, it may be understood as depending 
 on the idea of a noun implied in the verb ; thus KpaTtiit (xpiTos) T^t BttKdtrirris 
 (see 741) to exercise control over the sea. 
 
236 GENITIVE WITH VERBS. [736 
 
 736. The genitive is used with verbs whose action affects the 
 object only in part (compare genitive partitive, 739 e ; also 734). 
 Almost any transitive verb may be occasionally so used. : 
 
 Twj/ iij-iTipioj ifjioi SiUvai to give me some of your property (Lys.21'^), 
 \aP6vTes rov Pap^apMod a-Tparou having taken part of the barbarian army 
 (XA.l.S'), QKprels Tuv aixiiaKdruiv releasing some of the prisoners (XA.7.4''), 
 TTJs 7?s (T^pLoi' they ravaged part of t!ie land (T.1.30). So iriveii' ohov to 
 drink viine^ but iriviiv oivou to drink some tvine. 
 
 a But this principle applies especially to verbs of sharing (having, etc., part 
 of something), touching (the surface of something), aiming (seeking to touch), 
 enjoying (more or less of something). Hence the following rules (737-740). 
 
 737. Verbs of sharing take the genitive : avOpiaTrov i/'^x^ '''"^ 
 dewv /jLerix^L tnmi's soiil has part in the divine. 
 
 Such are iMeToXa/i^dva receive part, fieTaSiStoiii give part, Koivcovia> 
 participate, etc. 'Xayxavei.v tivos means to get jiy lot a share in some- 
 thing, Xayxaveiv tl to get (the whole of) something hy lot. 
 
 738. Verbs of touching, talcing hold of, beginning, take the 
 genitive : A,a/3eo-^ai rijs x^'P°' '" take hold of the ha^id. 
 
 Such are airTO/iai, \jfavai, Biyyavto touch, (xofiai hold on to, avrexofiai, 
 iTriKaji^avojiai take hold of, apxafiai hegiii, neipdofiai make trial of. 
 
 irvphs iiTTi Biy6vTa /ir) tuSiis Knecrflai it is possible that one touching fire slwiM 
 not be burned immediately (X0.5.1'°), toC \6yov 8e ijpx(To aSe and lie began his 
 speech thus (XA.3.2'J, ireipdiami Tairris rrjs Tcifeais trying this order of march 
 (XA.3.238). 
 
 a. The same verb may have an accusative of the person, and a genitive of 
 the part, touched : eKafiov Trjj (tivris rhv 'Opivrriv tliey took hold of Orontcs by 
 the girdle {^X.l.f,^"). 
 
 b. So, too, verba in which touching is only implied: &yeiv tijs rivlas rby 
 iimov to lead i/ie horse by iJie bridle (XEq.6^), Hm. ^{xk \tcr(Te(rxeTO yoii/wv site 
 besought me clasping my knees (I 451). So even KaTeiyevai or iruvTpifi7)v(U ttjs 
 HE(/>aA.iis to have one's head broken or bruised (ArAch.llSO, Pax 71). 
 
 739. Verbs of aiming, reaching, and attaining, take the 
 
 genitive : dv6p(irinj>v (TTOxa^ca-Bai to aim at men, crvyyvia/ji.rj'S 
 Tvyxiiveiv to obtain pardon. 
 
 Such are a-roxd^opai aim at, opiyopai reaeh after, ecpiepai long, strive 
 for, e^iKveopai, i(fiiKviop,ai arrive at, attain, rvyxdvio hit upon, obtain, in 
 poetry Kvpito light upon, and others. (For verbs of missing, see 748.) 
 
 tIkio-to tS>v aXKoTplccv opeyoyrai they are furthest from reaching for other 
 men's goods (XSym.4^''), iipUpLivos t^s 'EWiji/ik^s ''PX'is longing for tlie control 
 of G'tocc(T.1.128). 
 
 a. Here belong verbs of claiming and disputing, which take the object of 
 the dispute iu the genitive ; ouk ai/TiirotoiifieOa ^ouriKtt r7is apxv^ '^^ do not 
 pretend to the sovereignty against the king (XA.2.3'^^), Tj^ut^to'jS^TTja'ev 'EpexOei 
 Tns iriJAcais he disputed with Erechtheus tlie possession of the city (1.12"'). 
 
742] GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 237 
 
 740, Verbs of enjoying take the genitive : airoXav^iv twv 
 ayaOiov to enjoy the good things. 
 
 Such are aTrokava, ovivafiai, cva^iojiai, ripTrecrdai,. 
 
 eiaxov toO Aiiyou feast on the discourse (PRp.352''), evhs avSphs cS (fipovi\- 
 ffavTos ctTTorres &v itTroKavffmu/ from one man who has thought welfj all viay 
 receive proft (1.4*). 
 
 741, The genitive is used with verbs of ruling and leading: 
 as apx^i-v Tuiv vrfcruiv to rule the islands. 
 
 "Epms tUv Seaf Pa<Ti\ev€i Love is king of the gods (PSym.lQS"), TloKuKpaTiis 
 Sdiiou irupdvvei Folgcrates was tyrant of Sanios (T.1.13), Itnriwv AAxv^ iarpa- 
 T-tiyei Laches was general of cavalry (T.5.61), Mtvas Trjs Sa\d<r(nis ^Kpirriffe 
 Minos became master of the sea (T.l.i), Xetpl<ro(pos liyelTo toS arpaT^iiwros 
 Chirisophus led the army (XA.4.1'). 
 
 742, The genitive is used ■with many verbs ■which signify 
 an action of the senses or the mind ; particularly those mean- 
 ing to hear, taste, smell, to remember and forget, to care for 
 and neglect, to spare and desire : KJxavrj? aKovai J hear a voice, 
 Tutv tf}iX.<ov fj-efj-vrjcro remember your friends. 
 
 Such verbs are aKovco, aKpoaofiai hear, yiiojiai taste (also ycia cause 
 to taste), 6cr<^pa'i.voji.ai smell, aWBavopai perceive, pip.v^<rKopm remember 
 (also ptpvija-KO) remind), iirCKavBavopai forget, p,e\ei fioi I am concerned, 
 fierafieXfL pot I repent, eVt/ieXo/iat take ca/re of, evrpeiropai regard, dpeXeto 
 neglect, d\tya>pea> think little of, (peiSopai spare, a<pei.Seio am wasteful, 
 epata love, emdvpeo) desire, Treivdm hunger, bi^aa thirst. — iruvddvopai 
 am informed of more commonly takes the accusative. 
 
 T^i Kpa\ri'!\s TJa^Boi/To they perceived the sliouiing (XH.4.4*), SeSoma /ih ^ti^-o- 
 BdifiiSa Trjs o^KoSe dSov I am afraid we may forget the way home (XA.3.2"), 
 To'is ffTTovitdois ovx °^^^ "^^ '^^^ apeT^s &fie\€iy earrwst men cannot neglect virtue 
 (I.!""*), oi/TE ToS adiparos oire tSiv SvTav iipetaifi.i\i/ I spared neilJier my person 
 nor m.y property (Andoc.2^'), TOvTtov tui/ fioB'qpArav ir6^ai ivtOvfjM I have long 
 desired this learning (XM.2.6^**), -jreivufft rod iiraivov ewoi Twy tpitreuy some 
 natures hunger for praise (X0.13'). 
 
 a. With fj.e\etv and psTapeKav the object of the feeling is sometimes 
 (rarely in prose) nominative instead of genitive : toStiJ /xoi lieKn, instead of 
 roirov pot pe\et). 
 
 b. Verbs of remetnbering and forgetting may take the accusative 
 instead of the genitive : roiis ddiKovvras pepvrja-dai to remember those 
 who liarm you (D-G""); and always do when the object is a neuter 
 pronoun. So verbs of reminding may take two accusatives, instead 
 of accusative and genitive. 
 
 c. aKoia and cucpodopat usually have the thing heard in the accusative, the 
 person heard in the genitive : aKoietv rhf \6yov to hear the discourse, but 
 oKoietv Tov StSa(rKtl\ou to hear the teacher. This is always the case when both 
 are expressed : SjSii/xai ctwiiaiy <rou <f>povipo\js \iyovs I am glad to hear from you 
 sensible words (XA.2.5"). 
 
238 GENITIVE OF CAUSE, CRIME, VALVE. [748 
 
 743. The genitive is used with verbs of plenty and want : 
 yifjiiiv TOVTbiv tZv \6yoiv to be full of suoh talk. 
 
 Thus mjiiiKrifu, nXrjpoto fill, nKi'ida), yifuo am full, hiofiai want, etc. 
 
 TO S>Ta liov eVe'irXijo-E Saiiiovias ao(pi&s he filled my ears with divine loisdom 
 (PCrat.396''), xpriiiaTaiv iviripsi he had abundance of treasure (D.18''^), ou 
 Xpvfflov •wXqvt^'lv, d\Aa C(tiri^ ayaBTis to he rich, not in gold, hut in a good life 
 (PRp.521*), ff€<rayfi4i/os ttKovtov t^v \l/vxvv having his soul glutted with wealth 
 ( XSym.4''*), & fiifiev aSiKav oiSefos BeiToi v6iiov who does no wrong needs no laiv 
 (Antiph.iii.148), ewaivov ovTore (nrapiCere you never lack praise (XHier.l"). 
 
 Here belong expressions such as /iedvirBel! tov vexrapos intoxicated with the 
 nectar (PSyni.203''), tj itriyii ^e! /loAo i(/OxpoB iSSaros the spring rmis with very 
 cold water (PPhaedr.230'>). 
 
 a. When Seofiai means request, it may take a genitive of the person, 
 and a (cognate) accusative of the thing asked for : tovto v^iSiv Seofiai 
 I ash this of you (PAp. 17°). 
 
 b. The active Sea, as a personal verb, is found only with genitives of 
 quantity, itoKKov much, o\iyou, nlKpov, little, Toaoirou (also roffoTno) so much: 
 rotrovTov Sea) KaTa(j>pove7v I am so far from despising {J.\2^^); also imperson- 
 ally, TToWoS Se? oBthjs exE'i' it wants much of being so (PAp.35''). With 
 omitted Sei, o\iyov and fjuxpov have the force of adverbs, meaning almost: 
 o\iyou irrfi/Tej nearly all (PRp 652''). The phrases oi';5' bxlyov Sei (nor does 
 it want little) and ouSe voWod Sei (nor does it want much, but rather every- 
 thing) both mean far from it (D. 19'"*, 54'"'). For Se'aiv with numbers, see 292. 
 
 Genitive of Cause, Crime, Value. 
 
 744. Many verbs of emotion take a genitive of the cause: 
 TovTov fjLcv ov Oavfid^oi I am not siirpi'isecl at this. 
 
 Such verbs are davfia^a, ciya/iai wonder, admire, fj/Xdco, (j)6ovea> envy, 
 oiKripo) pity, evbaifiovl^m think happy, etc. 
 
 irvyxalptu rap yfyevrifjLcvay I share the joy for what has occurred (D.15''), 
 Toirovs olxTtptii TTJs ii^di/ xo'^E'T'is piffoi 1 pity these for their very severe dis- 
 ease (XSym.4'*''), CrjXeS <re tov vov, Tr\s h\ Sfi\tas (TTvya I envy thee for thy wis- 
 dom, but detest thee for thy cowardice (SEl.1021), xw^Mf"' yvvaiKis angry because 
 of a woman (A 429). — Here belong also ^ivov Uaaiop oiVeVai irpo0\>ixia.s 'tis rigid 
 to praise the stranger for his zeal (EIa.1371), oSttot' ivSpl ripSe KripvKev/iJ.Taip 
 luejuifiei 7iever wilt tliou blame me for my tidings (ASept.661), avyyiyvdiaKeiv 
 avTots XP^ "^VS iiriBvfiids it is right to forgive them for the desire (PEuthyd.306''). 
 
 745. Verbs of judicial action take a genitive of the crime: 
 <f>6vov StiiKCLv to prosecute for murder. 
 
 So the legal phrases ypac^o/xai indict, dia>Ka> prosecute, fpciyta am 
 prosecuted, aTro^iiyai am acquitted, aipia convict, aKla-KOfiai. am con- 
 victed, 6(j)\urKdva> lose a suit, etc. 
 
 hitt)Kia fi^v Kcucqyopias, ttj S* auTTj ^(jxp <f>6vov (j>e^a> I am prosecuting for 
 slander, and at the same trial am on my defence for murder (Lys.ll'^), y^evSofiap- 
 Tvptaf aK^a-ea-Sai wpoaSoKaf expecting! to be convicted of false testimony (D.39'*). 
 
 a. The genitive with these verbs depends on an omitted oognate-accusa 
 tive, SIktiv, ypatjyfiv or the lilse ; this may be expressed, as Aesch. Ag. 634. 
 
lis] GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 239 
 
 b. ©avcfroi;, with such verbs, is a genitive of value (cf. 746 b) : rii/ 2^t5p(d)i 
 &7njryov BavaTou they impeached Sphodrias on a capital chari/e (Xri.6.4'^). 
 
 746. The genitive of value is used -with verbs of buying, 
 selling, valuing, and sometimes with other verbs : 
 
 5pax/«iis vpiaaOai to buy for a drachme (PAp.26=), am &>- oireSJ/iTji/ troWou 
 Tas iX-rlias I would not have sold my hopes for a great price (PPhaed.9S''), 
 fi^ Ti^-flfni irXeiovos let him not set a greater price on it (PLg.91'7'^). 
 
 ir6aou Stiti(XKei ; Trevre jjlvSip for hum rnudi does he teach ? for fixe mitiae 
 
 !PAp.20''), 01 riipafeot fiiadov (pvKaKas exoviri the tyrants hop guards for pay 
 XHier.e'"), irpowewoTai r?j irapaurlHa xop'Tos tA t^s viK^ais vpayiiara the in- 
 terests of the city have been sacrificed fior immediate popularity (D.3'*), t^v 
 TrapaurlKa iKirl^a ojdevhs hv TjAAafayro tliei/ mould not have exchanged the liope 
 of the moment for anything (T.8 82). 
 
 a. With verbs of valuing, -irs^l iroAAou (803, 1 b) is usually said instead of 
 tvoWqv ; and so irepl ir\efovos, cAottoi/os, etc., unless an exact price is meant. 
 
 b. Note the phrase tTimv twI tivos Io fix one's penalty at something, said of 
 the judge, TliittffSai ni/i tivos to propose something as a penalty for some one, 
 said of the contending parties : Tt/iarac S' o5i/ /toi 6 ai/rjp Bai/drou tlie man 
 proposes death as my peiialty (PAp.SB''). 
 
 c. The thing bargained for is rarely put in the genitive (of cause) : ouSeVa 
 T^j (Tuvoualas apyipiov irpaTTei (724) for your society you demand money of no 
 one (XM. 1.6^*), tov 5c6S€ko fivas Ilcur/ij (sc. oipelKw); for what do I owe twelve 
 minae to Pasias? (ArNub.22). 
 
 Genitive of Separation, Distinction, Sottece. 
 
 747. As an ablative case, the genitive denotes that from which anything 
 is separated, is distinguished, or proceeds. Accordingly : 
 
 748. The genitive is used with verbs of separation ; that is, 
 those which imply removing, restraining, releasing, ceasing, 
 failing, differing, yielding (receding from), and many others : 
 
 1} vritTos ov TToKit Biex^t Ttjs ^jireipov the island is not far distant from tlie 
 mainland (T.3.51), e< flaXaTTTjs etpyoivTo if they should be excluded from the 
 sea {XII.7.1'), XP^^" ^^.tuflepuire lie freed (men) from debt (PRp.566'), €< koto- 
 \6eiv Treipaa^ffBe tovtov t^s apx~is if ye shall try to put this man out of Im com- 
 mand (XC.8.5^'*), Ktotpf rijs obivrts Koi yeyriBe it rests from its pain and rejoices 
 (PPhaedr.251''), o'jSels fiiidpravev avSp6s no one missed his man (XA.3.4"), ou/c 
 iifisia'Bii TTis iKiriSos he teas not disappointed of his expectation (Xn.7.5''''), ouS^y 
 Sioio'eis Xatpe(paivTOs t^v <p^ffiv you vjill not differ at all from ChcLci'ephon in 
 nature (ArNul)..')03), tTis tUv 'EWiivav i\fv0eplds irapax<upq(rai it\lwir<f to sur^ 
 render the freedom of the Greeks to Philip (D.18**). 
 
 a. Verbs of depriving sometimes take a genitive (instead of the accusative, 
 724) : T&v iWav atpaipoi/ievoi xphf^ara taking away property from the rest 
 (XM.1.6^), ir6aa>v oircffTepTjo-ffc ; of how much have you been bereft? (D.8"). 
 
 b. In poetry this genitive is used with verbs of simple motion, where in 
 prose a preposition would be required : $a9pa>y 'larturBs rise from the steps 
 (SOt.142), nvBSivos e/3dr from Pytho art tliou come (SOt.152). 
 
240 GENITIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS. [749 
 
 749. Verbs of superiority and inferiority take the genitive, 
 because of the comparative idea which they contain : Trepiyevi- 
 a-6ai T&v ixOpiov to get the better of one's enemies. 
 
 So irfptyiyvo/icu overcome, Xeliro/uu am inferior, and especially verbs de- 
 rived from comparative adjectives, as fiTrdo/iat am loorsted : av^p ^iveffip 
 oiSevhs \enr6nevos a man (left away from) second to no one in understanding 
 (T.6.72), ei Tis iripov irpoipepei i'riirTii/j.ri if one is more advanced than another 
 in knowledge (T.7.64), To-lyrov oIik ^TTi)(ri(/iie9a eS iroioDvT€s we shall not be out- 
 ione by him in kind offices (XA.2.3'''^), Tlfidts toxituiv lirKeoveKT^iTe in honors 
 you had t)ie advantage over these men (XA.3. 1^'), lurTepi^ovtri tSiv TrpayfiATinv 
 they are too late for the crisis (1.3'"). — vlKaffSai to be vanquished has the same 
 constructions as ^TrScrSai. 
 
 750. Many verbs take a genitive of the source : 
 
 ravri, aov Tvx^vres obtaining this of you (XA.6.6''), fidSe Si /lov Kol rdSe but 
 learn of me this also (XC.1.6''*), iTruMmvTo oi 'ApKciSes TiK afiipl UevotpafTa, tI 
 TO irvpa Karaa^effettui the Arcadians sought to learn from Xemoplwn's party, 
 why they extinguished the fires (XA.e.S"'). 
 
 So verbs meaning tn be born : Adpetov Kal napv(raTtSos yiyvovrai iroiSes Siio 
 of Darius and Parysatis are born tiuo sons (XA.1.1'). 
 
 a. In poetry, the genitive of the source is sometimes used with passive 
 participles and verbals, to denote the agent: aas a^ix"" "■(payeis slain by thine 
 oion spouse (EE1.123), (purhs iiitaTiindni deceived by a husband (SAj.807), Kfivi)s 
 SiSa/fTii taugld by her (SEl.SiS). 
 
 Genitive with Compound Verbs. 
 
 751. Many verbs compounded with a preposition take the 
 genitive when the preposition, used by itself in the same 
 sense, would have that case : 
 
 Trprf/cEiTai TTji xiipas ipt) fieyd\a in front of the country lie great mountains 
 (XM.3.5''), iiriPas rod reixous having mounted the wall (T.4.116), inrepe<p<iv'ii<rai> 
 Tov \6(l>ov they appeared over the ridge (T.4.93). So verbs derived from com- 
 pounds : {nrepSucetv lov \6yov to plead for the principle (PPhaed.86'). 
 
 752. Especially many compounds of Kara, which have the sense of 
 feeling or acting against, take the genitive of the person : KaTayiXdcrai 
 ifiau to laugh at you. 
 
 Xp^ M^ KaTappovfii/ tov irXiiBovs we should not contemn the multitude (1.5"), 
 SC exftpdy KaraipsiSovTai ftov through enmity they attack me viith falsehood 
 (D.21'a«). 
 
 a. Some take, beside, an accusative of the thing : thus of the crime, hvrt- 
 Po\w fi}] KarayvSivai SwpodoKiav ^fiov I beg you not to pronounce me guilty of 
 bribery (Lys.21^*), t^ tqjc rpidKovra a/jLopr-fifiara ifwD Karriydpouv they charged 
 on me the offences of the thirty (Lys.25'); or of t\ie punishment, ivlmy tirttaav 
 dfias ixplTinv Bdvarov KaTai\ir)(plaaaBat they persuaded you to pass sentence of death 
 on some without trial (Lys.26'°). 
 
 So witli an additional genitive of the crime, ttoWwv at iraripes firtSttrfiov 
 Bdvarov Kareyva>trav our fatfiers passed sentence of death against many for favor 
 ing the Persians (1.4'"). 
 
754] aENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 241 
 
 Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs. 
 
 753. The genitive is used with adjectives which correspond, 
 in derivatioa or meaning, to verbs that take the genitive. 
 Thus it is used with adjectives 
 
 a. Of Shaking : fifroxos iro(plds partaking in wisdom (PLg.689*), Wdfmifos 
 tSv iraTptfuv having an equal part of the patrimony (Isae.6''^). 
 
 b. Of Power; Kupios irwruf master of everything {A.e.^^^^\ rjSovuy iyKpar-lis 
 able to control indulgences (XM.l.a"). 
 
 0. Of Plenty or Want : fieo-rbj kokHv full of evils (MMon.334), irKoitriof 
 4>povT}iTiios Hch in good sense (PPol.261^), xPVf^T'^^ ireviis poor in treasure 
 (EEI.37), eTTKTT^/iTjs Kfv6% void of knmoledge (PRp.486°). So the adverb aKts 
 enough. 
 
 Many compounds of alpha privative take a genitive of the thing wanted : 
 &TTais oL^pevwif naiSoji/ childless as to male children (XC,4.6-), &Swpos xp^/^'^'^'^f' 
 taking no bnbes of m,oney (T.2.65). 
 
 d. Of Sensation or Mental Action. — Thus compounds in -■Iikoos from 
 oKoiw : \6yaii' Ka\a)i> iirliKoos listening to excellent discourses (PRp.499°), uTr^Kooy 
 Tuy yovieov obedient to one's parents (PRp.463*^). So ru^Xis tov fieWovTos blind 
 to the future (Plut.Sol.l2), afjivltiuiv tSiv KtvSivaiy unmindful of the dangers 
 (Ant.2a^), tVi^eXJjs aiuKpHv attentive to little things (PLg.900'=). 
 
 e. Of Aocohntabilitt : o/fnos Toirtnv accountable for this (PGo.447''), evoxos 
 SetKlds liable to a charge of cowardice (Lya.l4^), fj>6vov im6SiKos subject to a trial 
 for murder (D.54''), rrjs ipxn' (nreiSvyos bound to give account of his ojjiee 
 (D.18'"), wiroTE\))s <p6pov subject to payment of tribute (T.1.19). 
 
 f. Of Value : SJioj fVaiVou worthy of praise (PLg.762°), avUios Trjs Tr6\ca)s 
 unworthy of the city (Lyg.20'^), ai/rirhs XPIM'^'"''"'^""'''''''*'''*^''/'"' n^oney (1.2*'). 
 
 g. Of Separation and Distinction : op((>ov((r apSpiSf bereft of men (Ly3.2*), 
 iheiSspos aiSoSs free from shame (PLg.699"), xaBapis TrdfTaiv tSiv kokSv clear 
 from all things evil (PCrat.403'), yu/ivbs rod adimros stripped of the body 
 (PCrat.403''), Sidipopos twv &\\(iv distinct from the rest (PParm.160*), SWo 
 Twv StKoiav things other than the just (XM.4.4'°), tTcpov rb T)ih tov ayaSou tlie 
 pleasant is different from the good PGo.500^). 
 
 754. The genitive is also used -with other adjectives : 
 
 a. With adjectives of transitive action, where the corresponding verbs 
 would have the accusative : o^ifjuiShs Trjs aSiKlas late in learning injustice 
 (PRp.409'>}, KaKovpyos rdv &\\ai/ doing evil to the others (XM.1.5'), imiTT^/uov 
 rijs Texvris skilled in tlie art (PGo.448'') ; especially 
 
 b. With adjectives of capacity in -mSs : TapacrKevourriKhs rav eh rhv ir6\efMr 
 qualified to provide the requisites for the war (XM.3.1'), ii.SaiTKaXm'bs t^s outoG 
 aoiplas fitted to teach his own science (PEuthyph.3°). 
 
 c. With adjectives of possession, to denote the possessor: xoiyhs vrdvTay 
 mSpiivuv common to all men (PSym.206"), ISios aaruv belonging to themselves 
 alone (Ae.3'), e/ctiirTou OMtios peculiar to each (PGo.B06°), Uphs t^j 'AprefuSos 
 sacred to Artemis (XA.5.3"). These, however, sometimes take the dative. 
 
 d. With some adjectives of connection : ^vyyeviis avrov akin to him (XC. 
 4.1'^), ax6\ouBa aWijKaiv consistent with one another (XO.H'''), S/uiyvnos SeoKpcir 
 
242 OEMTIVE WITH ADVERBS. [756 
 
 Tous a namesake of Socrates (PSoph.218''). But these oftener take the dative 
 (772 b). 
 
 e. With some adjectives derived from substantives, where the genitive may 
 be regarded as depending on the included substantive : iipala ydfiou ripe for 
 man-iacfe (XG.i.6^), like Spd yd/iov age for marriage, TfKeios rrfs aperffs peifect 
 in virtue (PLg.643''), Uke reKos apeTijs perfection of virtue. 
 
 f. With some adjectives ot place (cf. 767), but seldom in Attic prose : Hm. 
 ivavrioi itTTav 'AxaiaK thei/ stood opposite to the Greeks (P 343), Hd. iTTMipaiai 
 rod Tl6i>Tov at rigid angles to the Ponius (Hd.7.36). 
 
 755. Adjectives of the comparative degree take the genitive 
 (see 643) : /*£t^tov tov a.SeX<f>ov taller than Ms brother. 
 
 SiTTepoi aTTiHiijUEvai t?is <TufiPo\ris coming (later than) too late for the engage- 
 ment (Hd.6.120), similarly tjj itrrepalf ttjs pLaxts on the day after the battle 
 (PMenex.240°), oliSevhs Seirepos second to no on«(lId.l.23), \evKOTfpa rod uvtos, 
 ipBoTfpa TTJr (pvffeas fairer than (reality) her real complexion, straighter than 
 (nature) her real figure (XM.2 l*''), KaraSietTTepdv rijv S6^av rr/s 4\vlSos eAajSe 
 the reputation he obtained came sliort of /lis expectation (1.2'), Si^a KpelrTav tuv 
 (pBomvvTav a reputation (greater than the envious) superior to envy (D.3'^''). 
 
 a. Multiplicatives in -irKdcrtos and -irAoGs have the same construction : 
 fiAAoii jToWoTTAotrfois vpiSiv i-TroKep.iiaaiJ.ei' loe engaged in war loith ot/iers many 
 times more numerous than you (XA.5.5^-). 
 
 b. The superlative often takes a partitive genitive (see 650). Inexact 
 expressions like KaWurros t&v &K\av (B 673), for KoWiaiy tS>v 6,XXav or 
 ndWiffros irdvrwy, are frequent. Similarly fiSvos ruy &\\Qti^ = fjL6vos Trdvrav 
 alone of all (Lycurg.'"^). 
 
 Genitive with Adverbs. 
 
 756. Adverbs derived from the foregoing adjectives, may 
 have the genitive : dva^ttos avroiv in a manner unworthy of 
 themselves, Siacfupovrta's tu>v aWwv av6pu>Tr(i)v differently from, 
 the rest of men. 
 
 757. The genitive is also used with other adverbs, especially 
 those of place : as iroO yijs ,- where on earth ? 
 
 So of ■npoe\ii\v6fV lure\yfld5 avSpa-ros to what a pitch of profligacy the man 
 has come (D.4^), fj-expt SeOpo rov \6yov to this point of the discussion (PSym. 
 217°), Tr6p^m aroiplds Ji/cei he is far advanced in wisdom (PEuthyd.294"), im-hs 
 Span outside of the boundaries (T.2.12), so ^j'T(Js inside, ^xtSpoui/ ^|m toS relxovs 
 they came without the wall (T.3.22), so flffa tiiitJiin, (U€to{ii toS vora/wu Kal ttjs 
 Taf pod between the river and the ditch (XA.1.7"), itK-naiov rov Sea'/im-nplov near 
 the piison (PPhaed.n9'*), Trp6(rBev, e/iTrpoirflei' tou ffrpuTorfSov in front of the 
 camp (XH.4.1-',XC.3.3*''), bo omo-Bfy behind, iip.ipoTepa>Stv Tijs dSovon both sides 
 of tlie way (XH.5.2'), so iHarepaBev on each side, kvBfv Ka\ IpBey on this side 
 and that, Tripdv tov iroTapov across the river (T.6.101), evBh rrjs ^affiiKtSos 
 straight towards Phascl'is (T.8.88). 
 
 a. So of time: ttipIk:: t's rifiepas at what time of tile day? (ArAv.1498), 
 8i//€ TTis Sipas late in iJie day (D.21®*). 
 
761] GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 243 
 
 Cf condition or degree : irus ^X'ls S6^ris ; in what state of mind are you I 
 (PRp.456''), oKOhaaiav <\>fVKr(oi ais txft iroSai' cKao-Tor jifiuiv loe must Jlee from 
 license, as fast as we am, each one of us, liter, accordiug to that condition of 
 feet in which each one is (PGo.o07''), ikovus ivuTTiiais 6|et he will be well 
 enouffh off for knowledge (PPhil.62''). 
 
 Of separation: x^P-^ '''<>'' <r<!>l"iTos apart from the body (PPhaed.66»), xpi^a 
 rav 'Aflrji-aW (in concealment from) without knowledge of tlie At/tenians 
 (T. 1.101). 
 
 758. The adverbs a.v€v without, vX-qv except, axpi, /^exP' until, 
 evexa for the sake of, as regards, often called improper prepo- 
 sitions (784 a), take the genitive : 
 
 &vev vKolaiv without boats (XA.2.2'), ^Xivdepias ivixa for the sake of freedom 
 (D.18'*>), /iE'xpi tP/s juaxiJ as far as (lis place of hatile (XA.2.2''). 
 
 a. "Ev€Ka has also the forms fvcxev and poet. eiVckh. tt^i^i/ is often used 
 without a genitive, as a conjunction: ouk op' 'Axoiois &vSpes fieri irXriv SSe 
 (with the same meaning as TrKriv roSSe) have the Acliaeans no men save this? 
 (SAj.1238). 
 
 Genitive in Looser Relations. 
 
 759. Genitive of Time. — The genitive is used to denote 
 the time to which an action belongs ; 17/xepds hy day, wkto's 
 by night. 
 
 The action is regarded, not as covering the whole extent of time, but as 
 occupying more or less of it : toO oSitoo xe'i""""" (at some time in) tlie same 
 winter (T.8.30), Sexa iraiv oix \i<"""^ t^^^ll "'*'' ""' come (any time in) for ten 
 years (PLg.642®), o^e ris ^evos a.<p'i<Tai xp^^ov ffvxvov nor has any stranger 
 come within a long time (PPhaed.57'), rpla JifitSdpcma toS iaiv6s three half- 
 darics each month (XA.1.3^'), toD \onrou (at any time) in the future, but ri 
 \oni6vfor tlie future (for all future time). 
 
 760. GENirrvB op Place. — The genitive is used in poetry to 
 denote the place to which, or within which, an action belongs: 
 
 veipos S o'j <palv€ro iria~i\s 70(7)1 but no cloud appeared over ( any part of) the 
 whole land (P 372 ), i(ev roixou tov irfpoto he was sitting by the other wall (1218), 
 ^ OUK 'Apyeoj hv 'Axaiiicod; teas he not (any where) in Achaean Argos? (7 251), 
 BUiv TteSloio to run on the plain (Z 507), KoifffSai irora/ioTo to bathe in the river 
 (Z 508). Still more singularly irpriffai irvpis to bum with (within) fre (B 415). 
 
 a. In prose, this construction appears only in a few phrases : ^TrcTaxCcoi' 
 Ttjs 6S0V tliey hurried them on the way (T.4.47), JcVoi toS iTp6ini to go forward 
 (XA.1.3'). But compare the adverbs of place which end in -ov: irov where, 
 etc. (283), auToS there, 6p.ov (in the same place) together. 
 
 761. The genitive is used in exclamations, with or without inter- 
 jections, to show the cause of the feeling : 
 
 <piv TOV avSpSs alas for the man! (XC.3.1"), 3 Tl6iiiiSov, SeivSiv \6yav 
 Poseidon, what fearful words ! (PKuthyd.SOS"), rt/s rrixiJ my ill luck ! 
 (XC.2 2^). It is often joined to an adjective : S 8u<rT((\aii'o rris ifirjs aiiBMas 
 unhappy me, for my self-willt (EMed.1027). 
 
244 DATIVE OF INDIRECT OBJECT. [762 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 762, The dative is commonly connected with verbs and adjectives. It 
 denotes properly the relations expressed in English by to and for ; but be- 
 sides tills, it has the uses of an instrumental and a locative ease, which in 
 Latin belong mostly to the ablative. 
 
 We distinguish: 
 
 1. Dative oftlie Indirect Object (that to which). 
 
 3. Dative of Interest (tliat for which"). 
 
 3. Dative of Association and Likeness (that with which). 
 
 4. Dative of Instniment, Means, Cause, Jlf«ra«CT' (that J;/ which). 
 
 5. Dative of Time and Place (that at or in which). 
 
 Dative of the Indirect Object. 
 
 763. The indirect object of an action is put in the dative : 
 e8(i)K6 Kiipiii ■)^rifi,a.Ta he gave money to Gyrus, Soku /j,ol it seems 
 to me. 
 
 764. The indirect object is generally indicated in English by to. 
 It is used : 
 
 1. With many transitive verbs, along with the direct object in the 
 accusative ; especially those meaning to give, send, entrust, promise, 
 say, advise and the lilie : 
 
 TT7 ffrpaTt^ aTreBwKe Kvpos ^tuT&hv TsTTapuv firfi/wv Oi/rus paid the armi/ four 
 months^ wages (XA.1.2''^), 6ij>el\eiv flcf! Bv<rlds to owe sacrifices to a god (PRp. 
 331''), Kiyeiv Tttvra Tois aTpaTtdrais to tell litis to t/ie soldiers (XA.1.4"). 
 
 a. With the passive, the direct object of the action becomes the subject 
 of the verb, while the dative remains unchanged : iKelvtp aSriii if X'^P"' ^^^^V 
 to him this country had been given (XH.3.1'). 
 
 3. With many intransitive verbs, as those of seeming, belonging, 
 yielding, etc. Here belong verbs signifying to please, profit, trust, 
 aid, obey, serve, befit, and their contraries ; also verbs denoting disposi- 
 tion toward any one, as anger, envy, favor, threats ; although the cor- 
 responding English verbs are for the most part transitive (712 a). 
 
 ^vfupopais ^aaov iripav e^Ko/jifv toe yield to misfortunes less than others (T.l .84), 
 Xapi(ifiLems Tjj iirtBOiUa gratifying h's desire (PRp.Sfll"), irl&revov aiirqi at 
 ir6\ets the cities trusted him (XA.1.9^), i86Kei avrcis virovpyeTv tois ^upa.Koo'iots 
 it seemed to tluim best to aid the Syracusans (T.G.SS), rm vS/xy tSi u^uerf'pw 
 ireltro/iai I will obey your law (XA.V.S''), rh ixriSiv aSiKui/ iratriv avepdnrots 
 npeirei to do no ivrong beseems all men (M.iv.293), ol h\ (TTpaTLwrai ^x^^^^aii^ov 
 ToTs a-TpttTTiyoTs but the soldiers were enraged at the generals (XA.1.4''^), (pSovovaiv 
 kavTols fjLaWav ^ rots &Wois avSpiinois tJiey envy each other rather than the rest 
 of mankind (XM.3.5"). 
 
 b. Note the following constructions : hviM^ew rivi (or rivet) reproach some 
 one, often uvftBi^eiv ri tlvi cast something in one's teeth ; so ^Tr^Tlpt^v i^iyKaKiw) 
 
768] DATIVE OF INTEREST. 245 
 
 ri rtut. \ot5ope7y Ttyd and \otSopeT(r9at rat both mean revile some one ; Tifucpeir 
 (rarely TifuopfTaSai) rtj/i means avenge some one, TinapfiaBat (rarely Tiiiapuy] 
 Tiyo take vengeance on, punish some one. Cf. also 712 h. 
 
 765. The dative is used with adjectives kindred in meaning to 
 verbs which take the dative of the indirect object : 
 
 Sttoxos Tois fleois subject to the gods (XA.2.6'), cnrpeiriis tpiKa^tv unbecoming 
 to puanlums (PRp.398"), v6ijlois ivavnos in opposition to tlie laws (D.B''), 
 ipiKos fiaa-iKei friencUi/ to tlie king (XA..2.1'"), Suiruefijs 6/uv Iwstile to you 
 (XH.2.3n 
 
 a. Even some substantives expressing action may take this dative : Siapa 
 ToTs flcotj gifts to the gods (PEuthyph.15'), ri i/iii t^ flc^i wTTjpcfffd mg service 
 to the divinity (PAp.3ii»). The same substantive may have also a genitive: 
 KoraSoiKoxris tSiv 'EAA^vaiy 'Mnvaiois subjugation of tlie Greeks to the Athenians 
 (T.3.10). 
 
 Dative of Interest. 
 
 766. The dative denotes, in general, that for which something is, 
 or is done. Of this dative there are several kinds, as follows : 
 
 767. Dative op Advantage ob Disadvantage. — The per- 
 son or thing to whose advantage or disadvantage anything 
 tends is put in the dative : •y£yev^o-^at t^ TrarplSi to be born for 
 one^s country. 
 
 So with verbs and adjectives : at ^ti\avQi twv (^oiviKtav rots otKirais ane- 
 KeiifTo the dates ipere laid aside for the slaves (XA.2.3'^), (rTs<pavov<r6ai t^ 6e^ to 
 be crowned in 7ionor of the god (XH.4.3"), fieyd\ii)v irpa.yiJi.iTai/ xaipoi trpoktuTai 
 TTi v6\ii opportunities for great deeds have been thrown away for (to the detri- 
 ment of) the t^tg (D.19'), icrwdvi(oy Tpo(pT)s tois iroAAoTs iJiei/ lacked provisions 
 for tlie most (T.4.6), oury (ro<p6s wise for /(i«wc//'(MMon.332), xp^<^'l">s a^Spa- 
 TTots useful for men (PRp.389''). 
 
 a. Such a dative is sometimes used where in English from would be said. 
 Thus in poetry with Sexofiai : S4^aT6 ol irK?)irTpov he took from him the staff 
 (B 186). And regularly with a/xiva ward off; which is e.ven used with dative 
 alone, as ifiiveiv rp Tr6\ei to defend tlie city. 
 
 768. Dative op the Possessor. — With elfil, ylyvofiai, and similar 
 verbs, the possessor is expressed by the dative : 
 
 ^A-Aois xP^P^'^a ^^"^^ others have treasure (T.1.86), irpoySvayv ^vpidbes eKdffTtp 
 yey6va<ri every man has Juid myriads of ancestors (PTheaet.175*). The verb 
 may be omitted : t^ Trarpl TlvpiKdixwris uvo/m (sc. ^irW, the father has Pyri- 
 lampes as his name) the fatlier's name is Pyrilampes (PPar.126''). 
 
 a. The possessor is more properly expressed by the genitive (732 a) : the 
 dative denotes rather one who has something for his use and service. 
 
 b. The dative, in this use, is sometimes found in connection with s:ubstan- 
 lives: ol ai^i p6es their cattle (Hd.1.31), oi &vBpanroi iv twj KTri/idTai/ toTs Beois 
 etVi men are one of the possessions belonging to the gods (PPhaed.62''). 
 
246 DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION. [769 
 
 769. Datitb of the Agent. — With the perfect and pluperfect 
 passive, the agent is sometimes expressed by the dative (instead of 
 xmo with the genitive); the dative implies that the person has the 
 thing done, as for liimself : 
 
 tA TotJr^ Treirpdy^eifa file things done by him (D.29'),.^W6(5^ ai/ToTs irapeffKei- 
 affTo when their preparations liad been inade (T.1.46). 
 
 a. With other passive tenses this dative is much less frequent : Ta\ri6h 
 avSpdmounv oix flipi<rKeTm the truth is not found by men (MMon.OIl). 
 
 b. With verbals in -reos, the agent is regularly expressed by the dative, 
 see 991. 
 
 770. Ethicax Dative. — The personal pronouns, implying a remote 
 interest, are used in colloquial language to impart a lively and familiar 
 tone to the sentence : 
 
 Toirtf! Trim fwi irpoaix^TS rhv vovv to this attend carefully (for me) / pray 
 you (D.18^''^), t( aot im64\ffop.ai; (what shall I learn for you) V)Jiat would you 
 have me learn? (ArNub.lll), afiovfrSrepot y^vi](rovTai vfuv ol veoi your young 
 men will become ruder, i. c, you will find them becoming so (PKp.SiB"). 
 
 771. Dative op Interest nsr iooseb kblatioks. — The dative may 
 denote one in whose mew, or in relation to whom, something is true : 
 
 6 fxef yhp eird\hs euye^'^y ^fioi 7* av^p the honest man is noble in my vieio, 
 (EFrag.345), v7ro\afi0dvsiv Set rtp Toioircp oti ^irfidris eari in the case of such a 
 man, one must suppose thai he is simple (PRp.598''), rfBvnx' v/iTv irdAai / am 
 long since dead to you (SPhil.1030), ^toKpdrTjs 4S6k€i rlfiiis &^ios elvai TJJ ir6\et 
 Socrates seemed to be worthy of honor (in relation to) from the city (XM.1.2^'). 
 
 a. In these constructions a participle in the dative is frequently used : 4irA 
 ?iv rifxepa TTE^Trrr) iwnr\fOvin to7s 'ABiivalois wlien (it was the fifth day for the 
 Athenians sailing out) the Athenians sailed out for battle for the fifth day 
 (XH.2.1^'). A feeling is often so expressed; et iKelycp ^ovKofievtp toOt' iffrlv 
 if that is according/ to his wish (XH.4.1^^), ^TraveKGcofjLev, eH (Tot 7jSofj.€vift iari let 
 us go back, if it is your pleasure to do so (PPhaed.78^). 
 
 b. Such a participle may be used without a substantive ; thus in expres- 
 sions of place : 'EiriSa^itj'iis ^ffri ttSkis ep Se^t^ etnrKeovTt rhv *l6yiov K6\irov 
 Epidamnus is a city on the right (to one sailing) as you sail into the Ionian gulf 
 (T.1.24). So the phrase cvveXivri (or S>s cvpeKivTi) e'nreiv to say it briefly (lit. 
 tor one to say it, having brought tlie matter to a point). 
 
 Dative of Association and Likeness. 
 
 772. The dative is used with -words of association or oppo- 
 sition to denote that ioith which something is, or is done : 
 thus o/xlXeiv Tots KaKoli to associate with the had, fiax^cOai ruxg 
 to fight loith fortune. 
 
 Here are included verbs of approaehiTig, meeting, accompanying, fol- 
 lowing, communicating, mixing, reconciling ; warring, quarrelling, and 
 like ideas: 
 
11i] DATIVE OF LIKEN ES8. 247 
 
 ouS^ ireXourixi oi6v t' ^y ttJ €f{r(JS<^ it was impossible even to get near tlie 
 entrance (XA.4.2'), airoi/Ta t^ HEV0(/)aJyTi E!iK\elSjts Evclides meets Xenophon 
 (XA.7.8'), 'iireaBai Sfui/ 0ov\oiiai J am willing to follow you (XA.3.1''), Kotvuvfiv 
 iXKi\\ois ir6miv to participate with one another in toils (PLg.BSe"), buoKoyfiv 
 aW-fiKois to agree with one another (PCrat.436''), Ste\ey€(rBr)v aW^Aoic they 
 were talking with each other (PEuthyd.273''), Kcpdffai rriv icpiivriv oivtfi to mingle 
 the spring with loirae (XA.1.2'2), xph KariiKKayrivai iri\iv Tri\ei dtg mxtst be 
 reconciled with dty (T.4.61), TroAt/neii' Tur<raif>ipvii to be at war with Tissa- 
 pjiemes (XA.l.l*), a^tfrnr^nrotjo'L fiey St' etii/otav ot ipi\oi Tots (^fXois, ipt^ovfft S^ 
 ol ix^pol o\\r)A.ois fncnih dispute goodnaturedly with friends, but enemies quar- 
 rel with one another (PProt.SSY"), Tors Trorrtpoh Sio(()epe<r9oi to be at variance 
 with the bad (XM.2.9S). 
 
 a. So with phrases : 0ouKeu6fi.eSa airoLS Sia <pt\lds Uvai we iniend to be oil 
 friendly tej'ms with tJiem (XA.3.2''), els \6yous (xe'tpas) ^pxeffdai Tivi to come 
 to words {blows) with any one (T.8.48 ; 7.44). 
 
 b. Also with adjectives of like meaning, and even substantives : miXouBos 
 6s!f conform,able to God{Phg.1\6'), Kotumvla toij avSpdin participation with men 
 (PKp.466°). Sidipopos with dative means at variance^ with genitive differtmt. 
 
 c. Here belong the adverbs S^a at the same time, d/iov together, ife^ns next 
 in order: o/iio ry riixip^ at day-break (XA.2.1'), rh SSup ^Tricexo dfiov rlf in}kip 
 the loater taas di-unk along with the mud (T.7.84), to to^tou i^e^ris rin'iv AettreoK 
 we must say what comes next to this (PTim.30°). 
 
 773. Words of likeness or unlikeness take the dative : o/toios 
 T(p dSsX.4"? ^^^^^ ^*** brother. 
 
 Except €oiKo am like, these are chiefly adjectives, or words derived from 
 adjectives ; 4\Aa t^i\oa6;fiu> eoucas. Si vtaviaKe lohy, you seem like a philosopher, 
 young man (XA.2.1^^), ou Set Xffov tx^^^ ''"O"^ KaKohs to?s ayaBols the bad must 
 not have equality with the good (XO.2.3^), SoKeT tovto TrapaTr\4ja't6if ti eJvai t^ 
 'Aa^Tudi/aKTi this name seems to be similar to Astyanax (PCrat.iigS"), & Triirvos 
 Te ttol Sudyu/MS 4noC my grandfatlier, and of the same name with me (PRp.330''), 
 Ti dfioiovv eaurhv &\\(p lupietaBai icri to make one's self like to another is to 
 imitate (PRp.393'=), aKK-fiKois Iwoixaiuis in a way unlike each other (PTim.36*). 
 
 a. On this principle 6 avror the same takes the dative : to avTo tw 
 t]\id'L<o the same thing as foolishness (XA.3.6''^), wTrXto-ficVoi ^trav to'is 
 aliTols Ku/jo) oirXots they were armed with the same weapons as Gyrus 
 (XC.?.!"). ' 
 
 b. The comparison is often abridged (cf. 643 c) : Sfioidv rats Soi\ais eJx^ 
 t})v itrdnra (for S/jioldv rri tSiv iovKSiv iffSrJTi) she had lier dress like (the dress 
 of) the slave-girls (XO.5.1^). Cf. the second example in a. 
 
 774, With other words a dative of accompaniment is used, chiefly 
 in statements of military forces : fifius Km 1-mrois toIs SwaraTaTois Koi 
 av'^^aari Tvopev&jieda let us go with horses the most powerful and with men 
 (XC.5.3»»). 
 
 a. Like this is the use of the dative with ahT6s : Terrapas vavs ^\o;8oj' outoij 
 av^piai they took four ships, crews and all, literally, with the crews themselves 
 (XH.1.2'*), TToXXofcr 6\67oc avTols Tols lititois KaTaKpniiivurBrivai tliey said thai 
 many had been thj-own over precipices, horses and all (XC.1.4'). 
 
248 DATIVE WITH OOMFOUNDS. [VT6 
 
 Dative loith Compound Verbs. 
 
 775. Many verbs compounded with eV, (tvv, liri, and some 
 compounded with wpds, irapa, ircpi, vm, take a dative depend- 
 ing ou the preposition : 
 
 iTrurritii-qv ifimoittii TJ) if/uxS tc produce knowledge in the soul (XM.2.1"'), 
 <ruj/6iro\€(H€i K'jp'j) Trpis aiiriv lie joined Ci/rus in the war affaitist him (XA.1.4'^), 
 iiriKelirSai roh Sia^almucrt to press hard upon them while croRsing (XA.4.3'), 
 irpoa^xBiiii Tip 5-^/i'fi to come before the people (D.18"), irapdrrao-Sai aXK'hXois 
 to stand bg one another (XH.6.5'8), vapea-fnev <roi toe are with you (XA.6.4™), 
 Trepiiriirreii' |uju(/)opa?s to (fall about) be involved in misfortunes (PLg.SYV), 
 vvoKiiadai Tw ipxavTi to be subject to tlie ruler (PGo.ClO"). 
 
 a. Sometimes the same preposition is repeated before the object : TrdpeffTi 
 TTop' V'>'(SPhil.l056). 
 
 b. Distinct from these are the compounds which take the dative on 
 account of their general meaning, according to the foregoing rules. 
 
 Dative of Instrument, Means, Cause, Manner. 
 
 776. The dative is used to denote the means or instrument, 
 the cause, and the manner : as opav rots o^^aX/Aois to see loith 
 the eyes, piyet airoXea-Oai to perish hy cold, ^(wpiiv Sp6[ji,<a to ad- 
 vance at a run. 
 
 Further examples : 
 
 Mrans or Instroment ; ouSeIs tiraivov r)Soi/a!s ^kt^uoto no one gets praise 
 b>/ pleasures (Ga.TC.fr.1), xph Tepl rai> iieXXivToiv reKixaipeadai toTs ^Sij ysyevrifii- 
 vois we must judge of the future bg what has already liappeiied (1.6^''), yvwffOivT^s 
 ttJ (fKivri TO)V ^rirXmv recognized by the fashion of their arms (T. 1.8), Qavwrt^ 
 ^riixiotJv to punish by death (XC.6.3''^'), A.(flois ifioKXov they pelted them wUh 
 stones (XA.5.4'^). 
 
 Cause : ajvoia 4laiiaprdyov(rt they err by reason of ignorance (XC.3.1™), 
 i)7oCj/Toi 7/;u5j (^i^if ouK iirUmt they think we do not attack them through fear 
 {T.5.97), ouSeis ouS^i/ vevia, Spiffet none will do aught because of want (ArEccl.605). 
 
 Manner : Toirtj} t^ Tp6irQ> iiropevB-nanv in this way they proceeded (XA.3.4'''"), 
 Kpauyri jroWri iirlaffi they advance with loud outcry (XA.i.7''), &TcA.er TJi viiqi 
 &vetrTri<rav they retired with their victory incomplete (T.8.27), rixv ayaBri Kcnap- 
 Xerai let him begin (with good luck) and may fortune favor it (PSym.111'). 
 So |8(if by force, forcibly, <rXy^ silently, o-irouSij hastily, earnestly. 
 
 The following are special uses of this dative : 
 
 777. The verb xpf^o/"" ''^^ (properly serve myself) takes the dative 
 (of means), as in Latin utor takes the ablative : Xtiym xp^"'"'" tli'^ '^se 
 reason (XM..S.S^^). 
 
 a. A predicate-noun is often added in the same case : Toirois xpavrat 
 iopv!p6pois these they use as body-guards (XHier.6''). The accusative of a neuter 
 pronoun specifies the use made of an object (of. 716 b) : t( /SoiiXeroi riijuii 
 XpV'f9at; for what does he want to use us S (XA,1.3"j. 
 
781] DATIVE OF INSTRUMENT, MEANS, ETC. 249 
 
 778. The dative of cause is used with many verbs of feeling ; thus 
 r/Sofxai, ;(at/D<a am pleased, a)^6ofiat am vexed, dyavoKTeai am indignant, 
 XaKeTraivo) am angry, alirxivoiiai am ashamed : 
 
 oiSivX oStm x^h^'^ ""s <pl\ois ayaSois you deligltt in nothing so much as in 
 good friends (XM.2.635), oxfleo-flelj TJj arajSoAf vexed at the delay (XH.l.e'), tiJ> 
 'EKaTuyv/iC(t ;^;cAe^^o£l'ol^€s rois etpTjfievois angry with Hecatonymus foi' what he 
 had said (XA.6.6''"'), altrx^votnai toi toij irp6Tepoi' a/jLaprlais I am ashamed of 
 my former errors (ArEq 1355), d7airo)>'Tes ttj iraynjpl^ being eontent viUh tlieit 
 safety (Lys.2*'), xo^ffois <p4pw toss vapovat irpayfucuri I am distressed at tlie 
 present occurrences (XA.1.3'). 
 
 a. But all these verbs take also iwi with the dative (799, 2 d). For the 
 genitive with some similar verbs, see 744. 
 
 779. a. As dative of manner are used several feminine forms with omitted 
 substantive (cf. 622 and 283) : raiirp (iKfiyp, f, wjj) in this {that, which, what) 
 way or manner, iSi§ (Srnioirif, koikJ) by individual (public, common) action or 
 expense. 
 
 b. This dative often means according to : Toirtp t^ K6yiji according to this 
 statement, tj iixfi yviirp in my judgment, tt) &Ar)9e(oi in truth, t^ iti/Ti in reality, 
 epya in act, in fad, \6yif in word, in profession, irpotpdiTft in pretence. 
 
 e. Note the peculiar dative with S^xopiat : rS>v Tr6Kea>v oil Sexofn-fvcoy aliTobs 
 hyop^ ouSc Sirrei, 85aTi 5e Kol Sp/i^ as the cities did not admit them to market 
 nor town, but {otdy) to water and anchorage (T.6.44). 
 
 780. Dative op Respect. — The dative of manner is used to show in what 
 particular point or respect something is true : Sia^fpeiv dpcTTJ to be distin- 
 guished in virtue (PCharm.157'), iVxJe"' toTj <Tiiiia<ri to be strong in their bodies 
 (XM.2.7''), Tats ^vxats ep^oififvea-Tfpoi firmer in their spirit (XA.3.1^^), rh 
 •irpffTTeiv Tov \4yeiv iiffTepov hy T?i Tt£|ti irp6repoiJ ttJ Swdfjiei effri action, though 
 after speech in order, is before it in power (D.S"). This use of the dative is 
 very like the accusative of specification (718). 
 
 a. So even with predicate or appositive substantives : ir6Kts QdifioKos ovS/uuti 
 a city Thapsacus by name (XA.1.4"). 
 
 781. Dative of DEaREs of Difference. — The dative of manner 
 is used, especially with the comparative, to show the degree by which 
 one thing differs from another : 
 
 T^ Ke<pa\^ fielCwv (taller by the head) a head taller (PPhaed.lOl*), iroWoTs 
 ■yfi/eais Sarepa tSiv TpmKuv many generations later than the Trojan war 
 (T.1.14), 56KO ?Tf(ri irph Trjs iv SaKaiitm mu/mxtas ten years before the sea-fight 
 at Salamis (PLg.698»). 
 
 a. So, very often, the dative of neuter adjectives : ivoWtp by much, fjuutpip 
 by far, oKiyif by little, etc., iroKK^ x^'p*"' w*^'* vorse, rip iravrl Kpe^TToii/ (better 
 by all odds) infiriiiely better, ■jr6(rtp /wWov Uv pLlaolaBe; how much more would you 
 be hated? (0.19''*), Toao\iTip %Slov CS> o<rw irXfiie (ce'/cTrjfiai / live more pleasantly 
 (by that degree, by which) the more I possess (XC.8.S'"'). — But the accusatives 
 t(, oiSev, firiSey are always used instead of their datives ; and sometimes iroA.iJ, 
 0X^70*'. 
 
 b. The dative occurs also with the superlative, fiaKp$ 6,puTTos best by far. 
 
■Z5d PREPOSITIONS. [782 
 
 Dative of Time and Place. 
 
 782, Dative of Time. — The dative is used to denote the- 
 time at which something is, or is done : tjJ va-Tepaia. on the 
 following day. 
 
 This applies to statements of the particular day., night, month, year ; an 
 attributive, therefore, must always be used with the substautive : tj) aWri 
 r\iiipi tlui .tame day, TTJSe rri vuktI io-night, tS) iiridvTi fiTjvi in the coming mo7dh 
 (I'Lg.YOY"), TeTapTQ) €T6i in the fonrt/i year (T.l. 103) ;— also to S>pi. x^^f-'^'"'^ 
 Sipi in time of winter (Andoc.l'*') ; — further to festival times ; @eaiio(poplois 
 at the Thesmophoria (ArAv.l5]9i. 
 
 a. To other words, iv is added : ej/ rourtp ry XP^^V ^^ ^^^^*^ time, ^v tu •jrap6vTi 
 at the present time. This is rarely omitted : Tji irporep^ ixxXriirli at the time 
 of the former assembly (T.1.44), xei/icpfm v6t(ji at the time of the iciutry south 
 wind (SAut.335). 
 
 783, Dative of Place. — In poetry, the dative is often used with- 
 out a jjrepositlon, to denote the ]3lace in which something is, or is done : 
 
 'E\\a5( oXxia valojv in Hellas inhabiting dwellings (IT 595), ttiv t' o&pea'i 
 rinTovEs iivSpES it^irajiov which on the mountains builders felled (N 390), e'jSe 
 p.vxtfi K\t(rirjs he slumbered in the corner of the tent (I 663), T(f|' ta^oitrtv exwv 
 bearing the bow on his shou'ders (A 45). 
 
 a. Here belongs the poetical dative with verbs of ruling: Ilm. Ta(ploi(ri, 
 <t>t\ripeTp.Oi(riv avaffffa among the oar-loving Taphians I reign (a 181). 
 
 b. In prose, the names of Attic demes, and very rarely those of other 
 places, are thus used in the dative: Mt^Xlrrj at Melite {Isae.ll'^-), 7h rp6iraia 
 TO, re MapaSai'i Koi SaXafuyi Kai nAaTciais the trophies at Marathon, Salamis, 
 and Plataea (PMenex.'248''). 
 
 c. The dative in this use has the office of the old locative case. For the 
 surviving forms of the locative itself, see 220. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THEIR CASES. 
 
 784, Tlie prepositions have a twofold use : 
 
 1. In composition with verbs, they define the action of the verb. 
 
 3. As separate words, connected with particular cases, they show 
 the relations of words in a sentence, more distinctly than the cases 
 alone could do it. 
 
 a. The name preposition (Trp69€(ris) is derived from the former use. Such 
 words, therefore, as Svcu without, irX^x except, etc , which are not compounded 
 with verbs, are not really prepositions at all. They are sometimes called 
 improper prepositions. They all take the genitive (758), except ij, which 
 takes the accusative (722 a). 
 
 785. All the prepositions were originally adverbs. Many of them are still 
 used as such in poetry, especially in Hm. : irepl round about, exceedingly (in 
 
788] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 251 
 
 the sense exceedingly some write Tre'pi) ; avv Si and therewith. Hd. has ^irl Si 
 and thereupon, fiera 8e and next, iv Si and among the number ; also vphs Se, 
 Kal Trp6s and besides, which occur even iu Attic prose. 
 
 a. The prepositiou may belong to itrri or eiV( (rarely ci/ifj understood, and 
 may thus stand for a compound verb : so, even in Attic prose, ^vt for ivfari 
 it is possible ; in Attic poetry, ird.pa for trdpea-Ti is at hand, iriipeifit I am here, 
 Hm. has also eiri, /neVo, for eireo-Ti, jueVeffTi, etc. For retraction of the accent 
 {anastrophe) in this case, see 1U9 b. 
 
 786, On account of this origin, the prepositions in Hm. are very free as 
 regards their position, being often separated from the verbs (tmesis, 580 a) 
 or substantives to which they belong : iv S' airhs iSiasTO viipoim x"^''^" and 
 he himself put on the shining brass (B 578), o/icpl Se x""'"' ii/«ois aiaffovrai and 
 round their shoulders wave the manes (Z 509J. 
 
 a. In Attic prose, the preposition is separated from its substantive only 
 by words that qualify the substantive : but particles such as juev, Si, yi, re, 
 ydp, oZv, may be interposed after the preposition ; other words very rarely : 
 iropa yap 6t/iat robs v6/iovs for contrary, J suppose, to the laws (PPol.30 )''). 
 
 b. The regular order of words rhv iiey avSpa (666 c) generally changes with 
 a preposition to irphs fiiv rhv ivSpa or irphs riic &i/Spa jxiv. 
 
 Use of different eases with the prepositions. 
 
 787i In general, the dative is used with prepositions, to express 
 ieing in a particular situation ; the accusative, for coming to it ; the 
 genitive, for passing from it : pivet napa ra /3acn\f i he remains (by the . 
 side of) in the presence of the Jcing, iJKfi nap' airov he is come to his pres- 
 ence, oix^erai nap' airov he is gone from his presence. 
 
 a. But there are exceptions to this : thus the- accusative sometimes ex- 
 presses extension over an object : koto &iTTa\iav throug/iout Thessaly ; and 
 the genitive sometimes mere belonging to or connection with an object : nph 
 Twv TtvKuv before the gales. 
 
 788. Verbs of motion sometimes have a preposition with the dative, 
 to denote a state of rest following the action of the verb : iv t£ norapa 
 enea-ov they fell (into, and wore) in the riiier (XAges.l"'). So too, with 
 verbs of rest, we sometimes have a preposition with the accusative 
 or genitive, because of an implied idea of motion : crras els pia-ov 
 (lit. standing into the midst) coming into the midst and standing there 
 (Hd.3.62), Ka6!)p.ed' uxpav tK ndywv we sat (and looked down)/ro»i the 
 top of a hill (8Ant.411). This is called constructio praegnans. 
 
 a. Similarly 6 ix is often said for S iv when the verb of the sentence im- 
 plies removal ; oi 4k t^s hyopas KarahtTrivres rti lovia iipvyov tlw market-people 
 (those in the market) left their goods and fled (XA.1.2'*). 
 
 b. These principles apply to adverbs: oirot KaOiara/iei/ whither (arrived) we 
 Sta7id (SOc.23), dycoci rhv iKf78ev niXfpiov Sevpo ii^ovra (for t)>v ixe! wiXiitov) 
 A« knoivs not that tlie war in that region viill come hither (D.!"). 
 
 c. Phrases meaning from are used (as in Latin) to denote position with 
 respect to the observer : ck Sc^ias (a dexira) on the right, fKaTepaiBev on either 
 hand, tvBtv koI ivBev on this side and on that. 
 
252 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. f?89 
 
 General View of the Prepositions. 
 
 789. In Attic prose the prepositions are used as follows : 
 With the Accusative only : dva, ek. 
 
 With the Genitive only : avri, diro, l^, Trpo. 
 
 With the Dative only : Iv and a-uv. 
 
 With the Accusative and Genitive: dyu,<^t, 8id, /card, ii-era, virip. 
 
 With the Accusative, Genitive and Dative : iirt, Trapd, -n-epi, 
 
 7r/30S, VTTO. 
 
 a. In poetry, iva, afiipl and fifTa are also used with the dative ; and afKpi 
 is so used by Herodotus. 
 
 790. The meaning of the prepositions with the different cases is explained 
 in sections 791-808. The beginner, however, should note especially the fol- 
 lowing 
 
 Commonest DiSTrNCxioNS or MBANnsro. 
 
 d/i0i and rrcpi: with genitive concerning ; with accus. around, about, 
 8id : with genitive thro-ugh ; with accus. on account of. 
 (card : with genitive against ; with accus. along, over, according to. 
 p.fTa : with genitive loitli ; with accus. after. 
 vTTip : with genitive ahme, in helialf of; with accus. over, beyond. 
 eVi : with genitive and dative on ; with accus. to, toward, for. 
 irapd: with genitive from; with dative with, near ; with accus. to, 
 contrary to. 
 
 irpos : with gen. on the side of; with dat. at, besides; with ace. to, toward. 
 vn-6 : with genitive by, under ; with dative and aecua under. 
 
 Use of the Prepositions, 
 
 791. ap(l)'i. (Lat. amb-) properly on both sides of (ci. Sptjico both), 
 hence about (cf. nepi, 803). 
 
 1 . With genitive, about, concerning, rare in prose : afup] Sy eTx"" SincfiepiJ- 
 fievot guarrelUng about what tliey had (XA.4.5"). 
 
 Very rarely of place : ItfiipX rairi^s rfis v6kios (about) in the neighborhood 
 of this city (nd.S.lOi). 
 
 2. With dative, only Tonic and poetic, about, and hence concerning, on 
 acco-unt of: i^piii(rei reXa^lbv &fi<p\ a-T-^dea-a-t the shield-strap will sweat about 
 his breast (B 388), hji^X atrihif ttj ^/irj wetaroiiai rot concerning my departure, 
 I ivill obey you (Hd.5.19), afiipX <\)6fite l)y reason of fear (EOr.82B). 
 
 3. With accdsatite, about, of place, time, etc. : &/i<fl ri Spio (about) close 
 to the boundaries (XC.2 4"), a/x^X fxeffov rifiipas cdiout midday (XA.4.4'), i/Kfl ret 
 TTE^/T^Ksj/To about fifty (XA.2.6"), djui()l hiiinov Hx^v lie was Imsy about dinner 
 (XC.6.5"). 
 
796] PREPOSITIONS WITH CASES. 253 
 
 Phrases : oi iii(pl nva a person with those about him, his friends, followers, 
 soldiers, etc. 
 
 In COMPOSITION : about, on both sides. 
 
 792. ava originally up (opposed to Kara). 
 
 1. With datite, only in Epic and lyric poetry, upon: avi, rapydpy ixptu 
 on the summit of Gargarus (O 152), xP"<f^V ""« (ndiir-rpai upon a golden staj" 
 (A 15). 
 
 2. With accdsatite, up along ; passing over, through (of. Kara with ace, 
 800, 2) : 
 
 a. Of place: ava irMTav ri/y yfiv over the whole land (XAges.9'), ora (rrpaT6v 
 through the camp (A 10), ava rhv iroTajdv up tJie river (IId.2.96). 
 
 b. Of time: avb. itaaav riiiipav evei-g dai/ {XG.l.2\ Hm. di/o vixra through 
 the niglU (H 80). 
 
 c. In distributive expressions : ivo IkotiJi/ 6y /turetfi-ctfe (XA.6.4"). 
 Phrases: avA. Kparos (up to his power) ii'ith all his might (XA.1.10'^), ava 
 
 \6yov according to propurlion (PPhaed.llO'*), dyo o-rif/uo ^x^iv to /uzve in one^s 
 mouth, to talk about (B 250). 
 
 In composition ; up, back, again. 
 
 avrC. 
 
 793. avTi instead of, for. 
 
 With genitive only : avrX rqs apxns SovKeidv aK\d^a7dai in exchange for 
 empire, to get slavery (Andoc.2''^). 
 
 a. The original meaning, facing, opposite to, was lost, except in composition. 
 In composition : against, in opposition to, in return. 
 
 794, aTTo (Lat. ab) from, off, away from (properly from a position 
 on something). 
 
 With genitive only: 
 
 a. Of place : Hm. a</>' tirwuv olKto xa^^C^ from tlve (horses) car lie sprang 
 to the ground (n 73.3), tup' Ijttou Bripeveiv to hunt (from a horse) on horseback 
 (XA.1.2'). 
 
 b. Of time : diri Toiixou toC xp^fO" (from) since that time (XA.Y.5*). 
 
 c. Of cause : airh (v/jLiiaxlas a'jT6vo/i,oi independent from the terms of an 
 alliance {T.'1.51), diri ^vve^iiaTos 'i'ik^i he is come by agreetneni (T.6.61). 
 
 Phrases: airh (TKortoii away from the mark, amiss (PTheaet.l'79'=), ajrh tovto- 
 fidrou (from self-moved action) wilhoul occasion, of itself {Ae.l'^''), iirb (TT6ixaros 
 eiVtri/ to repeal by fieart, lit., from mouth (XSym.3'). 
 
 In composition : from, away. 
 
 Std. 
 
 795. Sid (Lat. di-, dis-) through (originally between, asunder). 
 1. With genitive: 
 
 a. Of place : Hm. Sid /xev a(rirlSos ^\6e (jyastvrjs ufipiiiov lyxos through tlie 
 shining shield passed the slout spear (H 251). 
 
254 PREPOSITIONS WITH OASES [796 
 
 b. Of time : Sii vvkt6s throuqh the night (XA.4.6'''). 
 
 c. Of means ; Si' kpurivias \fyeiv to speak by an interpreter (XA.2.S"). 
 
 d. Of a state of action or feeling : outoTj 8ia 7ra\e/iou Uvai to proceed (in the 
 way of war) in a hostile manner iuiaard them (XA.S.2'), 5io ipdfiav ylyve<rBai 
 to come to be in a state of alarm (PLg.791''). 
 
 e. Siii witli tlie genitive often denotes an interval of space or time ; 5ia 
 fumpoS after a long interval (T.6.1B), Sio TCTpaKoirltov iriiy after (an interval of) 
 400 years (1.6^^), Sia SeVo eird\^ewv nvpyot ^trav at intervals of ten battlements^ 
 there were towers (T.3.21). 
 
 Phrases: 5io irTifjuaTos ^x"" '<• '"•"* '" one's mouth, i. e., passing through 
 the mouth (XC.l.i''), Sm x^'P^s cxeiv to have in hand (T.2.13), Sio raxfop 
 (by quick ways) quickly (XA.1.5'), Sm reKovs completeh/ (SAj.685). 
 
 2. With acohsatite : ' 
 
 a. Regularly! on account of: 810 v6aov toS iwrpov (filxos on account of sick- 
 ness he is fond of t/te physician (PLys.218^). 
 
 b. Through, during, mostly poetic : Hm. Sih Siiii.aTa through the halls (A 600), 
 Sia vvKTa during the night (t 66). 
 
 Phrases: airhs Si' kavT6v by and for himself (P'R^.Z&'J^), Sih, ri; why, wliere- 
 fore ? 
 
 In composition : through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-) : Suupipa = differo. 
 
 Els. 
 
 796. Elf (also «) into, to (properly to a position in something, op- 
 posed to e'l oiit of) = Lat. in with accusative. 
 With accusative only : 
 
 a. Of place : SiKf\o\ e'f 'lTo\(as Siefiniirav is SmeKtay the Siculi passed over 
 from Italy into Sicily (T.6.2), ets &v3pa5 iyypaipew to enrol among men, i. e., 
 write into the list of men (D.19™). 
 
 b. Of time: h iiu till dawn (\ 376), is ifie to my time (Hd.1.92), eis 
 iviavT6v (to the end of a year) for a whole year (k 467). An action may be 
 thought of as taking place when a certain time is come to ; hence cis is also 
 used for the time when, especially a fixed or expected time : iSSxet ykp eh 
 riiv iwtovcrav ew ^i^etv ySairiX^d for it was thought that on the next morning the 
 king would arrive (XA.l.V). 
 
 c. Of other relations : eh TerpaKOfflovs to the number of 4OO, about 4OO 
 (XA.3.3°), eh OKTii to the depth of eight men, eight deep (XA.7.I''), eh Sivafiiv 
 to the extent of one's powei- (XA.2.,S''), TraiSciieii/ avBpdirovs eis Aper^j/ to train 
 men with a view to virtue (PGfo.B19"), is riKos finally (Elon 1261). 
 
 In composition : into, in, to. 
 
 Note. — Fn Attic prose, eh is the common form : only Thucydides (like Hd.) 
 has is. The poets use either form at pleasure. 
 
 iv. 
 IQl. iv (Hm. evt) in, = Lat. in with the ablative. 
 With dative only: 
 
 a. Of place : iv SWpTj; in Sparta (T.1.128): — with a word implying num- 
 ber, it has the sense of among : iv toIs <pl\ois among their friends (XA.6.4''). 
 
 b. Of time : iv t$ xf'M'"'" *"" *''^ painter (X0ec.l7'). 
 
 u. Of other relations : iv tQ BeSi rh TeKos ^v (in the power of) vnth Ood 
 was the issue (D.18'"), iv TapairKivfi elvai to be i-a. preparation (T.2.80). 
 
799] PREPOSITIONS WITH CASES. 255 
 
 Phrases: iy SirAois ftvai to he under arms (XA.5.9"), ^i/ aWi^ ^X^'" '''""^ '" 
 /uild one (in blame) responsible (T.1.35), ireipiiroiiat h Kcup^ aoi ehai I will 
 try to be (in good time) useful to you (XH.3.4'). 
 
 In composition : in, on. 
 
 Note. — Rare poetic forms are eiV, eivi. 
 
 798. i^ (before consonants cV: Lat. ex, e) out of, from (properly 
 from a position in something). 
 
 With genitive only : 
 
 a. Of place : ^k Siroprr;! <p€iyei he is banisJied from Sparta. 
 
 b. Of time: ix iroiSiis (from a child) since childhood (XG.S.P). Hence of 
 immediate succession : K6yov ix \6yQv Keyeif to make one speech after artaiher 
 (D.183'3). 
 
 c. Of origin; ^k tuv 6eav yevoy6Tcs horn of the gods (1.12^^). Hence with 
 passive verbs (instead of uirt! with the gen.) : rXimaBai (K Tims to he honored 
 by some one : the agent is then viewed as the source of the action ; this con- 
 struction is rare in Attic, but frequent in other dialects. 
 
 d. Of inference; 4k rav ■!rap6vTav (fudging from) according to the present 
 circumstances (T.4.17). 
 
 Phrases: 4k Se|i5s on the right hand {1S8 c), 4k toWou at a great distance, 
 ever since a rem,ote time, e| iaoo on an equality, Sqcrat {Kpe/iiaai) ti ck tii/os to 
 bind (Jiang) one thing on another. 
 
 In composition ; otii of, from, away. 
 
 799. eVi on, upon. 
 
 1. With genitive : 
 
 a. Of the plact? wliero: TrpoiKpalvero 6 Kvpos 4(p' dpfiaros Gyrus appeared upon 
 a chariot (XC.8.3"), 4Tr\ tov euii>yvfj.oj (sc. Kipas) on the left wing (XA.1.8'). 
 
 b. Of the place whither : 4irX Si/iou irKeiv to sail toward Samos (T. 1.116). 
 0. Of time; 4-irl tSii> irpoySvain in our forefalliers^ time {Ae.S"^). 
 
 d. In other relation.^ : \4yeiv 4tI twos to speak with reference to some one 
 (PCharm.loS''), 4ip' iaurov oIksIv to live by himself {T .2.6%), 4v;' oKiyav reray- 
 fifvoi drawn up few men deep (XA.4.8"), ^iri yvdiji^s yeviaBai to take a resolu- 
 tion (D.4'), 4iri TWOS KsKhriadcu to be named after some one (Hd.4 4.i). 
 
 2. With dative : 
 
 a. Of place : Hm. 4Tri x^oyl oitov iSovTes eating bread upo:i the earth (9 222), 
 ^irl Tp BdSAjrari oMfi(r6ai to be situated (close upon) by tlie sea (XA.1.4'). 
 
 b. Of time; ^ttI Toirois after this, thereufon (XC.5.5"). 
 
 c. Of aim or condition ; ettI TraiSefa tovto efiaffes in ordei' to an education 
 hast iJiou learned this (PProt.312''), ^irl riKy Savtl^etv to lend on interest 
 (PLg.742»), ^irl toio-Be on these conditions (T.3.114). 
 
 d. In other relations : eVl toIs trpayiiafftv eTvat to be at the head of affairs 
 (D.9'), 4nl ToTs TroXe/xiots elvai to be in the power of the enemy (XA.5.8''), 4-k\ 
 fivi xaipiiv to rejoice (on the ground of) ai something (XM.2.6"). 
 
 3. With accdsative ; 
 
 a. Of place ; to, upon, against : lu/aPalvciv 4<l>' IWov to mount on horseback 
 (XA.1.8'), ^irl 56{i(^ toward the right (XA.6.4'), e'lrl ^turiKid. Ui/ai to march 
 against the king (XA.1.3'). 
 
256 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [800 
 
 b. Of extension over place or time : ^irl natrav ^ipdtniv tkrougliout all Eu- 
 rope (PCriti. 1 1 2' ), iirX rpeTs fi fie pas for (during) three days (XA.B.e'"). 
 
 u. Of an object sought : rpixf VI ropuvriy I run to fetch a ladle (ArAv.79). 
 
 Phrases: iic\ iroKi to a (/real extent (T.1.6), Sis 4iri rh iro\i for ilie most part 
 (T.2.1S), t1) iir ifie so far as lam concerned (EOr.1345). 
 
 Is COMPOSITION : upon, over, after, toward, unto. Often it cannot well be 
 translated. 
 
 800. Kara (cf. adv. kotci) telow) originally doicn (opposed to dvd). 
 
 1. With genitive : 
 
 a. Doiunfrom: Hra. ^q Se Kar^ OuKifi-jroLo Kapiivtav he went doivn from the 
 heights of Olympus (A 44). 
 
 b. Underneath: KaTi. yTjS underground (VPh&eit.'ii'i'^). 
 
 c. Down upon : ijtvpov koto Tijs K€<pah7is Karax^ai, to pour ointment over the 
 head (PJlp.SQS"). 
 
 d. Against a person (of speaking, etc.) : ^ei^etr&ai kotcE tivos to speak falsely 
 against one (PEuthyd.2S4''). Karely in a good sense : concerning, reacting. 
 
 Phrases : ir6\tv /cot' &Kpas eKtiy to take a city completely, i. e., from its 
 highest point down (T.4.irj), koto v^tou in the rear of an army (T.4.33). 
 
 2. With acodsative, down along; passing over, through; pertaining to, 
 according to, opposite: 
 
 a. Of place: Kora l>6ov down stream (Hd.2.96), koto ©iTToXiav throughout 
 Tliessaly (PCi'.45=), koto yriv KaX koto BaKaTTav (over) by land and by sea 
 (XA.3.2''*), ri Kofl' a'lnois the part opposite them (XA.l.S'"). 
 
 b. Of time: kot-' ixeimv rhv XP^""" "^ ^''"^ time (T.1,139), oi Kaff v/ius our 
 contemporaries (D.20"). 
 
 u. Of other relations : Karoi rhv avrhp rpiirOv (according to) in the same 
 manner (XC.8.2*), Karh irivTa in all respects {0.24"""), kotA Sii/aiuv according 
 to ability (Hd.3.I42), kot4 rohs vi/ious according to the laws (D.8'), ri kot' i/ii 
 as regards me (D.18^^^). 
 
 d. In distributive expressions: Hm. KOTci ipv\a by clans, each clan by itself 
 (B 362), koto 5iJo by twos, two by two (D.20"), Kaff fipicpdy day by day (T.1.2). 
 
 In composition : down, against. Often it serves only to strengthen the 
 meaning of the simple verb, and in many such eases it cannot be translated. 
 
 |lCTd. 
 
 801. nerd amid, among. 
 
 1. With genitive, loitJi, implying participation (of. a-iv, 806): /leri ^v/i/xd- 
 X<■)^ nivSvvevetii to meet the dangers of battle in common witfi allies (T.8.24), 
 ftfrd voWan SaKpiwv with (amid) many tears (PAp.34''). 
 
 2. With dative, poetic, chiefly Epic : Hm. "Y.ieropa is 6As iaxe hit' hvipigi 
 Hector who was a god among men (fi 258). 
 
 3. With AOcnsATivE : 
 
 a. Usually after, in time or order : fiera tovtov rhv XP^'"'" oftcr this time 
 (PEp.537''), /ieri fleous iJ'Ox^/ BeiiraTov next to the gods, the soul is most divine 
 (PLg.726»). 
 
 b. To (a position) among or along with, poetic : Hm. iic /ifrh eSvos iToipav 
 going among the multitude of his friends (H 115). 
 
803] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 257 
 
 c. After (in quest of), poetic : Hm. P?ivm neri, irwrpbs dfcou^v to go in qtteet 
 of tidings of a father {P 308). 
 
 Phrases: ^et4 x^'P"' ^X^'" to '««"« «« liand, properly, to take between 
 the hands and hold there {Ae.l"), /icfl" rmipav by day (Ant.5"). 
 
 In composition : with (of sharing), among, between, after, from one place to 
 another {fieraridevai to put in a new place), 
 
 irapd. 
 802. irapa (Hm. also wap, irapdl) alongside of, hy, near. 
 
 1. With genitite, from beside, from : Hm. iropo j/ijtSy &>/( omovocrTii(reiv to 
 return from the ships (M 115), \afifidveiv vapa jro\c/ilui/ to take from the enemy 
 (XHier.l**). Very rarely, and only in poetry, simply alongside of: vttierSiv 
 mp' 'I<r/tr)i'ov pelBpav dwelling by the currents of /smeniui (SAnt.1123). 
 
 2. With datite : with, beside : iraph, tijj SiSao-KaAfi o-iTeTirflai to dine with 
 tlie teacher (XC.1.2^), lira. fu/jwaC^iv trap^ vrivtrl KopwvliTi to remain by the curved 
 ships (B 392). Figuratively : Trap' 4iuol in my opinion (Hd.1.32). 
 
 3. With accusative, to (a position) beside, wdo : also along by : 
 
 a. Of place : Hm. ri 5* oStis Xttiv napa yTjas but they two went again to the 
 ships (A 347), 0rj 8" axeinv Trapa fftva iroKv(p\ola0oto BaXiaaiis he went sorrowing 
 along the shore of the roaring sea (A S4). 
 
 b. Of time : irop' oAoi' rhv filov (along by) during his whole life (MMon.131). 
 
 c. Of comparison : Trapa tovs &\Xovs evToKTav obedient in comparison with 
 the others (XM.4.4'). 
 
 d. Of cause : Trap^ t^v TjfieT^pdy afi4\€tav ^iMmros iinii^TiTat through our 
 neglect Philip is becoming great (D.4"), properly, by it, in connection with it. 
 
 e. Of exception or opposition : exm irapa TaDra &\\o ti \4'yeii' beside this I 
 have anot/ier thing to say (PPhaed.107"), Tropo touj i'6fiovs contrary to the laios 
 (XM.4.4'), properly, passing by or beyond them, trans-gressing them, the 
 opposite of Kara with ace. (800, 2 c). 
 
 Phrases : irap^ filKpSv by little, within a little, trapa fiixphv ^\6ov airoBai/eiv 
 I came near dying (1.19^^), Tropa ttoAu i/iKat/ to be (victorious by much) com- 
 pletely victorious (T.1.29), Trap' o\lyov iroieiaOai to esteem lightly (XA.6.6"). 
 
 In composition : beside, along by or pdst, aside, amiss. 
 
 TTCpC. 
 
 803. ircpt around (on all sides, cf. dp(pL 791). 
 
 1. With genitive: 
 
 a. Chiefly in derived sense, about, cancei-ning (Lat. de) : riva ypd/iiiv ?x^'S 
 Trepl T^s Topsids; what opinion have you about the march ? (XA.2.2"'). 
 
 b. In Hm. surpassing, more titan : irepl wavraii' efifieyai iWini' to be superior 
 to all others (A 287). Hence, in prose, such phrases as Fcp! iroWov nouia-eai 
 to consider as (more than much) vei-y important (PAp.46«), irepl ouBecbs ^yeicrflai 
 to esteem (iust above nothing) very low, think little o/'(Ly3.31»'). Cf. 746 a. 
 
 2. With DATivi;, not frequent in Attic prose : 
 
 u. Of place : B^pdiea ex^' "■'?' '''''" cr^pvois lie wears a cuirass round his 
 h-east (XC.1.2"). 
 
 b. Of cause : SiStires Trepl rip x^ph being alarmed for tlw place (T.1.60). 
 
258 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [804 
 
 3. With accusative, nearly the same as kfupi : vepl ^'EWiifnrovTov about 
 the Ilellesponi, in the rec/ion of the Hellespont {l).S^); and in derived sense, 
 trirouSdC^iv TTepl t^u iroKlrelav to be bitsili/ engaged about the gove^-nment (1.8^'), 
 Ta irepl rijv yewpyiav what pertains to husbandry (X0.20'). 
 
 In composition : around (remaining) over, surpassing (witli adjectives = 
 I at. per- in perinagnus). 
 
 For Hm. wept as adverb exceedingly, see 786. 
 
 irpo. 
 
 804. TTpi (Lat. pro) lefore. 
 
 With genitive only; 
 
 a. Of place : irph tUv iruKav before the gates (XH.2.4'*). 
 
 b. Of time: wph t/js fidxt^ before the battle (XA.1.7'^). 
 
 c. Of preference: wph roirou TcBvivai iKono before this he would rather 
 elwose death (PSym-lTQ"). 
 
 d. Of protection or care : /iix^"'^'" "'P^ irafBwi' to fight for one's children, 
 properly, in front of them (© 57), irph ufiwv aypvirveiv to watch in your behalf 
 (XA.7.B36). 
 
 Phrases : wph ttoWoC voiettrBat (to esteem in preference to much) to consider 
 as valuable, important (1.5'''), Hm. vph dSoi further on the way {A 382). 
 In composition : before, forward, forth. 
 
 irpds. 
 
 805. irpos (Hm. also TrpoTt, vori) at or hy (properly confronting). 
 
 1. With qenitive : 
 
 a. In front of, looiing towards, on the side of: vphs @piK7]s Ke7a6ai to be 
 siinated over against Thrace (D.23'*'), rh irpis kampas teixos the westward wall 
 (XH.4.4'8). 
 
 Similarly in swearing : irphs Beiiv before tile gods, by the gods (XA.6.7^). So 
 Trphs vaTp6s on the father's side, irphs ixr]Tp6s on the mother's side (0.21"*). 
 
 b. To express what is natural or appropriate on the part of some one: 
 Ttphs yvmiKbs ^v it was the way of a ioo»iaB-(AAg.l636), ovk ^v irphs tov Kipou 
 Tp6irQu it was not according to tJie charftcter of Cyrus (XA.1.2^'). 
 
 u. From : enaivov ex^^v irphs v/iiatv having praise from you (XA.7.6^^). 
 Sometimes used with passive verbs (instead of 6n6, 808, lb): vphs Beav 
 iptifici/os seen by the gods (AEum.411): cf. 4k, 798 c. 
 
 2. With dative: 
 
 a. At: h Kupos ^v irphs Btt$v\avi Cyrus zoos at Babylon (XC.7.5'). Also in 
 derived sense, engaged in: irphs Ipyp elvai to be busied with a work (XH.4.8"). 
 
 b. In addition to: irphs Toirois besides this, furthermore (XC.1.2'*). 
 
 8. With accusative : 
 
 a. To: tpxcvrai irphs iifias they come to us (XA.6.7'''), A^|oTf irpSs lie speak 
 to me (XA.S.S'-*). Also against : Uvat irphs rohs woXe^iiovs to march against the 
 enemy (XA.2 6>0). 
 
 b. Towards: irphs Bo^liav towards the north (T. 6.^). Especially of disposi- 
 tion or relation toward some one : oiKelus SiatceTirBat irp6s riva to be confiden- 
 iially, disposed toward'^ one (XA.7.5"), itirovSds ironfjo'ao-flai irp6s Tiva to make a 
 truce with one (T.4.15). 
 
808] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 259 
 
 c. In reference to, with a view to : nphs ravra in view of this, therefore 
 (APr.91B), iiatpipnv irphs appHiv to have the advantage in respect to virtue 
 (PAp.SS'), trolls t( /le tout" ipwT^s ; to what end do you ask me this? (XM.3.7'), 
 irphs rh apyipiov riiv euSoi/ioctdv Kp'iviw to judge of happiness (by reference 
 to) according to money (1.4'"). 
 
 Phrases : jrpbs T)Sorfiv, X'^P'" "'*''' " "'*"' ^ please, gratify (APr.494, SPhil. 
 1155), irphs play by force, forcibly (APr.208), irphs 6pyl]v in anger, angrily 
 (SE1.369), ovSiv irphs i/xe it is noHdng to me (D.18"). 
 
 In composition : to, towards, in addition. 
 
 806. a-vv (also ^iv) with, i. e. in company with, in connection with 
 = Lat. cum (cf. fiera with the gen., 801, 1) : 
 
 With dative only : 
 
 iiraiieiero ahv rif hSeKipif he was educated with his brother (XA.1.9''), irhv 
 Beats with the help of Hie gods (XC.6.4"), <riii' rif v6fup in conformity with tlie 
 law (XC.1.3"). 
 
 In composition : mth, together. 
 
 807. virep (Hm. also iweip) oiiei- = Lat. super. 
 
 1. With genitive : 
 
 a. Of place : d ?i\ios iirep rnuHv iropeicrai tJie sun journeys above m (XM.S.8'). 
 
 b. In derived sense, for, in behalf of: fidxeffdai inrep Ttvos to fight for one, 
 orig. over him, standing over to defend (PLg.642°), iroxeii/ uirep aov to labor 
 in your behalf (XA.V.S"'). Also on account of: inrlp Tris iKevdeplas d/ias 
 evSainovi(a> I congratulate you on account of your freedom (XA.1.7'). 
 
 c. Concerning ( = irtpi), rarely found before Demosthenes ; tV ^^P toO 
 iroKeyiov yir^iiriv TOiairiiir tx*"' '" ''""^ *""'' '"" opinion concerning the war (D.2'). 
 
 2. With acqusative, owe)*, beyond, of place and measure : Hm. {nrep oh^hv 
 4$iitreT0 he passed over the threshold [y 63), oi mr^p 'EW-^trirovTov oIkovvtcs those 
 who dwell beyond the Hellespont ( XA. 1.1'), fiirep Siya/uy beyond one's abilUy(p.21"). 
 
 In composition : over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of. 
 
 808, vvo (Hm. also virat) under = Lat. svh. 
 
 1. With genitive : 
 
 a. Less often under, of place: {nrh yris under the earth (PAp.18''). Hence 
 in some expressions of dependence: iir' aiiKiirav X"?"" '" march under tlie 
 lead of fute-players (T.5.70). 
 
 b. Much more frequently, by, of agency, with passive verbs : iTl/MTo Sirb 
 ToJ Siifiov fie was honored by the people (XH.2.3"), mh tuv Sov\ay airiSavov 
 they were slain by tjie slaves (XHier. 10''). Cf . 820. 
 
 c. Of cause : uirh ci.w\olds ivSierpirfiev through bad weather he delayed (T.2.86). 
 
 2. With dative, under: inrh rif ovpavif under the heavens (PPhaed.llO*), 
 virh Tp cLKpoirSKfi at the foot of the acropolis (XA.1.2'), iirh fieuriKei fhta to be 
 under (the power of) the king (XC.8.1°). 
 
360 VOICES: ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. [809 
 
 3. With accdsatite : 
 
 a. Of place, properly to (a position) under: Hm. iwh ■it6vToii iSiireTO Kv/iai- 
 voma he dived under the surging sea (\ 263). Hence, in derived sense, of 
 subjection : irtixets re koX iOvri u</)' eavTohs •jroieiadai to hHng cities and nations 
 under their power (PRp.34S''). 
 
 b. Of time (either impending or in progress) ; mrh vixra just before night 
 (T.1.H5\ cf. Lat. sub noclem ; irh t^v vvKTa daring the niglii (Hd.M.58). 
 
 In composition : under^ secretly^ slightly^ gradualh/. It is sometimes used 
 where the idea under is foreign to our conceptions, and in many such cases 
 can hardly be translated. 
 
 THE VOICES. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 809. The active voice represents, the subject as acting : 
 thus ruTTTO) I strike. 
 
 810. The active voice of some verbs has both a transitive (593 a) 
 and an intransitive meaning : 
 
 ekavveLv tr. to drive, intr. to ride, march ; irpimiv tr. to do, intr. eu 
 (Kaxas) irpirTeiv to do or fare well (ill) ; ex^'" *■■• *" ''3t)e, hold, intr. 
 KoKas E;(et Lat. iene se hahet, it is well, i'^e S^ stop now, e)(' rfpijia keep 
 still. — In English, tliis is still more common, as in the verbs move, 
 turn, break, melt, increase, etc. 
 
 In some verbs, the two meanings belong to different tenses, see 600, 501. 
 
 a. Some transitive verbs become intransitive in compounds : $<i\\€iv to 
 throw, eta'&iiwetp and ifi^dWetv to make an invasion, also (of rivers) to empty ; 
 StS6vai to give, iv^tB6i^ai to give in, surrender, iwiStS^vai to advance, improve ; 
 Kdirreiv to cut^ irpoKdirr^iv to make progress. 
 
 For intransitive verbs which become transitive in composition, see 712 c. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 811. The middle voice represents the subject as acting on 
 himself, or more exactly, as affected by his own action. 
 
 The subject may be variously affected by the action. Hence we distinguish 
 the following three uses of the middle. 
 
 812. The Direct Middle represents the subject as acting 
 directly on himself : X.ovea-6at to wa^h one's self, bathe. 
 
 So TpiirtffSai to turn one's self, iiriStlKmaBat to shorn one's self, 'laraiiBat to 
 set one's self, KaKiimffBai to cover one's self. The subject is also the dhieet 
 object of the action. 
 
816] MIDDLE VOICE. 261 
 
 a. In English, instead of the reflexive pronoun, an intransitive verb 
 is often to be used; iraveiv to atop, itavio-Bai, (to stop one's self) to cease; 
 (paiveiv to slum, (j>aLve(Tdat, (to show one's self) to appear; irdQuv to 
 persuade, nddea-dai (to persuade one's self) to trust, comply. 
 
 b. The direct middle is much less frequent than the indirect ; instead of 
 it, the active voice is generally used with a reflexive pronoun. Even with the 
 middle voice a reflexive pronoun is sometimes used for the sake of clearness 
 or emphasis : ^ KaKua-ai riiias ^ (r<pas aiiTois $(Paui<rttaBai either to harm ■us or 
 to secure tliemsdves (T.1.33). 
 
 813. The Indieect Middle represents the subject as acting 
 for himself, or on something belonging to himself : ■rropl^ecrOai 
 ■)(prifiiXTa to provide money for one^S self, cnrdaraa-Oai to |i^os 
 to draw one's (owti) sword. 
 
 So &ye<r6ai yvvawa to take a viifc (to one's own house), iroieicrBal rtva ipl\oi> 
 to (make some one a friend) gain some one's friendship (for one's self), iiira- 
 irf livo/ud Tiva I send for one (that he may come to me), riSeirBai tjji' >('^((>oi' to 
 deposit one's (oion) vote. Sometimes the middle means to, rather than for, 
 one's self: Hm. ^(^cAketoi SfSpa (riSripos the iron draws the man to itself {it 294). 
 
 a. With ' ward off ' etc. the middle is translated from (cf. 767 a) : aiitm- 
 (fflof KivSvvov to ward off danger (for, i. e.) from one's self, TpeircaBm Toiis iroAe- 
 jiious to turn the enemy from ourselves, put them to AiglU. 
 
 814. The Subjective Middle represents the subject as act- 
 ing with his own means and powers, and differs but slightly 
 from the active : 
 
 irapex^iv to furnish in any way, TrapEXfcfloi to afford from, one's oum property ; 
 Ttoiitv Tt6\iixnv to make war simply, iroiiiaiai itiKi\iov to make war with one's 
 own resources ; Kaiifiivav ti to take something, Kaii^dycaBal Tii/os to take hold of 
 something with one's own hand ; a-Koiretv to view, o-KoireTffflai to take one's own 
 view, consider in his mind. 
 
 a. Hence some intransitive verbs form a middle, which gives special promi- 
 nence to the 8ub.iect, as acting in his own sphere : PovKeieiv to lake counsel, 
 Pou\eiea'8ai to take one's own counsel, form his own plan ; iroMTeiiiv to be a 
 citizen, act as such, iroKlreieaSai to perform one's civic duties, to conduct public 
 affairs ; irpeafieisiv to be an embassador, negotiator, 7rp€(rj8eiie<r9ai (used of the 
 state) to conduct its negotiations, by sending embassadors. 
 
 815. In some verbs, the indirect middle has a causative use : 
 
 SiSaa-Kofuu riv vi6v I have my son taught (make others teach him for me), 
 iraparlBe/iai Sciirvov I have a meal served up tome (make others serve it for me). 
 Cf. PMen.93*, T.1.130. 
 
 816. The following verbs should be especially noted, as showing 
 important differences of meaning between active and middle : 
 
 1. aipsiv to take ; alpeltrdai to choose. 
 
 3. mrobovvai to give back; dirodotrdai to sell (give it away for one's 
 self, for value received). 
 
262 VOICES: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. [817 
 
 3. airreiv to attach; airrea-Bai nvos to touch something (attach one's 
 self to it). 
 
 4. apxftv to begin (in advance of others, opposed to iia-Tepfiv to te 
 behind) ; apxfa-dai to begin (one's own work, without reference to others, 
 opposed to Traica-Sm to cease). 
 
 5. yaju'tv to marry (of the man) ; yajuXaBai to marry (of the woman). 
 
 6. ypa<jieiv i/opoi/ to write or propose a law ; ypd(t>€a-dai riva to bring 
 miit against some one (have him written down in tlie magistrate's 
 book). 
 
 7. Savci^eiv to lend; Savei^ea-dai to borrow (make another lend to 
 one). 
 
 8. SiKa^eiv to give judgment ; SiKd(ea-6ai to maintain a suit at law 
 (make another give judgment for one). 
 
 9. e^eip to hold ; exea-dal tlvos to hold on to, hence be close to some- 
 
 10. fiurBovv to let for hire; p.ta-6ova-6at to hire (make another let to 
 one). 
 
 11. Tidivai vofiovi to make laws for others (said of the lawgiver); 
 Tidetrdai, i/d/iour to m,ahe laws for itself (said of the people). 
 
 13. Tlp.a>pfiv Tivi to avenge some one; Tipwpel(r6al riva to avenge one's 
 self on some one. 
 
 13. (jivXaTTdv Tiva to watch (guard) som« one; ^vKarTeirBai riva to 
 be on onfhe's gua/rd against some one (watch him for one's interest). 
 
 a. The same verb may have different uses of the middle voice : thus SiSeJ- 
 (TKoiiat indirect middle with causative meaning (816) ; but also as direct middle, 
 / teach rnyself, learn. 
 
 817. Deponent Verbs show the same uses of the middle voice, 
 and differ from the verbs already given only in having no active : 
 
 Thus direct middle, Airi(rx>'e'o'9c« (to hold one's self under) to undertake, 
 promise ; indirect, S4xf(r6ai to receive (to one's self), KTuffBm to acquire (for 
 one's self), StvafitdaaaBai causative, to (make live again) re-animate : subjective, 
 iyuAQitrBai to contend (with one's own powers), oU(r6ai to think (in one's own 
 mind). — For passive deponents, see 497. 
 
 For future middle used in passive sense, see 496. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 818. The passive voice represents the subject as acted on, 
 or suffering an action : Tv-mofLai I am struck. 
 
 a. Hence the object of the active verb becomes the subject of the 
 passive. The subject of the active verb (the agent) is variously ex- 
 pressed with the passive : usually by iuro with the genitive (808, 1 b) ; 
 rarely by other prepositions (798 e, 805, 1 c) ; sometimes by the dative 
 (769). 
 
PASSIVE VOICE. 263 
 
 819. The passive is used in Greek more freely than in Latin, espe- 
 cially in these particulars : 
 
 a. Many intransitive verbs form a passive voice, the indirect ob- 
 ject Cgenitive or dative) of the active becoming the subject of the 
 passive. Thus in particular ipav love, ilpxeiv rule, Kara^pavelv despise 
 (which take the genitive) ; iria-Tfiei.v trust, amaTelv distrust, (f>dovfiv 
 envy, fTrijSouXeuftv plot against, TroKejielv war against (which take the 
 dative) : 
 
 fua>Bdvova;ty dpxeiv re ko! ipxeffSai they learn to govern and to be governed 
 (XA.l.Q"*), iipd r}fiiv $ovKe6etr6ai fi^ KaTtuppovTjBwfj.ev His time for us to beware 
 lest we be despised (XA.5.7"), m<mie<Tdai mh rfis irarplSos to be trusted by one's 
 country (XSym.4"), rinets in' 'A6r]vaiiev iviPovK€v6ii€8a we are plotted against 
 by the Atfienians (T.1.82), ^flovjjflels urrh toS 'OSviraeas envied by Odysseus 
 (XM.4.233). 
 
 b. With'verbs of entrusting and enjoining, the dative sometimes becomes 
 thus the subject of the passive verb, while the accusative, which would prop- 
 erly become the subject, remains unchanged : oi iirtTeTpa/iifiet'ot riiv tpvKcaciiv 
 (for iKiivoi oXs 4mTfTpairTai ri (pvKaKii) those entrusted with tlie guard (T.1.126), 
 &KKo Ti jueifov iiTiTttx8'fl<rfa'0f (for &K\o ti liel^ov iiriTaxSiiiTiTai uiiiv) ye will 
 have some otiier greater eommand imposed on you (T.1.140). 
 
 c. Neuter passive participles, representing the cognate accusative of the 
 active (716b), are formed from intransitive verba: t4 iTrpaTiiyoip.eva the 
 things done in commanding, strategic operations (D.4*'), ra ifwl ir€-jrQ?uTevfieva 
 my political course or conduct (D.IS"). 
 
 d. Deponent verbs (though properly middle, 817) are sometimes used with 
 passive meaning : in this use, the aorist and future take the passive form : 
 Pti^faBtu to do violence, aor. $td(ra<r0ai ; but also pass, to suffer violence, aor. 
 Pia(r8fjvat (cf. 499). So too in other verbs, a passive meaning may arise from 
 that of the middle: aipe'iy to take; middle aipeiaBat, aor. cAcVfiai to clwose ; 
 passive wip^txBai, aor. tup^Brivai to be taken, also to be chosen. 
 
 Remark. — On the other hand, the Latin impersonal passive from intransi- 
 tive verbs {curritur, venium est, etc.) is unknown to the Greek. 
 For the aorist passive with middle sense, see 498. 
 
 820. The active of one verb sometimes serves as the passive of 
 another. Thus aKovetv, poet. k\v€lv, (properly ' hear ') in the sense of 
 to be called or to be well or ill spoTcen of takes the place of the passive 
 of \4yfiv. So €u nda-xfiv (' suffer well') means to be treated well as 
 passive of ev woiflv; dirodv^a-Keiv (' die ') to be killed as passive of oTro- 
 KTelveiv ; (pevyfiv (' flee ') to be banished or prosecuted as passive of SiaKfiv ; 
 iKirtwTeiv ('fall out') to be cast out as passive of iK^oKKeiv; and often 
 Keta-Qm (' lie ') to be put replaces the rare perfect passive of ridrnM. 
 
 Thus iJi.4ya ci ixoitiv Inrh ^aKia'X'f^lon' avBpdnrav His a great thing to be well 
 spoken of by six thousand men (XA.7.7*'), vvv K6\aKfS /col fleois ix^pol cucoiouiri 
 now they are called fawners and god-hated (D-IS""), iv ®paKri y&p aireeavev ivh 
 NlKiySpou for he was slain by Nicander in Thrace (XA.5.1''), ol itapafiaivovrfs 
 Tofis inrb rail/ Beav KcipLcpovs v6fiiOvs those who transgress the laws appointed by 
 the gods (XM.4.4"), /lii tois iyii inrh MeAljTOU Toirairds SIk&s ^iyoijju may I 
 never be prosecuted on such grave charges by Meletus (JfAp.l9°), 
 
264 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 [82] 
 
 THE TENSES. 
 
 821, The tenses in Greek do not merely distinguish time, as in 
 English. Besides doing this, they have another office; that of dis- 
 tinguishing the action in relation to its own progress, as continued, 
 completed, or simply brought to pass. 
 
 This distinction of action pertains to all the modes, while the dis- 
 tinction of time is nearly confined to the indicative. 
 
 822. The present and imperfect represent the action as 
 continued; the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect as 
 completed ; the aorist and future as indefinite, that is, as 
 simply brought to pass. 
 
 The difference will be best understood on comparing the meanings 
 of the aorist, present, and perfect infinitives of sevei'al verbs : 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 TTot^cm to do. 
 
 
 ■n-oieiv to be doing, 
 he engaged in. 
 
 ■ ireiroirfKivai to have done. 
 
 anoBaveiv to die. 
 
 
 ano6pri(TKiW to he 
 dying. 
 
 Te6vr)Kivai to be dead. 
 
 <j)vyciv to flee, run 
 
 away. 
 
 cfieiyetv to he fleeing, 
 
 irecjievyevat to have got 
 
 talce flight, he banished. 
 
 or in exile. 
 
 safe off] he out of dan- 
 
 (j>opridfjvai to take fright, cjioPeicrBai to fear, jrecpo^rjcrdai to be terror- 
 he frightened, he afraid. strichen. 
 
 dvdrja-ai to blossom forth, avdelv to bloom, he rjvdrjxevai to be in flower, 
 hurst into flower. blooming. 
 
 TTKTTevtrm to put one's TricrTfvfcj/ to trust. TreTritrTfvKevai to have a 
 
 trust. settled confidence. 
 
 a. It is often hard to express these distinctions in English, and recourse 
 must be had, sometimes to the ' progressive forms ' of tlie tenses, sometimes 
 to other phrases, as shown above. Observe that the simple English verb is 
 not always the same in this respect : thus to sleep expresses continued action, 
 to take, action brought to pass. 
 
 b. The name of the aorist tense {Upurros indefinite) has reference to this 
 characteristic of its meaning. 
 
 c. It is often said that the aorist expresses momentary action, and this 
 is usually true. Nevertheless a prolonged action, when conceived as a single 
 fact, may be expressed by the aorist. See 841 b. 
 
 823, The tenses of the indicative also express time. The 
 present an J perfect express present time ; the imperfect, aorist, 
 and pluperfect express past time ; the future and future per- 
 fect expi-ess/M^MJ-e time. This may be shown as follows : 
 
826] 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 265 
 
 
 ACTION BROnGIlT TO 
 PASS. 
 
 ACTION CONTINnED. 
 
 ACTION COMPLETED. 
 
 PRESENT TIME. 
 
 
 Pres. ypa(j)ci) 
 am writi?ig. 
 
 Perf. y4ypa(j)a 
 have written. 
 
 PAST TIJIE. 
 
 Aor. eypa^a 
 tcrote. 
 
 Impf. eypa^oi/ 
 
 was writing. 
 
 Plupf. eyfypd<pi] 
 had written. 
 
 FUTURE TIME. 
 
 Fut. ypa^jfco 
 sImU write. 
 
 
 Fut. Perf. yeypw- 
 
 yjrcTai it will have 
 
 been written. 
 
 a. It will be observed that there is no tense for action brought to pass at 
 the present time, or action continued at a future time. But the former is 
 seldom or never needed, and for the latter the future may be used : ypdilia 
 shall be vn-Uing. 
 
 I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 824. The present represents an action as going on at the 
 present time : ypd^xo I lorite or am writing. 
 
 a. Customary actions and general truths are also expressed by the 
 present : oZros fiev vSa>p, eyi> 8" olvov irfvco he drinks water, hut I wine 
 (D.19*°), TiKT-ft Kopor v^piv satiety begets insolence (Solon 8). 
 
 b. But a general truth is sometimes expressed by the perfect or the /«ferc, 
 as that which has been or will be true ; iroXKoi Siti Sfflac fieydha kokci irettSv- 
 fldo-i many on account of glory have suffered great evils (XM.4.2''), ovJjp ewteiK^s 
 aTro\4ads ri ^affTa^otaei a reasonable man^ when he has lost anything, will bear 
 it va-y easily (PRp.603"). — For a similar use of the aorist, see 838. 
 
 825. Present of attempted Action. — The present may represent 
 an action as attempted merely, not accomplished: thus BiStopi may 
 mean / offer, ireiOa I try to persimde. 
 
 i^e\aiveTe rifms ix Trjs x^P^^ V^ "™ trying to drive us out of tlie country 
 (XA.*?."?'). The same use is found in the other modes : Hm. rfpnovres iruKtvus 
 axaxfif-^vov • oiSc ti dijuf TepveTo seeking to clieer him in his grievous sorroto ; 
 but not at all in spirit was he cheered (T 312). 
 
 826. "With TToKai and other expressions of past time, the present is 
 used, where in English the perfect would be required : irdAat ^rfrovpev 
 we ham lon^ been seeking (80t.lll2). The imperfect is in like manner 
 used for the English pluperfect. 
 
S66 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. ISH 
 
 827i The present of some verbs may be used nearly in tlie sense 
 of the perfect, to express the continued result of a completed ajtion. 
 Thus aKovai {I hear) may mean / (have heard) am infoi'med; vlKcua (J 
 conquer) may mean / (have conquered) am victorious; (jtevyio (I fee) 
 may mean T (have fled) am in exile ; aStieea (/ do wrong) may mean 
 I (have done wrong) am a wrong-doer. The presents rJKa I am come, 
 of^o^ai lam gone, are always used in this way. 
 
 a. The imperfect of these verba has a corresponding use : iuiKuv I was 
 victoHous, etc. 
 
 828. HiSTOBiCAL Pbesent. — In vivid uarration, a past event is 
 often thought of and expressed as present : 
 
 Aopeiou Kal TlapvaariSos ■yiyi'ovTai TroiSes 5iJo of Darius and Parysatis are 
 hm-n two sons (XA.1.1'). The present in this use is freely interchanged with 
 the past tenses : iwei fiyfiro 'ApxiSafiOS im roiis amnrd\ovs, ivravBa oiiK iS4- 
 foi'To, aW iyxXimviri when Archidamns led against the enemy, they did not 
 abide the attach, but turn to fee (XH.'/.S^^). 
 
 a. Even a future event, when thought of as immediate or certain, may 
 be expressed by the present : ei oBtt) i] ■K6\is \7)</)9i)(rfToi, ^x"""' ««! ^ iraaa 
 2iKEAfd if this city shall be taken, the whole of Sicily is (i. e., wiU be) in their 
 hands (T.6.91). This is the general use of ct/u I (am going, i. e.) am abo-M 
 to go (in a). 
 
 T7nperfect. 
 
 829. The imperfect represents an action as goinij on at a 
 past time : typa^ov I was leriting. 
 
 a. The imperfect is especially common where different past actions 
 are represented as going on at the same time : 
 
 Hm. i<ppa lifv T)iis ?iv koI iffcTo Upbv ^/^a/>, ■r6<ppa iid\' i.^iporfpuv PfKe' 
 TJTTTETo, irrTTTE 5e \d6s wMIe it tvas morning and the sacred day was waxing, so 
 long the weapons of both hosts did clash, and people fell {& 66). 
 
 830. The imperfect is regularly used to denote a customary 
 or frequently repeated past action : 
 
 iuKpdrris Hnnep iylyvaiTKfv ovrtos €\eye as Socrates thougJU, so he (always) 
 spoke (XM-l.!*), iKeyero it was (repeatedly) said, the talk, was (XA.1.2"). 
 
 831i In narration the imperfect is sometimes employed where the aorist 
 would seem to us more natural ; this is especially frequent with verbs imply- 
 ing speech (saying, commanding, asking, etc.) : i\eye rois irpoeSpois Srt ia'fio\ii 
 fCTTttt he told the magistrates tliat there would be an attach (T.3.25). 
 
 832. Impbbpbot of attempted action. — The imperfect, like the 
 present (835), often denotes an attempted action : 
 
 Kx4apxos Toiis arpandrras iptd^ero Uvai- ol S" abrhv t^aXKov, ^jrel ^p|oTO 
 rpoiivai Clearchus ( was forcing) tried to force his soldiers to march ; but they 
 kept throwing stones at him, when he began to go forward (X1A..1.3'). 
 
838] IMPERFECT AND A0RI8T. 267 
 
 833. The imperfect is often used, instead of the present, to denote a 
 present fact or truth which has been jusl riecognizcd, although true before : 
 oil TOUT* ^1/ euSai/toWct, Koxov a-KaKKayi] this — deliverance from evil — is not 
 happiness, as we before supposed it to be (PGo.4'?8'=), ou crb ii.6vos &p' ^(rff 
 enoiji; arenH you then the only epops, as I supposed? (ArAv.280). 
 
 834. Verbs of obligation are used in the imperfect, with reference 
 to present time, to express that which ought to be, but is not: thus 
 eSei o-€ toCto noieiv may mean you ought to be doing this (but are not). 
 
 ^561 Tovs KeyovTos jtt^Te vphs tx^P°-^ Troieltrdai K6yov firjSeva /a^tc irpbs X'^P"' 
 tfie speakers ought not to viake any discourse with reference eii/ier to enmity or 
 to favor, implying that they do (D.8'). Thus also XPV" it were proper, embs ^v 
 it were fitting. 
 
 a. This must not be confounded with the normal use of the imperfect to 
 express past obUgation :, thus tSet ce toOto Troteli/ may also mean you were 
 under obligation to do this, without any implication of non-fulfillment. 
 
 835. The imperfect is sometimes used with av, to express a custom- 
 ary past action ; that is, an action which took place, if occasion 
 served, at various past times : 
 
 avaKafi^avav aiiTwv rh iroiiifjLaTa Siript^aii' tiv tI Aeyotec taking up their poems, 
 I would (often) ask what they meant (PAp.22''). 
 
 a. The aorist indicative with i,v has a similar use : Spax/ias ttv jfTTjir" elKoctp 
 eis ifidTioi/ Z would (:=\isedL to) ask for twenty drachmae for a cloak (ArPlut.982). 
 
 b. This use must be carefully distinguished from the hypothetical indicative 
 with &y ; see 895. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 836. The aorist iDdicative represents an action simply as 
 brought to pass or dot^e at a past time : iypaij/a I wrote. 
 
 a. The action is thought of merely as an event or single fact, with- 
 out regard to the time it occupied. In tliis its ordinary use, the aorist 
 may be called the factitive aorist : 
 
 To^iviiv Kol laTpiK^v KaX /lavrtK^v 'Air6\\ii>v avritipe Apollo invented arclierj) 
 and medicine and divination (PSym.197*), Hm. tV 5^ iro\b irpwros T5e Tt^Ac- 
 paxos 9eo€tSiis, /8i) S' iBbs trpoBipoio her much the first godlike Tclemachus espied, 
 arid went straight toward the door-way (a 113). 
 
 837. The aorist indicative is often used where the perfect or plu- 
 perfect might be looked for : 
 
 rmv omeTap ovSira KareKimv, i\\' S,iravTas irivpaxe of hii servants lie (left) 
 has left no one, but has sold them all (Ae.l"), Kvpov /ncTaire'iUTrcToi (828) hrb 
 T^t &pxri' ?s alirbv traTpiwtiv 4iro'n)(rf fie sends for Cyrus from the government 
 of which he (made) had made him satrap (XA.1.1'). 
 
 838. Epistolary Aorist. — In letters a writer sometimes puts himself in 
 the position of the reader, and views the moment of writing as a past time : 
 fier' 'ApTaP<i(ov, Sv troi eire/jaf/a, vpatr<re negotiate with Artabazus, whom I (sent) 
 send to thee (T,1.129). The perfect may also be so used. 
 
368 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [889 
 
 839. In questions with t( o\>, containing a proposal, the aorist is often 
 used, instead of the present : tI oi iri /loi iyivov <rm6i\paTi]s ; why (didn't you) 
 donH you become my fellow-lmnier ? (XM.3.11''). 
 
 840. Gnomic Aoeist. — General truths are often expressed 
 by the aorist indicative, as having proved true in past in- 
 stances. Such aorists are naturally translated by the English 
 present : 
 
 Tos riiv ^avKav trwriBeids 6\iyos xp^vos SieACiTE (lie associatiom of the bad a 
 little time dissolves (I.l'), /iC iinepa, Thv ixkv KaBe^Kev v\j/69ep, rhv S' ■fjp' &v<ii a single 
 day drags one man down from nigh estate, and lifts another up (EFrag.424). 
 
 a. This is called gnomic aorist, as being especially frequent in proverbs or 
 maxims (yv&iiai). By Hm. it is often used in similes or comparisons. 
 
 841. Inceptive Aoeist. — If the present of a verb denotes a 
 continued state, the aorist commonly expresses the beginning 
 of that state : thus ivoa-rja-e he fell ill (pres. votrfi am ill). 
 
 So exa> have, (<rxov got, got possession of; apxco rule, ^p^a attained 
 dominion; /SacriXfum am king, e'^atriXeuo-a lecameTcing ;-Koiij.S>ij.ai sleep, 
 iKoijiiidrjv went to sleep; la^x^'" "™ strong, lo-xv'ra grew strong; a-lyS> 
 am silent, ea-iyrja-a became silent; SaKpito weep, fBaKpitra burst into 
 tears; ipa loDe, ripaa-Briv fell in love; Kiv&vv€va am in danger, iKivhivevira 
 incurred rish So eaTTjv tooh my stand (perf, earrjKa am standing). 
 
 a. This use is found in all the modes of the aorist : votrija-ai to faU 
 ill, etc. 
 
 b. The inceptive meaning is not inseparable from these aorists : they are 
 sometimes used in the ordinary factitive sense (836 a) : ifiatrlXevae Sexa eri) 
 lie reigned ten years, the whole reign being conceived as one act. 
 
 842. The aorist is sometimes used, in the first person singular, to denote 
 a feeling, or an act expressive of it, which began to be, just before the moment 
 of speaking. In English the present is used : lytKtura I can't help laughing, 
 liter., I laughed (ArEq.69fi), iir^vea^ tpyov wal trpSvotav %i/ eflow / praise the 
 deed, and forethought which you exercised (SAJ.B36). 
 
 For the aorist indicative with &v, expressing occasional action, see 836 a. 
 
 Future. 
 
 843. The future denotes an action that will take place at 
 a future time : ypafm I shall write. 
 
 a. The future action may be understood either as brought to pass or as 
 continued (cf. 823 a) : thus &p^a may denote either / shall attain to rule (of. 
 aor. ^pfa, 841) or I shall rule (be ruler): irpdyfiaTeiovrai Situs Spfoi/o-i they take 
 measures to attain to power (XR1.14^), Siatpereov o'lrij/es &p^ovirl re Kol ^p^ovTai 
 we must distinguish who are to rule and wJio to he ruled (PRp.412''). 
 
 844. The second person of the future is used as a softened form of com- 
 mand : Triyras Si tovto Spacrets but this you shall do by all means (ArNub.1862). 
 
649] FUTURE, PERFECT, PLUPERFECT. 269 
 
 With negatives, it expresses prohibition : o\i toOto KoyiaaBe you will not (are 
 not to) consider this (Lycurg.*'). 
 
 a. But in negative questions, it forms a lively expression for urgent de- 
 mand: oil irepi/ieveh ; will Ihoti not waiti (PSym.iTZ"). For ov /i^ with the 
 future, see 1032 a. 
 
 845, With the future indicative Homer sometimes joins k4 or Sv, without 
 materially modifying the meaning : nal k4 tij SS" iphi and thits some one will 
 say (A 176). In Attic writers this construction is very rare, and even doubtful. 
 
 846, Pebipheastic Futuee. — To represent a future action 
 as immediately expected or intended, the verb /xeXAto mn about 
 is used with the infinitive of the future or present, or (more 
 rarely) the aorist : 
 
 /isWa u/ioi SiSd^eiv ofltK /ioi r) Siafio\i) ye-yov^ lam about to teach you whence 
 this calumny has arisen against me (PAp.21l>), ^ytb Sfias fieWa &yeiy els i'aa-iv 
 I am going to lead you to Phasis (XA.5.7^), niWovTos AojSeH' avrov when he is 
 on the point of seeing it (ArAch.1169). 
 
 a. Other tenses of fifWco are used in a similar way: ir\7i(rioy ijSit ^v i 
 ffraSiiis, ivBa 6y«€AAe KaTaXiaeiv (lie station was now near, where he was about to 
 stop for tlie night (XA.1.8'). Cf. Lat. duciurus sum, eram, ero, etc. 
 
 b. The phrase irais ov fiiWa or t£ ov /ifWu has a peculiar meaning, /low 
 {>i'h;f) should I not — ? iras oil fifWei ri ffoijuirepoi' HoAAioi' ^aivcadcu ; why 
 should not thai which is wiser appear nobler ? (PProt.309°). 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 847, The perfect represents an action as completed at the 
 present time ; the pluperfect, as completed at a past time : 
 yeypatfia I have written, iyeypdcfir] I had written. 
 
 848, A future action is sometimes vividly expressed by the perfect : 
 oAoiAaf, e!f <re tout' ip^trofuu Td\ii' thou art a dead man, if Task tliee this again 
 (SOt.1166). Cf. 828 a. Even the aorist can be thus used: see Eur. Ale. 386. 
 
 849, Pbefect with peesent meaning. — Several perfects 
 express a continued state, the result of a completed action, 
 and thus have a present meaning : 
 
 fie/jivrjfiai (from fufivija-Kta), properly, have recalled to mind, and so 
 remember, Lat. memini. 
 
 K€K\^/j.ai (KaXeoj) have received a name, am called. 
 
 KeKTri/iai (KTaofiai) have acquired, possess. 
 
 Tin(j>ietrii.ai (afi(f>uvvvfii) have dressed myself in, Tiave on. 
 
 TTcTToiBa (wetdai) have put confidence, have confidence in. 
 
 ire(j)vKa (<pva) have been produced, am Iry nature. 
 
 earrjKa {la-rrjfu) liave set myself, stand. 
 
 ^e^i/Ka (/Sa/vo)) have stepped, stand, also am gone. 
 
 eyvcoKa {yiyvoj(rK<a) have recognized, hnow. 
 
370 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [860 
 
 a. When the present of a verb denotes a state or condition, the perfect 
 denotes merely a more settled condition : see the last three examples in 822. 
 
 b. Here belong also several perfects which have no presents : as oTSa 
 know, ioMa am like, eluBa am accustomed, SeSotxa am afraid, and others ; 
 furthermore the perfects of several verbs signifying to make a noise ; Kexpaya 
 {Kpd^u) bawl, KeKpiya {Kpl^a) shriek, K4K\ayya (KKd^a) bay ; also KcxPVf^^^ 
 ixPiiC'') "^^'^ ^^^ others. In these the perfect seems never to have expressed 
 completed action. 
 
 c. In all these verbs, the pluperfect has the meaning of an imper- 
 fect : €KfKTTiiij)v was in possession of, ia-rriKri was standing; — and the 
 future perfect has the meaning of a simple j%tore; iarri^ai shall stand, 
 liflivrj(Toii,ai shall remember, KeKpa^ofiai shall bawl. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 850, The future perfect denotes an action which will be completed 
 at a future time : yeypayjreTat it will have been written. 
 
 For the forms (chiefly passive) of this tense see 466, 467. For the peri- 
 phrastic future perfect with effo/iat see 467 a. 
 
 a. But often the future perfect differs very little from the ordinary future 
 in meaning. In some verbs, it regularly takes the place of the future passive : 
 thus wfTrpdcroiiai shall be sold, KcKi$t|<o/iai shall be cut are the regular Attic forma, 
 instead of irpaS-^ffOfiat, Konija-o/iat ; and SeS-fiffofiat shall be bound, ireiraiiro^ai 
 shall be quiet are oftener said than Sefi^irojuai, ita.vBiiaop.ai. Cf. also 849 c. 
 
 n. TENSES IN OTHER MODES. 
 Genbeal Rule. 
 
 851, In the subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, 
 the tenses do not of themselves designate time. 
 
 The present in these modes denotes an action simply as 
 continued: thus troiuv to he doing (at any time). 
 
 The aoriet denotes an action simply as brought to pass: 
 ■n-oirja-ai to do (at any time). 
 
 The perfect denotes an action simply as completed: Trewon]- 
 Kevai to have done (at any time). 
 
 a. The time of the action, when time is thought of at all, is implied in the 
 connection, not expressed by the form of the verb. Thus : 
 
 Present time : ov fiovXeieaSai Spa, iAAck 0€Pov\fva6ai it is time, not to be 
 planning, but to have a plan formed (PCr.46''), iiawdiieda irivrfi iirdrav dj>yi(^- 
 ficBa we all are mad whenever we are angered (Philem.iv.54) Here 0ov\eie(r8at, 
 $ePov\evirDai, opyi(J>iie6a are understood, from the connection merely, to refer 
 to present time. 
 
854] TSN8ES IN OTHER MODES. 271 
 
 Fdtdre time : ris eSe\-ii(ret (crjpv^ Uvm; who will be willing to go as herald? 
 (XA.S.T™), dTrdTcw cariufiev, EiffovTai whenever we go away, they will follow 
 (XA.6.5"). Here the connection shows that Uvcu, wirluixev refer to the future. 
 
 Past time : €|8ouA€to rii iraiSe a/jupoTfpa> irapilvm he wanted both his sons to 
 be mill him (XA.l.l"), Kvpos imnire Pikous oivov lm6Te irinu r]Siiv \dPoi Cyrus 
 sent jars of wine whenever lie got any very good (XA.1.9'''). Here irapuvai, 
 Ad0ot are seen from the context to refer to the past. 
 
 b. The imperative, though expressing no time, necessarily implies the 
 future. So even the perfect imperative ; this expresses permanence or 
 finality : TerdxSw let him (have been placed) /lave his station (PEp.662''). 
 
 Optative and Ls-finitive in Indirect Discouese. 
 
 852. The optative and infinitive, when they stand in indirect 
 discourse representing an indicative of the direct discourse, 
 do denote time, relatively to that of the leading verb. 
 
 853i The present and perfect optative and infinitive in these cir- 
 cumstances (852) represent respectively the present and perfect in- 
 dicative, and so denote time relatively present: that is, the same 
 time as the leading verb : ypd(j>eiv (pr/a-i Tie says that lie is writing 
 Cnow) ; %(pj] ypd<f)fiii or tXtytv Sn ypd(t>oi he said tliat he was vyriting 
 (then). 
 
 So ytypaipfvai *7)(r! riiv tviaroxiiv he says that he has the letter written (now), 
 ^KaCov irpoeATjAaKci/ai they guessed that fie had 7-idden ahead, i. e., that the action 
 was then already completed (XA.1.10"), ?)Kev S,yye\os hiyuii oVi SucVvEirir 
 \e\onriis etri ri &Kpa there came a messenger saying that Hyennesis had left the 
 heights, i. e., was then gone from them (XA.2.1'"). 
 
 a. But sometimes they represent the imperfect and pluperfect in- 
 dicative, and so denote time relatively past : 
 
 ireireur/uu airh TTJs ^iciWris Si4 tovto <peiy€iv robs iuBpiiirovs J am persuaded 
 t/iat men used to run away from Scylla for this reason (XM.2.6"). Here 
 tpei>yeiv represents itpevyov. The aorist ^vyelv would mean that they ran 
 away on some one occasion. With the perfect infin., \4y^Tai &vhpa Tiva 
 4KireTr\rixBai 'tis said that a certain man had been fascinated (XC.1.4^'); here 
 4ieirev\fixSat represents i^eir^ir\nKTa. — The optative in this construction is 
 much less frequent than the infinitive : for an example, see 935 b. 
 
 854, The aorist optative and infinitive in the same circumstances 
 (853) represent the aorist indicative, and so denote time relatively 
 past : ypdyjrai (l>r](ri he says that he lorote, c<j>ji ypdyjfai or eXeyev on 
 ypa^eie he said that he had written. 
 
 oi 'IvSaX fXe^av Sri 7rf/ti/'€K <r(/>5s i 'IvSSiv 0a<riKfis (indie, finivfie) file 
 Indians said tJiat tlie king of the Indians liad sent them (XC.2.4''), \iyavrai iv 
 jifpei Tie! TTJs x'^P"* Kiic\iiiKfs o'lKrjtrttt the Cyclopes are said to have lived in a 
 pari of the country (T.6.2). 
 
 a. Observe that yp&^ai, aorist infinitive, when in indirect discourse means 
 to have written, but when not in indirect discourse it means to write. 
 
272 TEN8ES OF PARTICIPLES. [856 
 
 855. The future optative and infinitive represent the future indica- 
 tive, and so denote time relatively /tiJaj-e.- yaa^eiv <f>rj<ri he says that he 
 will write, ecjir) ypd\j/eiv or eXeyev on ypdyfroi he said that he would write. 
 
 8 Ti Se irofliffot, ov Sieffinirivc but xohat he would do, he did not indicate 
 (XA.2.1*^), TauTO {nrXaxfeiTO iTOfl]<reiii he promised thai he would do this (1,5°^). 
 
 II. The future optative is never used otherwise than in indirect discourse ; 
 nor is the future iufiaitive, except in the construction with liiWa (846), and 
 with T(( (959) : rb ixcpopiia-ftv the expectation of frightening (1.4.12°). 
 
 b. The future perfect optative and infinitive differ from the future only 
 in expressing completed action. See Xen. Anab. 1. 6. 16. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 856. The participles denote time relatively to that of the 
 verb on which they depend. The present and perfect parti- 
 ciples denote time relatively present, the aorist participle time 
 relatively past, the future participle time relatively future. 
 Thus : 
 
 Present participle; ol ypil<povTis those who write (now), ol SeiXo! kvv^s toIs 
 fjLev trapttipTas SdKvQu(ri, rohs Sh Sii^KOVTas <\)ivyovaiv coioardly dogs bite the 
 passers-by, but run from those who pursue them (XA.S.2^'), ctvxov iv tt) ciyop^ 
 KaBeiSoyres they happened to lie sleeping in the market-place (T.4.11S). 
 
 Perfect participle : ol yfypa(p6Tes those who have written (have the writing 
 now done), kKysis iiri rois trv^^iQriK6(Titf, AltTx^vV V^'^ are vexed at what has 
 resulted, Aeschhus (D.IS""), ^A.eyoi' irivTa rk ysyevrtfisva they told all that had 
 happened, i. e., was at that time completed (XA.6.8"). 
 
 Aorist participle : ol ypdi^avres those who wrote, ravra troi-t^ffas SUfiatve 
 having done this he went across (XA.1.4"), KpoTtros "AKvv Sia$as fieyaKnv apxh" 
 KaraXiirei Croesus, the Halys crossed, a mighty empire will destroy (Oracle,Arist. 
 Rhet.3.5). 
 
 Future participle : oi ypii\l/ovTes those who will write, ov <rvvl]\6ofjiey Sis 3ao-i\ci 
 TToXe/iiia-oi'Tes we did not come together to make war (as about to make war) on 
 the king (XA.2.3"). 
 
 a. The present participle may, however, like the present infinitive 
 (853 a), stand for an imperfect indicative, and so denote time rela- 
 tively past: 'Adrjvaioi oi irparepov iropdovvrfs Tqv BotaTidv the Athenians 
 who formerly used to ravage Boeotia (KM..Z.5*). Here tvopBovurfs =^ oi 
 cjTopdovv. In like manner the perfect participle may represent a 
 pluperfect : see Soph. Phil. 778 {KeKTrjfievtf). 
 
 b. The aorist participle, when joined to a principal verb in the aorist, is 
 sometimes used without the idea of past time, to denote an action coinciding 
 in time with the other : eS ye eirolri(ras bj/ajirl\aas fie tfiou didst well in remind- 
 ing me (PPhaed.60°). So especially the supplementary aorist participle with 
 the aorists of (jtBdvai, rvyxdva, KavOdi/a (984) : as truxev IXBJiv he chanced to 
 come (T.7.2), PouXolfuriv hv KaBeiv aiirhv iareXBdv I should like to get aviay wiili- 
 out his knowledge (XA.l 3") ; rarely with other tenses of the same verbs: 
 ».^iro/4ei' lTmrea6vTes we shall fall on them unawares (XA.'J.S^). 
 
860] THE ADVERB AN. 373 
 
 THE MODES. 
 
 The Adverb S.v. 
 
 The uses of fix (Homeric /ce) are so important for the syntax of the modes 
 that the following summary is in place here. 
 
 857. The adverb av has two distinct uses : 
 
 1. In independent clauses, 
 
 (a) with the indicative (past tenses), 
 
 (b) with the optative. 
 
 2. In dependent clauses, with the subjunctive. 
 
 a. There is no adequate translation for av, taken by itself. In its 
 use with the indicative and optative, its effect is given in English by 
 the words 'would,' 'should,' or 'may.' With the subjunctive it is 
 untranslatable. 
 
 "Av IN Independent Clauses. 
 
 858. With the past tenses of the indicative, av marks an 
 action as contingent on an unfulfilled supposition, and there- 
 fore contrary to fact (Jiypothetical indicative, 895): eSuKci/ av, 
 cl Tt eix^ ^^ would have given, if he had had anything. 
 
 a. "fiV is never used with the principal tensfes of the indicative, except 
 in the Homeric use with the future indicative (840). 
 
 859. With the optative, av forms an expression oi possibility 
 {potential optative, 872) : toSto yivoiro av this may (might, 
 would) happen. 
 
 a. In Hm. &ir may be joined to the subjunctive in the sense of the future 
 indicative (868). 
 
 'Av IN Dependent Clauses. 
 
 860. All relative and conditional clauses which have the 
 subjunctive, must also have av ; but this av is attached to the 
 introductory word of the clause, and belongs less closely with 
 the verb : S n av ^ovXrjrai whatever he may choose, ottov av ^ 
 wherever he be. 
 
 With £1, ore, OTTore, hrii and ejrctS^, av unites to form eav 
 (riv, av) orav, biroTav, hrriv or eirav (Hd. eireav), hruhav. 
 
 a. Jor the omission of &v in such sentences, see 894 b, 898 b, 914 a and b, 
 921 a. For the rare Ki with optative in dependent clauses, see 900 b. 
 
274 FINITE MODES m SIMPLE SENTENCES. [861 
 
 861. "Av is used with the infinitive and participle, when eitlier 
 stands in the place of an indicative or optative which would take "iv ; 
 see 964 and 987. 
 
 862. Position of av. — In clauses with the indicative and optative 
 (858, 859) av is not always placed next the verb to which it belongs. 
 It often attaches itself to negatives (ouk av), or interrogatives (iras 
 av), or emphatic words (/laXio-r iiv), or to the principal verb instead of 
 a subordinate one {ovk ol8' &v et TreicraLfii for ovk olda ct 7retVat/it av, 
 EMed.941). 
 
 863i "Av sometimes stands alone, its verb being understood : oi S" oiKeVai 
 piyxoviTiv ■ a\K' ovK ttv wph rod (sc. ippeyKov) the slaves are snoring ; u'ell, Ihey 
 wouldn't have done so before (ArNub.5). So iraij yitp &v (sc. eiii); how ean it be? 
 For Hairep hv €t, see 905. 
 
 864, "Av REPEATED. — This may occur when the sentence is very long, or 
 when it contains more than one prominent word to whioli &v miglit naturally 
 attach itself (862): irSs hv oiv ovk tiv Seiva irdarxoi/iev ; /tow then should we not 
 be outrageously treated? (Lys.20"). 
 
 A. FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
 Indicative. 
 
 865. The indicative expresses that which is, loas, or will be. 
 It is used when the reality of the action is affirmed, denied, 
 or questioned : ' he went ; he did not stay ; will he return ? ' 
 
 For the indicative in conditional sentences (with or without &v), see 89S, 
 895 ; in expressions of wishing, see 871. For the indicative (imperfect or 
 aorist) with &v to denote customary action, see 835 and a. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 866. The subjunctive has three common uses in simple 
 sentences : 
 
 1. The first person is used to express a request or proposal 
 (hortative subjunctive): lu/^ev let us go, (t>epe Sij, irupaOSs come 
 now, let me try. 
 
 a. So negatively with p.r\: fifj imivafifBa let us not he Triad (XA.T.l"). 
 
 2. The second and third persons are used with ivq in prohi- 
 bitions : fvq ■n-ovffa-g'i ravra do not do this, This use IB confined 
 to the aorist : see 874. 
 
870] SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 275 
 
 3. The first person is used in questions as to what may be 
 done with propriety or advantage (subjunctive of delibera- 
 tion) : Tt <^ui ; what shall I say ? 
 
 The meaning is not ' what am I going to say ' as a future fact, but ' what 
 had I best say.' So Seletr^e ffvfiir^TtjVy ^ cLTriuftev; will you receive a feUow- 
 reveller, or shall we go away? (PSym.212"). Only the question ri irdBa; what 
 will become of me ? is an exception ; the subjunctive here being equivalent 
 to the future indicative ; cf. 868. 
 
 b. Often $oi\ei do you wish is prefixed to this subjunctive ; the two ques- 
 tions, thougli closely connected, being independent of each otlier : ;8o^i^el <roi 
 fttrw; do you wish me to tell y<m? (PGo.521''), properly, ' do you wish — shall I 
 tell you ? ' as two separate questions. 
 
 c. Questions of this sort are sometimes asked in the third person with t!s, 
 instead of the first person: iroi tis oSk (piyji; whither can one flee? (SAj.463). 
 
 867. The subjunctive is also used with jc*'^, in expressions of anxiety or 
 appre/iension : /x^ aypoiK^repov ^ rh oKTiBes eiireii/ / am afraid it muy be too 
 rude to say ixhat is trtie (PGo.462»). In strictness, the sentence here expresses 
 something desired : ' may it not be too rude.' If the object of apprehension 
 is negative, /iJ) oh is used : Hm. /»^ vi toi oh xpaltrnri (TKifiTTphv Kal (rTf/niut SeoTo 
 (there is danger) indeed that the staff and wreath of the god may not avail thee 
 (A 28), flit oh eeiuThv ^ I fear it is not rigid (PPhaed.67''). 
 
 868. In Hm., the subjunctive is sometimes used to denote future events, 
 nearly like the future indicative ; oh ydp tria rolovs i^ov dyepas, ouS^ iSa^iai for 
 never yet saw I such men, nor shall I see (A 262). To the subjunctive in this 
 use, &i> or k4 is sometimes added : ohx &v toi xP"'"'/*? "ISapts nougJit will tlie 
 lyre avail tJtee (r 54). Cf. 846. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 869. The optative has two uses in simple sentences; one without 
 &v, in wishes ; and one with av, in assertions and questions. 
 
 870. Optative op Wishing. — The optative is used without 
 Sv, to express a wish that something may happen : dmoXoiTo 
 may he perish. 
 
 So TovTovs 01 6eo\ aT0Ti(raivTo may tlie gods requite them (XA.3.2'), S> mi, 
 yevoio Trarphs evTux^o'Tepos rnayst tlwu, my son, be happier than thy sire 
 (SAj.650), iii\ iwi yeyoiff & 0oi\oti.', &K\' i avu^ip^i may not what I would fain, 
 but what is best, be mine (MMon.366). From this use comes the name optative. 
 
 a. This optative may be introduced by the particles of wishing, 
 eWe or fi ydp : thus ude a-ii (j)[\os fffiiv yivoio that thou wouldat be 
 our friend (XH.4.1'*). The sentence is then strictly a condition with 
 omitted conclusion, as in English ' if this would happen. ' 
 
 b. In poetry, simple eJ occurs ; for instance Eur. Hec. 836. Hm. some- 
 times has dtSf and at yip. 
 
 c. Wishes are also introduced by Sis : Hm. is Ipts Ik re Btav ?k t' i,v6p(!mav 
 a.T(i\oiTo would that discord from among both gods andmen might perish (2 107). 
 
276 FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. [871 
 
 d. A wish expressed by the optative refers to the future. Very rarely, 
 however, an aorist optative is used of the future reaUzatiou of a past event : 
 aJ ykf iKaaaiaTO fuivvxas 'imrovs that tliey may (prove to) luxve driven, off the 
 hoofed steeds (K 536). 
 
 e. Another form of wishing is irui &v with the optative, strictly a question. 
 This occurs chiefly in dramatic poetry: iris ftv o\oliw.v; (how can I perish?) 
 would thai I might die (EMed.97). 
 
 871i Unattainablb Wish. — A wish past realization, that is, in- 
 consistent with a, known reality, refers either to the present or the 
 past. It is expressed, like a condition contrary to fact (895), by a 
 fast tense of the indicative with iide or ft yap. The imperfect, aorist, 
 or pluperfect is used, according as the contrary reality would be ex- 
 pressed by a present, an aorist, or a perfect : 
 
 fl yap Toaairriv Sivajuv etxov that I had so much pouier, implying, ' I have 
 not' (EAlo.1072), ftSe aot rifre o'vveyfv6ft.'riv that J had been with thee then, 
 implying, ' but I was not ' (XM.1.2''*). 
 
 a. Such wishes are expressed also by a><t>eKov (ought) with the pres- 
 ent or aorist infinitive : acjyeXe jikv Kvpos (jjv would that Cyrus were 
 alive, liter., ' Cyrus ought to be alive ' (XA.2.1'). 
 
 The particles of wishing may be prefixed : rffl' S<^f\oi/, ei yap li<pe\ov. The 
 negative is fiii, not oli as might be supposed : fi^jror' HipiKov AiTreii/ would thai 
 I had never left (SPhil.969). 
 
 872, Potential Optative. — The optative is used witTi Sv 
 as a less positive expression for the future (or present) indica- 
 tive, and is translated with inay, might, would, etc. : tovto 
 yivoLT dv this may (or might) happen. 
 
 rroWas Sv eSpois urixavis many devices thou mayst find (EAnd.85), ovk ttv 
 apvTiedTiv I would not (= will not) deny i<(D.21'"), ivBa iroW^v (Tu^potrivTiv 
 /caTofioidot Tis &v where one may notice many an instance of self-control (XA.1.9^), 
 ■'f)5ius Uv ipolfiiiv I (would gladly ask) sliould like to as^ (D.18**). 
 
 ii. The potential optative is frequently used in the conclusion of a condi- 
 tional sentence (900); and even where no condition is expressed, as in the 
 above cases, one may usually be supplied in thought. Thus ' this might take 
 place' (if circumstances should favor), 'you would find' (should you search). 
 
 b. Properly the potential optative refers to the future. When it •eeems to 
 refer to the present, it denotes in strictness the future realization of a present 
 fact : iroO Stjt' Sii/ thy oi {eVoi ; where, pray, iliay the strangers be ? i. e., where 
 would they be found if sought (SE1.1450), lipS. Sv eft) Kiyeiv it (mould be, 
 will be) probably is time to say (XM.S.5''). 
 
 c. Very rarely it is used, in like manner, of a past event ; rfijirai/ S" &v 
 oStoi KpiJTEs these were probably Cretans, i. e., would prove on examination to 
 have been so (Hd.1.2). 
 
 d. The potential optative may be used for the imperative, expressing a 
 command as a permission: \4yois &y ir nixicTTo speak at once, liter., 'you 
 may speak ' (ASept.261). 
 
876J COMPOUND SENTENCES. 277 
 
 e. In poetry, the potential optative is used without Sv, though very seldom ; 
 ovK iaTw oTif fiei(ova noTpav veintttfi.' t) (Tol there's none to wliom a higher rank 
 J would avmrd than thee (APr.291). 
 
 f. The future optative is never used with 6,v. See 856 a. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 873, The imperative represents the action as commanded: 
 Veye speak, irdra^ov fi,ev, aKovcrov Si Strike, but listen. 
 
 For the tenses of the imperative, see 851 and b. For the infinitive instead 
 of an imperative, see 957. 
 
 874, Prohibitions, that is, negative commands, are expressed 
 by /i-^ with the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive : 
 
 fir] A,eye tovto or /xr] Aefgs tovto do not say this. 
 
 a. The present imperative is used if continuance is thought of, otherwise 
 the aorist subjunctive. For instance, the present is used in telling any one 
 not to go on with what he is doing: thus /xJ) x'"^^'""^'^^ '^ ""' persist in your 
 present anger (T 133), but fiii x"^^'"^'^' ^o ""^ take offence; fiij fipaSvyt /i.t)!!' 
 iTrtfurfjff&ris eTi Tpoids linger not (as you are now doing), nor mention TVoy 
 again (SiPhil.1400). 
 
 b. The aorist imperative is sometimes used with fii) in the third person, 
 but almost never in the second; aWh yip /ttJ) 9prjv6v tis tovtov rbK Aci^ov 
 vo/uiiiiTa) but let no one regard this discourse as a lamentation (XAges.lO'). 
 The present subjunctive is never used in prohibitions. 
 
 875, The imperative is idiomatically used in dramatic poetry after 
 ol(rff o and like questions, v^here we should expect 8fl with the infini- 
 tive : oia-ff o bpaa-ov; do you hnow what you are to do? liter., 'do — do 
 you know what ? ' (ArAv.54). So olaff i>s ttoi'ijo-ov ; (SOt.543). 
 
 B. FESTITB MODES IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 876. SuBOEDiNATiON. — A Sentence may enter as a subordi- 
 nate part into another sentence. The whole is then called a 
 compoimd sentence : it consists of a principal, and a dependent 
 or subordinate, sentence or clause. 
 
 ot Se aireKpivavTO (principal clause) on ovk ^rraCflo el?; (dependent clause) 
 but the;/ answered that he was not there (XA.i.S'") ; ei eeol ti SpS<riy aiaxpiv 
 (dependent), ovk eialv 6eoi (principal) if godi do aught that's base, they are not 
 gods (EFrag.294). 
 
 a. Co-ORDiNATioN ^On the other hand, connected sentences are said to be 
 co-ordinate, when they are mutually independent ; noivii ri rixv, to! rh neWov 
 &6paTov fortimc is fickle, and the future is unseen (I.l*'). Such sentences are 
 not called compound. The co-ordination of sentences, as opposed to their 
 subordination, is relatively more frequent in early Greek, especially in Homer. 
 
278 MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. [87V 
 
 877. A dependent clause may have another clause depending on it, 
 to which it stands as principal. 
 
 Thus in the compound sentence iip6iiriv 'Pl(^oPov rf Tives irapriaav Ht aTreKd/j^ 
 Pave T^v irpoiKa I asked Aphobus whether any persons had been present when 
 he received the dowry (D.SO*"), St' arreKdiipave rijy irpoT/ca depends on e? rives 
 irapria-av, and this again depends on i\p6ijinv 'hipoPov. 
 
 878. Pholepsis. — A substantive which properly belongs to the 
 dependent clause, is often transferred (usually with change of case) 
 to the principal clause. The object is to give it a more emphatic 
 position. When the substantive is thus brought in before its proper 
 place, the arrangement is called prolepm (Trp6Xi]\jns anticipation). 
 
 Thus ecipa rovs avOpdrttoDS ws eJx^v Beivws (^ €d>pd iLs ol &vdpamoi, eJxov 
 Setycos) he saw that the men were in sad plight (XA.6.4^^), Hm. TvSeiS-rjv S* ovk 
 hy yvolris TroTepoiai jhcte/t) Tydides tliou wouldsl not have knoivn, in which of 
 armies tivain was he (E 86), Koi twv PapPdpav iirt^eXeiTo us iroKefieiv lkovoI 
 firidav he took care also that the barbarians should be in condition to make war 
 (XA.1.1'). 
 
 879. Protasis, Apodosis. — A subordinate clause which has the 
 special office of preparing the way for its principal clause is called a 
 protasis., and the principal clause is called the apodosis. All condi- 
 tional clauses are protases, and so are many relative clauses : thus 
 iirel jjo-deTo Stafie^rjKcrrai (protasis), ijadri (apodosis) when he saw that 
 they had crossed, he was pleased (XA.1.4"). 
 
 The protasis naturally precedes the apodosis, though this order is 
 occasionally reversed. On the other hand, other subordinate clauses 
 ordinarily yoZZoM their principal clauses. 
 
 I. MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. 
 
 880. Final clauses are of three kinds : A. Clauses of pure 
 purpose ; B. Clauses with oirws after verbs of effort, etc. ; C. 
 Clauses with pJi after verbs of fearing. 
 
 A. Pure Purpose. 
 
 881. Clauses expressing purpose are introduced bj ha, &<;, 
 oirtos (and Ilm. o^pa) that, in order that, and i).ri, Iva ii,ri, ws [t,iq, 
 3ir(i)s jjuri that not ; and take the subjunctive : epxoixai iva tSot 
 J come to see. 
 
 But if the clause depends on a past tense, the optative may 
 be used instead of the subjunctive : rjkOov Iva 'Soifu (or tSo)) 
 T came to see. 
 
 Kivas Tpi(p€i5 'iva rohs \6icovs hrepvKicffiv you rear dogs, that they may keep 
 off the wolves (XM.2.9''), Zianoeirai r^v yeipvpav Kvtrai, £)S fiij Siaprjre he intends 
 to destroy the bridge, that you may not cross (XA.2.4"). 
 
885] MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. 279 
 
 Kaiei\Kov tSj rpiiipeis, Sis iv rairais irii^oivTo they were launching the tri- 
 remes, that in these they might save themselves (XA.7.1"), ihiKfi axiivai, fi^ 
 ^i6e(rts yevotTo rois Kara\e\eififi4vois it was thoug/U best to return, lest an attack 
 should be made on tJwse wlw were left behind (XA.4.4''''). 
 
 a. The optative is used on the principle of implied indirect discourse 
 (see 937). It is therefore permitted only, not required; the subjunc- 
 tive after past tenses being freely used : to irkola ' AtipoKofias KareKava-ev, 
 iva fjili Kvpos biafirj Abrocomas turned the vessels, that Cyrus (may not) 
 might not cross (YA 14") 
 
 b. The optative may be used by attraction, when the clause depends on an 
 optative : /Sao-iAEus iifMS airoKiiTiu irepl Trovrbj iv Troi^irotTO, ina Kal tois £A.\ais 
 "EAAtjiti <l>i$os elri tfie king would like exceedingly to destroy us, that the other 
 Qreeks might be afraid (XA.2.4'). — Very rarely the optative occurs after a 
 principal tense of the indicative : Iliad A 344. 
 
 c. "Oiraii with the future indicative is rarely used in pure final clauses : 
 Tfi(povTai oirair /rnxoCcToi tliey are kept that tliey may fight (XO.2.1"). 
 
 882. With mr, offojf (and in Hm. Scjtpa), the particle av (Hm. K4) 
 is sometimes used before the subjunctive. It adds nothing to the 
 meaning : as av imBtis, avraKova-ov hear me in turn, that you may lea/m 
 (XA..2.5"). Homer and Herodotus use this av even before the optative. 
 
 883. In some elliptical expressions, the principal clause is omitted : <Si$ 
 h\ amrifua hut to be brief, so. I say only this (ETro.441) ; iv" ix roirav ip^ai/juu 
 to begin loith this (D.21''*). 
 
 884. Unattainable Purpose. — A purpose which could only be 
 attained in an imagined case, contrary to reality, is expressed by a 
 past tense of the indicative. Such a clause must depend on a con- 
 clusion contrary to fact (895), a wish past attainment (871), or some 
 other expression implying non-reality : 
 
 el yap &tl}e\ov oXoi t' elvai ra pt.4yiiTTa KaKk ^^epyd^effBai, 'Iva oToi t' ^(rav aS 
 Kol ayc^i ri fieyurra I wish they were able to work the greatest mischief, tliat 
 they might be able to work tlie greatest good, implying ' but as it is, they cannot ' 
 (PCr.44''), QavTi iiei PrniBeiv, Sttws Sti SixatSraTos i>v ^Cv tl^!/ ought to have 
 aided him while living, that he mig/U have lived most justly (PLg.969''). 
 
 B. Veebs op Effobt. 
 
 . 885. After verbs which signify attention, care, or effort, the 
 object of the endeavor is expressed by ottcos or oTrtos /^^ with 
 the future indicative : a-KOTru oTrois TrapcVci see to if that you 
 are on hand. 
 
 Such verbs are crKonciv, opav, ewifieXetrdai, evXa^eicrdai, irpaweiv, etc. 
 
 ^TTwy Kol vixeis i/ie iiraivifffre ifwl lieK^ffei it shall be my care that you too 
 shall pra,ise me (XA.1.4'®), ipp6vTt^€ Sttw? firjS^v avd^tov ttjs Ti/i^s to^ttjs vpd^ets 
 beware that you do nought unworthy of that rank (1.2"). 
 
 a. Even after a past tense, the future indicative usually remains : iirpairaov 
 Situs rts fioTiBeta ^|« tliey negotiated for the sending of succor (T.3.4). Ooca- 
 
280 MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. [88B 
 
 sionally it gives place to the future optative : iireiieXiiTo Sttoji /t); ficriTof ttotc 
 iaotvTo he took care that thei) neva- should be without food (XC.8.1'"). 
 
 b. The subjunctive or optative of the present or aorist (cf. 881) is 
 sometimes used, instead of the future indicative : i'lrpaa-a-fv oncos 
 iroKejios yivrjTat he was striving that a war might he Drought about 
 (T.1.57). 
 
 c. In Homer this is almost always the case ; us may also be used for &V(vs, 
 and «€ may be added before the subjunctive : <ppiir<r€TM lis K€ i/cijTai he will 
 devise thai he shall homeward come (o 205), Treipd Sirws Key 5^ ir^v iraTpiSa yaiav 
 Hktjui try to reach at last thy native land (5 545). 
 
 886. Before onais with the future, in earnest commands and warn- 
 ings, the principal verb is often omitted : Sncos aviip co(i (sc. (tkottci he 
 sure to) he a man (ECycl.595), oiras irepl tov iroXifiov fiijSev epels (sc. 
 <^uXaTTou take heed to) say nothing about the war (D.19"). 
 
 C. Veebs of Fearing. 
 
 887. After verbs of fearing and kindred ideas, the object 
 of the fear is expressed by /aiJ that, lest, or /^^ ov that not, lest 
 not, with the subjunctive : <l>oftovfji,ai /u,^ yevrp-ai J fear that it 
 may happen. 
 
 After a past tense, the. optative may be used (as in pure 
 purpose, 881) : i<jioj3ovfi.r)ti /jifj yevoiro (or yivrjTai) J feared that 
 it might happen. 
 
 S4Soma fiii iwiKaBdiieSa rr/s olxaSf iSov I atn afraid we may forget the way 
 home (XA.3.2"), SeSiimv p-ii o4 /3e/3aioi fjre we fear you may not be steadfast 
 (T.3.57), ?jv & tlKmiros h ipAfiif /iii iK<piyoi to irpiyiiaTa Philip was in alarm, 
 lest his objects might escape him. (D.IS^^), tovs ffv^ficixovs iBe^iffav /i^ ajrofrrwo'i 
 they were afraid that their allies (may) might revolt (T.5.14). 
 
 a. Rarely oiras fi^f) is used for jn'^ : ov (/xjjSeT ottms fi.^ i.v6(Tiov Trpay/ia Tvyxi- 
 vris TTpaTTojv i are you not afraid that you may be dohig something impious? 
 (PEuthyph.4*). The future indicative may then be used : Sf'Soix' Sttws ju^ 
 rei^ofiai I fear I shall find (ArEq.112). The verb of fearing here takes the 
 construction of 885. 
 
 b. Even jn^ alone rarely takes the future indicative ; (poPoS/iai liii iiSovas 
 lup-tia-o/ifv ivavrias I fear that ice shall find opposite pleasures (PPhil.l3»). 
 
 c. After such words as dpav and aKtrireiv, ju^ often introduces something 
 suspected as probable, i. e. conjectui'ed (rather than feared) : &dp€t fxij ov tovto 
 p rh ayaflifi' take heed lest this may not be the real good (PGo.495''). 
 
 888. Wlien the fear relates to something past or present, the 
 indicative is used after prj and nfj ov : 
 
 {bo^oiiJ-e9a ju^ a.fi<poTepci)j/ 7]fuipT'fiKafL€v we are afraid tliat we have failed of 
 both (T.8.53), Se/Sw p.^ Si) irdtrra Bict vtiiiepria elirev I fear that all tlie goddess 
 said was true (e 800). 
 
 a. The subjunctive (aorist or present) in such cases is rare ; SeivUs &9vna 
 p,il fi\iiroiv S iiAvTis ^ sore am I troubled lest the prophet (prove to) be clear 
 siglded (SOt.747) ; cf.' the first example in 887 a. See Iliad A 555. 
 
891] MODES m CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 381 
 
 II. MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 889. A conditional clause is one containing a supposition. 
 It is introduced by a word meaning if: either el, or idv (860) 
 contracted rjv, dv (Homeric d Ke). 
 
 The conditional clause {2}rotasis, condition) together with 
 its principal clause {apodosis, conclusion) forms a conditional 
 sentence or period. 
 
 890. Conditional sentences are either particular or general. 
 In a particular conditional sentence, the supposition relates 
 to a definite act or acts. In a general conditional sentence, it 
 relates to a?iy one of a series of acts; and this may be indi- 
 cated by the use of ' if ever ' in the condition and ' always ' 
 in the conclusion (' if ever ' being nearly equivalent to ' when- 
 ever '). 
 
 Thus : if he loishes {now) to go, he has leave, is a particular 
 conditional sentence ; but if he {ever) wishes to go, his master 
 {alicays) gives him leave, is a general conditional sentence. 
 
 Particular and general conditions are not distinguished in 
 form, except in the first of the following four classes. 
 
 891. There are four classes of conditional sentences. Two 
 are for present and past suppositions, and two for future 
 suppositions. 
 
 The first class has three forms, one for particular conditions 
 and two for general. Altogether, then, there are six forms, 
 as shown in the following 
 
 Table of Conditional Forms. 
 
 I. Simple present or pg^t supposition : 
 A. Particular: el with pres. or past indie. . . indicative. 
 
 _ p T \ 1- ea)/ with subjunctive' pres. indicative. 
 
 a. Lreneral : ^ g ^, ^j^j^ optative imperf . indicative. 
 
 n. Present or past supposition, contrary to reality : 
 
 el with past indicative . . . past indicative with civ. 
 
 in. Future supposition with more probability : 
 
 iav with subjunctive .... futui-e indicative, or imperative. 
 
 rV. Future supposition with less prohahility : 
 
 61 with optative optative with av. 
 
282 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [892 
 
 First Class. 
 
 892. Simple Present or Past Supposition. — We have here 
 two distinct cases, Particular Suppositions and General Sup- 
 positions. 
 
 893. A. Particular. — The condition assumes something, 
 without implying any judgment as to its reality. We have 
 then : 
 
 in the condition, d with present or past indicative ; 
 in the conclusion, any tense of the indicative : 
 €t TovTo TToieii, iiraivu) if yoii are doing this, J approve. 
 
 €1 fleof Ti SpSaiv aiffxpiv, ouk flah Beol if ffods do aught that's base, tliey are 
 not gods (Err.294), ei fleoS ^v, oliK ■?!» alffxpoxipSiis if he viof: a god's son, he 
 was not greedy of gain (PRp.40t)*^), ei vaph rohi opKous e\Oe rds irirovSas, tV 
 SiKrjv ex^* if contrary to his oaths he broke tlie t'i^uce, lie has his due {XA.2 5^^), 
 iTtirep ye Adpetov Kal TlapvcrotTiSSs 4ffTt nous, ouK ujua^cl toCt' 4y^ Krj^l/ofiat so 
 sure as he is a son of Darius and Parysatis, I shall not loin this prise without a 
 struggle (XA.!."?'). 
 
 a. Observe that condition and conclusion may be in different tenses ; and 
 that the conclusion may refer to the future, and so have the future indica- 
 tive. See the last two examples. 
 
 b. The imperative, or the optative of wishing, may also be used in 
 the conclusion: o-oi fi' ler) nXXr) Se'Soxrai, Xe'ye /cai StSaa-Ke if you have 
 come to a different view, speah and instruct me (PCr.49"). 
 
 c. Rarely a future indicative, expressing present intejiiion, is used in the 
 condition ; a?|Oe vhrJKTpov ei /Jax^'t (= ei /if Was /laxeTcrBai) raise your spur if 
 you are going to fight (ArAv.759). This must not be mistaken for a future 
 condition: cf. 899. 
 
 894. B. Generai.— The occasional reality of the condition 
 is implied, and the conclusion states what happens (or hap- 
 pened) if ever the condition is (or was) fulfilled. There are 
 here different forms for present and past time. 
 
 1. For present time : 
 
 in the condition, lav with the subjunctive (any tense) ; 
 in the conclusion, the present indicative : 
 iav TOVTO TToiria-y, iwaivS) if he (ever) does this, I (always) 
 approve. 
 
 2. For past time : 
 
 in the condition, el with the optative (pres., aor., or perf.) ; 
 in the conclusion, the imperfect indicative : 
 el TOVTO TToi-qa-ete, cTrgvow if he (ever) did this, I (always) 
 approved. 
 
896J MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTEN.CE8. 283 
 
 "i^v S* iyyhs i\B\) SiivaTos, ovSeis jSoiSAeTat Bv^ffK^tv if death draws near, no 
 one desi7'es to die (EAlc.671), iroyT' eCTii/ i^eupi7v, 4av /atj rhv ■n6vov (pe^yn Tis 
 one mai/Jind old all things, if one shvn not the toil (Phiiem.iv.l3). 
 
 e? irou i^eKavvoi, iip' iWou XP"<^0X<'^''""' ''repiTJye rhy Kvpai/ as often as he 
 rode out, he took Ci/rus about on a horse with golden bridle (XC.1.3'), cf too 
 (plhav p\e>fiei€v o'lKSTav Sffms, txAaiev r) Svarrtms ela-opm/nevij if e'er slie saw the 
 form, of one of her beloved slaves, she wept, unhappy ladt/, at beholding him 
 (STr.908). The future optative is never used : see 855 a. 
 
 a. As the conclusion of general suppositions implies habitual or repeated 
 action, equivalent forms may be used. Thus for the present may be used 
 the gnomic aorist (840) ; for the imperfect may occur the imperfect or aorist 
 with iv (836): Vmros euyev^j, Kav ^ yfpuv, iv Tot<n SciraTs eO/jAv o'uk a.T(iKe<rei> 
 a steed of noble breed, though he be old, in danger loses not ?iis mettle (SE1.25), 
 ft Tis ouT^i SoKolri PKoKeiiiv, ^KKey6ttfms n-hv iiriT^Seioi/ eiroKrec &v if any one 
 seemed to him to be lagging, lie loould single out the offender and strike him 
 (XA.2.3"). So even the simple aorist with ' often,' ' never,' etc. : see XA.1.9". 
 
 b. Homer usually has el alone, instead of iiv, in general suppositions. In 
 the Attic poets this is very rare : aK\' ivSpa, Kel tis p <ro<l>6s, rh fiaMveip 
 Tr6A\' aitTXP^" ovSev but for a man, tlunigh he be wise, aye to be learning m.uch 
 is no disgrace (SAnt.710). 
 
 e. Occasionally the indicative with ci is used in the condition, the particu- 
 lar form (893) being used in a general sense: elt ris ri iwitpdrra, cnreKpivovTo 
 if any one asked any thing, they answered (T.7.10). 
 
 /Second Glass. 
 
 895. Present or Past Supposition contrary to reality. — 
 The supposition is understood to be past fulfilment, and con- 
 trary to fact. We have then : 
 
 in the condition, d with a past tense of the indicative ; 
 
 in the conclusion, a past tense of the indicative ■witli Sv. 
 
 The imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect is used, according as 
 the contrary reality would be expressed }3j a, present, an aorist, 
 ova perfect. Accordingly the imperfect and pluperfect denote 
 present time, and the aorist past time. 
 
 Thus ei TovTo iiroki, hqUvovv av if he were doing this, I 
 should approve (but he is not doing it, and I do not approve), 
 ci roBro hroitja-ev, iTr-gveaa av if he had done this, J should have 
 approved (but he did not do it and I did not approve). 
 
 6* edtpav ajTopoOvTos v^ias, tout* ttj/ iiTK6Trovv if I saw you in distress, I should 
 he considering this (XA.5.6**), qvk hv hroiriffiv 'Kyatrids touto, ft fi^ 4yti) avrhv 
 ixeKevffa Agasias would not have done this, if I had not bidden him (XA.6.6"'), 
 61 nil vfieTs ^\6fT€, iTopev6iieSa hv vphs Pairi\4a if you had not come, we should 
 be marching against the king (XA.2. 1*), «' iKeieriiiiriv oiffldv, 4ir' aarpifiris tm 
 axoif'tv if I possessed a fortune, I should ride on a saddle (Lys.24"), e> avripKri 
 ri ij/Tjipla'fiaTa ^v, ^iKiinros ovtc ttv u^piKei roirovrov xp*^W if your decrees were 
 sufficient, Philip would nnt have insulted I'ou so long, implying ' but they are 
 insufficient, and he has insulted you ' (D.3'*). 
 
284 MODES m CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Note.— The indicative with av, thus used in the conclusion, is 
 called the hyjiothetieal indicative. 
 
 a. The imperfect is sometimes used where the contrary reality 
 would be expressed by an imperfect ; it then refers to the past : ovk 
 &v vqa-aiv eKpaTci, ei /jl!) tl Ka\ vavriKov clx^ ''<i would not liave been master 
 of any islands, if he had not been possessor of a naval force, implying 
 'but he was possessor of a navy, and was master of islands' (T. 1.9). 
 
 b. In the conclusion, the aorist sometimes refers to pr&ient time, being 
 used of the inception or bringing to pass of the action (S22) : el 4yti a-e 
 Myxavov avepaTuiii, tI &•/ fjtot aireKpii/a ; if J happened to be asking you, wlud 
 would you (proceed to) answer? (PTheag.l23'>), but tI hv aireKptvov; what 
 ioould you be answering ? 
 
 896. In Homer the conclusion is sometimes expressed by the optative 
 (instead of the past indicative) with &v ; this makes no difference in meaning : 
 Kal vi Kfv tvB' ajri\otTO Svo| avSpSiv Alveiis, ei fiii &p' ofu j/6Ti<re Aibs Svyirrip 
 'Aippoytrri and here Aeneas, lord of men, had perished quite, if Aphrodite, child 
 of Zeus, had not observed him keenly (E 311). 
 
 897. The particle av is omitted, when the conclusion consists of an 
 imperfect of unfuljilled obligation (834), as eSct, xP^"! ^tc, with the 
 infinitive ; so that the contrary reality is the non-fulfilment of the 
 obligation : ti <ro0or rjcrda, XP'}" "'^ tovto noielv if you were wise, you 
 ought to do this (but you do not do it). We might say that the real 
 conclusion, Ka\ eVoi'etr av and you would be doing it, is omitted : 
 
 XPVf^ 0"') ^^Trep ^ffda fii] KaK6s, ireiffavTa fie yafieiv ydfwv t6vS^ thou ouyhtesi, 
 if thou wert not base, with my consent this wedlock to be forming (EMed.686). 
 
 a. But XPV" Sk, ISet &v are used, when the contrary reality is the non- 
 existence of the obligation ; el trKoiffios ^trffa, XP^I^ ^^ ^^ tovto Troteiv if you 
 were rich, you would be under obligation to do this (but now you are not under 
 obligation to do it) : el ^aav ireiraiSevixevoi, ^Sei &v fiaBivTa Koi affKiffavTa levai 
 &s Itt' aflXrjToy if they tcere trained, one would have to learn and practice, and 
 meet them as one does athletes (PAlc.i.119''). 
 
 b. Some other imperfects, particularly ifiou\6ixriv, ■/i<rxiv6tir]v, are occasion- 
 all)' used without Si/ ; fjffxvvSfniv, el uirb ToKe/iiov ye SvTos i(ri'taTi)6riv I should 
 be ashamed, if I had been deceived by one who was an enemy (XA.T.B'"). 
 
 Third Class. 
 
 898. Future Supposition with more probability. — The sup- 
 position relates to the future, and some expectation that it 
 may be realized is implied. We have then : 
 
 in the condition, kav with the subjunctive (any tense) ; 
 in the conclusion, the future indicative, or the imperative : 
 
 eai' TOVTO TTon^a-gs, iiraivecrofJiai if yOU do this, I shall approve. 
 
 (iv Tis av9iffTriTat, ireipcurS/jieSa x^'P"^'^^"' if "'''.'/ "ne resists, we shall try to 
 subdue him (XA.7.3*^), ^v ykp tovto Kafiajfiev, oil Swija'ovTai fi4vetv for if we 
 take this, they will not be able to remain (XA.3.4*'), ^v •jr6\efxov alpTJffBe, ju^Kcri 
 
900] MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 285 
 
 f(Kf T€ Scupo Skcu iTtKav . if you choose war, do not come here again unarmed 
 (SC.3.2>»). * 
 
 a. Equivalent expressions may be used for the future indicative and the 
 imperative in the conclusion. Thus the hortative and prohibitive subjunctive 
 (866, 1 and 2). In Homer the subjunctive, with or without &y or «€, (868) is 
 found : €i 5e k€ fiij Stiri(ri, 4ya Se KSf airhs fXaijiuu if he restore her not, tlien. 
 I myself will seize her (A 324). 
 
 b. Poets, especially Homer, sometimes use simple ei. for 4ai> or rf ke (of. 
 894 b) : ei S" aS tij palria-i 6fiiv iir\ otvom ir6vTCji, T\ri<rofiai iv (TT^fleiro-ii/ hut if 
 some god sliall wreck me on the wine-hued deep, I irill endure in soul (e 221). 
 
 c. The aorist subjunctive in the condition is often nearly equivalent to 
 the hatin future pajcd : ye'ot Sv iroi/^o-pr, yrjpas ejeit eieoKis si juvenis laho- 
 raveris, senectutem habebis jucundam, i. e., if young you toil (shall have toiled), 
 a thriving age you mill enjoy (MMon.38S). 
 
 899. Very often, the condition is expressed by tl with the future 
 indicative (instead of idv vrith the subjunctive). This makes no 
 essential difference in meaning: 
 
 e? Tl ireia-ovTat M?)Soi, is Tlepaas rh Seiyhir ^^ei if anything shall happen to 
 the Medcs, the danger will come to the Persians (XC.2.1''), ei Tliiwjyiia^is naTp6- 
 KK'.f rhv <p6vov Ka\ "EicTopa enroKTeveis, airhs OTroflayci if you shall avenge tilt 
 murder of Pati-oclus and slay Hector, you will yourself be slain (PAp.28°). 
 
 Fourth Glass. 
 
 900. Future Supposition with less probability. — The sup- 
 position relates to the future, but no expectation of its being 
 realized is implied. We have then : 
 
 in the condition, et with the optative (pres., aor., or perf.); 
 in the conclusion, the optative with Sv (pres., aor., or perf.) : 
 
 €t TOVTO iroirja-eia's, e7ra6veo-at/tt av if you should do (or were to 
 
 do) this, I should approve. 
 
 £1 airavTes ixlfiTjffatfieOa t^v AoKedai/jiovitav vKeove^ldi/, eiiOhs ttv inroXoi/isBa 
 if we sliould all imitate the rapacity of the Lacedaemonians, we s/tould perish 
 forthwith (1.11'°), ft tis k^ktii^Uvos iirt ttKoutov, xpSno 5e out^ iii), op' tip 
 eiSaiiMDo! ; if a man should possess wealth, but make no use of it, would he be 
 liappy? (PEuthyd.280^). The future opt. is never used : see 866 a. 
 
 Note. — The optative with &v is the Potential Optative : see 872. 
 
 a. Quite distinct from this are cases in which the verb of the condition is 
 itself a potential optative with &v, conclusion to another condition expressed 
 or implied ; enrep &Wgj tqj -Tretdoiixrjv &v, /col ffol veiBofiat as surely ets I looutd 
 trust any one else (if he were to give me his word), I trust yow (PProt.329''). 
 
 b. Homer sometimes uses el' Ke with the optative instead of simple el : 
 ei x' Sf-e's ye (pdyoiTf, rdx' &" tote /cat rliris el?) should you devour, pen-cliance 
 hei-eafter I should gel redress (fi 76). 
 
 0. Things contrary to fact are sometimes conceived as if possible, and 
 expressed by a condition of the fourth class, instead of the second : oiS' hv 
 irv <t>alri$, ei in nil Kvl^oi \4xos nor wouldst tlu)u say so, did thy couch disgraced 
 not irk thee (£Med.568). 
 
286 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [901 
 
 Peculiarities of Conditional Sentences. 
 
 901. Mixed Fokms. — The form of the conclusion does not always 
 correspond to that of the condition. Especially frequent are : 
 
 a. A condition of the third class and a conclusion of ttie fourth: 
 iav ideXijaqre irpiiTTfLv d^toJS dfiwv avTOiv, taois &v p-tya tl KTrjaato-de 
 uyadov if you will consent to act in a manner worthy of yourselces, you 
 could perhaps gain some great good (D.3'°). 
 
 b. A condition of the first class (particular) and a. conclusion of 
 i^G fourth (cf. 893 a) : et firj^eva twv oKKtov livmveiv eiaa-aVf ovk 5v diKalcos 
 Xapi^ota-de airois if they allowed none of the others to seiiie as horsemen, 
 you will not justly show them any favor (Lys. 15°). 
 
 0. One conclusion may have two conditions of different classes ; in which 
 case it conforms to one of them. 
 
 902. Substitutions von Condition. — The place of a condition 
 may be taken by a participle (969 d), a preposition with its case, an 
 imperative, or other form of expression : 
 
 (Tu 5e K\iav elfffi rix" ^t if you listen, you will guiekly know (ArAv.1390), 
 iii y' v/ias avToiis vaKai tiv avohdiXeiTi by yourselves (i. e. if you had been left 
 to yourselves) ye would have perished long ago (D.18'"), TraiSes yev((rtu(rav • 
 (ppovrihav ^8t) TcivTa irKea lei children be born (= if they are born), everything 
 now is full of cares (Ant.ap.Stob.flor.68^'). 
 
 903. Condition Omitted. — This occurs especially in the second 
 and fourth classes of supposition. Thus rjPovkofirjv liv I should wish 
 {el ihvvaiiTiv if I had the jjower, as I have not) ; ^ovXolfiriv tiv I should 
 wish (fl Svvaifiriv if I should have the power, as possibly I might have). 
 The potential optative with av, in simple sentences, may be explained 
 in this way (cf. 873 a). 
 
 904. Conclusion Omitted. — This occurs when el, eWe, el yap are 
 used in expressions of wishing with the optative or indicative (870 a, 
 871). 
 
 a. When two opposite suppositions are expressed, the second by ei 8€ fii) 
 
 learn from the men of former times (XC.8.7°*). 
 
 905. Verb O.witted. — The verb of the condition or the conclusion 
 may be omitted, in cases where it may be readily supplied (Gll-613). 
 Especially when the same verb belongs to condition and conclusion, 
 it is often omitted with one of them : 
 
 el Tis Kol twos hiitp, Koi Kvpos fi|i<(s iari BavfuiCeireat if any other man is 
 worthy to be admired, Cyrus also is loorthy (XC.5.1'), el Si) rm <ro<l>iiTfpos 
 ipai-qv eJyoi, roirtf &v (sc. (ftatr]U, etc.) if in any respect I sliould say thai I was 
 waer, in this I sliould say it (PAp.29''). 
 
909] MODES tJSr RELATIVE CLAUSES. sSt 
 
 a. So arise the following special phrases : 
 
 1. «l fiTJ except: oi yhp dpa/iev, ei fii) oKlyovs roirovs for we see none (if not) 
 except these few (XA.4.'?'). 
 
 2. A (iJ| 8id «a:c«p< /or, explained by supplying an idea of hindrance: 4S6Kom 
 tur irdvTa KaTa\a$e!ii, ei fi^ StSi tV ^Keivou fieWriirti' it seemed thai they would 
 have taken everything, (if not prevented by) except for hit delay (T.2,18). 
 
 3. uinrcp ftv el as, like : ^oPoiiievos, Sxrirfp tii> ei irats, rh Te/jivefrBat fearing, 
 like a boy, to be cut (PGo.iTS'), properly, SoTrtp tv tpoPoTro, el iro« etn as he 
 might fear, if he were a boy. 
 
 906. A supposition directly contrary to something just before sup- 
 posed, asserted, or demanded, is expressed by cl 8e fil] : 
 
 din)T€i Ta xp^M^To • ci 8e ixii, iroAe/ni^ertu/ t^ avToh he bade them restore tfie 
 property ; but if not (if they should not restore it, ei /t); awoSoUv), he said he 
 would make war upon them (XH.1.3'). 
 
 a. ei Se it.i\ is sometimes found where iav 8^ /u^ would be more regular : 
 4hv fiiv ufiTv SoK<o \eyeiv ci\7i0es, ^uvoiio\oyi)iTaTf • ei 5e /iii, cu^iTeivere if I seem 
 to you to speak truth, agree with me ; but if not, oppose (PPhaed.Sl"). 
 
 b. 6t Se \x'i\ is often used after negative sentences, where we might expect 
 6i 5e ; thus ^^ oi^ta Aeye • €< 5e jix-^, oi Qa^^ovvra fie 'i^ets do not speak thiis ; 
 but (if otherwise) if you do, you will not find me confident (XC.S.l'*). So too 
 ci 5e' is sometimes used where we might expect ei 5^ jii] : fl fily PoiKerai, 
 ei/zeVcu ■ €i 5', o Tt 0ov\eTaL, tovto TrotsiToi if he wislies, let him boil me ; but if 
 he wishes something else, let him do wliat he wislies (PEuthyd.285°). 
 
 907. A peculiar class of clauses, having the form of conditions, 
 are those in which el or iav has the force of if perchance or on the 
 chance that. The clause expresses a contingency or possibility — either 
 desired or apprehended — which serves as a motive for the action or 
 feeling expressed by the principal verb : 
 
 ixmaov Kal ^.uoG, ii.v troi raura SoKJj listen to me too, if perchance you may 
 arrive at the same conclusion (PRp.358''), irpij tV Tr6\u/, ei iTiPoriBo7ev, ^x'^P"^" 
 'hey advanced towards the city, on the chance that they (the citizens) sJumld make 
 asa%(T.8.100). 
 
 For El after dauiid^ai, etc., see 926. 
 
 m. MODES IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 908. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns, 
 or by relative adverbs (conjunctions) of time, place or manner, 
 
 909. Oedinaey Relative Clauses. — In these tbe modes 
 are used just as in simple sentences. 
 
 Such clauses have a definite antecedent j that is, refer to 
 some definite person, thing, time or place. If negative they 
 have oi). 
 
288 MODES m RELA TIVE OLA USES. [910 
 
 a. Commonly the indicative ia used : ravr' im-lv tt iyi> vixSiv Sioixm it is this 
 that I ask of you (XA.'T.'i'^). But any form of expression may occur, which is 
 admissible in an independent sentence. Thus the hortative subjunctive : "hvu- 
 Tos oSe TTopeKaSeCeTo, (j5 fierdSuifieif TTJs ^rjT^ffews Anytus has sat down here, to 
 whom let us give a part in the investigation (PMen.89') ; or the optative of wish- 
 iug : oXfiat yap ttv rjfias Totavra vadety^ oTa robs ix^P^^^ "* ^^°^ •jroi'fjffeiaj/ for I 
 think we should be so treated as I pray the gods may treat our enemies (XA.3.2') ; 
 or even the imperative : &^toy trtcTTeda'at t^ yjp6vi^^ hv v/xeis traipetrTaTov eKeyxof 
 rov a\r]6avs vofjdffaTe you must trust time^ which 1 bid you consider as tJie surest 
 iest ofttie truth (Lys.l9*'). — For oTcrff h Spacrov, see 815. 
 
 910. A relative clause may express a cause, or a result. This 
 has no effect upon the mode used : 
 
 Cause, Baviuurrhv iroieis, is ruiiv ouSej' SlSas you behave strangely in that you 
 give us nothing (X-M.^.l^); Result, tIs outqis ev^Brjs Iffriv., Strrts h.yvosi rhu 
 iKeWev Tr6\€fLov Sevpo ii^ovra; who is so foolish^ as not to knoii) that the war in 
 that quariei- will come lather? (D.l'^). — For jui^ sometimes used in such sen- 
 tences, instead of ou, see 1021 b. 
 
 911. Final Relative Clauses. — Relative clauses express- 
 ing purpose take the future indicative; and if negative, have 
 M- 
 
 irpeo'Pitav vcfnreiy fjTis tout' ipcT to send an embassy to say this (D.l"), 6a\d<r- 
 aiov ^Kpi^ar'^ %vda ft^Tror* 6?(rrf»|/€(T0' in cast me out into ilie sea^ where ye may 
 never see me more (SOt.1411). — The use of oirms in final clauses (885) is a 
 development of this. 
 
 Conditional Relative Glauses. 
 
 912. A relative clause may have a conditional force, the 
 relative word implying the idea of 'if; so that 'whatever 
 person' (thing, place, etc.) is nearly equivalent to ' if any 
 person' (thing, place, etc.). The relative has then an indefi- 
 nite antecedent ; that is, refers to an uncertain or undeter- 
 mined person or thing, place or time. 
 
 913. Conditional relative clauses have forms corresponding 
 to all the forms of conditional clauses, the principal clause 
 taking in each case the form of the proper conclusion. The 
 particle av is attached to the relative word when the sub- 
 junctive follows (860): thus o<s av, biroBcv av etc. With on, 
 mroTe, hru, and eTretS^, it unites to form OTav, OTrorav, ctt-^v or 
 i-n-dv, iTTuSdv. If negative, the relative clause has /x.^. 
 
 914. FiBST Class. — Simple present or past relatii}e clauses. 
 
 A. Particular (of. 893). — Relative with present or past indicative 
 . . indicative: 
 
918] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES. 289 
 
 & fiT} oTSa^ ovSi tiiofiai fiSeVot what I do not kyiow (= et riva jx^ olSa if I do 
 not know anything), / don't think that I know (PAp.21''), ofts iir>\ eSpia-xoy, 
 Kei/OTd<titov auTorj ivolovv wliomever they did not find (= ef tii/oj fiii c'dpufKov if 
 they failed to find any), they made a cenotaph fm- them (XA.6.4'). 
 
 B. General (cf. 894).— Either: 
 
 (1) relative with Sv and subjunctive . . . present indicative; or 
 
 (2) relative with optative . . . imperfect indicative : 
 
 ce'or 5" airifAAiiT' ivruf &>/ iJ>iAj) Be6s he dieth yoimg whome'er a god doth love, 
 i. e., if a god loves any one (Hypsaeus ap.Stob.flor.l20i2), ^weiSav opfii/ieflo 
 vpofft^yai, ^epovTcu ot \ldoi iroWol whenever we begin to appj'oach, the stones fi^y 
 in great numbers (XA.4.7'), irdpTa!, Siroiis Xdfiotev iv rf BaXilurtrri, SU<petipov 
 tliey destroyed all, as many as they took on the sea (T.2.6'7), iB'fipevev carh iWou 
 iirtfre yvfjLydffat ^o\f\oiro kavr^v re Kal Tohs 'iinrovs he hunted on horseback U'hcn- 
 ever he wanted to exercise himself and his horses (XA.1.2'). 
 
 a. The omission of &v with the subjunctive (cf. 894 b) is frequent in 
 Homer, and occurs even in Attic poetry ; Twy Se irtjfioy&v fxaKiffra Xv-jroia' at 
 pav&a^ avOaiperot but of woes those cause most pain which come self-sought 
 (SOt.1231). 
 
 b. Analogous to the conditional relative is the Homeric use of the sub- 
 junctive, generally without kc or &v, in similes after &s, &s ore, and the like : 
 ws Se \eo}V ^v fiovffl Qop^v i^ avx^va &^ri nSprtos ^e &o6s, . . . &s roiis afitpore- 
 povs KT\. and as a lion, 'mongst the cattle leaping, breaks a heifer's or an ox's 
 neck, so tliese two etc. (E 161). 
 
 c. The optative occurs in place of the subjunctive, depending on an ex- 
 pression of necessity or possibility in the present tense : a\\' iv ii6kis ajiiam, 
 ToCSc XP^ Khiiiv but ibhom, the state appointcth, him we must obey (SAnt.666). 
 
 915. Sbconb Class. — Present or past, contrary to reality (cf. 805). 
 Relative with past indicative . . .past indicative with Sv. 
 
 ou ylip tty auTol cTrex^'poi'M^'' vpaTTeiv & fi^ rjiriffTdjuefla for we should not 
 ourselves be undertaking (as we are) to do what we did not undei-stand (PCharm. 
 i71»). 
 
 916. Third Class. — Future with more probability (cf. 898). Rela- 
 tive with av and subjunctive . . . future indicative, or imperative : 
 
 o Ti &!/ Sep, trfiffoixai whatever may be needful, I taill undei-go (XA.1.3'), 
 (TretSav Sia7rpa|iujuai & Seo^ai, I'l^a as soon as I shall have accomplished wJiat I 
 desire, I will come (XA.2.3''). 
 
 917. FoTJBTH Class. — Future with less probability (cf. 900). Rela 
 tive with optative . . . optative with Sv : 
 
 oiiK fev odv dp4\liats &vSpa octtis iBeKoi i-irepufcetv Toiij iirixf'povvTas SSweTc (re ; 
 woidd you not support a man w/io shovM be willing to keep off those who are 
 trying to injure you? (XM.2.9'). 
 
 918. In general the same freedoms and substitutions which occur 
 in conditional sentences, are allowed in the corresponding conditional 
 relative sentences. 
 
290 MODMS IN RELATIVE OLAXfSES. [919 
 
 Congruence op Mode. 
 
 919. a. When a conditional relative clause depends on any sub- 
 junctive or optative, its verb commonly takes the same mode : 
 
 imtZav wp hv Kpirirai Kupios yevTjTai as soon as he becomes master of loliat hi 
 hargainsfm- (D.IS""), Hm. us aw6\aiTo xal Sx\os Srir Toiavrd ye ^e'foi as mai/ 
 another perish too, whoe'er such deeds slui.ll do (a 47). 
 
 b. When a conditional relative clause depends on any past tense of 
 the indicative implying non-reality (895, 871, 884), its verb is likewise 
 put in a past tense of the indicative : 
 
 ^ufeytypi^JKeTe S^ttou &y fioi, ei if iKeivrt ttJ (ptovfi re Kai rtp rpSirci) eA67C»', 
 if ohirep ^Te9pi^/i|Ujji/ you would doubtless pardan me if I spoke in that language 
 and manner, in which I had been brought up (PAp.17'*). 
 
 Melative Glauses introduced ty '•xvntiV 
 
 920. The relative adverbs tas, eorf, axpi, ftexpi (Hm. o0/)a, do-oKev), 
 when they mean while, as long as, have nothing peculiar in their con- 
 struction ; but when they mean until, the clauses introduced by them 
 require special treatment. 
 
 921. 'E(i)s and other words signifying until, when they im- 
 ply expectation, take av and the subjunctive; but after a past 
 tense the optative (without av) may be used : 
 
 Trepi.ueyETc ^rr' &j/ cKSie wait till J come (XA.5.1*), ovk iva/nevo/iev I'ojs tiv fi 
 TluiTipa. xiipS, KaKarai we are not waiting for our own country to he ravaged 
 (XC.3.3"), TTfpie/ieve fiexpi iK9ai he waited for him to come (XH.l.S"), e?o|e:' 
 ovy ViioTivai 'ias Kupm a^ufifd^eiav they resolved therefore to go forward until they 
 sfiould come up with Cyrus (XA.2.1'). 
 
 a. The omission of &v is frequent in poetry, and occurs even in prose: 
 KaTariQiraL is TeyeSoi/, fJ.expi oS to7s 'AQijvaiois ri Si^Tj he deposits them in 
 Tenedos, until the Athenians shaH have come to some decision (T.S.28). 
 
 b The optative is used in dependence on the optative ; and a past indica- 
 tive iQ dependence on a past indicative implying non-7-eality. Thus Sioni ■/ 
 hv aiiTov fiiveiv eois hir4\Bois he would beg him to stay until you should retire 
 (XC.5.3"), OVK hi i-!rau6miv Uas lareTretpa.Bi)v I should not stop till T had made 
 trial (POrat.396"). 
 
 Remark. — These clauses have much analogy to clauses of purpose, and it 
 will be observed that they follow the same rules (S81-S84), save that the 
 omission of i,i> before the subjunctive is here the exception, not the rule. 
 The forms of expression which thus arise often correspond with those of 
 conditional relative sentences of the second, third, and fourth classes (915- 
 917); yet they sometimes differ from them, as in the use of the subjunctive 
 depending upon a present indicative, and of the optative (of implied indirect 
 discourse, 937) ; see the last three examples in 921, and that in 921 a. 
 
 922. When these words imply, not expectation, but actual 
 occurrence at a particular past time, they take the indicative -• 
 
926] CLAUSES OF CAUSE AND RESULT. 291 
 
 tout' {-jroiovv fi^xpt aK&Tos 4y€i/eTo they kept on iviih this till it became dark 
 (XA.4:.2''). The clause is then an ordinary relative clause (909). 
 
 923. When the clause implies customary occurrence, in 
 present or past time, it takes the construction of a general 
 conditional relative clause of the first class (914 B) : 
 
 TTKavarai I'ms av S^ Tives xp6mt y^iiaivTai V wanders until cei-tain periods 
 have been fulfilled (PPhaed.lOS"), avf/nepev avrous iare i/upii-yoUv ri lie (always) 
 waited till they had eaten a bit (XCS.!**). In these, the form does not show 
 whether actual occurrence or expectation is implied. 
 
 924. IlptV before, until, may either take the same construc- 
 tions as eo)S, or be joined with the infinitive (955) : 
 
 ov xfh i^f imiKBiiv irplv Su/ Su> Sixriv I do not deserve to depart till I have 
 been jntnished (XA.5.7®), oh irpSTepof 4irav<ravTo irplv i^€0a\oi/ ouTotJs they did 
 not cease until tliey had driven them out (I.1'2"). 
 
 a. In" general npiv takes the infinitive when depending on an 
 affirmative sentence, and a finite mode when depending on a negative 
 sentence. But exceptions occur on both sides, and in Homer the 
 infinitive is almost always employed. 
 
 IV. MODES IN CLAUSES OF CAUSE AND RESULT. 
 
 925. Causal Clauses. — Clauses expressing cause or reason 
 are introduced by on, hion because, ws as, linl. since, and othei' 
 words, and take the indicative: 
 
 4v6fu(ov Tia'a'oL(T8ai, on ou Tro\t) iviKav they thought tliey wm-e worsted, because 
 they mere not signally victorious (T.7.34). 
 
 a. When the sense requires, the potential optative (872) or hypothetical 
 indicative (895) may be used. 
 
 b. After a past tense, the optative rnay be used on the principle of 
 implied indirect discourse (937), to show that the reason was another''s, 
 not the speaker's: idaiiia^ov on Kvpos ovt€ aWov irifinoi, oiSrc airos 
 (j>aivotTo they wondered, that Gyrus neither sent any one else nor appealed 
 himself (KA.2.r). 
 
 o. For relative clauses with causal force, see 910. 
 
 926, After expressions of wonder, indignation, delight, and 
 like emotions (as Oav/j-d^ui, ayavaKTw, Setvoi/ ia-Ti, dyaTToi), the 
 cause is often expressed by el with the indicative, as i£ it were 
 a mere supposition : 
 
 Oavfid^a S' tywye el fiijSAs vfiuv ^tt^r' 4y0vfi€iTai /X'/tr' dpyt^srai but I am 
 surprised for my part that no one of you is either concerned or angry (D.4'"), 
 d^ovoKTM ei o'nacri S fow fi^ ol6s t ei/il fiTreiy I am vexed that 1 am so unahle 
 to express what /mean (PLaoh.194''). 
 
292 MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOVBSE. \m 
 
 927. Clauses of Result. — These are introduced by SiOTt 
 so that, which takes the indicative when stress is laid on the 
 actual occurrence of the result, otherwise the infinitive (953) : 
 
 ^irmiirrei x^^ fiirA.eTos, Siffre aweKpvfpe ret Hir\a Kol robs avdfttjivovs there corner 
 a tremendous fall of snow, so that it buried the arms and the men (XA.4.4"). 
 
 o. In reality, the indicative after Han is co-ordinate, not subordinate (Strre 
 meaning and so) ; it can be replaced by any expression used in simple sen- 
 tences. Thus the potential optative : irXoio d/iii/ wipeaTiv, So-re i^alipvris hv 
 ^iriiretrone you have ships, and so can make a sudden attack (XA,5.6*°). 
 
 b. For relative clauses of result, see 910. 
 
 V. MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 928, The words or thoughts of another are often quoted 
 indirectly ; that is, their substance is given in the form of 
 a dependent sentence. They are then said to be in indirect 
 discourse (oratio obliqua); and in distinction from this, the 
 original words themselves are called direct discourse {oratio 
 recta). 
 
 Thus indirect discourse aireKpivavro on ovk elSeUv they answered 
 that they did not hnow, direct discourse ovk 'io-fiev we do not hnaie. 
 
 Indirect discourse ovk eVcoei tI Trela-eTai he does not consider what he 
 shall suffer, direct discourse ri Tretcrofi.ai ; what shall I suffer ? 
 
 a. A speaker may state his own words or thoughts, like those of another, 
 in indirect discourse. 
 
 b. A direct quotation is sometimes introduced by on, as if it were 
 indirect: of 6c elvov on 'iKavoi ea-fj-ev but t?iey said (that) "we are able" 
 (XA.5.4'°), as if it were iKavol ehv or cla-l they were able. 
 
 929, Indirect discourse follows verbs of thiiJcing and saying (verba 
 sentiendi et declarandi) : these include all implying knowledge or its 
 expression ; as perceiving, showing, hoping, asking ; and even expres- 
 sions like SoKfl it seems, drj\6v ea-n it is evident. The indirect sentence 
 is the object of the principal verb ; or, if that is passive or intransi- 
 tive, its subject. 
 
 Rules of Indirect Discourse. 
 
 930, Simple Sentences. — Indirect assertions are either 
 
 (1) 'introduced by on or is that, or 
 
 (2J ti - ■ - ■ - ■■ ■ - 
 
 turned into the infinitive (see 946). 
 Indirect .questions are introduced by et whether, Trorepoi' . . , 
 y] whether . . . or, and other interrogatives or indefinite rela 
 tives (1011, 1016). 
 
9S3] MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 293 
 
 931. Compound Sentences. — "When a compound sentence 
 is quoted indii'ectly, its principal clause is treated like a simple 
 sentence (930), and the subordinate clauses remain dependent 
 on it. 
 
 932. Use of Modes. — 1. In general (except where the in- 
 finitive is employed, 930), the same modes are used in indirect 
 discourse that would be used in the direct. This is always 
 so when the leading verb, on which the quotation depends, 
 denotes present or future time : ipinTo. n Troteis he asks what 
 you are doing. 
 
 2. But if the leading verb denotes past time, any indicative 
 or subjunctive of the direct discourse may be changed, in the 
 indirect, to the optative of the same tense : ^pero tl iroioiris he 
 asked what you were doing. 
 
 a. This applies equally to subordinate clauses of the quotation : see 
 the last two examples but one below. 
 
 b. This optative is called the optative of indirect discourse, and must 
 be carefully distinguished from all other uses of the optative. 
 
 Examples. — Mode unchanged : \4yei as i^piariis eifii lie sai/s that I am 
 insoleni (Lys.24'^), direct iPpurr^s el you are insolent; ovk oiS' o ti Sc tis 
 Xpvt^ixtTO avrots I dori'f know what any one can do with tlieni (XA.3.1^''), direct 
 tI &p Tis xpil^^^"^^ ' what can one do with tlieni ?; PouKevofiai ^iras ffe airoBpw 
 lam considering hovj I can run away from you (XC.1.4'^), direct irSos airoSpa ; 
 deliberative subjunctive, 866, 3. 
 
 Optative : (1) for indicative : iyvieaav oi arpxTtuTm oti Ktvhs 6 (l>6$os ftri 
 tlie soldiers perceived iJiat their fear was groundless (XA.'2.2"), direct /cEcir i 
 ^6pos iari the fear is groundless ; Kvpo^ e\eysv 8t< ri 6Shs iaono vphs j3a(ri\E'd 
 Cyrus said that their march would be against the king (XA.1.4"), direct ^ dSbi 
 isTai tlie march will be ; TtpiiTo. tI viBoifv he asked what had befallen them 
 (XC.2.3"), direct ri e'lrcifleTe; v)hat has befallen you?; %Kiyov in irAriyeUv Tats 
 PdKois tJmi said tliat they had been strvck by the clods (XC.2.3"), direct iirXii- 
 717/xev we were st)~uck ; eXeyov on rrjs ett! BaPvKwva e?7) Si" fiimip T^Koteii they 
 said that it belonged to the road to Babylon, by which they had come (XA.S.fi"), 
 direct eVtI it belongs, tSketc you have come ; eTttev 8ti Ae^iwirov ovk e'ttoito/t) ei 
 TOVTO TreiroiriKiis eSV) lie said that he did not approve Dexippus if he had done this 
 (XA.6.6'^'), direct ovk iiraivZ I do not approve, cl veirolriKe if he has done. 
 
 (2) For subjunctive ; 01 'EwiSdfivioi rhv Sehv liriipovTo ei irapaSoTev Kopiv6lois 
 riiif T!6Ktv the Epidamnians inquired of the god whether they should give up their 
 city to the Corinthians (T.1.25), direct irapaSw/iEV ,- shall we give up ? 
 
 933. This change to optative is never obligatory ; the mode of the 
 direct discourse may remain unchanged even after a past tense, the 
 past thought being vividly conceived as if present: {jpero rl iroie'is he 
 ashed what you (are) were doing. 
 
 Thus ^Kef ayyeKKtav ns ws ^'Ehd/reia KaTei\7jnTai tliei'C came some one an- 
 fuyuncing that Elalea (has been) had been taken (D.18'*'), iro\iy xp6i>ov iiTr6poini 
 20 
 
294 MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [984 
 
 ri woT€ \4yei for a long time I was in doubt what he (means) meant (PAp.21''). 
 Mixed forms are common : sKsyov on Kvpos fj-ey tcAj'tjkcv, *Apiaios Se Tre^evytus 
 fir) they said that Cyrus was dead and thai Ariaetis hadfied (XA.2.1"). 
 
 tt. As the optative may represent either indicative or subjunctive, a cer- 
 tain ambiguity sometimes arises ; thus iiyv6ow o rt itoio'iev (nesciebant quia 
 facereiit) may mean either they Jcnew not what they were doing, or tliey knew 
 not what to do. 
 
 934, When a subjunctive introduced by a relative with av (860) is 
 turned into optative, the av is of course dropped. So idv, orav, eirfiSdv, 
 etc. become el, ore, fVetSij, etc. : 
 
 htreKpivaTo on $ov\iiiffotTo irepl avTcop S ri Siij/aiTo aya66v he a^iswered thai 
 he would provide for them whatever advantage he could (XA.^.l**), direct 
 fiouKeiirofuu S n tui Sivoifuu I will provide whatever I can ; vrlffX""''''', f ' 
 ^la^aief, fjLiaBo(popaif effeaSai he promised that, if they sitould go across, they 
 should receive wages (XA.^.l'), direct iav SiaPiJTe, idTtu if you go across, you 
 shall receive. 
 
 935, a. The hypothetical indicative with &v, and the indicative in a con- 
 dition contrary to reality (895) never change to optative: kireKoyovvio us ovk 
 &v TTOTe oira fiapol ^ffav, us, el ^Secov t(aTa\afi^ay6^eyoi' rhv Xleipata, ev t^ 
 iurrei hv vKOXeipiovs avTOvs irapeTxoy they said in defence that they would not 
 have been so foolish, if they had hiown that the Piraeus was just being seized, as 
 to have put themselves in their poieer in the city (SH.5.4'^). 
 
 b. The imperfect and pluperfect generally remain unchanged ; but rarely 
 they become the present and perfect optative (ef. 853 a) : Siij-yoCj/To Sti outoI 
 ettI Tofis TToKeidovs irXEOici/ they declared that they had themselves been sailing 
 against the enemy (XH. 1.7'), direct ^TrKeoiiev we were sailing. 
 
 c. So too the aorist indicative remains unchanged in a subordinate clause 
 of indirect discourse : e\eyQv &s d 'Sevo(l>wv otxoiTo irphs Xe/id-qv fi v-neffxero 
 aKoKri'f/iiJievos they said that Xenophon had gone to Seuthes to receive what he 
 had promised him (XA.Y.*?''). 
 
 936. Very rarely the present indicative becomes imperfect indicative (in- 
 stead of optative) : i-jreiOovTo, dpuvres Sti fiAvos i(pp6vei oTa Set rhv &pxovTa they 
 obeyed him, seeing that lie alone had the mind which a commander ought to have 
 (XA.2.2'), direct nivos (ppovel he alone has the mind. 
 
 937. Implied Indteect Discourse. — The rule for the 
 change to optative (932, 2) applies also to various dependent 
 clauses which, though not formally in indirect discourse, con- 
 tain the thoughts of another person. Such may be, for in- 
 stance, causal clauses containing another's reason (925 b), 
 clauses depending on the infinitive with verbs of command- 
 ing, wishing, etc., or on a final clause : 
 
 rhv TleptK\4a. IxiKi^ov, oVi ovK i^dyot they reviled Pericles, because (as they 
 said) he did not lead forth (T.2.21), ^TrefneiXev, et Tt irdOot, avaQelvat S ti oIoito 
 Xane7ff6ai rfj de^ lie charged him, if anything should happen to him, to dedicate 
 whatever he thought would please tlie goddess (XA.6..3*), 4iropev6nriv, 'Iva, et rt 
 
940] INFINITIVE. 295 
 
 Se'oiTo, ii<pe\oiriv avT6v I was going, thai I might aid him, if he should have any 
 need of it (XA.1.3''), present iropeio/mi, Jyo, idv ti Sei^rai, aitpeXa. 
 
 a. On this principle depends the use of the optative in final clauses 
 (881) and after Uais until etc. (921), since both purpose and expectation imply 
 thought. 
 
 C. INFINITIVE. 
 
 938. The infinitive and participle are verbal nouns — a substantive and 
 an adjective. But they are unlike other nouns derived from verbs (641), 
 being much more nearly related, in form and construction, to the finite verb. 
 Thus: 
 
 a. They are made from all verbs, and with different forms for the different 
 voices and tenses. 
 
 b. They may take an object, direct or indirect (693), like the finite verb. 
 
 c. They are modified by adverbs (not adjectives). 
 
 /Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive. 
 
 939. The subject of the infinitive, when it is expressed at 
 all, stands in the accusative case. A predicate-noun, belong- 
 ing to the subject of the infinitive, stands in the same case : 
 
 ^K0v6i> <Tc 'PlBi)vcuov eivai I heard that you were an Athenian (XA.8.1'"), rhv 
 Ka\hv KayaOhv &vSpa ei/Saifwya elvai (pTjfU I asser'l iliai the virtuous man is happy 
 (FGoAlO'). 
 
 a. The subject of the infinitive may be another infinitive : SiaTevpay/icvos 
 TJicei irapa fiaiTi\eais Bo&iival ol iTf&^eiv robs "EWTjfos he is come having obtained 
 from the king that it sJiould be granted him to reioie tlie Greeks (XA.2.3''), 
 where ady^nv is the subject of SoBrivai. 
 
 940. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed, when it 
 is the same as the subject of the principal verb. A predicate- 
 noun with the infinitive is then put in the nominative. 
 
 ?c^7) i64\eiy he said he was willing (XA.4.1"), in Latin, o"" the other hand, 
 dixit se velle ; aSiKiiaSai m/tiCei he thinks he is wronged (XA.l.S'"), Ufpirr/s e(pri 
 ilvai he said he was a Persian (XA 4.4"), iy&> oux diio\oyli(riii SkAtjtoj fiKeiv, 
 aW' mo (Tov KEKAi^/ieVoj I shall not admit that I have come unbidden, but bidden 
 by t/ue {FSym.}1ii). 
 
 a If the infinitive with omitted subject depends on another infinitive, the 
 predicate-noun of course takes the case of this infinitive's subject; and if it 
 depends on a participle, it takes the case of the participle ; voiovai Sokciv (r</)3s 
 iravToSawoi/s ipaiveaBai they contrive it so that l/iei/ seem, to appear in manifola 
 shapes (PRp.381«), aTraWaycls tUv ^curK6vTaii Smcuttuiv elvai being rid of tliose 
 wlho pi-ofcss to be judges (PAp.41''). 
 
 b. Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis or contrast, the subject of the 
 principal verb is also expressed with the infinitive ; it may thenstand either 
 
296 SUBJECT AND PREDIOATli WITH INFINITIVE. [941 
 
 in the nominative or the accusative (but aurifj is usually nominative) : ourbs 
 irp^ kittfvai (pT\aiv he says that he will himself depart early (XA.2.2'), el oUtrBe 
 XoAfciSeds rify 'KWdSa fftiiffetv-, vfieTs 5' aLtroSpdtreiTOai to irpdyfiara, ouk opBSis 
 dtiff&e if you think that tlie Chalcidians will save Greece^ but that you will 
 escape the trouble, you are mistaken (D.9"), of/iai i/ji vKiiai xp^f"-''''' ^'pydirBai 
 tl SaAouj aivSvo I believe that I have earned more money than any two others 
 (PHipp.Maj.282''). 
 
 941, The subject of the infinitive is also omitted when it is the 
 same as the object of the principal verb. A predicate-noun then 
 usually takes the case of tliis object, even when it is genitive or 
 dative; but sometimes stands in the accusative, in agreement with 
 the omitted subject : 
 
 Kvpou iSeofTo us irpodvfwTdTov yev4ff6ai they besought Cyrus to shoiu himself as 
 favorable as possible (XH.1.6^), jtoi'tI &pxoiiTi vpotr'l)Kei ippovtfUji ehat it becomes 
 every ruler to be prudent (XHipp.7'); — (rvfuptpei o-jtoTs ^(a.ous ehai fiuWov f) 
 TToAejufouF it is advantageous for them to be friends rather than enemies (XO. 1 1 ''). 
 
 942. An indefinite subject of the infinitive (as nva any one) is com- 
 monly unexpressed ; but a predicate-noun referring to it stands in the 
 accusative: (piKavOpairov elvai Sei (sc. riva) Ka\ (piXoTToXtv one ovght to 
 he humane and patriotic (1.2"), Sp&vras fjSlov Bavelv His meetei- (for 
 men) to die acting (EHe!.814). 
 
 943, The construction of the accusative with the infinitive originally 
 began with transitive verbs, the accusative being simply the object of the 
 verb : thus ijyyeiAav Kvpoi> vIkSv meant at first ' they reported Cyrus as to 
 conquering.' Afterward the accusative attached itself more closely to the 
 infinitive, and the construction was extended to eases where the principal 
 verb was intransitive or passive. 
 
 Pehsonal Construction for Impersonal. 
 
 944. Instead of using an impersonal verb with the accusative and 
 infinitive as its subject, the Greek often puts the subject of the in- 
 finitive in the nominative case, and joins it as a subject with the 
 principal verb. Thus it says Kvpos Xeyerai. vlKrjam Cyrus is said to 
 have conquered, instead of \eyerai Kvpov v'lKrjtrai it is said that Cyrus 
 conquered. 
 
 a. This change regularly occurs vsdth Sokei, coike it seems, Set in the 
 sense of it lacks (much or little) ; and usually with a-vp.fiaivei it happens, 
 SiKawv ecTTi it is just, dvayKalov earl it is necessai'y, eTTiTTjBcwv co-tl it is 
 fitting, and some similar phrases, and with Xe'ycrat and other passive 
 verbs of saying and thinking : 
 
 SoKovfi^v juoi KaBrja'Bai it seems to me that we are encamped (XA.1.3"), ttoWou 
 Seat 4y^ unep ifmvrov airoKoyelffdai I am far from speaking in my own defence 
 (PAp.SO^), SiKoios 6? PirnBeiv t^ kiibpl (you are just to take) it is right for you 
 to take the man's part (PProt.339"), & 'haffipios eis t^v x<^pav i/ifiaXuv i.yyi\. 
 XtToi it is announced that the Assyrian is aboui to make an inroad into t/ie 
 country (XC.5.S*i). 
 
948] INFINITIVE WITBOUT ARTICLE. 297 
 
 Inpinitivb without the Article. 
 
 945. The infinitive commonly stands either as the object or the svh 
 ject of a verb. As such it has two distinct uses, according as it is, or 
 is not, in indirect discourse. 
 
 a. An essential difference is that the infinitive in indirect discourse de- 
 notes time (852), while the other does not. Of. 854 a. 
 
 Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. 
 
 946. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used as the 
 object of verbs of thinldng and saying (see 929); and repre- 
 sents an indicative (or optative) of the direct discourse (930): 
 
 olo/iai /Se'Atkttoi/ ctvai I think it is best (XA.5. 1''), aKoia rivh Sia$d\\eiv e.ue 
 I hear that some one is slandering me (XA.S.Y'), o/uo/xSKaTe SwaiTftv ye- have 
 sworn that ye will give judgment (D.39'"'), (/)7)/tl toCto tpKvapias eTyai / say tliat 
 this is nonsense (XA.1..S'*). 
 
 a. With the passive of these verbs, and vpith goxei it seems, (j)aLveTm 
 it is plain, and like expressions, the infinitive stands as sviject : 
 
 Keyerai Kai tous deals imh rod Aihs ^(urtKsveaQat His said tliat even the gods 
 are rvled by Zeus (1.3^*), e5(Jkei Qeiov etvai «ol inrox^pria'cu rhv troTOfiiv it seemed 
 that it was a special providence and that the river had receded (XA.1.4'*). — But 
 the change to personal construction (see 944) is very common in these cases. 
 
 b. Of these verbs, observe that 
 
 c^ij^i and olo/iai almost always take the infinitive, 
 
 elnov takes on or mr, / 
 
 Xcyo) takes either. ' 
 Exceptions are very rare (XH.6.3' ; l.C ; XiLo-S"). Elirov with the infini- 
 tive commonly means commanded. In general, verbs of thinking take the 
 infinitive much oftener than on or as. 
 
 947. A subordinate verb, depending on an infinitive in indirect discourse, 
 is sometimes attracted into the infinitive, when the clause in which it stands 
 is a part of the quotation : roiavr' arra ff^as €(f)Tj StaKexBcifTas Uvai • 4wel Se 
 ysv€a9at eV! ttj olKii, aveay/ienriu KaToAa/ijSayeii' Till/ Bipai/ " after such conver- 
 sation," lie said, "they loent away • but when they came to live house, they found 
 t/ie door open" (PSym.lY4'l). 
 
 Infinitive not in Indirect Discourse. 
 
 948. As object, the infinitive is used especially with verbs 
 which imply power or fitness, feeling or purpose, effort or in- 
 fluence, to produce (or prevent) an action : 
 
 ou Sw'litrfTai ^litratrBai he will not be able to force them (XA. 1.3'), ^x" 7^P 
 avr^ lioprvpritTai for I can testify in his behalf (XA.T.B"), Tre^iKotriv diravTes 
 aimprdveiv all men are prone to err (T.3.45), ij6e\ov axoieiv they were willing to 
 listen (XA.2.6"), Poiherat Karaiiuvai tV arpariiv he wisJies the army to remain 
 (XA.5.6"), tpoPoinrii' tiy eireirBai I should be afraid to follow (XA.1.8"), rvpmytiv 
 
298 INFINITIVE WITHOUT ARTICLE. [949 
 
 hrivoei he intends to rule (ArThesm.338), ovk iK^Kve fiaa'i\ebs rh Kdpov ffrpd- 
 Tevfia SiaPaheiv tlie king did not hinder Cp-ns's arm.y from crosaing (XA.1.7"), 
 imipavTo el(r$d\\€ii/ tliey tried to enter (XA.1.2*'), jjfifaTO irpo'iivai he began to 
 go /orward(KA..l.S^)fTovs dir\irds ^KeKevcev avrov fietvai he bade the hoptites 
 remain on the spot (XA.1.5''), eireiflcj' avriv iropeuefffloi he urged him to march 
 (XA.6.2>=). 
 
 a. Verbs of hoping and promising are construed in two ways. If 
 felt as implying indirect discourse, they take the future infinitive ; 
 otherwise, the present or (wrist. Thus we may say vmaxv^'i-Tai Swa-etv 
 h^ promises that he will give (as in Latin, se daturum esse), or virtcr^velTai 
 boivai (or bibovai) h^ promises to give. Cf. XA.1.3°' and 2.3"° 
 
 949. As subject, the infinitive is used chiefly with imper- 
 sonal expressions like Sokei it seems good, Set, ^p^ it is neces- 
 sary, eWi it is possible, e^eari it is permitted, Trperru, TrpoCT-^Kei 
 it is fitting, Kokov icm it is honorable, and many others : 
 
 raffiv oSeii/ x"^^''^"" (s"' ^"■'■f) to please all men is hard (Solon 7), e^eirriv 
 bpav His permitted to see (XA.3.4^^), eSo^ev aiiTo7s Trpo'Uvai it seemed best to 
 them to proceed (XA.2.1^), ov S^iroy riv ipxovTa twv itpxofievtov irovTjpdTepov 
 Trpoffij/cei eTj/oi surely it is not right that the ruler should be wickeder than the 
 ruled (XC.7.5*'). — For the change to a personal construction in some ex- 
 pressions of this kind, when the infinitive has a subject, see 944 and a. 
 
 950. The infinitive may also stand as the predicate : rh fiavBii'eiv 4ti- 
 (rT7)/i7)c iffrl KafiPdixtv learning is getting knowledge (PEuthyd.277'') ; or in 
 apposition with the subject or object : ai^rij jU<fi/ij 4ffT\ KaK)\ irpa^ts, iTriffT-i}fj.ijs 
 (TTepTjfl^rai this alone is evil fortune, to be deprived of knowledge (PProt.346''). 
 
 951. The infinitive is often used (as an indirect object) to 
 denote the purpose of an action : 
 
 'Sei/otltwv rh tJjUktu rov ffTpareifiaros KareKtire (pvXdrTeti/ rb (TTpaTSweSov 
 Xenoplwn left half the army to guard the camp (XA.6.2'), Tai'n]v t))v x'^P"'" 
 4r4Tpe:f/€ Stapwdffai rots "EWTjffic this country he gave over to the Greeks to 
 plunder (XA.1.2'*), irapex^^ eavrhu ^ponav lie gives himself up (to question) to 
 be questioned (PMen.70'=), metv iiaiKi troi I gave thee to drink (ECycl.820). 
 
 952. The infinitive may depend on adjectives or substantives, 
 especially such as denote ability or fitness, or are otherwise 
 analogous in meaning to verbs which take the infinitive (948): 
 
 Adjectives: ixavhs vlkuv able to conquer (XM.3.7'), Semhs \4yeiv skilful in 
 speaking, eloquent (PAp.17''), fToi/ios ndxeaSai ready to figlti (XC.4.1'), i^ios 
 &pXf'y worthy to govern (XA.1.9'), xoAEiri eipfiv hard to find (PIlp.412''), yvvh 
 €uwpeirris 'Stif a woman comely to look on (XM.2.1''), oMa tjSIo-tti ivSiaiTcia-Bai 
 a house va-y pleasant to live in (XM.3 8'), 6 xf^vos Ppaxis iari SiriyfiarairBai tlie 
 time is short for relating it (PMenex,239^). 
 
 Substantives: oiix Spa KaSziSdv 'tis not a time to be sleeping (XA.l.S^^), 
 ffvvoiKeiv elx^v 7]\iKidi' she was of an age to be married (Isae.8^), ukvos ^p 
 avfo-TOfffloi there was a reluctance to rise up (XA.4.4"), miyKri irt/fleirfloi tliere 
 is need to obey (XH.1,6^, Bavpa ko! ixovaai a wonder even to hear of (PLg.6B6*). 
 
9B6] INFIXITIVE WITHOUT ARTICLE. 299 
 
 a. The active infinitive is generally employed in these expressions, even 
 where we might expect the passive : fijios eavfiiaai ' worthy to admire,' i. e., 
 that one should admire him, worthy to be admired (T. 1.138). 
 
 953. The infinitive is used witli muTe. to denote the result: 
 
 Tois Tj\iKt<&Tcus trwexcKpaTOj &ffTe oiKelus BiOKeTirOaL lie had mingled with those 
 of his 0W71 age, so as to be on familiar tains with them (XC.1.4'), ^Aawcc ^irl 
 Tobs MfpiDvos, Smttc cKelvovs iKircirKrixSat lie charged on Mcnon's soldiers, so that 
 t/tei/ viere terror-stricken (SA.l.S^"). — For &s used instead of Surre, see 1054, 1 f. 
 
 a. The infinitive with Sitte may also denote the purpose (as a result to be 
 attained) : irav ttoiovitiv, Sxtt^ Slicriv /ij) SiBivai tliey do everything, in order not 
 to suffer punishment (PGo.479''). 
 
 b. SttTTe with the infinitive sometimes means on conditimi that: ii/rtv ahroXs 
 rSiii Konriiv fipxeii/ 'EWi^vaii/, Sffre auToiij uiraKollEii' ^acnKei it was in their power 
 to be leaders of tlie rest of tlie Greeks, on condition of being tJiemselves subject to 
 tlie king (D.6"). — For e<()' i^re in the same sense, see 999 a. 
 
 954. After comparative words, 5 wo-te (less often ij, or ^ mj) is used 
 with the infinitive : 
 
 rurSoyro aitrhy eKaTTw Svvafiiv exovTa ^ Sffre Tohs (pi\ovs u(p^\eiv titey per' 
 ceived thai !ie had too small a force to assist his friends (XSA.S^^), liter., 'smaller 
 than so as to assist them ' ; v6aiina /ifiCov f) (pipciv a disease too great to be 
 boi-ne (SOt.1293). 
 
 955. The infinitive is often used after irpiv before ; see 924, 
 and a : 
 
 dif$Ti(rav irplv Tohs iWovs i.iroKptva<r6at they crossed before the otliers answered 
 (SA.1.4'^), 4tt\ TO^TOts iduero irpiv Tivi ehreiv rav ffTparitoTwif about this lie made 
 sacrifice before telling any of the soldiers (XA.o.6"'). 
 
 a. Hm. uses iripos in a similar way : iripos ToiSe tpya yeveffBai before these 
 deeds were done (Z 348). — Instead of irptV alone, we often find Trp6Tfpov . . . itplv, 
 or irpSaOev . . . npiv (and in Hm, irplv . . . irpiy, or trdpos . . . irpiv) : irpSr^pov 
 eKuvos ^TeAeiiTTjcre irpiv ri i/ioi Sicvcx^^""' ^'^ <^^<^ before ever /laving any 
 diffe)-ence with me (PLach. 1 80°). 
 
 b. Instead of irptf alone, we should expect irplv ij [prims guam) ; and this 
 occurs, oftenest in Hd., twice in Ilm., but perhaps never in Attic. 
 
 956. Inpinitivd in Loosb Construction. — The infinitive, with or 
 without the particle in, is used in several phrases with loose construc- 
 tion, somewhat like the adverbial accusative (719): as eiVeii/ or as 
 eTTos eiTTelv so to speak, (a>s) cruviKavri flirelv (sc. rii/t, cf. 771 b) to speak 
 concisely, ifioX fionceii/ as it seems to me, in my view, oKlyov Selv or jiiKpov 
 Selv almost, liter., 'so as to want little of it.' 
 
 a. So eTcoi is used in several phrases, where it may be translated at any 
 rate, or not translated at all ; eK&D etvai willingly (so as to be willing), rh vvr 
 flvai for tlie present, rh kutci tovtov eivai so far as this man is concerned : thus 
 iKliv elvai ov^\ii ifif^'tro/icu I will tell no falsehood ( willingly at any rate) if I can 
 help U (PSym.216»). 
 
300 INFINITIVE WITH ARTICLE. [SSY 
 
 957. iNFiNiTrvE FOR Impekative. — The infinitive is sometimes 
 used to express a command in the second person ; tlie subject, if 
 expressed, is nominative. This is rare in Attic prose : 
 
 dapauiv vvv^ AtifiifSss^ iirl Tpi^efffft fidx^cQai with courage^ Diomcd, now 
 against the Trojans Jighl (E 124J, ah, KXeaplSa, rds Tri\S.s auol^as iircKBe'iv do 
 t/imi, Cleai-idas, open the gates and sally forth (T.5.9). 
 
 a. With a svih]ect-accusative, the infinitive may express a wish or prayer ; 
 and also (in proclamations and decrees) a command in the third person; 
 Aeo! ttokXtcu, ii.il M' SovK^ds Tvxf'tv gods of our country, may not bondage be my 
 lot (ASept.253), aKoiere Xe^j • tovs yccopyobs airiei/ai hear ye people ; let the 
 husbandmen depart (ArPax 651). 
 
 For the infinitive in exclamations, see 962. 
 
 Infinitive "with IJ^butee Article. 
 
 , 958, The neuter article, prefixed to the infinitive, gives it more distinctly 
 the character of a substantive. Its different cases are used just like the cases 
 of substantives : thus for instance the oblique cases may depend on prepo- 
 sitions. The subject, predicate, and object of the infinitive are expressed in 
 the same way, whether it has or has not the article. Hence the rules in 939- 
 942 and 938 b are applicable here. 
 
 959, The infinitive with the neuter article prefixed may- 
 stand as a substantive in any case : thus 
 
 Nom. and Aec. to <^iXuv (the act of) loving, 
 Gen. Tov (f>iXuv of loving, 
 Dat. T(S (f)iXuv to, for, hy, loving. 
 
 Nominative : ri tppoveiv evdaifiovids Trp&Tov inrdpxei to be wise is the first 
 law of happiness (SAnt.1347). 
 
 Accusative ; aurb rh cLtroOvfia'Keiv oi/Sels (po^eTrai mere dying nobody is 
 afraid o/ (PGo.522^), 5iA rh ^evos elvai ovk fev otet aSiiaidrjvai ; do you think 
 you would not be injured on account of being a foreigner? (XM.2.1"), irphs rh 
 pieTpiuj/ Suo'dai imraiSeufj.et/os trained to having only moderate wants (XM.1.2M. 
 
 Genitive ; tov iriuv iiriBuiila desire of drinking (T.'7.84), A^flrji toS imTaKoicm 
 Tiv6s unaccustomed to obeying any one (1>.\^^), iiiol ovikv TrpeafivT^pov tov oti 
 0eKTt(rTov ifxe ■ysv4(j-6ai to me there is nothing more important than to become as 
 good as possible (PSym.'llS'^), Sp|oi/Tcs toS Sia^alveii/ having taken the lead in 
 crossing (XA.1.4"'), avT\ tov iirX Kdpidv Uvai cvdhs iiri i>pvyids itropeveTo instead 
 of going against Caria he marclwd straight toward Phrygia (XII.3.4"), ixThs 
 €? TOV fiiWeiv awoBv-fifTKetv aijpiov you are in no danger of dying to-morrow 
 (PCr.46«). 
 
 Dative : KCKpiTriK^ tZ irpiTepos vphs to7s irpayixatn yiyv^trdai he has fri- 
 umplied by being more prompt in action (D.8"), Wevav iiydWeTo Tip i^avaTav 
 86vaa-6at Mem>n delighted in being able to dcceii'e (XA.2.6'^''), it/ tw (typovely 
 yip juijSej/ tjSkttos plos in knowing nought consists the happiest life (SA^..^.^^), 
 46avpifSi^eT0 itrl T(p evOipuos re Kol evK6\a}s 0iv he was admired for h/s' living 
 cheerfully and contentedly (XM.4.8*). 
 
964] INFINITIVE WITH 'AN. 301 
 
 960. The inflnitive with rov is often used, without a preposition, 
 to denote the purpose, especially a negative purpose : 
 
 4Teixi(T9ri 'AtoAbi'TTJ 1) yijffos, toB /jl^ ApiTTOs KaKovpyew rifv Ett^oiai/ the 
 island Atalanle icas fortified, that pirates might nut ravage Muboea (T.2.32), 
 Mii/ajs rh \ria'riKhv KoQ^pei iK rrjs OahMTffijs, rou rets irpoirSSovs fia\\ov Uvat 
 auT^ Minos swept piracy from the sea, for the better coming in to him of his 
 revenues (T.1.4). 
 
 961. The infinitive with ri is sometimes found in loose construction, 
 analogous to the accusative of specification : rh irpoiTTaXaiirtiipitv ovStls xp<j8u- 
 (uts ^v as to enduring hardships no one was zealous (T.2.53). 
 
 a. In this way rh fi4i with the infinitive often expresses a negative resvlt : 
 Ti's MiiStiii' <roS aireKetipBr), rh /i-fi aroi aKoKouBetv; what one of the Medes remained 
 away from you, so as not to follow you? (XC.6.1*'). 
 
 962. iNPiinTrvB nsr Exclamations. — The infinitive with to is used 
 as an exclamation of surprise or indignation : rrjs fiapids ■ to Aia 
 vojii^fLv wliat folly ! to Relieve in Zeus! (ArNub.819). 
 
 a. In poetry ri is sometimes lacking : ^/ae iraQ^'iv To5e that I should come 
 to thit ! (AEum.837). 
 
 963. Verbs of hindering and kindred meaning take either (1) the 
 simple infinitive, or (2) the infinitive with rov : furthermore, in accord- 
 ance with 1029, they may take (3) the infinitive with firj or (4) with 
 rot) fiTj, or (5) with to firj (961). All these forms mean exactly the 
 same. Thus for Jie hinders me from speahing, may be said KoiXiei fic 
 \iyei.v, KfflXuet fie toC Xeyeiv, KcoXfjfi fie firj \iyciv, Ktakuci, fie rov fifj \eyeiv, 
 KtoXiei lie TO fit) Xeyeiv. 
 
 Infinitive with av. 
 
 964. The infinitive takes av when it stands in the place of 
 a finite verb which would take it. Thus the infinitive with 
 av coiTesponds 
 
 (a) to the potential optative with av (872), and 
 
 (b) to the hypothetical indicative with av (895) : 
 
 (a) xiyei ffuTriplas tiv rvxeif (independent construction i.v Tixoi) h-e says 
 that he should attain safety {XA.S.V), SoKeTrd fxoi iroKh PeKriov hv irepl rov 
 iro\cfwv $ov\ei(ra(reai (indep. fieXrlov tip Pou\eia-auree), el rhv Tiirov r1\s X"'?"' 
 'ivSOfirjdeiriTe it appears to me thai you woidd take much belter covnsel coticerning 
 t/ie war, if you should consider the situation of the country (D.4"). 
 
 (b) Kvpos, ei i^iaxrev, $.pttrros ttv ioKet &pxoiV yevetrOai (indep. &pi(rTos'^v 
 iyevero) it seems probable tliat Cyrus, if he had lived, would have proved a most 
 excellent ruler (X0.4"), aceu 5f aetfffiov otm &v fioi Soxei rb toioCto |u/itj37)i'ai 
 yevcirBcu (indep. own tiv ^mefir\) except for an earthquake, it seems to me that 
 such a thing would not have happened (T.3.89). 
 
 a. The future infinitive is not used with &v: cf. 856 a and 872 f. 
 
302 PARTICIPLE. [966 
 
 D. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 For the nature of the participle, see 938. For the agreement of the parti- 
 ciple with its substantive, see 620, 614-617. For the time denoted by the 
 tenses of the participle, see 8B6. 
 
 Atteibutive Paeticiple. 
 
 965. The participle, like any adjective, may qualify a sub- 
 stantive as an attributive : ttoAis olKovfi.evr] an inhabited city. 
 
 So always wlien it follows the article (666) ; b traplbv Kaip6s the present 
 occasion (D.3*), 6 Uphs KaXoi/uvos ■ir6\eiJ,os the so-called Sacred war (T.1.112). 
 
 966. The attributive participle is often used alone, its substantive 
 being omitted (631): 
 
 01 Trap6vTes the persons present, & rvxdv wlioever happens, ^irKet eVl -iroWas 
 vavs KeKTTifi^yovs lie sailed against men iolio possessed mani/ s/tijjs (XH.5 1'"). 
 
 Such participles are often to be translated by substantives : 6 Spitras the 
 doer, ot \eyovTes the speakers, ■jrpoff'^KOvTiS Tivss some relatives, trdXis iroKefiovyrcoif 
 a citt/ of belligerents, ra Seovra the duties, rb fi^Wov the future, rh TeKevratov 
 ixfiav the, final issue. 
 
 a. Participles thus used sometimes take a genitive, like substantives, espe- 
 cially in poetry : tA avjMfiipovTa T/jr Tr6Kfa>s the advantages of the state (D.18'*), 
 6 iKeivov TfKcii' his parent (EE1.335). 
 
 b. The participle with the neuter article is rarely used in an abstract sense, 
 like the infinitive : rh /lii /leAerSc the not-exercising, failure to cxej-eise (T.1.142), 
 = t!) iiii iieKerai/. In prose, this is nearly confined to Thucydides. 
 
 Peedicate-Paeticiple. 
 
 967. All participles vrhich are not attributive, are called predicate- 
 participles. See 594 rem. The predicate-participle is either circvm- 
 atantial or supplementary ; being in the latter case more closely related 
 to the principal verb. These two classes are not in all cases clearly 
 distinguished, but run into each other. 
 
 Circumstantial Participle. 
 
 968. The circumstantial participle adds a circumstance con- 
 nected with the action of the principal verb: ravra ebrhtv dirijeiv 
 having said this, he went away. 
 
 So yiKmv ttrriviae he praised them laughing (XC.2.2"), iiaKpve iroXhv xp^vov 
 etTTtis he wept a longtime standing {XA. 1.3^), in ttois hv irdwruv Kptiriaros 
 ivoiilCero while yet a boy, he was thought to excel all (XA.1.9'), ixoia-affL toTj 
 trTpaTTjyo75 ravra ^So|e rh ffrpArev^a ffvvayay^Tv when the generals heard this, 
 tlmy resolved to collect their forces (XA.4-.4'*). Often the participle must be 
 
969] CmQU^STAiJTlAL PARTICIPLE. 303 
 
 translated by a clause with wh&n or some similar word, as in the last two 
 examples. Sometimes it is best rendered by a separate finite verb : Ka,ra.Tri\- 
 S-{t<rds awh rov ipuaros Thv QiSipajia itfsSO he sprang from his chariot and put on 
 his cuirass (XA.1.8'). In cases like the third example above, &v cannot be 
 omitted. 
 
 a. The following participles are idiomatically used for adverbs 
 (cf. 619 and a) : dpxofifvos at Jirst, reXeuTooj/ at last, SiaXiiraiii xpovov 
 after an interval of time. So Zxuiv means persistently, dvva-ds quickly, 
 dappav boldly, Xadaiv secretly, )(^aipatv with impunity : 
 
 TcAeuTwi/ oZv 4-n\ ToOy x^^P^^^X^^^ ^" ^^ ''^^j fh&n, I went to file artisans 
 (PAp.22''), :l>Kvapus txai" you keep trifling, i. e., ' holding on to it ' (PGro.490»), 
 Hi/oty' avvtris make haste and open (ArNub.181), ov x<"POi'Tes Uv imaWd^aiTe 
 you wUl not yet off scot-free (XA.5.6^*). 
 
 b. The jiarticiples ex'"*'i "ly'v, r^iptov, Xafiav, xp^l'^^vos may often 
 be rendered loith: Stoa-ids naptjv ex<>>v oTrXirds TpidKocrcovs Sosiaa was 
 there with 300 hoplites (XA.1.2'), ^og xpa>p.evoi with a shout (T.3.84). 
 
 u. The phrases Ttiraddv; ('haying suffered what ?') and rt ij.a6tiy; ('having 
 learned what ? ') signify why, asked in a tone of surprise or severity : t( yiip 
 fiaB6i'Tes Toils 9eous vfipl^ere-; why tile deuce did i/ou instdt the gods I (ArNub. 
 1506). 
 
 969. Most commonly, the circumstantial participle denotes merely 
 an attendant cii'cumstance. But it may also imply means, manner, 
 cause, purpose, condition, or concession. Thus : 
 
 a. Means or Manner : Kri(6ij.emi faio'i they live by plundering (XC.3.2'*), 
 jjKet Tct ;taA.e7rcfc (pepSfiEva the troubles are come ivith a rush (XC.2.3^). 
 
 b. Oadse : napvtrdTis uwtjpx^ t^ ^^P% <l>i\oi(ra avThv fxaWop ^ tov pacriKei- 
 ovra 'Apra^p^riv Parysatis favored Cyrus, because she loved him more than the 
 reigning Artaxerxes (XA.1.1''). 
 
 c. Purpose : the participle is then usually /«te)'e ; napeKiiKvBa <ruiiPoiiKev(rmv 
 I have come forward to advise (1.6^), en-e/xij/e Ttva ipovvra oti ffvyy^v^ffBai avr^ 
 XPvC^' ''^ ^^^^ " """* '" ^"y ^''"^ ''^ wished to meet him (XA.'2.5'^). The present 
 also occurs, though seldom : Trefmsiv KaKvovras to smid persons to Am(^«'(T.6.88). 
 
 d. Condition ; ah 5f K\iuv ei<ret Tttxa bui if you listen, you will quickly 
 know (ArAv.1390). The conditional participle with fvl] can often be rendered 
 by without: oitc ivTiv ipx^i" M^ SiSSvra iuaB6v it is not possible to command 
 witliout giving pay (0.4?*). 
 
 e. Concession : rb BSaip eiwvATaTov &pitrTov up water is the cheapest of 
 things, tliough it is the best (PEuthyd.304'*), w^ets itpopcvfLsyoi ri ireTrpdyfieva 
 ta\ SuffxepalvoyTfs ^-yfre rj/c eipitvi)v S/ias you, though you were suspicious as to 
 what had been done, and were dissatisfied, continued to observe the peace notwith- 
 standing (D.IS"). 
 
 Remark.— It must be remembered that the (Jreek participle, while it 
 stands in all these relations, does not express them definitely and distinctly. 
 Hence the different uses run into each other, and cases occur in which more 
 than one might be assigned : thus rois <t>l\ovs eiepyeTorJVTes Ko! robs ix^P"^' 
 SviriiffeffBe KoXd^fiv by benefiting your friends (means), or if you benefit yuur 
 friends (condition), you will he able also to chastise your enemies (XO.8.7^'). 
 
304 &EN1T1VE1 AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. [9V0 
 
 Participle with Case Absolute. 
 
 970. Genitive Absolute. — The circumstantial participle 
 may be joined with a genitive not immediately dependent 
 on any word in the sentence. The two are then said to be 
 in the Genitive Absolute: tovtu>v XexOivruyv avear-qa-av this said, 
 they rose up. 
 
 imoipaivov'ros tov 9jpos, 6 'Ay7)<rl\aos k^iVottet^Js fjv when spnng was just 
 peeping^ Affesiiaus ivaa bed-ridden (XH.5,4''''), touto eirpaxOv KSvuvos trrpaTij- 
 yovvTos this was done while Conon was genei'al (1.9'*^), av4^r, eVi ra vp^i ouSei/hs 
 KaKvovTos lie ascended the mountains, no one liindtring (XA.1.2'-). 
 
 971. The genitive absolute, besides denoting merely time or atten- 
 dant circumstances (as in the above examples), may imply other rela- 
 tions (cf. 969). Thus: 
 
 a. Cause : tUv autiArav 6ri\vvofi€iia>v, Koi al if/Ox"' apfiaffT6T£pai yiyvovTai 
 (the body being enfeebled) by the enfeebling of the body, the spirit also is made 
 weaker (X0.4'). 
 
 b. Condition : dtay ef\6vTiev kv S' iKriBeia-aifi.' iyii if the gods will it, I icill 
 speak tlie truth (ASept.B62). 
 
 c. Concession : jSoij^^cai, iroWSiv uyrtav tripav, ouSels avrols iw^treTot though 
 there be many on the opposite bank, no one will be able to come to t/ieir aid 
 (XA.2.4™). 
 
 972. The Greek construction of the genitive absolute differs from 
 the Latin ablative absolute in several respects : 
 
 a. The noun is often omitted, when it can be easily supplied ; hrevBev 
 vfoi6vTmv (so. ahTasv), iipalveTO tx"'" 'linruiv as they were proceeding thence, there 
 appeared tracks of horses (XA.1.6'), Sovros (Zeus raining, cf. 602 c) while it 
 was raining (ArVesp.774). 
 
 b. The participle Hv being cannot be omitted ; TrafSmi' uvtiov T]fjLSiii when we 
 were boys (but Lat. nobh pueris). Except with the adjectives Ik^c and aKav, 
 which closely resemble participles: e^ov sk^vtos with m.y consent, ifiov aKovros 
 against my will. 
 
 c. The Greek, as it has perfect and aorist participles in the active voice, 
 uses the construction of the case absolute much less often than the Latin : 
 Ki/poy {TuyKaKeffas robs (TTpaTTiyobs elirev Cyrus, convocaiis ditcibus, dixit (XA. 
 1.4»). 
 
 d. The genitive absolute is sometimes needlessly used, when the noun 
 denotes something mentioned in the main clause ; ravT^ e^VrfcTos avrov, ^So^e 
 Ti \4yetv Tip 'AiTTvdyei (= Tai/r' eiViv ^So^e) vihen he had said this, lie seemed 
 to .4styages to say something important (XC.1.4-''), SiaPePTiKSros XlepM\4ovs, 
 iiyyf?i9ri aiiT^ (— 5iaj3e;8))K(<Ti TlepiKKel TiyyeXdr)) when Pericles had crossed 
 over, word was brought to him (T.1.114). 
 
 973. Accusative Absolute. — Instead of the genitive abso- 
 lute, the accusative is used when the participle is impersonal : 
 thus efov (it being permitted) since it is permitted. 
 
976] ADJUNCTS OF THE PARTICIPLE. 305 
 
 ah\h rl 5^, tiias i^hv hroK^trcu, oiiK ^irl tovto ^KBofi^v ; but why., when it wan 
 in our powa- to destroy you, did we not proceed to do so? (XA.2.5'*), irpoarax^ir 
 fioi M^vuva iyeiv eis ''EWiitT'irovTov, t^x^H-V*' Sm rdxovs (it being commanded) 
 wheii a command was given me to convey Maton to the Hellespont, I went in haste 
 (D.50^^), irape/ceAeiioiTO Kpavy^ ovK 6\ty7t xP^f^^^ot, oSvvaToy hv 4v vvkt) i(X\^ 
 Tif) a'rinrjvai they cheered each other on with no little outcry, (it being im possible) 
 as it was impossible in the night to give signals by any other means (T.7.44). 
 
 a. Usually the participle belongs to an infinitive, as in the above examples. 
 But sometimes it stands quite alone, as the participle of a verb with indeter- 
 minate subject (602 d): StjKov yap Srt oTa'Oa, fjL4\ov y^ a-oi for of course you 
 must know, (it being a care to you) since you take an interest in it (PAp.24''). — 
 Yet in this case the participle is commonly put in the genitive, if the corre- 
 sponding verb is not ordinarily impersonal : oSras ?x<"''''os or ixivTav (it being 
 thus, things being thus) in this state of things (PEp.38P,XA.S.l*"). So, also, 
 when the noun is replaced by a dependent sentence : aTumveivrav tQ 'AiTTudytt 
 Sti iro\efiiol tlaw iv T7) x^P^ when it was reported to Astyages that enemies wei-e 
 in the land (XC.1.4'8)'; for the plural, of. 635 a. 
 
 974. After as (978) and atrirep, the accusative absolute is sometimes 
 found, even when the participle is not impersonal : 
 
 '^ZuKpaTTtS riVx^TO Trphs robs 0eoits ottAws Tayada Si56vai, i}s robs Oeoiis kc£A- 
 Aio-To elS6Tas iiroTa ay add 4iTTt Socrates pi-ayed to the gods simply to bestow 
 good, thinking that the gods know best what things are good (XM.1.3'), aimirrf 
 iSelTTvovv, Stnrep tovto irpoaTeTayfiivov avTots they were dining in silence, just 
 as if this had been enjoined upon them (XSym.l"). 
 
 a. Rarely so, without preceding iis or SJa-irep : Trpocr^Ko*' airr^ tov /cA^pou 
 /iepos since a part of the inheritance belonged to him (Isae.5"), i6^avTa Se toCto 
 but this having been resolved on (XH.3.2"); even S6^av ttoto (XA.4.1''), on 
 the analogy of ?5o{e toOto. 
 
 Adjuncts of the Participle. 
 
 975. The relations of the circumstantial participle to the principal 
 verb are rendered more distinct by certain particles, wl^ich may be 
 called adjuncts of the participle. Thus : 
 
 976. The adverbs £v6is straightway and airUa forthwith, prefixed 
 to the participle, denote that the action of the principal verb imme- 
 diately succeeds that of the participle ; Sfia at the same time and /jLera^v 
 between, prefixed (rarely appended), represent the tvco actions as con- 
 temporaneous : 
 
 T^ Se|ii? K^pat eietis djro;8ei87)«((Ti iircKuvTO they fell upon tJie right wing 
 im.mediafAy after its landing (T.4.43), out/ko yeyifuvoi/ is Thv lufphv h^pjta^aTO 
 Zeiis as soon as he was born, Zeus sewed him into his thigh (Hd.2.146), iiiixovTo 
 Sl/jm Topevd/j-emi ol "EW-qves the Greeks fought while upon the march (XA.6.3'), 
 Mcve'leyoj fiera^b iralCuv siaipx^Tai Mencxenus, sporting the while, comes in 
 (PLys.207»). 
 
 a. Strictly speaking the above adverbs, though closely connected with the 
 participle, modify the principal verb. And sometimes they are joined with 
 this verb, not with the participle. So also 
 
306 ADJUNCIS OF THE PARTIQIPLE. [9V7 
 
 b. rdre, elro, t/reiro, o'jTas are often used with the priDcipal verb after 
 participles : vv^p (xeylj-Ttau Koi KaWftrrtoy Kiv^uve-ufTavres, outoj rhv $iov sreXciJ- 
 rri<rav they I'isked all for a great and noble caicsej and no ended their lives 
 (Ly3.2"). 
 
 977. The adverb are (also oXov, ola) with the participle gives a 
 causal meaning : 
 
 KOpos, &TE irtxts &y^ ^^ero t^ trro^j} C^p'us^ inaamuch as he was a child^ was 
 delighted with the equipage (XO.l.S^), itpri Kara^apOiiv irdvu ttoKv^ tire fiatcpSii' 
 T&v vvKT&v oviruv he said iJiat he slept a long while, because the nights wei'e long 
 (PSym.223'>). 
 
 978. The conjunction as as, as if, with the participle, represents 
 its action sometimes as seeming or pretended, but oftener merely as 
 thought or asserted by some other persrni than the speaker. Thus as 
 vlKav ('as conquering') may mean either pretending to he victorious 
 or thinking himself victorious. 
 
 Tlpi^evov iK4\ev(r€ irapayevetrdat, ws is neiffiSds fiou\.6fi€vos crrpaTevefrQm, &s 
 vp&y^ara irapex^fTuv nei(riSicv rp eaifTov x^P^ l^ bade Proxemis report himself 
 for duty, on the pretence that he wanted to march against the Pi&idiarts, because 
 t/ie Fisidians (as he alleged) ivere harassing his territory (XA.1.1"). — TavTTjv 
 T^v x^P^^ iTTFTpei^e StapTrdcat toTs ^KWrfffiv, ws iroK^fiiav ovcav this country he 
 gave over to the Greeks to be plundered, since it was (as he considered) hostile 
 (XA.1.2'^), daufid^ovrai S}s ffocpoi T6 Kol eurux^'^s auSpss yeyeu'qfj.epot they are 
 admired as having been (in the view of their admirei'i) both wise and fortunate 
 men (XO.1.1'), £ts SiSaKTou ot/ffTis tTjs apeT?}s \eyei he speaks in the belief that 
 virtue is a thing that can be taught (PMen.95"), awe^Kexfiari trphs iWifKovs, i)S 
 aurhs /xec sKaffTos ou jrotTjira}!^, rhv 8i nKTjiTiov Trpd^ovra (974) ye looked to one 
 another, expecting each that he himself tcou'd not do it, but that his neighbor 
 would accomplish i7(D.14'*), auKKaii^i'Jn Kvpov iis cLKOKTevav he seizes Cyrus, 
 meaning (as he declared) to put him. to death (XA.1.1^). 
 
 a. Hairep as, as if, on the other hand, implies simply resemblance or com- 
 parison : apxovvTo i(pt(rTdfi.ivoi Sirirep dWois eiriStiKviufvoi they slopped and 
 danced, as if exhibiting for others (XA.5.4'*). 
 
 979. KaiTTep (less often KaC) witli the participle gives a concessive 
 meaning and is rendered though : o-u/iiSovXeum o-oi Kalirep vfarepos av 
 I advise you, although I arro younger (XC.4.5^'). 
 
 a. In Hm., the Kai and jre'p are often separated : o5 8e Koi axfiiJ-evol irep 4Tf' 
 aiiTip iSii yeKaaaav hut they, though troubled, gleefully at him did laugh (B 270) ; 
 or Trip alone is used in the same sense: ix^liiifvoi irep {ic 174). 
 
 b. o>a>j yet, nevertheless may be added to the principal verb, whether Kai-rep 
 (s expressed or not : rh vKriBos &/i.eTpov Spavres, Suaa iroAfi^iraTf Uvat iir" 
 atiTois though seeing that their number was immense, you still had the courage 
 to charge on them (XA.3.2"'). — Sometimes ouas is separated from its verb by 
 the concessive clause : (rhv <rol li^ntus koI iv t^ t!o\fp.l5. Syres da^^ov/xey inth 
 you, though in the enemy's country, we are not afraid (XC.5.1'^), ipi\a-oiuu 8^ 
 Ka\ Kaxis irda'xoi'ff' ofims but I, though wronged, will ask thee none the lest 
 (EMed.280). 
 
 <i For Koi ravra and that with concessive participles, see 612 a. 
 
982] SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 307 
 
 Supplementary Participle. 
 
 980. The supplementaiy participle is closely connected with 
 the verb, and supplies au essential part of the predicate. It 
 may belong either to the subject or to the object of the prin- 
 cipal verb. 
 
 Thus : (subject) urdi AvTrijpos &v know tliat you are offensive; 
 (object) otSa auTov Xvirqphv ovra I Je7iow that he is offensive. 
 
 981. The supplementary participle is used with verbs of 
 being, appearing, and showing; and of beginning, continuing, 
 and ceasing to be. 
 
 So elfj.1, vndpx^ '*"'■) (jiaivopat appear, <pavep6s (fi^Xoff) ft/xi dTti Tnani- 
 fest, foiKa seem, deiKvvfU, SijXdto, dirofpaivai sliow, jroieo) represent, i^e)^ey)(a 
 convict, dyyeXKo) announce, 6ii6koyia> achnowledge ; — apxofiai begiii, 8ia- 
 Te\4u> continue, navai make cease, navopai, Xj;-yo) cease, SiaKeiira, tinXfiiro) 
 leave off, also dirayopfv<o give ovei; iXXciiraJ'ail. 
 
 Thus ei Tors irKfloffiv apeffKovrh i(r)ifv if we are acceptable (o the majoHty 
 (T.1.38), Sri\os fiv avitiiieuos it was dear that he was distressed (W.1.2"), mra- 
 tpaluoutTi Tovs (j>e6yovTas ira\ai irovTtpobs vvras they show that the exiles were long 
 ago had (Lys.?0'), iravra tveKa eaurot/ iromv e^eX^^e-y/CTOi he lias been convicted 
 of doing everything for hvi own advantage {D.2^). 
 
 kitra fi/iepas fiaxo/iecoi SieriKea-av seven days they (continued fighting) /o«^/i« 
 tvithout stopping (XA.4.3''), roiis $ap0ipov5 iTravffeii v^pi^ovra! he made the bar- 
 barians cease behaving insolently (1.12''), ovk oTreiire peyd\T)v Kal KoKiiv itpU/ievos 
 S6iai/ he did not give up aiming at a great and noble repntcUion (XAges.ll"). 
 
 a. Here belongs the construction of ix" ^^ii^ the aorist (seldom the per- 
 fect) participle, as a. circumlocution for the perfect ; this is chiefly found in 
 dramatic poetry: Kiipi^ds ix". ^ '"""^ proclaimed (SAnt.192) liter, 'having 
 proclaimed I hold myself thus,' &Se\<piiv rijy e^V yrifias ?x"*» ^''*' """* "'■!/ 
 sister as thy wedded wife? (SOt-BTT). 
 
 982. Verbs of knowing, perceiving, remembering, and the 
 contrary, take the supplementary participle. 
 
 Such are oi^a, yLyvata-KO) hnow, eirirrrapai understaTid, dyvoia a/nh ignO' 
 rant, — al(rdavop.ai. perceive, yo/ti'^tii rovstider, 6pda> see, nepiopato (overlook) 
 allow, aKova hear, p.avdava> learn, nvvBdvofiai lea/m by inquiry, evpia'K<o 
 find, Xa/i/Savo) (catch) detect, AXlaKoiiai, (fxopdopxu am detected, — pepvrjpai 
 remember, inCKavOavopai forget. 
 
 Thus oTSa ffe Xiyovra ael T know that you are always saying (XCLe"), XaBi 
 lifVToi aySriTos &v know, hoioever, that you are foolish (XA.2.t"), itymei rbc 
 ^KftSev ir6KeiJiov Sevpo fi^ovra lie knows not tltat the war vihich is raging there will 
 come hither (D.l"). 
 
 ftSov airois ireXd^ovras they saw them approaching (XC.1.4"'), dpSi jikv 
 i^afiapTdvtei', yimi I see indeed, woman, that T da err (EMed.3B0), ^Se'mr imoia 
 SiB/cpaTouj SiaKeyopihov I like to hear Socrates discourse (P.Sym.l94*), ^ir 
 imPouKiiui/ aKiiTKrrrai if he be detected in laying plots (XAges.8'). 
 
308 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. [988 
 
 IJLeiiin\luu Kpirli T^iSe ^w6iiTa <r€ I remember that you wci-e in company with 
 Crliias liere (PCharm. 156°), eViA.eA^ir^eS' jjS4as yepovTcs ivres we have forgot 
 with joy that we are old (EBacch.188). 
 
 n. The phrase aivoiia, fioi (or ifmvrQ) may take the participle either in tlie 
 nominative or in the dative ; <rivoiSa ifiavr^} aocphs &» or (ro^f' '•'"■' -^o™ <^t>^- 
 scious of being wise (see PAp.21'' ; 22''). 
 
 983. The supplementary participle is further used with 
 verbs of endurance and emotion. 
 
 So with 0f/)(i) bear, dvexof^ai support, KapTepem endure, — x'^^P'^t ijSo/iai, 
 TepTrofiai a/m pleased, dyandai am content, ayavaicTem, axBojiai, ;)(aXf7ra)S 
 (j)ipb> am vexed, displeased, 6pyiCop.at am angry, a/Txcvofiat am ashamed, 
 lj.eTaix4XoiMii, fierafieXfi fioi repent : also Kafivo) am weary. 
 
 Thus ovK avi^Ofuu (affa 1 shall not endure to live (EHipp.8B4), r/So/itai inp' 
 ipiSiv Ttpuifi€vos I am pleased to be honored by you (XA.6.1'*), oH fwi /jfTujueAei 
 oBtois airo\oyri<rafi€vu> I do not repent of having made such a defence (PAp.SS'), 
 .fiavBdvav p,ii Kdjive be not loeary in learning (Stob.Flor.S'"'). 
 
 984, With rayxavu) (poet. Kvpita) happen, XavOdvtii escape no- 
 tice, tf>6dvio anticipate, the supplementary participle contains 
 the main idea. In translating, it often becomes the verb, 
 while the verb becomes an adverbial modiiier : ervx^ 6uoju,evos 
 he happened to be sacrificing or by chance he loas sacrificing. 
 
 Thus ervxov iv tv ayop^ iTrKTrat Ka6e{idoyTes hopliies, as it chanced, were 
 sleeping in the martcct-phce (T.4.113), ^KaBof iyybs Trpoire\66yT€s they ap- 
 
 proached unperceived (XA.4.2'), $ov\oi/i7iv t^v \cLde7i' avrhv wirtKBdiv I should 
 like to go away ti'ithout Iiis knowledge (XA.l.S"), tpovea i\dv6caie fiiaxav (sc. 
 favr6v he etitertained a murderer unawares (Hd.i.44), ipeivovatv iirl t$ iicpa 
 
 7€i/(f/i£toi Tohs iroXcjilovs they an ive at the summit before the enemy do (XA.3.4'"). 
 a. With Tvyxdvm, the participle, especially Siv, is sometimes omitted ; eK tij 
 fimvs Tvyxdvei if any one chances to be friendly (ArEocl.1141). 
 
 985. Some other verbs, especially those meaning to do 'well or ill 
 (ev or xaxmr iroiico, dSiKf'a), afiapTdvco), to surpass or be inferior (i/Z/cdm, 
 r)TTdoyLai) may take a supplementary participle to express the manner : 
 
 cB y 4irolii<ras &.yafivfi(r&s /ii you have done well to remind me (PPhaed.60"), 
 iSiKEi Toiis v4ovs SicupBfipwv lie is guilty of corrupting the young (XM.1.1'). 
 
 986. Gbnbkal Remark. — With many of these verbs, an infinitive 
 may be used in the same sense ; but often there is a difference of 
 meaning. 
 
 Thus (palveTai irKovrCiv means he is manifestly rich, but ipaiverai irKovreiv he 
 appears (perhaps deceptively) to be rich. 
 
 alffxvvofiai K^ytcv I speak with shame, but aiffxi>vop.ai \4yeiv I am ashamed 
 to speak (and therefore do not speak). 
 
 olSe (jimiSdvfi) vlKuv he knows (learns) that lie is victorious, but oTSe (fiavBdyeij 
 vlKav he knows (learns) how to be victoriouji. 
 
 liefip-niioi els kIi/Suvov iKBdv I remember that I came into danger, but ncfiprifuu 
 rbv KivSvmy ipeiynv I am mindful to shun tlie danger. 
 
990] VERBALS IN -TE02. 309 
 
 Paeticiple with av. 
 
 .987, The participle takes av when it represents a finite verb 
 which would take it. Thus the participle with av corresponds 
 
 (a) to the potential optative with av (872), and 
 
 (b) to the hypothetical indicative with av (895). 
 
 (a) aiT€i ^evouSj ws oUtm 'treptyev6iJtevos &y tuv avriffTaffttorStv (independent 
 construction trepty^poi^Tjv &v) he asks for inerceiiaries^ saijing that thtis he 
 Amild be able to overcome his adversaries (XA.l.l'"), iydi il/u tuv ti r)S4as iv 
 i\eyxBevTav, ei ti /iii c<\7)fles Ae'^a, ^Se'ais S" &y 4\eyldvTiDi', f'i rts ti lii) a\i)6es 
 \4yoi (indep. ot i.v i\iyx9f7ev, i\4y^eiav) T am one of those who would gladly be 
 confuted, if I say anything untitie, but would gladly confute another; if lie should 
 say anything unii-ue (PGo.dSS"). 
 
 (b) TloTeiSatav e\ci/i/ Kal SuvTiSels cii/ aifTos exet*', e( i$ov\7i&ji, irap45aK€ (indep. 
 iSuvTiBji &v) wlien he had taken Polidaea, and would have been able to keep it him- 
 self, if he had wished, he gave it up (D.23""). 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -TE02. 
 
 988. The verbal adjective in -reos has a passive meaning, 
 like the Latin participle in -dus (of. 475). Used as a predi- 
 cate with ei/ii, it has two constructions — a personal and an im- 
 personaL The copula ei/xt is very often omitted, see 611 a. 
 
 989. In the personal construction the verbal agrees with the 
 subject of the sentence, like any predicate-adjective : eiria-ToXij 
 ypaTTTed ioTiv {epistula scribenda est) a letter must be written. 
 
 oil irpS ye Tijs a\Ti8elds Ti/iriTios avi\p a man is not to he honored before the 
 truth (PRp.695°), wtpeKTjTed (roi tj v6\i5 icrl the state must be aided bt/ you 
 (XM.3.6^), & Tois i\€v04pois TiyovvTo ehai wpiKTea things which tliey thought were 
 to be done by freemen (Ae.l'^). 
 
 990. In the impersonal construction the verbal stands in the 
 neuter (-reov or -re'a, see 635 a) ; and, although still passive, it 
 takes an object in an oblique case, the same which the active 
 voice of the verb would take : ypawriov ia-Tiv hrtarToX-qv one 
 must lorite a letter. 
 
 Tijv trSKiv oKpeKriTfov one must aid the state (XM.2.1''), rai/ ^o(rKi\ni.Tav 
 iirtfieXriTeov one must take care of his flocks and herds (XM.2.1''), (jiriixl Sii 
 ^flQf\T4ov elvat ro7s Trpayfiaffiv dfuv I say thai you must come to the rescue of the 
 interests at stake (D.l"), oiis ou TrapaSoria itrri whom we must not surrender 
 (T.1.86). 
 
 . a. Observe that the siibject of the personal construction becomes the 
 object of the impersonul. Verbals of transitive verbs admit either con- 
 struction, those of intransitive verbs the impersonal construction only, 
 
310 RELATIVE SENTENCES. [991 
 
 In Latin, the impersonal construction is confined to intransitives : thus 
 parendum est legi weurTeov toJ vo/xw, but not acribendum est epistulam. 
 
 991. The verbal in -t£os takes the agent, or doer of the 
 action, in the dative (cf. 769 b). For examples, see the 
 sentences given above. 
 
 a. With the impersonal construction, the agent is sometimes put in the 
 accusative, perhaps because the verbal was thought of as equivalent to 5c?- 
 with the infinitive : oh 5ou\evT€ov roijs vovv tx^^"^^^ ''""''^ kukcos tppovoufftt/ His 
 not right that the wise slumld be subject to the foolish (1.9'). 
 
 992i The verbal in -te'os sometimes shows the meaning of the middle voice : 
 irenrTcoK one must obey (irel6a> persuade, mid. obep), tfivKtucTtov one must gvMrd 
 against (tpvKiaaic watch, mid. guard against), airrioi/ one must take hold of 
 (fiTTTB attach, mid. touch). 
 
 PECULIARITIES IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF 
 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Attraction, Incorporation, etc. 
 
 993. A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in numbei- and gender 
 (627), but stands in any case required by the construction of its own clause. 
 Yet we often find an irregular agreement in case (attraclion), and sometimes 
 a peculiar arrangement of the words (incorporation). Both these changes 
 have the effect of bringing the relative clause into closer connection with its 
 antecedent. 
 
 994. Atteaction-. — The relative is often attracted into the 
 case of its antecedent, especially from the accusative to the 
 genitive or dative : 
 
 iffeaSe &vSpes SJioi rrjs i\ev0epiis vs KeKrr]aBe (instead of %v KcfcTTjirflc) you 
 will be men worthy/ of the freedom which you possess (XA.1.7'), rep 7)yefi.6vi 
 ■jriaTiiaofiev ^ ttv Kvpos SiS^ (for tv hv StSQ) we shall trust the guide whom 
 Cyrus shall give us (XA.1.3"). 
 
 a. Other varieties of attraction are nearly confined to instances of incorpo- 
 ration and omitted antecedent : see below, 996, 996. 
 
 995. Incoepoeation. — The antecedent is often incorpo- 
 rated, or taken up, into the relative clause. The relative and 
 antecedent must then be in the same case : 
 
 ovK iirexpiwrfTO tiv eTx* yvd/iriv (for tV yviii-nv ^v eTxe) he did not conceal 
 the opinion he Jiad (XM.4.4' ), /x^ a.(p4\i\iT8s in&v airuiji iiv id Sdlay xcicTricrBe 
 (for riiv 8(i|o;' iiv K6KT7)irfle) do not deprive yourselves of the reputation which 
 you have always possessed (D.20"''). 
 
997] ATTRACTION, INCORPORATION, ETC. 311 
 
 a. A nominatwe or aceuwitwe antecedent, when incorporated, con- 
 forms to the case of the relative; but a gmitive or dative antecedent 
 commonly attracts the relative to its own case, unless the relative is 
 nominative, or depended, before the incorporation, on a preposition 
 (of. 990 a) : 
 
 cf Tieo iptfi) KaTatTKevdCoiTa ^s &pxot X'^P°^ (f"'' '"'V \^pav ?s &pxo>) if he 
 saw ani/ one improving tlie district of which he was governor {XA.1.9"). — 
 iiTopeieTo (rtiv ^ elx^ Suydftet (for (rhy Tp Svvd/iei ^v elx*) he marched with what 
 force he had {XM,i.l'^),ToiTovs &pxomas tiroiei ^s KaTtaTpe^ero x^fS,s (for rr\s 
 X<^pis itv KareffT.) he made them governors of the countri/ lie subdued (XA.1.9"). 
 But ob Xv^tffrl^ dA.\* TJirep fjL6tni 'EAAtjvik^ effriv apfiovia (for rp apfwvl^ ^"i^^p) 
 not in the Lydian key, but in that key which alone is Greek (PLach.lSS*). 
 
 b. The relative may also keep its case when a demonstrative pronoun rep- 
 resents the antecedent in the main clause : see * 441, SOc.907. 
 
 c. Observe that the antecedent, when incorporated, loses its article. 
 
 996. Omission' of Antecedent. — The antecedent is often 
 entirely omitted, where it is implied in the context, or is 
 merely the general idea of person or thing : 
 
 yavfiaxid iraKaiTdrT] Stv ifffiev (for rav i-avfjiaxitiv ds) a sea-fght the most 
 ancient (of the sea-fights) that we know o/(T.1.13), iyyiyyerai einta irphs ots 
 hv wroAdPa (vvoXkSis ^x^'" (f*"^ "P ^* tovtovs oSs) I conceive good-will toward 
 those whom I believe to be kindly disposed (XM.2.6*'). 
 
 a. The relative : (1) keeps its own case when the omitted antece- 
 dent is nominative or accusative ; but (2) it usually takes the case of 
 the omitted antecedent when that is genitive or dative. A relative 
 in the nominative masculine or feminine, or depending on a preposi- 
 tion, remains, however, unchanged: 
 
 (1) N0M7NATITE : iyi) KM &IV iyi (cpoTB fievoSiiev (for olroi &v) I and those 
 wJiom I command will stay (X0.5.1'°). — ^Accusative : iTTuySiv /ihn f, p! ?TucTe» 
 (for eKsivTiv tJ) hating her who bore me (EAlc.338). 
 
 (2) Genitivp : ii t6\is finmv &v ^Kafiey Hvatri fimSuKC (for roiray a) our city 
 gave to all a shiire of (those things yih\ch)-Aiihat slie took (1.4"), S>y hrvyxdvio 
 fiAxiaTa i-yjifiai ire (for roiniov oh) of those whom I m^ with, I admire thee 
 most (PProt.361'). But ^ iiya S^fl' oT p! i^vaav; (for roiray oi) shall I (ouch 
 those who begoi me? (£Ion 560). — Dative : SeiToi aou tovtov iicirifTv <rby ots 
 fidKio'Ta (piKels (for ffhy Toinots ous) lie requests you to drink this (wine) with 
 those whom you best /(n)e(XA.1.9''*), i/ipieyeiy ots dpri iSo^ty riiuv (for Toirots 
 d) to abide by what we agreed just now (PProt.353''). But iyayKoioy aurois 
 StaKfyecBai Trap Ziv &i/ Kd^iey rhy pLiff66y (for tovtois Trop' &y) they are obliged 
 to give lessons to those /rom wliom tliey expect to receive their fet (XM.1.2^). 
 
 b. The omitted antecedent may be afterwards supphed by an emphatic 
 demonstrative : li/p' S>v irpoffiuTeT, larh roirav Sidyei on wluU lie begs, on tluU 
 he subsists (D.S^*). 
 
 997. Other Eblativeb. — The peculiarities just described (994- 
 996) are not confined to Ss, but apply also to the other relatives, oo-or, 
 cios, fjKiKos, ccr^is, etc. : 
 
 ^loiKcii' rits irdA.eu roioiTois fjSfiriv o'lois Eiay6pds elx' (f"' <•''») '" govern 
 tlie (xt'ts vjith such manners as Miagoras had (LS^^j, ninras ela'it>4peiv iup' iaef 
 
312 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 eKcuTTos ?x" ('<"' 4jrb TOffoiniav taa) that all shall contribute from such means 
 as each man has (D.2"). 
 
 a. The same peculiarities extend to relative adverbs : S{a v^ms ^vBa rh 
 irpay/ia iyeveTo (for ^KiTa'f ecfla) J will take yow to tlie place wjiere the affair 
 occurred (XC.5.4'-"), airo/cAeiocTei hBev &v ti \a^€iv ^ (for exeWey oSsv) excluding 
 them from places whence it mat/ be possible lo take anything (XM.2.1"'). Often 
 we may supply a pronoun as the antecedent : iia'KEi 6Tr6BiV Sif^Eis ^poveiv (for 
 rovTo 6jt66€v) practise that from which you will appear to he wise (PGo.486*), 
 An instance of attraction is seen in SiE/co^ffovTo €v9bs oBev vne^iSfvTo iraTSas 
 Kal yvvaTKas (for ^Keidfv ot) iliey inim.ediately brought over their children and 
 women from tlie places to which tJicy liad witlidrawn them (T.1.89). 
 
 SPBCIAIi CoNSTKtrCTIONS. 
 
 998. "EcTTiv ot — Tlie frequent phrase ea-riv oi (^ there are those who'') 
 meaus some: it is used in all cases, etrnv &v, ea-nv ols, i'trTtv oi'f : 
 
 aKaf effTtv ots 4yi) <pi\ii some men I love in spite of myself (PProt.346"), 
 vK^v 'hxaiav Koi effTiv Siv iWiov 46vuv except the Achaeans and some other 
 peoples (T.3.92), Biroirroi iyimvTo iariv 4v oTs they came to be suspected in some 
 things (T.5.25J. 
 
 a. For the singular effTiK, see 605. In the nominative, cTerii' o7 often occurs. 
 
 b. Similar expressions are ecrTii> Bre sometimes, eo-Tiv oS or ottou somewhere, 
 iaTiv oiras somehow, etc. 
 
 u. In questions, iariv o'lrives is common: Itrriv oBimi'as avBpdmav TeBai- 
 fiaKas iirl ffotpld ; hast thou admired any among men on account of wisdom ? 
 (XM.1.4*). 
 
 999. The neuter relative, vrith omitted antecedent, is sometimes 
 loosely used in place of a conjunction, as on or mcn-f. In this vcay 
 avff S)v and i^ iiv mean because (cf . oZvena, oBovv^Ka, 1050) : 
 
 irpoo''t}Kei X^P**' ai/Toifs ex^'*' ^^ io'tiBTjffav v(p' vfiZv it becomes them to be 
 grateful for this, that they were saved by yoti (D.16"), hovvai Ukiiv avff Sv ^|u4 
 (■qTeiTop ivBipS' cupaviirai penance to pay, because ye sought to drive me hence 
 (ArPlut.434). 
 
 a. So also i(\) are (= fVi rovra Sxrri) on condition that, often used 
 with the infinitive : aipeBivres e'0' tcre a-vyypa<^ai vofiovs having been 
 chosen on the condition that they should draw up laws (XH.3.3''). 
 
 b. Similar are e| oi and iut> oi since, ivjS_while\ eh 3 til!, iiexP' (^XP') "" 
 until, also to where (to that point of space ^twhicEJJ' and like expressions. 
 
 1000. Olos (full form toiovtos oioj) is often used with the infinitive, 
 and means of such sort as to, proper for. And so 0109 re in such condi- 
 tion as to, able to ; ocros of such amount as to, enough to. 
 
 Thus ouK ijn Hipa. o'id rh ireSiov ipSeiv it was not the pi'oper season for watering 
 the plain (XA.2.3'^), (run^ovKdeiv oXol t' i<r6fif6a we shall be able to give advice 
 (PGo.456''), i/e/iif/ucTOi Scroy airoCfiv tilling the land enough to live (T.1.2). 
 
 1001. Ofos and oo-os are sometimes used where we must supply an idea 
 of ' thinking,' ' considering ' : &ireKAdov riiv iiiavTov rixtv, o'iov aySphs kraipou 
 iarcprifieyos elriy I bewailed my own fortune (considering what kind of man) 
 
1004] OTHER FECULIARtTlBS. 313 
 
 in that I had been deprived of such a man as a companion (PPhaed.llV^). 
 Similarly euSaiixuv fioi dviip i((>ali>eTo, &s yevyalus ^TtAeurd Hie man appeared 
 to me happy (considering how) in that he died so noily (PPliaed.58'). 
 
 a. The same relatives, olos, iio-oj, and dij, are used in exclamations : Si Trdirwf, 
 Sffa itpaynara exeis 4v tQ Selmqi grandfatlier, Iww miich trouble you have in 
 your dinner, liter. ' oh ! the amount of trouble which you have ' (XCLS*), as 
 xa\is juH 6 irdmros how handsotne my grandfatlier is! (XC.1.3*). 
 
 1002. In saying 'such as I,' 'such as he,' etc., not only ofor but 
 the following nominative is attracted into the case of the antecedent: 
 
 Xapi^oixevos oXoj (TOL avSpi (for roioirtp oTos <rv el) gratifying a man such as 
 tluyu art (XM.2.9*), itphs avSpas roAiiripovs o'lous Ka\ 'ASriiiaiovs (for ofoi koI 
 'Aeriyaiol fltriv) against bold men such as the AHienians (T.7.21). — To this con- 
 struction the article may be prefixed : tois o'iois vfitv to such as we are. Rarely 
 the attraction is neglected. 
 
 a. By a similar attraction So-tij, and especially dimtrovv, are used in all the 
 cases with the meaning of any whatsoever : %<rTiv &pa Smaiov di'Spb; iSAairTeiv 
 ivTivovv avSpdmav ; (for riva, iffrtaovv iari any one whoever he is) is it the part 
 of a just man to injure any person whatsoever ? (PEp.SSS""). The same idiom 
 extends to other indefinite relatives. 
 
 b. A peculiar incorporation is seen in the phrases, Saoi yn^ves monthly (as 
 if roffavTaKis Scot ju^i'cs eiVi as many times as there are months), oirat Ji/iipat 
 (also dirijfjLepat) daily, etc. 
 
 1003. Inverse Attraction. — The antecedent, without being in- 
 corporated into the relative clause, is sometimes attracted to the case 
 of the relative. 
 
 In most instances of this kind, the relative sentence comes between the 
 antecedent and the word on which it depends : rijv outridv ^v KareXiirev oh 
 irKeloms offe i/Tri (for ri oiffia i)v) the property which he left is of no more value 
 (Lys.lQ*^). So with adverbs; Hal iWoffe oirot tiv wpliqi ^yaii-hcovai tre (for 
 oKKoBi) and in other places, wherever you may go, they will love you (PCr.45'^). 
 
 a. In this way, obSels is attracted by a following octtij oi : and the whole 
 phrase (declined throughout : ouSel; oittis oii, ovSevhs 'arov oil, etc.) has the 
 meaning eve^'y one: ovSevl Srif) ovk cnroKpiveTot (for ouSeis iffrii/ otoi ouk air. 
 there is no one whom he does not answer) he answers every one (Pilen.70''). 
 
 b. By a somewhat similar change, BavntuiT6ii iirriy Stros, Scrou, etc., passes 
 into ftav/jLaffrhs 'otTos, davfiaiTTov offov, etc. ; and in like manner, Qaufjut(rT6v iffnv 
 &IS, into Baviioa'Tws &s. A few other adjectives show the same idiom. Thus 
 Bau/uurTiiv offrip vepl ere irpoBiidav fX" ''* ''"* '^ wondeiful degree of devotion for 
 you (PAlcii-lSl"), meppviis dir x'^P" ^ ""^ prodigumsly pleased (PSym.l73°). 
 
 Other Peculiarities. 
 
 1004. Rblativb with Sitbordinate Verb. — A relative properly 
 belonging with the main verb of the relative clause, is sometimes 
 made to depend on a participle, or on a subordinate verb: 
 
 KaToKaiiPivovai rsXxos, h Teixicdfievol iron 'Axapvaves Koivip SucaiTTnpltp 
 ixpuino (properly ^ ixp^"^") ^^^ ^"■^^ " fortress, which the Acarnanians, having 
 
314 RELATIVJi SENTENCES. [lOOS 
 
 once fortified it were wdng as a common piacc of judgment (T.3.105 ', avBpdnrovs 
 cuTKOv^ev, ois dtrirav tis SiB^ TrKela fxitrdSv, fier^ ixelvuv aKoKovQ^covffi (prop, 
 ol iuco\ovSi](rou(n) we are training men wlio, whenever any one offers iliem larger 
 pay, will follow those (LS"). 
 
 1005. Relative Clause contqujbd by Demonstrative. — When 
 a relative clause is continued by a clause co-ordinate with it, the rela- 
 tive word is hardly ever repeated. Where this would be necessary, 
 the relative construction is abandoned in the second clause, and tlie 
 relative word is sometimes entirely omitted, and sometimes, if in uu 
 oblique case, replaced by a personal or demonstrative pronoun. 
 
 'Apicuos, hv Tjfieis TiBeKofiev jScuriAed KaOtiTTdvat, Kol iSc^Kafiey Kal 4\d^oftey 
 TtiffTo. (for ^ iStixa/iev, aip' oV 4\dPoiicv) Ariaeits, whom we wished to make king, 
 and to whom we gave, and from whom we received pledges (XA.3.2'), &va>xBt 
 Se fjiiv yaiieeaSat T<jJ oTetft re irariip KeKeral, Kol ai/Sai/ei ouT^ (for offris avSdvei) 
 and bid Iter marry him w/u>me'er Iter sire eommandelh, and {who, literally he) 
 is pleasing to herself {^ 114). 
 
 iKetvQt Toivw, oh ovk ixctpi^ovff ol \4yopres, ofiB* ifplKovy awTOiJy tliose there- 
 fore, whom the speakers did n-ot try to please, and did not caress them (D.S-**), 
 hvriBeov IlQ\6(p7ifwv, 'oov Kpdros icrrl ficyuTTov irafftv KvKKdmeffffi, @6uffa Se fiiv 
 Tfiee vifupri Polyphemus, peer of gods, whose might 'mongst nil Cyclopes is the 
 greatest, and tlt£ nymph T/wosa bare him (a 70). 
 
 a. Yet the relative is occasionally repeated: see XA.l.T', T.2.43. 
 
 1006. Verb Omitted. — When the same verb belongs to both 
 clauses, antecedent and relative, it is sometimes omitted in one of 
 them, especially in the relative clause : 
 
 (f>i\ous vofii^ovtr* oiiffirep hv Tr6ffis ffeSev (sc. vofii^rj (pi\ous) counting as friends 
 those whom thy husband counts so (EMed. 1163), toi yap &\\a S<rairep koI v/xeis 
 i-7roi€iTe (sc. ^TToiet) for the rest he did just wJiat you also were doing (XC.4.1^), 
 as ifwv l6vTos OTTTj tu/ vfteTs (sc. , triTe), oUtw t)/i/ yyt^fijiv exexe understanding 
 that I am going w/ierever you go, so make up your mind (XA.1.3'). 
 
 1007. Preposition Omitted. — When the antecedent stands before the 
 relative, a preposition belonging to both usually appears only with the first : 
 iv Tpiffl Kol SeKO ovx SAois ^Tstriv oh iirnroKd^ei (for 4v oh) in not quite thirteen 
 years, in which he has been uppermost (0.9^^), cmh rris out^s iyrate Vt'C iroWii 
 irpoieirOe rav Kotvuy from tlie same apathy from which you sacrifice many pub- 
 lie interests (D.18'*'). 
 
 1008. Transfer to Relative Clause. — Designations, especially 
 superlatives, which belong most properly to the antecedent, are some- 
 times taken into the relative clause : 
 
 CIS 'Apfievldv fi^eiv, ris 'Op6vTas ?ipxf iroWris Koi euSat/iovos (for iroWiiv Kal 
 fvSatnova) tliey would come to Armenia, of which Orontas was governor, an 
 extensive and prosperous eomitry (XA.3.6"), ^fya^ov iTr6aous itAeWous iSwd/iriv 
 J have brmtght (the largest number which) as many as I could (XC.4.5"). 
 
 a. In this way arise expressions like ivel (i>s, 3te) rdxiiTTa as soon as; also 
 hs rdxt(rTa as soon as possible, etc. (see 661). 
 
lOU] INTEEROQATIVE SENTENCES. 315 
 
 1009- Inteoddctory Relative Cladse. — A clause beginning witli a neuter 
 relative is sometimes loosely prefixed to another sentence, either — (a) to 
 suggest the matta- to which it pertains : & 5" efjrec, &s iyi> e'lfu olos iei ttote 
 lieTaPdWfa-Bai, KaravoiiaaTe but as to what he said, that I am one who is always 
 changing, consider, etc. (XH.2.3''*) ; or— (b) with apposUive force: % Spri 
 f^ijov, CvTV'^oy rives ipurroi ipvKcuces as I just said, we must inquire who are 
 the best guards (PRp.413"). 
 
 a. After such a clause, the principal clause is sometimes irregularly intro- 
 duced by Sti or yip : % /liv irivrav SauiuurriTarov &KoO<rai, Sti ey eKoarov mv 
 d-Tniueirafiev oir<iAA.O<ri Ti)v xf/ixhi' ii'JMi is strangest of all to hear, (that) each one 
 of the things which we approved ruins the soul (PRp.491''). In hke manner, 
 after phrases such as as \4yovai, S>s %otKf, etc., the principal clause is some- 
 times expressed as dependent : S>s yip iJKoua-d rtvos, iVi KhdavSpos 4k Bv(avTlov 
 fieWet 5i|eiv for as I /leard from some one, (that) Oleander is about to come 
 from Byzantium (XA.6.4"). 
 
 For relative clauses signifying cause and result, see 910 ; signifying pur- 
 pose, 911; signifying condition, 912. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 1010. There are two kinds of questions : 
 
 1. Sentence-Questions: these TeidXe to the action \tse\S : they 
 ask whether a given thing is or is done, and can be answered 
 by yes or no. 
 
 2. Word-Questions: these relate to something connected 
 with the action : they ask, for instance, who, what, where, 
 when, how, etc., and they cannot be answered by yes or no. 
 
 W OED-QUESTIONS. 
 
 1011. These are expressed by means of pronouns or adverbs, 
 — by interrogatives, if the question is direct, — by interroga- 
 tives or indefinite relatives, if it is indirect (700). 
 
 Ti's Xc'yei ; who is speaking f ri. Xf'yei ; what does he say ? nodev ^\dev ; 
 whence came he f 
 
 Tjpoiiijv Tis (or oo-Tiy) Xe'yoi I aaked who was speaking, jjp6ix.r)v iroBtv (or 
 diTodev) ekdoi I asked whence he had come. 
 
 a. Strictly speaking, the indefinite relatives have no interrogative force : 
 they are properly relatives (' I asked about tliat which he said ') ; it is the 
 connection only which gives the idea of a question. Accordingly the simple 
 relatives are sometimes used in their place, though never after verbs of asking: 
 SniAol Ss itrriv he explains who he is {T. 1.136), <l>pd(ov<riy & Keyet they male known 
 wlmt he says (XA.2.4"). Such clauses are not properly indirect questions. 
 
316 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [1012 
 
 1012. The interrogative word often depends, not on the principal 
 verb of the interrogative sentence, but on a partk-iph or otlier depend- 
 ent loord. This cannot be imitated in Englisli. 
 
 t( aSiK7i&e\s itri^ovX^veis fiot; (having been wronged in what, do you plot) 
 in what have i/oti been wronged, i/ial you plot against me? (XA.1.6*), iriJTe & XP^ 
 irpafeTc; ^ireiSav t( yivriTai; when will you do i/our dull/? (when what has 
 happened ?) wliat are you toaiting for? (D.4'''), rhv eK irolds 'ir6\eu3s iTTpaTriyhv 
 npoaSoxS Taura irpd^eiv ; (the general from what sort of city do 1 expect) /I'om 
 what sort of city must the general be, whom I expect to do this? (XA.ii.l"), 
 t( tSity TTOiovvTu Tttvra Kareyi/w/cos auTou; (having seen him doing what, have 
 you brought) tofiat have you seen him do, that you have brought these charges 
 against him? (XM.l.S^"), WK^iKiav ovk iiraieTO, Koi tI Ktmbv oii irapexoiv he did 
 not cease threatening, and (what evil not causing?) causing every evil (D.25™). 
 For ha ri, see 612. For ri TraOi^v and ri fiaddii', see 968 c. 
 
 a. The interrogative often stands as predicate-adjefltive with a demonstra- 
 tive pronoun, in the construction described in 618: t/ tout' e\efos; (being 
 what, hast thou said this?) wjnii i<s this that thou hast said? (EBacch.1033), 
 rlfas Toiio-y iiaopu; who are these I see ? (EOr.1347), t/s 8' o'Iitos tpx^ai ohs; 
 who art thou who contest alone? (K 82). So with a substantive: t/s 6 iriBos 
 aWoiis ^KeTO; wltat is this longing which lias conic upon tJiem? (SPhil.601). 
 
 1013. Two interrogative words, without connective, are sometimes 
 found in tlie same sentence : 
 
 rivas ovv inrh rlvaf eiipoifiei/ tiy fxelCova eirqpyiTrifx4vovs ; wlioin then can we 
 find more benefited, and by whom? (XM.2.2^), iioia Inroiov ^iuv )ilp.-i]fiaTa, ovk 
 ex!» hdyeiv what kinds (of numbers) are imitations of what sort of life, /can- 
 not say (PRp.400''), ris, viStv eh ai'Spaiv ; who, from whence of men art thou? 
 
 (a mo). 
 
 For interrogative pronouns with the article, see 676. 
 
 1014. When the respondent repeats the question before answering it, he 
 uses the indefinite relatives: aWo ris yap el; S<ttls; jro\iT57S xfl'^'^^^ -^^ ^"' 
 who are you, pray ? B. who am I? an honest burgher (AxAch.^'ii). 
 
 Sentence-Questions. 
 
 1015. Direct sentence-questions are usually introduced by 
 one of the following particles : 
 
 apa, ri, expecting neither yes nor no, y-Jl^ 
 
 ov, ap ov, ovKovv, expecting the answer yes, v-i.tn^v»>- 
 
 //.rj, apa p.^, piGiv, expecting the answer no: w^..^*- 
 
 ap' elfii fiivTis; am I a prophet? (SAnt.1212), ^ oSroi TToXipiioi e'uri; are these 
 enemies? (XC.1.4"). 
 
 ouK eiiropjs; do you not see? (SE1.997), ap' ovx Sppn rdSe; is not this inso- 
 lence? (SOc.883), oiiKoiJy aoi SoKeT; do you not then think? (XC.2.4"). 
 
 fi-fi tI ffoi SoKcH TopjSeij/ ; seem I to thee afraid ? implying * surely not ' 
 (APr.969), apa lii) 5ia.pA.\\e<r6ai Si^eis ; you will not think yourself slandered, 
 will you? (XM.2.6*'), pLuiv tI ere itSiKei; surely he has not wronged you, has lie I 
 (PPr'ot.310'»). 
 
lOlV] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 317 
 
 a. Sometimes there is no interrogative word at all, the question being 
 indicated by the tone of voice : "EWnyer iii/Ter PapBdpots SouKeia-o/iev ; shall 
 we, who are Hellenes, serve barbarians? (EFr.717). 
 
 b. An interrogative expression which distinctly expects the answer 
 yes, is oXAo Tt 1/ (for oAXo ti cotiv rj) is anything else true than = is it 
 not certainly true that ? — also, with ^ omitted, i'XXo n in the same 
 
 sense : 
 
 &\\o Ti ^ ifio\oyovij.ev ; do vie not acknowledge? (VGoA'Kf'), 6.\Ko ti (piKcTra 
 inh Tav Beav; is it not beloved by the gods? (PEuthyphr.lO''). 
 
 1016. Indirect sentence-questions are introduced by el 
 whether; less often by apa : 
 
 ^ptl>ri)(TfV El ^5t| airoKeKpiiievot ehv he asked whether they Imd already madt 
 answer- (XA.2.1'*), XSwiisv dip' oiToxri yiyverai airavra let its see wlieiher every- 
 thing is so produced (PPhaed.70''). 
 
 a. In Homer ^ (tje ) is sometimes used : Hx^to Trev(r6fievos ixerii ahu K\eosi 
 ij irou €t' eiTjs he went to ask for neios o/thee, ifi/iou wert yet alive (i/ 416). 
 
 b. This use of el is closely connected with its use in conditions : thus 
 examples like ttire fwi el ereiv ye ipi\t\v is TrarplS' mdvai tell me whether lam 
 really come to mine own laiid {i> S28) can be understood as tell me, if, etc. 
 ('if I am come, tell me so'). 
 
 c. Hv never really introduces an indirect question. Cases like (tke'i^oi 
 iav Ka\ aol {ui'SoKp consider if you too agree (PPhaed.ei") are best referred to 
 907. Hm. uses el: ice after ' see ' and ' know ' (cf . b above), but not after ' ask.' 
 
 1017. Alternative sentence-questions, if direct, are intro- 
 duced by TTOTcpov (TTOTcpa) . . . •^ {utrum . . . an) whether . . . or.. 
 Indirect alternative questions are introduced by the same 
 particles, or by ei . . . ^7 or etre . . . etre : 
 
 v6Tepoy 4^s fipx^"' ^ &\\ov KaBliiTi\s; do you let him go on governing, or 
 appoint another? (XC.3.1"'). 
 
 Striped ■ir6Tepov ^oihoiTo lievfiv % mrlevat she asked wlieiher lie wanted to stay 
 or go away (XC.1.3"), ifioiheveTo ei irefnroiev rivas fj irdvres toiev he consulted 
 whether tliey should send some, or all should go (^A.\.\Qfi\ oSiria icre eire a.ya6o\ 
 etre Kaxol riPii<ravTes yeviiaovTot you do not yet know whether they will turn out 
 good or bad when they grow up (Lys.20**). 
 
 a. TrSrepov is often omitted : lypiiyopas fl KodeiSeis ; are you awake or asleep ? 
 (PProt-SlO*). So even in indirect questions : Odyss. 8 110. Properly irciTcpoi' 
 is a neuter pronoun ; see 278 : thus TT6repov SeSpaxev ^ off; (D.23") originally 
 meant ' which of the two (is true), has he done it, or not (done it) ? ' 
 
 b. Hm. does not use ir6repQV. For direct disjunctive questions he has 
 ? (^e) . . . ^ (^e) ; for indirect, ^ (^e) . . . ^ (^e) : ^ \)i, ti ISfiev ivl <l>pe(riv, ^e 
 Kal ovkI; do we know aught in heart, or do we not? (S 632), lietvar' M XP^""", 
 Hfppa Baufiey ^ ^reby Kd\xds fiayreieToi ^e /col oiiKt wait for a time, that loe may 
 know if Calclias truly prophesies or not (B 299). 
 
 For the use of the modes in indirect questions, see 932-6. For the sub- 
 ject of the indirect question drawn into the principal sentence {prolepsis), 
 see 878. 
 
318 NEGATIVE SENTENCES. flOlS 
 
 NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 1018. There are two negative particles, ov and /i^. Oi 
 expresses negation absolutely ; ixri expresses it as willed or 
 thought of. The same difference appears in their compounds, 
 as ovre, /i.-ijTe; oiSets, jLnjScts; oiSajLiGs, jj.rfiafx.St'i; and many others. 
 
 1019. The Subjunctive and Imperative, in all their uses, 
 take fLTj : 
 
 Thus in independent clauses (8'74, 866): ^^ eav/id^ere he not sitrprued 
 (XA.1.3^), |tj) ixBwTe fie do not give me up (XA.6.6'8), ju)) arcAi) thv h6-)0v 
 KaToXlvafieii let us not leave the discussion unfinished (PGo.505'*), Ae'-yere, eiV/w 
 ^ ^■^; say, shall I go in or not? (PSym.213''): ' 
 
 In dependent clauses : thus final clauses, irapoKoAeTs farpois, oirus fiij 
 iiroBilvri you call in physicians, thai he may not die (XM.2.10'^); conditions, 
 ovK itrtCtjTovyTat, iav fi^ Trpopp7]6rj irape^vai they are not required, unless orders 
 have been issued for their presence [XC.l.'i''); conditional relative clauses, 
 oToc ij.il Toiij dBiKoSn-as \dpriTe, tows ivTvyxivopras KoAii^eTE wlien you do not 
 catch the offenders, you punish the first comers (1.18'^). 
 
 a. But the subjunctive in its epic use for the future indicative (868) has oi. 
 
 1020. Independent clauses with the Indicative and Opta- 
 tive have ij-rj in expressions of wishing (870, 871); but other- 
 wise, ov : 
 
 ^/iaprey, ws fi-fitroT* ttitpeKe (sc. a/iapTeTj/) he missed, as I would he had never 
 done (XC 4.6^), fi^ (vv M^t' a/Movtrlds let me not live in grosmess (EHf.676). 
 
 OVK oJSa J know not (ArNub.761), ovk Uv awoSolTjv toi/s r6Kovs I should not 
 pay the interest (ArNub.^BS). 
 
 For the force of o6 and fiii in questions, see 1016. 
 
 1021. Dependent clauses with the Indicative and Optative 
 have iirj when they express a purpose or a condition; but 
 otherwise, oi : 
 
 Thus fi-f} in final clauses : \a^^v jue 9iyev, *lva fii] <p8eyyoiTo jUijSffs he seized 
 me and dragged me aioay, that no one might raise his voice(XA.6.62^), (pvKaKTiov 
 Sirtus fitiiev ffvfi^fferai aoi roiovrov you must take care that nothing of this sort 
 befalls you (1.5'*). 
 
 ju^ in conditions : ei fii) ri KU>Kvei, ideKot aiiroTs Sia\exOvvai if nothing 
 hinders, I wish to confer with them (XA.4.8**), el fii] ral/rri SvvatvTo, &Wt] 
 lireipavTO if they did not succeed in this way, they tried in another (XA.4.2^). 
 
 fiii in conditional relative clauses : & ^^ o?5a oOS^ olojxai elSeyai what I do 
 twt know (= el Ti fii) ofSa) I do not even suppose that I know (PAp.21'1), 6ir6Te 
 fii] TI Seltreiav, oli ^vvficrav when they had no fear of anything, they did not come 
 together (T.2 16). 
 
 ov in others ; vpofftifiaivoviriv a re xp^ iroielv Kai h ov xp'h they signify before- 
 hand what one must do, and what not do (XC.1.6'°). 
 
 a. So, too, relative clauses expressing puipose take /nil : see 911. 
 
1024] NEaATlVE 8BNTEN0E&. 319 
 
 b. Relative clauses expressing cause and result (910), though properly 
 taking oi, sometimes have iii\, when the cause or result is to be characterized 
 as thought of rather than real: TaXaliraipos ai 76 avBfomos e?, ^ ji.i\Te fleol 
 TtaTfifoi i'lmv /i'^te lepo a wretched being art (hoii, who Iiast neit/ier ancestral 
 gods nor shHnes (i'Euthyd.S02''), tVa yap ^i> iroWols fo-ois eSpois hv oittis iffri 
 /ih x^^P"" Trarpis fur one perchance ^mongst many thou mayst find, who is not 
 meaner than his sire (EHeracl.327) ; here Sims means ' such as to be.' 
 
 c. ei oi) may be used for «' /x^ when the clause has a causal force (926) : 
 liil Bau/xdirris el ttoWh tZv eiprtfiivoiv oil irpeVei (roi be not surprised that much of 
 what has been said is not suited to you (I. !■"). 
 
 1022. Sentences in indirect discourse take the same nega- 
 tives tiiat they would have in direct discourse : 
 
 efirei/ on oilmen aurif /liXoi Tov vfierepov Bopi^ou (direct oiiSei/ /uji /ieKfi) he 
 said that he cared nothing for your disturbance (Lys.l2'^). 
 
 a. But after ei in indirect questions, either 06 or ii^fi can be used : iparis 
 et oi Ka\7) jUQi Sokei ehai you ask mhethm- 1 do not think it (rhetoric) a fine thing 
 (PGo.462°), Pou\6fiems IpesBai ei fioBiiv tIs ti fiii oTSei/ wishing to ask wliether 
 a man, who has learned a thing, does not know it (PTheaet.ltiS''), (TKmrafiev ci 
 Tipewet fi oi let us consider whetlicr it is proper or not (PRp.451''), toCt' aurd, eJ 
 Xalpeis ri /iij X"^P^'^) a»'c^y«'7 fe ayi/oeTt/ this vo'y thi ig, wlietlier you are pleased 
 or not pleased, you must needs be ignorant of (Pi'hil.21''). 
 
 1023. The Infinitive, when not in indirect discourse, has jut; : 
 
 TTiy KepKvpav i^ovKovTO jiij TtpoiirBai they wiihed not to abandon Corcyra 
 (T.1.44), lA.e'yo;' auToij /i{) aSiKeiv they told them not to commit injustice (T.2.5), 
 eiKhs (To(pi)v avBpa fx-ij \Tjpi7t/ it is fit that a wise man should 7iot talk idly 
 (PTheaet.152''), rij fj.T] an-o5i5(Jj/ot X'^P*'^*^ &^iKov tKpivev the not 7'etwning of 
 favors he accounted dishonest (XAges.4'), al %eipriv€! Kareixov, SfTTC /li) airUviu 
 air avTuv the Sirens detained them, so that they could not get away from tliem 
 (Xll.2.6"). 
 
 a. In some apparent exceptions, oi belongs with the principal verb : viias 
 a^iovvTis ov ^un/jiaxfTv aWii ^wahxeiv demanding not that you should be allies 
 with them, but partners in wrong-doing (T.1.39), where ou belongs properly to 
 a^iovvTes. 
 
 b. But SffTE ou, instead of Siare /vli, is sometimes found with the infinitive : 
 KaTelpycuTTat irupl, uxtt' oiS' lxvos ye reixetov elvai (ra(p4s "'tis destroyed by flame, 
 that not a trace of ramparts can be seen (EHel.108). 
 
 1024. The Infinitive in indirect discourse takes regularly ov, 
 yet sometimes jx-q : 
 
 i^liX ovK elSevai (direct ouK olSa) I declare that I do not know (FAp.SI^), 
 ivSfuirev oiK hv SivaaBai fieveiv robs voKiopKovvras (direct ou/c tu> iivaivro) he 
 thought tlie besiegers would not be able to remain (XH.7.4'''). 
 
 vareKpivaTo /iriSevhs "ittidv elvai he answered that he was no man's inferior 
 (XH.3.3"), TTio'Teia /tJ) ifiedo'Eli' |Ue TSs i\Trldas I trust that my hopes will not 
 disappoint me (XC.1.5''). After 'hope,' 'promise,' etc. (948 a), this /n^ is the 
 lule. 
 
320 NEGATIYE SENTENCES. [1026 
 
 1025. The Participle has /hi; when it expresses a condition 
 (969 d, 971 b) ; otherwise, o4 : 
 
 ovK ^v Zi}vtuo fiii Kafi&tv fi/SaifioveTv iJiou canst not^ if thou hast not toiled, be 
 happii (EFr.464), is r\Sh tIi fvji/ /ij) <p6omv<rr)s TJjj tvx^s ftow sweet is life, if 
 fortune be not envious (MMon.56S). 
 
 Kxpos di/e'/S?) ^1 t4 Spij, oi^evis KuXiovros Cyrus went up on the mountains, 
 (no one opposing) without opposition (XA.1.2''^), ^eopu/SciTE aij ou iroi^troi'Tfs 
 TauTc yoii made a clamor, as not intending to do this (Lys.l2^^). 
 
 a. The participle with 6 /j.!) has the force of a conditional relative 
 clause: 6 /x;) fiSmr wJioecer does not hnow (but 6 ovk fiSiir the particular 
 person who does not know) ; 6 fit/ Sapels uvOpanos oi naidevfrai the man 
 unwhipped receives of training nought (MMon.432). 
 
 1026. M^ is also used with adjectives, adverbs, and even with sub- 
 stantives with the sense of a conditional relative : t6 fii) ayaOuv ' the 
 not-good ' = lo^aiOTfij- is not good, 6 fiq iarpos 'the non-physician,' 
 whoever is not a physician (PGo.459''). 
 
 1027. M17 FOB oi. — Mtj is often used instead of oi with participles 
 or other words, through an influence of the verbs on which they 
 depend, when these verbs either have prj, or would have it, if nega- 
 tive: 
 
 p.^ X"^P*) *ATpe/S77, KepSeffiy to7s p^ KoAoty rejoice not, son of Aireus, in dis- 
 honest gains (SAJ.1.S49), ti)s prtShv eiStfr* iadi /i' &i/ avuTTopus (p^ because ^(r6i 
 would take pri) know that I know nought of what thou askesi (SPhil.253), K€A.f liti 
 piivai eirl tou irorapov p^ Sia^dvras {pii because peivai would take pi), 1023) he 
 bids tlwn remain at the river without crossing (XA.4.3**), iiv ti oVo-fl?; (reavriv 
 pil eiS6Ta {pii because iav atffBri would take pi], 1019) if you perceive yourself 
 to be ignorant of anything (XM.3.5'^). 
 
 1028. oi FOB pi). — With some particular words, ov has a special 
 connection, the two expressing a simple idea, as in cii (ptjpi deny, ovk 
 4S> forbid, oi iroWoL few, oix rja-a-ov more and the lUce ; in such expres- 
 sions, oi is often retained, when the rules require pq : thus iav oi (^rjTf if 
 you deny it (PAp-SS*), whereas iav prj (fyiJTe would be unless you affirm it. 
 
 1029. Rbdottoamt Negativb. — In connection with verbs of nega- 
 tive meaning, such as hindering, forbidding, denying, refusing, and the 
 like, the infinitive usually takes pq, to express the negative result 
 aimed at in the action of the verb : 
 
 Roi\u6pe<TBa pi) paBeiv we are hindered from learning, i. e., so as not to learn 
 (Elon 391), ctTre^TTOv rots Sov\ois p^ perex^tv they forbade the slaves from shar- 
 ing, i. e., requiring them not to share (Ae. 1"*), iipmvvTo pii irevTaKeuai tJiey 
 denied t/tai they had fallen, asserting that they had not fallen (ArEq.5'72), 
 airio'xovTO p^ iirl T^jv iKaripaiy yqv arparevtrai they refrained from making toar 
 upon the land of either, i. e., so as not to make war (T.5.25). 
 
 Often t6 is prefixed (cf. 961): outoI elaiv TipTv ipTroSi)v t^ pi/ jjSti ilvai %vBa 
 ItmeiSopev they are a hindrance to our being already where we wei-e hastening 
 (XA.4.8"'). 
 
 a. After ' deny ' and like verbs, we may even have is o!i or 8ti ou : Apwjfl^. 
 vcu Sis oliK lariSaKa to deny that I have paid (Lys.4'). 
 
1034] NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 321 
 
 Double Negatives. 
 
 1030, When a negative is followed by a compound nega- 
 tive of the same kind, the negation is simply strengthened : 
 ovK f(mv ovBiLi there is not any one. 
 
 In English, only one negative can be used : ouk iariv ovSiv Kpetffaov ^ <piKos 
 aa<p4]s there's nothing better than a faithful friend (EOr.1155), apXKpa ipiats 
 ouScy /icya ouScVore ovSeva oBtc 'iSidrrriti oBtc iriKiv Spa a little nature docs 
 nothing great at any time to any one, either citizen or state {PRp.496''), jxriSiv 
 T^KcirtD fiiyre ^fjtol fi-tjTe &W(p fATjSevi let him pay nothing eit^ier to me or to any 
 oneefee(XA.7.1«). 
 
 1031, When a negative if followed by a simple negative of the same kind, 
 each has its separate force : ovk hyvoi^ rots iKyduois oii KareSei^ev avT6 ^iwas 
 not through ignorance that he did not make it known to his descendants (PEp. 
 406°) ; and the two often balance each other, so as to make an affirmative : 
 ouSels OUK €ira<rxe ti (no one was not affected) eiiery man was affected (XSym. 1 '). 
 
 1032, Ov fiTj. — Oi followed by ^17 is used with the subjunctive 
 (seldom the future indicative; in emphatic negation, refeiTing to the 
 futm-e : oi /iij yewjrat it will not happen (D.4**). 
 
 oil nil Selirris riv iroKepiiOv you will certainly not fear the foe (XA.'J.S^^), ouSlp 
 fiil Seii'iii' wddriTe you will meet with no harm (D,6*^), 06 troi fiii luBi^oiwi itort 
 never wiU IfoUow thee (SE1.1053). 
 
 a. Ov pAi is also used with the future indicative to express a strong pro- 
 hibition : oi ii.il KdK'iiiTeis donH chatter (ArNub.605), ou ii.ii itpoaolaeis X^V" '".V 
 not thy hand upon me (EBacch.343). These are often printed as questions ; 
 cf. 844 a. — The origin of both these phrases with ov ii4i is obscure. 
 
 1033, Mij oi. — M^ followed by ov is used in two different ways. 
 First, after expressions of fearing, where fiij means lest, that, jij) ov 
 
 means lest not, that not (Lat. ne non). For examples, see 887. 
 
 So too without the verb of fearing, in the construction described in 867. 
 
 1034, Secondly, the infinitive takes fifi ov instead of /i^ when the 
 word on which it depends has a negative : 
 
 ouSeU ot6s r' ^(TtIi/ &\\tes K^yav fiii ov KarayeKatTTos etvai no one speaking in 
 any ot/ier way (is able not to be) can avoid being ridiculous (PGo.509»). 
 
 a. Hence verbs of hindering, foi'bidding, denying, etc. (1039), when 
 they have a negative, are followed by firj oi with the infinitive. Thus : 
 
 dpvoifiai fifj TToirja-ai I deny that I did it, but 
 OVK apvovfiai fiq ov jroiija'ai I dxyrCt deny that I did %t. 
 OVK ivarlScfuu /lii oi KahSis \iyiirBai I don't gainsay tliat it was rightly 
 argued (PMen.89*), ovk aTrffrxif-V t^ ju^ ovk 4irl tovto iAduf I did not refrain 
 from proceeding to that (PKp.364'), fiii iroppi rb fiii ov (ppda-oi forbear not to 
 make it known (SOt.263). 
 
 b. Mil oi is used in the same way, when the principal verb stands in a 
 question which implies a negative : riva olit iatapviiaeaBai fiii oux' iirlofTaaBm 
 Ta Slxaia; who, think you, will deny (= no one will deny) tJiat he understands 
 wJuU is just? (PGo.461''). 
 
322 INTENSIVE PARTICLES. [1088 
 
 Some Negative Expressions. 
 
 1035, a. oux fn, (i,'f| 8ti not ordy (probably 'I do not (say) that,' 'do not 
 (say) that ' = it is not enough to say that) : ji.^ Sti flebs aWa Kot &vBp<imoi not 
 a god only hut also mm (XC.7.2'''). 
 
 ovx Stms, /i^ oircDs, are used in the same way : fvh Sttws (so. om iiivcurBt) 
 opx^'iffSat iv ^vd^(^, dW' ou5' op6ovtr6at i^ivaffBe not only were ye not able t<y 
 dance in measure^ but ye were not able even to stand ei'eci (XG.1.3"*). 
 
 b. (idvov ou, |jiovov oi\C only not, hence all but, almost (tanlum noh) ; and, 
 in reference to time, Scrov ou almost : fiimv ov riiv 'Attik)(i' u,uiSv irepi^privTak 
 the'/ have all but stripped you of Attica (D.19*'^"), Stray ovk ^jSt; iy6tuiov airobs 
 vapeivai they thought they were already all hit arrived (T.8.96). 
 
 c. o« |i^v dWd, oi n^VTOi d\.\d nevertheless, notwitlistanding. They are to 
 be explained by supplying before dA.\o some idea drawn from the preceding 
 context : 6 tiriros fuKpov ^Keifoy i^erpax'^^io-ev • ov fi))v (sc. ^^eTpox^A-itrey) 
 aXkh. impLftvey S KSpos the horse almost threw Mm over its head ; (yet it did 
 not throw him, but) nevertheless Gyrus kept his seat (XC.1.4*). 
 
 PARTICLES. 
 
 Note. — The term particles includes the conjunctions (1038), besides a 
 number of adverbs, which, though not having of themselves a very definite 
 meaning, yet serve to show the relations of other words. 
 
 1036. Prepositive and Postpositive. — A particle is said to be 
 prepositive, when it is always put first in its own sentence ; postposi- 
 tive, when it is always put after one or more words of the sentence. 
 
 I. Interrogative Particles. — See 1010-1017. 
 II. Negative Particles.— ^ee 1018-1035. 
 
 1037. III. Intensive Particles. — These add emphasis to 
 particular words, or give additional force to the whole sen- 
 tence. 
 
 1. 7^ (postpositive and enclitic") even, at hast, Lat. quidem, 
 adds emphasis to the preceding word ; rrA^flei ye ovx vTripPaXoijieB' tiv rohs 
 TToKefuovs in numbers at least me should not surpass the enemy (XC.2,1*), trfi ■yip 
 vvv ye rifioii> eotxas pa<Ti\evs ehai for now at least thou sccmest to he our king 
 (XO.1.4'), Hm. cAKci ai, ei S'Vairaf 7e, Trepferxeo ttoiSiSs hut do thou, if only thou 
 art able, protect thy son (A 393). — It is added with especial frequency to pro- 
 nouns: eytoye I for my part, oyi in Hm. even he, '6s ys Lat. qui quidem. 
 
 a. When yi belongs to a word which has the article, it is usually attached 
 to the article: ij ye <pi\o<ro^ia philosophy at least (PSym.l82«). So too after a 
 preposition, if the word depends on one ; fiKovaev ouSels ev ye t$ ipavep^ no 
 one heard, in public at least (XA.1.3'"). 
 
103Y] INTENSIVE PARTICLES. 323 
 
 3. ■yoBv (postpositive) at any rate, Lat. certe, 
 contracted from 7^ o5i». It is used especially to mark the transition from a 
 less positive statement to one which is certainly true : ov ir\affr))V r^v ipiXlav 
 TrapelxovTo • ^fleAouerioi yaSv avrif (Tvvi^iyi\6T\aav they offered no pretended friend- 
 ship ; at any rate, they vnUingly joined him in giving aid (XAges.l**). 
 
 3. vif (postpositive and enclitic) very, just, even. 
 
 In Attic, it is used to strengthen relatives : ofirep just wJio, tjie one who, Utrnep 
 even as ; also in efirf p {^dvircp, ^inrep) if really, Kaiirep though. In Hm., it is 
 used with a variety of words : irpS:T6v mp for the very first time (H 296), ri re 
 rruyeovtri 8eoi irep lahich even gods detest (T 65) ; and especially with partiMples, 
 in the sense of xalirep (979). 
 
 4. i-i\ (postpositive) now, indeed, in particular, 
 
 marks something as being immediately present to the mind. It is commonly 
 put after the emphatic word, and admits a great variety of rendering : ttoWoI 
 S^ (obviously many) a great many, ii6ms S^ all alone, SjjAa 8^ it is quite plain. 
 It adds urgency to imperative expressions : imouTi Si) consider, I pray you, 
 &yi 8^ come now. It strengthens the superlative : iiiyicTTOs Sii the very great- 
 est ; and gives definiteness to demonstratives and relatives : %s Sii the (very) 
 <me who, oSras 8^ just so. So with other pronouns and particles ; ri S^ ; 
 what now ? iroD 8^ ; whe>-e pray ? ei 8^ if iildeed, if really. For ko! 8)) /to/, 
 see 1042 c. 
 
 a. It often means accordingly, referring to something preceding : iKeyov 
 oTt KaTiBoiev frTpdreu/ia ' iS6Ket 8^ oitK cur<pa\^s elvai StaffKijvovv tfiey said t/iat 
 they had seen an army ; it seemed accordingly unsafe to encamp apart (XA.4.4"'), 
 oStm S^ i/ius then (as previously described) ; and hence often in the apodosis 
 (879), as ore . . . t^Ite 8^ when . , . tlien, I say. 
 
 b. It sometimes approaches the meaning of ^5t|, Lat. jam : vvv Sii (nunc 
 jam) now already, iriKai 8^ (jam dudum) long since. So in /cal S^, often used 
 in answer to » command: ^veiye vvv koL St) ^efiijKa A. hasten now. B. see, 
 I am already gone (SE1.1436). 
 
 c. The epic SJ) yip, and poetic Sj; T6ri, may stand at the beginning of a 
 sentence. 
 
 5. S'/jirou (or hq jrou) I suppose, prdbMy, metJiinhs, 
 
 often used, with slight irony, in cases which admit no doubt : rpitpprat S\ 
 liOv); rivt; fiaBijpmri Siiirou with what is the spirit nourished? with learning, 
 doubtless (PProt.313°). — A stronger form is SiiirouBey. 
 
 6. SfjTa (a stronger Sij) surely, in truth, 
 
 nearly confined to the Attic: ov SrJTa surely not, irws S^to; how in truth? 
 
 7. StjBcv truly, forsooth, 
 
 mostly in reference to a seeming or pretended truth. 
 
 8. Sat (an Attic equivalent of Srf), 
 
 used only in questions, and chiefly in rl Sai; Ttms Sal; what now? how now? 
 with surprise or passion. 
 
 9. ^ (prepositive) really, truly, 
 
 (not to be confounded with i interrog., 1016, and ^ or, than, 1046, 1) adds 
 
324 CONJUNCTIONS. [10S8 
 
 force to an assertion. — ?i iiijv (Hm. ^ ^t'p) is used especially in declarations 
 under oath : o/ujirarrcs opxovs ^ fiiiv nil /ivfiffiKoiciireiv having sworn oatiis that 
 in vei-y truth iliey would not bear resetdmeni (XH.2.4''^). 
 
 10. To£ (postpositive and enclitic) surely, doubtless, 
 
 may often be rendered you know, you must inow, be assured, and the like. It 
 is frequent in statements of general truths : t6u roi rvpavvov fiKn^eTy ov ^adiov 
 fw ■princes 'tis no easy task to be dei'out (SAj.1350). — Compounds of roi are 
 ^Toi verily (only epic), otfTot surely not. — For ft^vTOi, see 1047, 4 : for Toivvv, 
 Tolyap, Toiyapovv, TOiydproi, see 1048, 4 and 5. For the disjunctive ^toi . . . 
 fj either . . . or, see 1045, 1 a. 
 
 11. (i^jv (postpositive) in truth, Lat. vera, 
 
 Ion. lih. Dor. fiav. Hm. has /leV, iiav, and /i^v : S5e yhp ^|epea), ko! /uV Tere- 
 \€<rnevov fO-Tot for thus J'll speak, and verily 'tviill be fulfilled {'V 410). The 
 word has also an adversative use, yet, howevei: In Attic t( juV; ('what in- 
 deed ? ') means of course. 
 
 12. }i,{v (postpositive) indeed, Lat. quidem; 
 
 originally the same as /uijw; oftenest used in connection with Sc (1046, 1 a), 
 but found also alone (so in questions), and with other particles, as /ihv oiv, 
 
 13. val yes, surely, — v^ and (la surely, 
 
 used in oaths and followed by the accusative (723). 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 1038, The conjunctions are particles used to connect sentences or 
 Svords with each other. They are divided into classes, according to 
 their meaning. Some conjunctions belong to more than one class. 
 
 a. The first four classes of conjunctions (copulative, disjunctive, 
 adversative, and inferential) connect co-ordinate sentences (876 a) : so 
 too the causal yap. The other classes connect subordinate sentences 
 with the principal sentences on which they depend. 
 
 1039, Asyndeton. — In continued discourse, every Greek sentence 
 has, in general, a conjunction to connect it with what goes before. 
 The absence of such connective is called asyndeton (da-vvSerov not 
 hound together) : it is most common in explanatory sentences. Some- 
 times it is preferred as a livelier and more striking mode of expression. 
 
 1040, IV. Copulative Conjunctions. 
 
 The principal copulatives are ko£, t^, and. Te is postpositive and 
 enclitic : it corresponds in general to Lat. que, as Kal to Lat. et. The 
 poets have also i\S4, ISi, and; ISe is epic only. 
 
 a. The copulative is often used with both members (correlation): 
 so very frequently re . . . Kai, t4 . . . ri; often where in English simple 
 
1043] GOPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 325 
 
 and would be used. Kai . . . Rai emphasizes the two members separ- 
 ately, both . . . and : 
 
 Siecxov aW^Xwy jSatriXeiJs t€ koI ol "EWiji/es &s rptaKovra ffraSia tlie king 
 and the Greeks were about thirty stades apart from each oilier (XA.1.10^), Hm. 
 axe\ yap rot ipis re iplx-q Tr6\efiol re juaxc" Te for always airife is dear to tliec and 
 wars and battles (A 177), KeXiffBou fwi So/cei koI ri iKiivav S$pis Kol ^ Tj/ieTepd 
 6iro\jila I think there is an end, both of their insolence and of our suspicion 
 (XA.3.1*'). — In like manner, the epic has TjyiteV . . . fjSf as well . . . as also. 
 
 b. Occasionally we find re . . . Sc, the two members being at first thought 
 3i as simply connected, but afterwards as standing in a certain contrast. 
 
 1041. In the epic language, re is used very extensively to mark the con- 
 nection of sentences and parts of sentences, being often attached to other 
 particles, as Ka^, fiev, Se, yap, aWd, and to relatives (os re, oT6s re). In such 
 cases, it cannot be translated into English. The common words &<rre and 
 oT6s re, used by all writers, are remnants of this early usage. 
 
 1042. To Kai belong further the meanings also and even, : 
 
 Hm. Trap* sfioiye Kai ^AAoi o'i Ke fte rtfi-fitTovat with me are others also who will 
 honor me (A 174), roO aBe\(pov Kai reQyrjKSros ^St? airorefi^v t^c KetpaXiiv 
 having cut off his brother's head, even after he was already dead (XA.3.]"). 
 In the meaning also, it is often repeated with both members of a compound 
 sentence : kk! ti/uv raira Sokei airep Kai /3acri^ei to lis also the same things seem 
 good, which seem good also to the king (XA.2.1''). In koI 5e, the proper con- 
 nective is Se, while Kai means also, even : Kai apxiKhs S' iKeyero ehax and lu 
 was also said to befit to rule (XA..2.6'). 
 
 a. After words of likeness, xai may be rendered as : d/tolas Kai Lat. 
 aeque ac. 
 
 b. 'AXKais re Kai means especially (literally ' both in other ways and particu- 
 larly in this ') : x"\e5rbi/ olfiai Sia^aivetv, &\\(i)S re Kol -KoKefiiav iro\K&v ^iXTrpoff- 
 Beii ivriav I consider it hard to cross, especially wlien the enemy in force is 
 opposing (XA.5.6'). 
 
 c. Ka! Sii Kai and in particular also, gives special prominence to that which 
 follows it : airiKveovrai h 'Hpils &\Sj>i re wivres iK rrjs 'EWiSos croipiirral, 
 Kol 8i) Kol 2(!A.a)i/ there coiru to Sardis both all the other wise men from Greece, 
 and particularly Solon (Hd.1.29). 
 
 1043. Negative sentences are connected by ouSe, /";8e, or oure, 
 /ijjTf . Of these, o48^, ht|8^ are the negatives of Kai (standing singly), 
 and have two uses : 
 
 1. As connective, and not, nor, continuing a preceding negative: 
 
 ayopav ovSels vape^et Tjfity, oiid' 6ir66ev iirifftrtoifieBa nobody will provide its 
 a market, nor any means of obtaining supplies (XA.2.4'). Very seldom after 
 an affirmative ; ajid not, but not : irphs trov yilp, owS' ^fjtov, ippjurtc in thy behalf 
 ni speak, and not mine own (SOt.1434) : the Attic prose in such oases always 
 employs Kai ov or iXtC ov. 
 
 3. With emphasizing sense, not even (Lat. ne . . . quidem) : 
 dw' ovSe roirav trrepiiaovrai but not even of these shall tliey be deprived 
 (5A.1.4S). 22 
 
326 DISJUNCTIVE AND ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. [1044 
 
 a. OuSf . . . ou8e are never correlated {neither . . . nor) ; when they occur, 
 they mean not even . . . nor yd. 
 
 1044. ofire ... oSre, (i^jre . . . [i'^tc, neither . . . nor, are used in 
 correlation ; they are the negatives of te . . . re : 
 
 oKtc airoSeSpa/cSo'ii' ovTs anroireipeiyafftv they have neiiher stolen away nor 
 escaped openly (XA.1.4*). 
 
 a. Sometimes oStc (fiTiTc) ... re occur (as in Lat. neque . . . que) : &jw(rca> 
 fvllTe npoSdiTeu' aW'ijAous ffufiixaxoi t€ effetrBat they swore that fhcy ivonld not 
 betray each other, and would be allies (XA.2.2''). 
 
 b. OSre (jdre) . . . o'uU (uriSf) is a slightly irregular form, corresponding 
 to t4 . . . S4 (see 1040 b). But otfre . . . oBte may be continued by o!iS4 with- 
 out any irregularity. 
 
 1045. V. Disjunctive Conjunctions. 
 
 1. 1\ or, than (not to be confounded with ^: 1015; 1037, 9): 
 
 a. Meaning or ; and repeated, ^ . . . tj either . . . or ; also ^toi . . . ij, with 
 special emphasis on the first member: t) KaTaye\<icriv fj x"^^'''"'^"'""^'" l^^il 
 either laugh at him, or are angry (PProt.323''). 
 
 b. Meaning than, after the comparative degree and adjectives like £\\o;, 
 eVe/joj, Sii^opos, ivavTios, which have a comparative meaning. See 643. 
 
 3. tUre . '. . An whether . . . or, Lat. sive . . . sive, 
 presenting a choice of two suppositions : 6 nev oiv fleiis, cifre ovk iffovKeTo, eifrt 
 Tts hviyiai iirriv, ^Toirifre fxtap ^6uoy now the god, be it that he chose not to, or 
 that lie was under some necessity, made one (bed) only {PRp.597°). Sometimes 
 the first eiVe is omitted, or ^ is used for the second. With the subjunctive, 
 idyre (^VTe, avre) is used instead of eire. For eIte . . . e?Te in indirect ques- 
 tions, see 1017. 
 
 1046. VI. Adversative Conjunctions. 
 
 1. 6^ (postpositive) but, and, 
 marks a slight contrast, being much weaker than aWa. Hence, 
 though generally meaning hut, it is often better rendered by and. 
 
 a. MfV . . . Se indeed . . . tut, on the one hand . . . on the other are 
 very common; though, in many cases, /xeV can hardly be rendered in 
 English. 
 
 Thus 6 fien plos Ppaxis, V 8^ t4xvv imxpi life indeed is short, but art is long 
 (Luc.Herm.63), Hm. oi irspl /iiv PovXrjv Aavaum irfpl 8' iffTf ftdx^irSai ye who 
 in counsel (on the one hand), and (on the other) in fighting, do excel the Danai 
 (A 258), WTofov /xe'i/, i.Kou(rov Se' strike, but listen (Plut.Them.il). 
 
 b. For i liiv ... 6 St', see 664. MeV may be followed by aWii, hrip, etc., 
 instead of 8e' ; and sometimes the thought to be contrasted with it, is ex- 
 pressed in other ways or omitted altogether. 
 
 c. After a conditional or relative sentence, the apodosis (principal sentence) 
 is sometimes introduced by Sf : Hm. elos h ravff S>p/jLaii/e Kxra <pp4va Kal Karh 
 Bvfiiiv, ^A8e 8' 'AB^irq while /ie revolved tliese things in mind and soul, tlien came 
 
1048] INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. 327 
 
 Athena (A 193). Here Si is used as if the former sentence were co-ordinate 
 with, not subordinate to, the latter. This construction, which is rare in 
 Attic, occurs frequently in Homer. 
 
 3. aWtt hut, yet (from SKKos otlier), 
 marks a stronger contrast than Se : Hm. ivff &\\oi lihv iriii/Tes iirfv^inriaav 
 'Axiiol, aW oiiK 'ArpeiSri ' kyani/imvi TjvSave Sv^$, aWa Kaxas itpUt then all 
 the other Greeks did showt assent, yet Agamemnon, Atreus' son, it did not please 
 in soul, but harshly lie dismissed him (A 22). 
 
 a. After a conditional clause expressed or implied, &\\d is often to be 
 rendered at least : «' ffiifia SovKov, aA.A' d vovs iKtiStpos though body captive be, 
 the soul at least is free (SFr.S56), & Seal irarp^oi, iruyyeveffBe y' aKKa mv gods 
 of my fathers, lielp me now at least (SEl.41.1). 
 
 b. 'AKKa is used in abrupt transitions. At the beginning of a speech it 
 may often be translated by well : a\K' &<piKe /uy Kipos (rjv well, I wish that 
 Oyrtis were alive (XIA.2.1*). 
 
 u. After negative expressions, aAA' ^ (less often iiWd alone) is used in the 
 sense of other than, except : apyipiov /ifv oIik ^x^i "'^^' ^ i^Kpiv ti I Imve no 
 money, except some little (XA.'7.7^'). For oi juV aWi, see 1035 c. 
 
 1047. other conjiinctiona which express a contrast, or a transition 
 to something different, are 
 
 1. air fpostpositive, properly again, hence) on the other hand,, on the 
 contrary. So epic aire. 
 
 2. drop (prepositive, Hm. also airdp) hit, however. 
 
 3. f.i\v (postpositive) yet, however : see 1037, 11. 
 
 4. n^vToi (postpositive : from /if v and to/) yet, Jiowever. 
 
 5. ko£toi (from kuI and toI: not in Hm.) and yet, though. 
 
 6. 8|jiMs nevertheless, notwithstanding. Tor its use with participles, 
 see 979 b. 
 
 1048. VII. Inferential Con)unctions. 
 
 1. ftpa (Hm. apa, ap, and enclitic pa, all postpositive) then, accord- 
 so: 
 
 oliK ipa cTi /uaxeiToi then he will not fght at all (XA.1.7"). It is especially 
 frequent in Homer, where it sometimes can hardly be translated : ^ roi B y' 
 Sis i'miiv kot' &p' c'Ccto now when he thus had spoken, he sal down (A 68). Ei 
 &pa means supposing that really, ei ju); &pa unless indeed. This word must not 
 be confounded with the interrogative apa: see 1015. 
 
 3. oiiv (postpositive, Hd. and Dor. S>v) therefore, then, consequently, 
 stronger than apa : 
 
 Toirois TJo-flT) Kvpos ■ /3oiJAeToi oif Ka! ff J Toirav yeia'arOai Cyrus liked these ; 
 he therefore whiles you to taste tliem too (XA.1.9'^). When preceded by an- 
 other particle (as itAAa), oZv often means /b)- that matter, at any rate, ca-lainly 
 (so S' oiv at any rate). With relatives, it has the force of Lat. -cumque: 
 idTiaovv wlwsoever (285). 
 
328 DECLARATIVE AND CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. [1049 
 
 a. From ov and ovv, arise both ovkovv tTierefore (and in questions 
 not therefore ? nonne igitur ?) and ovkovv therefore not, rum igitur. 
 
 (a) The first ia properly interrogative, ' not therefore ? ' : ovkovv tovto 
 SrjKov; isn't then this clear? (XM.3.6'). — (;8) But since questions with ov ex- 
 pect an affirmative answer, ovkovv came to be used without interrogation, as 
 an affirmative, ' therefore ' : ovkovv, orav SJ; fi)} <r8eva>, Treirdvffofiat well Ihc^i, 
 wliene'er my strength shall fail I will give over (SAnt.91). — (7) To express the 
 sense ' therefore not ' without interrogation, oSkovv is used (with accent on 
 the negative) ; ovkovv 4TroA.e/i//Ojuo( 76 itov, el rovro \eyeis I will not depart from 
 you, llien, if you say this (XC.4.1''). Some editors employ oSkovv also in the 
 first case (a). 
 
 3. vxiv or viJv (Hm. vvv and vi) postpositive and enclitic, 
 
 a weakened form of vvv, like English noio used for then, therefore. According 
 to many critics, the word should be written vvv (not enclitic) in all prose- 
 authors except Hd. ; and in poetry too, unless the verse requires a short 
 syllable. 
 
 4. roCvvv (postpositive) therefore, then, 
 
 from Tol (lOSI, 10) and viv : never found in Homer. 
 
 5. ToiyapoOv, Toi'ydpToi so then, therefore, 
 
 prepositive, like poet. Tof'yap, of which they are strengthened forms. 
 
 6. ficrre so that, and so : see 937. 
 
 1049. Vni. Declarative Gonjimctions. 
 
 1. 8ti that (Hm. also o and o re), 
 originally the same as o ti, neuter of the pronoun Sa-ris. Like Lat. 
 quod it has both a declarative sense, that ; and a causal sense, Jjecause. 
 
 a. Meaning that; see indirect discourse, 930. Hence the phrases S^A.ok 
 Sti (also written BTjXoi/iiTi) it is clear that, evidently, and o!8' Sti or eS oW on 
 I know that, certainly : iravrtov o?5' Sti ^trdvTwv 7* &v though all, I am sure, 
 would say (I). 9'). 
 
 b. Metming because ; see 925. 
 
 Remark. — Sti /lii is used after a negative sentence, in the sense of except : 
 ov irdi-KOTe 4k tTjs wSKews 4^ri\6es, on fii] &na^ els *l(r0fi6v you Tiever went out 
 of the city, except oiice to the Isthmus (PCr.52'') Ht. ' what you did not go out 
 that one time'. For on with superlatives, see 651. 
 
 3. Another declarative in general use is »s thM, see 1054, 1 d. 
 Little used are Sidrt and owv«Ka that, cf. 1050, 3. 
 
 1050. IX. Causal Conjunctions. 
 
 1. 8ti hecause, see 1049, 1. 
 
 2. irt and Itrd since, see 1055, 1 and 5. 
 
 3. SiiSti, and poet. oSvcKa, 66ofJvcKa hecavse. 
 
1053] CONDITIONAL AND OONOMSSIVE OONJVNCIIONS. 329 
 
 Sirfri is for Si" S ti = Sia toBto 8ti on account of this thai. And so oSveKo, 
 SBoiveKa are for o5 (Stov) e«Ka, = eVcKO roirov bri. They are used also as 
 declaratives, that, see 1049, 2. 
 
 4. 7ap (postpositive) for, 
 introduces a reason or explanation, mostly for a preceding thought, but some 
 times for a followiiig one ; vSv 8e', <rip6Spa yhp ^euSdnevos Sokus iKtiBfj Ae'yeii/, 
 Sia Tavrd (Te i/ie^aj but now since, in speaking what is wtterly false, you think that 
 you are speaking the ti-uth, for this cause I blame you (PProt.347»). 
 
 a. Other uses of yip grow out of an older meaning indeed or indeed then 
 (y4 and &pa). Thus especially in answers to questions: ayavurriov fjikv &pa 
 rifuv irphs robs &vSpas; avdyiai yap, l<pT] must we, then, contend with tlie men? 
 we must indeed, said he (XC.2.1*). 
 
 b. In questions, yip expresses surprise, and may often be rendered by wJiat 
 or why: bKoiXc yip; what, is he dead? (SOc.1583), irios yhp KiroiSa; why, how 
 do I know tliee ? (SPhil.250). — But ^ yip; ov yip; asking for assent to a state- 
 ment just made, imply no surprise :. if iXo(ro((>7jTeoi' i>iw\oyTiirtttiev ■ ^ yip; we 
 agreed that one should pursue philosophy, did we not? (PEuthyd.288''). 
 
 c. So yip is used in wishes: kukus yap i^6\oio (would indeed that you 
 might perish wretchedly) a curse upon you (ECycl.261). For ej yip (tUinam) 
 in wishes, see 870 a. 
 
 d. Kol yip (eienim) is translated simply /or; oAAi yip {at enim) but, and 
 oXTC ov yip but not : tqvto iiroUi ix rev xoAcTrby eJyai • Kal yap dpav ffTvyvbs ^v 
 he accomplished this by harshness ; for he was ugly %n appearance (XA.2.6'), 
 iyia dfiavTou Seo/xat ffeova'i toiJtois aKoKoudeTp • AaV oil yhp Sivaftai I demand it 
 of myself to keep up with these in running ; but I am not able (PProt.336*). — 
 These are sometimes explained by ellipsis : and (this is certain) for, but (this 
 is not so) for. 
 
 e. But Kol yip sometimes means for even, for also ; Kal emphasizing the 
 following word : /ca! yap iiSiKJiiifvoi alyriaSiieaBa for even though I'm wronged, 
 I'll hold my peace (EMed.314). 
 
 f. In ov yap aKki there is an ellipsis after yip : p.^ ffKuttre fi' 55e\^' ■ ov 
 yip oAA' ex<" kokSs <^o 'not mock me, brother ; for I (am not to be mocked, but) 
 am in wretched plight (ArKan.58). 
 
 1051. X. Mnal Conjunctions.— See 881-888. 
 
 1052. XI. Conditional Conjunctions. 
 1. el if; 
 
 3. 6ttv (for fl cLv) or by contraction fjv, &v, if. 
 
 For their use in conditional sentences, see 889 ff : for ei in indirect ques- 
 tions, 1016 : in expressions of wishing, 870 a. For ei p.it except, see 905 a. So 
 ci /ttJ) 61 except if, Lat. nisi si. For tXir^p = Lat. siguidem, if indeed, see 1037, 3. 
 
 For &v, epic /cf, KeV, Dor. xi (postpos. and enclitic), see 857-864. 
 
 1053. XII. Concessive Conjunctions. — These are really con- 
 ditional conjunctions (1052), but indicate that the condition 
 
330 COMPARATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. [1064 
 
 which they introduce may be granted without destroying the 
 conclusion. They are : 
 
 1. A KaC (liv Ko£) although: 
 
 Tr6\iv fieVj ei Koi fii] iSA-eVets, tppov^ts S* Efjueo; old v6tTtfi ^iveffTi as for the toion, 
 though thou art blind, thou yet dost know with what a plague it is afflicted 
 (SOt.SOiJ). 
 
 2. Kttl €l (koI Idv, Kov) even if, Lat. etiamsi : 
 
 rjyoifievos avSphs elvai ayaOov oi(l>€\e7v Toiis tpi\ovs, Kal el jxtjiels fiiWot ettre^ 
 irBai thinkitig it vjas the part of a good man to assist his friends, even if no 
 one were about to know of it (Lys.l9''). 
 
 a. Thu difference between ei xai and koI ei ia often slight, but koI el lays 
 more stress on the condition as an extreme or perhaps improbable supposi- 
 tion. 
 
 8. KaCirep (Hm. koi . . . rrep) with the participle, see 979. 
 
 1054. Xni. Comparative Conjunctions. — These are prop- 
 erly relative adverbs of manner. 
 
 1. ws as, that, Lat. ut, 
 a proclitic (111 c, yet see 112 b). It has a great variety of uses, viz.; 
 
 u. Comparative use : &>s ^ov\ei as thou wUt, &s iroKe^lois aiiToTs xpSi^ai 
 thei/ treat them as enemies (XO.3.1^'). So in expressions like ouk aSivaros, as 
 AaKeSai/iSvios, elireiv not unskilled in speaking, for a Lacedaemonian, i. e., consid- 
 ering that he was a L. (T.4.84). — It corresponds to Lat. quam in exclamations 
 (see 1001 a). — For &>s with superlatives : Sis Tix"''^"- Lat. quam celerrime, see 
 651. — With words of number- and measure, it has the meaning about, not far 
 from. ; &s S4Ka about ten, us ^irl rh ttoAiJ (pretty much over the greater part) 
 for tlie most part. — In expressions of action, it often denotes that which is 
 apparent, supposed, or professed: iiriKafjiirTev 5>s ets iciKAaciv he wheeled as if 
 to surround them (XA.1.8^^). Hence its use as an adjunct of the participle, 
 see 978. For its use with the infinitive, see 956. 
 
 b. Temporal use, as, as soon as, when : Hm. &s eiS", Sis /itv /iaAKov eSv x^^"! 
 what he espied them, then the more did anger come upon him (T 16). So &s 
 TtUx'trra (Lat. ut primum) as soon as: 1008 a. 
 
 c. Causal use, as, inasmuch as, seeing that : Se7 koI xpw^ai avroTs, as oiSiv 
 ii(peKos ttJj KriifTias 'yiyverai one must make use of them, since no advantage 
 comes from the acquiring (PEuthyd.280^). ' 
 
 d. Declarative use, that .• ^nev h.yy4\Xav tis &s 'EXtireia Karei\riTrTai tliere 
 came one with the tidings that Elatea is taken. (D.18^^^), cf. 930. 
 
 e. Final use, that, in order thai: &s fi^ itdnTes iKwinai that all man not 
 perish (0 37), cf. 881. 
 
 f. Consecutive use, like iSo-re so that, to express result ; mostly with the 
 infinitive (953) : iKuvk irpoa-Tyyov its Setirprjcrat T^y o'Tfaridy they brought enou^h^ 
 so thai the army could dine (XO.5.2') ; see also the example in 935 a. 
 
 g. For &s in expressions of wishing (Lat. utinam), see 870 b. 
 
 3. utnrep {as and irip) even aa, just as, 
 
 »■ strengthened is, but found only in the comparative use. 
 
1055] TEMPORAL aONJUNGTIONS. 331 
 
 3. Situs as, that, in order that, 
 
 is the indefinite relative corresponding to as. For its use as a final conjunc- 
 tion, see 881, 885. Like other indefinite relatives, it is used in dependent 
 questions (1011) how, in what manner. 
 
 4. w<rT6 (1041) is used in two ways : 
 
 a. Comparative use, as (= as, &(Twep) : this is Ionic and poetic, and is 
 especially frequent in Homer : Hare his like a lion (A 239). 
 
 b. Consecutive use, so that: see 927. 
 
 5. Hre as, used with participles, see 977. 
 
 6. fi, Sirn OS, see 1056, 4. 
 
 7. Hm. ipiTi, tvTi as, like as. 
 
 1055. XIV. Temporal Conjunctions. — These are mostly 
 relative adverbs of time. 
 
 1. 8Te,-6iro'Te, when; and (with av) Brav, oirdrav. 'Ore is rarely used 
 in a causal sense : whereas, since. 
 
 2. fZri (poetic and Ionic) = Sre, both temporal and causal. 
 
 3. ^vCKa, 6iri]vUa, at which time, when, more precise than ore. 
 
 4. Hm. TJnos wlien (— tihIko) : only with the indicative. 
 
 5. tirtC when, since; and (with nv) iTrf\v or lirdv (Hm. eTTei Ke, Hd. 
 iiTfdv). 'Ettcj is very often used as a causal conjunction, since, seeing 
 that. 
 
 6. lirsiSri since now, when now (eVet and 8^). With av, it forma 
 kiraSdv, which is much more used than eViji', ewdv. 
 
 7. SoT-e (not in Hm.), ias, and poet. 8<(>po (Hm. ds S Ke, els ore Ke) 
 until, as long as : see 930-933. For o<ppa as a Jinal conjunction, see 
 881. 
 
 8. |1^XPS '^XP'' until. These stand for fiexpt oS, axpi ov (cf. 758) 
 up to the point at which; which also occvir. 
 
 9. irpCv before (that), ere. 
 
 In this use, it stands for nph fi (sooner than, Lat. prites guam) : it may be 
 connected either with the infinitive (955) or with a finite verb (924). In its 
 proper use {—pritts, sooner, earlia-), it has no relative force and is not a 
 conjunction ; this use is found in Attic Greek only after the article ; iv rots 
 irplv \iyots in the foregoing statements (T.2.62) ; but is very frequent in Hm. ; 
 T^v S' iyi) ov Avcra • irpiv /uv Kol yrjpas iiretatv hut I mil not release her ; age 
 shall come upon her first (A 29). Hm. often uses this adverbial irpiV in corre- 
 spondence with a conjunction itplv ; o45^ tis 6tAt) irpiii irteetv irpXv XeTijfat nor 
 any man durst sooner drink ere he had made libation (H 480). 
 
332 FIOURES OF SYNTAX. [1056 
 
 1056. XV. Local Conjunctioiis. — These are relative adverbs 
 of place. They are also occasionally used to denote position 
 in time; and very often to denote conditions or circumstances. 
 
 1. o5, 8irou where (epic and lyric odi, 6n66i). 
 
 3. &9(v, oirdOev whence. 
 
 3. ot, 8iroi whither. 
 
 4. T\, 8irti (Hm. also ^xOi ^hich way, in which part, where : also, in 
 comparative sense, as. 
 
 5. 8v8a where, ?v9ev whence. Also, as demonstratives, there, thence. 
 
 6. iva. where; oftener as final conjunction (cf. 881), in order that. 
 
 FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 
 
 1057. Ellipsis (defect) is the omission of words which are requisite 
 to a full logical expression of the thought. 
 
 For examples of elliptical constructions already described, see 612, 643 c, 
 863, 883, 903-905, 996, 1015 b; but many of those constructions fall under 
 the special head of brachylogy. 
 
 1058. Brachylogy (fyrief expression) is a species of ellipsis, by 
 which a word appears but once, when in the complete expression it 
 would be repeated, and, usually, with some change of form or con- 
 struction : 
 
 iTrpa^ttfiev Ti/ieTs (sc. irphs iKeti/o-Js), Kol ixfimt irphs Tifias elpiivriv we made 
 peace with them, and they with im (D.3'). — Very often the complete expression, 
 instead of repeating the same word, would use another word of kindred mean- 
 ing ; aiis\i]<ras Siv ol iroWol (sc. ^7ri;ueAoSvToi) neglecting things which the most 
 care for (PAp-Se'). Thus %kiuttos or tIs must sometimes be supplied from a 
 preceding ovieis : ov^eis kK^v SlKaios, &K\a i^eyet ri 6.SiKe7v ci^vvaruv avrh 8pav 
 no one is just bi/ his own will, but each one blames injustice, became he is unable 
 to practise it (PRp.366'*). 
 
 1059. Zbugma (junction) is a variety of brachylogy, by which two 
 connected subjects or objects are made to depend on the same verb, 
 when this is appropriate to but one of them : 
 
 Hm. jJx' eicdffTci> Hwiroi aspaiiroies Kol iromiXxi reixe' ixeiTO where for each 
 man (stood, eVracrai') his steeds fleet-footed and his cunninglji-mrought arms were 
 lying (r 327), ^o-fl^ro <pop4oua-i ttj ^kvOik^ S/ioiriv, y\Zira-av Se •Siiji' they wear a 
 dress similar to the Scythian, but (have, exovffi) a peculiar language (Hd. 4.106). 
 
 1060. Aposiopesis (becoming silent) occurs when from strong or sudden 
 feeling a sentence is abruptly broken off and left incomplete : Hm. ettrip yip 
 k' iBdhritriv 'OKifimos &arT€poTrriTiis 4^ ISe'aii' crrvipfKl^ai — for if in sooth Olym- 
 pus' thunderer shall will to hurl us from our thrones — implying 'it will go 
 hard with us ' (A 580). It is a figure of rhetoric rather than of syntax. 
 
106S] FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 333 
 
 1061. Pleonasm (excess) is the admission of words which are not 
 required for the complete logical expression of the thought : 
 
 Tretpacrojuoi t^ iroinr^j, KpariffTos Stv iTnreiJs, irvfjtfjMX^^i^ auTy io mi/ grandfathei' 
 1 will try, being an excellent luyrseman, io be an ally to him (XC.l.S"). For 
 other instances, see 652 c, 697. 
 
 1062. Htperbaton {traiispositiori) is an extraordinary departure 
 from the usual and natural order of words in a sentence. Thus words 
 closely connected in constnaction are separated by other words which 
 do not usually and naturally come between them : 
 
 Si TTp6s ce yovaTaji' (for irphs jovdruy tre sc. £«cT€ua)) bi/ iky knees 1 entreat 
 i/iee (EHipp.607), e{ oTfiai t^s cucpoTaTTis i\ev0eplas Sov\eta TAeicrri as a con- 
 sequence, I suppose, of extreme freedom, comes utter servitude (PRp.564»). It 
 often gives emphasis to some particular word or words : iroWSv, S ivSpts 
 'ASrivcuoi, \6y(Miv ytyvoii.ei'aiv though many, Athenians, arc the speeches made 
 (D.9'); — especially by bringing similar or contrasted words into immediate 
 juxtaposition ; eyii ^wriv TtKtKu&Tais TjdSfievos TjSofxevois ^fioi I associated with 
 pei'sojis of 'my own age, taking pleasure in them, and tliey in me (XHier.6^), 
 Hm. Trap' evK iSehav i6e\ov(rri unwilling with her willing (e 155). 
 
 1063. Anacoluthon (inconsistency). — This occurs, when in the 
 course of a sentence, whether simple or compound, the speaker, pur- 
 posely or inadvertently, varies the scheme of its construction : 
 
 (tisl SiaKfy6iifi'OS a\n^, ?8o{c jioi oZtos i hn)p eiyai ao<p6s and conversing with 
 him, this man appeared to me to be wise (PAp.21=), for ' I thought the man to 
 be wise,' iv6iuQov rhv 6.vSpa, etc. ; ^cri rauTa t) (,ivolos fiv, 'Apytioi ii.ev opyfi 
 Xwpovvres after this t/ie engagement commenced, the Argivcs advancing eagerly 
 (T.S.TO), 'Ap767o£ instead of 'Apyeimv, as if the sentence began with (,vvnKeov 
 t/ieu engaged; robs "EAAtjcos toIis iv rii 'Airl^ o'lKouin-as oiiSfv irm aaiph A-cytrai 
 ei ewovTai but the Greeks that live in Asia, nothing certain is as yet reported, 
 ichether they are following (XC.2.1'), cl kirorrai instead of eWBai, the expres- 
 sion changing to an indirect question ; Hm. /i-nrfpa S' cX oi eO/ibs 4<popimTai 
 yaii4ea-eat, hf/ ira U ixiyapov TrarpSs but thy mofhei; if her mind is bent on 
 wedlock, then, let her to her father's house go back (a 275), &i)/ Ira instead of 
 airSiren^oy send back; Siairep oi aflA.7jTo(, irav tZv avTa-)avi(rTav 7e'>'£ui'Tai 
 'jTTous, toGt" airobs avia as the athletes, when thai prove inferior to their 
 antagonists, this troubles 'them (Xnier.4«), as if oi ie\vrai belonged to the 
 relative sentence, properly Toirip aviwvTai are troubled by this. 
 
 Sometimes the anacoluthon is caused by an endeavor to keep up a simi- 
 larity of form between two corresponding sentences : toioDto yap i tpas^ 
 imtiixvinai- Suarvxavmas /itv & yii)) Xuirrji' Tois &\\ois irapex^t ayiaph iroiei 
 vofilCiiv eiTVXoSvTas Se Kol to /xi) riSovris S|ia irap' iKeliav eVafcou iiiayKdiet 
 Tuyxivs'v for such effects does love exhibit: unfortunate persons he causes to 
 rcffard ax 'troublesome, things which give no pain to others ; but fortunate pei'- 
 eons, he makes it necessary that even things unworthy of pleasure should obtain 
 praise from them (PPhaedr.233''), fvrvxovpras irap' iKilvav instead of xop' 
 
 iVTVXO^i^flV. 
 
APPENDIX, 
 
 VEESIFICATION. 
 
 1064. Kinds op Poetkt. — Greek poetry is of two kinds; that 
 which was recited {enrj spoken verses), and that which was sung 
 {fiiXr] songs). 
 
 a. It is not always possible for us to distinguish the two. In the earliest 
 times all kinds of poetry were sung ; and, respecting some parts of the Attic 
 drama, we do not know how they were performed. 
 
 1065. In recited poetry, one kind of verse (dactylic hexameter, 
 iambic trimeter, etc.) is repeated indefinitely; the verse is then said 
 to be used iy the line. 
 
 In sung poetry (also called lyric poetry), verses are combined into 
 groups or strophes. The same form of strophe is usually repeated 
 one or more times to the same melody (though with different words), 
 precisely like the stanzas of a modern ballad or church-hymn. A 
 strophe commonly contains a variety of verses. 
 
 11. The simplest strophe is the distich, or couplet of two verses, differing 
 somewhat from each other. Any number of distiohs may constitute the poem. 
 
 b. Songs for the single voice (like those of Alcaeus and Sappho) consist 
 of a short strophe, usually of four verses, repeated indefinitely. 
 
 c. Choral poetry, as seen, for instance, in the lyric portions of tragedy and 
 comedy, consists of longer and more complex strophes. These are usually 
 arranged in pairs. Each pair consists of a strophe and antistrophe, the latter 
 of which is like the former, containing the same kinds of verse arranged in 
 the same order. Such a pair is sometimes followed by a single strophe — 
 called an epode (a/Hcr-iony)— differing from them in rhythms, and serving as 
 a conciusiou to them. In the lyric odes of Pindar, this is the general law ; 
 most of them consist of trios, in which a like pair, strophe and antistrophe, are 
 followed by an unlike epode; but the successive trios of the same ode are 
 all alike, showing the same kinds of verse in the same order of arrangement. 
 
 d. The anapaestic systems of the drama (see 1105) have no distinct division 
 into strophes ; and the same is true of many of the monodies (solos) which 
 occur in some plays, composed in a great variety of irregular rhythms. 
 
 1066. Rhythm and Mbtbb. — Greek verse, like English, has rhythm 
 {pv6ji6s), or regular momment ; and metre {jxirpov), that is, definite 
 measurement, by feet and lines of a given length. 
 
 It is unlike English verse, in that a regular arrangement of long 
 and short syllables is observed in its construction. 
 
 a. English verse, on the other hand, is based on word-accent, the rule 
 being that the accented syllable of every word must be so placed as to re- 
 
1068] 
 
 VERSIFIOATIOK 
 
 335 
 
 ceive the rhytlimic stress (ictus, 1071). But in Greek Tersification, the word- 
 accent was entirely disregarded ; that is, the poet was wholly indifferent 
 whether the ictus fell on the same syllables as the word-accent, or on differ- 
 ent syllables. The reason of this lies in the nature of the Greek accent (95). 
 In sung poetry, the word-accent disappeared altogether, as the pitch of each 
 syllable was determined by the melody. In recited verse, it could still be 
 observed along with the rhythmic stress, since it did not conflict with it. 
 Thus the Greeks could pronounce iK-n-ep-o-ai npi-a-|ioi-o irif-Xiv, giving the 
 stress to the syllables printed in heavy type, while speaking the syllables 
 marked with the acute in a higher key. 
 
 1067. Syllables. — In verse, the ordinary long syllable ( — ) has 
 double the value of the short syllable (>-'). Prolonged long syllables 
 sometimes occur: the triseme ('-), equal to three short syllables; and 
 the tetraseme ('-'), equal to four. In musical notation these values 
 may be thus expressed : 
 
 / J J. J 
 
 1068. Feet. — Verses are composed of metrical elements called/«et, 
 The most imjiortant are the following : 
 
 
 Feet of three times (| time). 
 
 
 Trochee 
 
 — v_y 
 
 XetTTe 
 
 J J^ 
 
 Iambus 
 
 ^ — 
 
 \i7reiv 
 
 .^ J 
 
 Tribrach 
 
 wv.^ 
 
 eXmov 
 
 ^ ^/ 
 
 
 Feet of four 
 
 ' times (f tiine). 
 
 
 Dactyl 
 
 -^^ 
 
 \ei7rofiev 
 
 J J-2 
 
 Anapaest 
 
 s^ y^ 
 
 XiTreVo) 
 
 /3 J 
 
 Spondee 
 
 
 
 Xeiirav 
 
 J J 
 
 
 Feet of Jive 
 
 times (1 time). 
 
 
 Cretic 
 
 — ^ — 
 
 XeiTTcroj 
 
 J ^ J 
 
 First Paeon 
 
 — w^^ 
 
 XfiTrofiida 
 
 J J^ SJ 
 
 Fourth Paeon 
 
 O^ v^ — 
 
 iXmofiTjv 
 
 J-2 J- J 
 
 Bacchius 
 
 w 
 
 XiTTovrav 
 
 J- J J 
 
 Antibacchius 
 
 ---. 
 
 XeiVoitr^e 
 
 J J / 
 
 
 Feet of six 
 
 times (1 time). 
 
 
 Ionic a majore 
 
 ^^ 
 
 'KeiTToifieBa 
 
 J J n 
 
 Ionic a ininore 
 
 «— ' -w 
 
 i\iir4a-6r]V 
 
 nj J 
 
 Molossus 
 
 
 
 'Kemovrav 
 
 J J J 
 
 Choriambus 
 
 — v> v> — 
 
 XeiTTo/ieVous 
 
 J nj 
 
336 VERSIFICATION. [1069 
 
 a. Less important are the proccleusmaiic (.^ v^ ^ v^), the second paeon 
 (v-' — w ^), and the third paeon (^ w — v^). Two short syllables (^ w) are 
 called a pyrrhic. 
 
 b. It will be seen from the above that the Greek music, like the modern, 
 employed common time (J), and triple time (f, f). The former was called 
 yivos 'iaov, because thesis and arsis (1071) were equal; the latter yevos SiirAci- 
 trtov, because the thesis was double the arsis. Besides these, the Greeks used 
 f time {yivos j)fu6\ioi>), which is unknown in modern music ; in this the ratio 
 of thesis to arsis is as 3 to 2. 
 
 1069. A dactyl occurring in f time has the rhythm 
 
 /3 -^ (not J J"J); 
 
 this is called a cyclic dactyl, and is marked —^ w. There is also a 
 long trochee, >- ^ : that is, 
 
 J , ^ (not J J>), 
 used in common time. 
 
 1070. Irrational Syllable. — A long syllable sometimes stands 
 in the place of a short one, in iambic and trochaic rhythms; thus 
 
 instead of — ^-^ a trochee, or v^ — an iambus, we have apparently 
 
 a spondee. Such a syllable is called irrational,* and is marked > ; 
 the seeming spondee is called an irrational trochee or iambus. 
 
 a. It is likely that the irrational syllable had a value between that of an 
 ordinary long syllable and a, short one. The irrational trochee would then 
 
 be I J* 1 *i"i its effect would be a slight retardation or dragging of the 
 
 f rhythm. 
 
 1071. Thesis and Aesis. — In each foot, one part is distin- 
 guished from the other by a stress of voice, called the ictus, or 
 rhythmic accent. The ictus has nothing to do vi^ith the written 
 word-accent, which was disregarded in versification (1066 a). 
 
 That part of the foot which has the ictus is called the thesis {Bia-is 
 setting, down-heat) ; the other part is called the arsis {tiptris raising, up- 
 
 a. The ictus is marked, in the rhythmical schemes, by a stroke (-^) ; a 
 weaker ictus (see 1082) by a dot (-=-). 
 
 b. The ictus usually falls on a long syllable. But if this is resolved into 
 two short syllables, the^cs^ of them receives the ictus. For example,'see 1080. 
 
 c. The names thesis and arsis came from the practice of marching, or of 
 beating time with the foot. The Greeks used them as given above. In modern 
 usage (which follows later Roman writers) they are commonly, but perversely, 
 interchanged ; arsis being used for the ictus-part, and thesis for the other. 
 
 1072, Groups or Feet. — A single foot, taken by itself, is called 
 a monopody; two feet, taken together, a dipody; three feet, a tripody; 
 four, five, six, etc., a tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, etc. 
 
 * Because it destroys the proper raiio between thesis and arsis. 
 
10V6] versification: 337 
 
 a. More than six feet canuot unite as a single group, and even a group of 
 six is possible only in trochaic, iambic, and logaoedic verses. 
 
 1073. Vbkses. — Verses are named trochaic, iambic, dactylic, etc., 
 according to the principal (or fundamental) foot used in them. They 
 are further distinguished as manometer, dimeter, trimeter, etc., accord- 
 ing to the number of their feet, or of their bases. 
 
 a. A basis ($iiins slcj}, m dancing or marching) is sometimes one, sometimes 
 two feet. In trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, a basis consists of two 
 feet : thus, an iambic trimeter consists of six feet ; a trochaic tetrameter, of 
 eight, etc. In other kinds of verse, each foot is reckoned as a basis : thus, 
 a dactylic hexameter consists of six feet ; an ionic tetrameter, of four. 
 
 1074. Final Syllable. — A verse must end with the end of a 
 word; and its final syllable is unrestricted as to quantity (syllaba 
 anceps). A long syllable may be used in that place instead of a short, 
 and a short syllable instead of a long. 
 
 Thus in the verse TeKfovvra xal TeKvoifievoy the last syllable is short, 
 although the scheme of the verse {^ -i- ■^ — ^ -i- ^ —) requires a long one. 
 — In the rhythmical schemes throughout the following sections, the final 
 syllable of each verse will be marked long or short, as the rhythm may 
 require, without reference to its quantity in the annexed specimen. 
 
 a. The reason of this freedom is the pause which occurs at the end of 
 every verse ; this obscures the difference between a long and a short syllable. 
 For the same reason, hiatus (76) is not avoided at the end of a verse. 
 
 b. Yet we sometimes find a system of lines, having the same or similar 
 rhythm throughout, in which the liberties above described (syllaba anceps 
 and hiatus) are allowed only in the closing line. A system of this kind is 
 properly a single long verse, the lines which compose it being metrical series 
 (1075) rather than verses. Hence the lines of such a system are sometimes 
 found ending in the middle of a word, which can never be true of a verse, 
 strictly so called. 
 
 1075. DicoLic Vekses. — ^A long verse sometimes contains two (or 
 even more) separate groups of feet. Thus the trochaic tetrameter 
 (1083) consists, not of one group of eight feet, but of two groups of 
 four fept. The groups are called also metrical series or cola (koiXoj' 
 member).; The first group may end in the middle of a word. 
 
 In the following schemes dicolic verses are marked by a dot under the 
 first thesis of each group. 
 
 1076. Syncope. — The arsis of a foot is sometimes omitted. When 
 this occurs in the middle of a verse, it is called syncope. The time 
 of the omitted arsis is made up by prolonging the preceding long 
 thesis. 
 
 ■ Thus the verse a/upl vamv K6pvfiPa {•'- ^ ^ ^ \^ -^■S) is a trochaic 
 tetrapody with the second arsis omitted : the syllable yd- is prolonged so as 
 to take the time of a whole trochee. 
 
338 VERSIFICATION. [107'! 
 
 1077. Oataibxis. — ^If the last foot of a verse Is incomplete, this is 
 called eatalexis {KwroKYj^is stopping short), and the verse is said to be 
 catalectic. On the other hand, verses which close with a complete 
 foot are called acatalectic. 
 
 Thus /irjSe tis kkXti^k^tu (-^ v^ — ^^ — w — ) is a catalectic trocliaic tetra- 
 pody ; the time of the missing final arsis is made up by a pause. 
 
 a. Generally it is the last part of the foot that is omitted ; and in ana- 
 paestic verses this is the thesis. But in catalectic iambic verses, the Jirst 
 syllable of the foot is wanting ; see 1090. 
 
 1078. a. A verse is donhhj catalectic when the arses of the last two feet 
 are omitted : thus KapSids TspaffK6irou iroTarai (-^*_' — v^ — w — w^^ — )isa 
 doubly catalectic trochaic hexapody. 
 
 b. The name hypercatalectic is sometimes applied to a verse which extends 
 one syllable beyond a given measure. For an example, see 1096 f. 
 
 1079. Anacrusis. — An initial arsis (long, short, or irrational sylla- 
 ble) prefixed to rhythms beginning with an ictus, is called an ana- 
 crusis (upward beat). Sometimes we find a double anacrusis, of two 
 short syllables. 
 
 Thus, the verses b, o, d, are like a, but have anacruses prefixed : 
 ii. Aa{j.vtd^03i/ 'yvvaiKuv. -^~^ ^^ -^ \^ ^ -^ 
 
 b. irpoKriSo/j.ei/d ^apeiav. <^ -K-^ ^^ -^ w Li. ^ 
 
 C. ju^ rap^a\ea 6dvoifil. > -^^ ^ — •.^ ^ -^ 
 
 d. ore Ktd Aihs cumpairSs. \-t ^ -^^> ^ — ^^ -^ 
 
 Kemaek. — The names iambic (1088 ff) and anapaestic (1103 ff), applied 
 to large classes of rhythms, though convenient from their brevity, are not 
 Indispensable : the iambic rhythms might with propriety be designated as 
 anaa-wstic-tj'ochaic, the anapaestic as anacrustic-dacti/lic, since they are in fact 
 simply trochaic and dactylic rhythms with preoedmg anacrusis. 
 
 1080. Resolution and Contbaction. — Many lands of verse allow 
 the use of two short syllables in place of a long one, which is then 
 said to be resolved ; or, vice versa, the use of a long syllable in place 
 of two short ones, which are then said to be contracted. 
 
 Thus, in the trochaic tetrapody 'Apa^lds t' &petov avBoi (^ ^ .^ — ^.^ -^ w-=- w), 
 a tribrach stands by resolution in place of the first trochee. An example of 
 contraction is the substitution of a spondee for the dactyl in the dactylic 
 nexameter (1100). 
 
 1081. Caesuea — Caesura {rofifi cutting or dividing) is a break in a 
 verse, produced by the end of a word. 
 
 According to one use of the term, there is a caesura whenever a word ends 
 within a verse. But in the stricter sense, caesura is an important break in 
 a verse, usually marked by a pause in the sense, and occurring for the most 
 part in certain fixed places. Sometimes this is called the principal caesura; 
 and the others lesser caesuras. 
 
1085] TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. 339 
 
 Thus in the dactylic hexameter ^AirrfA.A.aii'i Si/okti, rbv fivKOjioi TfKe AriTii 
 (-f — -^K^ — ^,^-T-^^ — ^^ — —) the prinoiptil caesura is after 'dvcacn, 
 though there are lesser caesuras after 'Air6KKam, t6i>, ■^uKoynos, aud reKt. 
 
 Tkochaio Rhythms. 
 
 1082. The fundamental foot is the trochee. In verses which have 
 an even number of feet (4, 6, etc.), the feet are commonly grouped by 
 twos (dipodic bases, see 1073 a), the first foot of each dipody having 
 a stronger ictus than the second. The second foot of the dij)ody may 
 then be irrational (1070) ; that is : 
 
 — — — > may stand in place of -^ ^ ~ ^. 
 Hence the rule is that the dimeter, trimeter, etc. , may have the irra- 
 tional trochee (apparent spondee) for the even feet (second, fourth, 
 etc.), but never for the odd feet (first, third, etc.). The tripody, 
 having an odd number of feet, never admits the irrational trochee. 
 
 The thesis of a foot may be resolved (1080), giving v^^ ^ (tribrach) 
 in place of the pure trochee, and ^i- v.^ > in place of the irrational 
 trochee. But the last thesis of a verse cannot be resolved. 
 
 1083. The Trochaic Tetrameter catalectic is often used by the 
 line (1065) in ■comedy and tragedy. It consists of two dimeters, the 
 second of -which is catalectic* There is usually a caesura between 
 the two parts, after the fourth foot. 
 
 yiyveTOA dvqToiSj 6 ficLfftrwu fiiOTos ?/»' raO^ irpSffw.^ 
 
 Observe the resolution in fiioros (v^v^v^). A dactyl is very rarely used in 
 place of a trochee, chiefly in proper names. Compare the use of the anapaest 
 in spoken iambic verse, 1089 a, 1091, 3. 
 
 1084. The tetrameter season (hobbling) or Hipponactean — a satiric verse 
 — differs from the above in having the last foot complete, and the next to the 
 last syncopated (1076). This unexpected close gives the verse an humorous 
 effect : 
 
 elra S' iarXv ix da\i^(Ti\s Sivvos ob Kaxbv jSpii^o.' 
 
 1085. Lyric Trochaic Rhythms. — The following are specimens: 
 a, b. tripody {ithijphallic) ; b, catalectic. 
 
 ^X*''"' ^>' Si/ji,ot<Ti ' (a). -^ w-^ w-*^ »_. 
 
 Kflcerai TtiA-ds * (b). -^ \^ -^ ^ -'- 
 
 ' APers.707. ' Ananias. ' EAlc.aOS. ' SE1.846. 
 
 * Cf. ' Tell me not in mournful numbers, life is but an empty dreamt 
 
340 IAMBIC RHYTHMS. [1086 
 
 c, d, e. tetrapody, or dimeter; d, catalectic; e, do'ubly catalectic. 
 ak\a Koi vvv 4K-jr6piCe ' (c). -^v-* — >— ^^v^ 
 
 is rh ;x7 Te\siTip6pov ^ (d). -£. ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^. 
 
 iv ^poToitriy e^eis '^ (e). -^ v_/ — ^ ^ — 
 
 f, g. hexapody, or trimeter ; f, catalectic ; g, doubly catalectic. 
 
 ap-nayai 5e hia^pop.av &fj.alfj.ot/£s * (f ). -^^ — .^v^w^ — w — ^-^ — 
 Aihn vTrayKaKKT/xa (refjLvhf "Hpd ^(g). vi/^_^r^^^^-^v-'-^^^'~ -=- 
 h. tetrameter acatalectic (two complete dimeters, lOTo). 
 K\v8l jueu, yepovTOS fv4Betpi XP''"'^^^'"^^ Kovpri.^ 
 
 Remark. — The forms a and e have the same syllables, but very diiferent 
 rhythms. Which is the right measurement in a given case can be determined 
 only by the surroundings, and is often doubtful. 
 
 1086, The following are specimens of syncopated forms (10Y6) : a is a 
 syncopated tetrapody ; b, a tetrapody catalectic ; c, d, catalectic hexapodies ; 
 e, f, g, catalectic tetrameters. Such forms as d appear to begin with a spon- 
 dee, which, however, is really a syncopated dipody. 
 
 tt. afifpX vatjov K6pvfxPa,'' -^ ^ ^^ — %-» — v^ 
 
 b. iras yap iTTTrTjActTds.^ -^ ^ Li_ -L ^_^ ^ 
 
 c. fi^ Tuxoutroi 9euy 'OKv/xirtup.^ -^^^^^ -^ ^^ -^ >^ -^ ^ 
 
 d. e^(n}pi6v T€ (pdfffia i/ai/jSarais."* ^ ^ -^ ^ — w -^ v 
 
 e. Zebs ScaJ airoffTcpoiTi ydfiov Sv(ravopa.'^ -fv, — w-^^^ -r-v 
 
 f . TTTUnta, fxarpifov ayviafxa Kvpiov <p6vov}'^ -r- ^ ^ — ^ ^ -r- v 
 
 g. TTTjfiovas e\u(raT* eS X^'P^ tratavidj'^ -r-^ — w — ^^ -r-v 
 
 1087. In lyric strophes, the tragedy avoids the irrational syllable alto- 
 gether; the comedy admits it. — Systems (1074 b) are sometimes found, in 
 which a succession of complete dimeters, with here and there a monometer, 
 is closed by a dimeter catalectic. 
 
 Iambic Rhythms. 
 
 1088. The fundamental foot is the iambus ; and the ictus is on the 
 second syllable, ^ -^. In verses vrhich have an even number of feet 
 (4, 6, etc.) the feet are commonly grouped by twos (dipodic bases, 
 1073 a), the first thesis of such dipody having a stronger ictus thau 
 the second. The Jirst foot of each dipody may then be irrational 
 (1070) : that is, > -'-^ — may stand in place of ^-^ ^ ^. Hence the 
 rule is that the dimeter, trimeter, etc., may have the irrational iambus 
 (apparent spondee) for the odd feet (1st, 3d, 5th), but only pure iambi 
 for the even feet (3d, 4th, 6th). In a tripody or pentapody, only the 
 first foot can be irrational. 
 
 » ArVeep..S65. " AAg.lOOO. ' ArNnb.4()0. * ASept.3.51. • EHel.242. " Anacreon. 
 ' EIo.258. 8APera.l2(i. • ASupp.iei. '» EIa.252. " ASupp.1064. " ABum.326. 
 " ASupp.1066. 
 
1091] lAMBIO TRIMETER. 341 
 
 a. The principle of the irrational arsis is the same in iambic and trochaio 
 rhythms (1082) ; namely, that the arsis following the first thesis of each 
 dipody must be rational (Sj, while other arses may be irrational. 
 
 1089. The thesis of a foot may be resolved (1080), giving v_.^v^ 
 (tribrach) 'in place of the pure iambus, and > ^^ (apparent dactyl) 
 in place of the irrational iambus. — But the last foot of a verse (in 
 catalectic verses the last complete foot) must always be a pure iambus. 
 
 a. The anapaest (w ^ -^) in place of the iambus is found only in spoken 
 verse ; and except in comedy, is restricted to the first foot. It is probable 
 that the two short syllables were rapidly pronounced, in the time of one. 
 
 1090. In catalectic iambic verses, the arsis (not the thesis) of the 
 last foot is omitted, and its time is filled by prolonging the preceding 
 thesis: thus ^^ -'- (not ^ -'■ ^). 
 
 The Iambic Trimeter. 
 
 1091. The iambic trimeter is, next to the dactylic hexameter, the 
 most widely used of all rhythms. It prevails especially in tragedy and 
 comedy, the dramatic dialogue being mainly carried on in this measure. 
 
 The trimeter of tragedy consists primarily of six iambi, of which 
 the fii'st, thiid, and fifth may be irrational : 
 
 O-^v^"^ O-^v.^-^ O — \^ •'- 
 
 Furthermore : — (1) By resolution of the thesis (1089), the tribrach 
 may stand for any foot but the last; and (2) the apparent dactyl 
 (> v^ v^) for the first and third ; but these liberties are not frequent : 
 see examples b and c below. (3) The anapaest (1089 a) is in tragedy 
 confined to the first foot (see example a, second line) ; only in proper 
 names it is occasionally admitted in other places. 
 
 (4) The chief caesura is most commonly in the middle of the third foot 
 ( penthemimeral caesura). The least approved caesura is that which divides 
 the verse into equal halves. 
 
 (6) When the fifth foot is divided by a caesura, the syllable before that 
 caesura (if it is not a monosyllabic word) is almost always short ('Forson's 
 nile^). 
 
 Examples are : 
 
 a. S Sios alBiip Ka! TaxiiTTepot TTVoal, > —^— >,— ^ — w-^w — 
 TTOTafiwj/ T€ Tn^yai, TTOvriiev re KvfiaTOjy ^^^ -^w— ">•, -^ v.^ — y^ — ^^ -^ 
 wiipiBfiov ye\a<riia, irafi/iTJldp re 7^.' * w -^^— »_/ -^ w, — >-^v-.— 
 
 b. craipas iiriaToa', '\ivtos KiH\.4]aerai? ^ — ^ — v-., v^v^v^ — ^-^w-^ 
 u. ffoi irpwTov *Io(, TrQ\vSQyov TKdyrjv (j>paffu. v-/ -^ v^ 7- >, v^v> v-y ^ v.> -^ v^ — 
 
 ' APr.88. ■■" APr.840. " APr.788. 
 
 * Cf . light immortal, winds on wings of xu'iftness borne, 
 river sources, and the eounlless flashing smile 
 Of occari's wavelets, univei^sal motive^' earth, etc. 
 23 
 
342 IAMBIC RHYTHMS. [1092 
 
 1092, The trimeter of comedy differs from the above in these re- 
 spects : 
 
 (1) The anapaest is freely used for every foot except the last. 
 (3) The apparent dactyl may stand as the fifth foot (as well as the 
 first and thud). 
 
 (3) The resolved feet (tribrach and dactyl) are far more frequent 
 than in tragedy. 
 
 (4) Person's rule of the fifth foot (1091, 5) is often neglected. 
 
 Si Zev fiaffiKeVj rh xPVf^^ twv wktGiv Hitov >• -^ w%^ — i^ -^^— >— w — 
 aTrepafTov. oiiSfnoff iififpd, yey^fferai ; \^<^ -^ v^ -=- ^^^^ -^ ^^ -^ .^ -^ ^^ -^ 
 
 ciTriKoio Stjt', Si ir6\efiej TToWuy oHveKa.^ ww -^ »..> — , ^v^.^*.^— >^w — 
 
 1093. Scheme of tTie iambic trimeter (forms in parentheses are con- 
 fined to comedy). 
 
 .^ -i w — 
 
 >./v> -^ (. . ^ 
 
 v^ -^ w> 
 
 > ^^ 
 
 
 (> ■^^) 
 
 VV>^ -i) 
 
 1094. The TRIMETER scAZON {IiobbKnff), called also choliambus, or Hippo- 
 naelean — a satiric verse — omits the syllable before the last thesis, but adds 
 another syllable at the end ; this unexpected close produces a humorous 
 effect. 
 
 w -^ w — w-^ ^ — w 1^ — v^ 
 5tJ' Tj/xepat yvvaiK^s ilffiv ^itffTai} 
 
 1095. The CATALECTic IAMBIC TETRAMETER is often used by the line in 
 comedy : it consists of two dimeters, the second of which is catalectic. 
 There is generally a caesura between the two parts. The resolved thesis and 
 the anapaest are freely admitted. 
 
 O -r- ^-^ -=- O -^ ^-^ -^, O -7- .— ' -^ v-^ ' — ■^- 
 
 Si ■KaffLV hvBpilmois <pave\s n^yiffTov u(j}e\7jfici,^ 
 
 1096. Lykic Iambic Rhythms. The following are specimens: 
 a. dipody or monometer : 
 
 ri StjB* 6pas.* ^y -^ v^ — 
 
 b, c. tripody ; c, catalectic : 
 
 'EWavlSfs K6pai ' (b). > -^ ^ -^ ^ -^ 
 
 Kpdraiov tyxos * (c). v> -^ ^^ l£. _i. 
 
 d, e, f. tetrapody or dimeter ; e, catalectic : f, hypercatalectie : 
 
 ^y\\(Jo (re rijy eh^ov\ias '(d). >-^*.> — >--^s.^ — 
 
 6fo\ 0poTois viftovfftv^ (e). v^ -^ %^ — \.v L?- — 
 
 3 BiJkxi, ^dp/iOKOv S' &purTov '(f). >-^w— ^-i-._/ — x^ 
 
 •ArNnb.a. » Hipponax. = ArEq.8.36. • ArNub.1098. ' EHel.193. • Pind.Pyth.6,34 
 ' ArAch.1008. « ESupp.616. • Alcaeus. 
 
1099] DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 343 
 
 g. pentapody: 
 
 Qi^axev t^is oh fiiB^ffrtpov} v^^,^-2.^^^_t^_4. 
 
 h. hexapody or trimeter catalectic : 
 
 ^iroj^eA.ijo'a Tc6\fOS i^eXfffQai} *^ -^ w — w v^%_/ ^^ — w ^ — 
 
 i. tetrameter acatalectic = dimeter repeated : 
 
 8c'|ai lie Kaftd^oina, Sc|ai, hiaaoiiai <re, A.iVo'o/xai.' 
 
 1097. The following are specimens of syncopated forms : a — e are tetra- 
 podies (the last two catalectic) ; f is a pentapody ; g — k are hexapodies (the 
 last two catalectic) ; 1 and m are tetrameters (tetrapodies repeated). The 
 form m is occasionally used by the line. 
 
 a. $ap€tal KaTaWaycd.* ^^ — ^ -^ ^ ~ 
 
 b. KOKou 8h xa^«ow rpdvoif.'^ w -^ .-> ^ -^ .^ — 
 C. fAeKaflirdyijs ireA€i.* w ^ L^ -^ w — 
 
 d. ^\ois S) v6fris fioi."^ N_/ ^ — ^ ^ — 
 
 e. StTrKd^eTot rtfid.^ v^ -^ w ^ l£. _^ 
 
 f. tpo^oviJiai S" (iros t6S' 4KPa\f7v.^ ^^ -i- ^ -i- ^ J- ^ -t. 
 
 g. fie^aiTi yap Tolirep ayperat ffTparov.^^ w-^^^ -£-^^^-i-v_^^ 
 h. jSfa Xff^t*'^*' 5' avotJS^ juei/et." w — v^^ -^w^ -^^ — 
 i. ivaux'fto'as 5e Tolfl-i 0*075 \<i70is.*^ ^^ ^ -i-^ — w-^^ — 
 j. Saipv7](p6pots ^QvQinonri Ti/iais.*^ ^ — v^^ — w — w^^ — 
 k. xnr apxas S* oKtitos Sod^av.'* w*^ i^ -^w — v^i^ — 
 1. ■jr6yot S6fiav veoi Tra\aio7ffi arvfjifityeis KaKo7sM 
 
 m. fipoTwv &\ai, veav re Koi inuTfulTav cupeiSels. 
 
 16 
 
 ,Ld. 
 
 1098. In the iambic strophes of tragedy, the irrational syllable is in 
 general avoided ; in those of comedy, it is frequent. Cf. 1087. 
 
 Systems (1074 b) are sometimes found, in which a succession of complete 
 dimeters, with here and there a monometer, is closed by a dimeter catalectic. 
 
 Dactylic Rhythms. 
 
 1099. The fundamental foot is the dactyl. But a spondee is very 
 often used instead (1080): at the end of a verse, it is much more 
 common than the dactyl. A proceleusmatic, used for the dactyl 
 (1068 a), is rare, and only found in lyric poetry. The ictus is on the 
 first syllable of each foot. 
 
 1 AAg.425. » SOc.541. > Alcaeus. * ASept.767. » AAg.390. ' AAg.392. ' ETro.587. 
 8 ESupp.781. • ACho.46. '» APers.1002. " AAg.238. " ArAv.639. " ASapp.706 
 " ASupp.595, " ASept.740. " AAg.195. 
 
344 DACTYLIC RHTTSMS. [1100 
 
 The Dactylic Hbxambteb. 
 
 1100. This is the most commoa of all Greek verses, being the 
 established measure for epic, didactic, and bucolic poetry. It con- 
 sists of six feet, of which the last is always a spondee.* Each of the 
 others may be at pleasure a dactyl or a spondee, but the dactyl pre- 
 vails; especially in the fifth place, where hardly one line in twenty 
 has the spondee {spmidaic verse, see example c below). 
 
 The third foot is almost always divided by a caesura, and this is 
 usually the principal caesura of the verse (1081). It may be either 
 masculine, i. e. after the long thesis of a dactyl or spondee {penthe- 
 mimeral caesura), — or feminine, i. e., between the two shorts of a 
 dactyl. Often also there is a caesura after the thesis of the fourth 
 foot Qiepliihemimei-al caesura), or at the end of the fourth foot (called 
 hucolic caesura, from its frequent occurrence in bucolic poetry) ; and 
 occasionally one of these is made the principal caesura. 
 
 The scheme therefore is : 
 
 Examples : 
 
 a. ot 8* ^TraveffTTiffav, irei9ovT6 re irolfiet/t \dieyj 
 
 -f^, ! ^ 2. ^ ^ _!- ^ ^ ^ _ 
 
 b, aW* avTos re Kddtjffo, Kol &\Kous 'iSpve XctotSs.^ 
 V, rfirr' -aSr', alyi6xoio Aihs tckos, cl\'ij\ovdas ; ^ 
 
 Remark. — The hexameter is properly a dicolic verse (1075), consisting of 
 two tripodies, less often of a tetrapody and a dipody. 
 
 1101. The Elegiac Distich. — This was not confined to the elegy, 
 but was the usual form for gnomic or reflective poetry. Its first line 
 is the hexameter ; its second is a verse containing two catalectic tri- 
 podies, which are always separated by a caesura. Of this verse the 
 first two feet may be dactyls or spondees at pleasure ; the fourth and 
 fifth feet are always dactyls. The third foot is filled out by the pro- 
 longed final syllable of the first tripody. 
 
 7?)y irepi Kal iraiSuv Kovpi^lT]s t' a\6xov.* 
 
 1102. Lteic Dactylic Ehythms. — The following are specimens: 
 a. dimeter: 
 
 fio7pa Su^Kci.' -^ w ^ -2- — 
 
 I B 85. a B 191. > A 202. * Callinus. « EHeracl.612. 
 
 * Cf . ' Under the open sky, in the odorous air of the orchard.' But English 
 dactylic and anapaestic verses are read in | time, unlike the Greek. 
 
- v^ v_* 
 
 1105] ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS. 345 
 
 b. trimeter catalectic {penthemimeria) : 
 
 irapBevoi Ofi$po<li6poi.^ -^ v^ v^ -2- ^ v^ -«. 
 
 c, d. tetrameter ; d, catalectic (hepMiemimei-is) : 
 
 ovpavlois Te 8so7s Sapiiiiara *(o). — w^-^w^^-' 
 
 ^KBct' iirmfi6fieiiai Siva/JLiv" (d). -'-^^-^^^-i-^^-i- 
 
 e. pentameter: 
 aWa fidTdv 6 Trp66viios del irrfvoc e'|6i.* -=-.^^-^^.^-2-^^v^-2- 
 
 f. lyric hexameter (two trimeters) ; 
 fiopffifia 5" otiTt tpvyetv Bdfxts^ oit trotplx Tis AirdJireTOi.^ 
 
 g. octameter (^two tetrameters) : 
 i> ■ir6iroi, ?i lieyiKas ayaBas re iro\iffa-ov6iiou floras iTmcvptra/iev.^ 
 
 Anapaestic Rhythms. 
 
 1103. The fundamental foot is the anapaest, with the ictus on the 
 last syllable, ^ ^^ A But a spondee (— -^) or a dactyl (— ^ ^) is very 
 often used (1080) instead of the anapaest; much less often, a, proce- 
 letismatic {^^^ ^), In catalectic vei-ses, the last foot lacks the ictua 
 (1077 a). 
 
 a. Anapaests are properly a marching rhythm. The feet are commonly 
 grouped by twos (1072 a), the two feet of each dipody corresponding to a 
 step with the right and left foot in succession. 
 
 1104. In marching-songs and lyric strophes the following kinds of 
 verses occur: 
 
 a, b. dipody or monometer ; b, catalectic : 
 
 airoKeis ju', oTroXeTs ** (a). v^ ^ — v.^ v-. -^ 
 
 veKvs ^5rj ' (b). w w-' — 
 
 0, d. tripody (prosodiac); d, catalectic: 
 
 ^a\afjuvtda'i (rrv^ihov ^ (c). v.>vv-^^w — w\-'-^ 
 
 vaoi e 01 ^olPov '" (d). _ ^ _ -!. _ 
 
 e. tetrapody or dimeter catalectic (paroaniac): 
 
 «ol fi^y r6Se Kvptop "fifiap.^^ ^ww — ww-^ — 
 
 TToLVTa yhp ^Stj TeTeAetTTai.^^ - 
 
 f. tetrapody or dimeter (acataleotic) : 
 Hf\eos yivv^ y^ re Trarpifd.'^ ^ 
 
 ■ Vi/ V_/ - 
 
 1105. Anapaestic Systems (1074 b) are much used in tragedy 
 and comedy. They are composed of several complete dimeters (and 
 
 • ArNnb.299. ' ArNub.305, » ArRan.879. * EHeracl.617. « EHeracl.615 • APers 852 
 ' STr.1007. » EAlc93. » APers.964. '» Elon 178. " EAlc.105. " EAlcilsa' 
 >• APers.933. 
 
346 LO&AOEDIC RHYTHMS. [1106 
 
 sometimes a monometer), with a catalectic dimeter {paroemiae) always 
 added as a close. 
 
 They are subject to the following rules : (a) A Buoeession of four short 
 syllables is avoided: hence a proceleusmatic almost never occurs, or a dactyl 
 followed by an anapaest. — (b) The dimeter has a regular caesura, generally 
 at the end of the second foot, but sometimes in the middle of the third. — 
 (c) The paroemiao admits a dactyl only as the first foot, and almost always 
 has an anapaest for the third. 
 
 The following is a short anapaestic system : 
 
 TciSe fiev Tl€p(Tuy tuv olxofJt€ya)i^ v^^^-^ — -^ — — ^^^^-^ 
 
 'E\A.aS' ^s aJay irlffTa KaXeTTai, — vi-v^ — — — ^^^.^ — — 
 
 KaX riov atfyyewv koI iroXvxpvtTUf — — ^ ^ — — ^ ^ — — 
 
 iSpiviov <)>i\ttKfs Korh. TrpeffPtldv ww -^ ^ ^ — ^ ^ -^ — — 
 
 otts aiirhs &va^ Bep^rjs fiafftKeijs — -^^^— — — ^v_^ — 
 
 /idpeioyevijs — — w w — 
 
 Eif\£TO X'^POJ i(popeieiv.^ — ^^^^ — — ^w-=- — 
 
 IIO61 There are also freer (lyrical) systems, which are not subject to 
 these restrictions. They sometimes consist, for lines together, of spondees 
 only, or dactyls only ; and sometimes they have two or more paroemiacs in 
 succession. They are much less used than the stricter systems, and are 
 mainly confined to the expression of complaint or mourning. 
 
 1107. The ANAPAESTIC TETRAMETER is much used by the line (1065) in 
 comedy. It consists of a dimeter and paroemiao. These two parts are 
 almost always separated by a caesura ; and each of . them is subject, in gen- 
 eral, to the rules given above (1105) for dimeters and paroemiacs in ana- 
 paestic systems. 
 
 'irp6(T(rxGTe rhy vovv Tois aSaudrois ^/iti', to7s allv iovtriy 
 
 ToTs alOeptois, roiffiv ay^pajs, rots &(p6tTa nTjSofxevonriv.^ 
 
 ^ ^i/ v^ ^^^1...* — , — WW 
 
 — -?■ww--v^w-^.--fww-ww-^■ — 
 
 L06A0BDIC Rhythms. 
 
 1108. Logaoedic verses consist of mixed dactyls and trochees. The 
 dactyls may stand before the trochees, or between them ; but trochees 
 never stand between the dactyls. Each trochee may be resolved into 
 a tribrach ; but a dactyl is not contracted to a spondee. The dactyls 
 are eyclic (1009), and the movement is in f time. 
 
 a. Logaoedic verse differs from the compound dactylo-trochaie rhythms 
 described in 1118, in having the dactyls and trochees united in the same 
 group or metrical series. 
 
 1109, A trochee standing as the first foot is ti-eated with great 
 freedom: besides being a tribrach {^-^ w), it may be in-ational (-^ >), 
 
 ' APers.l. " ArAv.688. 
 
Ull] LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. 347 
 
 or may be replaced by an iambus (vi — ) or an apparent anapaest 
 (.^ ^ >), and, m Aeolic poetry, even by a pyrrhic. 
 
 A logaoedic verse may have an anaenms (short or irrational) pre- 
 fixed to its first foot. Also a dovJble anacrusis (two short syllables) 
 may be used. 
 
 1110, (a) If two trochees precede the first dactyl, the second may be 
 irrational, or a tribrach, but admits no other substitution. — (b) An irrational 
 trochee may be used as the second foot, even when the first foot is a dactyl. 
 — (c) Further, in catalectic verses, an irrational trochee may stand before 
 the final thesis. — Thus : 
 
 a. uirep oKapTriiTTiov TreSfatv.* x^ v-/ v-^ — > -=-v^ v^ -^ 
 
 b. X'*^of/'*^'r<w ^iwnwv ktuttoj.* -^^> w — > — v_^ -^ 
 C. TOJ TiAcKTpoi))o6rs av-yas? -^ > -^-^ v^ — > — 
 
 d. Trochaic rhythms used in near connection with logaoedic, may have 
 anacruses, and the same freedom of substitution in the first foot. Thus : 
 Ttfihs vftas eXevOeptas* ^ ^ -^ ^ -^ 
 
 1111. The following are specimens of logaoedic rhythms with one dactyl. 
 The Phereeratean is called first or second, according as the dactyl is its first 
 or second foot : the Glyconic is called first, second, or third, by a similar dis- 
 tinction. 
 
 Dipody. 
 
 a. Adonic (dactyl and trochee) : 
 
 Qvi\v €T* 'iKil.^ -^^-' v^ -^ %-^ 
 
 7'ripodiet. 
 
 b, c. Phereeratean (first, second) ; d, e, catalectic : 
 
 6j XaplTav fiev &(fi ° (b). -^^^ ^ -^ w -^ v.^ 
 
 Se|€Tof t' eVl fiurSQ ' (c). -^ ^ -'■v^ ^ -^ ^ 
 
 \lieiSeiTi iroixlKoit ' (d). -^-^ w -^ ^ -'- 
 
 Koiirip axvilifvos ' (e). -^ ^ -'^ >-' -'- 
 
 f, g. Phereeratean with anacrusis {logaoedic paroemiac) : 
 
 iyd> 5e idva KoSfiia "> (f ). ^ -i^ ^ -^ ^ -^ ^ 
 
 iSSotftV apfiari vlmv " (g). > -'• v^ -^v^ ^ -^ ^ 
 
 b, i. Phereeratean catalectic with anacrusis {logaoedic prosodiac) : 
 
 'Hpo iror" 'OKvfuria " (h). > -!^ ^ -2- ^ -^ 
 
 KvKpiffiwv iSdrav " (i). > -^ ^ -\^ ^ -^ 
 
 Tetrapodies. 
 
 The forms b, c, f, g, are often to be read as doitblg catalectic tetrapodien, 
 instead of trlpodies. Thus : 
 
 j. Ad/jLvtdSay yvvaiKwv '* (= b). -'-^ ^ -^ ^ ^ -^ 
 
 k. xpuo'^s iu86fLfrov itvp " ( = c). -^ ^ -'■^ \^^ -^ 
 
 ' EPhoen.210. ' ArEq.552. ' EHipp.741. • ArNub.518. " Sappho. " Eupolis ii.494. 
 ' Crates ii.24fi. « Pinfl. 01.1.46. • Pind.Isth.7.5. "i Sappho. " Pind.Pyth.6.ir. 
 >a ArAT.1731. " Pind.01.14.1. '• Pind.01.4.38. " Pind.OI.1.2. 
 
348 LOGAOEDW RHYTHMS. [1112 
 
 1, m, n. Glyconic (first, second, third) : 
 
 ttal Kuavefi^oKoL 6oai ^ (1). -^-v-/ ^ — ^ -^ w -^ 
 
 ^pa)s irapdevios ir66(p ^ (ra). •^ K^ v-/ — w -^ 
 
 & fieyas uXfios d t' opera ^ (n). ^^y^ ^ — ^ -^^^ w -^ 
 
 o, p. acataieotic tetrapodies ; p, witii anacrusis : 
 
 Twv iv ©EppoTriKaLs BavSvTitjv'* (o). -^ > -^-v^ ^ — ^ -^ ^ 
 
 vK'fipTjs fjihy etpatyed^ d (re\dvva ^ (p). >■ -^v^ ^> -^ ^^ -^ v_^ -^ ^^ 
 
 q. PhalaecSan (iiendecasyllable) : 
 
 iy fjLvpTOV K\adl rh ^i<pos (f)op7]ffa}.^ -^ )> -^-^-/ ^^ ~ ^ -^ ^-' -^ v^ 
 
 r. Sappliic (hendecasyliable) : 
 
 ToiKi\66pov' dBdyar' 'A<ppoStTd.'' -^ ^ — v> -'-<-' w — w-^ v_/ 
 
 s. Alcaic (hendecasyliable), begins with anacrusis : 
 
 ou xph KoKolffi dO/jthi/ iiriTpeirriv.^ > — ^^ -^ ^^ -^-\^ *^ -^ s^ -^ 
 
 1112, The following have more than one dactyl: 
 
 a. oivov ii/eiKafi^vois fiedvadrjv,^ ^^v ^^ -^-^-f v^ -^ v-- -^ v^ 
 
 b. ixixu T€ cipun KaWitiira. '" ^^ '-^ w -^-w v^ ■'- 
 
 c. "TrapQive ray Ke<paKay ra S* tvepde vipitpa.?^ — ^ ^-^ -^-^-^ v^ -^-^^ ^^ — ^^ -^ ._/ 
 
 d. otvQs & (pi\E Trot Aeyerat Kol aKAdea.^^ — ^ -A^ ^ -^-^^ w -A^ ^ — -^ -^ 
 
 e. ^pos aj/^e/iiiei/Tor Eiraiov ipxo^uefoio.^^ 
 
 The forms d and c belong to the so-called AeoKc dactyls. The form c is 
 called Praxiltean. 
 
 1113. The following have a double anacrusis (logaoedic anapaestic) : 
 
 a, ittCTeiiiroTe S*, 3) K6pai.^^ ^^v^ -A^ v,^ -^ v_^ — 
 
 b. .Kar^KafV^aSy eSet^as ifKpavrj.^^ «-^^ -Av v> — ^ -^ w — 
 u. 'E^eVdj/ e\va'aTO Tpoids."' ^w -'- w -^ v^ -A> ^ -^ 
 
 d. Tiyt Twi/ -Trapos, 5 pAKaipa 0^)3d.''' w^ -^-v^ w — v^ -^ v_> — w 
 
 Trochaic forms with double anacrusis are also regarded as logaoedic 
 anapaestic : 
 
 e. Xaplrav e/cdTt r6vde Kajxov.^^ w^-^v^-^^ — ^-^^ 
 
 1114. Syncopated forms are very numerous. The following are speci- 
 mens : 
 
 a. vavrthlds ia-xdrds.^^ -^-^y ^ ^ — ^ — 
 
 b. ou ^evSei rey^tu \6yov.^^ >• -A^ ^> ^^ -^ v_y -^ 
 u. ^pws dyi/cdre fxdxdv.^^ v^ ^ ^^ l£. _t^^ ^ ^ 
 
 » ArEq.554. » Anacreon. ' EOr.807. * Simonidcs. ' Sappho. « Scolion. 
 ' Sappho. ' Alcaeiis. » Alcaeus. >» Pind.Ol. 10.18. " Praxilla. " Theoc.8!).l. 
 "Alcneua. "EIon4fi8. "> EEl.ijSfi. >» Pind.Isth.8.118. " Pind.Isth.7.1. "Pind.01.4.15. 
 " Pind.N.3.39. ^o Pind.01.4.38. " SAnt.781. 
 
1117] DACTYLO-EPITRITIG RHYTBMS. 349 
 
 e. Saicpv6e(r(Tdi' t' iipt\ri<rev oixA'""" -^^-^ '-' ^ -'■^ ^-^^^ -*■ 
 
 f. ci 86 Kvpei Tij jreAas oiWox'((a<u;'.^ A_/ >^ i^ -'^^ ^ i^ -^v^ ,^ -t 
 
 1115i Some verses consist of more than one sei-ies: thus 
 
 a. Asclepiadean (two Pherecrateana catalectic, second and first) : 
 r)\9es in vepartoy yas eXetjjavTiifdy.* -4- ^^ -^^^ v^ ^ -r-v^ ^^ -^ \j -^ 
 
 b. greater Asclepiadean (dipody catalectic between two Pherecrateans) i 
 Hifikv &KKo <pvTei(rris irp6Tfpov SevSpioy a/jnrfXu.^ 
 
 c. Priapean (= Glyconic and doubly catalectic tetrapody) : 
 evfiei'ijs 5* 6 AvK^tos ttrrot iratr^ yeo?^^.^ 
 
 d. Eupolidean (= Glyconic and trochaic tetrapody catalectic:) 
 S> QGt^fieyoL KaTepu trpbs vfias i\ev64pQ>Sf 
 
 oVto) vlK-fiaat/xi r' eyi) Kal vofii^oifirtv iT0(p6s.'^ 
 ^ ^ _i. ^ -i^ ^ L£. ^__j,^^^j:. 
 
 The Eupolidean is sometimes used by the line : in both halves of the verse 
 tbe first two feet allow the substitutions described in 1109 and 1110. 
 
 1116, Pherecratean verses are sometimes combined in systems (1074 b) 
 but much more frequent are Glyconic systems closing with a Pherecratean. 
 
 a. In antistrophic composition, the first and second Pherecratean some- 
 times correspond to each other in strophe and antistrophe, as equivalent 
 forms. So too the second and third Glyconic. Other interchanges are very 
 infrequent. 
 
 Dacttlo-Epiteitic Rhythms. 
 
 1117. Dactylo-epitritic (or Doric) strophes are composed of the 
 following elements: 
 
 1. -i-ww-^v-^wJ-— dactylic tripody with spondee as the 3d foot. 
 3. ■^■^^-^^^-^ the same, catalectic. 
 
 3. i^ ^ -«- — epitrite = long trochee (1069) and spondee. 
 
 4. '^ w-^ the same, catalectic. 
 
 These are variously combined ; for the most part two or three unite 
 to form a verse. Forms 1 and 3 may have a short final syllable in 
 caesura, even in the middle of a verse. The final syllable of 2 and 4, 
 in the middle of a verse, is prolonged to l^j . An anacrusis may be 
 prefixed to any verse. Sometimes, especially at the end of the strophe, 
 other dactylic or trochaic rhythms are employed. 
 
 ' EMed .643. " Anacreon. • ASapp.57. < AlcaeuB. ' Alcaeus. » ASapp.686. 
 ' ArNub.518,B19. 
 
350 ORETIC RHYTHMS. [1118 
 
 The following verses are specimens ; 
 
 ivai TTOTa/xwv hp&v x^poiiffi Trdyai^ v^-^v^^-^ww-^— ^ ^ -^ — 
 KaX SIko. Koi trdvTa ird\tv (rrpei^eTat.' ^ \^ -^— -^ ^ -^ -^ ^ ^ -^ 
 tf ai6\a viif impi^oiiem.- ^^ ^ Lii j.^^^^^^ 
 
 epXerat ri/xa yvvaiKeiep y4vei.^ ^ ^ — — L^-w -^ — L£.^-^ 
 
 K€K\VTe, TTOiSes inrepQljfjLCifj T€ ^uTwy Kol 6ewy.* 
 
 1118, Dacttlo-Teochaic Rhtthms. — In another class of lyric strophes, 
 we find a mixture of dactylic and trochaic verses, in greater variety than 
 those just described ; these probably moved in -f time, so that the dactyls 
 were cyclic. Sometimes dactylic and trochaic groups are united in one verse. 
 Examples of such compound verses are ; 
 
 a. dactylic tripody (with anacrusis, and syll. anceps), and trochaic tripody : 
 TouTOttri S' omadep trio tpepav Ziippov AvKovpyos.^ 
 
 b. dactylic tetrapody and trochaic tetrapody doubly catalectic : 
 ToTos yap (pi\6Tr]Tos epus inrh KapSldv i\utr6eis.^ 
 
 Ceetic Rhtthms. 
 
 1119, Appa/remt cretics often occur, as the result of syncope (1076), 
 in trochaic, iambic, and logaoedio rhytlims. Examples may be seen 
 in 1086, 1097, 1114. 
 
 Much rarer are the real cretic rhythms, in which the cretic (or, by 
 resolution, the first or fourth paeon) stands as the fundamental foot. 
 In these, the movement is in f time (see 1068 b). 
 
 The ictus falls on the first long syllable of the cretic ; at the same tims 
 there is a certain stress, though weaker, on the second long. 
 
 The following will serve as specimens : 
 a, b, u. dimeter ; c, with anacrusis : 
 
 ^do^ai 7* ri^ofiat ^ (a). -^ w — — ^ — 
 
 juijSe \eyi fwi av \6yov^ (b). — ^^ ^^ — ^ wv-, 
 
 S Zeu, ri TTore xPV<^^fJ^^^a^ (c). ^^v^w -^wwv-^ 
 
 d. dimeter catalectic: 
 
 k?t' iKayoeiipet}" -^ ^ ^^ -^ ^ 
 
 e. trimeter : 
 
 &s ip.i \a$ovffa rhv 5i?;urfT7;i'.^* -^ v.^ ^^^f -^ ^ ^ w — 
 
 f . tetrameter : 
 
 4XX' i/ptet rhv &vSp', €i Se ni, cji-fi/i' iyd.^^ i^_-£-^_^^_^^_ 
 
 ' EMed.410. " STr.94. » EMed.418. * Pind.P.4.22. ' Oratinns. ' Archilochus. 
 ' ArPax 1127. » ArAch.297. ' ArLy6.476. '» ArLya.789. " ArAch.675. " ArVesp.42a 
 
U22] IONIC RHYTHMS. 351 
 
 g. pentameter : 
 
 <roS 7' oKouirai/iEK ; airoAei ■ Kara ffe X'^""!''^' ^ois \fflois.' 
 
 Chokiambic Rhythms. 
 
 1120, Apparent choriambi are very frequent in logaoedic verse as the 
 result of syncope (1076). These have the rhythmical value -^v^ ^ ^. For 
 examples, see 1114. 
 
 Verses with the real choriambus {-'-^^—) as the fundamental foot, 
 would move in J time. But such, if they were ever used at all by the Greeks, 
 were exceedingly rare. The following is perhaps an instance : 
 
 Setra fjuv ouVy Seiva rapaffirei ffoiphs olavoQiras,^ 
 
 Ionic Rhythms. 
 
 1121. The fundamental foot is the ionic a minore (^^-^ —), with 
 the ictus on the first long syllable. 
 
 a. Anaclasis. — Two trochees (—^ — ^) may be substituted for the. 
 two longs of one foot with tlie two shorts of the next (— — ^ ^). This 
 change is very frequent : its effect is to produce a breaking up {ana- 
 clasis) of the ionic rhythm, which passes into the trochaic. 
 
 1122. Specimens of ionic rhythms : 
 a, b. dimeter ; b, with anaclasis : 
 
 T^erai 5' alo\6fir]Tis ^ (a). v-/v^-^ — ww-^ — 
 
 iroAiol /HEV riftiv ^Sri * (b). ww-^v.. — _.— — 
 
 c. dimeter catalectic : 
 
 StKcAbs Kofj.'fihs aviip.^ ^ -^ -^ — ■^•^ -^ 
 
 d, e. trimeter (acatalectic) ; e, with anaclasis : 
 
 ireirepOKev /xei/ b TreptrelTToKts ijSri ® (d). w^ — — ^^v^-^ — ww.^ — 
 
 \v(ris €/c irSvuv yevoiT'f oitSafjiA TwvSe '(e). ^v^-^v^ — w-' — ^^ '^ — — 
 f. trimeter catalectic : 
 
 Kardpas OiSiirrfSd PAa'f/i<t>poi'os.' ^ -^ -^ — ^^-^ — v>^-^ 
 
 g, h. tetrameter (acatalectic) ; h, with anaclasis : 
 
 4ixc SefActi', ifj."^ ■trdcruf KaKOTarat/ TreBexotffav * (g). 
 
 ■jraTepay re Kal TeK6vTtoe y6os ^vdiKos fiareiiet '" (h). 
 
 > ArAch.295. ' SOt.484. ' ASupp.1037. ' Anacreon. " Timocreon. • APers.GS. 
 ' Anacreon. « ASept.726. • Alcaeus. '» ACho.330. 
 
352 DOCHMIAO RHYTHMS. [1123 
 
 i, j. tetrameter catal. ( Galliamhic) ; j, with anaclasis : 
 Oavdrtjj \v(n^e\€i 6-r]p(rlv opsloKTi 0opaf ^ (i). 
 
 (piffis ovK eSioKi iJi6a'X'!> \d\ov ''AiriBi OTifM '' (j). 
 
 1123i a. Sometimes the last long of the ionic i3 omitted by syncope 
 (1076) ; the first long is then prolonged to supply its place : 
 
 b. Very seldom indeed, one of the long syllables is resolved into two 
 shorts, or the two short syllables contracted into a long : 
 
 Xpvffioiv trrtpvya <pfp€is} ww — ^^ w^ — 
 Aiovuffov <rav\at Pa/raaplSes.'' v-^v-^-^ — ^ — i-^%^-^ 
 
 c. In the form with anaclasis, the first of the two trochees is sometimes 
 irrational (-'■>): 
 
 Treptvaloi'Tat TraXaiSy.^ ^ ^ -^ > — ^ — — 
 
 1124. The SoTADEAN TERSE of the Alexandrian period has the ionic a 
 majore as its fundamental foot. It is a catalectic tetrameter. Each of the 
 three complete ionics may be replaced by two trochees, either of which may 
 be irrational. Resolutions and contractions are frequent ; so that the verse 
 has a great variety of forms. Two examples will suffice : 
 tS}v xp^ffoip6ptav ovZh yvvaiKiJov ^aSvKiKirtav.'^ 
 
 €6(re/3^s t/s iartv, Trevlav Se'Suttec air^.^ 
 
 DocHMiAc AND Bacchic Rhythms. 
 
 1125. The doehmms is a dipody, consisting of a lacchius with a 
 following iambus {^-^ — ^-^). The ictus is on the first long of the 
 bacchius, and the long of the iambus. 
 
 a. Dochmii have, therefore, a broken rhythm, in which f time (1068 b) 
 alternates with f . They are used only in lyric passages which express great 
 mental agitation. 
 
 1126. Either of the two shorts may be replaced by an irrational 
 syllable ; and each of the three longs may be resolved into two shorts. 
 These liberties give rise to a great variety of forms, most of which 
 are given below. The forms a, c, d are the most frequent. 
 
 a. 0} vp6ffTro\oi.^ ^> -i — v^ -^ 
 
 b. 4v -ya Tate (/>ei).^'* >• — — v_y -^ 
 
 c. (TTpoTiJireSoc \iirdJi'." \^^^ — w -^ 
 
 d. hov\off^va.S VTTfp}^ > \i'^^ — \^ -^ 
 
 >ESupp.46. ^Diog.La.viiiend. ' APer8.72. « EBacch..372. ' Anacreon. 'ASupp.1021. 
 ' Lycophronides. ' Sotades. • SAnt.1321. " AEum.781. " ASept.V9. " ASept.118. 
 
1127] DOCEMIAC AND BACCHIC RHYTHMS. 353 
 
 e. 6,Tnov en as XP^-^ ^ ^^~' w^ ^ -e- 
 
 f. fietiroKhs oSe Ksiis.* > v^^ ^w ^ -:- 
 
 g. av4ipe\oy ^ePoKes.' ^ -z, j ^^ ^ -i,^ 
 h. offiroT6 kaToXviTLfwv,* >. v^www^v^w 
 
 i. diroyeT' ^KT(fjrioi'.* ^ v^v_^ ._ ^ ^^ 
 
 j. riy KOTapdT(fTaT0v.® > ^i,^ — ^^ ^^^ 
 
 k, ri fi* oi/K ayTaldv."^ w — — > -^ 
 
 1. exBeis 'ArpelSas.^ > -^ — > -;- 
 
 m, /xefToAajSe? KivTptp,^ w v^ ^ — > -£- 
 
 li. v\a^6fJievov Keiffffw».^^ > v^ w — >. -^ 
 
 o. ffv T*, S A(07ei'es.^* ,^ -i- ^^ ^ — 
 
 p. iW m94po5 fivo)." > -^ ^^ ^ -^ 
 
 q. fiavfla^ TpairlSi.\' ^ ^ ^i ^ 
 
 Bemare. — Forms like o, p, q, in which the second or third long is resolved 
 when the first is not, are very uncommon. 
 
 Dochmii are oftenest combined in groups of two (dimeters). Usually two 
 or more groups unite to form a system (1074 b). 
 
 1127. Other baochio rhythms are little used in Greek poetry, and only 
 in coimection with docbmii. Thus we find a bacchic 
 
 a. dimeter : 
 
 XopevBevr' &vav\ois.^* v-/ -^ — ^ -^ — 
 
 b. trimeter catalectic (= bacchius and dochmius) : 
 
 li 7a re Kot irafKpaffs.^^ w — — ^ - — w-^ 
 
 Xkpto T€pf>.6i'tov iirl ndyov.'^ ^ ^^ — ^ ^■^ ^^^ J- 
 
 c. tetrameter : 
 
 tIs dx^, rts oSfjia irpotreirrd /*' 0^677^5." w-^ — w-^ — ^^ ~ — w-^- — 
 
 ' AAg.1428. 'ASept.80. ' SE1.1246. < SE1.1246. » SOt.1340. • SOt.1344. ' S Ant. 1307. 
 " SPhil.510. • AEiim.157. ■" SAj.886. " ASept,137. '» SPhil.:098. " EBacch.»»ft 
 »EHf.879. "EMed.1851. •• APr.117. " APr.US. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 USED IN CITING THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 A.. =: Aeschylus. 
 
 Ag(amemnon), Cho(ep7iori), 
 
 Eum(cmrf&f), Pers(ac), 
 
 Fr{omelheus}, Sept(t™), 
 
 Sapp(Kcei!). 
 Ae. = Aeschines. 
 Andoc. = Andocides. 
 Ant. = Antiphon. 
 Antiph. = Antiphanes. 
 Ar. = Aristophanes. 
 
 Ac\\[ar7iffnses\ Av(es), 
 
 ^cc\{esiazu.iae), Eq(uito), 
 
 ljys(istrata), Nub(fs), Plut(T«s), 
 
 Ean(ae), 'i\ie:STn{ophoriazusae), 
 
 Ve9p(ac). 
 Arist. = Aristoth. 
 
 Pol(«fa'oa), Rhet(on'ca). 
 Care. == Gareinus. 
 Chaer. = Ohaeremo. 
 
 D. = Demosthenes. 
 
 E. = Euripides. 
 Alc(«s&), An(i(romacKe), 
 Bacch(a«), Gyc\(ops), 'E\(eclra), 
 Hec(«^a), Hel(e«a), Heraol(i(Z«e), 
 Hf. = Hercules furens, 
 B.ipp{oli/tus), la. = Iphigenia 
 Ardidensis, Med(«o), Or{estes), 
 Phoen(«ssae), Supp(Kc«s), Tro(a&s). 
 
 Hd. = Herodotus. 
 Hm. = Homer. 
 I. = Isocrates. 
 Isae. = Isaeus. 
 Luc. = Ludan. 
 
 TIerm{olimus), Marin(o)-M»i dialogi). 
 Lycurg. = Lycurgus. 
 
 Lys. = Lysias. 
 
 M. = Menander. 
 }\{ou{osiichi). 
 
 Philem. = Philemon. 
 
 Find. = Pindar. 
 
 P. = Plato. 
 
 A\a(ibiades), Ap{oloffi/), 
 Ghiirm(ides), Gr{ito), Crat(^?«s), 
 Criti((i«), Euthyd(»mM), 
 Euthyphr(o), Go()yias), 
 ilippdas) maj(o)'), Lach(es), 
 Lg. ^ Leges, Lys(«s), Men(o), 
 Menex(i»itis), Va,v{menide.i\ . 
 Phaed(o), Phaedr(t<s), Vhi\{ebus), 
 Pol(ife'6'Ms)) Prot(ai70)'(M), 
 Rp. ^ l^epublic. Soph(/s/es), 
 Sym(jOOMMm), Theaet(eitM), 
 Theag(es), T\m(aeus). 
 
 P\ut. = Plutarch. 
 Them(istocles), Sol(o«). 
 
 B. = Sophocles. 
 Ai{ax), Ant{igone), 'E\{eclra), 
 Oc. = Oedipus OoloneuSj 
 Ot = Oedipus T)irannus, 
 Phil(o<;te<es), Tr{achiniae). 
 
 Stob. = Stolaeus. 
 F\or(ilegium). 
 
 T. = Thucydides. 
 
 X. = Xenophon. 
 
 Ainabasis), Ages(ilaus\ 
 G(ijropaedia), Eq. = (Z« re eguestri, 
 I\{ellenica), liier(o), Hipp( arfAicMs), 
 ii(emorabilia), 0{economicus), 
 Ra. ^ Tlespubhca Ailieniensis, 
 Rl. = Respublica Lacedaemonia, 
 Sym{posiimi). 
 
 The books of the Iliad are designated by Greek capitals (A, B, r, etc.) ; 
 those of the Odyssey by Greek small letters (o, /3, y, etc. ). Tragic fragments 
 {I^r. or J^'rag.) are cited by Nauck's numbers, Comic fragments (except 
 Menander's monostichi) by Meineke's volumes and pages. Otherwise, the 
 dramatists are cited by Dindorf's lines. The Orators are cited by numbers 
 of the speeches and sections. 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VEKBS. 
 
 This list contains all the verbs described in the classified verb-list (502 ft.), 
 besides a few mentioned in other sections, on account of some peculiarity of 
 inflection or tense-formation. For other verbal forms, see the general Greek 
 index. 
 
 The Attic 'principal parts' of the verbs contained in the body of the 
 classified verb-list, are given here in full. 
 
 'Aa-tti harm{&a(ra, Siro, adcrOrit') 604 D, 9. 
 &ya-fiai (idinire [ijyiiffdriy, TiyaadiATiv) 
 
 53o, 4. 
 aydrOfiai, ayaiofuti, 535 D, 4. 
 iyeipo) collect {^yeipa) 518, 1 ; 
 i)yepe0oi/Taiy StypSfieuos, D. 
 aylVGO) = aya, 508 D, 6. 
 iy-vv/ii break (&i<», eojo, edyo, 4ayriy) 
 
 528, 1. 
 &y-ai lead (Sfw, ^7070^, ^x"> ^7l""t 
 
 ijxev) 508, 6. 
 aS^freie, aSrjK^s, 363 D. 
 aeipia raise (^eipa, ^epe'flocToi, Hapro) 
 
 518 D, 2. 
 d€|-C0 = aff|w, aii^dyu, 522 D, 3. 
 Seo-a s/«pi ; see iaiJio, 506 D, 7. 
 Sj)/ii ifow 538 D, 1. 
 
 alSe-ofjuu am ashamed {mSfaofiai, 0e- 
 
 aiim, -/jUaeiiv) 503,( 7 ; crfS-ofiai ib. 
 
 aive-w praise {ajiv4ffai, ^veffa, ^veKO, 
 
 ^vn/iot, fjv€0rii') 504, 4. 
 aiWfo/uai, dvrifu, 504 D, 4. 
 at-n/iai, aji{o)aivufuu take, 526 D, 5. 
 aip4-a seize (mpi\aa>, eT\ov, fiprtKa, -fiat, 
 
 ^peBitv) 539, 1 ; ipaipriKa D. 
 atpai lift {apa, ^po, ?ipm, ^pfiat, fipBriv) 
 
 518, 2. 
 aiVS-cii'owai perceive (oiVfl^o'o^ai, pVflrf- 
 ;«)i/, fja^rumi) 522, 1 ; aM-o/uu, ib. 
 af-« AcaJ" (aioK, ^7r-^i(ro) 356 a. 
 iiKax'C<» pai» (fii"'X'"'i ^K^xtira) 628 D, 
 
 17. 
 iuti-oixai heal {iiKeffdnrip) 503, 8. 
 
 aKov-oi Aear (oKoi^iro/iai, iJKovtra, ok^koo, 
 
 ^Koia6r)v) 607, 1. 
 £\a\Kov, aAlcofleji', 510 D, 1. 
 oAii-o/iai iomuZe}' {i,\i\iii),at) 368 D, 
 
 389 D b, 497 a. 
 iXS-aivw, -^(TKar, nourish, 518 D, 22. 
 o\e/<^-(u anoint (a\efi//[d, ^A€it|/a, o\^A.i- 
 
 (^a, -tfifiai, ii\eiipdr]v) 511, 5. 
 d\e|-ai ward off {oKd^ofiou, Tt\€^d/AT]v) 
 
 510, 1 ; AkaAKov D. 
 dA€-o/iai or a\e6-o^iat avoid (^K^d^iiV, 
 
 ilKeiafniv) 512 D, 7; a\e€iya> ib. 
 i,\4-a grind {^\f(ra, aK^\e((r)ii.ai) 503, 9. 
 i\-^po/, 4d\nv; see elXw, 518 D, 23. 
 &\8-oiiai am healed (-i](roiJuu) 510 D, 20. 
 aK-lo'KOfiai am taken {i\iia'oiiai, eaKaiv 
 
 or ?i\av, ed\a)Ka or fjAuKa) 633, 1. 
 iKiT-ahu sin {-■lifKvos, ^\iToy) 622 D, 
 
 11. 
 4\A.({(r<i-a change (awd^a, ^\\a|a, 
 
 JjAAoxi, -7M<«', »/AA(i77)v or -x^i/i') 
 
 514, 1. 
 iK-Kojiat leap (aXoS/uai, ^A.(^/iti)i') 518, 3 ; 
 
 0A.TO 489 D, 36. 
 aKvKrd^ta am. troubled (Bt\a\6KT7ifMi) 
 
 368 D. 
 oKia'Kw avoid (o\i!fu), ^Aujo) 533, 7 ; 
 
 a\<p-dva> procure {?iK<j)ov) 522 D, 10. 
 a/iapT-dvu err (aiiapritaoimt, li/uoproy, 
 
 riiidprriKa, -fijiai, rifiapriidrii') 522, 
 
 2 ; fj/iPpoTOf D. 
 kn^K-lffKie miscarry {fjiip\a(ra, %;3\(»- 
 
 Ka, -juai) 638, S. 
 
356 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 S/iemi 489 D, 19. 
 
 afttK\d-o^cu contend {7}fitW'f]6if]v) 497 a. 
 Si^ir-itrxf^ofiai, atiir-exofiai have on 
 (d/u^€|o^i, T]^TTiffx^i^'nv) 524, 4. 
 
 afitr-icrxt^i afnr-ex^ P^ <^^ (^M*^^|Wi 
 ^fiTTiffxay) 524, 4. 
 
 a/jLir\aK-l(rKa miss {^fiir\aKov) 533 D, 12. 
 iftvv-a, afivviBo! defend 494. 
 ai^-dA-^fTKoi, ay'd\6-w spend (dmAdJO'cu, 
 
 di/^Aoxra, -/ca, -fJiat, -6i}v) 533, 2. 
 avSivta please 623, 1 ; aSijaai, erivSavov, 
 
 ocSov, €i/aSoj/, €dSa, B. 
 a.v-4x-of.tai endure (ijvetx^lJ-Ttv) 361 a. 
 a^i/oflE 368 D. 
 av-oiy-oj open (di/o£^ai, avstp^a, aveciyya, 
 
 di/£^X°) oj/etijyfjLalj ai/ecoxBrip) 608, 
 
 20 i av-oiy-vvfit ib. 
 &y-opd6-Qj erect {T)yii>p6a>a'a, -uixai) 361 a. 
 dj'v-eu, d^Jrw accomplish (di'i5o*&), ijpvffa, 
 
 ijvuKaj ijvvfffiat) 503, 17 ; fivw D. 
 Avwy-a command {&p(tix6t ; Tipdtyea, 
 
 ^v(t3yov\ avdi^io^ ^voj^a) 492 D, 11 
 ctTTtup-iaKio deceive (^7ro(/>o;', iitrdcfyria'a) 
 
 633 D, 13. 
 dirofOEOjuai despair (d?r€ra<j87)i') 497 a. 
 airS-xpii suffices 486 ; d7ro;tP^ !*• 
 OTTTO) touch (ai|/&>, ^^/a, 7ifxfi,ai^ ^(pSfjp) 
 
 613, 1. 
 dpd-ofiai pray (ap-fifxeuat) 535 D, 9. 
 Btp-ap-lffKta Jit i^pffa, ^papov, &pT]pa, 
 
 &pfiei'Os) 533 D, 14 ; apdpa ib. 
 hp4-ffKbi please (dpetrw, ijp^ira, T}p4ff6Tjv) 
 
 630, 10. 
 dp^^eyos 363 D, 
 
 &pKe-a suffice (apK^ffa, ^p/cetro) 503, 10. 
 apfiS^a ^ apfiSxTW, 516, 1. 
 apfiSTTQj fit (apfUffia^ ^piwffa, ^pfwafiaLj 
 
 rip^6tr0Tjy) 516, 1. 
 &py€-o/iai deny (^pyiiB-qy) 497 a. 
 &p-yvfiat win {apovfjiaij T]p6/j.Tjy) 528, 2. 
 dp(i-iu plough (^poiro, i)p6Bitv) 503, 16. 
 apTrd^Qj snatch ( apirdffaj, Sipiratra, ^pTra/ca, 
 
 -ff/iat, TjpTrda'dTiv) 517, 1. 
 dpiJ-a> or apvTu draw {^puffaj iip{)Q-(]v) 
 
 503, 18. 
 iipX-" '■'''« (Splm, ^pfo, ^p7/Joi, fipx^v) 
 
 508, 7. 
 
 atra, see d(£co ; affofnvy see latJw. 
 dtr/xevos (d5-, di'Sdi^co) 489 D, 46. 
 aul-dj'w, af'l-ci) increase (ou|^(ra), 77t'|7jo*o, 
 
 Tji^^T^Ka, -/iOi, ijv^'fi6riy) 522, 3. 
 dir-aupd-Q> deprive (&7roi5pds) 489 D, 20. 
 iv-avp4o'KOfjxu enjoy [i-jravp-fiffofiat, iir- 
 
 i;Opoj', -(Jjutji') 533, 4. 
 hi^daaai feel (^<^a.aa) 516 D, 8. 
 hi^iaa^ dip up (iupi^ai, ij<l>v<ra) 517 D, 
 
 10. 
 &X^-Of^Mi am vexed (d;t6€(ro/xa(, rjx^^o'- 
 
 BTiy) 510, 2. 
 
 ^X'l'i'/^'xt ^'^ pained {TjKax^M-V^t aKaxV' 
 
 dxEi5t»>', 628 D, 17. 
 dupro {deipu) 518 D, 2. 
 
 Bafvw jro (piiirofiai, e/Stji', fle'/STjKa) 519, 7; 
 
 efiriira, /Sf'^a/zai, i^dBiiy ib. 
 Pd\-\m th-ow (Pa\a, e^aKov, pipXrjKO, 
 
 -fiM, i^\i]6Tiy) 618, 4; Pi^oXiaTO, 
 
 ipXTjTO, )3A€To, D. 
 
 pdiTTQ) dip (PaTpaij e^ay^a, Pe0afj.^at, 
 
 ifii<l>vy) 613, 2. 
 ;8ci-<rKM = M"", 519 D, 7 ; 530 D, 11. 
 $a(rTd((i> carry {^aOTdaa, i^affraa'a) 
 
 517, 2. 
 $elofiai, iSeV"' (/3i<ia>) 507 D, 2. 
 fitPdCai make go (fii^dtrm, fii^Si) 424. 
 ;3ii3aj, /3i6«v, 519 D, 7 ; 534 D, 10. 
 fii^pc^a'Kaj eat (^e/3pwKa, -/xai, iPp(j^6r]v) 
 
 531, 3 ; PippiiBw, ifipoiv, D. 
 /Sid-tD Wtif [fiiAffoiiai, 40ltDv, -aura, $e0la- 
 
 Ka, Pefilatuu) 507, 2. 
 ttvorpiiia'KOHtti revive {6.ye$lmy) 531, 1. 
 $\dwTai hurt (p\dtf/a), E/SAnifo, 0ePKafa, 
 
 -/ificu, i$\d<p6r\y, l^Kd^-nv) 513, 3 ; 
 
 P\dPeTai D. 
 /SAatrT-di/iB sprout (^SAoirT^irtu, ejSXair- 
 
 Tov, {P)4p\atrTvica) 522, 4. 
 e\e'ir-m /ooi (/3\€><», ePXeij/a) 508, 8. 
 P\iTTiii take honey (l^hura) 616, 2. 
 PXdffKago (iioKovfiai, inoKov, /iffiPKaKa) 
 
 631, 2. 
 PiXeffBai {^oiXofiai) 510 D, 4. 
 Piaxa feed (^oaxiiaai) 510, 3. 
 ^i\-ofiai icish {^ouK'ficro/j.aij jBf/Sot^Af} 
 
 ;iai, i&ov\i\Briv) 510, 4. 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 357 
 
 $pd<r(ra boil 616, 3. 
 
 ^-;8/)0X€, -Ppi^it, -jSpoxefs, 508 D, 9. 
 
 917V) 008, 9. 
 Qpt$-w rt»i 7ieavi/ ($pi<ra, i^pTaa, p4ppT- 
 
 Ba) 508, 10. 
 $pvX du/iu roar (Pe$pDxa) 509 D, IS. 
 Bv-via stop up (jSuo'cii, ffivaa, p4$u<Tnat) 
 
 524, 1. 
 
 ra/iria wed (yafiH, lyrifia, yeydfaiKo, 
 
 -■niitti) 509, 1. 
 yd-yufiai 7'ejoice, yaiay, 525 D, 5, 
 ye-yav-a, yeytov-itrKta^ -eoj, s/iowi 508 D, 
 
 30. 
 yetvo/iai am bom (iyeivd/i-rivtT.) 506 D, 1 . 
 ye\d-u laugh (7eAc£(ro/u», ^76Aa(ro, 
 
 iyeXdaBirtv) 508, 1. 
 ytWo 489 D, 37 ; ?-7ep-to 506 D, 1. 
 Tijfle'-a rejoice (yr)fl^<rco, ^-/^flrjera, yiyn- 
 
 fla) 509, 2. 
 ynpa-CKto grow old {yripaira, iy^patra, 
 
 yey^pdKa) 530, 1 ; yripd-a ib. 
 yiyvofLai become (yeu^ffo/jutj iyev6fi7iUj 
 
 yeyoya, yeyfi'Tifuti) 506, 1. 
 yiyy&ffKta know {yyiiffo/xal, eyvon', ey^/ctf- 
 
 Ka, -tr^ai, iyvaaBi\v) 531, 4. 
 yydiiv-TW bend 513 D, 19. 
 •yoii-a) M'ffli/ (lyooi/) 509 D, 19. 
 ypd(p-a write {ypd^io, eypa)lia, ysypa/pa, 
 
 ■filJiiu, iypd(priv) 508, 11. 
 
 Ao-, Si^aj, SeSaov, SeSdiiKa, iSiriy, 533 
 
 D, 8. 
 Sal-miJU feast (ISaiira) 526 D, 6. 
 Saio/iat divide (^Sourafw)!', SfSiurTcu), 
 
 520 D, 4. 
 So((iJ bum (SeSria, Sdrirai) 520 D, 3. 
 idx-va bite (S^fo^ni, ISaKov, SeSTjy/iwi, 
 
 isiixevy) 521, 6. 
 
 Sdfi-yrjfJLty -vdu subdue (iSafiTj^, ida/ndj"- 
 Briv, eSiiiieriv), Sa/ittfo), 629 D, 1. 
 
 SapS-dva sleep (iSapBov, SeSdpBTiKa) 522, 
 6 ; ISpaBoy D. 
 
 SaTeofuu divide (Sardmreca) 520 D, 4. 
 
 5e'-aTo seemed 430 D. 
 
 SeSoma, Sf'Sm /caj- (^Seio-i) 490 5 ; Set 
 (Toua', ^SSeio'a, D. 
 24 
 
 Sei oportet (ici\afi, iSinae) 610, 6 a, 
 Sef-Sj-o, Se/Swyea?-, 490 D, 5. 
 SelK-yO/it sliow (Sil^a, ^Sci|a, Se'Seixo, 
 
 -yjuai, iSslxBTjy) 528, 3 ; Se^cu, Sei- 
 
 Scy/tai, SciKai/c^Ojuai, BeiMffKOfiai^ D. 
 8eV-iu JmW (eSei/io, SeSfiniiai) 529 D, 1. 
 depK-o/xou look {^dpoKoy, SedopKa) 508 B, 
 
 31. 
 Sep-tOj Seipto Jlat/ {Sepwy ^Seipo, SeSopjUcu, 
 
 ^SiipT).') 508, 12. 
 Beii-ojuoi iacA (^Se^ijire, S^ffe) 510 D, 5. 
 SeX'Ofiat receive (56|ojuat, ^Sclcijui}!/, 
 
 SeSeyfxaij 4S4xBr]v) 499 ; ^BeyfitiVy 
 
 Se'/CTO 489 D, 38 ; Se'xaTcu 363 D. 
 5c-a) bind (S^treo, eST^tro, ScSe/ca, ScSejuai, 
 
 ^Seev") 504, 1. 
 56-« /ac/: (Sei^crw, ^ScTitra, SeScTjKo, -^i, 
 
 ^Se^flrji/) 510, 5. 
 Sripid-o/jLai quarrel (iSiipMrip) 609 D, 20. 
 SioiTtt-ai fine {Si^rnira) 362 b. 
 5ia-Ac7-0yiiai converse (Sie\4x8riv) 497 a. 
 Siavoiopm meditate [SievoiiSriv) 497 a. 
 SiSdo-KU 2eac/i (SiSalm, ^SfSa|a, SeSISaxo, 
 
 -7^ot, ^StSt^x^'?*') "533, 8. 
 SiSti/it bind = Si-m, 534, 2. 
 St-Spd-iTKio escape (Spoiro/uu, ISpdv, S4- 
 
 Spaxa) 530, 2. 
 SiSufU give {S^ffot^ ^SatKct, SeSwKa, SeSo- 
 
 |ioi, ^5(<97)i/) 534, 4. 
 Sre, S(ov 490 D, 5. 
 
 Sl-ivToi, iv-SUffav, Sla/iai, 538 D, 2. 
 Si'fr/iuai «««* (Sif^o-o/noi) 538 D, 3. 
 St<\id-a thirst (Siif'$, Siifi^o-u) 412. 
 Sii^K-tt? pursue, SioiKaBa, 494. 
 Soxi-a seem (8($|cii, ISoJa, SeSoy/xai, 
 
 ^SiixS'!!') 509, 3. 
 S6a-Koy (SlSafu) 634 D, 4. 
 Sou7r€-ii> sound {iySoiirriffa) 509 D, 9. 
 Bpa^ovfiai, e-Spafiov etc. ; see rp^x^i 
 
 639, 6. 
 5pci-a> do {Spdffa, eSpoura, d€SpdKa, S4- 
 
 Spdfuu, iSpiirBnv) 505, 1. 
 Siva-fiai can (Svvfja'ofiai, 5cSiJi/7]juai, 
 
 iSvi^Briv) 536, 6 ; 487. 
 Siivoi = Sua, 507 D, 3. 
 SiJ-ai enter (Sitrio, ^SOira, ^Suk, SeSi/KO, 
 -Oko, Shv/uu, iSiBriv) 507, 8. 
 
358 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 '^i-a permit {eiav, eiaxa) 359. 
 
 iyelpo) roiise {iyepu^ iiyeipa, TjypSfijjVj 
 
 iypijyopOj iyiiyepfiai, ijyepdT}i') 
 
 618, 6 ; ^ypa, -ojuai, ib. 
 ^S-o/iot, iSiiSoica, see iadla, 639, 3. 
 ii-a eat, tS-iievtu 538 D, 9. 
 ?fo;t4ai sit 617, 7 ; see KaBe^oiuu. 
 id^\~w wish {iffeX'ltcrti}, 7jfl6\T/cro, tjO^Kt]' 
 
 Ka) 510, 10. 
 iSiCa accustom (^Sura, eiSiKa) 359. 
 eTSov saw; see dpia, 539, 4. 
 elS-tis, elS-evai (oTSo) 491. 
 Ef/c-Qi, e'mdSa yield, 494. 
 c2K-(is, e'lK-epM (eoiKo) 492, 7 ; e?Ke, 
 
 iticrriv etc. D. 
 €3f\6) ^ress {e\aa, eeXjuat, ^({Xtji/, ^(f\et), 
 
 cfAEW, elKeo), etAActf, JfWo), 518 D, 
 
 23. 
 ftfiat, ei'aTO (evt/Ojui) 526 D, 1. 
 elfti am {^<rofiai) 537, 1 ; 478 ; ■?a, ?o, 
 
 €0;', ^Tji', ^iji', eow, ^(rffo etc. 
 
 478 D. 
 e?/« (70 (^o, ^6iy) 536, 1 ; 477 ; ijU, p, 
 
 tffav, {4)ei<rifiiiv, 477 D. 
 eXvvov {^vvvfjLi) 526 D, 1. 
 cTtt-oi' said (ipm, etpT\Ka, -/uai, i^^iiSt)v) 
 
 539, 8 ; sXpa, 4v{ii)-eirai, ivtaitov, 
 
 ivi\fia, D. 
 c'lpr/-vi>ixi, flpya shut in (e!fij(», fTp^a, 
 
 flpyfiai, elpxiriv) 528, 4 ; iipya ib. ; 
 
 iepyci), 4epxaT0, etpyaBou, D. 
 ^p-ofiai = epofiai, 508 D, 14, 
 eipi-arat, eipuTO, cipvffdat, elp^Krtrofiai, 
 
 etc. 538 D, 6. 
 fXpa say 539 _D, 8. 
 rfpw join {^€pfj.4ms) 369 D. 
 cfira (eVirai, eVdj) 517 D, 7. 
 ^(TKtt), IcTKO) liken 533 D, 15. 
 elaBa am wont 369 ; ^fo0a D. 
 i\a6v(a dnve, i\u, ^Aatra, ^A^Aa/ca, 
 
 -^oi, ii\der]t') 521, 1 ; ^Aciw ib. 
 i\€yX-ai convict {i\-{i\eyfiai) 368. 
 eX-erc, cfA.oi', see alpea, 539, 1. 
 4\ei<roij,ai, 4\'fi\v6a ; see tpxoficu, 639, 2. 
 i\-il\aTo, €\7)\e'5aT0, 521 D, 1 ; 464 D a. 
 i\$-fiv, iJAfloK, see ipxojMt, 539, 2. 
 lAffftro) winti (e"\i(r(roi') 359. 
 
 e\K-ci) rfra^ (c^^w, fl\KVffa, cTXkuko, 
 
 cl\KvirfjLcu, eiXKiffdrjv) 503, 19 ; 
 
 eA.K£w D. 
 iKn-a) hope (^oXtto) 508 D, 32. 
 ipLe-ic vomit (^juecra) 503, 11. 
 ii/aipu slay {jfivapov, ivi\paTo) 518 D, 
 
 24. 
 4vta'Tt6ofiat oppose (JivavTititOtiv) 497 a. 
 iveyK-eiv, IjveyKO, -ov, 4v4\voxa, ivi\vey- 
 
 fiai ; Bee <pipu>, 539, 6 ; j/fciKo, 
 
 -ov, D. 
 ^i/6^w, ivveiroj, 4v(inre{s), iylyl/u, evt- 
 
 ffv4)<ra ; 539 D, 8. 
 iir-eviivoee 368 D. 
 
 ivSv/ie-o/jiU consider {iveBvuiiBriv) 497 a. 
 ivlir-TU chide {iiviTranov, iveiriirof) 513 
 
 D, 20. 
 iviaaa (= iviTrra) 615 D, 3. 
 ivvoeofiai consider (iv€voii6rii') 497 a. 
 €i/yvfit, afi(pi-efvvfjLi clothe [a/jupta, -iffo- 
 
 fiat, Tjfi/pleiTa, iifi.fjiUo'fiai) 626, 1 ; 
 
 e'lvuov, eWa, elfjiai, eVrai, eWo, B. 
 ^yoxXe'-w annoy {iiviix>^ri<^a, -Ka) 361 a. 
 ^oiKO am KA-e (emicTj, fiictir ; el'fto) 492, 7. 
 topya, ^Qtpyea 514 D, 14. 
 eopTd(a keep festival (Itiprafov) 359 d. 
 imfieKouai care (itreiieKiiBriv) 497 a. 
 iiriaTa-imi understand (iiriffTiiffoiiai, 
 
 ilTiicTT-fiBriv) 536, 6 ; 487. 
 ^TT-Ofiat follow {e\pofjiat, icnr6ij.riv) 508, 
 
 1 3 ; eir-oj, etrnoy, ffireto, D. 
 Ipa-iitti love 603, 2 ; 535, 1. 
 epi-w love aipdaBriv) 503, 2. 
 ipyd^ofiai work (efpyoir^ai) 359. 
 ^^u ^ fi/jya, 528 D, 4. 
 cpSfti rfb (ep|<a, epl") 514, 14 ; fopya, 
 
 idipyea D. 
 ipetS-u lean {4pftpei<r/j.ai, 4p7)p4SaTo) 
 
 464 D a. 
 ipflxa rend (fipiKov, ip^piyiiai) 611 D, 
 
 18. 
 ipelvm overthrow (ipe^a, ipdi^Briv) 
 
 511, 6 ; ^piirov, ip^pnra D. 
 ipiiraa row 516, 4 ; fiptaa D. 
 ipdyo/itti spew {^puyov), ipvyydvu, 511 
 
 D, 19. 
 ipciBa redden, ipuB-aivoiiai, 611 D, 20. 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 359 
 
 ipiS-aiva> contend {-^(rairflai), ipiSiialva, 
 
 522 D, 12. 
 ip-oimi oak {ipTiiro/iai, iipS/irip) 608, 14 ; 
 
 Gipo/jiait ipd-ojj 'Ofiat, -eivtOj B. 
 IpTT-d), -i^o) creep (elpwov, cipjruaa) 359. 
 Ip^-a go (ip^iitra, fippriira, ijp^riKa) 
 
 510, 1. 
 ajr6-ep-(ra 431 D c. 
 ipix-a hold back (%OJa) 508, 15 ; 
 
 iipvKOKOVj ipvK-dvuj -avda, D. 
 4puoiJicu preserve, eip^aTcUj ^pOro, etc. 
 
 5S8 D, 6. 
 ipi-ai draw (ftpvaa, eipO/uoi) 504 D, 11. 
 ^pX-ofiat ffO {iKs^iTo^aif '^KQot^j 4\-fi\v9a) 
 
 539, 2; ^\wflo</, 9iv0ov, eiA^Aoufla, D. 
 ip-w, etpjiKa, ipp'fiBjiv, see elirov, 539, 8. 
 iardla eat (iSo/aai, %(payov, ^8^5oko, Sii- 
 
 Siaiuu, i/SeVAiiv) 539, 3 ; iaSa, D. 
 tiTKov (el/il) 478 D. 
 eo-TTETE 539 D, 8. 
 eaTrSfiTjv ; see eVo^ai 608, 13, 
 eV-fra, eV-rat (eV^/ujUi) 626 D, 1. 
 eViroi, eWo^oi (?f<i)) 517 D, 7. 
 eiTTia-ai entertain (eiffTicura, -ko) 359. 
 «i!S-(u sleep 510, 8. 
 
 eiXo^€-o/ioi heware (jjuAo/S^flT/i') 497 a. 
 fip-laic(o find (eup'l)ira, ifipov, ri'iipriKa, 
 
 -fiai, ■nbp40'i}v) 533, 6. 
 im-(X^-ivoiiai am hated (-exBilffofuu, 
 
 -iix96ia\v, -■fixOrilia') 522, 6 ; ?x*ai, 
 
 ^X-M ^tave (e{a), irx'h<'i'>-, ^"'XO"' ^"'Xt'"', 
 -TIfuu) 608, 16; ox<"k<<, ^jt-i^X'"'''' 
 eax^^fv, D. 
 
 6i((-(i) Joi'Z (ci|(<)(rM, Tii/fijiro) 510, 9. 
 
 ra>M6i' (^6>) 489 D, 19. 
 
 il.y-4(0VTai (iT/ilt*) 476 D. 
 
 Zi-a live (^, rfij). Ion. C'i'a', 412. 
 
 ^e^y-vvfii yoke (^e^^eo, ^^ev^Oj ^C^vy/jaif 
 
 Kiyvv) 628, 6. 
 fe-w Joi; (f/o-B, ?fe<ro) 503, 12. 
 Cii-vm/u gird {e(a<ra, ^(ai{(r)fiai) 527, 1. 
 
 'HjSa-ir/cai come to puberty, fifii-a {iiPrh- 
 
 au, %^aa, JiflTj/to) 530, 3. 
 fjfiT), ^ttjitv etc. (oISo) 491 ; ^ettij etc. D. 
 
 TiSo/uai am glad (^aBriv, ijaSiiaoiuu) 
 
 497 a. 
 ^/uai sit 637, 2 ; 483 ; ilarai, cWai, 
 
 483 D. 
 ^lu say IJiv, ^) 636, 2. 
 
 ®d\-\a Jlourish (reBriKa) 518, 6 ; BaKe- 
 
 Suv, TriKiSdav, D. 
 6dir-Ta bury (flaif'm, tSw^a, T^Samuu, 
 
 irdiprtv) 513, 4. 
 Setva beat {eivS, fBemv) 518 D, 26. 
 fi^A-« (ecKiitra) = ^fl^A-B, 510, 10. 
 9e'ouffi, SeoiTo (t/95);Iu) 534 D, 1. 
 Bip-opLai grow warm 608, 17 ; Btpaoiuu, 
 
 Bep4u, D. 
 fleo) run {^Beiffoiiai) 612, 1. 
 ffijAf-o) = Ba\\o>, 618 D, 6. 
 Biyydi/a touch {Bizonal, liiyov) 623, 2. 
 fl\c(-o) 6r«is« 503, 6. 
 B\iP-a> press (B\t<lia, ^BAiif/a, iB\t^Briv) 
 
 608, 1. 
 ByjjiTKtD die (BavoS/uii, iBavov, reBiniica) 
 
 530, 4. 
 B6p-wfiai = BpwffKO), 531, 6. 
 Bpiffaw trouble (eBpa^a) 514, 8. 
 Bpaiai break (Bpaiaa, iBpavaa, t4- 
 
 Bpau{tr)iiai, iBpaiirBTtv) 605, 16. 
 Bpe^ofittt, eBpe^a; see rpex" 639, 6. 
 Bp4\l/ai, Eflpcfa ; see rpeipai 508, 29. 
 Bpihr-Tw weaken {Bp^ijia}, 49pv}l/a, T4Bpvfi- 
 
 /iai) 513, 6. 
 Bpiiana leap {Bopov/uu, iBopov) 631, 6. 
 Su-yo), flC-KEK JtM/i (= ffu-ai), 521 D, 
 
 10. 
 Bi-<e sacrifice {Biaa, iBvifa, tIBvko, ri- 
 
 Bvfuu, MBtiv) 604, 2. 
 Sum rash 621 D, 10. 
 
 iirOjiai heal (iatTdpi-qv, idBnv) 499. 
 iaiw sleep (Seiro, a<rafiev) 606 D, 7. 
 Idx-a, laxt'-iu <Ty, 508 D, 33. 
 lS-€iy, elBoy; see 6pc£:i; 639, 4. 
 rS-MEC, ifo-fli, fircUri (olSa), 491. 
 lSpu-o> seat. {iSiBriv, iSpivBriv) 469 D 
 i'fa) sj< 617, 7 ; eha, Uffaairo D. 
 
 ir)/U S«7l(/ (^(TOI, ^KO, cfKO, Ef/MU, c' 
 
 534, 3 ; 476. 
 
360 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 iK-dvu^ tKQ> 524 D, 2. , 
 
 Ik/icvos 489 D, 47. 
 
 iK-veoficu come (^^o/xatj tKSfirjv, Tyfim) 
 
 524, 2. 
 VAa-^uai propitiate (iKtiBi, IKaBi) 535 D, 
 
 10. 
 iXdrffKOfiai pi'opitiate {i\6.ffop.at^ iKaffd- 
 
 fiTiVf t\dtr67iv) 530, 5 ; tKdofiai, 
 
 f\.7iKa D. 
 iWa roll 518 D, 23. 
 i/jtdffa'ai whip (Jlfiaffa) 516 D, 9. 
 Iwra/iatfly 608 D, 23. 
 lirifLi 491 D. 
 
 fo-Kft), ^(TKai Kim, 533 D, 15. 
 'larriiu station {ariiaai, etrrTjira, taTiriv, 
 
 'dffTTjKa^ iffTaQTjp) 534, 5. 
 lirx^vw, Iffxtivdat, 606 D, 2. 
 tirxd) = ex™! 606, 2. 
 
 KaBeCofLai sit (KoSeSovficu) 517, 7. 
 KoOevSa sleep {Ka6ev5ii(ru) 510, 8. 
 Ki£9ijM<« s'' 537, 2 ; 484. 
 Kodl^Q) sit {KaBtcCj KoBi^-fia'ofj.ai, iudOiffa 
 
 or KaSTtra) 517, 7 ; Ko9er<ra D. 
 Katvvfiai surpass (Ke'/cair/ioi) 528 D, 18. 
 Kalfa kill {^Kayov) 518, 7. 
 Kafo), fcaw ^urn (Kat^crci;, iKavtra, KeKavKo, 
 
 -ftui, 4Kav6Tiv), 620, 1 ; ^Kija, Kects, 
 
 KoAe-o) caK (ko\w, c/ct{\E(ra, KfK\itKa, 
 
 K^H\i7/iai, iK\'l\0riv) 604, 5. 
 irpo-Ko\£^o^oi, KiK\-i]ffK(a, 504 D, 5. 
 KoAtJiTTW cofer (fcoAiJi//ai, ^Kc£\i't|/a, KCKti- 
 
 Kv^fiatj 4KaKi(p6T)p) 513, 6. 
 K<ifi-vu am weary [KafiovfjLcu, tnaimv^ 
 
 K^KflTJKa) 521, 7. 
 Kd^TT-Toi berul {Kdfvl/a^ ^Kafvpa, K^Ka/i- 
 
 fuu, iKdiMJ>eriJ'} 613, 7. 
 Ko«(^fais 628 D, 1. 
 KeSd-rvvfLij KiSvrifiL scatter^ 526 D, 4. 
 Kft-iMi lie {Keia'ofiai) 536, 2 ; 482 ; 
 
 Kearai, kectketo, Ke£o), jce'a, 482 D. 
 Kelpa shear (xepa, iKeipo, KeKap/nai) 
 
 518, 8; iKcpira, indpT/f D. 
 KcKaSov, -■fia'a 514 D, 18; K6KoS'^<roM<« 
 
 510 D, 21. 
 KcXaS^-ffi J-oar (icEXiiSttu') 509 D, 10. 
 
 keAeu-o) 6id (/fEAEiiirii), ^KE'XEuira, keke 
 
 Aeuko, -(Tfiai, ^KeXeiKTBifip) 505, 
 
 18. 
 kA-Aw Zan(? (/te'Aira), eKeAo-a) 422 b, 
 
 431 c. 
 KeK-Ofiai command (^KEKA(i^r)>/) 608 D. 
 
 34. 
 Kevre-a ffoad (KfVffai) 509 D, 11. 
 Kepd-vyOfjit mix (iKspaffay KeKpafiat^ ^■ 
 
 Kpdd7]Vf iKepdffdTjv) 626, 1 ; Kepdci}^ 
 
 Kepaia D. 
 KepSalvto gain {Kepiavw^ SKepBdya, /cEKE/^ 
 
 SriKa) 619, 6. 
 K€v6dy(i> = Keidco 511 D, 12. 
 Keiida hide (/ceiJffaj, ^/cEuira, KeKevda] 
 
 511, 12. 
 KExAdSdSs, -ovras 455 I) a. 
 /c^5-ti) trouble (xexaS'lirronai) 510 D, 21. 
 Kripu(r(rQ> proclaim {Kijpv^a, ^K^pv^a, Ke- 
 
 Kfipvxa^ -yt^i-ctt, iKTipUx^V^) 614, 2. 
 Ki.yXai'ai »'eac/j {Kix^i^ojioi, tKix"") 
 
 623, 3. 
 KiSyrj^i ^ KeSd-vyvfiiy 629 D, 8. 
 KtK\'f}ffKQJ = koAew, 630 D, 12. 
 Ki-yufntu move {^Kioy, iKtaBov) 526 D, 4. 
 KlpyTifii, -ydci}'{= KEpd^yyvfii) 629 D, 2. 
 «ix-oi'£i) j-eac/j 523 D, 3 ; iiclx^is, Kix'h- 
 
 TTjj/, KixTJi^oi etc., 638 D, 4. 
 
 K^XPIM' '*"<^ (XP^"'"'! ^XPI""") 'f^XP')"") 
 K^xpTi/JMi) 634, 9. 
 
 /cAa^w resoimd {K\dy^Q}, ^K\ay^a, k4- 
 
 «Ao77o) 614, 12 ; sKKayoy, ke- 
 
 KATjye^s, D. 
 /cAaftu, KAacu ZffdfiJO (tfAai$0'o/ia£, -ffov^aly 
 
 ^K\avirtt, KiKXavnai) 620, 2. 
 KAa-u Jj-eaA; (^KAoffa, KeK\a<Tfuu, 4K\d- 
 
 o-St,!/) 603, 3. 
 rtAef-o) s/iw/ {KAE((r«, ^/cAEtiro, KeKAE((o')- 
 
 /uai, iK\ei(T6T]v) 605, 14. 
 kAe^m, kAe<u celebrate, 612 D, 8. 
 kAeV-to) stra? (KAE'ifto, ?KAEi//a, ke'kAoi^o, 
 
 KiicXififiai, iKXdwnv) 513, S. 
 KA7f-(c) s/w< (KATfirai, ^K\ri(ra, ke'kAjjko, 
 
 KeKKfifiai, iK\r!iT6iiy) 605, 14. 
 Khtym lean (KAivtu, taMva, K^KAi/iai, 
 
 iK\ieriy, -eK\lyriy) 619, 1. 
 KAi!u %ca»' (ekAuoi', /cABfft, (ce'i{Aw9i, kA^ 
 
 fiEi/os) 512 D, 8. 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 361 
 
 Kval-a serafch (xvalffa, ^Kvaura, kcki/oj- 
 
 Ko, -iTfuu, iKvala-Srii/) 605, 11. 
 Kvdroj scrape (^(cj/^crfliji/) 505, 2. 
 Ktjir-Tm cut [K6\jia, tKoifio, kc'ko^o, 
 
 -o/jL/iai, iKdrniv) 513, 9. 
 Kopd-nO/u satiate (KeK6pt<Tiuu, ixopeir- 
 
 Briv) 526, 2; itopeVH tcexopriiis, 
 
 Ksic6priiicu, D. 
 
 Kopiiraa equip ((ccKopue/ne'i/os) 616 D, 
 10. 
 
 KOTc-m am ara^ry (^(cc^reiro, KcKorritis) 
 
 504 D, 10, 
 Kpi^fo) Ci-y {inpayov, KCKpaya) 514, 13. 
 Kpe/u»-^oi /iOJi^ (Kpeiiii<Toiuu) 536, 8 ; 
 
 487. 
 Kpi/id-wOfu hang (xpefio), iKpi/uura, 
 
 ^Kpe/icuTBTiy) 526, 2. 
 KpTifLva/Mi {=z Kpefia-iuu) 529 D, 3. 
 Kp(fa) «-«aA- ((tp{/ce, Ke'/cpiyo) 514 D, 20. 
 Kpi I'd) judge (Kpivci, iKplva, KfKpiita, -^ai, 
 
 ^kpWtji/) 519, 2. 
 Kpo{ha beat {Kpoiffta^ eKpovira^ KsKpouKa^ 
 
 KeKpau{ff)fjuu, 4Kpovff6rjv) 606, 21. 
 KpvTnta hide (KptJi//(u, eKpvyj/a, KdKpvfifjuUj 
 
 ixpitpBriv, -(jyiiv) 513, 10. 
 KTo-o/mi acquire {icfKTrinai) 365 b, 
 
 465 a. 
 KTeivat kill {ktsvmj im-avovj Ajr-eKToyo) 
 
 519, 4 ; eKTov 489, 4. 
 KTi^te found (Kri-fievos) 489 D, 28. 
 airo-Krii'iwfu Mil 528, 6. 
 KTUTTf'-o) crus/i (cKTinroc) 609 D, 12. 
 Ku-i(rKOfiaL conceive (e/cuffo), kiJw, Kuetu, 
 
 532, 1. 
 KuAt-ftj or /cuA.fj^5w ro/Z (^KuXitro, kckiJ- 
 
 \l(rfjMij ^KvKttrdTiv) 506, 6. 
 Kv-viw kiss {^Kvo'a) 524, 3. 
 
 KUTT-Tti) stoop (kUi/'O), ^KUi/'O, fCEKU^a) 
 
 613, 11. 
 Kvp4-a> Iiappen (licupcra), Kvp-a, 609, 4. 
 
 rfATJxa, -7/ucu, iK^x^") S^^, 4 ; 
 
 Aa|a/itai, \eAoxoi', XeA-o^x" I'- 
 \i2^o^ai ^a^e 616 D, 5. 
 \anPiva! iafre (X^ifio^ai, EA.a)3i)i', elf\7)(^a, 
 
 eiKriiifmi, i\i\^9Ttv) 523, 6 ; \cj/i- 
 
 \o/t7r-m s/iine (Aa/itlfu, ^Aa/tifia, AE\ajuira) 
 
 508, 18. 
 Atwdi^i/w /?d hid (A.^o'of, ^Xa0or, \f\7;0a, 
 
 -(T/uu) 623, 6 ; KeKaBov D. 
 \d<TKa speak (\aK^(ro/uai, iKiKriira, 
 
 iKaKoi>, \4\dKa) 633, 9 ; Atikcoi D. 
 \4y,a gather (Ae'loi, cAffo, tlXoxo, 
 
 6?Ae7juiu, iKeyitv) 508, 19 a; ^A^y." 
 
 Aey-*" spea* (AEfw, ?Ae|o, elpriKa, \4\ey- 
 
 /xcu, iKexBvv) 608, 19 b. 
 Ac/ttiii leave {\el\fia, iKnroy, AeAoura, 
 
 AeAeiyu^oi, iKeiipBriv) 611, 7. 
 AEli-w sione (Aevcroi, ^Aevo-o, ^AeiJcrSTji') 
 
 605, 19. 
 A€X- lag (tAeicTO, AexS"*! Aty/aeTOs) 
 
 489 D, 40. 
 A^flo) = Acwedva, 611, 1. 
 Ar/fltfi/ffl make fm-get 623 D, 6. 
 Atike'iu ^ \i<rKU, 533 D, 9. 
 Ai/uWroi ^ Acfn-Qi 611, 7. 
 Xlffaoiuu, Xij-oiiat pray, 616 D, 11. 
 Aixjuo-iu lick (AeAeix/uiTej) 509 D. 
 
 21. 
 Aou-d) j(ia«/» (^Aou, AoC/uii, AiJe) 412 b. 
 Au-w /oosfi (Aufffti, ^Autra, AcAuko, AcAv- 
 
 /io£, iKiBifiv) 504, 3 ; ^Av/itji' B. 
 
 MaCi^a/uai am mad (pmioviuu, ne/inva, 
 
 ipuiintv) 618, 11. 
 fioiofJLOt reach afiei' {p,4fiova, jUE/xa/iey) 
 
 /iaiiida, 520 D, 6 ; pKipavos ib. 
 fiOK-t&v {fmjKdofiai) 509 B, 22. 
 fiavBdvo) learn (fiaB-fja-ofiat, iptoBov, fie/ioi- 
 
 flTjKo) 523, 1. 
 Iiipvafiai fight 629 B, 4. 
 lidpT-ra seize (jiifiapvov, p-eniiroifv) 
 
 613 B, 21. 
 fiaprvpe-Uj ixaprvpoficu witness, 609, 6. 
 fjuurcra knead {fui^Qj, c/ja|a, fxi^iaxa, 
 
 -yfioi, 4pAyriv) 514, 3. 
 fiax4ofjLat 510 B, 11. 
 ixax-oimi fight (jiaxoviiat, ipiaxfirdfaiy, 
 
 liefiiXW") BIO, 11. 
 fieS-Ofiai attend to (fied^ffofiat), ju^Sojuai, 
 
 510 B, 22. 
 /ieSi-ffKa intoxicate {ijiiBvaa, i/itiiir 
 
 ei)v\ lieBia, 632, 2. 
 
362 
 
 ALPBABBTIQAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 Heipofiat receive part (e;u/topf, eifiapTai) 
 
 518 D, 26. 
 (t/W-ai am about (fjiiKKiiaa, i/tiWritTa) 
 
 51Q, 13. 
 Iie\-ti3 care (/xeA.^(rcu, ifieKriffa, jUEjU€\7}Ka, 
 
 -rjfiaif 4fie\'fi6-rji') 51l),12;/i€';t')j\a,D. 
 liiliP\eTai (/ieAoi) 510 D, 12. 
 jiflxPXaKa (P\iia'Kai) 531, 2. 
 fxefiertfjieyos {fjLeBttjfit) 476 D. 
 fie^oya' see fjiaiofjiat 520 D, 5. 
 f£eV-w remain {fievUj efi€tva, fiffi^vTjKa) 
 
 510, 14. 
 fierafieKofiat repent (jjLeTefjie\'{]6'r]f) 497 a. 
 UriKd-oftat bleat {funKdv, /icfiiiKiis) 509 D, 
 
 22. 
 ;i7|Tio-a), iitirioiuu plan, 509 D, 23. 
 liiy-vvm, fiitryta mix (^/|w, ^/ii^a, ^c- 
 
 lilyiiai, ifiixBriv, ifdyTiv) 52S, 7 ;, 
 
 fUKTO D. 
 
 fufxe-ofiai imitate {fiefiifirjfuii) 499 a, 
 fjLtfivijffKQi remind {fiv^ffoj, ^fivniffa, fi4~ 
 
 fivrjfial, ifivija'd'qv} 530, 6. 
 filfipoj = /tey-O), 506, 3. 
 ^/(r7a = luyvifu, 628, 7 ; 533, 10. 
 ^oA-ety, €-jUO\-oc {^K^ffKta) 531, 2. 
 fiiifw swci (4iJ.v(ricra) 517 D, 9. 
 liuKii-ofiai roar {efivKoi/, fie/xvKa) 509 D, 
 
 24. 
 fiu-ti) skill (e^ucro, /ii/iVKa) 501, 6. 
 
 Na(<a rfioe?/ (ivaaea, ifdcrBjiv) 520 D, 6. 
 vdffffQ} press (vevarr^t) 517, 3 ; ^va^a, D. 
 veiKe-ai quarrel (iveUeira) 503 D, 21. 
 )/e^-ci) distribute (i^e/m, ^vet/xa, vev^fnjKaj 
 
 -irtfxai, ivefi-l]0r}v) 510, 15. 
 KcVo' (70 616 D, 12. 
 vf'a) swim (vevirovixai, ivivira, vivcvKo) 
 
 612, 2. 
 ye-a> Acajo (v^ffdj, evi\aa, V€pri{<r)fiai) 
 
 505, 4. 
 rliX'"' swim 512 D, 2. 
 ylCu) wash (vlij/m, ej/ii/zo, V€vt/ifuu, ivtij)- 
 
 8t)ii) 515, 2; yltrTOfuu, D. 
 vlaiTOiiat go 516 D, 12. 
 
 He'-ft) scrape (eleiro, ?j€ir;uai) 603, 18. 
 (i-a polish (c^Oira, i^i(T6rii') 605, 9. 
 
 oStiSviTTai 868 D. 
 
 cJfo) smc^/ (o^-^o-ft), &C^tra) 517, 8; 
 
 uSwSa, D. 
 ofy-ai open (iirfa), olymiu, 608 D, 20. 
 o?8o Areoio (Hj-diri, ciStfJs, ijSii) 491. 
 
 522, 7. 
 oIko, oiKcis (eoiKa) 492 D, 7. 
 oivuxoi-o) pour wine [itpvox^ei) 359 D, 
 oi-ofiai, olfiat think {oijitro/jxitj c^-f}67jv). 
 
 510, 16; oi'-w, oi'-iv, 6t-0fiat [ojia'd.- 
 
 jUT/v, t^iadtjy) D. 
 o?(r(u, oT«r6 etc. ; see ^eptu 539, 6. 
 oix-oimi am gone (oix^io-ofiai) 510, 17 
 
 oixveu, 7rap-wx7JKo, otx^f^'h ^• 
 o\ur6-ava slip (&Kia6ov) 622, 8. 
 u\-\viu destroy {d\aj &\€a'a, uKS^tjv, 
 
 oKdjKeKo, u\Q}\a) 628, 8 ; Ii\4ko}^ 
 
 ovKo/xci/os, D. 
 &fjL-pvfit swear (o/xovfiai, iofiMTa, ofitifxaKo, 
 
 dfj.ci}fio[(r)fjLai, uifjL6[(r 67if) 528, 9. 
 6fi6py-vufit wipe {ofiSp^o^at, tafiop^Oy 
 
 aiJi6pxerip} 528, 10. 
 ovivt)fii benefit {oj/^trw, &yr\ffa, uv^iXTjVf 
 
 diviid7]v) 634, 6. 
 ivo-iiai blame [avoniniiv, aviafniv) 588 
 
 D, 5. 
 hiruio) it'ed {hiriaai) 620 D, 7. 
 tfirojjra, t/ij/ojuai, titpBTjy ; see dp{{a> 639, 4. 
 ^pc£ CO ^ed {oipofjLai, e7Soi/, ^6pdKa or edipaKa, 
 
 edipdfiat or Sifi/xai, &^67tv) 539, 4 ; 
 
 uirtoira ib. 
 opyalva enrage (Sp^ai/a) 431 b. 
 6pey-yufjit, dp4y-to reach {dpupexaTai), 
 
 528 D, 19. 
 opii'w coMc 528 D, 11. 
 vp-vOfit rouse {&p(rw, 3>piTa, tfpwpa) 628, 
 
 1 1 ; tapopov, S)pro, D. 
 ^poiJu )'tts/t 628 D, 11. 
 op^ffffta dig (opi^Qj, Hipv^Oy opiipvxa, 
 
 -y/iai, Qip^x^V^) 51^7 ^' 
 ua-(Toiiai foresee 516 D, 4. 
 offtpp-aipoixat smell (da'ippiiffofiaij itff^p6- 
 
 fjiffp, oKTtppiipBTjp) 5 19, 8. 
 o'jp4-ai make water (loipriira, -t)ko) 359. 
 ovTi-ui wound (o5Ta\ duxiifaj, 607 D, 5. 
 6<pelXw owe (d^ciA^irw, oKpelKrjffa, 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 363 
 
 &ipe\op^ wcpeiKrjKa, atpeiK'liBTtv) 518, 
 
 1^ ; opfWa, D. 
 o(biKKa> increase {txpfWeic) 518 D, 12. 
 6<pK-iarKdva> incur (uiphTfaa), ^(pAoy, 
 
 &ip\JIKa, -;uai) 622, 9. 
 
 IlttB-eTii, l-iraB-ov; see nti<rxio 533, 11. 
 nai^a sport (7rai|oDjuai, eTraitro, Trenrnff- 
 
 /mi, 617, 4. 
 ira(-ci) strike {Trcdffu or irai^crw, eTraXfra, 
 
 7rt7rai/ca, eirofcflTjj') 506, 12. 
 TraKai-w wrestle (Tra^afcro), ^TroXaifra, 
 
 iiraXaiaeriv) 605, 13. 
 TToX-Aa) brandish (eirjjAo, -irciraA.tiJj') 
 
 518 D, 27. 
 TrafKpalvaVj 'irafi^aj'6av, 518 D, 19. 
 TTapotv4-a> behave drunken (iirapc^mw, 
 
 TreirapcfivTjKa) S62 a. 
 irdtrtroj sprinkle (ttocw, ^iroca, iTrdtrdriy) 
 
 816, 5. 
 ■jTCtxTx^ stiver (-TreiiTOfiai^ ^•jroBoVy venovQa) 
 
 533, 11 ; TTciroo-fle D. 
 iraT€-ofiai eat {iira(riifnjVy trenafffiat) 
 
 609 D, 13. 
 irau-oi nmfe erase (ira(J<ri», eirav<ra, ire- 
 
 ^auKo, TrcTTou/iai, iiravBr]!/^ iravare- 
 
 os) 6C5, 17. 
 iretSoi persuade (miffa, tirei(ro, ireVeiKa, 
 
 ireVoifla, ireVclir/ial, iireMrii/) 511, 
 
 8 ; ^irifloc ib. ; ireiriBov, irenei\tra, 
 
 ttc/kw conibj sliear 509 D, 6. 
 irei>'c£-i» hunger (Treivp, ireiWjira)) 412. 
 Treipo) pierce (irepS, TreTap/iai) 518, 13; 
 
 iirdpTjy D. 
 irf/cro/iai ; see Trd(TX'>>t B33, II. 
 ire/c-Te'tti comS {iitex^v) 509, 6. 
 ircXiifo) approach {■ire\Z, irAijTO, ^irXa- 
 
 fliji/) ; TreAtJa), ireAaSo), irAaflo), 
 
 iriKiiatuu, 514 D, 21. 
 ■jreK-Oficu move (^Tr\6fiijy), ir^Aw, 508 D, 
 
 35. 
 ire/iTT-o) sm(i (w€fi\i>o>, €Tefi}fia, ireiro^^o, 
 
 ireTre/ijitai, ivefxtpBrjy) 508, 21, 
 irewiBov, ireirieiia'a), 511 D, 8. 
 n-4ir\riyov (irA^<r(ra)) 5 1 4 D, 5. 
 neirfiifuit {iryeo}) 512 D, 4. 
 TreirpwTat^ -^4vos, 508 D, 37. 
 
 ir€iropSo) 508, 22. 
 irepfl-M sacfc (^Trpofloy) 508 D, 36. 
 ir€pv7)fn sell {irepduj iirepcura) 629 D, 5. 
 TTcVtrw cooA (7r^»|/eo, ^Trcif/o, ireire/ijuoi, 
 
 4ire<l>eT]v) 515, 1. 
 Triraiuufly 608 D, 23. 
 ireTti-vvvfit spread (7r€Tw, ^Treraca, Tre- 
 
 ?rTa;uai, c7r€T(i(r67^y) 525, 3. 
 TTer-ofiai jltj (TTT^ffo/iOi, irer^irOjWU, 
 
 iTnifuw) 608, 23. 
 TTcudojuai, ^ TrvvOdyofiatj 511, 13. 
 ire^iSd/iT}!', -iiffofixu 511 D, 11. 
 vetpyov, eiretpvoVf Tretpafiot, Tretfyfiffofiot 
 
 519 D, 9. 
 
 TTji/) 628, 12 ; tiniKTo D. 
 ^^Afa/tai, -i/acu, = TTEAa^O), 514 P, 21, 
 
 629 D, 6. 
 Trlfnr\7ifii Jill (TrA^cro), cTrAT^co, WttAtj/co, 
 
 ir67rA7;(*r))UOi, iirKiiBvv) 534, 7. 
 ■irliiTprifu burn (irpiiaa, iirpriila, TreVpTj- 
 
 ^ai, firp^(T9iiv} 534, 8. 
 TTiyi-trKW make wise (iirivvaaa) 512 D, 4. 
 iri-yo) drink (Ttlo/icu, eiriov, ircVoiKo, 
 
 ireVo/uoi, 4v6Stiv) 621, 3. 
 irtTrtiTKa) give to drink (Triffai, ^Tricra) 532 
 
 D, 3. 
 mirpaa-Ka sell (weirpdica, -fuu, hrpairtv) 
 
 530, 7. 
 viirra fall (ireiroC/nai, ^weffov, ir^arioKo) 
 
 506, 4. 
 TT^Ti'TiM', -""0' (=■ iren^-wO^ui) 529 D, 7. 
 virvafall 521, 9. 
 irupavffKa declare 532 D, 4. 
 jrAcifo) mai'c wander (eirAo7{o, 4ir\ily- 
 
 xBnv) 398 b. 
 irAxiccrai mould (eirAoira, ireTrAao'/Aai, 
 
 iirKdffSriv) 516, 6. 
 ttAek-oi tojsi (^TrAefo, TreirKeyfiai, iir^d- 
 
 KVv) 508, 24. 
 irAfw ^az/ (7rA6iJo'o/xat, -croS/^at, ^7rA€uo'a, 
 
 TTCirAcuKa, -xTjUol) 612, 3. 
 iK-nr\'l\yvua6at 514, 6. 
 irA^floi am full (ireVATjfla) 634, 7. 
 irA^<r<r<i' strike (TrKiico. cTA^jfa, tt^itAtj- 
 
 ya, -7^ot, ^7r\^77^v) 514, 5. 
 
364 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 v\vvu wash {nKvvtjit^ iirKvvay ireTr\vfjicUj 
 
 iirKieTiv) 519, 3. 
 5r\£i-B, = irA.c'ai, 512 D, 3. 
 •Kveta blow {irveiffOfiai^ -(Tovficu, iirvevira, 
 
 TrenyevKo) 512, 4. 
 wty-tij chok'e (irnfoi, ^iri'ilo, iretryTyfiat, 
 
 iiroiy-nv) 508, 2. 
 iro6(-oy desire 504, 8. 
 ■vonryo-te puff 574. 
 
 TTop-eiv^ e-irop-oi/, iretrpanat^ 508 D, 37. 
 vop(j>ip-a boil 574. 
 irari-oixai fiy 508 D, 23. 
 irpofftrw (/o (Trpafw, €irpd|o, ireirpdyo, -xa, 
 
 -7;Ua(, ^irpax^iji') 514, 6. 
 irp^jflo) 6«!-n 634 D, 8. 
 Trpi'ao'floi, 4irpidfjL7if ; see oif eojuat, 539, 7. 
 vpi-O) saw (eirpiffo, ireirpro-yuat, iTrpiffdijif) 
 
 505, 6. 
 vpodOfie-Ofiai am eager {•jrpov9vfi'fi6r]v) 
 
 497 a. 
 trpomc-o/ittt foresee (irpowoTiBriv) 497 a. 
 irTdp-vufiai sneeze {wrapS), iwrapov) 528, 
 
 13. 
 VT^ffffa crouch (cimjia, ^jrrTJxa) 514, 7 ; 
 
 ■Krlaaa pound (eima-a, 67rTi<r^oi) 616, 7. 
 iTTu-tt) Sjtwi (eTTTuira) 503, 20. 
 irrdJciTei;, ^ TTT^ffffw, 514, 7. 
 irvvddvotuu inquire (ireiJiro/uai, iin86nriv, 
 TrewufffJLai) 523, 8. 
 
 'Paf-oi shatter {^alffa, i^^altrSriv) 605 D, 
 
 22. 
 pdirrw sew (/it^ij/w, ^^^at//a, ^fS^ajUjuai, 
 
 i^paipTiv) 513, 12. 
 ^^Co) </o (^e'Ja, ?pe|o, ipixBv) 614, 14. 
 (Seat ^ow (pe^ffofiai^ ^vfjo-Oficu^ ipp'6nKa^ 
 
 ipphtv) 512, 5. 
 p{\y-vvfii break (^^|a), ^^pij^a, t^ptaya^ 
 
 4l>imv) 528, 14. 
 (ily4-a shudder {Jlpplya) 509 D, 14. 
 piy6-u am cold (jilywv, plycfTiv) 412 a. 
 piiTTe-ai, = piirTio, 509, 7. 
 ptirra throiii (pi'^a, ^ppTtf/a, ^pp!<j>a, -ft/iai, 
 
 fppiipBw, ^pl<i>v) 513, 13. 
 pt-oiuu preserve (piaro, piaBai, ippO- 
 
 ai,H-nv) 538 D, 7. 
 
 pvn6-03 soil {pepvrra/i^vos) 365 D. 
 pti-pyv/u strengthen (tppaxra, tppwiiai, 
 ippdxrenv) 527, 2. 
 
 Sa/poi swcqti (t<ri]pa, ffeffripa) 518, 14. 
 <ro\7r(j[ii) 6/0!0 trumpet {i<rdK'iny^a) 
 
 398 b. 
 (ra<{-iu saiie (E(rciu(ra) 617 D, 5. 
 trfie-vyOfii quench ((riSetrw, crjSVjo'o^ai, 
 
 %a&eaa, ea-jSijc, iafiriKa, ifffitaenv) 
 
 526, 3. 
 a-40-oimi revere {4<ri<p6i]v) 497 a. 
 (re^aj shake ((re/cr&j, ecreitra, ffiff^iKO^ 
 
 o'ECeifffiatf iffelffdTjv) 505, 15. 
 (TeiJw rfj'ive (eccei/a, etrcujuai, (TiSto) 512 
 
 D, 9. 
 (T^irffl maic ro< (iri^if'O), ercVrjiro, icrdwriv) 
 
 511, 2. 
 ffKanTU dig {ffKdyj/(i>y eff/cai/za, ^(T/ca^a, 
 
 -fi^tai, itrKdcprjv} 513, 14. 
 (TKcSti-yi'u/it scatter (<r/ceBw, ^cTKcSacra, 
 
 iffueSaff/iai, itTKeSdcrBni') 625, 4. 
 <rK4\-\a) dry (iaK\riv) 618, 16; citkt)- 
 
 \a D. 
 
 (TKeV-TO/iOl, (TKOTTE-ai «ieM {(rKftf/O/lM, 
 
 iiTKerpdfjLTtVf ctTKe/A/iai) 613, 15. 
 
 fiai, ia'Kii<p6riy) 513, 16. 
 (TKiSyq/it (^ frKeSdvvvfii) 629 D, 8. 
 ffKilnr-Tui jeer i(rKil>y^ojxai^ ^ffKioy^ay itTK^ 
 
 tpenv) 513, 17. 
 irtul^a) wash ((r/iij) 412. 
 (Tii-ps, (Ti!?;, aiwai, 617 D, 5. 
 (nrcJ-ft) c/7*awi {ffTrdtru, ^ffiraffa, etrvaKOj 
 
 ^CTTcuTfiai, ^(rtrdfr$T]y) 603, 4. 
 ffweipo) sow ((TirepS, co'ireipa, ^C'Trap/Mzt, 
 
 icrirdpnv) 618, 16. 
 cnrivS-a pour (trvelcca, ^ffveiffa, -trfiai) 
 
 421 a, 429, 463 c. 
 ^yi-tTTTOi/, e-(nr-€Te, 539 D, 8. 
 ffrdiTKov (^ia-TTifii) 634 D, 6. 
 (TTetPai tread (ecTTenJ/o, ia'Tlprifuu) 511, 
 
 9. 
 (TTflxiD march (iarixov) 511, 10. 
 {TT^A-^w se«(/ ((TTcAw, ^(TTeiXa, ^(TraAffa, 
 
 effraKfiat, iardXriv) 518, 17. 
 aripy-oa love {in4p^Wy ^ffrep^a, ^ffropya) 
 
 608, 26. 
 
-ALPHASETIOAL LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 365 
 
 mif-laKto, (TTepda deprive (ffrep^o-o), 
 
 itTTeprjffo, iffrepTjKa, -^oi, darefyfj- 
 
 Briv) 533, 6 ; (rrcpo^oi ib. 
 »T65-Tai threatens, (ttcC-to, 638 D, 8. 
 irT6p-vOni spread (oropiS, i<TT6peiTa) 
 
 628, 16. 
 OTpfilt-to turn (ffrpeilito, effrpe^a, effrpo- 
 
 0a, ((rrpafi/iai, iirrpdiliriv) DOS, 26. 
 ffrp^-vvvfii spi'ead [iTTp^trtOj ^oTpuaa, 
 
 effTpwfiat, iffTp^Qiiv) 527, 3, 
 arvyi-u hale (iuTjyov) 509 D, 15. 
 tr<p6.^o} 01* fftpaiTTa slay (trc^alw, ifftpa^a, 
 
 ifffpayfAOi, ifftpdyriy) 614, 15. 
 v<pA\-\io trip {a<pa\a, eir(()7jA.a, i<r<pa\- 
 
 fxatj ifftpaXriy) 518, 18. 
 (Tx^Setv, iax^Bov, cxha'a ; see exai, 
 
 508, 16. 
 fftp^u save (tre^cra}, ^caxra, (recroiKa, tyiffu- 
 
 {<r)iuu, iffiifhiv) 517, 6. 
 
 Ta-fiiji/ai, iriSriv, TeroKo; see reivu, 
 
 519, 6. 
 Tdfufju =: refivo) 521 D, 8. 
 Toj/iJ-w s^7*e^cA (^Tciin;o'o, rerciin/ffjUat) 519 
 
 D, 5. 
 rop^crtro) trouble {rapd^ojj irdpa^a, Terd- 
 
 payfiatj irapdxSilv) 514, 8. 
 TcJccrw arrarufe iri^a, eTo|a, reToxo, 
 
 Terayfiai, irtix^Tlv) 514, 9. 
 TO0-7)ya«, iTd(j>riy; see fli^Trraj, 513, 4. 
 Tot^-dv, TtflTjiro am amazed, 511 D, 
 
 16. 
 Tefyo) stretch (reyS, ireiva, reTcuca, 
 
 Teraficu, irddTjy) 519, 5. 
 T-cK-crw, IreKov, TcroKa; see tIktoi, 
 
 606, 5. 
 -f\4-a> finish (reXw, ^Te\e(ro, TercAeKO, 
 
 TCTeAeir^i, iTeK^trBTjv) 603, 14. 
 T^^i) := refii/at 621 D, 8. 
 re/t-va cut {rtfui, iT^ium, erafLov, te- 
 
 TfiijKa, -/iai, iTfi-ijOrtv) 521, 8. 
 Tcpir-0) delight (rep^a, erfpifid, iTep<p8riv) 
 
 508, 27 ; TeTapwdnriv D. 
 reptr-ofjuu, reptralj/ot dry 508 D, 38. 
 rtTaydv having seized 436 D. 
 TtTitiimi grieve, TiTit]is 446 D. 
 TfTiMV attained, 436 D. 
 TCT/iafi'w £or£ 606, 6. 
 
 TeiJxfiJ make {reitfio, €T6u£a, TeTiryjtuM) 
 
 511, 14 ; TfTvKov, -^fitiv, D. 
 TT7«a) m^^^ (t^^w, eT7;|o, TeT?;ttO, 4t(£k9;i') 
 
 511, 3. 
 TTiXeflawK blooming 518 D, 6. 
 TiBrifii put {6^(ru, ^BrjKO, rdOeiKa, T^flei- 
 
 /mi, ^teB))!') 634, 1. 
 tIkto) bear {Te|ojuai, ^tekov, TETO/ca) 
 
 506, 6. 
 tI-vu pay {Titra, ^ttra, te'tiko, teti- 
 
 (T/uaf, ^Tiffdrip) 621, 4 ; Tit/Ofju D. 
 TiTof;/!!) stretch 619 D, 6. 
 TtTpdu bore (cTpjjffa, TerpTj/xai) 506, 6. 
 riTpciffKto wound [rpc&ffu, ^Tpaaa, te- 
 
 rpwfiat, irpdBTiv) 531, 6 ; rpt^co D. 
 TiTia-KOfiai aim 533 D, 16. 
 tAo-, etAt)!/ endured 489, 7; teVAiiko 
 
 492 D, 10. 
 Tn^iya cut (tT^iayov) 511 D, 17. 
 Tpair-eiofjiev (rcpTra) 50S D, 27. 
 TpaiTQ), Tpairea, = rpetra, 508 D, 28. 
 Tp<4(/)a), = TpE'(()ai, 508 D, 29. 
 Tpeir-ai turn {rpeipw, eTpeij/a, rsTpotpa, 
 
 T€TpafjL^t, irpdmii/) 508, 28. 
 Tpe<j>-a nourish (Bpetfia, ^Spe^fia, rirprnpa, 
 
 TiBpafinat, irpcupTiv) 508, 29. 
 Tp^X'^ ^"un {Spa/jLovfjuu, ^Spauov, SeSpd' 
 
 IxitKo, -/iai) 539, 5 ; 6pify>iMi, l6pf- 
 
 |a ib. ; rpdxto, SiSpofia, D. 
 Tpi-a tremble (eTpEtro) 603, 15. 
 Tpi^-U) rub {rpixl/u, ^rptil/a, rerpiipa, 
 
 T^Tpififiat, irpi^Ttv) 508, 3. 
 Tpiffco squeak {rtrptya) 614, 16. 
 rpoirea, = Tpf'irai, 508 D, 28. 
 Tpdyto gnaw (rpti^ofuu, %Tpayov, ri' 
 
 rpcoy/xoi) 511, 4. 
 rpda, = TiTpdiTKto, 531 D, 6. 
 'rvyx^vio haftpen. (rEu^Ojuat, irvxov, 
 
 rerixva) 523, 9. 
 riw-Ta strike (rirm-fia'a, Mirtiv) 613, 
 
 18. 
 Ti<t>u smoke (te'Su/i/ioi, iriipriv) 508, 4. 
 
 'tirurxv^oiiai promise {iiroa'x'lio'oftai, 
 {nreirx^f^Vt ^"■e'o'xiM"') 624, 6. 
 
 ff-O) rain (ucrai, u<ra, 6(r/uu, StrBriy) 505, 
 10. 
 
366 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. ^ 
 
 ^ay-eiVy ttpayov^ see iffdita^ 639, 3. 
 (paelvw shme (<padvBr}v) 518 D, 19. 
 tpalvu show (^(ww, itbTjvoj Tr4(j>ayKa^ 
 
 518, 19; tpdey Tre^^fferat, D. 
 <pdpyvvfity =; (ppdyvvfxt, 528, 16. 
 (pd-ffKUy = <fy7}fj.ly 530, 8. 
 Sia-^oiJ(rKft), -fpdxTKia daion 632 D, 4. 
 tpeidofxai spare {(fyelffofxat, i(pei(rd/jL7jv) 
 
 511, 11 ; ire^iBSfjiriV, -ijffofxai^ I), 
 (^epre 538 D, 10. 
 
 fpep'ti} bear (ottrw, ^veyKov or -/ca, ^;'- 
 ■hvoxo-i ivnt^eyfiaiy 7\v4x'dw) 639, 6 ; 
 ■^I'd/fa D. 
 ipe^ycojlee {tpei^^ofiat or -ovfuu^ ttpvyovy 
 
 wetpevya) 611, 16; 7r€(/)uf(lT€s 1). 
 <^i7/if .trt^ ((/>^o'w, efpvtra) 535, 1 ; 481 ; 
 
 i^d^JLtiUy <pd<r6aiy etc., 481 D. 
 <p6d-vo} anticipate {(pO-fjcrouai or ^flcftroj, 
 
 €<p6a(Ta, e(pd7}v) 621, 2. 
 <pBeipw corrupt ((pOepw, ^(pdeipa, i^BapKa^ 
 
 -fxaiy €<pdopay i<p6dpi)u) 618, 20. 
 tpdl-vco perish {(pdla-ta, i<pQi<ray itpBt^ai) 
 
 62], 5; 4<peifi)]Vy (pdivxiBtOy D. 
 <piK4-(a love (i<pi\dfjL7jv) 509 D, 16. 
 <^i\oTi/j.e-o(iai am ambitious (^(piKort- 
 
 fi-he-nv) 497 a. 
 <p\d-Q} bruise, = 0Aa-w, 503, B. 
 ^\4y-ot, <l>\€y4Bco blaze, 494. 
 ^pdy-vvfxty (ppdaffto enclose {^(ppa^a, ttc- 
 
 fppay/xai, itppdxBv^) ^28, 16. 
 (Pf'd^Qj declare (^patrtu, e^patro, irc^paKa, 
 ^4(ppa(rpLai, i(Ppd<rBT\v) 614, lY ; 
 iirlcppaZov D. 
 (ppiffaw bristle {^(ppT^a, ivi^plKa) 514, 10. 
 (bvyydua^ =: tpe^ya, 511, 16. 
 ^uXtfo'troj guard {(pvKd^w, ^(p(5\ofa, tte- 
 «^w\axa, ~7Aiai, ^^uA.t^x^''?'') 614, 11. 
 pvp-ta mix {<p6p(ra aor., ir4<pvpixai) 431 
 
 <^u-o> pi'oduce {(pdcto, ^^uffo, e(f uy, ir^ 
 
 (^Oko) 507, 4. 
 
 Xc^^o) ma^e 3'e^ire (ixf^^f^vv) 614, 18; 
 
 KfKaB-ovj -■f}(TO}, D. 
 XafpQj rejoice (xatp'fitrQ}, KexdprjKay -/lai, 
 
 ^X^PW) 518, 21 ; R€xa.p6fjL't\v, Kc- 
 
 Xapv^Sj D. 
 XaA.(i-w loosen {ixa^o-o'cty exoXeftrfiiji') 
 
 503, 6. 
 XavBdpo) contain (xeferouaf, ^x**^"'') ^23 
 
 D, 10. 
 xd-ffKa gape (xavov/xatj ^x^^^^i K^xw^t) 
 
 530, 9. 
 Xe^w ^«<;o (xeffou^ot, txcff"a, K^xoBa, 
 
 Kex^iyfiai) 614, 19. 
 X^(o pour (x^w, ^x^") K^xwKo, Kexvfioiiy 
 
 iX^Byiv) 612, 6 ; xefw, tx^*'"* X"^™! 
 
 D. / 
 
 X((-a> Aertjt> (x'^ff'a), exwo'a, Kext^fcOf 
 
 K4x<>>arfiaiy ^xdJcrOr^i/) 605, 8. 
 e-xpatciJ^oVy 4xp^^'^M^°-i ^^9 D, 17. 
 Xpd-OfJ.at use (xp^iTat) 412. 
 Xpct-w ^M'e oracle {xp'ho'<*>, expvo'eif 
 
 iXp^o'Bw) 605, 3. 
 Xp^ oportet (xp^o-et) 535, 3 ; 486. 
 Xpt-w anoint (xpttrw, exprcro, k4xpi{(t)- 
 
 fiaiy ixpifrd-nv) 506, 7. 
 Xpt'jC'^i XP°''C'^> XP^"*'*'^/*' co?or (k^- 
 
 Xpttio-fiaiy ixP^^^V) Bl*?? 6' 
 XiJto (xf'«^) 512 D, 6. 
 
 Tc£-w rwft (i//^) 412. 
 
 ^ij/oX^Tjy, €;|/iJx'?'') 508, 5. 
 
 *Ci,B€-Q}pnsh (^ffw, ^a)£ra, ^wcrfiai^ it^trOrip) 
 
 509, 8. 
 wye-o/jLai buy {avija-ofiai, iirpidfiijVj etivrf 
 
 fxaty iuvifBTiv) 639, 7. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 JNOTE. — The references are made in all cases to the sections, not the pages, 
 of the Grammar. The letters ff, placed after the number of a section, show 
 that the same subject extends into the following sections. 
 
 This index does not cover the Classified List of Verbs, sections 602-539. 
 To find any of the verbs or verbal forms contained in that list, consult the 
 foregoing Alphabetical List of Verba. 
 
 A, quant. 9 ; pronunc. 11. 
 
 a, c, 0, interch. 28. 448 a. 
 
 451 a. 435 a. 455 a. 460 
 
 a. 469. 471. 544 c. 545 
 
 b. 648. 675 a, b. 
 
 o,J7, interch. 32. 394. 451 
 
 c. 511. 
 atoel83D. 190 D. 433 a. 
 a to « 33 D. 444 D. 
 oto 1) -SS. 138. 146.412. 
 
 421 b. 4-29. 431 a. 451 
 
 b. 444 D. 
 d for oi 36. 
 «o after e, i, p, 30. 138. 
 
 140. 146. 222 a. 431 a. 
 d for 7) 30 D (2). 138 D b. 
 
 146 D. 363 D. 376 Da 
 
 431 a, b. 442. 
 a for v 139 D. 451 D c. 
 d for a, 409 D g. 
 a- priv. 689 ; bef. F 589 
 
 b ; in adj. w. gen. 753 c. 
 0-, d-, to 7|- (augm.) 356. 
 -a- theme-vowel 415 a. 
 
 444 D. 451 e. 489. 525. 
 
 536. 
 •d-stems 134 ; in comp. 
 
 575 a, b. 
 •oL- form. suff. 548. 
 <i- tense-sufiSx 372. 450. 
 
 465 a. 490. 
 -o quant. 136. 138-9. 
 
 146-7. 192. 308 c. 222 
 
 a, c. 
 « aco. sing. 133. 169. 
 
 179 a ; voc. sing. masc. 
 
 147 ; neut. pi. 123 (3). 
 
 151 b. 133. 
 -d gen. sing, for ov 149. 
 -a adv. 258. 
 ^ diphth. 13 ; pronunc. 
 
 14 c. 
 ao, OTE, for o6, ar] 409 D. 
 ayaB6s comp. 254, 1 ; adv. 
 
 eS 258. 
 &yaij.iu pass. dep. 497 a, b ; 
 
 w. gen. 744. 
 ayavoKTEU w. dat. 778 ; 
 
 aycw. El 926 ; w. part. 
 
 983. 
 ayairdu w. dat. 778 ; aya~ 
 
 Ira €1 926 ; w. part. 983. 
 ayyiKKu pass. pers. 944 
 
 a; w. part. 981. 
 &yfH 1037, 4. 
 ayeipa accent 389 D a ; 
 
 syncope, 437 D ; iiyipi- 
 
 Bovrai 494. 
 ayi)poiS {-aos) 160. 
 ay KiiKfi 213 D. 
 ayvo4(a w. gen. 733 ; w. 
 
 part. 982. 
 O7vo(d 139 e ; ayvoi^ 116. 
 &ymiu 72 D. 451 c, aug. 
 
 359; redupl. 369; pf, 
 
 intr. 601. 
 ayv^s 246. 
 ityopd wt. art. 661 ; ctyo- 
 
 pTlBiv 217 D. 
 a.y6s 548 b. 
 
 i,yp6p.ei'oi (ayelpa) 437 'D. 
 ayp6s wt. art. 661. 
 
 i.yp6Tfpos, &ypi05, 248 1). 
 SyX'i -""'i compar. 260 D. 
 &ym aor. 436 ; w. gen. 
 
 738 b; mid. 813;ii7M)' 
 
 with 968 b. 
 ayictfl^ofiat mid. 817; trdr 
 
 Kriv 716 a. 
 •aS- verb-themes 424. 
 iSf\^6s voc. sing. 155 a. 
 aS^JiTEiE, iXiiKiis, 363 D. 
 iStKia fut. mid. 496 a ; w. 
 
 part. 986 ; pros, for 
 
 pf. 827. 
 adiyara for aS6vaTov 635 ; 
 
 a^vvaroy ov 973. 
 f Soi fut. mid. 495. 
 ihcupos xpvt^^'^^'^ ''^^ ^' 
 OE to aa, etc. 409 D a ; 
 
 493 b. 
 -aei to -o^, etc. 409 B a. 
 a^l 35. 
 
 &6iK<is 40 b. (F) 689 b. 
 &Eipw 40 b. 494. 
 oeVicc 37 D f. 589 b. 
 -0^0) vbs. 398. 514 ff. 446 
 
 a;der. 57],6;fut.424. 
 ari, ari, to aa, etc. 409 D a. 
 arjSdif, a7}5o7, 200. 
 irifii 414 D. 
 a^p 216 D. 22. 
 'Aeiva 30 D (2). 
 'A0-limCc2iya.;-neev218; 
 
 -Va-i 220. 
 dBK4a 356 a. 
 aSpea w. /jfli 887 c. 
 aep6os, -od, 222 a. 
 
368 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 'Aflajiei; 'A8<«mrl59D. 
 oi 13 ; pronun. 14 a. 
 -ai elided 80 D ; short for 
 accent 102 a. 386; 2 
 
 sing, for cat 383, 4. 
 
 462 D. 
 ai for el 870 a. 
 Alas 15 a. 
 oi5eO|Uai pass. dep. 497 a ; 
 
 w. ace. 712. 
 'AtSTjs (-'Ai57)s) 73 D. 216 
 
 D. 23 ; 'AlMo-Se 219 D; 
 
 iv (eh) "AiSou 730 a. 
 al^oios 645 a. 
 'Ai5o»/€ii-s 216 D. 23. 
 aiZ(t>i 196. 
 ai'fer 72 D. 
 dtB€ for e?fl6 870 b. 
 aieitp 165. 215 a. 
 Aifl/mJ/ 174. 213 D. 
 oiK^s 40 b. 589 b. 
 -cuiii for -am 409 D h. 
 -aiva 1 decl. 139 a. 
 -aiyoi denom. 671. 7. 
 -aio-s adj. 564 b. 
 aipe'm augm. aor. 359 a ; 
 
 pf. 368 D ; w. two ace. 
 
 726 ; w. gen. 745 ; mid. 
 
 816; pass. 819 d. 
 eipa 40 b. 431 b. 
 ■ais, -auri{v\ dat. pi. 142. 
 
 142 D (c). 
 ■ais in ace. pi. 143 D. 
 -mrra for -daa 34 D. 242 D. 
 aurBim/jicu w. ace. or gen. 
 
 712 b. 742 ; w. part. 
 
 982. 
 aiaxpis oompar. 253. 
 aiffx^foiiai w. aec. 712; 
 
 w. dat. 778 ; w. part. 
 
 or inf. 983, 986 ; ^crxO- 
 
 v6ii.r)v witiiout 6.v 897 b. 
 •alrepos, -airaros 250 a. 
 alrea w. two ace. 724. 
 o?Tios w. gen. 753 e. 
 al-jQ^ririi 147 B. 
 aiui 356 a. 
 axdK-r]Ta 147 D. 
 6.Kavea 139 e. 
 aKaxt^^vos 53 D a. 368 D. 
 AKTix^Sarai (ox™) 464 
 
 D a. 
 «^Kij adv. 297. 
 
 aKiii) 53 a. 
 h{o{v)i) 44. 
 aK6\ou9os w. gen. 754 d ; 
 
 w, dat. 772 b. 
 oKoiim 2d perf. 460 a. 368; 
 
 fut. mid. 496 ; w. gen. 
 
 742 and e ; w. part. 
 
 982; am called 820; 
 
 pres. 827. 
 &KpaTos compar. 251 b. 
 cMpoioiiat w. gen. 742 
 
 and c. 
 dKpi(7roA.ij 585 b; wt. art. 
 
 661. 
 &Kpos w. art. 671. 
 aKTts{-v-) 166. 
 uKiov 37 D f. 689 b ; adj. 
 
 for adv. 619 a; gen. 
 
 abs. 972 b. 
 &\a\K0i> (HK^^ai) 436 D. 
 d.\do/j.ai 368 D ; accent 
 
 389 D b ; pass. dep. 
 
 497 a. 
 a.\awdCa> 398 D. 
 aKy€iv6s^ dAyiaji/, S-Kyiff- 
 
 Tos 254. 8. 
 &\ei(pap, -aros 182. 
 aKelipai pf. 368. 451 d. 
 oKsKTpvcitv 165. [D. 
 
 a\e|t<) 2 aor. redupl. 436 
 a\4ofJi.at, &\€^ofi.atj aor. 
 
 430 D. 
 SiKiiesia 139. 646 a; dat. 
 
 779 b. 
 a\7,edri 139 D. 
 aKrieris, SAijfles 232 a. 
 a\is 72 D ; w. gen. 753 c. 
 aKiffKOfuu 72 D ; augm. 
 
 359; 2 aor. 489, 13; 
 
 w. gen. 746 ; w. part. 
 
 982. 
 hxtti], oKkI, 213 D. 
 k\Kvdjv 166. 
 iXXi 1046, 2; ixV ^ 
 
 1 046, 2 ; ou /u)|i/ (jueV- 
 
 Tot) iWci 1035 c ; aWa 
 
 ydp^ oAV ou ydp 1050, 
 
 4 d ; ou yhp awd 1050, 
 
 4f. 
 iX\da<Tw 846. 328. 452 ; 
 
 w. gen. 746. 
 aK\ii\ani 268 ; 686 b. 
 iWoBi 217. 
 
 SWo/ioi aor. 481 b. 489 
 
 D, 35. 
 &\\os 267. 704; w. art. 
 
 663 ; appos. 706 ; w. 
 
 gen. 758 g ; posit. 704 ; 
 
 &\\os &\\o 704 a ; /i€. 
 
 yiffTos {n6vos) TUV &\' 
 
 \av 755 b ; itris S.\Kos 
 
 905; &\\os i, 1045, 1 
 
 b; &\\0Ti(¥i) 1015 b; 
 
 tI &\Ko ^, ovSkv 6^JC 1) 
 
 612. 
 iWotre 219 b. 
 aWva 84 D. 
 &\\ws, tV &\\as 622; 
 
 &A.Ali)S T€ Koi 1042 b. 
 
 aA.<(eEv 217 D. 
 
 OA.S 85 b. 187 a. 
 
 aAtro, a\TO 489 D, 35. 
 
 oXuKTcifw redupl. 368 D. 
 
 aKdirri^ 176. 
 
 a\Mj 213. 
 
 Hfia 80 c. 258; w. dat. 
 
 772 c; w. part. 976. 
 S/iafa (fifiola) 73 D. 
 afia^trSs 152 c. 
 afiaprdi/CD w. gen. 748 ; w. 
 
 part. 985. 
 &flPpOT05 60 D. 
 a;ue 261 D b. 
 
 afielvajv {aya$6s) 254, 1, ^ 
 i,/xe\fa w. gen. 742. 
 a/ie's, -iuiv, -iv, 261 D b. 
 afi-firap 589 a. 
 a/xtWdofjLat pass. dep. 
 
 497 a. 
 S/i/ics, -i(^), -f, 261 D. 17 
 
 D b. 87 D. 
 afiv^/iav w. gen. 763 d. 
 dLiiv6s 216. 2. 
 (f/iuis, a/4<(s, 269 D. 
 S.fws 283 D. 
 &fj.Tre\os fern. 152. 
 cifi.Tr-4x<i>, -((TX", 73 d. 
 a^TTVifvBrjv (tti/co)) 469 D. 
 a.fjLVfjuov 31. 
 ifiivai witli dat. 767 a; 
 
 mid. 813 a; -lidu 
 
 494. 
 ct/ni^f 110;,w. case 791. 
 i/iipievmiu w. two aec 
 
 724 ; perf. 849. 
 &IMpls 88 D. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 369 
 
 ltfutii(r$T)T4aiw. gen. 789 a; 
 
 w. dat. 772. 
 aiup6Tipoi. 296; -ov, -a, 
 
 appos. 626 b ; w. art. 
 
 673 a. 
 afiifioTfpaiSev w. gen. 767. 
 &IJi(pu 298 ; w. art. 673 a. 
 -av- verb-themes, 571, 8. 
 oc- priv. 689. 
 -OK from -oojv gen. pi. 
 
 141 D c; from -d^etu 
 
 410 b. 
 &v for dvii 84 D. 
 &y 857 fE ; w. cond. sent. 
 
 889 fE; w. pot. opt. 
 
 872. 900 ; w. hyp. ind. 
 
 896 ; of customary ac- 
 tion 835 and a ; w. f ut. 
 
 ind. 845 ; w. subj. for 
 
 fut. 868 ; w. final aij, 
 
 Stws, 882 ; w. subj. in 
 
 rel. clauses, 913. 934; 
 
 w. inf. 964 ; w. part. 
 
 987 ; &v omitted 872 e. 
 
 894 b. 897 b. 898 b. 
 
 914 a, b. 921 a. 
 av see 4<iv. 
 av for t &i> 76 a. 
 ivci] 10. 120; w. case 792. 
 &vaup 110. 120. 
 &va voc. of Si-ot 170 D b. 
 cwa^uiiTKOiwi 817. 
 avayKotos pera. constr. 
 
 944 a. 
 cwi.yK-rt w. inf. 952. 
 ava/jitnirtiffKa w. two obj. 
 
 724. 
 Sva| 72 D. 170 D b. 
 ii'ilios w. gen. 753 f. 
 avSivca 72 D ; augm. 359. 
 avSpxTTodoy 213 D. 
 -ave- tense-suffix, see 
 
 -avo|«-. 
 Sveu w. gen. 758. 
 iveuBeiv) 87 D. 
 avexoiua 361 a; w. part. 
 
 983. 
 ai/.e^'yo, av-4ti^xa 369. 
 dv^vofle 368 D. 
 dvi^p 188 b. 60 ; as appos. 
 
 (ivipes SiKiurraO 626 a ; 
 
 Aviip 77 b. • 
 hiff Siv 999. 
 
 6.v6panros 126; as appos. 
 
 (Si/S. y6ri5) 625 a. 
 avirifit 476 D. 
 -OTO- form. suff. 555. 
 -av"|e- tense -suff. 372. 
 
 402 b, c. 522. 
 01/0(7(1) aug. 359 ; red. 369. 
 ifoiiolas w. dat. 773. 
 civopSSw 361 a. 
 -avT- stems in, 241, 
 di/Toa? 409 D a. 
 orre for ^eii'Te 1045, 2. 
 avTfXOf"" w- g6D. 738. 
 oyTi 110; w. case 793 ; 
 
 after compar. 648 ; &y0' 
 
 Siv 999. 
 avTidvupa 246 D. 
 ivrmpvis), 88 D. 
 dj/TiTTOicojuai w. gen. 739 a. 
 d>'uo'T(fs w. superl. 651 a. 
 oKiia) as fut. 427 D ; avi- 
 
 aas 968 a. 
 &va adv. compar. 260. 
 Si'0)yo492 D, 11. 458 D; 
 
 redupl. 363 D. 
 avi^vufws 31. 
 S|ioj w. gen. 753 f ; w. 
 
 inf. 952. 
 do, eo), interch. 36. 141 D 
 
 b. 148 D, 2. 160. 409 
 
 Dd. 
 00 to 00), etc. 409 D a ; 
 
 to fa.409 D d. 
 -do for -00 gen. 148 D, 1. 
 aotSri 37 D f. 
 doiSioei 409 D a. 
 &op 166 D k. 
 oou to 00), etc. 409 D a ; 
 
 to £01- 409 D d. 
 dir- for dTTo- 84 D. 
 aTrayope^u w. part. 981. 
 SjToir 246 ; w. gen. 753 c. 
 imavTiM fut. mid. 495 ; 
 
 w. dat. 772. 
 STTof 288. 
 airds w. art. 672. 
 hirartiw pass, w. gen. 
 
 760 a. 
 awilTap 245. 
 iirmpda aor. 489 D, 20. 
 dTTCiAeo), airuK'fiTriy 412 
 
 D c. 
 diriKOToi, oro 464 D a. 
 
 airuTTta pass. 819 a. 
 d7rA.oDs 223. 295 b. 
 dTTii with case 794 ; com- 
 par. 260 ; iup' ou 999 b. 
 dTTOoifu/ioi 626 D, 6. 
 diro5i5pao'/ca) w. ace. 712 c. 
 diroSiSa/ii w. gen. 746 ; 
 
 mid. 816, 2. 
 airoepyade (eipyoj) 494. 
 anSepffa 431 D C. 
 atrodp-^aKtij am Mlhd 820. 
 diroAoiiii) fut. mid. 495 ; w. 
 
 gen. 740. 
 '^^r6\\av 186. 186. 
 airovoeopLai pass. dep. 
 
 497 a. 
 anopeo) Ti 716 b. 
 awofTTcpew w. two acc. 
 
 724 ; w. gen. 748 a. 
 oTToiipdj 489 D, 20. 
 am<palva w. part. 981. 
 airoipevya) w. gen. 745. 
 aTrSxpv 486. 
 amrefi^pel 84 D. 
 awper'fis w. dat. 765. 
 OTTTO) mid. 816, 3 ; w. gen. 
 
 738 ; OTTTeoi' 992. 
 d7ra)Tepo) 260. 
 -op-stems, 164 a ; op-nom. 
 
 from St. in -ot-, 182. 
 op for fipo 84 D. 1048, 1. 
 Spo 1048, 1. 120. 
 opo 1015. 1016. 120. 
 apat6s 72 D. 
 apaiptjKa (aipEO)) 368 D. 
 apaplcTKa red. 368 D; aor. 
 
 436 D ; dpapifia451 D c. 
 apyas, -dvra 238 D. 
 ^ApysToi 1 D. 
 apduv 254 D, 1. 
 apiiyw 28 a. 
 dpTjp.evos 363 D, 
 dpijv 216, 2. 
 "Apvs 94 D. 216, 1. 
 -opio- form. suff. 658, 2. 
 apiffrepa wt. art. 661. 
 apumvs 206 D. 
 &piffTos {ayaS6s) 254, 1. 
 apv- {h.pv6s, dpves,) 216, 2. 
 apviofiat pass. dep. 497 a 
 ap6a> 409 D c. 
 ctpTTol 246. ' 
 -opr- stems in, 182. 
 
370 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 apxoios 645 a. 
 
 -upxos comp'ds, accent 
 
 582 0. 
 ipX" fit- roii^' 496 a ; w. 
 
 gen. 741. 819 a; aor. 
 
 841 ; &pxoiiiai mid. Slfi, 
 
 4 ; w. gea. 738 ; w. 
 
 part. 981 ; iV ^^|w/Aa{ 
 
 883 ; oLpx^t^evos 9lj8 a. 
 ipay6s 28 a. 544 c. 
 ■a<r- stems in, 164 b. 
 
 190 ff. 
 -as nom. from st. in -ar- 
 
 183. 
 •ds nouns of number 
 
 295 d. 
 -OS ace. pi. 133. 169 a, b. 
 ■ds ace. pi. 143. 208 e. 
 -dtri dat. and loCo 220 
 
 and a. 
 -do-i 3 pi. 377. 385, 7. 
 
 455 a. 
 •a-(TKov iterat. 493 a. 
 aan^ms 231 b. 489 D, 46. 
 aawis coll. 609 ; 4it' (wap') 
 
 affiri^a 661. 
 fio-o-a 277 b ; S.<ra-a 280 D. 
 affiTuv compar. 260 D. 
 
 255 D. 
 curriip 188 a. 
 
 icrrpawTei sub], om. 602c. 
 So-Tu 72 D. 201-2 ; wt. 
 
 art. 661. 
 atriiiitTov 1089. 
 -OT- stems 164 a. 181 ff. 
 
 571, 8. 
 -oT-ai, -OTO, 3 pi. 876 D d. 
 
 416 D c, 464 a. 
 arip 1047, 2. 
 aTopiris 64 D. 
 fii-e 1054, 6 ; w. part, 977. 
 arepos 77 d. 
 'AtA/j 52 a. 
 -aro for -i/to 3 pi., see 
 
 -oral, 
 irpmris 64 D. 162 o. 
 arp€fia{s) 88 D. 
 arra277 b; OTTa 280 b. 
 au diphth, 13; pronunc. 
 
 14 a. 
 •au-stems 206 ; themes 
 401. 
 
 ad 1047, 1. 
 
 aieis 73 D. 
 
 aurap 1047, 2. 
 
 OUTE 1047, 1. 
 
 avT-i] 16 a. 
 
 aurlxa w. part. 976. 
 
 aSns 73 D. 
 
 auTos 265 ;— Synt. 677 a. 
 678 ff. 690. 691, 2; w. 
 and wt. art. 679; po- 
 sit. 680 ; for refl. 684 
 a ; for e airSy 687 a ; 
 w. dat. of aocomp. 774 
 a ; w. reflex. 644 ; au- 
 rhs d atfTjp and d av^p 
 aiirSs 680 fl: ; ifie au- 
 Tifc etc. 687 ; aiVb to5- 
 TO 626 b ; auri ravTO 
 719 (i;—i aMs 265. 
 679. 680; w. dat. 773 
 a ; Taurh tovto 626 b. 
 
 aMs 11 b. 265. 
 
 auToS gen. 673 b ; adv. 
 760 a. 
 
 abrov ^ kavrov 266. 
 
 iipaipca w. obj. 724. 
 748 a. 
 
 iKpipTcpos (&<l>ap) 265 D. 
 
 a(^£iS€ci; w. gen. 742, 
 
 a<{>€ra! 216 D b. 
 
 a^iri/ii w. gen. 736. 
 
 aipiKveofiai pf. mid. 464,B. 
 
 &<l>irji atpu^s 150. 
 
 'Axaio£ 1 D. 
 
 Sxi"C« compar. 252 D o. 
 
 axeo) {aiaix^SaTai) 464 
 D a. 
 
 HxSofiai pass. dep. 497 a ; 
 w. dat. 778 ; w. part. 
 983. 
 
 'Ax<A.(\)ei)s 47 D. 
 
 ^X^Uiuai accent 389 D b. 
 
 axP'(s) 80 b. 88 D. 920 
 ff. 1055, 8 ; w. gen. 
 758. 
 
 ate, CO), interch. 36. 141 
 D. 409 D d. 444 D. 
 
 au to 001, etc., 409 D a. 
 
 ■ate vbs 571, 2; desid. 
 etc. 573; contr. 323. 
 409-12. 493 b; fut. 
 424. 
 
 Sffl 2 aor. 488 B, 19. 
 
 •dan' gen. pi. 141 Da. 
 
 B, 24 ff ; bef. T-mute 51 \ 
 
 bef. ju 53 ; bef. ff 54. 
 for ^ 60 ; in fi{0)p 60 
 
 B; to (p 462. 470. 
 
 464 a. 
 -j8o for 0fiei (0alva) 442. 
 0aSlCa fut. mid. 496. 
 /SaSiis 229 D. 263 D. 
 0aii/a 2 aor. 489, 1 ; 2 pf . 
 
 490, 2 ; i0ii(TeTo 428 D 
 
 b ; 0ela> 444 D ; intr. 
 
 500, 2 ; perf. 849 ; w. 
 
 cog. ace. 716 a rem. 
 Bavxos 47. 91 a. 
 0ii?>J^ai 376 D d. 448 c. 
 
 466. 469 D, 21 ; aor. 
 
 mid. 496 D. 440 D; 
 
 0e0Ki\aro 464 D a ; w. 
 
 dat. 776; in comp. 
 . 810 a. 
 
 0apSurTos (0paSis) 263 D. 
 0apis 98. 
 0d(rttiios 162 a. 
 0airi\fld 139 b. 545 a. 
 
 562. 
 0tt(ri\ita 139 b. 646 a. 
 
 657 b. 
 0curl\etos 664. 
 0ain\eis 206 ; wt. art. 
 
 660 c ; 0a(ri\ciTepos, 
 
 •TaTos 256 S. 
 0airi\evai w. gen. 741 ; 
 
 aor. 841. 
 0a(ri\iK6s 546 o. 
 0a(rl\ia'ffa 545 a. 
 060\naL 92 D e. 
 0eloiiai, 0€Ofuu (fiiia) 
 
 421 D. 
 0ela {0ali'a) 444 D. 
 0eKTepos, -TaTos 254 D, 1 
 0iKrttuv, -laros, 254, ]. 
 0id dat. 776; w. gen. 
 
 729 c rem. ; irphs 0ldp 
 
 805 c ; 0lri<pi 221 D a. 
 0tdConai pass. 819 d. 
 /3ij3<i^iB fut. 424. 
 0l0\o! 162 e. 
 0t0pci<rKoj 2 aor. 489 D, 
 
 26 ; pf. 492 D, 16. 
 0t6te 2 aor. 489, 14 ; fut 
 427 D. 
 
QREEK INDEX. 
 
 371 
 
 &K- redupl. 365 a. 
 /3\(iTTai aor. pass. 472 a ; 
 
 w. cogn. ace. 725 c. 
 j8\cio 489 D, 21. 
 jSAcVai fut. mid. 495 ; w. 
 
 cog. ace. 716 b. 
 PK'hx'"' 166. 
 
 ^KdxTKW 60 D. 
 
 $oiii) fut. mid. 496. 
 
 ^o>; 138 a. 
 
 $6\\a. 34 D. 
 
 $opeds 149. 
 
 Pirpus 166. 201. 
 
 i3au\Ei!ai w. cog. ace. 716 
 a ; mid. 814 a. 
 
 /3ou\^ 162 d. 
 
 fioi\oiiai aug. 365 b ; 2 
 sing. 384 ; pass. dep. 
 497 a; |8oi5A.ei witli 
 subjunc. 866, 3 b ; 4ijuj\ 
 fiovKofjL^ycfj 771 a ; $ov- 
 Koifinv S,v, iPov\6firiv 
 &v, 903 ; 4PovK6iirir 
 without &i> 897 b. 
 
 Povs 206. 
 
 PpaSis compar. 253 D. 
 
 Ppaxis compar. 263 D. 
 
 0p€Tas 190 D. 
 
 Pporos 60 D. 
 
 Pws 206 D. 
 
 0aTidyeipa 246 D. 
 
 r, pronunc. 19; bef. t- 
 mute 51 ; bef. cr 54 ; to 
 X51. 452. 464 a. 470; 
 bef. £ 68. 397-8; in- 
 serted 402 c ; dropped 
 388 b. 
 
 7- nasal 20 ; from y 65. 
 448 b. 
 
 -7-theme3 397-8. 
 
 yiua 144 D. 
 
 ydKa 181. 
 
 ya\6cos 159 J). 
 
 ya/idai mid. 816, 5. 
 
 yap 1050, 4; co-ord. 
 1038 a; after art. 666 
 c ; after prep. 786 a ; 
 after rel. clauses 1009 
 a; 61 ydp 871. 
 
 yaffT'^p 166. 188. 
 
 jyy- 463 b; stems 174; 
 themes 398 b. 
 
 7^037, 1. 80 a. 113d; 
 
 after art. 666 c ; after 
 
 prep. 786 a; before 
 
 iota paragogicum 274. 
 yeyaya 458 D. 
 yeydis 490, 3. 
 yelvofnai intr. 600, 8. 
 ysXatreiaj 573. 
 7eA.(iM fut. mid. 495 ; ^7^- 
 
 \a(nTa 428 D a; aor. 
 
 842. 
 ye\ais 176 D. 
 ye/ia w. gen. 743. 
 yevos Xffov^ SnrKdfftoyj ri^i- 
 
 6\iov 1068 b. 
 7e'i/T0 489 D, 37. 
 yipai6s compar. 250. 
 76/)05 191. 190 D. 
 7€iJ(u, yevofiot w. gen. 742, 
 7^ 144; om. 621 c; wt. 
 
 art. 661. 
 yttpajTKw aor. 489, 2. 
 71 to (Tir 67. 397; to f 
 
 68. 398. 
 ylyvopm 2 pf. 490, 3 ; 
 
 redupl 393 b. 403 b ; 
 
 copulative 596; impers. 
 
 602 d; om. 612; w. 
 
 gen. 750 ; w. dat. poss. 
 
 768. 
 yiyviiTKa 2 aor. 489, 
 
 15 ; pf. 849 ; w. part. 
 
 982. 
 7A- redupl. 365 a. 
 yXauKuims 179 D. 586. 
 yWxis 229. 248. 263 D. 
 y\QJXts 166. 
 yy- redupl. 366 a. 
 yvdeos 152 b. 
 yvtifiri 840 a; om. 621 c; 
 
 gen. 732 d ; dat. 779 b. 
 -701'- stems in, 164 e. 
 y6]/u 216, 3. 
 7001/ 1037, 2. 
 yo^vara {y6pu) 216 D, 3. 
 ypavs 206. 
 ypa<f>i]v om. 745 a. 
 ypiijxa vr. gen. 745 ; w. 
 
 two aco. 726 ; mid. 
 
 816, 6. 
 yprjvs^ ypv^s, 14 D d. 
 yvfiviis 246. 
 yvixvis w. gen. 763 g. 
 
 yvvi] 216, 4 ; wt. art, 
 
 660 a. 
 yi-^os 162 a. 
 
 A, to <r 62. 53. 470; 
 dropped 54. 56. 86. 
 447 a; bef. . 68. 398; 
 bef. -arai, -oto, 464 D 
 a ; in v{S)p 60 ; added 
 549 ; doubl. aft. augm. 
 355 I) a. 
 
 -8- stems 164 d; 176 ff. 
 649 ; themes 398. 
 
 -5-, -iS-, -So-, -(5d-, patro- 
 nymic sufE. 569. 
 
 Mp 186 D. 
 
 ^aiiffofiat {iSdriv) 474 D. 
 
 8o( 1037, 8 ; Sof 216 D b. 
 
 Sai(a, 398 D. 
 
 Salvviu opt. 419 D b. 
 
 Saio/j.at 401 D ; SeSaiarcu 
 464 D a. 
 
 Saia 401 D. 
 
 SaKpua 393 a: aor. 841. 
 
 bd/Map 178. 
 
 bdfivqp-i^ SafieUre 473 D a. 
 
 Aavaol 1 I). 
 
 5avel(;ai mid. 816, 7. 
 
 8§s 172 a. 
 
 Sareo/Jiai aor. 430 D. 
 
 -Se local 217 ; enclit. 
 113 d. 
 
 Se 1046, 1 ; 80 a; after 
 art. 666 c ; after prep. 
 786 a ; re . . 8e' 1040 
 b; Kol . . Se'1042. 
 
 SfoTo 430 D. 
 , /ScSoiKa, SeSio 490, 5 ; Sei8- 
 365 D; SESo(Kaj455 D 
 a;pf. 849 b ; w. |Uij 887. 
 
 8£?, see Seo). 
 
 SfiKmfii 362. 332. 365 D ; 
 w. part. 981. 
 
 Sel\ri wt. art. 661. 
 
 Sfi\6s 569, 6. 
 
 Seii/o 279. 
 
 Setv6s 569, 4 ; Setvhv ei 
 926. 
 
 8e(ows (Sios) 190 D. 
 
 SeiTTVea, SeSenrv^Keiv 468 
 D. 
 
 SexacTi)! 678 a. 586. 
 
 Sends 295 d. 
 
372 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 SeKoxiXoi 288 D. 
 SUoiuu 73 D. 
 SeKeaiy 182. 
 Se\(l>is, -tv, 168 a. 
 Sefias 215 D b. 
 SevSpov 216 D, 24. 
 Se|i((j 248 D ; Se|io, Se^Kii/ 
 
 wt. art. 661 ; 4k 8e{ios 
 
 788 c. 
 SeliTcpiis 248 D. 
 Siofmi pass. dep. 497 a ; 
 
 w. gen. 743 and a. 
 Se'oi/ om. of cop. w. 611 a. 
 Seoyres, evbs (or Suoti/) 
 
 elfKoiri etc. 292. 
 Seos 190 D. 
 ScTras 190 D. 
 Sept) 138 a. 
 SepKo/iai aor. 43S D ; pass. 
 
 dep. 497 a ; w. cogu. 
 
 aoc. 716 a. 
 Si(rii(ls 213 D. 214. 
 Sea-ir6TTjs 147 ; SetTTrrfTea 
 
 ace. 147 D d. 
 Sevpo w. gen. 757. 
 SeiiraTos 255 D. 
 Seirepos 288; w. gen. 
 
 755. 
 Se'xaToi (redupl.) 363 D. 
 Sex^jUepos 82. 
 Sixott-c 73 D ; redupl. om. 
 
 363 D ; aor. 489 D, 38 ; 
 
 w. dat. 767 a. 779 c ; 
 
 mid. 817 ; pass. 499. 
 Seal bind 411 ; fut. pf. 
 
 850 a. 
 S4ii> want 409 D e. 411 ; 
 
 pass. dep. 497 a ; w. 
 
 gen. 743 ; — Sei w. gen. 
 
 743 b ; w. dat. and 
 
 gen. or ace. and gen. 
 
 712 b; w. inf. 949: 
 
 om. of cop. w. 611 a; 
 
 ei/hs (Svotj/) S4ovT€s 292. 
 S-li 1037, 4; after art, 
 
 666 c; ^x^S^SlO; koI 
 
 Sii Kul 1042 c. 
 Srie^v 1037, 7. 
 Sv\oviTi 1049, 1 a. 
 SrjKos w. part. 981 ; STjXa 
 
 S-li 1037, 4; Srj\oy on 
 
 1049, 1 a. 
 
 Sri\6a 341. 325 ; w. part. 
 
 981. 
 Atjfi'ijrTip 188 a. 
 S7ifi,iovpy6s 575 a. 
 Sri/iond 779 a. 
 S^v 93 D. 
 S-ffTTOTe 285. 
 
 S^TTOu, b'fitrovBeVy 1037, 5. 
 -5?7-s, see -5d-. 
 SiJTo 1037, 6. 
 S^a (^Saijj-) 427 D. 
 Si to C 68. 398. 
 5ia 110 ; w. case 795. 
 8io 222 D a. 
 SiaPaiyoi iv. aoc. 712 c. 
 SlaiTu 139 e. 
 SiaiTdai augm. 362 b. 
 Sio\f'70^oi redupl. 3f'6 ; 
 
 pass. dep. 497 a ; w. 
 
 dat. 772. 
 SiaXeiira w. part. 981 ; 
 
 ^LaKiirdiv 968 a. 
 SiiXiKTos 3 e. 152 d. 
 didixerpos 152 d. 
 Siayoeofiai pass. dep. 
 
 497 a. 
 SiaTre'7roK€iJ.7iff6/X€Vov 466c. 
 Siaa-Koneoj w. gen. 733 a. 
 SittTe\fa w. part. 981. 
 Sia(p4ptii prep. 796 end ; 
 
 w. gen. 748 ; mid. w. 
 
 dat. 772. 
 Sui<j>opos w. gen. 753 g ; 
 
 witli dat. 772 b ; w. <f 
 
 1045, 1 b. 
 Slya/iixa 1. 
 SiSdffKoi fut. mid. 496 a ; 
 
 w. two ace. 724 ; w 
 
 gen. 746 ; mid. 815. 
 
 816 a ; vbl. w. gen. 
 
 750 a. 
 SiSpaiTKa aor. 489, 3 
 
 ^Sei 834. 897 ; Seiy 956;^-''S(Sa!/il 350. 330. 334. 416 
 
 D a, b; imperf. 419 a; 
 
 aor. 432. 443 ; w. gen. 
 
 736; in eomp. 810 a; 
 
 pres. 825. 
 5t-e(-\eyfLat 366. 
 Si^X'" w. gen. 748. 
 Sl(ri/^ai 414 D. 
 Si7)/c<i(noi 288 D. 
 Siicd(a mid. 816, 8. 
 Slxatos pers. opnstr. 944 a. 
 
 SUri om. 621 c ; SlKrjv w. 
 
 gen. 719 a. 
 Si^6s 259 D b. 
 Aiopuffia 215 a. 
 STos, sra, 222 D a. 
 S«(ti 925. 1049,2.1050,3. 
 diirXda-ios 295 b. 
 SmhTiiTios 296 D b. 
 SittAoSs 295 b. 
 Sis 288. 
 Sicro-^! 295 b. 
 Si<l>doyyot IS. 
 Slxtt 295 c 
 Stxv 295 c. 
 Sixed 295 D c. 
 Si'fida 412 ; w. gen. 742. 
 StuKdBat 494. 
 Stdxa w. cogu. ace. 716 b; 
 
 w. gen. 733. 748. 
 Sfuis 172 a. 
 
 Sotd, Soiol, etc., 290 D, 2. 
 SoKEcu themes 405 ; with 
 
 dat.764,2;w. inf. 949; 
 
 pers.constr. 944 a; ifw\ 
 
 5oK€7y 956 ; S6^atTa 
 
 (8((|ac) TaSra 974 a. 
 Sok6s 152 e. 
 Si/wvSe 219 D. 
 -Boi'- stems in, 164 e. 
 Sopl-\riTrTos 61 5 c. 
 S((pi- 216, 6 ; iwl S6pv 661. 
 Soi;X6iW, Sou\du 672. 
 SouAeiSu w. cog. ace. 716 a. 
 Sovpara (S6pv) 216 D, 5. 
 Spa(T£/ai 573. 
 Spiaos 152 e. 
 Spvfuis 214 D. 
 Svds 295 d. 
 8u€ii/ 290 b. 
 Siva^iat 4) 5 D c. 416. 417 
 
 a; 418 b. 487; aug. 
 
 356 b ; pass. dep. 497 
 
 a; w. superl. 651 a,. 
 SUafiis dat. 780. 
 Svo 288, 290; 8uo?y flore- 
 
 poy 626 b. 
 SvoKcdSexa 288 B. 
 Suit- 690 ; augm. aft., 
 
 362 c. 
 Suo-d^aij/ S3 B. 
 SuffapeffT^o) 362 c. 
 Sitreptos 103 a. 
 Sva-l 290 b. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 37b 
 
 Suo-^ci/^s w. dat. 765. 
 
 Autr-TTopis 690. 
 
 SuiTTuxco) 362 c. 
 
 Si}<ii393a; 2 aor. 335.489 
 D, 17. 444-5 ; iUaero 
 428 D b ; trans. 500, 4. 
 
 Sum, -aj», -o«ri, 290 D, 2. 
 
 SuciSEKo, SuoiScKaTos, 288 
 D. 
 
 Su> for SaiM 215 Q b. 
 
 iupov w. dat. 765 a. 
 
 E, TOW. 9 ff ; name of, 
 
 8 ; pronunc. H ; in- 
 
 terch. w. a, o, see a ; w. 
 
 I, 31. 
 « to o 435 a. 448 a. 460 a. 
 e to 1) 34 a. 168. 206 D. 
 
 356. 
 t to €1 34. 359. 444 D. 
 e to 190. 451. 544 c. 
 e contr. by syniz 42 D ; 
 
 dropped 188. 409 D b, 
 
 e. 437. 493 b. 
 £- augm. 354-5 ; redupl. 
 
 365. 369. 
 -6 Toc. sg. 154 0. 
 -e dual 133. 
 
 -e- theme-vowel 489. 526. 
 -e- added to theme 405. 
 
 509 ff. 
 -e- tense-suff. see -o|e- ; 
 
 aor. pass. 468 ; for ei 
 
 458. 464 D a. 
 € pron. 261. 
 -eo- tense-suff. 372 D. 
 
 458 D. 
 -fa for -cm 229 D ; for -w 
 
 229 D ; fr. stems in -ecr- 
 
 192; -£d fr. St. in -eu- 
 
 208 ; -eo- in plup. 458 
 
 D. 372 D. 
 -to for -T/r ace. sing. 147 
 
 Dd. 
 iaya (iyvviu) 369. 
 HaSai' {arSiliia)) 3S9 D. 
 eoi to EI 40 c. 383, 4. 
 U\riv (eiA.a)) 359 D. 
 iiv 860. 1052, 2 ; in con- 
 
 dit. sent. 889 ff ; after 
 
 (TKOTre'tu, etc. 1016 c. 
 iiiinrep 1037, 3; iivTc 
 
 1045, 2. 
 
 25 
 
 iap 72 D. 172 b ; wt. art. 
 
 661. 
 iaai 386 D, 7. 415 D a. 
 eoToi 483 D.. 
 iauTov 266 ; 683. 692, 3 ; 
 
 w. $4\TurTos 644 a. 
 ida augm. 359 ; ouk ia 
 
 1028. 
 €/3SoMc£j 295 d ; 4/35((/iaTos 
 
 2SSD. 
 iyyis conipar. 260. 
 iyelpu red. 368 ; accent 
 
 389 D a ; 2 aor. 437 D ; 
 
 intr. 501. 
 ffKUTa 215 D a. 
 iyxparii! gen. 753 b. 
 ^yp-iiyopa 368. 
 tyX^f^vs 204 a. 
 iyd 261. 78. 603 a ; tyayye 
 
 1037, 1 ; ^/.e w. inf. 
 
 684 b. 
 iySfial 77. 
 iydi(v) 87 D. 261 D. 
 i^U-nv fut. of, 474. 427 D. 
 I-SSeio-e 355 D a. 
 fSvov 72 D. 
 eSo^at (iaeia) 427. 
 -ee to -J) 192. 202. 
 « 261 D. 
 -e-e-oi to -erai or -eat 409 
 
 Db. 
 UiKotri 72 D a. 288 D. 
 ieiKoa-ris 288 D. 
 -cell' for -etv 436 D b. 
 -e-e-o to -e*o or -eo 409 
 
 Db. 
 iepyu 72 D a; redupl. 363 
 
 D ; -aeev 494. 
 iepfievos (fJpai) 369 D. 
 ^sp<rri 72 D a. 
 6^0$ 258 D. 
 e-flvBavov 359 D. 
 'iris for ?j 276 D. 
 m\-n<r9a 377 D. 
 cflei/ 261 D. 
 
 ^Wfffl aug. 369 ; red. 369. 
 eflraj 72 D. 
 (I 13; pronunc. 14 a; 
 
 spurious 14 b; for e 
 
 33 D. see e; interch. 
 
 w. 1 32. 394. 447 b. 
 
 451 b 511 ; w. oi 29. 
 
 461 b. 644 0.648. 
 
 «- uncfa. by augm. 367 a. 
 el- result of augm. 359. 
 «- redupl. 366. 368. of. 
 
 869. 
 -ei 3 sing. act. 407 b ; 2 
 
 sing. mid. 40 e. 384. 
 -61- plup. 453 ; pf. 465 
 
 Da. 
 €1 1052, 1; 111 c; in 
 
 cond". sent. 889 ff \—if 
 
 perchance 907 ; indir. 
 
 quest.930. 1016. 1017; 
 
 in causal sent. 926 ; 
 
 in wish (ei, eWe, ei yip\ 
 
 870 a. 871 and a; eJ Sc 
 
 ni) 904 a. 906 ; ei Si 
 
 906 b ; El /i^, El fjeii Sia 
 
 905 a ;ei'o4 1021c. 1022 
 
 a ; El (iav) Kal 1063, 1, 2 
 
 a ; Kal ei (idi') 1053, 2 ; 
 
 ei&pa, fliiii apa 1048, 1 ; 
 
 El for 4av 894 b. 898 b. 
 eI (ei>0 479. 
 -Eld fem. 652 ; eio 139 b, 
 
 c. 229. 246 D. 247 D. 
 
 657, 1 b. 
 elapty6s 33 D. 
 -eios, -eiE, -etav for -ais, 
 
 -ai, -aiEi' 434. 
 Eiarai, -aro, 483 D ; c^aTO 
 
 526 D, 1. 
 ttSap 182. 
 EiSos in comp. 586 a ; ace. 
 
 718 b. 
 eiS<is 491. 
 -Einfor -Eia 139 D. 
 EiflE 118 a. 870 a. 871 and 
 
 a. 904. 
 EifliKa 369. 
 EiKi^ep, etc. 494. 
 EiKa; 295 d. 
 EfeoTi 288 D. 
 ErKE\oj 72 D. 
 fUoa-t 28S. 72 D. 
 liKO) 72 D. 494; w. dat. 
 
 764, 2. 
 Ei/cdJi/ 166. 200. 
 EiK<ij492,7;£iK!.s^i/834. 
 EiA^Aoute 29 D. 38 D. 
 et-XTftpa 366. 
 ^-Krjxa 366. 
 Er\oi' angm. 369 a. 
 ef-\oxa {\4ya gather) 866, 
 
374 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 A\a 72 D. 399 D a ; aug. 
 
 359 D ; aor. 431 D c. 
 tXjia 72 D. 
 
 cf/iai (evyu^i) red. 363 D. 
 el-fjiapTcu redup. 366. 
 -^eilililS; 113 c. 385 D, 7; 
 
 copula 596 ; oni. 611 a. 
 
 988 ; w. dat. posa. 768; 
 
 w. part. 981; 457. 
 
 465. 467 a ; eo-riy o't 
 
 {oirivis, Sre, o5, etc.) 
 
 998 ; — rh vvv etvai, rtarA 
 
 TOVTOV efvat, ck^v etyai 
 
 966 a; — Hv ciroumst. 
 
 968 ; case ab3. 972 b ; 
 
 om. 984 a ; Tip Smt 
 
 779 b. 
 €?/« 477. 381 D. 385 D, 
 
 7 ; om. 612; as f ut. 
 
 828 a. 
 -eiy infin. 381. 
 eiv for 4v 797. 
 t'lvdKLS 288 D ; -xi^'oi ib. 
 eivcucSfrtot 288 D. 
 eivuTos 288 D. 
 cTl'eKa, -Key, 84 D. 
 «V( for eV 797. 
 eh 261 D. 
 
 -eTo-v neut. 661, 1 b. 
 ehs for ems 283 D. 
 -eio-s adj. 566 a. 
 elwa 438. 
 cSirep 1037, 3. 
 elmv 72 D ; redupl. 436 
 
 a. cf. 438 ; w. Sti, ojj 
 
 946 b ; as (cttos) eiTretv 
 
 956. 
 etpya fut. mid. 496 a ; w. 
 
 gen. 748 ; iipyaBev 
 
 494. 
 et-fqKo. 366. 
 
 etpo^ai accent 389 D a. 
 tfpuo-a (^piJai) 359 D. 
 eipo 72 D ; redupl. 369 D. 
 «j 2 sing. act. 407 b. 
 <ir, -eo-o-a, -tv, adj. 237 ffi. 
 
 567. 
 -CIS accus. plu. 231 a,. 
 CIS 111 b ; w. case 796. 
 
 7fi8. 
 cTs -288. 290; efs {&i4p) 
 
 w. superl. 662 b. 
 «r$ (elfii) 113 D. 478 D. 
 
 cfiro (VCc») augm. 359 a. 
 
 ciW/i7)j' 477 D. 
 
 elffPdWa intrans. 810 a. 
 
 iiirri 72 D a. 
 
 ciiri^Kc 920. 
 
 eienrpaTTco w. two ace. 
 
 724. 
 elarifieii augm, 358 a. 
 
 359 a. 
 e1(Tii> w. gen. 757. 
 cTto 80 ; w. part. 976 b. 
 c?Tc 1045, 2. 1017. 118. 
 elrov {friiit) augm. 359 a. 
 ■ela> vbs. 409 D b. 
 etaea 369. 461 e ; 849 b. 
 elm 283 D. 
 in 798 J 61 b. 85 b. 88 c. 
 
 93 a. Ill b. 
 eicis 260 D. 
 eKcuTTdxis 297. 
 cTOff-Tos 72 D. 296 ; col- 
 lect. 609 a ; w. art. 673 
 
 a ; supplied from ouScfs 
 
 1068 ; cVao-Tds tis 703. 
 eKdrepos 296 ; w. art. 
 
 673 a. 
 iKarepaiSev W. gen. 757. 
 
 788 c. 
 eKaTQVTds 295 d. 
 eK^alviD w. ace. 712 c. 
 ^kSseu 500, 4 a ; w. two 
 
 ace. 724. 
 iice7, iKetdev, 283 a. 
 iKe7vo5 271. 695~; w. art. 
 
 673 ; wt. art. 674 ; 
 . ^KelvT) 779 a; ixeivoat 
 
 274 ; toOt' ^Ke'ivo etc. 
 
 697 0. 
 ^KcTo-c 283 a. 
 iK€K\6fjLTiv {Ke\ofiai) 436 
 
 D. 
 ^Kexetpia. 73 d. 
 eKii^oXos 72 D. 
 r(c7)Ti 72 D. 
 
 e/cio;/ (jUCT-cKfoflov) 494. 
 ixKhriirl^ dat. 782 a. 
 ^/cKA.i)(ntSfa aug. 362 a. 
 iKwtirra am cast (mt 820. 
 iKTr\4ia(Ti», 2 aor. pass. 
 
 471 o,. 
 ?KTi)/ioi 365 D b. 
 iKris w. gen. 757. 
 eKvp6s 72 D. 
 
 cKiiK 72 D ; adj. for adv. 
 
 619 a; w. gen. abs. 972 
 
 b ; eKtiJV elvai 956 a. 
 iKaaawv, 4Xarri»v 254, 4 ; 
 
 wt. f) 647; ircp! ^\aT- 
 
 rovos 746 a. 
 ^AoiSkoj redupl. 368; fut. 
 
 424; plup. 464 D a; 
 
 sense 810. 
 iXdx^ia 246 D. 
 ^AiiX'o''"''^ 254, 4. [D.- 
 iKeyxiffTOS, iKeyxees, 263 
 ^Keyxa 328. 368. 463 b. 
 4\eiBepos w. gen. 768 g. 
 ^\ev8ep6a w. gen. 748. 
 'EAcua'WSc. 
 i\r)\€SaTO (iKaivic) 464 
 
 D a. 
 ?Ai| 72 D. 
 eKlaffw augm. 359. 
 cA/cw augm. 359. 
 ^-AAa/8e 47 D. 
 'EAAtis 1. 
 
 ^AAcfTTti) w. part. 981. 
 "EAArj^cs 1. 4 g. 624 a. 
 eX\riA(a> 4 f. 
 ''ZWf)viffr-^s 4 f. 
 eKiuvs 58. 86 b. 
 cAttoi, -o;uai 72 D ; redupl. . 
 
 369 D. 
 ?A(ra('6!fAm)431 D Ci 
 eXup 166 D k. 
 iimvTov 266 ; 683. 692, 3 ; 
 
 ifi-e mriv etc. 687. 
 4fi0dKKa intr. 810 a. 
 i^eQev, ^/telo, ifi.eo^ ^M^^i 
 
 261 D. 
 ^jucwToO 266 D. 
 lilxlv for ^;w)( 261 D b. 
 i-lina»e 355 D a. 
 ?ft(/i)ej', efx(ji)evai, 478 D. 
 i-lifiope 366 D. 
 ^M((s 269 ; 689 ff. 
 iforlTTXriiii 634, 7 a; w. 
 
 gen. 743. 
 i/iTTOtefo w. dat. 775. 
 ejiTpocrdev w. gen. 757. 
 -c(v) 3 sing. 87. 
 -ev S pi. aor. pass. 473 D ; 
 
 infin. 381. 383, 5. 
 ^v 59. 111b; with caBB 
 
 797 ; in comp. 775 ; w. 
 dat. time 782 a; adv 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 375 
 
 785 ; ill Tois w. superl. 
 
 662 a. 
 •ivai inf. 443 c. 
 iycu/Tt6ofuu pass. dep. 
 
 497 a ; aug. 362 a. 
 ivavTlos vr. gea. 754 f ; w. 
 
 dat. 765; w. ^ 1045, 1 
 
 b ; rh ivavriov 026 b ; 
 
 ^1 ivaVTias 622. 
 ivapiCa 393 D. 
 ivSiSa/u intrans. 810 a. 
 ivSuai 600, 4 a ; w. two 
 
 ace. 724. 
 eveKUj -Key, 768. 
 ii/4viwou {iyivTw) 436 D. 
 ^vepei(v) 87 D. 
 ^i^i/oSe 368 D. 
 gi-flo 283. 284. 1056, 6; 
 
 997 a ; as rel. 284. 
 ivedSe 283. 
 4v0aura 74 D. 
 Mcy 283. 284 ; 1056, 5 ; 
 
 w. gen. 757 ; as rel. 
 
 284; ivBev koH ^i/Sev 
 
 788 c. 
 ivBevSt 283. 
 iveevrev 74 D. 
 ivBvfieofiai pass. dep. 497 
 
 a ; w. gen. or ace. 712 
 
 b. 
 ivl for 4v 797. 
 r>/i for ?yc<rTi 109 b ; 785 
 
 a. 
 iviirra aor. 436 D. 
 ivveds 296 d. 
 ivyedxi\oi 288 D. 
 %-tnf4ov 356 D a. 
 ivjrfjKOVTa 288 D. 
 ivyoeo/mi pass. dep. 497 a. 
 eWu/u 72 D ; pf. 363 D. 
 4vox>i-i'o aug. 361 a; case 
 
 712 b. 
 ivoxos w. gen. 753 e. 
 ■ivT- adj. sufE. 667. 237. 
 
 241. 
 ^>/TaE9o, -eEBw 283. 74 D. 
 ivH 478 D. 
 evTiis w. gen. 767. 
 ivrpeiro/uu w. gen. 742. 
 ^vvbpis 18 a. 
 ^|61b. 72D. 111b. 798; 
 
 4( Siv because 999 : see 
 
 ?fapyos w. acc. 713. 
 iiipX" w. acc. 713. 
 eids 296 d. 
 
 6Je\67x<» w. part. 981. 
 i^epXoiJiai w. cog. acc. 
 
 715 b. 
 l|e<rTi impers. 602 d rem. 
 
 949 ; ii6y 973. 
 i^iKDeo/juu w. gen. 739. 
 t\u ooinpar. 260 ; w. gen. 
 
 757. 
 eo for ao 409 D d ; to cu 
 
 190 D. 383 D, 4. 41)9 
 
 D b, d, e. 
 eo 72 D. 261 D. 685 a. 
 loj 261 D. 
 ?oiKo492, 7 ; 72 D ; augm. 
 
 353a;red. 369;w. dat. 
 
 773 ; pf. 849 b ; pers. 
 
 const. 944 a ; w. part. 
 
 981. 
 ^oKira (eA.7rai) 369 D. 
 lopya (?pSi») 369 D. 
 eoprd^w 359 b. 
 -eo-j adj. 566. 223 ff. 
 Us 269 D ; see 8s. 
 fou to ev 409 D b, e. 
 ivdv 860. 913. 1066, 5. 
 itraffffuTcpos 265 D. 
 tiriffa-a w. ir6Sa 716 rem. 
 ^n-€c£i/ 860. 
 cVe/ 78. 925. 1065, 5 ; w. 
 
 eudews, rdxurra 1008. 
 ^tteiSt), eVeiBoi', 860. 913. 
 
 1065, 6. 
 €7r€iTo w. part. 976 b. 
 iwsv^ivoee 368 D. 
 iirliKoos \Y. gen. 753 d. 
 iirliv 860. 913. 1065, 5. 
 ^iri 799; in comp. 712 b. 
 
 776; adT. 785; ^<i>" 
 •^Te 999 a. 
 Iiri for ^ireo-Ti 786 a. 
 ^irtfloW w. gen. 751. 
 4iriPov\eiai pass. 819 a. 
 imSclKm/u mid. 812. 
 iniSlSafu intrans. 810 a. 
 iiriBviifa w. gen. 742. 
 ixiKdpa-ios w. gen. 754 f. 
 iitlKeiiMi w. dat. 775. 
 im\ajjL0dmiiai w, gen. 738. 
 iiTiKavBdvoitai w. gen. 742; 
 w. part. 982. 
 
 imKelm) w. part, 981. 
 4mfieKiis w. gen. 763 d. 
 iirifieKonat pass. dep. 497 
 
 a ; w. gen. 742 ; w. 
 
 Siras 885. 
 iiria-To/iai 416. 417 a. 418 
 
 b. 489 ; pass. dep. 497 
 
 a ; vr. part. 982. 
 iiruTTdTi)<riv 220 a. 
 iinaritiuav w. acc. 713; 
 
 w. gen. 754 a. 
 itriffTpaT^va w.case 712 b. 
 iiriaxfS 391 a. 
 imriiSeios pers. constr. 
 
 944 a. 
 imTi/xdm w. dat. 764, 2b. 
 iirirpiTos 293. 
 iirlxapis compar. 252 c. 
 cir\6p.7iv {ire\ofjLm) 437 D. 
 fvo/uu augni. 359 ; 2 aor. 
 
 437 ; w. dat. 772. 
 ?iroj 72 D ; ^ttt) 1064 ; is 
 
 CTTOS EiTTelv 956. 
 -ep- syncop. stems in, 188. 
 ?^afe 219 D. 
 4pda w. gen. 742. 819 a ; 
 
 inc. aor. 841. 
 ipyd(otiai aug. 359. 
 Ipyov 72 D ; dat. 779 b. 
 fpytn (fipya) redupl. 363 
 
 D ; form. w. -9- 494. 
 epSa redupl. 369 D. 
 dpeiSw, iprjpeSaTo 464 D a. 
 ip^i-wo)^ ipdpnrro 368 D. 
 ipefiv6s 53 b. 
 epE|e 49 D. 
 
 ipipivTO iipeliru) 368 D. 
 ipripeSaro (epelSa>)i6i D a 
 ^prfa w. dat. 772. 
 iplripos, -es, 247 D. 
 epis 176. 179 D. 
 'Epfielas 148 D, 3. 
 'Ep^^s 146. 
 
 ipofiai accent 389 D a. 
 ipos 176 D. 
 
 ijyjroi^ kpn^^tOy augm. 359 
 ip^a 72 D. 
 ippaya 451 e. 
 ippiap-ivos 251 b. 
 -epaa, Airrf-eptro 431 D Q, 
 EpiTT) 139 exc. 
 iphxa redupl. 436 D. 
 ipvffdpimres 579 b. 
 
376 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 ipia 72 D. 359 D; as 
 
 fut. 427 D. 
 tpxarat, ^pxaro, ifpxaro 
 
 (epya) redupl. 363 D. 
 ipxop-ai accent 387 b; 
 
 augm. and red. 358 b ; 
 
 2 pf. 489 D, 13. 
 ^pmrl76D. 
 
 ^ptDTtio) w. two ace. 724. 
 -E<r- suff. 553, 2; 164 b. 
 
 190 if; adj. 230. 562, 2. 
 
 578 ; accent 5S2. 
 -€j nom. pi. 133. 
 ^s796. Ill b; seeeis. 
 ia-e^s 72 D. 166; coll. 609. 
 e(re(w fut. (eSoiiai) 427. 
 -eo-i dat. pi. 171 D b. 
 effwepa wt. art. 661. 
 eirnepos 72 D. 214 D. 
 -efffftt fem. adj. 237. 
 eWa, eWoi red. 363 D. 
 -€(r(ri{») dat. pi. 133. 171 
 
 D b. 188 D. 190 D. 
 i<ral 113 D. 
 i(rtrup.ai 365 D. 
 %aaav 254 D, 2. 
 eVroi (ewO/iu) red. 863 D. 
 effTE 920 ff. 1055, 7. 
 -fiTTcpoSy -etrraTos, 251. 
 iiTTn 440 a ; 'itrrriKa 358 a. 
 ^a-Ttv o'l 998. 
 iiTTidoi augm. 359. 
 etrrdis 244. 
 iaxap6tpi 221 Da. 
 ^ffxaros 256 a ; w. art. 
 
 671. 
 e<rxf6oy, ax^Bietv (J^X") 
 
 494. 
 iao) compar. 260; of. 
 
 ^Tcfl-^TTca, -eas, 458 D. 
 ^Te\f/€To 409 D b. 
 CTtpos 282 ; crasis 77 d ; 
 
 appos. 705 ; w. gen. 
 
 763. 643 b ; w. ^ 1045, 
 
 1 b.. 
 ?Ti7s 72 D. 
 iriiriai 150. 216 a. 
 ?T< 80 c. 88 b. 
 cTos 72 D ; gen. 769 ; dat. 
 
 782. 
 fu 13 ; pronune. 14 a ; in- 
 
 terch. w. ov 29. 409 D 
 
 I. 648 a ; w. u 32. 394. 
 
 447 b. 464 D a. 511. 
 eu from eo, tov see €o, eou. 
 eu to e 206 D. 394 a. 612 
 
 b. 
 ew unch. in augm. 357 a. 
 -fu-stems 164 g. 206. 
 
 669 b. 
 -€u- form. suff. 557, 1. 
 
 560, ]. 571, 4. 
 cS 268 ; augm. aft., 362 c ; 
 
 w. 7roi6i>'712; ^S258D. 
 cE 261 D. 685 b. 690 a. 
 iv^aifwvi^ia w. gen. 744. 
 ei/Satfiuv 235. 261 u. 
 €liSios 250 a. 
 edeA-TTiy 245. 
 eifpycT^a aug. 362 c. 
 Euflu 88 D ; w. gen. 757. 
 eMs ^8 D ; w. part. 976 ; 
 
 TJJj' euScioi/ 719 a. 
 €UK\e/d 139 e. 
 evKafieoiiat pass. dep. 497 
 
 a ; w. 'oTTus 886. 
 itvvTITos 47 D. 
 evuoia 139 e. 
 cKi'Ous compar. 251 c. 
 ei/narcpeia 246 D. 
 eiiropetn w. gen. 743. 
 evpla-Kia aug. 357 ; accent 
 
 387 b ;• w. part. 982. 
 e&pocs 49. 
 fBpor ace. 718 b. 
 ihpiona 147 D, 
 cupiis 229. 
 -€u-j masc. 206 if. 657, 1. 
 
 560, 1. 571, 4. 
 -CDS gen. sg. 190 D. 206 D. 
 iis 268 D. 
 
 eSre 10.54, 7. 1056, 2. 
 evippaha aor. pass. 498. 
 Eu^u^y 231 b. 
 eSxapis 246. 
 -Ei;<D denom. verbs B62. 
 
 671, 4. 
 evdi/vftov wt. art. 661. 
 EuwxEo/xai w. gen. 740. 
 ^((>' |te 999 a. 
 ^(pavva {(palvtt)) 431 D d. 
 i(pe\KV(rTiK6v (v) 87 b. 
 ^ipiKKO) mid. 813. 
 i^iilis w. dat. 772 c, 
 if^/iepos 82. 
 
 itpteiiai w. gen. 739. 
 
 iipiKvco/im w. gen. 739. 
 
 ix'^ivofiM accent 389 D a 
 
 eX^<'M'<', accent 389 D a. 
 
 ix^p6s compar. 253. 
 
 E^ts 166. 
 
 Exw '73 e ; augm. 359 
 2 aor. 437. 489, 12 
 E(rxE0oi/, (TXEflEti/ 494 
 fut. mid. 496 a; w. 
 ace. specif. 718 a 
 w. gen. 746 ; mid. w. 
 gen. 738 ; impers. 602 
 d; intrans. 810; mid- 
 dle 816, 9; aor. 841 ; 
 w. part. 981 a; — tx"" 
 with 968 b ; ^Kvapets 
 EX'*"' 963 a; oiirtas 
 exovTOs 973 a. 
 
 Eoj interch. w. ao, aai, see 
 00, Ota, 
 
 EO) in Att. 2 decl. 169 ff. 
 
 (cp for 7)01 (36). 465 D. 
 
 -EO) gen. sing. 148 D, 2. 
 
 -Eoj verbs 324, 328. 409- 
 12; fut. for -a-u 422; 
 der. 571, 3. 
 
 ^aOa 369 D. 
 
 iipKri (iOiKa) 858 a. 
 
 4ii\ma (Iattio) 369 D. 
 
 -euv g. pi. 1 dec. 141 D a. 
 
 icprnxifi 359 D. 
 
 i(i>pdKa {tpiita) 369. 
 
 iiipyea {epSia) 369 D. 
 
 -EMS gen sing. 203,208 b. 
 
 eW noun 73 D. 161. 196 
 D ; wt. art. 661. 
 
 E<BS conj. 1056, 7. 283 D. 
 920 ff. 
 
 laiuToD 14 D d. 266 D. 
 
 F, 7 ; pronune. 28 a ; re- 
 tained 72 D ; influ- 
 ence 76 Da. 92 D c. 93 
 D. 197 ff. 859 a. 369 
 436 a. 575 a. 589 b. 
 
 r' (numeral) 289. 
 
 f-stems 197 ff. 
 
 FaSvs 72. 
 
 fETOS 72 D. 
 
 FlSios 72 D. 
 
 Fttrrla 72 D b. 
 
 fpicpj 72. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 377 
 
 F6s 72. 
 Fparpa 72 D to. 
 
 Z, pronunc. 21 a; from 
 
 (tS 63; aS for, 63 D; 
 
 from Si, 71, 68 ; in pres. 
 
 398. 
 (ia 412; w. cog. ace. 
 
 715 b. 
 -fe local 219 a. 63. 
 Zews 216, 6 ; om. 602 c. 
 ^■nK6<o with gen. 744. 
 Ziiv6s, etc. 216 D, 6. 
 -foi verbs in 398(D). 514 
 
 if; fut. 424-5; Aeol. 
 
 -o-Sto 63 D 
 f(^s 227 D. 
 
 H, pronunc. 11 ; interch. 
 
 w. a 32. 394. 511; w. 
 
 a 28 a. 544 c. 
 7) for a 30. 32. 33. 138. 
 
 146. 409 D g. 412. 431 
 
 a, b. 575 b. 
 77 from e, see e. 
 p 13 ; pronunc. 14 c ; for 
 
 9 409 D g. 
 7)- syll. aug. 365 b. 
 -1)- tcnse-suff., pass. 372. 
 
 468 ; plup. 453. 458. 
 -7j- mode-suff., see -"|i)-. 
 -ri TOO. sing. mase. 147 b. 
 
 in dual 192. 202 ; ace. 
 
 sing. 231 b. 
 -17 2 sing. 40 c. 383, 4. 
 ' 384 ; 3 sing. 407 b. 
 ^O)-t045, 1.78.120.608; 
 
 interrog. 930. 1017. 
 
 1016 a. 
 ^ timn 1046, 1 ; w. corn- 
 par. 643. 645; ^ Kard 
 
 646; ^ (^ S>5, ^ So-te) 
 
 w. inf. 954 ; om. 647. 
 ^ ti-uli/ 1037, 9. 120. 
 3 interrog. 1015. 1017 b. 
 
 78. 120. 
 ^ said, 275 b. 485. 655 a. 
 jf 283. 779 a. 1056, 4. 
 
 1054, 6;w. 3uperl.651. 
 i/3ii(» 409 D a. 
 'ijyeofioi w. gen. 741. 
 ^TyepeOovTcu {ayeipai) 494. 
 ijSe 1040. 
 
 ^SsiC) 87 a. 
 
 ^St) 1037, 4 b. 
 
 ^So/xoi pass. dep. 497 a ; 
 
 w. dat. 778; w. part. 
 
 983 ; i)3o^lev<|> (roi 771 a. 
 9tSos 216 D b. 
 ^SvETTEta 247 D. 
 ^Siis 72 D. 229. 263. 
 iie 1016 a. 1017 b; ^e 
 
 1017 b. 
 TjEi to p 39. 
 )iie.(i/) 87 a. 
 ri4\ios 73 D. 
 iiepeBonTai {aelpto) 494. 
 ^epoj 216 D, 22. 
 ^flca 72 D. 
 ^iefii/ 166. 
 ?IKa (ri)|Ui) 432, 
 ^JKHTra 264, 2. 
 7JK'>> om. 612 ; as pf. 
 
 827. 
 W or iiKte 216 D b. 
 il\iKia w. inf. 952. 
 ri\Uos 997. 276. 282. 
 ^A.101 73 D. 
 
 ,?lfitu 483 ; w. ace. 712 b. 
 ^ifiap 182. 
 ?lfjLas, ^/xds, 264. 
 TlfieeSj rjfieioiy etc. 261 D. 
 7)/ie'i' 104 a. 
 ijfiepd w. iyeviTo 602 d ; 
 
 om. 621 c ; wt. art. 661; 
 
 gen. 759; dat. 782. 
 7ifieT€p6ySe 219 D. 
 Vfiiripos 269. 689 ff. 
 -Tjjtti for -eai 409 D h. 
 ^/ti*', Ti/Av, 264. 
 hiitihios 293. 
 ^/uff-us 293 ; w. art. 671 ; 
 
 w. gen. 730 e. 
 TjfitTaKavrov 293. 
 ^/toj 283 D. 1056, 4. 
 ^/wi' 264. 
 ^v see iiv. 
 ■'iivdavov 359 D. 
 iiyUa 283. 1055, 3. 
 ^Woxos 213 D. 
 TiviTraTTOV {iiflirra) 436 D. 
 ijvopfTj 33 D. 
 
 ^virep 1037, 3; IjyTe 
 1045, 2. 
 
 -7(01, -TJCl, -TJOS, 208 b, c. 
 
 ?7rap 181. 182. 
 
 ijireipos 152. 
 
 ^pa 216 D b. 
 
 'HpoKAe'711 194 D. 
 
 iipapov 436 D. 
 
 ilpiyfveia 247 D. 
 
 ^poj (eapos) 172 b. 
 
 TipuKcMov (ipuKa) 436 D. 
 
 SipiBj 197-8. 
 
 -ps 2 sing. 407 b. 
 
 -^s nom. pi. 208 a. 
 
 -ijs adj., see -e<r-; corn- 
 par. 252 a, b. 
 
 -ps, -pin(i/), dat. pi. 142 
 (D). 
 
 -Tjffole- tense-suff. 372. 
 474. 
 
 T^trtraVj tJttwi' 254, 2 ; ovx 
 T\aaov 1028. 
 
 ¥iaaxos 225. 260 a. 
 
 -TjT-stems, 164 i. 
 
 ^Toi 1045, 1. 118. 
 
 ^Toi 1037, 10. 
 
 ^Top 166 D k. 215 D b. 
 cf. 716 a. 
 
 i)TTiluo pass. w. gen. 749 ; 
 w. part. 986. 
 
 7|u diphth. 13. 14 d. 
 
 ^fSs 258 D. 
 
 ^iSre 1064, 7. 
 
 fX' 283 D. 1066, 4. 
 
 W 197. 
 
 ^<«s 73 D. 159 D. 196 D. 
 
 0, pronunc. 21 ; to 
 62-3. 470. cf. 443 b ; 
 bef. 1 67. 397 ; doubled 
 47; added 543 c; 
 dropped 54. 66. 447 a. 
 
 -9-stems 164 d. 176 ff; 
 themes 397 ; forma- 
 tion in, 494. 
 
 floAao-fl-o wt. art. 661. 
 
 9a\cia 246 D. 
 
 edWa irteaXvia) 461 D C. 
 
 BaiJLUs, ea/i€ud, 247 D. 
 
 SdvaTos gen.~746 b. 
 
 flaTTTW 74 c. 
 
 Bapjiim w. ace. 712; 9a^ 
 p&y boldly 968 a. 
 
 9ApPos 60. 
 
 eipaos 60. 64. 190 D. 
 
 Batraa w. ace. 712 b. 
 
 eda-a-av {raxis) 74 b. 263 
 
378 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 eirepov 11 d. 82 ; Svotv 
 
 Gdrepov 626 b. 
 BaStia 14 D d ; w. inf. 952. 
 8avfiaC<D fut. mid. 496 ; w. 
 
 gen. 733. 744 ; BavfidCtn 
 
 ei 926. 
 Oaufiaffrhs 'otroSj Bavfiaff- 
 
 rm as, 1003 b. 
 -9e- tense-suffix 372. 468. 
 Bed 138 D e. 
 fleioj 248 D. 
 «e/iij 216, 7. 
 -flej/, -fle, local 217 ; -Bev 
 
 gen. 217 D. 
 flcds 42. 126. 16B; om. 
 
 602 c ; wt. art. 660 b ; 
 
 Bi6ipi 221 D b. 
 Bepeios 664. 
 
 B4pw : Bipaoiwi 422 D b. 
 ©efffjiOipopiois 782. 
 Bf^Tepos 248 D. 
 -At)- tense-suffix 468. 
 0^;3df6 219 a. of. 63. 
 B?i\vs as fein. 229 a. 248 
 
 D. 
 Bv\iiTepos 248 D. 
 eV 113 D. 
 07ipaiu 338. 
 -flijo-ole- tense-suff. 872. 
 
 474. 
 fli to (TO- 67. 397. 
 -fli local 217. 
 -8i imper. 380. 885, 2. 73 
 
 b. cf. 448 b ; om. 883, 
 
 2. 415 b. 
 Biyydvm w. gen. 738. 
 Byija-Km perf. 454. 490, 4. 
 
 456 b ; Imper. 466 ; 
 
 fut. perf. 467 ; w. ace. 
 
 718. 
 -flole- tense-suffix, 494. 
 Bol^Ttov 11. 
 Bovpis, Bovpos, 247 D. 
 Bpdaos 64. See Bdpffos. 
 ®pS.a(ra 67. 
 
 Bpe^oftat (rpexa) 74 c. 
 Bpc^a {rpctpio) 74 c. 
 BpTJvvs 166. 
 Bpl^ 74 a. 174. 
 Bpiirru 74 c. 
 BvydrTip 188. 
 fliJpdCf 63. 219 a. 
 Siipdo-i 220. 
 
 Boa 73 c. 393 a. 
 B'lis 172 a. 
 0uu/ia 14 D d. 
 
 I, quant, 9. 94 rem. ; pro- 
 
 nunc. 11 ; om. 44. 35. 
 
 401. 482. 
 1 intercli. w. e 31 ; w. o 
 
 31 ; w. ei 32. 394. 447 
 
 b. 511; w. 0182.451 b. 
 I changes prod, by, 66-9. 
 
 396 ff. 
 1 subscript 13. 89 a; in 
 
 dat. sing, of -o<r-stems 
 
 195; in Att. 2d decl. 
 
 159. 
 lof 4th 01.896 ff. 514 ff; 
 
 as redupl. 371. 
 -(-stems 164 c. 164 f. 201 
 
 ff. 549 ; vb. themes 
 
 489. 532. 586. 
 -i-form. suff. 549. 571, 5. 
 -I- mode-suffix 374. 388. 
 
 408. 418 a. 434. 446. 
 
 473 a. 
 -1 ease ending 133. 
 -1 loc. 220. 
 -1 paragogicum 274. 
 -id- form. suff. 566, 8. 
 
 652. 576 b. 136 if. 
 -lo- mode-Buff. 374 b. 
 
 434. 
 ia for ;u(o 290 D, 1. 
 -idSris 569. 
 idofuu voice 499. 
 fdo-i (cliii) 415 D a. 
 Idxa, -eo), 72 B. 
 -laa desider. etc. 573. 
 -iS- prim. suff. 549. 
 -iS-, -Ti5-, gent. suff. 660, 
 
 3. 
 -iS- Terb-theme 425. 
 
 671, 5. 
 -iSd-, -^d; -laSd-, masc, 
 
 -iS-, -S- fem. patro. suff. 
 
 559. 
 iSi 1040. 
 iSilv 72 D. 
 
 -i5io- dim. suff. 658, 2. 
 iBios 72 D ; w. gen. 764 
 
 o; iUd 779 a. 
 %cv 63 D a. 
 iSpis 246. 
 
 Ihpiie 393 a ; ISpivBitv 469 
 
 1). 
 lipiis 176 D. 
 -IE- opt.-suffix bef. V 874 
 
 b. 379 a ; tense-suff., 
 
 see -i"|e-. 
 Up&l 73 D. 
 Up6s 37 D f; w, gen. 
 
 764 c. 
 -not for -iffw 425. 
 -ifw v'bs 398. 514 ff. 446 
 
 a ; Att. fut. 426 ; der. 
 
 671, 5. 
 if a) augm. aor. 359 a. 
 -17)- mode-suffix 374. 379 
 
 a. 410. 418 a. 445. 456. 
 
 478 a. 
 'triiu 476. 94 D. 417 D a. 
 
 419 Da; aor. 369 a. 
 
 432. 443. 445 b. 
 iBi{s) 88 D; iBivrara 
 
 249 D. 
 ixanas w. gen. 757 a. 
 UfKos 72 D. 
 
 Vevoi 53 D a. 489 D, 47. 
 ,-iHo-s adj. 565; w. gen. 
 
 754 b. 
 Uku, fff, T^op 428 D b. 
 i\dof 227 D. 
 i\eus 226. 
 "iKios 72 D; 'l\i6Bi 217 
 
 D ; ^l\,6^t 221 D b. 
 t/iilpa 571, 9. 
 -re-stems 168 a. 
 -tv ace. sing. 1 79 ; dual 
 
 1-3. 
 •& for of 261 D b. 
 ha 881. 1066, 6 ; iVo rt 
 
 612. 
 -ivo-s adj. 566. 
 -10 gen. sing. 133. 164 D a. 
 -10- dim. suff. 558, 1 ; 
 
 place 561 ; adj. 564. 
 
 566 a. 
 -loje- tense-suff. 372. 396. 
 
 tofiev, iotfiey 94 D. 
 -lo-v (dim.) see -lo-. 
 ■iov-, -lieu- patr. suff. 659c 
 W 72 D. 
 -lo-s adj. 564. 
 iox^atpa 246 D. 
 iinroSoo-cia 246 B 
 
BREEK INDEX. 
 
 379 
 
 Xirms coll. 609. 
 
 iinr6Ta Hi D. 
 
 ipv^ Ti D. 
 
 'Ipij 72 D. 
 
 ip6s 37 D f. 
 
 is 72 D. 166. 
 
 -IS see 'tS-j -iSd-. 
 
 ro-fliSl. 478; 491. 
 
 'lo-fl^oi 220. 
 
 -i<ri dat. case-ending 1.33. 
 
 -tfTKo-, -tffKd-j dim. suff. 
 
 558, 3. 
 -urico\e- tense-suffix 403. 
 
 530 fe. 
 
 i<r6iwtp3s w. gen. 753 a. 
 fo-os, hos, 72 D. 250 a; 
 
 ■w. dat. 773. 
 -io'Tepos, -iffTaroSi 252 a. 
 WTTJM" 351. 331. 335-6. 
 
 456. 444 D. 381 D; re- 
 
 dupl. 70 ; augra. 358 a ; 
 
 impf. 419 D a; fiit. 
 
 pert 467 ; transit. 500, 
 
 1 ; w. gen. 748 b ; mid. 
 
 688 ; aor. 841 ; pf. 849. 
 itrxi'^ 3U3 a; aor. 841. 
 X(rx<o redupl. 393 b. 
 ITfT) 72 D. 
 iX9ur 166. 201. 
 txiip 213 D. 
 -10. verbs 396 ff. 571, 9. 
 i^{= ivl) 290 D, 1. 
 ioiK^, icoKO, 213 D. 
 -iwi'-, -ioif- patron. 559 c. 
 •laiv, -itTTOs, 253 ff. 
 
 K, 24-27; pronunc. 19; 
 dropped 86; bef. lin- 
 gual 51 ; bef. /jl 53 ; bef. 
 <r 54 ; bef. i 67. 397. 
 
 K for IT, 278 D. 281 D. 
 
 K to X 452. 464 D a. 470. 
 
 -K- themes 397. 
 
 -K movable in o6k 8S a. 
 
 -Ko- tense-suffix 372. 446 ; 
 in aor. 432. 443. 
 
 Ka for Ke 1052, 2. 
 
 Kay, KoS, etc. 84 D. 85 D. 
 
 KaSSvffai 84 D. 
 
 KoSaipa 571, 9. 
 
 Ka0ap6s w. gen. 753 g. 
 
 KaBfiiSa 361. 
 
 iC(Jei)/«i 484. 
 
 KaBlCa aug. 361. 
 
 KoSiaTniu imper. 419 D a. 
 
 Koi 1040 ff; eras. 77 c; 
 
 w. num. 291 ; w. two 
 
 subj. 606; w. part. 
 
 979 ; (cal 8s 275 b. 655 
 
 a ; real ravra 612a; koL 
 
 S)S 284 ; Kal r6i% ttji/, 
 
 655 a ; ra koI to., etc. 
 
 655 b ; KOI yap 1050, 4 
 
 d, e ; C( ( ihv) Kal, Kol 
 
 «' (^rfi/) 1053, 2 ; Ka! 8^ 
 
 1037, 4 b; Kol Si) ko/ 
 
 1042 c. 
 
 Kofirep w. part. 979. 1037, 
 
 3. 1053, 3. 
 KoiToi 1047, 6. 118. 
 Koiai (xau-uu) 36. 401 ; aor. 
 
 430 D. 
 KOK (kotij) 84 D. 
 KaK6s compar. 264, 2 ; w. 
 cog. ace. 717. 
 
 KaKovpyos w. gen. 754 a. 
 
 KaKTaye 84 D. 
 
 KaKcas noisiv w. ace. 712. 
 
 KuAe'u perf. 849. 
 
 KaAAlTvi/afKa 246 I). 
 
 Ka\Ar^j/(us 269 a. 
 
 Ka\((j compar. 254, 6 ; 
 Ki\6s 94 D. 
 
 K(l\os 159 D. 
 
 koAw/St) 395 a. 
 
 Ka\uirTi<i 395 ; mid. 812. 
 
 Ka\us €xc[ 602 d. 
 
 Kd\ii}S 159. 
 
 KdftXvos 152 b. 
 
 Kd/i/iopos 84 D. 
 
 KdfivQ) : KeKfirj^s 446 D ; 
 w. cog. ace. 715b; w. 
 part. 983. 
 
 Kav 11 a ; «& 1063, 2. 
 
 Kdi/eoy, Kavovv, 167. 
 
 KtiTr, tttip (ffarci) 84 D. 
 
 Kdpd, KdpTj, Kap, 216, 8. 
 
 KdpSonos 152 b. 
 
 Kdpriva 216, 8. 
 
 mtpTo 258 D. 
 
 Koprepeta w. part. 983. 
 
 icapT€p6s 64 D. 
 
 KdpTKTTos 64 D. 254 D, 1. 
 
 /cos 77 c. 
 
 xdr [Kard) 84 D. 
 
 K^TO 77 c. 
 
 KOTil 800 ; comp'ds w. 
 
 gen. 752 ; 1) xari 646. 
 Kardfia 442. 
 KaraysAdw w. gen. 752. 
 KaiayiyviiaKia w. gen. 752 
 
 a. 
 Kardyvvfu w, gen. 738 b. 
 KaToSovXaffts w. dat. 766 
 
 a. 
 KOToAXdTTO) w. dat. 772. 
 KaroAitw w. gen. 748. 
 KaTavX-tifftru 471 a. 
 KarappiiyvOiu w. aoc. 714 
 
 b. 
 H.aTdpx'o w. ace. 713. 
 Karaippovim w. gen. 752 ; 
 
 pass. 819 a. 
 KaTa^elhoaai w. gen. 752. 
 KaTw^ri(^i^o}tai w. gen. 
 
 752 a. 
 Karriyopew w. gen. 752 a. 
 KarOavew 84 D. 
 KOTO) compar. 260. 800. 
 KaiiT6s 11 c. 
 Kuio j'or Koiu 36, 401. 
 Ke, Key, 857 ff. 87 D. 113 
 
 D ; see &v. 
 -Keo- tense-suff. 372 D. 
 -Kei- tensc-suff. 372. 449. 
 Kei, Kcis 77 c. 
 KeiBif K€i6ey, KEitre, 283 
 
 D a. 
 Keijuoi 482 ; fut. 427 D ; 
 
 w. ace. 712 b ; am put 
 
 820. 
 KEH/OS 271 D. 
 Keii'6s 34 D. 
 Ketpa aor. 431 D c. 
 KcKK^yovres {K\d(u) 455 
 
 D a. 
 KeKfiTjtis {KafjLvtti) 458 B. 
 KeKopvB/xeyos 53 D a. 
 Kc KTTjfjLai 366 b. 
 xeAevSos 152 c. 214 D. 
 KeWa fut. 422 b; aor 
 
 431 c. 
 KiKo/uu 2 aor. 436 D. 
 KcC((s w. gen. 753 o. 
 Kepdvm/u w. dat. 772. 
 Ke'poj 181. 183. 
 Kepialvai 43 1 b. 
 KepSoAe'os 254 D, 9. 
 KepSluVf 'iffTOSj 254 D, 9 
 
S8U 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 IKipiXaiov appos. 626 b. 
 KexXaSoj^as 455 D a. 
 Ke'w, Kfla (fut.) 427 D. 
 Kc'us 161. 
 
 -m)- tense-suffix 372. 449. 
 ioj5e?os, K-ii^itrros 254 D, 
 
 11. 
 K^p tem. 166. 
 
 KTJpU^ 175. 
 
 Ki to (TO- 67. 897. 
 
 Kifianis 152 b. 
 
 Kifltic 74 D. 
 
 Kivhvvtiu aor. 841. 
 
 Ki-r 203 b. 
 
 KhaCm 398 b ; pf. 849 b ; 
 
 KfK\^yovTfs 455 D a. 
 KKaioia-ea 377 D. 
 K\ajs 179 D a. 
 K\aliD, {K\av-iiD) 35. 401. 
 K\(i| 179 D a. 
 KXau(ric£co 673. 
 KAacD Ibr kWu 401 ; fut. 
 
 mid. 495. 
 KKeFos 72 D. 
 -ie\eris 230 D a, b ; proper 
 
 names 194. 
 K\€ls 179 a. 
 KA.f(ai pf. mid. 461 a. 
 K\4irTris compar. 252 a. 
 K\eTrTa pf. 452. 
 K\Tits 179 D a. 
 ■K\TJs prop, names in, 194. 
 K\iairi<\>i 221 D a. 
 KAiJti) 393 a ; 2 aor. 489 
 
 D, 30 ; am called 820. 
 KfiiM 412. 
 
 Kvtari, Kvtira, 139 D. 
 -/to- adj. euff. 565. 
 Kotfidofiai aor. 841. 
 KoivSs w. gen. 754 c ; ^ 
 
 Koic'^ 3 e ; Koivri 119 a. 
 Koivavem w. gen. 737 ; w. 
 
 dat. 772. 
 KOifwiia w. dat. 772 b. 
 K0ivwv6s^ •aves, 216, 9. 
 KoTos 278 D. 
 KiiATros om. 621 e. 
 KOfiiia 348. 425. 398 D. 
 k6vis 201 D b. 
 K(<irn-o 289. 
 KtJirpo; 152 a. 
 nJiTTu fut. pf. 860 a ; in 
 
 comp. 810 a. 
 
 xSpT] 138 a. 
 
 K6p<ni, ic6p^ri, 139 e, 50. 
 
 -Ko-s adj. 665 ; w. gen. 
 
 754 b. 
 K6(ros, k6tc, KSrepos, 278 
 
 D. 
 KOTvXTtBovdfpt 221 D c. 
 Kov 278 D. 
 Kovpos 34 D ; Kovpdrepos 
 
 255 D. 
 K<!a>s 159 D. 
 Kpti(a 398; pf. 451 c. 
 
 456. 492, 8 ; 849 b. 
 KpaTa (/capd) 216, 8. 
 KpiTfffipi 221 D c. 
 KpaTfo) w. gen. 741. 736. 
 
 KpdTKTTOS 264, 1. 
 Kptiros 64 D. 
 /tpoT^is 254 D, 1 ; 258 D. 
 Kp4as 191. 190 D. 
 Kpeitrffav 254, 1. 
 Kpefitt/im ill a. 418 b. 
 
 487. 
 Kpiaaav 264 D, 1. 
 Kpijeei' 217 D. 
 Kpflo-ffo 67. 
 Kplfor Kpl9^ 215 D b. 
 npiia pf. 849 b. 
 KpiKd) pf. 448 b ; w. cog. 
 
 ace. 716 a. 725 c. 
 Kpoytcov 669 c. 
 Kpiirra w. two ace. 724 ; 
 
 -aaKov 493 a. 
 Kpiipa w. gen. 767 a. 
 Krd^etfos {icTeiva) 496 D. 
 Krdo/iai red. 365 b; pf. 
 
 subj. opt. 465 a; fut. 
 
 pf. 466 b ; mid. 817 ; 
 
 pf. 849. 
 KTedrefTO'i 215 D b. 
 KT^ivm 2 aor. 496 D. 440 
 
 D. 489, 4. 
 KTfls 168 b. 
 KTepas 190 D. 
 /crffo) 2 aor. 489 D, 28. 
 KvStdviipa 246 I). 
 KuSpis compar. 253 D. 
 KVKititV 186 D. 
 KVK\6aev 218. 
 K^VTepos 255 D. 
 Kup^m w. gen. 739 ; w. 
 
 part. 984. 
 Kupios gen. 753 b. 
 
 Kvpo) fnt. 422 b. ; aor 
 
 431 0. 
 KiJwi' 216, 10. 
 KX for XX 4'7- 
 KWOS 190 D. 
 KUKuo) 393 a. 
 Ko>\io> 393 a ; fut. mid, 
 
 496 a. 
 K<is 161. 
 
 A, 22-27; doubl. after 
 augm. 366 D a ; bef. i 
 66. 399. See lAguids. 
 
 -\-stems 187 a; tliemes 
 399. 
 
 \Sos216, 11. 
 
 Kay 6s 169 D. 
 
 Aayx'''"" 402 c; redupl. 
 366 ; w. gen. 737. 
 
 \ayiis 160-1. 
 
 \.d.Kos compar. 262 a. 
 
 Ka/i^dvo) 402 c; aug. 47 
 D ; redupl. 366 ; ac- 
 cent 387 b; w. gen. 
 736. 738 and a; mid. 
 814; w. part. 982; Ka- 
 ^dv with 968 b. 
 
 KavBdva w. aoc. 712 ; w 
 part. 984 ; Kaiiv se- 
 cretly 968 a. 
 
 AaoUim 170 D b. 
 
 \d.6s 160. 
 
 A5j216, 11. 
 
 Aaxera 246 D. 
 
 \4yixeyos aor. 489 D, 40. 
 
 \eyta gather redupl. 366. 
 
 Kiytn speak 2 aor. 489 D, 
 39; two ace. 725 a; 
 om. 612 ; pers. or ini- 
 pers. 944 and a. 946 
 a, b. 949 ; rh \ey6ixepov 
 626 b ; e5 \eyeiv rivd 
 712. 
 
 \c/7rm 29. 32. 344. 320-1. 
 461 b ; mid. w. gen. 
 749. 
 
 A.e'|o, \^|fo, 428 D b ; 483 
 D, 40. 
 
 \eX^ 199 a. 
 
 Aeciis 169. 160. 
 
 A.:^7<ij w. part. 981, 
 
 A^Sct 138 a. 
 
 \nv6s 162 b. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 381 
 
 \il6s 159 D. 
 \i to K\ 66. 399. 
 \iya 258 D ; Kiyis ib. 
 \Wo/iai, aug. 356 D a ; 
 
 w. gen. 738 b. 
 \6yos dat. 779 b ; eis A.(<- 
 
 70US 772 a. 
 KotSopeVj -cFirtfai, constr. 
 
 764, 2 b. 
 \ai7r((i 29. 544 u. ace. 
 
 719 b; ToS \o(iroi} 769. 
 -\<(-s adj. 667, 6. 
 \oia>i\2 b. 
 Aun-EO) w. ace. 716 b, 
 Kvxvos 214 D. 
 A.iJw94D. 313-19. 393 a; 
 
 pf. opt. 465 D ; 2 aor. 
 
 489 D, 31. 
 \ataii, -trepos, 264 D, 1. 
 Xatpioj w. gen. 748. 
 \<fav, \^(rTos, 254, 1. 
 
 M, 23. 27; bef. p (or 
 
 \) 60 ; mutes bef. fi 
 
 53 ; doub'. after augm. 
 
 365 D a ; inserted 402 
 
 c. See lAquids. 
 -fia- form. sutf. 651, 2 a. 
 ■fia ueut. 181. See -iiar-. 
 fui 1037, 13. 723. 
 -fuu 1 sing. 376; elision 
 
 80 0. 
 Mata 15 a. 
 fiat/Aaa 574. 
 Iialonai. 401 D ; 2 pf. 492 
 
 D, 9. 
 /idicaipa 247 D. 
 fu{«a;> 246. 248. 
 /iaxpds io? D ; fiaicp^ 781 
 
 a ; (^s) noKpdv 622. 
 fiaKp6x"P 686. 
 ^ctAo 80 c. 258. 66 ; juS\- 
 
 Aoj/, /«£\i(rTo 258 ; to 
 
 form comp. sup. 256 ; 
 
 w. comp. sup. 652 c. 
 IMv for -iiTiv 1 sing. 376 
 
 D a. 
 Iiav tor liijv 1037, 11. 
 pMvBavw 402 c; augm. 
 
 355 D a; w. gen. 750; 
 
 w. part. (inf. ) 982. 986 ; 
 
 ri naedf 968 c. 
 UlapaBiiyi 783 b. 
 
 futpripoptai 571, 9. 
 fuiprvpos 216 D, 12. 
 luipTus, 165. 216, 12. 
 jMiitruv 253 D. 
 fitSo-Til 174. 213 D. 
 -jtaT- form. suff. 563, 1. 
 
 576 a. 
 fuixo/iai w. cog. ace. 715 
 
 a ; w. dat. cf . 772. 
 juc 113 a. 261. 
 Meyapd-Se 219. 
 Ii4yas 247. 253. 719 b; 
 
 /le'^a w. gen. 730 c; 
 
 cog. ace. 716 b; /iiyur- 
 
 rov w. superl. 652 c ; 
 
 rh lidyuTTov appos. 626 
 
 b. 
 jue'CwJ' 253 D. 
 -HeSa 1 pi. 376. 
 -fiseov 1 dual 378. 
 /jLeeiffKni w. gen. 743. 
 /teSiiai 393 a. 
 fieiCav 253. 
 /jLeipo/uu redupl. 366 D. 
 
 366. 
 juefj = t^iv 216 D, 25. 
 fieluv 254, 3 ; /xeioi' wt. ^ 
 
 647. 
 /leXaj 235. 248. 233. 
 M€Ae' 215 D b. 
 
 /iEA.1 181. 
 
 MeA^Tj; 783 b. 
 
 /AeAiTTouTo 238. 
 
 jUeAAu augm. 355 b ; w. 
 
 inf. 846. 
 /ie\os, lUeAj;, 1064. 
 fieKw w. gen. 742 and a ; 
 
 li(\ov 973 a. 
 fii-tivtipxiiy see fu^viiffKoj. 
 fi4fi(pofiai w. gen. 712 b. 
 
 744. 
 -H^v 1 pi. 376. 
 /ieV 1037, 12. 1046, 1 a; 
 
 after art. 654. 666 c; 
 
 after prep. 786 a ; for 
 
 fi'tiv 1037, U; fih odv, 
 
 lih H, 1037, 12. 
 -fievaif -fiey, inf. ;'81 D ; 
 
 for -i/ai 386 D, 5. 473 D. 
 M€Vi\eois 162 a. 
 -fievo- part. suff. 382. 663. 
 /levoivdai 409 D a. 
 /ifinav 77 b. 
 
 fi4vT0i 1047, 4 ; ot fiiiiToi 
 
 aWi 1035 c. 
 jiieVtt) w. ace. 712. 
 liepls om. 621 c. 
 litpiaipl^a 398 D. 
 -/iEs 1 pi. 376 D a. 
 p,fai\ii^plB. 60. 
 -/lea-Oa for -^efla 376 D c. 
 lie(ros compar. 250 a. 255 
 
 D ; w. art. 671 ; wt. 
 
 art. 661; ^i/jueo-p 621b. 
 juEtriroToj 266 D. 
 ^E(r((r)r)7iJ(s) 88 D. 
 fie<rT6s w. gen. 753 c. 
 /leri 801 ; adv. 786 ; /icVa 
 
 786 a. 
 HfTaMaiii w. gen. 737. 
 fi€Ta\ttnPdya w. gen. 737. 
 /leTo/icAei w. gen. 742 a ; 
 
 w. part. 983. 
 fjieTafie\o/jLai pass. dep. 
 
 497 a ; w. part. 983. 
 jueTolu w. gen. 757; w. 
 
 part. 976. 
 juETaTre/tTTCtf mid. 813. 
 Ix^TairKafffiSs 213. 
 liiT^KtaBov (iniov) 494. 
 liereffTi w. gen. 734. 
 jucTExiB w. gen. 737. 
 /t6T€CD/jf^a) 362 a. 
 fizTctapos 36. 
 fieroxos w. gen. 763 ii. 
 fiirpov 1066. 
 /leC 261 D. 
 jue'x/ji 80 b ; TV. gen. 758 ; 
 
 conj. 920 ff. 1066, 8; 
 
 w. o5, haou, 999 b. 
 ixixpi(,s) 88 D. 
 -/ir;, see -/io-. 
 Iii 1018 ff. 78. 88 b; w. 
 
 ind. 1021 ; w. subj. 
 
 866, 2. 867; w. impr. 
 874; w. part. 969 d; 
 final 881. 887; inter- 
 rog. 1016; jU^/*oi 612; 
 fiii for ou 1027 ; iik Sti, 
 ju^ htrws 1036 a ; |u)/ ou 
 
 867. 887-8. 1033-4; 
 ou jU'i) 1032 ; Sti /h^ 
 1049 rem. ; (Ift-i), ei /»j| 
 El except (if) 906 a 
 1052, 2. 
 
 /tTjSa^urj, -oO, -3j, 287. 
 
382 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 laiSe 1043 ; /iriSe eXs 290 
 
 a ; ^1,8' Sj 284. 
 /jLVSeis 290 a ; neut. 719 b. 
 fiTiSerepos 287. 
 fiTlSofuu 510 D, 22. 
 li.r\Kii.ojMi plup. 458 D. 
 
 flTjKeTl 88 b. 
 
 ^■flKllTTOS 253 D. 
 
 fxilKoiv 166. 
 
 -;U7;i/ pera. ending 376. 
 
 ^■i\v month 184 ; gen. 759 ; 
 
 o(Toi fiYives 1002 b. 
 Iiiiv in trulh 1037, 11. 
 
 1047, 3; ou niiii aK\ii 
 
 1036 c; ^ jUTji/ (Ji |UeV) 
 1037, 9. 
 fi7]vu(i) 393 a. 
 fii)T6 1044. 118. 
 ;U<)T7)/)188; wt. art. 660 a. 
 faiTiera 147 D. 
 jui^Tty, /i^Ti 287. 
 yiiTjTis, ^^Ti 201 D b. 
 fi-ljTpcus 197. 
 -fii 1 sing. 376. 379 a. 383 
 
 D, 1. 385, 1; 311;,om. 
 
 383, 1. See Eng. in- 
 dex, Mi-forms. 
 fiitt (flj) 290. 
 niymni f ut. Tiass. 474 d ; 
 
 2 aor. 489 D, 41. 
 Hmp6s 254, 3 ; gen. 743 b. 
 MJKiiirios 564 a. 
 ^illi€oiJiai voice 499. 
 /it/ivijirKo) pf. 365 b. 465 
 
 a ; fitf^vriai 462 D ; fut. 
 
 perf, 466 b ; w. gen. 
 
 742 ; pf. 849 ; w. part. 
 
 (inf.) 982. 986. 
 uh 261 D. 113 D. 
 mhas 161. 212 D. 198 D. 
 litaya 403 0. 
 fuMa mid. 816, 10. 
 ^fi bef. /I 463 b. 
 /JLt/a, fJLVea 144. 
 fivdo^ai 409 D a. 
 ^viaifievos 409 D a. 
 -lUO- fui-m. sufl. 551, 2. 
 uoi 261. 80 D. 113 a. 
 fioTpa om. 621 c. 
 ftoT^ra 34 D. 
 ■lnov- adj. suft. 662, 3. 
 [lovds 296 d. 
 uoj/ax^ 295 c. 
 
 li6vos tSiv &Woiv 755 b ; 
 fxovov oh 1035 b. 
 
 fiovotpiyos compar. 252 a. 
 
 -fio-s masc. 561, 2. 
 
 liov 261. 113 a ; as pos- 
 sess. 689. 
 
 fjLovvos 34 D. 
 
 nOBeofuu 409 D b. 
 
 fivta 139 e. 
 
 fivptds 295 d. 
 
 fLuptoi (fivpioi) 288. 
 
 /iiCs 166. 201. 
 
 fiuxolraTos 265 D. 
 
 fivta 393 a. 
 
 -,u«y adj. 562, 3. 676 a. 
 
 /Mwv (jU^ o5v) 1015. 
 
 fxwffa 34 D. 
 
 N, 23. 27; bef. other 
 cons. 55. 463 ft ; bef. ; 
 66. 400; doubled af- 
 ter augm. 366 D a ; 
 dropped in pf. 448 b ; 
 in theme 619. 448 a. 
 460. 463 ; inserted 
 402 0. 523; 469 D; 
 ch. to 7-nasal 448 b. 
 460; added in forma- 
 tion 543 0. 
 
 V 5th class 402. 521 ff. 
 
 -y- stems 164 j; adj. 283 ; 
 themes 400. 618 ff. 
 
 -V neut. 151. 
 
 -V ace. sg. 133. 169. 179 ; 
 voc. sg. 133. 151 a. 
 
 -V 1 sg. 376 ; om. 433 a ; 
 3 pi. 376. 879 a. 383, 
 3. 385 D, 3. 473 D. 
 
 -va- tense-suffix, 5th class 
 372. 402 f. 621 ff. 
 
 -i/oi inf. 381. 386, 5 ; ace. 
 389 d ; elis. 80 D. 
 
 ran087, 13. 723. 
 
 vatsTiiairKov 493 b ; pcueroi- 
 oyra 41)9 D a. 
 
 valx' 118 a. 
 
 i/ala 401 D. 
 
 vdis 36. 160. 
 
 vavs 206, 
 
 j/avaiiropos 675 c. 
 
 i/ai;<()i 221 D c. 
 
 j/S dropped bef. o- 66. 
 
 -«- tense-suffix, see -i">|e-. 
 
 veceros 255 a. 
 
 -vEc- tense-suffix, see 
 
 veiKitw 409 D b. 
 
 Wkus 166. 
 
 -vfo^c- tense-suffix 402 d. 
 
 624. 
 v€vp7i(pi 221 D a. 
 yecD swimy augm. 365 D a. 
 vfiis 36. 169-60. 
 yecitroiKos 576 c. 
 vil 1037, 13. 723. 
 -irj/ii v'bs 488. 
 vr)((j J59 1). 
 v?i<ros 163. 
 i/rjCy 14 D d. 206 D. 
 v8 dropped bef. <r 66. 
 vl(a> theme 398 c. 
 VLxda w. cog. ace. 716 a; 
 
 w. gen. 749 ; w. part. 
 
 986 ; pr. for pf. 827. 
 vh 261 D a. 113 D. 
 vl(pet wt. subj. 602 c. 
 -nvv- tense-sufflx 402. 
 
 525 ff. 
 -yole- tense-suffix 372. 402 
 
 a. 621. 
 m/il(a w. part. 982. 
 v6oSj vovs^ 167. 
 -yo-s adj. 669, 4. 
 ma-ea w. cog. ace. 715 a; 
 
 inc. aor. 841. 
 v6fros 1 62 e. 
 fitrcpiiv) 87 D. 
 v6tos dat. 782 a. 
 -vs aco. plu. 133. 143. 154 
 
 e. 169 a. 201 D. 204. 
 -ya-i 3 pi. 376 and a. 
 -VT- bef. 0- 56. 463 a 
 
 stems in, 184 h. 237 
 
 part, suffix 882. 663 
 
 decl. 241. 
 -i/Toi 3 pi. 376. 464. 
 -yri 3 pi. 376 and a. 407 
 
 D. 69 D. 
 -r/TO 3 pi. 376. 464. 
 -VTcoK 3 pi. impr. 380. 
 -vv' tcnse-suff. 5th class 
 
 872. 402 e. 625 ff. 
 -1/0/11 Tbs. 419 b. 488 a. 
 viH(pa 189 D. 
 vi(y) 113 D. 87 D. 120 
 
 1048, 3. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 383 
 
 vvv 120. 1048, S. 
 
 vi^ gen. 769; dat. 782; 
 
 wt. art. 661. 
 ywi", i/tjiV, 261 D. 
 vutTepas '269 D. 
 
 H, pronuno. 21 b. 
 
 {eiTOi 34 D; ^ivFos 72 
 
 Db. 
 t,iv = ttiv 806. 
 \ia, 393 a. 
 -ifl} fut. perE. 467. 
 
 O, name, 8 ; pronunc. 11 ; 
 intercb. w. a, e, see a ; 
 w. u 31. 
 
 o for d 218. 676 a, b; 
 for CO 373 D, 444 D. 
 
 o to 1 31. 
 
 o to o\i 34. 33 (1. 
 
 -0- to a) 33. 168(2); 249. 
 407. 356. 
 
 -0- dropped 545 c. 559 b ; 
 after -oi- 250. 
 
 -o- tense-auffix, see -»|j-. 
 
 -o- form. suff. 548 ; ac- 
 cent 582 c. 
 
 -0- stems 151 ff; incomp. 
 575 a. 
 
 -o- themes 489. 531. 
 
 -0- added to theme 405 ; 
 to stem 575 a. 
 
 b, V, t6, 270. 272. Ill 
 a; in poetry 653 ; de- 
 monstr. 654 ff. 272 
 b; as rel. 275 D ; 6 
 /ley, & 5e, 654 ; w. rts 
 
 654 a; w. appos. 625 
 b ; i S4, 654 e ; (to! t6v 
 etc. 665 a; rb Kai t6 
 
 655 b ; nph tou 655 d ; 
 as art. 656 ff ; ol irdvTfs 
 w. num. 672 a ; iv ro7s 
 w. sup. 652 a ; toS w. 
 Inf. 960 ; ri /ii) w. inf. 
 961 a. 1029. 
 
 8 neut. of Ss 275 ; crasis 
 76 b; for 3i 275 D; 
 for 8ti 1049, 1. 
 
 Q^pifjunraTpn) 246 D. 
 
 oySois 296 d. 
 
 oyUaros 288 D. 
 
 iyioos 288. 42 D. 
 
 oySiiiKoi'Ta 288 D. 
 
 iye 1037, 1. 
 
 oSc, {jSe, T((S€, 271. 272. 
 282. 118; use C95 ff; 
 w. art. 673 ; wt. art. 
 674; 65t 274; rdS' 
 iKe'ivo 697 0. 
 
 oSfiTi 53 D a. 
 
 iS6s 152 c; om. 621-2; 
 gen. 760 a. 
 
 oSois 168 b ; oSiiv 168 D. 
 
 "OBu(r{(r)EiJs 47 U. 
 
 ^"le- variable vowel 310. 
 372 a. 383. 406 ; tense- 
 suffix 372. 393 ff. 436. 
 603 ff ; mode-suff. for 
 -"I,- 373 D. 433 D b. 
 444 D. 437 D a; in 
 plup. 468 D. 
 
 oei to ou 40 a. 410 b. 
 
 -o-ei5r|S adj. 686 a. 
 
 077 to tf 417. 
 
 Se^v 283. 284. 1056, 2; 
 attraction 997 a. 
 
 o9i 283 D. 1056, 1. 
 
 SBoiviKa 1050, 3. 82. 
 
 01 13; pronunc. 14 a; 
 to y (aug.) 357 ; un- 
 changed in aug. 357 a ; 
 interch. w. ei 29. 544 c. 
 548. 
 
 -01 elided 80 D ; short for 
 accent 102 a. 386. 
 
 -oiTOC. sing. 199. 
 
 oT pron. 261. 113 a; ac- 
 cent 685 a. 
 
 of adv. 283. 284. 1056, 3 ; 
 w. gen. 757. 
 
 -oia fem. 139 c. 
 
 oTa conj. w. part. 977. 
 
 oJSa 491. 72 D. 849 b; 
 redupl. 363 D; plup. 
 458 D ; w. part, (inf.) 
 982. 986; e5 o?S' Sti 
 1049, 1 a; oUff h 
 Spairov 876. 
 
 OiSlirovs 216, 13. 
 
 -01)) for -oia 139 D. 
 
 ■olriv, -c/tjs, -olri opt. 457. 
 410 a. 
 
 oi^vpi^Tepos 249 D. 
 -oiif for -oil/ in dual 164 
 D f. 171 D a. 
 
 aUaSe 217. 219. 118. 
 oifceios 564 ; w. gen. 754 o. 
 oiKc'ai fut. mid. 496 a ; p£ 
 
 mid. 464 D a. 
 oXKoeiv 217. 
 oiiofli 217 D. 
 oricoi 102 b. 220. 
 oIkovSi 219 D. 
 o?/coi 72 D ; om. 730 a. 
 o'lKTipa aug. 357; w. gen. 
 
 74-4. 
 0LKTp6s compar. 263 D. 
 oifwt 80 D. 
 
 ol/ui^ai fut. mid. 495. 
 -oiy dual 133. 
 -oif for -otfu opt. 379 b. 
 ohos 72 D ; om. 621 c. 
 oitioxoiin aug. 369 D. 
 -010 gen sing. 154 D a. 
 oto/j-ai, olfiai, 2 sing. 384 
 pass. dep. 497 a ; w, 
 gen. 733 a; mid. 817 
 hyperb, 1062. 786 a 
 w. iniin. 946 b. 
 -oio-s adj. 564 b. 
 ahs 276. 282. 92 D d. 
 699. 997. 1000 ff; w. 
 sup. 651 ; ofoK, ofa, w. 
 part. 977 ; in exclam. 
 1001 a ; oTos <rv, etc. 
 1002. 
 oUs TE, oUa-re 10(10. 1041. 
 
 118. 
 -ou ace. pi. 164 D e. 
 oh 210. 72. 
 -oio-o for -oKo-o 34 D 242 
 
 D. 
 -oio'i(i') dat. pi. 156. 
 olxofn-at pr. for pf. 827. 
 Sk^ 281 D. 
 uKvos w. inf. 952. 
 Skoios, &K68ev, okov 281 D. 
 6k6ito!, dK6Tepos 281 D. 
 oKilCoiv 254, 4. 
 oXi^i^Kij 297. 
 o\/7or 254, 4 ; w. art. 
 665 ; gen. 743 b ; dat 
 781 a. 
 6\tyap4a w. gen. 742. 
 o\tCa>v 254 D, 4. 
 uWO/u pf. 601. 848. 
 S\os w. art. 672. 
 iiu\4a w. dat. 772. 
 
384 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 i/jLviiu imper. 415 D b ; 
 
 w. ace. 712. 
 S/ioios, l>iwi6(j>, w. dat. 773. 
 &iu>K\dai 409 D a. 
 ilxoKoyiw f ut. mid. 496 a ; 
 
 w. dat. 772 ; w. part. 
 
 981. 
 4/ioS 760 a ; w. dat. 772 c. 
 dfiuvufios w. gen. 764 d; 
 
 w. dat. 773. 
 Sftas 1047, 6 ; w. part. 
 
 979 b. 
 -0V-, -inv-, form. suff. 565. 
 -ov- compar. sterna in, 
 
 236. 
 -ova- form. suff. 555. 
 &iiaj> 215 b. 
 ivSe UtmvSe 219 D. 
 oveiSi^a with dat. or aec. 
 
 764 b. 
 tjyetpos 213. 
 mli/rifu 31 ; aor. 440 b. 
 
 489, 5 ; accent 445 a ; 
 
 mid. w. gen. 740. 
 uvofia dat. 780 a. 
 -oi'T-stems 241. 383, 6. 
 
 885, 6. 
 ofi/ya? pf. mid. 463 a. 
 ofiis 98. 
 
 -oos adj. in, 223. 
 '6ov = Ho for oE 275 D. 
 Sin; 283. 1056,4. 1064,6. 
 6mi\lico5 281. 282. 
 STVvlKa 28S. KI55, 3. 
 fcio-SeC;-) 87 D. 255 D ; w. 
 
 gen. 757. 
 oirl<r(a-)ii! 47 D. 
 OTrlffTaTos 265 D. 
 ^TrA-f^Tcpos, -Taros, 255 D. 
 air((flEj/283. 997 a. 1056,2. 
 diriJei 1066, 1. 
 oiroi 283. 1056, 3. 
 im'ios 281 ff. 699 a. 
 iir6<ros 281. 699 a. 
 ^TTi^irTos 294. 
 iiT6Tav 860. 913. 1056, 1. 
 6n6Ti 283. 1055, 1. 
 dir6Tepos 281. 282. 
 oirou 283. 1056, 1. 
 6-7nTo7os, dTTiriTepos, 47 D. 
 
 281 D. 
 Sinria-e 283 D. 
 iTTiriiTc, Sttttms, etc. 281 D. 
 
 Srrai 283. 1054, 3; w. 
 superl. 651; fin. 881 
 fif. 885 ff. 887 a ; ovx 
 (ixi)) OTTMs 1035 a. 
 
 6paa) aug. 369 ; redupl. 
 369; fut. 383 D, 4; 
 iSc 387 b ; w. oirais 885 
 ff; w. firi 887 c; w. 
 part. 982. 
 
 opyalfa aor. 431 b. 
 
 op-yl^ofiai w. part. 988. 
 
 opcyofxai w. gen. 739. 
 
 opetos, dp4(rTepoSj 248 D. 
 
 opfoi 72 D b. 
 
 £p8pos wt. art. 661. 
 
 Spxiw w. two ace. 725. 
 
 opvWodTjpas 149. 
 
 opi/ts, tpvts, 166. 176. 216, 
 14. 
 
 ipm/ii fut. 422 b ; aor. 
 431 c. 428 D b. 436 D. 
 489 1), 42 ; pf. 368 D. 
 
 opiaaw redupl. 368. 
 
 opipavis w. gen, 753 g. 
 
 opx^s 166. 
 
 -OS, -o-v, see -o-. 
 
 -oir-stems 196. 
 
 -OS neut. 190. 553, 2; in 
 comp. 578 a. 
 
 -OS gen. sing. 133 ; ace. 
 pi. 154 D e. 
 
 i's possess. 72 D. 269; 
 686 a. 690 a. 692. 
 
 «s rel. 275. 282 ; 627 fF. 
 699. 993 ff; as de- 
 monst. 275 b. 664 d; 
 &<(>' o5. ^1 o5, eV S, eh S 
 999 b ; ave^ S>v, 4^ av 
 999; Ss yt 1037, 1; 
 neut. 8 or 3 T6 for Sti 
 1049, 1. 
 
 6ir6.Kis 297. 
 
 SfTTtfjiepai 1002 b. 
 
 So-os 276. 282 ; 699. 997 ; 
 w. superl. 651. 1000 ff; 
 aec. 719 b; dat. 781 a; 
 offov 00 1035 b ; in ex- 
 clam. 1001 a. 
 
 otros irep 286. 
 
 cVirep 1037, 8. 
 
 da-a-iKi 297 D. 
 
 Sffirdrios 276 D. 
 
 iaae 215 D a. 
 
 So-o-os 47 D. 276 D. 
 StTTe 856 a, 
 offTeW, ^o'Toyi', 157. 
 So-Tis 280. 282. 286. 118 1 
 
 699 a. 997. 1002 a. 
 
 1011. 
 hffTtffhr}^ SffTitrovv, etc. 
 
 285, 1002 a. 
 oa-ippalyofiai with gen. 742. 
 -OT- pai-t. suffix 382. 563. 
 Hrav 860. 913. 
 Ste 283. 121 a. 1052. 
 
 1055, 1 ; w. T^xtffTa 
 
 1008 a; els Sre Ke 
 1055, 7. 
 
 oVeu, &'tt6u, ottco, otcw, 
 
 Sreftiy, ireoio't, 280 D. 
 Sti 80 b. 121 a; declar. 
 
 1049, 1. 930 ff; cans. 
 
 925; w. superl. 651; 
 
 expressed by pron. 
 
 999 ; irreg. after rel. 
 
 1009 a; ovx Sti 1035 
 a ; Sti /i'fi 1049, 1 rem. 
 
 SVis, 'oTiva, oTti'as, 280 D. 
 
 Stou, otw, etc. 280 a. 
 
 Stt. 47 D. 280 D. 
 
 ov 13; pronune. 14 a; 
 spurious 14 b; for o 
 38 D ; interch. with eu 
 29. 409 D f. 648 a; 
 from 0, see o. 
 
 -ou stems, 206. 
 
 oil gen. sing. 148. 154 a. 
 
 ov- unch. in augm. 357 a. 
 
 -ou 2 sing, imper. accent 
 
 391 ^J. 
 
 ov, ovK, OVX, ovxl, 88 a. 
 Ill d. 86 b. 1018 ff; 
 interrog. 1015; wt. /luf 
 723 a; ou for ;u^ 1028; 
 ovx 8ti, ovx Sitojs 1036 
 a ; ov ju^j/ {fievTot) &\\d 
 1035 c; ou /iii 1032; 
 fiil oil 1033 ff. 
 
 o5, oT, e, 261. 118 a; 685. 
 677 a. 690 a. 687. 
 
 oSadv. 283.284. 1056,1. 
 
 ofeTos (oSj) 216 D, 16. 
 
 oi/Safjifi, -ov, -us, 287. 
 
 o6So$'l90D. 
 
 ouSc 1043; ouS^ ets 290 
 a ; ouS' &s 284. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 385 
 
 •iSefi 290 a ; w. pi. 609 a; 
 
 ouSeis '6ffTis oil 1003 a ; 
 
 oiSiv 719 b. 703 a; 
 
 ovBsvSs 746. 
 oiSerepos 287. 
 ovK, see oil ; oiic 'Jl. 
 OWKETI 88 b. 
 oiiKl 73 D. 
 oiiKovVj otjKovv 1048, 2 a. 
 
 1015. 120. 
 oii\6^ivos 33 D. 
 O^\v/;(iroio 33 D. 
 -oSi/ aco. sing. 1 99 D. 
 olv 1048, 2 i w. rel. 285 ; 
 
 aft. art. 666 c ; after 
 
 prep. 786 a. 
 oSviKa 1049, 2. 1050, 3. 
 oHvofia 33 B. 
 oM 77 a. 
 ou/javrfetK 217 D. 
 olipeai augm. 359. 
 oSpeos 33 D ; oSpos 73 D. 
 -ous ace. plu. 154 e. 
 -ous adj." 223-4. 566. 
 -ov! particip. 385, 6. 
 oSs 172 a. 216, 15. 
 -ouo-i (for -o-yai) 407 c. 
 ouT({a), aor. 440 D. 489 D, 
 
 22. 
 oBte 1044. 608. 
 oStls 287. 
 oStoi 1037, 10. 
 ouTos 271. 272. 282. 695 
 
 ff ; w. art. 673 ; wt. art. 
 
 674 ; w. nom. for voc. 
 
 707. cf. 723 b ; w. verb 
 
 om. 612; pi. for sing. 
 
 636 ; maso. or fem. for 
 
 neut. 632 a ; neut. for 
 
 Diasc. fem. 6b2 ; as 
 
 adv. 719 c; w. gen. 
 
 730 c ; w. jucV, 5e', 654 
 
 b ; toSt' (kuvo 697 c. 
 ofnovt 274. 721. 
 o»tib(j) 272 c. 283. 88 o; 
 
 w. part. 976 b. 
 
 h^iiXa 399 a ; aor. in wish 
 
 871 a. 
 O0CA.A.U 431 D d. 
 S(pe\os 215 b. 
 oi^BaKiuia 573. 
 6<tia 166. 
 
 o<\i\iaKiivui w. gen. 745. 
 uippa 920 ff. 1055, 7; = 
 
 cms 283 D. 881. 
 i/xos, oxea 215 D a ; 
 
 iJxeiri;" 221 D c. 
 -oxos c'pMs, accent, 582 c. 
 o^i w. V 602 d ; w. gen. 
 
 757 a. 
 6\fit/ia6'lis w. gen. 754 a. 
 ixjiios compar. 250 a. 
 o^o(ticiyos compar. 252 a. 
 OH) for am, etc. 409 D a. 
 
 424 D ; for oou 409 D o. 
 -oa verba 325. 409-12. 
 
 n, 24 ff; -TTT- in pro- 
 nouns, etc. 281 D. 
 
 w bef. T-mute 51 ; bef. /n, 
 53 ; bef. <r 54. 
 
 IT to K 278 D. 281 D ; to 
 (^ 452. 470. 
 
 iraij 172 a. 180. 86; wt. 
 art. 660 a. 
 
 TTiUoi with pres. and im- 
 perf. 826. 
 
 Tra\ai6s compar. 250. 
 
 irdXii' in comp. 59. 
 
 iroAAoi 2 aor. 489 D, 44. 
 
 irac in comp. 59. 
 
 irai/Tax^ 295 c. 
 
 TTiiiiToBeji 218. 
 
 TrivTiDS 267. 
 
 rip 84 D. 802. 
 
 irapi 802. 787 ; in comp. 
 775 ; w. compar. 648. 
 
 'TTiipa for irdpeffTi 109 b. 
 785 a. 
 
 vapafialva vr. ace. 712 c. 
 
 wapal 802. 
 
 TTopoTTA.'^irior w. dat. 773. 
 
 irapcuFKevdCoi pf. mid. 
 464 D a ; impers. 602 d. 
 
 irapdffTd Hi!,. 
 
 TrapaTl6Tj/xt mid. 816. 
 
 Trapax(^p^tii w. gen. 748. 
 
 irdpfi/u w. dat. 775. 
 
 •nap^ffKevASaTot 464 I) a. 
 
 irapextii w. two acc. 726 ; 
 mid. 814. 
 
 iraplffTafiai w. dat. 776. 
 
 Tripoiee(v) 87 D. 
 
 Trapoifiias, rh rrjs 626 b. 
 
 TrapoLvea augm. 362 a. 
 
 trapoirepos 255 D. 
 
 wipos w. inf. 955 a. 
 
 jras 240. 239 ; w. and wt. 
 
 art. 672 ; ms tu 609 a. 
 
 703 ; wav w. gen. 730 
 
 c ; Travri 781 a. 
 irdiTtrtiiv 253 D. 
 viax" 403 c ; pf. mid. 
 
 492 D, 14; am treated 
 
 821); W irdBo) 866, 3; 
 
 t/ TrafltSi/ 968 e. 
 vixTiip 188 ; wt. art. 660 a. 
 Xii.Tpo«Kos 213 D. 
 Traia mid. 812 a; fut, 
 
 perf. 466 b. 850 a ; w. 
 
 part. 981. 
 TToxiis compar. 253 D. 
 Treifltii 197. 
 ireWo) 347. 328; 2 aor. 
 
 436 D ; 2 pf. 492 D, 
 
 16;intr. 501;pf. 849; 
 
 mid. 812 a; w. acc. 
 
 716 b ; w. two acc. 
 
 724; w. dat. 764, 2; 
 
 ■KtiSTiov 992. 
 ir^ivaovTo. 409 D a. 
 Tttwiia 412 ; w. gen. 742. 
 Weipaxih 208 d. 
 ■Keip6.o}jju w. gen. 738. 
 weTpap 182. 
 7reA<^f(»2 aor. 489 D, 24; 
 
 1 aor. 428 D b ; w. dat. 
 
 772. 
 TTcAe/cus 166. 201. 
 TeAofiat 2 aor. 437 D. 
 nE\o7r(ii'-i'7)(ros 575 c, 
 Te/ards 296 d. 
 jreV'ire 288 D. 
 Trefinw pf. mid. 463 b ; w. 
 
 cog. acc. 715 a. 
 irdvris 246. 248 ; w. gen. 
 
 753 c. 
 irevBecD, vaiSi\nevai, 412 
 
 Do. 
 irfvia dat. 776. 
 irtVoo-Se 492 D, 14. 
 TTfTrptcfi^vyf 621 c. 
 ire-TTTOjuai 365 b. 
 •jre-TTTtoKa 365 b. 
 ■nittav compar. 261 a. 
 ircp 113 d. 118. 1037, 8; 
 
 w. rel. 286; w. part. 
 
 979 a. 
 
386 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 irepd compar. 260. 
 ire'pdi' w. gen. 757. 
 Trepas 183. 
 
 irepdw TTtiSa 716 rem. 
 irepBai aor. 436 D. 489 D, 
 
 45. 
 irtpi 803. 80 b. 109 a. 
 
 110. 785; w. num. 600 
 
 b ; in comp. 360 a. 
 
 775. 
 irt'p. 785. 109 b. 
 ireptyiyvofiat w. gen. 749. 
 irepiopaa w. part. 982. 
 TreptntiTTu w. dat. 775. 
 Trepta-irdtifievos 98. 
 ireVo-u) theme 397 b. 
 TreTiivcujui redupl. 365 b. 
 TleredjSj n6T6&j-o 169 D. 
 ireVo/tai aor. 437. 489, 6. 
 ireiptSetrBaL (i^efSo^uai) 436 
 
 D. 
 irtipvoi/ {(pev-) 436 D. 
 tretpptKOi/Tas 455 D a. 
 jri), TT?;, 283. 113 b. 779 a. 
 iriiyvviu intr. 501 ; 2 aor. 
 
 489 D, 4.S. 
 in)5iiiB w. ace. 712 b. 
 n7]\7^((£57js 559 b. 
 vriKlKOS 278. 282. 
 TTTiviKa 283 ; w. gen. 767 a. 
 wjjxvs 166. 201. 
 irteipo 247 D. 
 Trl/jkvKrifu 2 aor. 489 D, 
 
 23. 440 D; w. gen. 
 
 743. 
 irivai fut. 427 ; aor. tr. 
 
 600,7; 2 aor. 489, 16; 
 
 w. gen. 736. 
 TTLTrpaaKu fut. pf. 880 a. 
 irtvTa redupl. 365 b ; pf. 
 
 part. 492 D, 17. 
 vurreia with dat. 764, 2 ; 
 
 pass. 819 a. 
 via-Tis 651, 1. 
 irlffvpes 290 D, 4. 
 nimv 247 D. 261 a. 
 wKdCa 398 b. 
 •ir\d<nos mult. 295 b. 
 
 755 a 
 nA.aTaiois 783 b; -Sffi 220. 
 irKecs, -as, 254 D, 5. 
 vKeiv (irXiov) 254, 5. 647. 
 v\(tos 221 D. 
 
 irKetffTiiKis 297. 
 7r\€7a-Tos 254, 5 ; w. 
 
 superl. 662 c. 
 ffAefftj*', ttXcuUj 254, 5. 
 irA.eoi' w. or wt. ^ 647. 
 irA.60i'6KTew w. gen. 749. 
 ■7r\eos 227 D. 
 7r\eS*', TrA.eCi'ey, 264 D, 6. 
 ir\6upd 213 D. 
 TrAf'w 411 ; w. acc. 712. 
 
 TT\fUS 227. 
 
 jT^^flos acc. 718 b ; w. pi. 
 
 609. 
 vXrieis 216 D, 26. 
 ir\ii8a w. gen. 743. 
 irA.^» w. gen. 758. 
 Tr\rip6u w. gen. 743. 
 ■ir\T}<rlov, wKijiTialTepos 250 
 
 a; w. gen. 767. 
 irX-iiffffu 471 a. 
 ttX^to 440 D. 
 TrXivBos 162 a; coll. 609. 
 -ttKoos, -^Kous, multipl. 
 
 295 b. 766 a. 
 ir\oi<nos 564 ; with gen. 
 
 763 0. 
 ttAouteco w. gen. 743. 
 TT\(ia 2 aor. 489 D, 27. 
 irvfo) fut. 426; aor. 469 
 
 D. 489 D, 32. 
 nc.){ 216, 16. 
 iria 1 38 a. 
 
 ■jr6ecv, TToeiv, 283. 113 b. 
 Tro0€ w, iroB'fjfxet'ai 4 1 2 D c. 
 Tr6et, woBi, 283 D. 113 b. 
 TToi, ml, 283. 113 b. 
 iroi€iB 339; om. 612; w. 
 
 two acc. 726 a ; w. part. 
 
 981; mid. 813. 814; 
 
 mid. w. two acc. 726 ; 
 
 eS (kCUCWs) TTQIU w. 
 
 ace. 712 ; w. part. 985. 
 iroioj, iroi6s 278, 282. 
 
 TTOITTVUIO 574. 
 
 iroKe^fti} pass. 819 a; -f^o), 
 
 ■6a, 572 ; w. dat. 772 ; 
 
 ToKei^lCo 398 D. 
 iro\is 201 ff. 202; wt. 
 
 art. 661 ; ■:r6Ktas 42 D ; 
 
 ■ir6\ivSi 219 D. 
 TToKiTeia mid. 814 a; 
 
 pass. 819 c. 
 iro\A.c£)«(j) 88 D. 297. 
 
 iro\\air\d(rtos, -7r\oDs, 
 
 295 b. 
 voWax^ 296 c. 
 vo\\ocrT6s 294. 
 iroKv'iffTOip 18 a. 
 TToKis 247 ; compar. 254, 
 
 5 ; w. article 666 ; w. 
 
 gen. 730 e; oi ttomJj 
 
 1028 ;— (Tb) Tio\i, (Tit.) 
 
 voWd, 719 b. Cf. 666. 
 
 781a; Trepl iroKKov etc. 
 
 746 a. 803, 1 b ; mWoB 
 
 743 b; mWip 781 a; 
 
 ^ttI ttoAu 7t9, 3; — 
 
 TrAe/ftji', irXewc, w. art. 
 
 666 ; wt. ^ 647 ; Tr^e?- 
 
 ffTov w. superl. 652 c ; 
 
 ol irXuffToi 665. 
 irofJLTT^v Tefiiretv 715 a. 
 iroplCa mid. 813. 
 tr6pl>u w. gen. 767. 
 TToptpipu 574. 
 ir<(<r6 283 D. 
 IlotrciSo)!' (-c£(ui/, -ewe, -Si') 
 
 34 D. S7Dh. 185. 186. 
 iriJo-oi 278. 282; xiftrou 
 
 746 ; dat. 781 a. 
 Troa-6s 278. 282. 
 voiT<ri 54 D. 171 D b. 
 jriffTos 294. 
 iriix for irp(<j 84 D. 
 TTorafiis w. attrib. app. 
 
 624 a. 
 iriJTc, TTCTc, 283. 113 b. 
 noreiSiv 37 D h. 
 ir((Tfpoj278. 282; ■ir6repov 
 
 Mrepo) 1017. 930. 
 ■Ktni for irpiJf 84 D. 805. 
 7r6Tva, irirvia, 246 D. 
 iroTTav 84 D. 
 mC 283. 113 b. 760 a; . 
 
 w. gen. 767; iroi 283. 
 
 113 b. 
 'jrov\v$6Teipa 246 D. 
 novKvSd/jM 170 D b. 
 irouAiis 247 D. 229 D. 
 mis 166. 178. 247 b. 
 wp^os 247 a. 
 irpaffiTtt) 452 a; w. two 
 
 acc. 724 ; w. eS, KaK£s, 
 
 810; w. Sttojs 886; 
 
 mid. 724. 
 vpaTos 255 D. 
 
QRSEK INDEX. 
 
 387 
 
 irpdiJj 247 D. 
 irpcVa) 764, 2. 949. 
 irpeVjSo, irpeirPetpa, 247 D. 
 irpe<rPeiiTiis, irpetrfieis, 
 
 216, 17. 
 vpecrPeia) w. ace. 714 b; 
 
 niid. 814 a. 
 irpiir^us 216, 17. 247 D. 
 ir/)e(r/8uT7)i 216, 17. 
 irpTjiJs 247 D. 
 Ttplv 1065, 9 ; w. inf. 955 ; 
 w. fin. Terb 924 ; rb 
 irpdz 663 ; vpXv ^ w. inf. 
 956 b. 
 vplafuu, irpiaifirii' 444 a. 
 
 446 a. 
 
 irprf 804. 76 b ; in comp. 
 
 360 a. 82 a; w. com- 
 
 par. 648 ; irpb tou 666 d. 
 
 irpifleo-is 784 a. 
 
 trpaOvfieofuii pass. dep. 
 
 497 a. 
 irpSKeifiai w. gen. 761. 
 irpoftiiirrai intrans. 810 a. 
 wp6Kri\jiis 878. 
 irpokoeofuu pass. dep. 
 
 497 a. 
 vp6s 806. 84 D ; in comp. 
 775 ; adv. 785 ; vp6s 
 ire yovdrfav 1062. 
 irpoa-avido! contr. 412 D c. 
 Trpoffepxofiai w. dat. 776. 
 irpotr^Kei w. gen. 734 ; 
 w. inf. 949 ; TrpoirrjKov 
 '■ 974 a. 
 irp(<(r96(i') 87 D ; w. gen. 
 
 757 ; w. wpiv 956 a. 
 wpoeraxSev aco. abs. 973. 
 Trp6ff(a w. Tov 760 a. 
 npoa'tf>Si6, 98. 
 TrpSffoyjrov, -oto, 213 D. 
 irprfxepos 255 ; w. art. 667 ; 
 irpOTEpoK 719b; TrpcJre- 
 pof' TTp^y 966 a. 
 irporf 806. 
 irpoToC 655 d. 
 irpoijpyoVf vpoupytaiTepos 
 
 250 a. 
 vpoipcuns dat. 779 b. 
 wpoipepa w. gen. 749. 
 vp6<ppioy, -ippaaaa, 247 D. 
 irpifivTjj npifiva, 139 D. 
 irpuToceis wt. art. 660 c. 
 
 Trpdoios compar. 260 a. 
 vptliTiffros 255 D. 
 TrpuTOs 256. 288. 619 b; 
 
 (rb) TtpSnov 719 b ; tV 
 
 Tpiiriiv 622. 
 iTTcpoSi'Ta 238. 
 irr-liaa-a 2 aor. 489 D, 26. 
 iTTux^ 216 D, 27. 
 TTTvu 393 a. 
 VTax6s compar. 262 a. 
 nofloi 220. 
 
 nuwiij (nni|) 216, 16. 
 iriftaTos 265 D. 
 TruyBivoimt w. gen. 760, 
 
 742 ; w. part. 982. 
 TTvp 166. 187 b. 213. 
 Tr(l> for <(>((> 47. 
 irii 113 b. 
 TTois 283. 113b; ttus £» in 
 
 wishes 870 e ; w. gen. 
 
 767 a ; irSs ov fi^KXa 
 
 846 b ; TTtiis 283. 113 b. 
 
 P, 18. 23; w. 1 65. 400; 
 
 doubled 49. 365 a ; see 
 
 Idquids. 
 p, pp, 18. 49. 366 a. 
 -p-stems 164 k; themes 
 
 400. 
 pi 1048, 1. 80 D. 113 D. 
 pi^Sos 152 e. 
 p^Stos compar. 254, 7. 
 'Pafjtvovs 238. 
 ^ocftii/, p^fTTOs, 254, 7. 
 ^e'o, p^Ta, 254 D, 7. 
 pepvwafiepos 365 D. 
 ^e'o) w. gen. 743. 
 piiyvvpit : prjyvvfft 416 D 
 
 a; Ip^iayo 461 e; intr. 
 
 501. 
 pTftSios, pvirepos, 264 D, 7. 
 piylcoVf ptyiirTos (piy7jK6s) 
 
 254 D, 10. 
 pty6a 412 a. 
 ^ifdeEi- 218. 
 ptwrm 346. 328 ; -oitkov 
 
 493 a. 
 ^is 166. 
 Poi\ 138 a. 
 -po-s adj. 569, 5. 
 p^ 49 ; for pa 60. 
 ^uff/niis 561, 2. 1066. 
 ^uT((<u redupl. 366 D. 
 
 2 (it, j) 6 ; pronunc. 19. 
 tr after mutes 64, 421 a; 
 
 after v 56-59. 
 0- bef. cons. 56 fl. 
 a from t, see t. 
 0- to /i 70. 359 c. 608, 
 
 13 a. 508, 16 a. 
 tt assimilated 431 D d; 
 
 omitted 61. 62. 71. 
 
 190. 576 b; iu -<rai, 
 
 -ao, 383, 4. 385, 4 a. 
 
 416. 441. 462 d; in 
 
 tense-suffix 422 a. 423 
 
 ff, 504. 
 -<r- added to verb-themes 
 
 461. 603. 605. 643, 
 
 579 b ; to roots 643 c. 
 a doubled 47 D. 273 D. 
 
 276 D. 420 D. 428 D a, 
 
 365 D a. 
 (T movable 88 c. 88 D. 
 -J nom. sing. 133. 168. 
 
 241. 
 -s gen. sing. 133. 
 -s 2 sing. 376. 
 -I imper. (for -fli) 443 b. 
 -s patronym. and gentile ; 
 
 see -i5-, -i5d-. 
 -r in -oKis 297 D. 
 -ff-, vb. themes iu, 537. 
 -o-o- tense-suff. 372.. 428. 
 -(TO fem. adj. (part.) 237. 
 -aai 2 sing. 376. 383, 4. 
 
 385, 4 ; eUded 80 JD. 
 taKaniivl 783 b. 
 (7o\jr(f(o 398 b ; subj. om. 
 
 602 c. 
 (TafjLTri 289 a. 
 -<rav 3 pi. 376. 379 a. 
 
 385, 3. 
 ^aTr<pii, ^ajrifxp 199. 
 ^apTTTiStiv 206 D. 
 frdTTOfiai w. gen. 743. 
 travTov 266 a. 
 crdtpa 258 D. 
 irmpris 248. 258 D. 
 aairepos 227 D. 
 a^ivvviu intrans. 600, 5 ; 
 
 2 aor. 489, 10. 
 0-5 for f 63. 
 -(rSm for -fm 398 D. 
 -o-t local 219 b. 
 -<rc- tenso-suff. see -aoU-. 
 
388 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 0-^261. 113 a. 
 
 aeaxjTov 266 ; 683. 692, 3, 
 
 ire avT6v etc. 687. 
 (Tf^ojuai pass. dep. 497 a. 
 ffeto, ffiBev, 261 D. 
 -<r€io) desider. 573. 
 (Tela augm. 366 D a ; 
 
 subj. om. 602 c. 
 o-fjUK(s53b. 669, 4.716 b. 
 ffeo, aevy 263 D. 
 -(rc»|e- tense-suff. 372 D. 
 
 426. 
 ireiai angm. 355 Da; re- 
 
 dupl. 365 D; accent 
 
 389 D b ; aor. 430 D. 
 
 489 D, S3. 
 (TeavTQv 266 D. 
 fftjfieiov appos. 626 h. 
 ff'i]fj^epov 69 a. 
 (T^iru intr. 501. 
 <rl]s 172 a. 
 <r9 after cons. 61. 
 -irflo 2 sing. 377. 
 -o-floi, elision 80 D ; infin. 
 
 381. 
 -ae&v for -o-Stij' 376 D a. 
 -o-9e, -(Tdov, -o-Btiii, mid. 
 
 376. 380. 
 ■aSov for -ffSTjc 376 D b. 
 -trOtOj -ffOwVy -(rBwffav^ mid. 
 
 380 and a. 
 -ai 2 sing. 376. 479. 
 0-1 for Ti 69. 561, 1. 
 -iTi- form. suif. 551, 1 ; 
 
 in comp. 579 b. 
 -aiiv) dat. pi. 67. 133. 
 
 171 D b. 
 ■ai{r) locative 220. 
 -<rt(v) 3 sing. 376. 383 D, 
 
 1. 385, 1 ; for -ti 69 ; 
 
 om. 383, 1. 
 -irio- form. suff. 661, 1. 
 alyaa fut. mid. 495 ; w. 
 
 ace. 712; aor. 841. 
 alyii dat. 776. 
 -aiiw-s adj. 669, 2. 
 -ffi-s, see -ffi-. 
 air OS 214. 
 aiunria fut. mid. 496 ; 
 
 w. ace. 712. 
 -iTKe- tense-suff. see -o-k"' j. 
 rneWw intrans. 500, 6 ; 
 
 2 aor. 489, 11. 
 
 -o-Kole- tense-suff. 372. 
 
 403. 493. 530 ff. 
 (TKoirito mid. 814; w. ^ui^ 
 
 887 c; w. giras885 ff. 
 (TkStos 212. 
 
 SkvWti, 2ki5a.Xo, 139 D. 
 ffK^ip 182 a. 
 (T/xacu 412. 
 
 -(70 2 sing. 376. 380. 416. 
 -(r°|e- tense-suff. 372. 420. 
 
 466. 474. 
 (Toi, o-oG 261. 80 D. 113a; 
 
 <roS as possess. 689 ; 
 
 ar4 w. inf. 684 b. 
 aio? 227 D. 
 (rop6s 162 b. 
 <r6s 269. 689 ff. 
 (TTrai'/fa) w. gen. 743. 
 ffirdco mid. 813. 
 o-TreVSoi 56. 421 a. 429. 
 
 463 c. 
 (Tireos, a-veios^ 190 D. 
 cnrevSa 29. 548 a. 
 (riro5(is 162 a. 
 ffwouSdCf) fut. mid. 495 
 (TirouB^ 29. 548 a ; dat. 
 
 776. 
 ffff ^ TT 48 ; in iota class 
 
 397. 
 -(Tcri dat. plu. 133. 
 -ffo-a verbs 397. 614 ff. 
 ITT abbrev. 6 a. 
 -(TTo for (rTT}Bi 442. 
 (TTaSiov 214, 
 a-Tae/iSs 214. 
 (TTo;' 440 a. 
 ffrdxvs 166. 
 ffreap 182. 
 
 o-reWa) 342. 322. 328. 
 (TTci'wirtfs 162 c. 
 fTTepiQ) fut. raid. 496 a. 
 (TtIxos 216 D, 28. 
 (TToa 188 a. 
 (rT6\os 548. 
 
 (TToxaCoM"" w- gen. 739. 
 (TTpaTctSw w. cog. ace. 
 
 715 b. 
 (TTpaTTiy^o) w. gen. 741 ; 
 
 pass. 819 c. 
 ffrparSTreSov wt. art. 661. 
 ffTpecpa pf. mid. 460 a ; 
 
 aor. pass. 469 a. 472 a. 
 
 498. 
 
 ffTvyect> w. gen. 744, 
 aTV<!>e\i(a> 398 D. 
 (TTai/iuAAo) 671, 9. 
 o-ii 261. 603. 
 tjrvyyev^s w. gen. 764 d. 
 cruyyiyvtiaKa! w, gen, 744 
 o'^k\t]tos 152 d, 
 (Tuyxaip" w, gen. 744, 
 <ruKda> w, two ace, 724, 
 2i}AA.dr, 2wA.A.d, 149, 
 aviifialva pers. constr. 
 
 944 u. 
 cri/iwds w. art. 672, 
 avfiiroKe^^u w, dat, 775, 
 o-iii' 69. 806 ; in comp. 
 
 295 a. 776 ; adv. 786. 
 -(TWO- form, suff, 666, 
 
 2. 
 (Tvvaipeat ; {us) <rvvsX6vTi 
 
 eiVcrv 771 b. 956. 
 ffwavrdtOy (TvvavTiiTTjy 4:12 
 
 Dc. 
 (TvpSvo 295 a. 
 -triii/Tj see -(rvva-. 
 aimiSa w. part. 982 a. 
 ffvvTefivm ; &S ffvitrefjuu 
 
 883. 
 (TvpTptpoiiat w. gen. 738 b. 
 <rSs or us 166. 70. 
 <r(pd^u ; (r</>a76(s w. gen. 
 
 760 a. 
 cr(j>4 113 D. 261 D. 
 a-ipfa 261 D a. 
 cripf as, <r<p€<i>v etc. 261 D; 
 
 690 a. 
 iT(phepos 269. 690. 692. 
 <r<l>l(i>) 261 D. 87 D. 113 
 
 D. 
 (r(|)(iri 113 a. 261. 
 a-<p6s 269 D. 
 <r(p(i>, atpwi, (T(fta4j etc. 261 
 
 ff. 
 (Ttptdrepos 269 D. 
 (r(/)iSi' for eavTUf 692, 
 . 3 a. 
 
 xx^Beciv (^x") *^^- 
 irxoXoios compar. 260. 
 2i)Kp(iT?js 193. 
 (To^/xa; ace. 718 a; dat 
 
 780. 
 iraos, (Tas, 227. 
 aan-fjp 186. 
 (Tdi(ppuv compar, 261 a. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 389 
 
 r, pronunc. 19 ; to 6 '?3 ; 
 
 to (T 62-3. 69. 248. 
 
 470 ; T for fl 74 ; bef. 
 
 1 67. 397. 
 r dropped 54. 56-7. 86. 
 
 167. 181 ff. 
 -T-stems 176; themes 39Y. 
 -TO for -Tr|s 147. 
 -TO- form. suff. 550. 557, 
 
 2. 560, 2. 
 ral for of 272 D. 
 -Toi 3 sing. 376 ; elision 
 
 80 D. 
 ToAds 236. 
 ToAXo 106. 
 Tafii&ffi 220 a. 
 t3/u)j 283 D. 
 ■rati for -rr)!' 376 D a. 
 TOLV (Vov) 216, 18. 
 ■ravSp6s 77 b. 
 Tva/ia as flit. 427 D. 
 Ta|ir dat. 780. 
 Tffpo 77 b. 
 Topiaira 397 ; f ut. mid. 
 
 496 a. 
 Top^e'es, Taptpeial, 247 B. 
 Tturo-oi 397 ; pf. mid. 464 
 
 a. 
 -TOTos superl. 248 ff. 
 Tavrdj TouTtf, TauTdv, 265 ; 
 
 Tavrh TovTO^ 626 b. 
 Toiirp 283. 779 a. 
 Toippos 152 b. 
 Toxo 80 c. 258. 
 ToxiSi oompar. 253. 74 
 
 b ; tV TaxiffTV 622. 
 
 719 a. 
 .Too.»272 D. 
 Toiis 213. 
 -re 2 pi. 376. 380. 
 -TE- tense-auff., see -role-. 
 re 1040 ff. 113 d. 80 a; 
 
 after art. 666 c ; after 
 
 prep. 786 a. 
 Te'for o-e 261 D b. 
 ridpiinros 82 a. 
 TeBO/i/Mai (Ti(pa)) 74 c. 
 , Tciv 261 D. 
 reli/a pf 448 b. 
 xeTos 283 D. 
 ■reipa- form. suff. 660. 
 T«xos wt. art. 661. 
 Ttlas 283 D. 
 
 26 
 
 T4Kfiap, TEK/iOip, 166 D k. 
 
 216 Db. 
 TfKii.i\piov appos. 626 b. 
 te'Aeios w. gen. 754 e. 
 TeAeuTaJx 968 a. 
 Te\4<a 340. 328 ; fut. 423 ; 
 
 reXfia 409 D b. 
 Te'Xoj ace. 719. 
 Tf/iva 402 a; w. ace. 714 ; 
 
 w. gen. 736. 
 -T€o- vb. adj. suff. 475. 
 TEO, Te'oiffi, 277 D. 
 •riov (-Tea) 990 ; eo-tI om. 
 
 611 a ; plur. 635 a. 
 -te'oj verb. adj. 299 u. 
 
 476. 563. 988 ff ; w. 
 
 dat. 769 b. 991. 
 Te6s for o-rfs 269 D. 
 Tf'pos 183. 
 Ttpriv 234. 
 -Tfpos oompar. 248-52. 
 
 296. 269. 278. 
 Tepirca aor. 436 D ; aor. 
 
 pass. 473 D a; mid. w. 
 
 gen. 740 ; w. part. 983. 
 TfWopEs 288, 290; teV- 
 
 aepes, Tea'a'epdKOVTa, 
 
 290 D, 4. 
 Terayciiy 436 D. 
 TeTapTriix6ptov 293. 
 TETHjas 446 D. 
 
 TGTfWV 436 D. 
 
 reropes 290 D, 4. 
 TerpoTTAji 295 D c. 
 Terpds 295 d. 
 TETpoffi 290 D, 4 ; TeVpa- 
 
 Tos 288 D ; TET/Joxflo 
 
 295 D c. 
 teO 277 D. 
 
 TE0, TEoCs, TEWS, 261 D b. 
 
 TEiJxw, TETeiJx«'rat 464 D 
 
 a. 
 te'xvtj om. 621 c. 
 
 tew, TEfWV, 277 D. 
 
 te'ws 283 D. 
 
 TTJSe 283. 
 
 riixa, 394 ; pf. intr. 501. 
 
 Tij\e superl. 260 D. 
 
 ti]KIkos, -((trSe, oCtos, 273. 
 
 282; 696. 
 ttjAoO, t7jAotc£tw, 260 D. 
 T'ti/upov 69 a. 
 T^/ios 283 D. 
 
 -rnv S dual 376 ; 2 dual 
 
 378 a. 
 t7)i/(ko, -oSe, -oCto, 283. 
 -Trjp- form. Buff. 650. 
 Tr)p4ca fut. mid. 496 a. 
 -T7)-s (masc. ), see -to-. 
 -T7)s (fern.), see -tijt-. 
 -rrjp-io-v ueut. 661, 1 a; 
 
 -T7)p-io-i adj. 569, 3. 
 T^(r(i) 272 D. 
 -TjjT- form. suff. 656, 1. 
 
 164 d. 
 re for ee 47. 
 Ti to (TiT 67. 397; to at 
 
 69. 561, 1. 
 -Ti- form. suff. 561, 1. 
 -Ti 3 sing. 376. 479. 
 -TI for -Si 73 b. 473 a. 
 -TiS- form. suff. 557, 2, 
 
 660, 3. 
 Tierifu 349. 329. S^S. 414 
 
 D. 415 D a. 73 a, c; 
 
 imperf. 419 a, c; aor. 
 
 432.443. 445 b; mid. 
 
 813. 816, 11; Tiei)/iE- 
 
 vos 33 D. 
 -TiKo- adj. suff. 666 a. 
 tIktu pres. 506, 5 ; pf. 
 
 461 ; 6 rsKdv 966 a. 
 Tf^uooi 337. 323 ; fut. mid. 
 
 496 a ; w. gen. 746 ; 
 
 w. gen. and dat. 746 b. 
 Tl/ivs (-■hets) 238 D. 40 a. 
 Tiprnpiie constr. 764, 2 b. 
 
 816, 12. 
 rlv for <rol 261 D b. 
 rivo, rivu, 94 D. 
 Tipvvs 58. 85 b. 
 -Ti'S, see -Tt-. 
 -Tis, see -TiS-. 
 tIs interrog. 277. 282. 
 
 113 b. 7U0. 1011; ac- 
 cent 277 a; ti 719 o; 
 
 Ti t/ 676; iVoT( 612; 
 
 t( tout' ?\e|os 1012 a; 
 
 ri oil with aor. 839; 
 
 T< oil lieWa 846 b ; Ti 
 
 liiiv 1037, 11. 
 rls indef. 277. 282. 285. 
 
 113 b. 701 ; coll. 609 
 
 a; after article 666 c; 
 
 om. bef. gen. 734. 785 ; 
 
 supplied from ovSeis 
 
390 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 1058; w. adj. etc. 702 
 -3; t1, 719 b; iyyisri 
 719 b; i Se Tir, etc. 
 664 a. 
 rla 307. 
 
 489, 7 ; 492 D, 10. 
 TjUTjo'ts 580 a. 
 -TO 3 sing. 376. 
 -TO- vb. adj. suff. 475. 
 -T» ,- tense-sufl. 372. 395. 
 
 613. 
 TiBev, r6et, 283 D. 
 Tol 1037, 10. 77 b. 113 d. 
 Tol for 01 272 D ; for a-ot 
 
 261 D. 80 D. 
 Toiyapf Toiyapovv, Toiydp- 
 
 Toi, 1048, 5. 
 ToriV for ToTv 272 D. 
 Tolmv 1048, 4. 
 Toio for ToC 272 D. 
 ToTos, TOirftrBe, toioStos, 
 
 273. 282 ; 696. 
 TOio-BEO-(o-)i, 272 D. 
 Toitn, roiaiSe 272 D. 
 Tii\/iO 139 e ; T(<X^a 139 
 
 D. 
 -Tov 2, 3 du. 376. 380 ; 
 
 for -Trjx 376 D b. 
 r6ms 98. 
 
 -Top- form. sufE. 550. 
 -t6-s verb. adj. 299 c. 475. 
 
 563. 
 roaauriKts 297. 
 T(Jo"os, TOtrdirde, roffovTos^ 
 
 273. 282. 696 ; too-outo 
 
 719 b; Too-ouTijj 781 a. 
 TiJo'o'os for TiJo'os 273 D. 
 ti(te 283; w. part. 976 
 
 b. 
 ToS from t(s, tIj, 277. 
 TovvavTiov 77. 
 Toiivofjui 76. 
 TotiT^pov 11 D d. 82 D. 
 
 TOVTl, see OVTOiTl. 
 
 TOVToyi 274. 
 T6(ppa = te'wj 283 D. 
 -Tpo-for -TEp- dat. pi. 188. 
 -Tpo- form. suff. 554. 
 Tpaytp^6s 15 a, 
 rpaireio^iv {r^pira)) 64 D. 
 
 473 D a. 
 rpe?s, rpla, 288. 290. 
 
 TpETto 460 a. 469 a. 472 
 
 a; mid. 812. 813 a. 
 tpe'</j(i) 74 c. 460 a. 469 a. 
 
 472 a; fut. mid.496 a; 
 
 w. two ace. 725. 
 tpe'xw 74 c ; w. cogn. ace. 
 
 715. 
 -rpld- form. suff. 550. 
 -Tpia quant. 130 b. 
 Tpias 295 d. 
 Tpt0w fut. mid. 496 a. 
 -Tpi5- form. suff. 550. 
 rpiriKQVTa 288 D. 
 Tpi-fipTis 232. 
 Tpi^6s 295 D b. 
 TpiTrXao-ios, -irA.^o'ios, 295 
 
 b and D. 
 TpiirKij 2 a 5 D c. 
 Tpnr\ovs 295 b. 
 Tpiirovs 247 b. 
 Tp(s 288. 
 -Tpi-s, see -Tpi5-. 
 Tpia(r6s 295 b. 
 TptTtUOS 619. 
 Tplraros 288 D. 
 TptTTjfj.iptof 293. 
 rplros 288. 
 Tpixi? 295 c; Tp^xa, Tpix- 
 
 fli 295 D c. 
 Tpoid 15 a. 
 -Tpo-r neut. 554. 
 rpSwos ace. 719 a; dat. 
 
 776 ; irphs rpdirov 805, 
 
 1 b. 
 Tpiis 172 a. 
 
 TT = (TIT 48. 
 
 -Tu- form. suff. 651, 3. 
 TV for o-ii or o-^ 261 D b. 
 Tvyxdvoi w. gen. 789. 750; 
 
 w. part. 984 and a; 
 
 Tux^j- 719 b. 
 Tvirri 261 D. 
 
 TiiTTw w. cogn. ace. 725 c. 
 Tvpameta w gen. 741. 
 -tO-s, see -TU-. 
 TU((>X(ij w. gen. 753 d. 
 Ti(t><ii 74 c. 
 Tv^tis 213. 
 
 TiJxri gen. 761 ; dat. 776. 
 -Tcij, -Twr, -Twfl'ac, imper, 
 
 380 and a. 
 T^ from T^f, tIj, 277. 
 Tu\.T]0h 11 D b. 
 
 -TQ)Pi see -Top-. 
 TiSj 284 D. 
 
 TWWTff 14 D d ; TW^Tofi 
 
 77 Db. 
 
 T, name of, 8 ; quant. 9, 
 
 94.393 a; pronunc. 11 
 
 and a; i- 17 b. 
 u, V interch. with o, a>, 
 
 31; w. ei;32. 394. 447 
 
 b. 464 D a. 511. 
 
 V not elided 80 d. 
 
 V ora. 44. 207. 401. 412 
 b. 559 b. 
 
 -u- stems in, 164 o and f. 
 
 201 ff., accent 205; 
 
 adj. 229. 562, 1; vb. 
 
 themes 394 a. 445. 489. 
 
 512. 632. 
 ufipiWeiv 84 D. 
 v$purr7is compar. 252 b. 
 uyiiis 231 b. 
 -vSpio-v neut. 568, 2. 
 eSmp 182 a. 
 i;e to u 38 a. 204. 
 m diphth. 13, 14 d. 
 m to V 419 D b. 44d D ; 
 
 to m 201 D. 
 -via fem. part. 244. 
 vi6s 216, 19; cm. 730 a. 
 v^ias 264, 
 
 ili.4, vfies, etc. 261 D b. 
 vfifas^ ufxeiaiv etc. 261 D. 
 vnerepus 269. 689 ff. 
 tfitv^ ufjtty^ tipiiv^ 264. 
 «iti/iE, if/i/iES, 261 D. 17 D 
 
 b. 
 ilt.iu(v) 87 D ; see S/iyiie. 
 vii6s 269 D. 
 -vv- vb. theme 571, 8. 
 -vv ace. sing. 205. 
 -ucT-stems 241. 
 -iiva denom. verbs 571, 8. 
 Sir for iTr6 84 D. 
 inral 808. 
 virap 216 b. 
 virdpxoj w, part. 981. 
 Vvaros (uir^p) 255 a, 
 ^fi'p (inreip) 807. 
 inrepZiKiia w. gen. 751. 
 87rfpflE(p) 87 D. 
 uirepTepoi, ^OTOS, 266 a. 
 itn^pfpaivofiai w, gen. 761. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 391 
 
 itrep<pvas &s lOOS b. 
 itreiBiyos w. gen. 753 e. 
 iwiiKoos w. gen. 763 d. 
 Amipeirla w. dat. 765 a. 
 ^tiTxvfoiitti mid. 817. 
 4iri/((<» 409 D c. 
 M 808 ; w. pass. 818 a ; 
 
 in comp. 775. 
 iiriSiKos w. gen. 763 e. 
 mriKet/Mu w. dat. 775. 
 imnrreia aug. 362 a. 
 4irOTeA.^j w. gen. 753 e. 
 Siroxos w. dat. 765. 
 -u-s, -eio, -u see -u-. 
 Si 166 f. 70. 
 ia-iitw 213 D. 
 
 UffTf^TIM 265 D. 
 
 SoTOTos 265. 
 
 uoTepo/d w. gen. 765 ; dat. 
 
 782. 
 i<rr€p4<o 816, 4. 
 iffTcpiQa w. gen. 749. 
 Sarepos, -tutos, 255, 619 
 
 a; w. gen. 755. 
 ini/ixepus 103 a. 
 6i)'i7reT7;A.os 33 D. 
 iifilai', S^uTTos, 254 D, 12. 
 -via vbs. 393 a. 
 vw 393 a; vei 602 c; 
 
 ConTos 972 a. 
 
 *, pronunc. 21 ; doubled 
 
 47. 
 (p bef. T-mute 51 ; bef. n 
 
 53 ; bef. <r 54 ; for ir, ;3, 
 
 452. 
 (paeivSSf rpadvTaroSf 249 D. 
 <l>aeluiaj ^aivdTiv, 469 D. 
 (fo/ya 343. 326-8. 431 D 
 
 d. 448 b. 451 c. 498; 
 
 aor. pass. 473 D a ; 
 
 intr. 601 j mid. 812 
 
 a ; w. part, (inf.) 981. 
 
 986. 
 tpavepSs w. part. 981. 
 ipaos 183 D. 
 ipelSo/tai redupl. 436 D. 
 
 742. 
 ^eprepos, -totos, (pepiffTOs, 
 
 254 D, 1. 
 tfifpa aor. 428 D b. 438 ; 
 
 w. part. 983 ; w. cogn. 
 
 ace. 715 rem. ; (pep6- 1 
 
 fxevos 969 a ; (jyepwv 
 
 with, 968 b. 
 (pev w. gen. 761. 
 <t)eiya426; fut. mid. 495; 
 
 w. ace. 712 ; w. cog. 
 
 ace. 715 a; w. gen. 
 
 745 ; pr. for pf. am 
 
 banished 820. 827. 
 (f>7jy6s 152. 
 (pripi 481. 113 c; (pda-i 
 
 602 c ; o6 ,pniu 1028 ; 
 
 w. infin. 946 b. 
 <l>e<iva 2 aor. 489, 8 ; w. 
 
 part. 984. 
 (peelpu pf. 448 a. 
 ipBiviSoutri etc. 494. 
 (pelva aor. 445 D. 489 D, 
 
 29. 
 (peiirlfi$poros 60 D. 
 ^Bovep6s 569, 5. 
 ipioviia w. dat. 764, 2 ; w. 
 
 gen. 744; pass. 819 a. 
 -<pi{v) 221 D. 87 D. 
 tplAatTepos, -atraTos 250 b. 
 ^i\€ai 324. 409 D e ; fut. 
 
 mid. 496 a; w. two 
 
 ace. 725. 
 (ptKofifietS^s 47 D. 
 (pt^.os compar. 250 b. 253 
 
 D ; w. dat. 766. 
 (ptKoTifUofiaL pass. dep. 
 497 a. 
 
 <t>l\TfpOS, <tllKTttTOS 250 b. 
 
 ^\€7e'9<» 494. 
 
 4>\6i 547. 
 
 ^o^e'tt) w. jit^ 887. 
 
 (p6$os dat. 776; w. p.^ 
 
 887; <()(Ooi'S6 219 D. 
 (foii'if 175. 
 (povaoj 573. 
 <pop€(o, (popl]p.evatf (popilifai 
 
 412 D c. 
 ((><iwi 183 D. 
 cppdCu 2 aor. 436 D. 
 ipp4ap 182. 
 ^pV166; in comp. 676 
 
 a. 
 <ppi<r(ra pf. part. 455 D a. 
 (ppovTlCa w. Hiras 885. 
 ippovTtffr'fis w. ace. 713. 
 fppovdos 82 a ; om. of cop. 
 
 w., 611 a. 
 (ppovpSs .82 a, 
 
 -(ppwv 576 a. 
 
 <()ii7o86 219 D. 
 
 (pvyds 246. 
 
 -^ui^j adj. 231 b. 
 
 <l}ii\aKos 216 D, 12. 
 
 ^liAoJ 174. 
 
 ^uA(i(r(rai fut. mid. 496 a ; 
 
 w. ace. 712; mid. 816, 
 
 13; (pvKaKTeov 992. 
 ipi^Lp-os 569, 2 ; w. ace. 
 
 713. 
 ipipa aor. 431 D c. 
 ^vu 393 a ; Tret^i/dcri 446 
 
 D; -Kei 455 De ; 2 aor. 
 
 489, 18; pf. 84«;intr. 
 
 500, 3. 
 <t>apdoiitti w. part 982. 
 (ptps 172 a. 
 (t>S)s 166. 172 a. 183. 
 
 X, pronunc. 21 ; bef. t- 
 
 mute 61 ; bef. p. 53 ; 
 
 bef. IT 54; bef. i 67. 
 
 397; doubled 47; for 
 
 K, 7 462. 
 -X-themes 397. 
 Xaipai w. ace. 712 b. 716 
 
 b ; w. dat. 778 ; w. 
 
 part. 983 ; X'^P"'" """ 
 
 pune 968 a. 
 Xe^fraiva w. dat. 764, 2. 
 
 778. 
 Xa\€7r3s ipfpa w. dat. 
 
 778 ; w. part. 983. 
 Xa^HO/Sapeia 247 D. 
 Xa/iSfe 219 D. 
 Xapfeij 248. 667. 
 Xapi(opai with dat. 764, 2. 
 Xiip'J 179 a. 262 c; ace. 
 
 719 a. 694. 
 xiirKu) pf. imper. 456. 
 Xf'P'iiy gen. 769. 
 X^ip 166. 216, 20; om. 
 
 621 ; (Is x^P's 772 a. 
 X^ipoyv, -la'Tos, 254, 2. 
 X^piia)", X^'pi'i fit". 264 
 
 D, 2. 
 XEO) fut. 427; aor. 430. 
 
 489 D, 34. 
 XV^is 152 b. 
 XB^v 166. 
 X' to irir 67. 397. 
 XiAiiis 295 d. 
 
393 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 X^Ttiv, KlBliv, 74 D. 
 
 X^f^v 166. 
 
 X07}(ft6pos S'TS b. 
 
 Xope^Q) w. ace. 712 b. 
 
 Xopriyita w. ace. 714 b. 
 
 Xous 209. 
 
 Xpdoiiai 409 D a, d. 412 ; 
 
 .ii.w., dat. 777; in part. 
 
 !)&8,b. 
 .XpeoJ;192; XPEWS 216, 21. 
 Xp^<»'f^cti, xp^^f^^^'^^i 409 
 
 D a,-,d.l i;.; . , 
 i^petu^jOm. of copula w., 
 H.fill a. 
 Xp^ 486; w. case 712 b; 
 
 w. inf. 949 ; impf. 834. 
 
 897. 
 Xiy^C" Pf- 849 b. 
 XP^(^tfios 569, 2. 
 Xp'fl<^T'ijs 160 ; XP^'^'^^^ i^* 
 Xpi^a 138 a. 
 Xpivos gen. 759 ; dat. w. 
 
 ^c 782 a. 
 XpAs 176 D. 
 
 X", X^l. XO'. '7'? c- 82. 
 Xiio/iai w. gen. 744. 
 Xiipi om. 621 c. 
 XMp^s w. gen. 757 a. 
 
 'V, pronuno. 21 b. 
 
 ■\fi masc, fern. 164 1. 
 
 174. 
 ^dn/ios 162 a. 
 ij/dp 166. 
 
 \jiaiai w. gen. 738. 
 ij/au 412. 
 
 ft for <T(p4 261 D b. 
 ilieiSoiiat w. ace. 716 b ; 
 
 w. gen. 748. 
 ^7J<pos 152 a. 
 if-CX^ dat 780. 
 
 n, name of, 8 ; pronunc. 
 
 11 ; from -o-, see -o-. 
 -01- for -o- 456 D b ; for 
 
 01) 34 D. 412 a. 
 ID, 7), interch. 28 a ; a, u, 
 
 SI. 
 
 a in Att. decl. 169 ff. 
 -0? fem. 197 ; for -d (dual) 
 
 272 a. 
 -01 for -oo (gen. sing.) 
 
 148 D, 3 ; 164 D a. 
 -01 or ay ace. sing. 161. 
 
 198. 
 -<i nom. dual 164 b. 
 -01 adv. 260. 88 c. 
 -0) verbs 311 u. 406. 
 -oi- theme vowel 627. 
 tji diphth. 13 ; pronune. 
 
 14 o; for oi 412 a. 
 -If dat. sing. 154 b. 
 •ip nom. sing. 199. 
 S 76 b. 77 ; w. voc. 709 
 
 a ; w. ace. 723 b. 
 uyaBe 11. 
 SSe 272 c. 283. 
 4H 13 a. 87 1) f. 
 -aiSijs adj. 686 a. 
 o>Sff 166. 
 -"It)- variable vowel 310 
 
 a ; mode-suffix 373. 
 
 408. 417. 433 b. 444. 
 
 455 a. 473 a. 
 oiSf'o) augm. 869 ; HBeir- 
 
 Kov 493 b. 
 5ko 268 D. 
 mK\ipoos 49 D. 
 wKiis 229 D. 263 D. 
 -ufxi for -010 409 D h. 
 -W1I-, -0V-, form. suff. 655. 
 
 561, 2. 
 -av part, ending 383, 6. _ 
 -av gen. pi. 133. 141. 
 
 154 d. 
 Siv part. 479. 
 Siv 1048, 2. 
 uvfo/iai augm. 359 ; aor. 
 
 inpidfjLTjv 441. 444 u,. 
 
 445 a. 489, !» ; w. gen. 
 
 746. 
 itvlip, &v6paTroi, 11 D b. 
 iivriT6s w. gen. 753 f. 
 &pd dat. 782; w. inf. 
 
 962 ; omis. of copula 
 
 611a. 
 
 ijpalos w. gen. 764 e. 
 Sipda-i 220. 
 lipUTTOS 11 D b. 
 Sipopov {^pyv/u) 436 D. 
 -o)s Att. 2 decl. 159 ft; 3 
 
 decl. 197 ff; gen. sing. 
 
 203. 207 b; ace. pi. 
 
 154 D e; adj. 226 ff; 
 
 pf. part. 244 ; adv. 257 
 
 ff. 
 i>s llle. 283; uses 1054, 
 
 1 ; w. gen. 757 a ; after 
 
 pos. 642 ; w. superl. 
 
 651.1064,1 a; in wish 
 
 870 c; indirect 930 ff. 
 
 1049, 2; final 881 ff. 
 
 885 c ; causal 925 ; w. 
 
 part. 974. 978 ; in ex- 
 clam. 1001 a ; ws ri- 
 
 XKTTo 1008 a; w. princ. 
 
 verb 1009 a ; w. inf 
 
 956. 
 is to 722 a. 
 &S 112 b. 120. 283; Kal 
 
 ols, ou5* fils, jUTjS' fis 284. 
 5sforo6r 216 D, 15. 
 us for Sis 284 D. 
 -aai (for -u-i/irt) 407 c. 
 Hffnep 1054, 2. 1037, 3. 
 
 118. 286; w. ace. abs. 
 
 974 ; with part. 978 a ; 
 
 SxTirep ttv el 905 a ; 
 
 Sunrepovv 286. 
 lia-re 1054, 4. 1048, 6. 
 
 1041. 118; after pos. 
 
 642 ; w. finite verb 
 
 927; with infin. 953; 
 
 expressed by pronoun 
 
 989; S(rT€oi/(/i!i^)1023 
 
 b. 
 -o)T- stems in, 164 i ; 455 
 
 D b. 
 mil diphth. 13. 14 d. 
 oiuTOs, aliT6s, 14 D d. 77 
 
 D b. 
 wxptoLtit 573. 
 0)0), 0)0 for OO) eta 409 I) 
 
 a. 424 D. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Abbreviations 6 a. 
 
 Ability, adj. 565. 
 
 Ablative in Lat. = Gr. gen. 121. HI. 
 972 ; = dat. 762. 797. 
 
 Absolute, gen. 970 ff ; ace. 973 S. 
 
 Abstract words 125 c. 621 b rem; 
 nouns of number 296 d ; in comp. 
 576 b ; in plural 636 ; w. art. 660 ; 
 participle 966 b. 
 
 Abundance, adj. 567. 
 
 Acatalectic verse 1077. 
 
 Accent 95 S; nouns 128 ff; 1st decl. 
 141. 147 c. 150 ; contr. forms 168 ; 
 2d decl. 162 ; 3d decl. 172. 185. 188 ; 
 icDKpdTiis 193. 203 ; adj. 222 b. 224. 
 232 a. 236 a ; comp. adj. 232 ; part. 
 242 a. 243. 477 c. 480 a ; proa. 263- 
 4. 272 b. 277 a ; verbs 386 ff. 105. 
 381 D ; lu-ioims 445 a. 482 a. 484 
 a. 487, 2, 3 ; ei/xi 480 ; in formation, 
 546 ; in comp. 582-3 ; — ^in versi- 
 fication 1066 a ; rhythmic accent 
 1071. 
 
 Accompaniment, dat. 774. 
 
 Accountability, gen. 753 e. 
 
 Accusative 123 (3); sing. 1st decl. 139. 
 143; 2d. decl. sing. 151. 161; 3rd 
 decl. neut. 167 ; masc. and fern. 169. 
 186 ; barytone stems 179 ; in -ea 
 208 c ; pi. 1st decl. 143 ; 2d decl. 
 154 e; 3d decl. 169 a, b ; in -eis 
 202 ; in -eas 208 c ; with -Se 219 ; 
 adv. 259. 719;— Synt. 710 ff; dou- 
 ble 724 ; in pass. 724 a ; for gen. 
 742 b ; app. iv. sent. 626 ; w. gen; 
 738 a. 743 a. 752 a ; w. dat. 764, 1 ; 
 w. prep. 787 ff ; aft. ij to 722 a ; 
 w. inf. 939 ff ; ace. abs. 973 ff ; inf. 
 as ace. 959 ; ora. 745 a ; aco. antec. 
 incorp. 995 a. 996 a. 
 
 Action, suffixes 651-2; expressed by 
 tenses 821. 300. 
 
 Active voice 298. 302 b ; endings 376 
 
 ff ; trans, and intrans. in diff. tenses 
 600 ff ;— Synt. 809 ff; act. for pass. 
 952 a ; act. for pass, of another vb. 
 820. 
 
 Acute accent 96 ff; ch. to grave 
 108. 
 
 Addition of vowels 45. 543 b. 679. 
 
 Address, voc. 709 ; nom. 707 ; w. oStos 
 698. 
 
 Adjectives 222 ff ; comparison 248 ff ; 
 formation 662 ff ; comp. 578-9 ; w. 
 Xapis 262 c;— Synt. 640 ff; attr. 
 and pred. 594 ; position 666 a. 670 
 ff; equiv. 600; adj. pron. as adj. 
 600; agr't 620; wt. subst. 621-2; 
 fem. wt. subst. 779 a ; of place w. 
 art. 671 ; w. cog. ace. 717 ; w. gen. 
 753 ff. 730 c, e ; w. dat. 765. 772 b ; 
 w. poss. pron. 691 ; w. tIs 702 a ; 
 w. iuf. 962; w. /«^ 1026;— Verbal 
 adj. 299 c. 475. 988 ff; see -t/os 
 (-Tf 01', -Tea) in Greek Ind. See Neu- 
 ter, Atlribulive, Prcdicate-Nmtn. 
 
 Adjuncts of participle 975 ff. 
 
 Adonic verse 1111 a. 
 
 Advantage, dat. 767. 
 
 Adverbial ace. 719. 956 ; part. 968 a. 
 
 Adverbs, elision 80 c; enclit. 113 b; 
 formation 257 ; accent 257 ; end'g in 
 -a 258 ; compar. 259 ; demonst. 272 
 c ; correl. 283 : neg. 287 ; numeral 
 288. 295 c. 297 . in compos, w aug. 
 360 cf. 580 a; Synt. 641 ; pred. adj. 
 for adv. 619 b; of swearing 723; 
 place w. gen. 757. 760 a; w. art. (for 
 adj.) 600. 641 a. 666 a ; w. gen. 756 
 ff ; w. dat. 772 c ; w. ri 702 b ; w. f»^ 
 1026; in constr. praeffnans 788 b; 
 prep, as adv. 785 ; participle for 
 adv. 968 a ; rel. adv. 908. 997 a. 
 1003. 1064. 
 
 Adversative conjunctions 1046 ff. 
 
 Aegean islands, Ionic of, 2. 
 
394 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Aeolic, dialect 2. 3 a ; accent 104 D b ; 
 
 inflec. of contract vbs. 409 D li ; 
 
 poetry 1109 ; dactyls 1112 d, e. 
 Aeschines, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Aeschylus, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Affection of body, verbs of 578. 
 Age, demonst. pron. 273 ; eorrel. 282. 
 Agent, suff. 650. 548 b ; accent D82 
 
 c; gen. 750 a ; dat. 769. 991 ; aec. 
 
 991 a; w. pass. 818 a. 808, 1 b. 798 
 
 0. 805, 1 c. 
 Agreement, gen. rules 603-82 ; pecul. 
 
 of number and gender 633 ff. 
 Aiming : gen. 736 a. 739. 
 Alcaeus, Aeolio of 3 a ; odes of 1065 
 
 b ; Alcaic verse 1111 s. 
 Alpha priv. 589 ; c'p'ds w. gen. 753 c ; 
 
 see a in Greek Ind. 
 Alphabet 5 ff. 
 Alternative questions 1017. 
 Anaclasis 1121 a. 
 Anacoluthon 1063. 
 Anacrusis 1079. 
 Anapaest 1068 ; anapaestic rhythms 
 
 1103 ff; logaoedic anap. 1113. See 
 
 Systems, 
 Anastrophe, 109. 
 Anceps, ivllaba anc. 1074. 
 Antecedeii.'. '>98; agr't with 627; om. 
 
 99e ff, joise'^iive 629, definite 699 
 
 •a. JOf mdemiite 699. 912; in rel. 
 
 sent. m-A ff. 
 Antepenult 90 
 Antibacchius 1068. 
 Antistrophe 106i5 o. 
 Aorist 300-3; augm. r-H; ice/ 493; 
 
 — Synt. 822. 836 ef. 851. 864. 856 
 
 and b ; for future 848 ; in wish 371 ; 
 
 subj. w. ni] 874 ; in condit. sent. 895 ; 
 
 subj. for fut. pf. 898 c ; part. act. 
 
 972 c ; aor. in indir. disc. 935 o. 
 Aorist, First, system Sib. ''27-8.428 
 
 fE ; tense-suffix 372 ; ending? 383, 5 
 
 b ; accent 389 c. 390 ; in .o 432 ; 
 
 transitive sense 500. 
 Aorist, Second, system 320. 322. 333- 
 
 4. 435 ff ; accent 387. 389 a. 391. 
 
 439 ff. 445 b ; >ii-form 311. 439 ff. 
 
 489 ; formation w. 9 494 ; iniransi- 
 
 tive sense 500. 
 Aorist, Passive, system 319. 322. 468 
 
 ff ; tense-suffix" 872 ; endings, 875 
 
 ff ; in depon. verbs 497 ff. 
 
 Apocope 84 D. 
 
 Apodosis 879. 889. 
 
 Aposiopesis 1060. 
 
 Apostrophe 79 ff. 
 
 Apposition, kinds of, 624 ff; infinitive 
 in, 950 ; to a sentence 626. 
 
 Appositive 695 a ; agr't 623 ; subst, 
 implied 633 b, o. 691 ; pron. 705 ; w. 
 voc. 707 a ; rel. sent. 1009. 
 
 Aristophanes, Attic of, 3 d. 
 
 Aristotle, dialect of, 3 e. 
 
 Arsis 1071. 1068 b. 
 
 Article 270 ; crasis 76 b. 77 b ; proc- 
 litic 111 a; w.ouT<is26B. 679 ff; for 
 rel. 275 U ; as demonstr. 272 b. 272 
 D, 275 b;— Synt. 653 fl ; posit. 666 ff ; 
 attrib. 600 ; as poss. 658 ; w. proper 
 name 663 ; w. num. 664 ; w. attrib. 
 
 665 ff ; w. adj. of place 671 ; w. pred. 
 noun 669 ; w. pron. 678 ff ; w. gen. 
 730 b ; w. ttSj, etc. 672 ; w. avrhs 
 aiiTov 688 a ; w. inf. 958 ff ; w. oTos 
 1002 ; w. ye 1037 a ; of incorp. 
 antec. 996 c ; om. 660 ff. 674. See 
 Neuter. 
 
 Asclepiadean verse 1 1 1 5 a, b. 
 Aspiration, rej. or transf . 73 ff ; of lab. 
 
 or pal. 452. 464 a. 
 Assimilation of consonants 46. 431 D a; 
 
 of vowels, 409 D. 
 Association, dat. 772. 
 Asyndeton 1039. 
 Attempted action 825, 832. 
 Attic, dial. 3 d; 2d deol. 169 ff. 198. 
 
 227; redup. 368. 368 b. 451 d; fu- 
 
 ture 426. 
 Attraction in relat. sentences 994 ff ; 
 
 inverse 1003 ; of relat. clause Jnto 
 
 infin. 947. 
 Attributive 594 a. 620 ff. 638 ; appos. 
 
 624 a ; subst. om. 621 ; w. article 
 
 666 ff ; w. cogn. ace. 715 ; part. 965 
 ff; gen. 728 a. 730. 
 
 Attributive position 666 a. 679. 6t)2, 8. 
 
 . 730 d. 
 
 Augment 364 ff; w. redupl. 358; on 
 
 sec. syll. 368 a. 369 b, d ; comp. vbs. 
 
 360 ff; bef. prep. 361, cf. 680 a; 
 
 double 361 a, 362 a, b ; om. 866 D. 
 
 3661). 368.493. 
 Bacchius, 1068; bacchic rhythms, 
 
 1126 ff. 
 iJarytone 99 ; items 179. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 395 
 
 Basis 1073 a. 
 
 Boeotia, Aeolio of, 2. 
 
 Brachylogy 1068. 
 
 Breathings 17 ff. 
 
 Bucolic, poetry 3 b, d ; caesura 1100. 
 
 Caesura 1081. 75 D d ; masc, fem. 
 
 1100. 
 Capacity, adj. w. gen. 754 b. 
 Cardinal numbers 288 ff. 
 Cases 123(3); defect. 215 b;— Synt. 
 706 ff; of infin. 95911; in rel. sent. 
 993 ff. 
 Case-endings 133. 
 Catalexis, catalectic verse, 1077 ; of 
 
 iambic verse 1090 ; doubly catalectic 
 
 verses 1078 a. 
 Causal clauses 926 ff. 
 Causal rel. claus. 910 ; w. /ifi 1021 b. 
 Causal conjunctions 1060. 1054, 1 c. 
 Causative, verbs 571, 2, 8 ; use of mid. 
 
 816 a. 
 Cause, gen. 744. 746 c ; dat. 776. 778 ; 
 
 circumst. part. 969 b. 977 ; gen. abs. 
 
 971a. 
 Characteristic, gen. 732 d. 
 Choliambus 1094. 
 Choral poetry 1065 c. 
 Choriambus 1068 ; choriambic rhythms 
 
 1120. 
 Chorus, as individual 638. 
 Circumflex accent 96 ff. 
 Circumstantial part. 968 ff. 
 Claiming, vbs, w. gen. 739 a. 
 Classes of verbs 392 ff. 602 G ; Ist. 
 
 393. 503fe; 2d. 394. 511 ff. 421 o. 
 
 429. 447 b. 451 b ; 3d. 395. 513 ff; 
 
 4th. 396 ff. 514 ff; 6th. 402. 621 ff; 
 
 6th. 403. 630 ff ; 7th. 404. 534 ff ; 
 
 8th. 502. 639. 
 Clause 876 ; as subst. 600 ; gen. w. 
 
 733. See Sentience. 
 Close vowels 12. 31. 37 a. 38 a. 76 D b ; 
 
 stems in, 130. 131. 
 Cognate, mutes 24 ; accus. 715 ff. 725 ; 
 
 w. adj. 717 ; om. 746 a. 
 Collective subject 609. 615 a; an tec. 629. 
 Colon 121 ; in versification 1075. 
 Comma 121. 
 
 Command 844 and a. 957 and a. 
 Common, dialect 3 c ; quantity 93 ; 
 
 gender 126. 165 ; common form vb. 
 
 inflec. 311. 383. 406 ; time (in mu- 
 sic) 1068 b. 
 
 Comparative, adj. 248 ff. 236, cf. 296 ; 
 
 adv. 259 ; = pos. 248 D ; from subst. 
 
 255 D ;— Synt. 642 ff ; w. gen. 644, 
 
 cf. 765. 749 ; w. ^ 643. 645. 1045, 1 
 
 b ; w. dat. 781 ; too or very, etc. 
 
 619 a ; w. inf. 954 ; conjunc. 1064. 
 Compensative lengthening 34. 65 d. 56 , 
 
 -7. 168 (2). 431. 
 Completed action 821 ff. 851. 
 Composition of words 676 ff ; elision 
 
 81 ff; prep, in comp. 784.791 ff. 
 
 580 ff. 576 b. 587 ff. 
 Compound words 540. 675 ff; accent 
 
 682;— Subst. 147 a. 185. 194 ;— Adj. 
 
 225. 232. 246. 247 b. 578; w. gen. 
 
 753 c, d ;— Verbs, 580 ff ; aug. 360 
 ff; redup. 370; accent 391. 387 b. 
 445 b ; w. gen. 761 ff ; w. dat. 776 ;— 
 Sentences 876 tf; — ^Negatives 1018. 
 1030. 
 
 Concession, part. 969 e. 971 c. 979. 
 
 Concessive conjunctions 1053. 
 
 Conclusion 889 ff. 
 
 Concrete words, pi. for sing. 636 b. 
 
 Condition 889 ff; w. p.^ 1021. 1025; . 
 supplied 872 a ; part. 969 d. 971 b. 
 
 Conditional, sentences 889 ff; mixed 
 901 ; coudit. conjunctions 1052. 889. 
 
 Conditional relat. clauses 910 ff ; w. 
 liit 1021. 1025 a. 1026. 
 
 Congruence of mode 919. 881 b. 921 b. 
 
 Conjunctions 1038 ff ; elision 80 b. 
 107; proclit. Ill c; ir\^y 758 a; in 
 fin. clauses 881 ff ; condit. claus, 
 889 ff ; rel. pron. for conj. 999. 
 
 Connection, gen. 729 a rem ; w. adj. 
 
 754 d ; dat. 772 b. 764 d. 
 Consecutive conjunctions 1054, 1 f. 
 
 927. 
 Consonants 19 ; changes 46 ff ; 545 d; 
 
 doubled 47 ff ; added 643 c ; bef. i 
 
 65-9 ; position 92 ff ; stems in, 130 ' 
 
 il. 163 ff. 174 ff. 228 ff; vb. themes 
 
 463. 628. 532. 
 Consonant - declension 181 ff. 163 ffj 
 
 228 ff. 
 Constructio ad sensum 633. 
 Constructio praegnans 788. 
 Continued action 300. 821 ff. 861 ff. 
 Contraction 37 ff ; crasis 76 ff ; accent 
 
 105 ;— in subst. 144, 157 ff. 160. 183. 
 
 190. 192. 193. 194. 198. 202. 201 D. 
 
 204 ;— in adj. 22S. 231 b. 288. 248, 
 
396 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 244 ; — ^in adv. 267 ; — in verbs 409- 
 12. 323-6. 493 b ; aug. 359-60 ; re- 
 dup. 369 ; aor. pass. 473 a ; fut. 
 422-27 ; w. -((r)oi, -((r)o, 383, 4 ; /jli- 
 forms 415-19; iter. 493 b; — in 
 formation 545 a ;— in verse 1080. 
 
 Co-ordinate, mutes 25 51 ; — sentences 
 876 a. 1005. 103S a. 
 
 Copula 596 ; omitted 611 and a. 988. 
 
 Copulative forms wt. art. 660 a ; con- 
 junctions 1040 ff. 
 
 Coronis 76. 
 
 Correlation, of pron. 282. 276 ; of adv. 
 283. 
 
 Crasis 76 ff. 82 ; accent 106. 
 
 Cretic 1068 ; rhythms 1119. 
 
 Crime, gen. 745. 752 a. 
 
 Customary action 824 a, b. 830. 835 
 aud a. 894 a. 923. 
 
 Cyclic dactyl 1069. 
 
 Dactyl 1068; dactylic rhythms 1099 ff. 
 
 Dactylo-epitritic rhythms 1117. 
 
 Dactylo-trochaic rhythms 1118. 
 
 Dative 12.S (3) ; accent 129. 162 b. 172 
 sing. 1st decl. 140; 2d decl. 154 b 
 3d decl. 195 ; plu. 1st decl. 142 
 220a; 2d decl. 156; 3d decl. 57, 
 171 D b; -ipi for 221 D ;— Synt, 
 762 ff; w. prep. 787 ff; w. -Te'os, 
 -TEW 991; inf. as dat. 959; dat. 
 antec. incorpor. 995 a. 996 a. 
 
 Declarative conjunctions 1049. 1054, 
 Id. 
 
 Declansion 122 ff. 131 ff ; 1st. 134 ff; 
 2d. 151 if ; 3d. 163 ff; irreg. 210 ff. 
 
 Defectives 215 ff. 166 Die; adj. 246. 
 254 D, 2, 5. 258 D ; compar. 255 ; 
 perf. 368 D ; pcrf. part. 363 D ; aor. 
 431 Do. 436 D. 
 
 Definitive apposition 624 c. 
 
 Degree, of comparison 248 ff ; w. gen. 
 730 ; of difference, dat. 781. 
 
 Deliberation, subjunc. of, 866, 3. 932. 
 
 Demonstratives (pron. and adv.) 270- 
 74. 275 b. 282 ;— Synt. 695 ff ; agr't 
 632 ; as antec. 995 b. 996 b. 997 a ; 
 w. art. 673 ff ; w. interrog 1012 a; 
 of ref. 599 ; as I'el. 284 ; art. as 
 dem. 654-5 ; rel. as dem. 275 b. 
 655 a; dera. w. appos. 625 b; co- 
 ord, w. rel. 1005. 
 Demosthenes, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Xlenominative, subst. 541. 656 ff; — adj. 
 
 564 ff; w. gen. 749; — verbs 808. 
 392 a. 570 ff. 581 ; augm. 362. 
 Denj'ing, vbs. w. iiii 1029. 1034 a. 
 Dependent, sentences or clauses 876 ff ; 
 w. gen. 733; with partic. absol 
 973 a; w. interrogatives 1012; w 
 negatives 1019 ff. See Subordinate, 
 — Depend, questions ; see Indirect. 
 Deponent verbs 298 a ; w. aor. pass, 
 497 ; w. passive meaning 499. 81 9 d ; 
 use of mid. 817. 
 Depriving, vbs. of, 748 a. 
 Descriptive apposition 624 b. 
 Desiderative verbs 573. 
 Designation, gen. 729 g. 
 Determinative comp. 585. 587 a; ac- 
 cent 582 c. 589. 
 Diaeresis 16. 
 Dialects 1 ff ; dialectic formations, in 
 
 verb 493 ff. 
 Diastole 121 a. 
 Dicolic verses 1075. 
 Digamma 7. See Vau. 
 Dimeter 1073. 
 
 Diminutives, suff. 558 ; neut. 125 d. 
 Diphthongs 13 ; contraction 39 ; before 
 p 49 ; crasis 77 a, b, c ; syniz. 78 ; 
 elision SOD; om. 545c.; quant. 
 92 ff; short for accent 102. 386; 
 shoi-tened bef. vowel 92 D o, d; 
 stems 206 ; augm. 357. 
 Dipody 1072. 
 
 Direct, middle 812 ; object 593; ques- 
 tion 1011. 1015. 1017. 700; dis- 
 course 928. 
 Direction, exp. by fern. adj. 622. 
 Disadvantage, dat. 767. 
 Disjunctive, conjunctions 1045. 
 Distich 1065 a; elegiac 1101. 
 Distinction, gen. 747-9. 753 g. 
 Distributives 295 a. 
 Dividing, vbs. of, 725 b. 
 Division, adverbs of, 295 o. 
 Dochmius, dochmiae rhythms 1125ff. 
 Doric, dialect 2. 3 b ; future 426 ; con- 
 traction 409 D g; strophes 1117. 
 Double, consonants 26. 46 ff. 365 a. 
 365. 420 D. 428 D a. 646 d ; position 
 92 ; double object 724 ; double neg. 
 1030 ff; augm. 361 a. 362 a, b. 
 Drama, Doric in, 3 b. 
 Dual 123 ; dual fem. of adj. 222 c; of 
 pron. 272 a. 275 a ; — Synt., w. two 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 397 
 
 sing. subj. 606 a. 623 b ; w. sing. 
 Tb. 606. 
 Duration, gen. 729 d. 
 Effect, ace. 714. 
 Effort, verbs of, S85 ff. 
 Elegiac distich 1101. 
 Elements of verb 353 ff. 
 Eli.sion 79 ff; accent 107. 119 c. 
 Ellipsis 1067. See Omission. 
 Emphatic; enclit. 119b; pronouns 
 2ti3. 273. 274 (with -I). 285. 677. 
 697; ouT(<s 680 ff. 687-8; superl. 
 651 if; negatives 1032; particles 
 1037. 1045 a; subj. of inf. 940 b; 
 prolepsis 878 ; place of &v 862 ; 
 ouSe iXs 290 a. 
 Enclitics 113 ff; adv. 283; vb. 480. 
 
 481a. 
 Endings, of dccl. 122 ; accented 172. 
 188; local 217 ff; adj. of two, 225. 
 230. 234. 236. 245; adj. of one, 
 246. 252 a ; comp., sup. 248 ff ; 
 253 ff. 296 ; verbs 306. 375 ff. 383 ff; 
 suffixes 542 ff. 
 English verse 1066 a. 
 Enjoying, gen. 736 a. 740. 
 Eperithesis 66. 407. 
 Epic dialect 3 c. 
 Epicene 127. 
 Epistolary aorist 838. 
 Epitrite 1117. 
 Epode 1065 c. 
 
 Equivalents of subst. and adj. 600. 
 Ethical dative 770. 
 Eupolidean verse 1116 d. 
 Euripides, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Exclamation, nom. 707 b ; ace. 723 b ; 
 gen. 761; rel. 1001a; infin. in. 
 962. 
 Expectation, modes for, 898 ff. 900 ff. 
 
 921 ; of answer 1015. 
 Extent, ace, 720 ; gen. 729 d. 
 Factitive aorist 836 a. 841 b. 
 Fearing, fin. clauses 887 ff; w. ^t) oh 
 
 1033. 
 Feet, in verse 1068. 
 Feminine 123 (1). 125 b; 2 decl. 162; 
 3 decl. 164 ff; adj. 222 a, b,c. 228; 
 wt. masc. 246 D ; irreg. 247 ; 2 pf. 
 part. 451 Dc; for neut. 730 e;— 
 fern, caesura 1 100. 
 Figures of syntax 1057 ff. 
 Final sounds, laws of, 75 ff ; — cons. 
 
 86 ff ;— clauses 880 ft. 911 ;— con- 
 junc. 881 ff. 1054, 1 e ;— syll. of 
 verse 1074. 
 
 Finite modes 299 a ;— Synt. 866 ff; 
 pred. 592; agr't 603 ff; w. irpi» 
 924 ; w. SffTE 927. 
 
 First tenses 303. 304 a. 
 
 Fitness, adj. 565. 
 
 Forbidding, vbs. w. ju^ 1029. 1034 a. 
 
 Formation of words 640 ff; of vbs. 
 ' 353 ff. 392 ff. 
 
 Formative lengthening 33 a. 
 
 Fractional expressions 293. 
 
 Fulness, adj. 567. See Plenty. 
 
 Function, suff. expressing 657, 1. 
 
 Future 300r3 ; system 315. 826. 420 
 ff; tense-suffix 372. 420; like pres- 
 ent 423. 427 ; contract 423-7 ; trans. 
 600 ; wanting 495. 496 a ; mid. as 
 act. or pass. 495, 496 ; — Syntax 822. 
 843 ; opt. and inf. 855 ; univ. truth 
 824 b ; pres. for 828 a ; subj. for 
 868; in final sent. 881 c. 885 ff; 
 w. ov ivfi 1032; — Fut. pass., endings 
 375 ff; formation 474. 
 
 Future Perfect 300-3 ; formation 459 
 ff. 466 and b ; tense-suffix 372 ; 
 active 467 ; Synt. 822. 850. 849 c. 
 855 b ; aor. subj. for, 898 c. 
 
 Future supposition 898 11. 900 ; con- 
 dit. rel. 916. 917. 
 
 Galliambic verse 1122 i, j. 
 
 Gender 123 (1). 124 ff. 152. 164 ff; 
 heterog. 214 ; adj. of one, 246. 252 
 a; pecul. of synt. 633 ff. 630. 632 a; 
 in formation 546 ff. 
 
 General condition 890. 894 ; condit 
 rel. 914. 923. 
 
 General truth 824 a, b. 840. 
 
 Generic article 666 ff. 
 
 Genitive 123 (3); accent 129. 162 b. 
 172; sing. 1st decl. 140. 148 ff ; 2d 
 decl. 164; 3d decl. 203. 208 b; 
 plur. 1st dccl. 141. 160; 2d decl. 
 154 ; 3d decl. 192. 203 ; -dtv for, 
 217 D ; -<pi for, 221 D ;— Synt. 727 
 ff; as attrib. or pred. noun 600. 
 666 b ; pred. w. infin. 732 c ; as 
 subj. 734 ; as obj. 735 ; two 7S1 ; w. 
 xip^v, SIktiu, 719 a ; w. vbs. 733 ff ; 
 o'pd vbs. 761 ff ; w. ace. 738 a. 
 743 a. 762 a ; for ace. 748 a: ; w. 
 dat. 766 a; w. prep. 787 ff; w, 
 
398 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 compar. 643 b ; w. poas. pron. 691. 
 692, 2 ; w. adj. and adv. 753 fF ; w. 
 part. 9U6 a; gen. abs. 970 ff; inf. 
 as gen. 959 ; ^ about 733 a; gen. 
 antee. incorp. 995 n. 996 a. See 
 Objective, Subjective, Time, etc. 
 
 Gentiles, suff. 560. 564 a. 
 
 Glyconic verse 1111 1-n. 1116. 
 
 Gnomic aoiist 840. 
 
 Grave accent 96 ff. 
 
 Groups of feet 1072. 1075. 
 
 Hellas, Hellenes, 1. 
 
 Hellenistic dialect 4 f. 
 
 Hephthemimeris 1102 d; hephtbemi- 
 meral caesura 1100. 
 
 Herodotui!, Ionic of, 3 c. 
 
 Hesiod, Epic of, 3 c. 
 
 Heteroclites 212. 
 
 Heterogeneous 214. 
 
 Hexameter 1073 ; dactylic 1100. 
 
 Hexapody 1072. 
 
 Hiatus 75 ; in epic poetry 75 D ; at 
 end of verse 1074 a. 
 
 Hindering, vbs. of, 9B3 ; w. /f^ 1029. 
 1034 a. 
 
 Hippocrates, Ionic of, 3 o. 
 
 Ilipponactean verse 1084. 1094. 
 
 Historical present 828. 
 
 Homer, epic of , 3 c ; van 72 D. 
 
 Hoping, vbs. of, 948 a. 
 
 Hortative subjunc. 866, 1. 909 a. 
 
 Hyperbaton 1062. 
 
 Hyperoataleotio verse 1078 b. 
 
 Hypodiastole 121 a. 
 
 Hypothetical indie. 895. 925 a. 935 a ; 
 infin. for, 964 ; part, for, 987. 
 
 Iambus 1068; irrational 1070 ; iambic 
 rhythms 1088 ff. 
 
 Ictus 1071. 
 
 Imperative 299 ; endings 380. 383, 2. 
 385, 2, 73 b. 415 b. 441-3 ; accent 
 387. 391 c; perf. act. 456; fut. for, 
 844 ; time of, 851 b ; potent, opt. for 
 872 d; in simp. sent. 873 ff ; in con- 
 dit. sent. 893 b. 898 ; in rel. sent. 
 909 a; inf for, 957; for condit. 
 902; w. fjL'l] 1019; om. 612. 
 
 Imperfect 300-1. 303 ; aug 354 ; for- 
 mation and infl. 372. 392 ff ; ^i-form 
 413 ff. 419 a ; iter. 493 ; form with 
 6 494 ;— Synt. 822. 829 ff. 849 c; in 
 wish 871 ; in condit. sent. 894, 895 
 ff; in final claus. 884; in until- 
 
 I clauses 921 b ; in ind. disc. 935 b. 
 
 936. 
 I Impersonal verbs 602 d and rem. 635 a. 
 I 743 b. 949 ; part. 973 ; v. a. in -riof 
 \ (-Tta) 990 ; pers. for impers. 944. 
 Implied indirect discourse 937. 881 a. 
 
 921 rem. 925 b. 
 Impi'oper, diphthongs 13. 96 a ; hiatus 
 
 75 D e ; prcpos. 768. 784 a. 
 Inceptive, class 403. 530 ff. 495 a; 
 
 aorist 841. 
 Incorporation 996. 
 Indeclinable pron. 279 ; num. 290 
 
 b, d. 
 Indefinites (pron. and adv.) 277-9. 
 
 282-3. 267; enclit. 113 b ;— Synt. 
 
 701 ff;~indef. action 821 ff 300 ; 
 
 subj. of inf. 942. 
 Indefinite Eelatives (pron. and adv.) 
 
 280-83. 294; str'gth'd 285-6;— 
 
 Synt. 699 a ; as indefin. 1002 a ; as 
 
 interrog. 1011 ff. 
 Independent, nom. 708 ; sentence w. 
 
 ou or jail, ll)19 ff. 
 Indeterminate, subj. 602 d. 973 a. 
 Indicative 299 ; endings 876 ff ; tenses 
 
 823. 824 ff; in simp. sent. 865 ; in 
 
 wishes 871 ; fin. clauses 881 c. 884. 
 
 885 H: 888 ; in condit. sent. 893. 
 
 894. 896 ff. 898 ff; rel. clauses 909 
 
 ff. 914 ff. 921 b. 922; causal clauses 
 
 925 ff ; result 927 ; indir. disc. 932 
 
 ff; w. neg. 1020 ff. 1032. 
 Indirect, compounds 581 ; middle 813; 
 
 object 593 ; dat. 763 ff. 951 ; reflex- 
 ives 683 a ff. 
 Indirect discourse 928 ff ; inf. in., 946 ; 
 
 neg. in,, 1022 ; questions 700. 930. 
 
 1016. 1017. 1022 a; implied ind. 
 
 disc. 325 b. 937. 881 a. 921 rem. 
 Inferential conjunctions 1048. 
 Infinitive 299 b : endings 381. 383, 5. 
 
 385, 5 ; accent 389 ; 2 aor. 435 D b. 
 
 443 c;— Synt. 938 ff; time of, 851. 
 
 852 ff; w. pred. noun 732 c; equiv. 
 
 of subst. 600 ; as subj. 602 d, rem. 
 
 939 a. 946 a. 949 ; w. Koi riv 655 
 
 a ; w. pos. for compar. 642 ; w. 
 
 fiiKKa 846 ; w. &(pe\ov 871 a ; in 
 
 indir. disc. 930. 946 ; by attraction 
 
 947 ; for supp. part. 986 ; w. neg. 
 
 1023. 1024. 1034; w. i^' ^e 999 
 
 a ; w. otos 1000. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 399 
 
 Inflection 122 ff; Terba 806. 854 ff. 
 
 375 ff. 406 ff. 
 Initial vowels, crasis 76 ; syniz. 78 ; 
 
 aphaereais 83 ; aug. 356. 359 ; re- 
 
 dupl. 367-9 ;— initial <t 70. 
 Insertion of mute 60. 464 D a. 
 Instrument, suff. 554 ; dat. 776 ff. 
 Intensive, pron. 265 ; — Synt. 678 ff; 
 
 w. dat. of accomp. 774 a; — ^verba 
 
 574 ;— pai'ticlea 1037. 
 Interchange of vowels 28 ff. 511 (see 
 Variation) ; in formation 575 a ; — 
 
 of quantity 36. 
 Interest, dat. 766 ff. 
 Interjection 709 a. 761. 
 Interrogation, mark of, 121. 
 Interrogatives (pron. and adv.) 277. 
 
 278. 294; Synt. 700. 1011 ff; w. 
 
 art. 676; as pred. adj. 1012 a; in- 
 
 terr. particles 1015; omoiiv 1048, 
 
 2 a ; — interrog. sentences 1010 ff ; 
 
 followed by imperat. 875. 
 Intransitive verbs 593 a; mixed sense, 
 
 trans, and intr. 500 ff; sometimes 
 
 tr. 712. b, c 810; =: Eng. trans. 
 
 712 a; w. verbal noun 713; denom. 
 
 571, 4 ; w. ace. 714 b ; w. dat. 764, 
 
 2 ; w. gen. as subj. 734 ; mid. 814 
 
 a ; pass. 819 a, b, e. 
 Introductory rel. clause 1009. 
 Inverse attraction 1003. 
 Ionic, dialect 2. 3 c ; feet 1068; 
 
 rhythms 1121 ff. 
 Iota paragogicum 274. 
 Iota subscript, see i in Greek Ind. 
 Iota-class 396 ff. 514 ff. 
 Irrational syllable 1070. 
 Irregular, decl. 211 ff; adj. 247; 
 
 meaning in verb-forms 495 ff. 
 Isocrates, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Italy, Doric of, 2. 
 Iterative formation 493. 
 Ithyphallic verse 1085 a. 
 Kindred, accus. 715 a, b. 
 Koppa 7. 289. 
 Labials 24 ; aspirated 452. 470. 464 a ; 
 
 labial stems 164 1. 174 ff; tliemes 
 
 395. 421 a. 513. 516. 
 Latin alphabet 8 a. 
 Latin letters corr. to Greek 5. 7. 15. 
 Lengthening of vowels 33 a. 34 ff. 64 
 a. 168. 187 b. 237. 249 ; augm. 354 
 ff; redup. 367; after Att. redup. 
 
 368; verb-theme 421 b. 481. 440. 
 
 447 b. 461 c. 604. 444 D. 369. 400. 
 
 403. 466 a; ;iu-torms 414. 415 b. 
 
 440 ; in contract verbs 409 D ; perf . 
 
 part. 456 D b ; in formation 544 d. 
 Lesbos, Aeolic of, 3 a. 
 Letters 5; names neut 125 d; for 
 
 numbers 288 ff. 
 Likeness, dat. 772. 
 Line, verses used by tiie, 1065. 
 Linguals 24. 470; bef. a 54. 421 a; 
 
 ling, stems 176 ff ; ling, verbs 421 
 
 a. 516. 447 a. 
 Liquids 23. 63. 64 ; mute and liq. 93. 
 
 249 a. 366 a ;— liq. stems 184 ff. 170 
 
 a ; liq. themes 309. 519 ; liq. verbs 
 
 309. 326-8. 448. 460.463. 518 ff; 
 
 fut. 422 ; 1 aor. 43 1 ; 1 pf . 448 ; pf . 
 
 mid. 463. 
 Local, endings 217 ff; conjunctions 
 
 1066. Sec Place. 
 Locative case 220. 762. 
 Logaoedic rhythms 1 108 ff. 
 Long vowels 9 ; interchange w. short 
 
 33 ; syniz. 78 ; quant. 92 ; accent 
 
 100 ff; augment 356 a; in subj. 
 
 tense-suffix 372. See Lengthening. 
 Lyric poetry 3 a, b, d. 1065. 
 Lysias, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Manner, adv. 283. 1054 ; expr. by fem. 
 
 adj. 622; dat. 776 ff; circ. part. 
 
 969 a ; suppl. part. 986 ; rel. claus. 
 
 908. 
 Masculine 123 (1). 125. 164; for fem. 
 
 226. 229 a. 246. 637 b ; in dual 222 
 
 c ; for neut. 632 a. 730 c ; for per- 
 son in general 639 ; — caesura 1100. 
 Material, adj. 666 ; gen. 729 f. 732 a. 
 Meaning, irregularities 496 ff; in 
 
 comp. 584 ff. 
 Means, suff. 554; dat. 776 ff; part. 
 
 969 a. 
 Measure, gen. 729 d. 732 a. 
 Mental action, gen. 742. 
 Metaplastic 213. 
 Metathesis 64 ff. 219 a. 400. 448 c. 
 
 460. 436 D. .473 D a; of quantity 
 
 36. 466 b. 
 Metre 1066. 
 Mi-forms, inflection 311. 329 ff. 413 ft. 
 
 439 ff. 476. 534 ; mode-suffix 373-4', 
 
 aor. subj. 373 D ; opt. 388 ; endings 
 
 377. 385. 
 
too 
 
 EN&LISH INDEX. 
 
 Middle mutes 26. 47 ; w. liquid 93 b. 
 
 Middle voice 29S. 302 a. 469 ff ; parti- 
 ciple-suffix 3S2 ; endings 376 ff. 
 3S3, 4. 385, 4 ; perf. 459 ff ; 'fut. 
 496. 496 ;— Synt. 811 if. 819 d. 992. 
 
 Mixed, class 502. 539 ; senses, trans, 
 and intrans. 500 ; forms of supposi- 
 tion 901. 
 
 Modes 299. S57 ff. 
 
 Mode-stem 306 b. 
 
 Mode-suffixes 372 ff. 417. 433 b. 444 
 D ; of aor. opt. 434. 
 
 Modern Greek 4 g. 
 
 Molossus 10B8. 
 
 Monodies 1065 d. 
 
 Monometer lii73. 
 
 Monopody 1072. 
 
 Motion, obj. 722 ; w. prep. 788 ff ; w. 
 adv. 788 b; vbs. w. gen. 748 b. 
 
 Movable consonants 87 if ef. 80 rem. 
 
 Multiplicatives 295 b ; w. gen. 755 a. 
 
 Mutes 24 tf ; changes 6 1 -54 ; dropped 
 403 ; mute ana liquid 93. 249 a. 
 365 a; — stems 174 ff. 164 1; mute 
 themes 309 ; verbs 309. 328. 439 
 D. 463. 470. 511 ; fut. 421 a. 424 
 ff ; 1 perf, 447 a; pf. mid. 463. 
 
 Ndsals 23; inserted 402 c; — nasal 
 class 402. 521 ff. 413. 495 a. 
 
 Nature, long by, 92. 
 
 Negatives 88 a, b. 287. 290 a ; w. ^uci 
 723; w. apx^v 719 a; w. fut. for 
 imper. 844 ; w. impcr. 874 ; fearing 
 887 ; fi St ijA after, 906 b ; purpose 
 960 ; neg. result 961 ; — Neg. pron. 
 and adv. 287 ; — Neg. sentences 1018 
 ff. 1043 ff; foil, by i.K\' ij 1046, 2 
 ; by Sti /i-li 1049, 1 rem. 
 
 Weuter 123 fl). 126 d, e. 164. 246 ; pi. 
 w. sing, verb 604. 610 a; in app. w. 
 sent. 626 b; attrib. 621 b; for 
 masc. or fem. 617. 681 a; pronoun 
 w. gen. 733; verbal in -t4os 990; 
 relative 999. 1009; — neut. art. w. 
 gen. 730 b ; w. inf. 958 ff. 1029 ; 
 w part. 966 b ; — neut. adj., as a 
 259. 719 b; as oogn. ace. 716 b ; w. 
 gen part. 730 c ; as degree of difl. 
 781 a. 
 
 Nominative 123 (3) ; sing. 1st. decl. 
 134. 139; in adj. 222. 228; 2d. 
 decl. 151 ; 3d. decl. 167. 168. 241 ; 
 plur. 1st decl. 222 b; 3d decl. 
 
 208 a;— Synt. 706 ff; indep. 708; 
 for voc. 707. 155; as subj. 601 ; in 
 app. w. voc. 709 a ; w. sent. 626 ; 
 w. inf. 940. 967 ; inf. as nom 959 ; 
 nom. antec. incorp. 995 a; omitt. 
 996 a. 
 
 Non-reality 871. 884. 896 ff. 900 c. 
 915. 919 b. 921 b. 985 a. 
 
 Notation of numbers 289. 
 
 Nouns 122 ff; in comp. 676 ff. of. 
 581 ; of number 295 d. 
 
 Number 123 (2); heterog. 214; defec- 
 tive 215; in verbs 299 a; pecul. of 
 syntax 633 ff ; — words of, 282. 295 
 d. 296. 
 
 Numerals 288-97 ; advbs. 288. 295 c. 
 297 ; w. prep. 600 b ; w. art. 664 
 w. ol irdvTes 672 a; w. auT6s 681 b 
 w. t!s 702 a; w. <Jis 1054, 1 a. 
 
 Object 593 ; accus. 711-13. 725-6 
 of motion 722 ; double 724 ; w, 
 cogn. ace. 715 ; w. pred. ace. 726 
 gen. 735 ff; w. inf. or part. 938 b 
 as subj. of inf. 941 ; w. supp. part. 
 980 ; w. -Teas, -reov, 990 ; ini'. as obj, 
 946. 946. 948. See Direct, Indirect. 
 
 Objective, gen. 729 o. 732 a. 735. 
 
 Obligation, iraperf. of 834. 897. 
 
 Oblique cases 123 a; as obj. 593. 
 
 Odes of Pindar 1065 c. 
 
 Omission, of diaer. 16 a; vowels 4.S-4. 
 645 ; aug. 364 D. 356 D. 35b. 493 ; 
 redup. 363 D. 491; cons, of redup. 
 366; ff of fut. and 1 aor. 422 ff. 
 431; a in pf. 454; stem-vowel in 
 comp. 675 a; endings 383. 1, 2; — 
 of subj. 602; subst. 621. 966. 972 
 a; antec. 996 ff; article 660 ff. 
 674; cog. ace. Sluriv, etc 745 a; 
 obj. after ij.i 723 a ; vUs, oIkos 730 
 a ; t!s, t1, 734. 736 ; St? 743 b ; ij 
 647 ; &v 872 e. 894 b. 897 b. 898 b. 
 921 a; subj. w. inf. 940 ff; part. w. 
 Tuyx'ii'a 984 a ; before Sirms 886 ; 
 in fin. clauses 883 ; condit. sent. 
 903 ff; rel. sent. 1006. 1007; gen. 
 abs. 972 a ; — omission of arsis 1076. 
 
 Open vowels 12. 28. 31. 37 ff. 
 
 Opposition, dat. 772. 
 
 Optative 299; mode-suffix 374. 434; 
 Ht-iovm 418 a. 419 b, c. 445. 473 a ; 
 endings 376. 379. 377 D; accent 
 102. 386. 388. 390. 418 b. 445 a i 
 
EJfTGLISH INDEX. 
 
 401 
 
 1 aor. 434; pf. act. 467; pf. mid. 
 465; contract 410 D a; wanting 
 446 ;—Synt., time of, 851. 862 ft'; 
 fut. opt. 855. 872 f ; opt. in simp, 
 sent. 869 ff; fin. clauses 881 ft' 
 condit. sent. 893 b. 894. 896. 900 
 rel. sent. 909 a. 914. 917. 921. 923 
 causal clauses 925 b ; iudir. disci 
 932, 2. 933; implied indir. disc. 
 881 a. 925 b; w. neg. 1020 If. 
 Oratio recta, obliqua, 928. See In- 
 direct discourse. 
 Ordinals 288 ff; w. ace. 721 ; w. avT6s 
 
 681 b ; adj. inst. of adv. 619 a. 
 Origin, gen. 729 a rem. 732 a. 
 Orthothone 113 b. 119. 
 Oxytone 99 ff; stems 170a. 199. 205. 
 Paeons 1068 and a 1119. 
 Palatals 24. 41. 55 ; aspir. 452, 470. 
 464 a ; pal. stems 164 1. 174 ff ; 
 themes 421 a. 
 Paroemiao verse 1104 e. 1105 ff; loga- 
 
 oedic 1111 f, g. 
 Paroxytone 99 ff. 
 
 Participle 299 b ; inflection 241-44 ; 
 suffixes 382. 563 ; endings 382 383, 
 6. 386, 6; accent 389. 477 c ; 2 pf. 461 
 D c; pf. w. iifii 457. 464. 465. 467'; 
 comparison 256 ; — Synt. 965 ff. 938 ; 
 time of, 856 ; agr't 620 ; agr't w. 
 pred. noun 610; equiv. of adj. 600; 
 om. 9S4a; attrib. 666 ff; w. dat. of 
 interest 771 a, b; neut. pass. 819 c; 
 w. &v 987 ; for condit. 902. 969 d. 
 971 b ; rel. w. 1004 ; w. interrog. 
 1012 ; w. neg. 1025. 1027 ; w. Wp 
 979 a. 
 Particles 1036 ff; accent 113 d. 120 ; w. 
 indef. rel. 285 ; of wishing 870 a, 
 b, c ; adjuncts of part. 975 ff ; in- 
 terrog. 1015 ff ; neg. 1018 ff. 
 Particular conditions 890. 893. 
 Partitive, appos. 624 d ; gen. 729 e. 
 
 730 c d,e. 732 a. 734. 755 b. 
 Passive voice 298. 302 a. 468 ff; pas- 
 sive systems 468 ff ; tense-suffixes 
 372 ; endings 375 ff ; as mid. in dep. 
 verbs 497 ff;— Synt. 818 ff; w. in- 
 det. subj. 602 d ; w. ace. 724 a. 
 725 c ; w. nom. for ace. 726 b ; w. 
 gen. 750 a ; w. dat. of agent 769 ; w. 
 prep. 798 c. 805, 1 c. 808, 1 b ; w. inf. 
 aa subj. 946 a. 
 
 Past supposition 892 ff. 895 ff; condit. 
 
 rel. 914. 915. 
 Past tenses 301, 2. 376. 379. 383, S ; 
 endings 376 ; contrary to fact, see 
 Non-reality. 
 Past time 301. 864. 823. 829. 836. 847. 
 
 851 ff. 
 Patronymics, suff. 659. 
 Pause, caesural 1081 ; at end of verse 
 
 1074 a. 
 Pentapody 1072. 
 Penthemimeris 1 102 b ; penthemimeral 
 
 caesura 1100. 
 Penult 90. 
 Perfect 300-1. 303; redup. 368 ff; 
 
 perf. system 446 ff ;— Synt. 822. 847. 
 
 851 and b. 853. 866; univ. truth 
 
 824 b; pres. for, 827 ; aor. for, 837. 
 Perfect Active system 317 ff. 321 ff. 
 
 336. 446 ff ; part. 244 ; tense-suffixes 
 
 372. 382 ; endings of inf. 383, 5 b ; 
 
 w. pres. form 455 D a ; pf. act. with- 
 out -a- 464. 490 ff ; meaning 456. 
 
 491-2 ; intrans. 501. 
 Perfect, Middle ; system 459 ff; accent 
 
 389 b ; 3 pi. 376 D d ;— Passive, w. 
 
 indeterm. subj. 602 d; w. dat. of 
 
 agent 769. 
 Period 121. 
 
 Periphrastic fut. w. neWu 846. 
 Perisporaenon 99 ff. 
 Person 261 ff. 299 a. 375 ff; subj. 608 a; 
 
 rel. subj. 627 a ; two or more subj. 
 
 606 ; 1 pi. for sing. 637 ; for dual 
 
 378 ; 3d for ist, 2d, 686 a ; person 
 
 in general 602 c. 639. 
 Person (= functionary), suff. 567. 
 Personal, pron. 262 ff ; auriis 265 a ; 
 
 Synt. 677. 603 a; auTiij 682; for 
 
 poss. 689 ; for reflex. 684 ; for rel. 
 
 1005 ; equiv. of subst. 600 ; gen. w. 
 
 art. 673 b. 676 ; as eth. dat. 770 ;— 
 
 endings 375 ff; — constr. for impers. 
 
 944 ; constr, w. -Tf'oj 989. 
 Phalaecean verse 1111 q. 
 Pherecratean verse 1111 b — i. 1116. 
 Phoenician alphabet 8 a. 
 Phrase as subst. 600 a ; prep, in comp, 
 
 588. 
 Pindar, Dor. 3 b ; odes, 1065 o. 
 Place, adj. 266 D ; 671. 764 f ;— adv. 
 
 63. 217 ff. 283. 767. 760 a. 908. 
 
 1056 ;— endings 217 ff; suff. 661; 
 
t02 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 design, wt. art. 661. 663 ; gen. 760. 
 
 Hi f; dat. 783; w. prep. 787 ff. 
 
 791 IE ; in rel. expr. 998 b. 999 b ; 
 
 condit. rel. clauses 912. 
 Plato, Attic of, 8 d, cf. rem. ; use of 
 
 avT6 681 a. 
 Plenty, gen. 743. 753 c. 
 Pleonasm, 1061. 
 Pluperfect, 300-1. 303. 449 j aug. 354. 
 
 358 ; redup. 363 ; tense-sufBx 372 
 
 D ; 3 pi. 376 D d ; formation and 
 
 inflect. 446 ff ; endings 468 a ; plupf. 
 
 without -o- 454. 490 ff.— Synt. 822. 
 
 847 ff; in wish 871 ; in condit. 
 
 clause 895 ;— plup. pass. 602 d. 769 ; 
 
 — ^in ind. disc. 935 b. 
 Plural 123 (2) ; w. sing. vb. 604-B ; pi. 
 
 and dual, 634; pi. for sing. 635; 
 
 pi. ending for dual 378 ; generaliz- 
 ing plur. 636 b ; pi. of ' modesty ' 
 
 637; pi. vb. w. sing. subj. 606 ff; 
 
 w. coll. subj. 609. cf. 629. 
 Poetry, kinds of, 1064 ff. 
 Person's rule, 1091 (5). 
 Position, long by, 92. 249 a. 268 D. 
 Position, phrases of, 788 c. 
 Positive, 248 fE. 642. 
 Possession, gen. 729 a. 732 a. 754 c. 
 
 768 a. 
 VPossessive pron. 269. 689 ff ; as reflex. 
 
 692-3 ; w. art. 675 ; art. as, 658 ; for 
 
 obj. gen. 694 ; — poss. compounds 
 
 586. 687 b. 589. 
 Possessor, dat. 768. 
 Possibility, vb. w. superl. 651 a. 
 Postpositive 1036. 
 Potential opt. 872 ; 900. 925 a. 927. 
 Power gen. 753 b. 
 Praxillean verse 1112 c. 
 Predicate 592; iv. ace. of specif. 718 
 
 rem. ; pred. noun 614 ff ; adj. 549 b. 
 
 615ff. 610 a. 619; subst. 595 b. 614. 
 
 618. 706 b ; vb. agrees w. 610 ; pred. 
 
 noun w. attrib. part. 667 b ; w. art. 
 
 669 ff ; in nom. 706 b ; in aco. 726 ; 
 
 in gen. 732 ; in dat. 777 a ; w. inf. 
 
 939 ff ; inf. as pred. 950 ; interrog. 
 
 1012 a ; v. a. in -reos 988 ff; pred. 
 
 part. 967 ff. 
 Predicate position 670 ff. 680. 689-90. 
 
 692, 3 a. 
 Prepositional phrases, compounds 
 
 from, 688. 
 
 Prepositions, crasis 76 b ; elis. 80 b ; 
 apocope 84 D; accent 107. 109. Ill 
 b ; w. pron. 263. 275 D ; aug. 360 ff. 
 362 a, b. cf. 580 a ; in comp. 860 ff. 
 580. 576 b. 587 ; 712 c. 751 ff.— 
 Synt. 784 ff; w. case, for adj. or 
 subst. 600. 666 ff. 648; with nu- 
 meral 600 b ; for condition 902 ; 
 bef. i jueV, 4 Be, 786 b; w. avr'os 
 auTov 688 a ; w. inf. 958 ; om. in rel. 
 sent. 1007; w. ye 1037, 1 a ; w. 
 particle and article 786 b ; — im- 
 proper 784 a ; w. gen. 768. 
 
 Prepositive 1036. 
 
 Present 300 ff. 303; system 814. 323 
 ff. 329 ff ; formation 372. 392 ff 
 inflection 406 ff; /iti-form 413 b 
 redupl. 371. 506 ft'. 403 b. 404 
 tense-suffixes 372 ; endings 376 ff 
 contract 409-12.— Synt. 822 ff. 824, 
 861. 863. 856 and a; imper. w. ii.i\ 
 874. 
 
 Present supposition 892 ff. 895 ff ; 
 condit. rel. 914. 916. 
 
 Priapean verse 1115 c. 
 
 Primitives 541. 546ff. 662ff; verbs 
 308. 392 a. 
 
 Principal, tenses 301. 376. 379; parts 
 of verbs 304 c. 603 ff ; sentences or 
 clauses 876. 1009 a ; principal cae- 
 sura 1081. 1100. 
 
 Probability 898. 900. 916. 917. 
 
 Prooeleusmatic 1068 a. 
 
 Proclitics 111 ff. 
 
 Prohibition 866, 2. 874. 1032 a. 
 
 Prolepsis 878. 
 
 Prolonged long syllables 1067. 
 
 Promising, vbs. of, 948 a. 
 
 Pronoun 261 ff; enclit. 113 a; accent 
 263. 272 b. 277 a.— Synt. 677 ff ; of 
 ref. 597. 627 ff; adj. and subst. 
 pron. 600 ; app. w. sent. 626 ; oin. 
 602 a ; w. art. 673 ff ; w. 7^ 10S7, 1 ; 
 w. B^ 1037, 4. See Neuter, Refer- 
 ence, Personal, etc. 
 
 Pronunciation 11 a. 14. 18 a. 19. 20, 
 21 a, b. 
 
 Proparoxytone 99 ff. 
 
 Proper names 138 a. 149. 159 D. 185. 
 193. 194. 206 D ; norain. indep. 
 708; w. or wt. art. 663; w. iSt 
 etc., 674. 
 
 Properispomenon 99 ff. 
 
ENQLIHH INDEX. 
 
 403 
 
 Prosodiac Terse 1104 o: logaoedio 
 llllh, i. 
 
 Protasis 879. 889. 
 
 Prothetic vowel 45. 543 b. 
 
 Punctuation 121. 75 D c. 
 
 Purpose 881 ff. 911; inf. 951. 960. 
 953 a ; fut. part. 969 c; w. /i^ 1021. 
 
 Pyrrhic 1068 a. 
 
 Quality, pronouns of, 273. 282 ; suf- 
 fixes 556. 553 a. 
 
 Quantity, of vow. 92 ff ; variable 393 a. 
 608; transfer of, 36. 160. 203 a. 
 208 b, d. 465 b. 465 D ;— pron. of, 
 273. 282 ; gen. of, 743 b. See Meas- 
 ure. 
 
 Questions ; vb. omitted 612. See Jnlei-- 
 rogative. 
 
 Quotation, direct, indirect, 928. 
 
 Keality 865. 893 ; contrary to reality, 
 871. 884. 895 ff. 9li0 o. 915. 919 b. 
 921 b. 935 a. 
 
 Eecessive accent 104 b. 386. 646. 445 
 b. 487, 3 ; in corap'ds. 582. 
 
 Reciprocal pron. 268. 686 b. 
 
 Redundant neg. 1029. 
 
 Reduplication 363 S. 446. 450. 459. 
 73 a ; aug. 358 ; accent 391 b ; in 
 pres. 371. 403 b. 404; in 1st class 
 506 ; in 6th class 630 ; in 7th class 
 634 ; in 2 aor. 436 and D. 
 
 Reference, pron. of, 597. 627 fP; an- 
 tec. implied 633 b, c. See Demori- 
 sirativCj Relative. 
 
 Reflexive pron. 266. 261 D a ;— Synt. 
 683 ff. 692-3. cf. 677 a; equiv. of 
 subst. 600; w. art. 673 b; for re- 
 cipr. 686 b ; emphat. 688 ; w. corn- 
 par. 644; w. mid. 812 b. 
 
 Refusing, vbs. w. /i<) 1029. 1034 a. 
 
 Relatives (pron. and adv.) 275. 276, 
 282. 284. 76 b;— Synt. 699. 598, 
 908 ff. 993 ff ; agr't 627 ff; anteo. 
 cm. 996; after art. 656 c; as de- 
 monst. 276 b. 654 d ; in indir. quest, 
 1011 a; w. particles 1048, 2. 286 
 w. v4p 286. 1037, 3 ; w. 5^ 1037, 4 ; 
 art. as rel. 276 D ; — rel. clauses 908 
 ff ; VI. fi^ 1021 a, b ; sentences, 993 
 ff; 1046, 1 c; rel. continued by dem. 
 1005. See Indefinite. Relativen, and 
 Reference. 
 
 Resolufion in verse 1080. 
 
 Respect, dat. 780. 
 
 Rest, with prep. 788 ; with adv. 788 b. 
 
 Restrictive article 666 ff. 
 
 Result, suffixes 563 ; infin. 953 ; clauses 
 of, 927 ; rel. clans. 910 ; vr.ji.ii 1021 b. 
 
 Rhythm 1066. 
 
 Romaic language 4 g. 
 
 Root 543. 307. 253. 
 
 Root-class 404. 413. 534 ff. 
 
 Root-vowel. See Vanalion. 
 
 Rough, breathing 17 ff ; after oi 88 a ; 
 in aug. 357 b ; — mutes 25. 27 ; pro- 
 nunc. 21 ; changed to smooth 73-4. 
 47. 364. 
 
 Ruling, vbs. w. gen. 741. 
 
 Sampi 289. 
 
 Sappho, Aeolic of , 3 a ; odes of, 1066 
 b; Sapphic verse 1111 r. 
 
 Saying, vbs. of, 929. 946 ; pass. pers. 
 944 a. 
 
 Scazon 1084. 1094. 
 
 Second tenses 303. 304 a. 320-22. 489 
 ff. 601. 607 ff. 614. 518. 
 
 Secondary tense-stems 305 a. 372. 
 
 Semivowels 23. 47 D. 
 
 Sensation, gen. 742. 763 d. 
 
 Sentence 601 ff. 876 fl ; equiv. of subst. 
 600 ; as subj. 602 d rem. ; in appos. 
 626 ; connected by conj. 1038 ; sen- 
 tence-quest. 1010. 1015 ff. See 
 Clause, Simple, Compound, De- 
 pendent, etc. 
 
 Separation, gen. 747-8. 763 g. 767 a. 
 
 Series, metrical 1076. 
 
 Sharing, gen. 736 a, 737. 763 a. 
 
 Short vowels 9 ff; interchange 28 
 interch. w. long 33. 400. 403. 421 b 
 inst. of long 373 D. 433 D, b. 444 D 
 elision 79. 274; accent 100 ff; re- 
 tained in verb-inflection 603 ff. 451 
 d ; in redupl. 363 D. 
 
 Shortening of vowels in poetry 92 D c. 
 
 Sibilant 23. 
 
 Sicily, Doric of, 2. 
 
 Simple, vowels 39. 49; oorrel. 282; 
 words 640 ff; sentence 865 ff ; sup- 
 pos 892 ff; condit. rel. clause 914. 
 
 Singular 123 (2) ; vb. w. pi. subj. 604 
 ff; pred. adj. 610 a; sing, and pi. 
 604 ff. 606 ff. 615 ff. 628 ff; sing, 
 for pi. 638. 
 
 Size, correlatives 282, 
 
 Smooth, breathing 17 ff; mutes 25, 
 27 ; for rough 47. 73^. 
 
404 
 
 EN0LI8H INDEX. 
 
 Sonant sounds 27 a. 
 
 Sophocles, Attic of, 3 d. 
 
 Sotadean verse 1124. 
 
 Source, gen. ■tlil. 750. 
 
 Space, ace. 720. 
 
 Specification, aoc. 718. 961. 
 
 Spirants 23 ; disappearance 70-72. 
 
 Spondee 1068; spondaic liexam. 1100. 
 
 Spurious compounds 576 c;' spurious 
 diphthongs 14 b. 40 a. 410 b. 
 
 Stems 130. 540 H ; pronoun 262. 268 
 a ; verb 305. 392 ff ; changed in 
 formation 575. 
 
 Strong vovfels interch. w. weak 32. 
 435 a. 511. 544 a; strong vowel 
 class 394. 511 fP. 421 c. 429. 447 b. 
 
 Strophe 1065. 
 
 Subject 592. 601. 706; iudet. 602 d; 
 agr't 603 ft; omitted 602; two or 
 more 606 ff; collective 609; of 
 pass. 818 a. 819 a, b; w. inf. 
 939 ff. 957; w. supp. part. 980; 
 sentence as subj. 602 d rem. ; gen. 
 as subj. 734 ; inf. as subj. 945. 946 
 a. 949. See Indeterminate, Sentence, 
 Verb, Attributive, etc. 
 
 Subjective, gen. 729 b; subjective 
 middle 814. 
 
 Subjunctive 299. 310 a ; mode-suffix 
 373. 408. 417. 433 b. 444. 455. 473 
 a ; endings 376. 379. 377 D. 383 D, 
 1. 407 ; perf. act. 457 ; pf. mid. 465 ; 
 time of, 851 ; in simp, sentences 
 866 ff. 874 ; indir. disc. 932 ff ; 
 final sent. 881 ff; condit. sent. 894. 
 898; rel. clauses 914. 916. 921. 
 923 ; w. neg. 1019. 1032. 
 
 Subordinate sentence or clause 876 ff. 
 1033 a. ; sub. clause, rel. w., 1004. 
 See Dependent. 
 
 Subscript, see i in Greek Index. 
 
 Substantives 134; accent 546 ; corn- 
 par. 255 D ■ formation 547 ff ; com- 
 pos. 575 ff ; qualified 594 ff ; equiv. 
 600 ; substantive of attrib. omitted. 
 621. 966 ; in agr't 620. 623 ; quali- 
 fying, in ace. 716 a ; w. gen. 728 ff. 
 754 e; w. two gen. 731; w. dat. 
 765 a. 768 b. 772 b ; w. inf. 952 ; 
 w. fii) 1026; Inf. as subst. 938. 958 
 ff. 
 Suffixes 372 ff. 393 ff. 542. 545. 648; 
 omitted 336. 454. 490 ff. 
 
 Superlative 248 ff. 259 ff (cf. 296) ;— 
 Synt. 650 ff ; = very 650 b ; w. gen. 
 650. 644 a. 755 b ; w. dat. of diff. 
 781 b ; -w. iv Tois 662 a ; w. eh 662 
 b ; w. iis, Sti, ^ etc. 651 ; w. 5^ 1037, 
 4 ; in rel. clause 1008 ; w. iis 1054, 
 1 a. 
 Supplementary participle 980 ff. 967. 
 Supposition, 889 ff. 
 Surd sounds 27 a. 
 Swearing, particles 1037, 13 ; w. ace. 
 
 723 ; gen. w. irp6s 806, 1. 
 Syllaba anceps 1074. 
 Syllabic augment 353^. 358 ff. 
 Syllables 89 ff; quant. 92 ff; accent 
 95 ff; in versif. 1067; irrational 
 1070. 
 Syncope 88 ; stems in -ep- 188 ; 2 aor. 
 
 436 D. 437; of arsis 1076. 
 Synizesis 42. 78 ; 141 D b. 148 D, 2. 
 Synopses of verbs 313. 337-52. 
 Syntax 591 ff. 
 
 Systems, of tenses 303 ff. 314 ff. 392 
 ff ; — in verse 1074 b ; anapaestic 
 1105. 1065 d ; trochaic 1087 ; iambic 
 1098; glyconic and pherecratean 
 1116; doohmiac 1126. 
 Tau-olass 395. 613 ff. 
 Temporal, aug. 354, 2. 356-8. 360 ff ; 
 conjunc. 1056. 1054, 1 b. See 
 JHme. 
 Tenses 300 ff; of indie. 821 ff; in 
 other modes 851 ff. See Mrst, Sec- 
 ond, Prineipal, Historical, Present, 
 etc. 
 Tense-stem 305. 310; formation 372 
 
 ff. 392 ff, 
 Tense-suffixes 372 ff. 
 Tense-systems, see Systems. 
 Tetrameter 1073; troch. catal. 1083; 
 
 iamb. cat. 1095 ; anap. cat. 1107. 
 Tetrapody 1072. 
 Tetraseme syllables 1067. 
 Theme, of vbs. 307 ff ; in comp. 579 ; 
 
 theme-vowel 394. 400. 431. 
 Theocritus, Doric of, 3 b. 
 Theophrastus, dial, of, 3 e. 
 Thesis 1071. 1068 b ; 75 D d. 92 D c. 
 
 94 D. 
 Thessaly, Aeolie of, 2. 
 Thinking, vbs. of, 929. 946 ; pass. 
 
 pers. 944 a. 
 Thueydides, Attic of, 3 d. ef . rem. ; 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 405 
 
 use of ir^uv 692, 3 a; of neut. part. 
 
 966 b. 
 Time, adj. 566 b ; as adr. 619 a ; adv. 
 
 283. 908. 1055. 1056; design, wt. 
 
 art. 661 ; aco. 720 ; time since 721 ; 
 
 gen. 759. 757 a ; dat. 782 ; w. prep. 
 
 791 ff ; tenses 821. 823. 851 S. 870 
 
 d. 872 b, c ; part. 968 a. 971. 976 ; 
 
 rel. expr. 998 b. 999 b; o(Tov ob 
 
 1035 b ; — in music 1068 b. 
 Tmesis 580 a. 786. 
 Toucliing, vbs. w. gen. 736 a. 738. 
 Tragedy, Attic of, 3 d, cf. rem. 
 Transfer of quantity 36. 160. 203 a. 
 
 208 b. 455 b. 465 D. 
 Transitive verbs 593 a; sometimes 
 
 intr. 712 b, c. 810 ; trans, phrase 
 
 713; w. ace. 710 S\ w. two ace. I 
 
 724-6 ; w. dat. 764, 1 ; adj. w. gen. 
 
 754 a ; mixed senses 500-1. 
 Transposition, see Metathesis. 
 Tribrach 1068. 
 
 Trimeter 1073 ; iambic 1091 ff. 
 Triple time (in music) 1068 b. 
 Tripody 1072. 
 Triseme syllables 1067. 
 Trochee 1068; long 1069; irrational 
 
 1070; trochaic rhythms 1082 ff. 
 
 mod. 
 
 Ultima 90 ; accented in decl. 129. 
 
 172. 
 Unattainable, wish 871 ; purpose 884. 
 Unlikeness, dat. 773. 
 ' Until,' rel. clauses, 920. 
 Value, gen. 729 d. 746. 745 b. 763 f. 
 Variation, of vowels in roots 644. 435. 
 
 451. 471. 608. 574; of themes 406. 
 
 517 ; of stems 179. 190. 202. 236 b. 
 
 237. 211 ff; in comp. 676 a. 576. 
 
 See Interchange, Strong and Weak, 
 
 Long and Short, Variable Vowel. 
 Variable Vowel 310; in suffixes, 372 
 
 a. 373. 383. 393 ff. 406. 408. 417. 
 
 419. 428 D b. 433 b. 435. 444. 455. 
 
 473 a. 494. 503" ff; see Variation. 
 
 Van 7; pronunc. 23 a; retained 72 D; 
 
 numeral 289 ; influence 197 ff. 359! 
 
 369. 436 a. 576 a. 589 b. 
 Verba sentiendi et declarandi 929. 
 Verbal noun, w. ace. 713 ; adj., see 
 
 -T((r -Te'oj, in Greek Index. 
 Verbs 298 ; formative elements 353 ff ; 
 
 in -/ii 311 c ; primitive 308 ; denom. 
 
 308. 570 ff. 681 ; comp. 580. 681 ; 
 
 agr't 603 ff; omitted 611 ff. 905. 
 
 1006 ; subj. om. 602 ff ; w. gen. 733 
 
 ff; w. dat. 763 ff. See FinUe, Im. 
 
 personal. Transitive, Intrans., Vowel, 
 
 Liquid, etc. 
 Verb-stem 307. 
 Verses 1073. 
 Versification 1064 ff. 
 Vocative 123(3); voo. smg. 1 st decl. 
 
 147; 2d decl. 154. 155; 3d decl. 
 
 170. 167. 180. 186. 188. 193. 199. 
 
 205 ; Synt. 709. 707. 
 Voices 298. 495 ff. 809 ff. 
 Vowels 9 ff; changes 28 ff; metath. 
 
 64 ff ; quant. 92 ff; accent 95 ff. See 
 
 Interchange, Long, Short, Lengthen- 
 ing, Shortening, Close, Open, Strong, 
 
 Weak, Variable, Variation, Addi- 
 tion, Omission, etc. 
 Vowel-decl. 132. 222 ff; — Vowel-stems 
 
 130 ff. 134 ff. 161 ff. 201 ff. 222 ff ; 
 
 — Vowel themes 4th class 401. 620 ; 
 
 added ir 461. 469 ; made by transp. 
 
 448 c. See Vowel- Verbs. 
 Vowel-verbs 309. 328. 401. 409. 421 
 
 b. 423 ff. 429. 447 b. 503 If. 607. 
 
 620. 
 Want, gen. 743. 763 c. 
 Way, adv. 283. 779 a. 
 Weak and strong vowels 32. 435 a. 
 
 511. 
 Whole, gen. 729 e. 
 Wishing 870 ff. 957 a. 1020. 1060, 4 e 
 Word-questions 1010. 1011 ff. 
 Xenophon, Attic of, 3 d. 
 Zeugma 1069. 
 
 THE END, 
 
 27 
 
TABLE 
 
 SHOWING THE CORRESPONDING ARTICLES IN HADLEY'S 
 AND HADLEY AND ALLEN'S CREEK GRAMMARS. 
 
 OLD. iraw. 
 
 1-5 1-5 
 
 ^ 5, Remark a 6 
 
 6, Eem. b 6 a 
 
 6, Eem. c 8a 
 
 6, note d — 
 
 7 9 
 
 8 10 
 
 9 11 
 
 10 12 
 
 11 13 
 
 11, Rem. a 14 a 
 
 11, Eem. b 14 o and d 
 
 IID b UD d 
 
 12 15 
 
 12, Exc. a 15 a 
 
 12, Eem. b 14 b 
 
 12, Rem. o 11 a 
 
 13 16 
 
 18, Rem. a 16 a 
 
 14 17 and a 
 
 15 17 band 18 
 
 15, Rem. a 18a 
 
 15 D 17 Db 
 
 16 19 and 20 
 
 17 21 
 
 17,Eem. a 21 b 
 
 18 23 
 
 19 24 
 
 20 25 
 
 20, Eem. a 25 a 
 
 21 26 
 
 21, Eem. a 21 a 
 
 22 27 
 
 22, Eem. a 27 a 
 
 23D 72 D 
 
 28 D, Eem. a 72 D a 
 
 24 Da 30 D (1) 
 
 24 D b SOD (2) 
 
 24 Do 341) 
 
 24 D d 34 D 
 
 25 28 and 29 
 
 25D 29 D 
 
 OLD. HEW. 
 
 26 D 36 D 
 
 27 31 
 
 28 33 
 
 28D 33 D 
 
 29 30 
 
 29 D 30 D 
 
 SO 32 
 
 31 34 
 
 32 87 
 
 32 De 87 Df 
 
 32 Df 87 Dg 
 
 32 Dg 37 Di 
 
 32 Dh 87 D h 
 
 33 38 
 
 34 39 and a 
 
 34, Exo. a 39 b 
 
 85 a 40 b 
 
 85 b 40 
 
 85 89 c 
 
 36 a 41 
 
 I 36 b 281 a 
 
 87 42 
 
 37 D 42 D 
 
 38 43 
 
 38D — 
 
 39 44 
 
 89, Eem. a 44 
 
 40 47 
 
 40 D 47 D 
 
 41 48 
 
 42 48 a 
 
 48 49 
 
 43, Eem. a 50 
 
 43 D 49 D 
 
 I 44 61 
 
 44, Eem. a — 
 
 45 53 
 
 46 53 
 
 46D 53Da 
 
 46, Rem. a 53 a 
 
 46, Eem. b 53 b 
 
 47 54 
 
 47 D 54D, 
 
 OI.D. ITEW. 
 
 47 Eem. ■> 61 b 
 
 48. 
 
 .55 
 
 49 56 
 
 50 57 
 
 50Exo.a 237 
 
 51 a 468a 
 
 51 b 58 and 468 a 
 
 52 59 
 
 53 
 
 60 
 
 53 D 
 
 60 D 
 
 54 
 
 
 65 
 
 62 
 
 55 D 
 
 62 D 
 
 56 
 
 68 
 
 56 D 
 
 68 D 
 
 57 
 
 64 
 
 57D 
 
 58 
 
 64 D 
 
 65 
 
 59 
 
 66 
 
 60 
 
 67 
 
 61 
 
 68 
 
 62 69 
 
 62, Rem. a 69 a 
 
 62D 69 D 
 
 64 
 
 64, Eem. a . 
 
 65.' 
 
 65 a 
 
 65 b 
 
 65 c 
 
 65 d 
 
 05 e 
 
 65 D 
 
 66 
 
 ....70 
 ....71 
 
 .■.'.■.73 
 ..73 a 
 ..78 b 
 ..73o 
 ..73 d 
 ..73 e 
 .73 D 
 .74 
 
 66 a 74a 
 
 66 b 74 b 
 
 66 74o 
 
 66, Eem. d 74 d 
 
 66D 74D 
 
 67 75 
 
 67D 75 D 
 
 67 Da 75 Da 
 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 407 
 
 erCb 75Db 
 
 67D rsDo 
 
 67 Dd 75 Dd 
 
 67 Do 75 De 
 
 68 76 and b 
 
 68, Eem. a 77 a 
 
 68D 76 D 
 
 68D fln 77 D 
 
 68, Eem. b 76 a 
 
 68, Eem. o 77 b and d 
 
 68, Eem. c. fln 77 d 
 
 69 78 
 
 70 79 and 80 
 
 70 D SOD 
 
 71 81 
 
 72 82 
 
 72D 82 D 
 
 73D 84D 
 
 74 a 85 
 
 1i\> 85 a 
 
 74, Exo. 85 b 
 
 74, Exc. d 85 b 
 
 74 D 85 D 
 
 76 86 
 
 76 — 
 
 77 — 
 
 78 87 
 
 78, Eem. o 87 b 
 
 78D 87D 
 
 79 a 87(2) 
 
 79 b 87(1) 
 
 79 («)(?) (y)(S) - 
 
 79D 87 D 
 
 80 a 88 a 
 
 80b 88b 
 
 80 88 
 
 80 D 88 D 
 
 81 89 
 
 82: 
 
 .91b 
 .91a 
 .91 
 
 84 a.. 
 84b. 
 
 85 a. 
 85 b. 
 
 .91 d 
 
 .90 
 
 86, Eem. a 92 b 
 
 --D 92D 
 
 93 
 
 87 
 87 a.. 
 87 b. 
 87 D. 
 88. 
 
 ..93 a 
 
 ..93b 
 
 .93 D 
 
 .94 
 
 88 D 94 D 
 
 89 95 and 96 
 
 90 
 
 91. 
 92. 
 98. 
 
 ..99 
 ..97 
 .100 
 
 01J>. svw, 
 
 94 101 
 
 95 a 102 a 
 
 95 b 102 b 
 
 96 103 
 
 96, Eem. a 104 a 
 
 97 104 b 
 
 97 D 104 D 
 
 98 106 
 
 99 106 
 
 100 107 
 
 lOOD 110a 
 
 101 108 
 
 101,Eem — 
 
 102 109 
 
 102 a 109 b 
 
 102 b 109 a 
 
 102 Da 110 b 
 
 102 D b 109 D 
 
 103 Ill 
 
 104 a 112 a and b 
 
 104 b 112 
 
 105 113 
 
 105 D 113 D 
 
 106 114 
 
 107 115 
 
 108 116 
 
 108, Eem. a 116 a 
 
 109 117 
 
 110 118 
 
 110, Eem. a 118 a 
 
 111 119 
 
 112 120 
 
 113 121 
 
 113, Eem. a 121 a 
 
 114 122 
 
 115 a 123(1) 
 
 115 b 123(2' 
 
 115 c 123(3) 
 
 116 — 
 
 116 fin 123 a 
 
 117 a 125 a 
 
 117 b 125 b 
 
 117 b fln 125 
 
 117 125 d and e 
 
 117 Eem 125 Eem. 
 
 118 126 and 127 
 
 119 124 and 272 
 
 119, Eem. a 272 a 
 
 119, Eem. b 709 a 
 
 119 D 272 D 
 
 120 128 
 
 121 129 
 
 121, Eem. a 129 a 
 
 122 131 
 
 122,1 131, 2 
 
 122,2 131,1 
 
 122, I 132,1 
 
 122,11 132,11 
 
 122. Bern 132 a 
 
 OLD. HEW. 
 
 123 134 
 
 124 135 
 
 125 136 
 
 125 a 138 
 
 125 b 139 a 
 
 125o 138 
 
 125, Exc. d 138 a and 
 
 189 Exc. 
 
 125 D,l 138Db 
 
 125 D, 2 138Dc 
 
 126 140 
 
 126, Exc. a 138 a, fin. 
 
 127 — 
 
 128 141 
 
 128 D 141 D 
 
 129 142 
 
 129 D 142 D 
 
 130 a 138 
 
 130 b 139 
 
 130, Exo. 0,1 139 b 
 
 130, Exc. 0, 2 139 
 
 130, Exc. 0,3 139 d 
 
 130, Eem. d 139, Eem. 
 
 131 138 and 139 
 
 132 144 
 
 132 D 144 D 
 
 133 145 
 
 134 146 
 
 134 D 146 D 
 
 135 147 
 
 135, Eem. a 147 o 
 
 136 a 134 
 
 136 b 148 
 
 136Da 147D 
 
 136 Db, 1 USD, 1 
 
 136 Db, 2 USD, 2 
 
 136 Db, 3 148 D, 3 
 
 136, Eem. o 148 
 
 136, Eem. d 149 
 
 137 150 
 
 138 151 and 153 
 
 139 152 
 
 140 154(a) 
 
 140 D 154 Da 
 
 140D a 154Df 
 
 140D b 156D 
 
 140 D c 154 De 
 
 141 154(c) and 155 
 
 141, Eem. a 155 a 
 
 142 164(d) 
 
 143 156 
 
 144 157 
 
 144 D 157 D 
 
 145 a 158 a 
 
 145b 158 b 
 
 145 ;224 
 
 146 169 
 
 146 D 169 D 
 
 147 160 
 
408 
 
 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 OLD: 
 
 148,. 
 Ii9.. 
 150.. 
 151. 
 
 ITEW. 
 ..161 
 
 ..162 
 .133 
 .163 
 
 151, Eem. a 163 a 
 
 152 a 164a 
 
 152 b 164 a 
 
 152 164 b 
 
 152 d 164 
 
 152e 164d 
 
 152 f 164d 
 
 152 g 164 
 
 152 h of. 197 
 
 152 i 164 f 
 
 152j 164g 
 
 152 k 164 h 
 
 152 1 164 i 
 
 152in 164j 
 
 152n 104k 
 
 152a 1641 
 
 152, Kem. p 165 
 
 153 166 
 
 153 D 166 D 
 
 154 133 
 
 104 Da 171 Da 
 
 154Db ITlDb 
 
 155 167 
 
 156 168 
 
 156, Exo. a 168 a 
 
 156, Exo. b 241 
 
 156, Exo. 0..168band233 
 
 156 D 168 D 
 
 157 169 
 
 158 170 
 
 158 a 170 fin. 
 
 158b 170a 
 
 158 170b 
 
 158 d 170 b 
 
 158e 170 b 
 
 158 f 241 fin. 
 
 158 D 170 D 
 
 159 133 
 
 160 172 
 
 160, Exo. a 242 a 
 
 160, Exo. b 239 
 
 160, Exo. 0.... 172, Exo. a 
 160, Exo. d... 172, Exo. b . 
 
 161 178, 239; 187 b ' 
 
 162 173 
 
 163 174 
 
 164 175 
 
 165 181 
 
 166 181,183 
 
 166D 183D 
 
 167 1B2 
 
 168 183 
 
 168 1) 183 D 
 
 169 176 
 
 169 D 176 D 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 170 178 
 
 171 179 
 
 171 D 179 D 
 
 172 184 
 
 172 a 187 a 
 
 172 b 185 
 
 172 Db 185 D 
 
 173 188 and 189 
 
 173D 188D 
 
 174 236 
 
 175a 236a 
 
 175 b 236 b 
 
 175 c -186 
 
 175D 186D 
 
 176 191 and 230 
 
 176D 190D 
 
 177 190 
 
 178 190 and 192 
 
 178 D.. 190 D and 230 Db 
 
 179 193 and 232 
 
 180 194 
 
 180 D 194 D 
 
 181 191 and 197 
 
 182 191-198 
 
 182D 190Dfin. 
 
 183 190 
 
 184 198 
 
 185 201 
 
 186 202 
 
 186 D 201 D 
 
 187 a 204 and 229 
 
 187 b 204 
 
 188 204 a 
 
 189 206 
 
 189D 206D 
 
 190 207 
 
 190 a 208 b 
 
 190 b — 
 
 190o 208c 
 
 190 d 208 a 
 
 190e ,. ...208d 
 
 190, Eom. f 208 b 
 
 191 247 b 
 
 191 D 216 D, 13 
 
 192 210 
 
 192D 210D 
 
 193 197 
 
 193D 199D 
 
 194a 199 
 
 194 b 199 a 
 
 194 200 
 
 195,196 of. 133 
 
 197 211, 212 
 
 197 D 212 D 
 
 198 193,194 
 
 199 213 
 
 199 D 213 D 
 
 200 214 
 
 201.' 215 
 
 OLD. NEW 
 
 201 D a 215 D n 
 
 201 D b 215 D b 
 
 202 216 
 
 202, 1 216, 1 
 
 202 D, 1 216 D, 1 
 
 202, 2 216, 2 
 
 202, 3 216, 3 
 
 202 D, 3 216 D, 3 
 
 202,4 216, 4 
 
 , 202, 5 216, 5 
 
 202 D, 5 216 D, 5 
 
 202, 6 216, 6 
 
 ; 202D, 6 216 D, 6 
 
 , 202,7 216, 7 
 
 ! 202D, 7 216D, 7 
 
 ; 202, 8 216, 9 
 
 1202, 9 216, 10 
 
 I 202, 10 216, 11 
 
 202,11 216, 12 
 
 202 D,ll 216 D, 12 
 
 202,12 216, 14 
 
 202D, 12 216D, 14 
 
 202, 13 216, 15 
 
 202 D, 13 216 D, 15 
 
 202,14 216, 16 
 
 202,15 216, 17 
 
 202,16 216, 18 
 
 202,17 216, 19 
 
 202D, 17 216 D, 19 
 
 202, 18 216, 20 
 
 202 D, 18 216 D, 20 
 
 202, 19 209 
 
 202, 20 216, 21 
 
 202 D, 21 216 D, 22 
 
 202D, 22 216D, 23 
 
 202 D, 23 216 T> 24 
 
 202 D, 24 216 D, 8 
 
 202 D, 25 — 
 
 202 D, 26 — 
 
 202D, 27 216D, 25 
 
 202 D, 28 216 D, 26 
 
 202 D, 29 216 D, 27 
 
 202 D, 30 216 D, 28 
 
 203 a-0 217 
 
 203 fin 218, 219 
 
 203D....217Dand219D 
 
 204 219 aandb 
 
 205 220 
 
 206 D 221 D 
 
 207 222 
 
 207 D 222 D 
 
 208 223 
 
 208 D 223 D 
 
 209 225, 226 
 
 209, Eena. ft 225 a 
 
 210 227 
 
 210 D 227 D 
 
 211 228 
 
 212 229 
 
TABLE OP OOBRMSPONDINa ARTICLES. 
 
 409 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 212, Eem. a 229 a 
 
 212 D 229 D 
 
 213 233-235 
 
 214 237-242 
 
 214D 238 
 
 214, Kem. a 237 
 
 215 243 
 
 216 244 
 
 216, Rem. a 244a 
 
 216, liem. b — 
 
 217 228 
 
 217a 230 
 
 217 b 234 
 
 217o 245 
 
 217 1) — 
 
 218 246 
 
 218 D 246 D 
 
 218, Rem. a — 
 
 219 247 
 
 219 U 247 D 
 
 219, Rem. a 247 a 
 
 220 248 
 
 221 a 249 
 
 221 D 249 D 
 
 221 b 250 
 
 221 c 250 a and b 
 
 221 d, 1 251 a 
 
 221 d, 2 251 b 
 
 221 d, 3 251 
 
 221 252 a 
 
 221f 252b 
 
 221 g 2520 
 
 222 253 
 
 222 D 253 D 
 
 223, 1 254, 1 
 
 223 D, 1 254D, 1 
 
 223, 2 254,2 
 
 223 D, 2 254 D, 2 
 
 223, 3 254, 3 
 
 223, 4 254,4 
 
 223 D, 4 254 D, 4 
 
 223, 5 254, 5 
 
 223 D, 5 254 D, 5 
 
 223, 6 254, 6 
 
 223, 7 254,7 
 
 223 D, 7 254 D, 7 
 
 223, 8 264, 8 
 
 223 D, 9 254 D, 9 
 
 223 D, 10 254D, 10 
 
 223 1), 11 254 D, 11 
 
 223 D, 12 254 D, 12 
 
 224 255 
 
 224 D 255 D 
 
 225 257 
 
 226 259 
 
 227 258 
 
 227 D 258 D 
 
 228 269 and a 
 
 829 260 
 
 229 D 260 D 
 
 230 261 
 
 231 262 
 
 232 263, 264 
 
 233 D 261 D 
 
 234 265 
 
 234 D. 265 D 
 
 235 266 
 
 235 D 266 D 
 
 236 267 
 
 237 268 
 
 238 269 
 
 238, Rem. a 269 a 
 
 238 D 269 D 
 
 239 271 and 272 
 
 239 D 272 D 
 
 239, Eem. a 272 o 
 
 240 271 fin. 
 
 240 D 271 D 
 
 241 273 
 
 242 274 
 
 243 275 
 
 243, Eem. a 275 b 
 
 243 D 275 D 
 
 244 277 
 
 244, Rem. a 277 a 
 
 244, Eem. b — 
 
 244, Rem. o 277 b 
 
 244 D 277 D 
 
 245 279 
 
 246 280 
 
 246, Rem. a 280 a 
 
 246, Eemb 280 b 
 
 246 D 280 D 
 
 247 282 
 
 243 ■ • 283 
 
 247, 248 i)'.'. . . . 278 D and 
 
 281 D 
 
 248 D 283 D 
 
 249 283 a 
 
 249D 283Da 
 
 250 284 
 
 260 D 284 D 
 
 251 285, 286 
 
 252 287 
 
 253 288 
 
 253 D 288 D 
 
 254 289 
 
 254, Eem. a 289 a 
 
 255 290 
 
 255 D,l 290 D, 1 
 
 255 D, 2 290D, 2 
 
 255 1), 4 290D,4 
 
 266 291,292 
 
 257 290 d and 294 
 
 257 D — 
 
 258 295 
 
 258 D 295 D 
 
 269 296,297 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 259 D 297 D 
 
 260 298 
 
 261 299 
 
 262 300 
 
 262 D 300 D 
 
 263 301 
 
 264 302 
 
 264 D ~ 
 
 265 307, 308 
 
 266 303 
 
 266, Eem. a 304 a 
 
 266, Eem. b 304 b 
 
 266, Eem. o 304 o 
 
 267 311 
 
 267,1 311 
 
 267, II 311b 
 
 267 fln 311 fin. 
 
 268 312 
 
 268, Eem. a — 
 
 268, note b 393 a 
 
 269 313 
 
 270 314 
 
 271 315 
 
 272... 316 
 
 273 317 
 
 274 318 
 
 275 319 
 
 276 ■ 320 
 
 277 321 
 
 278 322 
 
 279 323 
 
 280 324 
 
 281 325 
 
 282 326 
 
 283 827 
 
 284 328 
 
 285 337 
 
 286 338 
 
 287 of. 339 
 
 288 340 
 
 289 341 
 
 290 342 
 
 291 343 
 
 292 344 
 
 293 345 
 
 294 346 
 
 295 347 
 
 296 of. 348 
 
 297 329 
 
 298 330 
 
 299 331 
 
 300 332 
 
 301 338 
 
 302 334 
 
 303 336 
 
 304 336 
 
 306 336 
 
 306 363 
 
 307 354 
 
410 
 
 TABLE OF CORRESPONDINQ ARTICLES. 
 
 OLD, NEW. 
 
 307,1 854,1 
 
 307, 2 354,2 
 
 307, Eem. a — 
 
 307 D 354 D 
 
 308 355 
 
 308D 355Da 
 
 808D a 355Db 
 
 308, Eem. a 355 b 
 
 309 356 
 
 309D 356D 
 
 310 357 and a 
 
 310, Eem. a 857 b 
 
 311 358 
 
 311 D — 
 
 311, Eem. a 358 c 
 
 812 359 
 
 312 D 369 D 
 
 812, Eem. a 359 o 
 
 812 b 369 d 
 
 313 360 
 
 314 361 
 
 315 862 and a 
 
 816 862 c 
 
 317 of. 3C2 
 
 318 863 
 
 818 D 863 D 
 
 319 364 
 
 '319 D 365 D 
 
 819, Exo. a 365 
 
 319, Exo. b 365 
 
 319, Exo. c 365 a 
 
 819, Exo. d 365 
 
 319, note e 866 
 
 320 867 
 
 321 368 
 
 321 D 368 D 
 
 322 869 
 
 822 D 869 D 
 
 823 370 
 
 824 309 
 
 324 fin 892 
 
 825 393 
 
 326 394 
 
 327 395 
 
 328 396 
 
 328 a 397 
 
 328, Eem 397 a 
 
 328 b 398 
 
 328Db 398 D 
 
 328 b, Eem 898 a 
 
 328, note 398 b 
 
 828 899 
 
 328Dc 399D 
 
 328 d 400 
 
 328 e 401 
 
 828 De 401 D 
 
 829 402 
 
 329 a 402 a 
 
 329 b 402 b and 
 
 OLD. MEW. 
 
 829 b, Eem. . .402 o, Eem. 
 
 829 e 402 d 
 
 829 d 402 e 
 
 329D 402 f 
 
 330 403 
 
 331 405 
 
 832 371 
 
 332 a 408 b 
 
 833 539 
 
 334 451 
 
 384 a 28 
 
 334 b 451 b 
 
 334 — 
 
 334 d 451 e 
 
 835 421 b, 431, 440, 
 
 447 b, 451 c. 
 
 335, Exo. a 412 
 
 886 a 414 
 
 886 b 440 
 
 336 Db 444 D 
 
 887 431 
 
 388 451 c 
 
 888 D 451 Do 
 
 839 43 
 
 840 64 
 
 341 452 
 
 342 461 
 
 843 468 
 
 843 D 473 Da 
 
 344 372 
 
 344 D 872 D 
 
 345 — 
 
 845,1 422 
 
 345, 2 431 
 
 345, Eem. a — 
 
 345, Eem. b 422 a 
 
 345 D 431 Do 
 
 346 373, 374 
 
 347 373 
 
 347, Eem. a — 
 
 347, Eem. b — 
 
 847 D 373 D 
 
 848 374 
 
 348 D 374 D 
 
 348, Eem. a — 
 
 349 428 
 
 349 D 428 Db 
 
 350 446 
 
 360 D 455 Da 
 
 351 449 
 
 351 D 458 D 
 
 QKO 
 
 852D!!.' ..'.'.'.'.'.485 bb 
 
 853 — 
 
 854 375 
 
 355 376 
 
 355 Da 376 Da 
 
 355D b 376Db 
 
 355Do 473D 
 
 855 Dd 376 Do 
 
 356 D e 464 D a 
 
 356 a — 
 
 356 a, fin 877 
 
 356 b 878 
 
 356 0.. ..458 and 473 fin. 
 
 857 379 
 
 357, Exo. a 379 a 
 
 357D 376D e 
 
 358 380 
 
 858D 380D 
 
 359 881 
 
 859 D 381 D 
 
 860 382 
 
 360D 455Daandb 
 
 361 888, 1 and 2 
 
 861 D 388 D,l 
 
 362 383, 6 
 
 362 D 242 D 
 
 363 883, 4 
 
 363, Eem. a 384 
 
 368 D 883 D, 4 
 
 364. . . 383, 1 and 2, and 6 b 
 
 364D — 
 
 365 386 
 
 366 887 
 
 366 a 387 a 
 
 866 b 387 b 
 
 866 Eem 388 
 
 367 389 
 
 867 a 889a 
 
 367 Da 389 Da 
 
 367 b 389 
 
 367 Db 389 D b 
 
 367 389 d 
 
 867 d 389 e 
 
 367, Eem. e 390 
 
 308 391 
 
 368 a 391a 
 
 368 b 391b 
 
 369 406, 407 
 
 370 409 
 
 370 D 409 D 
 
 370 Da 409 Da 
 
 370 Db 409 Db 
 
 370 Do 409 Do 
 
 370 D d 409 D d 
 
 870De 409De 
 
 870 Df 409 Df 
 
 870 Dg 409 Dg 
 
 371a 410 b 
 
 371 b 411 
 
 371 412 
 
 871 De 412 D 
 
 371 d 412 a 
 
 871 e 412b 
 
 371 D e — 
 
 872 420 
 
 872 a --. 421a 
 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 411 
 
 OlD. HEW. 
 
 372 Da 421 Da 
 
 872 b 421 b 
 
 372 Db 420 D 
 
 372 c 421 c 
 
 373 422 and a 
 
 373, Exo 422 b 
 
 373 D 422 D 
 
 374 ■ 423 
 
 375 424 
 
 375 D 424 D 
 
 376 425 
 
 377 42li 
 
 377 D 426 D 
 
 378 427 
 
 378 D 427 D 
 
 379 496,496 
 
 380 -433,434 
 
 380D 433D b 
 
 381 429 
 
 381 D...428D and 430 D 
 
 382 431 
 
 382, Eem. a 431 b 
 
 382, Rom. b.... 431 b, fin 
 
 3S2D 431 D, candd 
 
 383 435 and aandb 
 
 383 D 435 D 
 
 384 436 and 437 
 
 384 D 436 D 
 
 385 — 
 
 385 D 455 Da 
 
 386 446 
 
 386 a 446a 
 
 386 b 447 b 
 
 386 c 448 a-c 
 
 386 D 446 D 
 
 387 450 
 
 387 a 451 a-e 
 
 387 Da 451 D 
 
 387 b 452 and a 
 
 387 D b 462 D 
 
 388 459 
 
 388 D 462 D 
 
 389 460 
 
 390 461 and a 
 
 391 463 
 
 391 a 463 a 
 
 391b 463 b 
 
 391 c 4630 
 
 392 464 
 
 392, Kem. a 464 a 
 
 392 D 464 D 
 
 393 465 
 
 393, Eem. a 465 a 
 
 893 D 465 D 
 
 394 466 
 
 394, Eem a 467 
 
 395 468, 473,474 
 
 396D...473Dand474D 
 896 a 469 
 
 396 b 470 
 
 396 D 469 D 
 
 397 a 471 and a 
 
 397 b 472 and a 
 
 397D 473Da 
 
 398 475 
 
 398D 508 D, 12 
 
 399 385 and 413 
 
 400 a 885, 1 
 
 400 Da 376 a 
 
 400 b 385, 2 
 
 400 385,4 
 
 400d 385, 3 
 
 400Dd 385D3 
 
 400 e 385,5 
 
 400 De 385 D, 5 
 
 400 f 385, 6 
 
 iOOg 377 
 
 400 D g 377 D 
 
 400L 415 and 419 
 
 400Db 415D 
 
 400 i 417 and 444 
 
 400 D i 444D 
 
 400 k 418 b 
 
 400 m 414 
 
 400 D m 414D 
 
 400 n 440 
 
 400 D n 414 D 
 
 401 b....415b, 443 b, 442 
 
 401 Db 415 Db 
 
 401 441 
 
 401 li 419 and a 
 
 401 D h 419 D a 
 
 401 i 417 
 
 401k 417a 
 
 401Dk 417Da 
 
 401 1 419 band 418 
 
 401D1 419Db 
 
 401 n 443 o 
 
 401 Du 440 D 
 
 402 432 
 
 403, 1 476 
 
 403, 1, Eem. a 476 
 
 403 D,l 476 D 
 
 403, 2 534, 1 
 
 403D2 534D, 1 
 
 403,3 634, 2 
 
 403,4 534,4 
 
 403 D, 4 634 D, 4 
 
 403, 5 534, 6 
 
 403 D, 5 534 D, 5 
 
 403, 6... 489, 5, and 534, 6 
 
 403 D, 6 48a, 5 
 
 403,7 534,7 
 
 403 D, 7 534 D, 7 
 
 403, 7, Eem. a... 534, 7, a 
 
 403, 8 634, 8 
 
 403 D, 8 534 D, 8 
 
 403,9 534, 9 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 403 D, 10 534 D, 10 
 
 404, 1 485 
 
 404,2 481 
 
 404D,2 4S1D 
 
 404, 2, Eem. a 481, a 
 
 404,3 486 
 
 404 D, 3 486 D 
 
 404,4 535, 4 and D 
 
 404, 5 536, 6 
 
 404 D, 6 635 D, 6 
 
 404, 6 635, 6 
 
 404 D, 6 5.35 D, 6 
 
 404, 7 535, 7 
 
 404, 8 535,8 
 
 404 D, 9 636 D, 9 
 
 '404D, 10 635 D, 10 
 
 404 Da 583 D,l 
 
 404 D b 633 D, 2 
 
 404 D o 533 D, 3 
 
 404 Dd 533 D, 4 
 
 405,1 477 
 
 405, 1, Eem. a 477 a 
 
 405,1, Eem. b 477 b 
 
 405, 1, Eem. c 477 o 
 
 405, 1,D 477 D 
 
 405, 2 482 
 
 405, 2, Eem. a 482 a 
 
 405 D, 2 482 D 
 
 405 Da 538 D 6 
 
 405Db 538D7 
 
 ; 405 Do 538 D 8 
 
 '406.1 478 
 
 406 D.l 478 D 
 
 I 406, Eem. a 479 
 
 '406D, Eem. a — 
 
 ' 406, Eem. b 480 
 
 !406, 1, Eem. o 480 a 
 
 1406, 2 484 
 
 406 D, 2 483 D 
 
 '406,2 a 484 a 
 
 !406D,3 538 D, 9 
 
 I 406 D 4 539 D, 6 
 
 I 407 - 
 
 407, Eem. a 484 a 
 
 408 489 
 
 408,1 489,1 
 
 408 D,l 489 D, 1 
 
 408, 2 489,2 
 
 408 D, 2 489 D, 2 
 
 408, 8 489, S 
 
 408 D, 3 489 D, 3 
 
 408,4 489, 4 
 
 408 D, 4 489 D, 4 
 
 408, 5 489, 6 
 
 408 D, 6 489 D, 6 
 
 408, 6 489,7 
 
 408 D, 6 489 D, 7 
 
 408, 7 489,8 
 
 408 D, 7 489 D, 8 
 
412 
 
 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 NEW. OLD. 
 
 408, 8 489, 9 
 
 408, 9 489, 10 
 
 408, 10 489, 11 
 
 408,11 489, 12 
 
 408, 12 489, 13 
 
 408 D, 12 489 D, 18 
 
 408, 18 489, 14 
 
 408, 14 489, 15 
 
 403 1), 14 489 D, 14 
 
 40^, 15 489, 1(5 
 
 408,16 489, 17 
 
 408 D, 16 489 D, 17 
 
 408, 17 489, 18 
 
 403 D, 17 489 D, 18 
 
 40.-3 D, 18 489 D, 19 
 
 408 D, 19 489 D, 20 
 
 408 D, 20 489 D, 21 
 
 408 D, 21 489 D, 22 
 
 403 D, 22 489 D, 24 
 
 408 D, 23 489 D, 25 
 
 408 1), 24 489 D, 26 
 
 408 D, 25 489 D, 27 
 
 408 D, 28 489 D, 28 
 
 408 D, 27 489 D, 29 
 
 403 D, 28 489 D, 30 
 
 403 D, 29 489 U, 31 
 
 403 D, 30 489 D, 32 
 
 408 D, 31 489 D, 33 
 
 408 D, 82 489 D, 34 
 
 408 1), 33 489 D, 35 
 
 408 D, 34 489 D, 36 
 
 408 D, 35 489 D, 37 
 
 408 D, 36 489 D, 38 
 
 408 D, 37 489 D, 39 
 
 408 D, 38 489 D, 40 
 
 408 D, 39 489 D, 41 
 
 408 D,40 489 D, 42 
 
 408 D, 41 489 D, 43 
 
 408 D, 42 489 D, 44 
 
 408 D, 48 489 D, 45 
 
 408 D, 44 4891), 46 
 
 408 D, 45 489 D, 47 
 
 409 490 
 
 409,1 490,1 
 
 409 Dj 1 490 D, 1 
 
 409, 2 490, 2 
 
 409 D, 2 490 D, 2 
 
 409, 3 490, 3 
 
 409 D, 8 490 D 3 
 
 409, 4 490, 4 
 
 409 D, 4 490 D, 4 
 
 409, 5 490, 5 
 
 409, 5, Eem. a — 
 
 409 D, 5 490 D, 5 
 
 409, 6 491 
 
 409, 6, Eem. a 491a 
 
 409 D, 6 491 D 
 
 409, 7 492, 7 
 
 409 D, 7 492D,7! 
 
 NEW. OLD. 
 
 409,8 492, 8 
 
 409 D, 9 492 D, 9 
 
 409 D, 10 492 D, 10 
 
 409 D, 11 492 D, 11 
 
 409 D, 12 492 Jl, 12 
 
 409 D, 13 492 1), 13 
 
 409 1), 14 492 D, 14 
 
 409 D, 15 492 D, 15 
 
 409 D, 16 492 D, 16 
 
 409 D, 17 492 D, 17 
 
 410D 493 
 
 411 D 494 
 
 412 a 495 
 
 412 b 496 
 
 413 497 and a 
 
 413, Eem. a 497 b 
 
 414 498 
 
 415 499 and a 
 
 416 500 
 
 416, 1 500, 1 
 
 416, 1, a 500, 1, a 
 
 416, 2 500, 2 
 
 416, 3 500, 3 
 
 416, 4 500,4 
 
 416, 5 500, 5 
 
 416, 6 500, 6 
 
 416, 7 500, 7 
 
 416, 8 500, 8 
 
 417 501 
 
 418 502 
 
 419 503 
 
 419, a 503, a 
 
 419 D, a 428D, a 
 
 419, 1 535,4 
 
 419 D, 1 635 D, 4 
 
 419, 2 503,1 
 
 419, 3 603, 2 
 
 419, 4 503,5, andD 
 
 419, 5 503, 3 
 
 419, 6 503,4 
 
 419, 7 535, 6 
 
 419, 8 535, 8 
 
 419, 9 535, 9 
 
 419, 10 535, 10 
 
 419, 11 603,11 
 
 419, 12 503, 12 
 
 419, 13 603, 13 
 
 419, 14 608,14 
 
 419, 16 608, 15 
 
 419, 16.. 503, 16, andD 16 
 
 419, 17 603,17 
 
 419 D, 17 503 D, 17 
 
 419, 18 503, 18 
 
 419, 19 603,19 
 
 419 D, 19 503 D, 19 
 
 419, 20 603, 20 
 
 419 D,21 503D, 21 
 
 420 504 
 
 420, 1 504,1 
 
 '420, 2 604, 2 
 
 !420, 8 504, 3 
 
 420 D, 3 504 0, 3 
 
 !420, 4 604,4 
 
 '420D, 4 604 D, 4 
 
 420, 6 504, 5 
 
 420 D, 6 604D,5 
 
 420, 6 504, 6 
 
 420, 7 504, 7 
 
 420, 8 604, 8 
 
 420, 9 — 
 
 420 D, 10 504D,9 
 
 420 D, 11 604 D, 10 
 
 420 D, 12 504 D, 11 
 
 421 505 
 
 421, 1 605, 1 
 
 421, 2 505, 2 
 
 421, 3 505, 3 
 
 421, 4 412 
 
 421, 5 505,4 
 
 421, 6 505, 5 
 
 421, 7 605, C 
 
 421, 8 605,7 
 
 421, 9 506, 8 
 
 421, 10 505, 9 
 
 421, 11 505,10 
 
 421, 12 505,11 
 
 421, 13 505, 12 
 
 421, 14 505, 13 
 
 421, 15 606, 14 
 
 421 D, 15 605 D, 14 
 
 421, 16 505, 14 
 
 421, 17 505, 16 
 
 421, 18 505, 16 
 
 421, 19 505,17 
 
 421, 20 506,18 
 
 421, 21 506, 19 
 
 421, 22 605, 20 
 
 421, 23 505, 21 
 
 421 D, 24 505 D, 22 
 
 422, 1 510, 2 
 
 422, 2 510, 3 
 
 422, 3 610, 4 
 
 422D,3 510r),4 
 
 422, 4 610, 5 
 
 422 D, 4 510 D, 5 
 
 423, 6 510, 6 
 
 422, 6 510,7 
 
 422, 7 510, 8 
 
 422, 8 510, 9 
 
 422, 9 510,10 
 
 422, 10 610, 11 
 
 422D, 10 510 D, 11 
 
 422, 11 610, 12 
 
 422 D, 11 510 1), 12 
 
 422, 12 610, 13 
 
 422, 13 610, 14 
 
 422, 14 610, 15 
 
 422, 16 510,16 
 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 413 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 422 D, 15 510 D, 16 
 
 422, 16 510, ir 
 
 422 D, 10 610 D, 17 
 
 422, 17 510,18 
 
 422, 18 510, 19 
 
 422 D, 19 610 D, 20 
 
 422 D, 20 510 D, 21 
 
 422 D, 21 510 D, 22 
 
 423, 1 507, 1 
 
 423, 2 507,2 
 
 423 D, 2 607 D, 2 
 
 423, 3 507,3 
 
 423 D, 3 507 D, 3 
 
 423, 4 507,4 
 
 423 D, 4 5071), 4 
 
 423 D, 5 607 D, 5 
 
 424, 1 508, 6 
 
 424 D, 1 508 D, 6 
 
 424, 2 608,7 
 
 424, 3 508, 8 
 
 424, 4 508, 9 
 
 424 D, 4 508 D, 9 
 
 424, 5 508, 10 
 
 424, 6 508, 11 
 
 424, 7 508, 12 
 
 424, 8 508, 13 
 
 424 D, 8 508 D, 13 
 
 424, 9 508, 14 
 
 424 D, 9 508 D, 14 
 
 424, 10 608, 15 
 
 424 D, 10 508 D, 15 
 
 424, 11 508, 16 
 
 424D,11 508 D, 16 
 
 424, 12 508, 17 
 
 424 D, 12 508 D, 17 
 
 424, 13 508,1 
 
 424, 14 508, 18 
 
 424, J5 508, 19 
 
 424D, 15 508 D, 19 
 
 424, 16 508, 20 
 
 424D, 16 508D, 20 
 
 424, 17 508, 21 
 
 424, 18 508, 22 
 
 424, 19 508, 23 
 
 424, 20... 608, 24 
 
 424, 21 608, 2 
 
 424, 22 508, 25 
 
 424, 23 608, 26 
 
 424 D, 23 508, 26 
 
 424, 24 508, 27 
 
 424 D. 24 508 D, 27 
 
 424, 25 .608, 28 
 
 424 D, 25 508 D, 28 
 
 424, 26 508, 29 
 
 424D, 26 508 D, 29 
 
 424, 27 508,3 
 
 424, 28 608,4 
 
 424, 29 508, 5 
 
 424 D, 30 508 D, 80 
 
 OLD. Njaw. 
 
 424 X), 31 508 D, 31 
 
 424 D, 32 508 D, 32 
 
 424 D, 33 .......508 1), 33 
 
 424 D, 34 608 D, 34 
 
 424 D, 35 508 D, 35 
 
 424 D, 36 508 D, 36 
 
 424 D, 37 508 D, 37 
 
 424 D, 38 508 D, 38 
 
 426, 1 611,1 
 
 425, 2 511, 2 
 
 425, 3 511, 3 
 
 425, 4 511,4 
 
 425, 5 511, 5 
 
 425, 6 511, 6 
 
 425 D, 6 — 
 
 425, 7 611,7 
 
 425, 8 511, 8 
 
 425 D, 8 511 D, 8 
 
 425, 9 511, 9 
 
 425, 10 511,10 
 
 425, 11 511, 11 
 
 425 U, 11 511 D, 11 
 
 426, 12 511 D, 19 
 
 425, 13 511, 12 
 
 425 D, 13 511 D, 12 
 
 425, 14 511,13 
 
 425, 15 511, 14 
 
 425 D, 15 511 D, 14 
 
 425, 16 511, 15 
 
 425 D, 16 511 D, 15 
 
 425 D, 17 511 D, 16 
 
 425 D, 18 511 D, 17 
 
 425 D, 19 611 D, 18 
 
 425 D, 20 511 D, 20 
 
 426, 1 512,1 
 
 426, 2 512, 2 
 
 426 D, 2 512 D, 2 
 
 426, 3 612,3 
 
 426 1), 3 512 D, 3 
 
 426, 4 512,4 
 
 426 D,4 612D,4 
 
 426, 5 512, 5 
 
 426, 6 612, 6 
 
 426 D, 6 512 D, 6 
 
 426 D, 7 512 D, 7 
 
 426 D, 8 ....;. ..612D, 8 
 
 426 D, 9 612 D, 9 
 
 427 513 
 
 427, 1 518, 1 
 
 427 D,l — 
 
 427, 2 513, 2 
 
 427, 3 513, S 
 
 427 D,3 513 D,3 
 
 427, 4 513 D, 19 
 
 427, 5 513,4 
 
 427 D, 6 513 D, 4 
 
 427, 6 513, 5 
 
 427 D, 6 613 D, 5 
 
 427, 7 618, 6 
 
 427, 8 513,7 
 
 427, 9 613, 8 
 
 427, 10 613, 9 
 
 427 D, 10 513 D, 9 
 
 427, 11 518,10 
 
 427, 12 613, 11 
 
 427, 13 513, 12 
 
 427, 14 513, 13 
 
 427, 16 613,14 
 
 427, 16 613,15 
 
 427, 17 513,16 
 
 427, 18 613,17 
 
 427, 19 513,18 
 
 427 D, 20 513 D, 20 
 
 427 D, 21 513 D, 21 
 
 428, 1 514,1 
 
 428, 2 514,2 
 
 428, 3 514,3 
 
 428, 4 514,4 
 
 428, 5 514,5 
 
 428 D, 5 514 D, 5 
 
 428, 6 514,6 
 
 428, 7 514,7 
 
 428 D, 7 514 D, 7 
 
 428, 8 514, 8 
 
 428, 9 514, 9 
 
 428, 10 514, 10 
 
 428D, 10 514D, 10 
 
 428, 11 514,11 
 
 428, 12 514,12 
 
 428 D, 12 514 D, 12 
 
 428, 13 514,13 
 
 428, 14 514,14 
 
 428, 16 614, 15 
 
 428, 16 514,16 
 
 428, 17 514, 17 
 
 428 D, 17 514 D, 17 
 
 428, 18 614, 18 
 
 428 D, 18 514D,18 
 
 428, 19 514,19 
 
 428 D, 20 514 D, 20 
 
 428 D, 21 514D, 21 
 
 429, 1 615,1 
 
 429, 2 516, 2 
 
 429 D, 3 515 D, 3 
 
 429 D, 4 516 D, 4 
 
 429 D, 5 515 D, 5 
 
 430, 1 516,1 
 
 430, 2 516, 2 
 
 430, 3 516,3 
 
 430, 4 616,4 
 
 430, 6 516, 5 
 
 430, 6 516, 6 
 
 430, 7 516,7 
 
 430 D, 8 516D, 8 
 
 430 D, 9 510 D, 9 
 
 430 D, 10 516 D, 10 
 
 430 D, 11 516 D, 11 
 
 480 D, 12 516 D, 12 
 
414 
 
 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 431, 1 517,1 
 
 431, 2 517, 2 
 
 431, 3 517, 8 
 
 431, 4 517,4 
 
 431, 5 517, 5 
 
 431 D, 5 517 D, 5 
 
 431, 6 517,7 
 
 431 D, 6 517 D, 7 
 
 431, 7 517 D, 9 
 
 431, 8 517,8 
 
 431 D, 9 517 D, 10 
 
 432, 1... 518,1 
 
 432 D,l 518 D, 1 
 
 432, 2 518, 2 
 
 4321), 2 518 D, 2 
 
 432, 3 518, 3 
 
 432, 4 -.518,4 
 
 432 D, 4 518 D, 4 
 
 482, 5 618, 5 
 
 432, 6 518, 6 
 
 43^D, 6 518 D, 6 
 
 432, 7 518,7 
 
 433, 8 518, 8 
 
 482 D, 8 518D, 8 
 
 432, 9 518, 9 
 
 432, 10 518, 10 
 
 432, 11 518,11 
 
 482 D, 11 518 D, 11 
 
 432, 12 518, 12 
 
 432 D, 12 518 D, 12 
 
 432, 13 518, 13 
 
 432, 14 518, 14 
 
 432, 15 518,15 
 
 432 D, 15 518 D, 15 
 
 432, 18 518, 16 
 
 432, 17 518, 17 
 
 432, 18 518, 18 
 
 432, 19 518, 19 
 
 432 D, 19 518 D, 19 
 
 432, 20 518, 20 
 
 432D, 20 518 D, 20 
 
 432, 21 518, 21 
 
 432 D, 21 518 D, 21 
 
 432 D, 22 ..*. ...518 D, 23 
 
 482 D, 23 518 D, 24 
 
 432 D, 24 518 D, 25 
 
 432 D, 25 518 D, 26 
 
 482 D, 26 518 D, 27 
 
 438, 1 519, 1 
 
 438 D,l 519 D,l 
 
 433, 2 519, 2 
 
 433 D, 2 519 D, 2 
 
 433, 8 519, 3 
 
 433, 4 519,4 
 
 433 D, 4 519 D, 4 
 
 438, 5 519, 5 
 
 438 D,5 519 D,5 
 
 433, 6 519, 6 
 
 433 D, 6 519 D, 6 
 
 OlD. NEW. 
 
 433 D, 7 519 D 
 
 434, 1 520,1 
 
 434D, 1 ...■ 520 D, 1 
 
 434, 2 520, 2 
 
 434 D, 3 520 D 
 
 484]), 4 530 D, 4 
 
 434 D, 5 5L0D, 5 
 
 4341), 6 520 D, 
 
 484 D, 7 520 D, 
 
 435, 1 519, 
 
 435 D, 1 519 D, 
 
 485, 2. 
 435 D, 
 485, 3, 
 435, 4 
 485, 5 
 
 521 
 
 2 521 d: 
 
 521 
 
 521 
 521 
 
 485 D, 5 521 D 
 
 435, 6 521, 
 
 435 D, 6 521 D, 
 
 435, 7 521, 
 
 485, 8 521,7 
 
 485 D, 8 5211), 7 
 
 435, 9 521 
 
 435 D, 9 521 D, 
 
 485 D, 10 621 D, 10 
 
 436, 1 522, 1 
 
 486, 2 522, 
 
 436 D, 2 522 D, 
 
 436, 3 622, 
 
 486, 4 522,4 
 
 436, 5 622, 5 
 
 436D, 5 522 D, 6 
 
 486, 6 622, 
 
 436, 7 628 
 
 486 D, 7 528 D, 8 
 
 436, 8 522, 7 
 
 436, 9 522, 
 
 486,10 519 
 
 486 D, 10 519 D 
 
 486, 11 522 
 
 436 D, 12 518 D, 22 
 
 436 D, 13 522 D, 11 
 
 436 D, 14 522 D, 10 
 
 486 D, 15 522 D, 12 
 
 487, 1 523, 1 
 
 4.S7D, 1 523 D, 1 
 
 487, 2 523, 2 
 
 487, 8 523,4 
 
 437 D, 8 528 D, 4 
 
 487, 4 523, 5 
 
 437I>,4 523 D, 5 
 
 437, 5 523, 6 
 
 437 D, 5 523 D, 6 
 
 487, 6 523,7 
 
 437, 7 523, 8 
 
 437 D, 7 523 D, 8 
 
 487, 8 523, 9 
 
 487 D, 8 528 D, 9 
 
 437 D, 9 523 D, 10 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 438, 1 524, 1 
 
 438, 2 524, 2 
 
 438D, 2 524D, 2 
 
 488, 3 524,8 
 
 488, 4 521, 9 
 
 488, 5 524,4 
 
 488, 6 524, 5 
 
 439, 1 525,1 
 
 489 D, 1 525 D, 1 
 
 489, 2 526, 2 
 
 489, 3 625, 3 
 
 489, 4 626,4 
 
 489 D,4 525 D, 4 
 
 439 D, 5 525 D, 5 
 
 440, 1 526,1 
 
 440 D, 1 626 D,l 
 
 440, 2 626, 2 
 
 440 D, 2 526D,2 
 
 440, 3 526,3 
 
 440, 4 528, 15 
 
 440 D, 5 626 D, 4 
 
 440 D, 6 526 D, 5 
 
 440 D, 7 626D, 6 
 
 441, 1 627,1 
 
 441, 2 527, 2 
 
 441, 8 527, 3 
 
 441, 4 617, 6 
 
 442, 1 528, 1 
 
 442 D,l 528 D, 1 
 
 442, 2 528, 2 
 
 442, 8 628,3 
 
 442D, 3 628D, 3 
 
 442, 4 528,4 
 
 442 D, 4 628 D, 4 
 
 442, 5 528, 5 
 
 442, 6 628, 6 
 
 442, 7 528,7 
 
 442 D, 7 528 D, 7 
 
 442, 8 528, 8 
 
 442 D, 8 ..: 528 D, 8 
 
 442, 9 528, 9 
 
 442, 10 628, 10 
 
 442, 11 528, 11 
 
 442 D, 11 628 D, 11 
 
 442, 12 528, 12 
 
 4421), 12 528 D, 12 
 
 442, 13 528, 13 
 
 442, 14 528,14 
 
 442, 15. 528, 16 
 
 442 D, 16 528 D, 17 
 
 442 D, 17 528 D, 18 
 
 442 D, 18 528 D, 19 
 
 443 D 529D 
 
 443 D,l 529 D, 1 
 
 448 D, 2 529 D, 2 
 
 448 D, 3 529 D, 8 
 
 443 D, 4 529 D, 4 
 
 443 D, 5 529 D, 6 
 
 443 D, 6 529 D. 6 
 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 415 
 
 OLD. MEW. 
 
 443 D,r 529 D, 7 
 
 443 D, 8 529 D, 8 
 
 444, 1 530,1 
 
 444, 2 530, 2 
 
 444 D, 2 530 D, 2 
 
 444, 3 530,8 
 
 444, 4 530,4 
 
 444, 5 530, 5 
 
 444 D, 5 530 D, 5 
 
 444, 6 630,6 
 
 444 D, 6 530 D, 6 
 
 444, 1 530,7 
 
 444 D, 7 529 D, 5 
 
 444, 8 530, 8 
 
 444, 9 530, 9 
 
 444, 10 530 10 
 
 444D, 11 530 D, 11 
 
 444 D, 12 530 D, 12 
 
 445, 1 531, 1 
 
 445, 2 531, 2 
 
 445, 3 581, 3 
 
 445 D, 3 531 D, 3 
 
 445, 4 531,4 
 
 445 D,4 531 D,4 
 
 445, 5 531, 5 
 
 445, 6 531, 6 
 
 445 D, 6 531 D, 6 
 
 446, 1 532D, 3 
 
 446, 2 532,1 
 
 446, 3 532, 2 
 
 446 D, 4 532 D, 4 
 
 447, 1 533, 1 
 
 447, 2 533, 2 
 
 447, 3 533, 3 
 
 447, 4 533 D, 12 
 
 447, 5 533,4 
 
 447, 6 633, 6 
 
 447, 1 533, 6 
 
 447 D, 7 533 D, 6 
 
 447, 8 510,1 
 
 447 D, 8 510 D, 1 
 
 447, 9 533,7 
 
 447 D, 9 533 D, 7 
 
 447, 10 533, 8 
 
 447 D, 10 533 1), 8 
 
 447, 11 633, 9 
 
 447 D, 11 633 D, 9 
 
 447, 12 533,10 
 
 447, 13 533, 11 
 
 447 D, 13 533 D, 11 
 
 447 D, 14 533 1), 13 
 
 447 D, 16 633 D, 14 
 
 447 D, 16 533 D, 15 
 
 447 D, 17 533 D, 16 
 
 443, 1 503,7 
 
 448, 2 509,1 
 
 448 D, a 509 D 
 
 448, 3 509, 2 
 
 448, i ......509, 3 
 
 OLD. iraw, 
 
 448, 5 509,4 
 
 448, 6 509,5 
 
 448, 7 — 
 
 448, 8 509 D, 13 
 
 448, 9 509, 6 
 
 448, 10 509,7 
 
 448, 11 509,8 
 
 448 D, 12 509 D, 9 
 
 448 B, 13 509 D, 10 
 
 44SD, 14 609 D, 11 
 
 448 D, 15 509 D, 12 
 
 448 D, 16 609 D, 14 
 
 448 D, 17 509 U, 15 
 
 448 D, 18 609 D, 16 
 
 448 D, 19 609 D, 17 
 
 448 D, 20 509 D, 18 
 
 448 D, 21 609 D, 19 
 
 448 D, 22 509 D, 20 
 
 448 D, 23 609 D, 21 
 
 448 D, 24 609 D, 22 
 
 448 D, 25 609 D, 23 
 
 448 D, 26 509 D, 24 
 
 449 506 
 
 449, 1 506,1 
 
 449 D, 1 506 D,l 
 
 449, 2 506, 2 
 
 449 D, 2 506 D, 2 
 
 449, 3 506, 3 
 
 449, 4 606,4 
 
 449 D, 4 606 D, 4 
 
 449, 5 506,5 
 
 449, 6 606, 6 
 
 449 D, 7 506 D, 7 
 
 450, 1 539,1 
 
 450 D, 1 639 D,l 
 
 460, 2 639, 2 
 
 450 D, 2 539 D, 2 
 
 460, 3 639,3 
 
 460 D, 3 639 D, 3 
 
 460, 4 and a 539, 4 
 
 450 D, 4 539 D, 4 
 
 460, 5 539,5 
 
 450 D, 6 539 D, 5 
 
 450, 6 539, 6 
 
 450 D, 6 539 D, 6 
 
 450, 7 639,7 
 
 450, 7, a 539, 7, a 
 
 480, 8 539,8 
 
 460, 8, a 639, 8, a 
 
 450 D, 8 639 D, 8 
 
 451 page 355 
 
 452 640 
 
 453 541 
 
 454 542 
 
 464, Rem. a 542 a 
 
 454, Eem. b 647 
 
 465 644, 545 
 
 455 a 645 a 
 
 465 b 545 
 
 OLD. MBW. 
 
 455o 544o 
 
 455 d 544 b 
 
 455e 645d 
 
 ~456 546 
 
 467 548 
 
 457 a 648 b 
 
 467 b _ 
 
 457 548 b 
 
 458 557 
 
 458, 1 557,1 
 
 458 a 657 b 
 
 469 560, 657, 2 
 
 469 a 550 a 
 
 460 a 551,1 
 
 460b 661,2 
 
 460 552 
 
 461a 563,1 
 
 461b 553, 2 
 
 461b, fin 553a 
 
 462 554 
 
 463 a 561 a 
 
 463 b 561 b 
 
 463 661, 2 
 
 464 a 556, 1 
 
 464b 556, 2 
 
 464 656, 3 
 
 464 d 553, 2 
 
 466 a 668, 1 and 2 
 
 466b 558, 3 
 
 466 559 andaandb 
 
 466 a 559 
 
 467 a 660,1 
 
 467b 560,2 
 
 467 660, 3 
 
 468,1 564 
 
 468 a — 
 
 468 b 664 a 
 
 468 c 564 b 
 
 469,2 565 
 
 470, 3 and 4 666 
 
 470, 5 567 
 
 471, 6 569 
 
 472 570 
 
 472 a 571,1 
 
 472b 571, 2 
 
 472 c 571, 3 
 
 472 d 571,4 
 
 472 671,5 
 
 472 f 671, 6 
 
 472g 571,7 
 
 472h 671, 8 
 
 472, Rem. i 572 
 
 472, Rem. j 573 
 
 472, Eem. k 574 
 
 473 575 
 
 473 a 576 a 
 
 473 b 675 b and 
 
 474 576 
 
 475 678 
 
416 
 
 TABLE OF GORBESFONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 475 a 5780 
 
 475 b 578 a 
 
 476 579 
 
 476 a 579 a 
 
 476 b 579 b 
 
 477 580 and a 
 
 478 581 
 
 479. .582 a and b, and 583 
 
 479 a 582 
 
 480 584 
 
 480,1 585anda 
 
 481,2 586 
 
 482,3 585 b 
 
 482, Eem. a 587 
 
 482, Eem. b 587 b 
 
 482, Eem. 587 a 
 
 483 589 
 
 484 590 
 
 485 591, 592 
 
 485 a 603 a 
 
 485 b — 
 
 485o 939 
 
 486 593 anda 
 
 486 a 784, 2 
 
 486 b 938 b 
 
 487 594,595 
 
 488 a 594 a 
 
 488 b 594 b 
 
 488 c 619 and b 
 
 489 a 595a 
 
 489 b 595 b 
 
 489c — 
 
 489 d — 
 
 489 e — 
 
 490 and a 596 
 
 490 b 596 a 
 
 490 726 
 
 490 d 938 b 
 
 491 a 598 
 
 491 b 599 
 
 492, a, b, 0, e, f, g 600 
 
 492 d 666 and a 
 
 492 h 666 b 
 
 493, a, b, 0, d 600 
 
 493 e 600a 
 
 498 f 600 b 
 
 493g — 
 
 494 602 d 
 
 494 a 602 d and Eem. 
 
 495 — 
 
 496 621b 
 
 497 a 603 
 
 497b 604 
 
 498 620 
 
 499 623 
 
 500 a 624 a and 625 a 
 
 500 b 624 d and 625 
 
 500 624b 
 
 500 d 624 and 625 b 
 
 OLD, MEW. 
 
 501 626 and a 
 
 502 a — 
 
 502 b 626 b 
 
 502c — 
 
 503 627 
 
 504 602 
 
 505 — 
 
 506 — 
 
 507 — 
 
 508a 611 
 
 508 b 612 
 
 508 c 613 
 
 509 a 621 d 
 
 509b 621 
 
 509 (a) 622 
 
 509 O) 730 a 
 
 509 c 621b 
 
 510 996 
 
 511, a, 0, andd 606 
 
 511b 606a 
 
 511 6 615(1) 
 
 511 f 615(2) 
 
 511ff 615 (a) 
 
 511 h 616 
 
 511 i 610 a and 617 
 
 512 a 608 and a 
 
 512 b 620 a 
 
 512 c 614 a and 623 b 
 
 512d 628 
 
 613 a 610 
 
 513 b 631 
 
 513 632 a 
 
 514 and a 609 
 
 514b 609a 
 
 514 c 629 
 
 514 d 629 a 
 
 514 e — 
 
 515 604 
 
 516 605 
 
 517 634 
 
 518 635 
 
 518 b — 
 
 518 636 
 
 518d 637 
 
 519 638 
 
 519 b — 
 
 520 689 
 
 521 272 a, 275 a, 222 o 
 
 522 617 
 
 523 638 
 
 624 663 
 
 625 and a 654 a and b 
 
 525(a) 654c 
 
 526m 664d 
 
 525 (v) 654e 
 
 525 b 666 a and b 
 
 525 655 
 
 526 d 655 d 
 
 526a 656 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 526 b 659 
 
 527 a 657 a 
 
 527 b — 
 
 527 657 b 
 
 527 d..... G68 
 
 627e 667 o 
 
 628 664a 
 
 628 a 666 
 
 629 659 fin. 
 
 529 a 659 a 
 
 530.. 660 
 
 530 a 663 
 
 630 b 661 
 
 530 c 660a 
 
 531 666 
 
 532 667 
 
 532 a 667 a and b 
 
 632 b 662 
 
 533 668 
 
 633 a and b 668 a 
 
 534 666 
 
 635a 669 
 
 536 b 670 
 
 536 671 
 
 537 C72 
 
 538 a 073 
 
 538 b 680 
 
 538 675 
 
 538 d 676 
 
 538 e 705 
 
 539 601 
 
 540 706 b 
 
 541 707 
 
 642 708 
 
 543 709 
 
 544 710,711 
 
 544 a 712 
 
 544 b 712 a 
 
 544 712 b 
 
 644 d 712c 
 
 544 6 713 
 
 545 723 
 
 546 714 
 
 547 a and b. . .715 a and b 
 
 647 c 716 b 
 
 547 d 716 a 
 
 548 717 
 
 549, a, b, 0. . . .718, a, b, c 
 
 550, a, b 720, a, b 
 
 550, Eem. c 721 
 
 651 722 
 
 552 719 anda 
 
 552 a 719 b and o 
 
 553 and a 724 and a 
 
 554 — 
 
 555 725 
 
 555 a 725o 
 
 556 726 
 
 556 a 726a 
 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 
 
 417 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 556 b 726 b 
 
 657 727 
 
 558 728 
 
 558 a 729 e 
 
 558 b 729 f 
 
 558 729 g 
 
 658 d 729 a 
 
 558 e 729 a, Eem. 
 
 558 f 729 b 
 
 558g 7290 
 
 558 E. .of. 729 a and Kem. 
 558 i 729 d 
 
 558 .j 729 g, Kem. 
 
 559 a 729 e 
 
 659 b — 
 
 559 730 
 
 559 d 730 d 
 
 559 e 730 e 
 
 560 729f 
 
 561 729 g 
 
 562 729 a and 730 a 
 
 663 of. 729 a 
 
 663 a — 
 
 563 b 730 b 
 
 664. 
 565. 
 566. 
 567. 
 568. 
 569. 
 570. 
 571. 
 572. 
 
 lb 
 
 729 
 
 .of. 729 a Eem. 
 
 729 d 
 
 732 d 
 
 731 
 
 733 
 
 .734 
 .732 
 
 572,a,b,o,d,e,f,g,h..732a 
 
 573. 
 674... 
 674 a. 
 574 b. 
 674 0. 
 574 d. 
 
 674 e. 
 575... 
 
 675 a. 
 576... 
 
 576 a.. 
 
 577 a. 
 677 b. 
 577, Eem. o 739 a 
 
 578 a 746 
 
 578 b 746 
 
 678, Eem. o 746 o 
 
 579, a, b, 747 
 
 580 748 
 
 580 a 748 a 
 
 581 749 
 
 581a 741 
 
 582 750 
 
 682 a 750 a 
 
 583 751 
 
 .736 
 ...736 
 ...737 
 ...738 
 ...739 
 ...740 
 ...736 
 ...743 
 .743 b 
 ...742 
 .742 
 ...744 
 
 .746 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 584 763 
 
 584a 753a 
 
 684 b 753 
 
 584 753 d 
 
 584 d 753 e 
 
 584e 753f 
 
 584 f 753 g 
 
 584 g 753 g 
 
 585 h 755 
 
 586 i 765 a 
 
 686 a 643 a 
 
 586 b 643 b 
 
 686 755 b 
 
 587 a 764a 
 
 587 b 764 b 
 
 5870 7640 
 
 587 d 754 d 
 
 687 e 754 e 
 
 587 f 754 f 
 
 588 766 
 
 589 767 
 
 590 a 760 anda 
 
 590 b 748 b 
 
 591 759 
 
 592 a 761 
 
 692 b 960 
 
 693 970 
 
 594 a 762,1 
 
 594 b 762,2 
 
 694 762, 3 
 
 594 d 762,4 
 
 594 e 762, 6 
 
 595 763 
 
 595 a 764,1 
 
 595 b 764, 2 
 
 695 765 
 
 595 d 765 a 
 
 596 766 
 
 596 a 767 
 
 596 b 768 
 
 596 770 
 
 596 d 769 
 
 596 e 771 
 
 697 767 
 
 598 768 
 
 598a 768a 
 
 598 b 76ff b 
 
 599 770 
 
 600 769 
 
 601 771 
 
 601 a 771 a 
 
 602 762,3 
 
 002,1 772 
 
 602 a 772a 
 
 602 b 772 c 
 
 603 773 
 
 603 a 773 b 
 
 604 774 
 
 605 775 
 
 OLD. MEW. 
 
 605 a 775 a 
 
 606 776 
 
 607 776 
 
 607 a 777 
 
 608 776 
 
 609 780 
 
 610 781 anda 
 
 610, Eem. a — 
 
 611 776 
 
 611 a 778 
 
 612 783 
 
 612 a 783 b 
 
 613 782 
 
 614 784 
 
 615 785 
 
 616 a 786 a 
 
 616 786 
 
 617 787 
 
 618 787 
 
 618 a 788 
 
 619, I-TI 789 
 
 620 796 
 
 620 a 796 a 
 
 620b 796 b 
 
 620 796 
 
 620 d 796 c 
 
 620, note 796, note 
 
 621 722 a 
 
 622 793 
 
 623 794 
 
 623 a 794 a 
 
 623 b 794 b 
 
 623 c 794 
 
 624 798 
 
 624a 798a 
 
 624b 798 b 
 
 624 7980 
 
 624 d 798 d 
 
 625 804 
 
 625a 804a 
 
 626 b 804 b 
 
 625 804 
 
 625 d 804 d 
 
 626, 5. "1 
 
 626, 6. I ^„ 
 
 026,7. f ^°'* 
 
 626, 8. J 
 
 626 a 768 
 
 626 b 758 
 
 626, Kem. r of. 767 
 
 627 797 
 
 628 806 
 
 629 795,1 
 
 630 a 795, 2 b 
 
 630 b 796, 2 a 
 
 631 800 
 
 631 a 800, 1 a and b 
 
 681b 800, lo 
 
 632 800, a 
 
418 
 
 TABLE OF OORRESFONDmGf ARTICLES. 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 683 807, 1 
 
 634 807, 2 
 
 635 792,1 
 
 636 792, 2 
 
 637, 1 791, 2 
 
 638 791,1 
 
 639 791,3 
 
 640 799, 2 
 
 640 a 799, 2 a 
 
 640 b 799, 2 b 
 
 640 799, 2 d 
 
 641 a 799, 1 a aad b 
 
 641 b 799, lo 
 
 6410 799, Id 
 
 642 799, 3 
 
 643 801, 2 
 
 644 801, 1 
 
 645 a 801,3 b 
 
 645 b 801, 8 
 
 645 801, 3 a 
 
 646 802, 2 
 
 047 802,1 
 
 648 802, 3 
 
 649 803, 2 
 
 650 803, 1 
 
 651 803, 3 
 
 652 805, 2 
 
 653 805, 1 
 
 653 a 805, 1, a and b 
 
 653 b 805, 1 
 
 654 805, 3 
 
 655 808, 2 
 
 656 808,1 
 
 657 808, 3 
 
 658 640 
 
 659 642 
 
 660 643 
 
 660 a 644 
 
 660 b 645 
 
 6600 646 
 
 660 d 647 
 
 661 648 
 
 662 649 
 
 663 650 
 
 664 651 
 
 664a — 
 
 664b 651 a 
 
 665 a 652 a and b 
 
 665b 6520 
 
 666 256 
 
 667 677 
 
 068 677 a 
 
 669 a 680, 1 
 
 669 b 680, 2 and 3 
 
 6690 682 
 
 670 
 
 671 
 
 671 a 
 
 671b 
 
 ...684 
 ...685 
 .686 a 
 
 OLD. ITEW 
 
 672 686 
 
 673 687 
 
 673 a 687 
 
 674 688 
 
 675 675 and 658 
 
 675 a 689 
 
 675 b 691 
 
 676 692 
 
 677 694 
 
 678 695 
 
 679 696 
 
 680 697 
 
 680 a 698 
 
 681 699 fin. 
 
 681 a 699 
 
 681 b 699 a 
 
 682 700 
 
 683 702 
 
 683 a 702 b 
 
 683 b 703 
 
 683 c 703 a 
 
 684 809 
 
 684 a 810 
 
 685 810 a 
 
 686 of. 815 
 
 687 811 
 
 688 812 
 
 688a 812b 
 
 689 813 
 
 689 a 813 a 
 
 689 b 815 
 
 690 814 
 
 69J 816 
 
 692 817 
 
 693 818 and a 
 
 694 819 
 
 694 a 819 a 
 
 694 b 819 
 
 694 819d 
 
 694, Eem. d....819, Eem. 
 695 821 
 
 695 a — 
 
 69G 823 
 
 696a 823a 
 
 696 b.... 851 
 
 697 824 a and b 
 
 698 827 
 
 699 828 
 
 700 838 
 
 700 a 833 
 
 701 829ff 
 
 702 832 
 
 703 834 
 
 704 835 and a 
 
 705 836 and a 
 
 706 837 
 
 707 840 
 
 708 841 
 
 709 842 
 
 OLD. jraw. 
 
 710 a 844 
 
 710 b 845 
 
 710 911 and 8810 
 
 711 846 
 
 712 849 andb 
 
 7l2a 8490 
 
 713 850 
 
 714 851 
 
 715 851 
 
 716 861 
 
 716a — 
 
 717 856 
 
 717 a 856 andb 
 
 717 b 854 
 
 718 855 
 
 718 a 855 b 
 
 719 865 
 
 719, Eom. a — 
 
 720 866 
 
 720 a 866,1 
 
 720 b 866, 2 
 
 7200 866, 3 
 
 720 d 867 
 
 720 e 868 
 
 721 869 
 
 721,1 870 
 
 721, la 870 a-o 
 
 721,1 b 871 and a 
 
 722 872 
 
 722 a 872a 
 
 722b 872 d 
 
 7220 872e 
 
 723 873 
 
 723 a 874 and a 
 
 723 b 874 b 
 
 724 876 
 
 724 a 876a 
 
 724 b 876 a 
 
 725 877 
 
 726 878 
 
 727 — 
 
 728 — 
 
 729 — 
 
 729 a — 
 
 729 b — 
 
 780 — 
 
 731 — 
 
 731a — 
 
 731b — 
 
 732 879 
 
 783 929, 930 
 
 734 928 
 
 734a 92Sa 
 
 734 b of. 932 
 
 734 of. 980,2 
 
 735 932,1 
 
 736 932,2 
 
 736,1 932 b(l) 
 
 737 932b{2) 
 
TABLE OF aORRESPONDma ARTICLES. 
 
 419 
 
 738 — 
 
 739 881 
 
 740 881 and a 
 
 740 b — 
 
 741 882 
 
 742 884 
 
 743 887 
 
 743 a 887 a and b 
 
 743 b 887 and 888 
 
 744 8889 
 
 745 893 andb 
 
 745 a 893 
 
 746 895 
 
 746 a 895, note a 
 
 746 b 895, note 
 
 747 894, 1, and 898 
 
 747 a 898 
 
 747 b 894 b 
 
 748 900 andb 
 
 749 932,2, band(l) 
 
 749 a 894, 2 
 
 750 901 
 
 751 902 
 
 752 903 
 
 753 904 
 
 754 and a 905 and a 
 
 754 b 906 
 
 755 908 and 909 
 
 756 911 
 
 756 a 886 
 
 757 912-918 
 
 758 908 and 920 
 
 759 860 
 
 760 a 898 c 
 
 760 b — 
 
 760 c 914 B (2) 
 
 760d 914c 
 
 761. 914 A 
 
 762 938 
 
 762 a 938 a 
 
 762 b 938 b 
 
 763 945 and 949 
 
 764 a 946 
 
 764 b 948 
 
 764o — 
 
 765 951 
 
 766 950 fin. 
 
 767 952 
 
 767a 952a 
 
 768 954 
 
 769 955 and a and b 
 
 770 953 
 
 771 927 and 924 
 
 772 956 
 
 773 939 
 
 773 a 939 a 
 
 773 b 947 
 
 774and 1 042 
 
 775 940 
 
 OLP. ITBW. 
 
 775 a 956 a 
 
 775b 940b 
 
 776 941 
 
 777 944 and a 
 
 777 a - 
 
 77715 943 
 
 778 958 
 
 779 959 
 
 780 959 
 
 780 a 961 
 
 781 969 
 
 781 a 960 
 
 782 959 
 
 783 964 
 
 783 a 964a 
 
 783 b 964 b 
 
 783, Eera. o — 
 
 784 957 
 
 785 965 
 
 786 a 
 
 786 b 
 
 787 and a. 
 788 
 
 788 a 
 
 789 b 
 
 789 c 
 
 789 d. 
 
 .966 a 
 .966 b 
 ...967 
 
 .cf. 
 
 969 
 
 969 a 
 
 969 b 
 
 969 c 
 
 789 e 969 d 
 
 789 1' 969 e 
 
 789, Eem. g 969, Eem. 
 
 790 970 
 
 790 a 971 
 
 790 b of. 971a 
 
 790 c 971 a 
 
 790 d 971 b 
 
 790 e 971 
 
 791 972 
 
 791 a 972 a 
 
 791b 972b 
 
 91c 972 c 
 
 791 d 972 d 
 
 792....- 973 
 
 792 a andb 973 a 
 
 793 974 and a 
 
 794 — 
 
 795 975 
 
 795 a 976 b 
 
 795 b 976 : 
 
 795 c 976 ' 
 
 795 d 977! 
 
 7956 978! 
 
 795 f 979 I 
 
 796 980 
 
 796 a 980 
 
 796 b 980 
 
 797 andl 981 and a 
 
 798 981 
 
 799 982 1 
 
 OlD. 
 
 799 a 
 
 982 a 
 
 800 
 
 . 983 
 
 800 a 
 
 
 801 
 
 984, 985 
 
 801a 
 
 984a 
 
 803 987 
 
 803 a 987 a 
 
 803 b ;.987b 
 
 804 988 
 
 804 a 989 
 
 804 b 990 
 
 805 991 and a 
 
 806 a 990 
 
 806 b 992 
 
 807 993 
 
 808 and a 994 
 
 809 995 a andb 
 
 809 a 9960 
 
 810 996 and a 
 
 810 a — 
 
 811 997 
 
 81ia 997a 
 
 812 998 
 
 813 999 and a 
 
 813a 999b 
 
 814 1000 
 
 816 1001 
 
 815 a r 1001 a 
 
 816 1002 
 
 816a 1002a 
 
 816 b 1002 b 
 
 817 1003 
 
 817 a 1003 a 
 
 817 b 1003 b 
 
 818 and a and b 1004 
 
 818 and d 1005 
 
 819 1006 
 
 820 1007 
 
 821 1008 and a 
 
 090 ^_ 
 
 823!!!!!'.!!!!'.i'od9'anda 
 824 a 1010,1 
 
 824 b 1010, 2 
 
 825 1011 
 
 825 a — 
 
 825 b 1011a 
 
 826 1012 
 
 826 a 1012 a 
 
 826 b 1012 
 
 827 1013 
 
 828 a 1015 a 
 
 828 b 1015 
 
 828, Eem. c — 
 
 829 1015 
 
 829 a 1015 b 
 
 830 1016 anda-o 
 
 831 1017 
 
 831 a 1017 b 
 
420 
 
 TABLE OF CORRESPONDINQ ARTTCLES. 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 832 1018 
 
 833 1019 
 
 834 1020 
 
 835 1021 
 
 835 a 1021a 
 
 836 1022 
 
 837 1023 
 
 837 a 1023 a 
 
 837 b 1024 
 
 838 1029 
 
 839 1025 
 
 840 1026 
 
 841 1027 
 
 842 1028 
 
 843 1030 
 
 844 1031 
 
 845 1032 
 
 846 1033 
 
 847 1034 
 
 847 a 1034 a 
 
 847b 1034b 
 
 848 1043, 1044 
 
 848 a 287, 719 b 
 
 848 b — 
 
 848 c 1035a 
 
 848d 1035 b 
 
 848 e 1035 e 
 
 849 1036 
 
 850 1037 
 
 850, 1 1037, 1 
 
 850, la 1037,1a 
 
 850, 2 1037, 2 
 
 850,3 1037, 3 
 
 851 1037,4 
 
 851 a 1037, 4 a 
 
 861b 1037, 4b 
 
 851 1037,4c 
 
 852, 5 1037, 5 
 
 852, 6 1087, 6 
 
 852,7 1037,7 
 
 852,8 1037,8 
 
 852, 9 cf. 113 D 
 
 852, 10 1037, 9 
 
 852,11 1037.10 
 
 852, 12 1037, lOfiu. 
 
 852, 13.... 1037, 11 and 12 
 
 852, 14 1037, 13 
 
 853 1038 
 
 853 a 1038 a 
 
 853 b 1038 a, fin. 
 
 854 1089 
 
 855 1040 
 
 855 a 1040a 
 
 855 b 1040 b 
 
 856 a 1041 
 
 856 b 1042 
 
 856 1042 a 
 
 867 1042 b 
 
 858 1043 
 
 * OLD. NEW. 
 
 858 a 1043, 1 
 
 858 b 1043, 2 
 
 859 1044 and a 
 
 I 859a 1044b 
 
 860,1 1045, 1 
 
 ' 860, 1 a 1045, 1 a 
 
 ' 860, 1 b 1046, 1 b 
 
 861 , 1045, 2 
 
 I 862. 1 1046, 1 
 
 '862, la...l046,l, aandb 
 
 I 862, lb 1046, Ic 
 
 863. 2 1046, 2 
 
 863, 2 a 1046, 2 a 
 
 '863, 2 b 1046, 2b 
 
 863, 2 c 1046, 2e 
 
 '864, 3 1047,1 
 
 864, 4 1047, 2 
 
 864, 5 1047,3 
 
 864, 6 1047,4 
 
 864, 7 1047,6 
 
 664, 8 1047, 6 
 
 865, 1 1048,1 
 
 866, 2 1048, 2 
 
 866, 2 a 1048,2 a 
 
 867, 3 1048,3 
 
 867, 4 1048,4 
 
 867, 5 1048,5 
 
 867, 6 1048, 6 
 
 868, 1 1049, 1 
 
 868, la 1049, la 
 
 868,1b 1049, 1 b 
 
 868, l,Eem.o. .1049, Kem. 
 
 868, 2 1049, 2 
 
 869, 1 1050,1 
 
 869, 2 1050, 2 
 
 869, 3 1050,3 
 
 870, 4 1050,4 
 
 870,4 a 1050,4 a 
 
 870,4 b 1050,4 b 
 
 870,4 1050, 4o 
 
 870, 4 d 1050, 4 d-f 
 
 871 1051 
 
 872 1052 
 
 873 857-868 
 
 873 a...... 864 
 
 878 b note before 857 
 
 874 1053 
 
 874, 1 1053,1 
 
 874, 2 1053, 2 
 
 874, 2 a 1053, 2 a 
 
 874, 3 1053, 8 
 
 874,3 b 1047, 6 
 
 875 1054 
 
 875, 1 1054,1 
 
 875,1a 1054, la 
 
 875, lb 1054, 1 b 
 
 875, 1 c 1054, 1 
 
 875, Id 1054, Id 
 
 875, le 1054. 1 e 
 
 OLD. T/mr. 
 
 875, If 1054,1} 
 
 875, Ig 1054, Ig 
 
 876 1054, 2 
 
 876, 8 1054, 8 
 
 876, 4 1054,4 
 
 876,4, a and b...l054, 4, 
 
 a and b 
 
 876. 5 1054, 5 
 
 876, 6 1054, 6 
 
 876, 7 1054, 7 
 
 877 1055 
 
 877, 1 1055, 1 
 
 877, 2 1055, 2 
 
 877, 8 1055,3 
 
 877, 4 1055,4 
 
 877, 5 1055, 5 
 
 877, 6 1055, 6 
 
 877, 7 1055,7 
 
 877, 8 1055,8 
 
 878 1055, 9 
 
 879 1056 
 
 879, 1 1056, 1 
 
 879, 2 1056, 2 
 
 879, 8 1056,3 
 
 879, 4 1056,4 
 
 869, 5 1056, 5 
 
 879,-6 1056, 6 
 
 879 Eem. a — 
 
 880 1057 
 
 881 1058 
 
 882 1059 
 
 883 1060 
 
 884 1061 
 
 885 1062 
 
 886 1063 
 
 887 1066 
 
 888 1068 
 
 889 1072 
 
 890 1073 
 
 891 1077 
 
 891a 1078 a 
 
 891 b 1078 b 
 
 892 1080 
 
 893 1081 
 
 894 1071 
 
 894, Eem. a 1071b 
 
 895 1076 
 
 896 1079 
 
 896 a 1079 a 
 
 896 b 1079 b 
 
 896 c 1079 
 
 896 d 1079 d 
 
 896, Eem. e...l079, Eem. 
 897 1074 
 
 897, Eem. a 1074 a 
 
 897. Eom. b 1074 b 
 
 898 a 1065 
 
 898b 1065a 
 
 898 1074 b 
 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTIGLEB. 
 
 421 
 
 OLD. NEW 
 
 898 d 1065 fin. 
 
 898e 1065o 
 
 899 1082 
 
 900 a — 
 
 900 b — 
 
 900c 1085 a 
 
 900 cl 1085 b 
 
 900 1085 
 
 900 f 1085 d 
 
 900 g — 
 
 900 h — 
 
 900 i 1085 f 
 
 900j — 
 
 900 k 1085h 
 
 9001 1033 
 
 900 m 1084 
 
 901 a 1086 a 
 
 901b 1086 b 
 
 901 1086 o 
 
 901 d — 
 
 901 e 1086 d 
 
 901 f 1086 e 
 
 90l£r 1086f 
 
 901 h 1086 g 
 
 902 a 1083, 1084 
 
 902b 1087 
 
 903 1088-1090 
 
 904a 1096a 
 
 904 b 1096b 
 
 904 c 10960 
 
 904d 1096d 
 
 904e 1096 e 
 
 904f 1096g 
 
 904 g — 
 
 9041 1096 Ji 
 
 9041 1091 a-o 
 
 904i 1094 
 
 904 k 1095 
 
 9041 10961 
 
 905 a 1097 d 
 
 905 b 1097 e 
 
 905 1097 a 
 
 905 d 1097 b 
 
 905e 1097o 
 
 995 f — 
 
 905 g — 
 
 905h 1097f 
 
 905 1 — 
 
 905j 1097J 
 
 905 k 1097k 
 
 906 1 1097 g 
 
 905 m 1097 S 
 
 905n 10971 
 
 905 o — 
 
 905p 10971 
 
 905 q — 
 
 905 r — 
 
 906 1091 
 
 906a • 1094 
 
 OLD. NEW. 
 
 907 a 1095 
 
 907 b 1098 
 
 907 c — 
 
 908 1099 
 
 909 a 1102 a 
 
 909 b — 
 
 909o 1102b 
 
 909 d 1102 
 
 909 e — 
 
 909 f 1102d 
 
 909 g 1102 6 
 
 909 h — 
 
 909 i — 
 
 909 i 1102 f 
 
 909 k — 
 
 909 1 1102g 
 
 909 m — 
 
 909 n — 
 
 909 — 
 
 909 p — 
 
 910 1100 
 
 911 1101 
 
 912 1103 
 
 913 a 1104 a 
 
 913 b 1104 b 
 
 913 c 1104 
 
 913 d 1104 d 
 
 913 e 1104e 
 
 913 f 1104 f 
 
 913 g 1107 
 
 914 1105 
 
 914 a 1105a 
 
 914 b 1105 b 
 
 914 c 11050 
 
 914 d 1106 
 
 915 1107 
 
 916 1108, 1109 
 
 916 a 1110a 
 
 916 b 1110 b 
 
 916 lUOo 
 
 916 d mod 
 
 917 nil 
 
 917 a 1111a 
 
 917 b — 
 
 917 nil b 
 
 917d llUc 
 
 917 e lllld 
 
 917 f nil e 
 
 917 g llllf 
 
 917 h llllg 
 
 9171 niih 
 
 917i lllli 
 
 917 k 11111 
 
 9171 inim 
 
 917 m nil n 
 
 917 n — 
 
 917o nil o 
 
 917 p nil p 
 
 917q llllq 
 
 OLT). NEW. 
 
 917 r llllr 
 
 9178 llllB 
 
 918 1112 
 
 918 a — 
 
 918 b 1112 a 
 
 918 1112 b 
 
 918 d — 
 
 918 e 1112 d 
 
 918 f •. 1112 6 
 
 918 g 1112 c 
 
 919 1113 
 
 919a lllSa 
 
 919b — 
 
 919 1113 b 
 
 919 d 11130 
 
 919e — 
 
 919 f 1118 d 
 
 919g — 
 
 919 h — 
 
 919 i — 
 
 919j 1113e 
 
 920 1114 
 
 920 a 1114a 
 
 9:iOb 1114b 
 
 920 c — 
 
 920 d: 1114 6 
 
 920 e — 
 
 920 f 1115 a 
 
 920 g 1115 b 
 
 920 b 1115 
 
 920 i 1115 d 
 
 921 1116 
 
 921 a 1116 a 
 
 922 1119 
 
 922 a 1119 d 
 
 922 b — 
 
 922 c 1119a 
 
 922 d 1119 c 
 
 922e ni9e 
 
 922 f — 
 
 922g 1119f 
 
 922 h — 
 
 922 1 in9g 
 
 923 1119 fin. 
 
 923 a — 
 
 924 1120 
 
 924a 1114d 
 
 924b 1114c 
 
 924c — 
 
 924 d 11141 
 
 924 6 1120 
 
 924f — 
 
 924g - 
 
 925 1121 
 
 925 a 1121 a 
 
 926 a 11220 
 
 926 b — 
 
 926 c 1122 a 
 
 926 d 1122 b 
 
422 
 
 TABLE OF CORRESPONDmCt ARTiOLEa. 
 
 NBW. OLD. 
 
 NEW. OLD. 
 
 926 e 1122 f 
 
 926 f 1122d 
 
 926 g 1122 6 
 
 926h - 
 
 9261 11221 
 
 926i 1122J 
 
 926 k 1122 g 
 
 926 1 1122 E 
 
 927 a : 1123a 
 
 927 b 11231) 
 
 827 o. 
 
 927 d 1123 c 
 
 928 1125,1126 
 
 923 a... 1126 a 
 
 928 b 1126 b 
 
 928 1126 k 
 
 928 d 1126 1 
 
 928 e 1126 o 
 
 928 f 1126d 
 
 928 g 1126 m 
 
 928 h 1126 n 
 
 .1123 b I 928 i 1126 e I 
 
 928 i 1126 t 
 
 928 k — 
 
 9281 1126g 
 
 928 m 1126h 
 
 928 n 1126 i 
 
 928 1126J 
 
 928p 11260 
 
 928 q 1126 p 
 
 928r 1126q 
 
 929 1127 
 
 TBB sin> 
 
Greek Methods 
 
 Gleason and Atherton's First Greek Book 
 
 By Clarence W. Gleason, A.M., Master in the Roxbury 
 Latin School, and Caroline Stone Atherton, A.M. 
 With an introduction by William C. Collar, A.M. 
 Cloth, i2mo, 2gg pages . . .... $1.00 
 
 This new book for beginners is constructed on new and original 
 lines, representing the best modern methods of teaching the language 
 and the changed position of Greek in the school course. 
 
 Harper and Castle's Inductive Greek Primer 
 
 By William R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., President of the 
 University of Chicago, and Clarence F. Castle, Ph.D. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 416 pages. Illustrated $1.25 
 
 This first book for beginners in Greek is based on the inductive 
 method of teaching language. It combines in one volume a progressive 
 grammar, a preparatory Greek composition, and an introduction to the 
 reading of a first Greek author. 
 
 Coy's Greek for Beginners 
 
 By Edward G. Coy, A.M. Cloth, i2mo, 152 pages . . $1.00 
 A companion book to Hadley and Allen's Greek Grammar and an 
 
 introduction to either Coy's First Greek Reader, or the Anabasis of 
 
 Xenophon. 
 
 Harkness's First Greek Book 
 
 By Albert Harkness, Ph.D. , LL.D. Cloth, i2mo, 276 pp. $1.05 
 An introductory Greek Grammar and Greek Reader designed to 
 
 accompany Hadley and Allen's Greek Grammar, with references also to 
 
 Goodwin's and Crosby's Grammars. 
 
 Pearson's Greek Prose Composition 
 
 By Henry C. Pearson, A.B. Cloth, i2mo, 187 pages . ' $0.90 
 The aim of this book is to combine a thorough and systematic study 
 
 of the essentials of Greek Syntax with abundant practice in translating 
 
 and in composition. 
 
 Harper and Castle's Exercises in Greek Prose Composition 
 By -William R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., and Clarence F. 
 Castle, Ph.D. Cloth, izmo, 127 pages .... $0.7.5 
 These exercises are based on the first four books of Xenophon's 
 Anabasis, to which are added inductive studies in the uses of the Greek 
 Modes, designed to aid the pupil in the study of Greek Syntax. 
 
 Copies of any of the above books will be sent, prepaid, to any addres- 
 on receipt of the price by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 NEW YORK . CINCINNATI ♦ CHICAei, 
 
 m 
 
The First Greek Book 
 
 BY 
 
 C. W. GLEASON, A.M. C. S. ATHERTON, A.M. 
 
 Master in the Roxbury Latin School. Late of the Roxbury Latin School 
 
 WITH AN INTRODUCTION BY 
 
 WILLIAM C. COLLAR. A.M. 
 
 Flexible cloth, 285 pages. Illustrated. Price, $1.00 
 
 In the preparation of this new bool< for beginners, the authors have 
 had in mind the clianged position of Greek in the school course. 
 Believing that the true aim of Greek study is the development of 
 the power to read Greek authors, they have departed in many features 
 from the time-honored .practice of introductory Greek books. The 
 essentials of the language arc presented concisely and clearly ; non- 
 essentials are omitted ; practice in form and construction is carried only 
 far enough to insure definiteness. 
 
 Some of the distinctive features of the book are the following; 
 
 The second aorist, a tense constantly used, is introduced early in 
 the book. Contract nouns and adjectives, always a stumbling-block, 
 are postponed to a more natural position than is usually given them. 
 The dual has been removed to its proper place, the appendix. Dia- 
 logues, fables, and reading exercises are given as early as possible and 
 continued through the book. The study of forms begins with the verb, 
 followed by the O-declension of nouns, as pupils find it easier to learn 
 -adjectives in the order of their declension, than to learn first the 
 feminine, and later the masculine and neuter. 
 
 The English-Greek exercises have been made subordinate to the 
 sentences to be translated into English, as that will be the pupil's main 
 work in the study of Greek. 
 
 Copies of Gleason and Atherton^ s First Greek Book will be sent ^ prepaid ^ 
 to any address^ on receipt of the price ^ by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Com 
 
 pany 
 
 NeviT York ♦ Cincinnati « Chicago 
 
 (67) 
 
Greek Texts and Lexicons 
 
 DEMOSTHENES. Smead's Demosthenes' Philippics, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 220 pages $1 .05 
 
 HERODOTUS. Johnson's Selections from Herodotus, with 
 
 Notes. Cloth, i2mo, 185 pages ... .1.05 
 
 HOMER. Johnson's Homer's Iliad. Three Books, with Notes 
 and Selected Passages for Sight Reading, combined with 
 Blake's Lexicon. Cloth, i2mo, 509 pages . . 1.32 
 
 Blake's Lexicon to the First Three Books of Homer's Iliad. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 215 pages 1.00 
 
 Owen's Homer's Iliad, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 760 pages 1.40 
 
 Owen's Homer's Odyssey, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 568 pages 1,40 
 
 PLATO. Kitchel's Plato's Apology of Socrates, and Crito, and a 
 Part of the Phaedo, with Notes. 
 
 Flexible Cloth, i2mo, 188 pages 1.25 
 
 The Same, 'Text Edition 30 
 
 Tyler's Plato's Apology and Crito, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 180 pages 1.05 
 
 SOPHOCLES. Crosby's Sophocles' Oedipus Tyrannus, with 
 
 Notes. Cloth, i2mo, 138 pages . ■ . . . . 1.05 
 Smead's Sophocles' Antigone, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 242 pages 1.22 
 
 XENOPHON. Harper and Wallace's Xenophon's Anabasis. 
 
 Seven Books; Books I, to TV. with Notes, Books V. to 
 
 VII. arranged for Sight Reading. With Full Lexicon. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 575 pages 1.50 
 
 Boise's Xenophon's Anabasis. Four Books, with Notes and 
 
 Lexicon. Cloth, i2mo, 309 pages . . . . 1 32 
 Crosby's Xenophon's Anabasis. Complete with Notes and 
 
 Lexicon. Cloth, i2mo, 573 pages . . . .1.60 
 
 Gleason's Xenophon's Cyropaedia, with Notes and Lexicon. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 325 pages 1 25 
 
 Owen's Xenophon's Cyropaedia, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, :2mo, 573 pages ... . . 1 75 
 
 Robbins's Xenophon's Memorabilia of Socrates, with Notes. 
 
 Cloth, l2mo, 421 pages 1.40 
 
 Copies of any of the above books will be senf^ prepaia^ to any address on 
 receipt of the price by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 NEW YORK • CINCINNATI ♦ CHICAGO 
 
 (54) 
 
Latin Texts 
 
 CAESAR. Harkness's Caesar's Gallic War 
 
 Harper and Tolman's Caesar's Gallic War 
 The same, Text Edition 
 CICERO. Harkness's Cicero's Orations 
 
 Rockwood's Cicero's Cato Maior de Senectute 
 
 Lord's Cicero's Laelius de Amicitia 
 GELLIUS. Knapp's Stories from Aulus Gellius . 
 HORACE. Lincoln's Horace .... 
 JUVENAL. Lindsay's Satires of Juvenal . 
 LIVY. Lincoln's Livy's Roman History 
 
 NEPOS. Lindsay's Cornelius Nepos. 
 
 Text Edition .... 
 OVID. Lincoln's Ovid ..... 
 
 QUINTILIAN. Frieze's Quintilian (Books X and XII) 
 QUINTUS CURTIUS RUFUS. Crosby's Quintus Curtius Rufus 
 SALLUST. Harkness's Sallust's Catiline . 
 
 Herbermann's Sallust's Jugurthine War 
 TACITUS. Tyler's Histories of Tacitus 
 
 Tyler's Germania and Agricola of Tacitus 
 VERGIL. Frieze's Vergil's Aeneid (Complete) 
 The same, Text Edition . 
 
 Frieze's Vergil's Aeneid (Six Books), Bucolics, and Georgics 
 
 Frieze's Vergil's Bucolics and Georgics. Text Edition 
 
 Frieze's Vergil's Complete Works .... 
 
 Harper and Miller's Vergil's Aeneid (Complete) . 
 
 Harper and Miller's Vergil's Aeneid (Complete), and Bucolics 
 
 Searing's Vergil's Aeneid (Six Books), Bucolics, and Georgics 
 
 $1.20 
 1.20 
 
 .75 
 1.22 
 
 .90 
 
 .72 
 
 .30 
 1.22 
 1.00 
 1.22 
 1.10 
 
 .40 
 1.22 
 1.20 
 1.05 
 
 .90 
 1.12 
 1.12 
 
 .87 
 1.30 
 
 .50 
 1.30 
 
 .25 
 1.60 
 1.25 
 1.50 
 1.60 
 
 Searing's Vergil's Aeneid (Six Books) 1.40 
 
 VIRI ROMAE. Arrowsmith and Knapp's Selections from ViriRomae 
 
 Text Edition ... 
 
 LATIN READINGS. Arrowsmith & Whicher's First Latin Readings 
 EPIGRAPHY. Egbert's Latin Inscriptions. Fully Illustrated 
 LATIN PROSE. Harkness's Preparatory Course in Latin Prose 
 
 Authors (Caesar, Sallust, Cicero) 
 
 ROMAN LIFE. Peck and Arrowsmilh's Roman Life in Latin 
 
 Prose and Verse ..... ... 
 
 ROMAN SATIRE. Merrill's Fragments of Roman Satire . 
 
 .75 
 
 .25 
 
 1.25 
 
 3.50 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.50 
 .75 
 
 Copies of any of the above books will be sent prepaid to any address, on 
 receipt of the price by the Publishers • 
 
 American Book Company 
 NEW YORK ♦ CINCINNATI . CHICAGO 
 
 (53) 
 
Harkness's 
 Standard Latin Grammar 
 
 FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 
 By albert HARKNESS, Ph.D.. LL.D. 
 
 Trofessor in Brown University 
 
 Cloth, 12mo, 430 pages. Price, $1.12 
 
 Harkness's Standard Latin Grammar represents the best classifica- 
 tion and arrangement of the facts of the language. It is a Grammar of 
 the Latin language, based upon the facts of that language, not on 
 ' ' comparative grammar " ; but the facts and laws of the language are 
 all presented in the light of the latest and best grammatical studies, 
 including comparative grammar. 
 
 The principles and facts are presented in clear and simple language. 
 The work has been pronounced " a model for perspicuity of statement 
 and clearness of arrangement." It is characterized by strict accuracy 
 of statement. 
 
 It is very much more comprehensive than any of its competitors. It 
 practically embraces three works in one : 
 
 It is pre-eminently a grammar for schools. The part intended to 
 be learned is printed in large type and is kept distinct from other parts 
 of the work. It is made as brief, clear, and simple as possible. 
 
 It is a full and trustworthy grammar for the advanced student. It 
 accordingly contains a large amount of valuable information intended for 
 reference, and presented in the most convenient form for that purpose. 
 
 It is a practical introduction to philological study based upon the 
 Latin. This part of the work is kept distinct by being placed in foot- 
 notes. Abundant references are made to the latest and best authorities 
 on the numerous linguistic questions which now interest the classical 
 scholar. 
 
 Copies of Harkness's Standard Latin Grammar will be sent, prepaid, 
 to any address on receipt of the price by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 Newr York ♦ Cincinnati * Chicago 
 
 (5°> 
 
Latin Lessons and Methods 
 
 Coy's Latin Lessons 
 
 By E. W. Coy, A.M., Principal of the Hughes High School, 
 Cincinnati. Cloth, i2mo, 330 pages. Illustrated . $1 00 
 
 This introductory book for beginners is intended to give a thorough 
 drill in the essentials of Latin Grammar and to prepare the student to 
 read different Latin authors in the course with ease and satisfaction. 
 Special features will be found in the methods of presenting inflected 
 forms, the accent of which is marked in all paradigms; in the promi- 
 nence given to the tense sign of verbs by the use of heavy type; in the 
 practical and suggestive character of the notes on the reading matter; and 
 in the parallel exercises which apply the material furnished by the text. 
 
 I he latter part of the book contains, in consecutive arrangement, all 
 of the text used in the lessons, and further selections from the Viri 
 Romfe, Nepos and Csesar. The appendix contains in concise form all 
 the inflected forms and constructions used. 
 
 Harkness's Easy Method for Beginners in Latin 
 
 By Albert Harkness, Ph.D., LL.D. 
 
 Half leather, l2mo, 348 pages. Illustrated . . . $1.20 
 
 This book is at once a Beginner's Grammar, a Latin Reader, and a 
 Manual of Exercises — making a complete First Year's Course in the 
 study. Its vocabulary is drawn mainly from Caesar, and thorough drill 
 is afforded in forms and constructions. 
 
 Clearness and simplicity are insured by well-worded, accurate rules, 
 explanatory notes and logical arrangement. Attractiveness and interest 
 are secured by the character of the exercises, the coUoquia, the frequent 
 anecdote or dialogue, and the illustrations. 
 
 Harper and Burgess's Inductive Latin Primer 
 
 By W. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., President of the University of 
 
 Chicago, and ISAAC B. BuRGESS, A.M. 
 Cloth, i2mo, 432 pages. With maps and illustrations . $1.00 
 This first book in Latin for beginners follows the rational, modern^ 
 method of develo'ping the grammar from the language. It is strictly 
 inductive in treatment, and at the same time scientific and accurate in 
 its presentation of facts. The work is based on the connected text of 
 Caesar. The lessons are short, and the exercises copious and easy. The 
 subject matter is illustrated by maps, plans and pictures. It includes a 
 brief inductive treatment of English Grammar intended for a review 
 course in English preparatory to the study of Latin. 
 
 Copies of the above books will be sent prepaid to any address^ on receipt 
 of the price, by the Publishers: 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York ♦ Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 
 
 (s=) 
 
Introduction to the Study of 
 Latin Inscriptions 
 
 By James C. Egbert, Jr., Ph.D., Adjunct Professor of 
 Latin, Columbia University. Half Morocco, large 
 i2mo, 468 pages. With numerous illustrations and 
 exact reproductions of inscriptions. . Price, $3.50 
 
 This work is designed as a text-book for the use of 
 students in Universities and Colleges, and also to furnish 
 an account of this branch of archaeological study for 
 general readers. It has been prepared in the belief that a 
 knowledge of epigraphy forms an essential part of the 
 equipment of a teacher of the classics, and that the sub- 
 ject itself has become so important as to justify its intro- 
 duction, in elementary form at least, into the curriculum 
 of undergraduate studies. 
 
 A distinctive feature of the book is the number and 
 character of its illustrations, — there being over seven 
 hundred cuts and diagrams of inscriptions, for the purpose 
 of illustrating the text, and for practice in reading. Of 
 these, over one hundred are photographic reproductions, 
 showing the forms of the letters and the arrangement of 
 the inscriptions. The work is also supplied with an 
 exhaustive bibliography and valuable tables of abbrevia- 
 tions, archaisms, etc. 
 
 Copies of Egberts Latin Inscriptions will be sent prepaid to any address ^ 
 on receipt of the price ^ by the Publishers: 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York Cincinnati Chicago 
 
Stories from Aulus Gellius 
 
 EDITED FOR SIGHT READING 
 
 BY 
 
 CHARLES KNAPP, Ph.D. 
 
 INSTRUCTOR IN LATIN, BARNARD COLLEGE, NEW YORK 
 
 Paper, 12mo. Price, 30 cents 
 
 The Noctes Atticse of Aulus Gellius is a representative work, 
 since it not only reflects perfectly the nature of the subjects which 
 engaged the attention of the literary men of the second century A.D., 
 but also forcibly depicts the spirit in which their labors were prosecuted. 
 Of especial interest and value are the numerous quotations from early 
 writers whose works are no longer extant. For such portions as yet 
 remain of the oldest Latin literature, we are almost wholly indebted to 
 quotations by various grammarians. In this connection the obligations 
 of Latin scholarship to Gellius are far from small. Fully two hundred and 
 seventy-five authors are mentioned or directly quoted in his work, while 
 the number of individual works cited is twice or thrice as large. In 
 giving these quotations from the older writers, he often adds information 
 concerning their careers, or their works, and in this way his contribu- 
 tions to our knowledge of the history of Latin literature is very 
 valuable. For example, practically all that is known of the life of 
 Plautus, the greatest comic poet of Rome, is derived from the third 
 chapter of the third book of the Noctes Atticje. 
 
 The commentary gives sufficient assistance to enable such students 
 to read the selections as rapidly and intelligently as possible, and 
 without the need of any helps beyond those furnished by the book itself. 
 The text, in point of language and spelling, is in the main that of 
 Hertz, as given in his critical edition. Throughout the book all vowels 
 known to be long have been carefully marked. 
 
 Copies of Knapp's Aulus Gellius will be sent, prepaid, to any address, on 
 receipt of the price {jo cents), by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New/ York • Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 
 
 (56) 
 
Harper's Classical Series 
 
 LATIN 
 Harper and Burgess's Inductive Latin Primer 
 
 By Wm. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., President of the University of 
 Chicago, and Isaac B. Burgess, A. M. , of the University of Chicago. 
 Cloth, i2mo, 424 pages $1.00 
 
 Harper and Burgess's Inductive Latin Method 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 323 pages ....... $1.00 
 
 Both the Latin Primer and Latin Method are designed for beginners, and to 
 
 supply an adequate preparation for reading Cajsar. The Primer is more elementary 
 
 and easier in grade, and is thus suited to pupils less mature or less thoroughly trained 
 
 than those who can take up the Method. 
 
 Harper and Tolman's Caesar's Gallic War 
 
 Eight Books. By Wm. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., and Herbert 
 CusHiNG ToLMAN, Ph.D., of Vanderbilt University. 
 
 Cloth, i2nio, 502 pages $1.20 
 
 The Same. Text only 75 cents 
 
 Harper and Miller's Vergil's /Eneid 
 
 Six Books of the ^neid. With Notes and Vocabulary. By Wm. R. 
 Harper, Ph.D.^D.D., and F. J. Miller, Ph.D., of the University 
 of Chicago. Cloth, i2mo, 461 pages . . . $1 .25 
 
 Harper and Miller's Vergil's ^neid (six books) and Bucolics 
 
 With Notes and Vocabulary. Cloth, i2mo, 564 pages . $1 50 
 
 GREEK 
 
 Harper and Castle's Inductive Greek Prinner 
 
 On the same plan as the Inductive Latin Primer. By Wm. R. 
 Harper, Ph.D.,D.D., and Clarence F. Castle, Ph.D., of the 
 University of Chicago. Cloth, l2mo, 416 pages . . $1 .25 
 
 Harper and Waters's Inductive Greek Method 
 
 By Wm. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., and William E. Waters, Ph.D. 
 
 Cloth, i2mo, 355 pages $1.00 
 
 The Greek Primer and Greek Method are similar in plan and scope to the 
 
 corresponding books of the Latin series, and either book will prepare for the reading 
 
 of Xenophon s Anabasis. 
 
 Harper and Castle's Exercises in Greek Prose Conoposition 
 
 By Wm. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., and Clarence F. Castle, Ph.D. 
 Cloth, l2mo, 127 pages ....... 75 cents 
 
 Harper and Wallace's Xenophon's Anabasis 
 
 By Wm. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., and James Wallace, Ph.D. 
 Seven Books. The first four books have full Notes, Topics for 
 Collateral Study, Inductive Exercises, Vocabulary, etc. The last 
 three books are arranged for practice in sight reading. 
 Cloth, i2mo, 575 pages $1.50 
 
 Copies oy any of the above books ivill be sent prepaid to any address^ on receipt of 
 the price, by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York ♦ Cincinnati » Chicago 
 
 (59) 
 
ROCKWOOD'S 
 Cicero's Cato Maior De Senectute 
 
 Edited with Introduction and Notes by 
 FRANK ERNST ROCKWOOD, A.M. 
 
 Professor of Latin in Bucknell University 
 
 Linen, 12mo, 159 pages. Price, 90 cents 
 
 Cicero's defense of old age is so charming in style and so inter- 
 estingf in matter that it deserves something more by way of commen- 
 tary than mere discussion of grammatical and linguistic usage. 
 Accordingly an attempt has been made in the illustrative notes, on 
 the pages with the text, to give prominence to the historical and 
 literary features of the essay, and to show by numerous quotations 
 what ancient and modern authors have uttered like thoughts, couched 
 in similar forms of expression. 
 
 In order that the chief emphasis may be placed on the literary 
 element, the grammatical and textual commentary is placed in a 
 separate body of notes following the text. The commentaries are 
 supplemented by a list of variations from the text of MUUer, an 
 index to the notes and an index of proper names. 
 
 The text is preceded by an introduction containing a life of 
 Cicero, a resume of his works, a valuable bibliography, and a discussion, 
 analysis and summary of the De Senectute. 
 
 Copies of Cicero^ s Cato Maior De Senectute will be sent^ prepaid, 
 to any address on receipt of the price by the Publishers ; 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New Yo'k • Cincinnati • Chicago 
 
 (60) 
 
First Latin Readings 
 
 An Equivalent for Caesar 
 By R. ARROWSMITH, Ph.D. 
 
 Professor of Latin and Greek, Teachers College, New York City 
 AND 
 
 G. M. WHICHER, M.A. 
 
 Instructor in Classics, Packer Collegiate Institute, Brooklyn, N. Y. 
 Cloth, I2mo, 344 pages. Price, $1.25 
 
 This work has been prepared in response to a growing demand for 
 a new first reading book in Latin, offering more simple and interesting 
 material for the second-year work than is now^ provided by Caesar's 
 Commentaries, the first connected reading pupils meet in the Latin 
 course. 
 
 It is the aim of the present volume to offer for the student's first 
 reading in Latin, material in which the least, rather than the more, 
 difficult Latin comes first ; which contains the largest possible general 
 vocabulary, instead of a small special vocabulary ; which is drawn from 
 a wide, instead of a narrow, range of literature ; and which may be 
 associated with other departments of teaching with greater success and 
 productiveness than Caesar's Commentaries. 
 
 The selections in First Latin Readings have, therefore, been 
 chosen with reference to their difficulty, their interest as literature, and, 
 as far as possible, their relation to Roman life and custom, and not with 
 reference to their exclusive use as drilling material on formal classical 
 construction. 
 
 Exercises in Latin prose composition, based on the text of each 
 author represented, have been prepared, and are included in the book. 
 
 Copies of First Latin Readings will be sent^ prepaid^ to any address 
 on receipt of the price by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York ♦ Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 
 
 (6i) 
 
Roman Life 
 In Latin Prose and Verse 
 
 Illustrative Readings from Latin Literature 
 Selected and Edited by 
 
 H. T. PECK, Ph.D. 
 
 Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in Columbia University 
 AND 
 
 ROBERT ARROWSMITH, Ph.D. 
 Cloth, 12mo, 256 pages. Price, $1.50 
 
 This work gives a representative survey of Latin Literature, 
 intended to be read in advanced academic or college work, as supple- 
 mentary to a regular course in Latin Literature, or to be itself the 
 fundamental work in such a course. The selections range from the 
 popular songs which antedate written literature, to the Christian hymns 
 of the third century, covering the early dramatists, historians, orators, 
 philosophers, the writers of satire and epigram, the lyric and epic poets, 
 the collectors of anecdotes, letter writers, and authors of prose works, 
 and including other material of a popular nature, such as lampoons, 
 parodies, epitaphs, advertisements, announcements of ball games, 
 theatrical and gladiatorial notices, etc. To each selection is prefixed a 
 concise account of the author, when known, and of his works, with a 
 brief bibliography. For convenience in sight reading the text is 
 provided with a translation of the more difficult words, and is followed 
 by a fuller commentary of special points of interest. 
 
 Copies of Roman Life in Latin Prose and Verse will be sent ^ prepaid^ 
 to any address on receipt of the price by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York • Cincinnati • Chicago 
 
 (62) 
 
Coy's Latin Lessons 
 
 FOR BEGINNERS 
 
 BY 
 
 E. W. COY, Ph.D. 
 
 Principal of Hughes High School, Cincinnati 
 
 Cloth, 12mo, 330 pages. Price. $1.00 
 
 This new book for beginners in Latin lias been prepared to meet 
 the demand for introductory lessons combining an early development of 
 the reading power with thorough drill in the essentials of the grammar. 
 It is intended to prepare the student to read different Latin writers in 
 the course, and is therefore based upon selections from several authors 
 and not from one alone. The following are some of the leading distinc- 
 tive features of the work; 
 
 1. The marking of the accent of paradigms, insuring a correct pro- 
 
 nunciation from the beginning. 
 
 2. The use of heavier type to show the tense signs of verbs and the 
 
 endings of nouns and adjectives. 
 
 3. The logical and clear treatment of verb-formation, similar forms 
 
 being grouped together, and their resemblances pointed out. 
 
 4. The frequent and thorough reviews. 
 
 5. The systematic study of English derivatives and allied and synony- 
 
 mous Latin words and phrases. 
 
 6. The exercises in sight reading and in composition based upon the 
 
 text already read. 
 
 7. The appendix of tabulated rules and paradigms. 
 
 8. The early introduction of connected Latin reading adapted to the 
 
 capacity of the beginner and interesting in subject-matter. 
 
 9. The liberal training in the reading of good Latin selected from Viri 
 
 Romse, Caesar, and Nepos, and the consequent thorough prepara- 
 tion for the second year's work. 
 
 Copies of Coy's Latin Lessons will be sent^ prepaid^ to any address, on 
 receipt of the price, by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York ♦ Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 
 
 (63) 
 
Lindsay's Cornelius Nepos 
 
 WITH NOTES, EXERCISES, AND VOCABULARY 
 
 EDITED BY 
 
 Thomas B. Lindsay, Ph.D. 
 Professor of Latin and Sanskrit, Boston University 
 
 Cloth, 12mo, 363 pages. Illustrated Price, $1.10 
 
 This edition of the Lives of Cornelius Nepos is virtually 
 a new work rather than a revision. The material of former 
 editions has been recast and enlarged. The text has been 
 thoroughly revised, and the notes and vocabulary entirely 
 rewritten. The grammatical references have been placed 
 at the foot of the text-page. The text has over fifty illus- 
 trations and a fine double page map of the Roman Empire, 
 Greece and the Chersonesus. The dates of all important 
 events are given in the text. The notes are accurate and 
 explain all difficulties, not giving mere translations without 
 hinting at their sources. The English-Latin exercises 
 have been rewritten and cover the full text of the twenty- 
 five Lives. These exercises, while easy and forming 
 connected sense, give thorough drill on special or difficult 
 constructions. 
 
 Text Edition 
 
 For use in recitations and examinations a separate volume 
 is provided, containing the text alone. This edition will 
 be furnished at 40 cents per copy. Teachers whose classes 
 use the complete annotated edition will be supplied with 
 the Text Edition at special introductory terms. Corre- 
 spondence and orders should specify "Text Edition." 
 
 Copies of Lindsay* s Cornelius Nepos will be sent prepaid to any address^ 
 on receipt of the price, by the Publishers : 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 Nsw York ♦ Cincinnati * Chicago 
 
 (6j)